This is a modern-English version of U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1950-1953, Volume 5 (of 5): Operations in West Korea, originally written by United States. Marine Corps, Meid, Pat, Yingling, James M.. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Transcriber’s Note

Transcriber's Note

Cover created by Transcriber, using the original cover and the text of the Title page, and placed into the Public Domain.

Cover created by the Transcriber, using the original cover and the text from the Title page, and made available in the Public Domain.

Larger versions of most illustrations may be seen by right-clicking them and selecting an option to view them separately, or by double-tapping and/or stretching them.

Larger versions of most illustrations can be viewed by right-clicking them and choosing an option to view them separately, or by double-tapping and/or stretching them.

KOREA

WESTERN KOREAN FRONT

WEST KOREAN FRONT

SITES OF MAJOR OUTPOST BATTLES

MAJOR OUTPOST BATTLE SITES

1952–53

1952–53

U. S. MARINE OPERATIONS IN KOREA
1950–1953
VOLUME V
Operations in South Korea

by
LIEUTENANT COLONEL PAT MEID, USMCR
and
MAJOR JAMES M. YINGLING, USMC

by
LIEUTENANT COLONEL PAT MEID, USMCR
and
MAJOR JAMES M. YINGLING, USMC

Historical Division
Headquarters, U. S. Marine Corps
Washington, D. C., 1972

Historical Division
Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps
Washington, D.C., 1972


Preceding Volumes of
U. S. Marine Operations in Korea

Preceding Volumes of
U.S. Marine Operations in Korea

Volume I, “The Pusan Perimeter”
Volume II, “The Inchon-Seoul Campaign”
Volume III, “The Chosin Reservoir Campaign”
Volume IV, “The East-Central Front”

Volume I, “The Pusan Perimeter”
Volume II, “The Inchon-Seoul Campaign”
Volume III, “The Chosin Reservoir Campaign”
Volume IV, “The East-Central Front”

Library of Congress Catalogue Number: 55-60727

Library of Congress Catalogue Number: 55-60727

For Sale by the Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402—Price $4.50 (Cloth)
Stock Number 0855-0059

For Sale by the Documents Superintendent
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402—Price $4.50 (Cloth)
Stock Number 0855-0059


iii

iii

Foreword

Mention the Korean War and almost immediately it evokes the memory of Marines at Pusan, Inchon, Chosin Reservoir, or the Punchbowl. Americans everywhere remember the Marine Corps’ combat readiness, courage, and military skills that were largely responsible for the success of these early operations in 1950–1951. Not as dramatic or well-known are the important accomplishments of the Marines during the latter part of the Korean War.

Korean War and it quickly brings to mind the image of Marines at Pusan, Inchon, Chosin Reservoir, or the Punchbowl. Americans everywhere recall the Marine Corps’ combat readiness, bravery, and military expertise that were crucial for the success of these early operations in 1950–1951. Less dramatic or recognized are the significant achievements of the Marines during the later stages of the Korean War.

In March 1952 the 1st Marine Division redeployed from the East-Central front to West Korea. This new sector, nearly 35 miles in length, anchored the far western end of I Corps and was one of the most critical of the entire Eighth Army line. Here the Marines blocked the enemy’s goal of penetrating to Seoul, the South Korean capital. Northwest of the Marine Main Line of Resistance, less than five miles distant, lay Panmunjom, site of the sporadic truce negotiations.

In March 1952, the 1st Marine Division moved from the East-Central front to West Korea. This new area, almost 35 miles long, was at the western edge of I Corps and was one of the most important parts of the entire Eighth Army line. Here, the Marines prevented the enemy from reaching Seoul, the capital of South Korea. Northwest of the Marine Main Line of Resistance, less than five miles away, was Panmunjom, where the occasional truce negotiations were taking place.

Defense of their strategic area exposed the Marines to continuous and deadly Communist probes and limited objective attacks. These bitter and costly contests for key outposts bore such names as Bunker Hill, the Hook, the Nevadas (Carson-Reno-Vegas), and Boulder City. For the ground Marines, supported by 1st Marine Aircraft Wing squadrons, the fighting continued until the last day of the war, 27 July 1953.

Defense of their strategic area exposed the Marines to constant and deadly Communist attacks and restricted their objectives. These tough and expensive battles for important outposts were known as Bunker Hill, the Hook, the Nevadas (Carson-Reno-Vegas), and Boulder City. For the ground Marines, backed by 1st Marine Aircraft Wing squadrons, the fighting went on until the final day of the war, 27 July 1953.

The Korean War marked the first real test of Free World solidarity in the face of Communist force. In repulsing this attempted Communist aggression, the United Nations, led by the United States, served notice that it would not hesitate to aid those nations whose freedom and independence were under attack.

The Korean War was the first true test of Free World unity against Communist aggression. In pushing back this attempt at Communist takeover, the United Nations, under the leadership of the United States, made it clear that it wouldn't hesitate to support countries whose freedom and independence were threatened.

As events have subsequently proven, holding the line against Communist encroachment is a battle whose end is not yet in sight. Enemy aggression may explode brazenly upon the world scene, with an overt act of invasion, as it did in Korea in June 1950, or it mayiv take the form of a murderous guerrilla war as it has more recently, for over a decade, in Vietnam.

As events have shown, standing firm against Communist expansion is a struggle that still has no clear conclusion. Aggressive actions from the enemy can erupt boldly on the global stage with an obvious act of invasion, like what happened in Korea in June 1950, or it can manifest as a brutal guerrilla war, as we've seen for over a decade in Vietnam.

Whatever guise the enemy of the United States chooses or wherever he draws his battleline, he will find the Marines with their age-old answer. Today, as in the Korean era, Marine Corps readiness and professionalism are prepared to apply the cutting edge against any threat to American security.

Whatever form the enemy of the United States takes or wherever he sets his battle line, he will encounter the Marines with their timeless response. Today, just like during the Korean era, the Marine Corps is ready and professional, prepared to confront any threat to American security.

(signature)

L. F. Chapman, Jr.
General, U.S. Marine Corps,
Commandant of the Marine Corps

L.F. Chapman Jr.
General, USMC,
Commandant of the Marine Corps

Reviewed and approved: 12 May 1971.

Reviewed and approved: May 12, 1971.


v

v

Preface

This is the concluding volume of a five-part series dealing with operations of United States Marines in Korea between 2 August 1950 and 27 July 1953. Volume V provides a definitive account of operations of the 1st Marine Division and the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing during 1952–1953, the final phase of the Korean War. At this time the division operated under Eighth U.S. Army in Korea (EUSAK) control in the far western sector of I Corps, while Marine aviators and squadrons functioned as a component of the Fifth Air Force (FAF).

This is the last volume of a five-part series about the actions of United States Marines in Korea from August 2, 1950, to July 27, 1953. Volume V offers a comprehensive overview of the operations of the 1st Marine Division and the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing during 1952–1953, the last phase of the Korean War. During this period, the division operated under the control of the Eighth U.S. Army in Korea (EUSAK) in the far western area of I Corps, while Marine pilots and squadrons served as part of the Fifth Air Force (FAF).

The period covered by this history begins in March 1952, when the Marine division moved west to occupy positions defending the approaches to Seoul, the South Korean capital. As it had for most of the war the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, operating under FAF, flew close support missions not only for the Marines but for as many as 19 other Allied frontline divisions. Included in the narrative is a detailed account of Marine POWs, a discussion of the new defense mission of Marine units in the immediate postwar period, and an evaluation of Marine Corps contributions to the Korean War.

The time frame of this history starts in March 1952, when the Marine division moved west to take positions defending the routes to Seoul, the capital of South Korea. Like throughout most of the war, the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, operating under FAF, conducted close support missions not only for the Marines but also for as many as 19 other Allied frontline divisions. The narrative includes a detailed account of Marine POWs, a discussion on the new defense mission for Marine units in the immediate postwar period, and an assessment of the Marine Corps' contributions to the Korean War.

Marines, both ground and aviation, comprised an integral part of the United Nations Command in Korea. Since this is primarily a Marine Corps history, actions of the U.S. Army, Navy, and Air Force are presented only in sufficient detail to place Marine operations in their proper perspective.

Marines, both on the ground and in aviation, were a crucial part of the United Nations Command in Korea. Since this is mainly focused on Marine Corps history, the actions of the U.S. Army, Navy, and Air Force are discussed only enough to give context to Marine operations.

Official Marine Corps combat records form the basis for the book. This primary source material has been further supplemented by comments and interviews from key participants in the action described. More than 180 persons reviewed the draft chapters. Their technical knowledge and advice have been invaluable. Although the full details of these comments could not be used in the text, this material has been placed in Marine Corps archives for possible use by future historians.

Official Marine Corps combat records are the foundation of this book. This primary source material has been enhanced with comments and interviews from key participants in the events described. Over 180 people reviewed the draft chapters. Their technical expertise and feedback have been incredibly helpful. Although we couldn’t include all the details of their comments in the text, this information has been archived by the Marine Corps for potential use by future historians.

The manuscript of this volume was prepared during the tenure of Colonel Frank C. Caldwell, Director of Marine Corps History,vi Historical Division, Headquarters Marine Corps. Production was accomplished under the direction of Mr. Henry I. Shaw, Jr., Deputy Director and Chief Historian, who also outlined the volume. Preliminary drafts were written by the late Lynn Montross, prime author of this series, and Major Hubard D. Kuokka. Major James M. Yingling researched and wrote chapters 1–6 and compiled the Command and Staff List. Lieutenant Colonel Pat Meid researched and wrote chapters 7–12, prepared appendices, processed photographs and maps, and did the final editing of the book.

The manuscript for this volume was created during the leadership of Colonel Frank C. Caldwell, Director of Marine Corps History,vi Historical Division, Headquarters Marine Corps. The production was overseen by Mr. Henry I. Shaw, Jr., Deputy Director and Chief Historian, who also outlined the volume. The initial drafts were written by the late Lynn Montross, the main author of this series, and Major Hubard D. Kuokka. Major James M. Yingling researched and wrote chapters 1–6 and compiled the Command and Staff List. Lieutenant Colonel Pat Meid researched and wrote chapters 7–12, prepared the appendices, processed the photographs and maps, and carried out the final editing of the book.

Historical Division staff members, past or present, who freely lent suggestions or provided information include Lieutenant Colonel John J. Cahill, Captain Charles B. Collins, Mr. Ralph W. Donnelly, Mr. Benis M. Frank, Mr. George W. Garand, Mr. Rowland P. Gill, Captain Robert J. Kane, Major Jack K. Ringler, and Major Lloyd E. Tatem. Warrant Officer Dennis Egan was Administrative Officer during the final stages of preparation and production of this book.

Historical Division staff members, both past and present, who generously shared suggestions or provided information include Lieutenant Colonel John J. Cahill, Captain Charles B. Collins, Mr. Ralph W. Donnelly, Mr. Benis M. Frank, Mr. George W. Garand, Mr. Rowland P. Gill, Captain Robert J. Kane, Major Jack K. Ringler, and Major Lloyd E. Tatem. Warrant Officer Dennis Egan served as Administrative Officer during the last stages of preparing and producing this book.

The many exacting administrative duties involved in processing the volume from first draft manuscripts through the final printed form, including the formidable task of indexing the book, were handled expertly and cheerfully by Miss Kay P. Sue. Mrs. Frances J. Rubright also furnished gracious and speedy assistance in obtaining the tomes of official Marine Corps records. The maps were prepared by Sergeants Kenneth W. White and Ernest L. Wilson. Official Department of Defense photographs illustrate the book.

The numerous detailed administrative responsibilities involved in managing everything from the first draft manuscripts to the final printed version, including the challenging task of creating the book's index, were expertly and happily handled by Miss Kay P. Sue. Mrs. Frances J. Rubright also provided kind and prompt help in gathering the official Marine Corps records. The maps were created by Sergeants Kenneth W. White and Ernest L. Wilson. Official Department of Defense photos illustrate the book.

A major contribution to the history was made by the Office of the Chief of Military History, Department of the Army; the Naval History Division, Department of the Navy; and the Office of Air Force History, Department of the Air Force. Military history offices of England, Canada, and South Korea provided additional details that add to the accuracy and interest of this concluding volume of the Korean series.

A significant contribution to history was made by the Office of the Chief of Military History, Department of the Army; the Naval History Division, Department of the Navy; and the Office of Air Force History, Department of the Air Force. Military history offices in England, Canada, and South Korea offered additional insights that enhance the accuracy and interest of this final volume of the Korean series.

(signature)

F. C. Caldwell
Colonel, U.S. Marine Corps (Retired)
Director of Marine Corps History

F. C. Caldwell
Colonel, U.S. Marine Corps (Retired)
Director of Marine Corps History


vii

vii

Contents

    Page
I Operations in West Korea Begin 1
From Cairo to JAMestown—The Marines’ Home in West Korea—Organization of the 1st Marine Division Area—The 1st Marine Aircraft Wing—The Enemy—Initial CCF Attack—Subsequent CCF Attacks—Strengthening the Line—Marine Air Operations—Supporting the Division and the Wing—Different Area, Different Problem
II Defending the Line 51
UN Command Activities—Defense of East and West Coast Korean Islands—Marine Air Operations—Spring 1952 on JAMSTOWN—End of the Second Year of War—A Long Fourth of July—Changes in the Lineup—Replacement and Rotation—Logistical Operations, Summer 1952
III The Battle of Bunker Hill 103
The Participants and the Battlefield—Preliminary Action on Siberia—The Attack on Bunker Hill—Consolidating the Defense of Bunker Hill—Company B Returns to Bunker Hill—Supporting Arms at Bunker Hill—In Retrospect
IV Outpost Fighting Expanded 145
From the Center Sector to the Right—Early September Outpost Clashes—Korean COPs Hit Again—More Enemy Assaults in Late September—Chinese Intensify Their Outpost Attacks—More STRESS, More CAS, More Accomplishments—Rockets, Resupply, and Radios
V The Hook 185
Before the Battle—Preparations for Attack and Defense—Attack on the Hook—Reno Demonstration—Counterattack—Overview
VI Positional Warfare 217
A Successful Korean Defense—Six Months on the UNC Line—Events on the Diplomatic Front—The Marine Commandsviii During the Third Winter—1st MAW Operations 1952–1953—Behind the Lines—The Quiet Sectors—Changes in the Concept of Ground Defense—Before the Nevadas Battle
VII Vegas 263
The Nevada Cities—Supporting Arms—Defense Organization at the Outposts—Chinese Attack on 26 March—Reinforcements Dispatched—Massed Counterattack the Next Day—Push to the Summit—Other Communist Probes—Three CCF Attempts for the Outpost—Vegas Consolidation Begins—Aftermath
VIII Marking Time (April-June 1953) 313
The Peace Talks Resume—Operation Small toggle—Interval Before the Marines Go Off the Line—The May Relief—Training While in Reserve and Division Change of Command—Heavy May-June Fighting—Developments in Marine Air—Other Marine Defense Activities—The Division Is Ordered Back to the Front
IX Heavy Fighting Before the Armistice 363
Relief of the 25th Division—Initial Attacks on Outposts Berlin and East Berlin—Enemy Probes, 11–18 July—Marine Air Operations—Fall of the Berlins—Renewal of Heavy Fighting, 24–26 July—Last Day of the War
X Return of the Prisoners of War 399
Operation Major Change—Circumstances of Capture—The Communist POW Camps—CCF “Lenient Policy” and Indoctrination Attempts—The Germ Warfare Issue—Problems and Performance of Marine POWs—Marine Escape Attempts—Evaluation and Aftermath
XI While Guns Cool 445
The Postwar Transition—Control of the DMZ and the Military Police Company—Organization of New Defense Positions—Postwar Employment of Marine Units in FECOM
XII Korean Reflection 475
Marine Corps Role and Contributions to the Korean War: Ground, Air, Helicopter—FMF and Readiness Posture—Problems Peculiar to the Korean War—Korean Lessons

ix

ix

Appendices

    Page
A Glossary of Technical Terms and Abbreviations 537
B Korean War Chronology 541
C Command and Staff List 549
D Effective Strength, 1st Marine Division and 1st Marine Aircraft Wing 573
E Marine Corps Casualties 575
F Marine Pilots and Enemy Aircraft Downed in Korean War 577
G Unit Citations (during 1952–1953 period) 579
H Armistice Agreement 587
Bibliography 611
Index 617

x

x

Illustrations

Photographs

Photos

Sixteen-page sections of photographs following pages 212 and 436

Sixteen-page sections of photos following pages 212 and 436

Maps and Sketches

Maps & Sketches

    Page
1 EUSAK Dispositions—15 March 1952 9
2 Western Korea—I Corps Sector—1952–1953 14
3 1st Marine Division Sector—30 April 1952 23
4 1st Marine Aircraft Wing Dispositions—30 April 1952 25
5 2/5 Sector—15–16 April 1952 35
6 West Coast Island Defense Element—Summer 1952 54
7 East Coast Island Defense Element—Summer 1952 57
8 Objectives for 1/5 Attack—9 May 1952 78
9 1st Marines Sector of JAMestown (Division Center)—8 August 1952 110
10 2/1 Sector—9–11 August 1952 115
11 Bunker Hill Area—2300, 12 August 1952 120
12 Combat Outposts and Ambush Sites—5th Marines Sector (Division Right)—Early September 1952 151
13 Combat Outposts—KMC Sector (Division Left)—5–7 September 1952 154
14 7th Marines Sector (Division Right)—Early October 1952 164
15 “CCF Creeping Tactics”—March-October 1952 189
16 Hook Sector of MLR—1800, 26 October 1952 198
17 Hook Penetrations—26–27 October 1952 201
18 Outpost Reno Attacks—27 October 1952 204
19 CCF Attack Against KMC Sector (Division Left)—31 October 1952 219
20 Organization of Ground Defense—Winter 1952–1953 252
21 Typical Hill Defense (Cross Section)—Winter 1952–1953 254
22 5th Marines MLR Sector—26 March 1953 266
23 1st Marines MLR Sector (Division Center)—26 March 1953 269
24 COP Carson—March 1953 272
25 COP Reno—March 1953 274
26 COP Vegas—March 1953 277xi
27 Attack on 5th Marines Front—26–30 March 1953 282
28 25th Infantry Division Sector (Following Relief of the 1st Marine Division)—5 May 1953 330
29 Eighth Army Sector—1 January-27 July 1953 343
30 7th Marines MLR Sector (Division Right)—Linear Defense—19–20 July 1953 380
31 7th Marines MLR Sector—Defense-in-Depth—20–21 July 1953 382
32 7th Marines MLR Sector—Defense-in-Depth—22–23 July 1953 384
33 Eighth Army Front—27 July 1953 395
34 POW Camps in which Marines Were Held 417
35 1st Marine Division Post-Armistice Main Battle Position—30 September 1953 462

From Cairo to JAMESTOWN—The Marines’ Home in West Korea—Organization of the 1st Marine Division Area—The 1st Marine Aircraft Wing—The Enemy—Initial CCF Attack—Subsequent CCF Attacks—Strengthening the Line—Marine Air Operations—Supporting the Division and the Wing—Different Area, Different Problem

From Cairo to JAMestown—The Marines’ Home in South Korea—Structure of the 1st Marine Division Area—The 1st Marine Aircraft Wing—The Enemy—First CCF Attack—Following CCF Attacks—Reinforcing the Line—Marine Air Operations—Supporting the Division and the Wing—Different Area, Different Challenges

From Cairo to JAMESTOWN1

1 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1st Marine Division Staff Report, titled “Notes for Major General J. T. Selden, Commanding General, First Marine Division, Korea,” dtd 20 Aug 52, hereafter Selden, Div. Staff Rpt; the four previous volumes of the series U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1950–1953, namely, Lynn Montross and Capt Nicholas A. Canzona, The Pusan Perimeter, v. I; The Inchon-Seoul Operation, v. II; The Chosin Reservoir Campaign, v. III; Lynn Montross, Maj Hubard D. Kuokka, and Maj Norman W. Hicks, The East-Central Front, v. IV (Washington. HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, 1954–1962), hereafter Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea—Central Front, v. IV; Department of Military Art and Engineering, U.S. Military Academy, Operations in Korea (West Point, N.Y.: 1956), hereafter USMA, Korea; David Rees, Korea: The Limited War (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1964), hereafter Rees, Korea, quoted with permission of the publisher. Unless otherwise noted, all documentary material cited is on file at, or obtainable through, the Archives of the Historical Division, Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps.

1 Unless stated otherwise, the material in this section comes from: 1st Marine Division Staff Report, titled “Notes for Major General J. T. Selden, Commanding General, First Marine Division, Korea,” dated August 20, 1952, hereafter Selden, Div. Staff Rpt; the four earlier volumes of the series U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1950–1953, specifically, Lynn Montross and Capt Nicholas A. Canzona, The Pusan Perimeter, vol. I; The Inchon-Seoul Operation, vol. II; The Chosin Reservoir Campaign, vol. III; Lynn Montross, Maj Hubard D. Kuokka, and Maj Norman W. Hicks, The East-Central Front, vol. IV (Washington. HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, 1954–1962), hereafter Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea—Central Front, vol. IV; Department of Military Art and Engineering, U.S. Military Academy, Operations in Korea (West Point, N.Y.: 1956), hereafter USMA, Korea; David Rees, Korea: The Limited War (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1964), hereafter Rees, Korea, quoted with permission from the publisher. Unless otherwise mentioned, all documentary material cited is on file at, or can be obtained through, the Archives of the Historical Division, Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps.

During the latter part of March 1952, the 1st Marine Division, a component of the U.S. Eighth Army in Korea (EUSAK), pulled out of its positions astride the Soyang River in east-central Korea and moved to the far western part of the country in the I Corps sector. There the Marines took over the EUSAK left flank, guarding the most likely enemy approaches to the South Korean capital city, Seoul, and improving the ground defense in their sector to comply with the strict requirements which the division2 commander, Major General John T. Selden, had set down. Except for a brief period in reserve, the Marine division would remain in the Korean front lines until a cease-fire agreement in July 1953 ended active hostilities.

At the end of March 1952, the 1st Marine Division, part of the U.S. Eighth Army in Korea (EUSAK), withdrew from its positions along the Soyang River in east-central Korea and relocated to the far western region of the country in the I Corps area. There, the Marines took over the EUSAK left flank, securing the most probable enemy routes to the South Korean capital, Seoul, and enhancing ground defense in their sector to meet the strict standards set by the division2 commander, Major General John T. Selden. With the exception of a short time in reserve, the Marine division would stay on the Korean front lines until a cease-fire agreement in July 1953 brought an end to active hostilities.

The division CG, Major General Selden,2 had assumed command of the 25,000-man 1st Marine Division two months earlier, on 11 January, from Major General Gerald C. Thomas while the Marines were still in the eastern X Corps sector. The new Marine commander was a 37-year veteran of Marine Corps service, having enlisted as a private in 1915, serving shortly thereafter in Haiti. During World War I he was commissioned a second lieutenant, in 1918, while on convoy duty. Between the two world wars, his overseas service had included a second assignment to Haiti, two China tours, and sea duty. When the United States entered World War II, Lieutenant Colonel Selden was an intelligence officer aboard the carrier Lexington. Later in the war Colonel Selden led the 5th Marines in the New Britain fighting and was Chief of Staff of the 1st Marine Division in the Peleliu campaign. He was promoted to brigadier general in 1948 and received his second star in 1951, prior to his combat assignment in Korea.

The division CG, Major General Selden,2 took command of the 25,000-man 1st Marine Division two months earlier, on January 11, from Major General Gerald C. Thomas while the Marines were still in the eastern X Corps sector. The new Marine commander was a 37-year veteran of the Marine Corps, having enlisted as a private in 1915 and soon after serving in Haiti. During World War I, he became a second lieutenant in 1918 while on convoy duty. Between the two world wars, his overseas service included a second stint in Haiti, two tours in China, and sea duty. When the United States entered World War II, Lieutenant Colonel Selden was an intelligence officer on the carrier Lexington. Later in the war, Colonel Selden led the 5th Marines in the New Britain fighting and was the Chief of Staff for the 1st Marine Division during the Peleliu campaign. He was promoted to brigadier general in 1948 and received his second star in 1951, before his combat assignment in Korea.

2 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of MajGen John T. Selden, Mar 54.

2 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of MajGen John T. Selden, Mar 54.

American concern in the 1950s for South Korea’s struggle to preserve its independence stemmed from a World War II agreement between the United States, the United Kingdom, and China. In December 1943, the three powers had signed the Cairo Declaration and bound themselves to ensure the freedom of the Korean people, then under the yoke of the Japanese Empire. At the Potsdam Conference, held on the outskirts of Berlin, Germany in July 1945, the United States, China,3 and Britain renewed their Cairo promise.

American concern in the 1950s for South Korea’s fight to maintain its independence came from a World War II agreement between the United States, the United Kingdom, and China. In December 1943, the three nations signed the Cairo Declaration, committing to ensure the freedom of the Korean people, who were then under Japanese rule. At the Potsdam Conference, held just outside Berlin, Germany, in July 1945, the United States, China, 3 and Britain reaffirmed their Cairo commitment.

3 China did not attend. Instead, it received an advance copy of the proposed text. President Chiang Kai-shek signified Chinese approval on 26 July. A few hours later, the Potsdam Declaration was made public. Foreign Relations of the United States: The Conferences at Cairo and Teheran, 1943 (Department of State publication 7187), pp. 448–449; The Conference of Berlin (The Potsdam Conference), 1945, v. II (Department of State publication 7163), pp. 1278, 1282–1283, 1474–1476.

3 China did not participate. Instead, it got an advance copy of the proposed text. President Chiang Kai-shek indicated Chinese approval on July 26. A few hours later, the Potsdam Declaration was made public. Foreign Relations of the United States: The Conferences at Cairo and Teheran, 1943 (Department of State publication 7187), pp. 448–449; The Conference of Berlin (The Potsdam Conference), 1945, v. II (Department of State publication 7163), pp. 1278, 1282–1283, 1474–1476.

When the Soviet Union agreed to join forces against Japan, on 8 August, the USSR also became a party to the Cairo Declaration. According to terms of the Japanese capitulation on 11 August, the Soviets were to accept surrender of the defeated forces north of the 38th Parallel in Korea. South of that line, the commander of the3 American occupation forces would receive the surrender. The Russians wasted no time and on 12 August had their troops in northern Korea. American combat units, deployed throughout the Pacific, did not enter Korea until 8 September. Then they found the Soviet soldiers so firmly established they even refused to permit U.S. occupation officials from the south to cross over into the Russian sector. A December conference in Moscow led to a Russo-American commission to work out the postwar problems of Korean independence.

When the Soviet Union agreed to team up against Japan on August 8, the USSR also joined the Cairo Declaration. According to the terms of Japan's surrender on August 11, the Soviets were to accept the surrender of defeated forces north of the 38th Parallel in Korea. South of that line, the commander of the 3 American occupation forces would handle the surrender. The Russians didn’t waste any time, and by August 12, their troops were in northern Korea. American combat units, stationed throughout the Pacific, didn’t enter Korea until September 8. When they arrived, they found the Soviet soldiers so well established that they even refused to let U.S. occupation officials from the south cross into the Russian sector. A December conference in Moscow resulted in a Russo-American commission to address the postwar issues of Korean independence.

Meeting for the first time in March 1946, the commission was short-lived. Its failure, due to lack of Russian cooperation, paved the way for politico-military factions within the country that set up two separate Koreas. In the north the Communists, under Kim Il Sung, and in the south the Korean nationalists, led by Dr. Syngman Rhee, organized independent governments early in 1947. In May of that year, a second joint commission failed to unify the country. As a result the Korean problem was presented to the United Nations (UN). This postwar international agency was no more successful in resolving the differences between the disputing factions. It did, however, recognize the Rhee government in December 1948 as the representative one of the two dissident groups.

Meeting for the first time in March 1946, the commission was short-lived. Its failure, caused by a lack of cooperation from Russia, led to the emergence of political and military factions within the country that established two separate Koreas. In the north, the Communists, led by Kim Il Sung, and in the south, the Korean nationalists, headed by Dr. Syngman Rhee, set up independent governments early in 1947. In May of that year, a second joint commission failed to unify the country. As a result, the Korean issue was brought to the United Nations (UN). This postwar international agency was also unsuccessful in resolving the differences between the opposing factions. However, it did recognize the Rhee government in December 1948 as the representative government of the two conflicting groups.

In June 1950, the North Koreans attempted to force unification of Korea under Communist control by crossing the 38th Parallel with seven infantry divisions heavily supported by artillery and tanks. Acting on a resolution presented by the United States, the United Nations responded by declaring the North Korean action a “breach of the peace” and called upon its members to assist the South Koreans in ousting the invaders. Many free countries around the globe offered their aid. In the United States, President Harry S. Truman authorized the use of U.S. air and naval units and, shortly thereafter, ground forces to evict the aggressors and restore the status quo. Under the command of General of the Army Douglas MacArthur, then Far East Commander, U.S. Eighth Army occupation troops in Japan embarked to South Korea.

In June 1950, North Korea tried to unify Korea under Communist rule by crossing the 38th Parallel with seven infantry divisions, heavily backed by artillery and tanks. Acting on a resolution from the United States, the United Nations responded by declaring the North Korean action a “breach of the peace” and urged its members to help South Korea drive out the invaders. Many free countries worldwide offered their support. In the United States, President Harry S. Truman approved the use of U.S. air and naval forces, and soon after, ground troops were sent to evict the aggressors and restore order. Under the command of General of the Army Douglas MacArthur, the U.S. Eighth Army occupation troops in Japan were deployed to South Korea.

The first combat unit sent from America to Korea was a Marine air-ground team, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, formed at Camp Pendleton, California on 7 July 1950, under Brigadier General Edward A. Craig. The same day the UN Security Council passed a resolution creating the United Nations Command (UNC) which was to exercise operational control over the international military forces4 rallying to the defense of South Korea. The Council asked the United States to appoint a commander of the UN forces; on the 8th, President Truman named his Far East Commander, General MacArthur, as Commander in Chief, United Nations Command (CinCUNC).

The first combat unit sent from America to Korea was a Marine air-ground team, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, formed at Camp Pendleton, California on July 7, 1950, under Brigadier General Edward A. Craig. On the same day, the UN Security Council passed a resolution creating the United Nations Command (UNC), which was to exercise operational control over the international military forces4 rallying to defend South Korea. The Council requested the United States to appoint a commander for the UN forces; on the 8th, President Truman named his Far East Commander, General MacArthur, as Commander in Chief, United Nations Command (CinCUNC).

In Korea the Marines soon became known as the firemen of the Pusan Perimeter, for they were shifted from one trouble spot to the next all along the defensive ring around Pusan, the last United Nations stronghold in southeastern Korea during the early days of the fighting. A bold tactical stroke planned for mid-September was designed to relieve enemy pressure on Pusan and weaken the strength of the North Korean People’s Army (NKPA). As envisioned by General MacArthur, an amphibious landing at Inchon on the west coast, far to the enemy rear, would threaten the entire North Korean position south of the 38th Parallel. To help effect this coup, the UN Commander directed that the Marine brigade be pulled out of the Pusan area to take part in the landing at Inchon.

In Korea, the Marines quickly earned the nickname "firemen of the Pusan Perimeter" because they were moved from one hotspot to another along the defensive line surrounding Pusan, the last United Nations stronghold in southeastern Korea during the early days of the conflict. A bold tactical plan set for mid-September aimed to ease enemy pressure on Pusan and weaken the North Korean People’s Army (NKPA). As General MacArthur envisioned, an amphibious landing at Inchon on the west coast, deep in enemy territory, would threaten the entire North Korean position south of the 38th Parallel. To carry out this strategy, the UN Commander ordered the Marine brigade to be pulled from the Pusan area to participate in the landing at Inchon.

MacArthur’s assault force consisted of the 1st Marine Division, less one of its three regiments,4 but including the 1st Korean Marine Corps (KMC) Regiment. Marine ground and aviation units were to assist in retaking Seoul, the South Korean capital, and to cut the supply line sustaining the NKPA divisions.

MacArthur’s attack team included the 1st Marine Division, minus one of its three regiments, 4, but it featured the 1st Korean Marine Corps (KMC) Regiment. Marine ground and air units were set to help retake Seoul, the capital of South Korea, and to sever the supply line supporting the NKPA divisions.

4 The 7th Marines was on its way to Korea at the time of the Inchon landing. The brigade, however, joined the 1st Division at sea en route to the objective to provide elements of the 5th Regimental Combat Team (RCT).

4 The 7th Marines were headed to Korea during the Inchon landing. However, the brigade joined the 1st Division at sea while on the way to the objective to provide support for parts of the 5th Regimental Combat Team (RCT).

On 15 September, Marines stormed ashore on three Inchon beaches. Despite difficulties inherent in effecting a landing there,5 it was an outstandingly successful amphibious assault. The 1st and 5th Marines, with 1st Marine Aircraft Wing (1st MAW) assault squadrons providing close air support, quickly captured the port city of Inchon, Ascom City6 to the east, and Kimpo Airfield. Advancing eastward the Marines approached the Han River that separates Kimpo Peninsula from the Korean mainland. Crossing this obstacle in amphibian vehicles, 1st Division Marines converged on Seoul from three directions. By 27 September, the Marines had captured5 the South Korean government complex and, together with the U.S. Army 7th Infantry Division, had severed the enemy’s main supply route (MSR) to Pusan. In heavy, close fighting near the city, other United Nations troops pursued and cut off major units of the NKPA.

On September 15, Marines landed on three beaches at Inchon. Despite the challenges of landing there, it was an exceptionally successful amphibious assault. The 1st and 5th Marines, with support from assault squadrons of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing (1st MAW), quickly took control of the port city of Inchon, Ascom City to the east, and Kimpo Airfield. Moving east, the Marines approached the Han River, which separates Kimpo Peninsula from the Korean mainland. Using amphibious vehicles to cross this barrier, Marines from the 1st Division advanced on Seoul from three different directions. By September 27, the Marines had secured the South Korean government complex and, alongside the U.S. Army's 7th Infantry Division, had cut off the enemy’s main supply route (MSR) to Pusan. In intense, close combat near the city, other United Nations forces pursued and isolated significant units of the NKPA.

5 For a discussion of the hardships facing the landing force, see Montross and Canzona, USMC Ops Korea—Inchon, v. II, op. cit., pp. 41–42, 59–60, 62–64.

5 For a discussion of the challenges facing the landing force, see Montross and Canzona, USMC Ops Korea—Inchon, v. II, op. cit., pp. 41–42, 59–60, 62–64.

6 In World War II, the Japanese developed a logistical base east of Inchon. When the Japanese surrendered, the Army Service Command temporarily took over the installation, naming it Ascom City. Maj Robert K. Sawyer, Military Advisers in Korea: KMAG in Peace and War (Washington: OCMH, DA, 1962), p. 43n.

6 In World War II, the Japanese set up a supply base east of Inchon. After the Japanese surrendered, the Army Service Command took control of the site for a short time, calling it Ascom City. Maj Robert K. Sawyer, Military Advisers in Korea: KMAG in Peace and War (Washington: OCMH, DA, 1962), p. 43n.

Ordered back to East Korea, the Marine division re-embarked at Inchon in October and made an administrative landing at Wonsan on the North Korean coast 75 miles above the 38th Parallel. As part of the U.S. X Corps, the 1st Marine Division was to move the 5th and 7th Marines (Reinforced) to the vicinity of the Chosin Reservoir, from where they were to continue the advance northward toward the North Korean-Manchurian border. The 1st Marines and support troops were to remain in the Wonsan area.

Ordered back to East Korea, the Marine division re-embarked at Inchon in October and made an administrative landing at Wonsan on the North Korean coast, 75 miles above the 38th Parallel. As part of the U.S. X Corps, the 1st Marine Division was set to move the 5th and 7th Marines (Reinforced) to the area around the Chosin Reservoir, from where they would continue advancing north toward the North Korean-Manchurian border. The 1st Marines and support troops were to stay in the Wonsan area.

While the bulk of the division moved northward, an unforeseen development was in the making that was to change materially the military situation in Korea overnight. Aware that the North Koreans were on the brink of military disaster, Communist China had decided to enter the fighting. Nine Chinese divisions had been dispatched into the area with the specific mission of destroying the 1st Marine Division.7 Without prior warning, on the night of 27 November, hordes of Chinese Communist Forces (CCF, or “Chinese People’s Volunteers” as they called themselves) assaulted the unsuspecting Marines and nearly succeeding in trapping the two Marine regiments. The enemy’s failure to do so was due to the military discipline and courage displayed by able-bodied and wounded Marines alike, as well as effective support furnished by Marine aviation. Under conditions of great hardship, the division fought its way out over 78 miles of frozen ground from Chosin to the port of Hungnam, where transports stood by to evacuate the weary men and the equipment they had salvaged.

While most of the division moved north, an unexpected event was unfolding that would significantly change the military situation in Korea overnight. Knowing that the North Koreans were on the brink of disaster, Communist China decided to join the conflict. Nine Chinese divisions were sent into the area with the specific goal of taking out the 1st Marine Division. Without any warning, on the night of November 27, large groups of Chinese Communist Forces (CCF, or “Chinese People’s Volunteers” as they referred to themselves) attacked the unsuspecting Marines, nearly managing to trap two Marine regiments. The enemy's failure was due to the discipline and courage shown by both able-bodied and wounded Marines, along with effective support from Marine aviation. Despite harsh conditions, the division fought its way over 78 miles of frozen ground from Chosin to the port of Hungnam, where transports were ready to evacuate the exhausted men and the equipment they had salvaged.

7 Montross and Canzona, USMC Ops Korea—Chosin, v. III, p. 161.

7 Montross and Canzona, USMC Ops Korea—Chosin, v. III, p. 161.

This Chinese offensive had wrested victory from the grasp of General MacArthur just as the successful completion of the campaign seemed assured. In the west, the bulk of the Eighth Army paced its withdrawal with that of the X Corps. The UNC established a major line of defense across the country generally following the 38th Parallel. On Christmas Day, massed Chinese forces crossed the parallel, and within a week the UN positions were bearing the full brunt of the enemy assault. Driving southward, the Communists6 recaptured Seoul, but by mid-February 1951 the advance had been slowed down, the result of determined Eighth Army stands from a series of successive defensive lines.8

This Chinese offensive had taken victory away from General MacArthur just as it seemed the campaign would be a success. In the west, most of the Eighth Army coordinated its retreat with the X Corps. The UNC set up a major defense line across the country, generally following the 38th Parallel. On Christmas Day, large Chinese forces crossed the parallel, and within a week, the UN positions were under heavy enemy attack. Moving south, the Communists recaptured Seoul, but by mid-February 1951, their advance had slowed, thanks to the determined stands of the Eighth Army from a series of defensive lines.8

8 On 9 January 1951, General MacArthur was “directed to defend himself in successive positions, inflicting maximum damage to hostile forces in Korea subject to the primary consideration of the safety of his troops and his basic mission of protecting Japan.” Carl Berger, The Korea Knot—A Military-Political History (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1957), pp. 131–132, hereafter Berger, Korea Knot, quoted with permission of the publisher.

8 On January 9, 1951, General MacArthur was instructed to defend himself from multiple positions, dealing as much damage as possible to enemy forces in Korea, while keeping the safety of his troops and his main mission of protecting Japan as top priorities. Carl Berger, The Korea Knot—A Military-Political History (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1957), pp. 131–132, hereafter Berger, Korea Knot, quoted with permission of the publisher.

Following its evacuation from Hungnam, the 1st Marine Division early in 1951 underwent a brief period of rehabilitation and training in the vicinity of Masan, west of Pusan. From there, the division moved northeast to an area beyond Pohang on the east coast. Under operational control of Eighth Army, the Marines, with the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment attached for most of the period, protected 75 miles of a vital supply route from attack by bands of guerrillas. In addition, the Marines conducted patrols to locate, trap, and destroy the enemy. The Pohang guerrilla hunt also provided valuable training for several thousand recently arrived Marine division replacements.

Following its evacuation from Hungnam, the 1st Marine Division in early 1951 went through a short period of recovery and training near Masan, west of Pusan. From there, the division moved northeast to an area beyond Pohang on the east coast. Under the operational control of the Eighth Army, the Marines, along with the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment for most of the time, defended 75 miles of a crucial supply route from attacks by groups of guerrillas. Additionally, the Marines carried out patrols to find, capture, and eliminate the enemy. The Pohang guerrilla hunt also served as important training for several thousand newly arrived replacements in the Marine division.

In mid-February the 1st Marine Division was assigned to the U.S. IX Corps, then operating in east-central Korea near Wonju. Initially without the KMCs,9 the Marine division helped push the corps line across the 38th Parallel into North Korea. On 22 April, the Chinese unleashed a gigantic offensive, which again forced UN troops back into South Korea. By the end of the month, however, the Allies had halted the 40-mile-wide enemy spring offensive.

In mid-February, the 1st Marine Division was assigned to the U.S. IX Corps, which was operating in east-central Korea near Wonju. Initially without the KMCs, the Marine division helped push the corps line across the 38th Parallel into North Korea. On April 22, the Chinese launched a massive offensive, forcing UN troops back into South Korea. By the end of the month, however, the Allies had stopped the enemy's 40-mile-wide spring offensive.

9 The 1st KMC Regiment was again attached to the Marine Division on 17 March 1951 and remained under its operational control for the remainder of the war. CinCPacFlt Interim Evaluation Rpt No. 4, Chap 9, p. 9-53, hereafter PacFlt EvalRpt with number and chapter.

9 The 1st KMC Regiment rejoined the Marine Division on March 17, 1951, and stayed under its operational control for the rest of the war. CinCPacFlt Interim Evaluation Rpt No. 4, Chap 9, p. 9-53, hereafter PacFlt EvalRpt with number and chapter.

Once again, in May, the Marine division was assigned to the U.S. X Corps, east of the IX Corps sector. Shortly thereafter the Communists launched another major offensive. Heavy casualties inflicted by UNC forces slowed this new enemy drive. Marine, Army, and Korean troops not only repelled the Chinese onslaught but immediately launched a counteroffensive, routing the enemy back into North Korea until the rough, mountainous terrain and stiffening resistance conspired to slow the Allied advance.

Once again, in May, the Marine division was assigned to the U.S. X Corps, just east of the IX Corps area. Soon after, the Communists initiated another major offensive. The heavy losses caused by UNC forces hindered this new enemy attack. Marine, Army, and Korean troops not only pushed back the Chinese assault but also quickly launched a counteroffensive, driving the enemy back into North Korea until the difficult, mountainous terrain and increasing resistance slowed the Allied progress.

In addition to these combat difficulties, the Marine division began to encounter increasing trouble in obtaining what it considered7 sufficient and timely close air support (CAS). Most attack and fighter aircraft of the 1st MAW, commanded by Major General Field Harris10 and operating since the Chosin Reservoir days under Fifth Air Force (FAF), had been employed primarily in a program of interdicting North Korean supply routes. Due to this diversion of Marine air from its primary CAS mission, both the division and wing suffered—the latter by its pilots’ limited experience in performing precision CAS sorties. Despite the difficulties, the Marine division drove northward reaching, by 20 June, a grotesque scooped-out terrain feature on the east-central front appropriately dubbed the Punchbowl.

In addition to these combat challenges, the Marine division started facing more trouble in getting what it considered7 enough and timely close air support (CAS). Most of the attack and fighter aircraft from the 1st MAW, led by Major General Field Harris10 and operating since the days at Chosin Reservoir under Fifth Air Force (FAF), had mainly been used for a program to disrupt North Korean supply routes. This shift of Marine air away from its primary CAS mission affected both the division and the wing—the latter suffering because its pilots had limited experience in executing precision CAS sorties. Despite these challenges, the Marine division pushed northward and, by 20 June, reached a surreal scooped-out terrain feature on the east-central front aptly named the Punchbowl.

10 Command responsibility of 1st MAW changed on 29 May 51 when Brigadier General Thomas J. Cushman succeeded General Harris.

10 Command responsibility of 1st MAW changed on May 29, 1951, when Brigadier General Thomas J. Cushman took over from General Harris.

Eighth Army advances into North Korea had caused the enemy to reappraise his military situation. On 23 June, the Russian delegate to the United Nations, Jacob Malik, hinted that the Korean differences might be settled at the conference table. Subsequently, United Nations Command and Communist leaders agreed that truce negotiations would begin on 7 July at Kaesong, located in West Korea immediately south of the 38th Parallel, but under Communist control. The Communists broke off the talks on 22 August. Without offering any credible evidence, they declared that UNC aircraft had violated the neutrality zone surrounding the conference area.11 Military and political observers then realized that the enemy’s overture to peace negotiations had served its intended purpose of permitting him to slow his retreat, regroup his forces, and prepare his ground defenses for a new determined stand.

The Eighth Army's advance into North Korea made the enemy reconsider their military situation. On June 23, Jacob Malik, the Russian delegate to the United Nations, suggested that the issues in Korea might be resolved through negotiations. Soon after, the United Nations Command and Communist leaders agreed to start truce talks on July 7 in Kaesong, a city in West Korea just south of the 38th Parallel, which was under Communist control. However, the Communists ended the discussions on August 22. They claimed, without providing any credible evidence, that UNC aircraft had breached the neutrality zone around the conference area.11 Military and political analysts then recognized that the enemy's offer for peace talks had achieved its goal of allowing them to slow down their retreat, regroup their forces, and strengthen their ground defenses for a renewed, stronger stand.

11 The Senior Delegate and Chief of the United Nations Command Delegation to the Korean Armistice Commission, Vice Admiral C. Turner Joy, USN, has described how the Communists in Korea concocted incidents “calculated to provide advantage for their negotiating efforts or for their basic propaganda objectives, or for both.” Examples of such duplicity are given in Chapter IV of his book, How Communists Negotiate (New York: The MacMillan Company, 1955), hereafter Joy, Truce Negotiations, quoted with permission of the publisher. The quote above appears on p. 30.

11 The Senior Delegate and Chief of the United Nations Command Delegation to the Korean Armistice Commission, Vice Admiral C. Turner Joy, USN, has explained how the Communists in Korea created incidents “designed to benefit their negotiating strategies or to serve their core propaganda goals, or both.” Examples of this deceit are provided in Chapter IV of his book, How Communists Negotiate (New York: The MacMillan Company, 1955), hereafter Joy, Truce Negotiations, quoted with permission of the publisher. The quote above can be found on p. 30.

The lull in military offensive activity during the mid-1951 truce talks presaged the kind of warfare that would soon typify the final phase of the Korean conflict. Before the fighting settled into positional trench warfare reminiscent of World War I, the Marines participated in the final UN offensive. In a bitter struggle, the division hacked its way northward through, over, and around the Punchbowl, and in September 1951 occupied a series of commanding terrain8 positions that became part of the MINNESOTA Line, the Eighth Army main defensive line. Beginning on the 20th of that month, it became the primary mission of frontline units to organize, construct, and defend positions they held on MINNESOTA. To show good faith at the peace table, the UNC outlawed large-scale attacks against the enemy. Intent upon not appearing the aggressor and determined to keep the door open for future truce negotiations, the United Nations Command in late 1951 decreed a new military policy of limited offensives and an aggressive defense of its line. This change in Allied strategy, due to politico-military considerations, from a moving battle situation to stabilized warfare would affect both the tactics and future of the Korean War.

The lull in military operations during the mid-1951 peace talks hinted at the type of warfare that would soon characterize the final stage of the Korean conflict. Before the fighting turned into the trench warfare similar to World War I, the Marines took part in the last UN offensive. In a tough battle, the division fought its way north through, over, and around the Punchbowl, and in September 1951 seized a series of key positions that became part of the Minnesota Line, the main defensive line of the Eighth Army. Starting on the 20th of that month, the main objective for frontline units was to organize, build, and defend the positions they held on MINNESOTA. To demonstrate good faith at the peace negotiations, the UNC prohibited large-scale attacks against the enemy. Aiming not to seem like the aggressor and eager to keep the possibility of future truce talks open, the United Nations Command in late 1951 established a new military policy of limited offensives and a strong defense of its line. This shift in Allied strategy, influenced by political and military factors, from a fluid battle situation to static warfare would impact both the tactics and the future of the Korean War.

Even as Allied major tactical offensive operations and the era of fire and maneuver in Korea was passing into oblivion, several innovations were coming into use. One was the Marine Corps employment of helicopters. First used for evacuation of casualties from Pusan in August 1950, the versatile aircraft had also been adopted by the Marine brigade commander, General Craig, as an airborne jeep. On 13 September 1951, Marines made a significant contribution to the military profession when they introduced helicopters for large-scale resupply combat operations. This mission was followed one week later by the first use of helicopters for a combat zone troop lift. These revolutionary air tactics were contemporary with two new Marine Corps developments in ground equipment—body armor and insulated combat boots, which underwent extensive combat testing that summer and fall. The latter were to be especially welcomed for field use during the 1951–1952 winter.

Even as the major tactical offensive operations by the Allies and the era of fire and maneuver in Korea faded into memory, several innovations were emerging. One was the Marine Corps' use of helicopters. Initially employed for evacuating casualties from Pusan in August 1950, this versatile aircraft was also adopted by Marine brigade commander General Craig as an airborne jeep. On September 13, 1951, Marines made a significant contribution to military tactics by introducing helicopters for large-scale resupply combat operations. This was followed a week later by the first use of helicopters for troop transport in a combat zone. These groundbreaking air tactics coincided with two new developments in Marine Corps ground equipment—body armor and insulated combat boots, which underwent extensive testing in combat that summer and fall. The latter would be especially valued for field use during the winter of 1951–1952.

Along the MINNESOTA Line, neither the freezing cold of a Korean winter nor blazing summer heat altered the daily routine. Ground defense operations consisted of dispatching patrols and raiding parties, laying ambushes, and improving the physical defenses. The enemy seemed reluctant to engage UN forces, and on one occasion to draw him into the open, EUSAK ordered Operation CLAM-UP across the entire UN front, beginning 10 February. Under cover of darkness, reserve battalions moved forward; then, during daylight, they pulled back, simulating a withdrawal of the main defenses. At the same time, frontline troops had explicit orders not to fire or even show themselves.912

Along the MINN. Line, neither the freezing cold of a Korean winter nor the scorching summer heat changed the daily routine. Ground defense operations involved sending out patrols and raiding parties, setting ambushes, and improving physical defenses. The enemy seemed hesitant to confront UN forces, and at one point, to lure them into the open, EUSAK ordered Operation STFU across the entire UN front, starting on February 10. Under the cover of darkness, reserve battalions moved forward; then, during the day, they pulled back, pretending to withdraw the main defenses. At the same time, frontline troops were given strict orders not to fire or even reveal themselves.912

12 Col Franklin B. Nihart comments on draft MS, Sep 66, hereafter Nihart comments.

12 Col Franklin B. Nihart comments on draft MS, Sep 66, hereafter Nihart comments.

MAP 1 K. WHITE

MAP 1 K. WHITE

EUSAK DISPOSITIONS

EUSAK PROVISIONS

15 MARCH 1952

15 March 1952

10

10

It was hoped that the rearward movement of units from the front line and the subsequent inactivity there would cause the enemy to come out of his trenches to investigate the apparent large-scale withdrawal of UNC troops. Then Marine and other EUSAK troops could open fire and inflict maximum casualties from covered positions. On the fifth day of the operation, CLAM-UP was ended. The North Koreans were lured out of their defenses, but not in the numbers expected. CLAM-UP was the last action in the X Corps sector for the 1st Marine Division, which would begin its cross-country relocation the following month. (See Map 1.)

It was hoped that the withdrawal of units from the front line and the resulting inactivity would entice the enemy to leave his trenches to check out the apparent large-scale pullback of UNC troops. Then Marine and other EUSAK troops could open fire and inflict maximum casualties from covered positions. On the fifth day of the operation, SHUT UP was ended. The North Koreans were drawn out of their defenses, but not in the expected numbers. Stay quiet was the last action in the X Corps sector for the 1st Marine Division, which would begin its cross-country relocation the following month. (See Map 1.)

Code-named Operation MIXMASTER, the transfer of the 1st Marine Division began on 17 March when major infantry units began to move out of their eastern X Corps positions, after their relief on line by the 8th Republic of Korea (ROK) Division. Regiments of the Marine division relocated in the following order: the 1st KMCs, 1st, 7th, and 5th Marines. The division’s artillery regiment, the 11th Marines, made the shift by battalions at two-day intervals. In the motor march to West Korea, Marine units traveled approximately 140 miles over narrow, mountainous, and frequently mud-clogged primitive roads. Day and night, division transport augmented by a motor transport battalion attached from Fleet Marine Force, Pacific (FMFPac) and one company from the 1st Combat Service Group (CSG) rolled through rain, snow, sleet, and occasional good weather.

Code-named Operation MIXMASTER, the transfer of the 1st Marine Division started on March 17 when major infantry units began to leave their positions in the eastern X Corps after being relieved by the 8th Republic of Korea (ROK) Division. The regiments of the Marine division relocated in this order: the 1st KMCs, 1st, 7th, and 5th Marines. The division's artillery regiment, the 11th Marines, made the move in battalions at two-day intervals. During the motor march to West Korea, Marine units traveled about 140 miles over narrow, mountainous, and often muddy, primitive roads. Day and night, division transport, supported by a motor transport battalion from Fleet Marine Force, Pacific (FMFPac) and one company from the 1st Combat Service Group (CSG), moved through rain, snow, sleet, and occasional good weather.

Marines employed 5,800 truck and DUKW (amphibious truck) loads to move most of the division personnel, gear, and supplies. Sixty-three flatbed trailers, 83 railroad cars, 14 landing ships, 2 transport aircraft, the vehicles of 4 Army truck companies, as well as hundreds of smaller jeep trailers and jeeps were utilized. The division estimated that these carriers moved about 50,000 tons of equipment and vehicles,13 with some of the support units making as many as a dozen round trips. The MIXMASTER move was made primarily by truck and by ship14 or rail for units with heavy vehicles.

Marines used 5,800 truck and DUKW (amphibious truck) loads to transport most of the division's personnel, gear, and supplies. They utilized 63 flatbed trailers, 83 railroad cars, 14 landing ships, 2 transport aircraft, vehicles from 4 Army truck companies, and hundreds of smaller jeep trailers and jeeps. The division estimated that these carriers moved around 50,000 tons of equipment and vehicles, with some support units making as many as a dozen round trips. The MIXMASTER move was mainly done by truck and by ship or rail for units with heavy vehicles.

11

11

13 Marine commanders and staff officers involved in the planning and execution of the division move were alarmed at the amount of additional equipment that infantry units had acquired during the static battle situation. Many had become overburdened with “nice-to-have” items in excess of actual T/E (Table of Equipment) allowances. Col William P. Pala comments on draft MS, 5 Sep 66, hereafter Pala comments.

13 Marine commanders and staff officers involved in planning and carrying out the division movement were concerned about the extra equipment that infantry units had picked up during the prolonged battle. Many had ended up with too many “nice-to-have” items beyond their actual T/E (Table of Equipment) limits. Col William P. Pala comments on draft MS, 5 Sep 66, hereafter Pala comments.

14 Heavy equipment and tracked vehicles were loaded aboard LSDs and LSTs which sailed from Sokcho-ri to Inchon.

14 Heavy equipment and tracked vehicles were loaded onto LSDs and LSTs that sailed from Sokcho-ri to Inchon.

Impressive as these figures are, they almost pall in significance compared with the meticulous planning and precision logistics required by the week-long move. It was made, without mishap, over main routes that supplied nearly a dozen other divisions on the EUSAK line and thus had to be executed so as not to interfere with combat support. Although the transfer of the 1st Marine Division from the eastern to western front was the longest transplacement of any EUSAK division, MIXMASTER was a complicated tactical maneuver that involved realignment of UNC divisions across the entire Korean front. Some 200,000 men and their combat equipment had to be relocated as part of a master plan to strengthen the Allied front and deploy more troops on line.

Impressive as these numbers are, they almost fade in significance compared to the careful planning and precise logistics needed for the week-long move. It was carried out smoothly along main routes that also served nearly a dozen other divisions on the EUSAK line, so it had to be done without disrupting combat support. The transfer of the 1st Marine Division from the eastern to western front was the longest relocation of any EUSAK division, and DJ Mixer was a complex tactical operation that required realigning UNC divisions throughout the entire Korean front. Around 200,000 soldiers and their combat gear had to be moved as part of a master plan to strengthen the Allied front and position more troops in place.

Upon its arrival in West Korea, the 1st Marine Division was under orders to relieve the 1st ROK Division and take over a sector at the extreme left of the Eighth Army line, under I Corps control, where the weaknesses of Kimpo Peninsula defenses had been of considerable concern to EUSAK and its commander, General James A. Van Fleet. As division units reached their new sector, they moved to locations pre-selected in accordance with their assigned mission. First Marine unit into the I Corps main defensive position, the JAMESTOWN Line, was the 1st KMC Regiment attached to the division, with its organic artillery battalion. The KMCs, as well as 1/11, began to move into their new positions on 18 March. At 1400 on 20 March, the Korean Marines completed the relief of the 15th Republic of Korea Regiment in the left sector of the MLR (main line of resistance). Next into the division line, occupying the right regimental sector adjacent to the 1st Commonwealth Division, was Colonel Sidney S. Wade’s 1st Marines with three battalions forward and 2/5 attached as the regimental reserve. Relief of the 1st ROK Division was completed on the night of 24–25 March. At 0400 on 25 March the Commanding General, 1st Marine Division assumed responsibility for the defense of 32 miles of the JAMESTOWN Line. That same date the remainder of the Marine artillery battalions also relocated in their new positions.

Upon arriving in West Korea, the 1st Marine Division was ordered to relieve the 1st ROK Division and take over a section at the far left of the Eighth Army line, under I Corps control, where the vulnerabilities of Kimpo Peninsula defenses had raised significant concerns for EUSAK and its commander, General James A. Van Fleet. As the division units reached their new area, they moved to locations that had been pre-selected in line with their assigned mission. The first Marine unit to enter the I Corps main defensive position, the JAMestown Line, was the 1st KMC Regiment, which was attached to the division along with its own artillery battalion. The KMCs, along with 1/11, began moving into their new positions on March 18. At 1400 on March 20, the Korean Marines completed the relief of the 15th Republic of Korea Regiment in the left sector of the MLR (main line of resistance). Next into the division line, occupying the right regimental sector next to the 1st Commonwealth Division, was Colonel Sidney S. Wade’s 1st Marines, with three battalions forward and 2/5 attached as the regimental reserve. The relief of the 1st ROK Division was completed on the night of March 24–25. At 0400 on March 25, the Commanding General of the 1st Marine Division took over responsibility for defending 32 miles of the JAMESTOWN Line. On the same day, the rest of the Marine artillery battalions also moved into their new positions.

As the division took over its new I Corps mission on 25 March, the Marine commander had one regiment of the 1st ROK Division attached as division reserve while his 5th Marines was still in the east. Operational plans originally had called for the 5th Marines, less a battalion, to locate in the Kimpo Peninsula area where it was12 anticipated Marine reserve units would be able to conduct extensive amphibious training. So overextended was the assigned battlefront position that General Selden realized this regiment would also be needed to man the line. He quickly alerted the 5th Marines commanding officer, Colonel Thomas A. Culhane, Jr., to deploy his regiment, then en route to western Korea, to take over a section of the JAMESTOWN front line instead of assuming reserve positions at Kimpo as originally assigned. General Selden believed that putting another regiment on the main line was essential to carrying out the division’s mission, to aggressively defend JAMESTOWN Line, not merely to delay a Communist advance.

As the division started its new I Corps mission on March 25, the Marine commander had one regiment from the 1st ROK Division attached as division reserve while his 5th Marines were still in the east. The original operational plans called for the 5th Marines, minus a battalion, to be stationed in the Kimpo Peninsula area where it was expected that Marine reserve units could carry out extensive amphibious training. The assigned battlefront position was so stretched that General Selden realized this regiment would also be necessary to hold the line. He quickly notified the commanding officer of the 5th Marines, Colonel Thomas A. Culhane, Jr., to send his regiment, which was on the way to western Korea, to take over a section of the JAMESTOWN front line instead of occupying reserve positions at Kimpo as originally planned. General Selden believed that having another regiment on the main line was crucial for fulfilling the division’s mission to aggressively defend the JAMETOWN Line, not just to delay a Communist advance.

Only a few hours after the 5th Marines had begun its trans-Korea move, helicopters picked up Colonel Culhane, his battalion commanders, and key regimental staff officers and flew them to the relocated division command post (CP) in the west. Here, on 26 March, the regimental commander officially received the change in the 5th Marines mission. Following this briefing, 5th Marines officers reconnoitered the newly assigned area15 while awaiting the arrival of their units. When the regiment arrived on the 28th, plans had been completed for it to relieve a part of the thinly-held 1st Marines line. On 29 March, the 5th Marines took over the center regimental sector while the 1st Marines, on the right regimental flank, compressed its ranks for a more solid defense.

Only a few hours after the 5th Marines had started their move across Korea, helicopters picked up Colonel Culhane, his battalion commanders, and key regimental staff officers and flew them to the new division command post (CP) in the west. On 26 March, the regimental commander officially received the update on the 5th Marines' mission. After this briefing, the 5th Marines officers surveyed the newly assigned area15 while waiting for their units to arrive. When the regiment got there on the 28th, plans were finalized for it to relieve part of the lightly-held 1st Marines line. On 29 March, the 5th Marines took over the center regimental sector while the 1st Marines, on the right regimental flank, tightened their ranks for stronger defense.

15 Col Thomas A. Culhane, Jr. ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 16 Sep 59, hereafter Culhane ltr.

15 Col Thomas A. Culhane, Jr. letter to Headquarters, History Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, dated 16 September 1959, hereafter Culhane letter.

Frontline units, from the west, were the 1st KMCs, the 5th, and 1st Marines. To the rear, the 7th Marines, designated as division reserve, together with organic and attached units of the division, had established an extensive support and supply area. As a temporary measure, a battalion of the division reserve, 2/7, was detached for defense of the Kimpo Peninsula pending a reorganization of forces in this area. Major logistical facilities were the division airhead, located at K-16 airfield, just southwest of Seoul, and the railhead at Munsan-ni, 25 miles northwest of the capital city and about five miles to the rear of the division sector at its nearest point. Forward of the 1st Marine Division line, outposts were established to enhance the division’s security. In the rear area the support facilities, secondary defense lines, and unit command posts kept pace with development of defensive installations on the MLR. Throughout the 1st13 Marine Division sector outpost security, field fortifications, and the ground defense net were thorough and intended to deny the enemy access to Seoul.

Frontline units from the west included the 1st KMCs, the 5th, and 1st Marines. Behind them, the 7th Marines, designated as division reserve, along with additional units of the division, set up a comprehensive support and supply area. As a temporary measure, a battalion from the division reserve, 2/7, was assigned to defend Kimpo Peninsula while the forces in the area were reorganized. Major logistical hubs included the division airhead at K-16 airfield, located just southwest of Seoul, and the railhead at Munsan-ni, 25 miles northwest of the capital and about five miles behind the division sector at its closest point. In front of the 1st Marine Division line, outposts were established to enhance the division’s security. In the rear, support facilities, secondary defense lines, and unit command posts kept up with the development of defensive installations on the MLR. Throughout the 1st13 Marine Division sector, outpost security, field fortifications, and the ground defense network were comprehensive and aimed to prevent the enemy from accessing Seoul.

The Marines’ Home in Western Korea16

16 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 52; CIA, NIS 41B, South Korea, Chap I, Brief, Section 21, Military Geographic Regions, Section 24, Topography (Washington: 1957–1962); Map, Korea, 1:50,000, AMS Series L 751, Sheets 6526 I and IV, 6527 I, II, III, and IV, 6528 II and III, 6627 III and IV, and 6628 III (prepared by the Engineer, HQ, AFFE, and AFFE/8A, 1952–1954).

16 Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 52; CIA, NIS 41B, South Korea, Chap I, Brief, Section 21, Military Geographic Regions, Section 24, Topography (Washington: 1957–1962); Map, Korea, 1:50,000, AMS Series L 751, Sheets 6526 I and IV, 6527 I, II, III, and IV, 6528 II and III, 6627 III and IV, and 6628 III (prepared by the Engineer, HQ, AFFE, and AFFE/8A, 1952–1954).

In western Korea, the home of the 1st Marine Division lay in a particularly significant area. (See Map 2.) Within the Marine boundaries ran the route that invaders through the ages had used in their drive south to Seoul. It was the 1st Marine Division’s mission to block any such future attempts. One of the reasons for moving the Marines to the west17 was that the terrain there had to be held at all costs; land in the east, mountainous and less valuable, could better be sacrificed if a partial withdrawal in Korea became necessary. At the end of March 1952, the division main line of resistance stretched across difficult terrain for more than 30 miles, from Kimpo to the British Commonwealth sector on the east, a frontage far in excess of the textbook concept.

In western Korea, the 1st Marine Division was based in a very important area. (See Map 2.) The route that invaders had used throughout history to move south to Seoul ran through Marine territory. It was the 1st Marine Division’s job to prevent any future attempts along that route. One of the reasons for relocating the Marines to the west 17 was that the land there needed to be defended at all costs; the mountainous and less valuable land in the east could be sacrificed if a partial withdrawal in Korea was needed. By the end of March 1952, the division’s main line of resistance extended over difficult terrain for more than 30 miles, from Kimpo to the British Commonwealth sector on the east, covering a much larger area than usual.

17 The two other reasons were the weakness of the Kimpo defenses and abandonment of plans for an amphibious strike along the east coast. Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea, v. IV, p. 253. Planning for a Marine-led assault had been directed by the EUSAK commander, General Van Fleet, early in 1952. The Marine division CG, General Selden, had given the task to his intelligence and operations deputies, Colonel James H. Tinsley and Lieutenant Colonel Gordon D. Gayle. On 12 March General Van Fleet came to the Marine Division CP for a briefing on the proposed amphibious assault. At the conclusion of the meeting the EUSAK commander revealed his concern for a possible enemy attack down the Korean west coast and told the Marine commander to prepare, in utmost secrecy, to move his division to the west coast. Lynn Montross, draft MS.

17 The two other reasons were the weakness of the Kimpo defenses and the cancellation of plans for an amphibious strike along the east coast. Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea, v. IV, p. 253. Planning for a Marine-led assault had been directed by the EUSAK commander, General Van Fleet, early in 1952. The Marine division CG, General Selden, had assigned the task to his intelligence and operations deputies, Colonel James H. Tinsley and Lieutenant Colonel Gordon D. Gayle. On March 12, General Van Fleet came to the Marine Division CP for a briefing on the proposed amphibious assault. At the end of the meeting, the EUSAK commander expressed his concern about a potential enemy attack along the Korean west coast and instructed the Marine commander to prepare, in complete secrecy, to move his division to the west coast. Lynn Montross, draft MS.

Although Seoul was not actually within the area of Marine Corps responsibility, the capital city was only 33 air miles south of the right limiting point of the division MLR and 26 miles southeast of the left. The port of Inchon lay but 19 air miles south of the western end of the division sector. Kaesong, the original site of the truce negotiations, was 13 miles northwest of the nearest part of the 1st Marine Division frontline while Panmunjom was less than 5 miles away and within the area of Marine forward outpost security. From15 the far northeastern end of the JAMESTOWN Line, which roughly paralleled the Imjin River, distances were correspondingly lengthened: Inchon, thus being 39 miles southwest and Kaesong, about 17 miles west.

Although Seoul wasn't technically part of the Marine Corps' area, the capital city was only 33 air miles south of the division's right boundary and 26 miles southeast of the left. The port of Inchon was just 19 air miles south of the western edge of the division sector. Kaesong, where the truce negotiations originally took place, was 13 miles northwest of the closest point on the 1st Marine Division frontline, while Panmunjom was less than 5 miles away and within the range of Marine forward outpost security. From15 the far northeastern end of the JAMESTOWN Line, which roughly followed the Imjin River, the distances were correspondingly increased: Inchon was now 39 miles southwest and Kaesong was about 17 miles west.

MAP 2 K. WHITE

MAP 2 K. WHITE

WESTERN KOREA

WESTERN KOREA

I CORPS SECTOR 1952–1953

I Corps Sector 1952–1953

The area to which the Marines had moved was situated in the western coastal lowlands and highlands area of northwestern South Korea. On the left flank, the division MLR hooked around the northwest tip of the Kimpo Peninsula, moved east across the high ground overlooking the Han River, and bent around the northeast cap of the peninsula. At a point opposite the mouth of the Kongnung River, the MLR traversed the Han to the mainland, proceeding north alongside that river to its confluence with the Imjin. Crossing north over the Imjin, JAMESTOWN followed the high ground on the east bank of the Sachon River for nearly two miles to where the river valley widened. There the MLR turned abruptly to the northeast and generally pursued that direction to the end of the Marine sector, meandering frequently, however, to take advantage of key terrain. Approximately 2½ miles west of the 1st Commonwealth Division boundary, the JAMESTOWN Line intersected the 38th Parallel near the tiny village of Madam-ni.

The area where the Marines relocated was in the western coastal lowlands and highlands of northwestern South Korea. On the left side, the division's Main Line of Resistance (MLR) curved around the northwest tip of the Kimpo Peninsula, moving east across the high ground that overlooked the Han River, then bending around the northeast end of the peninsula. At a point across from the mouth of the Kongnung River, the MLR crossed the Han River to the mainland, heading north alongside it until it met the Imjin River. After crossing north over the Imjin, JAMestown followed the high ground on the east bank of the Sachon River for almost two miles to where the river valley opened up. There, the MLR changed direction sharply to the northeast and generally continued in that direction to the end of the Marine sector, frequently winding around to make the most of important terrain features. About 2½ miles west of the 1st Commonwealth Division boundary, the JAMestown Line met the 38th Parallel near the small village of Madam-ni.

Within the Marine division sector to the north of Seoul lay the junction of two major rivers, the Imjin and the Han, and a portion of the broad fertile valley fed by the latter. Flowing into the division area from the east, the Imjin River snaked its way southwestward to the rear of JAMESTOWN. At the northeastern tip of the Kimpo Peninsula, the Imjin joined the Han. The latter there changed its course from south to west, flowed past Kimpo and neighboring Kanghwa-do Island, and emptied eventually into the Yellow Sea. At the far western end of the division sector the Yom River formed a natural boundary, separating Kanghwa and Kimpo, as it ran into the Han River and south to the Yellow Sea. To the east, the Sachon River streamed into the Imjin, while the Kongnung emptied into the Han where the MLR crossed from the mainland to Kimpo.

Within the Marine division area north of Seoul, there’s the meeting point of two major rivers, the Imjin and the Han, along with a part of the wide, fertile valley nourished by the latter. The Imjin River flowed into the division area from the east, winding southwest toward the back of JAMESTOWN. At the northeastern tip of the Kimpo Peninsula, the Imjin joined the Han. At that point, the Han changed its direction from south to west, flowing past Kimpo and the nearby Kanghwa-do Island before eventually emptying into the Yellow Sea. At the far western edge of the division area, the Yom River created a natural boundary between Kanghwa and Kimpo as it flowed into the Han River and south toward the Yellow Sea. To the east, the Sachon River fed into the Imjin, while the Kongnung emptied into the Han at the point where the MLR crosses from the mainland to Kimpo.

In addition, two north-south oriented rivers flanked enemy positions opposite the Marines and emptied into major rivers in the Marine sector. Northwest of Kimpo, the Yesong River ran south to the Han; far to the northeast, just beyond the March 1952 division right boundary, the Samichon River flowed into the Imjin.

In addition, two rivers running north-south bordered enemy positions across from the Marines and drained into major rivers in the Marine area. Just northwest of Kimpo, the Yesong River flowed south to the Han; way to the northeast, just beyond the March 1952 division's right boundary, the Samichon River fed into the Imjin.

Although the rivers in the Marine division were navigable, they16 were little used for supply or transportation. The railroads, too, were considered secondary ways, for there was but one line, which ran north out of Seoul to Munsan-ni and then continued towards Kaesong. Below the division railhead, located at Munsan-ni, a spur cut off to Ascom City. Roads, the chief means of surface transport, were numerous but lacked sufficient width and durability for supporting heavy military traffic. Within the sector occupied by the Marines, the main route generally paralleled the railroad. Most of the existing roads south of JAMESTOWN eventually found their way to the logistic center at Munsan-ni. Immediately across the Imjin, the road net was more dense but not of any better construction.

Although the rivers in the Marine division could be navigated, they16 were rarely used for supplies or transportation. The railroads were also seen as secondary options, with only one line running north from Seoul to Munsan-ni and then continuing toward Kaesong. Below the division railhead at Munsan-ni, a spur line branched off to Ascom City. Roads, the primary means of surface transport, were plentiful but too narrow and weak to handle heavy military traffic. In the area occupied by the Marines, the main route generally ran alongside the railroad. Most of the roads south of JAMESTOWN eventually connected to the logistics center at Munsan-ni. Directly across the Imjin, the road network was denser, but the quality of construction was no better.

From the logistical point of view, the Imjin River was a critical factor. Spanning it and connecting the division forward and rear support areas in March 1952 were only three bridges, which were vulnerable to river flooding conditions and possible enemy attack. Besides intersecting the Marine sector, the Imjin formed a barrier to the rear of much of the division MLR, thereby increasing the difficulty of normal defense and resupply operations.

From a logistical perspective, the Imjin River was a crucial factor. In March 1952, there were only three bridges crossing it, linking the forward and rear support areas of the division, and these were at risk from river flooding and potential enemy attacks. In addition to cutting across the Marine sector, the Imjin acted as a barrier behind much of the division's main line of resistance, making typical defense and resupply operations even more challenging.

When the Marines moved to the west, the winter was just ending. It had begun in November and was characterized by frequent light snowfalls but otherwise generally clear skies. Snow and wind storms seldom occurred in western Korea. From November to March the mean daily minimum Fahrenheit readings ranged from 15° to 30° above zero. The mean daily maximums during the summer were between the upper 70s and mid-80s. Extensive cloud cover, fog, and heavy rains were frequent during the summer season. Hot weather periods were also characterized by occasional severe winds. Spring and fall were moderate transitional seasons.

When the Marines headed west, winter was just wrapping up. It started in November and was marked by frequent light snowfalls, though the skies were mostly clear. Snow and wind storms were rare in western Korea. From November to March, the average daily minimum temperatures ranged from 15° to 30° above zero. During the summer, the average daily maximum temperatures were in the upper 70s to mid-80s. There was often a lot of cloud cover, fog, and heavy rain during the summer months. Hot weather was also sometimes accompanied by strong winds. Spring and fall were moderate transitional seasons.

Steep-sided hills and mountains, which sloped abruptly into narrow valleys pierced by many of the rivers and larger streams, predominated the terrain in the I Corps sector where the Marines located. The most rugged terrain was to the rear of the JAMESTOWN Line; six miles northeast of the Munsan-ni railhead was a 1,948-foot mountain, far higher than any other elevation on the Marine or Chinese MLR but lower than the rear area peaks supporting the Communist defenses. Ground cover in the division sector consisted of grass, scrub brush, and, occasionally, small trees. Rice fields crowded the valley floors. Mud flats were prevalent in many areas immediately adjacent to the larger rivers which intersected the17 division territory or virtually paralleled the east and western boundaries of the Marine sector.

Steep hills and mountains that dropped sharply into narrow valleys carved by numerous rivers and larger streams dominated the landscape in the I Corps area where the Marines were stationed. The toughest terrain was behind the JAMESTOWN Line; six miles northeast of the Munsan-ni railhead was a 1,948-foot mountain, much taller than any other peak in the Marine or Chinese Main Line of Resistance (MLR), but shorter than the higher peaks supporting the Communist defenses. The ground cover in the division area included grass, scrub brush, and occasionally, small trees. Rice fields filled the valley floors. Mud flats were common in many spots right next to the larger rivers that crossed the17 division territory or ran almost parallel to the eastern and western edges of the Marine sector.

The transfer from the Punchbowl in the east to western Korea thus resulted in a distinct change of scene for the Marines, who went from a rugged mountainous area to comparatively level terrain. Instead of facing a line held by predominantly North Korean forces the division was now confronted by the Chinese Communists. The Marines also went from a front that had been characterized by lively patrol action to one that in March 1952 was relatively dormant. With the arrival of the 1st Marine Division, this critical I Corps sector would witness sharply renewed activity and become a focal point of action in the UNC line.

The move from the Punchbowl in the east to western Korea marked a clear change of scenery for the Marines, who transitioned from a rugged, mountainous area to a flatter landscape. Instead of facing a line primarily held by North Korean forces, the division now dealt with the Chinese Communists. The Marines also shifted from a front that had seen active patrols to one that was relatively quiet in March 1952. With the arrival of the 1st Marine Division, this crucial I Corps sector would experience a notable increase in activity and become a key area of action in the UNC line.

Organization of the 1st Marine Division Area18

18 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar ComdDs, Mar 52; 1st KMC RCT Daily Intelligence and Operations Rpts, hereafter KMC Regt UnitRpts, Mar 52; Kimpo ProvRegt ComdDs, hereafter KPR ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52.

18 Unless otherwise stated, the content in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar ComdDs, Mar 52; 1st KMC RCT Daily Intelligence and Operations Rpts, referred to as KMC Regt UnitRpts, Mar 52; Kimpo ProvRegt ComdDs, referred to as KPR ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52.

“To defend” were the key words in the 1st Marine Division mission—“to organize, occupy, and actively defend its sector of Line JAMESTOWN”—in West Korea. General Selden’s force to prevent enemy penetration of JAMESTOWN numbered 1,364 Marine officers, 24,846 enlisted Marines, 1,100 naval personnel, and 4,400 Koreans of the attached 1st KMC Regiment. The division also had operational control of several I Corps reinforcing artillery units in its sector. On 31 March, another major infantry unit, the Kimpo Provisional Regiment (KPR) was organized. The division then assumed responsibility for the Kimpo Peninsula defense on the west flank with this Marine-Korean force.

“To defend” were the key words in the 1st Marine Division mission—“to organize, occupy, and actively defend its sector of Line JAMESTOWN”—in West Korea. General Selden’s force to prevent enemy penetration of JAMESTOWN included 1,364 Marine officers, 24,846 enlisted Marines, 1,100 naval personnel, and 4,400 Koreans from the attached 1st KMC Regiment. The division also had operational control of several I Corps reinforcing artillery units in its sector. On 31 March, another major infantry unit, the Kimpo Provisional Regiment (KPR), was organized. The division then took responsibility for defending the Kimpo Peninsula on the west flank with this Marine-Korean force.

A major reason for transfer of the 1st Marine Division to the west, it will be remembered, had been the weakness of the Kimpo defense. Several units, the 5th KMC Battalion, the Marine 1st Armored Amphibian Battalion, and the 13th ROK Security Battalion (less one company), had been charged with the protection of the peninsula. Their operations, although coordinated by I Corps, were conducted independently. The fixed nature of the Kimpo defenses provided for neither a reserve maneuver element to help repel any18 enemy action that might develop nor a single commander to coordinate the operations of the defending units.

A main reason for moving the 1st Marine Division to the west, as we know, was the weakness of the Kimpo defense. Several units, including the 5th KMC Battalion, the Marine 1st Armored Amphibian Battalion, and the 13th ROK Security Battalion (minus one company), were responsible for protecting the peninsula. Their operations, while coordinated by I Corps, were carried out independently. The rigid structure of the Kimpo defenses didn’t allow for a reserve maneuver unit to assist in repelling any enemy actions that might arise, nor did it have a single commander to oversee the operations of the defending units.

These weaknesses become more critical in consideration of the type of facilities at Kimpo and their proximity to the South Korean Capital. Seoul lay just east of the base of Kimpo Peninsula, separated from it only by the Han River. Located on Kimpo was the key port of Inchon and two other vital installations, the logistical complex at Ascom City and the Kimpo Airfield (K-14). All of these facilities were indispensable to the United Nations Command.

These weaknesses become more important when you think about the facilities at Kimpo and how close they are to the South Korean capital. Seoul is just east of the Kimpo Peninsula, separated only by the Han River. On Kimpo, there’s the key port of Incheon and two other crucial sites: the logistics hub at Ascom City and Kimpo Airfield (K-14). All of these facilities were essential to the United Nations Command.

To improve the security of Kimpo and provide a cohesive, integrated defense line, CG, 1st Marine Division formed the independent commands into the Kimpo Provisional Regiment. Colonel Edward M. Staab, Jr., was named the first KPR commander. His small headquarters functioned in a tactical capacity only without major administrative duties. The detachments that comprised the KPR upon its formation were:

To enhance the security of Kimpo and create a unified, integrated defense line, the CG of the 1st Marine Division organized the independent commands into the Kimpo Provisional Regiment. Colonel Edward M. Staab, Jr. was appointed as the first commander of the KPR. His small headquarters operated solely in a tactical role, without significant administrative responsibilities. The detachments that made up the KPR at its formation were:

Headquarters and Service Company, with regimental and company headquarters and a communication platoon;

Headquarters and Service Company, which includes the regimental and company headquarters along with a communication platoon;

1st Armored Amphibian Battalion, as supporting artillery;

1st Armored Amphibian Battalion, serving as support artillery;

5th KMC Battalion;

5th KMC Battalion

13th ROK Security Battalion (-);

13th ROK Security Battalion;

One battalion from the reserve regiment of the 1st Marine Division (2/7), as the maneuver element;

One battalion from the reserve regiment of the 1st Marine Division (2/7) was the maneuver unit;

Company A, 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion;

Company A, 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion;

Company B, 1st Shore Party Battalion, as engineers;

Company B, 1st Shore Party Battalion, as engineers;

Company D, 1st Medical Battalion;

Company D, 1st Med Battalion;

Reconnaissance Company (-), 1st Marine Division;

Reconnaissance Company (-), 1st Marine Division;

Detachment, Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison Company (ANGLICO), 1st Signal Battalion;

Detachment, Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison Company (ANGLICO), 1st Signal Battalion;

Detachment, 181st Counterintelligence Corps Unit, USA;

Detachment, 181st Counterintelligence Corps Unit, USA;

Detachment, 61st Engineer Searchlight Company, USA; and the

Detachment, 61st Engineer Searchlight Company, USA; and the

163rd Military Intelligence Service Detachment, USA.

163rd Military Intelligence Service Detachment, USA.

The Kimpo Regiment, in addition to maintaining security of the division left flank, was assigned the mission to “protect supporting and communication installations in that sector against airborne or ground attack.”19 Within the division, both the artillery regiment and19 the motor transport battalion were to be prepared to support tactical operations of Colonel Staab’s organization.

The Kimpo Regiment, while keeping the left flank of the division secure, was tasked with the mission to “protect supporting and communication installations in that area from airborne or ground attacks.”19 Within the division, both the artillery regiment and19 the motor transport battalion were expected to be ready to support the tactical operations of Colonel Staab’s organization.

19 KPR ComdD, Mar 52, p. 13.

19 KPR ComdD, Mar 52, p. 13.

For defense purposes, the KPR commander divided the peninsula into three sectors. The northern one was manned by the KMC battalion, which occupied commanding terrain and organized the area for defense. The southern part was defended by the ROK Army battalion, charged specifically with protection of the Kimpo Airfield and containment of any attempted enemy attack from the north. Both forces provided for the security of supply and communication installations within their areas. The western sector, held by the amphibian tractor company, less two platoons, had the mission of screening traffic along the east bank of the Yom River, that flanked the western part of the peninsula. Providing flexibility to the defense plan was the maneuver unit, the battalion assigned from the 1st Marine Division reserve.

For defense purposes, the KPR commander split the peninsula into three sectors. The northern sector was occupied by the KMC battalion, which held strategic terrain and organized the area for defense. The southern section was defended by the ROK Army battalion, specifically responsible for protecting Kimpo Airfield and preventing any enemy attacks from the north. Both forces ensured the security of supply and communication sites within their regions. The western sector, held by the amphibian tractor company minus two platoons, was tasked with monitoring traffic along the east bank of the Yom River, which bordered the western part of the peninsula. To add flexibility to the defense plan, the maneuver unit was a battalion from the 1st Marine Division reserve.

The unit adjacent to the KPR20 in the division line in late March was the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment, which had been the first division unit to deploy along JAMESTOWN. The KMC Regiment, command by Colonel Kim Dong Ha,21 had assumed responsibility for its portion of JAMESTOWN at 0400 on 20 March with orders to organize and defend its sector. The regiment placed two battalions, the 3d and 1st, on the MLR and the 2d in the rear. Holding down the regimental right of the sector was the 1st Battalion, which had shared its eastern boundary with that of Colonel Wade’s 1st Marines until 29 March when the 5th Marines was emplaced on the MLR between the 1st KMC and 1st Marines.

The unit next to the KPR20 in the division line in late March was the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment, which was the first division unit to deploy along JAM. The KMC Regiment, commanded by Colonel Kim Dong Ha,21 took charge of its section of JAMestown at 0400 on March 20 with orders to organize and defend its area. The regiment positioned two battalions, the 3rd and 1st, on the MLR and the 2nd in the rear. The 1st Battalion held the regimental right of the sector, having shared its eastern boundary with Colonel Wade’s 1st Marines until March 29, when the 5th Marines was placed on the MLR between the 1st KMC and the 1st Marines.

20 The following month the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion would be added to the four regiments on line, making a total of five major units manning the 1stMarDiv front. It was inserted between the Kimpo and 1st KMC regiments.

20 The next month, the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion would join the four regiments on the front lines, bringing the total to five major units supporting the 1st MarDiv. It was positioned between the Kimpo and 1st KMC regiments.

21 Commandant, Korean Marine Corps ltr to CMC, dtd 20 Sep 66, hereafter CKMC ltr.

21 Commandant, Korean Marine Corps letter to CMC, dated September 20, 1966, hereafter CKMC letter.

The 1st Marines regimental right boundary, which on the MLR was 1,100 yards north of the 38th Parallel, separated the 1st Marine Division area from the western end of the 1st Commonwealth Division, then held by the 25th Canadian Infantry Brigade. In late March, Colonel Wade’s 2/1 (Lieutenant Colonel Thell H. Fisher) and 3/1 (Lieutenant Colonel Spencer H. Pratt) manned the frontline positions while 1/1 (Lieutenant Colonel John H. Papurca), less Company A, was in reserve. The regiment was committed to the defense of its part of the division area and improvement of its ground20 positions. In the division center sector Colonel Culhane’s 1/5 (Lieutenant Colonel Franklin B. Nihart) and 3/5 (Lieutenant Colonel William S. McLaughlin) manned the left and right battalion MLR positions, with 2/5 (Lieutenant Colonel William H. Cushing) in reserve. The latter unit was to be prepared either to relieve the MLR battalions or for use as a counterattack force.

The right boundary of the 1st Marines regimental line, located 1,100 yards north of the 38th Parallel on the Main Line of Resistance (MLR), separated the 1st Marine Division's area from the western end of the 1st Commonwealth Division, which was held by the 25th Canadian Infantry Brigade. In late March, Colonel Wade’s 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines (Lieutenant Colonel Thell H. Fisher) and 3rd Battalion, 1st Marines (Lieutenant Colonel Spencer H. Pratt) were on the front lines, while the 1st Battalion, 1st Marines (Lieutenant Colonel John H. Papurca), minus Company A, was in reserve. The regiment was tasked with defending its section of the division area and improving its positions.20 In the center sector of the division, Colonel Culhane’s 1st Battalion, 5th Marines (Lieutenant Colonel Franklin B. Nihart) and 3rd Battalion, 5th Marines (Lieutenant Colonel William S. McLaughlin) occupied the left and right battalion MLR positions, with the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines (Lieutenant Colonel William H. Cushing) in reserve. The latter unit was prepared to either relieve the MLR battalions or be used as a counterattack force.

It did not take the Marines long to discover the existence of serious flaws in the area defense which made it questionable whether the Allied line here could have successfully withstood an enemy attack. While his Marine units were effecting their relief of JAMESTOWN, Colonel Wade noted that “field fortifications were practically nonexistent in some sections.”22 General Selden later pointed out that “populated villages existed between opposing lines. Farmers were cultivating their fields in full view of both forces. Traffic across the river was brisk.”23 A member of the division staff reported that there was “even a school operating in one area ahead of the Marine lines.”24 In addition to these indications of sector weakness, there was still another. Although the ROK division had placed three regiments in the line, when the two Marine regiments relieved them there were then more men on JAMESTOWN due to the greater personnel strength of a Marine regiment. Nevertheless, the division commander was still appalled at the width of the defense sector assigned to so few Marines.

It didn't take the Marines long to find serious flaws in the area defense, raising doubts about whether the Allied line here could withstand an enemy attack successfully. While his Marine units were taking over from JAMestown, Colonel Wade observed that “field fortifications were practically nonexistent in some sections.”22 General Selden later emphasized that “populated villages existed between opposing lines. Farmers were cultivating their fields in full view of both forces. Traffic across the river was busy.”23 A member of the division staff reported that there was “even a school operating in one area ahead of the Marine lines.”24 Besides these signs of sector weakness, there was another concern. Although the ROK division had placed three regiments in the line, when the two Marine regiments took over, there were more personnel on JAMESTOWN due to the larger size of a Marine regiment. Still, the division commander was shocked by the width of the defense sector assigned to so few Marines.

22 1stMar ComdD, Mar 52, p. 2.

22 1stMar ComdD, Mar 52, p. 2.

23 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 52, App IX, p. 1.

23 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 52, App IX, p. 1.

24 LtCol Harry W. Edwards comments on preliminary draft MS, ca. Sep 59.

24 LtCol Harry W. Edwards reflects on preliminary draft manuscript, around Sep 59.

At division level, the reserve mission was filled by Colonel Russell E. Honsowetz’, 7th Marines, minus 2/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Noel C. Gregory), which on 30 March became the maneuver force for the Kimpo Regiment. As the division reserve, the regiment was to be prepared to assume at any time either a defensive or offensive mission of any of the frontline regiments. In addition, the reserve regiment was to draw up counterattack plans, protect the division rear, improve secondary line defenses, and conduct training, including tank-infantry coordination, for units in reserve. The 7th Marines, with 3/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Houston Stiff) on the left and 1/7 (Lieutenant Colonel George W. E. Daughtry) on the right, was emplaced in the vicinity of the secondary defense lines, WYOMING and KANSAS, to the rear of the 5th and 1st Marines.

At the division level, the reserve mission was taken on by Colonel Russell E. Honsowetz’s 7th Marines, excluding 2/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Noel C. Gregory), which became the maneuver force for the Kimpo Regiment on March 30. As the division reserve, the regiment needed to be ready to take on a defensive or offensive mission at any time for any of the frontline regiments. Additionally, the reserve regiment had to create counterattack plans, protect the division's rear, enhance secondary line defenses, and provide training, including tank-infantry coordination, for reserve units. The 7th Marines, with 3/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Houston Stiff) on the left and 1/7 (Lieutenant Colonel George W. E. Daughtry) on the right, were positioned near the secondary defense lines, WYOMING and KANSAS, behind the 5th and 1st Marines.

21

21

Another regiment located in the rear area was the 11th Marines. Its artillery battalions had begun displacement on 17 March and completed their move by 25 March. Early on the 26th, the 11th Marines resumed support of the 1st Marine Division. While the Marine artillery had been en route, U.S. Army artillery from I Corps supported the division. With the arrival on the 29th of the administrative rear echelon, the Marine artillery regiment was fully positioned in the west.

Another regiment stationed in the rear area was the 11th Marines. Its artillery battalions started moving on March 17 and finished their relocation by March 25. Early on the 26th, the 11th Marines resumed support for the 1st Marine Division. While the Marine artillery was on the way, U.S. Army artillery from I Corps provided support for the division. With the arrival of the administrative rear echelon on the 29th, the Marine artillery regiment was fully set up in the west.

For Colonel Frederick P. Henderson, who became the division artillery commander on 27 March, operational problems in western Korea differed somewhat from those experienced in the east by his predecessor, Colonel Bruce T. Hemphill. The most critical difficulty, however, was the same situation that confronted General Selden—the vast amount of ground to be covered and defended, and the insufficient number of units to accomplish this mission. To the artillery, the wide division front resulted in spreading the available fire support dangerously thin. Placement of 11th Marines units to best support the MLR regiments created wide gaps between each artillery battalion, caused communication and resupply difficulties, prevented a maximum massing of fires, and made redeployment difficult.25

For Colonel Frederick P. Henderson, who took over as the division artillery commander on March 27, operational issues in western Korea were somewhat different from those faced by his predecessor, Colonel Bruce T. Hemphill, in the east. However, the most pressing challenge was the same one that General Selden dealt with—the enormous territory that needed to be covered and defended, coupled with too few units to effectively manage this task. For the artillery, the broad division front meant that available fire support was stretched too thin. Positioning the 11th Marines units to optimally support the MLR regiments created large gaps between each artillery battalion, leading to communication and resupply issues, hindering the ability to concentrate fire, and complicating redeployment. 25

25 Col Frederick P. Henderson ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 25 Aug 59, hereafter Henderson ltr I.

25 Col Frederick P. Henderson letter to Headquarters, Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, dated August 25, 1959, hereafter Henderson letter I.

In making use of all available fire support, the artillery regiment had to guard not only against the duplication of effort in planning or delivery of fires, but also against firing in the Panmunjom peace corridor restricted areas, located near the sector held by the Marine division’s center regiment. Moreover, the artillerymen had to maintain a flexibility sufficient to place the weight of available fire support on call into any zone of action.

In utilizing all available fire support, the artillery regiment had to ensure that there was no overlap in planning or executing fires, and also avoid firing in the restricted areas of the Panmunjom peace corridor, near the sector controlled by the Marine division’s center regiment. Additionally, the artillerymen needed to remain flexible enough to direct the available fire support to any active combat zone as needed.

Other difficulties were more directly associated with the nature of the sector rather than with its broad expanse. The positioning of the division in the west, although close to the coast, put the Marines beyond the range of protective naval gunfire. The sparse and inadequate road net further aggravated the tactical and logistical problems caused by wide separation of units. Finally, the cannoneers had exceptionally heavy demands placed on them due to the restricted amount of close air support allocated to frontline troops under operational procedures employed by Fifth Air Force. This command22 had jurisdiction over the entire Korean air defense system, including Marine squadrons.

Other challenges were more closely related to the nature of the sector than its vast size. The division's location in the west, while near the coast, left the Marines out of range of protective naval gunfire. The limited and inadequate road network made the tactical and logistical issues from the wide separation of units even worse. Additionally, the cannoneers faced extremely heavy demands due to the limited close air support assigned to frontline troops based on the operational procedures of the Fifth Air Force. This command22 had authority over the entire Korean air defense system, including Marine squadrons.

Manning the main line of resistance also frequently presented perplexing situations to the infantry. There had been little time for a thorough reconnaissance and selection of positions by any of the frontline regiments. When the 1st Marines moved into its assigned position on the MLR, the troops soon discovered many minefields, “some marked, some poorly marked, and some not marked at all.”26 Uncharted mines caused the regiment to suffer “some casualties the first night of our move and more the second and third days.”27 As it was to turn out, during the first weeks in the I Corps sector, mines of all types caused 50 percent of total Marine casualties.

Manning the main line of resistance often put the infantry in confusing situations. There wasn't much time for a proper reconnaissance and selection of positions by any of the frontline regiments. When the 1st Marines took their assigned position on the MLR, the troops quickly found numerous minefields, “some marked, some poorly marked, and some not marked at all.”26 Unmarked mines led to the regiment experiencing “some casualties the first night of our move and more the second and third days.”27 As it turned out, during the first few weeks in the I Corps sector, mines of all kinds caused 50 percent of total Marine casualties.

26 Col Sidney S. Wade ltr to Deputy AsstCofS, G-3, HQMC, dtd 25 Aug 59.

26 Col Sidney S. Wade letter to Deputy Assistant Chief of Staff, G-3, HQMC, dated August 25, 1959.

27 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

A heavy drain on the limited manpower of Marine infantry regiments defending JAMESTOWN was caused by the need to occupy an additional position, an outpost line of resistance (OPLR). This defensive line to the front of the Marine MLR provided additional security against the enemy, but decreased the strength of the regimental reserve battalion, which furnished the OPLR troops. The outposts manned by the Marines consisted of a series of strongpoints built largely around commanding terrain features that screened the 1st Marine Division area. The OPLR across the division front was, on the average, about 2,500 yards forward of the MLR. (See Map 3.)

A significant drain on the limited manpower of Marine infantry regiments defending JAMESTOWN was due to the requirement to occupy an additional position, an outpost line of resistance (OPLR). This defensive line in front of the Marine main line of resistance (MLR) offered extra protection against the enemy but reduced the strength of the regimental reserve battalion that supplied the OPLR troops. The outposts staffed by the Marines were made up of a series of strongpoints primarily constructed around key terrain features that protected the 1st Marine Division area. The OPLR across the division front was, on average, about 2,500 yards ahead of the MLR. (See Map 3.)

To the rear of the main line were two secondary defensive lines, WYOMING and KANSAS. Both had been established before the Marines arrived and both required considerable work, primarily construction of bunkers and weapons emplacements, to meet General Selden’s strict requirement for a strong defensive sector. Work in improving the lines, exercises in rapid battalion tactical deployment by helicopter, and actual manning of the lines were among the many tasks assigned to the division reserve regiment.

To the back of the main line were two additional defensive lines, Wyoming and KANSAS. Both had been set up before the Marines arrived and needed a lot of work, mainly building bunkers and weapons placements, to meet General Selden’s strict standards for a strong defensive area. Tasks assigned to the division reserve regiment included improving the lines, practicing quick battalion tactical deployments by helicopter, and actually staffing the lines.

MAP 3 K. White

MAP 3 K. White

1st MARINE DIVISION SECTOR

1st Marine Division Area

30 APRIL 1952

30 April 1952

Rear and frontline units alike found that new regulations affected combat operations with the enemy in West Korea. These restrictions were a result of the truce talks that had taken place first at Kaesong and, later, at Panmunjom. In line with agreements reached in October 1951:

Rear and frontline units found that new regulations impacted combat operations against the enemy in West Korea. These restrictions were a result of truce talks that initially happened at Kaesong and later at Panmunjom. According to the agreements made in October 1951:

Panmunjom was designated as the center of a circular neutral zone of a 1,000 yard radius, and a three mile radius around Munsan and Kaesong was24 also neutralized, as well as two hundred meters on either side of the Kaesong-Munsan road.28

Panmunjom was chosen as the center of a circular neutral zone with a radius of 1,000 yards, and a three-mile radius around Munsan and Kaesong was24 also made neutral, along with two hundred meters on each side of the Kaesong-Munsan road.28

28 Rees, Korea, p. 295.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Rees, *Korea*, p. 295.

To prevent the occurrence of any hostile act within this sanctuary, Lieutenant General John W. O’Daniel, I Corps commander, ordered that an additional area, forward of the OPLR, be set aside. This megaphone-shaped zone “could not be fired into, out of, or over.”29 It was adjacent to the OPLR in the division center regimental sector, near its left boundary, and took a generally northwest course. Marines reported that the Communists knew of this restricted zone and frequently used it for assembly areas and artillery emplacements.

To prevent any hostile actions in this sanctuary, Lieutenant General John W. O’Daniel, the commander of I Corps, instructed that an additional area, located in front of the OPLR, be designated. This megaphone-shaped zone "could not be fired into, out of, or over."29 It was next to the OPLR in the division center regimental sector, close to its left boundary, and generally ran northwest. Marines reported that the Communists were aware of this restricted zone and often used it for assembly areas and artillery positions.

29 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 52, p. 7.

29 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 52, p. 7.

The 1st Marine Aircraft Wing30

30 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 52; 1st MAW ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52.

30 Unless stated otherwise, the material in this section comes from PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 52; 1st MAW ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52.

When the 1st Marine Division moved to western Korea in March 1952, the two 1st Marine Aircraft Wing units that had been in direct support of the ground Marines also relocated. Marine Observation Squadron 6 (VMO-6) and Marine Helicopter Transport Squadron 161 (HMR-161) completed their displacements by 24 March from their eastern airfield (X-83) to sites in the vicinity of the new division CP. HMR-161, headed by Colonel Keith B. McCutcheon, set up headquarters at A-17,31 on a hillside 3½ miles southeast of Munsan-ni, the division railhead, “using a couple of rice paddies as our L. Z. (Landing Zone).”32 The squadron rear echelon, including the machine shops, was maintained at A-33, near Ascom City. About 2½ miles south of the helicopter forward site was an old landing strip, A-9, which Lieutenant Colonel William T. Herring’s observation squadron used as home field for its fixed and rotary wing aircraft. (For location of 1st MAW units see Map 4.) In West Korea, VMO-6 and HMR-161 continued to provide air transport for tactical and logistical missions. Both squadrons were under operational control of the division, but administered by the wing.

When the 1st Marine Division moved to western Korea in March 1952, the two units from the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing that had been directly supporting the ground Marines also moved. Marine Observation Squadron 6 (VMO-6) and Marine Helicopter Transport Squadron 161 (HMR-161) completed their relocations by March 24 from their eastern airfield (X-83) to locations near the new division command post. HMR-161, led by Colonel Keith B. McCutcheon, established its headquarters at A-17, on a hillside 3½ miles southeast of Munsan-ni, the division’s railhead, “using a couple of rice paddies as our L.Z. (Landing Zone).” The squadron’s rear echelon, including the machine shops, was based at A-33, near Ascom City. About 2½ miles south of the helicopter forward site was an old landing strip, A-9, which Lieutenant Colonel William T. Herring’s observation squadron used as their home field for fixed and rotary wing aircraft. (For the location of 1st MAW units see Map 4.) In West Korea, VMO-6 and HMR-161 continued to provide air transport for tactical and logistical missions. Both squadrons were under the operational control of the division but managed by the wing.

31 In Korea, fields near U.S. Army installations were known as “A”; major airfields carried a “K” designation; and auxiliary strips were the “X” category.

31 In Korea, fields close to U.S. Army bases were called “A”; main airfields had a “K” designation; and support strips were in the “X” category.

32 MajGen Keith B. McCutcheon comments on draft MS, dtd 1 Sep 66.

32 MajGen Keith B. McCutcheon comments on draft MS, dated September 1, 1966.

Commanding General of the 1st MAW, since 27 July 1951,26 was Major General Christian F. Schilt,33 a Marine airman who had brought to Korea a vast amount of experience as a flying officer. Entering the Marine Corps in June 1917, he had served as an enlisted man with the 1st Marine Aeronautical Company in the Azores during World War I. Commissioned in 1919, he served in a variety of training and overseas naval air assignments. As a first lieutenant in Nicaragua, he had been awarded the Medal of Honor in 1928 for his bravery and “almost superhuman skill” in flying out Marines wounded at Quilali.34 During World War II, General Schilt had served as 1st MAW Assistant Chief of Staff, at Guadalcanal, was later CO of Marine Aircraft Group 11, and participated in the consolidation of the Southern Solomons and air defense of Peleliu and Okinawa.

Commanding General of the 1st MAW since July 27, 1951,26 was Major General Christian F. Schilt,33 a Marine aviator who brought a wealth of experience as a pilot to Korea. He joined the Marine Corps in June 1917 and served as an enlisted member with the 1st Marine Aeronautical Company in the Azores during World War I. After being commissioned in 1919, he held various training and overseas naval air positions. As a first lieutenant in Nicaragua, he received the Medal of Honor in 1928 for his courage and “almost superhuman skill” in flying out injured Marines at Quilali.34 During World War II, General Schilt served as the 1st MAW Assistant Chief of Staff in Guadalcanal, later becoming the CO of Marine Aircraft Group 11, and took part in the consolidation of the Southern Solomons and the air defense of Peleliu and Okinawa.

33 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of General Christian F. Schilt, USMC (Ret.), Jun 59 rev.

33 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of General Christian F. Schilt, USMC (Ret.), Jun 59 rev.

34 Robert Sherrod, History of Marine Corps Aviation in World War II (Washington: Combat Forces Press, 1952), p. 26, hereafter Sherrod, Marine Aviation.

34 Robert Sherrod, History of Marine Corps Aviation in World War II (Washington: Combat Forces Press, 1952), p. 26, hereafter Sherrod, Marine Aviation.

MAP 4 E. WILSON

MAP 4 E. WILSON

1ST MARINE AIRCRAFT WING DISPOSITIONS

1ST MARINE AIRCRAFT WING STATUS

30 APRIL 1952

30 April 1952

As in past months, the majority of General Schilt’s Marine aircraft in Korea during March 1952 continued to be under operational control of Fifth Air Force. In turn, FAF was the largest subordinate command of Far East Air Forces (FEAF), headquartered at Tokyo. The latter was the U.S. Air Force component of the Far East Command and encompassed all USAF installations in the Far East. The FAF-EUSAK Joint Operations Center (JOC) at Seoul coordinated and controlled all Allied air operations in Korea. Marine fighter and attack squadrons were employed by FAF to:

As in previous months, most of General Schilt’s Marine aircraft in Korea during March 1952 were still under the operational control of the Fifth Air Force. In turn, the FAF was the largest subordinate command of the Far East Air Forces (FEAF), based in Tokyo. FEAF was the U.S. Air Force component of the Far East Command and included all USAF installations in the Far East. The FAF-EUSAK Joint Operations Center (JOC) in Seoul managed and coordinated all Allied air operations in Korea. FAF used Marine fighter and attack squadrons to:

Maintain air superiority.

Maintain air dominance.

Furnish close support for ground units.

Furnish close support for ground units.

Provide escort [for attack aircraft].

Provide escort for attack aircraft.

Conduct day and night reconnaissance and fulfill requests.

Conduct reconnaissance day and night and fulfill requests.

Effect the complete interdiction of North Korean and Chinese Communist forces and other military targets that have an immediate effect upon the current tactical situation.35

Implement a total ban on North Korean and Chinese Communist forces along with other military targets that directly impact the current tactical situation.35

35 1st MAW ComdD, Mar 52, p. 2.

35 1st MAW ComdD, Mar 52, p. 2.

Squadrons carrying out these assignments were attached to Marine Aircraft Groups (MAGs) 12 and 33. Commanded by Colonel Luther S. Moore, MAG-12 and its two day attack squadrons (VMF-212 and VMF-323) in March 1952 was still located in eastern Korea (K-18, Kangnung). The Marine night-fighters of VMF(N)-513 were also here as part of the MAG-12 group. Farther removed from the immediate battlefront was Colonel Martin27 A. Severson’s MAG-33, located at K-3 (Pohang), with its two powerful jet fighter squadrons (VMFs-115 and -311) and an attack squadron (VMA-121). A new MAG-33 unit was Marine Photographic Squadron 1 (VMJ-1), just formed in February 1952 and commanded by Major Robert R. Read.

Squadrons handling these missions were part of Marine Aircraft Groups (MAGs) 12 and 33. Led by Colonel Luther S. Moore, MAG-12 and its two daytime attack squadrons (VMF-212 and VMF-323) were still stationed in eastern Korea (K-18, Kangnung) in March 1952. The Marine night-fighters of VMF(N)-513 were also stationed here as part of the MAG-12 group. Further from the front lines was Colonel Martin27 A. Severson’s MAG-33, located at K-3 (Pohang), which included two strong jet fighter squadrons (VMFs-115 and -311) and an attack squadron (VMA-121). A new unit in MAG-33 was Marine Photographic Squadron 1 (VMJ-1), which was just formed in February 1952 and led by Major Robert R. Read.

In addition to its land-based squadrons, one 1st MAW unit was assigned to Commander, West Coast Blockading and Patrol Group, designated Commander, Task Group 95.1 (CTG 95.1). He in turn assigned this Marine unit to Commander, Task Element 95.11 (CTE 95.11), whose ships comprised the West Coast Carrier Element. Marine Attack Squadron 312 (VMA-312) was at this time assigned to CTE 95.11. In late March squadron aircraft were based on the escort carrier USS Bairoko but transferred on 21 April to the light carrier Bataan.36 Operating normally with a complement of 21 F4U-4 propeller-driven Corsair aircraft, VMA-312 had the following missions:

In addition to its land-based squadrons, one unit from the 1st MAW was assigned to the Commander of the West Coast Blockading and Patrol Group, called Commander, Task Group 95.1 (CTG 95.1). He then assigned this Marine unit to the Commander of Task Element 95.11 (CTE 95.11), which included the West Coast Carrier Element. At that time, Marine Attack Squadron 312 (VMA-312) was assigned to CTE 95.11. In late March, the squadron's aircraft were stationed on the escort carrier USS Bairoko, but were transferred on April 21 to the light carrier Bataan. 36 Operating normally with a total of 21 F4U-4 Corsair aircraft, VMA-312 had the following missions:

To conduct armed air reconnaissance of the West Coast of Korea from the United Nations front lines northward to latitude 39°/15´ N.

To carry out armed air surveillance of the West Coast of Korea from the United Nations front lines going north to latitude 39°/15' N.

Attack enemy shipping and destroy mines.

Attack enemy ships and destroy mines.

Maintain surveillance of enemy airfields in the Haeju-Chinnampo region.37

Maintain surveillance of enemy airfields in the Haeju-Chinnampo region.37

Provide air spot services to naval units on request.

Provide air spot services to naval units upon request.

Provide close air support and armed air reconnaissance services as requested by Joint Operations Center, Korea (JOC KOREA).

Provide close air support and armed air reconnaissance services as requested by the Joint Operations Center, Korea (JOC KOREA).

Conduct air strikes against coastal and inland targets of opportunity at discretion.

Conduct air strikes against coastal and inland targets of opportunity as needed.

Be prepared to provide combat air patrol to friendly naval forces operating off the West Coast of Korea.

Be ready to provide air support for friendly naval forces operating off the West Coast of Korea.

Render SAR [search and rescue] assistance.

Render SAR [search and rescue] assistance.

36 Unit commanders also changed about this time. Lieutenant Colonel Robert E. Smith, Jr. assumed command of the Checkerboard squadron from Lieutenant Colonel Joe H. McGlothlin, on 9 April.

36 Unit commanders also shifted around this time. Lieutenant Colonel Robert E. Smith, Jr. took over command of the Checkerboard squadron from Lieutenant Colonel Joe H. McGlothlin on April 9.

37 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-75. The Haeju-Chinnampo region, noted in the surveillance mission, is a coastal area in southwestern North Korea between the 38th and 39th Parallels.

37 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-75. The Haeju-Chinnampo region, mentioned in the surveillance mission, is a coastal area in the southwestern part of North Korea located between the 38th and 39th Parallels.

Because they were under operational control of Fifth Air Force, 1st MAW flying squadrons, except those assigned to CTG 95.1 and 1st Marine Division control, did not change their dispositions in March. Plans were under way at this time, however, to relocate one of the aircraft groups, MAG-12, to the west.

Because they were under the operational control of the Fifth Air Force, the 1st MAW flying squadrons, except for those assigned to CTG 95.1 and under the 1st Marine Division's control, did not change their positions in March. However, plans were in progress at this time to move one of the aircraft groups, MAG-12, to the west.

On 30 March the ground element of the night-fighters redeployed28 from its east coast home field to K-8 (Kunsan), on the west coast, 105 miles south of Seoul. Lieutenant Colonel John R. Burnett’s VMF (N)-513 completed this relocation by 11 April without loss of a single day of flight operations. On 20 April the rest of MAG-12,38 newly commanded since the first of the month by Colonel Elmer T. Dorsey, moved to K-6 (Pyongtaek), located 30 miles directly south of the South Korean capital.

On March 30, the ground team of the night fighters shifted28 from their base on the east coast to K-8 (Kunsan) on the west coast, 105 miles south of Seoul. Lieutenant Colonel John R. Burnett’s VMF (N)-513 completed this move by April 11 without losing a single day of flight operations. On April 20, the rest of MAG-12,38 which had been under new leadership since the beginning of the month with Colonel Elmer T. Dorsey in charge, relocated to K-6 (Pyongtaek), situated 30 miles directly south of the South Korean capital.

38 VMFs-212 (LtCol Robert L. Bryson) and -323 (LtCol Richard L. Blume) left an east coast field for a flight mission over North Korea and landed at K-6 thereafter, also completing the move without closing down combat operations. The relocation in airfields was designed to keep several squadrons of support aircraft close to the 1st Marine Division. Col E. T. Dorsey ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 7 Sep 66.

38 VMFs-212 (LtCol Robert L. Bryson) and -323 (LtCol Richard L. Blume) took off from an east coast base for a flight mission over North Korea and then landed at K-6, all while keeping combat operations running smoothly. The move to different airfields aimed to keep multiple squadrons of support aircraft near the 1st Marine Division. Col E. T. Dorsey ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 7 Sep 66.

Marine aircraft support units were also located at K-3 and at Itami Air Force Base, on Honshu, Japan. Under direct 1st MAW control were four ground-type logistical support units with MAG-33, a Provisional Automatic Weapons Battery from Marine Air Control Group 2 (MACG-2), and most of wing headquarters. This last unit, commanded by Colonel Frederick R. Payne, Jr., included the 1st 90mm AAA Gun Battalion (based at Pusan and led by Colonel Max C. Chapman), and a detachment of Marine Transport Squadron 152 (VMR-152), which had seven Douglas four-engine R5D transports. This element and the wing service squadron were based at Itami.

Marine aircraft support units were also stationed at K-3 and Itami Air Force Base on Honshu, Japan. Directly under the control of the 1st MAW were four ground logistical support units with MAG-33, a Provisional Automatic Weapons Battery from Marine Air Control Group 2 (MACG-2), and most of the wing headquarters. This last unit, led by Colonel Frederick R. Payne, Jr., included the 1st 90mm AAA Gun Battalion (based in Pusan and commanded by Colonel Max C. Chapman) and a detachment of Marine Transport Squadron 152 (VMR-152), which operated seven Douglas four-engine R5D transports. This unit and the wing service squadron were stationed at Itami.

Marines, and others flying in western Korea, found themselves restricted much as Marines on the ground were. One limitation resulted from a FAF-EUSAK agreement in November 1951 limiting the number of daily close air support sorties across the entire Eighth Army line. This policy had restricted air activity along the 155-mile Korean front to 96 sorties per day. The curtailment seriously interfered with the Marine type of close air support teamwork evolved during World War II, and its execution had an adverse effect on Marine ground operations as well. A second restriction, also detrimental to Marine division and wing efficiency, was the prohibitive cushion Fifth Air Force had placed around the United Nations peace corridor area north of the Marine MLR. This buffer no-fly, no-fire zone which had been added to prevent violation of the UN sanctuary by stray hits did not apply, of course, to the Communists.

Marines, along with others flying in western Korea, found themselves facing restrictions similar to those experienced by Marines on the ground. One limitation came from a FAF-EUSAK agreement in November 1951 that limited the number of daily close air support sorties across the entire Eighth Army line. This policy reduced air activity along the 155-mile Korean front to 96 sorties per day. The cutback seriously disrupted the Marine-style close air support teamwork developed during World War II, negatively impacting Marine ground operations as well. A second restriction, which also harmed the efficiency of Marine divisions and wings, was the no-fly, no-fire buffer zone that the Fifth Air Force established around the United Nations peace corridor north of the Marine MLR. This buffer zone was implemented to prevent stray hits from violating the UN sanctuary but, of course, did not apply to the Communists.

29

29

The Enemy39

39 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 52.

39 Unless otherwise specified, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 52.

Directly beyond the 1st Marine Division sector, to the west and north, were two first-rate units of the Chinese Communist Forces, the 65th and 63d CCF Armies. Together, they totaled approximately 49,800 troops in late March 1952. Opposite the west and center of the Marine division front was the 65th CCF Army, with elements of the 193d Division across from the KPR and the 194th Division holding positions opposing the KMC regiment. Across from the Marine line in the center was the 195th Division of the 65th CCF Army, which had placed two regiments forward. North of the division right sector lay the 188th Division, 63d CCF Army, also with two regiments forward. The estimated 15 infantry battalions facing the Marine division were supported by 10 organic artillery battalions, numbering 106 guns, and varying in caliber from 75 to 155mm.40 In addition, intelligence reported that the 1st CCF Armored Division and an unidentified airborne brigade were located near enough to aid enemy operations.

Directly beyond the 1st Marine Division's area, to the west and north, were two top-notch units of the Chinese Communist Forces, the 65th and 63rd CCF Armies. Together, they had about 49,800 troops in late March 1952. Facing the west and center of the Marine division front was the 65th CCF Army, with parts of the 193rd Division opposite the KPR and the 194th Division stationed against the KMC regiment. In the center of the Marine line was the 195th Division of the 65th CCF Army, which had deployed two regiments forward. To the north of the division's right sector was the 188th Division from the 63rd CCF Army, also with two regiments on the front lines. The estimated 15 infantry battalions opposing the Marine division were backed by 10 organic artillery battalions, totaling 106 guns with calibers ranging from 75 to 155mm.40 Additionally, intelligence indicated that the 1st CCF Armored Division and an unidentified airborne brigade were close enough to support enemy operations.

40 The Korean Marine Corps placed the artillery count at 240 weapons ranging from 57 to 122mm. CKMC ltr.

40 The Korean Marine Corps reported that there are 240 pieces of artillery, ranging from 57 to 122mm. CKMC ltr.

Chinese infantry units were not only solidly entrenched across their front line opposite the Marine division but were also in depth. Their successive defensive lines, protected by minefields, wire, and other obstacles, were supported by artillery and had been, as a result of activities in recent months, supplied sufficiently to conduct continuous operations. Not only were enemy ground units well-supplied, but their CCF soldiers were well disciplined and well led. Their morale was officially evaluated as ranging from good to excellent. In all, the CCF was a determined adversary of considerable ability, with their greatest strength being in plentiful combat manpower.

Chinese infantry units were not only strongly positioned along their front line facing the Marine division but were also well-fortified. Their multiple defensive lines, secured by minefields, barbed wire, and other obstacles, were backed by artillery and had been adequately supplied in recent months to carry out ongoing operations. Not only were the enemy ground units well-equipped, but their CCF soldiers were also well-disciplined and effectively led. Their morale was officially rated as good to excellent. Overall, the CCF was a determined and capable opponent, with their greatest strength being their ample combat personnel.

Air opposition to Marine pilots in Korea was of unknown quantity and only on occasion did the caliber of enemy pilots approach that of the Americans. Pilots reported that their Chinese counterparts generally lacked overall combat proficiency, but that at times their “aggressiveness, sheer weight of numbers, and utter disregard for losses have counterbalanced any apparent deficiencies.”41 The30 Communists had built their offensive potential around the Russian MIG-15 jet fighter-interceptor. Use of this aircraft for ground support or ground attack was believed to be in the training stage only. The Chinese had also based their air defense on the same MIG plus various types of ground antiaircraft (AA) weapons, particularly the mobile 37mm automatic weapons and machine guns that protected their main supply routes. In use of these ground AA weapons, enemy forces north of the 38th Parallel had become most proficient. Their defense system against UNC planes had been steadily built up and improved since stabilization of the battle lines in 1951, and by March 1952 was reaching a formidable state.

Air opposition to Marine pilots in Korea was unpredictable, and only occasionally did the skill level of enemy pilots come close to that of the Americans. Pilots reported that their Chinese counterparts generally lacked overall combat skill, but at times their “aggressiveness, sheer numbers, and complete disregard for losses countered any apparent weaknesses.”41 The30 Communists had structured their offensive capabilities around the Russian MIG-15 jet fighter-interceptor. The use of this aircraft for ground support or ground attack was thought to be in the training phase only. The Chinese had also relied on the same MIG along with various types of ground anti-aircraft (AA) weapons, particularly the mobile 37mm automatic guns and machine guns that safeguarded their main supply routes. In utilizing these ground AA weapons, enemy forces north of the 38th Parallel had become quite skilled. Their defense system against UNC planes had been continually strengthened and enhanced since the stabilization of the battle lines in 1951, and by March 1952, it was becoming quite formidable.

41 PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 4, p. 10-38.

41 PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 4, p. 10-38.

As the more favorable weather for ground combat approached toward the end of March, the CCF was well prepared to continue and expand its operations. Enemy soldiers were considered able to defend their sector easily with infantry and support units. Division intelligence also reported that Chinese ground troops had the capability for launching limited objective attacks to improve their observation of Marine MLR rear areas.

As the better weather for ground combat neared at the end of March, the CCF was ready to continue and expand its operations. Enemy soldiers were thought to be easily able to defend their area with infantry and support units. Division intelligence also reported that Chinese ground troops could launch limited objective attacks to enhance their observation of Marine MLR rear areas.

Initial CCF Attack42

42 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52; KMC Regt UnitRpt 31, dtd 2 Apr 52.

42 Unless otherwise stated, the content in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52; KMC Regt UnitRpt 31, dated 2 Apr 52.

Whether by intent or default, the Chinese infantry occupying the enemy forward positions did not interfere with the Marine relief. With assumption of sector responsibility by the division early on 25 March, the initial enemy contact came from Chinese supporting weapons. Later that day the two division frontline regiments, the 1st and 5th Marines, received 189 mortar and artillery shells in their sectors which wounded 10 Marines. One man in the 1st Marines was killed by sniper fire on 25 March; in the same regiment, another Marine was fatally wounded the following day. Forward of the lines, the day after the division took over, there was no ground action by either side.

Whether by design or chance, the Chinese infantry stationed in the enemy forward positions didn’t stop the Marine relief. After the division took over control early on March 25, the first contact with the enemy came from Chinese supporting weapons. Later that day, the two frontline regiments of the division, the 1st and 5th Marines, were hit with 189 mortar and artillery shells in their areas, resulting in 10 Marines being wounded. One Marine from the 1st Marines was killed by sniper fire on March 25, and another from the same regiment was mortally wounded the next day. On the day after the division assumed responsibility, there was no ground action from either side.

During the rest of the month, the tempo of activities on both sides increased. Marines began regular patrol actions to probe and ambush the enemy. Division artillery increased its number of observed missions by the end of the month. By this time the CCF had also begun31 to probe the lines of the Marine regimental sectors. In these ground actions to reconnoiter and test division defenses, the Chinese became increasingly bold, with the most activity on 28 March. Between 25–31 March, the first week on JAMESTOWN, some 100 Chinese engaged in 5 different probing actions. Most of these were against the 1st KMC Regiment on the left flank of the division MLR.

During the rest of the month, the pace of activities on both sides picked up. Marines started regular patrols to scout and ambush the enemy. By the end of the month, division artillery increased its number of observed missions. By this time, the CCF had also started to probe the lines of the Marine regimental sectors. In these ground actions to reconnoiter and test division defenses, the Chinese grew increasingly daring, with the most activity on March 28. Between March 25 and March 31, the first week on JAMSETOWN, around 100 Chinese troops engaged in 5 different probing actions. Most of these were against the 1st KMC Regiment on the left flank of the division MLR.

It was no wonder that the Chinese concentrated their effort against the Korean Marines, for they held the area containing Freedom Gate, the best of the three bridges spanning the Imjin. Both of the other two, X-Ray and Widgeon, were further east in the division sector. If the enemy could exploit a weak point in the KMC lines, he could attack in strength, capture the bridge, and turn the division left flank, after which he would have a direct route to Seoul.43 Without the bridge in the KMC sector, the division would be hard pressed, even with helicopter lift, to maneuver or maintain the regiments north of the Imjin.

It was no surprise that the Chinese focused their efforts against the Korean Marines, as they controlled the area around Freedom Gate, the best of the three bridges spanning the Imjin. The other two bridges, X-Ray and Widgeon, were further east in the division sector. If the enemy could find a weak point in the KMC lines, they could launch a strong attack, take the bridge, and threaten the division’s left flank, giving them a direct route to Seoul.43 Without the bridge in the KMC sector, the division would struggle, even with helicopter support, to maneuver or keep the regiments north of the Imjin.

43 Henderson ltr I.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Henderson letter I.

On 1 April, at about 2130, the CCF began pounding the frontline companies in the KMC area with an artillery preparation. A half hour later, the enemy attacked an outpost and the main line. First to engage the Chinese were the OPLR troops of the KMC 1st Company; 1st Battalion, on the regimental right. There, a Chinese company forced an opening between friendly outposts and reached a point about 200 yards short of the MLR and just north of a road leading to the main bridge over the Imjin. While this attack was in progress, another CCF company hit the outpost line further south. This attack, less successful, ended far short of the MLR and about a half-mile south of the bridge road. Both enemy companies withdrew at about 2345.

On April 1st, around 9:30 PM, the CCF started bombarding the frontline units in the KMC area with artillery fire. Half an hour later, the enemy launched an attack on an outpost and the main line. The first to respond to the Chinese were the OPLR troops from the KMC 1st Company; 1st Battalion, located on the regimental right. There, a Chinese company managed to break through between friendly outposts, reaching a point about 200 yards short of the MLR, just north of a road leading to the main bridge over the Imjin. While this attack was happening, another CCF company targeted the outpost line further south. This attack was less successful and fell short of the MLR, stopping about half a mile south of the bridge road. Both enemy companies withdrew around 11:45 PM.

To the left of the 1st Battalion, the 3d was receiving the brunt of this initial CCF attack. The 9th, 11th, and 10th Companies (deployed in that order from west to east, in the left battalion sector), had been engaged by the same preliminary 30-minute shelling. At 2200, when four CCF squads attacked the two companies on the left, an enemy company hit the left end of the 10th Company, occupied by the 2d Platoon. About midnight the South Koreans, under fire from both flanks and under heavy frontal assault, were forced to withdraw. In the rear, the company commander pulled the 1st32 Platoon from the line, ordered the 3d to extend left to cover both sectors, and led a counterattack with the 1st Platoon and elements of the 2d. Positions were quickly restored by the KMC action.

To the left of the 1st Battalion, the 3rd was taking the brunt of this initial CCF attack. The 9th, 11th, and 10th Companies (deployed in that order from west to east, in the left battalion sector) had all experienced the same preliminary 30-minute shelling. At 10 PM, when four CCF squads attacked the two companies on the left, an enemy company struck the left end of the 10th Company, where the 2nd Platoon was stationed. Around midnight, the South Koreans, under fire from both sides and facing a heavy frontal assault, were forced to fall back. In the rear, the company commander pulled the 1st32 Platoon from the front lines, ordered the 3rd to extend left to cover both sectors, and led a counterattack with the 1st Platoon and elements of the 2nd. The KMC's actions quickly restored their positions.

Soon after it had hurled the Chinese back across the OPLR, the 1st Battalion was subjected to a second attack. An enemy unit, estimated to be a company, engaged a 1st Company platoon briefly. When the KMCs returned heavy defensive fires, the Communists pulled back but struck again at 0300. After a 20-minute fire fight, the Chinese company retreated.

Soon after it had pushed the Chinese back across the OPLR, the 1st Battalion faced a second attack. An enemy unit, estimated to be a company, briefly engaged a 1st Company platoon. When the KMCs returned heavy defensive fire, the Communists pulled back but attacked again at 0300. After a 20-minute firefight, the Chinese company retreated.

This action on 1–2 April cost the attackers 2 killed, 34 estimated killed, and 10 estimated wounded. For the KMC, casualties were 2 killed, 10 wounded. To all 1st Division Marines, the successful defense by the 1st KMC regimental Marines was heartening. It had preserved not only the division western flank but also the vital link over the Imjin.

This action on April 1-2 resulted in 2 attackers killed, an estimated 34 killed, and around 10 more wounded. For the KMC, there were 2 killed and 10 wounded. For all the Marines in the 1st Division, the successful defense by the 1st KMC regimental Marines was encouraging. It not only protected the division's western flank but also preserved the critical connection over the Imjin.

Subsequent CCF Attacks44

44 Unless otherwise noted, the material for this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, KPR ComdDs, Apr 52; KMC Regt UnitRpt 35, dtd 16 Apr 52.

44 Unless stated otherwise, the material for this section comes from: 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, KPR ComdDs, Apr 52; KMC Regt UnitRpt 35, dated 16 Apr 52.

Following his attempted assault against the KMC regiment, the enemy opposite the 1st Marine Division reverted to a passive defense. Except for a probe late on 2 April of the far eastern line held by Lieutenant Colonel Pratt’s 3/1 and two patrols that scouted MLR positions in the western Korean Marine area that same date, Communist offensive measures consisted largely of artillery and mortar fire. Chinese line units appeared to concentrate on improving their dugouts and trench systems. Marines reported frequent sightings of enemy groups working in and around their forward trenches.

Following his attempted attack on the KMC regiment, the enemy facing the 1st Marine Division switched to a defensive strategy. Aside from a brief probing attack late on April 2 against the far eastern line held by Lieutenant Colonel Pratt’s 3/1 and two patrols that checked out MLR positions in the western Korean Marine area on the same day, the Communist offensive actions mainly involved artillery and mortar fire. Chinese infantry units seemed to focus on enhancing their dugouts and trench systems. Marines frequently reported seeing enemy groups working in and around their front trenches.

Marine division troops, too, were busy fortifying their defensive positions. On the Kimpo Peninsula they dug gun emplacements and erected camp facilities for the newly activated Kimpo Provisional Regiment. North of the Han, mine clearance and construction of trenchworks and fortifications was the order of the day for most Marines. Other Marines patrolled forward of the lines as a major aspect of the division’s continuous active defense. During daylight hours, MLR regiments dispatched reconnaissance and combat patrols and sent out snipers, armed with telescope-equipped M-1 rifles.33 Division tanks firing from temporary gun slots on the main line and artillery batteries emplaced in rear area dugouts hammered away at enemy positions and disposed of his patrols. At night, harassing and interdicting (H&I) artillery fires and infantry raids continued to keep the Communists off-balance.

Marine division troops were also busy strengthening their defensive positions. On the Kimpo Peninsula, they dug gun emplacements and set up camp facilities for the newly activated Kimpo Provisional Regiment. North of the Han, clearing mines and building trenches and fortifications was the main task for most Marines. Other Marines patrolled ahead of the lines as a crucial part of the division’s ongoing active defense. During the day, MLR regiments sent out reconnaissance and combat patrols and deployed snipers armed with telescope-equipped M-1 rifles.33 Division tanks fired from temporary gun slots on the main line, and artillery batteries set up in rear area dugouts pounded enemy positions and took out his patrols. At night, harassing and interdicting (H&I) artillery fire and infantry raids continued to keep the Communists off-balance.

A combat raid on 5 April typified the extensive Marine division night activities forward of the line. Conducted by three platoons, less a squad, of the KMC 10th Company, the raiding party had the mission of capturing prisoners. Departing the MLR at 2300, the Korean Marines worked their way over the low ground and then crossed the Sachon River. Immediately thereafter the raid leader, who was the 10th Company commander (First Lieutenant No Won Keun) dispatched two squad-sized ambushes along the patrol route. The raiders then continued northwest toward their objective, an area near the village of Tonggang-ni, a half mile beyond the river. When about 50 yards from its objective, the patrol ran into tactical wire and an enemy sentry, who alerted his unit by rifle fire. The KMC raiders opened up and called in pre-planned mortar and artillery support. The CCF defenders replied immediately with rifles and machine gun fire.

A combat raid on April 5 showcased the extensive night activities of the Marine division ahead of the front line. Conducted by three platoons, minus a squad, of the KMC 10th Company, the raiding party aimed to capture prisoners. They left the MLR at 11 PM, maneuvering over low ground and crossing the Sachon River. Soon after, the raid leader, who was the commander of the 10th Company (First Lieutenant No Won Keun), sent out two squad-sized ambushes along the patrol route. The raiders then continued northwest toward their target, an area near the village of Tonggang-ni, about half a mile past the river. When they were roughly 50 yards from their objective, the patrol encountered tactical wire and an enemy sentry, who alerted his unit by firing his rifle. The KMC raiders opened fire and called in pre-planned mortar and artillery support. The CCF defenders immediately responded with rifles and machine gun fire.

To complete the maneuver, the patrol leader positioned his machine guns to fire on the Communist flanks and directed one platoon to prepare for a frontal assault on the defenders. At 0148, the 1st Platoon attacked from the right. A minute later the 2d Platoon charged headlong at the defenders. Hand-to-hand fighting followed until the Chinese broke contact and disappeared into bunkers within the trenchline. From inside, the CCF soldiers continued the battle, firing through gun revetments and wounding several KMC pursuers in the legs. After 30 minutes had passed, the South Korean assault troops observed enemy reinforcements moving in from the northwest. At 0230, the Marine patrol withdrew under the cover of artillery, reaching its battalion MLR at 0400. The raiders brought back seven civilians found in the area and several Russian-made carbines. At the cost of 2 killed and 18 wounded, the KMCs inflicted casualties totaling 12 counted killed and 25 estimated wounded.

To finish the maneuver, the patrol leader set up his machine guns to shoot at the Communist flanks and instructed one platoon to get ready for a head-on attack against the defenders. At 1:48 AM, the 1st Platoon launched an attack from the right. A minute later, the 2nd Platoon charged straight at the defenders. Intense hand-to-hand fighting erupted until the Chinese broke off contact and retreated into bunkers within the trench line. From inside, the CCF soldiers kept fighting, shooting through gun emplacements and injuring several KMC pursuers in the legs. After 30 minutes, the South Korean assault troops noticed enemy reinforcements coming in from the northwest. At 2:30 AM, the Marine patrol fell back under the protection of artillery, arriving at its battalion MLR at 4:00 AM. The raiders returned with seven civilians found in the area and several Russian-made carbines. At the cost of 2 killed and 18 wounded, the KMCs inflicted casualties totaling 12 confirmed killed and an estimated 25 wounded.

Other division patrols similarly took into custody civilians living between the MLR and OPLR. It was also the job of these patrols to destroy buildings that the enemy had used. On the night of 5 April, 5th Marines patrols apprehended 34 civilians, and a wounded34 enemy soldier. The day before, a patrol from 2/1 had also captured a Chinese soldier.

Other division patrols also detained civilians living between the MLR and OPLR. These patrols were also responsible for destroying buildings that the enemy had occupied. On the night of April 5, patrols from the 5th Marines apprehended 34 civilians and a wounded34 enemy soldier. The day before, a patrol from 2/1 had also captured a Chinese soldier.

On 12 and 13 April, the enemy stepped up his ground actions. He launched two probes against the 5th Marines occupying the center regimental sector. Both attempts were beaten back. The 1st Marines on the extreme right flank encountered little hostile activity, but in the western KMC sector, Chinese shelling increased noticeably. The following day the artillery picked up again, accompanied by several infantry probes directed against the two KMC frontline battalions. To the right, the Chinese also tested 5th Marines lines again. On the far right, in the area held by the 1st Marines, an air alert was sounded from 0410 to 0726, but no enemy aircraft appeared. By mid-month, the Chinese were dispatching fewer infantry probes but firing a greater number of artillery and mortar shells toward the division line. The enemy even sent 25 rounds to Kimpo, where a total of only 4 had fallen during the first two weeks in April.

On April 12 and 13, the enemy increased their ground actions. They launched two attacks against the 5th Marines in the center regimental sector. Both attempts were pushed back. The 1st Marines on the far right flank faced minimal enemy activity, but in the western KMC sector, Chinese shelling noticeably increased. The following day, the artillery fire resumed, along with several infantry attacks aimed at the two KMC frontline battalions. To the right, the Chinese also tested the 5th Marines' defenses again. On the far right, in the area occupied by the 1st Marines, an air alert was issued from 4:10 AM to 7:26 AM, but no enemy aircraft showed up. By mid-month, the Chinese were sending fewer infantry attacks but were firing a greater number of artillery and mortar shells aimed at the division line. The enemy even launched 25 rounds towards Kimpo, where only 4 had landed during the first two weeks of April.

Ushering in the second half of April was another Communist attack, this one on 15–16 April and to be the last that month against the central part of the Marine Division sector. This attempt to breach the Marine lines was directed against Company E of 2/5, manning an outpost position on the OPLR. The rest of the battalion was now holding the left sector of the center regimental front, having assumed its new mission on line three days earlier in relief of 1/5, which reverted to the role of regimental reserve. Northwest of the 5th Marines MLR, the Company E commander, Captain Charles C. Matthews, had placed a reinforced rifle platoon. His Marines had occupied several dug-in positions near the top of a 400-foot hill, known as Outpost 3 (OP 3). (See Map 5.) The platoon had been improving this outpost area and fortifications so that the bunkers could be employed for living and fighting.45 During the afternoon and again at dusk on 15 April the Communists had shelled this location. One Marine was wounded in the second firing.

Ushering in the second half of April was another Communist attack, this one on 15–16 April and to be the last that month against the central part of the Marine Division sector. This attempt to breach the Marine lines targeted Company E of 2/5, which was stationed at an outpost position on the OPLR. The rest of the battalion was now holding the left sector of the center regimental front, having taken on its new mission three days earlier to relieve 1/5, which reverted to the role of regimental reserve. Northwest of the 5th Marines MLR, the Company E commander, Captain Charles C. Matthews, had placed a reinforced rifle platoon. His Marines occupied several fortified positions near the top of a 400-foot hill, known as Outpost 3 (OP 3). (See Map 5.) The platoon had been improving this outpost area and fortifications so that the bunkers could be used for living and fighting.45 During the afternoon and again at dusk on 15 April, the Communists shelled this location. One Marine was injured in the second round of fire.

45 Chapter III discusses in detail the construction of bunkers.

45 Chapter III goes into detail about how to build bunkers.

MAP 5 K. WHITE

MAP 5 K. WHITE

2/5 SECTOR

2/5 Sector

15–16 APRIL 1952

April 15–16, 1952

At 2330 on 15 April, Company E reported that a green flare cluster had just burst over Hill 67, approximately 1,900 yards southwest of OP 3 and just beyond the OPLR. This signal triggered a 20-minute heavy enemy preparation of 76mm artillery and 120mm mortars on the friendly outpost and its supporting mortar position. Ten minutes36 before midnight, another green flare exploded over the same height, and the shelling stopped. After five minutes the signal reappeared. Immediately thereafter, the Chinese shifted their artillery and mortar fire to an area west of the OP 3 mortar site and north of a Company F observation post. At the same time, the enemy attacked Outpost 3.

At 11:30 PM on April 15, Company E reported that a green flare cluster had just gone off over Hill 67, about 1,900 yards southwest of OP 3 and just beyond the OPLR. This signal triggered a 20-minute intense enemy bombardment with 76mm artillery and 120mm mortars targeting the friendly outpost and its supporting mortar position. Ten minutes36 before midnight, another green flare exploded over the same location, and the shelling stopped. After five minutes, the signal reappeared. Right after that, the Chinese redirected their artillery and mortar fire to an area west of the OP 3 mortar site and north of a Company F observation post. At the same time, the enemy attacked Outpost 3.

Initially, the Chinese struck the Marine defenses in a frontal assault, but as the fighting progressed enemy forces quickly enveloped the outpost and charged it simultaneously from three sides. The vastly outnumbered Marine defenders withdrew into a tight perimeter at the southeastern corner of the outpost where their defending firepower prevented the enemy from seizing the position. Within 15 minutes the enemy had surrounded the Marines and severed the outpost communications, but could not take the outpost. The CCF soldiers then pulled back and let their artillery soften OP 3 while they regrouped for another assault. The Chinese soon stormed the outpost a second time, but were again unsuccessful. Moreover, they lost three of their men who were captured by the tenacious 2/5 defenders.

Initially, the Chinese launched a direct attack on the Marine defenses, but as the battle continued, enemy forces quickly surrounded the outpost and charged it from three sides. The vastly outnumbered Marine defenders fell back to a tight perimeter at the southeastern corner of the outpost, where their firepower prevented the enemy from taking control. In just 15 minutes, the enemy had encircled the Marines and cut off communications to the outpost, but they still couldn’t take it. The CCF soldiers then withdrew and let their artillery bombard OP 3 while they regrouped for another attack. The Chinese soon charged the outpost again, but once more they were unsuccessful. Additionally, they lost three men who were captured by the determined 2/5 defenders.

The fighting continued until 0315, reaching a hand-to-hand clash at one stage. In addition to mortar and artillery fire, the enemy employed small arms, automatic weapons, hand and stick-type grenades, bangalore torpedoes, and 57mm recoilless rifles. During the attack, patrols were sent out from the MLR and OP 2, to the west, to reestablish contact and help with casualty evacuation.

The fighting went on until 3:15 AM, culminating in a hand-to-hand battle at one point. Along with mortar and artillery fire, the enemy used small arms, automatic weapons, hand grenades, stick grenades, bangalore torpedoes, and 57mm recoilless rifles. During the attack, patrols were sent out from the Main Line of Resistance (MLR) and Observation Post 2 (OP 2) to the west to restore contact and assist with evacuating casualties.

Well to the rear of the outpost and unknown to its occupants, intelligence personnel intercepted a Chinese message ordering the Communists to withdraw. Immediately, friendly artillery fired on all known escape routes available to the attackers. Despite this interdicting fire, the enemy soldiers managed to withdraw without further loss. Their unsuccessful thrust against the 2/5 OPLR cost the Chinese 25 known killed, 25 estimated killed, 45 known wounded, and 3 prisoners. Marine casualties were 6 killed, 5 missing, and 25 wounded and evacuated.46

Well behind the outpost and unaware to those inside, intelligence personnel intercepted a Chinese message instructing the Communists to retreat. Right away, friendly artillery targeted all known escape routes available to the attackers. Despite this fire aimed to block them, the enemy soldiers managed to pull back without any further losses. Their failed attempt against the 2/5 OPLR cost the Chinese 25 confirmed dead, 25 estimated dead, 45 confirmed injured, and 3 prisoners. Marine casualties included 6 killed, 5 missing, and 25 injured and evacuated.46

46 One of those wounded was Corporal Duane E. Dewey, a machine gunner. He was wounded twice, in fact, the second time from an exploding enemy grenade which he had rolled upon to shield two nearby comrades. Dewey somehow survived, and the following March, after release from the Marine Corps, he went to the White House where he received the Medal of Honor, the first to be presented by the new President, Dwight D. Eisenhower. (Duane E. Dewey Biog. File)

46 One of the injured was Corporal Duane E. Dewey, a machine gunner. He was wounded twice, actually, the second time from an enemy grenade explosion that he had rolled onto to protect two fellow soldiers. Dewey somehow survived, and the following March, after leaving the Marine Corps, he went to the White House where he received the Medal of Honor, the first to be awarded by the new President, Dwight D. Eisenhower. (Duane E. Dewey Biog. File)

Why the Chinese had selected OP 3 for their mid-April attack is not known. Several theories, however, have been advanced by those37 involved in the action. Colonel Culhane, the regimental commander, believed that the enemy incursion “was the direct result of the aggressive patrols that frequently used the outpost as a point of departure....”47 Brigadier General Merrill B. Twining, the assistant division commander since 22 March, declared that the position was too large for a reinforced platoon to hold.48 Perhaps the Chinese had harbored the same thoughts before the night of 15–16 April.

Why the Chinese chose OP 3 for their mid-April attack is unclear. Several theories have been proposed by those involved in the action. Colonel Culhane, the regimental commander, believed that the enemy incursion “was the direct result of the aggressive patrols that frequently used the outpost as a starting point....”47 Brigadier General Merrill B. Twining, the assistant division commander since March 22, stated that the position was too large for a reinforced platoon to hold.48 Perhaps the Chinese had similar thoughts before the night of April 15–16.

47 Culhane ltr.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Culhane letter

48 LtGen Merrill B. Twining ltr to Deputy Asst CofS, G-3, HQMC, dtd 19 Aug 54.

48 LtGen Merrill B. Twining letter to Deputy Assistant Chief of Staff, G-3, HQMC, dated August 19, 1954.

Just before its OPLR was withdrawn in favor of an observation line, the 1st Korean Regiment was struck by the Chinese in the area immediately north of the 1–2 April clash. Beginning at 0100 on 17 April, the enemy placed a 15-minute preparatory fire on the left flank of the 3d Battalion, occupying the regimental right sector. The CCF then probed friendly lines in and around the area pounded during the preliminary fires. Three separate attacks took place before 0400, when the Communists withdrew. In these probes, the Chinese made free use of automatic weapons; the enemy’s well-coordinated action attested to their training and discipline. Confirmed casualties were 36 CCF and 2 Koreans killed. The KMCs suffered 5 wounded and estimated that 70 Chinese had been wounded. Although the South Koreans frequently called down artillery support during the attack, most of the casualties inflicted on the enemy were from rifle and machine gun fire. The 17 April probe was to mark the last major infantry action for the 1st Marine Division during its second month on JAMESTOWN.

Just before its OPLR was replaced by an observation line, the 1st Korean Regiment was hit by the Chinese in the area just north of the April 1-2 clash. Starting at 1:00 AM on April 17, the enemy launched 15 minutes of preparatory fire on the left flank of the 3rd Battalion, which was holding the regimental right sector. The CCF then probed friendly lines in and around the area that had been targeted during the preliminary fire. Three separate attacks occurred before 4:00 AM, when the Communists pulled back. During these probes, the Chinese heavily used automatic weapons; their well-coordinated actions showed their training and discipline. Confirmed casualties were 36 CCF and 2 Koreans killed. The KMCs had 5 wounded and estimated that 70 Chinese were injured. Although the South Koreans frequently called for artillery support during the attack, most of the damage done to the enemy came from rifle and machine gun fire. The April 17 probe was the last major infantry action for the 1st Marine Division during its second month on JAMESTOWN.

Throughout the month a total of 5,000 rounds of artillery fire and 3,786 rounds of mortar fire fell in the division sector. On 2 April the greatest volume for any single day was received: 3,000 artillery and 118 mortar rounds. An average day’s incoming, during April, was approximately 167 artillery and 125 mortar rounds.

Throughout the month, there were a total of 5,000 rounds of artillery fire and 3,786 rounds of mortar fire in the division sector. On April 2, the highest amount for any single day was recorded: 3,000 artillery rounds and 118 mortar rounds. An average day in April saw about 167 artillery rounds and 125 mortar rounds coming in.

Strengthening the Line49

49 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 52; KMC Regt UnitRpt 46, dtd 17 Apr 52.

49 Unless otherwise specified, the content in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 52; KMC Regt UnitRpt 46, dated April 17, 52.

Even before the Communists had launched their mid-April attacks against JAMESTOWN, the 1st Marine Division had implemented plans38 to strengthen its line in western Korea. Besides the digging, timbering, and sandbagging to accomplish a major improvement of the physical defenses, General Selden required Marine infantry regiments to conduct an aggressive defense of their sector of responsibility. He ordered MLR units to employ snipers all along JAMESTOWN and to dispatch daily patrols forward of the line to ambush, raid, kill, or capture Chinese and their positions. The division commander further directed that supporting arms such as artillery, tank, and air, when available, be used to destroy hostile defenses, harass the enemy, and break up his assemblies as well as to protect Marine positions.

Even before the Communists launched their mid-April attacks against JAMSTOWN, the 1st Marine Division had put plans in place38 to reinforce its line in western Korea. In addition to digging, building, and sandbagging to significantly enhance the physical defenses, General Selden required Marine infantry regiments to actively defend their assigned areas. He instructed MLR units to use snipers throughout JAMESTOWN and to send out daily patrols ahead of the line to ambush, raid, kill, or capture Chinese forces and their positions. The division commander also directed that supporting units like artillery, tanks, and air support, when available, be deployed to destroy enemy defenses, disrupt the enemy, break up their gatherings, and protect Marine positions.

As a result of an I Corps directive, the 1st Marine Division assumed responsibility for an additional 6,800 yards of front on 14 April from the 1st Commonwealth Division sector to the right of the division. In preparation, the 5th Marines had taken over the western end of the 1st Marines sector, held by 2/1, two days earlier. On the 14th the 1st Marines, newly commanded by Colonel Walter N. Flournoy,50 extended its line eastward to assume new limiting points and part of the MLR in the western part of the Canadian Brigade sector. Relief of the Commonwealth unit was completed without any difficulty or enemy interference. This additional yardage, plus the Kimpo Peninsula front, now stretched the Marine division MLR to 35½ miles.

As a result of an I Corps directive, the 1st Marine Division took over an additional 6,800 yards of the front on April 14 from the 1st Commonwealth Division sector to the right of the division. To prepare for this, the 5th Marines had assumed control of the western end of the 1st Marines sector, which was held by 2/1, two days earlier. On the 14th, the 1st Marines, now commanded by Colonel Walter N. Flournoy, extended its line eastward to take on new limiting points and part of the MLR in the western part of the Canadian Brigade sector. The relief of the Commonwealth unit was completed without any issues or enemy interference. This additional stretch, along with the Kimpo Peninsula front, now extended the Marine division MLR to 35½ miles.

50 Colonel Flournoy became regimental CO on 10 April, succeeding Colonel Wade.

50 Colonel Flournoy took over as regimental CO on April 10, replacing Colonel Wade.

As a result, General Selden found it necessary to withdraw the division general outpost line in order to build up his main line of resistance. On 17 April, the 1st KMC Regiment reduced its OPLR to an OPLO (outpost line of observation) and the left battalion pulled its MLR back to more defensible ground. The Marine division center and right regiments withdrew their outpost lines on 23 and 24 April. Both regiments then established forward outposts and listening posts which, in many cases, utilized former OPLR positions. Many of these posts were manned during daylight hours only.

As a result, General Selden decided to pull back the division's general outpost line to strengthen his main line of defense. On April 17, the 1st KMC Regiment changed its Outpost Line of Resistance (OPLR) to an Outpost Line of Observation (OPLO), and the left battalion moved its Main Line of Resistance (MLR) back to more defensible ground. The Marine division's center and right regiments pulled back their outpost lines on April 23 and 24. Both regiments then set up forward outposts and listening posts, many of which used former OPLR positions. Most of these posts were staffed only during daylight hours.

Abandonment of the forward OPLR added strength to the main line, but it also meant that frontline battalions had to commit all their companies on line, thus losing their reserve. To prevent Chinese occupation of desirable terrain features on the former OPLR, the division dispatched combat and reconnaissance patrols forward of its39 line. In the KMC sector, the only Marine area favorable for tank operations forward of JAMESTOWN, tank-infantry patrols were periodically employed.

Abandoning the forward OPLR strengthened the main line, but it also meant that frontline battalions had to deploy all their companies, losing their reserve. To stop the Chinese from taking control of key terrain features on the former OPLR, the division sent combat and reconnaissance patrols ahead of its39 line. In the KMC sector, the only Marine area suitable for tank operations ahead of JAMESTOWN, tank-infantry patrols were used periodically.

To the west of the KMC sector, the Marine 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion (Lieutenant Colonel Michiel Dobervich) was assigned a section of the KANSAS Line to defend, beginning 16 April. Reinforced by attachment of the Division Reconnaissance Company (Major Ephraim Kirby-Smith) that same day, Lieutenant Colonel Dobervich employed Company C (two platoons), the headquarters LVT platoon, and the reconnaissance unit to man 30 defensive positions from the Han River eastward to the KMC western boundary.51

To the west of the KMC sector, the Marine 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion (Lieutenant Colonel Michiel Dobervich) was assigned a part of the KANSAS Line to defend, starting April 16. That same day, they were reinforced by the Division Reconnaissance Company (Major Ephraim Kirby-Smith). Lieutenant Colonel Dobervich used Company C (two platoons), the headquarters LVT platoon, and the reconnaissance unit to operate 30 defensive positions from the Han River eastward to the KMC western boundary.51

51 Company A, 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion had been attached to the Kimpo Provisional Regiment since 31 March and Company B was supporting MAG-33 at Pohang.

51 Company A, 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion had been assigned to the Kimpo Provisional Regiment since March 31, and Company B was assisting MAG-33 at Pohang.

Two other measures to strengthen his sector of JAMESTOWN were utilized by the Marine division commander. On 18 April, he asked General O’Daniel to reconsider the no-fire zone recently established by the corps commander. General Selden, who had received reports of Chinese use of the sanctuary located within Marine Corps territory—for firing positions and assembly areas primarily—recommended, after I Corps had refused him permission to fire into the haven, a redrawing of the O’Daniel line to coincide more closely with the boundaries established by the UN. Approval along the lines submitted by the division was given by I Corps that same day. The second measure employed by General Selden was use of an additional defensive line, WYOMING FORWARD. This position, closely paralleling JAMESTOWN in the KMC and 5th Marines sectors, added depth to the sector defenses.

Two other actions to strengthen his area of JAMESTOWN were taken by the Marine division commander. On April 18, he asked General O’Daniel to rethink the no-fire zone that had recently been set up by the corps commander. General Selden, who had received reports of the Chinese using the sanctuary within Marine Corps territory—for firing positions and gathering areas mainly—suggested, after I Corps denied him permission to fire into the safe zone, a revision of the O’Daniel line to more closely match the boundaries established by the UN. I Corps approved the changes proposed by the division that same day. The second action taken by General Selden was the addition of another defensive line, WYOMING FORWARD. This position, which closely followed JAMESTOWN in the KMC and 5th Marines areas, provided more depth to the sector defenses.

A unique rescue and recovery operation also came into existence about this time. On 19 April the division ordered the 5th Marines, occupying the center regimental sector, to organize a tank-infantry force for rescue of the United Nations Truce Team, should such action become necessary. The regimental plan, published on 22 April, utilized a reinforced rifle company-tank company organization directly supported by organic 5th Marines 4.2-inch mortars and 1/11. The Everready Rescue Force, from the regimental reserve, occupied the high ground (OP 2) east of and dominating Panmunjom.

A unique rescue and recovery operation was set up around this time. On April 19, the division instructed the 5th Marines, stationed in the central regimental sector, to form a tank-infantry unit for the potential rescue of the United Nations Truce Team if necessary. The regimental plan, released on April 22, employed a reinforced rifle company-tank company organization directly supported by organic 5th Marines 4.2-inch mortars and 1/11. The Everready Rescue Force, from the regimental reserve, took position on the high ground (OP 2) east of and overlooking Panmunjom.

In addition to setting forth organizational details of the task unit, the 5th Marines Operational Plan 6-52 specified the method of operation for the rescue force. Taking advantage of the peace corridor40 in the western end of the center sector, a Forward Covering Force would speed tank-riding infantry to the high ground one-half mile beyond the objective, Panmunjon. Following would be the Pick-Up Force, from the 1st Tank Battalion Headquarters Platoon, which would retrieve the principal UN delegates and take them quickly to the assembly area two miles to the rear of the MLR. A Rear Covering Force, composed of a tank-infantry element, would follow the Pick-Up force both on its way towards the objective and on the return trip. Withdrawal of both covering forces was regulated by a series of phase lines.

In addition to outlining the organizational details of the task unit, the 5th Marines Operational Plan 6-52 outlined the operational method for the rescue team. Using the peace corridor40 in the western part of the center sector, a Forward Covering Force would quickly transport tank-riding infantry to the high ground half a mile past the objective, Panmunjon. Following this would be the Pick-Up Force, from the 1st Tank Battalion Headquarters Platoon, which would fetch the main UN delegates and quickly take them to the assembly area two miles behind the MLR. A Rear Covering Force, made up of tank and infantry units, would follow the Pick-Up Force both toward the objective and on the way back. The withdrawal of both covering forces was controlled by a series of phase lines.

Marine Air Operations52

52 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; 1st MAW, HMR-161, VMO-6 ComdDs, Apr 52; Lynn Montross, Cavalry of the Sky—The Story of U. S. Marine Combat Helicopters (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1954), hereafter Montross, SkyCav, quoted with permission of the publishers.

52 Unless otherwise specified, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; 1st MAW, HMR-161, VMO-6 ComdDs, Apr 52; Lynn Montross, Cavalry of the Sky—The Story of U. S. Marine Combat Helicopters (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1954), hereafter Montross, SkyCav, quoted with permission of the publishers.

Even though the Marine air-ground team had been shorn of much of its tactical aviation, what remained was well utilized. Helicopter troop operations had become commonplace by the end of April 1952. That month there were three exercises to further evaluate tactical concepts of helicopter employment. Operation PRONTO, conducted on 5 April, was the first major troop lift in the new I Corps sector. In this maneuver approximately 670 troops of 2/7 and 10,000 pounds of rations were transported by helicopter and truck from the Munsan-ni vicinity across the Han River to the Kimpo Peninsula. Here the reserve battalion served as a counterattack force in a hypothetical enemy landing. Due to the necessity for avoiding the neutrality zone in the Munsan area, round-trip flights averaged about 57 miles.

Even though the Marine air-ground team had lost a lot of its tactical aviation, what was left was used effectively. By the end of April 1952, helicopter troop operations had become routine. That month, there were three exercises to further assess tactical concepts for helicopter use. Operation NOW, held on April 5, was the first major troop lift in the new I Corps sector. During this operation, about 670 troops from 2/7 and 10,000 pounds of supplies were transported by helicopter and truck from the Munsan-ni area across the Han River to the Kimpo Peninsula. Here, the reserve battalion acted as a counterattack force in a simulated enemy landing. Because they had to avoid the neutrality zone in the Munsan area, round-trip flights averaged about 57 miles.

The exercise combined the shortest notice and longest distance of any large-scale helicopter troop movement conducted by HMR-161. It pointed to the fact that a helicopter unit could successfully lift a troop organization virtually as an “on call” tactical tool and without the benefit of previous liaison.

The exercise combined the shortest notice and longest distance of any large-scale helicopter troop movement conducted by HMR-161. It highlighted that a helicopter unit could successfully lift a troop organization almost as an “on call” tactical resource without any prior coordination.

Operation LEAPFROG, on 18–19 April, transported one KMC battalion across the Han to the peninsula and lifted out another the following day. The purpose of this test was to determine the feasibility41 of a replacement movement conducted over water, with “consideration given to the language barrier existing between the troops and the transporting facility.”53 The six-mile round trip was the shortest troop haul yet made by the transport chopper squadron. Consequently, it took the 12 HRS-1 single-engine Sikorsky aircraft only 3 hours and 26 minutes to complete the exchange of the 1,702 KMC troops.

Operation Leapfrog, on April 18–19, moved one KMC battalion across the Han River to the peninsula and picked up another the next day. The aim of this test was to evaluate the viability41 of transporting troops over water, with “consideration given to the language barrier between the soldiers and the transporting facility.”53 The six-mile round trip was the shortest troop transport ever done by the helicopter squadron. As a result, it only took the 12 HRS-1 single-engine Sikorsky aircraft 3 hours and 26 minutes to complete the transfer of 1,702 KMC troops.

53 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, 10-73.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, 10-73.

Colonel McCutcheon’s HMR-161 pilots found that their helicopters could carry six combat-equipped Korean Marines instead of five American Marines, due to the smaller size and weight of the average Korean. Since the U.S. and KMC Marine battalions were the same size, the larger load factor for the Korean Marines enabled their unit to be moved faster. In LEAPFROG the language difference proved to be no handicap, since there were sufficient interpreters on hand and the troops were cooperative. Helicopter pilots could use landing sites close together because the terrain was open and the area of operations beyond the reach of Chinese artillery.

Colonel McCutcheon’s HMR-161 pilots discovered that their helicopters could carry six combat-ready Korean Marines instead of five American Marines, thanks to the smaller size and weight of the average Korean. Since both the U.S. and KMC Marine battalions were the same size, being able to transport more Korean Marines allowed their unit to be deployed more quickly. In LEAPFROG, the language barrier wasn’t an issue, as there were enough interpreters available and the troops were cooperative. Helicopter pilots could utilize landing sites that were close together because the terrain was open and the operational area was safe from Chinese artillery.

Close on the heels of LEAPFROG came a third airlift. Operation CIRCUS, conducted on 23 April, provided for the air deployment of the 7th Marines reserve regiment, minus two battalions, across the Imjin to landing sites just to the rear of the secondary defensive line, WYOMING FORWARD. Ten helicopters carried 1,185 Marines over the river barrier to blocking positions in 90 minutes. The CIRCUS exercise illustrated that a minimum distance should be maintained between loading and unloading sites for a safe and efficient transport operation. It also pointed up that “consideration must be given to the number of aircraft assigned to each traffic pattern during short hops over a river.”54 This successful maneuver came three days before all HRS-1 aircraft were grounded due to a defect in the tail rotors. By mid-May the problem had been corrected and the aircraft returned to flying status.

Close on the heels of LEAPFROG came a third airlift. Operation CIRCUS, conducted on April 23, allowed for the air deployment of the 7th Marines reserve regiment, minus two battalions, across the Imjin to landing sites just behind the secondary defensive line, WYOMING FORWARD. Ten helicopters carried 1,185 Marines over the river barrier to blocking positions in 90 minutes. The CIRCUS exercise showed that a minimum distance should be kept between loading and unloading sites for a safe and efficient transport operation. It also highlighted that “consideration must be given to the number of aircraft assigned to each traffic pattern during short hops over a river.”54 This successful maneuver happened three days before all HRS-1 aircraft were grounded due to a tail rotor defect. By mid-May, the problem was fixed, and the aircraft returned to flying status.

54 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 9-50.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 9-50.

During April, Lieutenant Colonel Herring’s VMO-6 employed its 11 single-engine OE-1 observation planes for a total of 508 fixed-wing combat flights. More than half of these, 275, were for artillery spotting; of the remainder, 166 were flown for reconnaissance and 67 represented photo, weather, liaison, and area check-out maneuvers.42 Combat flights by the squadron helicopters55 during the month were 110 liaison, 45 reconnaissance, and 93 evacuations. Of the total 756 combat flights performed by both fixed-wing and rotary craft, 511 were over enemy territory.

During April, Lieutenant Colonel Herring’s VMO-6 used its 11 single-engine OE-1 observation planes for a total of 508 fixed-wing combat flights. More than half of these, 275, were for artillery spotting; of the remainder, 166 were for reconnaissance and 67 were for photo, weather, liaison, and area check-out operations.42 The squadron's helicopters conducted 110 liaison flights, 45 reconnaissance flights, and 93 evacuations during the month. Out of the total 756 combat flights performed by both fixed-wing and rotary aircraft, 511 were over enemy territory.

55 Rotary wing aircraft assigned were two types, HTL-4 and H03S-1. The former is a two-place, plastic-dome Bell product; the latter, the first helicopter operated by the Marine Corps, is an observation-utility, three-passenger Sikorsky-made craft. HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, Marine Corps Aircraft, 1913–1965, Marine Corps Historical Reference Pamphlet (Washington: 1967 ed.) pp. 34, 38.

55 Two types of rotary-wing aircraft were assigned, the HTL-4 and the H03S-1. The HTL-4 is a two-seat, plastic-dome Bell model, while the H03S-1, which was the first helicopter used by the Marine Corps, is a three-passenger Sikorsky helicopter designed for observation and utility. HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, Marine Corps Aircraft, 1913–1965, Marine Corps Historical Reference Pamphlet (Washington: 1967 ed.) pp. 34, 38.

During that same month, Marine squadrons operating under the Fifth Air Force put a total of 2,708 planes into the air despite restrictive or prohibitive weather on 20 days. Continuing its emphasis on attacking the North Korean transportation system, the Air Force command dispatched 1,397 Marine planes on interdiction missions. Marine-piloted close air support sorties flown to assist the 1st Marine Division numbered only 56 throughout April; those piloted by Marines for 16 other UN divisions totaled 547.

During that same month, Marine squadrons flying under the Fifth Air Force managed to get 2,708 planes in the air, even with bad weather forcing them to stay grounded for 20 days. Keeping its focus on hitting the North Korean transportation network, the Air Force command sent out 1,397 Marine planes for missions to disrupt enemy supply lines. There were only 56 close air support missions flown by Marine pilots to help the 1st Marine Division in April; however, Marine pilots supported 16 other UN divisions with a total of 547 sorties.

Not all the air sortie records were made by land-based Marine squadrons. On 18 April, VMA-312, the CTE 95.11 squadron provided by the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, flew 80 sorties, a Korean record for a carrier-based squadron to that date and twice the daily average for the initial six months of 1952.

Not all the air sortie records were set by land-based Marine squadrons. On April 18, VMA-312, the CTE 95.11 squadron provided by the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, flew 80 sorties, a Korean record for a carrier-based squadron at that time and double the daily average for the first six months of 1952.

By 20 April the three tactical squadrons of MAG-12—VMF(N)-513, VMF-212, and VMF-323—had completed their relocations on the Korean west coast. Two days later, combined MAG-12 attack and -33 jet aircraft participated in what was a Fifth Air Force one-day combat record: 1,049 sorties.

By April 20, the three tactical squadrons of MAG-12—VMF(N)-513, VMF-212, and VMF-323—had finished relocating to the Korean west coast. Two days later, the combined MAG-12 attack and -33 jet aircraft took part in what became a one-day combat record for the Fifth Air Force: 1,049 sorties.

One MAG-33 unit, the newly-formed Marine Photographic Squadron 1, was already flying a large number of aerial reconnaissance missions directed by Fifth Air Force. It provided almost one-third of the daylight photo effort required by FAF with but one-quarter of the aircraft.56 VMJ-1’s complement of a dozen 550 mph McDonnell twin-jet Banshee F2H-2P aircraft mounted three cameras and were capable both of high altitude work and good speed. Introduction of this single-seat jet was considered the “first important development43 in aerial photography in the Korean War,”57 since the Banshee could outproduce any photo plane in Korea.

One MAG-33 unit, the newly-formed Marine Photographic Squadron 1, was already carrying out a significant number of aerial reconnaissance missions for the Fifth Air Force. It provided nearly one-third of the daytime photo requirements for FAF with only a quarter of the aircraft. VMJ-1 had a dozen 550 mph McDonnell twin-jet Banshee F2H-2P aircraft, which were outfitted with three cameras and could operate at high altitudes while maintaining good speed. The introduction of this single-seat jet was seen as the “first important development in aerial photography in the Korean War,” since the Banshee could outperform any other photo plane in Korea.

56 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, pp. 10-2, 10-108. This record was established despite the fact that the Marine squadron, with 10 jets, flying out of K-3 (Pohang) was more than 150 miles further from most targets than the other major photo unit, the 15th Tactical Reconnaissance Squadron of the 67th Tactical Reconnaissance Wing, based at K-14 (Kimpo).

56 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, pp. 10-2, 10-108. This record was set even though the Marine squadron, with 10 jets, operating out of K-3 (Pohang), was over 150 miles farther from most targets than the other main photo unit, the 15th Tactical Reconnaissance Squadron of the 67th Tactical Reconnaissance Wing, located at K-14 (Kimpo).

57 Ibid., p. 10-59.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., pp. 10-59.

The month of April also marked change of command ceremonies for the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing. On 11 April at K-3, General Schilt turned over wing responsibility to Brigadier General Clayton C. Jerome. Among the numerous civilian and military dignitaries attending the ceremony at the Pohang 1st MAW headquarters were the Honorable John J. Muccio, U.S. Ambassador to Korea; Air Force Lieutenant Generals Otto P. Weyland and Frank F. Everest, commanders of FEAF and FAF respectively; and the Marine division CG, Major General Selden.

The month of April also marked the change of command ceremonies for the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing. On April 11 at K-3, General Schilt handed over wing responsibility to Brigadier General Clayton C. Jerome. Among the many civilian and military dignitaries attending the ceremony at the Pohang 1st MAW headquarters were the Honorable John J. Muccio, U.S. Ambassador to Korea; Air Force Lieutenant Generals Otto P. Weyland and Frank F. Everest, commanders of FEAF and FAF respectively; and the Marine division CG, Major General Selden.

The new wing commander, General Jerome, like his predecessor, had a distinguished flight career. A 1922 graduate of the Naval Academy, he had served in various foreign and U.S. aviation billets and was a veteran of five World War II campaigns. In 1943 Colonel Jerome was operations officer for Commander, Aircraft, Solomon Islands. Later he was named Chief of Staff, Commander, Aircraft, Northern Solomons and Commander, Aircraft and Island Commander, Emirau, in the northern Solomons. Before returning to the States, Colonel Jerome had participated in the recapture of the Philippines, commanding MAG-32 and directing all Marine air support in the Luzon fighting. Brigadier General Jerome became Director of Aviation and Assistant Commandant of the Marine Corps for Air in September 1950 and served in this capacity until taking command of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing in Korea.58

The new wing commander, General Jerome, like his predecessor, had an impressive flight career. A 1922 graduate of the Naval Academy, he held various aviation positions both overseas and in the U.S., and he was a veteran of five World War II campaigns. In 1943, Colonel Jerome was the operations officer for Commander, Aircraft, Solomon Islands. He later became the Chief of Staff for Commander, Aircraft, Northern Solomons and the Commander for Aircraft and Island Commander, Emirau, in the northern Solomons. Before heading back to the States, Colonel Jerome took part in the recapture of the Philippines, leading MAG-32 and overseeing all Marine air support during the fighting in Luzon. Brigadier General Jerome became the Director of Aviation and Assistant Commandant of the Marine Corps for Air in September 1950 and held this position until he took command of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing in Korea.58

58 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of LtGen Clayton C. Jerome, Jul 58, rev.

58 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of LtGen Clayton C. Jerome, Jul 58, rev.

During the command ceremonies the outgoing 1st MAW commander, General Schilt, was presented the Distinguished Service Medal for his outstanding leadership of the wing. The award was made by Lieutenant General Weyland. Shortly before his Korean tour ended, General Schilt had also received from ROK President Syngman Rhee the Order of Military Merit Taiguk, for his contribution to the military defense of South Korea.

During the change of command ceremonies, the outgoing 1st MAW commander, General Schilt, was awarded the Distinguished Service Medal for his exceptional leadership of the wing. The award was presented by Lieutenant General Weyland. Just before his tour in Korea ended, General Schilt also received the Order of Military Merit Taiguk from ROK President Syngman Rhee for his contributions to the military defense of South Korea.

44

44

Supporting the Division and the Wing59

59 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv, 1st MAW, 1st CSG, 11thMar, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52; 1st CSG UnitRpts, Apr 52.

59 Unless otherwise specified, the content in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv, 1st MAW, 1st CSG, 11thMar, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52; 1st CSG UnitRpts, Apr 52.

Because of the command relationships existing in Korea, with all ground units under operational control of CG, EUSAK, the majority of the logistical support to the Marines was handled by the Army. Eighth Army, 2d Logistical Command (2d LogCom) provided for resupply of items used commonly by both Marine and Army personnel; the Marine Corps (Commanding General, FMFPac) furnished those supplies and equipment used by Marine units only.

Due to the command structure in Korea, where all ground units are under the operational control of CG, EUSAK, most of the logistical support for the Marines was managed by the Army. The Eighth Army, 2d Logistical Command (2d LogCom), was responsible for resupplying items commonly used by both Marine and Army personnel, while the Marine Corps (Commanding General, FMFPac) supplied the items and equipment used exclusively by Marine units.

When the division moved to the west, the 1st Shore Party Battalion opened a rear service area at Ascom City. Here the division established and maintained Class II (organizational equipment) and IV (special equipment) dumps for its units, as well as Class I (rations) and III (petroleum products) facilities for both the Kimpo regiment and the service units stationed at Ascom. Class I shipments were forwarded to the Munsan-ni railhead and stored there. Fuels and lubricants and Class V items (ordnance) were received from the U.S. Army. A forward ammunition supply point (ASP) was located north of the Imjin to assure a steady flow of ammunition to frontline combat units in the event that either an enemy attack or emergency flooding conditions of the river prevented use of the bridges. For the same reason a truck company was positioned near this supply point each night.

When the division moved west, the 1st Shore Party Battalion set up a rear service area at Ascom City. Here, the division established and maintained Class II (organizational equipment) and IV (special equipment) storage for its units, as well as Class I (rations) and III (petroleum products) facilities for both the Kimpo regiment and the service units stationed at Ascom. Class I shipments were sent to the Munsan-ni railhead and stored there. Fuels, lubricants, and Class V items (ordnance) were received from the U.S. Army. A forward ammunition supply point (ASP) was located north of the Imjin to ensure a steady flow of ammunition to frontline combat units in case of an enemy attack or emergency flooding conditions that might block the bridges. For the same reason, a truck company was positioned near this supply point each night.

Reinforcing the division logistic effort was the 1st Combat Service Group. Commanded by Colonel Russell N. Jordahl, the 1st CSG in late April had nearly 1,400 Marines and Navy medical personnel stationed at various points between Japan and Korea. At Kobe, Japan, the Support Company processed Marine drafts arriving and departing Korea. At Masan, the Supply Company, 1st CSG, requisitioned for the division those Class II and IV items peculiar to the Marine Corps needs and forwarded them upon request. Heavy maintenance of all technical equipment was performed by the Maintenance Company. Supporting the 1st Motor Transport Battalion operation was the Motor Transport Company, 1st CSG. Most of the group, including Headquarters Company, was based at Masan.60 Splinter detachments45 from the group also operated transport facilities at other locations in Korea.

Reinforcing the division's logistics effort was the 1st Combat Service Group. Led by Colonel Russell N. Jordahl, the 1st CSG had nearly 1,400 Marines and Navy medical personnel stationed at various locations between Japan and Korea by late April. At Kobe, Japan, the Support Company managed the processing of Marine drafts arriving in and leaving from Korea. In Masan, the Supply Company, 1st CSG, handled requests for those Class II and IV items specific to the Marine Corps' needs and forwarded them as needed. The Maintenance Company took care of heavy maintenance for all technical equipment. Supporting the 1st Motor Transport Battalion's operations was the Motor Transport Company, 1st CSG. Most of the group, including Headquarters Company, was located in Masan. 60 Splinter detachments45 from the group also operated transport facilities at other sites in Korea.

60 The Support Company moved to Ascom City on 14 Jun 52.

60 The Support Company relocated to Ascom City on June 14, 1952.

In western Korea, good rail transport into Munsan-ni and an adequate but not all-weather road system improved the division’s logistical situation. Greater storage facilities also existed in the JAMESTOWN rear supply areas than in the X Corps sector just vacated by the Marines. Division motor equipment did not suffer any appreciable damage due to the rigors of the MIXMASTER transplacement. Vehicle maintenance also presented a favorable outlook, due to the expected decreased use during the period of positional warfare. On the other hand, an unduly large number of tanks developed engine troubles in March, which were traced back to defective oil cooling fans. This condition was corrected in April and May by installation of new fan assemblies.

In western Korea, good rail transport into Munsan-ni and a decent but not all-weather road system improved the division's logistical situation. There were also more storage facilities in the JAMESTOWN rear supply areas than in the X Corps sector just vacated by the Marines. The division's motor equipment didn’t suffer any significant damage from the challenges of the MIXMASTER transplacement. Vehicle maintenance also looked promising, thanks to the expected reduced usage during the positional warfare period. However, an unusually high number of tanks experienced engine problems in March, which were traced back to faulty oil cooling fans. This issue was fixed in April and May by installing new fan assemblies.

Guns of the 1st Tank Battalion immediately began to render valuable support to Marine frontline regiments with the division’s new assignment in the west. Companies A, B, and C were placed in direct support of the three forward infantry regiments. Company D drew the reserve mission, which included tank-infantry training with the 7th Marines and preparation for reinforcing division artillery fires. Tank companies were used almost daily in the forward sectors for destruction by direct fire of the Chinese MLR fortifications. For such missions the M-46 tanks, equipped with high-velocity 90mm guns, lumbered forward from secure assembly areas to the rear of JAMESTOWN to temporary firing positions on the line.

Guns from the 1st Tank Battalion quickly began providing crucial support to Marine frontline regiments following the division’s new mission in the west. Companies A, B, and C were assigned to directly support the three forward infantry regiments. Company D was designated for reserve duties, which included tank-infantry training with the 7th Marines and getting ready to back up the division’s artillery fire. Tank companies were utilized almost every day in the front lines to destroy Chinese MLR fortifications with direct fire. For these missions, the M-46 tanks, fitted with powerful 90mm guns, rolled out from secure assembly areas behind JAMESTOWN to temporary firing positions on the front line.

After pouring direct fire on preselected targets and completion of the fire mission, the armored vehicles then returned to the rear. Less frequently, a five-vehicle tank platoon accompanied a reinforced rifle platoon and conducted daylight reconnaissance missions of forward areas to engage the Chinese and to gain intelligence about enemy positions and terrain. During April six such tank-infantry patrols, all in the KMC regimental area, failed to establish direct contact with the enemy but did draw mortar and artillery fire.

After targeting preselected areas with direct fire and finishing the mission, the armored vehicles returned to the rear. Less often, a five-vehicle tank platoon teamed up with a reinforced rifle platoon to carry out daytime reconnaissance of forward areas to engage the Chinese and gather intelligence on enemy positions and terrain. In April, six of these tank-infantry patrols, all within the KMC regimental area, did not make direct contact with the enemy but did attract mortar and artillery fire.

Marine artillery, which had been receiving its share of attention from Communist field guns,61 was faced by problems in two other46 respects. Although the enemy held only four more artillery weapons than did the Marines, General Seiden still lacked the ability to mass artillery fires to the same degree as did the Chinese.62 This limitation stemmed directly from the wide physical separation of 11th Marines batteries and the frontline infantry regiments being supported. A second problem, the loss of qualified forward observers—reserve officers due to return to the States for release from active service—forced the 11th Marines to begin a school to train infantry officers for this function. To make the course realistic, all firing was done at live targets.63

Marine artillery, which had been getting its fair share of attention from Communist field guns, faced issues in two other areas. Even though the enemy had only four more artillery pieces than the Marines, General Seiden still couldn't concentrate artillery fire as effectively as the Chinese. This limitation was mainly due to the significant distance between the 11th Marines' batteries and the infantry regiments they were supporting. A second problem was the loss of qualified forward observers—reserve officers who were about to return to the States for discharge from active duty—forcing the 11th Marines to start a school to train infantry officers for this role. To make the course realistic, all firing was done at live targets.

61 One artillery weapon, in particular, as well as the Marine tanks habitually drew the fury of Chinese counterfire. The heavy destructive power of the U.S. Army 8-inch, self-propelled howitzers firing on tough Chinese defensive positions, generally brought down on their own emplacements a rain of enemy shells, so sensitive were enemy commanders to these hard-hitting weapons. Pala comments.

61 One artillery weapon, in particular, along with the Marine tanks, regularly attracted the wrath of Chinese counterfire. The heavy destructive force of the U.S. Army's 8-inch self-propelled howitzers, which targeted tough Chinese defensive positions, often led to a downpour of enemy shells on their own locations, as enemy commanders were highly alert to these powerful weapons. Pala comments.

62 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 9, p. 9-39.

62 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 9, p. 9-39.

63 BGen Frederick P. Henderson ltr to CMC, dtd 6 Sep 66, hereafter Henderson ltr II.

63 BGen Frederick P. Henderson letter to CMC, dated September 6, 1966, hereafter Henderson letter II.

In April 1952, the 11th Marines organization had three light 105mm howitzer battalions (54 guns), one medium 155mm howitzer battalion (12 guns), the KMC 105mm howitzer battalion (18 pieces), and a 4.5-inch rocket battery (6 launchers). Attached to the 1st Marine Division and located in its sector were one battalion and one battery of the I Corps field artillery. The mission of the Marine artillery regiment was to provide accurate and timely fires in support of both the MLR and OPLR defenses, until withdrawal of the latter late in April. Batteries of the 11th Marines also fired on known and suspected Chinese gun emplacements and on targets of opportunity. The regiment also provided intelligence on enemy artillery.

In April 1952, the 11th Marines organization had three light 105mm howitzer battalions (54 guns), one medium 155mm howitzer battalion (12 guns), the KMC 105mm howitzer battalion (18 pieces), and a 4.5-inch rocket battery (6 launchers). Attached to the 1st Marine Division and located in its area were one battalion and one battery of the I Corps field artillery. The mission of the Marine artillery regiment was to deliver accurate and timely fire support for both the MLR and OPLR defenses, until the latter withdrew in late April. Batteries of the 11th Marines also targeted known and suspected Chinese gun positions and took advantage of target opportunities. The regiment also provided intelligence on enemy artillery.

Throughout April, Colonel Henderson’s units continued to improve their tactical and administrative areas, concentrating on field fortifications, wire communications, and road trafficability. In the last category, the artillery dozers and dump trucks not only did nearly all of this work for the 11th Marines but also provided “a fair amount of ‘direct support’ bulldozing to the infantry regiments and occasionally loaned dozers and operators to the engineers.”64

Throughout April, Colonel Henderson’s units kept enhancing their tactical and administrative areas, focusing on field fortifications, wire communications, and road trafficability. In the last category, the artillery dozers and dump trucks not only handled almost all of this work for the 11th Marines but also offered “a fair amount of ‘direct support’ bulldozing to the infantry regiments and occasionally lent dozers and operators to the engineers.”64

64 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Within a Marine aircraft wing, personnel and equipment for logistic support are purposely limited to carrying out the wing primary mission—providing air support during an amphibious operation. The wing T/O (Table of Organization) provides a streamlined organization with light, transportable organic equipment. Additional logistical support personnel and equipment are not included since this would result in (1) a duplication of support effort between the wing47 and landing force and (2) a great increase in wing transport shipping requirements. When the wing moves ashore, organic units render support necessary for operations on the airfield only. Responsibility for activities beyond this basic mission—airfield construction, maintenance of runways, and movement of supplies to the airfield—must come from more senior commands. Usually such assistance is obtained by attaching elements of a naval construction battalion and other logistical support units.

Within a Marine aircraft wing, the personnel and equipment for logistical support are intentionally kept minimal to focus on the wing's main mission—providing air support during an amphibious operation. The wing's T/O (Table of Organization) establishes a streamlined setup with lightweight, transportable organic equipment. Additional logistical support personnel and equipment are excluded to avoid (1) overlapping support efforts between the wing47 and landing force and (2) a significant increase in the wing's transport shipping needs. When the wing moves ashore, organic units provide the necessary support for operations at the airfield only. Any responsibilities beyond this basic mission—like airfield construction, runway maintenance, and moving supplies to the airfield—must be handled by higher command. Typically, this help is secured by attaching elements of a naval construction battalion and other logistical support units.

In April 1952, Naval Construction Battalion Unit 1804 assisted in the construction and maintenance received by MAG-33 at K-3. Here at the port of Pohang, a detachment from the 1st Combat Service Group controlled the movement of fuels, oils, lubricants, and ordnance to wing dumps. Amphibian tractors (LVTs) of Company B, 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, provided most of the transportation required for these supplies excepting ordnance. Assistance in the form of amphibious trucks (DUKWs) was furnished by a platoon from the 1st Amphibian Truck Company. When required, Marines of these two companies manhandled the supplies.

In April 1952, Naval Construction Battalion Unit 1804 helped with the construction and maintenance received by MAG-33 at K-3. At the port of Pohang, a team from the 1st Combat Service Group managed the movement of fuels, oils, lubricants, and ordnance to wing dumps. Most of the transportation for these supplies, except for ordnance, was provided by amphibian tractors (LVTs) from Company B, 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion. A platoon from the 1st Amphibian Truck Company provided additional support with amphibious trucks (DUKWs). When necessary, Marines from these two companies handled the supplies manually.

Logistical support for the Marine wing was governed by the same general procedures that applied to the division; 1st MAW supply requirements beyond its augmented capability became the responsibility of Eighth Army (2d LogCom) which furnished items common to both Marine and Army units. If this EUSAK agency did not stock the requisitioned item, it provided a substitute. Responsibility for resupply of aviation items rested with the U.S. Navy. Commander, Naval Forces, Far East (ComNavFE) replaced unserviceable aviation technical equipment such as aircraft parts and special maintenance tools. Commander, Service Force, Pacific (ComServPac) replenished aviation ordnance. Responsibility for supplying items peculiar to the Marine Corps rested with CG, FMFPac.

Logistical support for the Marine wing was managed by the same general procedures that applied to the division; 1st MAW supply needs beyond its enhanced capability became the responsibility of Eighth Army (2d LogCom), which provided items common to both Marine and Army units. If this EUSAK agency didn’t have the requested item in stock, it offered a substitute. The U.S. Navy was responsible for resupplying aviation items. The Commander of Naval Forces, Far East (ComNavFE) replaced unserviceable aviation technical equipment, like aircraft parts and specialized maintenance tools. The Commander of the Service Force, Pacific (ComServPac) replenished aviation ordnance. The responsibility for supplying items unique to the Marine Corps rested with the CG, FMFPac.

The repair and maintenance of 1st MAW equipment posed far less of a problem than the construction and upkeep of airfields. Major repair work on aircraft was satisfactorily performed in Japan by the wing support squadron at Itami, and by the U.S. Navy Fleet Air Service Squadron 11 (FASRon-11), located at the Naval Air Station, Atsugi. The establishment in Japan of the wing heavy maintenance facility depended, in part, upon its proximity to the wing flying squadrons. Other considerations were the availability to the wing commander of adequate air transport for continuous resupply of both48 routine and emergency items and reliable communications between the users and the maintenance unit. Because these conditions favoring removal of the heavy maintenance facility from the immediate combat area existed throughout Korean hostilities, it was possible for the maintenance units to operate successfully in Japan away from the combat zone.

The repair and upkeep of 1st MAW equipment was much less of a challenge than building and maintaining airfields. Major aircraft repairs were effectively handled in Japan by the wing support squadron at Itami and by the U.S. Navy Fleet Air Service Squadron 11 (FASRon-11) at the Naval Air Station, Atsugi. The establishment of a wing heavy maintenance facility in Japan relied, in part, on its closeness to the wing flying squadrons. Other factors included having enough air transport available for the wing commander to ensure ongoing resupply of both routine and emergency items, as well as dependable communication between the users and the maintenance unit. Because these favorable conditions for relocating the heavy maintenance facility from the immediate combat zone existed throughout the Korean conflict, the maintenance units could operate successfully in Japan, away from the combat area.

Air base construction and maintenance of airfield runways and taxiways had plagued wing operations since the early days of the Korean War. During the first winter these problems had appeared repeatedly at those installations where Marine air was either not properly supported or insufficiently augmented by the operational commander. Shortly after MAG-33 had moved to K-3 in early 1951, the wing commander requested emergency repairs for the runway and a permanent solution to the airfield maintenance difficulties. Assistance was made available, but it was insufficient. The repair force had to be augmented by Marines pulled away from their own vital jobs and by native laborers. Later, in the spring of 1952, when the Air Force assigned some of its engineers to assist, the maintenance problem almost disappeared.

Air base construction and the upkeep of airfield runways and taxiways had been a constant issue for wing operations since the early days of the Korean War. During the first winter, these problems frequently arose at installations where Marine air either lacked proper support or wasn't adequately reinforced by the operational commander. Shortly after MAG-33 moved to K-3 in early 1951, the wing commander requested emergency repairs for the runway and a lasting solution to the airfield maintenance issues. Assistance was provided, but it was not enough. The repair crew had to be supplemented by Marines pulled away from their own essential tasks and by local laborers. Later, in the spring of 1952, when the Air Force sent some of its engineers to help, the maintenance problem nearly vanished.

Motor transport within the wing was a continuing source of logistical problems. Vehicles for handling the heavier aviation ordnance were unsatisfactory because their configuration, of World War II vintage, did not permit them to service the newer aircraft. Other trucks lacked engine power or rigidity to withstand sustained use under primitive airfield conditions. World War II vehicles that had been preserved and placed in open storage required reconditioning before their use in Korea. Mechanics’ general and special tools had a high replacement rate throughout the entire period of wing operations in Korea.

Motor transport within the wing continued to create logistical issues. Vehicles meant for handling the heavier aviation ordnance were inadequate because their design, dating back to World War II, couldn’t service the newer aircraft. Other trucks lacked the engine power or sturdiness needed for prolonged use under rough airfield conditions. World War II vehicles that had been kept in storage outdoors needed to be refurbished before they could be used in Korea. The general and specialized tools for mechanics had a high replacement rate throughout the entire time the wing operated in Korea.

Aircraft fuel handling in April 1952 followed outmoded World War II methods. For K-3, amphibian vehicles received drummed fuel from ships and landed it at the beach. There MAG-33 personnel transferred the gasoline to 1,200-gallon fuel trucks, which then moved it to the airfield servicing area, where other Marines transferred it again, this time to 3,200-gallon stationary refuelers for dispensing into the aircraft. Although this method became highly developed, it was extremely slow and wasteful of manpower and vehicles in comparison to the tank farm system, which was soon to reach K-3.

Aircraft fuel handling in April 1952 used outdated World War II methods. For K-3, amphibious vehicles brought drummed fuel from ships and landed it at the beach. There, MAG-33 personnel transferred the gasoline to 1,200-gallon fuel trucks, which then took it to the airfield servicing area, where other Marines transferred it again, this time to 3,200-gallon stationary refuelers for dispensing into the aircraft. Although this method became well-developed, it was extremely slow and wasteful of manpower and vehicles compared to the tank farm system, which was soon to arrive at K-3.

Two areas of logistics continued to remain almost trouble free for49 division and wing Marines. Medical problems existed but were not extensive. During a five-day period in late March, Marine Air Control Group 2 experienced 13 cases of scarlet fever but no fatalities. That same month, the Pacific Fleet Medical Officer noted that MAG-12 sick bays were in excellent condition and that medical “personnel have shown great ingenuity in fabricating various items of medical equipment from scrap metal and lumber.”65

Two areas of logistics remained mostly trouble-free for49 division and wing Marines. There were medical issues, but they weren't widespread. During a five-day stretch in late March, Marine Air Control Group 2 reported 13 cases of scarlet fever, but no deaths. That same month, the Pacific Fleet Medical Officer observed that MAG-12 sick bays were in great shape and that medical “personnel have been very resourceful in creating various items of medical equipment from scrap metal and wood.”65

65 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 12, p. 12-8. The medical officer’s report to CinCPac noted that a vast improvement “in the spaces allocated for the care of the sick and wounded” had been made.

65 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 12, p. 12-8. The medical officer’s report to CinCPac mentioned that there was a significant improvement “in the areas designated for the care of the sick and injured.”

Evacuation of casualties and the utilization of air vehicles for transport of passengers and cargo proved to be the second asset in logistical operations. The Itami-based detachment of VMR-152 moved 7,757 personnel from the division and wing and 738.7 tons of cargo during April 1952. In addition, the R5D craft hauled a total of 325.2 tons of U.S. mail that month for the two Marine organizations. Speedy removal of patients to better equipped facilities in the rear by VMO-6 and HMR-161 helicopters was a giant step forward in life-saving techniques. VMO-6 usually provided this service, but early in April, Colonel McCutcheon’s squadron was assigned emergency medical evacuation duties to augment the observation squadron.66 Pilots flew these evacuation missions with almost total disregard for adverse weather or darkness, and without radar control or adequate instrumentation for all-weather operations.67

Evacuating casualties and using aircraft to transport passengers and cargo turned out to be a key asset in logistical operations. The Itami-based detachment of VMR-152 transferred 7,757 personnel from the division and wing and moved 738.7 tons of cargo during April 1952. Additionally, the R5D planes transported a total of 325.2 tons of U.S. mail that month for the two Marine organizations. Quickly getting patients to better-equipped facilities in the rear by VMO-6 and HMR-161 helicopters was a major advancement in life-saving techniques. VMO-6 typically handled this service, but early in April, Colonel McCutcheon’s squadron was assigned emergency medical evacuation duties to support the observation squadron.66 Pilots carried out these evacuation missions with nearly total disregard for bad weather or darkness, and without radar control or sufficient instruments for all-weather operations.67

66 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-69, p. 10-73.

66 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-69, p. 10-73.

67 Ibid., p. 10-68. Flights were not made in heavy fog. Test use by the Marine Corps Equipment Board of some of the equipment needed to navigate under conditions of reduced visibility was nearing the end of its development cycle.

67 Ibid., p. 10-68. Flights didn’t take place in thick fog. The Marine Corps Equipment Board was wrapping up testing some of the gear required for navigating in low visibility conditions.

Different Area, Different Problem68

68 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: CG, 1stMarDiv ltr to CMC, dtd 23 Jul 53, Subj: Type “C” Rpt: “Civilian Affairs and the Korean Service Corps, Mar 52-May 53,” hereafter CG, 1stMarDiv ltr, Civ Afrs and KSC; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52; HqBn, 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Mar-Apr 52.

68 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: CG, 1stMarDiv letter to CMC, dated July 23, 1953, Subject: Type “C” Report: “Civilian Affairs and the Korean Service Corps, March 1952-May 1953,” hereafter CG, 1stMarDiv letter, Civ Afrs and KSC; 1stMarDiv Command Diaries, March-April 1952; Headquarters Battalion, 1stMarDiv Command Diaries, March-April 1952.

An additional responsibility the 1st Marine Division inherited when it moved to western Korea was control of civilians within the division boundary. In eastern Korea, all nonmilitary personnel had been evacuated from the vicinity of the MINNESOTA Line in the division sector; they had not been removed from the JAMESTOWN area. Prior to the50 arrival of the division in the west, the STAYBACK Line, averaging seven miles to the rear of the Imjin River and running in a generally northeast-southwest direction, had been established to limit the movement of civilian personnel in the forward areas. The Marines soon found that their predecessors must have been lax, however, in requiring that Korean civilians remain behind STAYBACK. What seemed equally unsuitable to the division was the poor military-civilian relationship that had apparently existed for some time.

An additional responsibility the 1st Marine Division took on when it moved to western Korea was managing civilians within its boundary. In eastern Korea, all nonmilitary personnel had been evacuated from the area around the Minnesota Line, but they had not been removed from the JAMESTOWN area. Before the division arrived in the west, the Stay back Line, which was about seven miles behind the Imjin River and ran generally northeast to southwest, had been set up to restrict the movement of civilians in the forward zones. However, the Marines soon realized that their predecessors must have been relaxed in enforcing the requirement for Korean civilians to stay behind the STAY BACK Line. The division also found the poor military-civilian relationship that had apparently existed for some time to be equally concerning.

To correct the situation, General Selden cautioned his units to avoid unnecessary damage or destruction to the civilian economy. He directed his commanding officers to keep unauthorized Koreans away from Marine installations. Military police set up check points and instituted roving patrols to enforce division controls. Civil violators were turned over to Korean authorities or held for investigation before release. Civilians who lived in the forward areas were removed to the rear. They were prevented from going beyond STAYBACK until August 1952, when a controlled passage system was instituted.

To fix the situation, General Selden warned his units to avoid causing unnecessary damage or destruction to the civilian economy. He instructed his commanding officers to keep unauthorized Koreans away from Marine bases. Military police set up checkpoints and started roving patrols to enforce division rules. Civilian violators were handed over to Korean authorities or held for questioning before being released. Civilians living in the front areas were moved to the rear. They were not allowed to go past Stay back until August 1952, when a controlled passage system was put in place.


UN Command Activities—Defense of West and East Coast Korean Islands—Marine Air Operations—Spring 1952 on JAMESTOWNEnd of the Second Year of War—A Long Fourth of July—Changes in the Lineup—Replacement and Rotation—Logistical Operations, Summer 1952

UN Command Activities—Defense of West and East Coast Korean Islands—Marine Air Operations—Spring 1952 on JAMestownEnd of the Second Year of War—A Long Fourth of July—Changes in the Lineup—Replacement and Rotation—Logistical Operations, Summer 1952

UN Command Activities69

69 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: Cdr Malcolm W. Cagle, USN and Cdr Frank A. Manson, USN, The Sea War in Korea (Annapolis, Md.: U.S. Naval Institute, 1957), hereafter Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; James A. Field, Jr., History of United States Naval Operations, Korea (Washington: [Div. of Naval Hist], 1962), hereafter Field, NavOps, Korea; John Miller, Jr., Maj Owen J. Carroll, USA, and Margaret E. Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953 (Washington: OCMH, DA, 1958), hereafter Miller, Carroll, and Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953.

69 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: Cdr Malcolm W. Cagle, USN and Cdr Frank A. Manson, USN, The Sea War in Korea (Annapolis, Md.: U.S. Naval Institute, 1957), hereafter Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; James A. Field, Jr., History of United States Naval Operations, Korea (Washington: [Div. of Naval Hist], 1962), hereafter Field, NavOps, Korea; John Miller, Jr., Maj Owen J. Carroll, USA, and Margaret E. Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953 (Washington: OCMH, DA, 1958), hereafter Miller, Carroll, and Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953.

Movement of the 1st Marine Division to the west was part of an Eighth Army master plan to strengthen UN defenses and at the same time to enable South Korean forces to assume increased responsibility in the defense of their homeland. The tactical realignment in the spring of 1952 put more South Korean infantry units on the main line of resistance and buttressed the fighting front with five corps sectors instead of four. In the far west, the I Corps positions were newly manned (left to right) by the 1st Marine, 1st Commonwealth, 1st ROK, and the U.S. 45th Infantry Divisions. Next in line was IX Corps, whose left boundary General Van Fleet70 had shifted further west, which now had a divisional line up of the ROK 9th on the left, the U.S. 7th in the center, and the U.S. 40th on the right.

The motion of the 1st Marine Division to the west was part of an overall plan by the Eighth Army to strengthen UN defenses while also allowing South Korean forces to take on more responsibility for defending their country. The tactical adjustment in the spring of 1952 positioned more South Korean infantry units along the main line of resistance and reinforced the fighting front with five corps sectors instead of four. In the far west, the I Corps positions were newly staffed (left to right) by the 1st Marine, 1st Commonwealth, 1st ROK, and the U.S. 45th Infantry Divisions. Next was IX Corps, whose left boundary General Van Fleet70 had moved further west, now consisting of the ROK 9th on the left, the U.S. 7th in the center, and the U.S. 40th on the right.

70 General Van Fleet, CG, EUSAK since April 1951, had advocated a program in which South Korean troops would be rigorously trained to take over an increasingly greater part of the UNC defense efforts in Korea. See Mark W. Clark, From the Danube to the Yalu (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1954), p. 185, hereafter Clark, Danube to Yalu, quoted with permission of the publishers.

70 General Van Fleet, Commander of EUSAK since April 1951, had promoted a plan for South Korean troops to be thoroughly trained to assume a larger role in the United Nations Command defense efforts in Korea. See Mark W. Clark, From the Danube to the Yalu (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1954), p. 185, hereafter Clark, Danube to Yalu, quoted with permission of the publishers.

52

52

To fill in the central part of the EUSAK front where the change of IX Corps boundary had created a gap in the line, the UN commander inserted the ROK II Corps with three divisions (ROK 6th, ROK Capital, and ROK 3d) forward. Immediately to the right of this new ROK corps sector, the X Corps continued in approximately its same position on the east-central front. Its ROK 7th and U.S. 25th Divisions remained on line, while the ROK 8th had advanced to the former sector of the Marine division in the wild Punchbowl country. At the far right of the UN line, the ROK I Corps front was held by the ROK 11th Division at the X Corps boundary and the ROK 5th along the Sea of Japan. By 1 May 1952, nine Republic of Korea divisions had been emplaced on the UNC main defense line, three more than had been there in mid-March.

To fill the central part of the EUSAK front where the change in the IX Corps boundary created a gap in the line, the UN commander placed the ROK II Corps with three divisions (ROK 6th, ROK Capital, and ROK 3d) forward. Right next to this new ROK corps sector, the X Corps maintained its position on the east-central front. Its ROK 7th and U.S. 25th Divisions stayed in line, while the ROK 8th had moved up to the previous sector of the Marine division in the rugged Punchbowl area. At the far right of the UN line, the ROK I Corps front was held by the ROK 11th Division at the X Corps boundary and the ROK 5th along the Sea of Japan. By May 1, 1952, nine Republic of Korea divisions had been positioned on the UNC main defense line, three more than in mid-March.

Throughout Korea in March and April there had been a general stagnation of offensive action on both sides because of fog, rain, and mud. In May, however, the Chinese launched no less than 30 probing attacks against the ROK 1st Division in the I Corps sector, without gaining any significant advantage. To the right, the enemy and the U.S. 45th Division traded blows in several patrol actions. In June, major EUSAK combat action was still centered in the 45th’s sector, but the following month was marked by sharp battlefront clashes in nearly all Eighth Army division areas. For a two-week period in July and August, heavy seasonal rains limited both ground and air action. With the return of normal weather, heavy fighting again broke out, this time concentrated in the I Corps sector. This action did not abate until late August, when the onset of the heaviest rains of the season again drastically reduced military operations.

Throughout Korea in March and April, there was a general lull in offensive actions on both sides due to fog, rain, and mud. However, in May, the Chinese launched no less than 30 probing attacks against the ROK 1st Division in the I Corps sector, without gaining any significant advantage. To the right, the enemy and the U.S. 45th Division exchanged blows in several patrol actions. In June, major EUSAK combat action was still focused in the 45th’s sector, but the following month saw intense clashes across nearly all Eighth Army division areas. For a two-week period in July and August, heavy seasonal rains limited both ground and air operations. With the return of normal weather, intense fighting broke out again, this time concentrated in the I Corps sector. This fighting didn't subside until late August, when the heaviest rains of the season once more drastically reduced military operations.

Communist ground activity in the spring of 1952 was marked by increased artillery support which resulted in telling damage to UN infantry and artillery positions. Thus, during May, the enemy expended approximately 102,000 artillery and mortar rounds against the Allied front, roughly 12 times the number fired the previous July, just prior to the period of stabilized battlelines in Korea. The artillery buildup was accompanied by a sharp decrease in hostile air support activities. While the Chinese had flown 3,700 jet sorties during the first month of 1952, by June the monthly total had dropped to 308.

Communist ground activity in the spring of 1952 saw an increase in artillery support, which caused significant damage to UN infantry and artillery positions. In May, the enemy fired about 102,000 artillery and mortar rounds at the Allied front, roughly 12 times the amount fired the previous July, just before the battle lines in Korea stabilized. This artillery buildup coincided with a sharp decline in hostile air support activities. While the Chinese conducted 3,700 jet sorties in January 1952, the monthly total dropped to 308 by June.

As part of the balanced military forces, Allied air and sea units continued their active defense in support of UN ground units. Beginning in late May, Fifth Air Force shifted the emphasis of its53 destructive effort from interdiction of communication routes to the bombing of selected industrial targets. Naval air was committed to support the FAF programs. At sea, ships steamed almost at will to sustain the U.S. lifeline. Underscoring the complete UN control of Korean waters, large naval vessels offshore fired their big guns in support of ground troops. Off both the west and east coasts, Task Force (TF) 95 maintained its blockade of North Korean ports and reduced the extent of water travel that enemy craft could safely undertake. This same naval force was responsible for the Allied defense of islands located off the east and west coasts of Korea.

As part of the balanced military forces, Allied air and sea units continued their active defense in support of UN ground units. Starting in late May, the Fifth Air Force shifted its focus from disrupting communication routes to bombing specific industrial targets. Naval air units were dedicated to supporting the FAF programs. At sea, ships moved almost freely to maintain the U.S. lifeline. Reinforcing the complete UN control of Korean waters, large naval vessels offshore fired their big guns in support of ground troops. Off both the west and east coasts, Task Force (TF) 95 upheld its blockade of North Korean ports and limited the safe water travel of enemy vessels. This same naval force was responsible for the Allied defense of islands located off the east and west coasts of Korea.

Defense of West and East Coast Korean Islands71

71 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9; No. 5, Chap. 8; West Coast Island Defense Element ComdDs, Feb-Oct 52, hereafter WCIDE ComdD, with date; East Coast Island Defense ComdDs, Jan-Oct 52, hereafter ECIDE ComdD, with date; Col William K. Davenport ltr to CMC, dtd 27 Jun 52, Subj: Type D Report of duty as Commander West Coast Island Defense Element (CTE 95.15); Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Field, NavOps, Korea.

71 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9; No. 5, Chap. 8; West Coast Island Defense Element ComdDs, Feb-Oct 52, hereafter WCIDE ComdD, with date; East Coast Island Defense ComdDs, Jan-Oct 52, hereafter ECIDE ComdD, with date; Col William K. Davenport letter to CMC, dated 27 Jun 52, Subject: Type D Report of duty as Commander West Coast Island Defense Element (CTE 95.15); Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Field, NavOps, Korea.

Just off the northwest Korean mainland a string of islands extends from the mouth of the Yalu River down around the peninsula to Pusan in the southeast. Most of these islands are tiny and are located south of the 38th Parallel. Only a few lie off the east coast, and these are clustered primarily in the North Korean harbor of Wonsan. By early 1951, UN forces exercised control over most of the Korean islands. Their tactical importance is shown from their diverse use as sites for UN Command intelligence activities, USAF radar installations, locations for the emergency landing strips used by Allied planes, bases for U.S. search and rescue operations, and as springboards for possible thrusts into enemy rear areas.72

Just off the northwest coast of Korea, a chain of islands stretches from the mouth of the Yalu River down around the peninsula to Pusan in the southeast. Most of these islands are small and lie south of the 38th Parallel. Only a few are off the east coast, and they are mainly clustered in the North Korean harbor of Wonsan. By early 1951, UN forces controlled most of the Korean islands. Their strategic significance is evident from their various uses, including sites for UN Command intelligence activities, USAF radar installations, emergency landing strips for Allied planes, bases for U.S. search and rescue operations, and launch points for potential attacks into enemy territory.72

72 Evidence of Chinese concern about such rear area attacks is apparent in the countermeasures taken: “Order of Battle reports indicated that a total of three North Korean Corps and three Chinese Communist Armies were engaged in coastal defense operations on the east and west coasts of North Korea.” PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 5, p. 8-79.

72 Evidence of China's worries about those attacks in the rear is clear from the countermeasures they implemented: “Order of Battle reports showed that three North Korean Corps and three Chinese Communist Armies were involved in coastal defense operations on both the east and west coasts of North Korea.” PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 5, p. 8-79.

Another reason for holding some of the islands had come to light during truce negotiations in December 1951. At that time, in an attempt to expedite the successful conclusion of the truce meetings, UN representatives had offered the Communists all the islands north of the 38th Parallel. Brushing aside the tactical value of the proposal, the enemy boasted that he could capture the islands at any55 time. In November 1951 the Communists had, in fact, seized two western islands near the mouth of the Yalu. The 1,000 defending guerrillas there—former North Koreans working for the UNC—had been unable to stem the assault. The UN Command promptly reviewed the island situation and on 6 January 1952 gave TF 95, the United Nations Blockading and Escort Force, responsibility for both overall defense and local ground defense for the 11 coastal islands north of the 38th Parallel and the 4 islands immediately south of this boundary. Two subordinate blockade task groups, one in the west and another in the east, were responsible for the defense of these islands.

Another reason for holding some of the islands came to light during truce negotiations in December 1951. At that time, in an effort to speed up the successful conclusion of the truce meetings, UN representatives offered the Communists all the islands north of the 38th Parallel. Ignoring the tactical significance of the proposal, the enemy boasted that they could capture the islands at any55 time. In November 1951, the Communists had actually seized two western islands near the mouth of the Yalu. The 1,000 defending guerrillas there—former North Koreans working for the UNC—had been unable to stop the attack. The UN Command quickly revisited the island situation and on January 6, 1952, assigned TF 95, the United Nations Blockading and Escort Force, the responsibility for both overall defense and local ground defense of the 11 coastal islands north of the 38th Parallel and the 4 islands immediately south of this boundary. Two subordinate blockade task groups, one in the west and another in the east, were tasked with the defense of these islands.

MAP 6 K. White

MAP 6 K. White

WEST COAST ISLAND DEFENSE ELEMENT

West Coast Island Defense Unit

SUMMER 1952

SUMMER 1952

In the west, Task Group (TG) 95.1 was charged with the defense of six islands. (See Map 6.) Two of these, Sok-to and Cho-do, lie between the 38th and 39th Parallels; the four remaining islands, Paengyong-do, Taechong-do, Yongpyong-do, and Tokchok-to, are above the 37th Parallel. In the east, TG 95.2 was responsible for keeping nine islands north of the 38th Parallel in friendly hands. Situated in Wonsan harbor are Mo-do, Sin-do, So-do, Tae-do, Hwangto-do, Ung-do, and Yo-do, the largest. (See Map 7.) Another island, Yang-do, actually a two-island group further north in the area of the 41 st Parallel, is 18 miles northeast of the coastal city of Songjin. The southernmost island, tiny Nan-do, is below Wonsan and the 39th Parallel and lies 10 miles northeast of Kojo, another coastal city.

In the west, Task Group (TG) 95.1 was responsible for defending six islands. (See Map 6.) Two of these, Sok-to and Cho-do, are located between the 38th and 39th Parallels; the other four islands, Paengyong-do, Taechong-do, Yongpyong-do, and Tokchok-to, are situated above the 37th Parallel. In the east, TG 95.2 was in charge of making sure nine islands north of the 38th Parallel remained under friendly control. In Wonsan harbor, you'll find Mo-do, Sin-do, So-do, Tae-do, Hwangto-do, Ung-do, and the largest one, Yo-do. (See Map 7.) Another island, Yang-do, which is actually a two-island group further north near the 41st Parallel, is located 18 miles northeast of the coastal city of Songjin. The southernmost island, the small Nan-do, is situated below Wonsan and the 39th Parallel and lies 10 miles northeast of Kojo, another coastal city.

Ground defense of the islands had been, at best, a haphazard arrangement before TF 95 took over the responsibility. Many of the islands, especially those inhabited by friendly guerrillas, had neither plans for a proper defense nor commanders experienced in organizing resistance to enemy attack. Soon after the two islands near the mouth of the Yalu were taken, ROK Marines were rushed to those islands considered most strategic for South Korean defense. Late in 1951, U.S. Marines had been assigned to the area in an advisory capacity. By early 1952, Marine Corps detachments were in command of the island defense activities for both task groups. Korean Marines provided a majority of the actual defending forces.

Ground defense of the islands was, at best, a random setup before TF 95 took over the responsibility. Many of the islands, especially those occupied by friendly guerrillas, lacked proper defense plans and commanders experienced in organizing resistance against enemy attacks. Shortly after the two islands near the mouth of the Yalu were captured, ROK Marines were quickly sent to the islands deemed most crucial for South Korean defense. By late 1951, U.S. Marines had been assigned to the area in an advisory role. By early 1952, Marine Corps detachments were in charge of the island defense operations for both task groups. Korean Marines made up the majority of the actual defending forces.

Although the 1st Marine Division initially had supplied the officers and men for the island security missions, in January 1952 FMFPac took on direct responsibility for furnishing personnel and providing for their administrative and logistical support through the 1st Provisional Casual Company, FMFPac. Located at Otsu, Japan, the56 company was the administrative headquarters for seriously wounded Marine division and wing personnel recuperating in service hospitals in Japan. Recovered patients who volunteered for duty with the offshore commands provided the bulk of the Marines used in this defense. Major responsibilities were to plan, organize, and conduct the defense of these islands off the Korean west and east coasts. A task element under each task group was created for this purpose.

Although the 1st Marine Division initially provided the officers and personnel for the island security missions, in January 1952, FMFPac took over the responsibility for supplying staff and managing their administrative and logistical support through the 1st Provisional Casual Company, FMFPac. Based in Otsu, Japan, the 56 company served as the administrative headquarters for seriously injured Marine division and wing personnel recovering in service hospitals in Japan. Recovered patients who volunteered for duty with the offshore commands made up the majority of the Marines used in this defense. The main responsibilities were to plan, organize, and conduct the defense of these islands off the coasts of Korea. A task element under each task group was established for this purpose.

With its headquarters at Paengyang-do, Task Element (TE) 95.15, the West Coast Island Defense Element (WCIDE), was organized early in January 1952. The following month, the initial complement of U.S. Marines arrived. Colonel William K. Davenport, Jr., element commander, assigned his 5 officers and 29 enlisted men to the 4 most critical islands and to his staff. Those islands garrisoned were Cho-do and Sok-to, north of the Parallel and both within range of enemy mainland guns, and Paengyang-do and Yongpyong-do, to the south. Taechong-do, near the command island, and Tokchok-to, southwest of Inchon, were both considered secure and not provided with U.S. Marine commanders. At each of the four occupied islands, Marines reconnoitered the terrain, drew up plans for preparation of defensive positions, organized and trained the troops available, and began the laborious task of constructing the defense. Protection against long-range hostile artillery fire was emphasized for the northern Sok-to and Cho-do garrisons.

With its headquarters on Paengyang-do, Task Element (TE) 95.15, the West Coast Island Defense Element (WCIDE), was established in early January 1952. The following month, the first group of U.S. Marines arrived. Colonel William K. Davenport, Jr., the element commander, assigned his 5 officers and 29 enlisted men to the 4 most critical islands and to his staff. The garrisoned islands were Cho-do and Sok-to, located north of the Parallel and within range of enemy mainland artillery, and Paengyang-do and Yongpyong-do, to the south. Taechong-do, near the command island, and Tokchok-to, southwest of Inchon, were considered secure and did not have U.S. Marine commanders. At each of the four occupied islands, Marines surveyed the terrain, developed plans for defensive positions, organized and trained the available troops, and began the challenging work of building the defense. Emphasis was placed on protection against long-range enemy artillery fire for the northern Sok-to and Cho-do garrisons.

Off the other long coast of Korea, TE 95.23, the East Coast Island Defense Element (ECIDE), commanded until early May 1952 by Colonel Frank M. Reinecke, had an almost entirely different situation. Eight of the nine islands in the vicinity of Wonsan Harbor or north of Songjin that ECIDE was responsible for were within range of Communist shore batteries and thus frequently fired upon. Even before the January 1952 decision, the U.S. Navy had been charged with the security of these east coast islands north of the 38th Parallel. For these reasons ECIDE defenses had to maintain a greater state of readiness and were more advanced than in the west. Fire support ships and land based U.S. Marine naval gunfire spotting teams from 1st ANGLICO (Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison Company), FMF, which also provided forward air controllers for the KMC regiment, stood by at all times to silence unfriendly artillery fire emanating from the mainland. The Marines had also trained Korean Marines to handle the spotting missions.

Off the other long coast of Korea, TE 95.23, the East Coast Island Defense Element (ECIDE), which was led by Colonel Frank M. Reinecke until early May 1952, faced an entirely different situation. Eight out of the nine islands near Wonsan Harbor or north of Songjin that ECIDE was responsible for were within range of Communist shore batteries and were frequently targeted. Even before the January 1952 decision, the U.S. Navy had been assigned the security of these east coast islands north of the 38th Parallel. For these reasons, ECIDE's defenses needed to be on higher alert and were more sophisticated than those in the west. Fire support ships and land-based U.S. Marine naval gunfire spotting teams from 1st ANGLICO (Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison Company), FMF, which also provided forward air controllers for the KMC regiment, were always on standby to neutralize hostile artillery fire coming from the mainland. The Marines had also trained Korean Marines to carry out the spotting missions.

57

57

MAP 7 K. WHITE

MAP 7 K. WHITE

EAST COAST DEFENSE ELEMENT

EAST COAST DEFENSE TEAM

SUMMER 1952

SUMMER 1952

58

58

A number of events of major interest occurred during those first difficult weeks following organization of the two offshore island commands. On 19 and 20 February, elements of two North Korean infantry battalions launched an unsuccessful assault against the two Yang-do islands. The combined “action of the island garrison and UN surface forces”73 repulsed the enemy attempt, which had been planned to gain intelligence and kill as many of the defenders as possible.74 On the heels of this action, with the first enemy effort to take an east coast island, came an unexpected bonus in the form of a defector. Brigadier General Lee Il, NKPA, came ashore on 21 February at Tae-do “in a stolen sampan with a briefcase full of top secret papers, a head full of top secret plans, and a strong desire to make himself useful.”75 He was rushed immediately to Eighth Army intelligence officers.

A number of significant events took place during those first tough weeks after the organization of the two offshore island commands. On February 19 and 20, units from two North Korean infantry battalions launched a failed attack on the two Yang-do islands. The combined "efforts of the island garrison and UN surface forces" 73 successfully repelled the enemy attempt, which aimed to gather intelligence and eliminate as many defenders as possible.74 Following this action, right after the first enemy attempt to seize an east coast island, an unexpected development occurred in the form of a defector. Brigadier General Lee Il, NKPA, arrived on February 21 at Tae-do "in a stolen sampan with a briefcase full of top secret documents, a mind full of top secret plans, and a strong desire to be helpful."75 He was swiftly taken to Eighth Army intelligence officers.

73 CinPac Weekly Intel Digest No. 23-52, dtd 6 Jun 52, included as App. 17 to PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 9-110.

73 CinPac Weekly Intel Digest No. 23-52, dated June 6, 1952, included as Appendix 17 to PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, pages 9-110.

74 First Lieutenant Joseph S. Bartos, Jr., a former All-American football great, also distinguished himself during the Yang-do action. His cool, resourceful, and valiant leadership during the two-day defense earned him the Silver Star Medal. BGen Frank M. Reinecke comments on draft MS, dtd 25 Aug 66.

74 First Lieutenant Joseph S. Bartos, Jr., a former All-American football star, also made a name for himself during the Yang-do conflict. His calm, clever, and brave leadership during the two-day defense earned him the Silver Star Medal. BGen Frank M. Reinecke comments on draft MS, dtd 25 Aug 66.

75 Field, NavOps, Korea, p. 426.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Field, NavOps, Korea, p. 426.

The next day command personnel of the west coast TE 95.15 were treated to a surprise, though not so pleasant as the unforeseen defection of the NKPA general. Rear Admiral George C. Dyer, Commander Task Force (CTF) 95, and his staff were engaged in an inspection of the WCIDE islands. While the party was looking over the antiaircraft defenses at Paengyong-do:

The next day, the command staff of the west coast TE 95.15 were caught off guard, but it wasn't as shocking as the unexpected defection of the NKPA general. Rear Admiral George C. Dyer, Commander Task Force (CTF) 95, and his team were inspecting the WCIDE islands. While they were examining the antiaircraft defenses at Paengyong-do:

... an aircraft of VMA-312 made a pass at the CP, followed closely by a second plane. The second aircraft made a message drop and accidentally released a 500-pound bomb, which landed from 75–100 feet west of the CP, shattering all windows and blowing all the doors off their hinges. Personnel harbored within the CP were thrown to the floor by the concussion, a few sustaining minor cuts and bruises, but no fatalities were incurred.... Commanding Officer, USS Bairoko [the carrier to which VMA-312 was assigned], sent a note of apology to CTE 95.15 and later followed up with material to repair the CP.76

... an aircraft from VMA-312 flew over the command post, closely followed by a second plane. The second aircraft dropped a message and accidentally released a 500-pound bomb, which landed about 75–100 feet west of the command post, shattering all the windows and blowing the doors off their hinges. The personnel inside the command post were thrown to the floor by the blast, with a few suffering minor cuts and bruises, but thankfully, there were no fatalities. The Commanding Officer of the USS Bairoko [the carrier to which VMA-312 was assigned] sent a note of apology to CTE 95.15 and later provided materials to repair the command post.76

76 CTE 95.15 ComdD, 1 Feb-31 May 52, p. 8.

76 CTE 95.15 ComdD, 1 Feb-31 May 52, p. 8.

In March, CTG 95.1 directed the occupation of Ho-do, barely more than a speck of dirt 4,000 yards south of Sok-to and within 400 yards of the Communist mainland. Despite Colonel Davenport’s objection that the proposed action was beyond the defensive mission59 of his command and that the proximity of Ho-do to the enemy shore made the island untenable,77 the task group commander would not rescind the directive. After a detailed reconnaissance by First Lieutenant Wallace E. Jobusch, Colonel Davenport ordered a reinforced Korean Marine Corps platoon to occupy the island. This order was carried out, but during the night of 25–26 March the platoon lost its newly gained objective to a well-coordinated enemy amphibious attack. Not a single Korean Marine survivor could be accounted for at daylight. On 2 April, however, after the enemy force had departed Ho-do, six of the platoon turned up on Sok-to. They had survived by hiding out at Ho-do. None of the others were ever seen again. After the island was overrun, it was not reoccupied by Allied forces.

In March, CTG 95.1 ordered the takeover of Ho-do, which was just a small piece of land about 4,000 yards south of Sok-to and only 400 yards from the Communist mainland. Despite Colonel Davenport’s objection that this action was beyond the defensive mission of his command and that Ho-do's closeness to the enemy shore made it very risky, the task group commander refused to cancel the order. After a thorough reconnaissance by First Lieutenant Wallace E. Jobusch, Colonel Davenport instructed a reinforced Korean Marine Corps platoon to take control of the island. The order was executed, but during the night of March 25–26, the platoon lost their newly acquired position due to a coordinated enemy amphibious attack. By dawn, not a single Korean Marine survivor could be found. However, on April 2, after the enemy had left Ho-do, six members of the platoon appeared on Sok-to. They had survived by hiding on Ho-do. None of the others were ever seen again. Once the island was overtaken, Allied forces did not reclaim it.

77 Colonel Davenport later pointed out that the enemy could easily employ high-powered rifles against Ho-do occupants, that resupply posed problems to his command, and that at times the enemy could even walk to Ho-do over the winter ice. Col William K. Davenport ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 7 Sep 66.

77 Colonel Davenport later noted that the enemy could easily use high-powered rifles against the occupants of Ho-do, that resupply was an issue for his command, and that at times the enemy could even walk to Ho-do over the winter ice. Col William K. Davenport ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 7 Sep 66.

After this latest offensive action in the west, the Communists made no further attempts to seize any of the islands. U.S. and ROK Marines enjoyed a period of relative freedom from enemy harassment, except for frequent shore battery shelling directed against the east coast islands. For WCIDE command members the quiet island duty was interrupted only occasionally by hostile artillery fire although rumors of imminent enemy landings abounded. On 13 October, however, the enemy bombed Cho-do in the first air attack made against an island garrison since the U.S. Marines had been assigned the west coast island command responsibility. No casualties resulted from this raid. The lull in enemy activity that then ensued enabled island personnel to devote increased efforts towards improvement of their defenses.

After the latest offensive in the west, the Communists stopped trying to take any of the islands. U.S. and ROK Marines had a period of relative peace without much enemy interference, aside from regular shelling from shore batteries targeting the east coast islands. For WCIDE command members, the quiet duty on the islands was only occasionally interrupted by enemy artillery, even though there were many rumors about potential enemy landings. However, on October 13, the enemy bombed Cho-do, marking the first air attack on an island garrison since the U.S. Marines took over command of the west coast islands. Fortunately, no casualties occurred from this raid. The resulting lull in enemy activity allowed island personnel to focus more on improving their defenses.

Marines instructed, drilled, and conducted tactical exercises for the island forces. Island commanders supervised the construction and improvement of gun pits and other defense installations. At the ECIDE command island, Yo-do, a 2,700-foot airstrip (Briscoe Field) for emergency landings and intelligence flights had been completed by June. Since much of the labor was performed by Koreans, the language barrier sometimes created difficulties. In all these activities the Marines found that they were hampered but not unduly burdened by this problem.

Marines trained and ran tactical exercises for the island forces. Island commanders oversaw the building and upgrading of gun pits and other defense setups. At the ECIDE command island, Yo-do, a 2,700-foot airstrip (Briscoe Field) for emergency landings and intelligence flights was completed by June. Since much of the work was done by Koreans, the language barrier sometimes caused issues. In all these activities, the Marines found that while this problem was a challenge, it didn't overly hinder them.

One condition, however, did handicap operations of the island60 Marines. This was the supply situation which was prevented from becoming desperate only because the Marines were able to borrow and obtain necessities from other service activities. The inability of the island Marines to draw needed supplies from the responsible U.S. Army agency developed as a result of the slowness of the Marines in approving the task element tables of equipment (T/E),78 and from insistence of the supplying activity that it would deal only with those units that had approved tables of equipment. The urgency of the situation was alleviated in May when weekly supply flights were begun by the 1st MAW. Even when surface ships did arrive with provisions, Marines frequently discovered that items which had been invoiced were missing.79 Consumables, especially, had a high rate of disappearance.

One issue, however, did hinder the operations of the island60 Marines. This was the supply situation, which was kept from becoming critical only because the Marines were able to borrow and obtain essentials from other service branches. The island Marines' inability to get necessary supplies from the responsible U.S. Army agency arose from the slow approval process for the task element tables of equipment (T/E) by the Marines, and from the supplying agency's insistence that it would only deal with units that had approved equipment tables. The urgency of the situation eased in May when the 1st MAW began weekly supply flights. Even when surface ships arrived with supplies, Marines often found that items listed on invoices were missing. Consumables, in particular, had a high rate of loss.

78 A T/E is a listing of equipment that a unit needs to accomplish its mission. Tables vary according to type of unit and its mission.

78 A T/E is a list of equipment that a unit requires to complete its mission. The tables differ based on the type of unit and its mission.

79 Commenting on logistical matters, Colonel Kenneth A. King, who during 1952 commanded first the WCIDE and then 1st CSG, was of the opinion that the main difficulty lay “not in getting requisitions filled, but in getting delivery of what was approved” due to the fact Marines were not assigned to processing of requisitions and delivery of supplies. He had high praise for the concern and assistance of 1st MAW units as well as Captain G. L. G. Evans (RN) of HMS Ocean and various other United Kingdom ship captains. Colonel King further commented that “for the benefit of Marines who may have to serve in isolated areas, and I imagine this often prevails in Vietnam today, it cannot be emphasized too strongly that the Marine Corps should be very reluctant to leave the support of any of its elements, no matter how small, to other services or nationalities.” Col Kenneth A. King ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 24 Aug 66.

79 Commenting on logistical issues, Colonel Kenneth A. King, who in 1952 led both the WCIDE and then the 1st CSG, believed that the main challenge was “not in getting requisitions filled, but in getting delivery of what was approved” because Marines were not assigned to handle requisition processing and supply delivery. He praised the dedication and support from 1st MAW units as well as Captain G. L. G. Evans (RN) of HMS Ocean and several other UK ship captains. Colonel King also noted that “for the benefit of Marines who may have to serve in remote areas, which I believe is often the case in Vietnam today, it cannot be emphasized enough that the Marine Corps should be very hesitant to leave the support of any of its elements, no matter how small, to other services or nationalities.” Col Kenneth A. King ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 24 Aug 66.

Marine Air Operations80

80 Unless otherwise noted, the material for this section has been derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 10; No. 5, Chap. 9; 1st MAW ComdDs, May-Aug 52; MAG-12 ComdDs, Jun, Aug 52; Robert F. Futrell, The United States Air Force in Korea, 1950–1953 (New York: Duell, Sloan, and Pearce, 1961), hereafter Futrell, USAF, Korea.

80 Unless stated otherwise, the information for this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 10; No. 5, Chap. 9; 1st MAW ComdDs, May-Aug 52; MAG-12 ComdDs, Jun, Aug 52; Robert F. Futrell, The United States Air Force in Korea, 1950–1953 (New York: Duell, Sloan, and Pearce, 1961), hereafter Futrell, USAF, Korea.

Close air support of ground troops remained an almost forgotten mission of Fifth Air Force tactical aircraft. When planes were allotted for close support, both their customary late arrival over the target area and pilot inefficiency left Marine ground commanders less than satisfied.81 The particular concern of General Jerome, the new 1st MAW commander, was the continuing limited opportunity for his Marines to execute their normal primary mission—close air support61 of frontline troops. Although FAF assigned Marine pilots to support the 1st Marine Division whenever possible, the infrequent number of close air support missions performed under the existing sortie limit was beginning to detract from the quality of delivery. General Jerome set out to remedy this unfavorable situation.

Close air support for ground troops had become an almost forgotten mission for the Fifth Air Force's tactical aircraft. When planes were allocated for close support, their usual late arrival over the target area and pilot inefficiency left Marine ground commanders feeling dissatisfied. The main concern for General Jerome, the new 1st MAW commander, was the ongoing limited chances for his Marines to carry out their primary mission—close air support of frontline troops. Although FAF assigned Marine pilots to support the 1st Marine Division whenever they could, the low number of close air support missions conducted under the current sortie limit was starting to impact the quality of their operations. General Jerome was determined to fix this unfavorable situation.

81 1st MAW ComdD, Feb 52, quoted in PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-45.

81 1st MAW ComdD, Feb 52, quoted in PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-45.

Working with General Selden, the Marine wing commander prevailed upon the Air Force to permit close air support training of wing pilots and of forward air controllers with the Marine division. On 19 May, CG, FAF lifted the close air support restriction that he had imposed in front of General Selden’s MLR. By agreement between the FAF and the two Marine commanders, Fifth Air Force would permit the scheduling of 12 close air support sorties daily for a one-month period, MAG-12 was given this training mission, to begin on 21 May.82

Working with General Selden, the Marine wing commander convinced the Air Force to allow close air support training for wing pilots and forward air controllers with the Marine division. On May 19, the Commander of the Fifth Air Force lifted the close air support restriction he had imposed in front of General Selden’s Main Line of Resistance. By agreement between the Fifth Air Force and the two Marine commanders, Fifth Air Force would allow scheduling of 12 close air support sorties daily for one month. MAG-12 was assigned this training mission, starting on May 21.82

82 Two months earlier, FAF had begun “a program for training pilots in close air support techniques.... Initially, all training missions for this division were flown by Air Force aircraft.” The flights, not in response to specific requests, were assigned by the G-3, I Corps. CG, 1stMarDiv ltr to CG, FMFPac dtd 23 May 52, Subj: CAS sum for pd 1 Jan-30 Apr 52, cited in PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-196. These flights ceased just before the ones from MAG-12 began. 1st MarDiv ComdD, May 53, p. 4. A 1st MarDiv staff officer, who had observed the frequency of General Jerome’s visits to the division CP to discuss the new close air support training program, has credited the two Marine CGs for their “great amount of coordinated personal aggressiveness in bringing this about.” Col Robert A. McGill comments on draft MS, Sep 66, hereafter McGill comments.

82 Two months earlier, FAF had started "a program to train pilots in close air support techniques.... Initially, all training missions for this division were conducted by Air Force aircraft." The flights, which weren't in response to specific requests, were assigned by the G-3, I Corps. CG, 1stMarDiv ltr to CG, FMFPac dated 23 May 52, Subject: CAS summary for period 1 Jan-30 Apr 52, cited in PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-196. These flights stopped just before the ones from MAG-12 began. 1st MarDiv ComdD, May 53, p. 4. A 1st MarDiv staff officer, who noted the frequency of General Jerome’s visits to the division CP to discuss the new close air support training program, credited the two Marine CGs for their "significant amount of coordinated personal aggressiveness in making this happen." Col Robert A. McGill comments on draft MS, Sep 66, hereafter McGill comments.

The objective of the CAS program, in addition to providing operational training and practice for Marine ground officers, air controllers, and pilots, was to inflict maximum casualties on Chinese troops and to increase the destruction and damage to their positions. Before assigning a pilot to the actual training flights, MAG-12 sent him on a tour of the front lines to become better familiarized with the topography, the restricted (“no-fly”) areas, and probable enemy targets. Air strikes requested by the division went directly to MAG-12. Initially, a limitation of 12 sorties per day was established, but on 17 July—the program having already been extended beyond its original 30-day limit—a new ceiling of 20 daily sorties went into effect. The division was also allowed additional flights above this prescribed daily sortie number when air support was needed to repel a large-scale enemy attack or to assist in a major Marine ground assault.

The goal of the CAS program, besides offering hands-on training for Marine ground officers, air controllers, and pilots, was to cause maximum casualties among Chinese troops and to increase the destruction of their positions. Before a pilot participated in the actual training flights, MAG-12 sent him to tour the front lines to get better acquainted with the terrain, the restricted (“no-fly”) zones, and potential enemy targets. Air strikes requested by the division were directed to MAG-12. At first, there was a limit of 12 sorties per day, but on July 17—after the program had already been extended beyond its original 30-day limit—a new cap of 20 daily sorties was implemented. The division was also permitted additional flights beyond this daily sortie limit when air support was required to counter a large-scale enemy attack or to assist in a major Marine ground assault.

Almost as soon as the Marines began to derive the benefit of the training program, the flights were terminated by FAF. On 3 August62 1952, following a complaint by CG, Eighth Army that Marines were getting a disproportionate share of the close air support sorties, the Fifth Air Force notified General Jerome that the special program would end the next day. General Selden was instructed to request air support “in the same manner as other divisions on the Army front.”83 Despite the abrupt termination of the training program, the division had derived substantial benefits from the 12 weeks of Marine-type close air support. “Air attacks were the most useful weapon for dealing with enemy dug-in on the reverse slopes,”84 according to an official analysis. One regimental commander reported that the 1,000-pound bombs were effective in destroying enemy bunkers and further noted that the strikes had produced good results in the “destruction or damaging of enemy artillery and mortar pieces.”85 Another senior officer commented that air overhead kept the Communists “buttoned up,” which permitted Marines greater freedom of movement for tactical and logistical operations.86

Almost as soon as the Marines started benefiting from the training program, FAF shut it down. On August 362, 1952, after a complaint from CG, Eighth Army that the Marines were getting too much of the close air support sorties, the Fifth Air Force informed General Jerome that the special program would end the next day. General Selden was directed to request air support “in the same way as other divisions on the Army front.”83 Despite the sudden end of the training program, the division had gained significant benefits from 12 weeks of Marine-type close air support. “Air attacks were the most effective weapon for dealing with the enemy entrenched on the reverse slopes,”84 according to an official analysis. One regimental commander mentioned that the 1,000-pound bombs were effective in destroying enemy bunkers and further noted that the strikes had produced good results in the “destruction or damage of enemy artillery and mortar pieces.”85 Another senior officer said that having air support kept the Communists “buttoned up,” allowing Marines greater freedom of movement for tactical and logistical operations.86

83 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-54.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-54.

84 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 9-36.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, pp. 9-36.

85 1st MarDiv ComdD, Jun 52, p. 2.

85 1st MarDiv ComdD, Jun 52, p. 2.

86 Col Russell E. Honsowetz ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 14 Sep 66.

86 Col Russell E. Honsowetz letter to Head, History Branch, G-3 Division, Headquarters Marine Corps, dated September 14, 1966.

A second type of Marine close air support aided the mission of Marine infantrymen in western Korea during the summer of 1952. This was controlled radar bombing, which permitted delivery of aviation ordnance at night or under other conditions of limited or poor visibility. The Air Force had introduced the concept into Korea in January 1951, had tested and evaluated it in combat, and shortly thereafter had put it to good use against the Communist spring offensives that year. Based on a concept oriented towards deep support of troops in extended land campaigns, the Air Force system made use of 20-ton vans to house its ground components.87

A second type of Marine close air support helped the mission of Marine infantrymen in western Korea during the summer of 1952. This was controlled radar bombing, which allowed the dropping of bombs at night or in situations with limited or poor visibility. The Air Force introduced this concept in Korea in January 1951, tested and evaluated it in combat, and soon after effectively used it against the Communist spring offensives that year. Based on a strategy focused on providing deep support to troops in extended land campaigns, the Air Force system utilized 20-ton vans to accommodate its ground components.87

87 As an Air Force spokesman noted, “... the AN/MPQ-2 radars introduced into Korea in January 1951 were Strategic Air Command bomb scoring radars and not tactical equipment. This would explain the large vans.” Robert C. Futrell, Historian, Hist Studies Br USAF Hist Div, comments on draft MS, dtd 12 Oct 66. Dr. Futrell authored the definitive unclassified history of Air Force operations in Korea, previously cited as USAF, Korea.

87 As an Air Force spokesperson pointed out, “... the AN/MPQ-2 radars that were brought to Korea in January 1951 were Strategic Air Command bomb scoring radars, not tactical equipment. This clarifies the presence of the large vans.” Robert C. Futrell, Historian, Historical Studies Branch USAF Historical Division, comments on draft manuscript, dated October 12, 1966. Dr. Futrell wrote the definitive unclassified history of Air Force operations in Korea, previously referenced as USAF, Korea.

The Marine equipment, on the other hand, was more mobile since it was to be employed close to friendly lines. Referred to as the MPQ-14,88 the Marine radar bombing system was designed so that63 the largest piece could be put into a one-ton trailer. Major ground items were a generator power supply, a tracking radar, and a computer; the last essential component, an automatic bombing control, was mounted in the aircraft.

The Marine equipment, on the other hand, was more mobile because it was meant to be used near friendly lines. Known as the MPQ-14,88 the Marine radar bombing system was designed so that63 the biggest piece could fit into a one-ton trailer. The main ground components included a generator power supply, a tracking radar, and a computer; the final crucial part, an automatic bombing control, was installed in the aircraft.

88 These letters indicate first, the type of installation; next, the kind of electronic equipment; and finally, its purpose. In this case, M-mobile ground installation, P-radar, and Q-intended for a combination of purposes. The figure indicates the model number in the developmental history of the equipment.

88 These letters show the type of installation, the kind of electronic equipment, and its purpose. In this case, M stands for mobile ground installation, P stands for radar, and Q indicates it's intended for multiple purposes. The number shown refers to the model number in the equipment's development history.

Developed and hand built after World War II by Marines under Major Marion C. Dalby at the Naval Air Materiel Test Center, Point Mugu, California, the MPQ-14 was first used in Korea in September 1951. Initially, considerable mechanical difficulty was experienced with radar bombing, which affected the accuracy of the bombs, but later the system became sufficiently reliable to permit bomb drops within one mile of friendly lines. Subsequent use confirmed the tactical precision of the MPQ-14. By the middle of summer 1952, the Marines had obtained Fifth Air Force permission to use radar bombing, controlled by a forward observer on the ground, in a close support role.

Developed and built by Marines under Major Marion C. Dalby at the Naval Air Materiel Test Center in Point Mugu, California, right after World War II, the MPQ-14 was first deployed in Korea in September 1951. Initially, there were significant mechanical issues with radar bombing, which affected bomb accuracy, but eventually, the system became reliable enough to allow bomb drops within one mile of friendly lines. Later use confirmed the tactical precision of the MPQ-14. By the middle of summer 1952, the Marines obtained permission from the Fifth Air Force to use radar bombing, directed by a forward observer on the ground, for close support missions.

Before this policy change took place another one, at a still higher command level, had occurred. On 23 June, FAF planes struck at eight North Korean hydroelectric plants in the central and northwestern part of the country. The attack represented a departure from the intense interdiction of enemy lines of communication (Operation STRANGLE) which, since May 1951, had characterized FAF support operations. The shift came about after a Far East Air Forces study on the effectiveness of the interdiction campaign had concluded, in part, that the program had been indecisive.89

Before this policy change happened, there was another one at an even higher command level. On June 23, FAF planes targeted eight North Korean hydroelectric plants in the central and northwestern regions of the country. This attack marked a shift away from the intense disruption of enemy supply lines (Operation STRANGLE) that had defined FAF support operations since May 1951. The change followed a study by the Far East Air Forces on the effectiveness of the interdiction campaign, which concluded, in part, that the program had not been effective. 89

89 HistDiv; Air Univ, USAF, United States Air Force Operations in the Korean Conflict, 1 November 1950–30 June 1952, USAF Hist Study No. 72 (Washington, 1955), p. 159, hereafter USAF, Ops in Korea, with appropriate number. The Air Force operations were published in three books, numbered 72, 73, and 127.

89 HistDiv; Air Univ, USAF, United States Air Force Operations in the Korean Conflict, 1 November 1950–30 June 1952, USAF Hist Study No. 72 (Washington, 1955), p. 159, hereafter USAF, Ops in Korea, with appropriate number. The Air Force operations were published in three volumes, numbered 72, 73, and 127.

For more than a year preceding the 23 June attack, the Fifth Air Force had concentrated its ground support efforts on the disruption of Communist communication lines so that the enemy would be unable “to contain a determined offensive ... or to mount a sustained offensive himself.”90 During the lifetime of the doctrine, no major offensive had been launched by the enemy, and on this fact was based the claim for success of the interdiction program. Opponents, however, pointed out that despite this maximum FAF air effort, the Communists had built up their strength, including support areas immediately to the rear of their front lines and resupply installations. As the recent UN commander, General64 Matthew B. Ridgway,91 told members of the Senate Committee on Armed Services on 21 May 1952, the same month that FAF had begun to shift its air effort away from interdiction, “I think that the hostile forces opposing the Eighth Army ... have a substantially greater offensive potential than at any time in the past....”92

For over a year leading up to the attack on June 23, the Fifth Air Force focused its ground support on disrupting Communist communication lines to prevent the enemy from “containing a determined offensive... or launching a sustained offensive themselves.”90 During the time this strategy was in place, the enemy had not launched any major offensives, and this was used as evidence of the success of the interdiction program. However, critics pointed out that despite the maximum effort from FAF air support, the Communists had strengthened their positions, including support areas just behind their front lines and resupply facilities. As the recent UN commander, General64 Matthew B. Ridgway,91 informed the Senate Committee on Armed Services on May 21, 1952, the same month FAF started to shift its focus away from interdiction, “I believe that the hostile forces opposing the Eighth Army... have a significantly greater offensive potential than at any time in the past....”92

90 Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 435–436.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 435–436.

91 General Mark W. Clark had succeeded Ridgway as UN Commander on 12 May 1952. Ridgway was to take over as the new Supreme Allied Commander, Europe, 1 June, replacing General of the Army Dwight D. Eisenhower, who was returning to the United States.

91 General Mark W. Clark took over from Ridgway as UN Commander on May 12, 1952. Ridgway was set to become the new Supreme Allied Commander in Europe on June 1, replacing General of the Army Dwight D. Eisenhower, who was heading back to the United States.

92 Cited in Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 435.

92 Cited in Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 435.

A number of factors contributed to the reduced emphasis on the interdiction strategy. Three, however, appear to have most influenced the inauguration of Operation PRESSURE, the name given the new policy of concentrating aerial attacks on major industrial targets considered of greatest value to the North Korean economy. Mounting FAF aircraft losses due to enemy flak (fire from ground-based antiaircraft weapons) and an insufficient number of replacements helped shape the new program. By April 1952 FEAF had received “only 131 replacement aircraft of the types engaged in rail interdiction against the 243 it had lost and the 290 major-damaged aircraft on interdiction sorties.”93 These heavy losses had resulted from the increasing accuracy of Communist antiaircraft ground weapons, a capability Air Force planners had failed to consider sufficiently.94

A few factors led to a reduced focus on the interdiction strategy. However, three seem to have most significantly influenced the start of Operation STRESS, the name for the new approach of targeting major industrial sites deemed most valuable to the North Korean economy with aerial attacks. Increasing losses of FAF aircraft due to enemy fire (ground-based antiaircraft weapons) and a lack of replacement aircraft played a major role in shaping the new plan. By April 1952, FEAF had received “only 131 replacement aircraft of the types involved in rail interdiction against the 243 it had lost and the 290 significantly damaged aircraft on interdiction missions.”93 These significant losses were a result of the improved accuracy of Communist ground antiaircraft weapons, a capability that Air Force planners had not adequately taken into account.94

93 USAF, Ops in Korea, No. 72, p. 156.

93 USAF, Ops in Korea, No. 72, p. 156.

94 Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 436–437.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 436–437.

Although significant, this loss factor was not the final consideration in executing PRESSURE attacks against the power plants. More directly responsible were two other recent developments. These were the decision of the new UN commander, General Mark W. Clark, to take forceful action to bring the Communists around to an armistice agreement and a top-level Defense Department change of policy that had removed a major North Korean hydroelectric facility from the restricted bombing list. This was the Suiho plant, fourth largest in the world. Adjacent to the Yalu River, about 75 miles northeast of its mouth, Suiho supplied approximately 25 percent of the electrical power used in nearby northeast China.95

Although it was significant, this loss factor wasn’t the final consideration in carrying out Stress attacks on the power plants. Two other recent developments were more directly responsible. These were the new UN commander, General Mark W. Clark's decision to take strong action to push the Communists toward an armistice agreement and a high-level change in Defense Department policy that removed a major North Korean hydroelectric facility from the restricted bombing list. This facility was the Suiho plant, which is the fourth largest in the world. Located near the Yalu River, about 75 miles northeast of its mouth, Suiho provided around 25 percent of the electrical power used in the nearby northeast China.95

95 Ibid., pp. 452–453 and Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea, pp. 443–445.

95 Ibid., pp. 452–453 and Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea, pp. 443–445.

Results of the PRESSURE strikes, carried on from 23–27 June, were highly successful. Marine, Navy, and Air Force planes flew 1,654 attack and escort sorties in these raids. Of the 13 target plants attacked during this period, 11 were put out of commission and 265 others were presumably destroyed. North Korea was almost blacked out for two weeks. Chinese and Russian experts were rushed to North Korea to lend a hand in restoration. The hydroelectric strikes marked the first time that Marine, Navy, and Air Force pilots had flown a combined mission in Korea. The 23 June strike, moreover, was of particular significance to 1st MAW since it was also the first time that MAGs-12 and -33 were assigned group strikes at specific adjacent targets at the same time.

Results of the STRESS strikes, conducted from June 23 to June 27, were highly successful. Marine, Navy, and Air Force planes carried out 1,654 attack and escort missions during these raids. Of the 13 target plants hit in this period, 11 were taken out of commission and 265 others were likely destroyed. North Korea experienced almost total darkness for two weeks. Chinese and Russian experts were sent to North Korea to assist in the restoration. The hydroelectric strikes marked the first time that Marine, Navy, and Air Force pilots executed a joint mission in Korea. The strike on June 23 was particularly significant for 1st MAW as it was the first instance where MAGs-12 and -33 were tasked with group strikes on specific nearby targets simultaneously.

Led by Colonel Robert E. Galer, the new MAG-12 commander since 25 May, group pilots struck and leveled the single power complex, Chosin 3, in the 23–24 June runs. Colonel John P. Condon, who had taken over MAG-33 on 24 May, put 43 jets from VMFs-311 and -115 into the air during the two-day mission. The first time that its F9Fs had ever been massed for a strike of this type, the MAG-33 jets similarly destroyed the Chosin 4 plant, 11 miles northwest of Hamhung.

Led by Colonel Robert E. Galer, who became the new MAG-12 commander on May 25, the group pilots attacked and destroyed the Chosin 3 power complex during the runs on June 23–24. Colonel John P. Condon, who took over MAG-33 on May 24, deployed 43 jets from VMFs-311 and -115 for the two-day mission. This was the first time MAG-33's F9Fs were gathered for this type of strike, and they also successfully destroyed the Chosin 4 plant, which is located 11 miles northwest of Hamhung.

Although the jets carried a smaller payload than the Corsairs and ADs of MAG-12 (approximately 37 gross tons to more than 150 tons), the extremely precise bombing record made by the Grumman Panther jet pilots forever put to rest the doubts about jet accuracy that had been held by some in 1st MAW. As the group commander later recalled, “The capability of jet strike aircraft for extremely accurate bombing, an item of open discussion prior to this time, was never questioned in the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing after this mission.”96 Another gratifying result was that flight personnel on all of the 150 Marine aircraft returned safely. In fact, of the total 1,645 FAF sorties, only 2 aircraft were downed; rescue aircraft successfully picked up these two pilots, both U.S. Navy officers.

Although the jets could carry a smaller payload than the Corsairs and ADs of MAG-12 (about 37 gross tons compared to over 150 tons), the highly accurate bombing record achieved by the Grumman Panther jet pilots put to rest any doubts about jet accuracy that some had in the 1st MAW. As the group commander later recalled, “The ability of jet strike aircraft to perform extremely accurate bombing, a topic of open discussion before this, was never questioned in the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing after this mission.”96 Another positive outcome was that all flight personnel on the 150 Marine aircraft returned safely. In fact, out of the 1,645 FAF sorties, only 2 aircraft were lost; rescue teams successfully picked up both pilots, who were U.S. Navy officers.

96 MajGen John P. Condon ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 1 Oct 66.

96 MajGen John P. Condon letter to Head, History Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, dated October 1, 1966.

It was the high probability of being rescued, if forced to abandon their aircraft, that not only eased the minds of pilots on missions north of the 38th Parallel but also permitted the fliers a greater degree of success. As the MAG-12 commander, Colonel Galer, who was shortly to escape imminent capture by the enemy, later declared, “I do know that every pilot flying in this theatre should have the highest possible morale with the knowledge that so many are ready and willing to risk so much to get them.”97

It was the strong likelihood of being rescued, if they had to ditch their aircraft, that not only calmed the nerves of pilots on missions north of the 38th Parallel but also allowed them to be more successful. As Colonel Galer, the MAG-12 commander who was about to narrowly avoid being captured by the enemy, later stated, “I believe that every pilot flying in this theater should have the highest possible morale knowing that so many are ready and willing to risk so much to bring them back.”97

97 MAG-12 ComdD, Aug 52, p. D-4.

97 MAG-12 ComdD, Aug 52, p. D-4.

A Medal of Honor holder from World War II, Colonel Galer66 was leading a flight of 31 aircraft on 5 August. His objective was the supply area and tungsten mines in the mountainous northeastern part of North Korea, just below the 39th Parallel and 35 miles southwest of Wonsan. After several hits had killed his engine, the MAG-12 commander, preparing to parachute, climbed out over the side of his plane, but found that he had one foot stuck inside the cockpit, probably on the shoulder straps or the loop of the belt. He then pulled himself partially back towards the cockpit, freed his foot with a vigorous kick, cleared the plane, and headed in spread-eagle fashion towards the ground. Almost immediately the plane, falling in a nose dive, caught the descending pilot on the shoulder and pulled him into a spin. Colonel Galer recovered in time, however, to pull the ripcord and thus ease his impact onto enemy terrain. He landed within ten feet of his crashed AU.98

A Medal of Honor recipient from World War II, Colonel Galer66 was leading a flight of 31 aircraft on August 5. His goal was the supply area and tungsten mines in the mountainous northeastern region of North Korea, just south of the 39th Parallel and 35 miles southwest of Wonsan. After several hits disabled his engine, the MAG-12 commander, preparing to parachute, climbed out of his plane but found one foot stuck inside the cockpit, likely caught on the shoulder straps or the belt loop. He then pulled himself partway back into the cockpit, kicked his foot free, cleared the plane, and spread his body towards the ground. Almost immediately, the plane, in a nose dive, hit Colon Galer on the shoulder and dragged him into a spin. However, Colonel Galer managed to recover in time to pull the ripcord, which softened his landing on enemy territory. He touched down within ten feet of his crashed AU.98

98 The AU is the attack version of the Marines’ famed World War II fighter, the F4U Corsair.

98 The AU is the combat variant of the Marines’ iconic World War II fighter, the F4U Corsair.

“Immediately upon getting free of the chute, I ran as rapidly as possible, staying low, down through a corn field.”99 At the end of the field, the Marine aviator paused momentarily to survey the terrain for an escape route. Spotting a dry stream bed nearby, Colonel Galer dashed toward it and quickly but cautiously moved up it some 100 yards. Then he halted to put into operation a small survivor radio to report his position. The message was received by the rescue air patrol orbiting overhead which relayed the information to pickup aircraft. The patrol advised the downed pilot that a rescue helicopter had already departed for the crash area.

“Right after getting free from the chute, I ran as fast as I could, staying low, through a cornfield.”99 At the end of the field, the Marine aviator paused briefly to check the area for an escape route. Seeing a dry stream bed nearby, Colonel Galer sprinted toward it and quickly but carefully moved up it for about 100 yards. Then he stopped to set up a small survivor radio to report his location. The message was picked up by the rescue air patrol circling overhead, which passed the information on to the pickup aircraft. The patrol informed the downed pilot that a rescue helicopter had already left for the crash site.

99 MAG-12, ComdD, Aug 52, p. D-2.

99 MAG-12, ComdD, Aug 52, p. D-2.

Before breaking radio contact, Colonel Galer told the air patrol his planned movements in order to facilitate pickup. He then quickly left the area which was located too near the crashed aircraft for a rescue attempt. Evading detection by enemy soldiers and curious teenagers moving towards the wreckage, the Marine worked his way to higher ground, keeping the air patrol advised of his changing position. By 1845, a search of the area was underway. Of the events that followed: Colonel Galer wrote:

Before losing radio contact, Colonel Galer informed the air patrol of his intended movements to make pickup easier. He then quickly vacated the area that was too close to the crashed aircraft for a rescue attempt. Avoiding detection by enemy soldiers and nosy teenagers heading towards the wreckage, the Marine made his way to higher ground, keeping the air patrol updated on his changing location. By 6:45 PM, a search of the area had begun. Regarding the events that followed, Colonel Galer wrote:

At 1908 I heard the helicopter go down the next valley and saw it disappear. I called, told them to make a 180-degree turn since I was in the valley to the southwest and on the north slope. I did not get an answer but soon the helicopter came through a saddle in the ridge....67 I immediately let the red smoke (day flare) go, and came out of the bushes ... calling the helicopter on the radio also. They apparently saw me immediately and came over and hovered. The mechanic leaned out and swung the hoisting sling back and forth.... Finally, I grabbed it and got in ... and the pilot took off.... The mechanic pulled me up and into the helicopter as we crossed the valley.100

At 1908, I heard the helicopter pass over the next valley and watched it disappear. I shouted for them to make a 180-degree turn since I was in the valley to the southwest and on the north slope. I didn’t get a response, but soon the helicopter came through a saddle in the ridge. 67 I quickly let off the red smoke (day flare) and stepped out of the bushes, calling the helicopter on the radio as well. They seemed to spot me right away and came over to hover. The mechanic leaned out and swung the hoisting sling back and forth. Finally, I grabbed it and got in, and then the pilot took off. The mechanic pulled me up and into the helicopter as we crossed the valley. 100

100 Ibid., p. D-3.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. D-3.

The colonel was not yet out of the woods. The trip to a rescue ship at Wonsan was marked by intermittent bursts of enemy antiaircraft fire. On one occasion the chopper was hit hard enough to spin it completely around. As the rescue craft neared the coast patches of fog added to the hazards of night flying. About this time the warning light indicating low fuel supply came on but “the pilot gambled on making the sea at the risk of having to autorotate through the overcast into the mountains.”101 It was a correct decision. The fuel lasted until the helicopter landed on the rescue vessel. It was then 2100.

The colonel was still not out of danger. The trip to a rescue ship at Wonsan was punctuated by sporadic enemy anti-aircraft fire. At one point, the chopper took a hit hard enough to spin it completely around. As the rescue craft approached the coast, patches of fog made night flying even more hazardous. Around this time, the warning light for low fuel turned on, but “the pilot took a risk, hoping to reach the sea despite the chance of having to autorotate through the overcast into the mountains.”101 It was the right call. The fuel held out until the helicopter landed on the rescue vessel. It was then 2100.

101 Ibid., p. D-4.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. D-4.

Quite naturally the episode brought forth high praise for the rescue system, and particularly for those individuals whose skills, initiative, and courage made downed crew rescues of this type possible. But Colonel Galer also saw some weaknesses. He pointed out that rescue helicopter pilots should be kept up to date on changing enemy flak positions. The Marine group commander also stressed the need for rescue helicopters to establish and maintain a minimum safe fuel level which would depend largely upon the position of the downed aircraft. One final suggestion, not about the system but the aircraft itself, was that fixed-wing aircraft have ejection-type seats. Remembering his own difficulties, the MAG-12 commander further cautioned pilots to be certain they were free of all straps and cords before bailing out.

Naturally, the episode received a lot of praise for the rescue system, especially for the individuals whose skills, initiative, and courage made these rescues possible. However, Colonel Galer also identified some weaknesses. He emphasized that rescue helicopter pilots should be kept informed about changing enemy flak positions. The Marine group commander also highlighted the importance of rescue helicopters maintaining a minimum safe fuel level, which would largely depend on the position of the downed aircraft. Lastly, he suggested that fixed-wing aircraft should have ejection seats. Reflecting on his own challenges, the MAG-12 commander advised pilots to ensure they were free of all straps and cords before bailing out.

In addition to attack missions by tactical aircraft and rescue work by its helicopters, the Marine wing was also responsible for providing antiaircraft defense. It was not until July 1951, 13 months after the NKPA invasion of South Korea, that a formal air defense had been established for the country. Fifth Air Force was given the command responsibility of coordinating the aerial defense net for South Korea and its adjacent sea frontiers. In mid-November 1951, the FAF commander had revised the defensive system, dividing his68 area into a northern and southern sector, at a point exactly halfway between the 36th and 37th Parallels.

In addition to attack missions carried out by tactical aircraft and rescue operations conducted by its helicopters, the Marine wing was also tasked with providing air defense. It wasn't until July 1951, 13 months after the NKPA invasion of South Korea, that a formal air defense system was put in place for the country. The Fifth Air Force was assigned the responsibility of coordinating the aerial defense network for South Korea and its nearby sea borders. In mid-November 1951, the FAF commander updated the defensive system, splitting his68 area into a northern and southern sector, exactly halfway between the 36th and 37th Parallels.

FAF commanded the northern air defense sector while the southern sector became the responsibility of CG, 1st MAW. In turn, these two sectors were further divided into subsectors. Each of these, through a tactical air direction center (TADC), maintained radar surveillance of its assigned area and performed plotting and identification functions. Each subsector was charged with being “directly responsible for sector air defense.”102

FAF was in charge of the northern air defense sector, while CG, 1st MAW took over the southern sector. These two sectors were then split into smaller subsectors. Each subsector, through a tactical air direction center (TADC), kept radar surveillance over its designated area and carried out plotting and identification tasks. Each subsector was tasked with being “directly responsible for sector air defense.”102

102 Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 616.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 616.

Although the 1st MAW commander had been designated as the Air Defense Commander, Southern Sector, Korea, he was not actually given the means to carry out this responsibility. He still did not have command over his tactical squadrons, nor could he exercise control over operations of his tactical air coordination center (TACC) or TADC.103 Moreover, his southern sector could not originate practice air warning messages. The wing commander had to obtain permission from JOC before he could begin practice intercepts for training his radar intercept controllers.

Although the commander of the 1st MAW was named the Air Defense Commander for the Southern Sector in Korea, he wasn't actually given the resources to fulfill this role. He still lacked command over his tactical squadrons, and he couldn't control the operations of his Tactical Air Coordination Center (TACC) or TADC.103 Furthermore, his southern sector couldn't send out practice air warning messages. The wing commander had to get permission from JOC before he could start practice intercepts to train his radar intercept controllers.

103 TACC is the senior agency for controlling all tactical aircraft and air warning functions; the TADC performs similar functions in an area controlled by the TACC. JCS, Dictionary of United States Military Terms for Joint Usage (Short title: JD). JCS Pub. 1 (Washington, 1964), p. 141, hereafter JCS, JD.

103 TACC is the main agency responsible for overseeing all tactical aircraft and air warning operations; the TADC carries out similar tasks in a region overseen by the TACC. JCS, Dictionary of United States Military Terms for Joint Usage (Short title: JD). JCS Pub. 1 (Washington, 1964), p. 141, hereafter JCS, JD.

Several other deficiencies existed in the air defense system that the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing had inherited. There were no ground antiaircraft weapons at the Marine fields until a .50 caliber automatic weapons battery was detached from the 1st 90mm Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion, FMF, early in 1952 and sent to K-3, the home field of MAG-33. Other inadequacies were deficient equipment—a search radar limited to 30 miles out and 20,000 feet up—and lack of an interceptor aircraft capable of rising to meet the faster swept-wing jets the enemy was employing. Airfields housing Marine air groups did not have revetments for either aircraft parking areas or ordnance dumps.

Several other shortcomings were present in the air defense system that the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing had inherited. There were no ground antiaircraft weapons at the Marine fields until a .50 caliber automatic weapons battery was detached from the 1st 90mm Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion, FMF, in early 1952 and sent to K-3, the home field of MAG-33. Other issues included outdated equipment—a search radar that only reached 30 miles out and 20,000 feet up—and a lack of interceptor aircraft capable of reaching the faster swept-wing jets the enemy was using. Airfields housing Marine air groups didn’t have revetments for either aircraft parking areas or ordnance dumps.

Not all of these weaknesses were acquired with assumption of the air defense mission. There had been a general lack of concern about air defense throughout South Korea. This attitude had resulted from the air supremacy which the Fifth Air Force had quickly established. Camouflage was seldom practiced. Dispersal of aircraft, supply dumps, and servicing facilities was employed only rarely.69 In fact, at K-6, there was not sufficient land to properly scatter installations and aircraft.

Not all of these weaknesses appeared when taking on the air defense mission. There had been a general lack of concern about air defense across South Korea. This attitude came from the air superiority that the Fifth Air Force had quickly achieved. Camouflage was rarely practiced. The dispersal of aircraft, supply depots, and maintenance facilities was only done infrequently.69 In fact, at K-6, there wasn't enough land to adequately spread out installations and aircraft.

Defense of the southern sector was commanded from K-3 (Pohang), the site of the TACC (Major Fred A. Steel). Marine Ground Control Intercept Squadron 1 (MGCIS-1) was set up on the west coast at K-8 and MGCIS-3 (Lieutenant Colonel Owen M. Hines), on the east coast, near Pohang. Each of these intercept units had an early warning detachment operating off the mainland. Antiaircraft artillery was provided by the 90mm AAA battalion, which was controlled, however, by EUSAK. The 1st MAW commander specified a ready alert status for two aircraft during daylight hours. Just before sunrise and sunset, four planes were put on strip alert. Aircraft for night alert were provided by VMF(N)-513 until April, when the requirement was withdrawn. By 30 June 1952, 1st MAW air defense operations had destroyed a total of five enemy planes. The F7F night fighters flown by VMF(N)-513, moreover, had frequently been scrambled to intercept hostile night intruders that had penetrated into the Seoul area, or northern sector.

Defense of the southern sector was managed from K-3 (Pohang), the location of the TACC (Major Fred A. Steel). Marine Ground Control Intercept Squadron 1 (MGCIS-1) was established on the west coast at K-8 and MGCIS-3 (Lieutenant Colonel Owen M. Hines) was stationed on the east coast, near Pohang. Each of these intercept units had an early warning team operating off the mainland. Antiaircraft artillery was supplied by the 90mm AAA battalion, which was overseen by EUSAK. The 1st MAW commander ordered a ready alert status for two aircraft during the day. Just before sunrise and sunset, four planes were placed on strip alert. Aircraft for night alerts were provided by VMF(N)-513 until April, when that requirement was canceled. By June 30, 1952, 1st MAW air defense operations had taken down a total of five enemy planes. The F7F night fighters flown by VMF(N)-513 had often been dispatched to intercept hostile night intruders that had entered the Seoul area, or the northern sector.

This low kill rate did little to atone for the steadily increasing number of Marine aircraft lost to enemy flak. Although the number of friendly planes destroyed or damaged in air-to-air combat during the latter half of Korean hostilities diminished sharply compared to the early period, losses due to ground fire were reaching alarming proportions in early and mid-1952. In May 1952 Navy and Marine air losses to enemy action were twice the total for April, and the June figure was even higher. By June, the Communists had massed more than half of their antiaircraft artillery along communication routes that FAF struck nearly every day.

This low kill rate did little to make up for the steadily increasing number of Marine aircraft lost to enemy fire. While the number of friendly planes destroyed or damaged in air-to-air combat during the latter half of the Korean War dropped significantly compared to the early period, losses from ground fire were reaching alarming levels in early and mid-1952. In May 1952, Navy and Marine air losses due to enemy action were double the total for April, and the June figures were even higher. By June, the Communists had gathered more than half of their anti-aircraft artillery along the communication routes that FAF targeted almost every day.

Remedial action was soon taken. Stress on flak evasion was emphasized in pilot briefings and debriefings. The MAG-33 intelligence section came up with a program that attempted to reduce losses by a detailed analysis of flak information. The originator of this system, First Lieutenant Kenneth S. Foley, based his method on:

Remedial action was soon taken. Emphasis on avoiding flak was highlighted in pilot briefings and debriefings. The MAG-33 intelligence section developed a program aimed at reducing losses through a thorough analysis of flak data. The creator of this system, First Lieutenant Kenneth S. Foley, based his method on:

... photo interpretation of an up-to-date flak map, scale 1:50,000, and an intelligent utilization of flak reports disseminated by the 67th Tactical Reconnaissance Squadron of the 5th Air Force. Frequent briefings were given to each squadron on the enemy AA capabilities. Elaborate overlays were drawn up and displayed. Target maps, clearly showing AA positions and flak clocks [danger areas], were given to flight leaders to aid them in evading known AA guns in their target area. Through flak analysis, the70 safest route to the target area was determined and an actual attack and retirement route was suggested. These recommendations appeared in a flak summary presented at each combat briefing.104

... photo analysis of a current flak map, scale 1:50,000, and effective use of flak reports shared by the 67th Tactical Reconnaissance Squadron of the 5th Air Force. Regular briefings were provided to each squadron regarding enemy anti-aircraft (AA) abilities. Detailed overlays were created and shown. Target maps, clearly indicating AA positions and flak clocks [danger zones], were given to flight leaders to help them avoid known AA guns in their target area. Through flak analysis, the safest path to the target area was identified, and a proposed attack and retreat route was outlined. These suggestions were included in a flak summary given at each combat briefing.104

104 VMF(N)-513 ComdD, Jun 52, App II, p. 5. Mention of a flak analysis program first appeared in the March 1952 records of MAG-33. Aircraft losses on interdiction strikes (the program was not applicable to CAS missions) dropped for the next several months. When Lieutenant Foley transferred to the night squadron, he took his system with him and had it put into operation there. LtCol Kenneth S. Foley interv by HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 24 Mar 66.

104 VMF(N)-513 ComdD, Jun 52, App II, p. 5. The flak analysis program was first mentioned in the March 1952 records of MAG-33. Aircraft losses on interdiction strikes (the program did not apply to CAS missions) decreased over the next several months. When Lieutenant Foley moved to the night squadron, he brought his system along and had it implemented there. LtCol Kenneth S. Foley interviewed by HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dated 24 Mar 66.

Other measures attempted to reduce mounting losses of personnel and aircraft. In all Marine air units, evasion and escape tactics were stressed. In addition to the FAF de-emphasis on interdiction of communication routes that had come about, in part, due to heavy aircraft losses, Fifth Air Force decreed that beginning 3 June, “with the exception of the AD and F4U aircraft [1st MAW types] only one run will be made for each type of external ordnance carried and no strafing runs will be made.”105 CTF 77 ordered that in all attack runs, aircraft would pull out by the 3,000-foot altitude level. The Marines, combining their air and ground efforts, came up with a positive program of their own. It was to become the first known instance of Marine ground in support of Marine air.

Other measures were taken to reduce the increasing losses of personnel and aircraft. In all Marine air units, evasion and escape tactics were emphasized. Along with the FAF's reduced focus on disrupting communication routes, which was partly due to high aircraft losses, the Fifth Air Force announced that starting June 3, “except for the AD and F4U aircraft [1st MAW types], only one run will be made for each type of external ordnance carried and no strafing runs will be done.” 105 CTF 77 ordered that in all attack runs, aircraft must pull out by the 3,000-foot altitude level. The Marines, combining their air and ground efforts, developed a successful program of their own. It became the first recorded instance of Marine ground forces supporting Marine air.

105 FAF CbtOps Notam No. 6-10.1 cited in App. 9, PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 10, p. 10-199.

105 FAF CbtOps Notam No. 6-10.1 mentioned in App. 9, PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 10, p. 10-199.

Although the originator of the idea cannot be positively identified, the time that artillery flak suppression firing was first employed can be traced back to late 1951, when the division was still in East Korea.106 It was not until June 1952, however, that a published procedure for conducting flak suppression firing appeared in Marine division records. That same month another type of flak suppression, this by an aircraft, was utilized by the 1st Marines, commanded at the time by Colonel Walter N. Flournoy. The procedure called for the FAC [forward air controller] to relay gun positions to friendly strike planes which temporarily diverted their attack to silence the located gun. Although the method “worked with good results,”107 it was not destined to become the system adopted by the Marines.

Although the creator of the idea can't be definitively identified, the use of artillery flak suppression firing can be traced back to late 1951, when the division was still in East Korea.106 It wasn't until June 1952 that a published procedure for flak suppression firing was recorded in Marine division documents. That same month, another type of flak suppression, executed by an aircraft, was used by the 1st Marines, led at the time by Colonel Walter N. Flournoy. The procedure involved the FAC [forward air controller] communicating gun positions to friendly strike planes, which would temporarily change their attack to take out the identified gun. Although the method “worked with good results,”107 it did not end up being the system adopted by the Marines.

106 Paid comments; Nihart comments. Both of these officers, the former artillery, the latter infantry, recall flak suppression firing late in 1951 or early in 1952 when the division was on the eastern front. Colonel Nihart pointed out, in addition, that “such expedients and new tactics went on for some time before getting into the regimental commander’s reports.”

106 Paid comments; Nihart comments. Both of these officers, one from artillery and the other from infantry, remember flak suppression firing that took place late in 1951 or early in 1952 when the division was on the eastern front. Colonel Nihart also noted that “these strategies and new tactics continued for a while before they made it into the regimental commander’s reports.”

107 1stMar ComdD, Jun 52, p. 2.

107 1stMar ComdD, Jun 52, p. 2.

The more frequently used flak suppression called for artillery to71 fire on hostile gun positions that could impede the success of a friendly close air support strike. Several Marine officers appear to have had a major role in the development and employment of this technique. Among them were Brigadier General Frank H. Lamson-Scribner, Assistant Commanding General, 1st MAW; Colonel Henderson, the 11th Marines commander; and Lieutenant Colonel Gerald T. Armitage, 3/1 commander.

The more commonly used flak suppression involved artillery firing on enemy gun positions that could hinder the success of friendly close air support missions. Several Marine officers seem to have played a key role in developing and implementing this technique. Among them were Brigadier General Frank H. Lamson-Scribner, Assistant Commanding General, 1st MAW; Colonel Henderson, the commander of the 11th Marines; and Lieutenant Colonel Gerald T. Armitage, commander of 3/1.

The 1st Marines battalion commander explained how the system operated in late spring 1952:

The commander of the 1st Marines battalion explained how the system worked in late spring 1952:

I was in an outpost watching an air strike. I asked Captain Shoden [John C., the battalion forward air controller] to work out some idea of flak suppression. Shoden, G-2, and others worked two or three weeks to complete the first plot of antiaircraft positions. My idea was to have a plane start a run and then pull up before finishing the dive. The enemy antiaircraft gunners could not tell that the pilot was pulling out at an extremely high level. The batteries would fire and Marine observers would plot their positions from their fires. Then, the Marine artillery would lay a heavy barrage on these positions.108

I was at a forward base watching an air strike. I asked Captain Shoden [John C., the battalion forward air controller] to develop a plan for flak suppression. Shoden, G-2, and others spent two or three weeks creating the first map of antiaircraft positions. My idea was to have a plane start its run and then pull up before completing the dive. The enemy gunners wouldn’t be able to tell that the pilot was pulling out at such a high altitude. The batteries would shoot, and Marine observers would mark their locations based on those shots. Then, the Marine artillery would unleash a heavy barrage on those positions.108

108 LtCol Gerald T. Armitage interv by HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 15 Aug 61.

108 LtCol Gerald T. Armitage interviewed by HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dated 15 Aug 61.

While observing an air strike from the Marine division sector, General Lamson-Scribner noted that prior to the strike there had been no preparatory firing on enemy antiaircraft artillery positions. After the strike he discussed this matter with General Selden, who “directed me to discuss with his chief of staff what I had observed and my suggestions that division firepower for ‘flak suppression’ be coordinated with air strikes.”109 The upshot of this was that the division chief of staff suggested that the 11th Marines regimental commander and his staff members develop an SOP110 for using artillery flak suppression fires in support of close air support strikes. It was believed that proper utilization of these fires would reduce aircraft losses and further increase the opportunity for a successful close air support mission by destruction of enemy antiaircraft weapons.72111

While watching an airstrike from the Marine division area, General Lamson-Scribner noticed that there hadn't been any preparatory fire on enemy anti-aircraft artillery positions before the strike. Afterward, he talked about this with General Selden, who “told me to discuss my observations and my suggestions that division firepower for ‘flak suppression’ be coordinated with air strikes”.109 As a result, the division's chief of staff recommended that the 11th Marines regimental commander and his staff create a standard operating procedure (SOP) 110 for using artillery flak suppression fire to support close air support strikes. It was thought that properly using these fires would lower aircraft losses and increase the chances of successful close air support missions by eliminating enemy anti-aircraft weapons.72111

109 MajGen Frank H. Lamson-Scribner ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 12 Oct 66.

109 MajGen Frank H. Lamson-Scribner letter to Headquarters, History Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, dated October 12, 1966.

110 An SOP, standing operating procedure, is a set of instructions for conducting operations that lend themselves to established procedures. JCS, JD, p. 133.

110 An SOP, or standard operating procedure, is a set of instructions for carrying out operations that can be performed according to established procedures. JCS, JD, p. 133.

111 With respect to the effect of enemy fire on attack aircraft, the CO, MAG-33 later commented that “Antiaircraft artillery has a direct deterioration effect on pilot accuracy, particularly with regard to care in getting on target and doing a precise job.” CO, MAG-33 ltr to CG, 1st MAW, dtd 25 Jul 52, quoted in PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-76.

111 With regard to the impact of enemy fire on attack aircraft, the CO, MAG-33 later stated that “antiaircraft artillery directly affects pilot accuracy, especially in terms of being careful about hitting the target and executing a precise mission.” CO, MAG-33 letter to CG, 1st MAW, dated July 25, 1952, quoted in PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-76.

On 30 June 1952, the 11th Marines published the SOP. Since the objective was to prevent enemy fire from interfering with friendly strike planes, the key to the entire procedure was the precise coordination of artillery fire with the delivery of aircraft ordnance. As Colonel Henderson described the system:

On June 30, 1952, the 11th Marines published the SOP. The goal was to stop enemy fire from affecting friendly strike planes, so the whole process depended on the exact coordination of artillery fire with the release of aircraft ordnance. As Colonel Henderson explained the system:

When the infantry regiment received word of an air strike, the air liaison officer plotted on the map ... the target of the strike, the orbit point, the direction of approach, and the altitude ... and direction of pullout. Then the artillery liaison officer, by looking at the map, could determine which of the Chinese positions could bring effective fire on the strike aircraft. The artillery battalion had prearranged code names and numbers for every antiaircraft position. All the artillery liaison officer had to do was pick up the phone and tell the F.D.C. [fire direction center] ‘flak suppression’ and read off what targets he wanted covered.

When the infantry regiment got word of an airstrike, the air liaison officer marked on the map ... the target of the strike, the orbit point, the direction of approach, the altitude ... and direction of pullout. Then the artillery liaison officer, by looking at the map, could figure out which of the Chinese positions could effectively target the strike aircraft. The artillery battalion had already set up code names and numbers for every anti-aircraft position. All the artillery liaison officer had to do was pick up the phone and tell the F.D.C. [fire direction center] ‘flak suppression’ and read off which targets he wanted covered.

These fires were then delivered on the request of a forward observer who was with the forward air controller.... When there was a forward air controller up in the front lines controlling the strike, we would put a forward observer with him. When the planes were ... ready to go, the F.O. [forward observer] got the word ‘Batteries laid and loaded,’ and he would tell them to fire. The minute the FO would get the word, ‘On the way,’ the forward air controller would tell the planes to start their run. As a result, we had cases where the planes were in their bombing run within 30 seconds after the flak suppression was fired, which meant that they were in on the target while the positions were still neutralized. The question of control and split second timing is of exceeding importance because the aircraft are going 300 to 400 miles an hour....112

These fires were then delivered at the request of a forward observer who was with the forward air controller. When a forward air controller was stationed at the front lines managing the strike, we would assign a forward observer to work with him. When the planes were ready to go, the F.O. [forward observer] received the signal ‘Batteries laid and loaded,’ and he would instruct them to fire. The moment the F.O. got the signal ‘On the way,’ the forward air controller would command the planes to begin their approach. As a result, there were instances where the planes were on their bombing run within 30 seconds after the flak suppression began, meaning they hit the target while the positions were still neutralized. The issue of control and split-second timing is extremely important because the aircraft are traveling at 300 to 400 miles per hour. 112

112 Henderson ltr II.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Henderson letter II.

Early in the program the MAG-12 commander reported that although the flak suppression procedure was not flawless, it was proving “very capable and workable.”113 An indication of the success of 1st Marine Division pioneering efforts in flak suppression is seen in the fact that shortly after it was put into operation “there was a steady stream of visitors to the 11th Marines CP to find out what [it was] and how we were doing it and to get copies of our SOP.”114 The procedure was eventually adopted by other Eighth Army units.

Early in the program, the MAG-12 commander reported that although the flak suppression procedure wasn’t perfect, it was proving to be “very capable and workable.”113 A sign of the success of the 1st Marine Division’s pioneering efforts in flak suppression is seen in the fact that shortly after it was implemented, “there was a steady stream of visitors to the 11th Marines CP to find out what [it was] and how we were doing it and to get copies of our SOP.”114 The procedure was eventually adopted by other Eighth Army units.

113 CO, MAG-12 Spdltr to CG, 1st MAW, dtd 2 Jul 52, Subj: Comments on 11th Mar Flak Suppression SOP, cited in PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 5, Chap. 9, p. 9-78.

113 CO, MAG-12 Spdltr to CG, 1st MAW, dated July 2, 1952, Subject: Comments on 11th Mar Flak Suppression SOP, mentioned in PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 5, Chapter 9, page 9-78.

114 Henderson ltr II.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Henderson letter II.

Marine air losses from hostile ground fire during CAS strikes immediately began to drop from the June peak and never again reached this level. In 124 close support sorties flown by 1st MAW on 13 August, not one plane was shot down and only four received73 minor damage from enemy flak. Although there were some complaints as to execution of the flak suppression program these would be corrected, in the main, by a revised procedure which the 11th Marines would undertake in the winter of 1952.

Marine air losses from enemy ground fire during close air support missions quickly started to decline from the peak in June and never reached that level again. In 124 close support sorties flown by the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing on August 13th, not a single plane was shot down, and only four sustained minor damage from enemy anti-aircraft fire. Although there were some complaints about how the flak suppression program was executed, these issues would mainly be addressed with a revised procedure that the 11th Marines would implement in the winter of 1952.

Spring 1952 on JAMESTOWN115

115 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Apr-Jun 52; 5thMar ComdDs, Apr-Jun 52; 7thMar ComdD, Jun 52; 11thMar ComdDs, Apr-May 52; 1/5 ComdD May 52; 1/7, 2/7 ComdDs, May 52.

115 Unless otherwise specified, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Apr-Jun 52; 5thMar ComdDs, Apr-Jun 52; 7thMar ComdD, Jun 52; 11thMar ComdDs, Apr-May 52; 1/5 ComdD May 52; 1/7, 2/7 ComdDs, May 52.

Earlier in the year the Marines had revised their estimate of enemy capabilities after the lengthening of the division MLR by I Corps and the subsequent heavy enemy attack. The re-evaluation placed the most likely course of Chinese action as defending their present positions with the 21 infantry battalions assigned and also cautioned that the Communists could mount a limited objective attack at any time of their choosing. Division intelligence estimated that the Chinese could muster up to “57 infantry battalions supported by 12 artillery battalions and 40 tanks and/or self-propelled guns” for a thrust into the Marine sector.116

Earlier in the year, the Marines updated their assessment of enemy capabilities after I Corps extended the division's MLR and following a significant enemy attack. The new evaluation indicated that the most likely Chinese action would be to defend their current positions with the 21 infantry battalions assigned, and it also warned that the Communists could launch a limited objective attack whenever they chose. Division intelligence estimated that the Chinese could assemble up to “57 infantry battalions supported by 12 artillery battalions and 40 tanks and/or self-propelled guns” for an incursion into the Marine sector.116

116 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 52, p. 1.

116 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 52, p. 1.

The enemy, however, showed little disposition for any concerted ground attack during the remainder of April. But before the month ended, Marines, in conjunction with other I Corps divisions, had deluged the enemy with artillery and tank fire in Operation CLOBBER. The purpose of this shoot was to inflict maximum casualties and damage by employment of the element of tactical surprise. The reinforced 11th Marines, augmented for this occasion by Company D, 1st Tank Battalion and nine of the battalion’s 105mm howitzer and flame tanks, blasted Chinese CPs, bivouac areas, artillery and mortar positions, and observation posts. Marine frontline regiments joined in with their organic mortars. Since most of the firing took place at night when results were unobserved, no estimate could be made as to the effect of the operation on the enemy.

The enemy, however, showed little willingness for any organized ground attack during the rest of April. But by the end of the month, Marines, along with other I Corps divisions, had overwhelmed the enemy with artillery and tank fire in Operation DOMINATE. The goal of this operation was to cause maximum casualties and damage using the element of tactical surprise. The reinforced 11th Marines, supported for this event by Company D, 1st Tank Battalion and nine of the battalion’s 105mm howitzer and flame tanks, targeted Chinese command posts, camp areas, artillery and mortar positions, and observation posts. Marine frontline regiments also contributed with their own mortars. Since most of the firing occurred at night when they couldn't see the results, no assessment could be made regarding the operation's impact on the enemy.

A new Marine artillery tactic about this time was the counter-counterbattery program instituted by the 11th Marines. The regiment had developed this technique to counter superior enemy artillery strength. This situation, as well as the fact that I Corps artillery74 available to the division was considered inadequate for counterbattery support, led the Marine division to adopt the new program in May 1952. One provision required a battery in each battalion to select counter-counterbattery positions and occupy them for 24 consecutive hours each week. Another proviso of the program was the selection by each battalion of 10 roving gun positions that were to be occupied by a single weapon rotated to each place at least once weekly. By these tactics, the artillery regiment hoped not only to mislead the Chinese in their estimate of the strength and location of Marine artillery but also to dilute enemy counterbattery intelligence by causing him to fire into areas just vacated by friendly guns. “The effectiveness of the program was demonstrated on numerous occasions when the enemy fired counterbattery into unoccupied positions.”117 An added advantage was that of providing deeper supporting fires on target areas.118

A new Marine artillery tactic around this time was the counter-counterbattery program launched by the 11th Marines. The regiment developed this approach to combat the superior artillery strength of the enemy. This situation, along with the fact that the artillery available to I Corps for the division was seen as insufficient for counterbattery support, led the Marine division to adopt the new program in May 1952. One rule required a battery in each battalion to choose counter-counterbattery positions and occupy them for 24 consecutive hours each week. Another aspect of the program involved each battalion selecting 10 rotating gun positions to be manned by a single weapon, which would be moved to each location at least once a week. With these tactics, the artillery regiment aimed not only to mislead the Chinese in their assessment of the strength and location of Marine artillery but also to confuse enemy counterbattery intelligence by making them fire into areas just vacated by friendly guns. "The effectiveness of the program was demonstrated on numerous occasions when the enemy fired counterbattery into unoccupied positions."117 An added benefit was providing deeper supporting fires on target areas.118

117 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-51.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-51.

118 LtCol Bruce F. Hillam comments on draft MS, dtd 31 Aug 66.

118 LtCol Bruce F. Hillam comments on draft MS, dated August 31, 1966.

Still another concept regarding the employment of artillery developed during the early days of the JAMESTOWN defense. The 11th Marines had advised the infantry regiments that it could effectively fire on enemy troops attacking friendly positions if the Marines had overhead cover. The idea was to use variable time (VT) fuzes119 with the standard high explosive (HE) shells. Artillery battalions supporting the frontline regiments registered on positions occupied frequently by patrols going forward from JAMESTOWN.

Still another idea about using artillery came up during the early days of the JAMESTOWN defense. The 11th Marines had informed the infantry regiments that they could effectively target enemy troops attacking friendly positions if the Marines had overhead protection. The plan was to use variable time (VT) fuzes119 with the standard high explosive (HE) shells. The artillery battalions supporting the frontline regiments registered on spots often occupied by patrols moving out from JAMESTOWN.

119 A type of proximity fuze, the V.T. depends upon an external source, such as an electronic signal, rather than the force of ground impact, to detonate the shell at a predetermined height over the target.

119 A type of proximity fuse, the V.T. relies on an external source, like an electronic signal, instead of the impact of hitting the ground, to trigger the shell at a specific height above the target.

According to the recollections of veteran artillery and infantrymen in the division, the first occasion that pre-planned artillery fire was placed on friendly positions occurred in May 1952.120 The episode involved a 2/7 platoon patrol that late on 18 May was ordered to return to the MLR from an outpost on the former OPLR. Operating forward of the center regimental sector,121 the platoon commander, Second Lieutenant Theodore H. Watson, directed that two of the three Marine squads return to the MLR. The remaining unit, surrounded by about 50 Chinese, engaged them in a brisk fire fight.

According to the memories of veteran artillery and infantry soldiers in the division, the first time pre-planned artillery fire was directed at friendly positions happened in May 1952.120 This incident involved a 2/7 platoon patrol that was ordered late on May 18 to return to the MLR from an outpost on the former OPLR. Operating ahead of the center regimental sector,121 the platoon commander, Second Lieutenant Theodore H. Watson, instructed that two of the three Marine squads go back to the MLR. The remaining unit, surrounded by around 50 Chinese soldiers, engaged in a rapid firefight.

75

75

120 1stMarDiv ComdD, May 52, p. 4.

120 1stMarDiv ComdD, May 52, p. 4.

121 The 7th Marines advanced to the line to relieve the 5th Marines in the center sector on 11 May.

121 The 7th Marines moved up to the front line to take over from the 5th Marines in the center sector on May 11.

When the artillery fired to seal off the enemy and box-in the defensive position failed to discourage the hostile force, Lieutenant Watson ordered his men into the shelter of two nearby bunkers. He then requested the artillery to place VT directly over his positions.122 The volleys of overhead fire and effective Marine small arms fire then forced the enemy to call off his assault. Although the exact number of Chinese casualties could not be determined, the new fire technique fully accomplished its purpose—repelling the enemy force.

When the artillery fired to cut off the enemy and trap their defensive position didn't deter the hostile force, Lieutenant Watson ordered his men to take cover in two nearby bunkers. He then asked the artillery to target VT directly over his positions.122 The overhead fire and effective Marine small arms fire forced the enemy to abandon their assault. While the exact number of Chinese casualties couldn't be determined, the new firing technique successfully achieved its goal—repelling the enemy force.

122 The artillery regiment had earlier developed the “box-me-in” fires for outpost defense. If under heavy attack the outpost could call for these pre-planned close-in fires that completely surrounded the position. In event of radio or wire communication failures, the outpost could call for “box-me-in” or “Fire VT on my position” by signal flare or other pyrotechnic device. Henderson ltr II.

122 The artillery regiment had previously developed the "box-me-in" fires for outpost defense. If the outpost was under heavy attack, they could request these pre-planned close-in fires that completely surrounded their position. In case of radio or wire communication failures, the outpost could call for "box-me-in" or "Fire VT on my position" using a signal flare or another pyrotechnic device. Henderson ltr II.

Initiating the infantry action in May was the 1st KMC Regiment, holding the division left flank, with its 2d and 1st Battalions on line. At dusk on 3 May a platoon-size raiding party, under Second Lieutenant Kim Young Ha, left an outpost forward of the 1st Battalion line on a prisoner-taking mission and headed for the objective, Hill 34, adjacent to the rail line to Kaesong and about a half-mile west of the Sachon River. When the platoon was within approximately 1,000 yards of its goal, a support squad was detached near a trail and stream juncture to ambush any enemy attempting to attack the raiders from the rear.123 The remainder of the platoon, two assault squads, then continued towards the objective, moving cautiously and halting for an hour because of the bright moonlight.

Initiating the infantry action in May was the 1st KMC Regiment, holding the division's left flank, with its 2nd and 1st Battalions in formation. At dusk on May 3, a platoon-sized raiding party, led by Second Lieutenant Kim Young Ha, left an outpost in front of the 1st Battalion line on a mission to capture prisoners and headed towards their target, Hill 34, near the railway to Kaesong and about half a mile west of the Sachon River. When the platoon was about 1,000 yards from their objective, a support squad was separated near a trail and stream junction to ambush any enemy trying to attack the raiders from behind. The rest of the platoon, two assault squads, then continued towards the objective, moving carefully and pausing for an hour due to the bright moonlight.

123 This support squad itself was later ambushed. The heavy casualties it received prevented its further participation in the raid. KMC Regt UnitRpt 53, dtd 4 May 52.

123 This support squad was later caught in an ambush. The significant losses it suffered stopped it from participating further in the raid. KMC Regt UnitRpt 53, dtd 4 May 52.

After midnight the moon disappeared behind the clouds, and the Koreans again emerged. They advanced towards a village immediately south of the objective. After searching a few houses and not finding any enemy, the KMCs started on the last leg to Hill 34. As soon as the objective came into view the raiders deployed for the assault. At 0410 the two squads of Korean Marines charged the knoll, immediately drawing heavy Chinese small arms fire. When the raiders continued their assault, the enemy retreated to his trenchworks and bunkers where he continued to fire on the KMCs. Since it now appeared to the patrol leader that the probability of taking a prisoner was unlikely, he prepared to return to friendly lines. He first arranged for artillery to cover the withdrawal of the patrol, and then broke off the 18-minute fire fight, taking his only casualty,76 a wounded rifleman, with him. The KMCs counted 12 enemy dead. No prisoners were taken. In the preliminary action, the support squad had also suffered three killed and seven wounded.

After midnight, the moon was hidden by clouds, and the Koreans came out again. They moved toward a village just south of their target. After checking a few houses and not finding any enemies, the Korean Marines started the final stretch toward Hill 34. Once they could see the objective, the raiders spread out for the attack. At 4:10 AM, the two squads of Korean Marines charged the hill, immediately coming under heavy small arms fire from the Chinese. As the raiders pressed on with their assault, the enemy fell back to their trenches and bunkers but continued to shoot at the KMCs. Since the patrol leader now believed the chances of capturing a prisoner were slim, he decided to return to their lines. He first arranged for artillery support to cover the patrol's withdrawal and then ended the 18-minute firefight, taking with him his only casualty, a wounded rifleman. The KMCs tallied 12 enemy dead. No prisoners were taken. In the earlier action, the support squad had also suffered three killed and seven wounded.

As the KMC raiders were making their way back to the MLR, a combat patrol from 1/5, the reserve battalion of the 5th Marines, prepared to move out. This patrol was one of many dispatched by the battalion during the first week of May in accordance with its mission of patrolling in front of the OPLR, between the MLR and the OPLR, and throughout the regimental sector. On this occasion, the patrol was to occupy the high ground south of former Outpost 3, which had become the focal point of activity in the center sector.124 When used as a base of fire, this ground provided a position from which automatic weapons could readily cover enemy lines or tie in with adjacent friendly defenses. In addition, the 1/5 patrol was to drop off friendly snipers to cover the former OPLR position, to maintain surveillance, and to ascertain to what extent the Chinese were developing the outpost. The task went to a Company A platoon, which the unit commander, First Lieutenant Ernest S. Lee, reinforced with light and heavy machine guns.

As the KMC raiders were heading back to the MLR, a combat patrol from 1/5, the reserve battalion of the 5th Marines, was getting ready to deploy. This patrol was one of many sent out by the battalion during the first week of May as part of its mission to patrol in front of the OPLR, between the MLR and the OPLR, and across the regimental sector. This time, the patrol was going to take control of the high ground south of the old Outpost 3, which had become the center of activity in the middle sector.124 When used as a firing base, this location allowed for automatic weapons to effectively cover enemy lines or connect with nearby friendly defenses. Additionally, the 1/5 patrol was set to drop off friendly snipers to watch over the former OPLR position, keep an eye on things, and find out how much the Chinese were developing the outpost. This task was assigned to a Company A platoon, which the unit commander, First Lieutenant Ernest S. Lee, strengthened with light and heavy machine guns.

124 This position, the site of the mid-April battle, along with several others had been abandoned when the division withdrew its OPLR late in April. Infantry regiments dispatched frequent patrols in an attempt to discourage the enemy’s incorporating the hill into his own OPLR.

124 This position, the location of the mid-April battle, along with several others, was abandoned when the division pulled back its OPLR late in April. Infantry regiments sent out regular patrols to try to prevent the enemy from taking control of the hill for their own OPLR.

At sunup the Marines crossed line JAMESTOWN and before 0900 had reached the high ground they were to occupy. Here the patrol leader set up his base of fire, then pushed on with the rest of his men to the outpost, receiving occasional mortar fire before reaching the old position. While organizing his men at the objective, Lieutenant Lee received word by radio that the Chinese were preparing to attack. Almost immediately, intense shelling struck the forward slope of the hill. A Marine aerial observer (AO) detected 60–70 Chinese advancing from the next hill, some 800 yards to the front of the Marines. The AO also reported that the enemy was firing mortars towards OP 3.

At sunrise, the Marines crossed line JAMSTOWN and by 0900 had reached the high ground they were supposed to secure. The patrol leader established his base of fire and then moved on with the rest of his men to the outpost, encountering occasional mortar fire before reaching the old position. While organizing his men at the objective, Lieutenant Lee got a radio update that the Chinese were getting ready to attack. Almost immediately, intense shelling hit the forward slope of the hill. A Marine aerial observer (AO) spotted 60–70 Chinese advancing from the next hill, about 800 yards in front of the Marines. The AO also reported that the enemy was firing mortars at OP 3.

Shortly thereafter the Chinese fire ceased. Moments before it lifted, the patrol received a second warning that an enemy attack was imminent. Even as this message was being received, about 30 Chinese rushed the patrol. The Marines immediately took the hostile assault force under fire, killing 14 CCF with well-placed small arms77 fire. Overhead, four 1947-vintage Marine Corsair fighters (F4U-4Bs) struck at troublesome mortar positions previously located by the AO. At 1330 another aerial strike against Chinese mortars and enemy positions on the hill north of OP 3 was executed. These two air missions were credited with destroying six mortars, damaging two others, and wrecking seven personnel bunkers. During the second strike the 1/5 patrol began its withdrawal.

Shortly after that, the Chinese gunfire stopped. Just before it did, the patrol received another warning that an enemy attack was coming. While this message was still coming through, about 30 Chinese soldiers charged the patrol. The Marines instantly opened fire on the attacking troops, killing 14 CCF with accurate small arms fire. Above them, four Marine Corsair fighters from 1947 (F4U-4Bs) targeted troublesome mortar positions that had been identified by the AO. At 1:30 PM, another airstrike hit Chinese mortars and enemy positions on the hill north of OP 3. These two air missions were credited with destroying six mortars, damaging two others, and destroying seven personnel bunkers. During the second airstrike, the 1/5 patrol started its withdrawal.

On two occasions during the patrol’s return to its base the enemy attempted to ambush it. Each time the attempt was thwarted, once by the patrol itself and the second time, with the help of friendly artillery. On the way back several loud explosions suddenly halted the patrol. Investigation revealed that the Marines, carrying their casualties of one dead and four wounded, had inadvertently stumbled onto a path not cleared of mines. Two members of the stretcher bearer detail were killed and three others wounded by the AP (anti-personnel) mines that had not been charted on friendly maps by the Marines’ predecessors in the defense sector. A mine clearance team promptly disposed of the danger. With the aid of fires from a 2/5 patrol on the nose of a nearby hill, the 1/5 platoon was able to break contact. After pulling back several hundred yards, the patrol reached a forward medical aid station where jeeps picked up the more seriously wounded and took them to helicopters, which completed the evacuation. Patrol members reported 27 known enemy dead, including one that had been propelled into the air by a direct hit from an artillery round.

On two occasions during the patrol’s return to base, the enemy tried to ambush them. Each time the attempt was stopped—once by the patrol itself and the second time with support from friendly artillery. On the way back, several loud explosions suddenly halted the patrol. Upon investigation, it was revealed that the Marines, carrying their casualties of one dead and four wounded, had unintentionally walked onto a path that hadn't been cleared of mines. Two members of the stretcher team were killed and three others were wounded by the anti-personnel mines that were not marked on the friendly maps provided by the Marines’ predecessors in the defense sector. A mine clearance team quickly disposed of the threat. With the help of fire from a 2/5 patrol on the edge of a nearby hill, the 1/5 platoon was able to disengage. After pulling back several hundred yards, the patrol reached a forward medical aid station where jeeps picked up the more seriously injured and transported them to helicopters, which completed the evacuation. Patrol members reported 27 confirmed enemy dead, including one who had been thrown into the air by a direct hit from an artillery shell.

The next major Marine ground action soon involved the same Company A platoon, but this time as part of a larger force. Colonel Culhane, the regimental commander, directed his 1st Battalion to launch a new raid on the Outpost 3 area in an attempt to oust the Chinese and thereby deny the enemy use of the critical terrain. Inflicting casualties and capturing prisoners were additional tasks assigned. On 8 May Lieutenant Colonel Nihart issued Operation Order 12-52, calling for 1/5 to seize a series of three intermediate objectives (S, V and X) en route to OP 3 (Y). (See Map 8.) The combat patrol, reinforced by regimental elements, less Company B, was to be prepared to move north of OP 3 to occupy the next hill mass (Z), if necessary.

The next major Marine ground action soon involved the same Company A platoon, but this time as part of a larger force. Colonel Culhane, the regimental commander, directed his 1st Battalion to launch a new raid on the Outpost 3 area to push the Chinese out and deny the enemy access to the critical terrain. Inflicting casualties and capturing prisoners were additional tasks assigned. On May 8, Lieutenant Colonel Nihart issued Operation Order 12-52, calling for 1/5 to seize a series of three intermediate objectives (S, V, and X) on the way to OP 3 (Y). (See Map 8.) The combat patrol, reinforced by regimental elements, excluding Company B, was to be ready to move north of OP 3 to occupy the next hill mass (Z) if necessary.

MAP 8 K. White

MAP 8 K. White

OBJECTIVES FOR 1/5 ATTACK

1/5 Attack Objectives

9 MAY 1952

9 MAY 1952

Operational plans called for Lieutenant Lee’s Company A to do most of the leg work as the assault unit. Captain Leland Graham’s79 Company C, the diversionary force, was to make a feint against Hill 67, an enemy position southwest of OP 3, and to neutralize it by fire. Weapons Company, under First Lieutenant Ross L. Tipps, in support of the Company A force, was to set up a base of fire at a designated position (T), southeast of OP 3. Artillery support was to be furnished by 1/11, 4/11, and the attached 4.5-inch Rocket Battery. A section of regimental 4.2-inch mortars was also assigned. One platoon of Company B tanks was to assist the assault force by firing both on designated positions and targets of opportunity. Close air support flights were to be on station at two periods during the 9 May daylight operation.

Operational plans called for Lieutenant Lee’s Company A to handle most of the groundwork as the assault unit. Captain Leland Graham’s79 Company C, acting as the diversionary force, was to stage a feint against Hill 67, an enemy position southwest of OP 3, and to neutralize it with gunfire. Weapons Company, under First Lieutenant Ross L. Tipps, supporting Company A, was to establish a base of fire at a designated position (T), southeast of OP 3. Artillery support was to be provided by 1/11, 4/11, and the attached 4.5-inch Rocket Battery. A section of regimental 4.2-inch mortars was also assigned. One platoon of Company B tanks was to assist the assault force by engaging both designated positions and targets of opportunity. Close air support flights were to be available at two times during the daylight operation on May 9.

In the early morning hours, under cover of darkness, all units moved into position. At 0430 the 1st Platoon of Company A crossed the line of departure heading for Objective S, a small ridge south and west of OP 3. The 2d Platoon followed and moved out on the right, while the 3d Platoon covered the rear. This hill, lightly defended, was quickly overrun by the Marines. The 1st Platoon then turned northeast towards the four peaks (designated as V, X, Y, and Z), its main objectives. These four positions were all situated at approximately the same elevation, 450 feet. A distance of some 1,300 yards separated the first and fourth hills in the north-south ridgeline.

In the early morning hours, under the cover of darkness, all units got into position. At 4:30 AM, the 1st Platoon of Company A crossed the starting line heading for Objective S, a small ridge located to the south and west of OP 3. The 2nd Platoon followed and moved out on the right, while the 3rd Platoon secured the rear. This hill, which had light defenses, was quickly taken by the Marines. The 1st Platoon then turned northeast toward the four peaks (labeled V, X, Y, and Z), which were their main objectives. All four positions were at roughly the same elevation of 450 feet. There was about 1,300 yards between the first and fourth hills along the north-south ridgeline.

As the 1/5 platoon neared Objective V, friendly rockets lashed the crest of the hill, which was held by a reinforced enemy platoon in mutually supporting fighting holes. Assisted by this fire, Marine two-man teams with rifles and grenades assaulted the fighting holes occupied by the Chinese. As the Marines proceeded to clear the objective, half of the Chinese were forced to retreat to safer ground. Marines estimated that 15 enemy were killed and a like number wounded. By this time, three hours after setting out on the raid, the platoon had seized one prisoner and sustained five wounded.

As the 1/5 platoon approached Objective V, friendly rockets pounded the top of the hill, which was held by a reinforced enemy platoon in mutually supporting fighting positions. With this fire aiding them, Marine two-man teams with rifles and grenades attacked the enemy positions occupied by the Chinese. As the Marines worked to clear the objective, half of the Chinese forces were driven back to safer ground. The Marines estimated that 15 enemies were killed and about the same number were wounded. By this time, three hours after starting the raid, the platoon had captured one prisoner and had five wounded.

While reorganizing for the attack against Objectives X and Y, the 5th Marines patrol came under a heavy artillery and mortar barrage that killed one Marine and wounded three others. As the main body of the assault force advanced towards Objective X to support the attack, the lead elements of the company headed for OP 3. Throughout this maneuver, the company remained under heavy artillery fire.

While getting ready for the assault on Objectives X and Y, the 5th Marines patrol was hit by a heavy artillery and mortar attack that killed one Marine and injured three others. As the main part of the assault force moved forward towards Objective X to assist in the attack, the lead elements of the company made their way to OP 3. During this operation, the company was continuously under heavy artillery fire.

Proceeding along the eastern slope of the ridgeline to assault80 knobs X and Y, the platoon had a good view of the effectiveness of their friendly supporting artillery fire. In fact, the combined rocket, howitzer, mortar, tank, and machine gun fire threw up so much dust that at times it restricted the vision of the Marine assault team. As platoon members neared the summit of Objective X they encountered a heavy stream of defending fire. A strong counterattack from the front and left flank assailed the 1st Platoon, but the Marines repulsed the enemy with accurate small arms fire, killing six CCF. Infiltrators then attempted to envelop the Marine platoon and isolate it from the rest of the Company A assault force. Successive waves of Chinese, employing a wedge formation, tried to overrun the main body of the assault force. In repulsing this latest counterattack, Company A killed 12 and wounded 5 enemy.

As the platoon advanced along the eastern slope of the ridgeline to take on knobs X and Y, they had a clear view of how effective their friendly artillery fire was. The combined fire from rockets, howitzers, mortars, tanks, and machine guns kicked up so much dust that it sometimes limited the visibility of the Marine assault team. When the platoon members got close to the top of Objective X, they faced a heavy wave of defending fire. A strong counterattack from the front and left flank hit the 1st Platoon, but the Marines pushed back the enemy with precise small arms fire, killing six CCF. Then, infiltrators tried to surround the Marine platoon and cut it off from the rest of the Company A assault team. Successive waves of Chinese forces, using a wedge formation, attempted to take over the main part of the assault team. In fighting off this latest counterattack, Company A killed 12 and wounded 5 enemy troops.

Quickly sizing up the situation, the company commander ordered the 1st Platoon to rejoin the rest of the assault force. As the platoon began to pull back at 1435 the Chinese blanketed the route with a heavy barrage, firing “over four hundred rounds in a five minute period.”125 This intense shelling took the lives of three Marines, wounded a number of others, and halted the assault force just short of its final goal. Even though the Chinese had been driven from the three intermediate objectives, the devastating enemy mortar and artillery fire made the Marine position untenable. A third of the platoon moved back to Objective V; the rest worked their way along a route east of that objective. While the rest of Company A and Weapons Company elements occupied Hill T, the diversionary force, Company C, reinforced by other Weapons Company personnel, had remained at a strongpoint not far from Objective S. All supporting ground weapons assisted in the withdrawal. In addition to lending direct fire support, Marine tanks brought forward emergency supplies and evacuated casualties. By 1730, the assault force had returned to friendly lines, followed shortly by the rest of the battalion.

Quickly assessing the situation, the company commander ordered the 1st Platoon to reunite with the rest of the assault force. As the platoon began to pull back at 2:35 PM, the Chinese covered the route with heavy artillery, firing "over four hundred rounds in a five-minute period."125 This intense bombardment took the lives of three Marines, wounded several others, and stalled the assault force just before reaching its final objective. Even though the Chinese had been pushed back from the three intermediate objectives, the devastating enemy mortar and artillery fire made the Marine position impossible to hold. A third of the platoon returned to Objective V, while the remainder navigated a route east of that target. While the rest of Company A and elements of Weapons Company occupied Hill T, the diversionary force, Company C, reinforced by other Weapons Company personnel, maintained a stronghold not far from Objective S. All supporting ground weapons assisted in the withdrawal. In addition to providing direct fire support, Marine tanks delivered emergency supplies and evacuated casualties. By 5:30 PM, the assault force had returned to friendly lines, soon followed by the rest of the battalion.

125 1/5 ComdD, May 52, p. 10.

125 1/5 ComdD, May 52, p. 10.

Although the battalion failed to seize and hold all of its objectives, that part of the mission calling for inflicting casualties and taking81 prisoners had been successfully executed.126 Marines counted 35 enemy dead, 53 wounded, and 1 POW, and estimated that an additional 70 CCF had been killed and 105 wounded. Seven Marines were killed and 66 wounded in the action described by some observers as “the largest offensive effort the 1st Marine Division [has] made since last September.”127 The battalion fire support was well controlled and coordinated from an observation post on the MLR. Five air strikes, including one MPQ-14 mission, were credited with destroying three artillery pieces and an equal number of mortars, damaging two other mortars, and demolishing six personnel bunkers.

Although the battalion didn't manage to capture and hold all of its objectives, it successfully accomplished the part of the mission involving inflicting casualties and taking81 prisoners. The Marines reported 35 enemy dead, 53 wounded, and 1 POW, estimating that an additional 70 CCF were killed and 105 wounded. Seven Marines lost their lives and 66 were injured in what some observers described as “the largest offensive effort the 1st Marine Division [has] made since last September.” The battalion's fire support was effectively controlled and coordinated from an observation post on the MLR. Five air strikes, including one MPQ-14 mission, were credited with destroying three artillery pieces and the same number of mortars, damaging two other mortars, and demolishing six personnel bunkers.

126 Lieutenant Colonel Nihart believed that the heavy enemy shelling, which had caused the early retirement of his battalion, had been possible either because Chinese mortar and artillery positions were so well camouflaged that intelligence had not located them or else so well protected that UNC counterbattery fire had failed to destroy them. Nihart comments.

126 Lieutenant Colonel Nihart believed that the intense enemy shelling, which had forced his battalion to retreat early, was possible either because the Chinese mortar and artillery positions were so well hidden that intelligence couldn't find them, or they were so well protected that UNC counter-battery fire couldn't take them out. Nihart comments.

127 5thMar ComdD, May 52, p. 9.

127 5thMar ComdD, May 52, p. 9.

As the regiment noted, the earlier withdrawal of the OPLR had “altered to a considerable extent the tactics employed in this area. This is especially apparent in the number of patrol contacts close to the MLR and displayed the eagerness of the enemy to move in on any ground not held by friendly forces.”128 At the same time the increased number of troops made available for the MLR defense considerably strengthened the JAMESTOWN Line itself. Sector responsibility changed on 11 May. Colonel Russell E. Honsowetz’ 7th Marines relieved the 5th Marines in the center regimental sector, with 2/7 and 1/7 occupying the left and right battalion positions, respectively.

As the regiment noted, the earlier withdrawal of the OPLR had "significantly changed the tactics used in this area. This is especially evident in the number of patrol contacts near the MLR and showed the enemy's eagerness to advance into any territory not held by friendly forces." 128 At the same time, the increased number of troops available for MLR defense greatly strengthened the JAMESTOWN Line itself. Sector responsibility changed on May 11. Colonel Russell E. Honsowetz's 7th Marines took over from the 5th Marines in the center regimental sector, with 2/7 and 1/7 occupying the left and right battalion positions, respectively.

128 Ibid., p. 1.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 1.

When it took over the peace corridor sector the 7th Marines also assumed the responsibility for emergency rescue of the Allied truce delegates at Panmunjom.129 The regiment advanced a mile nearer the objective when it moved the pick-up force’s assembly area to within 400 yards of the line of departure. The 7th Marines also replaced the tanks in the force with M-39 personnel carriers, a U.S. Army-developed tracked vehicle similar in appearance to the Marine amphibian tractor. Another vehicle the 7th Marines retained in its task force was a medium tank equipped with additional radios. This armored communication and control vehicle was used as a radio82 relay station on the MLR to assist in liaison between moving infantry and tank units. Marine riflemen dubbed this command tank the porcupine, to describe the effect of many bristling antennas sticking out from its top. While the Marine division right sector, occupied by the 1st Marines, remained relatively quiet during the spring months on JAMESTOWN, the 7th Marines in the center MLR would shortly be involved in the division’s major ground action in late May.

When the 7th Marines took control of the peace corridor sector, they also became responsible for the emergency rescue of the Allied truce delegates at Panmunjom.129 The regiment moved a mile closer to the objective by relocating the pick-up force’s assembly area to within 400 yards of the line of departure. The 7th Marines replaced the tanks in the force with M-39 personnel carriers, a tracked vehicle developed by the U.S. Army that looks similar to the Marine amphibian tractor. Another vehicle that the 7th Marines kept in their task force was a medium tank fitted with extra radios. This armored communication and control vehicle served as a radio82 relay station on the MLR to help with coordination between the moving infantry and tank units. Marine riflemen nicknamed this command tank the porcupine, due to the many bristling antennas sticking out from its top. While the Marine division right sector, occupied by the 1st Marines, remained relatively quiet during the spring months on JAMestown, the 7th Marines in the center MLR would soon be involved in the division’s major ground action in late May.

129 This force and its mission at various times were known as “Task Force Jig” or “Operation Snatch.”

129 This group and its purpose were referred to at different times as “Task Force Jig” or “Operation Snatch.”

As part of the active defense of its JAMESTOWN line, Lieutenant Colonel Daughtry, commanding 1/7, issued a directive on 26 May intended to deny to the enemy key terrain remaining on the old OPLR. Operation Plan 16-52 called for an attack to seize two parcels of high ground to the regiment’s right front. At the same time, the battalion was to neutralize two Chinese positions west of the main objectives, Hill 104 (Objective 1) and the Tumae-ri Ridge (Objective 2), approximately a half-mile further north. The designated attack force, Captain Earl W. Thompson’s Company A, was heavily reinforced. While Company A pursued its mission to the right, a Company C reinforced platoon under Second Lieutenant Howard L. Siers would conduct a feint on a pair of enemy positions to the left. Support for the operation would come from 2/11, two tank platoons, and from air, which was to be on call.

As part of the active defense of its JAMESTOWN line, Lieutenant Colonel Daughtry, in charge of 1/7, issued an order on May 26 aimed at denying the enemy control of key terrain still held on the old OPLR. Operation Plan 16-52 outlined an attack to capture two patches of high ground to the regiment’s right front. Simultaneously, the battalion was to neutralize two Chinese positions located west of the main objectives, Hill 104 (Objective 1) and the Tumae-ri Ridge (Objective 2), which were about half a mile further north. The assigned attack unit, Captain Earl W. Thompson’s Company A, was heavily reinforced. While Company A carried out its mission to the right, a Company C reinforced platoon led by Second Lieutenant Howard L. Siers would stage a feint against a couple of enemy positions to the left. Support for the operation would come from 2/11, two tank platoons, and air support, which would be on standby.

H-Hour was set for 0300 on 28 May. Attack and diversionary forces on schedule crossed the line of departure, a half-mile north of the MLR. Captain Thompson’s main force advanced nearly to the base of Hill 104 before the Chinese, in estimated reinforced platoon strength, began to counterattack. The fight came to an abrupt end when Second Lieutenant John J. Donahue led his platoon to the top with bayonets fixed.130 As the Marines dug in they came under heavy mortar and artillery fire from CCF strongholds to the north. On the left, meanwhile, Lieutenant Siers had received orders to seize the closer of his two objectives, former OPLR 5, instead of merely placing suppressive fire on it.

H-Hour was set for 0300 on May 28. The attack and diversionary forces, on schedule, crossed the line of departure, a half-mile north of the MLR. Captain Thompson’s main force advanced almost to the base of Hill 104 before the Chinese, estimated to be in reinforced platoon strength, began to counterattack. The fight came to an abrupt end when Second Lieutenant John J. Donahue led his platoon to the top with bayonets fixed. 130 As the Marines dug in, they came under heavy mortar and artillery fire from CCF strongholds to the north. Meanwhile, on the left, Lieutenant Siers had received orders to seize the closer of his two objectives, former OPLR 5, instead of just placing suppressive fire on it.

130 Maj Kenneth A. Seal comments on draft MS, dtd Oct 66. At the time of this attack, Lieutenant Seal commanded the 2d Platoon, A/1/7.

130 Maj Kenneth A. Seal comments on draft MS, dtd Oct 66. At the time of this attack, Lieutenant Seal was in charge of the 2nd Platoon, A/1/7.

Moving forward from its base of fire, the platoon soon established contact with the enemy. At 0554 the platoon began its attack on the objective. Despite the close-in, hand-to-hand fighting, when it became apparent the assault could not be stopped the enemy gave83 way to Marine persistence in seizing the hill. By 0700 the Company C, 7th Marines platoon had secured its objectives and begun preparations for defense of the positions as well as continued support of the main attack force. Heavy casualties, however, forced Lieutenant Colonel Daughtry to recall the platoon and it returned to the lines by 0930.

Moving forward from its firing position, the platoon quickly made contact with the enemy. At 5:54 AM, the platoon started its attack on the objective. Despite intense close-quarters combat, when it became clear that the assault couldn't be stopped, the enemy conceded to the Marines' determination in taking the hill. By 7:00 AM, Company C, 7th Marines, had secured its objectives and started preparing to defend its positions while also continuing to support the main attack force. However, heavy casualties forced Lieutenant Colonel Daughtry to pull the platoon back, and it returned to the lines by 9:30 AM.

Up on Hill 104, Company A, 1/7 faced practically the same situation. Taking Objective 1 had been costly and the advance through withering enemy fire was adding to the casualties. A reinforcing platoon was sent from the MLR to help the company disengage and return to friendly lines. Contact with the enemy was broken shortly after noon. With the aid of air and artillery, the company was able to make its way to the MLR by 1405.

Up on Hill 104, Company A, 1/7 faced almost the same situation. Capturing Objective 1 had been expensive, and pushing through intense enemy fire was increasing the casualties. A reinforcing platoon was sent from the MLR to assist the company in breaking away and returning to friendly lines. Contact with the enemy was lost shortly after noon. With support from air and artillery, the company managed to reach the MLR by 2:05 PM.

Advancing only as far as it did, the attack, like the one earlier that month, failed to take all the designated objectives. Casualties to the 1/7 Marines were placed at 9 killed131 and 107 wounded. Most of the latter were evacuated for further treatment. Forty-five of the enemy were counted dead and three wounded. Marines estimated another 40 enemy killed and 40 more wounded.132 The action resulted in a casualty toll that was the highest to date for any Marine company in western Korea. All three Company A rifle platoon leaders—Second Lieutenants Donahue, Jules E. Gerding, and Kenneth A. Seal—were wounded. This battle also became the occasion for another unwelcomed record—4,053 rounds of enemy incoming, during a 24-hour period.

Advancing only as far as it did, the attack, like the one earlier that month, failed to achieve all the designated goals. The 1/7 Marines suffered 9 killed and 107 wounded. Most of the wounded were evacuated for further treatment. Forty-five enemy soldiers were counted as dead and three wounded. Marines estimated another 40 enemies killed and 40 more wounded. The action led to a casualty count that was the highest so far for any Marine company in western Korea. All three Company A rifle platoon leaders—Second Lieutenants Donahue, Jules E. Gerding, and Kenneth A. Seal—were wounded. This battle also set another unwanted record—4,053 rounds of enemy fire during a 24-hour period.

131 Two Marines killed in the action were later posthumously awarded the Medal of Honor. Corporal David B. Champagne, A/1/7, was responsible for saving the lives of the three other members of his fire team. When a grenade fell in their midst, Champagne grabbed it to hurl back to CCF positions. Just as it cleared his hand, the grenade exploded, showering lethal shrapnel into the body of the 19-year-old Rhode Islander. One of the C/1/7 reinforcement Marines, Private First Class John D. Kelly, had conducted a one-man assault against a dug-in Chinese machine gun crew. Though painfully wounded during this encounter, he disposed of the enemy, then reduced a second weapons bunker. While firing point-blank into a third position the brave Marine was fatally wounded. This 1/7 action was the first in the western Korea defense to result in multiple Medal of Honor awards.

131 Two Marines who died in the action were later awarded the Medal of Honor posthumously. Corporal David B. Champagne, A/1/7, was credited with saving the lives of three other members of his fire team. When a grenade fell among them, Champagne grabbed it to throw it back to the enemy positions. Just as it left his hand, the grenade exploded, sending deadly shrapnel into the body of the 19-year-old Marine from Rhode Island. Private First Class John D. Kelly, a reinforcement Marine from C/1/7, carried out a solo assault against a dug-in Chinese machine gun crew. Even though he was badly wounded during this confrontation, he eliminated the enemy and then took out a second weapons bunker. While firing at close range into a third position, the brave Marine was fatally wounded. This 1/7 action was the first in the defense of western Korea to lead to multiple Medal of Honor awards.

132 1/7 ComdD, May 52, pp. 17–18.

132 1/7 ComdD, May 52, pp. 17–18.

Following this late May offensive, a brief period of relative calm settled over the MLR. Marine and Chinese units continued the active defense of their respective sectors, with generally only a limited number of contacts. Fire fights between Marine patrols and CCF defenders lasted only a short time and usually ended when artillery84 fire caused the patrol to pull back. Even though this state of affairs remained essentially unchanged through June, several other events that month would affect Marine defense of the westernmost sector in I Corps.

Following this late May offensive, a brief period of relative calm settled over the Main Line of Resistance (MLR). Marine and Chinese units continued to actively defend their respective areas, with generally only a limited number of encounters. Gunfights between Marine patrols and CCF defenders lasted only a short time and usually ended when artillery fire forced the patrol to retreat. Even though this situation remained largely the same throughout June, several other events that month would impact the Marine defense of the westernmost sector in I Corps.

End of the Second Year of War133

133 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 52; 5th Mar ComdDs, Apr, Jun 52; 7thMar ComdDs, May-Jun 52; 1/7 ComdD, May 52; KMC Regt Unit Rpt 120, dtd 30 Jun 52.

133 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 52; 5th Mar ComdDs, Apr, Jun 52; 7thMar ComdDs, May-Jun 52; 1/7 ComdD, May 52; KMC Regt Unit Rpt 120, dated 30 Jun 52.

A second realignment of the Marine-Commonwealth boundary along Line JAMESTOWN was made on 1 June. Part of the rear of the MLR was moved eastward to enable the Marine division to assume full responsibility for a key ridgetop. Prior to this date the hill mass had been divided along its crest, a factor that made it a potential trouble spot for both divisions. On 23 and 24 June, the 7th Marines MLR battalions relocated their positions towards the enemy along JAMESTOWN. This readjustment of the line varied from 1,300 yards in the center of the regimental sector to 400 yards near its right. The additional terrain strengthened the division front by placing the center regiment on improved and more defensible ground.

A second adjustment of the Marine-Commonwealth boundary along Line JAMESTOWN took place on June 1. Part of the rear of the MLR was moved east to allow the Marine division to take full responsibility for a crucial ridgetop. Before this change, the hill mass had been divided along its crest, which made it a potential trouble spot for both divisions. On June 23 and 24, the 7th Marines MLR battalions shifted their positions toward the enemy along JAMestown. This realignment of the line varied from 1,300 yards in the center of the regimental sector to 400 yards near its right. The additional land strengthened the division front by positioning the center regiment on better and more defensible ground.

A week before this MLR change took place, there had been a shift in occupants in its far right sector. Colonel Culhane’s 5th Marines replaced the 1st on line, which then went into division reserve. Manning the MLR were 2/5 on the left and 1/5 to the right.

A week before this MLR change happened, there was a shift in the occupants in its far right area. Colonel Culhane’s 5th Marines took the place of the 1st on the front line, which then went into division reserve. Holding the MLR were 2/5 on the left and 1/5 on the right.

In early June the recently appointed UN commander, General Clark, made his first visit to the 1st Marine Division front. During his briefing, General Selden reviewed the unusual combat difficulties confronting his Marines. In addition to the unfavorable terrain, the division commander noted the special operational restrictions caused by proximity to the truce talk site. Presence of a large number of uncharted minefields created another obstacle. Herculean efforts were required of the Marines to simultaneously man and construct defenses over 35 miles of JAMESTOWN. Adding to Marine problems were the facts that ground units were not receiving sufficient close air85 support and the capabilities of the Chinese were constantly increasing.

In early June, the newly appointed UN commander, General Clark, made his first visit to the 1st Marine Division front. During his briefing, General Selden discussed the unique combat challenges facing his Marines. Besides the tough terrain, the division commander pointed out the specific operational restrictions due to the nearby truce talk location. The presence of many uncharted minefields posed another problem. The Marines needed to put in massive efforts to simultaneously man and build defenses along 35 miles of JAMESTOWN. On top of that, the ground units weren’t getting enough close air85 support, and the capabilities of the Chinese forces were continually growing.

Chinese order of battle (OOB) information was fed into the division intelligence network by higher commands, I Corps and EUSAK, and adjacent units, but a large part of the data about Communist forces was produced by the division itself. Frontline units in contact with the enemy, by observation of his activities, supplied the bulk of intelligence about enemy defense tactics, employment of weapons, and combat characteristics. Supporting Marine division units, particularly artillery and armor, fed more facts into the system, mostly through identification of the caliber of enemy shells fired at the Marines. As a result of its missions forward of the line and actions in defense of it, the division reconnaissance company also contributed to the intelligence network. Individual Marines, performing as tactical air observers and artillery air observers, as well as the VMO and HMR pilots, were other important sources readily available to the 1st Marine Division.

Chinese order of battle (OOB) information was provided to the division intelligence network by higher commands, I Corps and EUSAK, and nearby units, but a significant portion of the data about Communist forces was generated by the division itself. Frontline units in contact with the enemy, by observing their activities, supplied most of the intelligence on enemy defense tactics, weapon usage, and combat characteristics. Supporting Marine division units, especially artillery and armor, contributed more information to the system, primarily through identifying the caliber of enemy shells fired at the Marines. Because of its missions ahead of the frontline and actions defending it, the division reconnaissance company also added to the intelligence network. Individual Marines, acting as tactical air observers and artillery air observers, along with the VMO and HMR pilots, were other crucial resources readily available to the 1st Marine Division.

G-2 directed the division intelligence effort, including processing of raw material and supplying of updated reports to 1st Division units. The G-2 section also maintained OOB and target identification data on Chinese units and their commanders. Members of the G-2 staff also assisted in interrogation of prisoners of war (POWs), screened the civilians apprehended in unauthorized areas, debriefed Marines exposed to enemy intelligence, and conducted inspections of division internal security. In areas where the 1st Marine Division had only a limited intelligence capability it turned to EUSAK for assistance.

G-2 led the division's intelligence efforts, including processing raw data and providing updated reports to 1st Division units. The G-2 section also kept track of order of battles and target identification information on Chinese units and their commanders. G-2 staff members also helped interrogate prisoners of war (POWs), screened civilians caught in restricted areas, debriefed Marines who had been exposed to enemy intelligence, and conducted inspections of the division's internal security. In areas where the 1st Marine Division had limited intelligence capabilities, it turned to EUSAK for support.

Eighth Army teams augmented the division counterintelligence efforts and provided most of the translation service. In addition, three radio intercept units furnished information to the Marines. The critical importance of this service had been proven during several combat patrols in May when additional information was instantly radioed to a friendly unit under fire.

Eighth Army teams boosted the division's counterintelligence efforts and handled most of the translation services. Additionally, three radio intercept units supplied information to the Marines. The vital importance of this service was demonstrated during several combat patrols in May when extra information was promptly relayed to a friendly unit under fire.

Other intelligence activities were less beneficial to the Marines. These operations were conducted by Tactical Liaison Officers (TLOs, friendly Koreans trained by U.S. intelligence teams), and members of a Higher Intelligence Detachment (HID), a Korean unit assigned from EUSAK. Both the TLO and HID proved of limited value to the division, due to the generally poor educational background of the agents, their inadequate training, and frequent86 failure to return from assignments behind enemy lines. Some Marines believed the basic fault in these operatives lay in “an exaggerated opinion of their importance.”134

Other intelligence activities were less helpful for the Marines. These operations were carried out by Tactical Liaison Officers (TLOs, friendly Koreans trained by U.S. intelligence teams) and members of a Higher Intelligence Detachment (HID), a Korean unit assigned from EUSAK. Both the TLO and HID turned out to be of limited value to the division, mainly because of the generally poor educational background of the agents, their insufficient training, and their frequent failure to return from missions behind enemy lines. Some Marines thought the main issue with these operatives was their “exaggerated opinion of their importance.”134

134 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 9-33.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 9-33.

Several division intelligence Marines, in conjunction with training and shore party personnel, took part in an informational activity of a different type. These Marines reconnoitered several friendly islands off western Korea to determine their suitability for division landing exercises. The second one inspected, Tokchok-to, 30 miles southwest of Inchon, was selected. By early June planning had progressed to the point where a program had been developed for bimonthly battalion landing team exercises. The KPR maneuver force, appropriately reinforced, was designated as a participating unit. Landings were to employ boat teams, amphibian tractors, and helicopters. The entire program was designed to provide refresher training for Marines in carrying out their primary mission of amphibious assault. By the end of June, 3/5 and 3/1, in turn, had captured Tokchok-to.

Several intelligence Marines from the division, along with training and shore party personnel, participated in a unique informational activity. These Marines checked out a few friendly islands off the coast of western Korea to see if they were suitable for division landing exercises. The second island they inspected, Tokchok-to, located 30 miles southwest of Inchon, was chosen. By early June, planning had advanced to the point where a program was created for bimonthly battalion landing team exercises. The KPR maneuver force, appropriately reinforced, was designated as a participating unit. The landings would utilize boat teams, amphibious tractors, and helicopters. The entire program was designed to provide refresher training for Marines in executing their primary mission of amphibious assault. By the end of June, 3/5 and 3/1 had successfully captured Tokchok-to.

Other training concentrated more on the task at hand. Division units in reserve rehearsed tactics for offensive and defensive warfare. Most ground units conducted extensive schooling in both mine and booby trap detection and clearance. Recognizing that patrolling was an important part of a Marine’s life on the MLR, the division included in its Noncommissioned Officers’ (NCO) Leadership School a thorough indoctrination in patrolling tactics.135 More than 50 percent of the training at all levels was at night. In addition, an extensive orientation was conducted for newly arrived combat replacements, who could not be committed to action for 72 hours after joining the division.

Other training focused more on the tasks at hand. Reserve units practiced tactics for both offensive and defensive warfare. Most ground units received thorough training in detecting and clearing mines and booby traps. Understanding that patrolling was a crucial part of a Marine's life on the MLR, the division incorporated a comprehensive training in patrolling tactics into its Noncommissioned Officers’ (NCO) Leadership School. More than 50 percent of all training was conducted at night. Additionally, an extensive orientation was provided for newly arrived combat replacements, who couldn't be sent into action for 72 hours after joining the division.

135 BGen Austin R. Brunelli ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 13 Sep 66, hereafter Brunelli ltr. The division chief of staff during more than half of 1952, Colonel Brunelli later observed that the “school produced more effective patrolling and ... contributed to reducing our casualties.”

135 BGen Austin R. Brunelli letter to Head, Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, dated September 13, 1966, hereafter Brunelli letter. The division chief of staff for more than half of 1952, Colonel Brunelli later noted that the “school produced more effective patrolling and ... helped reduce our casualties.”

A week after the division’s June replacements landed at Inchon, General Selden’s headquarters received a directive that would affect a number of these new Marines. On 10 June CG, EUSAK ordered his corps commanders to make continuous efforts to secure the identification and changes in the enemy order of battle. Two days later I Corps followed the Eighth Army order with a letter of instruction which called for each I Corps division to “prepare plans for launching swift, vigorous, and violent large-scale raids to87 capture prisoners, to gain intelligence, to destroy enemy positions and material and/or strong limited objective attacks to improve and strengthen Line JAMESTOWN.”136 Large scale was defined as an “attacking force limited to battalion or regimental (brigade) size with appropriate armor and artillery support.”137 Divisions were required to submit detailed proposals for future action by 21 June. Marine division plans for limited objective attacks during July by units of the 7th Marines and KMCs were subsequently prepared and forwarded to I Corps.

A week after the new replacements for the division arrived at Inchon in June, General Selden's headquarters got a directive that would impact several of these new Marines. On June 10, the CG, EUSAK, instructed his corps commanders to make continuous efforts to identify changes in the enemy’s order of battle. Two days later, I Corps followed the Eighth Army's directive with a letter of instruction that required each I Corps division to “prepare plans for launching swift, vigorous, and violent large-scale raids to 87 capture prisoners, gather intelligence, destroy enemy positions and materials, and/or conduct strong limited objective attacks to enhance and strengthen Line JAMestown.”136 Large scale was defined as an “attacking force limited to battalion or regimental (brigade) size with appropriate armor and artillery support.”137 Divisions needed to submit detailed proposals for future actions by June 21. Plans for limited objective attacks during July by units of the 7th Marines and KMCs were then prepared and sent to I Corps.

136 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 52, App. I, p. 8.

136 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 52, App. I, p. 8.

137 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

One operation conducted north of the 2/5 left battalion sector early on 22 June was not, however, in response to this enemy identification mission. Late the previous day, Company G had sent out a 16-man ambush. Before the Marines reached their destination, a small enemy force, itself lying in wait, began to pour a heavy volume of fire on the Marines. At this point the patrol was ordered to pull back. One group of 10 made it back to the MLR; the remaining Marines headed for a nearby combat outpost in friendly hands. Reports to the company revealed one Marine not accounted for. The outpost commander was directed to search the area for the missing Marine. This reconnaissance by a fire team failed, but a reinforced squad sent out later brought back the body of the Marine who had been killed by Chinese artillery.

One operation carried out north of the 2/5 left battalion sector early on June 22 wasn’t in response to the enemy identification mission. Late the day before, Company G had deployed a 16-man ambush. Before the Marines got to their destination, a small enemy force, waiting in ambush, opened fire on them with heavy volume. At that point, the patrol was ordered to pull back. One group of 10 made it back to the MLR; the other Marines headed for a nearby friendly combat outpost. Reports to the company indicated one Marine was unaccounted for. The outpost commander was instructed to search the area for the missing Marine. This reconnaissance by a fire team was unsuccessful, but a reinforced squad sent out later recovered the body of the Marine who had been killed by Chinese artillery.

While this rescue effort was in progress, another similar action was under way. Not long after its arrival on the MLR, Company E, 2/5 had spotted in the No-Man’s-Land between the two main defensive lines a figure that appeared to be the body of a Marine. Since one man had been reported missing from an earlier 1st Marines patrol, recovery of the body, which had been propped up against a mound of dirt in the open, was undertaken. A special Company E patrol left the main line shortly before dawn on the 22d and reached the recovery area at daybreak. After artillery had laid down smoke, the patrol moved in, quickly recovered the body, and set out for friendly territory. Before the Marines had advanced very far on their return trip, the Chinese interdicted their route with heavy mortar fire, which killed one member of the patrol and wounded another. When the 5th Marines patrol returned to88 JAMESTOWN shortly after 0700, it carried not only the body it had recovered but also that of the Marine who had been killed on the recovery mission.

While this rescue operation was happening, another similar effort was underway. Shortly after arriving on the MLR, Company E, 2/5 spotted what looked like the body of a Marine in the No-Man’s-Land between the two main defensive lines. Since one man had been reported missing from an earlier patrol of the 1st Marines, they set out to recover the body, which had been propped up against a dirt mound in the open. A special Company E patrol left the main line shortly before dawn on the 22nd and reached the recovery area at daybreak. After artillery laid down smoke, the patrol moved in, quickly recovered the body, and headed back to friendly territory. Before the Marines had gone far on their return trip, the Chinese intercepted their route with heavy mortar fire, killing one member of the patrol and wounding another. When the 5th Marines patrol returned to88 JAMESOTWN shortly after 0700, it brought back not only the body they had recovered but also the body of the Marine who had been killed during the recovery mission.

By the end of June, major command changes had taken place within the 1st Marine Division as well as in several other UNC components. On 13 June, Brigadier General Robert O. Bare took over the second spot from Brigadier General Twining. Both ADCs were graduates of the Naval Academy and both were native mid-Westerners (General Bare—Iowa, General Twining—Wisconsin). Before joining the 1st Marine Division in Korea General Bare had served at Camp Pendleton, California where most recently he had been commanding general of the Training and Replacement Command. His World War II experience included participation in both European and Pacific campaigns. He was the Staff Officer, Plans, in the U.S. Naval Section for the Allied naval group that planned the amphibious assault at Normandy, France. Later he served in the Peleliu and Okinawa campaigns and, with the ending of hostilities, had participated in the surrender and repatriation of the Japanese in north China.

By the end of June, significant command changes occurred within the 1st Marine Division and several other UNC components. On June 13, Brigadier General Robert O. Bare took over the second position from Brigadier General Twining. Both Assistant Division Commanders were graduates of the Naval Academy and were originally from the Midwest (General Bare—Iowa, General Twining—Wisconsin). Before joining the 1st Marine Division in Korea, General Bare had served at Camp Pendleton, California, where he most recently held the position of commanding general of the Training and Replacement Command. His World War II experience included involvement in both European and Pacific campaigns. He was the Staff Officer for Plans in the U.S. Naval Section of the Allied naval group that planned the amphibious assault at Normandy, France. Later, he participated in the campaigns at Peleliu and Okinawa, and with the end of hostilities, he took part in the surrender and repatriation of Japanese forces in northern China.

The outgoing ADC, General Twining, was being reassigned to the Office of the Commandant, HQMC. For his outstanding service as assistant division commander from March through May 1952, he received a Gold Star in lieu of his second Legion of Merit with Combat “V.”

The outgoing ADC, General Twining, was being reassigned to the Office of the Commandant, HQMC. For his exceptional service as assistant division commander from March to May 1952, he received a Gold Star instead of his second Legion of Merit with Combat “V.”

Other high-level changes in command that had also recently taken place had included the UNC commander himself, General Ridgway, who had been succeeded in mid-May by General Clark. Major General Glenn O. Barcus, USAF, had assumed command of Fifth Air Force, replacing Lieutenant General Everest on 30 May. On 4 June, Vice Admiral Robert P. Briscoe had been named the new Commander, Naval Forces Far East to succeed Vice Admiral C. Turner Joy who had held the position since August 1949. And in I Corps, Major General Paul W. Kendall, USA, took over as corps commander on 29 June from Lieutenant General O’Daniel.

Other significant changes in leadership that recently occurred included the UNC commander, General Ridgway, who was replaced in mid-May by General Clark. Major General Glenn O. Barcus, USAF, took over command of the Fifth Air Force, succeeding Lieutenant General Everest on May 30. On June 4, Vice Admiral Robert P. Briscoe was appointed as the new Commander of Naval Forces Far East, replacing Vice Admiral C. Turner Joy, who had been in the role since August 1949. In I Corps, Major General Paul W. Kendall, USA, became the corps commander on June 29, taking over from Lieutenant General O’Daniel.

The end of the second year of the Korean fighting and the beginning of the third was observed by the Chinese with an attack against the 2d Battalion, 5th Marines, manning JAMESTOWN positions to the left of the regimental sector. Commanded at that time89 by Lieutenant Colonel Thomas J. Cross, 2/5 was new on line, having relieved 2/1 during the night of 15–16 June.

The end of the second year of fighting in Korea and the start of the third was marked by a Chinese attack on the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines, who were defending the JAMESTOWN positions to the left of the regimental sector. At that time, the battalion was led by Lieutenant Colonel Thomas J. Cross and was newly on the front lines, having taken over from the 2/1 during the night of June 15-16.89

Late in the afternoon of 24 June, the enemy began registering his mortars and artillery on MLR company positions of 2/5 and a portion of the rear area occupied by the battalion 81mm mortars. Chinese incoming, sometimes intense, sometimes sporadic, continued until shortly after 2130. By this time the CCF were moving down their trenches toward a key outpost, Yoke, known also as Hill 159, which was still occupied on daytime basis by the Marines and lay north of the Company F Sector (Captain Harold C. Fuson). Moments later, the 34 men temporarily outposting Yoke saw the Chinese and opened with small arms fire, but the Marine positions were quickly enveloped by the Chinese. The Americans occupying the forward slopes of Yoke suffered many casualties from the intense fires supporting the enemy rush.

Late in the afternoon on June 24, the enemy started targeting MLR company positions of 2/5 and part of the rear area occupied by the battalion's 81mm mortars with their mortars and artillery. The incoming fire from the Chinese, sometimes intense and sometimes sporadic, continued until shortly after 9:30 PM. By this time, the CCF were moving down their trenches toward a key outpost, Yoke, also known as Hill 159, which was still occupied by the Marines during the day and lay north of Company F Sector (Captain Harold C. Fuson). Moments later, the 34 men temporarily stationed at Yoke spotted the Chinese and opened fire with small arms, but the Marine positions were quickly surrounded by the Chinese. The Americans on the forward slopes of Yoke suffered many casualties from the intense fire supporting the enemy's charge.

While the initial attack was in progress, the Chinese were able to position and fire machine guns from behind the outpost and in trenches on the forward slopes. Communist mortars interdicted the Marine supply routes to make normal withdrawal and reinforcement measures difficult. The Marines moved into bunkers, called down pre-planned fires, and continued the defense. Although the Chinese had overrun Yoke, they could not evict the Marines. At about 0300, the enemy withdrew. When the 2/5 troops followed to reoccupy the forward slopes of Yoke, the enemy renewed his attack and struck again. As before, the Marines took to bunkers and called in defensive artillery fires. These boxing fires fell around the outpost perimeter until first light when the attackers withdrew for the second time.

While the initial attack was happening, the Chinese managed to set up and fire machine guns from behind the outpost and in trenches on the forward slopes. Communist mortars targeted the Marine supply routes, making normal withdrawal and reinforcements challenging. The Marines took cover in bunkers, called in pre-planned artillery support, and continued to defend. Even though the Chinese had taken Yoke, they couldn’t drive the Marines out. Around 0300, the enemy pulled back. When the 2/5 troops moved in to reclaim the forward slopes of Yoke, the enemy launched another attack. Like before, the Marines took shelter in bunkers and requested defensive artillery fire. This artillery landed around the outpost perimeter until dawn when the attackers retreated for the second time.

Four other outposts in the battalion area were involved in the anniversary attack, but the action around Yoke was by far the heaviest. It resulted in 10 Marines of 2/5 killed and 36 wounded. At Yoke alone, 9 were killed and 23 wounded. Enemy dead were 12 known and 50 estimated killed. Chinese wounded were estimated at 100. At one point during the attack on Yoke, the outpost commander reported that the enemy were wearing gas masks and using tear-gas grenades. Investigation revealed that the Chinese had carried and even worn the masks, but that they had employed white phosphorus grenades rather than tear gas. This was the first instance Marine division personnel had ever encountered of CCF soldiers carrying gas masks in an attack and it was “believed part of the90 enemy’s hate campaign to impress their troops with the possible use by the UN Forces of CBR (Chemical, Biological and Radiological) warfare.”138

Four other outposts in the battalion area were involved in the anniversary attack, but the action around Yoke was by far the heaviest. It resulted in 10 Marines from 2/5 being killed and 36 wounded. At Yoke alone, 9 were killed and 23 wounded. The enemy casualties included 12 confirmed dead and an estimated 50 killed. Chinese wounded were estimated at 100. At one point during the attack on Yoke, the outpost commander reported that the enemy were wearing gas masks and using tear gas grenades. Investigation revealed that the Chinese had carried and even worn the masks, but that they had used white phosphorus grenades instead of tear gas. This was the first instance Marine division personnel had ever encountered of CCF soldiers carrying gas masks during an attack, and it was “believed part of the90 enemy’s hate campaign to impress their troops with the possible use by the UN Forces of CBR (Chemical, Biological and Radiological) warfare.”138

138 Selden, Div Staff Rpt, p. 16.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Selden, Div Staff Report, p. 16.

This violent eruption of enemy activity on the night of 24 June was followed by a brief period of greatly reduced ground action. Late on the 29th, however, the battlefront lull was broken when the 1st KMC Regiment sent out a raiding party to capture Chinese soldiers and their weapons and equipment, to inflict casualties, and to destroy positions. Second Lieutenant Kwak Sang In had his reinforced platoon from the 3d Company, 1st Battalion, equipped with rifles, carbines, machine guns, flamethrowers, and explosives. Target for the attack was an enemy outpost four miles south of Panmunjom that overlooked the Sachon River.

This sudden outburst of enemy activity on the night of June 24 was followed by a short period of much less ground action. However, late on the 29th, the quiet on the battlefront was interrupted when the 1st KMC Regiment sent out a raiding party to capture Chinese soldiers along with their weapons and equipment, inflict casualties, and destroy positions. Second Lieutenant Kwak Sang In led his reinforced platoon from the 3rd Company, 1st Battalion, armed with rifles, carbines, machine guns, flamethrowers, and explosives. The target for the attack was an enemy outpost four miles south of Panmunjom that overlooked the Sachon River.

The patrol followed the general pattern of previous raids. It made use of supporting elements positioned on high ground in front of the objective. In this action the patrol struck from the rear, using artillery fire for both the assault and the withdrawal. Another similarity existed in that the results were nearly the same—no prisoners taken but fewer casualties to the attackers. One difference from earlier operations was that this patrol employed flamethrowers and TNT for destroying bunkers and inflicting casualties. Both weapons were credited in the killing of 12 and the wounding of 6 Chinese, in destroying 1 mortar and 7 bunkers, and in burning 3 other bunkers and numerous automatic weapons and rifles. Because of the heavy weight of a loaded flamethrower and the small size of the Korean Marines carrying these weapons, the flamethrower operators were fairly well exhausted by the end of the patrol.

The patrol followed a similar pattern to previous raids. It used support teams positioned on high ground in front of the target. In this mission, the patrol attacked from the rear, using artillery fire for both the assault and the retreat. Another similarity was that the outcomes were almost the same—no prisoners were captured but the attackers had fewer casualties. One difference from earlier missions was that this patrol used flamethrowers and TNT to destroy bunkers and inflict casualties. These weapons were responsible for killing 12 and wounding 6 Chinese soldiers, destroying 1 mortar and 7 bunkers, and setting fire to 3 other bunkers along with numerous automatic weapons and rifles. Due to the heavy weight of a loaded flamethrower and the small size of the Korean Marines carrying these weapons, the flamethrower operators were pretty much exhausted by the end of the patrol.

A Long Fourth of July139

139 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8; and 1stMarDiv, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 1/7, 3/7, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Jul 52.

139 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8; and 1stMarDiv, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 1/7, 3/7, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Jul 52.

The approach of the American Fourth of July holiday marking an earlier struggle for freedom was appropriately accompanied by ground action initiated by all of the mainland MLR regiments. In the KMC area, a 3 July raiding party struck at forward enemy positions91 before dawn, killing nine Chinese. In the center regimental sector Colonel Thomas C. Moore’s140 7th Marines were also engaged in an active sector defense. In the left battalion spot 3/7, which had replaced 2/7 on line, dispatched raids on each of the first three nights of the month. Its Company G patrol on the night of 2–3 July was to be involved in one of the most costly small unit actions in the western Korea tour of duty for the Marine division.

The American Fourth of July holiday, which celebrates an earlier fight for freedom, was fittingly marked by ground operations led by all the mainland MLR regiments. In the KMC area, a raiding party struck enemy positions early on July 3, killing nine Chinese soldiers. In the center regimental sector, Colonel Thomas C. Moore’s 7th Marines were actively engaged in defense. In the left battalion, 3/7, which had replaced 2/7 on the line, conducted raids on each of the first three nights of the month. Its Company G patrol on the night of July 2-3 was involved in one of the most costly small unit actions during the Marine division's tour of duty in western Korea.91

140 Colonel Moore took over regimental command on 11 June. The former CO, Colonel Honsowetz, had been named Assistant Chief of Staff, G-3 of the 1st Marine Division.

140 Colonel Moore assumed command of the regiment on June 11. The previous commanding officer, Colonel Honsowetz, had been appointed Assistant Chief of Staff, G-3 of the 1st Marine Division.

Operational plans called for the platoon night raid on the 2d to be followed by a dawn attack the next morning. In both actions, the prisoner-taking aspect of the mission was considered a primary one. The early part of the operation was uneventful. One platoon moved forward toward the objective, Hill 159 (Yoke), 1,200 yards beyond combat outpost (COP) White, to the regimental left, without making contact with the enemy. The platoon then established a base of fire on favorable terrain from which the attack by the second platoon could be supported.

Operational plans specified that the platoon’s night raid on the 2nd would be followed by a dawn attack the next morning. In both actions, capturing prisoners was considered a primary goal of the mission. The early part of the operation went smoothly. One platoon advanced toward the objective, Hill 159 (Yoke), which was 1,200 yards beyond combat outpost (COP) White, to the regimental left, without encountering the enemy. The platoon then set up a base of fire on advantageous ground to support the attack by the second platoon.

The second platoon passed through the forward position of the first shortly before 0630 and moved out into enemy terrain. It advanced less than 300 yards before its progress was halted by a Chinese force of battalion strength occupying the objective, Hill 159. Heavy enemy rifle and machine gun fire, hand grenades, mortar and artillery deluged the advancing Marines. Many of them quickly became casualties, but the operation continued, due in part to the determination and initiative of the NCOs. One of these was Staff Sergeant William E. Shuck, Jr., in charge of a machine gun squad. When the leader of one of the rifle squads became a casualty, Sergeant Shuck assumed command of that squad in addition to his own. Although wounded, he organized the two units and led them against the objective. Nearing the summit of the hill, the sergeant was hit a second time. Still he refused evacuation, remaining well forward in the lines to direct his assault force.

The second platoon moved through the front line of the first platoon just before 6:30 AM and entered enemy territory. They advanced less than 300 yards before being stopped by a Chinese battalion occupying Hill 159. Intense enemy rifle and machine gun fire, along with hand grenades, mortar, and artillery, rained down on the advancing Marines. Many quickly became casualties, but the mission continued, partly due to the determination and initiative of the NCOs. One of them was Staff Sergeant William E. Shuck, Jr., who led a machine gun squad. When the leader of one of the rifle squads was injured, Sergeant Shuck took over that squad as well. Despite being wounded, he organized both units and led them towards the objective. As they got close to the top of the hill, the sergeant was hit again. Still, he refused to be evacuated, staying at the front lines to direct his assault team.

It was not until he had received orders to break contact with the enemy that the sergeant pulled back from the attack. During the withdrawal he looked after the other Marine casualties, making certain that all dead and wounded had been evacuated from the zone of action. While directing the last of the evacuation, Sergeant Shuck92 was struck by a sniper’s bullet and killed by this third hit.141 He was one of four Marines killed in the engagement. Forty others were wounded. Although no Chinese were captured, Marines estimated the enemy suffered losses of 50 killed and an additional 150 wounded.

It wasn't until he got orders to break contact with the enemy that the sergeant pulled back from the attack. During the withdrawal, he looked after the other Marine casualties, ensuring that all the dead and wounded were evacuated from the combat area. While directing the last of the evacuation, Sergeant Shuck92 was hit by a sniper's bullet and killed by this third shot.141 He was one of four Marines killed in the engagement. Forty others were wounded. Although no Chinese soldiers were captured, Marines estimated that the enemy lost 50 killed and an additional 150 wounded.

141 The leadership, bravery, and unselfish devotion to duty earned for Sergeant Shuck the Medal of Honor, an award made to 14 Marines during the fighting in West Korea. During the earlier part of the war, 28 Marines had received the Medal of Honor. Of these, 17 were awarded posthumously. Five Navy hospital corpsmen, all attached to the 1st Marine Division, also earned the MOH. These awards, with one exception, were for heroism under combat conditions during the 1952–1953 period of the Korean War.

141 The leadership, courage, and selfless commitment to duty earned Sergeant Shuck the Medal of Honor, an award given to 14 Marines during the fighting in Korea. Earlier in the war, 28 Marines had received the Medal of Honor, with 17 awarded posthumously. Five Navy hospital corpsmen, all part of the 1st Marine Division, also received the MOH. Except for one case, these awards were for acts of heroism under combat conditions during the 1952–1953 period of the Korean War.

To the east of the 7th Marines, the 5th Marines in the right MLR sector ordered a company-size patrol, also on the night of 2–3 July. Company A, 1/5 was directed to attack successively three outposts in the vicinity of the village of Samichon along the river bearing the same name and two miles beyond the point where the MLR crossed the river. After the reinforced company had taken the first two objectives, which were unoccupied, it received orders from division to return to the battalion area. Despite the fact the patrol had ventured far beyond the Marine lines, it did not come into contact with any Chinese forces.

To the east of the 7th Marines, the 5th Marines in the right MLR sector ordered a company-sized patrol on the night of July 2–3. Company A, 1/5 was directed to attack three outposts near the village of Samichon along the river of the same name, two miles past where the MLR crossed the river. After the reinforced company captured the first two objectives, which were empty, it received orders from division to return to the battalion area. Even though the patrol had gone far beyond the Marine lines, it did not encounter any Chinese forces.

A 2/5 combat patrol leaving the MLR just after dawn was successful in inflicting casualties on the enemy, taking prisoners, and destroying enemy field fortifications. The patrol made good progress until a Marine inadvertently set off an enemy mine. This mishap gave away the patrol’s location and prompted reprisal by the Chinese. A one-hour fire fight followed. Then the patrol called in smoke and returned under its cover to JAMESTOWN. Marine casualties were 1 killed and 11 wounded. The second 2/5 patrol that same date was a successful ambush completed 10 minutes before midnight. In the brief clash that developed, Marine ambushers killed 6 enemy and wounded 8 more. The Marine force suffered no casualties.

A 2/5 combat patrol leaving the MLR just after dawn successfully caused enemy casualties, took prisoners, and destroyed enemy field fortifications. The patrol was making good progress until a Marine accidentally triggered an enemy mine. This accident revealed the patrol’s location and led to retaliation from the Chinese. A one-hour firefight ensued. The patrol then called in smoke cover and returned safely to JAMestown. The Marine casualties were 1 killed and 11 wounded. The second 2/5 patrol on the same date was a successful ambush completed 10 minutes before midnight. In the brief clash that followed, Marine ambushers killed 6 enemy soldiers and wounded 8 more. The Marine unit had no casualties.

The ambush patrol returned 15 minutes after midnight on 4 July. Even at that early hour division artillerymen had already initiated an appropriate ceremony to mark the Fourth. On 2 July, I Corps had directed the massing of fires on 4 July on the most remunerative targets in each division area. All objectives in the corps sector were to be attacked simultaneously at specified times for a one-minute period by employing a firing technique known as time on target93 (TOT).142 Normal daily fires were also to be carried out. Designated as Operation FIRECRACKER, the shoot expended 3,202 rounds in the division sector. Light and medium battalions of the 11th Marines, plus its 4.5-inch Rocket Battery destroyed some enemy trenches, bunkers, mortar and artillery positions, and damaged others. The division reported that the special fires on 4 July had also resulted in 44 known CCF casualties, including 21 dead, and 12 more who were estimated to have been injured.

The ambush patrol got back 15 minutes after midnight on July 4th. Even at that early hour, the division artillerymen had already started a ceremony to celebrate the Fourth. On July 2nd, I Corps had ordered the concentration of fire for July 4th on the most valuable targets in each division area. All objectives in the corps sector were to be attacked at the same time for one minute using a firing technique called time on target93 (TOT).142 Normal daily fires were also to continue. Labeled as Operation Firecracker, the operation fired 3,202 rounds in the division sector. Light and medium battalions of the 11th Marines, along with its 4.5-inch Rocket Battery, destroyed some enemy trenches, bunkers, mortar, and artillery positions while damaging others. The division reported that the special fires on July 4th also resulted in 44 confirmed CCF casualties, including 21 dead and an estimated 12 injured.

142 In the TOT technique, participating units time their initial volleys to ensure that their shells arrive on the target at the same time.

142 In the TOT technique, participating units coordinate their initial volleys to make sure their shells hit the target simultaneously.

More casualties, however, resulted from the issuing of another I Corps directive, this one dealing with the conduct of raids to seize prisoners, obtain information about the enemy, and to destroy his positions, supplies, and equipment. Back in June, the EUSAK commander had first stressed to his corps commanders the increased importance of combat raids to obtain additional intelligence during this period of stabilized conflict.

More casualties, however, resulted from another directive issued by I Corps, which focused on conducting raids to capture prisoners, gather information on the enemy, and destroy their positions, supplies, and equipment. Back in June, the EUSAK commander had emphasized to his corps commanders the growing importance of combat raids to gather additional intelligence during this time of stabilized conflict.

Although General Selden had submitted two division plans, he strongly believed that smaller patrols could accomplish the objective with fewer casualties and loss of life.143 In particular, the division commander pointed out to I Corps that adequate defense of the 35-mile-long Marine division front did not permit the withdrawal of a sizable force for patrol missions without endangering the security of the entire Corps sector. The attack order was issued, however, on 3 July for the first large-scale raid to be conducted prior to 7 July. The code name BUCKSHOT 2B was assigned for this particular raid. As soon as he received the date of execution for the proposed operation, the Marine division commander advised I Corps that designation of 7 July as the cut-off date for the raid precluded proper rehearsal of attack plans. The operation would also conflict with rotation to the States of 2,651 Marines, whose replacements would not be available until 11 July. Corps turned a deaf ear; division then ordered a battalion-size attack for the night of 6–7 July.

Although General Selden had put forward two division plans, he strongly believed that smaller patrols could achieve the goal with fewer casualties and loss of life. 143 Specifically, the division commander pointed out to I Corps that adequately defending the 35-mile-long Marine division front didn’t allow for pulling a large force for patrol missions without risking the security of the entire Corps sector. However, an attack order was issued on July 3 for the first large-scale raid to take place before July 7. The code name BUCKSHOT 2B was assigned to this raid. As soon as he received the execution date for the proposed operation, the Marine division commander informed I Corps that setting July 7 as the cut-off date for the raid made proper rehearsal of attack plans impossible. The operation would also clash with the rotation to the States of 2,651 Marines, whose replacements wouldn’t be available until July 11. Corps ignored these concerns; the division then ordered a battalion-size attack for the night of July 6-7.

143 Among division commanders in the I Corps area, General Selden was not alone in his grave misgivings of this method of gaining information about the Chinese. Major General A. J. H. Cassels, 1st Commonwealth Division, shared with the Marine commander the belief that such operations were too costly for the intended purpose. McGill comments and Brigadier C. N. Barclay, The first Commonwealth Division: The Story of British Commonwealth Land Forces in Korea, 1950–1953 (Aldershot, England: Gale and Polden Ltd., 1954), p. 127, hereafter Barclay, Commonwealth.

143 Among the division commanders in the I Corps area, General Selden wasn’t the only one expressing serious concerns about this way of gathering information on the Chinese. Major General A. J. H. Cassels from the 1st Commonwealth Division also agreed with the Marine commander that these operations were too expensive for their intended goal. McGill comments and Brigadier C. N. Barclay, The first Commonwealth Division: The Story of British Commonwealth Land Forces in Korea, 1950–1953 (Aldershot, England: Gale and Polden Ltd., 1954), p. 127, hereafter Barclay, Commonwealth.

Before dusk on 6 July, Lieutenant Colonel Daughtry’s reinforced94 1st Battalion, 7th Marines moved into position—on the left, a tank-infantry force, A/1/7 (still under Captain Thompson), to create a diversion; in the center, the main assault force, Company C (Captain Robert A. Owens); and on the right, a reinforced platoon from Company B (Captain Lyle S. Whitmore, Jr.) to support the attack by fire from positions close to the objective, Yoke. Earlier, three reinforced squads from Captain Thompson’s unit had occupied combat outposts in the area of operations to deny the use of key terrain to the enemy and to provide additional fire support in the attack. At 2200, Captain Owens’ Company C crossed the line of departure and set its course for Yoke, three-quarters of a mile northeast. Five minutes later the Company B support unit moved out to occupy the intermediate objective, COP Green, one-half mile southeast of Yoke. As it took up positions on COP Green, Captain Whitmore’s Company B platoon discovered that no Chinese were in its vicinity; in fact, the platoon was not to encounter any enemy forces during BUCKSHOT.

Before sunset on July 6, Lieutenant Colonel Daughtry’s reinforced 94 1st Battalion, 7th Marines got into position—on the left, a tank-infantry group, A/1/7 (still led by Captain Thompson), to draw attention; in the center, the main attack force, Company C (Captain Robert A. Owens); and on the right, a reinforced platoon from Company B (Captain Lyle S. Whitmore, Jr.) to provide fire support for the assault from positions near the target, Yoke. Earlier, three reinforced squads from Captain Thompson’s unit had set up combat outposts in the operational area to prevent the enemy from using key terrain and to provide extra fire support during the attack. At 10 PM, Captain Owens’ Company C crossed the starting line and headed toward Yoke, which was three-quarters of a mile northeast. Five minutes later, the support unit from Company B moved out to secure the intermediate objective, COP Green, located half a mile southeast of Yoke. Upon taking positions at COP Green, Captain Whitmore’s Company B platoon found that there were no Chinese troops nearby; in fact, the platoon would not encounter any enemy forces during BUCKSHOT.

Even though Company B failed to engage any Chinese, the remainder of the battalion encountered more than its share. About 450 yards southwest of the objective the Company C attack force was hit by an enemy ambush, which cut off Captain Owens’ lead element. Although the Chinese directed strong efforts at halting the Marine advance, they were unsuccessful in this attempt. The Marines pressed the attack and seized Yoke 20 minutes after midnight.

Even though Company B didn’t manage to engage any Chinese forces, the rest of the battalion faced more than their fair share. About 450 yards southwest of the target, the Company C attack force was ambushed by the enemy, which cut off Captain Owens’ lead unit. Although the Chinese put in a strong effort to stop the Marine advance, they were unsuccessful. The Marines continued their attack and took Yoke 20 minutes after midnight.

On the left, the diversionary attack unit, Company A supported by the five tanks of the 2d Platoon, Company D, 1st Tank Battalion, and by a section of flame tanks from the armored battalion headquarters, began its mission at 2355. In three-quarters of an hour, the tank-infantry unit reached its objective, the first high ground southwest of Yoke. Tanks turned their 90mm guns on known Chinese positions on the hill to the north. During the next hour, the big guns of the M-46 medium tanks sent 49 rounds into enemy emplacements. The Marine tanks ceased fire at 0113 when Captain Thompson was alerted to assist Company C. He left one rifle platoon with the tanks.

On the left, the diversionary attack unit, Company A, supported by the five tanks from the 2nd Platoon, Company D, 1st Tank Battalion, and a section of flame tanks from the armored battalion headquarters, started its mission at 11:55 PM. In about 45 minutes, the tank-infantry unit reached its target, the first high ground southwest of Yoke. The tanks aimed their 90mm guns at known Chinese positions on the hill to the north. Over the next hour, the heavy guns of the M-46 medium tanks fired 49 rounds into enemy positions. The Marine tanks stopped firing at 1:13 AM when Captain Thompson was called to assist Company C. He left one rifle platoon with the tanks.

Over on the high ground to the north and east, the attack force was under heavy fire from Communist mortars and artillery and was also receiving a number of enemy small-unit probes. At 0200, Company A made contact with Company C. Captain Thompson found95 the main force somewhat disorganized as a result of the wounding of the company commander, Captain Owens, the loss of several key officers and NCOs, and the effects of the lead element of Company C being ambushed and cut off. After being briefed on the situation by Captain Owens and conducting a reconnaissance, Captain Thompson recommended to the battalion commander that the entire force be recalled before daylight. At 0310 the two companies at Yoke began to disengage, returning to the MLR by 0636 on the 7th, without further casualties.

Over on the high ground to the north and east, the attack force was under heavy fire from Communist mortars and artillery and was also facing several enemy small-unit probes. At 2:00 AM, Company A made contact with Company C. Captain Thompson found the main force somewhat disorganized due to the wounding of the company commander, Captain Owens, the loss of several key officers and NCOs, and the lead element of Company C being ambushed and cut off. After being briefed on the situation by Captain Owens and conducting a reconnaissance, Captain Thompson recommended to the battalion commander that the entire force be called back before daylight. At 3:10 AM, the two companies at Yoke began to disengage, returning to the MLR by 6:36 AM on the 7th, without any further casualties.

The one platoon of Company A and seven tanks of the diversion unit were still in their forward positions on the left and had prepared to resume firing. At dawn the M-46s relaid their guns on targets that had become visible. Tank gunners destroyed two observation posts and three machine gun positions and damaged many feet of trenchlines. At one point in the firing, the tank platoon commander, Second Lieutenant Terry K. Donk, using a power scope, observed “... two officers in forest green uniforms without equipment. They were definitely giving orders to machine gunners and infantry.”144 These 2 were among the 19 counted casualties (10 wounded) that the tankers inflicted during BUCKSHOT.

The single platoon from Company A and seven tanks from the diversion unit remained in their forward positions on the left, ready to start firing again. At dawn, the M-46s adjusted their guns to targets that were now visible. The tank gunners took out two observation posts and three machine gun positions, damaging several feet of trenchlines. During the firing, the tank platoon commander, Second Lieutenant Terry K. Donk, used a power scope to spot “… two officers in forest green uniforms without gear. They were clearly directing machine gunners and infantry.”144 These two were among the 19 counted casualties (10 wounded) that the tankers caused during BUCKSHOT.

144 1st TkBn ComdD, Jul 52.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1st Tank Battalion Command, Jul 52.

With the return at 0645 of the tank-infantry diversion force, the special operation for obtaining prisoners and information ended. No Chinese had been captured and no data gleaned from Communist casualties, listed as the 19 reported by the tankers and an estimated 20 more wounded or killed. Marine casualties from the operation were out of proportion to the results achieved—12 dead, 85 wounded, and 5 missing. It had been a high price to pay for a venture of this type, particularly when the primary objectives went unaccomplished.

With the return at 6:45 AM of the tank-infantry diversion force, the special operation to capture prisoners and gather information came to an end. No Chinese soldiers were captured, and no information was obtained from Communist casualties, which were reported as 19 by the tankers, with an estimated 20 more wounded or killed. The Marine casualties from the operation were significantly higher than the results achieved—12 dead, 85 wounded, and 5 missing. It had been a steep price to pay for this type of mission, especially since the main objectives were not met.

During the entire 4–7 July period, 22 Marines had lost their lives in combat operations. Division reported that 268 Marines had been wounded during the long Fourth of July. These figures were the highest since September 1951 when large scale attacks by UN forces had first been abolished in line with the new tactic of positional warfare that would be waged until the truce talks resulted in an armistice.

During the whole period from July 4 to July 7, 22 Marines lost their lives in combat operations. The division reported that 268 Marines were wounded during the extended Fourth of July. These numbers were the highest since September 1951, when large-scale attacks by UN forces were first stopped in accordance with the new strategy of positional warfare that would continue until the peace talks led to a ceasefire.

96

96

Changes in the Lineup145

145 The material in this section is derived from the 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 52.

145 The content in this section comes from the 1stMarDiv ComdD, July 1952.

Division casualties were considerably higher during the first week in July than they were for the rest of the month. Once the pace of combat slowed, following the initial flurry of activity, the front again settled down to the patrol, raid, and ambush routine that had marked the static period of the Korean fighting. In accordance with the orders previously issued by higher authority the division placed continued emphasis on gathering all information it could about the enemy, his dispositions, and tactics. To assist in this effort, General Selden in July removed his reconnaissance company from defense of its small sector of JAMESTOWN and directed the unit to conduct training for its primary mission, obtaining intelligence about the enemy. Its place on the MLR was assumed by the two amphibian tractor companies then on line.

Division casualties were significantly higher during the first week of July compared to the rest of the month. Once the fighting pace slowed down after the initial burst of action, the front returned to the routine of patrols, raids, and ambushes that had characterized the static period of the Korean conflict. Following previously issued orders from higher command, the division focused on gathering as much information as possible about the enemy, including their positions and strategies. To support this effort, General Selden removed his reconnaissance company from defending its small sector of JAMestown in July and directed the unit to train for its main mission of gathering intelligence on the enemy. The two amphibian tractor companies then took over its position on the MLR.

Another change of lineup took place on 14 July. At this time a battalion from the 15th Regiment, U.S. 3d Infantry Division took over the role of the maneuver element in the Kimpo Provisional Regiment, then held by 1/1, thereby releasing that battalion to its parent unit. With this change, the 1st Marine Division had a full regiment in reserve for the first time since its arrival in western Korea. A later shift in units occurred on 26 July when the 7th and 1st Marines traded places and missions. At that time the MLR, from west to east, was manned by the KPR, 1st AmTrac Bn, KMC, 1st Marines, and 5th Marines.

Another lineup change happened on July 14. At this time, a battalion from the 15th Regiment, U.S. 3rd Infantry Division stepped in as the maneuver element in the Kimpo Provisional Regiment, previously held by 1/1, which allowed that battalion to return to its parent unit. With this change, the 1st Marine Division had a full regiment in reserve for the first time since arriving in western Korea. A subsequent shift in units took place on July 26 when the 7th and 1st Marines switched places and missions. At that moment, the MLR, from west to east, was manned by the KPR, 1st AmTrac Bn, KMC, 1st Marines, and 5th Marines.

Opposing them in mid-July were an estimated 27 infantry battalions, whose primary missions were to defend the sectors assigned. The division credited these units with the capability of launching limited objective attacks at any time or of taking part in a major attack with a force of up to 57 infantry and 16 artillery battalions, augmented by 40 tanks or self-propelled guns. It was estimated also that the enemy could cross the Han in battalion strength in the vicinity of the northern shore of Kimpo Peninsula at any time and that Communist aircraft could attack anywhere in the division sector. Enemy forces identified at the end of July, from west to east, were the 193d, 195th, and 194th Divisions of the 65th CCF Army; the 189th Division of the 63d CCF Army; and the 118th Division, 40th97 CCF Army, which had recently moved from a position opposite the Commonwealth and U.S. 3d Infantry Divisions. Infantry strength of the Communists was established at 28,328.

Opposing them in mid-July were about 27 infantry battalions, whose main jobs were to defend their assigned areas. The division acknowledged that these units could launch limited objective attacks at any time or participate in a major attack with up to 57 infantry and 16 artillery battalions, supported by 40 tanks or self-propelled guns. It was also estimated that the enemy could cross the Han River with battalion strength near the northern shore of Kimpo Peninsula at any moment, and that Communist aircraft could strike anywhere in the division's sector. The enemy forces identified at the end of July, from west to east, included the 193rd, 195th, and 194th Divisions of the 65th CCF Army; the 189th Division of the 63rd CCF Army; and the 118th Division, 40th97 CCF Army, which had recently moved from a position facing the Commonwealth and U.S. 3rd Infantry Divisions. The infantry strength of the Communists was reported at 28,328.

Replacement and Rotation146

146 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9.

146 Unless noted otherwise, the information in this section comes from PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9.

Marine infantry strength at the end of July 1952 was little more than half of the Chinese total. The division personnel strength was maintained by the monthly replacement and rotation program of Marines to fill vacancies created by the return of Marine combat personnel to CONUS (Continental United States) and combat losses. In the second quarter of 1952, the division rotated 433 officers and 6,280 enlisted men from Korea. In exchange, 506 officers and 7,359 enlisted men arrived from the States in replacement drafts. A new arrival could expect to stay with the division about 10½ months.

Marine infantry strength at the end of July 1952 was just over half of the Chinese total. The division's personnel strength was kept up by the monthly replacement and rotation program of Marines to fill gaps created by the return of Marine combat personnel to CONUS (Continental United States) and combat losses. In the second quarter of 1952, the division rotated 433 officers and 6,280 enlisted men out of Korea. In return, 506 officers and 7,359 enlisted men arrived from the States in replacement drafts. A new arrival could expect to be with the division for about 10½ months.

In the late spring of 1952 many of the division’s new replacements were “dental cripples”—Marines requiring dental treatment, even emergency care in some cases.147 General Selden directed that contact teams be formed to meet the replacement drafts in Japan. During the last leg of the trip to Korea dental personnel screened the new combat Marines on shipboard. By the time the division area had been reached, the dentists knew what remedial work would be required by incoming troops. At the end of the summer the problem was well under control.

In late spring of 1952, many of the division's new recruits were “dental cripples”—Marines who needed dental treatment, including emergency care in some cases.147 General Selden ordered the formation of contact teams to meet the incoming replacements in Japan. During the final leg of the trip to Korea, dental personnel screened the new combat Marines on board the ship. By the time they arrived in the division area, the dentists were aware of the remedial work needed for the incoming troops. By the end of the summer, the issue was largely resolved.

147 Brunelli ltr.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Brunelli letter

Even though the 1st Marine Division in July continued to be somewhat in excess of its authorized strength in total personnel, it had certain imbalances and was in rather short supply of certain ranks and specialists. While the normal tour for most infantry officers ranged from 9 to 12 months, an excess of company grade officers, particularly lieutenants, had resulted in a reduction of the Korean tour for them to just six months. This brief period of duty plus an intra-division rotation policy that caused a mass shifting of duty assignments every three-to-five months tended to reduce unit combat efficiency. On the other hand the change of assignments had a favorable effect in that it broadened the experience of individual98 Marines. Beginning in the summer of 1952, however, the division modified this policy to reduce its number of intra-division transfers.

Even though the 1st Marine Division was still somewhat over its authorized strength in total personnel in July, it faced some imbalances and was short on certain ranks and specialists. While the typical tour for most infantry officers lasted between 9 to 12 months, an excess of company-grade officers, especially lieutenants, led to a reduction of the Korean tour for them to just six months. This shorter period of duty, along with a rotation policy that caused frequent changes in duty assignments every three to five months, tended to lower unit combat efficiency. However, the changes in assignments positively impacted individual Marines by broadening their experience. Starting in the summer of 1952, the division revised this policy to reduce the number of intra-division transfers.

Personnel shortages existed in both the artillery and tank MOSs (Military Occupational Speciality). Mass rotation of reservist company grade artillery officers had necessitated the transfer of infantry officers to the 11th Marines for training and reassignment within the regiment. During the time when the supply of artillery officers was limited, however, the quality of support rendered remained high.148 The other major shortage in the division was that of qualified crewmen—both drivers and gunners—for the M-46 tanks. Neither tank driving nor gunnery for the M-46 was taught in the tank crewmen’s course conducted at Camp Pendleton, California. General Selden requested of Lieutenant General Franklin A. Hart (CG, FMFPac) that “tank crewmen be thoroughly trained prior to leaving the U.S.”149

Personnel shortages were present in both the artillery and tank MOSs (Military Occupational Speciality). The mass rotation of reservist company-grade artillery officers required the transfer of infantry officers to the 11th Marines for training and reassignment within the regiment. Despite the limited supply of artillery officers at that time, the quality of support provided remained high.148 The other significant shortage in the division was qualified crew members—both drivers and gunners—for the M-46 tanks. Tank driving and gunnery for the M-46 were not taught in the tank crewmen's course held at Camp Pendleton, California. General Selden requested that Lieutenant General Franklin A. Hart (CG, FMFPac) ensure that "tank crewmen be thoroughly trained before leaving the U.S."149

148 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 9-27.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, pp. 9-27.

149 1stMarDiv ComdD, July 52, p. 4.

149 1stMarDiv ComdD, July 52, p. 4.

Fundamental to the tank problem was a shortage of the M-46 itself. At the training facility, Training and Replacement Command, Camp Pendleton, M-46 engines had been available for maintenance instruction but no tanks for the training of gunners and drivers.150 General Hart pointed out this deficiency to the Commandant, General Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr. On 13 August the Commandant directed the transfer of five tanks to the training installation from the 7th Tank Battalion,151 also located at Camp Pendleton. At the same time General Shepherd ordered an increase in the school quota for tank crewmen. The first graduates would not reach the division in Korea, however, until the November draft.

Fundamental to the tank issue was a lack of the M-46 itself. At the training facility, Training and Replacement Command, Camp Pendleton, there were M-46 engines available for maintenance training, but no tanks for training gunners and drivers.150 General Hart brought this issue to the attention of the Commandant, General Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr. On August 13, the Commandant ordered the transfer of five tanks to the training center from the 7th Tank Battalion,151 which was also at Camp Pendleton. At the same time, General Shepherd instructed an increase in the quota for tank crewman training. However, the first graduates wouldn’t join the division in Korea until the November draft.

150 FMFPac ComdD, Jul 52, App VIII, Encl (7), Anx (E).

150 FMFPac ComdD, Jul 52, App VIII, Encl (7), Anx (E).

151 FMFPac ComdD, Aug 52, App I, Encl (35).

151 FMFPac ComdD, Aug 52, App I, Encl (35).

The presence of not fully trained personnel in a combat zone was not limited to the division. In the summer and fall of 1952, a large number of volunteer reservists, both pilots and enlisted replacements with little experience since the end of World War II, joined the 1st MAW. It had not been possible for the Stateside training and tactical squadrons, themselves short of personnel and aircraft, to qualify all pilots as combat ready. It fell upon the wing in Korea, therefore, to take the needed corrective action. The more experienced99 1st MAW pilots, after completing their combat missions, flew instructional flights to help prepare the rusty fliers. Some reserve pilots, away from regular daily flying since 1945, found the adjustment too difficult and turned in their wings. MACG-2 operated “Pohang U,” a training course for forward air controllers. In practically every squadron, there were shortages of electronics personnel. Jet squadrons found mechanics hard to come by. There were never enough motor transport replacements. For unqualified enlisted Marines, squadrons operated on-the-job training programs.

The presence of undertrained personnel in a combat zone wasn't just an issue for the division. In the summer and fall of 1952, a large number of volunteer reservists, both pilots and enlisted replacements with little experience since World War II ended, joined the 1st MAW. The training and tactical squadrons back home, which were also short on personnel and aircraft, couldn't manage to qualify all pilots as combat ready. So, it was up to the wing in Korea to take the necessary corrective measures. The more experienced 99 1st MAW pilots, after finishing their combat missions, flew instructional flights to help get the out-of-practice pilots up to speed. Some reserve pilots, who hadn't flown regularly since 1945, found the transition too challenging and gave up their wings. MACG-2 ran “Pohang U,” a training course for forward air controllers. Almost every squadron faced shortages of electronics personnel. Jet squadrons struggled to find enough mechanics. There were never enough motor transport replacements. For unqualified enlisted Marines, squadrons implemented on-the-job training programs.

To maintain a reasonable degree of unit proficiency, the wing limited the monthly turnover of pilots to 25 percent. Like the division, the wing employed split tours between an officer’s primary duty and staff work to broaden his experience. In some cases the amount of time required by administrative work as compared to a pilot’s actual flying time reduced his proficiency in the air. In June, Task Force 95 reported that the proportionately large number of take-off and landing accidents on the carrier Bataan was caused by the rapid turnover of pilots and their need for frequent carrier qualification.152

To keep a reasonable level of proficiency among the unit, the wing limited the monthly turnover of pilots to 25 percent. Similar to the division, the wing used split tours between an officer's main duty and staff work to expand their experience. In some cases, the amount of time spent on administrative tasks compared to a pilot's actual flying time decreased their proficiency in the air. In June, Task Force 95 reported that the unusually high number of take-off and landing accidents on the carrier Bataan was due to the rapid turnover of pilots and their need for frequent carrier qualifications.152

152 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-198.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 10-198.

A Marine pilot joining the wing could expect his assignment to last for 6 to 9 months. Personnel in a nonflight status had longer tours of 10 months to a year. Wing replacements were made on an individual basis, although there were plans that by mid-1953 a new policy of at least partial squadron replacement would be in effect. That 1st MAW squadrons were able to operate effectively on an individual replacement system was attributable to the peculiarity of combat conditions in Korea. Absence of real enemy aerial opposition permitted the use of basic, parade-type flight formations and non-tactical approaches and attacks. An unusually high-level of experienced pilots in each of the two wing groups helped in the establishment of training programs and operational doctrine. The FAF limitation of four aircraft per flight eliminated the problem of large-scale, precombat squadron training as well as the difficulty of controlling and coordinating a large number of planes in a strike.

A Marine pilot joining the wing could expect their assignment to last about 6 to 9 months. Personnel not flying had longer assignments of 10 months to a year. Wing replacements happened on an individual basis, though there were plans for a new policy of at least partial squadron replacements to take effect by mid-1953. The 1st MAW squadrons managed to operate effectively with an individual replacement system due to the unique combat conditions in Korea. The lack of significant enemy air resistance allowed for basic, parade-like flight formations and non-tactical approaches and attacks. A notably high number of experienced pilots in each of the two wing groups supported the development of training programs and operational strategies. The FAF limitation of four aircraft per flight removed the challenges of large-scale precombat squadron training and the complications of managing and coordinating many planes in a strike.

100

100

Logistical Operations, Summer 1952153

153 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: Selden, Div Staff Rpt; PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8; 1stMarDiv, 1st EngrBn ComdDs, Jun-Jul 52.

153 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: Selden, Div Staff Rpt; PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8; 1stMarDiv, 1st EngrBn ComdDs, Jun-Jul 52.

Logistical support of the division and wing remained largely unchanged through July. Several modifications did take place, however, and these were:

Logistical support for the division and wing stayed mostly the same through July. A few changes did occur, though, and these were:

(1) The change of responsibility for logistical support of ground-based units in Korea from Commanding General, 2d Logistical Command to the Commanding General, Korean Communication Zone (CG, KComZ).

(1) The responsibility for logistical support of ground-based units in Korea is shifted from the Commanding General of the 2d Logistical Command to the Commanding General of the Korean Communication Zone (CG, KComZ).

(2) The opening of a pipeline system for resupply of aviation fuel at K-3, beginning in May.

(2) The startup of a pipeline system for replenishing aviation fuel at K-3, starting in May.

(3) The beginning of increased support for airbase maintenance at those airfields housing Marine squadrons.

(3) The start of more support for maintaining airbases at the airfields where Marine squadrons are located.

Resupply of common items used by both Marine and Army units was still being hampered by the Marines’ limited knowledge of the Army supply system in effect and by their inability to obtain the catalogues, orders, and directives essential for requisitioning.

Resupplying common items used by both Marine and Army units was still being hindered by the Marines' limited understanding of the Army supply system in place and by their inability to access the catalogs, orders, and directives needed for placing requisitions.

Two logistical operations, both of an engineering nature, took place between May and July 1952 in western Korea. One was Operation TIMBER, undertaken to provide lumber required to complete the bunker construction on the JAMESTOWN, WYOMING, and KANSAS lines. The division had estimated that three million linear feet of 4 x 8-inch timbers would be needed. Since lumber in this amount was not available through supply channels or standing timber in the division sector, Corps assigned the Marines a wooded area 50 miles to the east in the U.S. 45th Infantry Division sector. On 12 May a reinforced engineer platoon, under Second Lieutenant Roger E. Galliher, a truck platoon, and 500 Korean Service Corps (KSC) laborers,154 began the cutting, processing, and hauling of timbers which were then trucked to the railhead. Between 500 and 1,000 logs were cut daily. When the operation ended in July a total of101 35,194 sections of timber had been cut. This was still not enough lumber to complete the required construction. Eighth Army then made up the difference, mostly with 12 x 12-inch timbers 30 feet long; these the Marine engineers cut to 4 x 8s for standard bunker construction.155

Two logistical operations, both engineering-related, occurred in western Korea from May to July 1952. One was Operation Lumber, aimed at providing the lumber needed to finish bunker construction on the JAMESTOWN, WYOMING, and KANSAS lines. The division estimated that three million linear feet of 4 x 8-inch timbers would be necessary. Since this amount of lumber wasn’t available through supply channels or standing timber in the division’s area, the Corps assigned the Marines a forested area 50 miles east in the U.S. 45th Infantry Division sector. On May 12, a reinforced engineer platoon under Second Lieutenant Roger E. Galliher, a truck platoon, and 500 Korean Service Corps (KSC) laborers, 154 began cutting, processing, and hauling the timbers, which were then trucked to the railhead. Between 500 and 1,000 logs were cut each day. When the operation wrapped up in July, a total of 101 35,194 sections of timber had been cut. This was still insufficient for completing the required construction. The Eighth Army then covered the shortfall, primarily using 12 x 12-inch timbers, 30 feet long; the Marine engineers cut these down to 4 x 8s for standard bunker construction. 155

154 The KSC was a ROK quasi-military organization for logistical support of the UNC. Personnel were drafted from those rejected for Army service. Each KSC unit had a cadre of ROK officers and enlisted. All types of labor except personal services were performed by these Koreans. During its period in western Korea, the 1st Marine Division was supported by the 103d KSC Regiment of 5,222 men. CG, 1stMarDiv, Civ Afrs and KSC, pp. 8–9.

154 The KSC was a quasi-military organization in South Korea that provided logistical support to the UNC. Members were recruited from those who were deemed unfit for Army service. Each KSC unit had a team of South Korean officers and enlisted personnel. These Koreans handled all kinds of labor, except for personal services. While stationed in western Korea, the 1st Marine Division was supported by the 103rd KSC Regiment, which had 5,222 men. CG, 1stMarDiv, Civ Afrs and KSC, pp. 8–9.

155 Col Harry D. Clarke ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 1 Sep 66.

155 Col Harry D. Clarke letter to Head, History Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, dated 1 Sep 66.

Operation AMAZON, published by I Corps on 12 June, ordered that bridging preparations be made for the approaching summer flood season. The previous August at the Honker Bridge, the one nearest the railhead, the Imjin had crested some 27 feet above normal. One reason for the precautionary efforts taken to insure bridge security during the flood season was the potential damage the Chinese could cause. Since they controlled the upriver area of the Imjin, before it entered the division sector, they could introduce floatable debris or explosives into the swift running flood waters. Another major concern was the logistical problem that would be faced by forward MLR units in event the bridges became impassable and the enormous strain that would thus be placed on helicopter resupply operations.

Operation AMAZON, issued by I Corps on June 12, instructed that preparations be made for bridge safety ahead of the upcoming summer flood season. Last August, at the Honker Bridge, which is closest to the railhead, the Imjin River had risen about 27 feet above its usual level. One reason for the precautionary measures taken to ensure bridge safety during the flood season was the potential damage that could be inflicted by the Chinese. They controlled the area upstream of the Imjin before it entered the division sector, which meant they could introduce debris or explosives into the fast-moving floodwaters. Another significant concern was the logistical challenges that frontline MLR units would face if the bridges became unusable and the immense pressure this would place on helicopter resupply operations.

The I Corps directive specified that its divisions maintain a transport capability that would enable medium tanks to pass safely over bridges spanning the major rivers in their I Corps sector. The order also called for the removal of debris that could cause damage to bridges. Removal of those bridges vulnerable to flood conditions and the erection of emergency river spans were also to take place on corps order.

The I Corps directive stated that its divisions should have a transport capability that would allow medium tanks to safely cross bridges over the major rivers in their I Corps area. The order also required the clearing of debris that might damage the bridges. Bridges at risk of flooding needed to be removed, and emergency river spans were to be built as directed by the corps.

To carry out the I Corps operational order, General Seiden put the division’s own AMAZON plan into effect on 1 July. On this date Companies A, B, and D of Lieutenant Colonel Harry D. Clarke’s 1st Engineer Battalion began extensive preparations for debris removal from the four bridge sites in the division sector. Even before this, Marine engineers and shore party personnel had been trained at special schools to handle U.S. Army equipment provided for the AMAZON operation.156

To execute the I Corps operational order, General Seiden implemented the division’s own AMAZON plan on July 1. On this day, Companies A, B, and D of Lieutenant Colonel Harry D. Clarke’s 1st Engineer Battalion began extensive preparations for debris removal from the four bridge sites in the division area. Even prior to this, Marine engineers and shore party personnel had been trained at special schools to operate U.S. Army equipment allocated for the AMAZON operation.156

156 This included employment of the 60-inch searchlight for night illumination, maintenance of boats for debris removal, and operation of the M-4 ferry. Other preparations by the division, of a non-engineer nature, included positioning of 13,000 life-saving floatation devices for use by frontline troops should they become shut off from planned evacuation.

156 This involved using the 60-inch searchlight for nighttime lighting, keeping boats ready for debris removal, and running the M-4 ferry. Other preparations by the division, which weren't related to engineering, included placing 13,000 life-saving flotation devices for frontline troops in case they got cut off from their planned evacuation.

Beginning 1 June, division engineers began blasting away at objects102 that flood waters could loosen and carry into the bridge supports. Bridge approaches were improved and their supports strengthened. Each company had a detail living at the bridge site for which it was responsible. With the advent of heavy rains, these Marines were to operate 24-hour boat patrols to keep the river free of debris. The engineers were also to maintain a round-the-clock debris watch at the four division bridges—Freedom Gate, or the Munsan-ni Railroad Bridge in the left regimental sector; Honker and X-Ray in the center; and finally, Widgeon, very close to the Commonwealth boundary.

Beginning June 1, division engineers started blasting away at objects102 that floodwaters could loosen and carry into the bridge supports. The bridge approaches were improved and their supports reinforced. Each company had a team stationed at the bridge site for which it was responsible. With heavy rains approaching, these Marines were set to run 24-hour boat patrols to keep the river clear of debris. The engineers were also tasked with maintaining a continuous debris watch at the four division bridges—Freedom Gate, or the Munsan-ni Railroad Bridge in the left regimental sector; Honker and X-Ray in the center; and finally, Widgeon, near the Commonwealth boundary.

Heavy rains began on 27 July and continued until the 30th. On the first day the decking of Widgeon Bridge was completely submerged and Honker was removed to prevent its being carried away. Precipitation increased on 28 July and reached its peak on 29 July when 3.66 inches of rainfall were recorded. By the 30th, the rains had subsided but not before the overflowing Imjin had collapsed the X-Ray bridge. During the height of the four flood days, engineers fought the rains, flooding waters, and floating debris. The major effort took place downstream to save the Freedom Gate Bridge.

Heavy rains started on July 27 and continued until the 30th. On the first day, the decking of Widgeon Bridge was totally underwater, and Honker was taken away to avoid being swept away. The rain got heavier on July 28 and peaked on July 29 with 3.66 inches of rainfall recorded. By the 30th, the rains had eased up, but not before the overflowing Imjin River caused the X-Ray bridge to collapse. During the worst of the four flood days, engineers battled against the rains, rising floodwaters, and floating debris. The main efforts were focused downstream to save the Freedom Gate Bridge.

Assigned personnel removed debris from the bridge supports, guided large, dangerous pieces away with poles, while upriver the boat teams blasted still larger sections into manageable chunks that would pass between the bridge supports. These engineer efforts, in addition to regular repair and maintenance of the large road net, constituted the major ground activity in the 1st Marine Division sector in late July. August would bring more rains and emergency demands on the engineers, but the critical ground activity at that time would be directed against the Communists in the area around Bunker Hill.

Assigned personnel cleared debris from the bridge supports, using poles to guide large, dangerous pieces away, while boat teams upstream blasted even larger sections into manageable chunks that could fit between the bridge supports. These engineering efforts, along with the regular repair and maintenance of the vast road network, made up the main ground activity in the 1st Marine Division sector in late July. August would bring more rain and urgent demands on the engineers, but at that time


The Participants and the Battlefield—Preliminary Action on Siberia—The Attack on Bunker Hill—Consolidating the Defense of Bunker Hill—Company B Returns to Bunker Hill—Supporting Arms at Bunker Hill—In Retrospect

The Participants and the Battlefield—Initial Engagement in Siberia—The Assault on Bunker Hill—Strengthening the Defense of Bunker Hill—Company B Comes Back to Bunker Hill—Supporting Forces at Bunker Hill—In Reflection

The Participants and the Battlefield157

157 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Jul-Aug 52; 1stMar, 2/1, 3/1 ComdDs, Aug 52; 1st MAW ComdD, Aug 52.

157 Unless otherwise stated, the content in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Jul-Aug 52; 1stMar, 2/1, 3/1 ComdDs, Aug 52; 1st MAW ComdD, Aug 52.

The torrential rains that had fallen just before the end of July continued to affect ground operations into early August. Contacts between opposing forces were few and brief, and casualties remained correspondingly low. On 1 August, General Selden assigned the reserve regiment, the 7th Marines, the task of developing the secondary defense line, KANSAS, at the extreme right of the division sector. The 5th Marines, manning this regimental area and originally responsible for the construction, had been unable to reach the second line because bridging across the Imjin to the rear of the sector was washed out. By 3 July the division put a ferry service into operation at the site of the inoperable Honker Bridge for the purpose of feeding ammunition to combat units north of the Imjin. The critical resupply problem began to ease the next day when the waters overflowing the Widgeon Bridge further upstream receded sufficiently to permit restoration of normal vehicular crossings there.

The downpour that fell just before the end of July continued to impact ground operations into early August. Encounters between opposing forces were few and short, and casualties stayed correspondingly low. On 1 August, General Selden tasked the reserve regiment, the 7th Marines, with developing the secondary defense line, Kans., on the far right side of the division sector. The 5th Marines, who were stationed in this regimental area and originally responsible for the construction, had been unable to reach the second line because the bridge across the Imjin to the rear of the sector was washed out. By 3 July, the division had operated a ferry service at the site of the non-functional Honker Bridge to supply ammunition to combat units north of the Imjin. The critical resupply issue started to improve the next day when the waters overflowing the Widgeon Bridge further upstream receded enough to allow normal vehicle crossings to resume there.

Traffic in the air had, quite naturally, been less affected by the heavy rains and by the flooded, mucky terrain that was slowing ground movement throughout the entire division area. Flight operations during the first week of August produced a daily sortie rate104 that would approximate the monthly average. In fact, the month of August was to become the record one for 1st MAW attack and fighter pilots during 1952, with a total of 5,869 sorties flown.

Traffic in the air was, understandably, less impacted by the heavy rains and the flooded, muddy ground that was slowing down movement across the entire division area. Flight operations in the first week of August achieved a daily sortie rate104 that closely matched the monthly average. In fact, August would go on to be a record month for 1st MAW attack and fighter pilots in 1952, with a total of 5,869 sorties flown.

While the air people in August were maintaining a good weather pace against the enemy following the July downpours, the Communist ground troops apparently found the going too difficult to mount any sustained attack. The enemy merely continued his active defense, with an average of two contacts daily, while busily engaged in advancing his OPLR by creeping tactics. Even the usually assiduous Chinese artillery was strangely quiet. With respect to the enemy’s excellent artillery capability, the 1st Marine Division in July learned that the Chinese had introduced a 132mm Russian rocket in their combat operations. The presence of this truck-mounted launcher, the Katusha, which could fire 16 rockets simultaneously, was indicated by a POW who had been informed by “his platoon leader that there were two Katusha regiments in the CCF.”158 In addition to this new enemy weapon, the Marine division reported the same month that positive sightings had been made of self-propelled guns emplaced well forward, and that there was an “indication that these guns were being used to fire direct fire missions from frontline revetments.”159

While the air forces in August were keeping a steady pace against the enemy after the heavy rains in July, the Communist ground troops seemed to find it too challenging to launch any major attacks. The enemy simply continued their active defense, making about two contacts daily while working on advancing their OPLR using creeping tactics. Even the usually diligent Chinese artillery was oddly quiet. Concerning the enemy’s strong artillery capabilities, the 1st Marine Division learned in July that the Chinese had started using a 132mm Russian rocket in their combat operations. The presence of this truck-mounted launcher, the Katusha, which could fire 16 rockets at once, was confirmed by a POW who had heard from “his platoon leader that there were two Katusha regiments in the CCF.”158 Along with this new enemy weapon, the Marine division reported the same month that they had positively identified self-propelled guns positioned very close to the front and that there were indications these guns were being used to conduct direct fire missions from frontline revetments.159

158 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 52, p. 2.

158 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 52, p. 2.

159 Ibid., p. 1.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 1.

Communist forward positions were gradually encroaching on JAMESTOWN. Since April 1952 the division had noted every month that the enemy was continuing to extend his trenches in the direction of the Marine MLR. The Chinese technique was to occupy key, high terrain at night, prepare the ground during darkness by digging trenches and constructing bunkers, and then vacate the area before daybreak. After nightly repetitions of this process had produced a tenable position, the enemy moved in and occupied it. By means of these creeping tactics, the Chinese hoped to acquire the dominating terrain necessary for controlling access to Seoul. The ultimate goal of the Communist forces was believed to be the 750-foot-high Paekhak Hill,160 the Marine high ground position also known as Hill 229, just over a mile east of the road leading to Panmunjom and Kaesong.

Communist front lines were slowly closing in on Jamestown. Since April 1952, the division had been noting each month that the enemy was continuing to expand their trenches toward the Marine MLR. The Chinese strategy was to take control of key, elevated terrain at night, prepare the ground in the dark by digging trenches and building bunkers, and then leave the area before sunrise. After repeated nightly efforts created a defensible position, the enemy would move in and occupy it. Through these gradual tactics, the Chinese aimed to gain control of the critical terrain needed to manage access to Seoul. The ultimate objective of the Communist forces was believed to be the 750-foot-high Paekhak Hill,160 the Marine high ground also known as Hill 229, located just over a mile east of the road to Panmunjom and Kaesong.

105

105

160 CG, I Corps msg to CG, 1stMarDiv, dtd 18 Jun 52, in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 52, App. I, p. 5.

160 CG, I Corps message to CG, 1st Mar Div, dated 18 Jun 52, in 1st Mar Div Command Document, Jun 52, Appendix I, p. 5.

During the four months that the 1st Marine Division’s mission had been to conduct an aggressive defense of the EUSAK left flank, Marines had become familiar with a number of Chinese small unit infantry tactics. Shortly after assignment of the division to western Korea, General Twining, the ADC, had observed that the Chinese first made a diversionary frontal assault while the main force maneuvered around UNC defenders to attack from the rear. Almost invariably the Chinese employed this envelopment technique. Occasionally the enemy also used more passive measures, such as attempting to demoralize Marines in the front lines and subvert their allegiance by English language propaganda broadcasts. These attempts represented wasted effort. Not one Marine was swayed.

During the four months that the 1st Marine Division's mission was to aggressively defend the EUSAK left flank, Marines became familiar with various Chinese small unit infantry tactics. Shortly after the division was assigned to western Korea, General Twining, the ADC, noticed that the Chinese first launched a distraction with a frontal assault while their main force maneuvered around UNC defenders to attack from the rear. The Chinese almost always used this encirclement strategy. Sometimes, the enemy also employed more passive tactics, like trying to demoralize Marines on the front lines and undermine their loyalty through English language propaganda broadcasts. These efforts were futile. Not a single Marine was influenced.

In some cases the Chinese were imaginative in changing their tactics or improvising new ones. This tendency had been noted as early as May by a 5th Marines battalion commander, Lieutenant Colonel Nihart, after 1/5 had engaged the enemy in a limited, objective attack:

In some cases, the Chinese were creative in altering their tactics or coming up with new ones on the fly. This observation was made as early as May by a 5th Marines battalion commander, Lieutenant Colonel Nihart, after 1/5 had faced the enemy in a limited, objective attack:

... when friendlies marked targets with WP [white phosphorus], the enemy would immediately drop rounds of WP between the target and friendly troops to conceal the target and to confuse friendly FOs [artillery forward observers]; the enemy tried very hard to take prisoners (rather than shoot a friendly, they would often attempt to knock him out with a concussion type grenade); counterattacks were made in waves of four to seven men deployed in a formation somewhat similar to the Marine Corps wedge; snipers were deployed in holes that were mutually supporting; concerted efforts were made to knock out automatic weapons; ... for close-in fighting, the enemy used PPSH [Soviet-made 7.62mm submachine gun] guns and grenades rather than bayonets; the enemy attacked behind well coordinated mortar fire; some enemy snipers were observed to have bushes tied to their backs....161

... when allies marked targets with white phosphorus (WP), the enemy would quickly drop WP rounds between the target and friendly troops to obscure the target and confuse friendly artillery forward observers (FOs); the enemy worked hard to capture prisoners (instead of shooting a friendly, they would often try to incapacitate him with a concussion grenade); counterattacks launched waves of four to seven men in a formation similar to the Marine Corps wedge; snipers were positioned in mutually supporting holes; there were coordinated efforts to take out automatic weapons; ... for close-quarter combat, the enemy preferred using PPSH submachine guns and grenades over bayonets; the enemy attacked under well-coordinated mortar fire; some enemy snipers were seen with bushes tied to their backs....161

161 1/5 ComdD, May 52, p. 12.

161 1/5 ComdD, May 52, p. 12.

On occasion 1st Division Marines found evidence that the enemy had infiltrated their lines. It appeared the most likely spot for line-crossers to make their way into the Marine rear area was from the far bank of the Imjin between the Sachon and Han Rivers where the enemy MLR was only a short distance from the sector held by the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion. Two enemy agents “armed with pistols of German manufacture, six hand grenades, and one set of field glasses”162 had been apprehended here by a Marine reconnaissance106 company patrol. The prisoners had stated they were “part of a force of one thousand men who were infiltrating to form a guerrilla force somewhere in South Korea.”163 Six days later, after a brief fire fight between a small group of Chinese and a Marine outpost in the center of the division sector, the defenders discovered that two of the three enemy dead wore under their own clothing various articles of Marine uniforms. Neither of the Chinese had identification or any papers whatsoever. It was believed that both were enemy agents and that the attack on the outpost was a diversion “for the express purpose of detracting attention from infiltrators.”164

On occasion, 1st Division Marines found proof that the enemy had slipped through their lines. The most likely place for infiltrators to enter the Marine rear area was from the far bank of the Imjin River between the Sachon and Han Rivers, where the enemy's main line of resistance was only a short distance from the sector held by the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion. Two enemy agents, "armed with German-manufactured pistols, six hand grenades, and a pair of binoculars,"162 were caught here by a Marine reconnaissance company patrol. The prisoners claimed they were "part of a force of one thousand men who were infiltrating to form a guerrilla force somewhere in South Korea."163 Six days later, after a brief firefight between a small group of Chinese soldiers and a Marine outpost in the center of the division sector, the defenders discovered that two of the three enemy dead were wearing pieces of Marine uniforms underneath their own clothing. Neither of the Chinese had identification or any papers at all. It was believed that both were enemy agents and that the attack on the outpost was a distraction "to divert attention from infiltrators."164

162 HqBn, 1stMarDiv ComdD, May 52, p. 27.

162 HqBn, 1stMarDiv ComdD, May 52, p. 27.

163 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

164 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 52, p. 5.

164 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 52, p. 5.

Even though enemy tactics and attempts to penetrate Marine positions demonstrated a good deal of soldierly skills, his conduct of defensive operations was nothing short of masterful. This was especially true of Chinese construction of underground earthworks. It appeared that the Chinese had no single pattern for this type of field fortification. Like the Japanese in World War II, the Chinese Communists were experts in organizing the ground thoroughly and in utilizing a seemingly inexhaustible supply of manpower to hollow out tunnels, air-raid shelters, living quarters, storage spaces, and mess halls. Americans described the Chinese as industrious diggers,165 who excavated quickly and deeply for protection against UN bombardments. From numerous reports of ground clashes in the 1st Marine Division sector and from observations made by Marine pilots, it became known that the enemy was quick to seek cover whenever he was exposed to sustained artillery bombardment or air attack.

Even though enemy strategies and efforts to breach Marine positions showed a lot of military skill, his management of defensive operations was nothing short of brilliant. This was particularly evident in the Chinese construction of underground fortifications. It seemed that the Chinese didn’t follow any specific design for this kind of field fortification. Similar to the Japanese in World War II, the Chinese Communists were experts at thoroughly organizing the terrain and utilizing what seemed like an endless supply of manpower to create tunnels, air-raid shelters, living quarters, storage areas, and mess halls. Americans referred to the Chinese as hardworking diggers,165 who excavated quickly and deeply for shelter against UN bombings. From numerous reports of ground encounters in the 1st Marine Division sector and from observations made by Marine pilots, it was clear that the enemy was quick to find cover whenever he was exposed to continuous artillery bombardment or air strikes.

165 “The Chinese attack by ‘shovel’ proved effective and difficult to combat. They burrowed forward almost continuously, even under direct observation. Every foot of advance provided added opportunity to attack Marine COPs with greater impunity. While this activity possibly provided Marines with target practice in both small arms and mortars, these CCF working parties in a narrow trench 7 to 10-feet deep probably took very few casualties.” Col William R. Watson, Jr. ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 18 July 67.

165 “The Chinese tactic of attacking with ‘shovels’ was effective and hard to fight against. They consistently dug forward, even when being watched directly. Every foot gained allowed them to attack Marine COPs with more freedom. While this might have given Marines practice with small arms and mortars, the CCF work crews in a narrow trench 7 to 10 feet deep likely suffered very few casualties.” Col William R. Watson, Jr. ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 18 July 67.

What was not known, however, was the extent of these subterranean shelters. One Chinese account, allegedly written by a reconnaissance staff officer named Li Yo-Yang, described the protection of a CCF shelter to a recently captured UN prisoner as they were under Allied artillery bombardment. While shells exploded all around the position the enemy boasted: “There’s no danger of being killed on a position fortified by the Chinese People’s Volunteers.... Don’t107 you know it’s impossible for your shells to penetrate our air-raid shelters?”166 An American report on enemy field fortifications estimated that the amount of earth cover in Chinese air-raid shelters was as high as 20 feet, and in frontline defensive positions, up to 33 feet.167

What wasn’t known, though, was how extensive these underground shelters were. One Chinese account, supposedly written by a reconnaissance officer named Li Yo-Yang, described the safety of a CCF shelter to a recently captured UN prisoner while they were under Allied artillery fire. As shells exploded all around them, the enemy boasted: “There’s no risk of being killed in a position fortified by the Chinese People’s Volunteers.... Don’t107 you know it’s impossible for your shells to break through our air-raid shelters?”166 An American report on enemy field fortifications estimated that the amount of earth covering the Chinese air-raid shelters was as much as 20 feet, and in frontline defensive positions, up to 33 feet.167

166 A Volunteer Soldier’s Day: Recollections by Men of the Chinese People’s Volunteers in the War to Resist U.S. Aggression and Aid Korea (Peking: Foreign Languages Press, 1961), p. 193, hereafter CPV, Recollections.

166 A Volunteer Soldier’s Day: Memories by Men of the Chinese People’s Volunteers in the War to Resist U.S. Aggression and Aid Korea (Beijing: Foreign Languages Press, 1961), p. 193, hereafter CPV, Memories.

167 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-90.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-90.

Marine defensive installations carved out of the ground were not so extensive as those of the enemy opposing JAMESTOWN. “In spite of orders, instructions, and inspections many bunkers were only half dug in, then built up above the ground with sandbags,” observed one Marine battalion commander.168 Back in April, just after the Marine division had settled in the west, its 1st Engineer Battalion, using U.S. Army drawings, had published bunker construction plans. Express instructions to frontline units were to “construct bunkers to provide simultaneously living and fighting space. Overhead cover on all bunkers will be such as to withstand direct hit from 105mm and to allow friendly VT fire over position.”169

Marine defensive installations dug into the ground were not as extensive as those of the enemy facing JAMESTOWN. “Despite orders, instructions, and inspections, many bunkers were only partially dug in, then built up above ground with sandbags,” noted one Marine battalion commander.168 Back in April, shortly after the Marine division had settled in the west, its 1st Engineer Battalion, using U.S. Army blueprints, had released bunker construction plans. Clear instructions to frontline units were to “build bunkers that provide both living and fighting space. The overhead cover on all bunkers must be capable of withstanding a direct hit from 105mm and allowing friendly VT fire over the position.”169

168 LtCol Roy J. Batterton, Jr., “Random Notes on Korea,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 11 (Nov 55), p. 29, hereafter Batterton, Korea Notes.

168 LtCol Roy J. Batterton, Jr., “Random Notes on Korea,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 11 (Nov 55), p. 29, hereafter Batterton, Korea Notes.

169 CO 5thMar msg to 5thMar units, dtd 20 Apr 52, in 5thMar ComdD, Apr 52, #2, App. II, p. 6.

169 CO 5thMar message to 5thMar units, dated April 20, 1952, in 5thMar Command Document, April 1952, #2, App. II, p. 6.

Some officers felt it was, perhaps, the work-during-light, patrol-at-night routine that resulted in the shallow draft Marine bunkers. Others suggested that the relatively limited defensive training received by the more offensive-minded Marines created a natural apathy to digging elaborate fighting positions.

Some officers believed that the routine of working during the day and patrolling at night led to the shallow draft Marine bunkers. Others argued that the relatively limited defensive training given to the more aggressive-minded Marines created a natural indifference towards building elaborate fighting positions.

It took a hole 12 feet square and 7 feet deep to house the Army, Lincoln-logs-type bunker the Marines first used in the spring of 1952. The fortification, using tree trunks up to eight inches in diameter, had a cover of seven to eight feet. This consisted of four feet of logs, and three-to-four more feet of rocks, sandbags, and earth fill. By the summer of 1952, the division developed its own style of bunker, a prefabricated timber structure designed to fit into a hole eight feet square and somewhat less than seven feet deep. This size fortification could accommodate a .50 caliber machine gun, crew members, or several riflemen. Provision was also made for the inclusion of a sleeping shelf in the rear of the bunker. Its construction required no saws, hammers, or nails, only shovels to excavate. The108 major drawback to erection of the prefab was the difficulty in manhandling the heavy roofing timbers, 11 feet long, 12 inches wide, and 4 inches thick. On top of this was placed a two-foot layer of sandbags, tarpaper covering, and a four feet high layer of earth that completed the structure and partly camouflaged it.

It took a hole 12 feet square and 7 feet deep to create the Army's Lincoln-log-style bunker first used by the Marines in the spring of 1952. The fortification, built with tree trunks up to eight inches in diameter, had a cover of seven to eight feet. This included four feet of logs and three to four more feet of rocks, sandbags, and earth fill. By the summer of 1952, the division developed its own version of a bunker, a prefabricated timber structure designed to fit into a hole that was eight feet square and just under seven feet deep. This size of fortification could hold a .50 caliber machine gun, crew members, or several riflemen. There was also space for a sleeping shelf at the back of the bunker. Its construction didn’t require saws, hammers, or nails—only shovels to dig. The108 main drawback to setting up the prefab was the difficulty of handling the heavy roofing timbers, which were 11 feet long, 12 inches wide, and 4 inches thick. On top of this, there was a two-foot layer of sandbags, a tarpaper cover, and a four-foot high layer of earth that completed the structure and helped camouflage it.

Battlefield construction was carried out by the infantry regiments to the limit of unit capabilities. The division engineers, one company per frontline regiment, augmented at times by shore party units, supplied the technical know-how and engineering materials and equipment. These combat support troops processed the lumber for bunker construction and built fortifications for forward medical treatment and one bunker for observation of battle action by civilian and military dignitaries, irreverently called VIPs (Very Important Persons), who frequently visited the division. Engineers also erected some of the barbed wire barriers in the forward areas and, when necessary, cleared firing lanes for weapons housed in bunkers.

Battlefield construction was done by the infantry regiments to the best of their abilities. The division engineers, with one company assigned to each frontline regiment and sometimes supported by shore party units, provided the technical skills and engineering materials and equipment needed. These combat support troops processed the lumber for bunker construction and built fortifications for forward medical treatment, as well as a bunker for observing battle action by civilian and military officials, casually referred to as VIPs (Very Important Persons), who often visited the division. Engineers also set up some of the barbed wire barriers in the forward areas and, when needed, cleared firing lanes for weapons stored in bunkers.

The processing of timbers for easier and faster bunker-construction had begun on 28 July, but this was hardly in time for the most difficult fighting the division had faced thus far in western Korea. Given the name Bunker Hill,170 this battle would take place in the center sector of the division line manned since 27 July by Colonel Walter F. Layer’s 1st Marines.171 On that date Lieutenant Colonel Armitage’s battalion, 3/1, took over from the 3d Battalion, 7th Marines on the left, and 2/1 (Lieutenant Colonel Roy J. Batterton, Jr.) relieved the 2d Battalion of the 7th Marines on the right.172

The processing of timber for quicker and easier bunker construction started on July 28, but this was barely in time for the toughest fighting the division had encountered so far in western Korea. Named Bunker Hill, this battle would occur in the central sector of the division line, which had been held since July 27 by Colonel Walter F. Layer’s 1st Marines. On that date, Lieutenant Colonel Armitage’s battalion, 3/1, took over from the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines on the left, and 2/1 (Lieutenant Colonel Roy J. Batterton, Jr.) relieved the 2nd Battalion of the 7th Marines on the right.

170 Since bunkers were in everyone’s mind and frontline units were heavily involved in the bunker-construction program, it is felt likely “someone in G-2 arbitrarily assigned the name.” Col Gerald T. Armitage ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 6 July 67, hereafter Armitage ltr.

170 Since bunkers were on everyone’s mind and frontline units were heavily involved in the bunker-construction program, it seems probable that “someone in G-2 randomly assigned the name.” Col Gerald T. Armitage ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 6 July 67, hereafter Armitage ltr.

171 Two days earlier Colonel Layer had taken over the command from Colonel Flournoy.

171 Two days earlier, Colonel Layer had taken over command from Colonel Flournoy.

172 Lieutenant Colonels Gerald F. Russell and Anthony Caputo, respectively, commanded 3/7 and 2/7 at this time.

172 Lieutenant Colonels Gerald F. Russell and Anthony Caputo were in charge of 3/7 and 2/7 at that time.

Across No-Man’s-Land, units of two Chinese divisions faced the 3,603 men of the 1st Marines. From west to east opposite the Marine regiment’s frontline battalions were elements of the 580th Regiment, 194th Division, 65th CCF Army and of both the 352d and 354th Regiments, 118th Division, 40th CCF Army. The 352d Regiment held most of the area on which the battle would be fought.173 Enemy combat efficiency was rated as excellent and his forward units were well-supplied. The Chinese conducted an active defense, using limited109 objective attacks, numerous small-size probes, and creeping tactics to extend their OPLR line. Communist soldiers offered well-coordinated and tenacious resistance to Marine patrols, raids, and attacks. Within enemy lines a 775-foot elevation, known as Taedok-san, was situated directly north of the Marine division center and commanded the entire Bunker Hill area.

Across No-Man’s-Land, two Chinese divisions faced off against the 3,603 men of the 1st Marines. From west to east, in front of the Marine regiment’s frontline battalions, were units from the 580th Regiment, 194th Division, and 65th CCF Army, along with both the 352d and 354th Regiments, 118th Division, 40th CCF Army. The 352d Regiment controlled most of the area where the battle would take place.173 Enemy combat effectiveness was rated as excellent, and their forward units were well-supplied. The Chinese employed an active defense, executing limited objective attacks, many small probes, and creeping tactics to extend their OPLR line. Communist soldiers provided well-coordinated and determined resistance to Marine patrols, raids, and assaults. Within enemy territory, a 775-foot elevation known as Taedok-san was located directly north of the Marine division center and overlooked the entire Bunker Hill area.

173 1stMarDiv PIR 657, dtd 13 Aug 52.

173 1stMarDiv PIR 657, dated 13 Aug 52.

On JAMESTOWN, the dominating height was Hill 201, 660 feet high174 and immediately to the rear of the MLR in the left battalion sector. Southwest of this elevation was the Marine stronghold, Hill 229, just 23 feet lower than Taedok, and believed by the Marines to have been the objective of the August battle. Directly north of Hill 201 was Hill 122, adjacent to the enemy OPLR, and called Bunker Hill by the Marines. It was shortly to become the scene of bitter fighting. The crest of Hill 122 was about 350 yards long. At a distance of about 700 yards, it generally paralleled the northeast-southwest direction of JAMESTOWN in the left of the 2/1 sector and adjoining 3/1 sector.

On JAMESTOWN, the highest point was Hill 201, standing at 660 feet and located just behind the MLR in the left battalion area. Southwest of this height was the Marine stronghold, Hill 229, which was only 23 feet lower than Taedok and considered by the Marines to be the target of the August battle. Directly north of Hill 201 was Hill 122, next to the enemy OPLR, which the Marines called Bunker Hill. It was soon to be the site of intense fighting. The top of Hill 122 was about 350 yards long. At a distance of roughly 700 yards, it generally ran parallel to the northeast-southwest line of JAMestown in the left part of the 2/1 sector and adjacent to the 3/1 sector.

174 Frequently cartographers use elevations for names of hills. Heights on the Korean maps are in meters, and many of these hills derive their name (i.e., number) from their elevation. For changing meters to feet, the conversion factor 3.28 is used.

174 Frequently, mapmakers use elevations for the names of hills. Heights on Korean maps are in meters, and many of these hills get their names (i.e., numbers) from their elevation. To convert meters to feet, the conversion factor 3.28 is used.

Southwest of Bunker and a little more than 200 yards from the Marine MLR was Hill 124. This Hill 124–122 axis, for tactical purposes, was known as the Bunker Ridge. The ridgeline, roughly “cashew” in shape almost anchored back into the MLR on the forward slopes of Hill 229. To the northeast of Bunker Hill and separated from it by a wide saddle175 was another enemy position, Hill 120. (See Map 9, for outposts and key hill positions in the 1st Marines center regimental area in early August.)

Southwest of Bunker and just over 200 yards from the Marine MLR was Hill 124. This Hill 124–122 line was referred to as Bunker Ridge for tactical reasons. The ridgeline, which was roughly shaped like a “cashew,” almost connected back to the MLR on the front slopes of Hill 229. To the northeast of Bunker Hill, separated by a wide saddle, was another enemy position, Hill 120. (See Map 9, for outposts and key hill positions in the 1st Marines center regimental area in early August.)

175 A saddle, the low point in the crest line of a ridge, is much in appearance like the side view of a riding saddle.

175 A saddle, the low point in the crest line of a ridge, looks a lot like the side view of a riding saddle.

Approximately one mile east of Hill 124 was Hill 56A, or Samoa, the right flank limit of the immediate battlefield. It guarded the best avenue of approach into the Bunker Hill area, the Changdan Road. Another Marine position west of Samoa was Hill 58A, or Siberia, a sentinel overlooking a long draw running down the east sides of Hills 122 and 120. Both Samoa and Siberia were outposted by squads. Another 1st Marines squad occupied Hill 52, on the other side of Changdan Road and not quite a half-mile east of Samoa. The entire battlefield was cut up by numerous gullies and draws, most of which paralleled Bunker Hill.

Approximately one mile east of Hill 124 was Hill 56A, known as Samoa, which marked the right flank of the battlefield. It protected the best route into the Bunker Hill area, the Changdan Road. Another Marine position to the west of Samoa was Hill 58A, or Siberia, which overlooked a long draw running down the east sides of Hills 122 and 120. Both Samoa and Siberia had squads stationed at them. Another squad from the 1st Marines was positioned on Hill 52, on the opposite side of Changdan Road, and not quite half a mile east of Samoa. The entire battlefield was crisscrossed by numerous gullies and draws, most of which ran parallel to Bunker Hill.

110

110

MAP 9 K. White

MAP 9 K. White

1ST MARINES SECTOR OF JAMESTOWN

1ST MARINES SECTOR OF JAMESTOWN

(Division Center)

(Division Center)

8 AUGUST 1952

8 AUGUST 1952

111

111

Preliminary Action on Siberia176

176 Unless otherwise noted, the material for this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 9–11 Aug 52; 1stMar, 1/1, 2/1, 3/1 ComdDs, Aug 52.

176 Unless stated otherwise, the material for this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, Aug 9–11, 52; 1stMar, 1/1, 2/1, 3/1 ComdDs, Aug 52.

The first round in the battle of Bunker Hill began as the fight for Siberia, Hill 58A. Just slightly more than a quarter of a mile from JAMESTOWN, this squad-size outpost, the most western in the right battalion sector, had been occupied in June when the division moved its MLR forward. Since Siberia was located halfway between the Marine MLR and the Communist OPLR, the Marine seizure of Siberia prevented the Chinese from holding terrain suitable for employing 60mm mortars against Marine frontline troops.177 Strong enemy outposts on Hills 120 to the north and 110 to the northeast constantly threatened the squad on 58A. From these two forward positions, Chinese troops early on 9 August 1952 streamed down to Siberia, launching in the process the Bunker Hill battle.

The first round in the Battle of Bunker Hill kicked off as the fight for Siberia, Hill 58A. Just a bit over a quarter of a mile from JAMESTOWN, this small outpost, the farthest west in the right battalion sector, had been taken over in June when the division moved its Main Line of Resistance (MLR) forward. Since Siberia was situated halfway between the Marine MLR and the Communist Outer Perimeter Line (OPLR), the Marines’ capture of Siberia stopped the Chinese from using the terrain to launch 60mm mortars at Marine front-line troops.177 Strong enemy outposts on Hills 120 to the north and 110 to the northeast continuously threatened the squad on 58A. From these two forward positions, Chinese troops poured down to Siberia early on 9 August 1952, initiating the Bunker Hill battle.

177 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52, App. VII, p. 1.

177 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52, App. VII, p. 1.

Just before 0100 an estimated four enemy squads fell upon Hill 58A, outposted by Company E Marines. Using assorted infantry weapons, the raiding party forced the outnumbered Siberia occupants to withdraw. By 0145 the outpost Marines returned to the MLR. At this time the JAMESTOWN sector south of the outpost, also held by Captain Jesse F. Thorpe’s Company E, was under attack by approximately 50 Chinese.

Just before 1:00 AM, about four enemy squads attacked Hill 58A, which was guarded by Company E Marines. Armed with different infantry weapons, the raiding party pushed the outnumbered defenders from Siberia to retreat. By 1:45 AM, the outpost Marines had returned to the Main Line of Resistance (MLR). At this point, the JAMSTOWN sector south of the outpost, also held by Captain Jesse F. Thorpe’s Company E, was being attacked by around 50 Chinese.

After breaking up the enemy assault by well placed friendly mortar fire, the Marines enjoyed a brief respite from Chinese pressure and formulated plans to recapture Siberia. It was decided that a reinforced Company E platoon would counterattack to regain the outpost. At 0355, the 11th Marines fired a five-minute preparation against the objective. On schedule, the platoon crossed JAMESTOWN at 0400 and in the darkness headed towards the outpost. Advancing carefully to avoid detection as long as possible, the Marines reached the area near the base of the hill by 0525. Heavy enemy artillery and mortar fire again forced the Marines to withdraw, and the platoon returned to its company CP at 0545. So far, the 58A action had resulted in the wounding of 32 Marines and the killing of another.

After breaking up the enemy attack with well-placed friendly mortar fire, the Marines took a brief break from Chinese pressure and made plans to retake Siberia. They decided that a reinforced Company E platoon would launch a counterattack to reclaim the outpost. At 3:55 AM, the 11th Marines fired a five-minute preparation against the target. Right on schedule, the platoon crossed JAMestown at 4:00 AM and headed toward the outpost in the dark. Moving carefully to avoid detection for as long as possible, the Marines reached the area near the base of the hill by 5:25 AM. Intense enemy artillery and mortar fire forced the Marines to pull back, and the platoon returned to its company CP by 5:45 AM. So far, the 58A action had resulted in 32 Marines being wounded and another one killed.

It became evident that more preparation, by Marine air and artillery,112 would be required for the recapture of Siberia. At 0650, four Marine F9F jet fighters worked the hill over with napalm and 500-pound bombs. Three hours later, a flight of Air Force F-80 “Shooting Star” jets dropped eight 1,000-pound bombs on the same target. With the aerial attack complete, Marine artillery opened fire. Five minutes later another Marine reinforced platoon launched a second ground attack. This was made by a unit from Company A (Captain Robert W. Judson) of the regimental reserve battalion, supported by a Company E platoon. Again the Marines advanced to the open sector south of the hill before the enemy reacted. As before, the Chinese response was a devastating barrage from their supporting weapons. The stubborn Marine assault against Siberia brought down the full weight of Chinese firepower—rifle, machine gun, and hand grenades—but the attack force would not be beaten off. At 1103 the Siberia hill again belonged to the Marines. Quickly the Company A platoon began to organize a defense to repulse the Chinese counterattack, which was certain to come.

It became clear that more preparation, through Marine air and artillery, 112 would be necessary for taking back Siberia. At 6:50 AM, four Marine F9F jet fighters bombed the hill with napalm and 500-pound bombs. Three hours later, a group of Air Force F-80 “Shooting Star” jets dropped eight 1,000-pound bombs on the same target. With the airstrike finished, Marine artillery began firing. Five minutes later, another Marine reinforced platoon launched a second ground attack. This was led by a unit from Company A (Captain Robert W. Judson) of the regimental reserve battalion, supported by a Company E platoon. Once more, the Marines advanced into the open area south of the hill before the enemy could respond. As before, the Chinese countered with a fierce barrage from their support weapons. The relentless Marine assault on Siberia faced the full force of Chinese firepower—rifles, machine guns, and hand grenades—but the attacking force wouldn't give up. At 11:03 AM, the hill at Siberia was once again in Marine hands. The Company A platoon quickly started setting up a defense to fend off the Chinese counterattack that was sure to come.

In anticipation of a prompt and violent retaliation by the Chinese, and to help the speedily improvised defense efforts, the 2/1 battalion commander, Lieutenant Colonel Batterton, had sent forward the supporting platoon from Company E. This reinforcing unit reached Siberia within seven minutes after the Marine attackers had gained possession of the objective. The new arrivals scarcely had time to dig in before a hail of mortar and artillery shells forced all the Marines to seek cover in a defiladed position on the southern side of the slope. From here, the 2/1 force directed counter mortar and artillery fire onto the top and far side of Siberia and unleashed their own assault weapons against the Chinese soldiers pressing for possession of Siberia. By midafternoon, with heavy enemy counterfire on the position and their casualties reaching nearly 75 percent, the Marines were forced to withdraw and return to their own lines. The hill had changed hands twice and the enemy had employed 5,000 rounds of artillery in the contested ownership.

In anticipation of a quick and violent retaliation from the Chinese, and to support the rapidly improvised defense efforts, Lieutenant Colonel Batterton, the commander of the 2/1 battalion, had sent forward the supporting platoon from Company E. This reinforcement arrived at Siberia just seven minutes after the Marine attackers secured the objective. The new arrivals barely had time to set up before a barrage of mortar and artillery shells forced all the Marines to take cover in a sheltered position on the southern side of the slope. From there, the 2/1 unit directed counter-mortar and artillery fire onto the top and far side of Siberia and unleashed their own weapons against the Chinese soldiers trying to take control of Siberia. By midafternoon, faced with heavy enemy counterfire and their casualties nearing 75 percent, the Marines had to withdraw and return to their own lines. The hill had changed hands twice, and the enemy had fired 5,000 rounds of artillery in the disputed fight for control.

Badly mauled by two actions against Hill 58A, Company E came off the lines to reorganize, exchanging positions with Company A, of Lieutenant Colonel Louis N. King’s 1st Battalion. About this time Company C, less one platoon, had moved from the 1/1 rear area forward to an assembly point behind 2/1 in preparation for a night counterattack to retake the now battle-scarred outpost. Without113 the customary artillery preparation, the attacking force at 2245 crossed the MLR at a point directly south of the former outpost Samoa, which had been abandoned earlier when Siberia fell. Working their way northwest towards Siberia, the Company C Marines, commanded by Captain Casimir C. Ksycewski, cautiously approached the assault line. Reaching it at 0105 on 10 August the force deployed immediately and rushed the objective.

Badly damaged by two attacks against Hill 58A, Company E withdrew to reorganize, swapping places with Company A from Lieutenant Colonel Louis N. King’s 1st Battalion. Around this time, Company C, minus one platoon, had moved from the rear area of the 1/1 to an assembly point behind 2/1 to prepare for a nighttime counterattack to reclaim the now battle-damaged outpost. Without the usual artillery support, the attacking force crossed the MLR at 2245 at a spot directly south of the former outpost Samoa, which had been abandoned earlier when Siberia fell. Making their way northwest towards Siberia, the Company C Marines, led by Captain Casimir C. Ksycewski, cautiously approached the assault line. They reached it at 0105 on August 10 and immediately deployed and charged the objective.

At about this time the Chinese defenders opened fire but could not halt the assaulting Marines. The struggle to regain the Siberia objective was fierce; some of the Chinese refused to yield and fought to their death. Most, however, held their defense positions only briefly before retiring to the refuge offered by the reverse slope of the hill. Gaining the crest of Hill 58A at 0116, the Company C commander ordered a platoon to the other side of the objective to dispatch remaining elements of the enemy force. The resulting fire fight lasted nearly four hours. At daybreak, however, the enemy, in estimated company strength, strenuously renewed his counterfire and, for a third time, forced the 1st Marines to retire from the disputed hill and return to the main line.

At around this time, the Chinese defenders started shooting but couldn't stop the attacking Marines. The fight to reclaim the Siberia objective was intense; some of the Chinese soldiers refused to give up and fought until they died. Most, however, only held their defensive positions for a short time before retreating to the cover provided by the slope on the back side of the hill. After reaching the top of Hill 58A at 0116, the Company C commander ordered a platoon to the other side of the objective to take out the remaining enemy forces. The ensuing firefight lasted nearly four hours. However, at daybreak, the enemy, estimated to be in company strength, vigorously renewed their counterfire and, for the third time, forced the 1st Marines to retreat from the contested hill and return to the main line.

Later that day, at the regimental CP, Colonel Layer called a staff conference to decide on the best course of action. Successive Marine withdrawals had been caused by the intense enemy shelling. The key to its effectiveness was the observation provided the Chinese from Hills 122 and 110. Heavy enemy fire had also caused most of the casualties, 17 killed and 243 wounded, in 1st Marine ranks. It was decided to shift the battle area to better restrict this enemy capability not only to observe Marine troop movements but also to call down accurate fire on friendly attacking units. Bunker Hill, an enemy outpost west of Siberia, was selected. In the eyes of 1st Marines tacticians, possession of Hill 122 instead of Hill 58A presented three major advantages:

Later that day, at the regimental command post, Colonel Layer held a staff meeting to figure out the best way to proceed. The Marine withdrawals had been due to intense enemy shelling. The effectiveness of the enemy fire was largely based on the observation they had from Hills 122 and 110. Heavy enemy fire also led to most of the casualties, with 17 killed and 243 wounded among the 1st Marines. It was decided to move the battle area to limit the enemy's ability to not only observe Marine troop movements but also to direct precise fire on friendly attacking units. Bunker Hill, an enemy outpost west of Siberia, was chosen. In the view of the 1st Marines' strategists, controlling Hill 122 instead of Hill 58A offered three major benefits:

Hill 122 offered excellent observation into the rear of enemy outposts;

Hill 122 provided great visibility into the back of enemy outposts;

Possession of Hill 122 would greatly strengthen the MLR in the regimental sector, effectively neutralize Siberia, provide dominating terrain that was more defensible than 58A; and

Possessing Hill 122 would significantly reinforce the MLR in the regimental sector, effectively neutralize Siberia, and provide better defensible terrain than 58A; and

Bunker offered an excellent opportunity for an attack employing the element of surprise against the enemy.

Bunker provided a great chance for a surprise attack against the enemy.

114

114

To help preserve this tactical surprise, the plan for the Bunker Hill attack included a diversionary attack against Siberia. Making this secondary effort would be a reinforced rifle platoon and a composite unit of gun and flame tanks. For the main attack, Lieutenant Colonel Batterton’s 2d Battalion would employ a reinforced rifle company with supporting artillery and armor, if needed. The operation was to be conducted at night, to further ensure the opportunity for tactical surprise. For the same reason, the attack was not to be preceded by artillery preparation on either objective. To the right of the 1st Marines, however, Colonel Culhane’s 5th Marines would support the diversion by artillery and tank fire placed on enemy strongpoints in the Ungok area, about 1¼ miles northeast of Siberia. During daylight, air, artillery, and tanks attacked targets on both 122 and 58A. Priority of effort in the 1st Marines area went to units preparing for the Siberia-Bunker offensive.

To maintain the tactical surprise for the Bunker Hill attack, the plan included a diversionary attack against Siberia. This secondary effort would involve a reinforced rifle platoon and a mixed unit of gun and flame tanks. For the main attack, Lieutenant Colonel Batterton’s 2nd Battalion would use a reinforced rifle company with supporting artillery and armor, if necessary. The operation was scheduled for nighttime to maximize the chances of tactical surprise. For the same reason, the attack would not be preceded by any artillery preparation on either objective. On the right of the 1st Marines, Colonel Culhane’s 5th Marines would provide support for the diversion with artillery and tank fire targeting enemy strongpoints in the Ungok area, located about 1¼ miles northeast of Siberia. During daylight hours, air, artillery, and tanks struck targets on both 122 and 58A. The 1st Marines focused their efforts on units getting ready for the Siberia-Bunker offensive.

The Attack on Bunker Hill178

178 Unless otherwise noted, the material for this section is derived from: Encl (1) to CG, FMFPac ltr 0762/161 over A9 to CMC, dtd 25 Nov 52, Subj: “Summary of 1stMarDiv Sit from 20 July-20 Oct 52,” hereafter FMFPac, 1stMarDiv Sum, Jul-Oct 52; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 2/1, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Aug 52.

178 Unless otherwise noted, the material for this section is derived from: Encl (1) to CG, FMFPac ltr 0762/161 over A9 to CMC, dtd 25 Nov 52, Subj: “Summary of 1stMarDiv Sit from 20 July-20 Oct 52,” hereafter FMFPac, 1stMarDiv Sum, Jul-Oct 52; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 2/1, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Aug 52.

At dusk on 11 August, 1,000 yards behind the MLR in the western sector of the 2/1 line, the eight Company C tanks that were to provide much of the diversionary effort at Hill 58A moved out of their assembly area. Leading the column east of the MSR, Changdan Road, were four M-46 mediums, mounting 90mm guns. They were followed by an equal number of flame vehicles. Each M-46 was specially equipped with an 18-inch fighting light, actually a searchlight with a shutter over the lens, to be used for battlefield illumination. The flame vehicles, World War II M4A3E8 mediums, mounted a 105mm howitzer in addition to the flame tube. As the tanks reached the Changdan Road, they turned north, crossed the MLR, and proceeded to preselected positions. (See Map 10.)

At dusk on August 11, 1,000 yards behind the Main Line of Resistance (MLR) in the western sector of the 2/1 line, the eight tanks from Company C that were set to create much of the diversionary effort at Hill 58A began to move out of their assembly area. Leading the column east along the Main Supply Route (MSR), Changdan Road, were four M-46 medium tanks equipped with 90mm guns. They were followed by an equal number of flame thrower vehicles. Each M-46 was specially outfitted with an 18-inch fighting light, which was basically a searchlight with a shutter over the lens for battlefield illumination. The flame vehicles, World War II M4A3E8 mediums, were equipped with a 105mm howitzer in addition to the flame tube. As the tanks reached Changdan Road, they turned north, crossed the MLR, and proceeded to their preselected positions. (See Map 10.)

MAP 10 K. WHITE

MAP 10 K. WHITE

2/1 SECTOR

2/1 SECTOR

9–11 AUGUST 1952

9–11 August 1952

When the M-46 gun tanks were in position to fire on Siberia and its flanks, their powerful 90s opened up on the objective. At this time, 2110, the first section of flames (two tanks) made its way116 along the stream bed between the MLR and Hill 56A (Samoa). Lighting their way with very short bursts of flame, the two tanks advanced in this manner to the base of Hill 58A. There the vehicles paused momentarily, then began to move up the near slope, using longer spurts of flame to sear the ground and sparse vegetation to the crest of the position. The gun tanks, in the meantime, had shifted their fire from Siberia northeast to neutralize Hill 110. When the flame vehicles reached the top of Siberia, they lumbered down the far slope, firing then in shorter bursts and sweeping the area with machine guns to discourage any enemy infantry interference.

When the M-46 tank guns were set to fire on Siberia and its sides, their powerful 90mm cannons targeted the objective. At 2110, the first pair of flame tanks moved along the stream bed between the Main Line of Resistance and Hill 56A (Samoa). Using brief bursts of flame to light their way, the two tanks advanced to the base of Hill 58A. There, the vehicles stopped for a moment before climbing the slope, using longer bursts of flame to scorch the ground and sparse vegetation all the way to the top. Meanwhile, the gun tanks had redirected their fire from Siberia to the northeast to take out Hill 110. Once the flame vehicles reached the peak of Siberia, they trundled down the opposite slope, firing in short bursts and sweeping the area with machine guns to deter any enemy infantry from interfering.

With some fuel reserved to light their way on the return trip, the flame section reversed its course from the far side of the objective, mounted the crest, and clanked back to the Changdan Road. When the first section had returned, the second departed, completing its mission in much the same manner. Tank personnel of both groups observed that the enemy artillery and mortar fire was medium to heavy on Siberia. Some rifle fire was also received. Gun tanks, firing from Changdan Road east of Siberia, experienced less fire from the Chinese.

With some fuel saved to light their way back, the flame section turned around from the far side of the target, climbed the ridge, and made its way back to the Changdan Road. After the first section returned, the second set off, finishing its mission in a similar way. Tank crews from both groups noted that the enemy artillery and mortar fire on Siberia was medium to heavy. They also encountered some rifle fire. Gun tanks firing from Changdan Road east of Siberia faced less fire from the Chinese.

Although the flame vehicles had completed their mission and were on their way home, the M-46s remained on position in support of the 3d Platoon, Company D which, at 2230, was advancing from the MLR to complete the infantry part of the diversion. Staying out of the low ground that the tanks had used, the platoon swept over Hill 56A at 2255 and immediately struck out for the further objective, Hill 58A. Gun tanks firing their 90s on the Chinese OPLR on Hill 110 and on Siberia illuminated the target area with their fighting lights, the shutter of which the tankers flicked open and closed during each five-second interval that the light remained on.

Although the flame vehicles had finished their mission and were heading home, the M-46s stayed in position to support the 3rd Platoon, Company D, which, at 10:30 PM, was moving from the Main Line of Resistance to complete the infantry part of the diversion. Avoiding the low ground that the tanks had used, the platoon moved over Hill 56A at 10:55 PM and immediately headed toward the next objective, Hill 58A. Gun tanks fired their 90s at the Chinese OPLR on Hill 110 and at Siberia, lighting up the target area with their fighting lights, the shutters of which the tankers opened and closed during each five-second interval that the light was on.

Less than an hour after crossing JAMESTOWN, the platoon from Captain George W. Campbell’s Company D reported the capture of Siberia. The enemy quickly made his presence felt at the objective; a half hour before midnight, he assaulted the hill in reinforced platoon strength. Ten minutes later the Chinese withdrew and the Company D Marines, in accordance with their battle plan, did likewise. At about the same time the 5th Marines, having completed its part in the diversion, also secured from the operation.

Less than an hour after crossing JAMestown, the platoon from Captain George W. Campbell’s Company D reported that they had captured Siberia. The enemy quickly established their presence at the target; a half hour before midnight, they attacked the hill with reinforced platoon strength. Ten minutes later, the Chinese pulled back, and the Company D Marines, following their battle plan, did the same. Around the same time, the 5th Marines, having finished their part in the diversion, also withdrew from the operation.

Ten minutes after the diversionary infantry had cleared Samoa while enroute to Siberia, the main attack force, Company B, which117 had come under operational control of 2/1 at 1800, crossed the MLR, the line of departure. Moving at a fast pace to preserve the element of anticipated surprise, the attack force, commanded by Captain Sereno S. Scranton, Jr., soon deployed two squads of the lead platoon against the near side of the hill. By 2318 on 11 August the squads were moving up Bunker Hill and, 10 minutes later, one platoon had gained the top of the objective and one was at the base of the hill, both moving northward along the forward slope. As the advancing units neared the end of their sweep forward, they began to come under small amounts of rifle fire from the front and left flank of the position.179 The Company B platoons continued to advance, returning well-placed small arms fire.

Ten minutes after the diversionary infantry had cleared Samoa while heading to Siberia, the main attack force, Company B, which117 came under operational control of 2/1 at 1800, crossed the MLR, the line of departure. Moving quickly to maintain the element of surprise, the attack force, led by Captain Sereno S. Scranton, Jr., soon deployed two squads from the lead platoon against the near side of the hill. By 2318 on 11 August, the squads were advancing up Bunker Hill, and 10 minutes later, one platoon reached the top of the objective and another was at the base of the hill, both moving northward along the forward slope. As the advancing units neared the end of their forward sweep, they started to take small amounts of rifle fire from the front and left flank of the position.179 The Company B platoons continued to push forward, returning well-aimed small arms fire.

179 Recalling the Marine seizure of Bunker, the G-3, 1stMarDiv at that time expressed the view that “taking these places was easy but holding them under heavy Chinese artillery and mortar fire was extremely costly. Our counterbattery fire was ineffective because we were limited to from one to eight rounds per tube per day, depending on the weapon, by Army order, because of an ammunition shortage.” Col Russell E. Honsowetz MS comments, dtd 15 Jun 67, hereafter Honsowetz ltr II.

179 Recalling the Marine seizure of Bunker, the G-3 of the 1st Marine Division at that time stated that “taking these locations was easy, but holding them under intense Chinese artillery and mortar fire was very costly. Our counterbattery fire wasn’t effective because we were restricted to firing from one to eight rounds per tube per day, depending on the weapon, due to an Army order related to an ammunition shortage.” Col Russell E. Honsowetz MS comments, dtd 15 Jun 67, hereafter Honsowetz ltr II.

Soon the intensity of Chinese small arms fire increased; at the same time enemy mortars and artillery opened up on the company. Marines attempting to assault the top of Hill 122 also came under a hail of hand grenades hurled by the staunch Chinese defenders. After a brief but vicious fight at point-blank range, the Chinese gave ground on the eastern side, heading uphill. Several Marines pursued the fleeing enemy to the summit, then joined the rest of the assault units of Company B in organizing a defense. By 0300, 12 August the battle had quieted down and for a short while all firing ceased. Then, as the Marines began to dig in, a bypassed pocket of enemy resistance came to life. Two fire teams in the 1st Platoon took these Chinese Communists under fire.

Soon, the intensity of Chinese small arms fire increased; at the same time, enemy mortars and artillery targeted the company. Marines trying to storm the top of Hill 122 were also met with a barrage of hand grenades thrown by the determined Chinese defenders. After a brief but brutal fight at close range, the Chinese fell back on the eastern side, moving uphill. Several Marines chased the retreating enemy to the summit and then joined the other assault units of Company B to set up a defense. By 0300 on August 12, the battle had settled down, and for a short while, all firing stopped. Then, as the Marines started to dig in, a bypassed pocket of enemy resistance sprang to life. Two fire teams in the 1st Platoon opened fire on these Chinese Communists.

Even as the fighting continued, Marines and KSC personnel were hauling fortification materials towards Bunker to consolidate the precarious foothold. For a while, enemy mortars unleashed a heavy fire against the newly won position, but by 0230 Company B was able to report that enemy shelling had stopped and that the objective was in friendly hands. A new fire fight broke out at 0345 between a small force of enemy soldiers occupying a draw forward of Bunker Hill and Marines nearby. The exchange of fire continued for nearly two hours, but short of harassing the Marines on Bunker Hill the enemy did not launch a counterattack. Dawn on 12 August118 revealed that thus far in the Bunker Hill fighting 1 Marine of Company B had been killed and 22 were wounded. The earlier diversionary attack on Siberia had resulted in only one Marine casualty, the wounding of the platoon commander, Second Lieutenant James W. Dion.

Even as the fighting raged on, Marines and KSC personnel were transporting fortification materials to Bunker to strengthen their unstable position. For a while, enemy mortars fired heavily on the newly secured area, but by 0230, Company B reported that the shelling had ceased and the objective was in friendly hands. A new firefight erupted at 0345 between a small group of enemy soldiers in a draw ahead of Bunker Hill and nearby Marines. The exchange of gunfire lasted for nearly two hours, but other than harassing the Marines on Bunker Hill, the enemy did not initiate a counterattack. Dawn on 12 August118 showed that so far in the Bunker Hill fighting, 1 Marine from Company B had been killed and 22 were injured. The earlier diversionary attack on Siberia had resulted in just one Marine casualty, the wounding of the platoon commander, Second Lieutenant James W. Dion.

Personnel losses were kept to a minimum by the well-organized medical support and the efficient service of medical and evacuation personnel. A forward aid station was established in the vicinity of the Company E CP. Casualties that were not ambulatory arrived at this two-bunker installation usually by hand litter, other wounded men were transported in armored personnel carriers, U.S. Army tracked vehicles similar in appearance to the Marine LVT, that had accompanied the diversionary unit and were part of the Panmunjom rescue force stationed in the area of COP 2 on the 3/1 left flank. Wounded Marines were examined immediately. Minor injury cases were treated and discharged; more seriously injured personnel were given emergency treatment and evacuated. Movement to the rear was accomplished by ambulance jeeps. Helicopters, landing only 30 yards from the station, flew out the critically wounded. A sandbag-protected squad tent was used to house casualties waiting to be examined. This emergency aid station closed down on 13 August, when action in the right battalion sector diminished.

Personnel losses were kept to a minimum thanks to the well-organized medical support and the efficient efforts of medical and evacuation personnel. A forward aid station was set up near the Company E command post. Casualties who couldn’t walk typically arrived at this two-bunker installation by hand litter, while other wounded individuals were transported in armored personnel carriers, which are U.S. Army tracked vehicles similar to the Marine LVT. These vehicles accompanied the diversionary unit and were part of the Panmunjom rescue force stationed in the area of COP 2 on the 3/1 left flank. Injured Marines were examined right away. Minor injuries were treated and the personnel were discharged; those with more serious injuries received emergency treatment and were evacuated. Movement to the rear was done using ambulance jeeps. Helicopters, which landed only 30 yards from the station, transported the critically wounded. A sandbag-protected squad tent was used to keep casualties waiting for examination. This emergency aid station shut down on August 13, when action in the right battalion sector decreased.

Even though the remainder of the morning of 12 August was practically free of any retaliatory attempts by the Chinese against Bunker Hill, the Marines occupying the new position were not idle, for they anticipated an immediate and severe reaction for capturing the hill. Quickly, but methodically, the company dug in. At noon, regiment passed to 3/1180 the responsibility for Bunker Hill and operational control of Company B. Consolidation of Hill 122 continued until about 1500, when the Marines were forced to put down their entrenching tools and grab their rifles instead. The Chinese had suddenly launched an intense mortar and artillery attack against the hill. Defending Marines expected to see enemy soldiers start up the western slopes at any minute.

Even though the morning of August 12 was mostly free of any counterattacks by the Chinese against Bunker Hill, the Marines stationed at their new position weren’t just sitting around. They expected an immediate and strong response for taking the hill. Quickly but carefully, the company set up defensive positions. By noon, responsibility for Bunker Hill and operational control of Company B was handed over to 3/1180. The consolidation of Hill 122 continued until around 3 PM, when the Marines had to put down their digging tools and pick up their rifles instead. The Chinese suddenly launched a heavy mortar and artillery attack on the hill. The defending Marines were expecting to see enemy soldiers charging up the western slopes at any moment.

180 Initially the diversionary attack against Siberia and subsequent assault against Bunker had been made by Marines of 2/1 since Siberia was in the 2/1 sector. On 12 August operational control was transferred to 3/1 as the fighting continued at Bunker, in the area of responsibility of the left battalion sector.

180 Initially, the diversionary attack on Siberia and the following assault on Bunker were carried out by the Marines of 2/1 since Siberia was in their area. On August 12, operational control was handed over to 3/1 as the fighting at Bunker continued in the left battalion sector's area of responsibility.

Actually, more than an hour elapsed before the Communists initiated their first main ground attack to regain Bunker. By that119 time, heavy casualties from the continued shelling had forced Company B to pull back from the ridge and take up positions on the reverse (eastern) slope of Bunker Hill. At this point, with reduced Company B forces and with no radio communication between Captain Scranton’s unit and 3/1, Lieutenant Colonel Armitage sent I/3/1,181 under Captain Howard J. Connolly, forward from the MLR. Shortly before 1600, a force of more than 350 Chinese lunged out of the low ground of Hill 123, west of Bunker, to attack defensive positions along the ridge between Hills 124–122. Striking in rapid succession first the west side and then the northern end of the Company B position to find a weak spot in the defense, the enemy counterattack finally concentrated on the southwestern part of the hill.

Actually, over an hour passed before the Communists launched their first major ground attack to retake Bunker. By that119 point, heavy losses from the ongoing shelling had forced Company B to retreat from the ridge and take positions on the reverse (eastern) slope of Bunker Hill. At this moment, with reduced forces in Company B and no radio communication between Captain Scranton’s unit and 3/1, Lieutenant Colonel Armitage sent I/3/1,181 under Captain Howard J. Connolly, forward from the MLR. Shortly before 1600, a force of over 350 Chinese surged out of the low ground of Hill 123, west of Bunker, to attack defensive positions along the ridge between Hills 124–122. They struck rapidly, first on the west side and then the northern end of the Company B position, searching for a weak spot in the defense, with the enemy counterattack ultimately concentrating on the southwestern part of the hill.

181 From the division reserve, Captain Anthony J. Skotnicki’s company, I/3/7, was en route to take over the I/3/1 sector. As an interim measure, Captain Byron J. Melancon’s Company H extended its MLR positions to the right to cover the Company I area.

181 From the division reserve, Captain Anthony J. Skotnicki’s company, I/3/7, was on its way to take over the I/3/1 sector. As a temporary solution, Captain Byron J. Melancon’s Company H expanded its Main Line of Resistance (MLR) positions to the right to cover the Company I area.

An intense exchange of fire raged here until 1715, when the defending fire of Company B plus the added weight of the Company I reinforcements combined to stall the enemy advance. Having failed to gain their objective, the Communists abruptly broke off their artillery and mortar fire and ordered their infantry to withdraw. They pulled back only to the far side of the hill, however. By 1740 the enemy was occupying his new post on the northern slope, while the Marines continued to hold their positions on the reverse slope of Bunker Ridge. Enemy supporting fires had lifted and a lull ensued in the fighting.

An intense exchange of gunfire went on here until 5:15 PM, when the defensive fire from Company B, along with the added strength of the Company I reinforcements, combined to halt the enemy's advance. After failing to achieve their objective, the Communists suddenly stopped their artillery and mortar fire and ordered their infantry to pull back. They only retreated to the far side of the hill, though. By 5:40 PM, the enemy was taking over their new position on the northern slope, while the Marines kept holding their ground on the reverse slope of Bunker Ridge. The enemy's supporting fire had eased up, and a lull settled over the fighting.

Consolidating the Defense of Bunker Hill182

182 Unless otherwise noted, the material for this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 12–13 Aug 52; 1stMar, 1/1, 3/1 ComdDs, Aug 52.

182 Unless specified otherwise, the content for this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Journal, Aug 12–13, 1952; 1stMar, 1/1, 3/1 ComdDs, Aug 52.

Even before the Chinese had made their coordinated attack against Hill 122 in the midafternoon of the 12th, the 1st Marines had implemented a plan of action to assure that the critical position would remain in Marine hands. In addition to the movement of Company I/3/1 to reinforce Bunker Hill and of Company I/3/7 as its relief on the MLR, a precautionary displacement was also made of the 3/1 reconnaissance platoon to Hill 124 to tie in that terrain121 feature with both Bunker and JAMESTOWN and thus consolidate the defense north of the MLR and west of Bunker. (See Map 11.)

Even before the Chinese launched their coordinated attack on Hill 122 in the afternoon of the 12th, the 1st Marines had put a plan into action to ensure that the critical position would stay in Marine control. In addition to moving Company I/3/1 to strengthen Bunker Hill and deploying Company I/3/7 to relieve it on the MLR, a precautionary shift was also made of the 3/1 reconnaissance platoon to Hill 124 to connect that terrain feature with both Bunker and JAMestown, thereby consolidating the defense north of the MLR and west of Bunker. (See Map 11.)

MAP 11 K. WHITE

MAP 11 K. WHITE

BUNKER HILL AREA

Bunker Hill Area

2300, 12 AUGUST 1952

2300, August 12, 1952

Other activities behind the line aimed at making the Marine position on the newly seized hill more tenable. As one step in this direction, General Selden shifted most of his reserve into the zone of action. Before the end of the day remaining units of 3/7 were placed under operational control of 3/1, and 2/7 was attached to Colonel Layer’s reserve. The 7th Marines was directed to place its 4.2-inch mortars on call to the 1st Marines. Priority of artillery support went to the Bunker Hill regiment. Within the 1st Marines, the regimental commander moved two provisional platoons (118 Marines) of the reserve 1st Battalion to the 3d Battalion sector. All 81mm mortars in 1/1 were sent to the left battalion. The fire plan also called for employment of all the 60mm mortars that could bear on the crest of 124–122, with 81mm and artillery box-me-in barrage fires on the ridge and flanks.

Other activities behind the lines aimed at making the Marine position on the newly taken hill more stable. As part of this effort, General Selden moved most of his reserves into the action zone. By the end of the day, the remaining units of 3/7 were placed under the operational control of 3/1, and 2/7 was attached to Colonel Layer’s reserve. The 7th Marines were directed to have their 4.2-inch mortars ready for the 1st Marines. Artillery support was prioritized for the Bunker Hill regiment. Within the 1st Marines, the regimental commander shifted two provisional platoons (118 Marines) from the reserve 1st Battalion to the 3rd Battalion sector. All 81mm mortars in 1/1 were sent to the left battalion. The fire plan also included the use of all available 60mm mortars targeting the crest of 124–122, with 81mm and artillery box-me-in barrage fire aimed at the ridge and flanks.

Machine guns from the MLR were assigned missions on the crest of Bunker Ridge and 4.5-inch ripples were planned on the deep enemy approaches. Gun and flame tanks were to protect the right flank of Hill 122 where the steep draw between Bunker and the MLR offered the most dangerous approach into Bunker Hill. Supplies and fortification materials, meanwhile, were being carried forward and casualties taken to the rear by the relief party. Although 3/1 initially reported that the Bunker Hill fighting had resulted in 58 killed or wounded Marines, a later battalion count showed this number to be 34—5 killed and 29 wounded.

Machine guns from the MLR were assigned tasks on the top of Bunker Ridge, and 4.5-inch barrages were planned for the enemy's deep approaches. Gun and flame tanks were set to cover the right flank of Hill 122, where the steep draw between Bunker and the MLR presented the most dangerous route into Bunker Hill. At the same time, supplies and fortification materials were being moved forward, and the relief party was taking casualties to the rear. Although 3/1 initially reported that the fighting at Bunker Hill had resulted in 58 Marines killed or wounded, a later battalion count revised this number to 34—5 killed and 29 wounded.

Most of the casualties had been caused by hostile shelling. Although the Hill 122 reverse slope afforded some cover from the Chinese artillery and mortars, the positions on the crest did not offer any protection, so Marines continued their trenchworks and other defensive preparations at a rapid pace and supporting fires were registered by 1900. The approach of night was certain to bring renewed Communist attempts to capture Bunker Hill.

Most of the casualties were due to enemy shelling. While the reverse slope of Hill 122 provided some shelter from the Chinese artillery and mortars, the positions on the top offered no protection. So, Marines kept working on their trench systems and other defensive setups quickly, and support fire was scheduled by 1900. The onset of night was sure to lead to renewed Communist efforts to take Bunker Hill.

At 2000, Lieutenant Colonel Armitage reported to division that his force on Hill 122 occupied the entire reverse slope and that the Marine of I/3/1 and B/1/1 were digging in and consolidating their scant defenses. Enemy shells were still falling on both Bunker and Hill 124. Company commanders forward of the MLR estimated that as many as 400 Chinese occupied the ridge on the other side122 of the slope from the Marines. Since the crest of the long Hill 124–122 ridgeline was fairly level, the gentle incline of the Bunker rear slope permitted defending Marine units excellent fields of fire to the ridge crest, a major consideration in the 3/1 battalion commander’s decision to adopt a rear slope defense. Moreover, the top of the ridge could be swept with direct fire from the MLR as well as supporting weapons from the two nearest companies on JAMESTOWN. Opposing Marine and Chinese forces were thus lined up for a continuation of the battle for Bunker Hill.

At 2000, Lieutenant Colonel Armitage informed the division that his troops on Hill 122 were holding the entire reverse slope and that the Marines from I/3/1 and B/1/1 were digging in and strengthening their limited defenses. Enemy shells were still landing on both Bunker and Hill 124. Company commanders ahead of the MLR estimated that up to 400 Chinese troops occupied the ridge on the opposite side122 of the slope from the Marines. Since the top of the long Hill 124–122 ridgeline was relatively flat, the gentle slope of the Bunker rear allowed defending Marine units to have excellent fields of fire toward the ridge crest, which was a key factor in the 3/1 battalion commander’s choice to implement a rear slope defense. Additionally, the top of the ridge could be targeted with direct fire from the MLR as well as supporting fire from the two closest companies on JAMESTOWN. As a result, both Marine and Chinese forces were prepared for the ongoing battle for Bunker Hill.

It appeared that the Chinese wished to attempt a diversionary tactic of their own. To draw attention away from Hill 122 they engaged a Marine outpost east of Bunker and a KMC ambush far to the left before attacking Bunker again. In the KMC sector, shortly after 2300, an enemy infantry platoon walked into a trap near the eastern edge of the Sachon and 500 yards south of the Munsan-ni-Kaesong rail line. The brief fire fight lasted only 10 minutes before the Chinese broke contact.

It seemed that the Chinese wanted to try their own diversion tactic. To shift focus away from Hill 122, they attacked a Marine outpost east of Bunker and set up a KMC ambush far to the left before launching another attack on Bunker. In the KMC area, shortly after 11 PM, an enemy infantry platoon walked into a trap near the eastern edge of the Sachon, about 500 yards south of the Munsan-ni-Kaesong rail line. The brief firefight lasted just 10 minutes before the Chinese withdrew.

Perhaps the ambush was incidental to the forthcoming attack against the Bunker complex, but this same reasoning cannot be applied to the Communist-inspired action which broke out shortly at Hill 48A, Stromboli, another friendly outpost far to the east of Hill 122. Near the right limiting point of Colonel Layer’s 1st Marines and the 5th Marines boundary, Stromboli was another Marine fire-team-by-day, squad-by-night position. It occupied a small rise 250 yards forward of the MLR and commanded the immediate sector in all directions. The entire MLR in the regimental right was dominated by the enemy-held Hill 104, a half-mile north of 48A.

Perhaps the ambush was just a coincidence related to the upcoming attack on the Bunker complex, but that same logic can't be applied to the Communist-inspired action that started shortly afterward at Hill 48A, Stromboli, another friendly outpost far to the east of Hill 122. Located near the right boundary of Colonel Layer’s 1st Marines and the 5th Marines, Stromboli was another position held by Marines, serving as a fire team during the day and a squad at night. It sat on a small rise 250 yards in front of the Main Line of Resistance (MLR) and provided a commanding view of the surrounding area in all directions. The entire MLR on the regimental right was overshadowed by the enemy-held Hill 104, which was half a mile north of 48A.

Communist infantry opened the attack without benefit of any supporting arms preparation and rushed to seize Hill 48A early on the morning of 13 August, a few minutes after midnight. Defending Marines immediately responded with small arms and automatic weapons fire. By the time the outpost commander had informed battalion of the attack by radio, the far right sector of the 1st Marines line, held by Captain Clarence G. Moody, Jr.’s Company F, had also come under attack. Firing rifles and submachine guns and hurling hand grenades as they assaulted the main position, the Chinese attempted to penetrate the JAMESTOWN defenses. In spite of the enemy’s concerted efforts, the Marine line remained staunch.

Communist infantry launched their attack without any supporting artillery preparation and rushed to take Hill 48A early on the morning of August 13, just a few minutes after midnight. The defending Marines quickly responded with small arms and automatic weapon fire. By the time the outpost commander radioed the battalion about the attack, the far right sector of the 1st Marines line, held by Captain Clarence G. Moody, Jr.’s Company F, was also under attack. As they assaulted the main position, the Chinese fired rifles and submachine guns and threw hand grenades in an attempt to breach the JAMESTOWN defenses. Despite the enemy's determined efforts, the Marine line held strong.

At Stromboli, the Communists met with no greater success,123 although they did cause enough casualties to warrant the dispatch of a Company F reinforcing squad. When this unit left the MLR, at 0106 on 13 August, the Marine line was still under a heavy attack not only from Chinese infantry but from hostile artillery and mortars as well. Out at Hill 48A the outpost remained in comparative quiet until the approach of the reinforcing party. As the Company F squad neared the base of the hill, Chinese infantry that earlier had been assaulting the Marine MLR turned their rifle and machine gun fire from positions on the JAMESTOWN side of the outpost. A heavy rain of devastating mortar fire engulfed the reinforcing Marines. On order, they broke off the approach march and returned to the company rear area.

At Stromboli, the Communists didn't achieve much success, 123 although they did inflict enough casualties to justify sending a reinforcing squad from Company F. When this unit left the MLR at 1:06 AM on August 13, the Marine line was still facing heavy attacks not only from Chinese infantry but also from enemy artillery and mortars. Out at Hill 48A, the outpost remained relatively quiet until the arrival of the reinforcing party. As the Company F squad got closer to the base of the hill, Chinese infantry that had previously been attacking the Marine MLR shifted their rifle and machine gun fire from positions on the JAMESTOWN side of the outpost. A heavy barrage of destructive mortar fire struck the reinforcing Marines. Following orders, they halted their approach and returned to the company rear area.

On the main line, meanwhile, Company F positions were still being bombarded by Chinese artillery and assaulted by their infantry. Casualties along the entire line forced Lieutenant Colonel Batterton to order his 1st Provisional Platoon, Headquarters and Service Company, 2/1, to the Company F command post. After the clutch unit departed the battalion area, at 0210, and approached Captain Moody’s CP, enemy fires immediately intensified. A violent fight erupted to the left of the Company F sector, but the Marines there held. The Chinese then tried to punch holes in other parts of the company line, moving eastward along JAMESTOWN. Each failure to breach the line seemed to signal a decrease in the intensity of Chinese shelling.

On the main line, Company F was still under heavy fire from Chinese artillery and being attacked by their infantry. The casualties across the entire line forced Lieutenant Colonel Batterton to send his 1st Provisional Platoon, Headquarters and Service Company, 2/1, to the Company F command post. After the unit left the battalion area at 0210 and moved towards Captain Moody’s CP, enemy fire intensified immediately. A fierce fight broke out to the left of the Company F sector, but the Marines there held their ground. The Chinese then attempted to break through in other parts of the company line, advancing east along JAMestown. Each time they failed to penetrate the line, the intensity of the Chinese shelling appeared to decrease.

This easing of Communist pressure against the main line enabled the Company F commander to put into operation a new attempt at the reinforcement and rescue of Stromboli. After the initial enemy assault in the early hours of 13 August had ended in failure, the Chinese made repeated attempts to capture the outpost. At one time it appeared that a company of Chinese had overrun the hill. Later, however, the Stromboli stronghold radioed that the enemy force, subsequently identified as only a platoon, had encircled the Marine position. To relieve enemy pressure at Hill 48A, Captain Moody employed a rifle platoon which set out for the outpost at 0325.

This reduction of Communist pressure on the main front allowed the Company F commander to initiate a new effort to reinforce and rescue Stromboli. After the enemy's first attack in the early hours of August 13 failed, the Chinese made several attempts to take the outpost. At one point, it seemed like a Chinese company had taken over the hill. Later, however, the Stromboli stronghold communicated that the enemy force, which was later identified as only a platoon, had surrounded the Marine position. To ease the enemy's pressure at Hill 48A, Captain Moody sent out a rifle platoon to the outpost at 0325.

Simultaneously, as if their intelligence had advance knowledge of the 1st Marines recovery plan, the Chinese stepped up the tempo of their attack at Stromboli. A fresh assault by the enemy was stymied by Marine superiority in hand-to-hand combat. Thereafter, close-in124 defensive fires continued to ring the outpost and to discourage future assaults. The approach of the second Marine rescue party eliminated much of the pressure that Communist foot soldiers had maintained around the hill position. After a 90-minute exchange of fire with the enemy, the friendly platoon penetrated the encirclement and rushed to the besieged outpost at the hill crest. At this point the Chinese disengaged and withdrew towards the north.

At the same time, as if they somehow knew about the 1st Marines' recovery plan, the Chinese intensified their attacks at Stromboli. A new enemy assault was blocked by the Marines' hand-to-hand combat skills. After that, close-in124 defensive fire continued to surround the outpost and deter any future attacks. The arrival of the second Marine rescue team relieved much of the pressure that the Communist soldiers had been putting on the hill position. After a 90-minute gunfight with the enemy, the friendly platoon broke through the encirclement and rushed to the besieged outpost at the hilltop. At this point, the Chinese pulled back and retreated to the north.

After their diversion against Stromboli had approached the proportions of a full-scale attack, with the enemy having reinforced from platoon to company size, the Chinese then initiated their main thrust, an attempt to retake Bunker. Captain Connolly (I/3/1) had reported that shortly before 0100 Communist mortar fire had begun falling on his positions on the southern slope of Bunker Hill. Simultaneously, Chinese artillery stepped up the rate of its barrage fires as did the assaulting close-in enemy infantry. Captain Connolly then requested the 11th Marines to place box-me-in fires around the Marine company positions on Hill 122. Artillery furnished these defensive fires almost immediately.

After their diversion against Stromboli escalated to a full-scale attack, with the enemy reinforcing from platoon to company size, the Chinese launched their main offensive, aiming to retake Bunker. Captain Connolly (I/3/1) reported that shortly before 1:00 AM, Communist mortar fire began hitting his positions on the southern slope of Bunker Hill. At the same time, Chinese artillery increased its barrage, as did the advancing enemy infantry. Captain Connolly then requested the 11th Marines to create box-me-in fires around the Marine company positions on Hill 122. Artillery provided these defensive fires almost immediately.

Shortly after 0130, the Marines in the center and right of the I/3/1 position observed a large number of Chinese, deployed into a skirmish line, headed directly for their part of the hill. The attack was accompanied by intense machine gun and rifle fire. It was countered by an equally heavy reply from Marines on Bunker. For nearly four hours the battle raged at Hill 122. Unsuccessful enemy frontal assaults were followed by attempts to dislodge the defenders from the rear. In their continuing thrust against the hill, the Chinese were repulsed by Marine coordinated support fires—tank, rocket, artillery, and mortar.

Shortly after 1:30 AM, the Marines in the center and right of the I/3/1 position saw a large group of Chinese troops forming a skirmish line heading straight for their section of the hill. The attack was met with intense machine gun and rifle fire. In response, the Marines on Bunker delivered an equally heavy counterattack. For nearly four hours, the battle raged on at Hill 122. Unsuccessful frontal assaults from the enemy were followed by attempts to push back the defenders from behind. As the Chinese continued their assault on the hill, they were repelled by the Marines’ coordinated support fire—tanks, rockets, artillery, and mortars.

By firing on known or suspected assembly areas and Chinese infantry units advancing up the draws towards Hill 122, these Marine supporting weapons helped to preserve the status quo at Bunker. Repeated box-me-ins were also fired by the 11th Marines during the early-morning Communist attacks on 13 August. Exploding friendly mortar shells increased the effectiveness of the hill defense; nine rocket ripples183 fired by the artillery regiment further supported Marines at the critical terrain position. Tanks unleashed125 their deadly fire on nearby enemy outposts to neutralize them; their 90mm guns, aided by the battlefield illumination from tank fighting lights, helped eliminate Chinese foot soldiers attempting to envelop Marine positions on Bunker.

By targeting known or suspected assembly areas and Chinese infantry units moving up the draws towards Hill 122, these Marine supporting weapons played a crucial role in maintaining the status quo at Bunker. The 11th Marines also fired repeated box-me-ins during the early-morning Communist assaults on August 13. The explosion of friendly mortar shells enhanced the effectiveness of the hill defense; nine rocket ripples183 launched by the artillery regiment further backed the Marines at this critical position. Tanks unleashed their deadly fire on nearby enemy outposts to neutralize them; their 90mm guns, supported by battlefield illumination from tank fighting lights, helped take out Chinese foot soldiers trying to surround Marine positions at Bunker.

183 A characteristic of 4.5-inch rocket launcher is the discharge of 24 rounds in quick succession, called a ripple. A battery of six launchers can fire 144 rounds on target in less than a minute.

183 A feature of the 4.5-inch rocket launcher is that it can release 24 rounds rapidly in a pattern known as a ripple. A battery of six launchers can hit a target with 144 rounds in under a minute.

It was in this direction that an enemy force, estimated at reinforced battalion strength, headed during the early morning fighting on Hill 122. At 0330, the struggle for possession of the height had reached the climax. For an hour the issue remained in doubt. Then, as the Chinese small arms fire decreased, the tempo of the enemy’s artillery shelling increased. This, the division correctly deduced, announced the beginning of a temporary Communist withdrawal from Bunker Hill.

It was in this direction that an enemy force, estimated to be the strength of a reinforced battalion, moved during the early morning fighting on Hill 122. At 3:30 AM, the battle for control of the height had reached its peak. For an hour, the outcome was uncertain. Then, as the Chinese small arms fire lessened, the intensity of the enemy’s artillery shelling ramped up. The division accurately concluded that this indicated a temporary Communist withdrawal from Bunker Hill.

Although the immediate danger of the enemy onslaught had ended for the time being, Marines to the rear of the JAMESTOWN Line stepped up their defensive preparations. Division, regimental, and battalion operational plans were put into effect to prevent a Chinese victory. The seriousness of the situation on the 1st Marines right flank at Stromboli early on 13 August had resulted in the movement of one company of 5th Marines into blocking positions behind the MLR near the left regimental boundary. To the south of Bunker Hill, relief and replacement units from the division reserve, ordered into action late the previous day, maneuvered into position to strengthen the regimental front. One of these relief units, G/3/7, under command of Captain William M. Vanzuyen, had just deployed from its assembly area to pass through the ranks of an MLR company and take over the Bunker Hill positions. The Marines’ situation on Hill 122 had deteriorated so rapidly, however, that the 3/1 commander rushed two reinforced squads forward from I/3/7, the nearest MLR unit.

Although the immediate threat of the enemy attack had passed for now, the Marines behind the JAMESTOWN Line increased their defensive efforts. Plans at the division, regimental, and battalion levels were activated to prevent a Chinese victory. The critical situation on the right flank of the 1st Marines at Stromboli early on August 13 prompted the movement of one company from the 5th Marines into blocking positions behind the MLR near the left regimental boundary. To the south of Bunker Hill, relief and replacement units from the division reserve, ordered into action late the day before, moved into position to reinforce the regimental front. One of these relief units, G/3/7, commanded by Captain William M. Vanzuyen, had just deployed from its assembly area to pass through the ranks of an MLR company and take over the Bunker Hill positions. However, the Marines’ situation on Hill 122 had deteriorated so quickly that the commander of 3/1 rushed two reinforced squads forward from I/3/7, the closest MLR unit.

The Company G reinforcement unit jumped off from JAMESTOWN and arrived at Bunker shortly after sunup, where it reinforced Captain Connolly’s positions during the height of the battle for possession of Hill 122. Not long after, the Chinese initiated their withdrawal under cover of increased artillery and mortar barrages. As they left, the Communists policed the battlefield in their typically thorough manner. A Marine platoon that swept the northern slope of Bunker failed to find any enemy bodies in this area so recently abandoned by the Chinese, but did take under fire and kill seven enemy that had remained on Hill 122.

The Company G reinforcement unit jumped off from JAMESTOWN and arrived at Bunker shortly after sunrise, where it bolstered Captain Connolly’s positions during the peak of the battle for control of Hill 122. Soon after, the Chinese began their withdrawal while increasing artillery and mortar fire for cover. As they left, the Communists searched the battlefield in their usual thorough way. A Marine platoon that swept the northern slope of Bunker couldn’t find any enemy bodies in this area just abandoned by the Chinese, but they did engage and kill seven enemies who remained on Hill 122.

126

126

Before I/3/1 had sent one of its platoons to reconnoiter the far side of Bunker Hill, Lieutenant Colonel Armitage ordered H/3/7, under Captain John G. Demas, forward to relieve friendly forces at the contested height. The exchange of units was completed before noon of the 13th. By late afternoon, except for Company H, all 2d and 3d Battalions, 7th Marines units that had moved up to reinforce the 1st Marines were on their way back to the regimental reserve area. At this time the 1st Marines CO, Colonel Layer, reported to General Selden that the Bunker Hill action during 12–13 August had resulted in 24 Marines killed and 214 wounded. On the right, in the 2d Battalion sector, an additional 40 Marines were listed as casualties, including 7 killed in the Stromboli defense. Chinese known dead numbered 210, plus an estimated 470 killed and 625 wounded.184 Artillery and aerial observers reported that between 1500 on the 12th and 0600 the following morning an estimated 5,000 to 10,000 rounds of enemy fire had fallen on 1st Marines positions, the “heaviest incoming fires received by the Division since coming into the present sector.”185

Before I/3/1 had sent one of its platoons to scout the far side of Bunker Hill, Lieutenant Colonel Armitage ordered H/3/7, led by Captain John G. Demas, to move forward and take over from friendly forces at the contested position. The unit change was completed before noon on the 13th. By late afternoon, all units from the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 7th Marines that had moved up to support the 1st Marines, except for Company H, were on their way back to the regimental reserve area. At this time, the CO of the 1st Marines, Colonel Layer, informed General Selden that the Bunker Hill action from August 12-13 had resulted in 24 Marines killed and 214 wounded. On the right, in the 2nd Battalion area, an additional 40 Marines were reported as casualties, including 7 killed during the Stromboli defense. The known dead among the Chinese was 210, with an estimated 470 killed and 625 wounded. 184 Artillery and aerial observers reported that between 1500 on the 12th and 0600 the following morning, an estimated 5,000 to 10,000 rounds of enemy fire had landed on the 1st Marines positions, marking the “heaviest incoming fire received by the Division since entering the current sector.” 185

184 1stMarDiv PIR 658, dtd 14 Aug 52.

184 1stMarDiv PIR 658, dated 14 Aug 52.

185 Selden, Div Staff Rpt, p. 19.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Selden, Div Staff Report, p. 19.

The number of casualties from the Bunker Hill action was to increase further that same day with a renewed attack on the outpost. Before the Chinese again engaged Hill 122, however, they made a diversionary attack on the western flank at the extreme left of the 3/1 sector. At dusk on 13 August, the enemy shelled the Company G Marines at COP 2, the critical height overlooking the Panmunjom peace corridor. The shelling caused several casualties and lasted 90 minutes. Towards the end, Communist infantrymen moved forward and fired on the outpost. At about the same time, Company H personnel emplaced on the MLR to the rear of COP 2 began to receive artillery rounds in preassault proportions.

The number of casualties from the Bunker Hill battle continued to rise that same day with a renewed attack on the outpost. Before the Chinese engaged Hill 122 again, they launched a diversionary attack on the western flank at the far left of the 3/1 sector. At dusk on August 13, the enemy shelled the Company G Marines at COP 2, the key height overlooking the Panmunjom peace corridor. The shelling, which lasted for 90 minutes, caused several casualties. Towards the end, Communist infantrymen advanced and fired on the outpost. Meanwhile, personnel from Company H positioned on the MLR behind COP 2 began receiving artillery rounds in quantities typical of a preassault.

A ground attack in this western end of the 3/1 sector did not materialize, however. Instead, the Chinese resumed their attack on Bunker Hill. Since their temporary withdrawal early on the 13th, the CCF had repeatedly sent mortar and artillery barrages against the bastion to harass its new occupants. On occasion these well-aimed mortar rounds found their mark. Mortars interdicting a trail used for resupply of the Hill 122 defenders did inflict some casualties127 on two groups rushing emergency supplies forward from the MLR.

A ground attack in the western part of the 3/1 sector didn’t happen, though. Instead, the Chinese started their assault on Bunker Hill again. Since their temporary withdrawal early on the 13th, the CCF had been launching mortar and artillery attacks against the stronghold to annoy its new occupants. Occasionally, these accurately fired mortar rounds hit their targets. Mortars targeting a supply trail for the Hill 122 defenders caused some casualties127 among two groups hurrying to bring emergency supplies from the MLR.

At 2100, while continuing his shelling of the left end of the 3/1 sector, the enemy lifted his preparation on Hill 122 to permit a CCF reinforced company to make a new assault there on the Marine defenders. Captain Demas called for box-me-ins to seal off his positions and illumination shells to help locate the enemy force. Utilizing the draw to the east of Hill 58A, the Chinese proceeded west to Bunker where they pitted one platoon against the center of the Company H, 3/7 line and another against the right flank. Defensive fires momentarily held off the intruders, although some were able to break through to the Marines’ fighting positions.

At 2100, while continuing to shell the left side of the 3/1 sector, the enemy stopped their preparation on Hill 122 to let a reinforced CCF company launch a new attack on the Marine defenders. Captain Demas requested box-me-ins to secure his positions and illumination shells to help spot the enemy force. Taking advantage of the draw east of Hill 58A, the Chinese moved west to Bunker, where they sent one platoon against the center of Company H, 3/7's line and another against the right flank. Defensive fire temporarily held off the attackers, although some managed to break through to the Marines’ fighting positions.

Those enemy troops who penetrated the Marine defenses were quickly eliminated by grenades and small arms fire. Unable to weaken the Marine defenses any further and by now sustaining sizable casualties from unrelenting Marine artillery and mortar concentrations, the Communists withdrew at 2215. Marine defenders estimated they had killed 175 enemy during this latest encounter; a firm count of 20 bodies were found on the shell-torn slopes. Company H casualties, all from enemy mortar and artillery fire, were 7 killed and 21 wounded.186 Enemy incoming was again heavy during this period, with a reported 3,000 rounds falling in the sector.

Those enemy troops that broke through the Marine defenses were quickly taken out by grenades and gunfire. Unable to weaken the Marine defenses any further and suffering heavy casualties from relentless Marine artillery and mortar fire, the Communists withdrew at 10:15 PM. Marine defenders estimated they had killed 175 enemies during this most recent encounter; a confirmed count of 20 bodies were found on the shell-damaged slopes. Company H suffered casualties, all from enemy mortar and artillery fire, totaling 7 killed and 21 wounded.186 Enemy fire was once again heavy during this time, with a reported 3,000 rounds hitting the sector.

186 During the fighting on the 13th, Hospitalman John E. Kilmer was mortally wounded while “administering aid to the wounded and expediting their evacuation.” Though wounded by enemy mortars, he continued his life-saving efforts until another barrage took his life. He had died shielding a wounded Marine undergoing emergency treatment. Hospitalman Kilmer, a distant cousin of poet Joyce Kilmer, became the first of four corpsmen serving with the 1st Marine Division to be awarded the Medal of Honor during the trench warfare in western Korea.

186 During the fighting on the 13th, Hospitalman John E. Kilmer was fatally wounded while “providing aid to the injured and speeding up their evacuation.” Even after being hit by enemy mortars, he kept working to save lives until another explosion took his life. He died while protecting a wounded Marine who was receiving emergency treatment. Hospitalman Kilmer, a distant cousin of poet Joyce Kilmer, became the first of four corpsmen with the 1st Marine Division to receive the Medal of Honor during the trench warfare in western Korea.

In the 3d Battalion sector, Marine and KSC stretcher bearers brought casualties to the I/3/1 CP, several hundred yards to the rear of the front line. At the command post, the critically wounded were airlifted by helicopter to the rear. Less seriously wounded casualties were placed in jeep ambulances and carried to the battalion forward aid station, about two miles away. Here a team of doctors and corpsmen examined and treated patients, discharged a few, but prepared most for further evacuation. At the 1st Marines forward aid station, patients were reexamined and their wounds redressed when required; discharge or further evacuation was also accomplished. Most of the Marines brought to this forward facility128 had become exhausted from vigorous activity in the high temperature and humidity which characterized the South Korean summer. The regimental aid station treated these heat cases and then released them to their units.

In the 3rd Battalion area, Marine and KSC stretcher bearers brought injured soldiers to the I/3/1 command post, located several hundred yards behind the front lines. At the command post, critically injured individuals were airlifted by helicopter to the rear. Those with less severe injuries were placed in jeep ambulances and taken to the battalion's forward aid station, which was about two miles away. There, a team of doctors and corpsmen assessed and treated patients, discharging a few but preparing most for further evacuation. At the 1st Marines forward aid station, patients were reexamined and their wounds redressed as necessary; discharges or additional evacuations were also carried out. Most of the Marines brought to this forward facility128 were exhausted from intense activity in the high heat and humidity typical of the South Korean summer. The regimental aid station treated these heat-related cases and then sent them back to their units.

Company B Returns to Bunker Hill187

187 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 3/1, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Aug 52.

187 Unless stated otherwise, the content in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 3/1, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Aug 52.

Division intelligence subsequently reported that the 2100 attack on 13 August had been made by an enemy battalion with a reinforced company in assault. This same unit again sent a small band of Chinese soldiers against Hill 122 at 0225 the following morning. This clash was to be the briefest of all offensives for control of Bunker Hill during the 11–17 August period. Prior to launching this four-minute fire fight, an enemy machine gun at Siberia had attempted to harass the Marines at Bunker Hill. In retaliation, Marine tanks illuminated this enemy weapon with their searchlights and immediately took it under fire with their 90mm guns, knocking it out of action. At the same time, enemy artillery attempted to shell friendly tanks. During this brief fire exchange, one tanker was wounded slightly and the lens of one fighting light was splintered by fragments from enemy shells bursting around the tanks. The inconsequential probe was made, Marines believed, not so much to seriously challenge Marines holding Hill 122 as it was to retrieve CCF dead and wounded from the major attack a few hours earlier that night.

Division intelligence later reported that the 2100 attack on August 13 was carried out by an enemy battalion with a reinforced company in an assault. This same unit sent a small group of Chinese soldiers against Hill 122 at 0225 the next morning. This clash ended up being the shortest of all offensives for control of Bunker Hill during the period from August 11 to 17. Before starting this four-minute firefight, an enemy machine gun at Siberia tried to harass the Marines at Bunker Hill. In response, Marine tanks lit up this enemy position with their searchlights and immediately fired at it with their 90mm guns, taking it out of action. At the same time, enemy artillery attempted to shell friendly tanks. During this brief exchange of fire, one tanker was slightly wounded, and one of their fighting light lenses was shattered by fragments from enemy shells bursting around the tanks. The Marines believed this minor probe was not meant to seriously contest their hold on Hill 122 but rather to recover CCF dead and wounded from the major attack earlier that night.

Anticipating that a much heavier ground attack was close at hand, the 1st Marines ordered a reinforcement of the Bunker Hill position. Even before the heavy action on the 13th, this machinery had been set in motion. To this end, the 3d Battalion was to reinforce the Bunker defense by sending a 1/1 platoon to the hill and the 2d Battalion was instructed to return Company A (minus this platoon) to the reserve battalion. At 0415 on the 14th, Company E/2/1, led since 10 August by Captain Stanley T. Moak, took over from A/1/1 the responsibility for the 2d Battalion’s MLR “Siberia sector,” adjacent to the Bunker Hill area held by the 3d Battalion. The Company A reinforcing platoon arrived at Hill 122 just before dusk,129 preceding another CCF company attack by only a few hours.

Anticipating that a much heavier ground attack was imminent, the 1st Marines ordered reinforcements for the Bunker Hill position. Even before the intense action on the 13th, preparations were underway. To achieve this, the 3rd Battalion was tasked with bolstering the Bunker defense by sending a 1/1 platoon to the hill, while the 2nd Battalion was directed to pull Company A (excluding this platoon) back to the reserve battalion. At 4:15 AM on the 14th, Company E/2/1, led by Captain Stanley T. Moak since August 10th, took over from A/1/1 the responsibility for the 2nd Battalion’s main line of resistance in the “Siberia sector,” which was next to the Bunker Hill area held by the 3rd Battalion. The Company A reinforcing platoon arrived at Hill 122 just before dusk,129 only a few hours before another CCF company launched their attack.

At midnight the 1st Marines front was suspiciously quiet for a few minutes. Forward on Hill 122, there was no apparent enemy activity. Captain Demas sent out a two fire-team patrol from Bunker to reconnoiter northwest of Bunker towards the Chinese lines. Shortly after the eight Marines returned with a negative report of contact with the enemy, the regiment received a report about the outbreak of a small arms clash between defenders on the left flank of Bunker and an enemy unit farther west. At 0118 on 15 August what had initially appeared to be a minor contest suddenly erupted into a heated fire fight all along the 124–122 Bunker Ridge complex. At the request of Captain Dumas, Marine artillery fired protective boxes around the Bunker positions. This defensive maneuver held the attackers in check.

At midnight, the 1st Marines front was suspiciously quiet for a few minutes. Up on Hill 122, there was no visible enemy activity. Captain Demas sent out a two-fire-team patrol from Bunker to scout northwest towards the Chinese lines. Shortly after, the eight Marines returned with no contact report. Then the regiment got word about a small arms clash starting between the defenders on the left flank of Bunker and an enemy unit further west. At 0118 on 15 August, what had looked like a minor skirmish suddenly turned into an intense firefight throughout the 124–122 Bunker Ridge complex. Following Captain Dumas's request, Marine artillery fired protective boxes around the Bunker positions. This defensive action kept the attackers at bay.

At this moment, Chinese infantrymen in the draw running alongside the 124–122–120 ridge system were massed for an assault on Bunker from the northeast. The plan might have been successful had not a fighting light from a tank on the main line intercepted the Communists in this state of their preparations. In a matter of moments, friendly artillery, mortar, and tank fire struck the Chinese and scattered the formation.

At this moment, Chinese soldiers in the draw running alongside the 124–122–120 ridge system were gathered for an attack on Bunker from the northeast. The plan might have worked if a spotlight from a tank on the main line hadn’t caught the Communists during their preparations. In just moments, friendly artillery, mortar, and tank fire hit the Chinese troops and broke up their formation.

After discovering he could not successfully pull a sneak attack, the enemy reverted to his usual procedure, employing a preassault bombardment prior to his infantry assault. This preparation began at 0206; it reached the rate of approximately 100 rounds of 82 and 122mm mortar shells per minute. While supporting weapons pounded the Marines, the Chinese assault commander reorganized his attack force that the Marine shelling had scattered. Communist infantry then moved forward and fired on the Bunker Marines, who replied with rifles and machine guns and box-me-in fires. Unable to penetrate this protective mask around the positions, the Chinese gradually decreased their small arms and artillery fire until, at 0315, the rate of exploding shells at Hill 122 had dropped to only four or five per minute. Soon thereafter the small arms fire slacked off entirely and by 0400 even the mortars had stopped. Across the entire 1st Marines front, all was quiet again.

After realizing he couldn't pull off a sneak attack, the enemy went back to his usual strategy, using a pre-assault bombardment before his infantry assault. This preparation started at 2:06 AM and ramped up to about 100 rounds of 82mm and 122mm mortar shells per minute. While supporting weapons pounded the Marines, the Chinese assault commander reorganized his attack force that the Marine shelling had disrupted. Communist infantry then advanced and fired on the Bunker Marines, who responded with rifles, machine guns, and covering fire. Unable to break through the protective barrier around the positions, the Chinese gradually reduced their small arms and artillery fire until, at 3:15 AM, the rate of exploding shells at Hill 122 had decreased to just four or five per minute. Shortly after, the small arms fire stopped completely, and by 4:00 AM, even the mortars had ceased. Across the entire 1st Marines front, everything was quiet again.

During the Company H defense of the hill, enemy losses, caused mostly by friendly artillery and mortar fire, were placed at 350, including 40 counted dead. Captain Demas’ Marines suffered 35130 casualties, of whom 7 were killed. En route to the MLR after relief by B/3/1, the company suffered four more casualties, including two KIAs, all the victims of Chinese mortars.

During the defense of the hill by Company H, enemy losses, mostly due to friendly artillery and mortar fire, were estimated at 350, including 40 confirmed dead. Captain Demas’ Marines experienced 35130 casualties, with 7 killed. On the way to the main line of resistance after being relieved by B/3/1, the company incurred four more casualties, including two killed in action, all due to Chinese mortars.

It was not long before these weapons inflicted casualties on Company B, which had six of its men wounded even before the H/3/7 unit had reached JAMESTOWN. Another Marine at Bunker was wounded by enemy mortars later that morning. At 1640 the Communists again probed Bunker Hill, this time in company strength. Striking in daylight during a thunderstorm and without any preparatory fires, the Chinese attackers failed to achieve any tactical surprise. The defenders fired both infantry and supporting weapons; some threw grenades at the few Communists who did manage to get close to the fighting positions. At 1750, the Chinese withdrew, this time leaving 35 of their dead in the attack area. Four Marines had been wounded; five others suffering from battle fatigue were later evacuated.

It wasn't long before these weapons caused injuries to Company B, which had six of its soldiers wounded even before the H/3/7 unit arrived at JAMestown. Another Marine at Bunker was injured by enemy mortars later that morning. At 4:40 PM, the Communists probed Bunker Hill again, this time with a larger group. Attacking in daylight during a thunderstorm and without any prior bombardment, the Chinese attackers failed to catch the defenders off guard. The defenders fired both infantry and support weapons; some threw grenades at the few Communists who managed to get close to their positions. At 5:50 PM, the Chinese retreated, leaving 35 of their dead in the area. Four Marines were wounded, and five others suffering from battle fatigue were later evacuated.

Exactly when the enemy would strike next at Bunker Hill was not known by the Marines. Most believed that the Communists would return but only speculated as to when. Although the battalion felt that “the enemy was not expected to attack again for some time,”188 events were to prove otherwise. In any case, the battalion was prepared, having an adequate force on Bunker and sufficient local reserves to absorb an attack up to the strength of any received so far. Division supporting arms were readily available for commitment at critical points.

Exactly when the enemy would strike again at Bunker Hill was unknown to the Marines. Most believed that the Communists would come back but only guessed at when. Although the battalion felt that “the enemy was not expected to attack again for some time,” 188 events would prove otherwise. In any case, the battalion was ready, having enough troops on Bunker and sufficient local reserves to handle an attack up to the strength of any they had faced so far. Division support was easily available to deploy at critical points.

188 3/1 ComdD, Aug 52, p. 4.

188 3/1 ComdD, Aug 52, p. 4.

The Chinese soon put an end to the conjecture about the next attack. At 0040, 16 August, an enemy force, later estimated as a battalion, came out of positions to the west and north of Hill 122. Supported by mortars at first, and later on by artillery, the battalion sent one company against the Marine outpost. Several attacking elements were able to penetrate the defensive fires. These Chinese reached the crest of the hill and began using their rifles, automatic weapons, and hand grenades against the defenders. Captain Scranton called for reinforcements. A platoon from I/3/7 was dispatched promptly from the 3/1 sector. The reinforcements departed JAMESTOWN just as the fire fight on Bunker began to subside. By 0315, the enemy had begun his withdrawal, and another reinforcing element,131 I/3/1, had moved forward, this time from regiment to Lieutenant Colonel Armitage’s CP.

The Chinese quickly ended the speculation about the next attack. At 12:40 AM on August 16, an enemy force, later estimated to be a battalion, moved out from positions to the west and north of Hill 122. Initially supported by mortars and later by artillery, the battalion sent one company against the Marine outpost. Several attacking units managed to get through the defensive fire. These Chinese forces reached the top of the hill and began firing their rifles, automatic weapons, and throwing hand grenades at the defenders. Captain Scranton called for reinforcements. A platoon from I/3/7 was quickly sent from the 3/1 sector. The reinforcements left JAMESTOWN just as the firefight on Bunker began to calm down. By 3:15 AM, the enemy had started to withdraw, and another reinforcement element, 131 I/3/1, moved up, this time from regimental headquarters to Lieutenant Colonel Armitage’s command post.

About two hours later a brief fire fight flared up in the Company B sector. No ground assault was made on Marine positions. The enemy force, of undetermined strength, never closed with the Marines and within 10 minutes, the firing stopped. No casualties to the Marines resulted during this exchange. The earlier clash had resulted in the death of 3 Marines and the wounding of 27. Enemy losses were estimated at 40 killed and 30 wounded.

About two hours later, a brief firefight broke out in the Company B sector. No ground assault was made on the Marine positions. The enemy force, whose strength was unclear, never engaged with the Marines, and within 10 minutes, the firing stopped. There were no casualties among the Marines during this exchange. The earlier clash had resulted in the deaths of 3 Marines and left 27 wounded. Enemy losses were estimated at 40 killed and 30 wounded.

Before it came off the hill, Company B was engaged by enemy fire three more times. At 1945, Chinese mortars (82mm) wounded two Marines. Later, heavier mortars placed 20 rounds on Hill 122, but these caused no casualties. There were some losses, however, early on the morning of the 17th when C/1/1 was relieving the Bunker defenders. Captain Scranton’s Marines sustained five more wounded from automatic weapons, five during the relief.

Before it came down from the hill, Company B faced enemy fire three more times. At 7:45 PM, Chinese mortars (82mm) injured two Marines. Later, heavier mortars fired 20 rounds at Hill 122, but these did not result in any casualties. There were some losses, though, early in the morning of the 17th when C/1/1 was taking over from the Bunker defenders. Captain Scranton's Marines suffered five more injuries from automatic weapons, five during the handover.

The second relief of Company B on Bunker brought to a close the battle that had been waged for possession of the vital hill complex. During the Hill 122 tours of Company C and other 1st Marines units that followed in August, seven more ground actions tested the Bunker Hill defenses. Only one of them, during the night of 25–26 August, was of significant size. This attack also failed to dislodge the Marines from the hill.

The second relief of Company B on Bunker ended the battle for control of the important hill complex. During the Hill 122 rotations of Company C and other 1st Marines units that followed in August, there were seven more ground actions that tested the Bunker Hill defenses. Only one of these, during the night of August 25–26, was significant in size. This attack also did not manage to remove the Marines from the hill.

Supporting Arms at Bunker Hill189

189 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 4–16 Aug 52; 1st Mar, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Aug 52; MAGs-12, -33 ComdDs, Aug 52.

189 Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 4–16 Aug 52; 1st Mar, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Aug 52; MAGs-12, -33 ComdDs, Aug 52.

It was quite natural that the flurry of ground activity during the battle of Bunker Hill created a need for increased participation from Marine supporting arms. The magnitude of infantry action during the contest for Hill 122 resulted in a monthly record to date in 1952 for the amount of air support received as well as the volume of both artillery and tank fires supporting the division. During this critical 9–16 August period, the 11th Marines played a part in every ground action except the feint attack on Siberia and the seizure of Bunker Hill, both of which were purposely executed without an artillery preparation. Medium tanks fired day and night missions during132 most of the infantry action. Close air support at times amounted to a strike every 20 minutes.

It was completely understandable that the rush of ground activity during the Battle of Bunker Hill created a need for more involvement from Marine support units. The scale of infantry action during the fight for Hill 122 led to a record month in 1952 for the amount of air support received, as well as the level of artillery and tank fire backing up the division. During the crucial period from August 9 to 16, the 11th Marines were involved in every ground action except for the feint attack on Siberia and the capture of Bunker Hill, both of which were intentionally carried out without artillery preparation. Medium tanks conducted missions day and night throughout most of the infantry actions. Close air support at times reached a strike every 20 minutes.

During the ground action around Bunker, Siberia, and Stromboli, the division received close air support in amounts unparalleled for JAMESTOWN Marines to that time. Marine and U.S. Air Force pilots flew a total of 458 missions (including 27 ground controlled MPQ-14 radar bombing attacks) during five of the most critical days, 9–13 August. On two of them, the 1st Marine Division received priority of close air support along the whole EUSAK front. Fifth Air Force assigned 1st MAW aircraft to Marine requests for close air support as long as Marine aircraft were available.

During the ground action around Bunker, Siberia, and Stromboli, the division received close air support like never before for the JAMestown Marines up to that point. Marine and U.S. Air Force pilots flew a total of 458 missions (including 27 ground-controlled MPQ-14 radar bombing attacks) during five of the most critical days, from August 9 to 13. On two of those days, the 1st Marine Division had priority for close air support across the entire EUSAK front. Fifth Air Force assigned 1st MAW aircraft to fulfill Marine requests for close air support as long as Marine aircraft were available.

The initial air strike by Marines in the Bunker fighting was on 9 August in support of counterattack plans for Siberia. MAG-33 provided a morning and evening flight of four F9F jet fighters to destroy enemy forces and defensive works on 58A (Siberia). USAF fighter-bombers attacked Siberia and other outposts nearby and enemy artillery positions supporting the Chinese forward line. On the next day, air operations, concentrating on Siberia, were stepped up considerably against enemy outposts. Thirty-five aircraft in nine missions attacked 58A with bombs, rockets, and napalm. These strikes were carried out by MAG-12 and U.S. Air Force pilots at irregular intervals during daylight hours. Air controllers reported good results. Other aircraft hit known mortar locations capable of supporting the Chinese. During the morning, Marine Attack Squadron 121 (Lieutenant Colonel Philip “L” Crawford) bombed and burned Bunker Hill. Just before sunset, F-80 and -84 jets of the U.S. Air Force dropped 15 tons of bombs on mortar positions and troops on and around Hill 120. Four F-80s also participated with eight Marine AD-2 propeller-driven attack aircraft in the morning attack on Bunker.

The first air strike by Marines in the Bunker fighting happened on August 9 to support plans for a counterattack in Siberia. MAG-33 provided a morning and evening flight of four F9F jet fighters to take out enemy forces and defenses on 58A (Siberia). USAF fighter-bombers targeted Siberia and nearby outposts, as well as enemy artillery positions supporting the Chinese front line. The next day, air operations focusing on Siberia were significantly increased against enemy outposts. Thirty-five aircraft completed nine missions, attacking 58A with bombs, rockets, and napalm. These strikes were executed by MAG-12 and U.S. Air Force pilots at various times during daylight. Air controllers reported positive results. Other aircraft targeted known mortar positions that could support the Chinese. In the morning, Marine Attack Squadron 121 (Lieutenant Colonel Philip “L” Crawford) bombed and set Bunker Hill on fire. Just before sunset, F-80 and F-84 jets from the U.S. Air Force dropped 15 tons of bombs on mortar positions and troops on and around Hill 120. Four F-80s also joined eight Marine AD-2 propeller-driven attack planes in the morning assault on Bunker.

Air activity in support of the 1st Marines continued unabated on 11 August. Before the diversionary ground attack just after dusk that day, Marine and Fifth Air Force fliers repeated the treatment that Hills 58A and 122 had received the previous day. During daylight, supporting weapons positions were hit by FAF fighter planes. At night, MAG-12 air attacks guided by the MPQ-14 radar bombing system destroyed hostile artillery and mortars. Also during the dark, the medium bombers of the FEAF Bomber Command struck deeper in the rear at heavy weapons locations.

Air operations supporting the 1st Marines kept going strong on August 11. Before the diversionary ground attack that happened just after sunset that day, Marine pilots and Fifth Air Force crews repeated what the positions on Hills 58A and 122 experienced the day before. During the day, supporting weapons positions were targeted by FAF fighter planes. At night, MAG-12 airstrikes, directed by the MPQ-14 radar bombing system, took out enemy artillery and mortars. Also at night, the medium bombers from the FEAF Bomber Command targeted heavy weapons sites deeper in the rear.

These Air Force bombers conducted four more controlled-bombing133 attacks against Chinese artillery during the early hours of 12 August, when Company B was consolidating its positions and hastily organizing the defense of Bunker Hill. After daylight and until dusk, MAGs-12 and -33 and USAF squadrons provided four-plane flights to strike troop assembly areas, supporting weapons positions, and observation posts close to Hill 122. In late afternoon, Marine pilots in four F9F Panther jets and three ADs bombed and burned the enemy side of Bunker Hill during the shelling and subsequent ground attack against the Marines on the eastern slope.

These Air Force bombers carried out four more controlled bombing attacks against Chinese artillery in the early hours of August 12, while Company B was securing its positions and quickly setting up the defense of Bunker Hill. From dawn until dusk, MAGs-12 and -33 along with USAF squadrons conducted four-plane missions to hit troop assembly areas, supporting weapon positions, and observation posts near Hill 122. In the late afternoon, Marine pilots in four F9F Panther jets and three ADs bombed and set fire to the enemy side of Bunker Hill during the shelling and subsequent ground assault against the Marines on the eastern slope.

Marines flew, on 13 August, all of the daylight close air support missions in support of the actions on both Bunker in the center and Stromboli in the right of the 1st Marines sector. On 13 August, a total of 94 aircraft were committed over the regimental sector to conduct strikes in support of ground operations. Enemy Hill 104, commanding the 2/1 outpost on 48A (Stromboli), received four attacks. Fighter bombers (F4U propeller-driven Corsairs) carrying napalm, rockets, and 1,000-pound bombs, raided the hill mass at 0535. The other strikes against this key terrain-feature were made by attack and fighter aircraft during the afternoon. Other targets on the regimental right were weapons positions beyond Hill 104 and an enemy outpost one thousand yards west of Stromboli.

Marines conducted all daylight close air support missions on August 13, backing operations at both Bunker in the center and Stromboli on the right side of the 1st Marines sector. On that day, a total of 94 aircraft were deployed over the regimental sector to perform strikes in support of ground operations. Enemy Hill 104, overseeing the 2/1 outpost on 48A (Stromboli), was targeted with four attacks. Fighter bombers (F4U propeller-driven Corsairs) equipped with napalm, rockets, and 1,000-pound bombs hit the hill mass at 5:35 AM. Additional strikes on this strategic location were carried out by attack and fighter aircraft throughout the afternoon. Other targets on the regimental right included weapons positions beyond Hill 104 and an enemy outpost located one thousand yards west of Stromboli.

Most of the air support received by the 1st Marines on the 13th was directed against targets that were participating—or that were capable of taking part—in the battle on Bunker Hill. Against the enemy on the height itself, the Marines directed only three strikes, and these came late in the morning. A majority of the air attacks were dispatched against observation and command posts and the firing positions of both automatic and large caliber weapons. Chinese artillery and mortar fire had inflicted more casualties and punishment on the Marines than the enemy infantry assaults. As a consequence, the main effort of the close air support strikes was directed against these hostile supporting weapons.

Most of the air support for the 1st Marines on the 13th was aimed at targets involved in—or capable of getting involved in—the fight at Bunker Hill. The Marines only directed three strikes against the enemy on the hill itself, and these happened late in the morning. Most of the air attacks were focused on observation and command posts, as well as the firing positions of both automatic and heavy weapons. Chinese artillery and mortar fire caused more casualties and damage to the Marines than the enemy infantry attacks. As a result, the primary focus of the close air support strikes was on these enemy support weapons.

After dark on the 13th, VMF(N)-513 commanded by Colonel Peter D. Lambrecht,190 took up the air offensive against the heavy134 firing positions in the rear of the enemy line. The squadron conducted four attacks with its night fighters. Two of its attacks were made just before sunrise.

After dark on the 13th, VMF(N)-513 led by Colonel Peter D. Lambrecht,190 launched the air offensive against the heavy134 firing positions behind the enemy line. The squadron carried out four attacks with its night fighters. Two of these attacks were made just before sunrise.

190 Two days later, Colonel Lambrecht, flying a F3D twin jet night fighter with his radar operator, Second Lieutenant James M. Brown, disappeared while on a night flight. The last known position of the plane was over the Yellow Sea, 50 air miles west of Pyongyang. At about that point the aircraft faded from the radar screen. Efforts to reestablish communications failed. It was reported that observers at sea sighted a crash and explosion at about this same time. Extensive search failed to uncover any trace of the Marines or their aircraft.

190 Two days later, Colonel Lambrecht was flying a F3D twin jet night fighter with his radar operator, Second Lieutenant James M. Brown, when they disappeared during a night flight. The last known position of the plane was over the Yellow Sea, 50 air miles west of Pyongyang. At that point, the aircraft vanished from the radar screen. Efforts to reestablish communication were unsuccessful. Reports indicated that observers at sea saw a crash and explosion around the same time. An extensive search failed to find any sign of the Marines or their aircraft.

During the remainder of the battle of Bunker Hill, the ground fighting subsided and the requirement for close air support abated accordingly. On the 14th, only four daylight strikes were flown in the 1st Marines area. These, all by Marine squadrons, were against active artillery and mortars in the defilade of Hill 120 and others to the west on the far slope of Hill 123, and Chinese outpost positions, west of 48A, which had been pestering the Stromboli garrison. There were no flights after dark on the 14th, but on the following night, two MPQ missions were flown by VMF(N)-513. Each was a single plane flight against a reported artillery location. This was the final night air action in the battle for Bunker Hill. Daylight missions in support of Hill 122 defense after the sharp decrease of attacks on the 14th numbered only seven attacks, each by four planes. These, flown by Marines, continued to emphasize the destruction of enemy artillery.

During the rest of the battle of Bunker Hill, the fighting on the ground calmed down, and the need for close air support decreased as well. On the 14th, only four daytime strikes were conducted in the 1st Marines’ area. All of these were carried out by Marine squadrons targeting enemy artillery and mortars hidden on Hill 120 and others to the west on the far slope of Hill 123, as well as Chinese outpost positions west of 48A that had been bothering the Stromboli garrison. There were no flights after dark on the 14th, but on the following night, two MPQ missions were flown by VMF(N)-513. Each was a single-plane flight aimed at a reported artillery site. This marked the final night air action in the battle for Bunker Hill. Daytime missions to support the defense of Hill 122, after the significant drop in attacks on the 14th, numbered only seven, each consisting of four planes. These missions, flown by Marines, continued to focus on eliminating enemy artillery.

Marine artillery continued its support of ground troops and air strikes. Cannoneers of the 11th Marines fired 21 flak suppression missions during the five days beginning on 11 August. This type of close coordination between Marine supporting arms further reduced combat losses of aircraft providing CAS to the division. The Marine artillerymen had played a vital part in the defense of the besieged outposts. Lieutenant Colonel Armitage credited the box-me-in fires with an important role in thwarting each enemy attack on Bunker.191

Marine artillery continued to support ground troops and air strikes. Cannoneers of the 11th Marines completed 21 flak suppression missions over the five days starting on August 11. This close coordination between Marine supporting units significantly decreased the combat losses of aircraft providing close air support to the division. The Marine artillerymen played a crucial role in defending the besieged outposts. Lieutenant Colonel Armitage acknowledged that the box-me-in fires were vital in preventing each enemy attack on Bunker.191

191 3/1 ComdD, Aug 52, pp. 3–4.

191 3/1 ComdD, Aug 52, pp. 3–4.

In the 24-hour period beginning at 1800 on 12 August, Marine artillery directly supporting the 1st Marines fired 10,652 rounds. Most of the ammunition was expended in support of the Bunker Hill defense; some was used in behalf of the Marines outposting Stromboli during the Communists’ early morning diversion that day. On the 9th, the direct support battalion, 3/11 (Lieutenant Colonel Charles O. Rogers), had fired about one-fourth of the 12–13 August total. Many of the shells that first day of the Bunker battle were preparatory to counterattacks for regaining Siberia.

In the 24-hour period starting at 6 PM on August 12, Marine artillery directly supporting the 1st Marines fired 10,652 rounds. Most of the ammo was used to support the defense of Bunker Hill; some was used for the Marines stationed at Stromboli during the Communists’ early morning distraction that day. On the 9th, the direct support battalion, 3/11 (Lieutenant Colonel Charles O. Rogers), had fired about one-fourth of the total rounds used on August 12–13. Many of the shells fired on the first day of the Bunker battle were aimed at preparing for counterattacks to reclaim Siberia.

When the retaking of Hill 58A was discarded in favor of the surprise attack on 122, the amount of artillery support was reduced,135 during the 1st Marines infantry preparations on the 10th and 11th, in keeping with the fire support plan. Upon seizure of Bunker, Lieutenant Colonel Rogers’ business immediately picked up and quickly reached a crescendo the following day, when the 10,652 shells fired became a Marine one-day battalion record for western Korea until the last stages of fighting in 1953. Other Marine artillery battalions fired reinforcing missions during the critical period as did the 4.5-inch Rocket Battery which fired a large number of on-call ripples. The regimental commander later recalled that “during some of the crises every gun that could bear on Bunker in the 11th Marines and reinforcing units was shooting there.”192

When the decision was made to skip retaking Hill 58A and go for a surprise attack on 122 instead, the artillery support was decreased,135 during the 1st Marines infantry preparations on the 10th and 11th, in line with the fire support plan. After capturing Bunker, Lieutenant Colonel Rogers’ operation quickly gained momentum and peaked the next day, when the 10,652 shells fired set a Marine one-day battalion record for western Korea that stood until the final stages of fighting in 1953. Other Marine artillery battalions also conducted reinforcing missions during this critical period, as did the 4.5-inch Rocket Battery, which fired a significant number of on-call ripples. The regimental commander later remembered that “during some of the crises every gun that could fire on Bunker in the 11th Marines and supporting units was shooting there.”192

192 BGen Frederick P. Henderson ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC and MS comments, dtd 20 Jun 67, hereafter Henderson ltr III.

192 BGen Frederick P. Henderson letter to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC and MS comments, dated June 20, 1967, hereafter Henderson letter III.

After a sharp drop on the 14th, the artillery support gradually decreased in proportion to the amount and strength of the enemy’s action against Hill 122. By 20 August, 3/11 was firing only 244 rounds a day. Only on the 26th, during a serious Chinese attempt to retake Bunker, did the number of artillery rounds match the intensity of the fire support rendered during the earlier part of the month.

After a steep decline on the 14th, the artillery support slowly reduced in relation to the scale and strength of the enemy's attacks on Hill 122. By August 20, 3/11 was firing just 244 rounds a day. It was only on the 26th, during a major Chinese effort to reclaim Bunker, that the number of artillery rounds matched the intensity of the fire support provided earlier in the month.

It was not only the quantity of 11th Marines support that the infantry called for during the battle of Bunker Hill; quality was equally important. A majority of the more than 28,000 rounds that 3/11 fired during the eight days of Bunker Hill fell around the besieged outposts. Many rounds were fired in defense of MLR positions. In both of these types of protective fires, extreme accuracy and precision were required due to the proximity of enemy and friendly lines in order to prevent any “short” rounds from falling among Marine positions. Lieutenant Colonel Armitage recalled that during the height of the battle on the night of 12 August, “we did have a bad scare ... when Captain Connolly reported that friendly mortar fire was falling short.”193 The battalion immediately ceased fire with its 60mms, 81mms, and 4.2s and each piece was checked; the culprit was quickly located and within 5–10 minutes 3/1 resumed fire.

It wasn't just the number of 11th Marines supporting the infantry during the battle of Bunker Hill that mattered; the quality of that support was equally crucial. Most of the more than 28,000 rounds fired by 3/11 during the eight days of Bunker Hill landed around the besieged outposts. Many rounds were shot in defense of MLR positions. In both cases of protective fire, extreme accuracy and precision were essential due to the closeness of enemy and friendly lines to prevent any “short” rounds from landing among Marine positions. Lieutenant Colonel Armitage remembered that during the peak of the battle on the night of August 12, “we did have a bad scare ... when Captain Connolly reported that friendly mortar fire was falling short.”193 The battalion immediately stopped firing with its 60mms, 81mms, and 4.2s, and each piece was inspected; the issue was quickly identified, and within 5–10 minutes, 3/1 resumed fire.

193 Armitage ltr and comments, p. 12.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Armitage letter and comments, p. 12.

During the August battle, artillery in general support of the entire division and I Corps artillery reinforcing the fires of136 Colonel Henderson’s regiment, stepped up their efforts to destroy the distant and more difficult targets, including mortars and artillery. These continued to be the main cause of Marine casualties. Some of the labors of the 11th Marines gun crews did silence enemy heavy weapons, but personnel losses from enemy shellings still mounted, especially in the infantry units. To assist in the location and destruction of the enemy artillery, aerial observers spent considerable time in spotting and fixing Chinese weapons positions.

During the battle in August, artillery supporting the whole division, along with I Corps artillery backing up Colonel Henderson’s regiment, increased their attempts to take out the distant and harder targets, including mortars and artillery. These were still the main cause of Marine casualties. Some of the efforts by the 11th Marines gun crews did manage to silence enemy heavy weapons, but personnel losses from enemy shelling continued to rise, particularly in the infantry units. To help locate and destroy the enemy artillery, aerial observers spent a significant amount of time spotting and pinpointing Chinese weapon positions.

Besides these counterbattery efforts, the 11th Marines employed other artillery means to provide the additional support the 1st Marine Division requested during Bunker Hill. Two of these were the counter-counterbattery and the countermortar programs, the former being a passive defense-deception program to minimize Chinese counterbattery fires against 11th Marines weapons. Nearly every day C Battery, 17th Field Artillery Battalion, fired special request missions.194 Another type of fire, flak suppression, aided the cause of close air support pilots delivering ordnance against those Chinese positions taking Bunker Hill and Stromboli under fire. At night, illumination shells helped outpost and frontline Marines in locating groups of enemy massing for assault on Hill 122.

Besides these counter-battery efforts, the 11th Marines used other artillery methods to provide the extra support requested by the 1st Marine Division during Bunker Hill. Two of these were the counter-counterbattery and countermortar programs, with the former being a passive defense-deception program designed to reduce Chinese counter-battery fire against the 11th Marines' weapons. Nearly every day, C Battery of the 17th Field Artillery Battalion fired special request missions.194 Another type of fire, flak suppression, supported close air support pilots as they dropped ordnance on Chinese positions that were firing on Bunker Hill and Stromboli. At night, illumination shells aided outpost and frontline Marines in spotting groups of the enemy gathering for an assault on Hill 122.

194 Many of these targets were CCF choke points, dumps, and weapons emplacements. Targets were identified and confirmed by a highly developed system that employed air spotting, aerial photographic interpretation, artillery evaluation, and POW interrogation.

194 Many of these targets were enemy choke points, dumps, and weapons locations. Targets were identified and confirmed through a sophisticated system that used air spotting, aerial photography analysis, artillery assessment, and prisoner of war interrogation.

Mortars (4.2-inch) of the 1st Marines contributed heavily to the defense of the outposts. Operations reached a peak on 12–13 August when, in a 24-hour period, Captain Carl H. Benson’s mortar company fired 5,952 rounds—4,084 high explosive and 1,868 illuminating. In addition to their defensive fires, these hard-hitting weapons attacked Chinese mortars, automatic weapons, defensive positions, and troop formations with deadly accuracy.

Mortars (4.2-inch) from the 1st Marines played a vital role in defending the outposts. Operations peaked on August 12-13, when Captain Carl H. Benson’s mortar company fired 5,952 rounds in a 24-hour period—4,084 high explosive and 1,868 illuminating. Besides their defensive fire, these powerful weapons targeted Chinese mortars, automatic weapons, defensive positions, and troop formations with lethal precision.

No less precise and lethal were the fires of Captain Gene M. McCain’s gun tanks (Company C, 1st Tank Battalion), and the battalion flame tanks. Three of the latter had fired their 105s in support of the KMC on the morning of the 9th before the vehicles received orders to move east to join Company C temporarily. On the next day, 90s fired on enemy bunkers, observation posts, and trenches in the vicinity of Siberia and Stromboli. During 11 August, two gun tanks blasted at targets immediately beyond Siberia and others to the west of that outpost.

No less precise and deadly were the fires from Captain Gene M. McCain’s tank company (Company C, 1st Tank Battalion) and the battalion's flame tanks. Three of those flame tanks had fired their 105s to support the KMC on the morning of the 9th before the vehicles got orders to move east to temporarily join Company C. The next day, 90s targeted enemy bunkers, observation posts, and trenches around Siberia and Stromboli. On August 11, two gun tanks unleashed fire at targets just beyond Siberia and others west of that outpost.

Towards the end of the 11th, the critical part of Bunker battle began for the tankers also. Those elements of Lieutenant Colonel137 John I. Williamson’s battalion supporting the diversion and the subsequent main attack pulled into positions south of Hill 122 on the MLR and to the right in the Company F sector. It was not until the next day that the tanks operating with the 1st Marines reached a peak in gun support for the Bunker fight. Beginning with the defense of Hill 122 from 1600 that day, and for the next 26 hours, the tankers placed 817 shells on targets effecting the Chinese capability of capturing Bunker and Stromboli. In addition to the heavy ammunition, the Company C tanks, augmented by the 1st Marines antitank platoon and five tanks from the division tank reserve, fired 32,000 rounds of .30 caliber machine gun ammunition.

Towards the end of the 11th, the crucial part of the Bunker battle also began for the tankers. Those units from Lieutenant Colonel137 John I. Williamson’s battalion that were supporting the diversion and the upcoming main attack moved into position south of Hill 122 on the Main Line of Resistance and to the right in the Company F sector. It wasn't until the following day that the tanks working with the 1st Marines reached peak gun support for the Bunker fight. Starting with the defense of Hill 122 from 1600 that day, and continuing for the next 26 hours, the tankers fired 817 shells at targets, hindering the Chinese ability to capture Bunker and Stromboli. Along with the heavy artillery, the Company C tanks, along with the 1st Marines antitank platoon and five tanks from the division tank reserve, fired 32,000 rounds of .30 caliber machine gun ammunition.

Except on the 11th, most of the tank firing in the fight for Bunker Hill through 14 August was accomplished during the hours of darkness. On the latter date, the cannons and machine guns of the mediums blasted directly at Chinese outposts opposite Colonel Layer’s regiment. The number of rounds that day fell off considerably from the high on the 13th; on the 15th the tanks in the 1st Marines area did not fire at all. Heavy rain that had accompanied the late afternoon thundershower that day made movement forward to firing positions impractical. By the next day, however, the ground was solid enough to permit some maneuvering by the tracked vehicles. They fired 52 rounds of 90mm shells and 14,750 machine gun rounds at automatic weapons positions and bunkers on the western slope of Hill 122. This marked the final tank mission in support of the 1st Marines in the battle for Bunker Hill.

Except for the 11th, most of the tank firing in the fight for Bunker Hill until August 14 was done at night. On that day, the cannons and machine guns of the mediums fired directly at Chinese outposts in front of Colonel Layer’s regiment. The number of rounds fired that day dropped significantly from the peak on the 13th; on the 15th, the tanks in the 1st Marines area didn't fire at all. Heavy rain that came with the late afternoon thunderstorm made it impossible to move forward to firing positions. However, by the next day, the ground was firm enough to allow some movement by the tracked vehicles. They fired 52 rounds of 90mm shells and 14,750 machine gun rounds at automatic weapons positions and bunkers on the western slope of Hill 122. This marked the last tank mission in support of the 1st Marines in the battle for Bunker Hill.

During the early part of the August fighting, tanks of the division were able to get the first real test of a technique of night support,195 and at the same time experiment with a towing device to permit retrieval of disabled vehicles under fire without getting outside the tank. The use of the lights to support both the diversionary force and the defense of Hill 122 showed the value of these instruments. Lieutenant Colonel Williamson recommended that tanks be employed in pairs, one to spot and adjust fire and the other to fire. With respect to the towing device, he considered the new piece of equipment an improvement over the manual hook-up method, but noted that the device limited tank maneuverability and had a tendency138 when bouncing up and down over rough terrain to dig into the ground, impeding the forward progress of the vehicle.

During the early days of the August fighting, the division's tanks got their first real test of a night support technique, 195 and had the chance to experiment with a towing device that made it possible to retrieve damaged vehicles while still under fire without having to exit the tank. Using lights to support both the diversionary force and the defense of Hill 122 demonstrated the value of these tools. Lieutenant Colonel Williamson suggested that tanks should operate in pairs, with one tank spotting and adjusting fire while the other tank fires. Regarding the towing device, he viewed this new piece of equipment as an improvement over the manual hook-up method, but he pointed out that it limited the tank's maneuverability and tended to dig into the ground when bouncing over rough terrain, slowing down the vehicle's forward movement.

195 The use of fighting lights to illuminate targets for tank gunners had been undertaken in July, but the results were inconclusive, owing to failure of one of the bulbs of the two lights tested. 1st TkBn ComdD, Aug 52, App. VI, Encl. 2. Declared the G-3, 1stMarDiv: “The diversion on Siberia was 100 percent effective, due largely to the new tank battle lights which we were using for the first time.” Honsowetz ltr II.

195 The use of battle lights to light up targets for tank gunners began in July, but the results were unclear because one of the bulbs in the two lights tested had failed. 1st TkBn ComdD, Aug 52, App. VI, Encl. 2. The G-3 of 1stMarDiv stated: “The diversion in Siberia was completely effective, mainly because of the new tank battle lights that we were using for the first time.” Honsowetz ltr II.

In Retrospect196

196 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: FMFPac, 1stMarDiv Sum, Jul-Oct 52; PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar ComdDs, Aug 52.

196 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: FMFPac, 1stMarDiv Sum, Jul-Oct 52; PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar ComdDs, Aug 52.

Whether the sacrifice of Siberia in favor of the seizure of Bunker justified the outcome can be determined, in part, by looking back to the division commander’s reasons for this decision. He had cited three advantages in seizing and occupying Hill 122 instead of 58A. One, tactical surprise achieved by an attack on the former, was an unqualified success. That Bunker Hill would provide more defensible terrain and at the same time add strength to the main line were two sound judgments that the test of time would bear out. The third point, that observation into the enemy’s outpost line would be increased from the higher hill, also proved to be correct.

Whether sacrificing Siberia for the capture of Bunker was worth it can be, in part, assessed by reviewing the division commander's reasons for making this choice. He mentioned three benefits of taking and holding Hill 122 instead of 58A. First, the element of surprise achieved by attacking the former was a complete success. The fact that Bunker Hill would offer more defensible ground while simultaneously strengthening the main line were two solid assessments that proved true over time. The third point, that visibility into the enemy’s outpost line would improve from the higher hill, also turned out to be accurate.

Only the inability to neutralize Hill 58A effectively from Bunker cast any doubt on the considerations. At night the enemy could occupy Siberia both for firing positions and flank security to attack friendly forces moving down the corridor east of Hill 122. Action to counter these two enemy actions came mainly from MLR forces.

Only the failure to effectively neutralize Hill 58A from Bunker raised any doubts about the plans. At night, the enemy could take control of Siberia for both firing positions and to secure their flanks while attacking friendly forces moving down the corridor east of Hill 122. The response to counter these two enemy actions primarily came from MLR forces.

One measure of the results of the Bunker Hill fighting is seen in the price paid. Chinese losses were estimated by the 1st Marine Division at approximately 3,200, including more than 400 known dead. Marine casualties in the action were 48 killed and 313 seriously wounded. Several hundred additional wounded were treated at 1st Marines medical facilities and returned to duty shortly thereafter.

One way to assess the outcomes of the Bunker Hill fighting is by looking at the cost. The 1st Marine Division estimated Chinese losses to be around 3,200, with over 400 confirmed dead. Marine casualties during the conflict included 48 killed and 313 seriously injured. Several hundred more wounded were treated at the 1st Marines medical facilities and were able to return to duty soon after.

To replace combat losses in the infantry regiment, General Selden on 12 August directed that rear area service and support units fill the vacancies. Two hundred Marines, nearly all of them volunteers, were provided to Colonel Layer by the 14th. To offset other losses within the division, its commander similarly had requested on 12 August that the Commandant, General Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr., authorize an air-lifting of 500 enlisted Marine infantrymen to the 1st Marine Division as soon as possible. Pointing out that mounting battle casualties had reduced the effective strength of the139 division, General Selden also urged that each of the next two monthly replacement drafts scheduled for the division be increased by 500 more enlisted men. After some debate at the next senior administrative headquarters,197 the request was granted by General Shepherd, and the emergency replacements were made available from the 3d Marine Division at Camp Pendleton, California. The initial replacement of 500 Marines arrived on 21 August.

To fill the combat losses in the infantry regiment, General Selden on August 12 instructed that rear area service and support units fill the gaps. Two hundred Marines, mostly volunteers, were provided to Colonel Layer by the 14th. To address other losses in the division, its commander also requested on August 12 that Commandant General Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr. approve the airlift of 500 enlisted Marine infantrymen to the 1st Marine Division as soon as possible. Noting that increasing battle casualties had lowered the effective strength of the 139 division, General Selden urged that each of the next two monthly replacement drafts planned for the division be increased by an additional 500 enlisted men. After some discussion at the next senior administrative headquarters, 197 the request was approved by General Shepherd, and the emergency replacements were provided from the 3rd Marine Division at Camp Pendleton, California. The first group of 500 Marines arrived on August 21.

197 CG, FMFPac, Lieutenant General Hart, requested the Commandant to delay decision until FMFPac could survey the combat replacement situation and aircraft availability. After a quick evaluation of both these factors, General Hart on the 14th recommended approval. FMFPac ComdD, Aug 52, App. I, Encl. (6). The air lift of 500 replacements to Korea was an “all out effort for Marine Aviation Transport based on the West Coast. This general support of Korean based forces demonstrated the total capability of Marine Aviation in support of ground forces.” MajGen Samuel S. Jack to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 27 Jun 67, hereafter Jack ltr.

197 CG, FMFPac, Lieutenant General Hart, asked the Commandant to postpone the decision until FMFPac could assess the situation regarding combat replacements and aircraft availability. After a quick review of both factors, General Hart recommended approval on the 14th. FMFPac ComdD, Aug 52, App. I, Encl. (6). The airlift of 500 replacements to Korea was a “full-scale effort for Marine Aviation Transport based on the West Coast. This overall support of forces in Korea showed the full capability of Marine Aviation in supporting ground forces.” MajGen Samuel S. Jack to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 27 Jun 67, hereafter Jack ltr.

More men to replace divisional combat losses might have been required had not the medical support been such an efficient operation. After the battle, the regimental surgeon, Lieutenant Robert E. Murto, called for a review of the medical facilities in effect during the Bunker, Siberia, and Stromboli fighting. In attendance were the battalion doctors and the division surgeon, Captain Lawrence E. Bach. Participants discussed both the major difficulties and routine procedures involved in medical care of the wounded. Problem areas were the high incidence of heat exhaustion, ground transportation of the wounded, enemy artillery fire that interfered with helicopter evacuations, and the need for increased medical support under battle conditions.

More men to replace combat losses might have been needed if the medical support hadn't been so efficient. After the battle, the regimental surgeon, Lieutenant Robert E. Murto, called for a review of the medical facilities used during the Bunker, Siberia, and Stromboli fighting. In attendance were the battalion doctors and the division surgeon, Captain Lawrence E. Bach. They discussed both the major challenges and routine procedures involved in caring for the wounded. Key issues included the high rates of heat exhaustion, ground transportation of the injured, enemy artillery fire that disrupted helicopter evacuations, and the need for increased medical support in battle conditions.

Regarding the last category, the surgeons noted that medical supplies during the heavy fighting of 9–16 August were never at a dangerously low level. The only shortage that had developed was in stretchers, due to the normal delay in transfer of stretchers from medical stations along the evacuation route to the company forward medical facilities. To help combat the Chinese artillery problem, medical officers had placed aid stations on the reverse slopes of hills. There was no available or known solution to hastening and easing the movement of battlefield casualties over the ground. The armored personnel carrier offered some protection from ground fire and a ride less painful than one in a truck, but the wheeled vehicles remained the most widely used.

Regarding the last category, the surgeons noted that medical supplies during the intense fighting from August 9 to 16 were never at a dangerously low level. The only shortage that occurred was in stretchers, due to the usual delay in transferring them from medical stations along the evacuation route to the company’s forward medical facilities. To address the Chinese artillery issue, medical officers set up aid stations on the back slopes of hills. There was no available solution to speed up and ease the movement of battlefield casualties over the ground. The armored personnel carrier provided some protection from ground fire and offered a more comfortable ride compared to a truck, but the wheeled vehicles were still the most commonly used.

There was little that could be done about the number of heat exhaustion cases. High temperature and humidity, vigorous activity,140 and the wearing of the armored vest (and to some degree, the steel helmet), combined to produce the casualties. All the surgeons agreed that regardless of the number of heat casualties, the wearing of these two items must continue. Regimental doctors credited the armored vest with saving the lives of 17 Marines. Several other Marines, they noted, had received only slight head wounds from bullets that had spent most of their velocity penetrating the steel helmet.

There wasn't much that could be done about the number of heat exhaustion cases. High temperatures and humidity, intense activity,140 and wearing the armored vest (and to some extent, the steel helmet) all contributed to the casualties. All the surgeons agreed that, no matter how many heat-related cases there were, the use of these two items had to continue. Regimental doctors credited the armored vest with saving the lives of 17 Marines. They also noted that several other Marines had only suffered minor head wounds from bullets that had lost most of their speed after penetrating the steel helmet.

Helicopter evacuation saved the lives of other Marines. The doctors credited the flying skills and bravery of the evacuation pilots for these rescues. Immediate response to day and night calls was instrumental in the recovery of numerous Marines. Rear Admiral Lamont Pugh, Surgeon General of the U.S. Navy, commented upon the value of the helicopter and on other reasons for success of medical support. After a Far East inspection trip, which included a visit to the 1st Marine Division during the battle of Bunker Hill, Admiral Pugh expressed the following opinion:

Helicopter evacuations saved the lives of other Marines. Doctors praised the flying skills and bravery of the evacuation pilots for these rescues. Quick responses to calls both day and night were crucial in the recovery of many Marines. Rear Admiral Lamont Pugh, Surgeon General of the U.S. Navy, highlighted the importance of helicopters and other factors that contributed to the success of medical support. After inspecting the Far East, including a visit to the 1st Marine Division during the battle of Bunker Hill, Admiral Pugh shared the following opinion:

... [I] attributed the new low record “2% mortality” of those men wounded in action to the bullet resistant vest, to skillful frontline surgery with availability of whole blood, the utilization of helicopters for casualty evacuation direct to hospital ships and rear area hospitals, and the efficient manner in which the Hospital Corpsmen of the Navy fulfilled their mission with the Marines.198

... [I] attributed the new low record “2% mortality” of those men wounded in action to the bullet-resistant vest, advanced frontline surgery with access to whole blood, the use of helicopters for direct evacuation to hospital ships and rear area hospitals, and the efficient way in which the Navy Hospital Corpsmen accomplished their mission alongside the Marines.198

198 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 12. p. 12-8.

198 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 12. p. 12-8.

In another logistical area, the performance was not quite as satisfactory, for the level of supply of one important item—illuminating shells—fell dangerously low during the Bunker fighting. On 16 August, 3/1 reported early in the morning that “artillery illumination was exhausted and 81mm mortar illumination was fast diminishing.”199 To replace the shell-produced light, the regiment used a flare plane.200

In another logistical area, the performance wasn't as good, because the supply of one crucial item—illuminating shells—dropped dangerously low during the Bunker fighting. On August 16, 3/1 reported early in the morning that “artillery illumination was exhausted and 81mm mortar illumination was running out fast.”199 To make up for the lack of shell-produced light, the regiment used a flare plane.200

199 3/1 ComdD, Aug 52, p. 4.

199 3/1 ComdD, Aug 52, p. 4.

200 Earlier, on 13 August, a flare drop requested by the 1st Marines went awry when the aircraft got off course and dropped the flares forward of the 5th Marines main line. 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 13 Aug 52.

200 Earlier, on August 13, a flare drop requested by the 1st Marines went wrong when the aircraft got off track and dropped the flares in front of the 5th Marines' main line. 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 13 Aug 52.

Ammunition supply appeared to be no problem to the Chinese. The rate and frequency of mortar and artillery fire proved that the enemy had a vast store of these shells. During the heavy fighting, the division observed that the enemy expended approximately 17,000 mortar and artillery rounds in the 11–16 August period of141 the battle. It was noted for the first time that the Chinese used mortars primarily in support of limited attacks.

Ammunition supply didn't seem to be an issue for the Chinese. The amount and frequency of mortar and artillery fire showed that the enemy had a large supply of these shells. During the intense fighting, the division noted that the enemy used about 17,000 mortar and artillery rounds from August 11 to 16 during141 the battle. It was observed for the first time that the Chinese mainly used mortars to support limited attacks.

About the enemy’s reliance on mortars and the technique of their employment, the 1st Marine Division reported:

About the enemy’s reliance on mortars and how they use them, the 1st Marine Division reported:

This was particularly true of his 60 and 82mm mortars, which are easily displaced forward and shifted to alternate positions. These light mortars were difficult to locate by our observers mainly because of the small size and limited development of their positions, and the fact that they are moved frequently. A large number of enemy mortars were fired from bunkers deep in the ground with only a narrow aperture at the top through which to fire. There were some instances, during the Battle of Bunker Hill, when the enemy brought his 60mm mortars out from cover on the forward slope and set them up in the open near the crest of the ridge. After delivering several rounds, the mortars would then displace quickly back to a covered position. During August, mortar fire averaged between 50 and 60 percent of the total incoming received by the 1st Marine Division.201

This was especially true of his 60mm and 82mm mortars, which could be easily moved forward and shifted to different positions. These light mortars were hard for our observers to spot mainly because of their small size and the limited development of their locations, as well as the fact that they were moved around frequently. Many enemy mortars were fired from bunkers deep underground with only a small opening at the top for firing. There were times, during the Battle of Bunker Hill, when the enemy moved their 60mm mortars out from cover on the forward slope and set them up in the open near the top of the ridge. After firing several rounds, the mortars would quickly relocate back to a sheltered position. In August, mortar fire made up about 50 to 60 percent of the total incoming fire received by the 1st Marine Division.201

201 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52, p. 2.

201 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52, p. 2.

Further information about the Chinese was also derived at this time, although not always directly associated with the battle. Deserters picked up in the left sectors of the 1st and 5th Marines on 12 and 13 August and papers taken from enemy dead on the 13th confirmed earlier-reported dispositions of Chinese units. One prisoner, from the artillery regiment of the 118th Division, the unit facing the major part of the 1st Marines line, indicated that another artillery regiment had been assigned to support his division. If true, this extra unit would account for both the increased Chinese fires in the Bunker area and the additional artillery emplacements that photo planes had spotted in the 118th Division sector. Infantry units of this division, the Marines observed, introduced no new techniques or equipment during the battle. Prior intelligence had provided the 1st Marines with typical enemy ground attack tactics. Neither the Chinese envelopment of Siberia, Stromboli, and Bunker nor the diversion against Hill 48A before the main attack on Hill 122 represented a departure from normal CCF practice.

Further information about the Chinese was also gathered at this time, although not always directly related to the battle. Deserted soldiers picked up in the left sectors of the 1st and 5th Marines on August 12 and 13, along with documents taken from enemy dead on the 13th, confirmed previously reported positions of Chinese units. One prisoner, from the artillery regiment of the 118th Division, which was facing most of the 1st Marines' line, mentioned that another artillery regiment had been assigned to support his division. If this is accurate, this extra unit would explain both the increased Chinese artillery fire in the Bunker area and the additional artillery positions that photo planes detected in the 118th Division sector. The Marines observed that infantry units of this division didn’t introduce any new techniques or equipment during the battle. Prior intelligence had already equipped the 1st Marines with information on typical enemy ground attack tactics. Neither the Chinese envelopment of Siberia, Stromboli, and Bunker nor the diversion against Hill 48A before the main attack on Hill 122 indicated a change from standard CCF practices.

Nor was the earlier Marine diversion new, but unlike the Chinese attempt, the 1st Marines tactic was successful. Just before the maneuver, the division pulled off another strategem, described by General Selden in a letter to General Shepherd:

Nor was the earlier Marine diversion new, but unlike the Chinese attempt, the 1st Marines' tactic was successful. Just before the maneuver, the division executed another strategy, as described by General Selden in a letter to General Shepherd:

I worked a ruse that morning which proved to be very profitable. Throughout the Eighth Army front, it had been routine to put on a strike,142 this to be followed by smoke, then a good artillery barrage, with troops following for the assault. This was done with the exception that there were no troops. The enemy, thinking that there were troops, opened up with everything. The only damage inflicted was on their own forces.... While they were firing on their own troops, we again opened fire with our artillery, just to help the situation along.202

I pulled off a trick that morning that turned out to be very beneficial. Across the Eighth Army front, it was standard practice to stage a strike, followed by smoke, then a solid artillery barrage, with soldiers moving in for the assault. This time, however, there were no soldiers. The enemy, believing there were troops, fired everything they had. The only harm done was to their own forces.... While they were shooting at their own troops, we fired our artillery again, just to stir things up a bit.

202 MajGen John T. Selden ltr to Gen Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr., dtd 14 Aug 52.

202 MajGen John T. Selden letter to Gen Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr., dated August 14, 1952.

One technique the Marines employed in the Bunker Hill battle was defense of the reverse (protected) side of the hill. Although counter to the usual American military practice, the reverse slope defense was required by the intense artillery and mortar fire massed upon the front slope defenders. As the 3/1 battalion commander later commented:

One technique the Marines used in the Bunker Hill battle was defending the back (protected) side of the hill. Even though this was against standard American military practice, the reverse slope defense became necessary due to the heavy artillery and mortar fire targeting the front slope defenders. As the 3/1 battalion commander later remarked:

It’s true, we suffered from the heavy incoming—but had we had to work replacements, casualties, and supplies all the way up to the (forward) military crest of Bunker—the losses would have been prohibitive. With the weight of the incoming and our inability to get greater infantry mass onto the battlefield at one time, a conventional defense would have been far more costly ... [after] the damage done to Baker Company in the [12 August] afternoon attack ... had we not gone into a reverse slope defense, we could not [have held] with the strength at hand.203

It’s true, we faced heavy incoming fire—but if we had to manage replacements, casualties, and supplies all the way up to the military crest of Bunker, the losses would have been too high. With the strain of incoming fire and our inability to deploy more infantry onto the battlefield all at once, a traditional defense would have been much more expensive ... [after] the damage done to Baker Company in the [12 August] afternoon attack ... if we hadn’t switched to a reverse slope defense, we wouldn’t have been able to hold our ground with the strength we had.203

203 Armitage ltr and draft MS comments, p. 7. For further details of the Bunker Hill action, see Armitage ltr in v. V, Korean comment file.

203 Armitage letter and draft manuscript comments, p. 7. For more details about the Bunker Hill action, see Armitage letter in vol. V, Korean comment file.

On the other hand, a tactical weakness of the reverse slope defense, that “plagued us until the end of the battle,”204 was the fact that the 1st Marines initial gain was not more fully exploited. As the battalion commander explained:

On the other hand, a tactical weakness of the reverse slope defense, that “plagued us until the end of the battle,”204 was that the 1st Marines' initial gains were not more thoroughly utilized. As the battalion commander explained:

204 Ibid., p. 8.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 8.

To be successful, in a reverse slope defense, the defender must immediately counterattack, retake and reoccupy the forward slope of the position as soon as enemy pressure diminishes. Because of the incoming and primarily because of our overextension in regiment, we ... [employed] piecemeal commitment ... and fed units into the battle by company, where we should have employed our entire battalion in counterattacks to punish the withdrawing force and restore the forward slope. To the very end, lack of decisive strength prevented this. We stayed on the reverse slope all the way, except for brief forays to the forward slope.205

To succeed in a reverse slope defense, the defender must quickly counterattack and reclaim the forward slope of the position as soon as the enemy pressure lessens. Due to the incoming forces and primarily our overextension in the regiment, we ... [employed] a piecemeal commitment ... and sent units into the battle by company when we should have used our entire battalion for counterattacks to hit the retreating force and restore the forward slope. Until the very end, the lack of decisive strength held us back. We remained on the reverse slope the entire time, except for brief excursions to the forward slope.205

205 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Some officers felt, in retrospect, that a more feasible solution during the August battle might have been to move all three battalions on line—3/1, 1/1, and 2/1, with the reserve battalion143 (1/1) deployed on a narrow front. This would have provided decisive strength on Bunker and the MLR behind it to give greater depth counterattack capability, and better control at the point where needed.206 Departure from standard doctrine by employment of the reverse slope defense furthered the existing controversy as to the best method of ground organization in the division sector. But it was to be some months before a change would be effected.207

Some officers later thought that a more practical solution during the August battle could have been to position all three battalions in line—3/1, 1/1, and 2/1, with the reserve battalion143 (1/1) spread out across a narrow front. This would have provided strong support on Bunker and the main line of resistance behind it, improving the depth of counterattack capabilities and allowing for better control where it was most needed.206 Straying from standard practices by using the reverse slope defense intensified the ongoing debate about the best way to organize ground forces in the division sector. However, it would take several months before any changes were made.207

206 Ibid., p. 9.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 9.

207 As the military situation changed in Korea to become increasingly one of a battle of position and attrition, the Marine Corps Basic School, Quantico, Va. curriculum was revised to give greater emphasis to tactics of positional warfare. Close attention was paid to terrain evaluation, employment of infantry units, offensive and defensive use of automatic and supporting weapons, night counterattacks, field problems of reverse slope defense, and even tasks of “research into WW I—and the American Civil and Revolutionary Wars for the tactic of Reverse Slope defense.” Armitage ltr.

207 As the military situation in Korea shifted to a more positional and attritional battle, the curriculum at the Marine Corps Basic School in Quantico, Va. was updated to focus more on the tactics of positional warfare. There was a strong emphasis on evaluating terrain, utilizing infantry units, offensively and defensively using automatic and supporting weapons, conducting night counterattacks, addressing field issues related to reverse slope defense, and even studying tactics from WW I, as well as the American Civil and Revolutionary Wars for insights into reverse slope defense tactics. Armitage ltr.

Tank, artillery, air, and ground Marines participating in the battle of Bunker Hill gave up one outpost but took another, one that added strength not only to the outpost defense but also to the main line. A well thought-out plan and its skillful execution permitted Marines to take the critical terrain quickly without crippling casualties. Defense of the position on Hill 122 was complicated not so much by the Chinese infantry action but by the intensive mortar and artillery shelling. The Marines’ capability to defend was enhanced by close coordination among artillery, air, and tank units. Chinese casualties, by estimate, were 500 percent more than the losses actually suffered by the Marines. The battle of Bunker Hill resulted in the first major Marine action and victory in West Korea. It ushered in two straight months of hard fighting, the most difficult ones yet for Marines on the western front.

Tank, artillery, air, and ground Marines involved in the battle of Bunker Hill lost one outpost but captured another, which strengthened both the outpost defense and the main line. A well-planned strategy and its effective execution allowed the Marines to seize the critical terrain quickly with minimal casualties. Defending the position on Hill 122 was complicated not as much by the Chinese infantry actions but by the heavy mortar and artillery bombardment. The Marines' ability to defend was boosted by close coordination among artillery, air, and tank units. Chinese casualties were estimated to be 500 percent higher than the losses endured by the Marines. The battle of Bunker Hill marked the first major Marine engagement and victory in West Korea. It initiated two straight months of intense fighting, the toughest yet for the Marines on the western front.


From the Center Sector to the Right—Early September Outpost Clashes—Korean COPs Hit Again—More Enemy Assaults in Late September—Chinese Intensify Their Outpost Attacks—More PRESSURE, More CAS, More Accomplishments—Rockets, Resupply, and Radios

From the Center Sector to the Right—Early September Outpost Clashes—Korean COPs Hit Again—More Enemy Assaults in Late September—Chinese Intensify Their Outpost Attacks—More PRESSURE, More CAS, More Accomplishments—Rockets, Resupply, and Radios

From the Center Sector to the Right208

208 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 661–675, dtd 18–31 Aug 52; 1stMar, 5thMar, 2/1, 3/1 ComdDs, Aug 52.

208 Unless otherwise specified, the information in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 661–675, dated 18–31 Aug 52; 1stMar, 5thMar, 2/1, 3/1 ComdDs, Aug 52.

Following the progressively faltering Chinese attacks against Bunker Hill in mid-August, the 1st Marines in the center MLR sector witnessed a period of decreased enemy activity. By sunup on the 17th, Captain Ksycewski’s Company C, from Lieutenant Colonel King’s 1st Battalion had relieved B/1/1, marking the second complete tour of duty at Hill 122 for Company B that month. In two days on the shell-torn crest, Company C received only a single enemy probe and only a few rounds of artillery and mortar fire. In the early morning hours of the 19th, D/2/1 assumed responsibility for Bunker and Hill 124. These new occupants of the disputed property almost immediately were subjected to larger and more frequent Chinese probes as well as increased fire from CCF supporting weapons.

After the increasingly ineffective Chinese attacks on Bunker Hill in mid-August, the 1st Marines in the center MLR sector experienced a drop in enemy activity. By dawn on the 17th, Captain Ksycewski’s Company C, from Lieutenant Colonel King’s 1st Battalion, had replaced B/1/1, marking Company B's second complete tour of duty at Hill 122 that month. In the two days on the battle-scarred summit, Company C faced only one enemy probe and a few rounds of artillery and mortar fire. In the early hours of the 19th, D/2/1 took over responsibilities for Bunker and Hill 124. The new occupants of the contested area were quickly subjected to larger and more frequent Chinese probes, along with increased fire from CCF supporting weapons.

Enemy ground action was directed against the Marine flank, especially the right. Four Chinese infantrymen attempted to infiltrate this corner of the Bunker Hill defenses just before sunrise on 23 August. One even made his way to the top of Hill 122 where he fired downhill at several Marine defenders, wounding one. A moment later this lone Chinese’s reconnaissance efforts was rewarded by a fatal hit from a Marine sniper’s rifle.

Enemy ground action targeted the Marine flank, particularly the right side. Four Chinese infantrymen tried to sneak into this part of the Bunker Hill defenses just before sunrise on August 23. One of them even reached the top of Hill 122, where he shot down at several Marine defenders, injuring one. Moments later, this lone Chinese soldier's reconnaissance efforts ended with a fatal shot from a Marine sniper.

146

146

Captain Moody’s Company F next took over the two-hill complex. That night, the 24th, the Chinese shelled the two hills and probed their defenses but again showed no inclination to press an attack. On the following night, however, the Chinese became more aggressive. At dusk, two squads charged the right flank of Bunker Hill, threw hand grenades, and fired their submachine guns briefly at the Marines. The enemy then retired, but about an hour afterwards, a force estimated at two-company strength assaulted the outpost defenses from the center to the right. At the same time, enemy shells began exploding around these Marine positions. Captain Moody called for artillery and tank fire on the attackers. Pushing forward, the Communist infantrymen forced a small opening in the defense perimeter; by this time, a standby platoon on the MLR was moving forward to strengthen the Bunker garrison. Upon arrival of the Marine reinforcements, at midnight, the Chinese soldiers withdrew. Simultaneously, the incoming artillery and mortar fire diminished, and in less than a half hour all firing had ceased.

Captain Moody's Company F next took over the two-hill complex. That night, the 24th, the Chinese shelled the two hills and tested their defenses but again showed no signs of launching an attack. However, on the following night, the Chinese became more aggressive. At dusk, two squads charged the right flank of Bunker Hill, threw hand grenades, and briefly fired their submachine guns at the Marines. The enemy then pulled back, but about an hour later, a force estimated to be the size of two companies assaulted the outpost defenses from the center to the right. At the same time, enemy shells began exploding around these Marine positions. Captain Moody called for artillery and tank fire on the attackers. As the Communist infantry pushed forward, they forced a small opening in the defense perimeter; by this time, a standby platoon on the MLR was moving forward to reinforce the Bunker garrison. When the Marine reinforcements arrived at midnight, the Chinese soldiers withdrew. Simultaneously, the incoming artillery and mortar fire decreased, and in less than half an hour, all firing had stopped.

After the enemy had pulled back, Company F sent its platoon out to reoccupy a forward listening position temporarily abandoned during the second attack. Chinese soldiers immediately contested this advance and, after a local fire fight, caused the Marines to retire once more. That action ended the significant Bunker Hill action in August. In the spirited infantry fighting and artillery dueling during the night of 25–26 August, Marines suffered 65 casualties, including 8 killed. The Chinese losses were estimated at 100 killed and 170 wounded. Supporting arms fire had contributed largely to the high casualty figures on both sides.

After the enemy pulled back, Company F sent its platoon to retake a forward listening position that had been temporarily abandoned during the second attack. Chinese soldiers immediately challenged this move, and after a brief firefight, forced the Marines to retreat again. That action marked the end of the significant Bunker Hill engagement in August. In the intense fighting and artillery exchanges on the night of August 25–26, the Marines suffered 65 casualties, including 8 fatalities. The estimated Chinese losses were 100 killed and 170 wounded. Supporting fire played a major role in the high casualty numbers for both sides.

During August, whenever a lull had occurred in Colonel Layer’s 1st Marines embattled sector, it almost invariably signaled a step-up of Chinese action elsewhere along the 1st Marine Division MLR. When frustrated in their attacks against the positions held by the 1st Marines, the enemy invariably turned his attention to the right of the line, manned since June by the 5th Marines. During August the Chinese seized three outposts forward of the 2/5209 right battalion line, which it had been the Marine practice to man during daylight hours only. The trio, forming a diagonal line southwest to northeast, in front of the battalion sector were Elmer, Hilda, and Irene.

During August, whenever there was a pause in Colonel Layer’s 1st Marines' battle zone, it almost always meant that the Chinese were ramping up their action somewhere else along the 1st Marine Division's MLR. When they faced setbacks in their attacks on the positions held by the 1st Marines, they usually shifted their focus to the right side of the line, which had been held by the 5th Marines since June. In August, the Chinese captured three outposts in front of the 2/5209 right battalion line, which the Marines had only manned during the day. The three outposts, positioned in a diagonal line from southwest to northeast, in front of the battalion sector, were named Elmer, Hilda, and Irene.

147

147

209 Command responsibility for this sector changed on 20 August, when Lieutenant Colonel William S. McLaughlin took over the battalion from Lieutenant Colonel Cross.

209 Command responsibility for this sector changed on August 20, when Lieutenant Colonel William S. McLaughlin took over the battalion from Lieutenant Colonel Cross.

After dusk on 6 August the enemy had advanced to COP Elmer, on the far southwest end, and by skillful coordination of their infantry and supporting fires denied the position to the Marines approaching to reoccupy the outpost early the next morning. An hour before midnight on 11 August, another 2/5 patrol had attempted to temporarily occupy Hilda, in the center, during the diversionary fires supporting the Bunker Hill attack. As the Marines neared the outpost, however, they discovered the Chinese had already occupied it. Enemy mortar and artillery fire drove the patrol back to its own lines.

After dark on August 6, the enemy had moved up to COP Elmer, at the far southwest end, and by expertly coordinating their infantry and support fire, they prevented the Marines from reclaiming the outpost early the next morning. An hour before midnight on August 11, another 2/5 patrol tried to temporarily take Hilda, in the center, during the diversionary fire supporting the Bunker Hill attack. However, as the Marines got closer to the outpost, they found that the Chinese were already there. Enemy mortar and artillery fire forced the patrol to retreat back to their own lines.

A similar situation occurred at dawn on 17 August, when the Marine outpost detail moved forward to occupy Irene during daylight hours and found the Chinese already on the position. Enemy troops fired at the Marines, pinning them down.210 Although two rescue units were dispatched to support the Marines, CCF fire interdicted their route of approach. When it became evident the second reinforcement party could not reach its objective, the outpost detail was ordered to pull back to the MLR. The Chinese continued to occupy Irene, the last outpost lost in August, for the remainder of the 2/5 tour on line.

A similar situation happened at dawn on August 17, when the Marine outpost team moved in to take over Irene during the day and found the Chinese already there. Enemy troops fired at the Marines, keeping them pinned down.210 Even though two rescue units were sent to help the Marines, CCF fire blocked their way. When it became clear that the second reinforcement group couldn't reach its goal, the outpost team was ordered to fall back to the MLR. The Chinese continued to hold Irene, the last outpost lost in August, for the rest of the 2/5 tour in the field.

210 To escape the murderous hostile fire, the Marines sought shelter in a trench nearby. During the ensuing clash, a Chinese grenade landed in the midst of the Marines. Private First Class Robert E. Simanek, E/2/5, unhesitatingly threw himself upon the deadly missile an instant before it exploded. Although gravely wounded, his courageous action prevented injury or death to fellow patrol members. The following year, President Dwight D. Eisenhower presented the Medal of Honor to the Detroit, Michigan Marine for his “daring initiative and great personal valor.”

210 To escape the deadly enemy fire, the Marines took cover in a nearby trench. During the intense fight, a Chinese grenade fell right among the Marines. Private First Class Robert E. Simanek, E/2/5, immediately threw himself on the explosive just seconds before it detonated. Although seriously injured, his brave act saved his fellow patrol members from injury or death. The following year, President Dwight D. Eisenhower awarded the Medal of Honor to the Detroit, Michigan Marine for his “daring initiative and great personal valor.”

For the remainder of August the Chinese were apparently content to hold what they had gained without immediately seeking additional positions. As a result, operations along the front were mostly limited to patrol action. Chinese infantry units, usually no larger than a squad, regularly fired on Marine patrols, engaging them for a short period from afar, and then quickly breaking off the contact. Seldom was this small unit action supported by artillery or mortars.

For the rest of August, the Chinese seemed satisfied to maintain what they had captured without trying to take more territory right away. As a result, most activities along the front were limited to patrols. Chinese infantry units, typically no bigger than a squad, frequently shot at Marine patrols, confronting them for a brief time from a distance before quickly retreating. This small unit action was rarely supported by artillery or mortars.

On two occasions late in the month, however, the Chinese showed more spirit. Both encounters took place during the early evening hours of 22 August when Chinese patrols came upon two different Company F ambushes operating forward of the 2/5 sector. Heavy casualties were suffered by both sides.

On two occasions late in the month, however, the Chinese showed more determination. Both encounters happened in the early evening of August 22 when Chinese patrols stumbled upon two separate ambushes set by Company F ahead of the 2/5 sector. Both sides experienced heavy casualties.

The next day a brief but heavy period of rainfall began with nine inches recorded between 23–25 August. Although the flooding conditions in the division sector were not so extensive as the July rains, they curtailed ground activity considerably and air action to a lesser148 degree. Division roads were badly damaged but not trenches and bunkers, strengthened as a result of the experience with the July floods. High waters made the ferry inoperable at the Honker Bridge site and also washed out Widgeon Bridge, where the Imjin crested to 42.5 feet. If the sudden flash floods wreaked havoc with some of the Marine division installations, the Chinese were the recipients of similar disfavors; intelligence indicated that damage to the CCF frontline positions was even more severe than to the JAMESTOWN defenses.211

The next day, a short but intense rainfall started, with nine inches recorded between August 23 and 25. Although the flooding conditions in the division sector weren’t as severe as during the July rains, they significantly limited ground activity and had a lesser impact on air operations. The division roads were heavily damaged, but trenches and bunkers, which were reinforced after the July floods, remained intact. Rising waters made the ferry at Honker Bridge unusable and also washed out Widgeon Bridge, where the Imjin River peaked at 42.5 feet. While the sudden flash floods caused disruption to some of the Marine division facilities, the Chinese faced similar problems; intelligence reports indicated that damage to the CCF frontline positions was even worse than to the JAMestown defenses.148

211 1stMarDiv PIR 669, dtd 25 Aug 52.

211 1stMarDiv PIR 669, dated 25 Aug 52.

The end of August saw the relief of General Selden as Commanding General, 1st Marine Division. He was succeeded on the 29th by Major General Edwin A. Pollock. A brief ceremony at division headquarters, attended by senior officers of EUSAK and KMC, marked the event. Earlier that month, in recognition of his services to the Korean defense, President of the Republic of Korea, Syngman Rhee, had awarded General Selden the Order of Military Merit, Taiguk, the highest Korean award.

The end of August brought relief for General Selden as the Commanding General of the 1st Marine Division. He was succeeded on the 29th by Major General Edwin A. Pollock. A short ceremony at division headquarters, attended by senior officers of EUSAK and KMC, marked the occasion. Earlier that month, in recognition of his contributions to the defense of Korea, the President of the Republic of Korea, Syngman Rhee, awarded General Selden the Order of Military Merit, Taiguk, the highest honor in Korea.

The new division commander, General Pollock212 had commanded the 2d Marine Division at Camp Lejeune, North Carolina just prior to his Korean tour. He had more than 30 years of military experience. During World War II, he had participated in no fewer than five major campaigns in the Pacific, including the first at Guadalcanal, where he earned a Navy Cross, and one of the war’s most costly battles, Iwo Jima. Following the war, he had served at Marine Corps Schools, Quantico, in command and staff assignments, and later at Headquarters Marine Corps where in July 1949, he had received his first star.

The new division commander, General Pollock212 had led the 2nd Marine Division at Camp Lejeune, North Carolina just before his tour in Korea. He had over 30 years of military experience. During World War II, he took part in at least five major campaigns in the Pacific, including the first at Guadalcanal, where he earned a Navy Cross, and one of the war’s most significant battles, Iwo Jima. After the war, he served at Marine Corps Schools, Quantico, in various command and staff roles, and later at Headquarters Marine Corps, where he received his first star in July 1949.

212 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of MajGen Edwin A. Pollock, Jan 56, rev.

212 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of MajGen Edwin A. Pollock, Jan 56, rev.

Early September Outpost Clashes213

213 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, 2/1, 3/1, 2/5, 3/5 ComdDs, Sep 52; KMC Regt UnitRpts 188–189, dtd 6–7 Sep 52.

213 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, 2/1, 3/1, 2/5, 3/5 ComdDs, Sep 52; KMC Regt UnitRpts 188–189, dated 6–7 Sep 52.

The new division commander shortly received a first-hand demonstration of the ferocity and persistence of the Chinese Communists opposite his division. On 4 September, the enemy suddenly stepped up his activities which had recently been limited to sporadic probes149 and occasional artillery fire against Bunker Hill. At 2030 that date Captain Moak, E/2/1, commanding officer at the Bunker outpost, reported that an artillery preparation was falling on his positions. Ten minutes later he radioed 3/1214 that an enemy platoon was vigorously probing his right flank. When Company E Marines returned a heavy volume of small arms fire, the enemy retired.

The new division commander quickly got a first-hand look at the intensity and determination of the Chinese Communists facing his division. On September 4, the enemy suddenly increased their activities, which had recently been limited to occasional probes149 and some sporadic artillery fire against Bunker Hill. At 8:30 PM that day, Captain Moak, the commanding officer of E/2/1 at the Bunker outpost, reported that artillery was landing on his positions. Ten minutes later, he radioed 3/1214 to say that an enemy platoon was aggressively probing his right flank. When the Marines from Company E returned heavy small arms fire, the enemy withdrew.

214 Normally a component of the 2d Battalion, Company E had been attached to the 3d Battalion on 1 September when the company took over the Bunker Hill outpost. The relieved Company H was then attached to 2/1, the reserve battalion, from 1–3 September.

214 Normally part of the 2nd Battalion, Company E was assigned to the 3rd Battalion on September 1 when the company took over the Bunker Hill outpost. The relieved Company H was then assigned to 2/1, the reserve battalion, from September 1 to September 3.

This Chinese withdrawal was only temporary, for the initial probe proved the forerunner of more serious activity. Again at 0100 on 5 September a heavy deluge of Chinese mortar and artillery began raining on Hill 122. The intense preparation had apparently convinced the Chinese attacking force that they had eliminated resistance at the Marine outpost, for their soldiers walked upright toward Marine positions, without bothering to make any attempts at concealment. After discovering that a stout defense was still being maintained at Bunker, the Chinese again withdrew and reorganized.

This Chinese withdrawal was only temporary, as the initial probe turned out to be the precursor to more serious activity. Again at 1 AM on September 5, a heavy barrage of Chinese mortar and artillery started falling on Hill 122. The intense preparation had apparently convinced the Chinese attacking force that they had removed any resistance at the Marine outpost, as their soldiers advanced upright toward Marine positions, not even trying to hide. After realizing that a strong defense was still being held at the bunker, the Chinese withdrew and reorganized once more.

When they resumed the attack, the Chinese used considerably greater caution. This time, in addition to small arms, automatic weapons fire, and a hail of grenades, their assault was supported by artillery and mortars. The results of this concerted effort were not too rewarding, however. Assaults on the center of Hill 122 were repulsed and attempts to crack the left perimeter of Company E’s defenses were even more speedily beaten back. A number of Chinese attempting to outflank the E/2/1 defenders inadvertently strayed too far to the right of the outpost and found themselves advancing against the MLR south of Hill 122.

When they launched the attack again, the Chinese were much more cautious. This time, along with small arms and automatic gunfire, they also unleashed a barrage of grenades, and their assault was backed by artillery and mortars. However, the results of this coordinated effort were not very successful. Assaults on the center of Hill 122 were driven back, and attempts to breach the left perimeter of Company E’s defenses were even more quickly repelled. Several Chinese soldiers trying to flank the E/2/1 defenders accidentally wandered too far to the right of the outpost and found themselves advancing against the MLR south of Hill 122.

When JAMESTOWN forces engaged these wanderers by fire, the latter quickly realized their mistake and wheeled left for a hasty retreat. They immediately came under fire of their own troops, some of whom had meanwhile penetrated 60 yards into the extreme right of the Bunker positions. At this point, Captain Moak’s Company E launched a counterattack and restored its positions on the right. This action forced a general withdrawal of the Chinese force, which the Marines estimated at battalion strength. Lieutenant Colonel Sidney J. Altman215 subsequently advised division headquarters that his men had killed 30 enemy soldiers and estimated that as150 many as 305 were probably wounded. This high rate of casualties was attributed, in part, to the enemy’s mistaken sense of direction, their direct walking approach which had made them easy standing targets, and to the box-me-in artillery fires supporting the defenders. Marine losses were 12 killed and 40 wounded, caused mostly by Chinese mortars and artillery.

When JAMESTOWN forces engaged these wanderers with gunfire, they quickly realized their mistake and turned left to make a fast retreat. They soon came under fire from their own troops, some of whom had pushed 60 yards into the far right of the Bunker positions. At this moment, Captain Moak’s Company E launched a counterattack and regained control of its positions on the right. This action forced a general withdrawal of the Chinese force, which the Marines estimated to be at battalion strength. Lieutenant Colonel Sidney J. Altman215 later informed division headquarters that his men had killed 30 enemy soldiers and estimated that as150 many as 305 were probably wounded. This high casualty rate was attributed, in part, to the enemy’s mistaken sense of direction, their straightforward approach which made them easy targets, and to the box-me-in artillery fire supporting the defenders. Marine losses included 12 killed and 40 wounded, primarily due to Chinese mortars and artillery.

215 On 20 August Lieutenant Colonel Altman became the commander of 3/1 in relief of Lieutenant Colonel Armitage.

215 On August 20, Lieutenant Colonel Altman took over as the commander of 3/1, relieving Lieutenant Colonel Armitage.

Although the left battalion area was the center of attention in the 1st Marines line early on 5 September, the far right sector was not entirely neglected either. Five minutes after their initial attack on Bunker, other Chinese units also lunged at the Hill 48A outpost, Stromboli. An estimated reinforced platoon, supported by three active machine guns on Hill 104, 850 yards to the north, employed submachine guns, rifles, and grenades in their attack. This battle lasted for nearly two hours, until the Chinese soldiers withdrew at 0240. There were no Marine losses. No tally or estimate was made on the number of enemy KIA or WIA. It was presumed that some of the Communists did become casualties since the three machine guns that had been chattering away to support the attacker’s ground action suddenly went silent after Marines called down mortar and artillery fire on the Hill 104 positions.

Although the left battalion area was the focus for the 1st Marines early on September 5, the far right sector wasn't completely overlooked either. Five minutes after their initial assault on Bunker, other Chinese units also launched an attack on the Hill 48A outpost, Stromboli. An estimated reinforced platoon, backed by three active machine guns on Hill 104, 850 yards to the north, used submachine guns, rifles, and grenades in their assault. This fight went on for nearly two hours, until the Chinese soldiers pulled back at 0240. There were no Marine casualties. No count or estimate was made on the number of enemy killed or wounded. It was assumed that some of the Communists suffered casualties because the three machine guns that had been firing to support the attackers suddenly went quiet after the Marines called in mortar and artillery fire on the Hill 104 positions.

The probes of 1st Marines positions at Bunker Hill and, to a lesser degree, at Stromboli were repeated in the 5th Marines right regimental sector. At almost exactly the same time Colonel Eustace R. Smoak’s regiment216 was struck at five of its forward outposts. In the case of OP Gary, on the right, the enemy merely shelled the position for 40 minutes. Against the four other outposts, known as Allen, Bruce, Clarence, and Felix, the Chinese employed both fire and assault troops. (See Map 12.) At Felix the action had begun at 0130, a half hour later than at the adjacent outposts. The difference was probably due to a C/1/5 ambush217 which had engaged an enemy force operating between Donald and Felix. After a brief five minute fire fight the Marines broke off the action, pulling back to Felix. The other three outposts, clustered to the left of the 3/5 sector, received the brunt of the enemy thrust which lasted for an hour and 20 minutes before the Communists withdrew.

The attacks on the 1st Marines' positions at Bunker Hill and, to a lesser extent, at Stromboli were repeated in the 5th Marines' right regimental sector. Almost simultaneously, Colonel Eustace R. Smoak’s regiment216 was hit at five of its forward outposts. At OP Gary, on the right, the enemy simply shelled the position for 40 minutes. Against the other four outposts, known as Allen, Bruce, Clarence, and Felix, the Chinese used both artillery and assault troops. (See Map 12.) The action at Felix began at 0130, half an hour later than at the nearby outposts. This delay was likely due to a C/1/5 ambush217 that engaged an enemy force operating between Donald and Felix. After a brief five-minute firefight, the Marines pulled back to Felix. The other three outposts, grouped to the left of the 3/5 sector, took the bulk of the enemy attack, which lasted for an hour and 20 minutes before the Communists withdrew.

151

151

216 Colonel Smoak had relieved Colonel Culhane on 15 August.

216 Colonel Smoak took over from Colonel Culhane on August 15.

217 Although 1/5 (Lieutenant Colonel Alexander W. Gentleman) was the regimental reserve at this time, the regiment had assigned one company to 2/5, manning the right sector.

217 Although 1/5 (Lieutenant Colonel Alexander W. Gentleman) was the regimental reserve at this time, the regiment had assigned one company to 2/5, covering the right sector.

MAP 12 K. WHITE

MAP 12 K. WHITE

COMBAT OUTPOSTS AND AMBUSH SITES

Combat outposts and ambush locations

5TH MARINES SECTOR

5TH MARINES AREA

(Division Right)

(Division Right)

Early September 1952

Early September 1952

152

152

Employing a squad against both Allen and Clarence, and sending a reinforced company against Bruce, the enemy alternately assaulted and shelled the positions until 0420, after which the Communist units policed the battlefield for casualties and withdrew to the north.

Using a team to attack both Allen and Clarence, and sending a strengthened company against Bruce, the enemy took turns assaulting and bombarding the positions until 4:20 AM, after which the Communist units combed the battlefield for casualties and pulled back to the north.

Although there was no official estimate of enemy losses, one Marine at outpost Bruce was credited with inflicting approximately 200 casualties by fire from two machine guns, a carbine, and grenades. He was Private First Class Alford L. McLaughlin, of I/3/5, who was later to receive the Medal of Honor for “conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity.” Another Marine from the same company was posthumously awarded the medal. Private First Class Fernando L. Garcia, although gravely wounded, had thrown himself on a hostile grenade to save the life of his platoon sergeant during the Chinese rush to take OP Bruce.

Although there was no official estimate of enemy losses, one Marine at outpost Bruce was credited with causing around 200 casualties using two machine guns, a carbine, and grenades. He was Private First Class Alford L. McLaughlin, from I/3/5, who would later receive the Medal of Honor for “conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity.” Another Marine from the same company was awarded the medal posthumously. Private First Class Fernando L. Garcia, despite being severely wounded, had thrown himself on a hostile grenade to save his platoon sergeant during the Chinese rush to take OP Bruce.

At daybreak the I/3/5 defenders at Bruce, commanded by Captain Edward Y. Holt, Jr., were confronted by an almost unbelievable scene of destruction. All of the bunkers on the forward side of the hill had been destroyed by Chinese mortar and artillery; on the reverse slope, only two had escaped ruination. Marine losses were 32 dead and wounded.218 To restore the position the 3/5 commander, Lieutenant Colonel Oscar T. Jensen, Jr., directed replacements forward immediately. Carrying emergency supplies, including building materials, the relief element reached Bruce about 1000. Evacuation of casualties was the first task and at 1045 the relieved detail was on its way back to the MLR. Later that day a supply party reached the outpost, having been temporarily delayed by Chinese interdicting fire.

At daybreak, the I/3/5 defenders at Bruce, led by Captain Edward Y. Holt, Jr., faced an almost unbelievable scene of destruction. All the bunkers on the front side of the hill had been destroyed by Chinese mortar and artillery; on the back slope, only two had survived. Marine losses totaled 32 dead and wounded. To regain the position, the 3/5 commander, Lieutenant Colonel Oscar T. Jensen, Jr., immediately sent in reinforcements. Carrying emergency supplies, including building materials, the relief team reached Bruce around 1000. Evacuating casualties was the first priority, and by 1045, the relieved party was on its way back to the MLR. Later that day, a supply team arrived at the outpost, having been temporarily held up by Chinese fire.

218 Still another award of the Medal of Honor was to come out of the action that ended on 5 September. Hospitalman Third Class Edward C. Benfold had ministered aid to several wounded Marines and was searching for others who needed medical attention when he saw two wounded Marines in a shell crater. Just as he neared its edge two grenades fell into it and two Chinese prepared to assault the Marines. “Picking up a grenade in each hand, Benfold leaped out of the crater and hurled himself against the onrushing hostile soldiers, pushing the grenades against their chests and killing both.... He gallantly gave his life for his country.” Medal of Honor citation, case of Hospital Corpsman Third Class Edward C. Benfold, USN, 4168234.

218 Still another award of the Medal of Honor would come from the action that ended on September 5. Hospitalman Third Class Edward C. Benfold had provided care to several wounded Marines and was looking for others who needed medical help when he spotted two injured Marines in a shell crater. Just as he got close to the edge, two grenades fell into it, and two Chinese soldiers were preparing to attack the Marines. “Picking up a grenade in each hand, Benfold jumped out of the crater and threw himself at the approaching enemy soldiers, pressing the grenades against their chests and killing both.... He bravely gave his life for his country.” Medal of Honor citation, case of Hospital Corpsman Third Class Edward C. Benfold, USN, 4168234.

Reinforcement of Bruce and the repair of its defenses were considerably slowed by the continuous rain of enemy projectiles during daylight. Marine and USAF pilots bombed and napalmed enemy bunkers and troops north of JAMESTOWN in the 5th Marines sector. Ten air strikes were executed in support of the 5th Marines that day.

Reinforcing Bruce and fixing its defenses were significantly delayed by the constant rain of enemy projectiles during the day. Marine and Air Force pilots bombed and used napalm on enemy bunkers and troops north of JAMESTOWN in the 5th Marines sector. Ten airstrikes were carried out in support of the 5th Marines that day.

153

153

Early on 6 September, 10 minutes after midnight, long-range machine gun fire, buttressed by artillery and mortars, hit outpost Bruce. After 35 minutes the firing subsided, but again at 0305 the outpost experienced a heavy rate of incoming. At about this time, the Communist soldiers massed for an assault on the battered position. Marine defenders called down the artillery box, and the Chinese dispersed.

Early on September 6, 10 minutes after midnight, long-range machine gun fire, supported by artillery and mortars, hit Outpost Bruce. After 35 minutes, the firing eased off, but at 3:05 AM, the outpost faced intense incoming fire again. Around this time, the Communist soldiers gathered for an assault on the weakened position. Marine defenders called in artillery strikes, and the Chinese troops scattered.

That evening, at 1915, the outpost commander reported that the Chinese had again resumed a steady shelling of the position. The bombardment continued for an hour. After these heavy preparatory fires, a wave of enemy infantry began scrambling up the sides of Bruce. At the same time, outpost Allen to the left came under long-range fire from enemy strongholds to the west and north. After the Chinese made their initial rush against Bruce, a second and third attack fared no better. Each was met and repulsed by the 5th Marines.

That evening, at 7:15 PM, the outpost commander reported that the Chinese had started shelling the position again. The bombardment lasted for an hour. After this intense artillery fire, a wave of enemy infantry began scrambling up the sides of Bruce. At the same time, outpost Allen on the left came under long-range fire from enemy strongholds to the west and north. After the Chinese launched their first attack on Bruce, the second and third attempts were just as unsuccessful. Each was met and pushed back by the 5th Marines.

After the third abortive attack, a period of deathly stillness descended upon the contested hill. Occasionally, an enemy mortar round found its mark among the scattered, splintered bunker timbers and the caved-in trenches, which connected the sandbag and lumber positions. At 0145 on the 7th, the Chinese interrupted the uneasy peace that had settled upon Bruce with a brief, heavy preparatory fire.

After the third failed attack, a heavy silence fell over the disputed hill. Occasionally, an enemy mortar shell struck amidst the broken bunker debris and the collapsed trenches that linked the sandbag and wood positions. At 1:45 AM on the 7th, the Chinese broke the tense calm that had settled on Bruce with a short but intense bombardment.

Exactly an hour later, an estimated two Chinese companies advanced up the forward slopes, using demolitions to destroy any friendly bunkers their artillery and mortar had not earlier completely wrecked. By the time this newest assault had raged for 30 minutes, nearly every 3/5 defender had become a casualty. Still the Marines refused to give ground, dealing first with the forward slope assault by the Chinese and later with those who attempted to envelop the Marines on the reverse side. On the MLR Marines first observed enemy flares falling between outpost Bruce and Line JAMESTOWN. Soon thereafter the Chinese policed the battlefield. By 0400 the Communists retired, and the fight for this key outpost had ended in failure.

Exactly an hour later, about two Chinese companies moved up the front slopes, using explosives to eliminate any friendly bunkers that their artillery and mortars hadn’t already destroyed. By the time this latest attack had been going for 30 minutes, nearly every 3/5 defender had become a casualty. Still, the Marines refused to give up ground, first dealing with the Chinese assault on the front slope and later handling those who tried to surround them on the back side. On the MLR, Marines first noticed enemy flares dropping between outpost Bruce and Line JAMESTOWN. Soon after, the Chinese cleaned up the battlefield. By 0400, the Communists retreated, and the battle for this crucial outpost ended in failure.

During the 51-hour siege of Outpost Bruce, 19 Marines had been killed and 38 wounded. At the adjacent 5th Marines outposts, additional losses were 5 killed and 32 wounded. More than 200 enemy dead were counted. During the last eight hours of the vicious, close-in fighting at Bruce, it was estimated that another 200 Chinese had been wounded.

During the 51-hour siege of Outpost Bruce, 19 Marines were killed and 38 were injured. At the nearby 5th Marines outposts, there were an additional 5 killed and 32 wounded. More than 200 enemy soldiers were counted as dead. In the final eight hours of the brutal, intense fighting at Bruce, it was estimated that another 200 Chinese soldiers were wounded.

154

154

MAP 13 K. White

MAP 13 K. White

COMBAT OUTPOSTS

Forward operating bases

KMC SECTOR

KMC District

(Division Left)

(Division Left)

5–7 September 1952

5–7 Sept 1952

155

155

The Korean Marines, holding down the western flank of the three mainland regimental sectors in the 1st Marine Division line, also received a share of the enemy’s attention. At dusk on 5 September, Chinese barrages began to smash Outpost 37,219 the first of a trio of positions that would merit hostile attention for the next 22 hours. Throughout the following day the Chinese continued their mortar and artillery fire against Outposts 37 and 36, and the regimental observation post located on Hill 155 (also called Hill 167) to the rear of the MLR. (See Map 13.) The heaviest enemy fire was directed against OP 36, a small rise in the low land terrain midway between the Sachon River, on the west and the Munsan-ni-Kaesong rail line, 600 yards to the east.

The Korean Marines, defending the western side of the three main regimental sectors in the 1st Marine Division line, also attracted a lot of enemy attention. At dusk on September 5, Chinese bombardments started to hit Outpost 37, the first of three positions that would come under attack for the next 22 hours. Throughout the next day, the Chinese continued their mortar and artillery fire on Outposts 37 and 36, as well as the regimental observation post located on Hill 155 (also known as Hill 167) behind the Main Line of Resistance (MLR). (See Map 13.) The heaviest enemy fire was aimed at OP 36, a small rise in the low terrain located midway between the Sachon River to the west and the Munsan-ni-Kaesong rail line, which was 600 yards to the east.

219 Contemporary records of the 1st KMC Regiment for 1952–1953 identify this as Outpost 37. Current reviewer comments refer to this hill as OP 67. LtCol Kim Yong Kyu, ROKMC, ltr to CMC, HQMC, dtd 5 Jul 67.

219 Contemporary records of the 1st KMC Regiment for 1952–1953 identify this as Outpost 37. Current reviewer comments refer to this hill as OP 67. LtCol Kim Yong Kyu, ROKMC, letter to CMC, HQMC, dated July 5, 1967.

At 1605 a 50-round barrage struck OP 36. After this harassing fire there was a lull until 1810 when Chinese artillery and mortars again resumed a steady pounding of the three positions. One hour later enemy soldiers hit both outposts. Twice the attacking company assaulted OP 37 but neither effort represented, in the view of the defenders, a serious attempt at capture. Less than a mile south at OP 36, however, the enemy motive appeared to be quite different.

At 4:05 PM, a 50-round barrage hit OP 36. After this harassing fire, there was a break until 6:10 PM when Chinese artillery and mortars started a consistent attack on the three positions again. An hour later, enemy soldiers targeted both outposts. The attacking company charged OP 37 twice, but the defenders felt neither attempt was a serious effort to take the position. However, less than a mile south at OP 36, the enemy's intentions seemed to be quite different.

Crossing the Sachon just north of the Freedom Gate Bridge (also known as the highway bridge), the Communist infantry moved to assault positions on the west, north, and northeast sides of the outpost. At 1910, the Chinese began their first rush. It was repulsed, as was a second one. Another artillery barrage, joined this time by tank fire, preceded the third attempt. At this point communications went out at the besieged outpost. At 2150, a squad leader from OP 36 reached the 10th Company CP to report that his position had fallen. In 30 minutes a communications link was reestablished with the outpost. The defending Koreans reported that although enemy troops had overrun much of the hill, they had subsequently withdrawn, apparently because their losses had been so heavy.

Crossing the Sachon just north of the Freedom Gate Bridge (also known as the highway bridge), the Communist infantry moved into attack positions on the west, north, and northeast sides of the outpost. At 7:10 PM, the Chinese launched their first assault. It was pushed back, as was a second attempt. Another artillery barrage, now accompanied by tank fire, preceded the third effort. At this point, communications went down at the surrounded outpost. At 9:50 PM, a squad leader from OP 36 reached the 10th Company command post to report that his position had fallen. In 30 minutes, a communications link was reestablished with the outpost. The defending Koreans reported that although enemy troops had overrun much of the hill, they had subsequently withdrawn, apparently due to their heavy losses.

Casualties and damage were severe. The Korean regiment estimated that 110 enemy had been killed or wounded. An early morning KMC reconnaissance patrol counted 33 dead Chinese in the vicinity of OP 36. The attacking force had also left behind much equipment, including more than 100 grenades and several automatic156 weapons. No papers were found on the dead Communist soldiers, but many propaganda leaflets had been dropped around the outpost. Korean Marine losses at OP 36 were nine killed and seven wounded. At OP 37 there were four casualties; at the regimental CP, one Korean and two U.S. Marines had been killed by enemy artillery. Chinese incoming, estimated at 2,500 rounds during the two actions, had also caused major damage to part of the OP 36 defenses, but inflicted less harm to the other two positions. Repairs were begun before daylight.

Casualties and damage were significant. The Korean regiment estimated that 110 enemy troops were killed or wounded. An early morning KMC reconnaissance patrol found 33 dead Chinese soldiers near OP 36. The attacking force also left behind a lot of equipment, including over 100 grenades and several automatic156 weapons. No papers were found on the dead Communist soldiers, but many propaganda leaflets had been scattered around the outpost. Korean Marine losses at OP 36 were nine killed and seven wounded. At OP 37, there were four casualties; at the regimental CP, one Korean and two U.S. Marines were killed by enemy artillery. Chinese incoming fire, estimated at 2,500 rounds during the two engagements, also caused significant damage to part of the OP 36 defenses, but inflicted less harm on the other two positions. Repairs began before sunrise.

Korean COPS Hit Again220

220 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Sep 52; KMC Regt UnitRpts 195–202, dtd 13–20 Sep 52.

220 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Sep 52; KMC Regt UnitRpts 195–202, dated 13–20 Sep 52.

After the stepped-up enemy ground activity in early September, both Chinese and Marine frontline units resumed their earlier pattern of combat patrols, probes, and ambushes. Possession of Bunker Hill remained the immediate objective of the enemy and his activities in the middle of the Marine line were directed to this goal. Once again on 9 September a marauding Chinese platoon, employing grenades and submachine guns, sounded out the Bunker defenses, now manned by G/3/1 (Captain William F. Whitbeck, Jr.). After a tentative investigation, the enemy withdrew. That same day, expanded patrol and raiding activities were undertaken by Marine line battalions.

After the increased enemy ground activity in early September, both Chinese and Marine frontline units went back to their previous routine of combat patrols, probes, and ambushes. Controlling Bunker Hill remained the enemy's main goal, and their actions in the middle of the Marine line were focused on that objective. Once again, on 9 September, a roaming Chinese platoon, using grenades and submachine guns, tested the defenses at Bunker, which were now held by G/3/1 (Captain William F. Whitbeck, Jr.). After a cautious investigation, the enemy retreated. That same day, Marine line battalions started expanded patrol and raiding activities.

These sharply increased offensive measures resulted, in part, from the Communist interest, as evinced during the summer truce negotiations, in certain forward positions held by UNC units. On 7 September, the CG, I Corps had alerted his division commanders to the fact that the enemy “may attempt to seize and hold certain key terrain features ... over which there was extensive disagreement during [the 1952 summer truce] negotiations for the present line of demarcation.”221 Since much of the critical land was in his sector, Major General Kendall further warned his division commanders “to take the necessary action within your means to hold all terrain now occupied by your divisions.”222 Critical terrain features in the 1st Marine Division area of responsibility were Bunker Hill and the157 height on which COP Bruce had been established (Hill 148), in the center and right regimental sectors respectively.

These sharply increased offensive measures were partly due to the Communists' interest, as shown during the summer truce negotiations, in specific forward positions held by UNC units. On September 7, the CG of I Corps had alerted his division commanders that the enemy "might try to take and hold certain key terrain features... over which there was significant disagreement during [the 1952 summer truce] negotiations for the current line of demarcation."221 Since a lot of the critical land was in his area, Major General Kendall warned his division commanders "to take the necessary actions within your means to hold all terrain now occupied by your divisions."222 Critical terrain features in the 1st Marine Division's area of responsibility were Bunker Hill and the157 height where COP Bruce had been established (Hill 148), located in the center and right regimental sectors respectively.

221 1stMarDiv ComdD, Sep 52, App. I, # 8.

221 1stMarDiv ComdD, Sep 52, App. I, # 8.

222 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Two days later, General Pollock amplified this directive by underscoring the necessity for holding these two positions, plus eight more he considered vital for sound tactical defense. These additional positions, from west to east, were Hills 86 and 37 in the KMC sector; Hills 56 and 48A in the center sector; and the outposts then known as Allen, Clarence, Felix, and Jill, all the responsibility of the right regiment.223

Two days later, General Pollock expanded on this directive by emphasizing the importance of holding these two positions, plus eight more that he deemed essential for effective tactical defense. These additional positions, from west to east, were Hills 86 and 37 in the KMC sector; Hills 56 and 48A in the central sector; and the outposts then known as Allen, Clarence, Felix, and Jill, all under the responsibility of the right regiment.223

223 When the 7th Marines took over this sector from the 5th in early September, the names changed to Carson, Vegas, Detroit, and Seattle respectively. COP Bruce was also redesignated as Reno. Since the old names of the outposts were well known to the enemy, for purposes of security it was decided to identify them differently. U.S. cities were selected.

223 When the 7th Marines took control of this area from the 5th in early September, the names were changed to Carson, Vegas, Detroit, and Seattle, respectively. COP Bruce was also renamed Reno. Since the enemy was familiar with the old names of the outposts, it was decided for security reasons to give them new identifiers. U.S. cities were chosen.

Although the eastern part of the division main line thus contained at this time more key hills than any other Marine sector, much of the increase in Marine patrol and ambush activity took place in No-Man’s-Land forward of the middle frontline regiment. Of the two JAMESTOWN sectors manned by U.S. Marines, the one in the center of the division area offered better ground for infantry operations.

Although the eastern part of the division main line had more key hills than any other Marine sector at that time, much of the increase in Marine patrol and ambush activity occurred in No-Man’s-Land ahead of the middle frontline regiment. Of the two JAMestown sectors held by U.S. Marines, the one in the center of the division area provided better terrain for infantry operations.

On the divisional western flank, the Korean Marines conducted frequent infantry-tank patrols during the second and third weeks of September, but the enemy opposite the KMCs initiated little ground activity. Instead, the Chinese relied upon their supporting weapons to provide the contact. For a seven-day period ending 19 September, a total of 2,375 enemy rounds had fallen in that regimental sector, an average of 339 per day. Nearly a third had been in the vicinity of Hill 36.

On the western side of the division, the Korean Marines carried out regular infantry-tank patrols during the second and third weeks of September, but the enemy facing the KMCs hardly engaged on the ground. Instead, the Chinese depended on their supporting artillery to maintain contact. Over a week ending on September 19, a total of 2,375 enemy rounds landed in that regimental area, averaging 339 rounds per day. Almost a third of those rounds fell near Hill 36.

Before sunrise on the 19th, a Chinese infantry company had crossed the Sachon in the vicinity of the railroad bridge. Once on the east side, the enemy soldiers concealed themselves in caves and holes, remaining there until dusk. Then, when they came out of hiding, the Communists held a briefing and organized themselves into three attack groups. As these advance infantry elements approached their objective, OP 36, other reinforcing units were prepared to seize OP 37, to the east, and OPs 33 and 31, to the south. Artillery and mortar preparation supported these diversionary attacks.

Before sunrise on the 19th, a Chinese infantry company crossed the Sachon near the railroad bridge. Once on the east side, the enemy soldiers hid in caves and holes, staying there until dusk. Then, when they came out, the Communists held a briefing and organized into three attack groups. As these forward infantry units moved toward their target, OP 36, other reinforcing units prepared to take OP 37 to the east and OPs 33 and 31 to the south. Artillery and mortar preparations supported these diversionary attacks.

The main assault was accompanied by even heavier shelling. As the three assault units reached the bottom of the hill at OP 36,158 artillery, mortars, and tanks had fired more than 400 rounds. Approaching from the north, east, and west, the Chinese scrambled up the hill, gaining control of the wrecked defenses by 2000. Sporadic exchanges of fire lasted until nearly midnight. At 0115 the Korean Marines attempted to retake the hill. The counterattack was cut short, however, upon discovery of another enemy unit moving towards the outpost and then only one-half mile away. Three hours later the enemy came back in strength when a CCF platoon successfully overthrew the outpost at 0520. This new assault occurred without any warning and was so swiftly executed that a number of the KMC defenders found themselves encircled and trapped at their posts. Most managed to escape, but several were captured and later evacuated when the Chinese removed their own battle casualties.

The main attack was paired with even heavier shelling. As the three assault units reached the bottom of the hill at OP 36,158 artillery, mortars, and tanks had fired over 400 rounds. Coming from the north, east, and west, the Chinese rushed up the hill, taking control of the damaged defenses by 2000. Sporadic gunfire continued until nearly midnight. At 0115, the Korean Marines tried to retake the hill. However, the counterattack was cut short when they discovered another enemy unit approaching the outpost, just half a mile away. Three hours later, the enemy returned in force when a CCF platoon successfully captured the outpost at 0520. This new attack came without any warning and was executed so quickly that several of the KMC defenders found themselves surrounded and trapped at their positions. Most managed to escape, but a few were captured and later evacuated when the Chinese removed their own battle casualties.

Another attempt to regain the outpost was made by the Koreans at 1400, following artillery preparation and two air strikes. Three Marine attack squadrons, VMAs-323, -121, and -212 blasted the Chinese on the front slope of OP 36. The contour of the far side of the hill had provided the enemy a defiladed position and safety from 1st Marine Division organic weapons. But the MAG-12 air sorties, destroying many CCF automatic weapons and mortars and breaking up a company strongpoint, helped the Koreans counterattack and overrun the dazed defenders. Two KMC platoons, supported by artillery, mortar, and tank fire, then carried the OP after overcoming token Chinese resistance. After the enemy vacated OP 36, he still continued to remain in the low area to the northwest, close to the east side of the Sachon River. No serious attempt was made by the enemy to occupy the position for the rest of the month.

Another attempt to retake the outpost was made by the Koreans at 1400, following artillery preparation and two air strikes. Three Marine attack squadrons, VMAs-323, -121, and -212, bombed the Chinese on the front slope of OP 36. The shape of the far side of the hill had given the enemy a sheltered position and protection from the 1st Marine Division's weapons. However, the MAG-12 air sorties destroyed many CCF automatic weapons and mortars, disrupting a company strongpoint, which helped the Koreans launch a counterattack and overrun the stunned defenders. Two KMC platoons, backed by artillery, mortar, and tank fire, then took the OP after overcoming minimal Chinese resistance. After the enemy abandoned OP 36, they still remained in the low area to the northwest, near the east side of the Sachon River. No serious attempts were made by the enemy to occupy the position for the rest of the month.

The 20-hour clash for control of OP 36 was believed to have developed from the Chinese ambition to occupy the position and thereby eliminate the harassing fires from Hill 36 that had struck CCF mainline troops. The 19–20 September attempts to wrest the outpost from Korean control resulted in an estimated 150 Chinese casualties, including 20 counted dead. KMC losses were placed at 16 killed, 47 wounded, and 6 missing.

The 20-hour battle for control of OP 36 was thought to have stemmed from China's desire to take over the position and eliminate the harassment from gunfire coming from Hill 36 that had targeted CCF mainline troops. The attempts on September 19-20 to take the outpost from Korean control resulted in an estimated 150 Chinese casualties, including 20 confirmed dead. KMC losses were reported as 16 killed, 47 wounded, and 6 missing.

On the day that the second September battle for OP 36 had ended, the Commandant of the Marine Corps had also just concluded his three-day visit and inspection of General Pollock’s troops. Visiting every battalion in the division, General Shepherd was impressed by the morale and proficiency of the Marines, including the attached159 1st KMC Regiment. During his visit to Korea, the Marine Corps Commandant was also presented the Order of Military Merit, Taiguk, by President Rhee. General Shepherd ended his Korean battlefront visit after a two-day inspection of 1st Marine Aircraft Wing units commanded by Major General Jerome (he had received his second star on 6 August).

On the day the second September battle for OP 36 wrapped up, the Commandant of the Marine Corps had just finished his three-day visit and inspection of General Pollock’s troops. During his tour of every battalion in the division, General Shepherd was impressed by the morale and skill of the Marines, including the attached159 1st KMC Regiment. While in Korea, the Marine Corps Commandant was also awarded the Order of Military Merit, Taiguk, by President Rhee. General Shepherd concluded his visit to the Korean battlefront after a two-day inspection of 1st Marine Aircraft Wing units led by Major General Jerome (who had received his second star on August 6).

More Enemy Assaults in Late September224

224 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 7thMar, 2/1 ComdDs, Sep 52.

224 Unless stated otherwise, the content in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 7thMar, 2/1 ComdDs, Sep 52.

Even though the enemy had concentrated his strongest infantry attack in late September against the Korean Marines, his most frequent probes were launched against center regimental positions held by Colonel Layer’s 1st Marines. Here the enemy was more consistent in conducting his defense. Chinese troops doggedly held on to the northern slopes of several Marine outposts, notably Hills 124 and 122. In this center regimental sector, the enemy initiated several attacks, the most significant of these occurring on the 20th.

Even though the enemy had focused his strongest infantry attack in late September against the Korean Marines, his most frequent attempts were aimed at the central regimental positions held by Colonel Layer’s 1st Marines. Here, the enemy was more consistent in maintaining his defense. Chinese troops stubbornly held onto the northern slopes of several Marine outposts, especially Hills 124 and 122. In this central regimental area, the enemy launched several attacks, with the most significant one occurring on the 20th.

This action against the left sector manned by 2/1 centered about Hill 124, where Lieutenant Colonel Batterton’s battalion had established a 24-hour, squad-size outpost three days earlier. At 0345, Marines on Hill 124 observed two green flares fired from a hill about 1,100 yards to their front. At the same time the men of 2/1 observed numerous figures moving about downhill from their own position. It soon became evident that four enemy groups were converging on Hill 124 and preparing to assault the Marine defenses which shortly came under fire from enemy submachine guns and rifles. The main probe was a frontal assault against Batterton’s men; it was made by about 20 Chinese and lasted only five minutes. Afterwards, all four assault groups withdrew but continued firing intermittently at the Marine squad. Nearly every Marine on the hill suffered wounds, most of these minor. Enemy losses for the action were placed at 22.

This attack against the left sector, led by 2/1, focused on Hill 124, where Lieutenant Colonel Batterton's battalion had set up a 24-hour, small squad outpost three days earlier. At 0345, Marines on Hill 124 saw two green flares shot from a hill about 1,100 yards in front of them. At the same time, the men of 2/1 noticed several figures moving downhill from their position. It quickly became clear that four enemy groups were coming together on Hill 124 and getting ready to assault the Marine defenses, which soon came under fire from enemy submachine guns and rifles. The main attack was a direct assault on Batterton's men; it involved about 20 Chinese troops and lasted only five minutes. After that, all four assault groups retreated but continued to fire intermittently at the Marine squad. Almost every Marine on the hill was injured, most with minor wounds. Enemy losses in this engagement were reported at 22.

In this same sector Marines in late September attacked the northern slope of Hill 122, where the enemy still maintained a foothold. The proximity of Marine defenses at Bunker Hill to enemy positions, separated in some places by as little as 30 yards, was the cause of160 frequent contact and clashes. Marines raided the enemy side of Bunker, using demolitions and portable flamethrowers to destroy trenches and bunkers, and their occupants. Tanks and artillery assisted in these brief offensive actions, usually undertaken at night. Flares were used frequently to aid in identifying and striking targets and in assessing the results.

In late September, Marines attacked the northern slope of Hill 122, where the enemy still held a position. The close proximity of Marine defenses at Bunker Hill to enemy positions, separated in some places by as little as 30 yards, led to frequent contact and clashes. Marines raided the enemy side of Bunker, using explosives and portable flamethrowers to destroy trenches and bunkers, along with their occupants. Tanks and artillery supported these brief offensive actions, which typically took place at night. Flares were used often to help identify and hit targets and to assess the results.

It became routine during the last days of September for the Chinese to probe the Marine defenses at the Hills 124–122 axis. There did not appear to be a serious or determined assault to take either outpost, however. The Marines considered the infantry probes as just another form of harassment, although perhaps more personal and direct than the Chinese shelling, which inflicted daily losses. On the division right, Colonel Moore’s 7th Marines, which had moved into this sector on 7 September, found enemy activities about the same. Artillery rounds caused the greatest number of casualties, although these attacks were not particularly spirited. Many enemy contacts occurred during the Marine combat patrols that largely characterized frontline operations at the end of September.

It became routine in the last days of September for the Chinese to test the Marine defenses along the Hills 124–122 axis. However, there didn’t seem to be a serious or determined effort to capture either outpost. The Marines viewed these infantry probes as just another form of harassment, although perhaps it felt more personal and direct compared to the Chinese shelling, which caused daily losses. On the division's right, Colonel Moore’s 7th Marines, which had entered this sector on September 7, noted similar enemy activities. Artillery fire was responsible for the most casualties, even though these attacks lacked intensity. Numerous enemy encounters occurred during Marine combat patrols, which primarily defined frontline operations at the end of September.

Chinese Intensify Their Outpost Attacks225

225 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: FMFPac, 1stMarDiv Sum, Jul-Oct 52; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 1–7 Oct 52; 1stMarDiv PIRS 706–713, dtd 1–8 Oct 52; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 3/1, 1/7, 2/7, 3/7 ComdDs, Oct 52; KMC Regt UnitRpts 214–220, dtd 2–8 Oct. 52.

225 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: FMFPac, 1stMarDiv Sum, Jul-Oct 52; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 1–7 Oct 52; 1stMarDiv PIRS 706–713, dated 1–8 Oct 52; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 3/1, 1/7, 2/7, 3/7 ComdDs, Oct 52; KMC Regt UnitRpts 214–220, dated 2–8 Oct. 52.

With the beginning of October, the 1st Marine Division became aware of certain changes that were occurring to its front. In the center sector, for the first time in two weeks there was no significant enemy ground activity, yet across the entire Marine front there was a build-up of enemy shelling. Part of the increased bombardment was directed at Hill 86 in the KMC sector, one of the positions recently cited as integral to the defense line in this area. Beginning at 2000 on 1 October, the Chinese broadcast a warning that they would knock down the outpost bunkers there unless the Korean Marines surrendered. When the KMCs manning the position did not, of course, surrender in reaction to this blatant propaganda tactic, the Chinese began showering Hill 86 with artillery rounds. During the next 20 hours, 145 rounds fell on and around the outpost. This161 incident marked the first time that the Chinese mainline forces had carried out an announced threat.

With the start of October, the 1st Marine Division noticed some changes happening on its front. In the center sector, for the first time in two weeks, there was no significant enemy ground activity. However, across the entire Marine front, enemy shelling was on the rise. Part of the increased bombardment was aimed at Hill 86 in the KMC sector, which had been recently identified as crucial to the defense line in that area. Starting at 8:00 PM on October 1, the Chinese issued a warning that they would destroy the outpost bunkers there unless the Korean Marines surrendered. When the KMCs stationed at the position did not surrender in response to this obvious propaganda tactic, the Chinese began bombarding Hill 86 with artillery fire. Over the next 20 hours, 145 rounds landed on and around the outpost. This161 incident was the first time that Chinese mainline forces had followed through on a threat they announced.

This type of operational tactic—first to warn, then to carry out the threat—was not, however, the reason for the increased Chinese shelling. Rather, as it turned out, the enemy was about to embark on a series of limited objective attacks against the division flanks, starting first with major outposts guarding the most critical terrain on the MLR. The artillery and mortar fire of the 1st had been but an initial step. At 1830 on 2 October, Communist direct fire weapons opened up from an area 2,800 yards northwest of OP 36, lashing all the KMC outposts within range. A tank platoon, dispatched to counter the fire, returned at 1915 without having located the hostile emplacements. Shortly after the tanks returned, an extremely heavy artillery barrage again fell upon all of the KMC regimental outposts. Ten minutes later, seemingly on the signal of one red and one green flare, the enemy guns lifted their preparatory fires to permit an infantry attack. The ground action simultaneously struck OPs 37, 36, and 86, the forward positions closest to the Sachon River.

This type of operational tactic—first to warn, then to execute the threat—was not the reason for the increased Chinese shelling. Instead, it turned out that the enemy was about to launch a series of limited objective attacks against the division flanks, starting with the major outposts protecting the most crucial terrain on the MLR. The artillery and mortar fire from the 1st had been just an initial step. At 6:30 PM on October 2, Communist direct fire weapons opened up from an area 2,800 yards northwest of OP 36, hitting all the KMC outposts within range. A tank platoon sent to counter the fire returned at 7:15 PM without locating the enemy positions. Shortly after the tanks came back, a very heavy artillery barrage fell again on all of the KMC regimental outposts. Ten minutes later, seemingly on the signal of one red and one green flare, the enemy guns lifted their preparatory fire to allow for an infantry attack. The ground action simultaneously hit OPs 37, 36, and 86, the forward positions closest to the Sachon River.

At OP 37, the defending Korean Marine platoon fought valiantly for more than an hour against the assault of two enemy platoons, each of which required a company-size reinforcement before the Korean Marines were finally ousted. Although temporarily dislodged, they reorganized at the base of the position for a counterattack. Two counterattacks were made the next day, the second one carrying the Koreans to the top of the hill. Fierce enemy mortar and artillery shelling forced them to seek the shelter of the reverse slope before again renewing their assault. On 4–5 October, the outpost changed hands four times. At 1340 on the latter date, a heavy enemy artillery and ground attack compelled the KMCs to abandon their ravaged outpost; this withdrawal ended friendly control of OP 37 for the rest of the month.

At OP 37, the defending Korean Marine platoon fought fiercely for over an hour against two enemy platoons, which each needed a company-sized reinforcement before the Korean Marines were finally pushed out. Even though they were temporarily forced to retreat, they regrouped at the base of their position to prepare for a counterattack. Two counterattacks took place the following day, with the second one pushing the Koreans to the top of the hill. Intense enemy mortar and artillery fire drove them to take cover on the reverse slope before they launched another assault. On October 4-5, the outpost switched hands four times. At 1:40 PM on the latter date, a heavy enemy artillery and ground attack forced the KMCs to abandon their damaged outpost; this withdrawal ended friendly control of OP 37 for the remainder of the month.

Nearby OP 36 was also lost. In the course of the night the Korean Marines on OP 36 turned back two Communist assaults, but fell under the weight of the third. By sunup on 3 October, the exhausted Korean Marines were forced to give ground; the Chinese immediately occupied OP 36 and held it.

Nearby OP 36 was also lost. During the night, the Korean Marines on OP 36 repelled two Communist attacks, but couldn't withstand the third. By sunrise on October 3, the worn-out Korean Marines had to retreat; the Chinese quickly took over OP 36 and held it.

One more KMC outpost was to fall during the first week. OP 86 guarded the southwestern two-thirds of the regimental sector and frequently was the target of artillery shelling and ground attacks.162 This position was also the most distant from the main line and the closest to the Sachon River.

One more KMC outpost was set to fall during the first week. OP 86 watched over the southwestern two-thirds of the regimental sector and was often the target of artillery fire and ground assaults.162 This position was also the farthest from the main line and closest to the Sachon River.

The heaviest Communist attack on 2 October was against the KMC platoons defending Hill 86. Nearly a battalion of Chinese took part in this action, finally overpowering the outpost just before midnight. The defenders withdrew south to the bottom of the hill, where they were comparatively safe from enemy fire. Resting, receiving reinforcements, and regrouping during the early morning hours of the 3d, the Korean Marine force observed friendly artillery and air pound the outpost preparatory to their counterattack. It was made at 1015 and succeeded, after two hours fighting, in routing the Chinese from the outpost.

The biggest Communist attack on October 2 was aimed at the KMC platoons defending Hill 86. Almost a battalion of Chinese troops participated in this battle, ultimately overwhelming the outpost just before midnight. The defenders fell back south to the base of the hill, where they were relatively safe from enemy fire. They rested, received reinforcements, and regrouped during the early morning hours of the 3rd, while the Korean Marine force watched friendly artillery and air support strike the outpost in preparation for their counterattack. This was launched at 10:15 and successfully drove the Chinese out of the outpost after two hours of fighting.

While the enemy was counteracting the ground loss with artillery and mortars, Marine air flushed out the Chinese, who had retreated only a short distance from the outpost. From atop the hill, Korean Marines witnessed many of the enemy hurriedly leaving the area under attack. This scattering of the enemy force prevented the Chinese from launching an immediate counterattack for control of OP 86 and gave the Korean Marines additional time in which to prepare their defenses. At 2200 on 6 October, an enemy force of undetermined size assaulted the position and wrested it from the Koreans before the end of the day. Early the next morning a KMC counterattack was successful, but at 0640 the Koreans were again compelled to withdraw, due to devastating blows from Chinese artillery. Loss of the third key outpost during the first week of October, ended for a time the flare-up of outpost fighting in the left regimental sector of the division front.

While the enemy was trying to regain lost ground with artillery and mortars, Marine air support forced the Chinese to retreat just a short distance from the outpost. From their vantage point on the hill, Korean Marines saw many of the enemy quickly leaving the attacked area. This dispersal of enemy forces stopped the Chinese from launching an immediate counterattack for control of OP 86, giving the Korean Marines extra time to prepare their defenses. At 10:00 PM on October 6, an enemy force of unknown size attacked the position and took it from the Koreans before the end of the day. Early the next morning, a KMC counterattack was successful, but at 6:40 AM, the Koreans were forced to withdraw again due to devastating hits from Chinese artillery. Losing the third key outpost during the first week of October ended the intense fighting at the outposts in the left regimental sector of the division front for a while.

The middle part of the MLR, held in early October by the 1st Marines, received the least enemy attention in this period. Although frequent contacts were made with the enemy during the first part of the month, no outposts were lost. Most of the action was minor, i.e., patrol engagements and Communist probes centered around Bunker Hill and Hill 124. Late on 5 October, a combat patrol from H/3/1 became involved in the most important ground action in Colonel Layer’s area during early October. These Marines were surprised by a larger Chinese force lying in wait. The ambushers held their fire until the Marine combat patrol had cleared a small hilltop. At 2230, after a 20-minute fire fight, the patrol withdrew to the reverse slope of the rise, called in 81mm mortar fire, then163 broke contact, and returned to the MLR. There were 4 Marine casualties, and by count, 13 dead Chinese.

The middle part of the MLR, which took place in early October with the 1st Marines, attracted the least attention from the enemy during this time. While there were frequent skirmishes with the enemy in the first part of the month, no outposts were lost. Most of the activity was minor, such as patrol engagements and Communist probes focused around Bunker Hill and Hill 124. Late on 5 October, a combat patrol from H/3/1 became engaged in the most significant ground action in Colonel Layer’s area during early October. These Marines were caught off guard by a larger Chinese force that was lying in wait. The ambushers held their fire until the Marine patrol had cleared a small hilltop. At 10:30 PM, after a 20-minute firefight, the patrol withdrew to the reverse slope of the hill, called in 81mm mortar fire, broke contact, and returned to the MLR. There were 4 Marine casualties, and a total of 13 Chinese troops were counted as dead.

By far the greatest number of personal losses at this time occurred in the right area held by the 7th Marines, where the Chinese began a series of limited objective attacks against outposts guarding the division right flank. These offensives to obtain critical terrain in this sector, and others manned by the 1st Marine Division, would continue intermittently right up to the brink of the cease-fire, in July 1953.

By far the majority of personal losses during this time happened in the area controlled by the 7th Marines, where the Chinese launched a series of targeted attacks against outposts protecting the division's right flank. These offensives aimed at securing key terrain in this area, as well as others held by the 1st Marine Division, would persist intermittently until just before the cease-fire in July 1953.

In early October, Colonel Moore’s troops manned nine permanent combat outposts. (See Map 14.) Seven of these had been taken over when the regiment relieved the 5th Marines in September. Two additional ones—Frisco and Verdun—had been established by the 7th Marines on the 14th and 26th, respectively. Of these nine forward positions, the Communists chose to concentrate on four, which formed a diagonal line roughly paralleling the center sector of the MLR at an average distance of about 450 yards. This quartet—Detroit, Frisco, Seattle, and Warsaw—together with Verdun,226 at the 1st Commonwealth boundary, comprised the easternmost permanent outposts of the division. The first four positions were, on the average, slightly lower in elevation than the COPs in the regimental area to the west.

In early October, Colonel Moore’s troops were stationed at nine permanent combat outposts. (See Map 14.) Seven of these had been taken over when the regiment relieved the 5th Marines in September. Two more—Frisco and Verdun—were set up by the 7th Marines on the 14th and 26th, respectively. Of these nine forward positions, the Communists decided to focus on four, which formed a diagonal line that roughly matched the center sector of the MLR at an average distance of about 450 yards. This group—Detroit, Frisco, Seattle, and Warsaw—along with Verdun,226 at the 1st Commonwealth boundary, made up the easternmost permanent outposts of the division. The first four positions were, on average, slightly lower in elevation than the COPs in the regimental area to the west.

226 The outpost at the extreme right flank was given the name “Verdun” because of its World War I connotation of “They shall not pass.” Col. Leo J. Dulacki ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 2 Jun 67, hereafter Dulacki ltr.

226 The outpost at the far right flank was named “Verdun” because of its World War I meaning of “They shall not pass.” Col. Leo J. Dulacki letter to Head, History Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, dated June 2, 1967, hereafter Dulacki ltr.

The frontline contest began with little forewarning other than a slight increase in enemy artillery and machine gun fire against Frisco and a light probe against Detroit. At 1836 on 2 October, the Communists launched a heavy artillery and mortar barrage against Seattle and Warsaw, and that part of the MLR nearest Seattle. Exactly one hour later, the preparation on the outposts lifted, permitting the enemy attack force to strike. Not less than a company assaulted the reinforced platoon on Warsaw, while a squad moved against the Seattle defenders. Warsaw fell in about 45 minutes,227 Seattle held out five minutes longer.

The front-line battle kicked off with little warning, aside from a slight uptick in enemy artillery and machine gun fire aimed at Frisco and a minor probe against Detroit. At 6:36 PM on October 2, the Communists launched a heavy barrage of artillery and mortars against Seattle and Warsaw, targeting the section of the MLR closest to Seattle. Exactly one hour later, the bombardment on the outposts stopped, allowing the enemy attack force to move in. No less than a company attacked the reinforced platoon in Warsaw, while a squad advanced on the defenders in Seattle. Warsaw fell in about 45 minutes, Seattle held out five minutes longer.

164

164

227 During the latter stage of the fight for Warsaw, a Chinese soldier tossed a grenade into a bunker shared by five Marines. Private Jack W. Kelso, of I/3/7, quickly picked up the missile and ran outside with it. As he was throwing the grenade back to the Chinese, it went off in his hand. Disregarding his wounds, the Marine moved back inside the shelter, directed the other four to return to the MLR and went outside to cover their exit. As he was firing at the advancing Chinese soldiers, Private Kelso was hit several times by enemy bullets. His “conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life” was later recognized in the posthumous award of the Medal of Honor.

227 During the later stage of the fight for Warsaw, a Chinese soldier threw a grenade into a bunker occupied by five Marines. Private Jack W. Kelso, of I/3/7, quickly grabbed the grenade and ran outside with it. As he was throwing the grenade back at the Chinese, it exploded in his hand. Ignoring his injuries, the Marine went back inside the shelter, told the other four to return to the MLR, and went outside to cover their escape. While firing at the advancing Chinese soldiers, Private Kelso was hit several times by enemy bullets. His “conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life” was later recognized with a posthumous Medal of Honor.

MAP 14 K. WHITE

MAP 14 K. WHITE

7TH MARINES SECTOR

7th Marines Area

(Division Right)

(Division Right)

EARLY OCTOBER 1952

Early October 1952

165

165

Immediately, plans for the recapture of both were made. At 2047, Captain John H. Thomas dispatched a platoon from his company, I/3/7, from the MLR to counterattack Warsaw. The platoon quickly took the position, for the enemy had withdrawn. At Seattle, the result was different. On 3 October, two squads from Company I departed JAMESTOWN at 0340, but came under enemy artillery fire en route to the objective. The squads worked their way forward nevertheless, but were unable to take the outpost. Captain Thomas then recalled the force, which reached JAMESTOWN at dawn. Later that day, just before dusk, air and artillery placed a smoke screen on Seattle while two squads advanced toward the outpost. When the counterattack met stiff resistance, a squad-size reinforcement228 was sent from the MLR. Together the three units attempted to retake the position, but were forced to pull back because of heavy casualties. As the infantry again regrouped, Lieutenant Colonel Bert Davis, Jr.’s 2/11 fired preparatory barrages on the Chinese occupying Seattle. At 2225 the Marines assaulted the outpost again; as before, overpowering Chinese artillery and grenades inflicted such high casualties that the counterattackers were compelled to withdraw.

Immediately, plans to recapture both were put into action. At 2047, Captain John H. Thomas sent a platoon from his company, I/3/7, from the MLR to counterattack Warsaw. The platoon quickly secured the position since the enemy had pulled back. In Seattle, the outcome was different. On October 3, two squads from Company I left JAMestown at 0340 but came under enemy artillery fire while heading to the objective. The squads pushed forward regardless but couldn't take the outpost. Captain Thomas then called them back, and they returned to JAMestown at dawn. Later that day, just before dusk, air and artillery laid down a smoke screen on Seattle as two squads moved toward the outpost. When the counterattack faced strong resistance, a squad-sized reinforcement228 was sent from the MLR. Together, the three units attempted to reclaim the position but had to fall back due to heavy losses. As the infantry regrouped once more, Lieutenant Colonel Bert Davis, Jr.’s 2/11 fired preparatory barrages on the Chinese in Seattle. At 2225, the Marines charged the outpost again; as before, overwhelming Chinese artillery and grenades caused such heavy casualties that the attackers had no choice but to withdraw.

228 This squad was from Company A (Captain Frederick C. McLaughlin), which came under the operational control of 3/7 at 1130 on 3 October, relieving Company C (Captain Paul B. Byrum). The latter company had reported to the 3d Battalion from regimental reserve at 2130 the previous day. Company D was sent immediately to reinforce the hard-pressed Company I.

228 This squad was from Company A (Captain Frederick C. McLaughlin), which fell under the operational control of 3/7 at 11:30 AM on October 3, relieving Company C (Captain Paul B. Byrum). The latter company had reported to the 3rd Battalion from regimental reserve at 9:30 PM the previous day. Company D was sent right away to support the struggling Company I.

By this time, action at the two outposts had resulted in 101 Marine casualties, including 13 killed. By sundown on 3 October, the regiment had been forced off the two COPs and had been able to retake only one of them. Against Warsaw, the one that the Marines had recaptured, the Chinese immediately launched a counterattack. At 0145 on 4 October a platoon struck the position. This time the Warsaw garrison held, inflicting losses on the CCF and receiving none. The Chinese made an unsuccessful attempt against Frisco at 2300 on 5 October, when a squad attempted to drive the Marines from the outpost.

By this time, the fighting at the two outposts had led to 101 Marine casualties, including 13 who were killed. By sunset on October 3, the regiment had been forced to abandon the two COPs and was only able to reclaim one of them. The Chinese quickly launched a counterattack against the Warsaw outpost, which the Marines had just retaken. At 1:45 AM on October 4, a platoon attacked the position. This time, the Warsaw garrison held firm, causing losses to the CCF while sustaining none. The Chinese made an unsuccessful attempt against Frisco at 11 PM on October 5, when a squad tried to push the Marines out of the outpost.

The enemy’s repeated attacks and apparent determination to seize commanding terrain, plus the heavy casualties suffered by 3/7, led the 7th Marines to reinforce its MLR at 1200 on 5 October. At this time the right battalion sector then held by 3/7, was split into two sectors and the regimental reserve, 1/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Leo J. Dulacki) took over the far right of the 3/7 line, assuming responsibility166 for Warsaw and Verdun.229 The 7th Marines thus had all three of its battalions on line with the regimental front manned, from the left, by 2/7, 3/7, and 1/7.

The enemy’s constant attacks and clear determination to capture key terrain, along with the heavy losses experienced by 3/7, prompted the 7th Marines to strengthen its Main Line of Resistance (MLR) at noon on October 5. At this point, the right battalion sector currently held by 3/7 was divided into two sectors, and the regimental reserve, 1/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Leo J. Dulacki), took over the far right of the 3/7 line, taking responsibility for Warsaw and Verdun.166 Therefore, the 7th Marines had all three of its battalions in position along the regimental front, with 2/7 on the left, followed by 3/7, and then 1/7.

229 At the same time one company, I/3/7, became the regimental reserve, having been relieved on the MLR at 1500 the previous day by A/1/7.

229 At the same time, one company, I/3/7, became the regimental reserve after being relieved on the MLR at 3:00 PM the day before by A/1/7.

During the next 30 hours, the Communists launched a series of strong probing actions against the regimental outposts of the 7th Marines. Although the numerical strength used in these widespread limited objective attacks did not exceed that employed in previous large-scale outpost offensives, the scope of the operation on 6 and 7 October and the well-coordinated attacks indicated careful and detailed planning. Each move against the five outposts and two MLR positions attacked was preceded by unusually close attention to artillery and mortar preparation. This was to a degree unprecedented even when measured against those massive concentrations that had characterized Communist operations since the Chinese intervention in the war late in 1950.

During the next 30 hours, the Communists carried out a series of strong probing actions against the regimental outposts of the 7th Marines. Although the number of troops involved in these widespread limited objective attacks did not exceed that used in previous large-scale outpost offensives, the scale of the operation on October 6 and 7 and the well-coordinated attacks showed careful and detailed planning. Each move against the five outposts and two MLR positions was preceded by unusually close attention to artillery and mortar preparation. This level of preparation was unprecedented, even compared to the large concentrations that had characterized Communist operations since the Chinese intervention in the war in late 1950.

Prior to the Communist general attack, the Marines made another attempt to retake Seattle. Leaving JAMESTOWN at 0600 on 6 October, a C/1/7 reinforced platoon was halted by solid resistance in the form of exploding artillery and mortar rounds. The forces returned to the MLR, reorganized, and jumped off again. At 0815, a two-squad reinforcement was dispatched from the main line. Meanwhile, the enemy, estimated at platoon reinforced strength, doubled his garrison, using troops from his outpost line. By 0900, a heavy fire fight was in progress, supported by artillery and mortars on both sides. Marines called on air in support of the attack, but the combined air and infantry action was unable to penetrate enemy defenses. Finally, at 1100, after five hours of close heavy fighting, the Marines broke contact and retired, bringing with them 12 dead and 44 wounded. Estimates of enemy losses totaled 71.

Before the Communist general attack, the Marines tried again to retake Seattle. Leaving JAMestown at 0600 on October 6, a reinforced platoon from C/1/7 was stopped by strong resistance from exploding artillery and mortar rounds. The forces returned to the main line, reorganized, and launched another attempt. At 0815, a two-squad reinforcement was sent from the main line. Meanwhile, the enemy, estimated to be at platoon reinforced strength, doubled their garrison by pulling troops from their outpost line. By 0900, a heavy firefight was underway, with artillery and mortars supporting both sides. The Marines called in air support for the attack, but the joint air and infantry action couldn’t break through the enemy defenses. Finally, at 1100, after five hours of intense fighting, the Marines disengaged and retreated, taking with them 12 dead and 44 wounded. Enemy losses were estimated at 71.

That evening, at dusk, artillery and mortar fire began falling on outpost positions across the entire regimental front and at two locations on the MLR. At the same time an estimated Chinese reinforced battalion in a coordinated effort advanced toward the Marine line and at 1930 assaulted the seven positions that had just been under artillery preparation. By midnight an estimated 4,300 rounds of artillery fire and 104 rounds of counterbattery fire had fallen on Marine positions. In the regimental left manned by 2/7 (Lieutenant167 Colonel Caputo) the attacks appeared to be more of a diversion—merely probes by small units, which showed little inclination to press the attack. Carson, the most western COP held by the regiment, reported that the enemy soldiers withdrew at 2050. Two hours later Reno, the next outpost to the east, radioed to the MLR that the Chinese had just ceased their attacks at that forward post. A total of 12 Marines were wounded in these two actions.

That evening, at dusk, artillery and mortar fire started hitting outpost positions along the entire regimental front and at two spots on the MLR. At the same time, an estimated Chinese reinforced battalion advanced toward the Marine line in a coordinated effort and assaulted the seven positions that had just been targeted by artillery at 7:30 PM. By midnight, around 4,300 rounds of artillery fire and 104 rounds of counterbattery fire had landed on Marine positions. On the regimental left, manned by 2/7 (Lieutenant167 Colonel Caputo), the attacks seemed more like a diversion—just probes by small units that showed little interest in pushing the attack. Carson, the most western COP held by the regiment, reported that the enemy soldiers withdrew at 8:50 PM. Two hours later, Reno, the next outpost to the east, radioed to the MLR that the Chinese had just stopped their attacks at that forward post. A total of 12 Marines were wounded in these two actions.

On the far right, in Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s sector, a reinforced CCF platoon poured over the Warsaw defenses at 1930. Immediately the outpost Marines called for the friendly artillery box. As these protective fires were being delivered all communication at the outpost was severed by hostile fire. Enemy artillery continued at a heavy rate. By 2000, however, communication was reestablished between the COP and MLR. The first message from the besieged outpost was a request for more artillery. With additional fire support and continued stiff outpost resistance, the Chinese at 2055 relinquished their quest to regain Warsaw.

On the far right, in Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s area, a reinforced CCF platoon rushed over the Warsaw defenses at 7:30 PM. Immediately, the outpost Marines called for the artillery support. While this protective fire was being deployed, all communication at the outpost was cut off by enemy fire. The enemy artillery was still firing heavily. By 8:00 PM, however, communication was restored between the COP and MLR. The first message from the surrounded outpost was a request for more artillery. With added fire support and ongoing strong resistance from the outpost, the Chinese gave up their attempt to retake Warsaw at 8:55 PM.

The enemy’s most determined assaults on the night of 6–7 October were made upon a pair of outposts, Detroit and Frisco, manned by the middle battalion, 3/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Gerald F. Russell). Two JAMESTOWN areas in this sector were also attacked, but only briefly. The assault against the outposts was executed by a Chinese battalion which sent one company against Detroit and another against Frisco, east of Detroit. Both outposts were manned by two squads of Marines.

The enemy's most relentless attacks on the night of October 6–7 were aimed at two outposts, Detroit and Frisco, which were staffed by the middle battalion, 3/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Gerald F. Russell). Two JAMestown areas in this region were also targeted, but only for a short time. The assault on the outposts was carried out by a Chinese battalion that sent one company against Detroit and another against Frisco, located east of Detroit. Both outposts were occupied by two squads of Marines.

At Detroit, the Company G Marines reported that the initial attack made at 1940 on 6 October by a Chinese company had been rebuffed. The enemy did succeed, however, in advancing to the outpost trenchline. Strong defensive fires prevented him from exploiting this initial gain by occupying any of the bunkers, and the attackers were forced to pull back. After regrouping, the Chinese returned at 2100 and again were able to secure a foothold at the main trench.

At Detroit, the Company G Marines reported that the first attack launched by a Chinese company at 7:40 PM on October 6 had been unsuccessful. However, the enemy did manage to move forward to the outpost trenchline. Powerful defensive fire stopped them from making the most of this initial advantage by taking over any bunkers, and the attackers had to retreat. After regrouping, the Chinese returned at 9:00 PM and were able to establish a foothold in the main trench once again.

Marine artillery assisted the outpost defenders in repulsing this new attack, but not before Chinese interdictory fires had disrupted all communications between the COP and its MLR support company. Some Chinese had also moved south in the vicinity of the MLR, but these attacks were neither persistent nor heavily supported. At 2115 the last of the enemy intruders had withdrawn from the MLR. At about this same time, 3/7 heard Detroit request overhead VT168 fires, but shortly after this the battalion again lost contact with the outpost.

Marine artillery helped the outpost defenders repel this new attack, but not before Chinese fire disrupted all communications between the COP and its MLR support company. Some Chinese troops also moved south near the MLR, but these attacks weren't persistent or heavily supported. At 9:15 PM, the last of the enemy intruders had pulled back from the MLR. Around the same time, 3/7 heard Detroit asking for overhead VT168 fire, but shortly after that, the battalion lost contact with the outpost again.

Two squads were then sent out to reinforce the position. They were stopped, however, by heavy Chinese artillery barrages. At the outpost, Marine artillery fires had forced the Chinese to retreat, but at 0015 the enemy reappeared at the trenchline. The artillery regiment once again applied the overhead fire remedy, but with less success—the Chinese, neither retreating nor advancing, took cover in the trenches. During the long night, attempts to reestablish communications with Detroit had proved fruitless, although battalion radio operators reported that they had heard Chinese language coming over one of the Marine radio nets used by the COP. A six-man reconnaissance detail was sent forward to investigate. It returned at 0355 with the information that Detroit was now held by the enemy. Two wounded Marines had escaped; the rest of the Detroit garrison had fallen to the enemy. At 0630 the Marines withdrew after heavy fighting that had lasted more than 10 hours.

Two squads were sent out to reinforce the position. However, they were halted by heavy Chinese artillery fire. At the outpost, Marine artillery had forced the Chinese to retreat, but at 0015, the enemy reappeared at the trench line. The artillery regiment tried the overhead fire tactic again, but it was less effective— the Chinese, neither retreating nor advancing, took cover in the trenches. Throughout the long night, attempts to reestablish communication with Detroit were unsuccessful, though battalion radio operators reported hearing Chinese language on one of the Marine radio channels used by the COP. A six-man reconnaissance team was sent forward to check it out. They returned at 0355 with the information that the enemy now controlled Detroit. Two wounded Marines had escaped; the rest of the Detroit garrison had been captured by the enemy. At 0630, the Marines withdrew after heavy fighting that had lasted more than 10 hours.

During the earlier part of the night, while the battle for outpost control raged at Detroit, reinforcements had also been dispatched to Frisco to help stabilize the situation at this adjacent Company H/3/7 outpost. Like Detroit, it had been attacked by a Chinese company, beginning about 2000. An hour and a half later some of the enemy had made their way into the trenchline, but were repulsed with the help of friendly artillery VT. Shortly after midnight the enemy again probed Frisco and reached the trenchline. At 0115, two squads jumped off from JAMESTOWN, but a rain of Chinese artillery interrupted their progress. Throughout the early morning hours of 7 October, Company H and I units were sent out from the MLR to buttress the Frisco defense and stem the enemy attack. At 0510, a reinforced platoon from the reserve company was sent to renew the counterattack. It was this Company I unit that finally restored control of the COP to the Marines.230 Another reinforcing169 platoon arrived at the outpost just as the Marines there had evicted the remaining Chinese assault forces. At 0715, 7 October, Frisco was declared secure.

During the earlier part of the night, while the battle for outpost control was intense in Detroit, reinforcements were sent to Frisco to help stabilize the situation at the nearby Company H/3/7 outpost. Like Detroit, it had come under attack from a Chinese company, starting around 8 PM. An hour and a half later, some of the enemy got into the trenchline but were pushed back with support from friendly artillery VT. Shortly after midnight, the enemy probed Frisco again and reached the trenchline. At 1:15 AM, two squads launched from JAMESTOWN, but a barrage of Chinese artillery interrupted their advance. Throughout the early morning hours of October 7, Company H and I units were deployed from the Main Line of Resistance (MLR) to strengthen the Frisco defense and halt the enemy assault. At 5:10 AM, a reinforced platoon from the reserve company was sent to launch a counterattack. It was this Company I unit that ultimately restored control of the COP to the Marines.230 Another reinforcing169 platoon arrived at the outpost just as the Marines there had evicted the remaining Chinese assault forces. At 7:15 AM on October 7, Frisco was declared secure.

230 During the predawn attempt to retake Frisco on 7 October, Staff Sergeant Lewis G. Watkins, I/3/7, although already wounded, led his rifle platoon in the assault against Frisco. When an enemy machine gun impeded their progress, Staff Sergeant Watkins grabbed a wounded man’s automatic rifle to help get the assault moving forward again. At that instant, an enemy grenade landed in the midst of the Marines. Staff Sergeant Watkins immediately seized it. Just as he was about to hurl it away it exploded in his hand. The grenade took the sergeant’s life but he had saved his fellow Marines. For his bravery Staff Sergeant Watkins was posthumously awarded the Medal of Honor.

230 During the early morning effort to retake Frisco on October 7, Staff Sergeant Lewis G. Watkins, I/3/7, despite being wounded, led his rifle platoon in the assault against Frisco. When an enemy machine gun stalled their progress, Staff Sergeant Watkins picked up a wounded soldier’s automatic rifle to push the assault forward again. At that moment, an enemy grenade landed among the Marines. Staff Sergeant Watkins quickly grabbed it. Just as he was about to throw it away, it exploded in his hand. The grenade took the sergeant’s life, but he saved his fellow Marines. For his bravery, Staff Sergeant Watkins was posthumously awarded the Medal of Honor.

Its precarious position, however, demanded either an investment of more outpost troops to retain possession of it or else its abandonment, in conjunction with other measures to neutralize loss of the position. At 1804 that day the latter course was instituted. The 7th Marines reported that the enemy had suffered an estimated 200 KIA and unknown WIA as a result of the bitterly contested outpost attacks on 6–7 October. Marine casualties were listed as 10 killed, 22 missing, 105 wounded and evacuated, and 23 not-seriously wounded.

Its risky position, however, required either sending more troops to hold onto it or abandoning it, along with other strategies to minimize the loss. At 1804 that day, the second option was put into action. The 7th Marines reported that the enemy had an estimated 200 killed in action and an unknown number wounded in action due to the fiercely contested outpost attacks on October 6–7. Marine casualties were reported as 10 killed, 22 missing, 105 wounded and evacuated, and 23 not seriously wounded.

In all, during the first week in October, the 1st Marine Division gave up six outposts, or forward positions, that had been sited on some of the commanding ground in the Marine area. On the division left, COPs 37, 36, and 86 were the ones most removed from the Korean MLR and thus easily susceptible to being overrun by the enemy at will and to his early reinforcement.231 The division theorized that near winter and the subsequent freezing of the Sachon would facilitate the movement of Chinese troops and supplies across the river to new positions. The enemy was now able to operate patrols east of the river without interference. At the opposite side of the division MLR, on its right flank, Detroit, Frisco, and Seattle had been lost. By gaining this string of outposts, the enemy was better able to exert pressure against other Marine positions forward of the line and the critical ground on JAMESTOWN.

During the first week of October, the 1st Marine Division lost six outposts, or forward positions, located on some of the strategic ground in the Marine area. On the division's left, COPs 37, 36, and 86 were the farthest from the Korean MLR and therefore easily vulnerable to being taken over by the enemy at their discretion and to his early reinforcements.231 The division believed that with winter approaching and the freezing of the Sachon, it would be easier for Chinese troops and supplies to move across the river to new positions. The enemy could now carry out patrols east of the river without any interruptions. On the right flank of the division MLR, Detroit, Frisco, and Seattle had been lost. By capturing this line of outposts, the enemy could better apply pressure on other Marine positions further forward and the vital ground on JAMESTOWN.

231 FMFPac, 1stMarDiv Sum, Jul-Oct 52.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ FMFPac, 1stMarDiv Summary, Jul-Oct 52.

To counter this threat, General Pollock strengthened the outposts close to the MLR and increased his patrolling requirements. It was decided that in some cases the mission of the COP—that of providing early warning of impending attack and slowing it down—could be accomplished as effectively by using patrols and listening posts at night.

To counter this threat, General Pollock reinforced the outposts near the MLR and increased his patrol requirements. It was decided that in some cases the mission of the COP—providing early warning of an impending attack and slowing it down—could be just as effectively accomplished by using patrols and listening posts at night.

By these activities, the Marines hoped to minimize the Chinese gains and prevent the launching of new attacks against either division COPs or JAMESTOWN. The serious situation on the outposts was compounded by existing political considerations, which prevented the Marines from initiating any real offensive campaigns. Moreover, any170 hill taken was invariably backed up by a still higher one, controlled by the enemy. The key factor was not so much holding an individual outpost as it was to insure that the enemy was unable to penetrate the JAMESTOWN line.

By these activities, the Marines aimed to reduce the Chinese gains and stop any new attacks on either division COPs or JAMESTOWN. The serious situation at the outposts was made worse by political factors that prevented the Marines from launching any real offensive campaigns. Additionally, any hill taken was usually supported by an even higher one, controlled by the enemy. The crucial point was less about holding a specific outpost and more about ensuring that the enemy couldn't break through the JAMestown line.

More STRESS, More CAS, More Accomplishments232

232 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 9; 1st MAW ComdDs, Jun-Oct 52; MAG-12 ComdDs, Jun, Sep 52; MAG-33 ComdD, Aug 52; MACG-2 ComdD, Sep 52; VMA-312 ComdDs, Sep-Oct 52; VMA-323 ComdDs, Jun-Jul, Sep 52; VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Jun-Jul 52; VMJ-1 ComdD, Jul 52; Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Field, NavOps, Korea; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Rees, Korea.

232 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 9; 1st MAW ComdDs, Jun-Oct 52; MAG-12 ComdDs, Jun, Sep 52; MAG-33 ComdD, Aug 52; MACG-2 ComdD, Sep 52; VMA-312 ComdDs, Sep-Oct 52; VMA-323 ComdDs, Jun-Jul, Sep 52; VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Jun-Jul 52; VMJ-1 ComdD, Jul 52; Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Field, NavOps, Korea; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Rees, Korea.

Some of the enemy ground pressure against the outposts in September and October had been relieved by the increase in the number of air strikes received by the 1st Marine Division. De-emphasis of the Air Force interdiction strategy in favor of striking the enemy wherever (and whenever) it hurt him most had made available more aircraft for close support of ground operations.233 The UN commander, General Clark, who had given the green light to the shift in USAF policy and targets, followed the giant hydroelectric strike in June with a mass attack the next month on 30 military targets located near the North Korean Capital. During a year’s freedom from air attack (July 1951-July 1952) Pyongyang had become not only the major logistics center for combat equipment and personnel but also the focal point for command and control of Communist ground and air defense efforts.

Some of the enemy pressure on the outposts in September and October had been eased by the increase in airstrikes received by the 1st Marine Division. The shift away from the Air Force's interdiction strategy to hitting the enemy where it hurt the most allowed for more aircraft to be available for close support of ground operations.233 The UN commander, General Clark, who approved the change in USAF policy and targets, followed up the major hydroelectric strike in June with a large-scale attack the next month on 30 military targets near the North Korean capital. During a year without air attacks (July 1951-July 1952), Pyongyang became not only the main logistics hub for combat equipment and personnel but also the center for command and control of Communist ground and air defense operations.

233 The 1st MAW chief of staff during this period, then Colonel Samuel S. Jack, offered the opinion that “the Fifth Air Force was most sympathetic to Division requirements for close air support from Wing sources. The Eighth Army in the Joint Operations Center proved to be the principal limiting factor in the assignment of air in accordance with these requests. Also, requirements that Division CAS requests filter through I Corps and JOC constituted a major factor in Wing response.” Jack ltr.

233 The 1st MAW chief of staff during this time, then Colonel Samuel S. Jack, stated that “the Fifth Air Force was very understanding of the Division's needs for close air support from Wing sources. The Eighth Army in the Joint Operations Center turned out to be the main limiting factor in assigning air support based on these requests. Additionally, the requirement for Division CAS requests to go through I Corps and JOC was a significant factor in the Wing's response.” Jack ltr.

Designated Operation PRESSURE PUMP, the 11 July strike against Pyongyang called for three separate attacks during daylight and a fourth at night. This extended time over the target would give enemy fighters more than ample time to take to the skies in defense of the Capital. Because Pyongyang “was defended by 48 guns and more than 100 automatic weapons, making it one of the worst ‘flak traps’ in Korea,”234 there was considerable hazard in the operation. Added171 danger to the pilots resulted from the decision to forewarn the North Korean civilian population of the air assault. General Clark explained the reason for dropping warning leaflets prior to the attack on Pyongyang:

Designated Operation Pressure pump, the strike on July 11 against Pyongyang involved three separate attacks during the day and another at night. This prolonged exposure over the target would give enemy fighters plenty of time to take to the skies to defend the capital. Because Pyongyang “was defended by 48 guns and more than 100 automatic weapons, making it one of the worst ‘flak traps’ in Korea,” 234 there was significant risk in the operation. The pilots faced additional danger due to the decision to warn the North Korean civilian population about the airstrike. General Clark explained why they dropped warning leaflets before the attack on Pyongyang:

234 Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 482.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 482.

The objective was in part humanitarian and in part practical. We had to hit Pyongyang because the Communists had made it a major military headquarters and stockpile area. We wanted to warn the people away from danger areas. By warning them away we disrupted their daily lives and made it difficult for the Communists to maintain any kind of schedules in their work in the city.235

The goal was both humanitarian and practical. We needed to target Pyongyang because the Communists had turned it into a major military base and storage location. We aimed to alert the people to stay away from dangerous areas. By doing this, we disrupted their daily routines and made it harder for the Communists to keep any sort of schedule for their activities in the city.235

235 Clark, Danube to Yalu, pp. 208–209.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Clark, Danube to Yalu, pp. 208–209.

Results indicated that both the destructive and the psychological aspects of the mission were successful. American, British, and ROK planes completely destroyed 3 of the 30 military targets attacked. Of the rest, only two escaped major damage:

Results indicated that both the destructive and psychological aspects of the mission were successful. American, British, and ROK planes completely destroyed 3 of the 30 military targets attacked. Of the rest, only two escaped major damage:

According to ... reports, the North Korean Ministry of Industry’s underground offices were destroyed and a direct hit on another shelter was said to have killed 400 to 500 Communist officials. Off the air for two days, Radio Pyongyang finally announced that the ‘brutal’ strikes had destroyed 1,500 buildings and had inflicted 7,000 casualties.236

According to ... reports, the North Korean Ministry of Industry’s underground offices were destroyed, and a direct hit on another shelter reportedly killed 400 to 500 Communist officials. After being off the air for two days, Radio Pyongyang finally announced that the ‘brutal’ strikes had destroyed 1,500 buildings and caused 7,000 casualties.236

236 Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 482.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 482.

Of the far-reaching effect of the leaflets, the UN commander later wrote:

Of the widespread impact of the leaflets, the UN commander later wrote:

The warning leaflets, coupled with the bombing, hurt North Korean civilian morale badly. The very audacity of the United Nations in warning the Communists where bombers would strike hurt morale because it emphasized to the North Koreans just how complete was UN mastery of the air. Contrarily, it made them see even more clearly that the Communists were ineffectual in their efforts to ward off our air blows....

The warning leaflets, along with the bombings, seriously damaged North Korean civilian morale. The boldness of the United Nations in notifying the Communists about where the bombers would hit further hurt morale because it highlighted for the North Koreans just how dominant the UN was in the air. On the contrary, it made it even clearer to them that the Communists were ineffective in trying to defend against our airstrikes....

As a result of the warnings, the bombings, the failure of the Communists to provide protection, and the refusal of the Communists to permit evacuation of the clearly defined target areas, civilian resentment was channeled away from the UNC bombers and towards the Communist rulers.237

As a result of the warnings, the bombings, the Communists' failure to provide protection, and their refusal to allow evacuation of the clearly defined target areas, civilian anger was directed away from the UNC bombers and towards the Communist leaders.237

237 Clark, Danube to Yalu, p. 209. “I told you so” leaflets were dropped after the raid to impress the inhabitants with the importance of believing the warning leaflets. USAF, Ops in Korea, No. 127, pp. 36, 37.

237 Clark, Danube to Yalu, p. 209. “I told you so” leaflets were dropped after the raid to convince the locals of the importance of trusting the warning leaflets. USAF, Ops in Korea, No. 127, pp. 36, 37.

The record set by the 1,254 sorties flown in this 11 July operation was to last only seven weeks. On 29 August, 1,403 sorties were employed in a new strike against the Capital. The massed raids against military targets in Pyongyang, known as the “All United Nations Air172 Effort” turned out to be the largest one-day air assault during the entire three years of the Korean War. Again attacking at four-hour intervals three times during daylight, Allied aircraft blasted a list of targets that “read like a guide to public offices in Pyongyang and included such points of interest as the Ministry of Rail Transportation, the Munitions Bureau, Radio Pyongyang, plus many factories, warehouses, and troop billets.”238 Of the 45 military targets in the city, 31 received moderate-to-severe damage according to post-strike photographs.

The record set by the 1,254 missions flown in this operation on July 11 only lasted seven weeks. On August 29, 1,403 missions were conducted in a new strike against the capital. The coordinated attacks on military targets in Pyongyang, known as the “All United Nations Air172 Effort,” became the largest one-day air assault in the entire three years of the Korean War. Once again striking at four-hour intervals three times during the day, Allied aircraft targeted a list of sites that “read like a guide to public offices in Pyongyang,” including key locations such as the Ministry of Rail Transportation, the Munitions Bureau, Radio Pyongyang, along with numerous factories, warehouses, and troop barracks. 238 Of the 45 military targets in the city, 31 suffered moderate to severe damage according to post-strike photos.

238 Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 489.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 489.

Substitution of the previous interdiction strategy by PRESSURE attacks brought increased close air support to frontline troops. As a result of this expanded number of CAS sorties, wing pilots and ground forward air controllers greatly increased their operational proficiency.239 The Marines were still not satisfied with the close support picture, however, and neither were a number of U.S. Army commanders. Some of the latter regarded General Clark as the champion of more extensive close air support missions for frontline units, but he quickly dispelled this view. Instead, he cautioned these supporters of Marine-type close air support to accept the existing procedures, which were derived from the “vast reservoir of experience ... [representing] the composite view of senior members of the Armed Forces [with] the longest and most responsible experience in close support during World War II.”240 At the same time the UN commander, on 11 August 1952, had advised his force commanders to study the factors affecting the close air support situation in Korea and comment on certain UNC proposals for improving the CAS system.

The shift from the previous interdiction strategy to STRESS attacks led to more close air support for frontline troops. With this increase in close air support sorties, wing pilots and ground forward air controllers improved their operational skills significantly.239 However, the Marines were still not happy with the close support situation, and many U.S. Army commanders felt the same way. Some of them saw General Clark as the advocate for enhanced close air support missions for frontline units, but he quickly dismissed that idea. Instead, he urged these supporters of Marine-style close air support to accept the current procedures, which were based on the “vast reservoir of experience ... [representing] the composite view of senior members of the Armed Forces [with] the longest and most responsible experience in close support during World War II.”240 Meanwhile, the UN commander, on 11 August 1952, had advised his force commanders to examine the factors affecting close air support in Korea and provide feedback on certain UNC proposals for improving the CAS system.

239 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-53.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-53.

240 Ibid., p. 9-143.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 9-143.

In the close air support picture for the Marines, October was a bright month. In the outpost battles of early October, the 1st MAW put 319 sorties in the air during both day and night to strike, strafe, bomb, and burn enemy positions and troops facing General Pollock’s division. A new level of achievement had been reached during the Bunker Hill battle in August. That month nearly 1,000 aircraft, predominantly Marine, loosed ordnance at targets on and near the Chinese MLR and OPLR.

In the close air support scenario for the Marines, October was a vibrant month. During the outpost battles in early October, the 1st MAW flew 319 sorties both day and night to attack, strafe, bomb, and destroy enemy positions and troops opposing General Pollock’s division. A new level of success was achieved during the Bunker Hill battle in August. That month, almost 1,000 aircraft, mainly Marine, dropped munitions on targets on and near the Chinese MLR and OPLR.

During the first six months of Marine ground operations in defense of JAMESTOWN, wing squadrons and pilots had made major contributions173 to the U.S. air effort in Korea. On 7 June 1952, First Lieutenant John W. Andre, VMF(N)-513, piloting a World War II model Corsair on a night armed reconnaissance mission over the west coast of North Korea, shot down an enemy piston-driven Yak fighter. It was the first time that a Russian-built plane of that model had been knocked out of the skies at night by another plane. This aircraft was also the fifth kill for the lieutenant, making him the first Marine nightfighter ace in Korea.241

During the first six months of Marine ground operations defending JAMESTOWN, wing squadrons and pilots made significant contributions173 to the U.S. air effort in Korea. On June 7, 1952, First Lieutenant John W. Andre, VMF(N)-513, piloting a World War II Corsair on a night armed reconnaissance mission over the western coast of North Korea, shot down an enemy piston-driven Yak fighter. This was the first time a Russian-built plane of that type had been brought down at night by another aircraft. This also marked the lieutenant's fifth kill, making him the first Marine nightfighter ace in Korea.241

241 The first Marine night ace was Captain Robert Baird, who shot down six Japanese planes between 9 June and 14 July 1945. Sherrod, Marine Aviation, p. 404. Lieutenant Andre’s first four planes were also downed during World War II. See Appendix F for Marine air kills during the Korean War.

241 The first Marine night ace was Captain Robert Baird, who shot down six Japanese planes between June 9 and July 14, 1945. Sherrod, Marine Aviation, p. 404. Lieutenant Andre's first four planes were also downed during World War II. See Appendix F for Marine air kills during the Korean War.

Nearly three months after that record, another one emerged: the first Marine to down an enemy jet with a propeller-driven aircraft. Late on the afternoon of 10 September, Captain Jesse G. Folmar and First Lieutenant Willie L. Daniels, both of VMA-312, had taken off from the Sicily to attack an enemy troop concentration reported to be south of Chinnampo, on the west coast just below the 39th Parallel. Shortly after reaching the vicinity of the target, the Marine Corsairs were jumped by a pair of MIG-15s. Two more Russian-made jets tore into the fight. During a fast exchange of cannon and machine gun fire, the Marine captain was able to score lethal hits on one of the MIGs. When four more of them picked up the chase, the vastly outnumbered Marines broke for home, heading westward in a diving turn.

Nearly three months after that record, another one came to light: the first Marine to shoot down an enemy jet using a propeller-driven aircraft. Late in the afternoon on September 10, Captain Jesse G. Folmar and First Lieutenant Willie L. Daniels, both from VMA-312, took off from the Sicily to attack an enemy troop concentration reported to be south of Chinnampo, on the west coast just below the 39th Parallel. Shortly after getting near the target, the Marine Corsairs were attacked by a pair of MIG-15s. Two more Russian-made jets joined the fight. During a quick exchange of cannon and machine gun fire, the Marine captain managed to inflict lethal damage on one of the MIGs. When four more MIGs joined the chase, the vastly outnumbered Marines pulled back for home, heading westward in a steep dive.

Captain Folmar’s return to the Sicily was delayed almost immediately:

Captain Folmar's return to the Sicily was held up almost right away:

I had just started picking up good diving speed when I saw balls of tracer ammo passing on my left and at the same instant felt a severe explosion in my left wing ... I saw that the left aileron and four feet of my left wing were gone.242

I had just begun to gain good diving speed when I noticed tracer rounds flying past on my left, and at that moment, I felt a huge explosion in my left wing... I saw that the left aileron and four feet of my left wing were missing.242

242 VMA-312 ComdD, Sep 52.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ VMA-312 Commander, Sep 52.

This damage caused the plane to rapidly go out of control. While still able to maneuver, the Marine aviator headed for the sea and as he neared it, bailed out of his Corsair and parachuted into the ocean. A rescue plane out of Cho-do picked him up and returned the captain, who had sustained a slight shoulder injury, to the carrier. Lieutenant Daniels, who had alerted the rescue force, circled his descending flight leader until he hit the water. After ascertaining that the waterborne flier’s condition was satisfactory, the lieutenant turned his plane towards the Sicily. In a short while he was safely home.

This damage caused the plane to quickly go out of control. While still able to maneuver, the Marine pilot headed for the sea and, as he got close, jumped out of his Corsair and parachuted into the ocean. A rescue plane from Cho-do picked him up and brought the captain, who had a slight shoulder injury, back to the carrier. Lieutenant Daniels, who had alerted the rescue team, circled his descending flight leader until he hit the water. After confirming that the waterborne pilot was okay, the lieutenant turned his plane toward the Sicily. Before long, he was safely back home.

174

174

In late September, Major Alexander J. Gillis, VMF-311, assigned earlier that summer to the Air Force’s 335th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter Group, as an exchange pilot.243 distinguished himself by becoming not only the first naval aviator to destroy three enemy aircraft in Korea but also the second one to get a multiple killing in a single day.244 Flying in a four-plane Sabrejet formation near the vicinity of the mouth of the Yalu on 28 September, Major Gillis led another plane after two MIG-15s. By superior pilot technique and aggressive tactics, he forced one of the enemy to crash during a low altitude chase. Later on during the sortie, the Marine initiated an attack on a solo MIG, closing on it and scoring hits that caused the plane to become uncontrollable and the pilot to eject. Major Gillis also had to eject from his F-86 after it became disabled by the MIG. The incident had occurred on the Marine aviator’s 50th combat mission with the Air Force. He spent nearly four hours in the Yellow Sea before a rescue helicopter picked him up.

In late September, Major Alexander J. Gillis, VMF-311, who had been assigned earlier that summer to the Air Force’s 335th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron, 4th Fighter Group, as an exchange pilot, distinguished himself by becoming not only the first naval aviator to destroy three enemy aircraft in Korea but also the second to achieve a multiple kill in a single day. Flying in a four-plane Sabrejet formation near the mouth of the Yalu on September 28, Major Gillis led another plane after two MIG-15s. Through superior piloting skills and aggressive tactics, he forced one of the enemy aircraft to crash during a low-altitude chase. Later in the mission, the Marine pilot initiated an attack on a solo MIG, closing in and scoring hits that rendered the plane uncontrollable and caused the pilot to eject. Major Gillis also had to eject from his F-86 after it was disabled by the MIG. This incident occurred during the Marine aviator's 50th combat mission with the Air Force. He spent nearly four hours in the Yellow Sea before a rescue helicopter picked him up.

243 The exchange program “appears to have originated with the participation—at Tactical Air Command’s invitation—of two Marine Corps and two Navy pilots ... in the fall of 1947.” Within two years, the program designed to “indoctrinate selected Air Force and Navy pilots in the air operational and air training activities of each other’s service, had received Department of Defense approval.” On 1 October 1949 the program went into effect. Initially the exchange period was one year, but after the Korean fighting broke out, the period was reduced to approximately three months. Marine participation began late in 1951. Atch 1 to Hq, USAF (AFCHO) memo to Maj J. M. Yingling, HQMC, dtd 16 Jan 67 in v. V, Korean comment file.

243 The exchange program “seems to have started with the involvement—at the invitation of Tactical Air Command—of two Marine Corps and two Navy pilots ... in the fall of 1947.” Within two years, the program created to “familiarize selected Air Force and Navy pilots with each other’s operational and training activities had received approval from the Department of Defense.” On October 1, 1949, the program was implemented. Initially, the exchange period lasted one year, but after the Korean conflict began, the period was shortened to about three months. Marine participation started in late 1951. Atch 1 to Hq, USAF (AFCHO) memo to Maj J. M. Yingling, HQMC, dtd 16 Jan 67 in v. V, Korean comment file.

244 On 15 September, Major Gillis had shot down a solo MIG-15.

244 On September 15, Major Gillis shot down a single MIG-15.

Another feat, this one a study in determination and perseverance, had occurred early in the summer. On 22 July, the VMJ-1 commander, Lieutenant Colonel Vernon O. Ullman, had taken to the air for a photo mission over North Korea in the vicinity of Sinanju, located near the Yellow Sea 40 miles above Pyongyang. During the first of seven scheduled flights, he encountered heavy flak but nevertheless completed his first mapping run in the area. Further, the Marine flier decided that the antiaircraft menace was not going to force him to abandon the remaining part of his task. He continued. On the second of his seven runs, some 40 enemy jets (MIG-15s) appeared on the scene. These were dissuaded from close-in interference, however, by the photo escort of 24 USAF single-engine Sabrejet fighters. Thereafter, the Russian-made aircraft disappeared; Lieutenant Colonel Ullman continued, despite the intense, accurate enemy antiaircraft fire, until he concluded his mission.

Another impressive achievement, showcasing determination and perseverance, took place early in the summer. On July 22, Lieutenant Colonel Vernon O. Ullman, commander of VMJ-1, headed out for a photo mission over North Korea near Sinanju, which is located about 40 miles north of Pyongyang by the Yellow Sea. During the first of seven planned flights, he faced heavy anti-aircraft fire but still managed to complete his first mapping run in the area. Additionally, the Marine pilot refused to let the threat from anti-aircraft guns force him to give up on the rest of his mission. He pressed on. On his second run, around 40 enemy jets (MIG-15s) showed up. However, the presence of 24 USAF single-engine Sabrejet fighters escorting him deterred them from getting too close. After that, the Russian-made planes vanished; Lieutenant Colonel Ullman continued his mission undeterred, despite the intense and accurate enemy anti-aircraft fire, until he completed his task.

175

175

The type of determination displayed by Lieutenant Colonel Ullman helped Marine tactical squadrons achieve some kind of distinction nearly every month from late spring to the fall of 1952. In May, VMF-323 (“the Death Rattlers”), then commanded by Major William A. Weir, established a squadron one-month record for number of combat sorties, 1,160, and total combat hours, 2,362.7. A high percentage of aircraft availability, 95.6, helped make this mark possible. On 1 June, VMA-312 received the congratulations of CTF 95 for its “outstanding performance under difficult conditions” during the spring months. During this period the squadron, based on board the USS Bataan, had been particularly hampered by excessive turnover of key squadron officers and flight leaders. This continual squadron rotation resulted in considerable variation in pilot indoctrination and need for field carrier landing qualification, due to the “close tolerances in pilot skill required by carrier operations.”245 Despite these difficulties, VMA-312 had scored an impressive 80-sortie mission, flown by 24 aircraft, on 18 April.

The determination shown by Lieutenant Colonel Ullman helped Marine tactical squadrons achieve some form of recognition nearly every month from late spring to fall 1952. In May, VMF-323 ("the Death Rattlers"), led by Major William A. Weir, set a one-month record for combat sorties with 1,160 and total combat hours at 2,362.7. A high aircraft availability rate of 95.6% made this achievement possible. On June 1, VMA-312 received congratulations from CTF 95 for its "outstanding performance under difficult conditions" during the spring months. During this time, the squadron, based on the USS Bataan, faced challenges due to frequent turnover among key squadron officers and flight leaders. This constant rotation led to significant differences in pilot training and the need for field carrier landing qualifications, due to the "close tolerances in pilot skill required by carrier operations." Despite these challenges, VMA-312 managed to complete an impressive 80-sortie mission with 24 aircraft on April 18.

245 PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 4, Chap. 10, p. 10-77.

245 PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 4, Chap. 10, p. 10-77.

Additional recognition of professional excellence was conferred upon Marine squadrons in July. On the 17th, the senior advisor to the ROK I Corps expressed the gratitude of the corps commander for the magnificent support the 1st MAW pilots had provided during the second week of the month. All four attack squadrons in MAG-12 and both fighter units in MAG-33 had taken part in these CAS missions. A week later, eight planes from Lieutenant Colonel Henry S. Miller’s VMA-323, (which, along with Lieutenant Colonel Graham H. Benson’s VMA-212, had been redesignated from fighter to attack squadrons the previous month), completed an unusually successful interdiction mission at Hago.

Additional recognition of professional excellence was awarded to Marine squadrons in July. On the 17th, the senior advisor to the ROK I Corps expressed the gratitude of the corps commander for the outstanding support the 1st MAW pilots provided during the second week of the month. All four attack squadrons in MAG-12 and both fighter units in MAG-33 participated in these CAS missions. A week later, eight planes from Lieutenant Colonel Henry S. Miller’s VMA-323, which, along with Lieutenant Colonel Graham H. Benson’s VMA-212, had been redesignated from fighter to attack squadrons the previous month, completed an exceptionally successful interdiction mission at Hago.

Located 25 miles northwest of Kaesong, the village reportedly was the site of heavy troop concentrations, active mortar positions, and antitank weapons. Leaving K-6 at 1725, the eight Marine VMA-323 pilots were soon over the target. Comprising the Death Rattler’s flight were Majors John M. Dufford, Raymond C. Holben, William H. Irvin, Jr., and Curtis E. Knudson; Captain John Church, Jr.; First Lieutenant William A. Poe, Jr.; and Second Lieutenants Stuart L. Spurlock and James S. Thompson. At 1810 their attacks were launched, using 1,000-pound bombs, napalm, rockets, and 20mm ammunition.176 The strike was over almost as soon as it had started, and when the Marines departed, not one building remained in useful condition. But it was not until several days later that the final results of the strike were known. Intelligence sources reported that the raid had caught the enemy troops at the evening meal; more than 500 had been killed by the Corsairs, aptly called “Whistling Death” by the Japanese in World War II.

Located 25 miles northwest of Kaesong, the village was said to have heavy troop concentrations, active mortar positions, and antitank weapons. Leaving K-6 at 5:25 PM, the eight Marine VMA-323 pilots quickly reached the target. The Death Rattler’s flight included Majors John M. Dufford, Raymond C. Holben, William H. Irvin, Jr., and Curtis E. Knudson; Captain John Church, Jr.; First Lieutenant William A. Poe, Jr.; and Second Lieutenants Stuart L. Spurlock and James S. Thompson. At 6:10 PM, they launched their attacks using 1,000-pound bombs, napalm, rockets, and 20mm ammunition.176 The strike was over almost as soon as it began, and when the Marines left, not one building was left standing. However, it wasn’t until several days later that the final results of the strike were determined. Intelligence sources reported that the raid had caught the enemy troops during dinner; more than 500 were killed by the Corsairs, which the Japanese had aptly named “Whistling Death” during World War II.

For the remainder of the summer and into the fall Marine groups and squadrons continued their record-breaking and efficient support of ground troops and naval forces. With four squadrons (two day, one night-fighter, and one photo), MAG-33 sent 141 sorties against the enemy on 6 August. This one-day group record occurred just before the departure of Colonel Condon, who turned over the reins of the organization to Colonel Herbert H. Williamson on the 11th, and then took command of MAG-12.

For the rest of the summer and into the fall, Marine groups and squadrons continued their record-breaking and efficient support of ground troops and naval forces. With four squadrons (two for daytime operations, one for night-fighting, and one for photo reconnaissance), MAG-33 launched 141 sorties against the enemy on August 6. This one-day record for the group happened just before Colonel Condon left, handing over command of the organization to Colonel Herbert H. Williamson on the 11th, before taking command of MAG-12.

Shortly before Colonel Condon relinquished command, he was particularly pleased by the success of a four-plane strike by VMF-311 (Major William J. Sims) in support of the U.S. 25th Infantry Division commanded by Brigadier General Samuel T. Williams. Major Johnnie C. Vance, Jr., strike leader, was accompanied in this flight by Captain George R. Brier and Second Lieutenants Charles E. Pangburn and Whitlock N. Sharpe. Up until this time the infantry had been particularly harassed by several enemy frontline fortifications and supporting artillery. The four pilots destroyed three bunkers and two heavy guns and also caved in approximately 50 feet of trenchline on the 7 August strike. Upon learning of the success of the Marine pilots and the conditions under which the attacks were carried out—dangerous terrain and constant ground fire directed towards the planes—the general dispatched a letter, commending the “skill, courage, and determination displayed by these pilots....”246

Shortly before Colonel Condon handed over command, he was really pleased with the success of a four-plane strike by VMF-311 (Major William J. Sims) in support of the U.S. 25th Infantry Division led by Brigadier General Samuel T. Williams. Major Johnnie C. Vance, Jr., the strike leader, was joined on this mission by Captain George R. Brier and Second Lieutenants Charles E. Pangburn and Whitlock N. Sharpe. Up to that point, the infantry had been under heavy pressure from several enemy frontline fortifications and supporting artillery. The four pilots destroyed three bunkers and two heavy guns and also collapsed about 50 feet of trenchline during the strike on August 7. When General Williams learned of the Marine pilots' success and the tough conditions they faced—dangerous terrain and constant ground fire aimed at the planes—he sent a letter praising the “skill, courage, and determination displayed by these pilots....”246

246 MAG-33 ComdD, Aug 52, p. 16.

246 MAG-33 ComdD, Aug 52, p. 16.

Another congratulatory message was received in September, this one from General Pollock for the excellent support given by MAG-12 on the 20th. With three attack squadrons participating, Colonel Condon’s group had neutralized Chinese weapons and troops at OP 36 to help prevent a takeover of the Korean position. The pilots reported well over 100 Chinese casualties. Lieutenant Colonel Kenneth R. Chamberlain’s VMA-323 contributed most of the 23 Marine177 sorties. The other attacking squadrons were VMA-121 (Lieutenant Colonel Wayne M. Cargill, who 10 days earlier had relieved Lieutenant Colonel Crawford), and VMA-212, commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Maurice W. Fletcher.

Another congratulatory message was received in September, this one from General Pollock for the outstanding support provided by MAG-12 on the 20th. With three attack squadrons involved, Colonel Condon’s team had neutralized Chinese weapons and troops at OP 36 to help prevent a takeover of the Korean position. The pilots reported well over 100 Chinese casualties. Lieutenant Colonel Kenneth R. Chamberlain’s VMA-323 contributed most of the 23 Marine177 sorties. The other attacking squadrons were VMA-121 (Lieutenant Colonel Wayne M. Cargill, who 10 days earlier had relieved Lieutenant Colonel Crawford) and VMA-212, led by Lieutenant Colonel Maurice W. Fletcher.

September was a month of mixed fortunes in the air war over Korea. The successful CAS strikes of the 20th followed only a few days after another high point set on 14 September, when Lieutenant Colonel Cargill’s attack squadron flew its 5,000th combat sortie since arrival in the Korean theater in October 1951. Then on 15 September, General Jerome commissioned a new kind of unit in the wing, Marine Composite Squadron 1 (VMC-1), whose mission was to provide electronic counter-measures (ECM) for UN aircraft. Lieutenant Colonel Lawrence F. Fox headed the squadron, the only one in the naval service with an ECM primary mission in Korea.

September brought a mix of outcomes in the air war over Korea. The successful close air support strikes on the 20th came just a few days after another highlight on September 14, when Lieutenant Colonel Cargill’s attack squadron completed its 5,000th combat sortie since arriving in the Korean theater in October 1951. Then, on September 15, General Jerome established a new type of unit in the wing, Marine Composite Squadron 1 (VMC-1), tasked with providing electronic counter-measures (ECM) for UN aircraft. Lieutenant Colonel Lawrence F. Fox led the squadron, the only one in the naval service with ECM as its primary mission in Korea.

Three days after the commissioning, a strange incident transpired. North of the UN line and at an altitude of 9,500 feet, a F-84 Thunderjet fighter, with U.S. Air Force markings and insignia, attacked a propeller-driven Air Force trainer. The slower plane immediately began defensive maneuvering, flying in tight circles. After making five turns, the trainer pilot saw the supposedly friendly jet fly off.

Three days after the commissioning, a strange incident took place. North of the UN line and at an altitude of 9,500 feet, a F-84 Thunderjet fighter, marked with U.S. Air Force insignia, attacked a propeller-driven Air Force trainer. The slower aircraft quickly started defensive maneuvers, flying in tight circles. After making five turns, the trainer pilot saw the supposed friendly jet fly away.

It was believed that such a paradoxical occurrence was due to the substantial number of F-84 losses and the enemy’s ability to piece together and fly an aircraft of that model. A few similar episodes—attacks by apparently friendly aircraft on UN planes—had previously taken place. In each case, the impostor was a model of U.S. aircraft that had suffered particularly heavy losses.

It was thought that this paradoxical situation was caused by the significant number of F-84 losses and the enemy’s ability to assemble and operate an aircraft of that type. There had been a few similar incidents—attacks by seemingly friendly aircraft on UN planes—before this. In each case, the false aircraft was a model of U.S. planes that had experienced particularly high losses.

Another incident in September had dire consequences. On the 10th, MAG-33 dispatched 22 fighter aircraft from VMF-115 (Lieutenant Colonel Royce W. Coln) to attack reported troop concentrations near Sariwon, 35 miles directly south of Pyongyang. The F9F Panther jets had completed the strike and were returning to their K-3 base when they were diverted to land at K-2, Taegu, where the weather was better. Fog had suddenly swept over the field at K-3, reducing visibility to zero. Sixteen Panthers landed safely at K-2, 45 miles southwest of the Marine field at Pohang. The remaining six, piloted by Majors Raymond E. Demers and Donald F. Givens, First Lieutenant Alvin R. Bourgeois, and by Second Lieutenants John W. Hill, Jr., Carl R. Lafleur, and Richard L. Roth, flying in formation178 in poor weather, crashed into the side of a 3,000-foot mountain while descending.247 They would have required only an additional 600 feet of altitude to clear the summit.

Another incident in September had serious consequences. On the 10th, MAG-33 sent 22 fighter jets from VMF-115 (Lieutenant Colonel Royce W. Coln) to attack reported troop concentrations near Sariwon, 35 miles directly south of Pyongyang. The F9F Panther jets had completed their strike and were on their way back to their K-3 base when they were redirected to land at K-2, Taegu, because the weather was better there. Fog had suddenly rolled in over K-3, reducing visibility to zero. Sixteen Panthers landed safely at K-2, 45 miles southwest of the Marine field at Pohang. The remaining six, piloted by Majors Raymond E. Demers and Donald F. Givens, First Lieutenant Alvin R. Bourgeois, and Second Lieutenants John W. Hill, Jr., Carl R. Lafleur, and Richard L. Roth, while flying in formation in poor weather, crashed into the side of a 3,000-foot mountain while descending. They would have needed just an extra 600 feet of altitude to clear the summit.

247 Although not definitely proven, there were “some indications of false radio beacons being used by the enemy in clandestine operations in the K-2 area.” Jack ltr.

247 Although not definitively proven, there were “some signs of fake radio beacons being used by the enemy in secret operations in the K-2 area.” Jack ltr.

Losses of Marine pilots and aircraft had been of growing concern to the wing command. The initial success of the flak suppression fires had eliminated the one successful Communist source of air defense, accurate antiaircraft firing. One result was that noncombat accidents for a while during the summer became the principal cause of pilot and plane attrition. To help reduce these operational accidents as well as the combat losses, the two Marine air groups instituted squadron training programs and also directed the adoption of several new corrective procedures. In MAG-12, for example, a study of results from the FAF policy that limited bombing runs to one for interdiction and two for CAS targets revealed a sharp reduction in hits from flak. Tactical squadron commanders in MAG-12 drew up a syllabus during September to test proposed defensive tactics for their propeller aircraft to employ against enemy jets. The carrier squadron, VMA-312, began that same month the additional practice of field carrier landing qualification at K-6 for new pilots before permitting them to operate from the carriers.

Losses of Marine pilots and aircraft had become a growing concern for the wing command. The initial success of the flak suppression fires had eliminated the only effective Communist air defense, accurate antiaircraft fire. As a result, noncombat accidents during the summer became the main cause of pilot and plane attrition for a while. To help reduce these operational accidents as well as combat losses, the two Marine air groups started squadron training programs and also implemented several new corrective procedures. In MAG-12, for example, a study of the results from the FAF policy that limited bombing runs to one for interdiction and two for CAS targets showed a significant decrease in hits from flak. Tactical squadron commanders in MAG-12 created a syllabus in September to test proposed defensive tactics for their propeller aircraft against enemy jets. The carrier squadron, VMA-312, also began that month to practice field carrier landing qualifications at K-6 for new pilots before allowing them to operate from the carriers.

In spite of these efforts, pilot losses spiralled alarmingly in October. For the rest of 1952, the monthly totals remained near that month’s level. On the other hand, aircraft losses during October dropped sharply to 10 from the September total of 22. This lower figure was not to be exceeded until May 1953. These remedial procedures were considered at least partially responsible for the substantial decrease in aircraft losses.

In spite of these efforts, pilot losses increased alarmingly in October. For the rest of 1952, the monthly totals stayed close to that month’s level. However, aircraft losses in October fell sharply to 10 from the September total of 22. This lower number wouldn't be surpassed until May 1953. These corrective measures were seen as at least partly responsible for the significant drop in aircraft losses.

In another area, a mid-October landing at Kojo, on the east coast immediately south of the 39th Parallel, did not work out as planned. The amphibious operation was in reality a feint intended to draw troops away from frontline positions and expose them to naval air and gunfire as they rushed in reinforcements. The enemy failed to rise to the bait, and actually only a few Communist troops were sighted. VMA-312 provided armed reconnaissance, tactical air operation, and naval gunfire spotting during the feint. Although they made little enemy contact, the Marine “Checkerboard” pilots operating179 off the Sicily gained much experience in landings and take-offs under the adverse conditions of rough seas and high winds.

In another area, a mid-October landing at Kojo, on the east coast just south of the 39th Parallel, didn’t go as planned. The amphibious operation was actually a distraction meant to draw troops away from frontline positions and expose them to naval air and gunfire as they rushed in reinforcements. The enemy didn’t take the bait, and only a few Communist soldiers were spotted. VMA-312 provided armed reconnaissance, tactical air operations, and naval gunfire spotting during the feint. Although they had limited contact with the enemy, the Marine “Checkerboard” pilots operating 179 off the Sicily gained valuable experience with landings and take-offs in the challenging conditions of rough seas and high winds.

Rockets, Resupply, and Radios248

248 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9; 1st MAW ComdD, Oct 52; HMR-161 ComdDs Aug-Sep 52.

248 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9; 1st MAW ComdD, Oct 52; HMR-161 ComdDs Aug-Sep 52.

Through October 1952, operational control of Korean based Marine fighter and attack squadrons was still vested in commanders other than General Jerome. Tactical squadrons continued to be directed by the FAF or Navy in their missions; the observation and helicopter squadrons were under operational control of the 1st Marine Division and utilized, as before, at its discretion.

Through October 1952, the operational control of Marine fighter and attack squadrons based in Korea was still under the authority of commanders other than General Jerome. Tactical squadrons continued to be directed by the FAF or the Navy in their missions; the observation and helicopter squadrons were under the operational control of the 1st Marine Division and were used, as before, at its discretion.

HMR-161, commanded since 8 August by Lieutenant Colonel John F. Carey, continued its primary mission of evaluating rotary wing aircraft and their methods of employment. One tactical innovation, movement of elements of the 4.5-inch Rocket Battery, was undertaken during August soon after the Bunker Hill battle. With ground-fired rockets, the problem of a tell-tale cloud of dust and brilliant flash of the rockets after each salvo had always plagued the artillerymen. This seldom went unnoticed by the enemy, who often showered the marked area with counterbattery fire. On 19 and 20 August, in Operation RIPPLE, HMR-161 and the rocket battery proved that these two units could successfully shoot and scoot to a new location and fire effectively again without drawing an enemy reprisal. This Marine Corps innovation in air mobility—the first displacement of field artillery under combat conditions—offered a major time-saving advantage. Whereas previously it took approximately a half-hour for rocket launchers to move from their bivouac area to firing position,249 deployment by helicopter could be made in a matter of minutes, a time factor that could be critical in event of an enemy attempted breakthrough.

HMR-161, led since August 8 by Lieutenant Colonel John F. Carey, continued its main mission of assessing rotary wing aircraft and their usage methods. One tactical advancement, moving parts of the 4.5-inch Rocket Battery, was implemented in August shortly after the Bunker Hill battle. With ground-fired rockets, the issue of a noticeable cloud of dust and bright flash from the rockets after each launch had always troubled the artillerymen. This rarely went unnoticed by the enemy, who often responded with counterbattery fire. On August 19 and 20, in Operation RIPPLE, HMR-161 and the rocket battery demonstrated that these two units could successfully shoot and relocate to a new position and fire effectively again without provoking an enemy response. This Marine Corps innovation in air mobility—marking the first displacement of field artillery under combat conditions—provided a significant time-saving benefit. While it previously took about half an hour for rocket launchers to move from their camp to firing position, deployment via helicopter could be done in just a few minutes, a crucial factor in case of an enemy breakthrough attempt.

249 Henderson ltr III.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Henderson Letter III.

The operation demonstrated that helicopters not only could transport rocket crews with weapons and ammunition to firing areas far more rapidly than conventional wheeled vehicles, but that the rotary craft could airlift these weapons into places inaccessible by road. The nature of the mountainous terrain proved advantageous in that180 hills and valleys provided defiladed areas for loading and firing the weapons as well as protected routes for helicopter movements. An observation made by pilots for operations in other types of environment, not offering as much cover and concealment, was that the shiny blue paint on their birds would make detection easy in most surroundings and that camouflage paint would lessen the risk from enemy AA.

The operation showed that helicopters could transport rocket crews with weapons and ammo to firing areas much faster than traditional wheeled vehicles and could also airlift these weapons to places that roads couldn't reach. The mountainous terrain was beneficial because the hills and valleys provided covered areas for loading and firing the weapons, as well as safe routes for helicopter movements. Pilots noted in operations in different environments, which didn’t offer as much cover and concealment, that the shiny blue paint on their helicopters would make them easy to spot in most surroundings and that using camouflage paint would reduce the risk from enemy anti-aircraft fire.

Transport helicopters of HMR-161 continued to augment those of VMO-6 in casualty evacuation and ferrying Marines and other frontline troops. The observation squadron maintained its policy and outstanding record of emergency flights of the wounded under any weather conditions except dense fog (electronic navigational aids still were not available). In August, various mechanical failures developed among the newly received HO5S-1 Sikorsky helicopters. These three-place observation aircraft were underpowered but superior in many flight characteristics to the HTL-4 helicopters then in the squadron. Mechanical difficulties with the newer aircraft increased until it became necessary to ground them late in October until replacement parts became available in the supply system.

Transport helicopters of HMR-161 continued to support those of VMO-6 in evacuating casualties and transporting Marines and other frontline troops. The observation squadron upheld its policy and impressive record for emergency flights of the wounded in any weather conditions except thick fog (electronic navigation aids were still not available). In August, various mechanical issues arose with the newly received HO5S-1 Sikorsky helicopters. These three-seat observation aircraft were underpowered but had many superior flight characteristics compared to the HTL-4 helicopters in the squadron at that time. Mechanical problems with the newer aircraft increased until it became necessary to ground them in late October until replacement parts were available in the supply system.

Employment of transport helicopters for logistical support continued to be a principal use of such rotary wing aircraft as the end of 1952 approached. Tests earlier in the year had proved the theory that this versatile aircraft could resupply a battalion manning the MLR. The next step was to determine if the logistical support for an entire combat regiment could be accomplished by helicopter. Operation HAYLIFT, conducted during 22–26 September, the last of five operations that month for HMR-161, was to test and evaluate helicopter resupply of Colonel Moore’s 7th Marines. Plans called for delivering all Class I, III, and V items and such Class II and IV items as could be accommodated. Two loading and four unloading sites were prescribed. All but extremely valuable cargo, such as mail, was to be carried externally in slings or wire baskets.

Employment of transport helicopters for logistical support remained a primary use of these rotary-wing aircraft as 1952 came to an end. Earlier in the year, tests had confirmed the idea that this versatile aircraft could resupply a battalion stationed at the MLR. The next step was to find out if logistical support for an entire combat regiment could be provided by helicopter. Operation HAY LIFT, conducted from September 22 to 26, was the last of five operations that month for HMR-161 and aimed to test and evaluate helicopter resupply for Colonel Moore’s 7th Marines. The plan was to deliver all Class I, III, and V items, along with any Class II and IV items that could fit. Two loading sites and four unloading sites were designated. All cargo except for highly valuable items, like mail, was to be transported externally in slings or wire baskets.

HAYLIFT did show that at least for a short period of time—five days—a helicopter squadron, utilizing 40 percent of its aircraft, could sustain a MLR regiment. Following the general procedures employed previously with the battalion, HMR-161 found that no great changes were necessary for resupply of the regiment. Two recommendations emerged from an evaluation of HAYLIFT. One stressed the need for establishment of an operations center manned181 by representatives of each unit participating in the exercise. The second called for development of a more flexible loading system, one that would permit rapid weight increases or decreases of 50 pound increments, as the situation demanded. Such a method would make possible a more efficient payload for each lift.250

HAY LIFT demonstrated that, at least for a brief period—five days—a helicopter squadron, using 40 percent of its aircraft, could support a MLR regiment. Following the standard procedures used earlier with the battalion, HMR-161 discovered that no significant changes were needed for resupplying the regiment. Two recommendations came out of the evaluation of HAYLIFT. One emphasized the necessity for setting up an operations center staffed181 by representatives from each unit involved in the exercise. The second suggested creating a more adaptable loading system that would allow for quick weight adjustments in 50-pound increments, based on the needs of the moment. This approach would enable a more effective payload for each lift.250

250 For example, on 25 September, rain soaked the cardboard cover of the rations, adding extra weight to each preloaded lift of these Class I supplies. On the other hand, a heavier load could have been used at times. As the helicopter used up its fuel, a commensurate increase in cargo could have been carried.

250 For instance, on September 25, rain drenched the cardboard wrapping of the rations, making each preloaded lift of these Class I supplies heavier. However, a heavier load could have been utilized at times. As the helicopter burned through its fuel, a corresponding increase in cargo could have been transported.

Transport on a larger scale in the 1st MAW was accomplished by General Jerome’s few transport aircraft reinforced by the eight R5Ds from the VMR-152 detachment. In June, the passenger-carrying operations reached the peak for the entire Korean War; that month, 17,490 troops and military-associated civilians utilized the reinforced wing transport aircraft. June 1952 was also the second busiest month in freight transportation (7,397,824 pounds, nearly double the figure for June 1951).

Transport on a larger scale in the 1st MAW was managed by General Jerome’s limited number of transport aircraft, supported by the eight R5Ds from the VMR-152 detachment. In June, the passenger-carrying operations hit their peak for the entire Korean War; that month, 17,490 troops and military-associated civilians used the reinforced wing transport aircraft. June 1952 was also the second busiest month for freight transportation (7,397,824 pounds, almost double the amount for June 1951).

Squadrons that were unable to better their performance records in some cases could trace their trouble to the inability to get all of their planes off the ground. Several models were subject to spare parts shortages.251 New aircraft, the F3D-2s and the AU-1s received in June by VMF(N)-513 and VMA-212, respectively, had preceded an adequate stocking of normal replacements for worn out or defective parts. The night fighter squadron was handicapped also by introduction into the supply system of inadequate radio tubes, which burned out rapidly. The most critical shortage, however, was parts for starter units of jet engines. This deficiency was not corrected until summer. One problem never quite eliminated was the confusion of supply orders intended for the helicopters in HMR-161 and VMO-6. It was believed that the close resemblance of Sikorsky HRS and HO5S part numbers and nomenclatures had caused the improperly-marked requisitions and mix-up.

Squadrons that couldn’t improve their performance records often found that their issues stemmed from not being able to get all their planes off the ground. Several models faced shortages in spare parts. New aircraft, the F3D-2s and the AU-1s, which were received in June by VMF(N)-513 and VMA-212, respectively, arrived before there were enough normal replacements for worn-out or defective parts. The night fighter squadron also struggled due to the introduction of inadequate radio tubes into the supply system, which burned out quickly. The most critical shortage, however, was parts for the starter units of jet engines. This issue wasn’t resolved until summer. One persistent problem was the confusion over supply orders meant for the helicopters in HMR-161 and VMO-6. It was believed that the similarity between the part numbers and names of Sikorsky HRS and HO5S led to incorrectly labeled requisitions and mix-ups.

251 Spare parts shortages are “inherent in the introduction of new equipment into the field and prior to the development of usage data.” a major effort was made at this time by 1st MAW to improve its critical spare parts support by improved stock control procedures and complete inventory. Jack ltr.

251 Spare parts shortages are “inherent in bringing new equipment into the field and before usage data is developed.” A significant effort was made at this time by 1st MAW to enhance its critical spare parts support through better stock control procedures and a complete inventory. Jack ltr.

The 1st Marine Division logistical situation during the summer and fall of 1952 was generally excellent. General Pollock’s units did not suffer from the shortage of spare parts experienced by the 1st MAW whose aircraft sometimes had to be grounded because of a missing spare part. U.S. Army support in the replacement of182 worn-out Marine vehicles for new Army ones proved satisfactory. No major problems arose in engineer support. Medical evacuation and treatment and the level of supplies in the five companies of the 1st Medical Battalion remained excellent.

The logistical situation for the 1st Marine Division during the summer and fall of 1952 was generally outstanding. General Pollock’s units didn’t face the spare parts shortages that the 1st MAW dealt with, causing their aircraft to be grounded at times due to missing parts. U.S. Army support in replacing worn-out Marine vehicles with new Army ones was satisfactory. There were no significant issues with engineer support. Medical evacuation, treatment, and supply levels in the five companies of the 1st Medical Battalion continued to be excellent.

There were two significant changes in the logistical support provided the Marine division early in the fall. One dealt with employment of the division’s 1st and 7th Motor Transport Battalions, located in the rear support areas. Beginning in September, the companies were placed in direct support of the four infantry regiments, with liaison by Lieutenant Colonel Kenneth E. Martin, division motor transport officer. It was believed this decentralization would have the following advantages:

There were two major changes in the logistical support provided to the Marine division early in the fall. One involved the deployment of the division's 1st and 7th Motor Transport Battalions, which were based in the rear support areas. Starting in September, the companies were assigned to directly support the four infantry regiments, with coordination by Lieutenant Colonel Kenneth E. Martin, the division motor transport officer. It was thought that this decentralization would offer the following advantages:

1. Decreased vehicle mileage and therefore less driver fatigue and prolonged vehicle life.

1. Less vehicle mileage, which means reduced driver fatigue and a longer lifespan for the vehicle.

2. Increased dispersal as a safeguard against loss of wheeled vehicle support in event of an unexpected and successful enemy attack.

2. Spreading out more to protect against losing wheeled vehicle support in case of an unexpected and successful enemy attack.

The other change was a shift in the emphasis of support rendered by the Korean Service Corps. During October, each of the three frontline regiments received 300 more laborers, raising the total to 800. Rear area units paid for the increase, since the KSCs were detached from support units and sent forward to the MLR.

The other change was a shift in the focus of support provided by the Korean Service Corps. In October, each of the three frontline regiments received 300 additional laborers, bringing the total to 800. Rear area units funded the increase, as the KSCs were separated from support units and moved forward to the MLR.

Logistical support from the 1st Signal Battalion left little to be desired. Commanded by Lieutenant Colonel John E. Morris252 when the Marines moved to western Korea, the signalmen helped establish and maintain an extensive communications net, with 5,200 miles of wire within the division and several vital links to adjacent and higher commands.253 Wiremen worked around the clock to lay and maintain the telephone lines, which suffered considerable damage from the artillery and mortar barrages. When possible, the signalmen raised the wires off the ground. The battalion set in more than 1,400 telephone poles. After the system had been installed and was working efficiently, the July floods washed away part of the major communications.183 By improvising and by setting up emergency equipment, the battalion was able to maintain the flow of communications traffic at a satisfactory level. Replacement items were provided by the U.S. Army on a reimbursable basis in accordance with existing directives.

Logistical support from the 1st Signal Battalion was top-notch. Led by Lieutenant Colonel John E. Morris252 when the Marines moved to western Korea, the signalmen helped create and maintain a vast communications network, with 5,200 miles of wire within the division and several crucial links to nearby and higher commands.253 Wiremen worked around the clock to lay and upkeep the telephone lines, which were significantly damaged by artillery and mortar fire. Whenever possible, the signalmen raised the wires off the ground. The battalion installed over 1,400 telephone poles. Once the system was up and running smoothly, the July floods washed away part of the main communications.183 By being resourceful and setting up emergency equipment, the battalion managed to keep communication traffic flowing at a satisfactory level. Replacement items were supplied by the U.S. Army on a reimbursable basis, following existing directives.

252 On 4 April Lieutenant Colonel Alton L. Hicks assumed command of the battalion; Lieutenant Colonel Jacob E. Glick relieved him on 3 August.

252 On April 4, Lieutenant Colonel Alton L. Hicks took charge of the battalion; Lieutenant Colonel Jacob E. Glick replaced him on August 3.

253 Communication with General Kendall’s I Corps consisted of radio-teletype, telephone, radio relay, courier plane, and motor messenger. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-68. The 11th Marines also had an additional 1,100 miles of communication wire. Henderson ltr III.

253 Communication with General Kendall’s I Corps involved radio-teletype, telephone, radio relay, courier planes, and motor messengers. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-68. The 11th Marines also had an extra 1,100 miles of communication wire. Henderson ltr III.

In September it became apparent that the signal equipment used to maintain division communications was no longer equal to the demands placed upon it. The extensive ground area plus the number and size of reinforcing units had not only put a heavy burden on radio, telephone, and teletype equipment but also caused the depletion of reserve stocks. With the spare equipment in use, there was no pool to draw upon when units turned in defective equipment for repair. Neither were there available replacements for materiel destroyed by enemy action. Items most urgently needed were flown in from the States. Other critical parts came from Army sources in Japan and Korea. By the end of October, the communication resupply had returned to a more normal condition.

In September, it became clear that the signal equipment used for division communications was no longer able to meet the demands placed on it. The large ground area and the number and size of additional units had not only put a significant strain on radio, telephone, and teletype equipment but also depleted reserve stocks. With the spare equipment already in use, there was no pool to draw from when units returned broken equipment for repair. There were also no available replacements for materials lost to enemy action. The items that were urgently needed were flown in from the States. Other critical parts were sourced from Army supplies in Japan and Korea. By the end of October, communication resupply had returned to a more normal state.

Before the month ended a different type of critical situation was to confront the division. It appeared that the enemy’s success in seizing a half-dozen outposts earlier in October had only whetted his appetite for more. Chinese eyes were turned towards positions that held still more potential value than the stepping-stones just acquired. The extreme right battalion in the division front held by the 7th Marines was the focal point of the new effort.

Before the month ended, a different type of critical situation confronted the division. It seemed that the enemy's success in capturing a half-dozen outposts earlier in October had only fueled their desire for more. Chinese forces were eyeing positions that held even greater potential value than the recently acquired stepping-stones. The extreme right battalion in the division front, held by the 7th Marines, became the focal point of this new effort.


Before the Battle—Preparations for Attack and Defense—Attack on the Hook—Reno Demonstration—Counterattack—Overview

Before the Battle—Preparing for Attack and Defense—Assault on the Hook—Reno's Show of Force—Counterattack—Summary

Before the Battle254

254 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: CG, 1stMarDiv, Info for CG, FMFPac; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 706–736, dtd 1–31 Oct 52; 7thMar ComdD, Oct 52; LtCol Robert D. Heinl, Jr. memo to Dir, MarCorHist, HQMC, dtd 28 Oct 52, Subj: Notes on 7th Marines’ Action (Defense of “The Hook”), 26–27 Oct 52, hereafter Heinl, memo.

254 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: CG, 1stMarDiv, Info for CG, FMFPac; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 706–736, dated 1–31 Oct 52; 7thMar ComdD, Oct 52; LtCol Robert D. Heinl, Jr. memo to Dir, MarCorHist, HQMC, dated 28 Oct 52, Subject: Notes on 7th Marines’ Action (Defense of “The Hook”), 26–27 Oct 52, hereafter Heinl, memo.

After the heavy fighting in early October, there was a change in the 1st Marine Division dispositions. On the 12th, the 5th Marines relieved the 1st in the center sector and the latter regiment went into reserve. For the next two weeks the lull that prevailed across the regimental front was in sharp contrast to the intense fighting there earlier in the month. On the division left, the Korean Marines, not engaged in any sizable Communist action, conducted frequent tank-infantry reconnaissance patrols and ambushes forward of their MLR. In the center of the division line the 5th Marines, too, found their Chinese opponent seemingly reluctant to pursue any combat offensives, though his harassment of the Bunker Hill area represented the strongest action against the Marine division at this time. The 7th Marines, holding down the right sector, similarly encountered the enemy for only brief periods, these contacts during patrol actions lasting no more than 15 to 30 minutes.

After the intense battle in early October, there was a shift in the 1st Marine Division's positions. On the 12th, the 5th Marines took over from the 1st in the center sector, and the latter unit went into reserve. For the next two weeks, the calm across the regimental front was a stark contrast to the intense fighting earlier in the month. On the division's left, the Korean Marines, not involved in any significant Communist actions, carried out regular tank-infantry reconnaissance patrols and ambushes ahead of their Main Line of Resistance. In the center of the division line, the 5th Marines also noticed the Chinese enemy seemed unwilling to launch any combat offensives, although their harassment of the Bunker Hill area was the most significant action against the Marine division at this time. The 7th Marines, stationed in the right sector, similarly faced the enemy only briefly, with these encounters during patrols lasting no more than 15 to 30 minutes.

Upon its relief from the MLR, the 1st Marines took over the division rear area. There the regiment continued the improvement of the secondary defensive lines, conducted extensive training, and dispatched numerous security patrols throughout the regimental area.186 These routine reserve roles were in addition to the primary mission of augmenting units on the Marine MLR in order to counterattack and defeat any attempted penetration of JAMESTOWN in the division area. As part of its counterattack mission, the divisional reserve regiment was to be prepared for employment anywhere in the I Corps sector to block an enemy advance.

After being relieved from the MLR, the 1st Marines took over the division's rear area. There, the regiment continued improving the secondary defensive lines, conducted extensive training, and sent out numerous security patrols throughout the regimental area.186 These routine reserve tasks were in addition to the main mission of supporting units on the Marine MLR to counterattack and stop any attempts to breach JAMESTOWN in the division area. As part of its counterattack mission, the divisional reserve regiment was to be ready to be deployed anywhere in the I Corps sector to block an enemy advance.

On the division right, the 7th Marines remained on position in defense of JAMESTOWN. Following the bitter outpost contests on 6 October, Colonel Moore continued to retain all three battalions on line: 2/7 on the left, 3/7 in the center, and 1/7 on the right. The regimental commander had found it necessary to commit his three battalions on line due to the vastly overextended six-mile front, the rugged terrain, and the very real possibility of a major Communist attack anywhere along the MLR. With all battalions forward, Colonel Moore was left with a very small reserve, one company from 3/7. This battalion had to use as its reserve what had become known as “clutch platoons”—units composed of cooks, bakers, clerks, motor transport, and other Marine headquarters personnel. These local reserves, and even the reserve company from 3/7, could be employed only with the regimental commander’s approval.

On the right side of the division, the 7th Marines held their position to defend JAMESTOWN. After the intense outpost fighting on October 6, Colonel Moore kept all three battalions in place: 2/7 on the left, 3/7 in the center, and 1/7 on the right. The regimental commander found it necessary to deploy all three battalions due to the significantly stretched six-mile front, the tough terrain, and the very real threat of a major Communist attack anywhere along the Main Line of Resistance (MLR). With all battalions engaged, Colonel Moore had very little reserve, just one company from 3/7. This battalion had to use what were called “clutch platoons”—units made up of cooks, bakers, clerks, motor transport, and other Marine headquarters personnel. These local reserves, along with the reserve company from 3/7, could only be used with the regimental commander’s permission.

Line JAMESTOWN, in the 7th Marines area, meandered from the vicinity of the burned-out village of Toryom, on the left, to the Hook salient in the right battalion sector and from there southeast to the Samichon River, the boundary with the 1st Commonwealth Division. From the left battalion sector to the right, the terrain gradually grew more rugged until the hills finally spilled over into the Samichon Valley. To the rear of the MLR, the ground was less jagged; forward of the line, the hills were more precipitous in character. The steepest heights were in the right battalion sector. Highest terrain feature along Colonel Moore’s MLR was Hill 146, located not far from the Hook. Throughout the 7th Marines sector rice paddies covered the narrow valley floors between the hills. Vegetation was sparse. A series of dirt roads and trails served the regimental area.

Line JAMESTOWN, in the 7th Marines area, wound from the area near the burned-out village of Toryom on the left to the Hook salient on the right battalion side, then southeast to the Samichon River, which marked the boundary with the 1st Commonwealth Division. The terrain steadily became more rugged from the left battalion sector to the right, until the hills rolled down into the Samichon Valley. Behind the MLR, the ground was less rough; in front of the line, the hills were steeper. The steepest elevations were in the right battalion sector. The highest point along Colonel Moore’s MLR was Hill 146, located not far from the Hook. Throughout the 7th Marines sector, rice paddies covered the narrow valley floors between the hills. Vegetation was sparse. A series of dirt roads and trails provided access to the regimental area.

Combat outposts varied greatly as to their distance from JAMESTOWN. Farthest from the line were the three in the left battalion sector, manned by Lieutenant Colonel Caputo’s 2/7. This trio, Carson, Reno, and Vegas, were approximately 1,000 yards forward of the MLR. Berlin and East Berlin (a new outpost established on187 13 October) were the forward positions in the center line outposted by Lieutenant Colonel Charles D. Barrett’s255 Marines. To the right Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s 1/7 sector held three—COPs Ronson, Warsaw, and Verdun, the latter near the Commonwealth border.

Combat outposts varied widely in their distance from JAMSTOWN. The farthest from the front line were the three in the left battalion sector, manned by Lieutenant Colonel Caputo’s 2/7. These three, Carson, Reno, and Vegas, were roughly 1,000 yards ahead of the MLR. Berlin and East Berlin (a new outpost set up on187 13 October) served as the forward positions in the center line held by Lieutenant Colonel Charles D. Barrett’s255 Marines. On the right, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s 1/7 sector was responsible for three—COPs Ronson, Warsaw, and Verdun, the last of which was near the Commonwealth border.

255 Responsibility for this part of the 7th Marines line changed on 13 October, when Lieutenant Colonel Barrett took command of 3/7 from Lieutenant Colonel Russell. The latter then was assigned as division senior liaison officer to the KMC regiment.

255 Responsibility for this section of the 7th Marines line changed on October 13, when Lieutenant Colonel Barrett took over 3/7 from Lieutenant Colonel Russell. Russell was then assigned as the division's senior liaison officer to the KMC regiment.

Ronson was the outpost nearest to the Hook, a major defensive position of the regiment. The importance of this part of the MLR, in the extreme eastern sector, lay not in its strength but rather in its weakness. Jutting as it did towards the Communist lines, the salient formed a J-shaped bulge in the main line, which not only gave the Hook its nickname but also established the vulnerability of the position. Its susceptibility to capture derived both from violation of a defensive axiom that the “MLR should not have sharp angles and salients”256 and to the fact that the ridgeline on which the Hook was located continued northwest into Communist-held territory. Seattle, which the Chinese had seized on 2 October, lay only about 500 yards northwest of the Hook.

Ronson was the closest outpost to the Hook, a key defensive position of the regiment. The significance of this part of the MLR, in the far eastern sector, was not in its strength but in its weakness. Sticking out toward the Communist lines, the salient created a J-shaped bulge in the main line, which not only earned the Hook its nickname but also highlighted the vulnerability of the position. Its risk of being captured came from breaking a defensive rule that the “MLR should not have sharp angles and salients”256 and from the fact that the ridgeline where the Hook was situated extended northwest into Communist-held territory. Seattle, which the Chinese had taken on October 2, was only about 500 yards northwest of the Hook.

256 Heinl, memo. The originator of this memo, Lieutenant Colonel Robert D. Heinl, Jr., was an experienced Marine officer and military historian who had just been assigned to the division for duty. Temporarily attached to the 7th Marines as an observer, his brief visit there happened to coincide with the beginning of the Hook battle.

256 Heinl, memo. The writer of this memo, Lieutenant Colonel Robert D. Heinl, Jr., was a seasoned Marine officer and military historian who had just been assigned to the division. He was temporarily attached to the 7th Marines as an observer, and his short visit there happened to align with the start of the Hook battle.

In spite of its vulnerability, the Hook could not be abandoned. There was no other terrain feature held by the Marines that could command the critical Samichon Valley, a major avenue of approach from the northeast directly to Seoul. The salient also dominated the entire nearby area of the Imjin River to the south. Possession of the Hook and adjoining ridge would give the Communists observation of a substantial portion of the Marine rear areas beyond the Imjin, as well as the vital river crossings. In the opinion of Major General M. M. Austin-Roberts-West, whose 1st Commonwealth Division was soon to take over the Hook sector, had the salient been lost, “a withdrawal of 4,000 yards would have been necessary.”257

In spite of its vulnerability, the Hook couldn't be left behind. There was no other geographical feature held by the Marines that could control the crucial Samichon Valley, a key route from the northeast straight to Seoul. The salient also oversaw the entire nearby area of the Imjin River to the south. Holding the Hook and the nearby ridge would allow the Communists to monitor a significant part of the Marine rear areas beyond the Imjin, as well as the important river crossings. According to Major General M. M. Austin-Roberts-West, whose 1st Commonwealth Division was about to take over the Hook sector, if the salient had been lost, “a withdrawal of 4,000 yards would have been necessary.”257

257 Quoted in LtCol Herbert F. Wood, Strange Battleground: The Operations in Korea and Their Effects on the Defense Policy of Canada (Ottawa: The Army Historical Section, Canadian Forces Headquarters, 1966), p. 213.

257 Quoted in LtCol Herbert F. Wood, Strange Battleground: The Operations in Korea and Their Effects on the Defense Policy of Canada (Ottawa: The Army Historical Section, Canadian Forces Headquarters, 1966), p. 213.

At the beginning of October, this vital area had been protected by COPs Seattle and Warsaw. When the former was overrun, it became necessary to establish a new position. This was directed by Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki, and on 16 October Ronson was established188 200 yards southeast of Seattle and 275 yards west of the Hook. About 600 yards northeast of the salient the remaining position, COP Warsaw, commanded the lowlands to the east and the narrow, east-west oriented valley of a Samichon tributary immediately to the front.

At the start of October, this crucial area was secured by COPs Seattle and Warsaw. After Seattle was overrun, it became necessary to set up a new position. This was overseen by Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki, and on October 16, Ronson was established188 200 yards southeast of Seattle and 275 yards west of the Hook. About 600 yards northeast of the salient, the remaining position, COP Warsaw, overlooked the lowlands to the east and the narrow, east-west oriented valley of a Samichon tributary directly in front.

Opposite the three MLR battalions of the 7th Marines were the 356th and 357th Regiments of the 119th Division, 40th CCF Army. In addition to these infantry units, numbering close to 7,000, an estimated 10 battalions (120 guns) of Chinese artillery258 were facing Colonel Moore’s regiment. Personnel strength of the American unit consisted of 3,844 Marines, 11 medical officers and 133 corpsmen, 3 U.S. Army communicators, and 764 Koreans (746 KSCs and 18 interpreters).

Opposite the three MLR battalions of the 7th Marines were the 356th and 357th Regiments of the 119th Division, 40th CCF Army. In addition to these infantry units, which numbered close to 7,000, there were an estimated 10 battalions (120 guns) of Chinese artillery 258 facing Colonel Moore’s regiment. The personnel strength of the American unit included 3,844 Marines, 11 medical officers, and 133 corpsmen, along with 3 U.S. Army communicators and 764 Koreans (746 KSCs and 18 interpreters).

258 The Marine division artillery regiment reported that in late October nine battalions of Chinese artillery, ranging from 75 or 76mm guns or howitzers to 122mm howitzers, opposed the 7th Marines. It was estimated that one other 122mm battalion was also emplaced north of the right division sector. In addition to these CCF units, elements of a 152mm self-propelled howitzer unit were also believed to be in the area. Late in November two batteries of 152mm howitzers were tentatively located about 4,000 yards west northwest of the Hook. Disposition had been determined “as a result of crater analysis, shell reports, sound plots, and capabilities of the weapon.” 11thMar ComdD, Nov 52, “Enemy Artillery Activity Rpts,” Nos. 21, 23, dtd 1, 21 Nov. 52.

258 The Marine division artillery regiment reported that in late October, nine battalions of Chinese artillery, including 75 or 76mm guns and 122mm howitzers, were facing the 7th Marines. It was estimated that another 122mm battalion was also set up north of the right division sector. Along with these CCF units, elements of a 152mm self-propelled howitzer unit were believed to be in the area as well. Late in November, two batteries of 152mm howitzers were tentatively located about 4,000 yards west-northwest of the Hook. Their positions were determined "as a result of crater analysis, shell reports, sound plots, and capabilities of the weapon." 11thMar ComdD, Nov 52, “Enemy Artillery Activity Rpts,” Nos. 21, 23, dtd 1, 21 Nov. 52.

During the summer and early fall, the 7th Marines had amassed considerable information about the enemy, including Chinese strength and composition of forces and many of their combat characteristics. Encroachment on Marine ground positions by steadily creeping the CCF trenchline forward continued to be the enemy’s major ground-gaining tactic. In fact, the Chinese units facing the Marine division concentrated their digging during the fall of 1952 in the sector north of the 7th Marines MLR. (See Map 15.) Other intelligence, however, seemed open to question. For example, there was the reported frontline presence of women among the 90 Chinese who had engaged a 2/1 patrol on 5 October as well as the sighting in the KMC sector on the 17th of enemy “super soldiers” far taller than the ordinary Chinese. Many in the division found it difficult to believe the statements of enemy prisoners. During interrogation they invariably maintained that the mission of Chinese Communist Forces in Korea was a “defensive” one.

During the summer and early fall, the 7th Marines gathered a lot of information about the enemy, including the size and makeup of the Chinese forces and many of their combat characteristics. The enemy's main ground-gaining tactic was slowly pushing their trench line forward onto Marine positions. In fact, the Chinese units facing the Marine division focused heavily on digging in the fall of 1952 in the area north of the 7th Marines' Main Line of Resistance. (See Map 15.) However, some intelligence seemed questionable. For example, there were reports of women being present among the 90 Chinese who confronted a 2/1 patrol on October 5, as well as sightings of enemy “super soldiers” that were much taller than the average Chinese in the KMC sector on the 17th. Many in the division found it hard to believe what enemy prisoners said. During interrogations, they consistently claimed that the mission of the Chinese Communist Forces in Korea was a "defensive" one.

MAP 15 K. WHITE

MAP 15 K. WHITE

“CCF CREEPING TACTICS”

“CCF Creeping Strategies”

MARCH-OCTOBER 1952

MARCH-OCT 1952

The static battle situation encouraged the use of psychological warfare. In attempting to influence the minds of their opponents and weaken morale, the Chinese depended upon loudspeakers to190 carry their propaganda barrage across No-Man’s-Land. Enemy employment of this technique was especially heavy during October. To Marines, for example, Chinese directed pleas of “Go home and have peace,” “Surrender, we treat POWs well,” “Leave Korea,” “Marines, come and get your buddies’ bodies,” and the like, often to the accompaniment of music. On occasion, Chinese patrols left propaganda pamphlets behind them in the KMC sector. Infrequently, the enemy displayed signs along patrol routes urging Marines to surrender. Most of the Chinese psychological efforts were directed against the Korean Marines.

The static battle situation led to the use of psychological warfare. To sway the minds of their opponents and undermine morale, the Chinese relied on loudspeakers to 190 blast their propaganda across No-Man’s-Land. The enemy heavily used this technique, especially in October. For instance, the Chinese sent messages to the Marines like "Go home and have peace," "Surrender, we treat POWs well," "Leave Korea," and "Marines, come and get your buddies’ bodies," often accompanied by music. Sometimes, Chinese patrols left behind propaganda pamphlets in the KMC sector. Occasionally, they put up signs along patrol routes urging Marines to surrender. Most of the Chinese psychological tactics were aimed at the Korean Marines.

In enemy employment of artillery, Marine frontline units and division intelligence had become well aware of the vast improvements the Communists had made in recent months. Aided by a plentiful supply of ammunition, enemy guns and howitzers, including the heavy 152mm weapon, frequently delivered concentrated fires on critical positions in the division area. Marines felt the effects of how well the Chinese had learned to mass their fires against a single target for maximum destructive power. From the Marines, moreover, the enemy had picked up the artillery box tactic, employing it for the first time in their sector opposite Colonel Moore’s regiment during the early October outpost battles.

In the enemy's use of artillery, Marine frontline units and division intelligence had become clearly aware of the significant advancements the Communists had made in the past few months. With a steady supply of ammunition, enemy guns and howitzers, including the heavy 152mm weapon, regularly targeted key positions in the division area. Marines experienced firsthand how effectively the Chinese had mastered the technique of concentrating their fire on a single target for maximum damage. Additionally, the enemy had adopted the artillery box tactic from the Marines, using it for the first time in their sector across from Colonel Moore’s regiment during the early October outpost battles.

During those same clashes, the 11th Marines had observed how the Chinese displaced some of their batteries well forward for more effective artillery support of their attacking infantry. One enemy artillery innovation had been noted the previous month by a Marine AO; on 19 September a Chinese artillery piece was detected firing in the open. Previous observations had indicated that the Chinese generally used wooded areas or extensive bunker-type positions to conceal their supporting weapons.

During those same clashes, the 11th Marines noticed how the Chinese moved some of their artillery forward for better support of their attacking infantry. One notable enemy artillery tactic had been observed the previous month by a Marine AO; on 19 September, a Chinese artillery piece was seen firing in the open. Earlier observations showed that the Chinese typically used wooded areas or extensive bunker-style positions to hide their supporting weapons.

By the middle of October, 62.5 percent of the Chinese artillery opposing General Pollock’s division was located in positions north of the 7th Marines. The importance the enemy put on the principle of massed artillery fire and the improvement of their ammunition supply can be seen in a remark attributed to a Chinese division commander:

By mid-October, 62.5 percent of the Chinese artillery facing General Pollock’s division was positioned north of the 7th Marines. The emphasis the enemy placed on the principle of concentrated artillery fire and the enhancement of their ammunition supply is highlighted in a comment attributed to a Chinese division commander:

The enemy had organized an attack of two-battalion strength on our first-line platoon. As the enemy were getting into their assembly area I directed several volleys of rapid fire against them with a total expenditure of about 120 rounds. That very evening the army commander rang me up and said disapprovingly, ‘You’ve expended a bit too much ammunition191 today!’ It seemed as though the army commander had detected precisely what was in my mind. There was an instant change in his voice as he said: ‘Oh, comrade, it really could not be accounted as waste, but you must know we are short of supplies.’

The enemy had launched an attack with two battalions on our front-line platoon. As the enemy was moving into their assembly area, I ordered several rapid fire volleys against them, using about 120 rounds in total. That evening, the army commander called me and said disapprovingly, “You’ve used up a bit too much ammo today!” It felt like the army commander knew exactly what I was thinking. His tone shifted instantly as he added, “Oh, comrade, it can’t really be considered waste, but you need to understand that we’re low on supplies.”191

Scarcely two years had passed but the situation was completely altered. In the present we had emplaced 120 guns to each kilometre of front line so that in a rapid-fire bombardment of 25 minutes more than 20,000 rounds of ammunition could be hurled against the enemy positions. If the fire used in supporting attacks and in repulsing enemy counterattacks were taken into account the total would reach 70,000 rounds.259

Scarcely two years had passed but the situation was completely altered. In the present we had emplaced 120 guns to each kilometer of front line so that in a rapid-fire bombardment of 25 minutes more than 20,000 rounds of ammunition could be hurled against the enemy positions. If the fire used in supporting attacks and in repulsing enemy counterattacks were taken into account the total would reach 70,000 rounds.259

259 CPV, Recollections, p. 360.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ CPV, Recollections, p. 360.

Exaggerated as the numbers of guns and rounds may be, the basic massing technique was in line with U.S. intelligence estimates at the time. The remark also pointed to the importance the Chinese had learned to place on employment of artillery, a shift in emphasis that Colonel Moore’s regiment was soon to experience in unprecedented volume.

Exaggerated as the numbers of guns and rounds might be, the basic massing technique aligned with U.S. intelligence estimates at the time. The comment also highlighted the significance the Chinese had come to place on using artillery, a change in focus that Colonel Moore’s regiment was about to experience in an unprecedented way.

Preparations for Attack and Defense260

260 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 24–26 Oct 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 729–732, dtd 24–27 Oct 52; 7th Mar, 1/7, VMA-323 ComdDs, Oct 52; Heinl, memo.

260 Unless noted otherwise, the material in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, Oct 24-26, 1952; 1stMarDiv PIRs 729-732, dated Oct 24-27, 1952; 7th Mar, 1/7, VMA-323 ComdDs, Oct 52; Heinl, memo.

Before the Hook battle erupted, the defensive fires that the 7th Marines could draw upon were not overpowering in terms of numbers of units available. Only one battalion, Lieutenant Colonel Bert Davis’ 2/11, was in direct support of Colonel Moore’s regiment. In this mission, the 2/11 fires were reinforced by those of 1/11 (Lieutenant Colonel David S. Randall). In addition to these organic units, the batteries of the 623d Field Artillery Battalion (155mm howitzers) and one platoon of C Battery, 17th Field Artillery Battalion (8-inch self-propelled howitzers) were readily available to the 7th Marines. In all, 38 light, medium, and heavy pieces constituted the artillery support of the right sector.261 General support was available from Lieutenant Colonel Raymond D. Wright’s 4/11 and from the 4.2-inch Rocket Battery (Captain Donald G. Frier). The 159th Field Artillery Battalion (155mm howitzers) and B192 Battery, 204th Field Artillery Battalion (155mm guns), like the other Army units positioned in the Marine Division sector, reinforced the fires of division artillery. Fire support from 1st Commonwealth Division weapons within range of the Hook area could also be depended upon.

Before the Hook battle began, the defensive firepower available to the 7th Marines wasn't very strong in terms of the number of units. Only one battalion, Lieutenant Colonel Bert Davis’ 2/11, was directly supporting Colonel Moore’s regiment. In this mission, the 2/11 fires were backed up by those of 1/11 (Lieutenant Colonel David S. Randall). Along with these units, the batteries of the 623rd Field Artillery Battalion (155mm howitzers) and one platoon of C Battery, 17th Field Artillery Battalion (8-inch self-propelled howitzers) were ready for use by the 7th Marines. In total, there were 38 light, medium, and heavy pieces providing artillery support for the right sector.261 General support was also available from Lieutenant Colonel Raymond D. Wright’s 4/11 and from the 4.2-inch Rocket Battery (Captain Donald G. Frier). The 159th Field Artillery Battalion (155mm howitzers) and B Battery, 204th Field Artillery Battalion (155mm guns), like the other Army units located in the Marine Division sector, strengthened the division artillery's fire. Fire support from 1st Commonwealth Division weapons within the range of the Hook area could also be counted on.

261 11thMar ComdD, Oct 52, App III, Sheet 3. Eighteen of the weapons (the 623d Field Artillery Battalion) had just moved into the Marine sector and begun operating on 14 October. The unit remained under I Corps operational control, with the mission of providing general support reinforcing fire.

261 11thMar ComdD, Oct 52, App III, Sheet 3. Eighteen of the weapons (the 623d Field Artillery Battalion) had just entered the Marine sector and started operations on October 14. The unit was under I Corps operational control, with the mission of providing general support and reinforcing fire.

Although the Army artillery units satisfied the heavy punch requirement of the 11th Marines, commanded since 21 September by Colonel Harry N. Shea, there was one basic element the regiment lacked. This missing ingredient was a sufficient amount of ammunition for the howitzers. Defense of outposts and mainline positions along the EUSAK front in early and mid-October 1952 consumed a great deal of this type of ammunition. This heavy expenditure was brought to the attention of the corps commanders by Eighth Army. General Van Fleet pointed out that ammunition consumption rates for both the 105mm and 155mm howitzers during these two critical weeks in October not only exceeded the expenditures of the massive Communist spring offensive in 1951 but also the UN counterstroke that followed.262

Although the Army artillery units met the heavy firepower needs of the 11th Marines, led since September 21 by Colonel Harry N. Shea, there was one key element the regiment was missing. This missing piece was enough ammunition for the howitzers. The defense of outposts and mainline positions along the EUSAK front in early and mid-October 1952 used up a lot of this type of ammunition. Eighth Army brought this heavy usage to the attention of the corps commanders. General Van Fleet noted that the ammunition consumption rates for both the 105mm and 155mm howitzers during these two critical weeks in October not only surpassed the amounts used during the massive Communist spring offensive in 1951 but also the UN counterstroke that followed.262

262 Later in 1951, during the UN Summer-Fall offensive, ammunition consumption had again risen sharply, creating concern among corps commanders and occasioning one of them to remark to a subordinate, “We have the distinct impression that two of your battalions are trying to compete for a world’s record.” Capt Edward C. Williamson, et al., “Bloody Ridge,” ms OCMH, 1951, cited in James A. Huston, The Sinews of War: Army Logistics, 1775–1953—The Army Historical Series (Washington: OCMH, 1966), v. II, p. 632.

262 Later in 1951, during the UN Summer-Fall offensive, ammunition use had once again surged dramatically, raising concerns among corps commanders. One of them even remarked to a subordinate, “We have a strong feeling that two of your battalions are trying to set a world record.” Capt Edward C. Williamson, et al., “Bloody Ridge,” ms OCMH, 1951, cited in James A. Huston, The Sinews of War: Army Logistics, 1775–1953—The Army Historical Series (Washington: OCMH, 1966), v. II, p. 632.

To help remedy the situation, the EUSAK commander urged “continuous command supervision to insure the maximum return for all ammunition expended.”263 The general made it plain that he was not changing his policy of exacting a heavy toll whenever the enemy began an attack. This course had been followed by the 1st Marine Division, but the Marines’ ability to both restrict the enemy’s creeping tactics and simultaneously fight a siege-type war was noticeably impeded.264

To improve the situation, the EUSAK commander urged “constant command oversight to ensure the best use of all ammunition used.”263 The general made it clear that he wasn’t changing his approach of imposing a steep cost whenever the enemy launched an attack. This strategy had been adopted by the 1st Marine Division, but the Marines’ capacity to limit the enemy’s slow advancements while also engaging in a siege-like battle was noticeably hindered.264

263 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52, App I, No. 19.

263 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52, App I, No. 19.

264 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8, p. 8-71.

264 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8, p. 8-71.

As the end of October approached, the shortage of ammunition was becoming a subject of increased concern to the frontline Marine units. Daily allowances established for the last 11 days of the month were 20 rounds of 105mm high explosive (HE) and 4.3 rounds of 155mm high explosive for each tube.265 With such small quantities193 to fire and further restricted by an equally critical shortage of both hand grenades and 81mm mortar rounds, Colonel Moore was almost powerless to spike the Chinese preparations for assault of the Hook.266 Artillery fires were reserved for only the most urgent situations or for large bodies of troops. It was one observer’s opinion that the “enemy could show himself almost at will without receiving fire, and that it was impossible either to harass or neutralize his continual fortification activity, let alone embark upon systematic destructive fires of the kind he was carrying out.”267

As the end of October drew near, the ammunition shortage was becoming a significant concern for the frontline Marine units. Daily rations set for the last 11 days of the month were 20 rounds of 105mm high explosive (HE) and 4.3 rounds of 155mm high explosive for each tube.265 With such limited quantities193 to fire and further restricted by an equally critical lack of both hand grenades and 81mm mortar rounds, Colonel Moore was nearly powerless to disrupt the Chinese preparations for an assault on the Hook.266 Artillery fire was reserved for only the most urgent situations or for large groups of troops. One observer noted that the “enemy could show himself almost at will without taking fire, and that it was impossible to either harass or neutralize his ongoing fortification efforts, let alone launch systematic destructive fire against what he was doing.”267

265 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

266 For example, during the latter part of the month each rifle company in the Hook battalion was limited to 150 hand grenades. The total 11-day allowance for Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s 81mm mortars was 475 rounds. 1/7 ComdD, Oct 52, App. III.

266 For instance, towards the end of the month, each rifle company in the Hook battalion was restricted to 150 hand grenades. The total allowance for Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s 81mm mortars over 11 days was 475 rounds. 1/7 ComdD, Oct 52, App. III.

267 Heinl, memo.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Heinl, note.

As a means of compensating for the shortage of 81mm mortar and 105mm howitzer ammunition, the Marines reverted to a former method of using machine guns. This technique, employed during the trench warfare days of World War I but seldom thereafter, was considered a useful expedient to discourage enemy defensive creeping tactics as well as to deter his preparations for objective attacks. The system required emplacing heavy machine guns both on and to the rear of the MLR to fire into areas that troops used for assembly or as check points. If the target was visible to the machine gunner, he could take it under direct fire. At night, when the enemy operated under cover of darkness, the machine guns fired into zones which had already been registered in the daytime. Colonel Moore directed his units on 23 October to resort to this expedient.

As a way to make up for the lack of 81mm mortar and 105mm howitzer ammunition, the Marines went back to an old method of using machine guns. This technique, which was used during the trench warfare of World War I but rarely after that, was seen as a useful way to discourage enemy defensive strategies and to prevent their plans for attacking objectives. The system involved setting up heavy machine guns both on and behind the Main Line of Resistance (MLR) to fire into areas where troops gathered or where they set up checkpoints. If the target was visible to the machine gunner, they could fire directly at it. At night, when the enemy operated under the cover of darkness, the machine guns targeted zones that had already been marked during the day. Colonel Moore instructed his units on 23 October to use this tactic.

A 1st Marine Division daily intelligence report covering the 24-hour period beginning at 1800 on 24 October noted that there was “a marked increase in enemy artillery and mortar fire with an estimated twelve hundred rounds falling in the CT 1010 area of the 7th Marines sector.”268 According to the division PIR there was also an increased number of enemy troops observed that same day in locations west and northwest of the Hook. Most of the fire was directed against the Hook area of the MLR and on the two sentinels, Ronson and Warsaw. Efforts by Marines and some 250 KSCs to repair the damaged or destroyed bunkers, trenches, communications lines, and tactical wire, during brief periods of relief from the artillery deluges, were wiped out again by subsequent shellings.

A daily intelligence report from the 1st Marine Division for the 24-hour period starting at 6 PM on October 24 noted that there was “a significant increase in enemy artillery and mortar fire with an estimated twelve hundred rounds landing in the CT 1010 area of the 7th Marines sector.” 268 According to the division PIR, there was also a rise in the number of enemy troops spotted that same day in areas west and northwest of the Hook. Most of the fire targeted the Hook area of the MLR and on the two sentinels, Ronson and Warsaw. Efforts by Marines and about 250 KSCs to repair the damaged or destroyed bunkers, trenches, communications lines, and tactical wire during short breaks from the artillery bombardments were quickly undone by subsequent shelling.

194

194

268 1stMarDiv PIR 729, dtd 24 Oct 52, p. 2. Ronson, the Hook, and Warsaw are within the 1,000-meter square, CT 1010.

268 1stMarDiv PIR 729, dtd 24 Oct 52, p. 2. Ronson, the Hook, and Warsaw are within the 1,000-meter square, CT 1010.

It would not be correct to say that 1/7 remained entirely passive at this time. Battalion weapons replied, though in faint voices barely audible in the din created by Chinese firing. Regimental mortars chimed in and so did 2/11, which fired 416 rounds in the 24 hours ending at 1800 on the 24th. For that same period, tanks expended 137 rounds at active weapon positions firing on the Hook. One air strike was directed against the enemy opposing the Hook battalion. This attack by a quartet of Marine F9Fs from VMF-311 (Lieutenant Colonel Arthur H. Adams) bombed and napalmed a troublesome group of Chinese entrenched on the enemy MLR 750 yards east of the Hook.

It wouldn't be accurate to say that 1/7 was completely passive during this time. Battalion weapons responded, although their fire was barely noticeable amidst the chaos of Chinese gunfire. Regimental mortars joined in, and so did 2/11, which fired 416 rounds in the 24 hours ending at 1800 on the 24th. During the same period, tanks fired 137 rounds at active enemy positions targeting the Hook. One airstrike was carried out against the enemy facing the Hook battalion. This strike involved four Marine F9Fs from VMF-311 (Lieutenant Colonel Arthur H. Adams) that bombed and napalmed a troublesome group of Chinese troops entrenched on the enemy MLR, located 750 yards east of the Hook.

During the next 48 hours, the enemy continued his preparations for an attack, concentrating his artillery fire on the Hook area. Colonel Moore’s battalions received approximately 2,850 artillery and mortar rounds, most of which rained down on 1/7 to the right. There, the heavy and continuous fire slowed Marine efforts to restore their wrecked bunkers and trenches. Late on the 25th there was some relief from the artillery bombardment, but by that time many of the prophets on the line and in the rear area were uncertain only as to the precise time of the unexpected Chinese attack.

During the next 48 hours, the enemy continued to prepare for an attack, focusing their artillery fire on the Hook area. Colonel Moore's battalions took around 2,850 artillery and mortar rounds, most of which fell on 1/7 to the right. The heavy and constant fire hampered the Marines' efforts to repair their damaged bunkers and trenches. Late on the 25th, there was some relief from the artillery bombardment, but by then, many of the men on the front line and in the rear area were only uncertain about the exact timing of the unforeseen Chinese attack.

Colonel Clarence A. Barninger, the division intelligence officer, had himself alerted General Pollock to the implications of “the intensification and character of enemy fires”269 being received in the 1/7 sector. The intelligence evaluation was not based only on recent events. A detailed study of Chinese capabilities and possible courses of action had just been completed by the G-2 and his staff. In its discussion of the early October outpost attacks in the division right, the report concluded that Chinese interests lay in gaining the “terrain dominating the Samichon Valley....”270

Colonel Clarence A. Barninger, the division intelligence officer, had alerted General Pollock about the implications of "the intensification and character of enemy fires" being received in the 1/7 sector. The intelligence assessment wasn't just based on recent events. A detailed analysis of Chinese capabilities and potential actions had just been completed by the G-2 and his team. In discussing the early October outpost attacks on the division's right, the report concluded that Chinese interests were focused on gaining the "terrain dominating the Samichon Valley...."

269 Heinl, memo.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Heinl, memo.

270 1stMarDiv Intell. Est., dtd 19 Oct 52, p. 8, filed with the divisions PIRs for that month.

270 1stMarDiv Intell. Est., dated 19 Oct 52, p. 8, filed with the division's PIRs for that month.

Since 5 October when 1/7 had been moved into the line as the regiment’s third MLR battalion, the enemy had begun a regular shelling of 1/7 positions adjacent to the Hook. Incoming rounds had increased almost daily. “Troops, vehicles, and tanks moving in daylight even behind the MLR almost invariably brought down enemy artillery or mortars upon them. It was apparent that the enemy was making preparation for a large scale assault in this195 portion of the MLR,”271 the battalion commander, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki, later recalled. Matters took an even more ominous turn about 23 October when the Chinese “began a deliberate, deadly accurate precision fire aimed at destruction of the major fortifications in the Hook’s system of dug-in defense.”272 As the tempo of this fire stepped up daily, the destruction of the battalion’s carefully prepared defenses exceeded the Marines’ ability to repair the damage. The artillery build-up was believed preparatory to an attempt to either seize or breach the MLR.

Since October 5, when 1/7 was moved into the line as the regiment’s third MLR battalion, the enemy had started a regular shelling of 1/7 positions near the Hook. The number of incoming rounds increased almost daily. “Troops, vehicles, and tanks moving in daylight, even behind the MLR, almost always brought down enemy artillery or mortars on them. It was clear that the enemy was preparing for a large-scale assault in this195 portion of the MLR,” the battalion commander, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki, later recalled. Things took an even more serious turn around October 23 when the Chinese “began a deliberate, deadly accurate precision fire aimed at destroying the major fortifications in the Hook’s system of dug-in defense.” As the pace of this fire increased each day, the destruction of the battalion’s carefully prepared defenses surpassed the Marines’ ability to repair the damage. The buildup of artillery was believed to be a preparation for an attempt to either seize or breach the MLR.

271 Dulacki ltr.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Dulacki letter.

272 Heinl, memo.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Heinl, note.

In late October, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki had two companies on the MLR to protect this important area. On the 23d, Captain Frederick C. McLaughlin’s Company A was assigned the left part of the battalion sector, which included the Hook. A squad outposted Ronson and a reinforced platoon was stationed at Warsaw. At 0200 on the 26th, Company C (Captain Paul B. Byrum) departed the battalion reserve area to take over responsibility as the left MLR company. Relief of Company A was completed at 0410.273 Holding down the right flank of the main line during this time was Company B (Captain Dexter E. Evans). This area was larger but somewhat less rugged than the western part of the 1/7 sector.

In late October, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki had two companies on the MLR to protect this important area. On the 23rd, Captain Frederick C. McLaughlin’s Company A was assigned the left part of the battalion sector, which included the Hook. A squad was stationed at Ronson, and a reinforced platoon was at Warsaw. At 2:00 AM on the 26th, Company C (Captain Paul B. Byrum) left the battalion reserve area to take over as the left MLR company. The relief of Company A was completed at 4:10 AM. Holding down the right flank of the main line during this time was Company B (Captain Dexter E. Evans). This area was larger but somewhat less rugged than the western part of the 1/7 sector.

273 Due to the width of the Hook sector, it was necessary to keep all three rifle platoons in the line. A reinforced platoon from the battalion reserve outposted Warsaw. While Company A was on line, a Company C platoon manned the outpost; when Company C was relieved on 26 October, a Company A platoon was sent to Warsaw. Maj Frederick C. McLaughlin ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 27 Jan 70, hereafter McLaughlin ltr.

273 Because of the width of the Hook sector, it was necessary to keep all three rifle platoons in the line. A reinforced platoon from the battalion reserve was stationed at Warsaw. While Company A was in line, a Company C platoon manned the outpost; when Company C was relieved on 26 October, a Company A platoon was sent to Warsaw. Maj Frederick C. McLaughlin ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 27 Jan 70, hereafter McLaughlin ltr.

In the two days immediately preceding the Chinese attack of 26 October, 1/7 received a limited amount of support intended to harass the enemy and throw him off balance, if possible. Tanks fired their 90s at bunkers, caves, trenches, and direct fire weapons in the enemy sector. On the 25th, Company A of the 1st Tank Battalion blasted away 54 times at these targets; on the next day, Captain Clyde W. Hunter’s gunners more than tripled their previous day’s output, firing 173 high explosive shells. Artillery, in the meantime, stepped up its rate of fire on the 25th, when Lieutenant Colonel Davis’ 2/11 fired 575 rounds, followed by 506 more the next day. The division general support battalion, 4/11, fired a total of 195 rounds on these two days.274 Nearly half were to assist the 7th196 Marines. On both days the regiment received the benefit of 4.5-inch rocket ripples.

In the two days leading up to the Chinese attack on October 26, 1/7 got some limited support aimed at disrupting the enemy and throwing them off balance, if possible. Tanks fired their 90mm guns at bunkers, caves, trenches, and direct-fire weapons in the enemy area. On the 25th, Company A of the 1st Tank Battalion fired 54 rounds at these targets; the next day, Captain Clyde W. Hunter’s gunners more than tripled that, firing 173 high-explosive shells. Meanwhile, artillery increased its firing rate on the 25th, with Lieutenant Colonel Davis’s 2/11 firing 575 rounds and another 506 the following day. The division's general support battalion, 4/11, fired a total of 195 rounds over these two days. Nearly half of those were to support the 7th196 Marines. On both days, the regiment also benefited from 4.5-inch rocket ripples.

274 On 24 October, Battery M of the battalion was temporarily relaid to provide additional support to Colonel Moore’s regiment.

274 On October 24, Battery M of the battalion was temporarily reassigned to give extra support to Colonel Moore’s regiment.

Air support just prior to the attack was increased slightly, but only two strikes were flown for the Hook battalion. At 1535 on the 25th, two Corsair fighters and a pair of AUs, the attack version of the Corsair, dive-bombed a section of Chinese trench that housed a number of weapons bothersome to the Marines nearby.275 The four VMA-323 aircraft claimed destruction of 40 yards of trench and damage to 35 yards more. The target was 1,000 yards southwest of the Hook. Next morning the squadron sent three of its famed fighters against bunker positions on a hill 900 yards west of the 1/7 salient. This mission had been prebriefed to attack enemy artillery positions opposite the KMC line. Instead, the flight was diverted to take on the bunkers, which represented, at that time, more of a menace to the division. The attack destroyed one bunker, damaged another, and produced an estimated seven casualties.

Air support just before the attack was increased slightly, but only two strikes were carried out for the Hook battalion. At 3:35 PM on the 25th, two Corsair fighters and a pair of AUs, the attack version of the Corsair, dive-bombed a section of Chinese trench that was hosting a number of weapons causing trouble for the nearby Marines. The four VMA-323 aircraft reported destroying 40 yards of trench and damaging another 35 yards. The target was 1,000 yards southwest of the Hook. The next morning, the squadron sent three of its famous fighters against bunker positions on a hill 900 yards west of the 1/7 salient. This mission had been planned to attack enemy artillery positions opposite the KMC line. Instead, the flight was rerouted to take on the bunkers, which were, at that time, more of a threat to the division. The attack destroyed one bunker, damaged another, and resulted in an estimated seven casualties.

275 The flight had been scheduled to attack active artillery positions 3½ miles north of the Carson-Reno-Vegas area. When some of their ordnance was unexpended after putting these guns out of action, the planes, were ordered to take on the trench target.

275 The flight was set to target active artillery positions 3½ miles north of the Carson-Reno-Vegas area. When some of their munitions were left over after disabling these guns, the planes were ordered to switch to the trench target.

Hidden nearby the area of this air strike in the early morning hours of 26 October was the Chinese infantry unit which later that same day would attack the Hook. Before daybreak the 3d Battalion, 357th Regiment, had moved from an area nearly two miles west of the Hook. The forward elements, two companies, with two day’s rations for each man, halted about a mile from their objective. There the Chinese remained throughout most of the 26th, carefully concealing themselves from observation by friendly forces.276 While the enemy troops were lying low, their mortars and artillery began the final preparatory fires.

Hidden nearby the area of this airstrike in the early morning hours of October 26 was the Chinese infantry unit that would later attack the Hook that same day. Before dawn, the 3rd Battalion, 357th Regiment, had moved from an area nearly two miles west of the Hook. The forward elements, two companies, each with two days' worth of rations, stopped about a mile from their target. There the Chinese stayed concealed for most of the 26th, carefully hiding from friendly forces' observation. While the enemy troops were lying low, their mortars and artillery began the final preparatory fires.

197

197

276 Within the division there were no reports of sightings of unusually large groups of enemy soldiers in this area. In fact, there were fewer enemy seen on the 26th than any other day since 18 October. During the 23d and 24th, about 100 enemy had been observed almost a half mile closer to the Hook than the hideout area used on the 26th. 11thMar ComdD, Oct. 52, p. 12; 1stMarDiv PIR 729, dtd 24 Oct 52, p. 2.

276 In the division, there were no reports of unusually large groups of enemy soldiers in this area. In fact, there were fewer enemies spotted on the 26th than on any other day since October 18. On the 23rd and 24th, about 100 enemies had been seen almost half a mile closer to the Hook than the hideout area used on the 26th. 11thMar ComdD, Oct. 52, p. 12; 1stMarDiv PIR 729, dtd 24 Oct 52, p. 2.

Attack on the Hook277

277 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 26 Oct 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 723, 734, dtd 27, 29 Oct 52; 7thMar, 11th Mar, 1/7, 4/11, 1st TkBn, VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Oct 52; Heinl, memo.

277 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Journal, Oct 26, 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 723, 734, dated Oct 27, 29, 52; 7thMar, 11th Mar, 1/7, 4/11, 1st Tank Battalion, VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Oct 52; Heinl, memo.

On the morning of 26 October, Chinese artillery and mortar fire striking the MLR slackened a bit but was still sufficiently heavy in the vicinity of the Hook to prevent visitors in the area any direct observation from the salient. During his inspection of Hook defenses that morning, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki was knocked to the ground by the concussion of an enemy artillery round exploding nearby.278 In the afternoon, enemy shelling continued at a steady pace, but towards the end of the day intense mixed artillery and mortar fire increased to preattack proportions. Dusk brought no relief from the enemy’s supporting weapons.

On the morning of October 26, Chinese artillery and mortar fire hitting the Main Line of Resistance eased up a bit but was still heavy enough near the Hook to stop anyone in the area from seeing directly from the salient. During his inspection of the Hook defenses that morning, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki was knocked to the ground by the blast from an enemy artillery shell exploding nearby.278 In the afternoon, enemy shelling continued steadily, but towards the end of the day, intense mixed artillery and mortar fire increased to pre-attack levels. Dusk brought no relief from the enemy’s supporting weapons.

278 The 1/7 commander, who was uninjured by the blast, might have become a believer that day in the military cliche, “Rank hath its privileges,” for Brigadier A. H. G. Ricketts (29th British Infantry Brigade, 1st Commonwealth Division), who was standing near Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki, was untouched. The British division was scheduled to take over responsibility for the Hook sector in early November.

278 The 1/7 commander, who wasn't hurt by the blast, may have started to believe in the military saying, “Rank has its privileges,” because Brigadier A. H. G. Ricketts (29th British Infantry Brigade, 1st Commonwealth Division), who was standing close to Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki, was unharmed. The British division was set to take over the Hook sector in early November.

Out at the flanking positions, Ronson and Warsaw, there was little change in the intensity of the enemy shelling for the remainder of the afternoon. Bunkers and trenches were caved in, just as they were on the Hook279 from the preparatory fires that had been building up over a period of days. (For a sketch of the Hook battle area on 26 October, see Map 16.) Enemy shelling had also produced a number of casualties. Marines at Ronson were the first to experience the enemy’s ground assault. At 1810 the outpost reported an increased rate of mortar and artillery rounds exploding on the position. Two groups of enemy soldiers were seen moving towards the outpost, one from the east and the other from the west. Ronson Marines took these advancing soldiers under fire immediately.

Out at the flanking positions, Ronson and Warsaw, the enemy shelling intensity remained steady for the rest of the afternoon. Bunkers and trenches collapsed, just like they did on the Hook279 from the buildup of preparatory fires over several days. (For a sketch of the Hook battle area on 26 October, see Map 16.) The enemy shelling also caused several casualties. Marines at Ronson were the first to face the enemy’s ground assault. At 1810, the outpost reported an increased number of mortar and artillery rounds hitting the area. Two groups of enemy soldiers were spotted moving towards the outpost, one coming from the east and the other from the west. Ronson Marines immediately opened fire on the advancing soldiers.

279 Prior to the enemy’s steady shelling of the Hook, the trenches were six feet deep. The preparatory fires of the past several days had been so intense that in nearly all areas the trenchline had been leveled by the time of the Chinese attack. “I am convinced that the Chinese didn’t realize that they had penetrated our MLR or they would have exploited the penetration.” Col Russell E. Honsowetz ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 26 Jan 70.

279 Before the enemy’s relentless shelling of the Hook, the trenches were six feet deep. The preparatory fires in the days leading up had been so intense that in nearly all areas, the trenchline was flattened by the time of the Chinese attack. “I am convinced that the Chinese didn’t realize they had breached our main line of resistance, or they would have taken advantage of it.” Col Russell E. Honsowetz letter to Director, Marine Corps History, Headquarters Marine Corps, dated January 26, 1970.

Initially, the radio messages from Ronson reported that the attacking force was a company, but a later estimate of approximately 50 Chinese appeared to be more nearly correct. Communist infantry199 made their way through the defensive artillery barrages requested by the COP garrison and into the rifle and machine gun fire of the Marines. By 1838 the enemy had overrun the squad of Marines and was in possession of Ronson. No one had escaped from the outpost.

Initially, the radio messages from Ronson indicated that the attacking force was a company, but a later estimate of around 50 Chinese troops seemed to be more accurate. Communist infantry199 navigated through the defensive artillery fire called for by the COP garrison and into the gunfire from the Marines’ rifles and machine guns. By 1838, the enemy had overwhelmed the squad of Marines and taken control of Ronson. No one had made it out of the outpost.

MAP 16 K. White

MAP 16 K. White

HOOK SECTOR OF MLR

Hook sector of MLR

1800, 26 October 1952

1800, October 26, 1952

At this time, 800 yards northeast, the 9th Company, 357th Battalion was working its way towards Warsaw. Striking at the COP from both east and west, the enemy company was momentarily halted by extremely heavy Marine mortar and artillery fire. By 1820, the platoon at Warsaw had requested the protective box around its position; this fire the 11th Marines delivered promptly. Still the Chinese continued to besiege the position and Company A defending Marines, under outpost commander Second Lieutenant John Babson, Jr., were locked in a hand-to-hand struggle. As a platoon was being readied to reinforce Warsaw the outpost reported, at 1907, that enemy soldiers had reached the Marine bunkers and that the defenders were using bayonets, pistols, hand grenades, and both ends of their rifles to repel the Communist invaders.

At this time, 800 yards northeast, the 9th Company, 357th Battalion was making its way toward Warsaw. Attacking the COP from both the east and west, the enemy company momentarily halted due to intense Marine mortar and artillery fire. By 6:20 PM, the platoon at Warsaw had requested a protective box around their position; this fire was promptly delivered by the 11th Marines. Still, the Chinese continued to besiege the position, and Company A's defending Marines, led by outpost commander Second Lieutenant John Babson, Jr., were engaged in a hand-to-hand struggle. As a platoon was being prepared to reinforce Warsaw, the outpost reported, at 7:07 PM, that enemy soldiers had reached the Marine bunkers and that the defenders were using bayonets, pistols, hand grenades, and both ends of their rifles to fend off the Communist invaders.

Three minutes later came the word, “We’re being overrun.” With this message all communication from the outpost temporarily ceased, but at 1944, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s CP heard Warsaw report heavy fighting still in progress there. The outpost first stated that enemy soldiers were on top of the bunkers; then called for “VT on own position” which the 11th Marines furnished.

Three minutes later, the message came in: “We’re being overrun.” With that, all communication from the outpost stopped temporarily, but at 1944, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s command post heard that Warsaw was still reporting heavy fighting. The outpost initially reported that enemy soldiers were on top of the bunkers, and then requested “VT on own position,” which the 11th Marines provided.

The seriousness of the situation was immediately apparent at higher commands. One outpost had been lost; a second was in jeopardy. At about this time, a veritable avalanche of enemy artillery and mortar fire began to blanket the Hook. Colonel Moore released Captain McLaughlin’s company to 1/7. The 7th Marines commander also ordered regimental ammunition supplies be allotted to Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s area. Shortly after that, division lifted ammunition restrictions on 1/7.

The seriousness of the situation was immediately clear to higher command. One outpost had been lost, and a second was at risk. Around this time, a massive onslaught of enemy artillery and mortar fire started to cover the Hook. Colonel Moore assigned Captain McLaughlin’s company to 1/7. The commander of the 7th Marines also ordered that regimental ammunition supplies be given to Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s area. Shortly after that, the division lifted ammunition restrictions on 1/7.

To counter the impending ground attack, at 1859 Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki ordered Captain McLaughlin’s Company A forward to reinforce the Hook sector and to assist Company C in containing the enemy attack. One platoon, the 1st, departed immediately for the MLR. As the remainder of the company prepared to move out, the enemy struck in estimated battalion strength. By 1938 some of the CCF infantry had advanced to the main trenches immediately south of the Hook. Within a few minutes, a second wave of Communist200 soldiers, following closely the preparatory barrages, hit JAMESTOWN just east of the 1/7 salient and frontally at the Hook itself. It appeared that the Communists had come to stay, for many cargo carriers—Chinese with construction materials for bunkers and trenches—accompanied the attacking infantry.

To counter the looming ground attack, at 1859 Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki ordered Captain McLaughlin’s Company A to move forward to reinforce the Hook sector and help Company C contain the enemy assault. The 1st platoon left immediately for the MLR. As the rest of the company got ready to deploy, the enemy struck with an estimated battalion's worth of troops. By 1938, some of the CCF infantry had advanced to the main trenches just south of the Hook. Within minutes, a second wave of Communist soldiers, following closely behind the initial bombardments, hit JAMESTOWN just east of the 1/7 salient and directly at the Hook itself. It seemed that the Communists were there to stay, as many cargo carriers—Chinese with construction materials for bunkers and trenches—accompanied the attacking infantry.

Fire fights raged during the early phase of the struggle, with continuous support furnished the assault troops by Chinese artillery and mortars. The momentum of the enemy’s three-pronged attack, aided by heavy rear area fire support, enabled the Chinese to overrun the trenches and push on along the crest of the ridge, its slope near the spine, and across the segments formed by the spurs that jutted south from the crest. Marine defenders pulled back while a small rear guard covered their movement with fire. Along the MLR, about 400 yards south of the Hook, the Chinese had slipped around the flanks of the COP and at 2030 forced a penetration in the C/1/7 line. Second Lieutenant John W. Meikle (1st Platoon, Company C) organized the Marines into a perimeter defense adjacent to the MLR. At 2130, remaining elements of the company formed another defense blocking area 550 yards east of the Hook near the crest of the ridge.

Firefights broke out during the early phase of the battle, with continuous support provided to the assault troops by Chinese artillery and mortars. The enemy's three-pronged attack, backed by heavy fire support from the rear, allowed the Chinese to overrun the trenches and push along the top of the ridge, its slope near the spine, and across the sections formed by the spurs that jutted south from the crest. Marine defenders fell back while a small rear guard covered their movement with fire. Along the Main Line of Resistance (MLR), about 400 yards south of the Hook, the Chinese managed to slip around the flanks of the Combat Outpost (COP) and at 2030 broke through the C/1/7 line. Second Lieutenant John W. Meikle (1st Platoon, Company C) organized the Marines into a perimeter defense next to the MLR. By 2130, the remaining elements of the company formed another defensive area 550 yards east of the Hook near the top of the ridge.

Between these two positions small groups of Marines continued the heavy close fight to repulse the enemy while inching their way forward to tie-in with the rest of the unit. (See Map 17 for penetration limits during the Hook battle.) To the northeast, the platoon at Warsaw had not been heard from since 1945, and at 2330, Colonel Moore reluctantly declared the outpost to be in enemy hands.

Between these two positions, small groups of Marines kept up the intense close fight to push back the enemy while slowly moving forward to connect with the rest of the unit. (See Map 17 for penetration limits during the Hook battle.) To the northeast, the platoon at Warsaw hadn't been heard from since 1945, and at 11:30 PM, Colonel Moore reluctantly declared the outpost to be in enemy hands.

At the time the loss of Warsaw was announced, counter-measures designed to halt the enemy assault were in various stages of preparation or completion. The initial reinforcing element sent forward to strengthen the main line had linked up with Lieutenant Meikle’s 1st Platoon, Company C, in the perimeter near the 3d Battalion boundary. The remainder of Company A was en route to the crest of the east-west ridge to thwart what appeared to be the main enemy drive. Colonel Moore had released his meager reserve, H/3/7, at 0300 on the 27th, and General Pollock had ordered one of the division reserve battalions, 3/1, to the 7th Marines area, although still retaining operational control of the unit.

At the time the news about the loss of Warsaw was announced, counter-measures to stop the enemy's attack were being prepared or completed. The first reinforcement sent to strengthen the main line had linked up with Lieutenant Meikle’s 1st Platoon, Company C, in the perimeter near the 3rd Battalion boundary. The rest of Company A was on its way to the top of the east-west ridge to block what seemed to be the main enemy push. Colonel Moore had sent out his small reserve, H/3/7, at 3:00 AM on the 27th, and General Pollock had ordered one of the division reserve battalions, 3/1, to the 7th Marines area, while still keeping operational control of the unit.

As the forward battalion of the division reserve, 3/1 (Lieutenant Colonel Altman) had prepared counterattack plans for critical locations202 in the division sector and had previously made a reconnaissance of the Hook area. The battalion immediately displaced from its bivouac site north of the Imjin (Camp Rose) to an assembly area behind the 7th Marines on the MLR.

As the lead battalion of the division reserve, 3/1 (Lieutenant Colonel Altman) had developed counterattack plans for key locations in the division's sector and had already surveyed the Hook area. The battalion quickly moved from its camp north of the Imjin (Camp Rose) to a gathering area behind the 7th Marines on the Main Line of Resistance (MLR).

MAP 17 K. White

MAP 17 K. White

HOOK PENETRATIONS

HOOK PENETRATIONS

26–27 October 1952

October 26–27, 1952

All possible support for 1/7 was made available, since the critical situation resulting from the major enemy assault automatically suspended previous restrictions on use of artillery and mortar allowances. At Warsaw, 2/11 blanketed the position with a continuous barrage in order to limit the enemy’s ability to effectively hold and consolidate the captured COP. Lieutenant Colonel Davis’ cannoneers also blasted enemy formations in response to fire missions from forward observers. Artillery rounds fell on Chinese outposts supporting the attack, on approach routes to the battleground, on assembly areas, and on known and suspected Chinese artillery locations.

All possible support for 1/7 was provided, as the critical situation from the major enemy assault automatically lifted previous restrictions on the use of artillery and mortar allowances. In Warsaw, 2/11 provided a continuous barrage to limit the enemy's ability to effectively hold and consolidate the captured COP. Lieutenant Colonel Davis's artillery team also targeted enemy formations in response to fire missions from forward observers. Artillery rounds hit Chinese outposts supporting the attack, approach routes to the battleground, assembly areas, and known and suspected Chinese artillery positions.

Marine aviation and tanks were employed as part of the plan to first limit the penetration made by the enemy before the counterattack to expel him. A section of tanks had been firing since 1930 against the enemy main line; a second section joined the direct fire assault a half hour later. At 2113, one F7F, with 1,300 pounds of bombs, hit a portion of the enemy’s MSR. At 2306, another twin-engine Grumman Tigercat blasted the same area, about three-quarters of a mile west of the Hook. These initial one-plane strikes in support of the defense of the salient were flown by Captain Leon C. Cheek, Jr. and Major Laurel M. Mickelson, respectively, of VMF(N)-513.

Marine aviation and tanks were used as part of the plan to first limit the enemy's advance before the counterattack to drive them back. A section of tanks had been firing since 1930 against the enemy's main line, and a second section joined the direct fire assault half an hour later. At 9:13 PM, one F7F, carrying 1,300 pounds of bombs, struck a part of the enemy’s MSR. At 11:06 PM, another twin-engine Grumman Tigercat targeted the same area, about three-quarters of a mile west of the Hook. These initial one-plane strikes in support of the defense of the salient were flown by Captain Leon C. Cheek, Jr. and Major Laurel M. Mickelson, respectively, from VMF(N)-513.

Reno Demonstration280

280 The material in this section has been derived from 7thMar, “Summary of Action, 26 Oct-1 Nov 52, Hook, Reno, Ronson”; 2/7 ComdD, Oct 52.

280 The information in this section comes from 7thMar, “Summary of Action, 26 Oct-1 Nov 52, Hook, Reno, Ronson”; 2/7 ComdD, Oct 52.

At 0030 on the 27th, Major Mickelson, returning from his MPQ attack, touched his Tigercat down at K-8 (Kunsan). At the very moment that the plane set down on the Kunsan runway, the Chinese launched another assault against the 7th Marines, the second in less than six hours. This later action, in Lieutenant Colonel Caputo’s 2/7 sector, nearly two miles west of the Hook, was not a surprise move either. In fact, an attack against the Carson-Reno-Vegas area had been anticipated for some time, and it was this state of preparedness203 that throttled the enemy’s attempt to seize an outpost here.

At 12:30 AM on the 27th, Major Mickelson, coming back from his MPQ attack, landed his Tigercat at K-8 (Kunsan). As soon as the plane touched down on the Kunsan runway, the Chinese launched another attack on the 7th Marines, the second one in less than six hours. This later action, in Lieutenant Colonel Caputo’s 2/7 sector, nearly two miles west of the Hook, wasn't unexpected. In fact, an attack on the Carson-Reno-Vegas area had been anticipated for a while, and it was this readiness that hampered the enemy’s attempt to take an outpost here.203

Division intelligence had accumulated considerable evidence that the Chinese buildup in late October was intended to ultimately clear the way to the 2/7 outposts rather than those of 1/7 in the eastern Hook area. A majority of the Marine supporting arms effort immediately prior to 1800 on the 26th had gone to the left battalion of Colonel Moore’s regiment. Aware of the interest the enemy had shown in the outposts earlier in the month, the battalion commander had strengthened the defense of this key area. One measure, increasing the size of the ambush force maintained at night near Reno from a squad to a platoon, was to pay handsome dividends before October was over.

Division intelligence had gathered significant evidence that the Chinese buildup in late October was aimed at ultimately attacking the 2/7 outposts instead of those of 1/7 in the eastern Hook area. Most of the Marine support efforts right before 1800 on the 26th had gone to the left battalion of Colonel Moore’s regiment. Aware of the enemy’s earlier interest in the outposts that month, the battalion commander had bolstered the defense of this crucial area. One action, increasing the size of the ambush team kept at night near Reno from a squad to a platoon, would pay off significantly before October ended.

Just after dark on the 26th, a reinforced platoon from Captain James R. Flores’ Company E departed the MLR on a combat patrol and ambush mission. After reaching its assigned area, about 300 yards short of the hill that housed COP Reno, the ambush platoon disappeared into camouflaged dug-in positions and waited. At midnight, the Marines were alerted by faint noises to the front. There, elements of two Chinese companies, which had stealthily maneuvered into the ambush area, were organizing for a sneak assault by an envelopment on Reno from the rear. (See Map 18.) The waiting platoon apprised the outpost of the enemy’s presence in the area; then when it appeared that the Chinese were about to launch their assault, the ambushers opened fire.

Just after dark on the 26th, a reinforced platoon from Captain James R. Flores’ Company E left the Main Line of Resistance for a combat patrol and ambush mission. After arriving at their designated area, about 300 yards short of the hill that held COP Reno, the ambush platoon settled into camouflaged positions and waited. At midnight, the Marines were alerted by faint sounds in the front. There, elements of two Chinese companies, which had quietly moved into the ambush area, were getting ready for a surprise attack by surrounding Reno from the back. (See Map 18.) The waiting platoon informed the outpost of the enemy’s presence in the area; then, when it looked like the Chinese were about to launch their attack, the ambushers opened fire.

As the surprised Chinese turned to take on the hidden ambush platoon, the two defending squads at Reno began firing. It took 10 minutes before the Chinese were sufficiently recovered to organize a withdrawal. At 0040, enemy elements quickly began to pull back towards the north. The outpost had been spared a major action, but its occupants were to be again engaged by the Chinese before daybreak.

As the shocked Chinese soldiers turned to confront the concealed ambush unit, the two defending squads at Reno started shooting. It took 10 minutes for the Chinese to regain their composure and organize a retreat. At 12:40 AM, enemy forces quickly began to pull back to the north. The outpost had avoided a major conflict, but its occupants were set to face the Chinese again before sunrise.

MAP 18 K. White

MAP 18 K. White

OUTPOST RENO ATTACKS

OUTPOST RENO ATTACKS

27 October 1952

October 27, 1952

At 0400, one platoon from a third CCF company, approaching from an enemy hill to the northeast, hit Reno. The attack was conducted in a fashion not previously experienced by the 1st Marine Division in West Korea—platoons echeloned in depth, assaulting in successive waves. The first unit to reach Reno was composed of grenade throwers and supporting riflemen. This advance element was followed immediately by the rest of the platoon, infantry armed with submachine guns and rifles. Marines on Reno were not troubled205 by the initial platoon assault, but the second one made some inroads before the defenders’ fires forced the enemy to pull back. A third two-phased attack succeeded, however, in cracking the defenses at the northeast section of the position. The outpost commander then ordered his Marines into the bunkers and called for overhead artillery fire. Caught in the open, the Chinese were forced to withdraw at 0440 and did not return.

At 0400, one platoon from a third CCF company, coming from an enemy hill to the northeast, attacked Reno. The assault was carried out in a way that the 1st Marine Division had not seen in West Korea before—platoons lined up in depth, attacking in successive waves. The first unit to reach Reno was made up of grenade throwers and supporting riflemen. This advance group was quickly followed by the rest of the platoon, infantry armed with submachine guns and rifles. The Marines at Reno weren't overly affected by the initial platoon attack, but the second one gained some ground before the defenders’ fire pushed the enemy back. However, a third two-stage attack managed to break through the defenses at the northeast part of the position. The outpost commander then ordered his Marines to take cover in the bunkers and called for artillery fire from above. Caught in the open, the Chinese were forced to retreat at 0440 and did not come back.

Counterattack281

281 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dtd 27–28 Oct 52; 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/7, 4/11, 1st TkBn, VMAs-121, -212, -323 ComdDs, Oct. 52.

281 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dtd 27–28 Oct 52; 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/7, 4/11, 1st TkBn, VMAs-121, -212, -323 ComdDs, Oct. 52.

After the Marines in Lieutenant Colonel Caputo’s 2/7 sector had dealt with the demonstration force, the action shifted back to the Hook. Early on the morning of the 27th, Captain McLaughlin’s unit, sent to the Hook-Hill 146 crest to block the penetration of the MLR, had established contact with Captain Byrum’s Company C, passed through its lines, and pressed on to the Hook. Suddenly, enemy small arms and machine guns opened up on lead elements of Company A. Artillery and mortar fire then began to hit the company. The Marines continued their advance and made some progress in arresting the Chinese thrust at the ridge. Shortly thereafter the enemy called in heavy supporting fires, forcing Company A to halt its attack temporarily. When the company commander ordered his men to resume the advance, overwhelming enemy fire again slowed the movement. McLaughlin then ordered his men to hold and dig in.

After the Marines in Lieutenant Colonel Caputo’s 2/7 sector dealt with the demonstration force, the action shifted back to the Hook. Early on the morning of the 27th, Captain McLaughlin’s unit, sent to the Hook-Hill 146 crest to block the enemy's advance, established contact with Captain Byrum’s Company C, passed through its lines, and continued toward the Hook. Suddenly, enemy small arms and machine guns opened fire on the lead elements of Company A. Artillery and mortar fire then began to hit the company. The Marines kept pushing forward and made some progress in stopping the Chinese advance at the ridge. Shortly after, the enemy called in heavy supporting fire, forcing Company A to pause its attack temporarily. When the company commander instructed his men to resume the advance, overwhelming enemy fire again slowed their movement. McLaughlin then ordered his men to hold their position and dig in.

When report of the Company A situation reached the regimental CP, Colonel Moore ordered into action his last reserve unit, Captain Bernard B. Belant’s Company H.282 He was directed to report to 1/7, then to pass through the depleted ranks of Company A, and take up the attack downridge towards the salient. At 0340 the regiment attached H/3/7 to 1/7 for operational control; at 0505 the company arrived at the 1st Battalion CP. Forty minutes later, Company H reached Captain McLaughlin’s area, where it regrouped and then deployed toward the ridgeline for the counterattack.

When the report about Company A's situation reached the regimental command post, Colonel Moore ordered his last reserve unit into action, Captain Bernard B. Belant’s Company H. He was told to report to 1/7, then move through the depleted ranks of Company A, and continue the attack down the ridge towards the salient. At 0340, the regiment attached H/3/7 to 1/7 for operational control; at 0505, the company arrived at the 1st Battalion command post. Forty minutes later, Company H reached Captain McLaughlin’s area, where it regrouped and then moved toward the ridgeline for the counterattack.

206

206

282 At 0545 on the 25th, Company I (Captain John Thomas), then the regimental reserve, and Captain Belant’s Company H, responsible for the right sector of 3/7, had exchanged roles.

282 At 5:45 AM on the 25th, Company I (Captain John Thomas), which was the regimental reserve at the time, and Captain Belant’s Company H, in charge of the right sector of 3/7, had swapped responsibilities.

When Captain Belant led his Marines towards the Hook to oust the Chinese, the enemy drive had reached the point of its deepest penetration. By this time the Chinese had seized control of slightly more than a mile of the meandering MLR. Most of the captured main defense line extended from the Hook east along the ridge towards Hill 146. (One-third of the Communist advance was from the Hook southwest, in the direction of the 3d Battalion boundary.) Between 0545 and 0800, H/3/7 worked its way towards the Hook-Hill 146 crest. After two hours the company was at the ridgeline, and at 0800 Captain Belant was ready to move forward towards the salient, a straight-line distance of about a half-mile. On the hour, the push downridge started. After having advanced about 200 yards, the H/3/7 Marines were assailed by small arms fire and the rain of heavy caliber rounds supporting the enemy’s thrust. Captain Belant signalled his Marines to attack.

When Captain Belant led his Marines toward the Hook to drive out the Chinese, the enemy's advance had reached its deepest point. By then, the Chinese had taken control of just over a mile of the winding Main Line of Resistance (MLR). Most of the captured defense line stretched from the Hook east along the ridge toward Hill 146. (One-third of the Communist advance came from the Hook southwest, toward the 3rd Battalion boundary.) Between 5:45 AM and 8:00 AM, H/3/7 made their way toward the Hook-Hill 146 crest. After two hours, the company reached the ridgeline, and at 8:00 AM, Captain Belant was set to move forward toward the salient, which was about a half-mile away in a straight line. On the hour, the push down the ridge began. After advancing about 200 yards, the H/3/7 Marines faced small arms fire and heavy caliber rounds supporting the enemy’s attack. Captain Belant signaled his Marines to charge.

Immediately, Second Lieutenant George H. O’Brien, Jr. leaped up from his position and shouted for his platoon to follow. On the run, he zigzagged across the exposed ridge and continued down the front slope towards the main trench. Before reaching this objective, the platoon commander was knocked to the ground by the impact of a single bullet. Scrambling quickly to his feet he motioned for his men to follow and took off on the run for the enemy-occupied trenchline. Again he stopped, this time to assist an injured Marine.

Immediately, Second Lieutenant George H. O’Brien, Jr. jumped up from his spot and yelled for his platoon to follow. While running, he zigzagged across the open ridge and continued down the front slope toward the main trench. Before reaching this goal, the platoon commander was knocked to the ground by the impact of a bullet. Getting quickly to his feet, he signaled for his men to follow and took off running toward the enemy-occupied trench line. Once more, he stopped, this time to help an injured Marine.

As he neared the trenchline, Lieutenant O’Brien started to throw a hand grenade into the enemy-occupied bunkers, but was stopped by the Chinese. With his carbine, the officer methodically eliminated this resistance, then hurled the grenades. Overcoming this position, the Texas Marine and his platoon advanced towards the Hook, but the enemy, now partly recovered, was able to slow and ultimately stop the counterattack. A profusion of artillery and mortar fire was primarily responsible for halting the advance, which had carried Company H very close to the Hook bunkers.

As he got closer to the trench line, Lieutenant O’Brien began to throw a hand grenade into the enemy's bunkers, but the Chinese stopped him. With his carbine, the officer systematically took out this resistance, then threw the grenades. After overcoming this position, the Texas Marine and his platoon moved toward the Hook, but the enemy, now partly regrouped, managed to slow down and eventually halt the counterattack. A heavy barrage of artillery and mortar fire was mainly responsible for stopping the advance, which had brought Company H very close to the Hook bunkers.

Spurred on by the leadership of Lieutenant O’Brien, who later received the Medal of Honor,283 the company was able to execute207 a limited advance. Despite the heavy artillery and mortar fire, the company drove a wedge into the Communist position, thereby retaking the initiative from the enemy. Company H also took three prisoners in the southeast end of the Hook before being forced by a deadly enemy mortar and artillery barrage to withdraw upridge.

Spurred on by the leadership of Lieutenant O’Brien, who later received the Medal of Honor, 283 the company managed to make a limited advance. Despite the intense artillery and mortar fire, the company pushed into the Communist position, regaining the initiative from the enemy. Company H also captured three prisoners in the southeast end of the Hook before being compelled to pull back up the ridge due to a fierce enemy mortar and artillery barrage.

283 Another Medal of Honor resulting from the Hook action was awarded posthumously to Second Lieutenant Sherrod E. Skinner, Jr. for “conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity.” Lieutenant Skinner, whose twin brother was also a Marine officer, had been assigned as an artillery forward observer with F/2/11. When the Chinese attack hit the MLR, Lieutenant Skinner organized the surviving Marines in defense of their observation post. Fighting off the enemy and calling down defensive artillery fire on the assaulting Chinese, he delayed capture of the position. Twice he left the bunker to direct fire on the enemy and get more ammunition.

283 Another Medal of Honor awarded for the Hook action was given posthumously to Second Lieutenant Sherrod E. Skinner, Jr. for “conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity.” Lieutenant Skinner, whose twin brother was also a Marine officer, had been assigned as an artillery forward observer with F/2/11. When the Chinese attack hit the MLR, Lieutenant Skinner organized the surviving Marines to defend their observation post. He fought off the enemy and called in defensive artillery fire on the attacking Chinese, delaying the capture of the position. Twice, he left the bunker to direct fire on the enemy and gather more ammunition.

When the Communists finally overran the bunker, Lieutenant Skinner instructed his fellow Marines to pretend they were dead; during the next three hours several different enemy groups frisked the inert Marines without discovering their ruse. Later, when a skeptical enemy soldier hurled a grenade into the bunker, Lieutenant Skinner unhesitatingly rolled on top of the missile, shielding the two surviving Marines. By thus absorbing the full force of the explosion, he sacrificed his life for theirs. (2dLt Sherrod E. Skinner, Jr. Biog. File)

When the Communists finally took over the bunker, Lieutenant Skinner told his fellow Marines to play dead; for the next three hours, several different enemy groups searched the motionless Marines without realizing it was a trick. Later, when a doubtful enemy soldier threw a grenade into the bunker, Lieutenant Skinner immediately rolled on top of it, protecting the two surviving Marines. By taking the full force of the explosion, he gave his life for theirs. (2dLt Sherrod E. Skinner, Jr. Biog. File)

The attack by Company H had been well supported from the air. At 0840, a flight of four ADs from Lieutenant Colonel Cargill’s VMA-121 assaulted the former Marine COP Seattle, where enemy reinforcements were being funneled through on the way to the Hook. Bombs and napalm took a heavy toll of the troops, bunkers, and weapons pouring fire on the counterattacking Marines. One hour later, a division (four planes) from VMA-323 struck another trouble spot, a former Marine outpost known as Irene (later, Rome). Aircraft of Lieutenant Colonel Chamberlain’s squadron hit this objective with three tons of bombs and more than 4,000 pounds of burning napalm. Thirty minutes later, another foursome, these from VMA-212, (Lieutenant Colonel Charles E. Dobson, Jr.),284 delivered bombs, napalm, and 20mm shells on enemy soldiers moving on the MSR towards JAMESTOWN.

The attack by Company H received strong air support. At 8:40 AM, four ADs from Lieutenant Colonel Cargill’s VMA-121 targeted the former Marine COP Seattle, where enemy reinforcements were moving through on their way to the Hook. Bombs and napalm had a devastating impact on the troops, bunkers, and weapons that were firing at the counterattacking Marines. An hour later, a division (four planes) from VMA-323 struck another hotspot, a former Marine outpost known as Irene (later, Rome). Aircraft from Lieutenant Colonel Chamberlain’s squadron bombed this target with three tons of bombs and over 4,000 pounds of burning napalm. Thirty minutes later, another group of four, this time from VMA-212, led by Lieutenant Colonel Charles E. Dobson, Jr., delivered bombs, napalm, and 20mm shells onto enemy soldiers advancing on the MSR towards JAMestown.

284 The new squadron commander had relieved Lieutenant Colonel Maurice Fletcher two days earlier. This flight was the first of two CAS attacks in behalf of the Hook forces that the new commanding officer participated in that day.

284 The new squadron commander had replaced Lieutenant Colonel Maurice Fletcher two days ago. This flight was the first of two CAS attacks that the new commanding officer took part in that day for the Hook forces.

While these three squadrons were bombing enemy strongpoints and other targets of opportunity, division artillery and tanks continued their destructive fire missions. Between 0930 and 1300, two tanks from Company A, 1st Tank Battalion, blasted away at Chinese bunkers and trenches, at an enemy 76mm gun on Seattle, and at positions southwest of the Hook. Artillery—2/11, 4/11, and the rocket battery—contributed the weight of its support. The 11th Marines, in an effort to stop the heavy hostile shelling of the Hook sector, fired 60 counterbattery missions on Chinese gun emplacements during the first 24 hours of the attack.

While these three squadrons were bombing enemy strongholds and other targets of opportunity, division artillery and tanks kept up their destructive fire missions. Between 9:30 AM and 1:00 PM, two tanks from Company A, 1st Tank Battalion, targeted Chinese bunkers and trenches, an enemy 76mm gun on Seattle, and positions southwest of the Hook. Artillery units—2/11, 4/11, and the rocket battery—provided significant support. The 11th Marines, aiming to stop the intense enemy shelling of the Hook sector, conducted 60 counter-battery missions against Chinese gun positions during the first 24 hours of the attack.

In the early afternoon of the 27th, 1st MAW attack squadrons continued their bombing and strafing of enemy troops engaged in208 the assault against the Hook. Before sundown, 30 aircraft had taken part in 8 additional strikes in support of Marine counterattacks along the ridge. The number of aircraft involved in close air support sorties for the Hook was approximately half the number received by the division all day. Of the 72 aircraft flying CAS strikes during the first 24 hours of the Hook action, 67 were Marine planes, all from MAG-12.

In the early afternoon of the 27th, 1st MAW attack squadrons continued their bombing and strafing of enemy troops involved in208 the assault on the Hook. Before sunset, 30 aircraft had participated in 8 additional strikes to support Marine counterattacks along the ridge. The number of aircraft involved in close air support missions for the Hook was about half of what the division received all day. Out of the 72 aircraft flying CAS strikes during the first 24 hours of the Hook action, 67 were Marine planes, all from MAG-12.

As in the morning’s close air support flights, Lieutenant Colonel Cargill’s ADs provided the bulk of air support for ground action that afternoon. Striking first a command post southeast of the 1/7 salient, at 1410, VMA-121 came back a half-hour later with four more Skyraiders against CCF troops pressing to envelop the right flank of the counterattack force. At 1635, two squadron aircraft flew in quickly in response to a sighting of troops moving forward in the Samichon tributary 1,000 yards north of the Hook. Twenty minutes after this successful attack, four more Skyraiders attacked bunkers opposite the left flank of Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s sector. The final daylight strike for 1/7 was again made by four ADs from -121. These planes took under attack a target that had been bombarded just 25 minutes earlier by Corsairs from VMA-323.

As in the morning’s close air support missions, Lieutenant Colonel Cargill’s ADs provided most of the air support for ground operations that afternoon. Striking first at a command post southeast of the 1/7 position at 1410, VMA-121 returned half an hour later with four more Skyraiders against CCF troops trying to surround the right flank of the counterattack force. At 1635, two squadron aircraft quickly flew in after spotting troops advancing in the Samichon tributary, 1,000 yards north of the Hook. Twenty minutes after this successful strike, four more Skyraiders targeted bunkers opposite the left flank of Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s area. The last daylight attack for 1/7 was again carried out by four ADs from -121. These planes targeted a location that had just been bombed 25 minutes earlier by Corsairs from VMA-323.

Another Marine attack squadron, VMA-212, participated in the Hook support that afternoon. At 1344, a four-plane flight assaulted troops moving through Frisco to reinforce the Chinese drive on the Hook. Two of the planes dropped three 1,000-pound bombs and two 250-pounders on the enemy soldiers. The other pair of attack Corsairs released six 780-pound napalm tanks over the position. It was estimated that 25 Chinese casualties resulted from this air attack. Wrapping up the VMA-212 CAS for the Hook sector on the 27th was a strike, at 1440, on camouflaged positions and another at 1520 against caves and bunkers. Each of these air assaults took place about 950 yards from the Hook. The earlier one was a napalm attack from 50 feet above the ground. One of the six tanks would not release and three did not ignite. Four caves were destroyed and one bunker was damaged in the latter strikes.

Another Marine attack squadron, VMA-212, took part in the Hook support that afternoon. At 1:44 PM, a four-plane flight targeted troops moving through Frisco to back up the Chinese advance on the Hook. Two of the planes dropped three 1,000-pound bombs and two 250-pound bombs on the enemy soldiers. The other two attack Corsairs released six 780-pound napalm tanks over the area. It was estimated that this air attack caused 25 Chinese casualties. Concluding the VMA-212 close air support for the Hook sector on the 27th was a strike at 2:40 PM on camouflaged positions and another at 3:20 PM against caves and bunkers. Each of these air strikes occurred about 950 yards from the Hook. The earlier one was a napalm attack from 50 feet above the ground. One of the six tanks failed to release and three did not ignite. Four caves were destroyed and one bunker was damaged in the later strikes.

Between the morning and afternoon air strikes, the ground commanders put together the final plans for recapture and defense of the Hook. When General Pollock had released I/3/1 to the regiment during an inspection trip to the 1/7 area that morning, the company was already en route to the ridge to make the counterattack. The209 ground commanders agreed that after I/3/1 regained the salient, H/3/1 would take over the right sector of 1/7 and the relieved company, B/1/7, would then occupy both the critical MLR sector and Warsaw. Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s scheme to recapture the positions and ground lost on 26 October was a continuation of the attack from atop the ridge directly towards the objective. It was to be a hard-nosed, frontal assault, but the only maneuver deemed advisable.

Between the morning and afternoon airstrikes, the ground commanders finalized their plans for reclaiming and defending the Hook. When General Pollock assigned I/3/1 to the regiment during an inspection of the 1/7 area that morning, the company was already on its way to the ridge to launch the counterattack. The209 ground commanders agreed that once I/3/1 secured the salient, H/3/1 would take over the right sector of 1/7, and the relieved company, B/1/7, would then occupy both the critical main line of resistance and Warsaw. Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s plan to reclaim the positions and territory lost on October 26th involved continuing the attack from the ridge directly toward the objective. It was meant to be a tough, direct assault, but it was the only strategy considered advisable.

Clearing the Company C command post about noon, the lead elements of Captain Murray V. Harlan, Jr.’s Company I, the 1st Platoon, continued its route to the ridge. After the 40 Marines had gained the crest, they quickly reoriented themselves to the new direction, and at 1350, led the I/3/1 assault. Artillery preparation by the 11th Marines had preceded the crossing of the line of departure, and these supporting fires were partially responsible for the substantial initial advance made by the counterattacking Marines. But Chinese artillery was not idle at this time either, and the volume of enemy fire matched that of the Marines. The I/3/1 movement forward was also slowed by Communist soldiers, estimated at about a company, who fired from protected positions along the perimeter of the Hook.

Clearing the Company C command post around noon, the lead elements of Captain Murray V. Harlan, Jr.’s Company I, the 1st Platoon, continued on their route to the ridge. After the 40 Marines reached the top, they quickly adjusted to the new direction, and at 1350, led the I/3/1 assault. Artillery preparation by the 11th Marines had happened before they crossed the starting line, and these supporting fires helped significantly with the initial advance made by the counterattacking Marines. However, Chinese artillery was active as well, and the level of enemy fire matched that of the Marines. The I/3/1 advance was also hindered by Communist soldiers, estimated to be about a company, who fired from protected positions along the perimeter of the Hook.

Inch by inch the company crawled forward. The vicious Chinese supporting barrages were exacting many casualties among Captain Harlan’s troops,285 yet they crept on, and ultimately reached the artillery forward observer bunker atop the ridge but 150 yards short of the Hook trenches. At this time, 1635, the enemy supporting fires were directed not only on the advancing Marines and the MLR defenses but extended as far back as the regimental CP.286 Chinese soldiers still clung to some of the Hook positions and trenches of the MLR just below the crest on the northern sides. Marines closest to the Hook could see the virtual ruination caused by enemy artillery and mortar shells to the trench system within the salient.

Inch by inch, the company moved forward. The fierce Chinese artillery barrages were inflicting heavy casualties on Captain Harlan’s troops,285 yet they pressed on and eventually reached the artillery forward observer bunker on top of the ridge, but still 150 yards short of the Hook trenches. At this point, 1635, the enemy's supporting fire was aimed not just at the advancing Marines and the MLR defenses but reached as far back as the regimental command post.286 Chinese soldiers still occupied some of the Hook positions and trenches of the MLR just below the crest on the northern side. Marines nearest to the Hook could see the extensive damage caused by enemy artillery and mortar shells to the trench system within the salient.

285 During this action, the company suffered 15 killed, 71 seriously wounded, and 6 slightly wounded. 3/1 ComdD, Oct. 52, p. 3.

285 During this action, the company had 15 killed, 71 seriously injured, and 6 slightly injured. 3/1 ComdD, Oct. 52, p. 3.

286 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dtd 27 Oct 52.

286 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dated 27 Oct 52.

Nearing their objective, elements of Company I pressed on with even more determination. By 1700 a few had made it to the shell-torn ditches, where they sought momentary refuge to reorganize. Several more joined, and together they reconnoitered the trenches210 and bunkers for enemy soldiers. Just then the Communists reacted with an even heavier supporting arms assault, which forced these few Marines to pull back with their platoon to the reverse slope of the ridge. To the right, about 250 yards away, the main body of Company I Marines occupied the reverse side of the hill, riding out the onslaught of artillery and mortar rounds while they waited for a lull before making the final dash to recapture the lost area of JAMESTOWN.

As they got closer to their goal, members of Company I pushed forward with even greater determination. By 1700, a few had reached the shell-damaged ditches, where they took a moment to regroup. Several more joined them, and together they surveyed the trenches210 and bunkers for enemy soldiers. At that moment, the Communists responded with an even heavier barrage, forcing these few Marines to retreat with their platoon to the back slope of the ridge. To the right, about 250 yards away, the main group of Company I Marines occupied the far side of the hill, enduring the onslaught of artillery and mortar fire while waiting for a break before making the final push to reclaim the lost area of JAMestown.

While Captain Harlan’s company was exposed to this extremely heavy enemy artillery fire, another unit, B/1/7, was on the move from Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s command post to the ridge to strike what was intended as a lethal blow to the Communist invaders. At 1932, Company B began its march forward. By midnight, the 1st Platoon was nearing its assault position close to the left flank of Company I of 3/1. Simultaneously, the 3d Platoon closed in on its jump-off point. The going was extremely difficult, complicated by a moonless night and the many shell craters that pockmarked the terrain. But at 0019, 28 October, the platoons mounted their assault, firing their rifles and machine guns, and hurling grenades to silence enemy automatic weapons and to reach dug-in Communist soldiers occupying the trenchline.

While Captain Harlan’s company was under heavy enemy artillery fire, another unit, B/1/7, was moving from Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s command post to the ridge to deliver what was meant to be a decisive blow to the Communist invaders. At 1932, Company B started its advance. By midnight, the 1st Platoon was approaching its assault position near the left flank of Company I of 3/1. At the same time, the 3rd Platoon was getting close to its jump-off point. The conditions were extremely challenging, made worse by a moonless night and numerous shell craters that dotted the landscape. But at 0019 on October 28, the platoons launched their assault, firing their rifles and machine guns, and throwing grenades to take out enemy automatic weapons and to reach the dug-in Communist soldiers in the trenchline.

The Marine charge was met by a burst of small arms fire and a shower of grenades. Weapons supporting the Chinese defense were still very active. After a standoff of 90 minutes the Marines pulled back, calling on their mortars and artillery to lay precise fire concentrations on the trouble spots. The weapons also fired on enemy approach routes through Ronson and Warsaw. After this preparation, Company B again made an assault against the enemy, at 0340. This advance was contested vigorously by the Chinese, but their resistance this time was not lasting. Quickly B/1/7 Marines deployed throughout the entire area, and by 0600 the Hook was again in Marine hands.

The Marine charge was met with a hail of gunfire and a rain of grenades. The weapons supporting the Chinese defense were still very active. After a 90-minute standoff, the Marines pulled back, calling in their mortars and artillery to target the problem areas with precise fire. The weapons also fired on enemy routes through Ronson and Warsaw. After this preparation, Company B launched another assault against the enemy at 0340. The Chinese fiercely contested this advance, but their resistance didn’t last long this time. Quickly, B/1/7 Marines spread throughout the entire area, and by 0600, the Hook was once again under Marine control.

Before the victors could permit themselves the luxury of a breathing spell, there were a number of critical tasks that demanded immediate attention. Defense of the MLR had to be quickly and securely shored up for a possible enemy counterattack. The newly rewon area had to be searched for Marines, both casualties and holdouts, and for Chinese diehards or wounded. The company had to be reorganized. In addition to these missions, there were two211 others, regaining Ronson and Warsaw. As it turned out, the duties were discharged nearly at the same time. COPs Ronson and Warsaw were reoccupied by the 7th Marines at 0630 and 0845, respectively, on 28 October.

Before the winners could allow themselves a moment to relax, several urgent tasks required their immediate attention. They needed to quickly and securely strengthen the defense of the MLR in case of an enemy counterattack. The newly regained area had to be searched for Marines, including casualties and those still holding out, as well as for wounded Chinese soldiers. The company also needed to be reorganized. Along with these missions, there were two others: retaking Ronson and Warsaw. As it happened, these tasks were completed almost simultaneously. COPs Ronson and Warsaw were reoccupied by the 7th Marines at 0630 and 0845, respectively, on 28 October.

In organizing the recaptured position, the Marines were hampered to some extent by a dense ground fog. Nevertheless, work still went ahead on these necessary tasks. Most of the Hook area was held by Company B; the western part of the 1/7 line, south of the Hook, was still manned by the platoon from Company A and one from Company C. The 1st Platoon of Company B quickly searched the retaken area of the MLR (except the caved in parts of the trenchline and bunkers, which were investigated later), but found no enemy soldiers. During the day, as Company B expanded its responsibility along the Marine main line, the platoons from A/1/7 and C/1/7 were relieved to rejoin their companies.287 Supplies began to move in, once the permanency of the defense had been established.

In organizing the recaptured position, the Marines were somewhat hindered by a thick ground fog. Still, work continued on these necessary tasks. Most of the Hook area was held by Company B; the western part of the 1/7 line, south of the Hook, was still held by a platoon from Company A and one from Company C. The 1st Platoon of Company B quickly searched the reclaimed area of the MLR (except for the collapsed parts of the trench line and bunkers, which were checked later), but found no enemy soldiers. Throughout the day, as Company B expanded its responsibility along the Marine main line, the platoons from A/1/7 and C/1/7 were relieved to rejoin their companies.287 Supplies started to flow in once the stability of the defense had been confirmed.

287 As a part of the reorganization, H/3/1 remained in the right sector, and Company C, of the Hook battalion, filled in the middle. Company A was in position on the friendly side of that part of the ridge held by Captain Byrum’s Company C. During the afternoon of the 28th, I/3/1 and H/3/7 also left Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s area to rejoin their parent organizations.

287 As part of the reorganization, H/3/1 stayed in the right sector, and Company C from the Hook battalion took the middle position. Company A was stationed on the friendly side of the part of the ridge held by Captain Byrum’s Company C. In the afternoon of the 28th, I/3/1 and H/3/7 also left Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki’s area to rejoin their main units.

Overview288

288 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 734–735, 741, dtd 29–30 Oct 52, 5 Nov. 52.

288 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 734–735, 741, dated 29–30 Oct 52, 5 Nov. 52.

In evaluating the battle for the Hook, it would appear that the Chinese assault against Reno was merely a demonstration or feint. By making a sizable effort near the primary objective after the attack there was well under way, the Communists expected not to obscure the real target but rather to cause the Marines to hesitate in moving higher echelon reserves to influence the action at the Hook. It was to the credit of the ambush force that the Chinese ruse was unsuccessful.

In assessing the battle for the Hook, it seems that the Chinese attack on Reno was simply a show or distraction. By launching a significant effort close to the main objective while the attack was already in progress, the Communists aimed not to hide the true target but to make the Marines hesitant in moving their higher-level reinforcements to affect the situation at the Hook. The success of the ambush force highlighted that the Chinese trick did not work.

Including losses from the Reno ambush, Marines estimated that the Chinese actions against that outpost cost the enemy 38 killed and 51 wounded. The COP defenders and the platoon that had surprised the enemy counted 22 dead Communist soldiers during and after the Reno action. Together with the Hook casualties,212 confirmed at 274 killed and 73 wounded and estimated at 494 killed and 370 wounded,289 the figure represented more than a third of an enemy battalion permanently lost in addition to about a battalion and a half put out of action temporarily. Distributed among the number of battalions that participated in the two actions, the total number of casualties lost some impact. What remains significant, however, are the cost and results—369 counted and 953 estimated casualties for not one inch of ground.

Including losses from the Reno ambush, Marines estimated that the Chinese actions against that outpost resulted in 38 enemy killed and 51 wounded. The defenders at COP and the platoon that ambushed the enemy counted 22 dead Communist soldiers during and after the Reno action. Along with the Hook casualties,212 confirmed at 274 killed and 73 wounded and estimated at 494 killed and 370 wounded,289 the total represented more than a third of an enemy battalion permanently lost, in addition to about a battalion and a half temporarily taken out of action. When distributed among the battalions involved in the two actions, the total number of casualties lost some of its impact. What remains significant, however, is the cost and results—369 confirmed and 953 estimated casualties for not gaining a single inch of ground.

289 The CCF casualty figures were derived from a comparison of reports of participating Marine battalions, the 7th Marines, and division. In addition to these losses caused by Marine infantry units were enemy casualties listed by the artillery and tank battalion command diaries and records of participating air squadrons; these supporting arms figures amount to 468 casualties, more than one-third the total number.

289 The CCF casualty figures came from comparing reports from the Marine battalions involved, specifically the 7th Marines and the division. Along with the losses from Marine infantry units, there were enemy casualties noted in the diaries and records of the artillery and tank battalions, as well as from participating air squadrons; these supporting units accounted for 468 casualties, which is more than one-third of the total count.

Marine losses in the Hook battle were 70 killed, 386 wounded (286 evacuated), and 39 missing, of whom 27 were later definitely known to have been captured. This was the second highest number of Marines taken prisoner in any single action during the Korean fighting.290 Such a large number was attributed to the tactics of the Chinese infantry, which followed the preparatory barrages so closely—at times even advancing into the rolling barrages—that the enemy was able to surprise and capture a considerable number of Marine outpost defenders. Nearly all of the 27 were captured in the enemy’s first rushes against the two outposts and MLR. In the diversion on Reno, an additional 9 Marines were killed and 49 wounded (29 evacuated).

Marine losses in the Hook battle were 70 killed, 386 wounded (286 evacuated), and 39 missing, of whom 27 were later confirmed to have been captured. This was the second highest number of Marines taken prisoner in any single action during the Korean fighting.290 Such a large number was due to the tactics of the Chinese infantry, which followed the preliminary bombardments so closely—at times even advancing into the rolling barrages—that the enemy was able to surprise and capture a significant number of Marine outpost defenders. Nearly all of the 27 were captured in the enemy’s initial attacks against the two outposts and the main line of resistance. In the diversion on Reno, an additional 9 Marines were killed and 49 wounded (29 evacuated).

290 During the Task Force Drysdale operation, in November 1950, more than 40 Marines had been seized by the enemy. Maj James Angus MacDonald, Jr., “The Problems of U.S. Marine Corps Prisoners of War in Korea” (M.A. thesis, Univ. of Maryland, 1961), App. G, pp. 261–262, hereafter MacDonald, POW.

290 During the Task Force Drysdale operation in November 1950, over 40 Marines were captured by the enemy. Maj James Angus MacDonald, Jr., “The Problems of U.S. Marine Corps Prisoners of War in Korea” (M.A. thesis, Univ. of Maryland, 1961), App. G, pp. 261–262, hereafter MacDonald, POW.

Perhaps as significant as any result of the Hook fighting is the amount of supporting fires the Chinese provided their infantry. Calculations of total incoming ran from 15,500 to 34,000 rounds during the 36-hour engagement. The 1st Marine Division reported conservatively that the enemy expended between 15,500–16,000 artillery and mortar rounds; estimates by supporting arms units put the total at the higher level. In any event, the 12,500 rounds the 7th Marines received during the first 24 hours represented the heaviest bombardment any Marine regiment had been subjected to up to that time. Moreover, it had now become clearly evident that the enemy could stockpile a plentiful supply of ammunition, despite attempts of UN aircraft to interfere with the enemy’s flow of supplies to the frontline.291

Perhaps just as significant as any outcome of the Hook fighting is the amount of supporting fire the Chinese provided their infantry. Estimates of total incoming rounds ranged from 15,500 to 34,000 during the 36-hour engagement. The 1st Marine Division reported conservatively that the enemy used between 15,500 and 16,000 artillery and mortar rounds; estimates from supporting arms units put the total at the higher end. In any case, the 12,500 rounds the 7th Marines faced during the first 24 hours represented the heaviest bombardment any Marine regiment had experienced up to that point. Additionally, it had become clearly evident that the enemy could stockpile a large supply of ammunition, despite attempts by UN aircraft to disrupt the enemy’s supply flow to the frontline.291

291 Comments by Dr. Robert F. Futrell, USAF Historian, in ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 2 Feb 70: “The Air Force position about the accumulation of munitions at frontline units was that by exercising supply discipline and refraining from combat, the enemy could hoard and build supply over a period of time.”

291 Comments by Dr. Robert F. Futrell, USAF Historian, in ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 2 Feb 70: “The Air Force believed that if frontline units practiced good supply management and avoided engaging in combat, the enemy would be able to stockpile and build up their supplies over time.”

DOD Photo A 160346

Marine Division Redeploys to West Korea—5th Marines units en route to new sector in April 1952 are slowed by muddy roads and spring thaws. Below, Korean washwomen labor at daily tasks while 1st Tank Battalion convoy moves up to new fighting area.

Marine Division Moves Back to West Korea—5th Marine units heading to a new area in April 1952 are delayed by muddy roads and spring thaws. Below, Korean laundry workers are busy with their daily tasks as the 1st Tank Battalion convoy heads to the new combat zone.

DOD Photo A 160984
DOD Photo A 164524

Surveillance of the Enemy—Men of the Reconnaissance Company, 1st MarDiv, scan CCF positions across the Imjin River. Below, Marines empty 75mm shell cases from armored amphibian after a shoot-out on Independence Day, 1952.

Watching the Enemy—Soldiers from the Reconnaissance Company, 1st MarDiv, are monitoring CCF positions across the Imjin River. Below, Marines are clearing out 75mm shell casings from an armored amphibian after a firefight on Independence Day, 1952.

DOD Photo A 162962
DOD Photo A 173690

Scene of See-Saw Fighting—View of enemy-held outpost Yoke as seen from Marine trenches. Below, clothing and equipment packed in a “survival bomb” dropped to Marine pilots awaiting rescue. Pilots of VMJ-1 are briefed on the day’s mission over North Korea.

Scene of See-Saw Fighting—View of the enemy-controlled outpost Yoke from the Marine trenches. Below, clothing and gear packed in a “survival bomb” are dropped for Marine pilots waiting to be rescued. Pilots of VMJ-1 receive a briefing on the day's mission over North Korea.

DOD Photo A 134927 DOD Photo A 134103
Official USN Photo

Island Marines—Korean Marine platoon undergoes instruction at Yo-do, ECIDE. Damaged AD-4 had crash landed at Briscoe Field nearby and was awaiting salvage. Below, Marine tank-infantry unit in stand-by position during truce sessions at Panmunjom.

Island Marines—A Korean Marine platoon is being trained at Yo-do, ECIDE. A damaged AD-4 has crash-landed at Briscoe Field nearby and is waiting to be salvaged. Below, a Marine tank-infantry unit is in a standby position during truce sessions at Panmunjom.

DOD Photo A 162782
DOD Photo A 162952

Amphibious Exercise—Caterpillars of 1st Shore Party Battalion pull floating dock ashore during 1st Marines training at Tokchok-to. Below, HMR-161 choppers airlift 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery to new firing positions during August 1952 maneuver.

Amphibious Exercise—Caterpillars of 1st Shore Party Battalion pull a floating dock ashore during 1st Marines training at Tokchok-to. Below, HMR-161 helicopters airlift the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery to new firing positions during the August 1952 maneuver.

DOD Photo A 163906
DOD Photo A 16448

Main Logistic Link to the Front—View of the Freedom Gate Bridge from eastern shore of Imjin. This bridge was the only one left standing after August 1952 floods. Below, the FDC bunker of 1st Battalion, 11th Marines CP. From this nerve center, fire missions are relayed to the batteries by radio.

Main Logistic Link to the Front—View of the Freedom Gate Bridge from the eastern shore of Imjin. This bridge was the only one still intact after the floods in August 1952. Below, the FDC bunker of the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines CP. From this nerve center, fire missions are communicated to the batteries by radio.

DOD Photo A 163812
DOD Photo A 162984 DOD Photo A 165569

On Guard at Critical Site—Korean Marines clean their 3.5-inch bazooka at blocking position near Hill 155. Gen Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr., CMC, observes fire placed on CCF position during frontline visit to 1st MarDiv. Below, AU Corsair of Deathrattler Squadron ready for action.

On Guard at Critical Site—Korean Marines clean their 3.5-inch bazookas at a blocking position near Hill 155. Gen Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr., CMC, watches as fire is directed at the CCF position during a visit to the frontline with the 1st MarDiv. Below, an AU Corsair from Deathrattler Squadron is ready for action.

DOD Photo A 349270
DOD Photo A 164153 DOD Photo A 164151

Battle Humor—Marine replacements moving up to front at Bunker Hill get friendly warning of occupational hazards. The versatile “Weasel” hauls ammo and supplies to the MLR. Below, Marine OP reports on Chinese dispositions during August 1952 battle.

Battle Humor—Marine replacements heading to the front at Bunker Hill get friendly warnings about the dangers of the job. The versatile “Weasel” transports ammo and supplies to the MLR. Below, a Marine OP reports on Chinese positions during the battle in August 1952.

DOD Photo A 165141
DOD Photo A 166041

Operation Haylift—Cargo lift from 1st Air Delivery Platoon area to MLR sector occupied by 7th Marines. Cargo net slung under copter body greatly increased airlift capability. Below, BGen Robert O. Bare, ADC, inspects pre-fabricated bunker at Marine outpost.

Operation Haylift—Cargo lift from the 1st Air Delivery Platoon area to the MLR sector occupied by the 7th Marines. A cargo net hung underneath the helicopter body significantly boosted airlift capacity. Below, BGen Robert O. Bare, ADC, checks out a pre-fabricated bunker at a Marine outpost.

DOD Photo A 167201
DOD Photo A 133865

Debriefing—Marine pilots of MAG-33 report to BGen Clayton C. Jerome, 1st MAW CG, upon return from June 1952 air strike, biggest to date. Below, aerial shot of 1stMarDiv CP at Yong-ri, as viewed from mess hall, looking north.

Debriefing—Marine pilots of MAG-33 report to BGen Clayton C. Jerome, Commanding General of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, after returning from the airstrike in June 1952, which was the largest to date. Below, an aerial view of the 1st Marine Division Command Post at Yong-ri, taken from the mess hall, looking north.

DOD Photo A 164363
DOD Photo A 162261

River Patrol—Amtracs of the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, Kimpo Provisional Regiment, on the Imjin River. Below, F7F Tigercat of 1st MAW, carrying napalm bomb, approaches target.

River Patrol—Amtracs from the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, Kimpo Provisional Regiment, on the Imjin River. Below, a F7F Tigercat from the 1st MAW, carrying a napalm bomb, approaches the target.

DOD Photo A 133537
DOD Photo A 166423 DOD Photo A 167466

Support for Battle of the Hook—Marines heading for embattled Hook carry machine gun ammunition. Note bandoliers. Captured CCF equipment taken in October 1952 battle included prima cord, cartridges, Soviet hand grenades. Below, VMO-6 helicopter returning from front lines lands at Field #19.

Support for Battle of the Hook—Marines heading to the troubled Hook are carrying machine gun ammo. Notice the bandoliers. Captured CCF equipment from the October 1952 battle included primacord, cartridges, and Soviet hand grenades. Below, the VMO-6 helicopter returning from the front lines lands at Field #19.

DOD Photo A 346322
DOD Photo A 168980

KANSAS Line—This recently completed secondary line is occupied by 1/7 while in reserve in late 1952. Below, tactical problems are reviewed (from left) by MajGen Edwin A. Pollock, CG, 1st MarDiv; LtGen Paul A. Kendall, I Corps Commander; and Col Russell E. Honsowetz, AC/S, G-3, 1st MarDiv.

Kans. Line—This newly finished secondary line is held by 1/7 while on standby in late 1952. Below, tactical issues are discussed (from left) by MajGen Edwin A. Pollock, CG, 1st MarDiv; LtGen Paul A. Kendall, I Corps Commander; and Col Russell E. Honsowetz, AC/S, G-3, 1st MarDiv.

DOD Photo A 165743
DOD Photo A 171273

Combat Surveillance—Marine counter mortar radar crew receives instruction on adjustment of electronic equipment. Below, regimental inspection of KMC troops by Col Kim Suk Bom, CO, 1st Regiment.

Combat Surveillance—The Marine counter-mortar radar crew is being trained on how to adjust their electronic equipment. Below, Colonel Kim Suk Bom conducts a regimental inspection of the KMC troops from the 1st Regiment.

DOD Photo A 165936
DOD Photo A 168468

Combat Interlude—Cardinal Spellman celebrates Christmas Mass before 2,500 bareheaded Marines in December 1952. Below, the Black Watch Pipe and Drum Corps honors Marines during their 177th Anniversary celebration, November 1952.

Combat Interlude—Cardinal Spellman celebrates Christmas Mass before 2,500 bareheaded Marines in December 1952. Below, the Black Watch Pipe and Drum Corps honors Marines during their 177th Anniversary celebration, November 1952.

DOD Photo A 166804
USN Photo 447570

Truce Talks Resumed—Marine helicopter approaches truce site at Panmunjom as negotiations reopen in October 1952. Below, Master Sergeant Theodore H. Hughes, 1st MAW, presents 900,000 won (equivalent to $150,000) to Bishop Mousset, of Little Flower’s Orphanage in Pohang. Money was donated by MAG 33 Staff NCO Club.

Truce Talks Resumed—A Marine helicopter arrives at the truce site in Panmunjom as negotiations restart in October 1952. Below, Master Sergeant Theodore H. Hughes, 1st MAW, hands over 900,000 won (about $150,000) to Bishop Mousset of Little Flower’s Orphanage in Pohang. The money was donated by the MAG 33 Staff NCO Club.

DOD Photo A 132432

213

213

With regard to combat tactics, the attacks during 26–27 October confirmed earlier reports that extremely heavy use of preparatory barrages by the enemy signalled an imminent infantry attack on the area. Defensive concentrations of apparently unlimited quantity typified Communist artillery support for their attacking forces. Meticulous policing of the battlefield, an established Chinese practice, was also apparent during the Hook battle. In order to prevent identification of his combat units, the enemy also took pains to ensure that assault troops remove all papers and unit insignia before going forward of their own lines.

Regarding combat tactics, the attacks on October 26-27 confirmed earlier reports that the enemy's heavy use of preparatory barrages indicated an imminent infantry attack in the area. The Communist artillery support for their attacking forces seemed to be in unlimited quantities. Careful policing of the battlefield, a common practice for the Chinese, was also evident during the Hook battle. To avoid the identification of their combat units, the enemy made sure that assault troops removed all papers and unit insignia before advancing beyond their own lines.

Two other previously reported tactics were corroborated during the late October battle for the Hook. One was the presence of cargo carriers with the attacking force. These soldiers, estimated by the division to comprise as high as 75 percent of the total number of Chinese troops committed, carried shovels, lumber, extra rations, medical aid equipment, and stocks of ammunition. One Marine evacuated from a bunker reported on a method of bunker searching by the Chinese. “English speaking Chinese were yelling into bunkers for Marines to ‘Come out and surrender.’ When there was no evidence of surrender, the Chinese would use bangalore torpedoes and satchel charges to destroy and seal bunkers.”292

Two other tactics that had been reported earlier were confirmed during the late October battle for the Hook. One was the presence of cargo carriers with the attacking force. These soldiers, estimated by the division to make up as much as 75 percent of the total number of Chinese troops involved, carried shovels, lumber, extra food, medical supplies, and ammunition. One Marine who was evacuated from a bunker described a method the Chinese used for searching bunkers. “Chinese soldiers who spoke English were shouting into the bunkers for Marines to ‘Come out and surrender.’ When they didn’t get any response, the Chinese would use bangalore torpedoes and satchel charges to destroy and seal the bunkers.”292

292 1stMarDiv PIR 738, dtd 2 Nov 52, p. 3. The Chinese also used hand grenades in searching the bunkers. All of these explosives had been widely employed during World War II.

292 1stMarDiv PIR 738, dtd 2 Nov 52, p. 3. The Chinese also used hand grenades while searching the bunkers. All of these explosives had been commonly used during World War II.

In one respect the enemy deviated from his usual tactics. During the battle for the Hook Marines who took prisoners made the discovery that the Chinese employed close-up relief forces. Prior to an offensive action, the enemy positioned a reserve just to the rear of the assault unit. After the attack had started, and at the appropriate time, the commander would signal the fresh force forward to take over the mission of the old unit. In this manner, the enemy hoped to sustain his drive or to retain a newly-won position.

In one way, the enemy changed his usual tactics. During the battle for the Hook, Marines who captured prisoners found out that the Chinese used close-up relief forces. Before launching an attack, the enemy placed a reserve unit just behind the front-line troops. Once the attack began, the commander would signal the fresh troops to move in and take over the mission from the original unit at the right moment. This way, the enemy aimed to maintain their offensive or hold onto a recently gained position.

Though the foresight appeared appropriate, the result was not always what had been anticipated. In the earlier part of the month,214 during a fight in another I Corps sector, the Communists had rushed a reserve force forward to consolidate the defense of an outpost immediately after its capture. In the Hook fighting, a fresh unit, which had been placed immediately to the rear of the assault troops, was ordered forward to keep the attack alive. Both attempts failed. Marines attributed this lack of success to the Communists’ apparent inability to organize or reorganize quickly, a difficulty which was believed to have resulted from the scarcity of officers in forward areas.293

Though the foresight seemed appropriate, the outcome wasn’t always what had been expected. Earlier this month,214 during a battle in another I Corps sector, the Communists quickly sent a reserve force to strengthen the defense of an outpost right after it was captured. In the Hook fighting, a fresh unit, positioned just behind the assault troops, was ordered to advance to keep the attack going. Both efforts failed. Marines believed this lack of success was due to the Communists’ clear difficulty in organizing or reorganizing quickly, which was thought to stem from a shortage of officers in frontline areas.293

293 1stMarDiv PIR 741, dtd 5 Nov 52, Encl. 2, p. 2.

293 1stMarDiv PIR 741, dated November 5, 1952, Enclosure 2, page 2.

Discussing the defense of the Hook area, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki commented shortly after the battle ended:

Discussing the defense of the Hook area, Lieutenant Colonel Dulacki commented soon after the battle ended:

The Chinese seemed to gain their greatest tactical advantage during action on “The Hook” by assaulting friendly positions directly under their own artillery and mortar barrages. The effects on defending Marines were two-fold: heavy incoming either physically trapped them in their bunkers, or the Chinese, having overrun our positions through their own barrages, took the defenders by surprise as they left their bunkers to man their fighting holes. It is therefore considered imperative that in future instances of heavy enemy supporting fires, all Marines physically occupy an individual shelter from which their fighting positions are readily accessible.

The Chinese seemed to have their biggest tactical advantage during the fighting at “The Hook” by attacking friendly positions right under their own artillery and mortar fire. This had two main effects on the defending Marines: the heavy incoming fire either physically trapped them in their bunkers, or the Chinese, having taken over our positions through their own artillery, surprised the defenders as they came out of their bunkers to man their fighting positions. It is therefore essential that in future situations with heavy enemy supporting fire, all Marines occupy their own shelters where their fighting positions are easily accessible.

Marines gained a false sense of security by taking cover, in groups, inside bunkers. In some cases, groups of three or four Marines were killed when a bunker caved in on top of them. Had they been spread out along the trenchline, but under individual cover, it is believed that far fewer casualties would have resulted, and also the position would have been better prepared for defense. The false sense of security gained by being with comrades inside a bunker must be overcome.294

Marines felt falsely secure by taking cover together inside bunkers. In some instances, groups of three or four Marines were killed when a bunker collapsed on them. If they had been spread out along the trench line, each under their own cover, it’s believed that many fewer casualties would have occurred, and the position would have been better defended. The false sense of security from being with friends inside a bunker needs to be addressed.294

294 1/7 ComdD, Nov 52, App. VI.

294 1/7 ComdD, Nov 52, App. VI.

Another factor bothered the 1/7 commander. He directed unit leaders to exercise closer control over the care and cleaning of weapons under their custody. During the Hook fighting, the malfunctioning of weapons due to improper cleaning and loss of some rifles “in the excitement to gain cover” caused the Marines to take casualties that might otherwise have been prevented.

Another factor worried the 1/7 commander. He instructed unit leaders to keep tighter control over the maintenance and cleaning of the weapons in their care. During the Hook fighting, the failure of weapons because of improper cleaning and the loss of some rifles “in the scramble to find cover” led to casualties among the Marines that could have been avoided.

These same deficiencies were also observed by General Pollock, and he ordered their immediate correction. Lieutenant General Hart, CG FMFPac, whose inspection of the division coincided with the Hook battle and who saw the trenches after they had been leveled, noted that shallow trenches and bunkers built above the ground did215 not offer sufficient protection from intensive enemy shelling. He directed that more emphasis be placed on the digging of field fortifications and bunkers.295

These same issues were also noted by General Pollock, who ordered their immediate fix. Lieutenant General Hart, CG FMFPac, who inspected the division during the Hook battle and saw the trenches after they were leveled, observed that shallow trenches and above-ground bunkers didn’t provide enough protection from heavy enemy shelling. He instructed that more focus be put on digging field fortifications and bunkers.295

295 CG, FMFPac ComdD, Nov 52, App IV, Encl (8), Anx G, p. 4. During the Hook fighting, General Hart also witnessed the helicopter deployment of the 4.5-inch rockets. He was impressed with the progress that had been made in this helicopter-ground team performance, particularly the speed and efficiency with which these weapons could be set up to fire and then displaced to a new position.

295 CG, FMFPac ComdD, Nov 52, App IV, Encl (8), Anx G, p. 4. During the Hook fighting, General Hart observed the deployment of 4.5-inch rockets via helicopter. He was impressed with the advancements made in the performance of the helicopter-ground teams, especially the speed and efficiency with which these weapons could be set up to fire and then moved to a new location.

In considering not only how the fight was conducted but why, one has only to go back to the first part of October and recall the situation that existed along the 1st Marine Division line. During the hotly contested outpost battles early in the month, the Chinese had attempted to outflank the division by seizing key terrain in the left and right sectors. Where the enemy had been unsuccessful, he returned later in the month for another major assault. On the night of the 26th the endeavor was in the division right. A new blow against the left was not far off.

In looking at not just how the fight happened but why it did, we need to go back to early October and think about the situation along the 1st Marine Division line. During the intense outpost battles at the beginning of the month, the Chinese tried to outmaneuver the division by capturing important ground on both the left and right sides. Where the enemy had failed, they came back later in the month for another major attack. On the night of the 26th, the focus was on the division’s right. A new strike against the left was imminent.


A Successful Korean Defense—Six Months on the UNC Line—Events on the Diplomatic Front—The Marine Commands During the Third Winter—1st MAW Operations 1952–1953 Behind the Lines—The Quiet Sectors—Changes in the Concept of Ground Defense—Before the Nevadas Battle

A Successful Korean Defense—Six Months on the UNC Line—Events on the Diplomatic Front—The Marine Commands During the Third Winter—1st MAW Operations 1952–1953 Behind the Lines—The Quiet Sectors—Changes in the Concept of Ground Defense—Before the Nevadas Battle

A Successful Korean Defense296

296 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdDs Oct-Nov 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 737–738, dtd 31 Oct-1 Nov 52; KMC Regt UnitRpts 238–244, dtd 24–30 Oct 52.

296 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdDs Oct-Nov 52; 1stMarDiv PIRs 737–738, dated 31 Oct-1 Nov 52; KMC Regt UnitRpts 238–244, dated 24–30 Oct 52.

In both the early and late October outpost battles the Chinese had attempted to seize critical terrain on the flanks of the 1st Marine Division. Although the majority of these attacks failed, the enemy had acquired six outposts early in the month—three in the western Korean Marine Corps sector and three north of the right regimental line. On the last day of October, two hours before midnight, the CCF again struck the Marine left flank. This time their efforts were directed against four outposts that screened Hill 155, the most prominent terrain feature in the entire KMC regimental zone. The fighting that developed was brief but very sharp and would be the most costly of all KMC clashes during this third winter of the war.

In both the early and late October outpost battles, the Chinese tried to take crucial land on the sides of the 1st Marine Division. Even though most of these attacks failed, the enemy managed to capture six outposts early in the month—three in the western Korean Marine Corps sector and three north of the right regimental line. On the last day of October, two hours before midnight, the CCF struck the Marine left flank again. This time, their efforts focused on four outposts that protected Hill 155, the most significant terrain feature in the entire KMC regimental zone. The fighting that ensued was short but intense and turned out to be the most costly of all KMC clashes during this third winter of the war.

The latest enemy attack came as no real surprise to Korean Marines of the 5th Battalion, occupying COPs 39, 33, and 31 in the northern regimental sector, or 2d Battalion personnel at COP 51 in the southern (western) half of the MLR. (Map 19.) The four outposts assisted in defense of the MLR (particularly Hill 155 just inside the MLR), afforded observation of CCF approach routes,218 and served as a base for friendly raids and offensive operations. Hill 155 overlooked both the wide Sachon Valley and Chinese frontline positions to the west. This critical Korean hill also commanded a view of the Panmunjom peace corridor, Freedom Gate Bridge, and the Marine division area east of Line JAMESTOWN in the KMC sector. Hill 155 had further tactical importance in that it protected the left flank of Paekhak Hill, the key ground in the entire 34-mile expanse of JAMESTOWN within 1st Marine Division territory.

The recent enemy attack didn't really surprise the Korean Marines of the 5th Battalion, who were stationed at COPs 39, 33, and 31 in the northern regimental sector, or the 2d Battalion personnel at COP 51 in the southern (western) part of the MLR. (Map 19.) The four outposts helped defend the MLR (especially Hill 155, which was just inside the MLR), provided observation of CCF approach routes,218 and served as a base for friendly raids and offensive operations. Hill 155 overlooked the wide Sachon Valley and the Chinese frontline positions to the west. This crucial Korean hill also had a view of the Panmunjom peace corridor, Freedom Gate Bridge, and the Marine division area east of Line JAMestown in the KMC sector. Hill 155 was also tactically important because it protected the left flank of Paekhak Hill, which was key ground in the entire 34-mile stretch of JAMestown within the 1st Marine Division territory.

Actually, the probability of a determined enemy attack against the four outposts had been anticipated since early October following CCF seizure of three positions (former COPs 37, 36, and 86) in their strike against the KMC regimental OPLR. The enemy had then proceeded to organize an OPLR of his own with the two northern outposts, COPs 37 and 36, and informally occupied another position to the south and one toward the north in the vicinity of COP 39. “With this OPLR once firmly organized, the enemy will have an excellent jump-off point towards our OPs 39 and 33, his next probable objectives,” KMC officers reasoned.297

Actually, the likelihood of a focused enemy attack on the four outposts had been expected since early October after the CCF took control of three positions (previously COPs 37, 36, and 86) in their assault on the KMC regimental OPLR. The enemy then began to set up an OPLR of their own using the two northern outposts, COPs 37 and 36, and informally took over another position to the south and one to the north near COP 39. “Once this OPLR is fully established, the enemy will have a great launching point towards our OPs 39 and 33, which are likely to be their next targets,” KMC officers concluded.297

297 KMC Regt UnitRpt 216, dtd 4 Oct 52, p. 2.

297 KMC Regt UnitRpt 216, dtd 4 Oct 52, p. 2.

Sporadic probes throughout the month in the COP 39 and 33 areas indicated continued enemy interest in the positions. COP 51, to the south, was considered another likely target because of its location immediately east of COP 86, previously annexed by the CCF.

Sporadic checks throughout the month in the COP 39 and 33 areas showed ongoing enemy interest in the positions. COP 51, to the south, was seen as another likely target due to its location just east of COP 86, which had been previously taken by the CCF.

Prior to attacking the four outposts on 31 October, the Chinese had signaled their intentions by sharply stepping up artillery and tank fire against the sector. During the 24-hour period ending 1800 on 30 October, a total of 1,881 rounds crashed on KMC positions, most of these against the two northern outposts, COPs 39 and 33. Nearly 1,500 rounds fell the next day. More than 50 sightings of enemy troops and weapons in the forward area were also reported. By contrast, during the previous week less than 15 observations of enemy activity had been made daily and, on the average, only about 200–340 rounds of fire had fallen in the entire sector. Despite this comparatively moderate rate of hostile fire, at least one Korean Marine was killed and three wounded in late October from well-placed Chinese mortar or artillery rounds striking the outposts.

Prior to attacking the four outposts on October 31, the Chinese had made their intentions clear by significantly increasing artillery and tank fire against the area. In the 24 hours ending at 6 PM on October 30, a total of 1,881 rounds hit KMC positions, mostly targeting the two northern outposts, COPs 39 and 33. Almost 1,500 rounds fell the next day. There were also over 50 reports of enemy troops and weapons in the forward area. In contrast, during the previous week, there had been fewer than 15 reports of enemy activity each day, with an average of only about 200–340 rounds of fire falling across the whole sector. Despite this relatively low rate of hostile fire, at least one Korean Marine was killed and three others wounded in late October by well-placed Chinese mortar or artillery rounds hitting the outposts.

MAP 19 K. White

MAP 19 K. White

CCF ATTACK AGAINST KMC SECTOR

CCF Attack on KMC Sector

(Division Left)

(Division Left)

31 October 1952

October 31, 1952

After the two days of heavy shelling, the regiment warned in its daily report issued only two hours before the full-scale attack began:

After two days of intense shelling, the regiment warned in its daily report issued just two hours before the full-scale attack started:

220

220

The enemy has made a consistent two-day effort to destroy friendly outpost positions. Last night, at 1830, two enemy companies were observed in an apparent attempt to attack OPs 39 and 33. Artillery fire broke up the attempt, but continued enemy artillery today indicates further attack is probable tonight. If enemy artillery preparation is indicative, a simultaneous attack against outposts 39, 51, 33, and 31 can be considered probable....298

The enemy has consistently tried for two days to destroy our outpost positions. Last night at 6:30 PM, two enemy companies were seen making what looked like an attempt to attack OPs 39 and 33. Artillery fire disrupted their attempt, but ongoing enemy artillery today suggests another attack is likely tonight. If the enemy's artillery preparations mean anything, we can expect a coordinated attack against outposts 39, 51, 33, and 31...298

298 KMC Regt UnitRpt 243, dtd 31 Oct 52, pp. 5–6.

298 KMC Regt UnitRpt 243, dated October 31, 1952, pages 5–6.

These earlier observations and predictions as to the enemy’s action were shortly confirmed when the CCF launched its new ground attack.

These earlier observations and predictions about the enemy’s actions were quickly confirmed when the CCF began its new ground attack.

Beginning at 2200,299 the enemy delivered an intensive eight-minute 76mm and 122mm artillery preparation against the four outposts. Chinese assault forces from four different infantry regiments then launched a simultaneous attack on the positions. Moving in from the north, west, and south, two CCF companies (3d Company, 1st Battalion, 581st Regiment and 2d Company, 1st Battalion, 582d Regiment) virtually enveloped the northern outpost, COP 39. Two more CCF companies (unidentified) lunged against the two central outposts, COPs 33 and 31, a company at each position.300 The southern and most-heavily defended post, COP 51, where a company of Korean Marines was on duty, was assailed by four Chinese companies (4th Company, 2d Battalion, 584th Regiment; 4th and 6th Companies, 2d Battalion, 585th Regiment; and 1st Company, 1st Battalion, 585th Regiment). Even though the enemy exerted his strongest pressure against COP 51, the position held and the Chinese broke off the attack there earlier than at the other outposts.

Beginning at 2200, 299 the enemy launched an intense eight-minute artillery barrage using 76mm and 122mm shells against the four outposts. Chinese assault forces from four different infantry regiments then simultaneously attacked the positions. Approaching from the north, west, and south, two CCF companies (3rd Company, 1st Battalion, 581st Regiment and 2nd Company, 1st Battalion, 582nd Regiment) nearly surrounded the northern outpost, COP 39. Two more CCF companies (unknown) charged at the two central outposts, COPs 33 and 31, with one company at each position. 300 The southernmost and most heavily defended post, COP 51, where a company of Korean Marines was stationed, was attacked by four Chinese companies (4th Company, 2nd Battalion, 584th Regiment; 4th and 6th Companies, 2nd Battalion, 585th Regiment; and 1st Company, 1st Battalion, 585th Regiment). Even though the enemy applied their strongest pressure against COP 51, the position held firm, and the Chinese broke off their attack there sooner than at the other outposts.

299 The attack on the 31st took place after the KMC 5th Battalion had taken over the right regimental sector, at 1700, from the 3d Battalion. The Chinese often deliberately timed their outpost attacks to coincide with a relief of lines. Company personnel of both the 5th and 3d Battalions were on line during the fighting. KMC Regt UnitRpts dtd 1 Nov 52, p. 4; 245, dtd 2 Nov 52, p. 4.

299 The attack on the 31st happened after the KMC 5th Battalion took over the right regimental sector at 5:00 PM from the 3rd Battalion. The Chinese often purposely timed their outpost attacks to coincide with a change of lines. Personnel from both the 5th and 3rd Battalions were in position during the fighting. KMC Regt UnitRpts dtd 1 Nov 52, p. 4; 245, dtd 2 Nov 52, p. 4.

300 KMC Regt UnitRpt 244, dtd 1 Nov 52, pp. 1, 4. A different account as to size of attacking units is given in Maj Kang Shin Ho, ROKMC ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 30 Apr 70, which states two reinforced enemy companies assaulted COP 33 and an estimated enemy battalion struck COP 31.

300 KMC Regt UnitRpt 244, dated November 1, 1952, pages 1 and 4. A different account regarding the size of the attacking units is provided in Major Kang Shin Ho's letter to the Director of Marine Corps History, Headquarters Marine Corps, dated April 30, 1970, which states that two reinforced enemy companies attacked COP 33 and an estimated enemy battalion hit COP 31.

At COP 31 a heavy fire fight raged until 0155, when the defending KMC platoon halted the Chinese and forced them to make a partial withdrawal. To the northwest, at COP 33, the enemy encountered less resistance from the two squads manning the outpost. The Chinese achieved some success in penetrating the defenses and occupied several positions. After heavy close fighting and friendly artillery support, the Koreans expelled the invaders at 0515.

At COP 31, a fierce firefight was underway until 1:55 AM, when the defending KMC platoon stopped the Chinese and forced them to pull back partially. Meanwhile, at COP 33 to the northwest, the enemy faced less resistance from the two squads stationed at the outpost. The Chinese managed to make some headway in breaching the defenses and took over several positions. After intense close combat and support from friendly artillery, the Koreans pushed the invaders out by 5:15 AM.

221

221

The enemy’s efforts appeared to have been most successful, temporarily, at COP 39, the northern post and one nearest to Hill 155. Although the Chinese wrested some ground from the KMC platoon, artillery fires continued to punish the enemy and by 0410 had forced him to pull back. A small hostile force returned at 0600 but after a 15-minute exchange of small arms it left, this time for good. At about this same time the last of the Chinese had also withdrawn from the two central outposts, 33 and 31.

The enemy's efforts seemed to be very successful, at least for a while, at COP 39, the northern post closest to Hill 155. Even though the Chinese managed to gain some ground from the KMC platoon, artillery fire kept hitting the enemy and by 0410 had made them retreat. A small enemy force came back at 0600, but after a 15-minute exchange of gunfire, they left for good. Around the same time, the last of the Chinese also pulled back from the two central outposts, 33 and 31.

In terms of sheer numbers, the enemy’s strongest effort was made against COP 51. This was the most isolated of the Korean positions and, at 2,625 yards, the one farthest from the MLR. Ironically, in the week preceding the attack COP 51 was least harassed by hostile artillery although it had received 20 rounds of 90mm. tank fire, more than any other position. On the 31st, elements of three companies struck the southwestern trenches and defenses, while a fourth attempted to break through from the north. As it turned out the action here was the least intense of the outpost clashes. After initial heavy fighting the Chinese seemed reluctant to press the assault even though they vastly outnumbered the Korean company deployed at the outpost. In the early morning hours the enemy broke contact and by 0330 had withdrawn from COP 51.

In terms of sheer numbers, the enemy's biggest attack was against COP 51. This was the most isolated of the Korean positions and, at 2,625 yards, the farthest from the MLR. Ironically, in the week before the attack, COP 51 faced the least harassment from enemy artillery, even though it had taken 20 rounds of 90mm tank fire, more than any other position. On the 31st, elements from three companies hit the southwestern trenches and defenses, while a fourth tried to break through from the north. As it turned out, the fighting here was the least intense of the outpost encounters. After some heavy initial fighting, the Chinese seemed hesitant to continue the assault, even though they outnumbered the Korean company stationed at the outpost by a large margin. In the early morning hours, the enemy lost contact and by 0330 had retreated from COP 51.

During the night approximately 2,500 rounds of CCF artillery and mortar fire lashed the positions. Korean Marines, aided by friendly artillery, repelled the assault and inflicted heavy casualties on the enemy. Supporting fires included more than 1,200 rounds of HE shells from the KMC 4.2-inch Mortar Company. Chinese casualties were listed as 295 known killed, 461 estimated wounded, and 9 POWs. Korean Marine losses were 50 killed, 86 wounded, and 18 missing.301 By first light the Korean outposts had thrown back the enemy’s latest well-coordinated attack. This ended the last significant action of October in the 1st Marine Division sector.

During the night, around 2,500 rounds of CCF artillery and mortar fire hammered the positions. Korean Marines, supported by friendly artillery, pushed back the assault and caused heavy casualties for the enemy. Supporting fire included over 1,200 rounds of HE shells from the KMC 4.2-inch Mortar Company. Chinese casualties were reported as 295 confirmed killed, 461 estimated wounded, and 9 POWs. Korean Marine losses were 50 killed, 86 wounded, and 18 missing.301 By dawn, the Korean outposts had successfully repelled the enemy’s latest well-coordinated attack. This marked the end of the last significant action of October in the 1st Marine Division sector.

222

222

301 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Six Months on the UNC Line302

302 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: Barclay, Commonwealth; Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Field, NavOps, Korea; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Walter G. Hermes, Truce Tent and Fighting Front—United States Army in the Korean War (Washington: OCMH, DA, 1966), hereafter Hermes, Truce Tent; Miller, Carroll, and Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953.

302 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: Barclay, Commonwealth; Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Field, NavOps, Korea; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Walter G. Hermes, Truce Tent and Fighting Front—United States Army in the Korean War (Washington: OCMH, DA, 1966), referred to as Hermes, Truce Tent; Miller, Carroll, and Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953.

The KMC Regiment’s battle in late October marked the end of two months of heavy fighting in the division sector. October had witnessed the most intense combat in more than a year. As the third Korean winter approached outpost clashes and small unit actions along the rest of the UNC frontline began to slacken. During November and December, neither side appeared eager to pursue the offensive. Chinese aggressiveness declined noticeably.

The KMC Regiment's battle in late October signaled the end of two months of intense fighting in the division sector. October saw the most intense combat in over a year. As the third Korean winter approached, skirmishes and small unit actions along the rest of the UNC frontline began to decrease. Throughout November and December, neither side seemed keen to take the offensive. The Chinese aggressiveness dropped noticeably.

Despite other action initiated by the enemy, the I Corps sector remained the chief Communist target. On 19 November, the British 1st Commonwealth Division successfully withstood what was initially a company-size attempt to capture the Hook. In sharp fighting between 1900 and 0430, Black Watch and reinforcing Canadian units repulsed a determined battalion-strength CCF assault, killing more than 100 Chinese.303 Marine and I Corps artillery units fired almost continuously throughout the night in support of the Hook defenders. Fighting flared again, briefly, in December in the I Corps sector when Chinese soldiers attempted to overrun outposts on the Imjin River line, but were thrown back by the ROK 1st Division. The enemy then tried to seize key terrain forward of the U.S. 2nd Division, but was again halted.

Despite other actions taken by the enemy, the I Corps sector stayed the main target for the Communists. On November 19, the British 1st Commonwealth Division successfully defended against an initial attempt by a company to take the Hook. In intense fighting from 1900 to 0430, the Black Watch, along with reinforcing Canadian units, pushed back a determined battalion-strength assault from the Chinese Communist Forces, killing more than 100 Chinese soldiers. Marine and I Corps artillery units fired almost constantly throughout the night to support the defenders of the Hook. Fighting flared up again for a short time in December in the I Corps sector when Chinese troops tried to overrun outposts along the Imjin River line but were thrown back by the ROK 1st Division. The enemy then attempted to capture key territory ahead of the U.S. 2nd Division, but were stopped once again.

303 For details of this action see Canadian Department of National Defence ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 8 Jan 70 in v. V, Korean comment file.

303 For details of this action, see the Canadian Department of National Defence letter to the Director, MCHist, HQMC, dated January 8, 1970, in volume V of the Korean comment file.

Elsewhere before the end of the year, the CCF captured one outpost in the IX Corps area, to the right of I Corps, but suffered a telling defeat at the hands of the Ethiopian battalion during an attempt to crack this sector of the U.S. 7th Division line. After a brief fire fight the Chinese were forced to withdraw, leaving 131 CCF dead in the Ethiopian positions. North Korean efforts to seize critical ground in the X and ROK I Corps sectors, at the far eastern end of the EUSAK line, was similarly broken up by the U.S. 40th and ROK 5th Divisions.

Elsewhere, before the year ended, the CCF took control of one outpost in the IX Corps area, located to the right of I Corps, but faced a significant defeat at the hands of the Ethiopian battalion when they tried to break through this section of the U.S. 7th Division line. After a short firefight, the Chinese had to retreat, leaving 131 CCF soldiers dead in the Ethiopian positions. North Korean attempts to capture key terrain in the X and ROK I Corps sectors, at the far eastern end of the EUSAK line, were similarly thwarted by the U.S. 40th and ROK 5th Divisions.

By the end of 1952 General Van Fleet had not only revitalized his defenses with recent rotation of frontline units but had also223 strengthened his line by inserting another division in the critical and long-troublesome Chorwon-Kumhwa sector of IX Corps, on the I Corps right flank. With these changes by late December there were 16 EUSAK divisions on line—11 Korean, 3 U.S. Army, 1 Marine, and 1 British Commonwealth—plus 4 divisions in reserve (1 Korean and 3 U.S. Army). Nearly 75 percent of the UNC line had been entrusted to Republic of Korea units. Their performance was a tribute to growing ROK military proficiency and justified the EUSAK decision to assign to ROK troops a greater role in the Allied ground defense.

By the end of 1952, General Van Fleet had not only improved his defenses with the recent rotation of frontline units but had also223 bolstered his line by adding another division in the crucial and long-troubled Chorwon-Kumhwa sector of IX Corps, on the right flank of I Corps. With these changes by late December, there were 16 EUSAK divisions in position—11 from Korea, 3 from the U.S. Army, 1 Marine, and 1 from the British Commonwealth—plus 4 divisions in reserve (1 Korean and 3 U.S. Army). Nearly 75 percent of the UNC line was entrusted to Republic of Korea units. Their performance demonstrated the increasing proficiency of the ROK military and justified the EUSAK decision to give ROK troops a more significant role in the Allied ground defense.

The slow pace of infantry action during the last two months of 1952 continued into the new year. Raids by small UNC units highlighted the limited combat during January and February. During the following month the battlefront tempo accelerated, due in part to expanded patrol activities. A number of sharp clashes in No-Man’s-Land resulted in several Communist setbacks but led the enemy to make an increased use of ambushes. These traps initially caught the UNC troops by surprise, inflicting heavy casualties on them. But by far the most severe fighting of the new year resulted when the Chinese renewed their fierce outpost and main line of resistance attacks in March.

The slow pace of infantry action during the last two months of 1952 continued into the new year. Small raids by UNC units highlighted the limited combat in January and February. In the following month, the intensity on the battlefront increased, partly due to expanded patrol activities. Several sharp clashes in No-Man’s-Land resulted in notable setbacks for the Communists, but they responded by increasing their use of ambushes. Initially, these traps surprised UNC troops and caused heavy casualties. However, the most intense fighting of the new year occurred in March when the Chinese renewed their fierce attacks on outposts and the main line of resistance.

Again, the western I Corps sector was the major combat area as enemy pressure mounted along the front. This was believed due, in part, to the “growing Chinese sensitivity to the I Corps raids”304 as well as an attempt by the CCF to regain the initiative as they began to send out larger forces to probe and assault UNC positions. On 17 March, the Chinese launched a battalion-size attack against Hill 355 (Little Gibraltar). This MLR position was defended by elements of the U.S. 2d Infantry Division, on line immediately east of the Marine division, in the sector customarily occupied by the 1st Commonwealth Division. (The Army unit had relieved the British division on 30 January.) A second large-scale assault on the hill that month was also turned back.

Again, the western I Corps sector was the main combat area as enemy pressure increased along the front. This was thought to be partly due to the “growing Chinese sensitivity to the I Corps raids”304 as well as an effort by the CCF to regain the initiative by sending larger forces out to probe and attack UNC positions. On March 17, the Chinese launched a battalion-sized attack against Hill 355 (Little Gibraltar). This MLR position was defended by elements of the U.S. 2nd Infantry Division, located just east of the Marine division, in the area usually held by the 1st Commonwealth Division. (The Army unit had taken over from the British division on January 30.) A second large-scale attack on the hill that month was also repelled.

304 Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 392.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hermes, *Truce Tent*, p. 392.

On 23 March, a Chinese Communist regiment attempted to capture three outposts manned by the U.S. 7th Division, at the far right of the I Corps line. Hills 225 (Pork Chop Hill) and 191 held. The enemy’s main effort was against Hill 266 (Old Baldy), defended by units of the division’s Colombian battalion. One attack carried the position,224 despite company strength reinforcements of the original defenders. Two strong UN counterattacks the next day to retake the outpost failed, and the Chinese retained the crest of Old Baldy. Although the CCF had gained their objective in Hill 266, the battles on the three hillocks had cost the enemy 750 casualties, according to 7th Division records.

On March 23, a Chinese Communist regiment tried to take control of three outposts held by the U.S. 7th Division, located at the far right of the I Corps line. Hills 225 (Pork Chop Hill) and 191 held firm. The enemy's main focus was on Hill 266 (Old Baldy), which was defended by units from the division's Colombian battalion. One attack successfully took the position,224 despite reinforcements sent to help the original defenders. Two strong UN counterattacks the following day to reclaim the outpost failed, and the Chinese kept control of the crest of Old Baldy. Even though the CCF achieved their goal on Hill 266, the battles for the three hills resulted in 750 casualties for the enemy, according to 7th Division records.

In one respect, the nature and extent of ground operations affected the type of air activity over North and South Korea during the winter of 1952–1953. Introduction of PRESSURE strategy, which had embodied the policy of the Far East Air Forces since mid-1952, brought more aircraft in close support of Eighth Army ground troops, a change that pleased the corps commanders. When the heavy outpost fighting throughout October diminished to only occasional skirmishes in November, there was temporarily a decreased need for large numbers of CAS sorties. As a result more planes became available for PRESSURE attacks. These strikes at first appeared to be reverting to the previous STRANGLE strategy since railroads were often the targets. But interdiction of the transportation system was only part of the PRESSURE aerial concept which also called for striking enemy production, repair, and storage facilities. The Allied strategy in conducting its air offensive remained the same: to make the bombing hurt the Communists so that they would end their deliberate delaying tactics in the truce sessions and join the UNC in effecting a Korean settlement.

In one way, the nature and scope of ground operations influenced the kind of air activity over North and South Korea during the winter of 1952–1953. The introduction of Stress strategy, which had been the policy of the Far East Air Forces since mid-1952, brought more aircraft in close support of Eighth Army ground troops, a change that pleased the corps commanders. When the heavy fighting at outposts throughout October decreased to only occasional skirmishes in November, there was a temporary reduction in the need for large numbers of CAS sorties. As a result, more planes became available for STRESS attacks. These strikes initially seemed to revert to the previous STRANGLE strategy since railroads were often targeted. However, disrupting the transportation system was just one part of the Stress aerial concept, which also aimed to hit enemy production, repair, and storage facilities. The Allied strategy for conducting its air offensive remained the same: to make the bombing inflict enough pain on the Communists so that they would stop their deliberate delaying tactics in the peace talks and join the UNC in securing a Korean settlement.

During the winter FEAF maintained a steady air pressure against the Communists. Major raids were made from time to time, but the number of strategic targets was gradually disappearing due to repeated UNC air attacks. Further, much of the enemy logistical net had gone so deeply underground during the prolonged stalemate that UN bombing and rocket attacks were having only a limited destructive effect. The U.S. B-29s, which had carried the fight to the enemy since the first week of the Korean conflict, found their last worthwhile objectives in stockpiles hidden in North Korean towns and villages. For the Fifth Air Force fighters there was little opportunity to increase their skill in air-to-air combat, since the Communist fliers continued to take evasive action and avoid “dogfights.”

During the winter, FEAF kept consistent air pressure against the Communists. Major raids occurred occasionally, but the number of strategic targets was slowly decreasing because of repeated UNC air strikes. Additionally, much of the enemy's logistics network had gone so deep underground during the prolonged stalemate that UN bombings and rocket attacks were only causing limited damage. The U.S. B-29s, which had been engaged in combat since the first week of the Korean conflict, found their last significant targets in stockpiles concealed in North Korean towns and villages. For the Fifth Air Force fighters, there was little chance to improve their skills in air-to-air combat, as the Communist pilots continued to take evasive action and avoid "dogfights."

Naval aviation contributed importantly to UNC air operations from September 1952 to March 1953. On the first day of this period,225 three carriers staged the largest all-Navy Korean air strike to date, which simultaneously attacked an oil refinery at Aoji and other targets in the northeastern corner of Korea. Less than two weeks later, two carriers launched another assault in the same part of the country. The significance of these September strikes stemmed from the almost complete lack of enemy response. Apparently the Communists in this area had felt secure and protected, their territory being next to the Chinese border. In fact, their location close to the sanctuary had ruled out bombings proposed earlier. Strikes in this part of Korea were particularly suited to carrier planes of the Seventh Fleet, whose mobile airfields brought the targets within easy striking range along approaches that would not violate the Manchurian haven.

Naval aviation played a key role in UNC air operations from September 1952 to March 1953. On the first day of this period,225 three aircraft carriers launched the largest all-Navy airstrike in Korea up to that point, attacking an oil refinery at Aoji and other targets in the northeastern part of Korea simultaneously. Less than two weeks later, two carriers conducted another assault in the same region. The importance of these September strikes came from the nearly complete lack of enemy response. The Communists in this area seemed to feel safe and protected, as their territory was adjacent to the Chinese border. In fact, their proximity to this sanctuary had previously ruled out proposed bombings. Strikes in this section of Korea were particularly well-suited for the carrier planes of the Seventh Fleet, whose mobile airfields positioned the targets within easy striking distance along routes that wouldn't breach the Manchurian refuge.

Perhaps the greatest naval contribution to the air war were the Cherokee strikes, so named after the commander of the Seventh Fleet, Vice Admiral Joseph J. Clark, because of his Indian ancestry. This new type of deep air support attack, which came into use in October 1952, employed the maxim of mass delivery of ordnance. Usually, targets were immediately behind the enemy MLR but beyond the range of friendly artillery. In May 1952, when the rail interdiction program was being phased out and Admiral Clark’s pilots were faced with a decreasing number of prime industrial targets, the fleet commander had theorized that he could most effectually damage the enemy by bombing supply dumps, artillery positions, and reserve forces immediately to the rear of the Chinese MLR. As the admiral reasoned, the enemy could not fight the kind of war he was waging “and still have all his forces, supplies, and equipment underground. Some of his stocks of supplies had to be above ground, out of sight and out of range of our artillery.”305

Perhaps the greatest naval contribution to the air war was the Cherokee strikes, named after the commander of the Seventh Fleet, Vice Admiral Joseph J. Clark, due to his Native American heritage. This new type of deep air support attack started in October 1952 and focused on mass delivery of ordnance. Targets were usually just behind the enemy's main line of resistance but out of range of our artillery. In May 1952, as the rail interdiction program was winding down and Admiral Clark’s pilots faced fewer key industrial targets, the fleet commander theorized that the best way to damage the enemy was by bombing supply dumps, artillery positions, and reserve forces right behind the Chinese front line. As the admiral reasoned, the enemy couldn’t continue the fight he was waging “and still have all his forces, supplies, and equipment underground. Some of his supplies had to be above ground, out of sight and out of range of our artillery.”305

305 Quoted in Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea, p. 461.

305 Quoted in Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea, p. 461.

Eighth Army welcomed the increased support that would result from the strikes, but FEAF expressed concern about the lack of top-level coordination. Admiral Clark had proposed that a EUSAK corps commander be allowed to authorize the attacks, which employed 24 to 36 aircraft. The Fifth Air Force initially maintained that it should control Cherokee strikes, just as it did the CAS missions. The matter was finally resolved in November.

Eighth Army welcomed the extra support that would come from the strikes, but FEAF was worried about the lack of high-level coordination. Admiral Clark suggested that a EUSAK corps commander should be allowed to approve the attacks, which used 24 to 36 aircraft. The Fifth Air Force initially argued that it should manage Cherokee strikes, just like it did the CAS missions. The issue was finally settled in November.

Following a high-level conference it was decided that attacks226 inside the bombline would be subjected to FAF coordination and that a minimal amount of tactical control would be exercised by the corps commander. Eighth Army gave a big assist to the Navy by moving the bombline to within 3,000 meters (nearly two miles) of the outpost line. A line was also drawn approximately 25 miles beyond the bombline, separating the area of “general support” from “interdiction.” Thereafter, the Cherokee strikes were effectively conducted against enemy installations outside the 3,000-meter line but within 20,000 meters of the ground front. General Clark, CinCUNC, had high praise for the strikes, which the Seventh Fleet employed until the end of the war.

Following a high-level conference, it was decided that attacks226 inside the bombline would require FAF coordination and that a minimal amount of tactical control would be managed by the corps commander. The Eighth Army significantly helped the Navy by adjusting the bombline to within 3,000 meters (almost two miles) of the outpost line. A line was also established about 25 miles beyond the bombline, dividing the area of “general support” from “interdiction.” From that point on, the Cherokee strikes were effectively carried out against enemy installations outside the 3,000-meter line but within 20,000 meters of the ground front. General Clark, CinCUNC, praised the strikes, which the Seventh Fleet continued to use until the end of the war.

Surface ships of the fleet were in much the same static warfare situation as the ground and air components of the United Nations Command. Aside from the Kojo demonstration in mid-October, the fleet had little diversification in its daily routine other than to maintain the siege around Wonsan. This operation had started in mid-February 1951 and had grown from the original plan to seize certain strategically-placed islands on both coasts into an attempt to isolate the entire port and city of Wonsan. Each day Allied minesweepers cleared the harbor; at night the enemy sampan fleet resowed the fields. Daily, usually during mine-clearing operations, ships of Task Force 95 fired on batteries in the mountains beyond the city and at other military targets in and around Wonsan. From time to time heavy units of the Seventh Fleet bombarded the area to keep the enemy off-balance and to partially deter the solid buildup of Communist arms and defenses just north of the 39th Parallel.

Surface ships of the fleet were in much the same stagnant warfare situation as the ground and air units of the United Nations Command. Other than the Kojo demonstration in mid-October, the fleet had little variety in its daily routine aside from maintaining the blockade around Wonsan. This operation began in mid-February 1951 and expanded from the initial plan to capture certain strategically located islands on both coasts into an effort to completely isolate the port and city of Wonsan. Each day, Allied minesweepers cleared the harbor; at night, the enemy's sampan fleet would replant the mines. Daily, usually during mine-clearing operations, ships from Task Force 95 fired on artillery positions in the mountains beyond the city and at other military targets in and around Wonsan. Occasionally, heavy units of the Seventh Fleet bombarded the area to keep the enemy off balance and to partially deter the significant buildup of Communist arms and defenses just north of the 39th Parallel.

Events on the Diplomatic Front306

306 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Dec 52; Berger, Korea Knot; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Hermes, Truce Tent; Robert Leckie, Conflict—The History of the Korean War, 1950–1953 (New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1962), hereafter Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

306 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Dec 52; Berger, Korea Knot; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Hermes, Truce Tent; Robert Leckie, Conflict—The History of the Korean War, 1950–1953 (New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1962), hereafter Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

For many of the UNC military personnel, the stalemated combat situation in Korea had become a depressing, no-win daily routine by the end of 1952. Back in the States, the Korean War was not only unpopular and ill-supported, but the slow progress of the conflict had also dulled public interest. In the course of the Presidential227 election campaign the question of Korea had become increasingly a matter of widespread national concern. Two weeks before election day the Republican candidate, former General of the Army Dwight D. Eisenhower,307 had vowed to bring the Korean fighting to an end. As a first step toward accomplishing this he had pledged, if elected, to visit the battlefront.

For many of the UNC military personnel, the stalemated combat situation in Korea had turned into a depressing, no-win daily routine by the end of 1952. Back in the States, the Korean War was not only unpopular and poorly supported, but the slow progress of the conflict had also dulled public interest. During the Presidential227 election campaign, the issue of Korea had become a matter of growing national concern. Two weeks before election day, the Republican candidate, former General of the Army Dwight D. Eisenhower,307 had promised to end the fighting in Korea. As a first step toward achieving this, he had pledged, if elected, to visit the battlefront.

307 Eisenhower had resigned his commission, following his return to the States in April to seek election.

307 Eisenhower had stepped down from his commission after coming back to the States in April to run for election.

Some had labeled Eisenhower’s statement, “I will go to Korea” as a mere pre-election gesture. The general intended to act on this pledge and, following his election, began a four-day visit to Korea on 2 December 1952. Part of the President-elect’s brief tour in Korea was spent at General Pollock’s command post. Here, on 3 December, the Marine ground chief briefed his future Commander in Chief on current Marine division operations. Generals Clark, Van Fleet, and Kendall accompanied Eisenhower and his party. This included General of the Army Omar Bradley, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, as well as Charles E. Wilson and Herbert Brownell, Jr., the new designates for Secretary of Defense and Attorney General, respectively.

Some people had called Eisenhower’s statement, “I will go to Korea” a simple pre-election stunt. The general meant to follow through on this promise and, after winning the election, started a four-day visit to Korea on December 2, 1952. Part of the President-elect's short tour in Korea was spent at General Pollock’s command post. Here, on December 3, the Marine ground chief updated his future Commander in Chief on what was happening with the Marine division operations. Generals Clark, Van Fleet, and Kendall joined Eisenhower and his group. This group included General of the Army Omar Bradley, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, along with Charles E. Wilson and Herbert Brownell, Jr., the newly appointed Secretary of Defense and Attorney General, respectively.

Though General Eisenhower’s promise to visit Korea personally to see the situation first-hand and his subsequent election had renewed American hopes for an early peace in Korea, negotiations there had been deadlocked since 1951 on the exchange of prisoners. Disagreement on this issue thus became the major obstacle which was not overcome until the truce was signed nearly 20 months later. The Communists insisted on repatriation to their native land of all NKPA and CCF prisoners held by the United Nations Command. More than 60,000 of the 132,000 enemy captives held by the UNC in South Korean POW camps did not wish to return to Communism, a fact which had been borne out by a UN survey.

Although General Eisenhower promised to visit Korea personally to understand the situation better, and his election had renewed American hopes for a quick peace in Korea, negotiations had been stuck since 1951 over the exchange of prisoners. Disagreement on this issue became the main obstacle, which wasn't resolved until the truce was signed nearly 20 months later. The Communists insisted on repatriating all NKPA and CCF prisoners held by the United Nations Command to their home country. More than 60,000 of the 132,000 enemy captives held by the UNC in South Korean POW camps did not want to return to Communism, a fact confirmed by a UN survey.

To draw attention from this unpopular position the Communists, through the civil and military links existing in the POW camps, had staged a series of riots in the spring of 1952. The worst, at Koje Island (just off the coast of Pusan) lasted six days, largely because the Communist prisoners planned for, and successfully carried out, the capture of the UN camp commander. His release, on 12 May, was effected only after the new commander signed, under duress, a228 statement which the Communists immediately exploited in an effort to discredit the validity of the prisoner survey.

To draw attention away from this unpopular situation, the Communists, using the existing civil and military connections in the POW camps, arranged a series of riots in the spring of 1952. The worst one, at Koje Island (just off the coast of Pusan), lasted six days, mainly because the Communist prisoners planned for and successfully executed the capture of the UN camp commander. His release on May 12 only happened after the new commander signed, under pressure, a228 statement that the Communists immediately used to undermine the credibility of the prisoner survey.

The propaganda gains had enabled the Communists to occupy a commanding position at the truce talks. In the meantime, the UN had offered several plans until, on 28 April, Admiral Joy presented “what we called our final package proposal.”308 By instituting the tactic of calling a recess whenever the Communists had nothing constructive to offer, a recommendation of Admiral Joy’s, the UN regained the advantage of the conference table. The talks continued but with no appreciable progress. On 8 October 1952, after continued Communist intransigence, Brigadier General William K. Harrison, who had become the senior UN delegate in late May, took the initiative in recessing the truce talks. This unexpected action, which caught the enemy off-guard, followed three separate proposals made by Harrison for ending the POW controversy. All had been promptly rejected by the Communist delegation. As General Harrison had informed one of its spokesmen, the North Korean General Nam Il:

The propaganda successes had allowed the Communists to hold a strong position during the truce talks. Meanwhile, the UN had put forward several plans until, on April 28, Admiral Joy presented “what we called our final package proposal.”308 By using the tactic of calling a recess whenever the Communists had nothing useful to contribute, a suggestion from Admiral Joy, the UN regained the upper hand at the conference table. The discussions continued, but with no significant progress. On October 8, 1952, after ongoing Communist stubbornness, Brigadier General William K. Harrison, who had become the senior UN delegate in late May, took the lead in recessing the truce talks. This unexpected move caught the enemy by surprise and came after Harrison had made three separate proposals to resolve the POW issue, all of which were quickly rejected by the Communist delegation. As General Harrison had informed one of its spokesmen, North Korean General Nam Il:

308 Joy, Truce Negotiations, p. 156. The proposal was a “complete armistice agreement,” not merely another offer to solve the prisoner question.

308 Joy, Truce Negotiations, p. 156. The proposal was a “full ceasefire agreement,” not just another attempt to address the prisoner situation.

We are not terminating the armistice negotiations, we are merely recessing them. We are willing to meet with you at any time that you are ready to accept one of our proposals or to make a constructive proposal of your own, in writing, which could lead to an honorable armistice ... Since you have offered nothing constructive, we stand in recess.309

We’re not ending the armistice negotiations, we’re just taking a break. We’re open to meeting with you whenever you’re ready to accept one of our proposals or to present a constructive proposal of your own, in writing, that could lead to a fair armistice... Since you haven’t offered anything constructive, we’ll stay in recess.309

309 Quoted in Berger, Korea Knot, p. 153.

309 Quoted in Berger, Korea Knot, p. 153.

After October, while the truce negotiations were in a period of indefinite recess, liaison officers at Panmunjom kept the channels of communication open between the Communist and UNC sides. Several developments along other diplomatic lines about this time were to prove more fruitful and lead the way to solution of the POW dispute and, in fact, to the end of the war.

After October, while the truce negotiations were on hold indefinitely, liaison officers at Panmunjom maintained open communication between the Communist and UNC sides. Several developments in other diplomatic efforts around this time turned out to be more successful and paved the way for resolving the POW dispute and, ultimately, for ending the war.

In mid-November, an attempt was made to end the prisoner exchange impasse through a resolution introduced by India at the United Nations session. The compromise measure recognized the United States position, namely, that force should not be used in returning prisoners to their homeland. This principle was to become known as the concept of voluntary repatriation.

In mid-November, India introduced a resolution at the United Nations session to try to resolve the deadlock over the prisoner exchange. The compromise acknowledged the United States' stance that force shouldn’t be used to return prisoners to their home countries. This principle would come to be known as the concept of voluntary repatriation.

To reconcile the widely conflicting Communist and UNC views on handling of prisoners, the Indian proposal suggested that a229 repatriation commission be established. This body was to be composed of representatives of two Communist and two Allied nations. It would function within a designated demilitarized zone in Korea through which all prisoners would be received and processed. Each prisoner was to be given a choice of being returned to his homeland or not. Both sides would have the opportunity of explaining to reluctant nationals “their rights” of repatriation. If these persuasive efforts failed and a man still chose not to return to his country, he would then be referred to a special political conference established by the armistice agreement.

To resolve the stark differences between the Communist and UNC viewpoints on how to manage prisoners, the Indian proposal recommended setting up a repatriation commission. This commission would consist of representatives from two Communist countries and two Allied nations. It would operate within a specific demilitarized zone in Korea, where all prisoners would be received and processed. Each prisoner would have the option to choose whether to return to their homeland or not. Both sides would have the chance to explain to hesitant individuals “their rights” regarding repatriation. If these attempts to persuade someone failed and they still opted not to return to their country, they would be sent to a special political conference established by the armistice agreement.

Should this four-member repatriation commission still not agree on settlement of the nonrepatriates, a final determination was then to be made by an official named by the commission or UN General Assembly. Many UNC nations favored the Indian proposal. U.S. official reaction was frankly skeptical and critical, well aware that the many vague aspects of the proposal could easily be exploited by the Communists to the disadvantage of the individual POW. Despite the promise of a good many headaches in its implementation, the UN adopted the compromise Indian resolution in December 1952 by a vote of 54 to 5.

If this four-member repatriation commission still couldn't agree on how to handle the non-repatriates, a final decision was to be made by an official chosen by the commission or the UN General Assembly. Many UNC nations supported the Indian proposal. The U.S. officials were openly skeptical and critical, fully aware that the many unclear aspects of the proposal could easily be manipulated by the Communists to the disadvantage of individual POWs. Despite the likely complications in putting it into practice, the UN adopted the compromise Indian resolution in December 1952 with a vote of 54 to 5.

Later that same month the Executive Committee of the League of Red Cross Societies, meeting in Geneva, adopted another feature of the Indian resolution proposing an exchange of sick and wounded POWs in advance of a truce. As General Clark observed, “It was hardly an auspicious omen for an armistice, yet it was the action which set in motion a chain of events which finally resulted in cease-fire.”310

Later that month, the Executive Committee of the League of Red Cross Societies met in Geneva and approved another part of the Indian resolution suggesting an exchange of sick and wounded POWs before a truce. As General Clark pointed out, “It wasn’t exactly a good sign for an armistice, but it kicked off a series of events that eventually led to a cease-fire.”310

310 Clark, Danube to Yalu, p. 240.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Clark, Danube to Yalu, p. 240.

On another front, State Department officials advised the Joint Chiefs of Staff that a resolution similar to that of the Red Cross would probably be introduced when the UN reconvened on 24 February. Following a JCS suggestion that a “feeler” proposition be first made to the Communists, General Clark wrote the NKPA and CCF leaders on 22 February. His letter was addressed to North Korean Premier Kim Il Sung and General Peng Teh-huai, the CCF military commander. Delivered through the Panmunjom liaison officers, it requested the immediate exchange of sick and wounded POWs. As both diplomatic and military leaders doubtfully awaited the results,230 a totally unexpected and far-reaching event, the death of the Russian leader, Premier Joseph Stalin, jolted the Communist world. Its repercussions soon extended to the truce tent at Panmunjom and decisively affected the progress of negotiations there.

On another front, State Department officials informed the Joint Chiefs of Staff that a resolution similar to that of the Red Cross would likely be introduced when the UN reconvened on February 24. After a suggestion from the JCS to first make a “feeler” proposition to the Communists, General Clark wrote to the NKPA and CCF leaders on February 22. His letter was addressed to North Korean Premier Kim Il Sung and General Peng Teh-huai, the CCF military commander. Delivered through the Panmunjom liaison officers, it requested the immediate exchange of sick and wounded POWs. As both diplomatic and military leaders anxiously awaited the results, 230 an entirely unexpected and significant event, the death of the Russian leader, Premier Joseph Stalin, shocked the Communist world. Its repercussions quickly reached the truce tent at Panmunjom and significantly impacted the progress of negotiations there.

The Marine Commands During the Third Winter311

311 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Nov 52-Jan 53; 1stMar ComdDs, Nov 52-Feb 53; 5thMar ComdD, Dec 52; 7thMar ComdDs, Nov 52, Jan 53; 11th Mar ComdDs, Jan-Feb 53; 2/1 ComdD, Nov 52; 1st MAW ComdD, Jan 53; MAG-12 ComdD, Jan 53; MAG-33 ComdD, Oct 52; MACG-2 ComdD, Feb 53.

311 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Nov 52-Jan 53; 1stMar ComdDs, Nov 52-Feb 53; 5thMar ComdD, Dec 52; 7thMar ComdDs, Nov 52, Jan 53; 11th Mar ComdDs, Jan-Feb 53; 2/1 ComdD, Nov 52; 1st MAW ComdD, Jan 53; MAG-12 ComdD, Jan 53; MAG-33 ComdD, Oct 52; MACG-2 ComdD, Feb 53.

Although renewed negotiations to bring the war to a close were under way with the enemy in late 1952 and early 1953, action on the battlefield continued the tedious routine of the war. An exception to the general lethargy across the front occurred on 22 November in the right regimental sector. A predawn raid was conducted by the 1st Marines, which had advanced to the front upon relief of the 7th Marines after their battle of the Hook. With the left and right battalion sectors manned by 1/1 and 3/1, respectively, Lieutenant Colonel Charles E. Warren’s 2/1, in regimental reserve, had been ordered to provide a company to raid Chinese positions across from COPs Reno and Vegas. Drawing the assignment was Company D (Captain Jay V. Poage).

Although new negotiations to end the war were happening with the enemy in late 1952 and early 1953, the action on the battlefield continued the slow routine of the conflict. An exception to the overall sluggishness across the front occurred on November 22 in the right regimental sector. A predawn raid was carried out by the 1st Marines, who had moved to the front after the 7th Marines were relieved following their battle at the Hook. With the left and right battalion sectors held by 1/1 and 3/1, respectively, Lieutenant Colonel Charles E. Warren’s 2/1, in regimental reserve, was ordered to provide a company to raid Chinese positions opposite COPs Reno and Vegas. Assigned to this task was Company D (Captain Jay V. Poage).

Code-named WAKEUP, the raid was conducted in a manner typical of many earlier forays against Chinese strongpoints. Its results, too, in most respects were similar to the outcome of previous raids. Artillery preparation of the objective area was accomplished, the infantry assaults were somewhat short of the targets due to heavy CCF defensive fires, and the prisoner-taking part of the mission was unfulfilled. Counterbalancing this, and what made the raid of value to the regiment, was the information gained about enemy defenses and Chinese reaction to the raid. It was one of the rare occasions during which the CCF did not employ artillery fire while their positions were under attack, using instead mortars and automatic weapons against Marine assault forces.

Code-named Wake up, the raid was carried out in a way that was typical of many earlier attacks on Chinese strongholds. Its results were, for the most part, similar to previous raids. The artillery preparation of the target area was completed, the infantry assaults fell a bit short of their objectives due to heavy CCF defensive fire, and the mission's goal of capturing prisoners was not achieved. On the plus side, what made the raid valuable to the regiment was the information gathered about enemy defenses and the Chinese response to the raid. It was one of the rare times that the CCF did not use artillery while their positions were under attack, opting instead for mortars and automatic weapons against Marine forces.

Raids such as WAKEUP, patrols, and ambushes became the pattern of action in late November and in December. Earlier in November some changes in the MLR dispositions had taken place. On 3 November,231 at 2345, the 1st Battalion of the Black Watch, 29th Infantry Brigade, 1st Commonwealth Division, had relieved 1/7 of the Hook sector responsibility, ending Marine occupation of that part of JAMESTOWN.312 And, on 16 November, the 7th Marines itself had been replaced in line by the 1st Marines. In between these changes of command on the frontlines, Generals Pollock and Jerome had received many congratulations and well wishes from combat commands and from government officials in the States. The occasion was the 177th birthday of the Marine Corps. Both of these senior commanders passed on to their Marines not only the Commandant’s Anniversary message but also the congratulations of the UNC commander, General Clark.

Raids like Wake up, patrols, and ambushes became the norm in late November and December. Earlier in November, some changes in the MLR positions had occurred. On November 3,231 at 11:45 PM, the 1st Battalion of the Black Watch, 29th Infantry Brigade, 1st Commonwealth Division, took over responsibility for the Hook sector, ending the Marine occupation of that part of JAMestown.312 And, on November 16, the 7th Marines were replaced in the line by the 1st Marines. Between these command changes at the front, Generals Pollock and Jerome received many congratulations and well wishes from combat units and from government officials back in the States. This was in celebration of the Marine Corps' 177th birthday. Both of these senior commanders shared not only the Commandant’s Anniversary message but also General Clark's congratulations with their Marines.

312 At this time a new limiting point between the division and British division was also established. This slightly reduced Marine division frontage to 33 miles and allowed the two MLR regiments to shorten their lines and maintain somewhat larger reserve units. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8, p. 8-23.

312 At this time, a new boundary was set between the division and the British division. This slightly reduced the Marine division's front to 33 miles and allowed the two MLR regiments to shorten their lines and keep somewhat larger reserve units. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8, p. 8-23.

Though the Commonwealth division had taken over the Hook area from the infantry Marines, the division’s participation in defense of the British sector had not completely ended. On 18–19 November, the 11th Marines expended more than 2,000 rounds to repel Chinese attacks on the Hook. This firing by the artillery regiment helped to repay the British for their “cooperation and outstanding artillery and tank support during the engagements of 26–28 October....”313 And as the Commonwealth division commander, Major General M. M. Austin-Roberts-West, had himself reported to General Pollock the day following the Hook attack, “All hands on the Hook much appreciated the prompt and effective support given last night. Grateful if you would pass on their thanks to all concerned.”314

Though the Commonwealth division had taken over the Hook area from the infantry Marines, it didn’t completely end its role in defending the British sector. On November 18–19, the 11th Marines fired over 2,000 rounds to fend off Chinese attacks on the Hook. This artillery support was a way to repay the British for their “cooperation and outstanding artillery and tank support during the engagements of October 26–28....”313 The Commonwealth division commander, Major General M. M. Austin-Roberts-West, reported to General Pollock the day after the Hook attack, “Everyone on the Hook really appreciated the prompt and effective support given last night. I’d be grateful if you could pass on their thanks to everyone involved.”314

313 CG, 1stMarDiv msg to GOC, 1stComWelDiv, dtd 29 Oct 52, in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52, App. II, p. 6.

313 CG, 1stMarDiv message to GOC, 1stComWelDiv, dated 29 Oct 52, in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Oct 52, Appendix II, p. 6.

314 GOC, 1stComWelDiv msg to CG, 1stMarDiv, dtd 19 Nov 52, in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Nov 52, App. I, p. 3.

314 GOC, 1stComWelDiv message to CG, 1stMarDiv, dated 19 Nov 52, in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Nov 52, App. I, p. 3.

Throughout December 1952 and January 1953, the lull in ground fighting continued. Mass Cherokee strikes by Admiral Clark’s Navy and Marine fliers had begun for the Marine division on 17 December, when the bombline was moved in nearer to the MLR for expanded operations. In noncombat activities, later that month Francis Cardinal Spellman, Archbishop of New York and Vicar for Catholic Chaplains of the Armed Forces, conducted a Christmas Mass at the division CP. On the 31st, His Eminence visited the 1st MAW at K-3 (Pohang). There he delivered an address to about 1,000232 Marines, shook hands with nearly all of them, and later heard confessions for many. Another special guest, not long afterward, was Episcopal Bishop Austin Pardue, of the Pittsburgh Diocese, who held Holy Communion at the division chapel.

Throughout December 1952 and January 1953, the pause in ground fighting continued. Large-scale Cherokee airstrikes by Admiral Clark’s Navy and Marine pilots had started for the Marine division on December 17, when the front lines were moved closer to the MLR for expanded operations. In noncombat activities, later that month, Francis Cardinal Spellman, Archbishop of New York and Vicar for Catholic Chaplains of the Armed Forces, conducted a Christmas Mass at the division command post. On the 31st, His Eminence visited the 1st MAW at K-3 (Pohang). There, he delivered a speech to about 1,000232 Marines, shook hands with nearly all of them, and later heard confessions for many. Another special guest, not long after, was Episcopal Bishop Austin Pardue of the Pittsburgh Diocese, who held Holy Communion at the division chapel.

The passing of 1952 and the arrival of the new year was not marked by any special observance on the battlefield. For that matter there was, it seemed, no change to note; the Marines, like the rest of the Eighth Army troops, maintained much the same regular, reduced, wintertime schedule. Activity of Marine infantry units consisted of aggressive patrolling and raids, and improvement of the secondary defenses of Lines WYOMING and KANSAS. Units in division reserve, during January, also participated in MARLEX (Marine Landing Exercise) operations.

The end of 1952 and the start of the new year didn’t bring any special celebrations on the battlefield. In fact, there was no noticeable change; the Marines, just like the rest of the Eighth Army troops, stuck to a pretty much the same routine during the winter. The Marine infantry units focused on aggressive patrolling and raids, as well as enhancing the secondary defenses of Lines WYOMING and Kans.. The units in division reserve also took part in MARLEX (Marine Landing Exercise) operations throughout January.

No major ground action had taken place in December, although Marine patrols, on a half dozen occasions, had engaged as many as 50 enemy for brief clashes and fire fights. January was a different story, however. On 8 January, a 7th Marines raiding party, reinforced by air, artillery, and tank support, skirmished with 85 Chinese in the Hill 134 area not far from COP 2, overlooking Panmunjom. Ten days later, the 1st and 7th Marines, together with the artillery regiment, took part in Operation BIMBO. This was another attempt, by combined infantry-artillery-tank-air action, to create the impression that CCF objective areas were under attack.

No major ground action happened in December, but Marine patrols had brief encounters with about 50 enemy troops on six occasions. January was different, though. On January 8, a raiding party from the 7th Marines, supported by air, artillery, and tanks, clashed with 85 Chinese soldiers in the Hill 134 area near COP 2, which overlooks Panmunjom. Ten days later, the 1st and 7th Marines, along with the artillery regiment, participated in Operation Bimbo. This was another effort, involving combined infantry, artillery, tank, and air action, to give the impression that CCF objective areas were under attack.

BIMBO began with heavy preparatory fires by the 11th Marines, including the 155mm projectiles hurled by 4/11, that inflicted early damage to CCF personnel and materiel. At 0630, on 18 January, frontline battalions of the two participating infantry regiments opened fire; reserve battalions assisted with indirect machine gun fire. Armored vehicles added to the effect of the ruse by shelling Chinese emplacements from prepared MLR positions. Marine attack planes streaked in to unload flaming napalm. In response to the BIMBO mock attack, the Chinese directed mortar fire into suspected Marine avenues of approach and assembly areas. Forward observers on JAMESTOWN could detect some enemy troop movement. (Marine artillery took these formations under intensive fire), but as in similar feint operations in the past, the enemy again failed to pick up the bait. The operation lasted approximately an hour and a half.

Bimbo started with intense preparatory fires from the 11th Marines, including the 155mm shells fired by 4/11, which caused early damage to CCF personnel and equipment. At 6:30 AM on January 18, the frontline battalions of the two infantry regiments began firing; reserve battalions supported with indirect machine gun fire. Armored vehicles added to the illusion by shelling Chinese positions from established MLR locations. Marine attack planes swooped in to drop flaming napalm. In reaction to the Bimbo mock attack, the Chinese fired mortars at suspected Marine routes of approach and assembly areas. Forward observers on JAMestown could see some enemy troop movements. (Marine artillery targeted these formations with heavy fire), but like previous feint operations, the enemy again did not take the bait. The operation lasted about an hour and a half.

During the winter months, a number of command changes had occurred in the Marines’ combat organizations in Korea. In the 1st233 Marine Aircraft Wing, the rotation of commanders began at the very top when, on 8 January, General Jerome handed over the wing colors to Major General Vernon E. Megee. During a ceremony at wing headquarters that day, Air Force Generals Weyland and Barcus paid tribute to General Jerome’s “exceptionally meritorious service” as 1st MAW CG since April 1952 by presenting him with the Distinguished Service Medal.

During the winter months, several command changes took place in the Marines’ combat units in Korea. In the 1st233 Marine Aircraft Wing, the rotation of commanders started at the very top when, on January 8, General Jerome transferred the wing colors to Major General Vernon E. Megee. During a ceremony at wing headquarters that day, Air Force Generals Weyland and Barcus honored General Jerome’s “exceptionally meritorious service” as the 1st MAW CG since April 1952 by presenting him with the Distinguished Service Medal.

The incoming wing commander, General Megee, had been a Marine flyer for 20 years, having received his wings in 1932. His Marine Corps career began more than a decade earlier, with enlistment in 1919. Commissioned in 1922, he served in infantry, artillery, and expeditionary billets before undergoing pilot training in 1931. Following school, staff, and command assignments, Major Megee was named advisor to the Peruvian Minister of Aviation from 1940–1943. During World War II, Colonel Megee was sent overseas as 3d MAW Chief of Staff in early 1944. As Commander, Control Unit One, he participated in the Iwo Jima campaign, earning the Legion of Merit. Later, at Okinawa, he commanded all Marine Corps Landing Force Air Support Control Units. After promotion to brigadier general in 1949, General Megee was named Chief of Staff, FMFLant. Receiving his second star in 1951, he served as Commanding General at Cherry Point, El Toro, and Air FMFPac prior to his assignment in Korea.315

The new wing commander, General Megee, had been a Marine pilot for 20 years, having earned his wings in 1932. His Marine Corps career started over a decade earlier when he enlisted in 1919. After being commissioned in 1922, he served in infantry, artillery, and expeditionary roles before completing pilot training in 1931. Following assignments in school, staff, and command, Major Megee was appointed as an advisor to the Peruvian Minister of Aviation from 1940 to 1943. During World War II, Colonel Megee was deployed overseas as the Chief of Staff for the 3d MAW in early 1944. As the Commander of Control Unit One, he took part in the Iwo Jima campaign, where he received the Legion of Merit. Later, at Okinawa, he led all Marine Corps Landing Force Air Support Control Units. After being promoted to brigadier general in 1949, General Megee became the Chief of Staff for FMFLant. He received his second star in 1951 and held the position of Commanding General at Cherry Point, El Toro, and Air FMFPac before his assignment in Korea.315

315 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of LtGen Vernon E. Megee, 1959.

315 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of LtGen Vernon E. Megee, 1959.

Within the wing and the division, every one of the top commands experienced changes of commanding officers in late 1952 and early 1953:

Within the wing and the division, each of the top commands went through changes in commanding officers in late 1952 and early 1953:

1st Marines—Colonel Hewitt D. Adams took over from Colonel Layer on 21 November;

1st Marines—Colonel Hewitt D. Adams took over from Colonel Layer on November 21;

5th Marines—Colonel Lewis W. Walt relieved Colonel Smoak on 10 December;

5th Marines—Colonel Lewis W. Walt replaced Colonel Smoak on December 10;

7th Marines—Colonel Loren E. Haffner took command from Colonel Moore on 5 November;

7th Marines—Colonel Loren E. Haffner took over from Colonel Moore on November 5;

11th Marines—Colonel James E. Mills vice Colonel Sea on 22 February;

11th Marines—Colonel James E. Mills replaced Colonel Sea on February 22;

MACG-2—Colonel Kenneth D. Kerby relieved Colonel Jack R. Cram on 16 February;

MACG-2—Colonel Kenneth D. Kerby took over from Colonel Jack R. Cram on February 16;

234

234

MAG-12—Colonel George S. Bowman, Jr. vice Colonel Condon on 13 January;

MAG-12—Colonel George S. Bowman, Jr. took over from Colonel Condon on January 13;

MAG-33—Colonel Louis B. Robertshaw succeeded Colonel Herbert Williamson on 22 October.

MAG-33—Colonel Louis B. Robertshaw took over from Colonel Herbert Williamson on October 22.

1st MAW Operations 1952–1953316

316 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt Eval Rpts No. 5, Chap. 9 and No. 6, Chap. 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Nov 52; 1st MAW ComdDs, Oct 52, Jan-Feb 53; MAG-12 ComdDs, Nov 52, Jan 53, Mar 53; MAG-33 ComdDs, Nov 52, Jan-Mar 53; VMA-121 ComdDs, Nov-Dec 52, VMF-115 ComdDs, Nov-Dec 52; VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Oct 52-Jan 53; HMR-161 ComdDs, Jul 52, Nov-Dec 52, Jan 53; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Montross, SkyCav.

316 Unless stated otherwise, the content in this section comes from: PacFlt Eval Rpts No. 5, Chap. 9 and No. 6, Chap. 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Nov 52; 1st MAW ComdDs, Oct 52, Jan-Feb 53; MAG-12 ComdDs, Nov 52, Jan 53, Mar 53; MAG-33 ComdDs, Nov 52, Jan-Mar 53; VMA-121 ComdDs, Nov-Dec 52, VMF-115 ComdDs, Nov-Dec 52; VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Oct 52-Jan 53; HMR-161 ComdDs, Jul 52, Nov-Dec 52, Jan 53; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Montross, SkyCav.

The heavy ground fighting across the Eighth Army front in October 1952 had drawn heavily upon units of the 1st MAW. That month Marine pilots logged their greatest number of sorties—3,897—since June 1951.317 As a result of the intense infantry action in the 1st Marine Division sector another air record was established—365 casualty evacuations by HMR-161 during October. This was a peak number to that time for the helicopter transport squadron for which med evac was a secondary mission. These “mercy missions” were not limited only to wounded Marine infantrymen or downed aviators.

The intense ground fighting along the Eighth Army front in October 1952 heavily involved the units of the 1st MAW. That month, Marine pilots completed their highest number of sorties—3,897—since June 1951.317 Due to the fierce infantry action in the 1st Marine Division area, another air record was set—365 casualty evacuations by HMR-161 in October. This was the highest number recorded at that time for the helicopter transport squadron, where medical evacuation was a secondary mission. These “mercy missions” weren't just for wounded Marine infantrymen or downed pilots.

317 A total of 1,362 CAS sorties were flown, with 443 for the 1st Marine Division. Interdiction missions numbered 1,842, plus additional miscellaneous and air reconnaissance flights. 1st MAW ComdD, Oct. 52.

317 A total of 1,362 Close Air Support sorties were flown, with 443 for the 1st Marine Division. Interdiction missions totaled 1,842, along with additional miscellaneous and air reconnaissance flights. 1st MAW ComdD, Oct. 52.

Whenever and wherever immediate air rescue was needed, the choppers were sent. In July 1952, HMR-161 evacuated “650 Army and Air Force troops as well as 150 Koreans”318 from a flooded river island. On the night of 18 January 1953, a helicopter retrieved five Marines from an uncharted minefield after one of the group had accidentally stepped on a mine. On 13 March, HMR-161 sent three helicopters aloft in an attempt to save five men from the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion who had become trapped in mud near the edge of the Imjin, and later that month the squadron dispatched a chopper to rescue a hunter marooned in the middle of the Han River.

Whenever and wherever immediate air rescue was needed, the choppers were dispatched. In July 1952, HMR-161 evacuated “650 Army and Air Force troops as well as 150 Koreans”318 from a flooded island in the river. On the night of January 18, 1953, a helicopter picked up five Marines from an uncharted minefield after one of the group accidentally stepped on a mine. On March 13, HMR-161 sent three helicopters into the air in an effort to save five men from the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion who had become stuck in mud near the edge of the Imjin River, and later that month, the squadron sent a chopper to rescue a hunter stranded in the middle of the Han River.

318 Montross, SkyCav, p. 189.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Montross, SkyCav, p. 189.

Almost obscured in the magnificent record of the mercy missions, especially the hazardous casualty evacuations by the VMO-6 pilots, were the problems encountered by the observation and helicopter235 squadrons. Under operational control of the division and administrative control of the wing, the squadrons found themselves exposed to overlapping command authority which sometimes resulted in conflicting directives from higher headquarters. Some squadron personnel felt that establishment of a helicopter group under the 1st MAW might have solved many of the organizational problems, but such a unit was never established in Korea, partly because only one helicopter squadron (plus half of the observation squadron) existed.

Almost hidden in the impressive record of the mercy missions, especially the risky evacuation operations by the VMO-6 pilots, were the issues faced by the observation and helicopter 235 squadrons. Under the operational control of the division and administrative control of the wing, the squadrons found themselves subject to overlapping command authority, which sometimes led to conflicting orders from higher headquarters. Some squadron members believed that creating a helicopter group under the 1st MAW could have resolved many of the organizational challenges, but such a unit was never formed in Korea, partly because there was only one helicopter squadron (along with half of the observation squadron).

Another organizational difficulty beset VMO-6. With two types of aircraft and two unrelated missions (med evac for the HTL and HO5S copters; observation and artillery spotting for its little OYs and, later, OE-1s), the squadron found supply and maintenance problems doubled and operational control of its rotary and fixed wing sections extremely complex. Attachment of the VMO-6 choppers (for evacuation, administrative, and liaison missions) to HMR-161 was suggested as a possible solution to these difficulties, but was never done.

Another organizational challenge hit VMO-6. With two types of aircraft and two separate missions (med evac for the HTL and HO5S helicopters; observation and artillery spotting for its small OYs and, later, OE-1s), the squadron faced doubled supply and maintenance issues, and managing its rotary and fixed-wing sections became very complicated. It was suggested to attach the VMO-6 helicopters (for evacuation, administrative, and liaison tasks) to HMR-161 as a potential solution to these challenges, but this was never carried out.

Other problem areas became apparent during the winter of 1952–1953. Accompanying the freezing weather were difficulties in starting and, for a brief time, in flying the helicopters. In order to overcome the engine starting problem on emergency evacuation missions, HMR-161 preheated its number one standby aircraft every two hours during the extreme cold. Dilution of engine oil with gasoline and use of warming huts (the latter, a scarcity) were also employed to cut down cold weather starting time.

Other problem areas became clear during the winter of 1952–1953. Along with the freezing weather, there were issues with starting and, for a short period, flying the helicopters. To tackle the engine starting problem during emergency evacuation missions, HMR-161 preheated its number one standby aircraft every two hours in the extreme cold. They also diluted engine oil with gasoline and used warming huts (which were rare) to reduce cold weather starting time.

Not related to freezing Korean temperatures were two additional problems, one navigational and the other mechanical. In January, the helicopter squadron put into use a jeep-mounted homing device for operations in reduced visibility. It proved unsatisfactory due to interference from other radio transmitters in the area, a difficulty never resolved during the rest of the war. The mechanical problem lay with the rotary winged aircraft in HMR-161. On 27 March, all of its HRS-2 choppers with more than 200 hours on the main rotor blades were grounded. Discovery in the States that minute .002-inch cuts on the blade surface had occurred during fabrication resulted in the grounding. New blades were promptly flown to Korea from both Japan and the United States, and the squadron again became fully operational on 2 April.

Not related to freezing Korean temperatures were two additional issues, one navigational and the other mechanical. In January, the helicopter squadron started using a jeep-mounted homing device for operations in low visibility. It turned out to be ineffective due to interference from other radio transmitters in the area, a problem that was never solved for the rest of the war. The mechanical issue involved the rotary-wing aircraft in HMR-161. On March 27, all of its HRS-2 helicopters with over 200 hours on the main rotor blades were grounded. It was discovered in the States that tiny .002-inch cuts on the blade surface had occurred during production, which led to the grounding. New blades were quickly flown to Korea from both Japan and the United States, and the squadron was fully operational again on April 2.

236

236

Evaluation of transport helicopter techniques continued during the period despite ever-present minor difficulties. At least one new HMR-161 tactical maneuver was scheduled each month to evaluate existing procedures and determine full operational capabilities of the aircraft. During these landing exercises both the infantry and helicopter commanders and their staffs had the opportunity to further develop vertical envelopment techniques that would soon be the new trademark of U.S. Marine Corps operations.

Evaluation of transport helicopter techniques continued during this time despite ongoing minor challenges. At least one new HMR-161 tactical maneuver was planned each month to assess existing procedures and determine the full operational capabilities of the aircraft. During these landing exercises, both the infantry and helicopter commanders and their teams had the chance to further refine vertical envelopment techniques that would soon become the signature of U.S. Marine Corps operations.

Most of the time HMR-161 operations drew more attention than those of VMO-6, but pilots in the latter unit had a host of division Marines who could attest to the skills and critical role performed by helicopter fliers in the composite observation squadron. VMO-6 had pioneered the night casualty evacuation service, and during the active fighting in Korea, had flown out more than 1,000 Marines from frontline medical facilities to better-equipped ones in the rear areas. These flights were made in all kinds of weather and without the benefit of adequate instrumentation or a homing device. No other Eighth Army helicopter unit made regularly scheduled night frontline evacuations.319

Most of the time, HMR-161 operations attracted more attention than those of VMO-6, but the pilots in the latter unit had plenty of division Marines who could vouch for the skills and vital role played by helicopter pilots in the composite observation squadron. VMO-6 had been the first to establish the night casualty evacuation service, and during the active fighting in Korea, they had evacuated over 1,000 Marines from frontline medical facilities to better-equipped ones further back. These flights took place in all kinds of weather and without adequate instruments or a homing device. No other Eighth Army helicopter unit regularly conducted scheduled night evacuations from the frontline.319

319 A relatively small number of night med evac flights was also being flown by HMR-161. During March 1953, for example, in transferring 283 casualties to the hospital ships, squadron helicopters made only 15 flights at night.

319 A relatively small number of night medical evacuation flights was also being conducted by HMR-161. For instance, in March 1953, while transferring 283 casualties to the hospital ships, the squadron's helicopters made only 15 night flights.

The courage of these VMO-6 pilots was recalled nearly 15 years later by a former executive officer of the 1st Marines:

The bravery of these VMO-6 pilots was remembered almost 15 years later by a former executive officer of the 1st Marines:

The flying of the evacuation helicopters from the jury-rigged and inadequate landing sites was nothing short of miraculous. I’ve always contended those pilots of the observation squadron received far less credit than they deserved. They used to fly at night, to frontline landing strips, where I had difficulty walking without barking my shins.320

The evacuation helicopters taking off from the makeshift and insufficient landing sites was truly miraculous. I've always believed that the pilots of the observation squadron didn’t get the recognition they deserved. They often flew at night to frontline landing strips, where I had a hard time walking without hitting my shins. 320

320 Col Glenn R. Long ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 11 Jun 67.

320 Col Glenn R. Long letter to Head, History Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, dated June 11, 1967.

During the latter part of 1952 and the first months of 1953, 1st Marine Aircraft Wing command relationships underwent a significant change. On 26 January 1953, General Megee forwarded a memorandum request to General Barcus. The paper outlined specific recommendations for restoring 1st MAW tactical elements to wing operational control, even though the Marine wing would continue as a tactical component of Fifth Air Force. In the proposal, CG, 1st MAW pointed out (as had his predecessors) that the existing command structure, in effect, completely bypassed the Marine wing237 commander. It had prevented him from exercising normal tactical command functions, even though he was fully responsible for the performance of his air groups and squadrons to FEAF/FAF orders. The 1st MAW commander’s proposal was intended to counter previous Air Force objections and demonstrate that more normal command relations would “enhance, rather than reduce [1st MAW] operational efficiency and effectiveness.”321

During late 1952 and the early months of 1953, the command relationships within the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing experienced a major change. On January 26, 1953, General Megee sent a memorandum request to General Barcus. The document included specific recommendations for bringing 1st MAW tactical elements back under wing operational control, even though the Marine wing would still function as a tactical component of Fifth Air Force. In the proposal, the CG of 1st MAW emphasized (as had his predecessors) that the current command structure essentially ignored the Marine wing commander. This setup had prevented him from carrying out normal tactical command functions, despite being fully responsible for the performance of his air groups and squadrons according to FEAF/FAF orders. The 1st MAW commander’s proposal aimed to address previous Air Force objections and show that more standard command relations would “enhance, rather than reduce [1st MAW] operational efficiency and effectiveness.”237

321 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 10-76.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 10-76.

At the same time, having been informally advised in an earlier conversation that CG, FAF would approve at least some of the requests made, General Megee implemented changes in his G-2 and G-3 staff sections. This reorganization was aimed at carrying out the increased functions which would result from approval of the request. Operational control of Marine tactical squadrons by FAF since 1951 had “relegated 1st MAW to the status of an administrative headquarters, forcing its G-2 and G-3 sections partially to atrophy.”322 To effect the changes in command relationships and establish the wing on an operational basis, the G-2 and G-3 sections were expanded. By the nature of their organization these were not capable of either targeting or tactical planning. In the intelligence section, a Target Information Sub-section was established to compile data on the mission targets (and accompanying photographs) received from FAF and to evaluate the desired objectives.

At the same time, after getting some informal advice in a previous conversation that CG, FAF would approve at least some of the requests made, General Megee made changes in his G-2 and G-3 staff sections. This reorganization was designed to handle the increased functions that would come from the approval of the requests. Since 1951, operational control of Marine tactical squadrons by FAF had “relegated 1st MAW to the status of an administrative headquarters, forcing its G-2 and G-3 sections partially to atrophy.”322 To implement the changes in command relationships and establish the wing on an operational basis, the G-2 and G-3 sections were expanded. Because of their organization, they were not able to handle either targeting or tactical planning. In the intelligence section, a Target Information Sub-section was created to compile data on mission targets (and the accompanying photographs) received from FAF and to assess the desired objectives.

322 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Upon receipt of this information, the G-3 planning group accomplished the target solution, prepared general tactics for conducting the strike, (number of planes, amount and kind of ordnance, approach routes to be used) and provided post-strike target evaluation. The chiefs of these sections jointly presented the completed information to the wing commander each afternoon. He selected the targets and forwarded via teletype and air courier to the wing G-3 representative at FAF headquarters a report of intended operations, providing a lead time of 36–48 hours.

Upon receiving this information, the G-3 planning group developed the target solution, created general tactics for carrying out the strike (number of planes, types and amounts of ordnance, and the approach routes to use), and provided an evaluation of the targets after the strike. The heads of these sections presented the finalized information to the wing commander every afternoon. He chose the targets and sent a report of the planned operations via teletype and air courier to the wing G-3 representative at FAF headquarters, giving a lead time of 36–48 hours.

As soon as the OP INTENT (Operations Intentions Report) was on its way to General Barcus for approval, the 1st MAW intelligence section began to prepare the target dossiers (including photographs, flak analysis, and related identification information) on each of the approved targets. The compiled dossiers were then sent to the appropriate238 tactical squadron. At this point, still perhaps a half-day before issuance of the FAF orders, the squadrons received two major advantages over the previous system:

As soon as the OP INTENT (Operations Intentions Report) was sent to General Barcus for approval, the 1st MAW intelligence section started preparing the target files (including photos, flak analysis, and related identification info) on each of the approved targets. The completed files were then sent to the appropriate238 tactical squadron. At this stage, still maybe half a day before the FAF orders were issued, the squadrons gained two significant advantages over the previous system:

(1) Adequate photo intelligence employed for the first time since FAF had assumed operational control of 1st MAW; and

(1) Sufficient photo intelligence was used for the first time since FAF took operational control of 1st MAW; and

(2) A substantial lead time advantage for proper briefing of pilots and arming of aircraft.

(2) A significant advantage in lead time for properly briefing pilots and preparing aircraft.

After the strike, and usually within an hour, Marine planes photographed the targets for damage assessment. These photos were annotated and an assessment report prepared. This information was then presented by the G-2 and G-3 to the wing commander. Immediately thereafter, prints of the photographs were distributed to the appropriate tactical units, thus making post-strike photography more freely available on a regular basis to the participating tactical units.

After the strike, and typically within an hour, Marine planes took photos of the targets to assess the damage. These photos were labeled, and a report was created. This information was then presented by the G-2 and G-3 to the wing commander. Soon after, copies of the photographs were shared with the relevant tactical units, making post-strike photography more accessible on a regular basis to the participating tactical units.

In a letter dated 18 February, General Barcus approved most of the 1st MAW commander’s specific requests, but retained full control over General Megee’s squadrons used in close air support. This was due to the fact that EUSAK-FAF joint policy required CAS mission requests to be approved by JOC, in accordance with daily Eighth Army priorities, which allocated the aircraft for each request. Returned to operational control of the Marine wing were planes used on interdiction, armed reconnaissance and general support activities—the planes on strikes beyond the bombline, the photo, and all-weather (night) squadrons. FAF also retained control over assignment of missions to VMC-1, the electronics unit.

In a letter dated February 18, General Barcus approved most of the 1st MAW commander’s specific requests but kept full control over General Megee’s squadrons used for close air support. This was because the EUSAK-FAF joint policy required CAS mission requests to be approved by JOC, in line with daily Eighth Army priorities, which assigned the aircraft for each request.Planes used for interdiction, armed reconnaissance, and general support activities—those involved in strikes beyond the bombline, photo reconnaissance, and all-weather (night) squadrons—were returned to the operational control of the Marine wing. FAF also maintained control over the assignment of missions to VMC-1, the electronics unit.

Although some of the Marine wing tactical squadrons thus newly enjoyed the advantages of flying under their own commander’s wings, 1st MAW headquarters staff members had to pay for these benefits. An increased work load swamped the G-2 section, where 7 photo interpreters were kept busy 16 hours a day, 7 days a week. Marine personnel processed and reviewed an average of 100,000 prints per month and these were “only those from that portion of the VMJ-1 effort devoted to 1st MAW operations.”323 Expansion of 1st MAW headquarters to set up a tactical planning capability pointed to a deficiency in the wing organization T/O, a weakness that existed during the rest of the war.

Although some Marine wing tactical squadrons were now benefiting from flying under their own commander’s leadership, the 1st MAW headquarters staff had to deal with the consequences. The increased workload overwhelmed the G-2 section, where 7 photo interpreters were busy for 16 hours a day, 7 days a week. Marine personnel processed and reviewed an average of 100,000 prints each month, and these were “only those from the portion of the VMJ-1 effort focused on 1st MAW operations.”323 The expansion of the 1st MAW headquarters to establish a tactical planning capability highlighted a gap in the wing organization’s T/O, a shortcoming that persisted throughout the rest of the war.

239

239

323 Ibid., p. 10-80.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 10-80.

While General Barcus earlier had General Megee’s recommendations under study, a radio news broadcast back in the States momentarily resulted in poor publicity for the Marine Corps. On 1 February a nationally syndicated columnist reported instances in which friendly troops had been bombed and strafed by U.S. aircraft. Marine Corps planes were the most careless, the broadcaster alleged, basing his statement on incomplete information. The news story had developed from an unfortunate publicity release issued by FEAF dealing with a MAG-33 incident. The phrasing implied that Marine aviators were “guilty of gross carelessness resulting in casualties among their own ground troops.”324

While General Barcus was reviewing General Megee’s recommendations, a radio news broadcast back in the States briefly created negative publicity for the Marine Corps. On February 1, a nationally syndicated columnist reported cases where friendly troops had been bombed and strafed by U.S. aircraft. The broadcaster claimed that Marine Corps planes were the most careless, relying on incomplete information. This news story stemmed from an unfortunate publicity release issued by FEAF concerning a MAG-33 incident. The wording suggested that Marine aviators were "guilty of gross carelessness resulting in casualties among their own ground troops."324

324 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-81.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-81.

Actually, of the 63 incidents in which friendly casualties had resulted from aircraft flown by FAF units between January and October 1952, 1st MAW pilots were responsible for 18, or 28.5 percent of the total number of incidents and majority of casualties. What was left unsaid, however, in the unfavorable publicity was that with approximately 14.5 percent of the aircraft represented in FEAF, Marine fliers had been accomplishing monthly totals of between 30 to 40 percent of all Eighth Army CAS missions. They also performed virtually all of the very close air support jobs (50 to 100 yards out from the MLR) which further reduced the comparative percentage of Marine “carelessness.”

Actually, of the 63 incidents where friendly casualties resulted from aircraft flown by FAF units between January and October 1952, 1st MAW pilots were responsible for 18, which is 28.5 percent of the total incidents and the majority of casualties. What wasn’t mentioned in the negative coverage was that with about 14.5 percent of the aircraft in FEAF, Marine pilots were completing monthly totals of 30 to 40 percent of all Eighth Army CAS missions. They also handled almost all of the very close air support tasks (50 to 100 yards from the MLR), which further lowered the relative percentage of Marine “carelessness.”

It was true, of course, that on rare occasions freak accidents did kill and injure UN troops, despite the continual training of pilots and controllers in strike procedures and target identification. The position taken by the two senior Marine commanders in Korea was that although any CAS incident involving friendly troops was highly regrettable, it was in the same category as “short” mortar and artillery rounds and just as unavoidable.

It was true, of course, that on rare occasions freak accidents did kill and injure UN troops, despite the ongoing training of pilots and controllers in strike procedures and target identification. The stance held by the two senior Marine commanders in Korea was that while any CAS incident involving friendly troops was very unfortunate, it fell into the same category as "short" mortar and artillery rounds and was just as inevitable.

Target identification, low visibility flying conditions, and ballistic computations made the task of precision close air support an enormous one. If anything, it was almost a wonder that more accidents did not happen. Despite the similarity of Korean geography, an unending panorama of almost identical hilltops, ridges, and streams, the pilot had to release ordnance at the proper altitude and speed, and in a balanced (trim) flight. While conducting his dive the pilot’s view could be blocked by cloud formations and his attention distracted240 by antiaircraft fire which required evasive action. Even when the ordnance had been properly released, prevailing wind conditions could affect the flight path of the bombs. This, in addition to human error and mechanical factors, such as the occasional malfunctioning of parts, also affected the accuracy of bombing.

Target identification, low visibility flying conditions, and ballistic calculations made precision close air support a huge challenge. Honestly, it was almost surprising that more accidents didn't occur. Even though the landscape in Korea was quite similar, featuring endless views of nearly identical hills, ridges, and streams, the pilot still needed to drop bombs at the right altitude and speed, while maintaining a stable flight. During the dive, the pilot's view could be obstructed by clouds, and distractions from antiaircraft fire required evasive maneuvers. Even after the bombs were released correctly, wind conditions could alter their flight paths. On top of that, human mistakes and mechanical issues, like parts sometimes malfunctioning, also impacted bombing accuracy.

Throughout the November 1952-March 1953 period, 1st MAW squadrons continued to provide the bulk of close air sorties to the 1st Marine Division, in keeping with General Barcus’ policy stated earlier in 1952. Between November and January there had been a lull in the heavy ground fighting that had prevailed in October and little need to request air strikes. When enemy forces opposing the division began to grow more active in February, however, the requirement for air support to 1st MarDiv greatly increased. During this month 1st MAW aviators reached an all-time high in the percentage of their total CAS sorties devoted to the division—two of every three wing close support sorties went to General Pollock’s infantry regiments.

Throughout the period from November 1952 to March 1953, 1st MAW squadrons continued to provide the majority of close air support missions to the 1st Marine Division, as outlined by General Barcus earlier in 1952. Between November and January, there was a lull in the heavy ground fighting that had been occurring in October, resulting in little need for air strikes. However, when enemy forces against the division became more active in February, the demand for air support for 1st MarDiv significantly increased. During this month, 1st MAW aviators achieved a record high in the percentage of their total close air support missions dedicated to the division—two out of every three close support missions from the wing were allocated to General Pollock’s infantry regiments.

On the critical issue of close air support, the Marine division had become better satisfied by the end of 1952 with the quantity of air support received from FAF. A continuing difficulty, however, was the delayed response to requests for immediate CAS. For the wing, several other conditions existed which bothered General Megee. One was that the VMA-312 carrier-based squadron was not utilized to any great extent in execution of CAS missions. This detrimental condition saddled the wing commander with an “unqualified” squadron. It also prevented pilots from practicing a highly developed skill they were responsible for maintaining, although later in the war this condition was gradually alleviated. Two other difficulties—centralized control of CAS mission assignments by JOC and the prevailing differences between the Marine and Air Force/Army CAS communications systems and request procedures—were never rectified.325

On the important issue of close air support, the Marine division was more satisfied by the end of 1952 with the amount of air support it received from FAF. However, a persistent problem was the slow response to requests for immediate CAS. For the wing, there were other issues that concerned General Megee. One was that the VMA-312 carrier-based squadron wasn’t used much for CAS missions. This negative situation left the wing commander with an “unqualified” squadron. It also prevented pilots from practicing a crucial skill they needed to maintain, although this issue gradually improved later in the war. Two other problems—centralized control of CAS mission assignments by JOC and the existing differences between the Marine and Air Force/Army CAS communication systems and request procedures—were never resolved.325

325 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 10-80.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 10-80.

One long-standing difficulty, though not a CAS matter, had been solved early in the winter. Following a series of mechanical troubles with the F3D-2 aircraft in VMF(N)-513 and prolonged delay in receipt of blast tube extensions for its 20mm guns, the squadron finally became fully operational on 1 November with its complement of 12 of the new jet Skyknight aircraft. Almost as soon as the241 F3D-2s were ready for night work, FEAF had put them to escorting B-29s on bombing runs over North Korea. With the F3D escort and changes in B-29 tactics, bomber losses, which had been severe, decreased sharply. Enemy attackers became fewer and fewer so that by February, air-to-air opposition was encountered only infrequently. Instead of sending up groups of night fighters at the escorted B-29s, the enemy would fly a single jet across the bomber formation. If a Skyknight followed, one or two MIG-15s, well to the rear and higher than the decoy, would attempt to gun down the Skyknight in its pursuit. But because of the F3D tail warning radar, the Marine radar operator could detect the enemy plane in its approach for the kill before it got within effective firing range.

One long-standing issue, although not a CAS matter, was resolved early in the winter. After experiencing a series of mechanical problems with the F3D-2 aircraft in VMF(N)-513 and a lengthy delay in receiving blast tube extensions for its 20mm guns, the squadron finally became fully operational on November 1 with its full set of 12 new jet Skyknight aircraft. Almost as soon as the F3D-2s were ready for night operations, FEAF began using them to escort B-29s on bombing missions over North Korea. With the F3D escort and adjustments in B-29 tactics, bomber losses, which had previously been high, decreased significantly. Enemy attackers became less frequent, so by February, air-to-air opposition was encountered only occasionally. Instead of sending up groups of night fighters against the escorted B-29s, the enemy would now send a single jet across the bomber formation. If a Skyknight followed, one or two MIG-15s, positioned well behind and higher than the decoy, would try to shoot down the Skyknight as it pursued. However, thanks to the F3D's tail warning radar, the Marine radar operator could detect the enemy plane approaching for the kill before it got within effective firing range.

Lieutenant Colonel Hutchinson’s VMF(N)-513 pilots soon established an enviable record for Marine aviation, netting by 31 January five enemy jets without loss of a single F3D. In addition to the jets, the squadron downed a piston engine plane and scored a probable destruct on another. During its first three months of operations with the Douglas Skyknights—the first Navy-Marine jet night-fighter to arrive in the Korean combat theater—the squadron earned two night-kill records. It also quickly proved the design theory and proposed tactics for the Skyknights that enemy aircraft could be located, intercepted, and destroyed purely by electronic means.

Lieutenant Colonel Hutchinson’s VMF(N)-513 pilots quickly built an impressive record for Marine aviation, shooting down five enemy jets by January 31 without losing a single F3D. In addition to the jets, the squadron also brought down a piston engine plane and likely destroyed another. During its first three months of operations with the Douglas Skyknights—the first Navy-Marine jet night-fighter to reach the Korean combat zone—the squadron achieved two night-kill records. It also swiftly validated the design theory and suggested tactics for the Skyknights, demonstrating that enemy aircraft could be located, intercepted, and destroyed solely through electronic means.

While on a night combat air patrol in the vicinity of Sinuiju airfield early on 3 November, Master Sergeant H. C. Hoglind picked up a contact on his intercept radar, which a ground radar station had passed on to him, and notified the pilot, Major William T. Stratton, Jr. After losing and reestablishing radar contact, Major Stratton made a visual sighting of a jet exhaust straight ahead. When he had been cleared to proceed, the Flying Nightmare’s pilot sent three bursts of 20mm into the other plane, identified as a YAK-15. Three explosions followed and the aircraft plunged towards the airfield directly below. This marked the first time that an enemy jet had been destroyed at night by use of airborne intercept radar equipment in a jet fighter.

While on a nighttime combat air patrol near Sinuiju airfield early on November 3, Master Sergeant H. C. Hoglind detected a contact on his intercept radar, relayed to him by a ground radar station, and informed the pilot, Major William T. Stratton, Jr. After losing and regaining radar contact, Major Stratton spotted a jet exhaust straight ahead. Once he received clearance to engage, the pilot of the Flying Nightmare fired three bursts of 20mm at the other aircraft, which was identified as a YAK-15. Three explosions followed, and the aircraft dove toward the airfield directly below. This was the first time an enemy jet was destroyed at night using airborne intercept radar equipment in a jet fighter.

Five days later the team of Captain Oliver R. Davis and Warrant Officer Dramus F. Fessler bagged the first MIG-15 for the squadron. Captain Davis expended only 20 rounds of 20mm cannon fire in his aerial victory, which took place northwest of Pyongyang near the Yellow Sea.

Five days later, Captain Oliver R. Davis and Warrant Officer Dramus F. Fessler scored the squadron's first MIG-15 kill. Captain Davis fired just 20 rounds from his 20mm cannon during the aerial victory, which happened northwest of Pyongyang, near the Yellow Sea.

242

242

The next two months brought new distinction to Marines in -513. Shortly after dark on 10 December, First Lieutenant Joseph A. Corvi had departed on a night combat patrol mission. About 35 miles northwest of Chinnampo, his radar operator, Master Sergeant D. R. George, picked up a target on his scope. Since the “bogey” (an unidentified aircraft, believed to be hostile) was three miles distant, the pilot quickly closed on the contact and shot it down. Almost immediately another blip appeared on the radar screen. Lieutenant Corvi turned to the new attack and began approaching it, but because of the slower speed of the enemy plane the Marine pilot was able to fire only one short burst before overtaking it. An instant before passing the enemy aircraft, Lieutenant Corvi saw it disappear from the radar screen, but neither member of the Flying Nightmares crew had made a visual sighting with the plane itself, listed as a probable kill. What these two Marines had accomplished with their earlier encounter was the first attempt to destroy an enemy aircraft without use of a visual sighting by means of lock-on radar gear.

The next two months brought new recognition to the Marines in -513. Shortly after dark on December 10, First Lieutenant Joseph A. Corvi left for a night combat patrol mission. About 35 miles northwest of Chinnampo, his radar operator, Master Sergeant D. R. George, detected a target on his scope. Since the “bogey” (an unidentified aircraft, thought to be hostile) was three miles away, the pilot quickly closed in on the target and shot it down. Almost immediately, another blip appeared on the radar screen. Lieutenant Corvi shifted to the new target and began approaching it, but because the enemy plane was slower, the Marine pilot could only fire a short burst before catching up to it. Just before passing the enemy aircraft, Lieutenant Corvi noticed it vanish from the radar screen, but neither member of the Flying Nightmares crew had visually spotted the plane, which was recorded as a probable kill. What these two Marines achieved in their earlier encounter was the first attempt to take down an enemy aircraft without visual confirmation using lock-on radar equipment.

All-weather squadron crews continued to demonstrate the F3D-2 capability for destruction of hostile aircraft by electronic intercept during January. The first MIG-15 downed was by Major Elswin P. (Jack) Dunn and Master Sergeant Lawrence J. Fortin, his radar operator. On 28 January Captain James R. Weaver and Master Sergeant Robert P. Becker destroyed another of the Russian fighter-interceptors in an aerial duel. The final kill came on the 31st when the new squadron commander, Lieutenant Colonel Robert F. Conley (who had taken over VMF(N)-513 on the 20th) accompanied by Master Sergeant James M. Scott bagged the Marine fighter pilots’ 12th MIG of the war.

All-weather squadron crews continued to showcase the F3D-2's ability to take down enemy aircraft using electronic interception throughout January. The first MIG-15 shot down was by Major Elswin P. (Jack) Dunn and Master Sergeant Lawrence J. Fortin, his radar operator. On January 28, Captain James R. Weaver and Master Sergeant Robert P. Becker destroyed another Russian fighter-interceptor in an aerial battle. The final kill happened on the 31st when the new squadron commander, Lieutenant Colonel Robert F. Conley (who took over VMF(N)-513 on the 20th), along with Master Sergeant James M. Scott, scored the Marine fighter pilots' 12th MIG of the war.

While VMF(N)-513 wrote several records in the sky, other MAG-33 and -12 squadrons also made their contribution during the winter of 1952–1953. In MAG-12, a highly successful noontime strike was launched on 16 November by 21 attack planes from VMAs-121 and -212 against a hydroelectric plant 25 miles southeast of Wonsan. For this exploit the group received the plaudits of the Fifth Air Force CG, General Barcus. Lieutenant Colonel John B. Maas, Jr.’s VMF-115 (he had succeeded Lieutenant Colonel Coin as CO on 29 September) helped all Marines celebrate their 177th birthday by sending 22 Panthers against enemy troops and supply243 shelters. On these strikes each MAG-33 aircraft was armed with 760 rounds of 20mm and 4 napalm tanks (500 pounds each), the first time that 4 tanks that large had been dropped from a fighter-bomber. This was part of the 98 sorties flown by 1st MAW against 21 enemy targets on the 10 November anniversary date. During December 1952, the frequency of combat flights by VMF-115 enabled the squadron to surpass its old (August 1951) monthly sortie record. The Panther jet fliers set this new mark of 726 effective sorties in the last 31 days of the year.

While VMF(N)-513 had several successful missions in the air, other MAG-33 and -12 squadrons also made their mark during the winter of 1952–1953. In MAG-12, a very successful noontime attack was carried out on November 16 by 21 attack planes from VMAs-121 and -212 targeting a hydroelectric plant located 25 miles southeast of Wonsan. For this achievement, the group received praise from the Fifth Air Force Commander, General Barcus. Lieutenant Colonel John B. Maas, Jr.’s VMF-115 (who took over as CO from Lieutenant Colonel Coin on September 29) helped all Marines celebrate their 177th birthday by deploying 22 Panthers against enemy troops and supply243 shelters. In these strikes, each MAG-33 aircraft was equipped with 760 rounds of 20mm ammunition and 4 napalm tanks (each weighing 500 pounds), marking the first time that such large tanks were dropped from a fighter-bomber. This was part of the 98 sorties flown by 1st MAW against 21 enemy targets on the anniversary date of November 10. Throughout December 1952, the increased frequency of combat flights by VMF-115 allowed the squadron to break its previous (August 1951) monthly sortie record. The Panther jet pilots achieved a new high of 726 effective sorties in the final 31 days of the year.

More honors came to wing pilots in the new year. On 8 January, three MAG-12 squadrons flew more than 28 combat sorties. Some, in support of the 1st Marine Division near the Panmunjom corridor, by VMAs-121, -212, and -323, produced outstanding results, earning the praise of General Pollock. Among the participating pilots was Lieutenant Colonel Barnett Robinson (VMA-212), who a week earlier had taken command of the squadron from Lieutenant Colonel Dobson.

More honors were awarded to wing pilots in the new year. On January 8, three MAG-12 squadrons flew over 28 combat missions. Some of these missions, in support of the 1st Marine Division near the Panmunjom corridor, conducted by VMAs-121, -212, and -323, showed excellent results, earning commendations from General Pollock. Among the pilots involved was Lieutenant Colonel Barnett Robinson (VMA-212), who had taken command of the squadron from Lieutenant Colonel Dobson just a week earlier.

Between 9–14 January, MAG-33 participated in a USAF-USMC joint operation to strike the rail system at Sinanju, 45 miles north of the enemy capital, and at Yongmi-dong, to the northwest across both the Chongchon and Taedong Rivers. During the six-day Operation PARALYSIS, Marine and Air Force jet squadrons flew flak suppression and interdiction missions, knocking out ground-based air defense weapons and damaging and destroying bridges, rails, and rolling stock. At night FEAF Bomber Command, with Flying Nightmare escorts, worked over the communications net, including repair facilities; during daylight, the fighter-bombers attacked marshalling yards near Sinanju, where railroad cars were stacked up awaiting repair of the river bridges. Bomb assessments and intelligence reports showed that two major rail lines were inoperative for 16 days and that, as General Barcus had predicted, the Chinese “hurriedly increased their antiaircraft defenses in the Chongchon estuary and shot down seven fighter-bombers.”326

Between January 9-14, MAG-33 took part in a joint USAF-USMC operation to target the rail system at Sinanju, which is 45 miles north of the enemy capital, and at Yongmi-dong, located to the northwest across both the Chongchon and Taedong Rivers. During the six-day Operation Paralyzed, Marine and Air Force jet squadrons conducted flak suppression and interdiction missions, taking out ground-based air defense weapons and damaging or destroying bridges, railways, and rolling stock. At night, FEAF Bomber Command, with escorts from Flying Nightmare, targeted the communications network, including repair facilities; during the day, the fighter-bombers struck marshalling yards near Sinanju, where railroad cars were piled up waiting for the river bridges to be repaired. Bomb assessments and intelligence reports indicated that two major rail lines were out of service for 16 days, and as General Barcus predicted, the Chinese "quickly increased their antiaircraft defenses in the Chongchon estuary and shot down seven fighter-bombers." 326

326 Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 582.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 582.

Following this operation, Colonel Robertshaw’s jets from VMFs-115 and -311 achieved extremely effective close air support in strikes flown 24 January in the I Corps area. About a month later, with an F9F as an airborne command post and with Lieutenant Colonel Walt244 Bartosh on his wing, the MAG-33 commander directed the operations of 208 USAF and Marine aircraft on another mass strike. The two-day mission was flown on 18–19 February against the North Korean tank and infantry school southwest of Pyongyang. More than 240 buildings were destroyed in 379 sorties. The attack was one of the largest all-jet fighter-bomber strikes of the war. Colonel Robertshaw thereby became the first Marine to lead such a large joint air-strike force from a CP aloft. And the next month, on 8 March, the Group CO flew the first Marine jet night MPQ mission, dropping six 250-pound bombs from an F9F-2 Panther on an enemy ammunition dump.

After this operation, Colonel Robertshaw’s jets from VMFs-115 and -311 provided highly effective close air support during strikes on January 24 in the I Corps area. About a month later, using an F9F as an airborne command post and with Lieutenant Colonel Walt244 Bartosh flying alongside, the MAG-33 commander oversaw the operations of 208 USAF and Marine aircraft in another mass strike. This two-day mission, conducted on February 18–19, targeted the North Korean tank and infantry school southwest of Pyongyang. Over 240 buildings were destroyed in 379 sorties. The attack was one of the largest all-jet fighter-bomber strikes of the war. Colonel Robertshaw became the first Marine to lead such a large joint air-strike force from an airborne command post. The following month, on March 8, the Group CO executed the first Marine jet night MPQ mission, dropping six 250-pound bombs from an F9F-2 Panther on an enemy ammunition dump.

Behind the Lines327

327 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9, No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdDs. Jan-Feb 53; 1/1 ComdD, Feb 53; HMR-161 ComdD, Feb 53; Montross, SkyCav.

327 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9, No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdDs. Jan-Feb 53; 1/1 ComdD, Feb 53; HMR-161 ComdD, Feb 53; Montross, SkyCav.

The Marine aviation command, like the division, found that its commitment to a large-scale land campaign in Korea considerably increased its requirements for nonorganic support, compared with normal amphibious combat operations. The wing fell heir to more of the permanent problems because its organization was less suited to the heavy support requirements of prolonged combat. Whereas the 1st Marine Division received adequate support through the FMFPac Service Command, the wing did not since the service command had been tailored more for support of ground organizations. Moreover, the command relations established in Korea underscored this situation, with the 1st Combat Service Group placed under CG, 1st Marine Division. The wing received emergency logistical support from VMR (Marine transport squadron) units. This was not an adequate substitute for the various ground support agencies essential for employment of the wing’s full combat potential.

The Marine aviation command, like the division, realized that its commitment to a large-scale land campaign in Korea greatly increased its need for nonorganic support compared to standard amphibious combat operations. The wing inherited more lasting issues because its organization was less suited to the heavy support demands of extended combat. While the 1st Marine Division got enough support through the FMFPac Service Command, the wing didn’t, as the service command was designed more for supporting ground units. Additionally, the command relationships established in Korea highlighted this problem, with the 1st Combat Service Group placed under the command of the 1st Marine Division. The wing received emergency logistical support from VMR (Marine transport squadron) units, but this was not a sufficient replacement for the various ground support agencies necessary for utilizing the wing’s full combat potential.

Major problems pertaining to service and support functions of 1st MAW units resulted from the use of amphibious Tables of Organization throughout the period of prolonged land combat without making a T/O adjustment for the actual combat mission being performed. What the wing had recommended to solve its longstanding support and supply problems was either to strengthen its245 organic logistical structure or to increase it by the attachment of appropriate units. It was emphasized that “prolonged Wing operations under Air Force control with logistical support derived from four different services, each at the end of its supply pipeline, brought clearly into focus the requirement for centralized control and monitoring of Wing requisitions and supplies.”328

Major issues related to the service and support functions of 1st MAW units arose from using amphibious Tables of Organization during the long period of land combat without adjusting the T/O for the actual mission being carried out. The wing suggested that to address its ongoing support and supply issues, it could either enhance its organic logistical structure or boost it by adding the right units. It was stressed that “extended Wing operations under Air Force control, with logistical support coming from four different services—each at the end of its supply chain—highlighted the need for centralized control and monitoring of Wing requisitions and supplies.”245

328 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 10-133.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 10-133.

A step toward expanding the amphibious T/O of the wing was made in 1953 with the request from CG, 1st MAW to CG, FMFPac for a detachment of the 1st Combat Service Group to provide electronics logistical support. It was further recommended that the electronics section be made organic to the wing to meet its need for this type of service unit.

A step toward expanding the amphibious T/O of the wing was made in 1953 with the request from CG, 1st MAW to CG, FMFPac for a detachment of the 1st Combat Service Group to provide electronics logistical support. It was further recommended that the electronics section be made organic to the wing to meet its need for this type of service unit.

Unlike the division, existing T/Os made it impossible for the wing to consolidate and control resupply requests from subordinate units and then to monitor the requisitions until parts or supplies were received by the users. This lack of a central wing supply agency had, for some time, impaired the effective, sustained performance of 1st MAW ground electronics equipment in Korea. CG, FMFPac concurred with the proposal. He requested an increase in the wing T/O of four additional electronics supply personnel to be attached to the wing for this purpose. The basic problem of establishment of a combat service group tailored to fully meet 1st MAW needs in the field remained unresolved, however.

Unlike the current setup, the existing T/Os made it impossible for the wing to coordinate and manage resupply requests from subordinate units and then to track the requisitions until the parts or supplies were received by the users. This absence of a centralized wing supply agency had, for some time, hindered the effective, ongoing performance of 1st MAW ground electronics equipment in Korea. CG, FMFPac agreed with the proposal. He asked for an increase in the wing T/O by four additional electronics supply personnel to be assigned to the wing for this purpose. However, the main issue of establishing a combat service group specifically designed to meet the 1st MAW needs in the field remained unresolved.

Supply problems in the division were less complicated. On 11 November 1952, General Pollock submitted a letter to the theater commander requesting approval of a special list of equipment in excess of certain Tables of Organization and Equipment within the division. The requirements of the Marine land war mission in Korea dictated the need for additional equipment, primarily crew-served weapons and automatic rifles. Approval was given on 19 January 1953 by CG, AFFE (Army Forces, Far East). All equipment received through this program was to be returned upon the departure of the Marine division from Korea.

Supply issues in the division were less complex. On November 11, 1952, General Pollock sent a letter to the theater commander asking for approval of a special list of equipment that exceeded certain Tables of Organization and Equipment within the division. The demands of the Marine land war mission in Korea required additional equipment, mainly crew-served weapons and automatic rifles. Approval was granted on January 19, 1953, by CG, AFFE (Army Forces, Far East). All equipment received through this program was to be returned when the Marine division left Korea.

During the cold months that ended in March 1953, the division continued its evaluation of experimental clothing and equipment. Items of winter wear generally proved to be highly satisfactory. The thermal boot, in particular, gave excellent service. On the other hand,246 the leather combat boot did not fully measure up to expectations. Most of its deficiencies were caused by the rapid wearing of the composition sole. One clothing item, the armored vest, had undergone further testing. In November, delivery of the vests to the division had been completed, including 400 sets of the new lower torso armor. Recent issue of this additional type of body armor appeared highly effective in reducing combat casualties; its extended coverage also raised morale.

During the cold months that wrapped up in March 1953, the division continued to assess experimental clothing and gear. The winter wear generally turned out to be very satisfactory. The thermal boot, in particular, performed amazingly well. On the flip side,246 the leather combat boot didn’t quite meet expectations. Most of its shortcomings were due to the rapid wear of the composition sole. One clothing item, the armored vest, had gone through more testing. In November, the division received the full delivery of the vests, which included 400 sets of the new lower torso armor. The recent issuance of this additional type of body armor seemed really effective in reducing combat casualties; its wider coverage also boosted morale.

Though their ability to halt successfully a Chinese bullet or exploding shell was being improved on, thanks to armored wear, the Marines’ opportunity to keep the enemy from division outposts or MLR areas was still being hampered by occasional ammunition shortages. From time to time during the winter months there was some relief from the grenade and howitzer firing restrictions that had been in effect before the Hook fighting. The cutback on use of 81mm mortar shells continued, however, as the supply level of these projectiles remained dangerously low.

Though their ability to successfully stop a Chinese bullet or exploding shell was getting better, thanks to body armor, the Marines’ chance to keep the enemy away from division outposts or MLR areas was still affected by occasional ammunition shortages. Every now and then during the winter months, there was some relief from the restrictions on grenade and howitzer fire that had been in place before the Hook fighting. However, the limit on the use of 81mm mortar shells continued, as the supply of these projectiles remained critically low.

A new shortage, this one in fuel, developed during the winter. In January 1953 it became necessary to reduce the distribution of gasoline for motor vehicles to .829 gallons per man per day, a drop of 17 percent from the previous month’s allocation. Diesel fuel was cut back to 1.41 gallons, or 7 percent less than the December ration. By February, however, the crisis had passed and vehicles returned to a less restricted operating schedule. No extreme hardship had been experienced by the Marines during the fuel drought. It was considered that “prolonged operation under such restrictions would result in a marked decrease in efficiency since many essential activities may be temporarily postponed, although not entirely eliminated.”329

A new shortage, this time in fuel, arose during the winter. In January 1953, it became necessary to cut the distribution of gasoline for motor vehicles to .829 gallons per person per day, which was a 17 percent decrease from the allocation of the previous month. Diesel fuel was reduced to 1.41 gallons, or 7 percent less than the December ration. By February, however, the crisis had passed and vehicles were able to operate on a less restricted schedule. The Marines did not experience significant hardship during the fuel shortage. It was noted that “prolonged operation under such restrictions would result in a marked decrease in efficiency since many essential activities may be temporarily postponed, although not entirely eliminated.”329

329 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jan 53, p. 3.

329 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jan 53, p. 3.

The month of February also witnessed the largest helicopter supply lift in Korea, HAYLIFT I, the previous September, had tested the feasibility of transporting Class I, III, and V supplies to a frontline infantry regiment for five consecutive days. HMR-161 and the 7th Marines had turned out an excellent test performance of the rotary craft in this logistical operation. It then became the task for the infantry and helicopters to run a resupply operation for two frontline regiments for a five-day period. HAYLIFT II, conducted 23–27 February, was the code name for this test.

The month of February also saw the largest helicopter supply lift in Korea. HAYLIFT I, which took place the previous September, had confirmed the viability of transporting Class I, III, and V supplies to a frontline infantry regiment for five straight days. HMR-161 and the 7th Marines performed exceptionally well with the helicopters during this logistical operation. It then became the responsibility of the infantry and helicopters to conduct a resupply operation for two frontline regiments over a five-day period. HAYLIFT 2, held from February 23 to 27, was the code name for this test.

247

247

Both the planning and execution of the February operation followed the general pattern of HAYLIFT I, but on a much larger scale. As in September, division ordnance and service battalions moved the supplies to helicopter loading zones near Lieutenant Colonel Carey’s HMR-161 air strip. It had been estimated that 130 tons each day would have to be lifted to supply the two MLR regiments, the 7th and 5th Marines. On the first day, this figure was exceeded by 30 tons. A request by A/1/5 on 24 February for support during an emergency operation necessitated additional ammunition330 and helicopters to be diverted from those resupplying the 7th Marines. By the third day, a backlog of supplies had accumulated in the loading areas. In order to eliminate this buildup and to replace ammunition expended that morning by 1/5, HMR-161 on 25 February transported 200 tons in a single day, thereby establishing a new record. This represented 392 lifts made in 138.4 hours flying time. Maximum time for unloading a chopper was 54 seconds; the minimum, 28 seconds.

Both the planning and execution of the February operation followed the general pattern of HAYLIFT I, but on a much larger scale. As in September, division ordnance and service battalions moved the supplies to helicopter loading zones near Lieutenant Colonel Carey’s HMR-161 airstrip. It was estimated that 130 tons would need to be lifted each day to supply the two MLR regiments, the 7th and 5th Marines. On the first day, this figure was exceeded by 30 tons. A request from A/1/5 on 24 February for support during an emergency operation required additional ammunition and helicopters to be redirected from those resupplying the 7th Marines. By the third day, a backlog of supplies had built up in the loading areas. To clear this buildup and replenish the ammunition used that morning by 1/5, HMR-161 transported 200 tons in a single day on 25 February, setting a new record. This involved 392 lifts over 138.4 hours of flying time. The maximum time for unloading a helicopter was 54 seconds, while the minimum was 28 seconds.

330 The following month, HMR-161 engaged in a four-day ammunition resupply operation for the division. Except for one day, the 22d, all available helicopters were assigned to that mission, beginning 20 March. HMR-161 also had a new CO by that time, Colonel Owen A. Chambers who had taken over from Lieutenant Colonel Carey on 15 March.

330 The next month, HMR-161 took part in a four-day ammunition resupply mission for the division. With the exception of one day, the 22nd, all available helicopters were dedicated to that operation, starting on March 20. By then, HMR-161 also had a new commanding officer, Colonel Owen A. Chambers, who had replaced Lieutenant Colonel Carey on March 15.

The last two days of HAYLIFT II, although less eventful, contributed to a resupply tonnage record five times greater than that set by HAYLIFT I. On the last day, when fog grounded their aircraft for a second time during the morning, Marines were again reminded of an operational limitation of the helicopters. In the end, though, the accomplishments far out-weighed this shortcoming. During the five days, a total of 1,612,406 pounds of supplies had been lifted to the two frontline regiments. Not one crewman or helicopter was lost. The operation contributed significantly to the February record for the greatest number of combat hours (765), total hours (1,275.5), combat flights (575), and total flights (1,183) flown by HMR-161 for any one-month period during the Korean fighting. For the rest of the war, the February 1953 gross lift of 2,018,120 pounds would also rank as the largest amount transported by HMR-161 for a single month.

The last two days of HAYLIFT 2, while less eventful, helped set a resupply tonnage record that was five times higher than what HAYLIFT I achieved. On the final day, when fog grounded their aircraft again in the morning, Marines were once more reminded of a limitation of the helicopters. However, the successes far outweighed this issue. Over the five days, a total of 1,612,406 pounds of supplies were delivered to the two frontline regiments. Not a single crew member or helicopter was lost. The operation significantly contributed to the February record for the highest number of combat hours (765), total hours (1,275.5), combat flights (575), and total flights (1,183) flown by HMR-161 in any single month during the Korean War. For the remainder of the war, February 1953's gross lift of 2,018,120 pounds would also be the largest amount transported by HMR-161 in a single month.

248

248

The Quiet Sectors331

331 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: KPR ComdDs, Jun, Aug, Oct-Dec 52, Jan-Mar 53; 1st AmTracBn ComdDs, Mar-Dec 52, Jan-Mar 53.

331 Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section comes from: KPR ComdDs, Jun, Aug, Oct-Dec 52, Jan-Mar 53; 1st AmTracBn ComdDs, Mar-Dec 52, Jan-Mar 53.

Two frontline units in the division MLR seldom became involved in setting records or bitter contests with the enemy, even though they carried out important roles in the sector defense. These were the Kimpo Provisional Regiment and 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, both located on the left flank of the Marine line. The Kimpo Provisional Regiment had been organized as a component of the 1st Marine Division a week after its arrival in the west, specifically for defending that vital sector at the extreme left of the UNC line. The next month the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion had been assigned part of Line KANSAS between the KPR and KMC sectors.

Two frontline units in the division MLR rarely got involved in setting records or intense battles with the enemy, even though they played crucial roles in defending the area. These two units were the Kimpo Provisional Regiment and the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, both positioned on the left side of the Marine line. The Kimpo Provisional Regiment had been formed as a part of the 1st Marine Division a week after its arrival in the west, specifically to defend that critical area at the far left of the UNC line. The following month, the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion was assigned a section of Line Kans. between the KPR and KMC sectors.

Because it was set apart from the Korean mainland on the north and east by the Han River,332 Kimpo Peninsula afforded little opportunity for its occupants to engage the enemy directly in infantry clashes. Artillery thus became the normal medium for carrying on the limited hostilities as they existed in this sector between the Communists and UNC opponents. Hostile forces opposing the KPR were deployed in company-sized strongpoints across the river, occupying numerous fortified heights on the north bank of the Han estuary. Enemy strength333 was estimated to be 7 infantry companies, supported by 7 artillery batteries and 40 mortar positions. Sporadic mortar and artillery rounds fell in the sector, with little harm. Occasionally, enemy counterbattery fire caused minor damage to the LVTs of the command. During 1952, the first year of the existence of the Kimpo regiment, 15 June had stood as the record day for the number of enemy artillery rounds received. Between 1900–2100 a total of 588 shells had fallen in the sector.

Because it was separated from the Korean mainland to the north and east by the Han River, 332 Kimpo Peninsula provided few chances for its residents to engage the enemy in direct infantry battles. Artillery therefore became the usual method for conducting the limited hostilities that took place in this area between the Communists and UNC forces. Enemy forces opposing the KPR were positioned in company-sized strongholds across the river, occupying several fortified positions on the north bank of the Han estuary. The enemy's strength 333 was estimated to be 7 infantry companies, supported by 7 artillery batteries and 40 mortar positions. Sporadic mortar and artillery fire landed in the area, causing little damage. Occasionally, counterbattery fire from the enemy caused minor harm to the command’s LVTs. During 1952, the first year of the Kimpo regiment's existence, June 15 marked the highest number of enemy artillery rounds received in a single day. Between 1900 and 2100, a total of 588 shells had landed in the sector.

332 On the west, the Yom River similarly separates the Kimpo Peninsula from Kanghwa-do Island, second in size of all Korean islands and a base for friendly intelligence operations.

332 On the west, the Yom River also divides the Kimpo Peninsula from Kanghwa-do Island, which is the second largest of all Korean islands and serves as a location for friendly intelligence operations.

333 Identified as elements of the 195th CCF Division of the 65th CCF Army and an unidentified CCF division, in a revised EOOB issued in December. Previously, units of the 193d CCF Division were at the front in this far western sector. KPR ComdDs, Oct-Dec 52.

333 Identified as parts of the 195th CCF Division of the 65th CCF Army and an unidentified CCF division, in an updated EOOB released in December. Previously, units of the 193rd CCF Division were stationed at the front in this remote western area. KPR ComdDs, Oct-Dec 52.

As part of its normal defense mission, personnel of the regiment spent a large part of their time controlling civilians and regulating traffic, especially water travel. Certain counterintelligence problems confronted the Kimpo Provisional Regiment. A large civilian population,249 numbering nearly 80,000 natives, lived within the regimental sector. Local restrictions set by the National Police on Kimpo (who cooperated with the KPR in security matters) included the STAYBACK LINE to the north of the peninsula. As a rule, no civilians other than those with daytime farming permits, were allowed beyond this line. Numerous regulations were also issued to control boat traffic. Surrounded by rivers on three sides, there was ample opportunity for enemy agents or line crossers to infiltrate the defense line, despite continuous screening by friendly outposts and waterborne patrols.

As part of its regular defense duties, the regiment's personnel spent a lot of their time managing civilian interactions and controlling traffic, particularly on the water. The Kimpo Provisional Regiment faced several counterintelligence challenges. A large civilian population, nearly 80,000 locals, resided within the regimental area. Local restrictions imposed by the National Police on Kimpo, who worked with the KPR on security issues, included the Stay Back Line to the north of the peninsula. Generally, no civilians other than those with daytime farming permits were allowed past this line. Numerous rules were also established to regulate boat traffic. With rivers on three sides, there was plenty of opportunity for enemy agents or infiltrators to breach the defense line, despite constant checks by friendly outposts and water patrols. 249

Two months after the “heavy” June shelling came the August floods, which were more destructive than the artillery had been. The rest of the summer and fall followed a fairly regular, uneventful pattern with customary defense duties, rotation of frontline units, and training exercises. Among the latter were four helicopter demonstrations in October and a five-hour communication CPX (Command Post Exercise) the following month.

Two months after the intense shelling in June came the August floods, which were even more destructive than the artillery. The rest of the summer and fall followed a pretty regular, uneventful routine with typical defense duties, rotation of frontline units, and training exercises. Among these were four helicopter demonstrations in October and a five-hour communication CPX (Command Post Exercise) the next month.

One episode toward the end of the year created a temporary stir in the daily routine. In late November, two Communist espionage agents and their North Korean guides were apprehended on the west bank of the Han, almost directly east of the Kimpo Airfield. They had crossed the Imjin-Han Rivers by boat, using this normal infiltration route to penetrate the Marine defense net. The agents were seized by National Police on 22 November and their North Korean guides two days later. It was unusual for agents and guides to be captured so closely together. Normal defense measures of the peninsula had assigned separate northern, western, and southern sector units for protection against possible amphibious or overland attacks or—far more likely—enemy infiltration.

One episode toward the end of the year created a brief stir in the daily routine. In late November, two Communist spies and their North Korean guides were caught on the west bank of the Han, almost directly east of the Kimpo Airfield. They had crossed the Imjin-Han Rivers by boat, using this common infiltration route to break through the Marine defense line. The spies were captured by National Police on November 22, and their North Korean guides two days later. It was rare for spies and guides to be caught so close together. Typical defense measures for the peninsula had assigned different northern, western, and southern sector units to protect against possible amphibious or overland attacks or—much more likely—enemy infiltration.

The following month four more “roving” two-man outposts were established in the western coastal area of the southern sector. Manned from sunset to 30 minutes after sunrise daily by either KPR military personnel or National Police, the outposts occupied different positions each night. They were responsible for checking for proper identification and enforcing the rigid 2100–0500 curfew hours. Another unusual occurrence took place the last four nights of December when a single-engine light aircraft dropped propaganda leaflets in Colonel Harvey C. Tschirgi’s334 sector.

The next month, four more “roving” two-person outposts were set up in the western coastal area of the southern sector. Staffed from sunset to 30 minutes after sunrise every day by either KPR military personnel or National Police, the outposts moved to different locations each night. They were tasked with checking for proper identification and enforcing the strict 9 PM to 5 AM curfew. An unusual event also occurred during the last four nights of December when a single-engine light aircraft dropped propaganda leaflets in Colonel Harvey C. Tschirgi’s334 sector.

250

250

334 Colonel Tschirgi had taken command of the KPR on 1 December from Colonel Richard H. Crockett, who previously relieved Colonel Staab (the original KPR commander) on 31 August.

334 Colonel Tschirgi took over command of the KPR on December 1 from Colonel Richard H. Crockett, who had previously replaced Colonel Staab (the original KPR commander) on August 31.

Commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Dobervich, the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion (minus Company A at KPR, and Company B at Pohang), reinforced by the Division Reconnaissance Company, had manned positions on the KANSAS line since April 1952. By the end of May, the battalion had inserted an additional unit, a provisional company,335 in the KANSAS secondary defense line. In July, the amtrac company relieved the reconnaissance company on line, the latter then becoming part of Headquarters Battalion, 1st Marine Division. All amphibian tractor battalion units assigned to ground defense missions received special refresher training in infantry operations, including the employment of forward observers.

Commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Dobervich, the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion (minus Company A at KPR and Company B at Pohang), supported by the Division Reconnaissance Company, had been stationed on the Kans. line since April 1952. By the end of May, the battalion had added a provisional company, 335 in the KANSAS secondary defense line. In July, the amtrac company took over from the reconnaissance company, which then became part of the Headquarters Battalion, 1st Marine Division. All units of the amphibian tractor battalion assigned to ground defense missions received special refresher training in infantry operations, including the use of forward observers.

335 Comprising a platoon from Company B and several headquarters elements, the provisional company was disbanded on 14 June when Company B that had been supporting MAG-33 at Pohang was reassigned to the battalion.

335 Made up of a platoon from Company B and a few headquarters teams, the provisional company was disbanded on June 14 when Company B, which had been supporting MAG-33 at Pohang, was reassigned to the battalion.

During the first summer in the west, the mainland-based amphibian organization continued its KANSAS defense mission. The battalion also instituted a training program for patrolling the Han River by tractor. (Company A, attached to the KPR, had conducted waterborne patrols of the Yom since June. The unit also manned outposts along that river.) Headquarters and Service Company assisted the U.S. Army in laying a signal cable across the river during August, the same month Lieutenant Colonel Dobervich relinquished unit command to Lieutenant Colonel Edwin B. Wheeler. In late August the battalion sent 58 of its members to help augment 1st Marines ranks, thinned by the fierce Bunker Hill fighting.

During the first summer in the west, the mainland-based amphibian organization continued its KANSAS defense mission. The battalion also set up a training program for patrolling the Han River using tractors. (Company A, attached to the KPR, had been conducting waterborne patrols of the Yom since June. The unit also operated outposts along that river.) Headquarters and Service Company helped the U.S. Army lay a signal cable across the river in August, the same month Lieutenant Colonel Dobervich handed over unit command to Lieutenant Colonel Edwin B. Wheeler. In late August, the battalion sent 58 of its members to help bolster the 1st Marines, which had been worn down by the intense fighting at Bunker Hill.

Through the end of 1952, the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion continued its KANSAS mission. Although the sector had witnessed relatively little action for some months, several incidents about this time varied the generally quiet daily routine. In October, Company B (Major Charles W. Fitzmaurice) sent out an amphibious patrol to capture prisoners (Operation CAT WHISKER). The plan was to cross the Han in a rubber boat and set up an ambush after reaching the enemy shore, but a storm-angered river, with a strong tide boosted by heavy winds, prevented landing of the boat. Two months later, another snare—this one set by the enemy—was partially successful. Several hours after dark on 1 December, the jeep assigned to the battalion commander, Major George S. Saussy, Jr.,336 was being251 driven on the MSR by Private First Class Billy J. Webb, its operator and only occupant.

Through the end of 1952, the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion continued its KANSAS mission. Although the area had seen relatively little action for some months, several incidents around this time interrupted the generally quiet daily routine. In October, Company B (Major Charles W. Fitzmaurice) launched an amphibious patrol to capture prisoners (Operation Cat whisker). The plan was to cross the Han River in a rubber boat and set up an ambush after reaching the enemy's shore, but a stormy river, with a strong tide fueled by heavy winds, made it impossible for the boat to land. Two months later, another trap—this one set by the enemy—was partially successful. Several hours after dark on December 1, the jeep assigned to the battalion commander, Major George S. Saussy, Jr.,336 was being251 driven on the MSR by Private First Class Billy J. Webb, its operator and only occupant.

336 Formerly the executive officer, Major Saussy took over unit command on 7 November, when Lieutenant Colonel Wheeler was transferred to the 5th Marines. Lieutenant Colonel Frank R. Wilkinson, Jr., became the next commanding officer on 16 March 1953.

336 Formerly the executive officer, Major Saussy took over unit command on November 7, when Lieutenant Colonel Wheeler was transferred to the 5th Marines. Lieutenant Colonel Frank R. Wilkinson, Jr., became the next commanding officer on March 16, 1953.

Suddenly shots rang out from the side of the road. Within a few seconds, 23 bullets from a Russian-made submachine gun had struck the jeep; the driver, astonishingly, received only a knee wound. No trace of the ambushers could be found by the friendly patrol dispatched to investigate the incident. An activity of an entirely different nature that same month was the assignment of battalion LVTs to break up the heavily encrusted ice that had formed around and endangered supports of three bridges in the I Corps area. A rash of minor incidents involving would-be, but unsuccessful, enemy infiltrators also took place during the winter months in the amtrac sector. In November, three agents attempted to cross the Imjin on their way to the division area, but were engaged by a battalion patrol. After a brief fire fight, friendly artillery was called down on the retreating boat and it was believed destroyed. Enemy agents on foot were engaged by National Police or Marine listening posts again in January and March and deterred from their espionage missions.

Suddenly, gunfire erupted from the side of the road. Within moments, 23 bullets from a Russian-made submachine gun had hit the jeep; incredibly, the driver only suffered a knee injury. The friendly patrol sent to investigate the incident couldn't find any sign of the attackers. In that same month, a completely different operation involved battalion LVTs breaking up the thick ice that had formed around and threatened the supports of three bridges in the I Corps area. There were also several minor incidents with would-be enemy infiltrators during the winter months in the amtrac sector. In November, three agents tried to cross the Imjin River on their way to the division area but were intercepted by a battalion patrol. After a brief firefight, friendly artillery was called in on the retreating boat, which was believed to have been destroyed. Enemy agents on foot were engaged again by National Police or Marine listening posts in January and March, deterring them from their spying missions.

Commitment to an infantry role in the KANSAS line, meanwhile, had permitted little time for operation of the battalion tractors. In December, construction began on a storage park for those LVTs not in use. By placing the non-operating tracked vehicles in a single area, the battalion could handle routine maintenance with just a few men. This facility, located at Ascom City, was completed early in 1953. By March, a total of 34 tractors had been placed there in caretaker status. Implicit in this economy measure was the requirement that all stowed tractors could revert to combat status, if necessary, on a 48-hour alert.

Commitment to an infantry role in the KANSAS line, meanwhile, allowed very little time for the battalion tractors to be operated. In December, construction started on a storage area for the LVTs that weren’t in use. By grouping the non-operating tracked vehicles in one location, the battalion could carry out routine maintenance with just a few men. This facility, located at Ascom City, was finished early in 1953. By March, a total of 34 tractors had been put there in caretaker status. Implicit in this cost-saving measure was the requirement that all stored tractors could be ready for combat status, if needed, on a 48-hour alert.

Changes in the Concept of Ground Defense337

337 The material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8.

337 The material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8.

During the winter months of 1952–1953, the 1st Marine Division modified the organization of its tactical defense, although it retained the basic concept of the combat outpost system as the backbone253 of MLR defense.338 Development of much of the KANSAS line and parts of the Marine MLR during this period reflected several new ideas on how the ground defense could be better organized. Recent experience during Communist attacks had shown that defensive emplacements and positions could be dug deeper and below ground to withstand massed enemy fires. Contrary to traditional concepts, it had also been found that centering the defense on the military crest339 of a hill was not always the best procedure. Emplacement of machine guns downslope or in low firing positions to cover draws or flat ground was not entirely suitable to the Korean terrain, enemy, or nature of positional warfare.

During the winter months of 1952–1953, the 1st Marine Division changed the way it organized its tactical defense, while still keeping the basic idea of the combat outpost system as the main part of MLR defense.253 Development of much of the Kans. line and parts of the Marine MLR during this time reflected several new ideas on how to better organize ground defense. Recent experiences during Communist attacks showed that defensive positions could be dug deeper and below ground to better survive heavy enemy fire. Contrary to traditional beliefs, it was also found that focusing defense on the military crest of a hill wasn't always the best approach. Placing machine guns lower down or in low firing positions to cover dips or flat areas was not completely effective for the Korean terrain, the enemy, or the nature of positional warfare.

338 The 1st Commonwealth Division, to the Marine right, utilized a different defense system. Instead of relying on the COPs forward of the main line of defense as major deterrent positions, the British preferred to include all strategic terrain features within the MLR itself. They followed a policy of active patrolling to the front and, at night, occupied selected ground sites, preferring to fight the enemy from their main battle positions rather than from more isolated COP positions. PactFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, pp. 9-92, 9-93.

338 The 1st Commonwealth Division, positioned to the right of the Marines, used a different defense system. Instead of depending on the Combat Outposts (COPs) in front of the main line of defense as primary deterrent positions, the British chose to encompass all key terrain features within the Main Line of Resistance (MLR) itself. They adopted a strategy of active patrols to the front and, at night, occupied chosen ground sites, preferring to engage the enemy from their main battle positions rather than from more isolated COP locations. PactFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, pp. 9-92, 9-93.

339 The military crest is that point along the slope of a hill from which maximum observation up and down the hill can be obtained. The topographical crest is the highest point on a hill or ridge.

339 The military crest is the spot on a hill's slope where you can see the most both up and down the hill. The topographical crest is the highest point on a hill or ridge.

MAP DIAGRAM 20 K. White

MAP DIAGRAM 20 K. White

ORGANIZATION OF GROUND DEFENSE

GROUND DEFENSE ORGANIZATION

WINTER 1952–1953

WINTER 1952–1953

Altered defense concepts, beginning in October, took the following form:

Altered defense strategies, starting in October, took the following shape:

(1) The trace of defensive positions followed the topographical crest (A) rather than military crest (B) of key terrain features. (Map diagrams 20 and 21 illustrate these changes.)

(1) The line of defensive positions followed the high point (A) instead of the military high point (B) of important terrain features. (Map diagrams 20 and 21 illustrate these changes.)

(2) Fighting positions and emplacements were dug a short distance downslope (C) from the topographical crest.

(2) Fighting positions and emplacements were dug a short distance downhill (C) from the top of the hill.

(3) Trenches on the topographical crest permitted easier, faster, and more protected access to fighting positions from the reverse slope and support area (D).

(3) Trenches on the high ground allowed for easier, quicker, and safer access to fighting positions from the back slope and support area (D).

(4) Positions on the topographical crest were less vulnerable to enemy artillery because it was more difficult for the enemy to adjust his fire on these positions than on trenches dug along the military crest. Many shells simply passed over the top (E) of the hill.

(4) Positions on the top of the ridge were less exposed to enemy artillery because it was harder for the enemy to aim their fire at these positions compared to the trenches dug along the military crest. Many shells just flew over the top (E) of the hill.

(5) Certain hills and noses were selected and organized so that trenches and gun emplacements, encircling the crest, would form mutually supporting positions (X).

(5) Some hills and high points were chosen and arranged so that trenches and gun placements, surrounding the top, would create mutually supportive positions (X).

(6) Machine guns were moved from the draws (Y) to hilltops and noses (Z) where better long-range observation and fields of fire existed.

(6) Machine guns were relocated from the draws (Y) to hilltops and ridges (Z) where there was better long-range visibility and firing fields.

254

254

MAP DIAGRAM 21 K. WHITE

MAP DIAGRAM 21 K. WHITE

TYPICAL HILL DEFENSE

Typical hill defense

(Cross Section)

(Cross Section)

WINTER 1952–1953

WINTER 1952–1953

255

255

Another change in the improvement of field fortifications came into use during the winter months. A different type of barbed wire obstacle, called “Canadian,” “random,” or “double-apron” wire, began to find favor with Marine infantrymen. Canadian wire consisted of two parallel rows of three-strand barbed wire fencing, erected about three feet apart. The void was filled in with additional barbed wire, placed at random, but connected to the parallel fences.340 The new type barbed wire appeared more effective for several reasons. Besides being simple and fast to emplace, Canadian wire merely became more entangled by artillery shelling, which quickly ripped apart the standard double-apron barbed wire previously used in COP slope defenses.

Another change in the improvement of field fortifications was adopted during the winter months. A different type of barbed wire obstacle, known as “Canadian,” “random,” or “double-apron” wire, started to gain popularity among Marine infantrymen. Canadian wire consisted of two parallel rows of three-strand barbed wire fencing, set up about three feet apart. The space in between was filled with additional barbed wire, placed randomly but connected to the parallel fences.340 This new type of barbed wire seemed more effective for several reasons. Besides being easy and quick to set up, Canadian wire became even more entangled by artillery fire, which quickly destroyed the standard double-apron barbed wire that had been used in COP slope defenses.

340 Commenting on the heavy destruction of Hook fortifications by CCF preparation, one 7th Marine company commander stated: “Enemy artillery and mortars did tend to destroy the protective wire. We noted especially that the Canadian ‘Random Wire,’ although it tended to move about under fire, did hold together and continue to offer good protection.” McLaughlin ltr.

340 Commenting on the heavy destruction of Hook fortifications by CCF preparation, one 7th Marine company commander stated: “Enemy artillery and mortars did tend to destroy the protective wire. We noted especially that the Canadian ‘Random Wire,’ although it moved around under fire, managed to stay intact and continued to provide good protection.” McLaughlin ltr.

Before the Nevadas Battle341

341 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Feb-Mar 53; 1stMar ComdD, Mar 53; 5thMar ComdDs, Feb-Mar 53; 7thMar, 11thMar, 1st TkBn, 1/5, 2/5, 1/7 ComdDs, Feb 53.

341 Unless otherwise specified, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Feb-Mar 53; 1stMar ComdD, Mar 53; 5thMar ComdDs, Feb-Mar 53; 7thMar, 11thMar, 1st TkBn, 1/5, 2/5, 1/7 ComdDs, Feb 53.

As the Marine division continued to revamp and strengthen its primary defenses, a change of pace on the battlefront was gradually being felt. Only a few major raids had taken place during November, December, and January, and these involved no transfer of real estate. Casualties had been light. Artillery rounds, both incoming and outgoing, had dropped substantially. By February, however, it became apparent that the period of winter inactivity was nearing an end.

As the Marine division kept updating and reinforcing its main defenses, a shift in the battlefront was slowly becoming noticeable. Only a few significant raids happened during November, December, and January, and none resulted in any territorial changes. Casualties were minimal. The number of artillery rounds, both fired and received, had decreased significantly. By February, it became clear that the winter lull was coming to a close.

Taking the initiative in the renewed action was the 5th Marines, occupants of the right regimental sector since 25 January. The next month the regiment conducted three successful daytime raids against fortified enemy positions. Targets for the initial action, on 3 February, were two consistently troublesome hills, 31 and 31A in the Ungok Hill mass, north of the left battalion sector.

Taking the lead in the renewed action was the 5th Marines, who had been in charge of the right regimental sector since January 25. The following month, the regiment carried out three successful daytime raids against heavily fortified enemy positions. The targets for the first action, on February 3, were two persistently problematic hills, 31 and 31A, in the Ungok Hill area, north of the left battalion sector.

Since all battalions of the 5th Marines were to be involved either directly or indirectly in Operation CLAMBAKE, the initial planning and actual execution of the raid was to be carried out by the256 regimental commander, Colonel Walt. Clambake required especially thorough coordination of the heavy fire support since it was to be launched with a tank-artillery feint against several CCF positions (Hill 104, Kumgok, and Red Hill) generally west of the Ungok objective area. The two target hills were to be assaulted by reinforced platoons from Company A (Captain Don H. Blanchard) of the reserve battalion, 1/5, commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Jonas M. Platt, who was responsible for the later planning stages of the raid. It was anticipated that intensive air and artillery preparation on the feint objectives and movement of gun and flame tanks during the diversion would gain the element of surprise for the assault platoons. Thus the Marines hoped to take prisoners, the main purpose of the raid, and to kill enemy troops and destroy their defenses.

Since all battalions of the 5th Marines were set to participate either directly or indirectly in Operation Clam bake, the initial planning and actual execution of the raid would be led by the 256 regimental commander, Colonel Walt. Beach cookout required especially thorough coordination of heavy fire support since it was to be launched with a tank-artillery feint against several CCF positions (Hill 104, Kumgok, and Red Hill) located generally west of the Ungok objective area. The two target hills would be attacked by reinforced platoons from Company A (Captain Don H. Blanchard) of the reserve battalion, 1/5, which was commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Jonas M. Platt, who was in charge of the later planning stages of the raid. It was expected that intensive air and artillery preparation on the feint objectives and the movement of gun and flame tanks during the diversion would provide the element of surprise for the assault platoons. Thus, the Marines aimed to capture prisoners, which was the main goal of the raid, and to kill enemy troops and destroy their defenses.

During the five weeks of preparation, every aspect of the maneuver was thoroughly reviewed and rehearsed. All participating units took part in the planning conferences. Routes were reconnoitered, mines cleared, and fire concentrations plotted and registered. MAG-12 pilots studied the target areas from the nearby Marine MLR. Six rehearsals, including practice in casualty evacuation, uncovered potential problem areas. Final rehearsal was held 1 February, with artillery and air preparation made against the feint objectives. Four close air support strikes were conducted that day and the next as part of the plan to divert enemy attention from the CLAMBAKE destruction mission.

During the five weeks of preparation, every part of the maneuver was thoroughly reviewed and practiced. All participating units took part in the planning meetings. Routes were scouted, mines were cleared, and fire concentrations were plotted and recorded. MAG-12 pilots studied the target areas from the nearby Marine MLR. Six rehearsals, including practice in casualty evacuation, highlighted potential problem areas. The final rehearsal took place on February 1, with artillery and air preparation made against the feint objectives. Four close air support strikes were carried out that day and the next as part of the plan to divert enemy attention from the Clam bake destruction mission.

Shortly after first light on 3 February, three platoons of tanks rumbled across the MLR to assault the feint area. A heavy “false” artillery preparation by 1/11 was also placed on the three western enemy hills as well as direct fire from gun and flame tanks. The two Marine assault forces, one against each hill, moved out armed with flamethrowers, 3.5-inch rockets, machine guns, grenades, satchel charges, bangalore torpedoes, and automatic weapons. Enemy forces occupying the positions made three separate counterattack attempts, which were blunted by Marine supporting arms. During the infantry attack, friendly air hovered on station and artillery fired continuous counterbattery and countermortar fire.

Shortly after dawn on February 3rd, three tank platoons rolled across the MLR to attack the feint area. A heavy "false" artillery barrage by 1/11 was also directed at the three western enemy hills, along with direct fire from gun and flame tanks. The two Marine assault groups, one targeting each hill, advanced armed with flamethrowers, 3.5-inch rockets, machine guns, grenades, satchel charges, bangalore torpedoes, and automatic weapons. Enemy forces holding the positions launched three separate counterattacks, all of which were stopped by Marine supporting fire. During the infantry assault, friendly air support remained on station while artillery provided continuous counter-battery and counter-mortar fire.

With the exception of the change of withdrawal route of one of the assault teams, the 5th Marines reported that the operation was carried out according to plan. Company A tanks had swung left across the frozen rice paddies to provide left flank security for the257 infantry and to interdict trenchlines that connected with the Ungok objective. Intense enemy fire lashed the armored vehicles as they approached Kumgok and Red Hill as well as those supporting tanks that remained on the MLR.342 Air, artillery, infantry, and tanks produced an estimated 390 Chinese casualties (including 90 known KIA) in addition to damaged or destroyed trenchlines, tunnels, caves, bunkers, and weapons of the enemy. Marine losses were 14 killed and 91 wounded. One flame tank was lost.

Except for a change in the withdrawal route of one of the assault teams, the 5th Marines reported that the operation went as planned. Company A tanks moved left across the frozen rice paddies to secure the left flank for the infantry and to target trenchlines connected to the Ungok objective. Intense enemy fire struck the armored vehicles as they approached Kumgok and Red Hill, as well as the supporting tanks that stayed on the MLR. Air support, artillery, infantry, and tanks caused an estimated 390 Chinese casualties (including 90 known killed in action) along with damage or destruction to enemy trenchlines, tunnels, caves, bunkers, and weapons. Marine losses included 14 killed and 91 wounded. One flame tank was lost.

342 For a detailed account of the tank action in the CLAMBAKE raid see Col Clyde W. Hunter ltr to Dir MCHist, HQMC, dtd 6 Jun 70, in v. V, Korean comment file.

342 For a detailed account of the tank action in the Seafood boil raid, see Col Clyde W. Hunter's letter to the Director of Marine Corps History, HQMC, dated June 6, 1970, in volume V of the Korean comment file.

As in the case of the 1st Marines WAKEUP raid in November 1952, CLAMBAKE was important not so much in accomplishing its primary mission (actually, no POWs were taken) as in lessons learned. One of these was to reemphasize the fact that thorough preparation helped to ensure smooth coordination of infantry and supporting arms. In his report of the operation, Lieutenant Colonel Platt wrote, “minute planning to the last detail along with carefully executed rehearsals are basic to success in actions of this type.”343 He further noted that “confidence and enthusiasm stimulated by the rehearsals are assets which cannot be overlooked.”344 The battalion commander also commented on the importance of planning for both troop withdrawal and maintaining a flexible schedule of fires by supporting arms. Air,345 artillery, and tanks all employed fire plans that could be readily adjusted to meet the changing tactical situation.

As with the 1st Marines Wake up raid in November 1952, Clambake was significant not just for achieving its main objective (in fact, no POWs were taken) but for the lessons learned. One of these was to reinforce the idea that thorough preparation contributed to smooth coordination between infantry and supporting units. In his report on the operation, Lieutenant Colonel Platt stated, “Detailed planning down to the last detail along with well-executed rehearsals are essential for success in operations like this.”343 He also pointed out that “the confidence and enthusiasm generated by the rehearsals are invaluable assets.”344 The battalion commander emphasized the need for planning both troop withdrawal and maintaining a flexible fire schedule by support units. Air,345 artillery, and tanks all employed fire plans that could easily be adjusted to adapt to the changing tactical situation.

343 1/5 ComdD, Feb. 53, App. IVc, dtd 19 Feb 53, p. 5.

343 1/5 ComdD, Feb. 53, App. IVc, dtd 19 Feb 53, p. 5.

344 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

345 In order to assure better close air support during the assault; an SOP for the airborne tactical controller was proposed and drafted by MAG-12 for 1st MAW approval. The plan utilized the marking of targets by rocket and subsequent corrections to be made by the FAC. This enabled MAG-12 aircraft “to scramble, fly a CAS mission at the Division front and be back at the field at K-6 in approximately 40 minutes.” Col Wayne M. Cargill ltr to Dir MCHist, HQMC, dtd 8 Jan 70.

345 To ensure better close air support during the assault, an SOP for the airborne tactical controller was proposed and drafted by MAG-12 for 1st MAW approval. The plan involved marking targets with rockets and making corrections by the FAC. This allowed MAG-12 aircraft "to scramble, fly a CAS mission at the Division front, and return to the field at K-6 in about 40 minutes." Col Wayne M. Cargill ltr to Dir MCHist, HQMC, dtd 8 Jan 70.

On the ground, flame was found to be the best weapon for neutralizing the well-fortified CCF caves. From Company A, 1st Tank Battalion (Captain Hunter) came information about Chinese 3.5-inch rocket launcher teams used in antitank defense. Several of these tank-killer teams had run down the trenchline holding small bushes in front of them. The enemy then boldly advanced through a hail of bullets to within 15–20 yards of the Marine tank before opening fire with their rockets. Short bursts of flame from headquarters tanks soon caused even the most intrepid to beat a hurried retreat.

On the ground, flames were found to be the most effective weapon for taking out the heavily fortified CCF caves. From Company A, 1st Tank Battalion (Captain Hunter), we received information about Chinese 3.5-inch rocket launcher teams used for antitank defense. Several of these tank-killer teams had crept along the trenchline, hiding behind small bushes. The enemy then boldly moved forward through a storm of bullets to within 15–20 yards of the Marine tank before launching their rockets. Quick bursts of flame from headquarters tanks quickly forced even the bravest to make a hasty retreat.

258

258

Concluding his after-action report of CLAMBAKE, the regimental commander, Colonel Walt, observed:

Concluding his after-action report of Clambake, the regimental commander, Colonel Walt, observed:

In addition to inflicting large numbers of casualties and destruction upon the enemy, the operation served a secondary purpose, none the less important. It provided excellent training and experience for the various infantry and supporting arms staffs involved, helping to develop them into a smoothly functioning infantry-air-artillery-tank team.346

In addition to causing significant casualties and destruction to the enemy, the operation had another important purpose. It offered valuable training and experience for the different infantry and supporting units involved, helping them become a well-coordinated infantry-air-artillery-tank team.346

346 5th Mar ComdD, Feb 53, App. VI, dtd 20 Feb 53, p. 3.

346 5th Mar ComdD, Feb 53, App. VI, dtd 20 Feb 53, p. 3.

Shortly before the end of the month, the 5th Marines made another major assault. As in the earlier CLAMBAKE, this raid was again in two-reinforced-platoon size and made during the early daylight hours of 25 February. This time the objective was a single height, Hill 15 (Detroit), two miles east of the CLAMBAKE objective. Lieutenant Colonel Oscar F. Peatross’347 2/5, manning the extreme right sector of the division, gave the assignment to Company F, then under Captain Harold D. Kurth, Jr. Planning for Operation CHARLIE, a standard-type kill, capture, and destroy raid, was carried out in much the same detailed manner as the earlier 1/5 raid.

Shortly before the month ended, the 5th Marines launched another major attack. Like the earlier Clam bake, this raid was also organized into two reinforced platoons and took place during the early hours of February 25. This time, the target was a single hill, Hill 15 (Detroit), located two miles east of the Beach cookout objective. Lieutenant Colonel Oscar F. Peatross’347 2/5, stationed at the far right of the division, assigned the mission to Company F, led by Captain Harold D. Kurth, Jr. The planning for Operation CHARLIE, which aimed to kill, capture, and destroy, was conducted with the same level of detail as the previous 1/5 raid.

347 Lieutenant Colonel Peatross had succeeded Lieutenant Colonel McLaughlin as battalion CO on 11 Sep 52.

347 Lieutenant Colonel Peatross took over as battalion CO from Lieutenant Colonel McLaughlin on September 11, 1952.

Charlie differed somewhat in concept in that the 2/5 operational plan attempted to gain surprise by launching the attack during the BMNT348 period as well as in use of smoke to screen enemy observation. Supporting arms preparatory fires had been carefully plotted, including the precision destruction aerial bombing that had proved so effective in the CLAMBAKE assault. In actual execution of CHARLIE, however, bad weather prevented the use of almost all the planned pre-D-Day and D-Day air strikes. Upon reaching the Detroit objective area assault Marines “found the majority of enemy installations were relatively undamaged, even though subjected to heavy bombardment by other supporting arms.”349 Artillery preparatory fires had been employed successfully to isolate the battle area and howitzer and tank missions supported the raid.259350

Charlie had a slightly different concept in that the 2/5 operational plan aimed to achieve surprise by launching the attack during the BMNT348 period and used smoke to conceal enemy observation. The supporting arms' preparatory fires were carefully planned, including precision aerial bombing that had proven very effective in the Clam bake assault. However, during the actual execution of CHARLIE, bad weather prevented almost all the planned pre-D-Day and D-Day air strikes. When the assault Marines reached the Detroit objective area, they "found that most enemy installations were relatively undamaged, despite heavy bombardment from other supporting arms."349 Artillery preparatory fires had successfully isolated the battle area, and howitzer and tank missions supported the raid.259350

348 Beginning morning nautical twilight is that period before sunrise or after sunset (BENT, or beginning evening nautical twilight) when visibility is limited to approximately 300 yards.

348 Beginning morning nautical twilight is the time before sunrise or after sunset (BENT, or beginning evening nautical twilight) when visibility is about 300 yards.

349 5thMar ComdD, Feb 53, App. VI, dtd 28 Feb 53, p. 5.

349 5thMar ComdD, Feb 53, App. VI, dtd 28 Feb 53, p. 5.

350 In nearly three hours of firing, the 11th Marines and its reinforcing and attached units, including the 1st Royal Canadian Horse Artillery, expended 11,881 rounds. Indicative of the meticulous planning that preceded an operation such as CHARLIE is the 11th Marines report of this raid, 11thMar ComdD, Feb 53.

350 In almost three hours of firing, the 11th Marines and its supporting and attached units, including the 1st Royal Canadian Horse Artillery, fired 11,881 rounds. The meticulous planning that went into an operation like CHARLIE is shown in the 11th Marines report on this raid, 11thMar ComdD, Feb 53.

Between the time of CLAMBAKE and CHARLIE a series of Marine and enemy small units actions erupted which were soon to become a way of life for the MLR combatants. By sporadic outpost attacks and increasing their use of artillery, the Chinese were beginning to demonstrate a more aggressive attitude than in recent months. On the night of 12–13 February, a CCF platoon supported by mortars and artillery probed COP Hedy (Hill 124), in the right battalion of the center regimental sector, held by Lieutenant Colonel Barrett’s 3/7. On the next night, it was the Korean Marines who turned aggressor. Two of their platoons raided Hill 240, on the west bank of the Sachon, nearly three miles north of the mouth of the river. The following night, a 7th Marines patrol moving into ambush positions was itself stalked by a large CCF patrol. When reinforcements, including armored vehicles, moved out from the MLR to support the Marines, the Chinese hastily withdrew.

Between the events of Clambake and CHARLIE, a series of actions involving Marine and enemy small units broke out, which would soon become a regular part of life for the MLR combatants. Through occasional outpost attacks and an increase in artillery use, the Chinese started to show a more aggressive stance than in recent months. On the night of February 12–13, a CCF platoon, supported by mortars and artillery, probed COP Hedy (Hill 124), located in the right battalion of the central regimental sector, held by Lieutenant Colonel Barrett's 3/7. The following night, it was the Korean Marines who took the offensive. Two of their platoons raided Hill 240, on the west bank of the Sachon, nearly three miles north of the river's mouth. The next night, a 7th Marines patrol moving into ambush positions was itself tracked by a large CCF patrol. When reinforcements, including armored vehicles, departed from the MLR to support the Marines, the Chinese quickly withdrew.

Three more contacts were made before the end of the month along the division front. On 19 February CCF soldiers, in two-platoon strength, engaged KMC sentries forward of COP 33, located about a mile east of the action the previous week. After the initial exchange of small arms fire, the Koreans moved back to the outpost and called down supporting fires on the Chinese. Artillery and mortars tore into the attackers causing numerous casualties and forcing the enemy to withdraw. On the morning of 22 February, a raiding party from the 5th Marines assaulted a smaller enemy force at Hill 35A, approximately 1,300 yards southwest of the Ungok hills. In this second raid staged by the 5th Marines that month, assault troops (H/3/5) used flamethrowers in the early stages of the action to help clear enemy trenches of hostile grenade throwers.

Three more contacts occurred before the end of the month along the division front. On February 19, CCF soldiers, in two-platoon strength, engaged KMC sentries ahead of COP 33, located about a mile east of the previous week's action. After the initial exchange of small arms fire, the Koreans retreated to the outpost and called in supporting fire on the Chinese. Artillery and mortars hit the attackers, causing many casualties and forcing them to withdraw. On the morning of February 22, a raiding party from the 5th Marines attacked a smaller enemy force at Hill 35A, about 1,300 yards southwest of the Ungok hills. In this second raid conducted by the 5th Marines that month, the assault troops (H/3/5) used flamethrowers in the early stages of the battle to help clear enemy trenches of hostile grenade throwers.

Late the next night a 7th Marines unit, consisting of a reinforced platoon and four M-46 tanks, set out to raid Yoke, located near the peace corridor five miles north of Freedom Bridge. The assault against that position never came off. At 2137 as the B/1/7 platoon moved into preliminary positions on Hill 90, north of the ultimate objective, a Chinese company ambushed the patrol from three sides. When the Marines closed with the enemy in hand-to-hand fighting, a support platoon was sent from the MLR. After an intense 30 minute fire fight, the CCF began withdrawing at 0138. Enemy losses were listed as 45 counted KIA, 33 estimated KIA, and 35 estimated WIA. As a result of the assault, orders for the 7th Marines raid on260 Yoke were cancelled. Marine casualties numbered 5 killed, 22 wounded.

Late the next night, a 7th Marines unit, made up of a reinforced platoon and four M-46 tanks, set out to raid Yoke, located near the peace corridor five miles north of Freedom Bridge. The attack on that position never happened. At 9:37 PM, as the B/1/7 platoon moved into preliminary positions on Hill 90, just north of the final objective, a Chinese company ambushed the patrol from three sides. When the Marines engaged the enemy in close combat, a support platoon was dispatched from the MLR. After an intense 30-minute firefight, the CCF began withdrawing at 1:38 AM. Enemy losses were reported as 45 confirmed KIA, 33 estimated KIA, and 35 estimated WIA. As a result of the assault, orders for the 7th Marines raid on260 Yoke were canceled. Marine casualties totaled 5 killed and 22 wounded.

Whereas February was characterized by a marked increase in ground contacts between Marines and their CCF adversaries, during the first part of March the Chinese again assumed an inactive posture. Marine patrols reported few contacts. Except for a KMC raid on 3 March, little action that could be considered a sizable engagement took place until after midmonth. On the 16th there was a brief skirmish involving a 5th Marines combat patrol near Reno and a short fire fight between Carson defenders and an enemy squad. The next night a Chinese platoon, waiting near Vegas for a Marine patrol to pass by, was itself put to flight by the patrol.

Whereas February saw a significant increase in interactions between Marines and their CCF opponents, the Chinese once again took a passive stance during the first part of March. Marine patrols reported very few encounters. Aside from a KMC raid on March 3, there was little action that could be considered a major conflict until after midmonth. On the 16th, there was a brief clash involving a 5th Marines patrol near Reno and a short firefight between Carson defenders and an enemy squad. The following night, a Chinese platoon, waiting near Vegas for a Marine patrol to pass by, ended up fleeing from the patrol itself.

Two encounters with the CCF on 19 March marked the heaviest action yet of the month. Early that morning, a predawn raid was staged by B/1/5 (Captain Theodore J. Mildner) at Hill 31A, one of the Ungok twin objectives in CLAMBAKE the previous month. The March ITEM raid employed 111 Marines. One platoon was to make the assault and the second platoon to support the operation and assist in casualty evacuation. Following a series of nearly a dozen air strikes on the objective and artillery preparation, Captain Mildner’s two assault platoons jumped off from the MLR check point at 0518. As usually happened in such operations, the preliminary fire drove the Chinese to reverse slope defenses. No enemy POWs were taken and at 0700 the Marine units disengaged, due to casualties sustained from enemy shelling and machine gun fire.351

Two encounters with the CCF on March 19 marked the heaviest action of the month so far. Early that morning, B/1/5 (Captain Theodore J. Mildner) staged a predawn raid at Hill 31A, one of the Ungok twin objectives from Seafood feast the month before. The March ITEM raid involved 111 Marines. One platoon was tasked with leading the assault while the second platoon was there to support the operation and help with casualty evacuation. After nearly a dozen air strikes on the target and artillery preparation, Captain Mildner's two assault platoons launched from the MLR checkpoint at 0518. As was typical in these operations, the initial fire pushed the Chinese back to their reverse slope defenses. No enemy POWs were captured, and by 0700 the Marine units withdrew due to casualties from enemy shelling and machine gun fire.351

351 Prior to the raid various combinations of flamethrower fuels and pressure were extensively used. The purpose was to determine the maximum effective range of the flamethrower teams in order to “neutralize the hand-grenade throwing potential of the enemy, this being one of the major problems confronting assault elements on other raids.” Final tests resulted in flame being thrown more than 40 yards up hill. 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, App. IVf, p. 3.

351 Before the raid, different mixes of flamethrower fuels and pressures were thoroughly tested. The goal was to find out the maximum effective range of the flamethrower teams to “neutralize the enemy's hand grenade throwing ability, which was one of the major issues facing assault units in other raids.” Final tests showed that flames could be projected over 40 yards uphill. 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, App. IVf, p. 3.

Earlier that same date, two attacks had been made simultaneously by the enemy on outposts in the center regimental sector, where the 1st Marines had relieved the 7th on 10 March. At 0105 one CCF company struck in the vicinity of Hedy while a second lunged at Esther, about 1½ miles east. When a G/3/1 reconnaissance patrol operating forward of COP Esther observed enemy movement, the Marines pulled back to the outpost, alerting it to the impending attack. After a heavy incoming artillery barrage, the enemy assaulted the outpost, but when a three-hour effort failed to carry the position,261 the attackers withdrew. By that time the Chinese company which had hit COP Hedy had also broken off the attack.

Earlier that same day, the enemy launched two attacks at the same time on outposts in the central regimental sector, where the 1st Marines had taken over from the 7th on March 10. At 1:05 AM, one CCF company attacked near Hedy while a second struck at Esther, about 1.5 miles to the east. When a G/3/1 reconnaissance patrol stationed ahead of COP Esther spotted enemy movement, the Marines fell back to the outpost, warning it of the upcoming attack. After a heavy artillery bombardment, the enemy charged the outpost, but after three hours of trying to take it, they retreated. By then, the Chinese company that had attacked COP Hedy had also pulled back. 261

Actually the fight in Captain Carl R. Gray’s Company H sector, to the rear of Hedy, was mainly at the MLR, for the Chinese indulged in merely a brief fire fight at the latter outpost, bypassing it in favor of a crack at JAMESTOWN. The main line of resistance failed to yield to the enemy thrust, which was supported by 2,400 rounds of mortar and artillery fire along the MLR and outposts.

Actually, the fight in Captain Carl R. Gray’s Company H sector, behind Hedy, was mainly at the main line of resistance (MLR), since the Chinese only engaged in a short firefight at the outpost, skipping it to target JAMestown. The main line of resistance held strong against the enemy advance, which was backed by 2,400 rounds of mortar and artillery fire along the MLR and outposts.

After being thwarted by Hedy-Esther defenses, the enemy shifted his efforts westward to the 1st KMC area. The Korean regiment received the brunt of the enemy’s minor infantry probes immediately preceding the Nevada Cities battle. Late on 25 March a series of skirmishes broke out in the 1st Marines sector between one-or-two platoon size Chinese infantry forces and Marine outpost defenders. Following a quiet daylight spell on the 26th, the Chinese resumed the offensive with a probe at COP Dagmar. This coincided with what developed into a massive regimental assault unleashed against Carson, Reno, and Vegas, outposts in the 5th Marines sector, to the right. There Colonel Walt’s regiment would shortly be the target of the bloodiest Chinese attack to date on the 1st Marine Division in West Korea.

After being blocked by Hedy-Esther defenses, the enemy redirected their focus to the 1st KMC area. The Korean regiment faced the main force of the enemy's small infantry attacks right before the Nevada Cities battle. Late on March 25, a series of skirmishes erupted in the 1st Marines sector involving one or two platoon-sized Chinese infantry units and Marine outpost defenders. After a quiet day on the 26th, the Chinese launched another offensive with a probe at COP Dagmar. This coincided with what turned into a massive regimental assault unleashed against the Carson, Reno, and Vegas outposts in the 5th Marines sector to the right. There, Colonel Walt’s regiment was soon set to be the target of the deadliest Chinese attack so far on the 1st Marine Division in West Korea.


The Nevada Cities—Supporting Arms—Defense Organization at the Outposts—Chinese Attack on 26 March—Reinforcements Dispatched—Massed Counterattack the Next Day—Push to the Summit—Other Communist Probes—Three CCF Attempts for the Outpost—Vegas Consolidation Begins—Aftermath

The Nevada Cities—Support Troops—Defense Group at the Outposts—Chinese Attack on March 26—Reinforcements Sent Out—Major Counterattack the Next Day—Advance to the Summit—Other Communist Attempts—Three CCF Efforts on the Outpost—Vegas Consolidation Starts—Aftermath

The Nevada Cities352

352 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5 ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar ComdD, Apr 53, Special Action Rpt Period 26–30 Mar 53, “Battle of the Cities,” hereafter 5thMar SAR “Cities”; Maj Norman W. Hicks, “U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1952–1953 with Special Emphasis on Outpost Warfare” (M.A. thesis, Univ. of Maryland, 1962), hereafter Hicks, Outpost Warfare; 1stLt Peter Braestrup, “Outpost Warfare,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 37, no. 11 (Nov 53) and “Back to the Trenches,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 3 (Mar 55); MSgt Robert T. Fugate, “Vegas, Reno, and Carson,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 6 (Jun 53), hereafter Fugate, “Vegas.”

352 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5 ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar ComdD, Apr 53, Special Action Rpt Period 26–30 Mar 53, “Battle of the Cities,” hereafter 5thMar SAR “Cities”; Maj Norman W. Hicks, “U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1952–1953 with Special Emphasis on Outpost Warfare” (M.A. thesis, Univ. of Maryland, 1962), hereafter Hicks, Outpost Warfare; 1stLt Peter Braestrup, “Outpost Warfare,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 37, no. 11 (Nov 53) and “Back to the Trenches,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 3 (Mar 55); MSgt Robert T. Fugate, “Vegas, Reno, and Carson,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 6 (Jun 53), hereafter Fugate, “Vegas.”

As the third winter of war in Korea began to draw to an inconclusive end in late March 1953, some 28,000 Marines of the 1st Division stationed on the western front suspected that coming weeks would bring a change of pace. Consider just the matter of basic logistics. Rising temperatures, tons of melting snow, and the thawing of the Imjin River, located north of the rear Marine support and reserve areas, would turn vital road nets into quagmires to tax the patience and ingenuity of men and machinery alike.

As the third winter of the war in Korea started to come to a confusing end in late March 1953, around 28,000 Marines from the 1st Division stationed on the western front had a feeling that the coming weeks would be different. Just think about the logistics. With temperatures increasing, tons of snow melting, and the Imjin River, north of the rear Marine support and reserve areas, thawing out, essential road networks would become muddy messes that would test the patience and resourcefulness of both the soldiers and their equipment.

With the arrival of another spring in Korea there was strong likelihood that the Chinese Communists facing the Marines across a 33-mile front of jagged peaks and steep draws would launch a new offensive. This would enable them to regain the initiative and end the stalemate that had existed since October when they were rebuffed in the battle for the Hook.

With the arrival of another spring in Korea, there was a strong chance that the Chinese Communists, facing the Marines across a 33-mile stretch of rugged mountains and steep valleys, would start a new offensive. This could allow them to take back the initiative and break the stalemate that had been ongoing since October when they were pushed back in the battle for the Hook.

264

264

Winning new dominating hill or ridge positions adjacent to the Marine MLR, in that uneasy No-Mans-Land buffer zone between the CCF and UN lines, would be both militarily and psychologically advantageous to the Communists. Any new yardage or victory, no matter how small, could be exploited as leverage against the “Wall Street capitalists” when truce talks resumed at the Panmunjom bargaining table. Further, dominant terrain seized by the CCF would remain in Communist hands when the truce went into effect. Although wise to the tactics of the Chinese,353 UN intelligence had not anticipated the extent or intensity of the surprise CCF attack that opened up at 1900 on 26 March when the Communists sent battalions of 700 to 800 men against Marine outposts of 50 men.

Winning new dominant hill or ridge positions next to the Marine MLR, in that uneasy No-Man's-Land buffer zone between the CCF and UN lines, would be both militarily and psychologically beneficial for the Communists. Any new ground or victory, no matter how small, could be used as leverage against the “Wall Street capitalists” when truce talks resumed at the Panmunjom bargaining table. Additionally, any key terrain captured by the CCF would stay in Communist hands once the truce went into effect. Although familiar with the tactics of the Chinese, UN intelligence had not expected the scale or intensity of the surprise CCF attack that began at 1900 on 26 March when the Communists sent battalions of 700 to 800 men against Marine outposts of 50 men.

353 Since the first of the year division intelligence reports had given the CCF the capability of mounting limited objective attacks ranging from company to regimental size. PacFlt EvalRpt, p. 9-28, quoting 1stMarDiv PIR 860, dtd 4 Mar 53.

353 Since the beginning of the year, intelligence reports from the division had shown that the CCF could carry out limited objective attacks ranging from company to regimental size. PacFlt EvalRpt, p. 9-28, quoting 1stMarDiv PIR 860, dtd 4 Mar 53.

The late March attack centered primarily on a trio of peaks where Marines had dug in three of their key outposts—Carson, Reno, and Vegas. Rechristened from earlier, more prosaic names of Allen, Bruce, and Clarence, respectively, the Nevada Cities hill complex was located approximately 1,500 yards north of the MLR fronting the 5th Marines right sector. The trio was the province of 1/5, which manned the western (left) part of the regimental area. Ultimately, however, reverberations ran through nearly 10,000 yards of division front, from the two Berlin outposts, 1,000 yards east of Vegas, to COP Hedy, midpoint in the 1st Marines center sector. Continuous attacks and counterattacks for possession of the key Vegas outpost raged unabated for five days. The action escalated into the bloodiest fighting to date in western Korea, resulted in loss of a major outpost, and the killing or wounding of nearly 1,000 Marines. It was a partial success for the enemy, but he paid a high price for the real estate: casualties amounting to more than twice the Marine losses, including 800 known killed and a regiment that was decimated by the Marine defenders.

The late March attack mostly focused on a group of three peaks where Marines had established three of their main outposts—Carson, Reno, and Vegas. Renamed from their earlier, more mundane names of Allen, Bruce, and Clarence, the Nevada Cities hill complex was situated about 1,500 yards north of the MLR in front of the 5th Marines' right sector. This area was managed by 1/5, which occupied the western (left) part of the regimental zone. However, the effects spread across nearly 10,000 yards of the division front, from the two Berlin outposts, 1,000 yards east of Vegas, to COP Hedy, at the midpoint in the 1st Marines' center sector. Ongoing attacks and counterattacks for control of the crucial Vegas outpost continued non-stop for five days. The fighting escalated to become the deadliest conflict so far in western Korea, leading to the loss of a major outpost and nearly 1,000 Marines being killed or wounded. It was a partial win for the enemy, but they paid a steep price for the territory: casualties exceeding twice the Marine losses, including 800 confirmed deaths and a regiment that was severely damaged by the Marine defenders.

The three Nevada outposts lay just below the 38th Parallel, approximately 10 miles northeast of Panmunjom and the same distance north of the Marine railhead at Munsan-ni. Possession of the area would give the Communists improved observation of I Corps MLR positions to the west. Indeed, the enemy had cast covetous eyes265 (an ambition translated into action through his well-known creeping tactics) on the semi-circular net of outposts since the preceding summer.

The three Nevada outposts were located just south of the 38th Parallel, about 10 miles northeast of Panmunjom and the same distance north of the Marine railhead at Munsan-ni. Controlling this area would give the Communists better visibility of I Corps MLR positions to the west. In fact, the enemy had been eyeing this semi-circular network of outposts since last summer, and their ambitions turned into action through their infamous creeping tactics.265

Mindful of this, the I Corps commanding general back in September had stressed the importance of holding key terrain features that could be of major tactical value to the enemy. This included Bunker Hill and COP Reno, both considered likely targets for renewed enemy aggression in the future. Particularly, the enemy had indicated he wanted to annex Reno. The object of increasing hostile attacks since July 1952, Reno was the closest of the three Nevadas to CCF lines and tied in geographically with two of the enemy’s high ground positions—Hill 190, to the northeast, and Hill 101, overlooking the site of the destroyed village of Ungok. (See Map 22.)

Mindful of this, the I Corps commanding general back in September emphasized the importance of holding key terrain features that could be of significant tactical value to the enemy. This included Bunker Hill and COP Reno, both seen as likely targets for renewed enemy aggression in the future. Specifically, the enemy had expressed a desire to take over Reno. Since July 1952, Reno had been the focus of increasing hostile attacks and was the closest of the three Nevadas to CCF lines, geographically linked with two of the enemy’s high ground positions—Hill 190, to the northeast, and Hill 101, overlooking the site of the destroyed village of Ungok. (See Map 22.)

Reno’s companion outpost on the right, Vegas, at 175 meters, was the highest of the three while Carson, on the left flank, was nearest JAMESTOWN and also assisted in defense of Reno and Vegas. Each of the three outposts was manned by a rifle platoon (40 Marines plus two Navy hospital corpsmen), heavily reinforced with weapons company personnel. A small hill between Reno and Vegas, known as the Reno Block, further supported the Nevada Cities complex and at night was defended by a reinforced squad.

Reno’s companion outpost on the right, Vegas, at 175 meters, was the tallest of the three, while Carson, on the left side, was closest to JAMESTOWN and also helped defend Reno and Vegas. Each of the three outposts was staffed by a rifle platoon (40 Marines plus two Navy corpsmen), heavily supported by weapons company personnel. A small hill between Reno and Vegas, known as the Reno Block, also provided support for the Nevada Cities complex and was defended at night by a reinforced squad.

Since they commanded the historic Korean invasion route to Seoul, 30 air miles south, the strategic importance of the Nevada outposts had been one of the reasons for transfer of the Marines from East Korea to the West, in 1952. Both Reno and Vegas, moreover, overlooked Chinese rear area supply routes. This was a matter of special concern to the enemy at this time since he had recently doubled his stockpiling efforts and wanted to prevent UNC intelligence from learning about the build-up. Possession of the Nevada hills would enable the Chinese to harass the Marines at even closer range and—hopefully—to conduct new thrusts at the MLR which would ultimately weaken the UNC position.

Since they were situated on the historic Korean invasion route to Seoul, just 30 miles to the south, the strategic significance of the Nevada outposts was one of the reasons for transferring the Marines from East Korea to the West in 1952. Both Reno and Vegas also had a view of the Chinese supply routes in their rear area. This was particularly concerning for the enemy at the time, as they had recently increased their stockpiling efforts and wanted to keep UNC intelligence from discovering the build-up. Controlling the Nevada hills would allow the Chinese to threaten the Marines at an even closer range and—hopefully—to launch new attacks on the MLR, which would ultimately weaken the UNC position.

MAP 22 K. WHITE

MAP 22 K. WHITE

5TH MARINES MLR SECTOR

5th Marines MLR Sector

26 March 1953

March 26, 1953

In mid- and late March, the units forward in the 1st Marine Division sector of the main defense line, JAMESTOWN, remained much as they had been in recent months. Left to right, the defending components were the Kimpo Provisional Regiment, 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, 1st Korean Marine Corps Regimental Combat267 Team (1st KMC/RCT),354 1st Marines, and 5th Marines. One change had occurred when the 1st Marines relieved the 7th in the center sector earlier in the month. The latter was now in division reserve in the Camp Rose rear area. Before long, this regiment was to see more offensive action in a hotly contested, five-day period than it had during its entire recent tour on line. Overall, the 1st Marine Division continued as one of the four infantry divisions in the I Corps sector of EUSAK355 and, in fact, the month itself marked exactly one year since the Marines had arrived on the western front.

In mid- and late March, the units deployed in the 1st Marine Division sector of the main defense line, JAMESTOWN, remained largely unchanged from the previous months. From left to right, the defending units included the Kimpo Provisional Regiment, 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, 1st Korean Marine Corps Regimental Combat267 Team (1st KMC/RCT), the 1st Marines, and the 5th Marines. One change occurred when the 1st Marines took over from the 7th in the center sector earlier in the month. The 7th Marines were now in division reserve in the Camp Rose rear area. Soon, this regiment would see more action in a highly contested, five-day period than it had during its entire recent deployment. Overall, the 1st Marine Division continued to be one of the four infantry divisions in the I Corps sector of EUSAK355 and, in fact, this month marked exactly one year since the Marines had arrived on the western front.

354 The 1st KMC Regiment had been redesignated the 1st KMC/RCT on 15 Dec 52. Continuing under opcon of the 1stMarDiv, the Korean RCT consisted of four infantry battalions, plus attached artillery, armor, engineer, and service units. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8, p. 8-64.

354 The 1st KMC Regiment was renamed the 1st KMC/RCT on December 15, 1952. Continuing under operational control of the 1st Marine Division, the Korean RCT included four infantry battalions, along with attached artillery, armor, engineer, and service units. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8, p. 8-64.

355 To the Marine division right were the U.S. 2d Infantry, ROK 1st, and U.S. 7th Infantry Divisions.

355 To the Marine division right were the U.S. 2nd Infantry, ROK 1st, and U.S. 7th Infantry Divisions.

Occupying the far eastern end of the division sector, the 5th Marines, under command of Colonel Walt,356 had been assigned to the MLR since late January. The regiment manned six miles of the JAMESTOWN front. It was flanked on the left by the 1st Marines while to the right its neighbor was the 38th Regiment, 2d Infantry Division, U.S. Army.

Occupying the far eastern end of the division sector, the 5th Marines, led by Colonel Walt, had been assigned to the MLR since late January. The regiment covered six miles of the JAMETOWN front. It was flanked on the left by the 1st Marines, and on the right, its neighbor was the 38th Regiment, 2d Infantry Division, U.S. Army.

356 No stranger to the 5th Marines, Colonel Walt had served with this regiment during World War II at Guadalcanal, Cape Gloucester, and Peleliu. He had commanded, on separate occasions, 2/5 and 3/5 and had earned two Navy Crosses for combat leadership and bravery.

356 Colonel Walt was no stranger to the 5th Marines; he had served with this regiment during World War II at Guadalcanal, Cape Gloucester, and Peleliu. He had commanded 2/5 and 3/5 on different occasions and had earned two Navy Crosses for his leadership and bravery in combat.

Since 20 February, the western part of the 5th regimental sector had been held by Lieutenant Colonel Platt’s 1/5, with Companies A, B, and C on line, from left to right. The battalion area held four outposts. COP Ava was tucked down near the boundary between the 1st and 5th Regiments, while the Nevada, or Three Cities, triangle screened the central part of the latter regimental sector. A Company A squad357 outposted Ava, some 325 yards forward of the main line. Personnel of Company C were stationed on Carson and Reno. Vegas had a unique command situation. Due to its proximity to the boundary between 1/5 and 3/5, Vegas came under operational control of the former battalion while personnel charged with its defense belonged to Company H of 3/5.

Since February 20, the western part of the 5th regimental sector had been held by Lieutenant Colonel Platt’s 1/5, with Companies A, B, and C lined up from left to right. The battalion area had four outposts. COP Ava was located near the boundary between the 1st and 5th Regiments, while the Nevada, or Three Cities, triangle covered the central part of the 5th regimental sector. A squad from Company A was stationed at Ava, about 325 yards ahead of the main line. Personnel from Company C were positioned on Carson and Reno. Vegas had a unique command situation. Because of its location near the boundary between 1/5 and 3/5, Vegas fell under the operational control of the former battalion, while the personnel responsible for its defense belonged to Company H of 3/5.

357 Normally Ava was a squad-size outpost. Prior to and during the late March attacks, all 5th Marine COPs were strengthened.

357 Normally, Ava was a small base. Before and during the late March attacks, all 5th Marine COPs were reinforced.

The right flank of the regimental sector was the responsibility of 3/5, which had moved to the front on 23 March, under Lieutenant268 Colonel Robert J. Oddy. Companies H, G, and I were forward, in that order from the west, with George personnel on duty at the two reinforced squad size outposts, Berlin and East Berlin. In regimental reserve was Lieutenant Colonel James H. Finch’s 2/5.

The right side of the regimental area was managed by 3/5, which had arrived at the front on March 23, led by Lieutenant Colonel Robert J. Oddy. Companies H, G, and I were positioned forward, in that order from the west, with George personnel on duty at the two reinforced squad-sized outposts, Berlin and East Berlin. In regimental reserve was Lieutenant Colonel James H. Finch’s 2/5.

Westward along JAMESTOWN from Colonel Walt’s 5th Marines was the center regimental sector, held by the 1st Marines commanded by Colonel Adams. (See Map 23.) The extreme western part of the regimental line came to a juncture with KMC territory just as it looped around the critical Panmunjom peace corridor. This left battalion sector was manned by Lieutenant Colonel George A. Gililland’s 2/1. Companies E, D, B from 1/1,358 and F were forward, outposting COPs 1, 2, Marilyn, Kate, and Ingrid. To the right 3/1, commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Ernest G. Atkin, defended Hedy, Bunker, Ginger, Esther, Dagmar, and Corinne, with Companies H, G, and I on line. Occupying the area adjacent to the secondary defense installations, WYOMING and the western part of the KANSAS line, was Lieutenant Colonel Frederick R. Findtner’s reserve 1/1. And located to the rear of the 1st and 5th Regiments was the 7th Marines (Colonel Haffner), in reserve,359 and the division rear support units, also south of the Imjin.

Westward along JAMESTOWN from Colonel Walt’s 5th Marines was the main regimental sector, held by the 1st Marines under Colonel Adams. (See Map 23.) The far western part of the regimental line met KMC territory right as it curved around the crucial Panmunjom peace corridor. This left battalion sector was staffed by Lieutenant Colonel George A. Gililland’s 2/1. Companies E, D, B from 1/1,358 and F were in the front, manning COPs 1, 2, Marilyn, Kate, and Ingrid. To the right, 3/1, led by Lieutenant Colonel Ernest G. Atkin, defended Hedy, Bunker, Ginger, Esther, Dagmar, and Corinne, with Companies H, G, and I in line. Occupying the area next to the secondary defense installations, WYOMING and the western section of the Kans. line, was Lieutenant Colonel Frederick R. Findtner’s reserve 1/1. Positioned behind the 1st and 5th Regiments was the 7th Marines (Colonel Haffner), in reserve,359 and the division rear support units, also located south of the Imjin.

358 Company B from 1/l had been assigned to operational control of 2/1 when the latter unit relieved 1/7 on line on 10 March. The increased personnel enabled the battalion to position a company-size detachment at the strategic high ground, COP 2, that overlooked Panmunjom and the critical truce talk site.

358 Company B from 1/l was put in charge of operations for 2/1 when that unit replaced 1/7 on the front line on March 10. The extra personnel allowed the battalion to set up a company-sized team at the crucial high ground, COP 2, which overlooked Panmunjom and the important truce negotiation site.

359 Regimental command changed 27 March when Colonel Glenn C. Funk, former commanding officer of the 1st Shore Party Battalion, was assigned to the 7th Marines, succeeding Colonel Haffner, who became G-2.

359 Regimental command changed on March 27 when Colonel Glenn C. Funk, the former commanding officer of the 1st Shore Party Battalion, was assigned to the 7th Marines, taking over from Colonel Haffner, who moved to the G-2 position.

Supporting Arms360

360 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv, 11thMar, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar 53; 1st MAW, MAGs-12, -33 ComdDs, Mar 53.

360 Unless otherwise specified, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv, 11thMar, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar 53; 1st MAW, MAGs-12, -33 ComdDs, Mar 53.

In support of the three infantry regiments were the artillerymen, guns, and howitzers of Colonel Mills’ 11th Marines. Two of its three light battalions, 1/11 and 3/11, provided 105mm direct fires to the 5th and 1st Marines, respectively. The general support battalion was 2/11, prepared to reinforce the fires of 1/11. The regimental medium battalion, 4/11, was in general support of the division, as was the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery. To the southwest of the division270 sector, the 75mm guns of the 1st KMC Artillery Battalion, also attached to the 11th Marines, were in direct support of the 1st KMC/RCT. Newly formed the preceding month, the 1st Provisional Antiaircraft Artillery-Automatic Weapons Platoon had the mission of defending two of the Imjin River Bridges—Freedom and Spoonbill—in the division sector.

In support of the three infantry regiments were the artillerymen, guns, and howitzers of Colonel Mills’ 11th Marines. Two of its three light battalions, 1/11 and 3/11, provided 105mm direct fire support to the 5th and 1st Marines, respectively. The general support battalion was 2/11, ready to back up the firepower of 1/11. The regimental medium battalion, 4/11, was in general support of the division, along with the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery. To the southwest of the division270 sector, the 75mm guns of the 1st KMC Artillery Battalion, also attached to the 11th Marines, were providing direct support to the 1st KMC/RCT. Newly formed the month before, the 1st Provisional Antiaircraft Artillery-Automatic Weapons Platoon was tasked with defending two of the Imjin River Bridges—Freedom and Spoonbill—within the division sector.

MAP 23 K. WHITE

MAP 23 K. WHITE

1ST MARINES MLR SECTOR

1ST MARINES MLR AREA

(Division Center)

(Division Hub)

26 March 1953

March 26, 1953

In addition to organic and attached units of the 11th, four I Corps artillery components, located within division territory, further reinforced 11th Marines capabilities. The 623d Field Artillery Battalion, with batteries in the 5th and 7th Marines sectors, like 4/11 consisted of 155mm howitzers. Three heavy artillery units were also available for counterbattery missions. These 8-inch howitzers belonged to Battery C of the 17th Field Artillery, Battery B of the 204th Field Artillery, and the 158th Field Artillery Battalion. These Army units were assigned to general support of I Corps, reinforcing Marine fires on call, and were under operational control of the 159th Field Artillery Battalion Group.

In addition to the organic and attached units of the 11th, four I Corps artillery units, based within the division area, further boosted the 11th Marines' capabilities. The 623rd Field Artillery Battalion, with batteries in the 5th and 7th Marines sectors, like 4/11, consisted of 155mm howitzers. Three heavy artillery units were also available for counter-battery missions. These 8-inch howitzers were part of Battery C of the 17th Field Artillery, Battery B of the 204th Field Artillery, and the 158th Field Artillery Battalion. These Army units were assigned to provide general support to I Corps, enhancing Marine firepower on demand, and were under the operational control of the 159th Field Artillery Battalion Group.

Active armored support for the division’s ground troops during March was provided by three of the four companies from the 1st Tank Battalion. Company A’s M-46s, flame tanks, and retrievers, well forward in the right sector, were in direct support of the 5th Marines; Company D tanks were assigned to the 1st Marines. Company B functioned as the forward reserve unit, ready to move into firing positions on the MLR if the tactical situation called for it. The rear reserve unit, Company C, conducted refresher training and performed equipment checks on the rest of the battalion tanks. The battalion commander, since May 1952, was Lieutenant Colonel John I. Williamson.

Active armored support for the division’s ground troops during March was provided by three of the four companies from the 1st Tank Battalion. Company A’s M-46s, flame tanks, and retrievers, positioned in the right sector, were directly supporting the 5th Marines; Company D tanks were assigned to the 1st Marines. Company B acted as the forward reserve unit, ready to move into firing positions on the Main Line of Resistance if the tactical situation required it. The rear reserve unit, Company C, conducted refresher training and checked the equipment on the rest of the battalion tanks. The battalion commander, since May 1952, was Lieutenant Colonel John I. Williamson.

The 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, with a personnel strength of 6,400, was located throughout Korea. Wing headquarters, Marine Air Control Group 2, and Marine Air Group 33, with its F9F day jet fighters and the VMJ-1 photo reconnaissance squadron operated from K-3, Pohang. VMF(N)-513, with all weather jet fighters, flew out of K-8, Kunsan, on the west coast, 105 miles below Seoul. MAG-12 and its squadrons of attack ADs and Corsairs was relatively near the 1st Marine Division sector, at K-6, Pyongtaek, 30 miles southeast of Inchon. Marine Wing Service Squadron 1, with its heavy maintenance capability, remained at Itami, Japan.

The 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, which had around 6,400 personnel, was spread throughout Korea. The wing headquarters, Marine Air Control Group 2, and Marine Air Group 33, equipped with F9F day jet fighters and the VMJ-1 photo reconnaissance squadron, operated from K-3, Pohang. VMF(N)-513, flying all-weather jet fighters, was based at K-8, Kunsan, located 105 miles south of Seoul on the west coast. MAG-12 and its squadrons of attack ADs and Corsairs were relatively close to the 1st Marine Division sector, at K-6, Pyongtaek, 30 miles southeast of Inchon. Marine Wing Service Squadron 1, capable of heavy maintenance, was stationed at Itami, Japan.

Tactical control had been altered radically the previous month271 when the Fifth Air Force had relinquished its command of Marine pilots and planes and they returned to operational control of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing for the first time since the early days of the war. Direction of the helicopters in HMR-161 and VMO-6 used in transport and reconnaissance missions had for some time been closer to home; both squadrons were under 1st Marine Division operational control. HMR-161 was based at A-17, in the vicinity of the 1st Marine Division command post. VMO-6, a composite unit consisting of single-engine OE-1 observation planes and a copter section of the HTL-4 and the new larger HO5S-1 craft, was located at A-9, three miles south of division headquarters. The squadron provided regularly scheduled helicopter evacuation of night frontline combat-casualties, artillery spotting flights, and airborne control of air strikes. Both squadrons performed routine liaison and reconnaissance, administrative, and resupply flights.

Tactical control changed dramatically the previous month271 when the Fifth Air Force handed back command of Marine pilots and planes, returning them to operational control of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing for the first time since the early days of the war. The direction of helicopters in HMR-161 and VMO-6, which were used for transport and reconnaissance missions, had been more locally focused for a while; both squadrons were under the operational control of the 1st Marine Division. HMR-161 was stationed at A-17, near the 1st Marine Division command post. VMO-6, a combined unit made up of single-engine OE-1 observation planes and a copter section featuring HTL-4 and the new larger HO5S-1 craft, was located at A-9, three miles south of division headquarters. The squadron regularly scheduled helicopter evacuations of night frontline combat casualties, conducted artillery spotting flights, and managed airborne control of air strikes. Both squadrons carried out routine liaison and reconnaissance, administrative, and resupply flights.

Defense Organization on the Outposts361

361 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1/5, 3/5 ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities.”

361 Unless otherwise stated, the content in this section comes from: 1/5, 3/5 ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities.”

Carson (Hill 27), furthest west of the three Nevada Cities was, at 820 yards, also nearest the Marine main line of resistance. It overlooked enemy terrain to the northwest and dominated an important approach from that same direction—the Seoul road. Organized as a perimeter defense position, Carson security was oriented toward two major Chinese strongpoints. These were the twin-peaked Ungok Hill mass (31-31A), approximately 650 yards west of the Seoul road which lay between Ungok and Carson, and Hill 67 (Arrowhead), an equal distance due northwest. Other critical features in the immediate Carson vicinity included, on the right, the west finger of Reno; the ridgeline south from Reno to a point known as “Ambush Alley,” in the vicinity of enemy Hill 47; and the ridgeline approaches by the two listening posts—Fox finger and George finger. (See Map 24.)

Carson (Hill 27), the westernmost of the three Nevada Cities, was also the closest to the Marine main line of resistance at 820 yards. It overlooked enemy territory to the northwest and controlled a crucial approach from that direction—the Seoul road. Set up as a perimeter defense position, Carson's security was focused on two major Chinese strongholds. These were the twin-peaked Ungok Hill mass (31-31A), about 650 yards west of the Seoul road, positioned between Ungok and Carson, and Hill 67 (Arrowhead), an equal distance directly northwest. Other key features near Carson included, on the right, the west finger of Reno; the ridgeline extending south from Reno to a spot known as “Ambush Alley,” near enemy Hill 47; and the ridgeline approaches by the two observation posts—Fox finger and George finger. (See Map 24.)

MAP 24 K. WHITE

MAP 24 K. WHITE

COP CARSON

COP CARSON

March 1953

March 1953

Little cover or concealment existed, other than that offered by the trenchline and a cave used as living quarters. Four weapons positions—light machine guns and Browning automatic rifles—covered273 main enemy avenues of approach. These and two listening posts were each manned by two men after 1800 and throughout the night. Of Carson’s customary strength of 38 (1 officer and 37 enlisted), 28 stood watch and worked on fortifications at night. A six-man security team was on duty during the day. All posts connected by land line to battalion headquarters, where a 24-hour phone watch was maintained. Sound power phones and radios also provided communication with the company CP.

Little cover or concealment was available, aside from what the trenchline and a cave used for living quarters provided. Four weapon positions—light machine guns and Browning automatic rifles—secured the main enemy approaches. These, along with two listening posts, were each staffed by two men after 6 PM and throughout the night. Out of Carson’s usual strength of 38 (1 officer and 37 enlisted), 28 were on watch and working on fortifications at night. A six-man security team was on duty during the day. All posts were connected by landline to battalion headquarters, where a 24-hour phone watch was kept. Sound power phones and radios also facilitated communication with the company CP.

Nearly 350 yards of trenchline encircled the outpost. Most was in good condition, five or more feet deep and two feet wide. The main trench on the reverse slope was in spots shallow, only three to five feet, and a new trench was being dug. Fields of fire for small arms protection were considered good, although some of the 28 fighting holes were overly close to culvert and sandbag overheading, which prevented complete fire coverage of forward slopes. Adequate fire support could be given along the southern slope of the west finger extending from COP Reno, which was also mutually supporting with that of the Reno Block. Forward observer teams for the 60mm and 81mm mortars provided observation for supporting arms. The arsenal of weapons at Carson included 4 A-4 light machine guns, 2 flamethrowers, 2 3.5-inch rocket launchers, 9 Browning automatic rifles, 36 M-1 rifles, 2 carbines, 2 pistols, and 4 grenade launchers.

Nearly 350 yards of trenchline surrounded the outpost. Most of it was in good shape, five or more feet deep and two feet wide. The main trench on the reverse slope was shallow in some spots, only three to five feet, and a new trench was being dug. The fields of fire for small arms protection were considered decent, although a few of the 28 fighting holes were too close to the culvert and sandbag overhead, which limited complete fire coverage of the forward slopes. Adequate fire support could be provided along the southern slope of the west finger extending from COP Reno, which was also mutually supportive with that of the Reno Block. Forward observer teams for the 60mm and 81mm mortars offered observation for supporting arms. The arsenal of weapons at Carson included 4 A-4 light machine guns, 2 flamethrowers, 2 3.5-inch rocket launchers, 9 Browning automatic rifles, 36 M-1 rifles, 2 carbines, 2 pistols, and 4 grenade launchers.

Some 450 yards northeast, COP Reno (Hill 25) was dug in on a ridgeline that fronted enemy Hill 25A (also known as Hill 150), immediately north. Approximately 1,600 yards away from the MLR, Reno was the central of the three outposts and also the one most distant from Marine lines. West to east, critical terrain consisted of five enemy positions—Hills 31, 67, 25A, 190, and 153—and friendly companion outpost Vegas, on the right flank. (See Map 25.)

Some 450 yards northeast, COP Reno (Hill 25) was set up on a ridgeline facing enemy Hill 25A (also called Hill 150), which was directly to the north. About 1,600 yards from the MLR, Reno was the middle of the three outposts and also the farthest from Marine lines. From west to east, the key terrain included five enemy positions—Hills 31, 67, 25A, 190, and 153—and the friendly outpost Vegas on the right flank. (See Map 25.)

Two main trenches led into the outpost, a reverse slope fortification. The forward trench, perpendicular to the ridgeline fronting the position, was approximately 20 yards long and 8 feet deep. The second, to the rear and about the same length, traversed the outpost in an east-west direction. Approaching from the entrance, or “Gate” of the MLR, the two trenches joined on the left, forming a 90 degree angle. A cave, located in the arc between the trenches, provided overcrowded living quarters where personnel slept either on the dirt floor or atop sandbags, since there were no bunkers at Reno. Ammunition supplies, as well as the corpsman’s first aid facilities, were cached in the cave.

Two main trenches led into the outpost, which was built on a reverse slope. The forward trench, running perpendicular to the ridgeline in front of the position, was about 20 yards long and 8 feet deep. The second trench, located to the rear and roughly the same length, went through the outpost from east to west. When approaching from the entrance, or “Gate” of the MLR, the two trenches met on the left, creating a 90-degree angle. A cave situated in the area between the trenches offered crowded living quarters where personnel slept either on the dirt floor or on sandbags, since there were no bunkers at Reno. Ammunition supplies and the corpsman's first aid facilities were stored in the cave.

274

274

MAP 25 K. WHITE

MAP 25 K. WHITE

COP RENO

COP RENO

March 1953

March 1953

275

275

A major blocking position, some 100 yards south, and to the rear of Reno itself was covered by troops posted in the trenchline. Left of the forward trench, protective wire was placed across the topographical crest. This left finger had good observation to Ungok and Arrowhead but also served as an approach to Carson. Most likely enemy approach, however, was considered to be the ridgeline from Hill 150, on the north. The Seoul road, rear trenchline, and valley to the right were alternate approaches. Twenty-four hour security at Reno included an automatic rifleman at the Gate, at Post 1, on the forward trench, and Post 2, which was at the extreme right of the rear trench. Ten machine gunners were also detailed as night watch on the guns. During the daytime they were responsible for maintenance of ammunition and weapons which consisted of 18 M-1 rifles, 6 BARs, 5 A-4 LMGs, 2 flamethrowers, 1 carbine, and 7 pistols.

A key blocking position, about 100 yards south and behind Reno, was manned by troops stationed in the trench line. To the left of the forward trench, protective wire was set up along the topographical crest. This left finger provided good visibility towards Ungok and Arrowhead but also acted as a route to Carson. However, the most likely enemy approach was considered to be the ridgeline from Hill 150 to the north. The Seoul road, the rear trench line, and the valley on the right offered alternate routes. Around-the-clock security at Reno included an automatic rifleman at the Gate, stationed at Post 1 on the forward trench, and at Post 2, located at the far right of the rear trench. Ten machine gunners were also assigned as the night watch on the guns. During the day, they were in charge of maintaining ammunition and weapons, which included 18 M-1 rifles, 6 BARs, 5 A-4 LMGs, 2 flamethrowers, 1 carbine, and 7 pistols.

The biggest defense problem at Reno stemmed from restricted fields of fire. Able gun, for instance, covered the rear of the topographical crest and Hills 31 and 67, on the left. But dead space masked its effectiveness practically from the base of Hill 67 to the gun itself. The Baker gun, protecting the reverse slope, had a lateral firing range of from 10 to 30 feet. Charlie gun maintained an unlimited sector of fire, approximately 180 degrees, and Dog gun covered the rear. As there were no prepared machine gun positions, they were fired from the parapet protecting both the fighting holes and firing positions in the trenchline. Two fighting holes were manned by BARs and two were used as machine gun posts.

The biggest defense issue at Reno came from limited fields of fire. The Able gun, for example, covered the back of the topographical crest and Hills 31 and 67 on the left. However, dead space greatly limited its effectiveness from the base of Hill 67 to the gun itself. The Baker gun, which defended the reverse slope, had a lateral firing range of just 10 to 30 feet. The Charlie gun had an unlimited firing sector of about 180 degrees, and the Dog gun covered the rear. Since there were no prepared machine gun positions, they were fired from the parapet protecting both the fighting holes and firing positions along the trench line. Two fighting holes had BARs stationed in them, and two were set up as machine gun posts.

Customarily 40 to 43 men were on duty at COP Reno. In fact this number had been viewed dubiously as being “far too many to man defensive positions at any one time,” by the commanding officer of the 1/5 Weapons Company during a survey earlier in the month, noting that “about 20 could adequately defend the position.”362 A six-man force was detailed as a permanent working party for the improvement of fortifications. Sound power phones linked all positions and field phones connected the forward observer with gun positions. Overall, for proper defense, Reno depended heavily upon support fires from Carson and Vegas, on its right flank. Morale was276 considered “very good to excellent” with Reno personnel being relieved every 8 to 10 days.

Typically, 40 to 43 men were stationed at COP Reno. In fact, the commanding officer of the 1/5 Weapons Company had previously expressed skepticism about this number, stating it was "far too many to man defensive positions at any one time," and noted that "about 20 could adequately defend the position."362 A six-man team was assigned as a permanent working group for fortification improvements. All positions were linked by sound power phones, and field phones connected the forward observer with the gun positions. Overall, for effective defense, Reno relied heavily on support fire from Carson and Vegas on its right flank. Morale was considered "very good to excellent," with Reno personnel being rotated every 8 to 10 days.

362 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, Inspection of COP Reno Report, by Capt Henry A. Checklou, dtd 12 Mar 53, p. 4.

362 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, Inspection of COP Reno Report, by Capt Henry A. Checklou, dtd 12 Mar 53, p. 4.

Vegas (Hill 21), the highest of the three outposts, was located approximately 1,310 yards in front of the MLR. Observation of the surrounding terrain from the east slope of enemy Hill 190 on the north, clockwise to the ridge south of Reno had been pronounced “excellent” on an inspection trip made earlier the day the outposts were attacked. From north to south this observation included in its 180-degree sweep, enemy hill mass 57 to the right, friendly outpost Berlin, the MLR, key Marine defense highpoints, Hills 229 and 181 in the 1st Marines rear sector, and intervening terrain. (See Map 26.)

Vegas (Hill 21), the highest of the three outposts, was located about 1,310 yards in front of the MLR. During an inspection earlier on the day the outposts were attacked, the view of the surrounding terrain from the east slope of enemy Hill 190 to the north, around to the ridge south of Reno, was described as “excellent.” This observation, from north to south, covered a 180-degree area that included enemy hill mass 57 to the right, friendly outpost Berlin, the MLR, key Marine defensive highpoints, Hills 229 and 181 in the 1st Marines' rear sector, and the terrain in between. (See Map 26.)

The north-south ridge leading to COP Reno masked the view from Vegas on the west. To the north full observation was partially limited by outpost Reno itself and enemy Hills 150, 153, and 190. The latter was particularly strategic for two reasons. First, it shielded a major assembly area. And, although the Chinese had observation of the entire right battalion MLR from Hill 190 on the north, Vegas prevented enemy close-in view of Marine rear areas. It also dominated the approach to a major Marine observation point, Hill 126, to the rear of the front lines in the western part of the 3/5 sector.

The north-south ridge leading to COP Reno blocked the view from Vegas on the west. To the north, the full view was partially blocked by outpost Reno itself and enemy Hills 150, 153, and 190. The latter was especially important for two reasons. First, it covered a major assembly area. And, even though the Chinese could see the entire right battalion MLR from Hill 190 to the north, Vegas stopped the enemy from getting a close view of the Marine rear areas. It also had a dominant position over the approach to a key Marine observation point, Hill 126, located behind the front lines in the western part of the 3/5 sector.

Organized as a perimeter defense, Vegas was surrounded by 250 yards of trenchline. The forward, or north trench, averaged four feet in depth but deepened to about eight feet as it progressed to the rear. The most solidly constructed part was the western portion. A center communication trench was in good condition between the rear and topographical crest. From this point to the forward trench its depth decreased to about four feet. The trench leading back to the MLR, about five feet deep and two wide, was in good condition. A total of 13 fighting holes had been constructed.

Organized as a perimeter defense, Vegas was surrounded by 250 yards of trench. The forward, or north trench, averaged four feet deep but got to about eight feet deep as it went towards the back. The strongest part was on the western side. A central communication trench was in good shape between the back and the highest point. From this spot to the forward trench, its depth decreased to around four feet. The trench leading back to the MLR was about five feet deep and two feet wide and was also in good condition. A total of 13 fighting holes had been built.

Outpost troops, numbering approximately 40, consisted of six fire teams, heavy weapons and machine gunners, two 81mm mortar crews and two artillery observers, one corpsman, and a wireman at night. Strength was reduced during the day, with replacements to make up the normal complement arriving on position early each evening.

Outpost troops, around 40 in total, were made up of six fire teams, heavy weapons and machine gunners, two 81mm mortar crews, and two artillery observers, along with one corpsman and a wireman at night. Their numbers were lower during the day, with replacements arriving early each evening to restore the usual personnel count.

MAP 26 K. WHITE

MAP 26 K. WHITE

COP VEGAS

COP Vegas

March 1953

March 1953

Major approaches to Vegas included the large draws to the west and north of the outpost, the ridgeline to the COP from Hill 153 to the northwest, and the rear trenchline. Several ancillary trenchlines to the east tended to reinforce this latter approach. A hindrance to the enemy, however, was the slope leading into the draw west of the278 outpost. For security purposes, the perimeter was divided into three sectors, each manned by two fire teams augmented by heavy weapons personnel. The outpost detachment stood nighttime posts on a 50 percent basis and remained within the several living bunkers or other shelters during daylight hours because of heavy shelling and sniper fire. Incessant enemy pressure at the exposed outpost made it expedient to rotate infantry Marines at Vegas every three days and observers, at the end of four or five days.

Major approaches to Vegas included the main routes leading west and north of the outpost, the ridgeline to the COP from Hill 153 to the northwest, and the rear trenchline. Several additional trenchlines to the east helped strengthen this last approach. However, a challenge for the enemy was the slope leading into the draw west of the 278 outpost. For security reasons, the perimeter was divided into three sectors, each staffed by two fire teams supported by heavy weapons personnel. The outpost detachment stood night shifts at 50 percent strength and stayed within various living bunkers or other shelters during the daytime due to heavy shelling and sniper fire. Constant enemy pressure at the exposed outpost made it necessary to rotate infantry Marines at Vegas every three days and observers every four or five days.

Weapons on position included two flamethrowers, one 3.5-inch bazooka, four machine guns, three pistols, and other small arms. Fields of fire at Vegas, rated fair to good, were generally restricted due to the proximity of overheading. Most of the light machine guns had plunging fields of fire except for the approach along the ridgeline from Hill 153, covered by grazing fire. A fighting hole to the left of Able Gate, which overlooked the trenchline leading to the MLR, was manned during the day. No other sentries or listening posts were in effect. Nine sound power phones were operative. Three were located in the CP bunker (connecting to C/1/5, G/3/5, and the CP net); one, each, at the four main posts, the rear Able Gate, and the cave.

Weapons in position included two flamethrowers, one 3.5-inch bazooka, four machine guns, three pistols, and other small arms. The fields of fire at Vegas, rated fair to good, were generally limited due to the close proximity of overhead cover. Most of the light machine guns had plunging fields of fire, except for the approach along the ridgeline from Hill 153, which was covered by grazing fire. A fighting hole to the left of Able Gate, overlooking the trench line leading to the MLR, was manned during the day. No other sentries or listening posts were active. Nine sound power phones were in operation. Three were located in the CP bunker (connecting to C/1/5, G/3/5, and the CP net), and one was at each of the four main posts, the rear Able Gate, and the cave.

Other than periodic work being done by 10 Korean Service Corps personnel in clearing out the trenches, no construction was in process at Vegas. KSCs, lugging their traditional A-frames and guided by Marines, also ran a nightly “supply train” to Vegas as they did to Carson and Reno. Sufficient personnel manned the outpost for adequate defense, although an inspecting officer opined that the “one 3.5 rocket launcher on position did not appear to be necessary for defense of this type position.”279363

Other than occasional work by 10 Korean Service Corps personnel clearing the trenches, there wasn't any construction happening at Vegas. The KSCs, carrying their traditional A-frames and guided by Marines, also operated a nightly “supply train” to Vegas, just like they did to Carson and Reno. There were enough personnel stationed at the outpost for solid defense, although an inspecting officer remarked that the “one 3.5 rocket launcher in position didn't seem necessary for the defense of this type of position.”279363

363 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, Inspection of COP Vegas Report, by Capt Henry A. Checklou, on 26 Mar, dtd 31 Mar 53, p. 4.

363 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, Inspection of COP Vegas Report, by Capt Henry A. Checklou, on 26 Mar, dated 31 Mar 53, p. 4.

The Chinese Assault of 26 March364

364 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 26–27 Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 883, dtd 27 Mar 53; 1st MAW PIRs 86-53, dtd 27 Mar 53, 87-53, dtd 28 Mar 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/1, 2/1, 3/1, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar 53; 1stMar SAR, 18–28 Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; Fugate, “Vegas.”

364 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 26–27 Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 883, dtd 27 Mar 53; 1st MAW PIRs 86-53, dtd 27 Mar 53, 87-53, dtd 28 Mar 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/1, 2/1, 3/1, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar 53; 1stMar SAR, 18–28 Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; Fugate, “Vegas.”

Until the final days of March, the CCF units opposite the 5th Marines had shown little aggressiveness. Regimental reports had officially cited Chinese actions as having been “extremely limited” other than their expected resistance to patrols and the Marine ITEM raid staged earlier in the month by the 1/5 two-platoon unit on Hill 31A, part of the Ungok complex. The enemy posture had, in fact, been described as one “reluctant to meet our patrols except in their positions.”365

Until the last days of March, the CCF units across from the 5th Marines had shown very little aggression. Official reports from the regimental level stated that Chinese actions had been “extremely limited,” other than their expected resistance to patrols and the Marine ITEM raid that the 1/5 two-platoon unit launched earlier in the month on Hill 31A, part of the Ungok complex. The enemy's stance had actually been described as “unwilling to confront our patrols except from their positions.”365

365 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, dtd 4 Apr 53, p. 2.

365 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, dtd 4 Apr 53, p. 2.

A regimental patrol policy early in March established as SOP a minimum of four reconnaissance and two combat patrols in each MLR battalion sector daily. Nevertheless, 3/5 had reported no contact with the enemy for the three-day period prior to the attack which was launched at 1900 on 26 March. Since the middle of the month, 1/5 had conducted nearly a dozen night combat patrols and ambushes in one- and two-squad strength to test the enemy in the Carson-Reno-Vegas area. Terminology of the operation orders read that the Marines were to make contact, capture prisoners, and deny the ground to the enemy, an injunction that—in view of events shortly to transpire—was to turn out more prophetic than anticipated.

A patrol policy set by the regiment in early March established standard operating procedures requiring at least four reconnaissance patrols and two combat patrols in each MLR battalion sector every day. However, 3/5 reported no contact with the enemy during the three days leading up to the attack that started at 1900 on 26 March. Since the middle of the month, 1/5 had carried out nearly a dozen night combat patrols and ambushes with one- and two-squad teams to engage the enemy in the Carson-Reno-Vegas area. The operation orders specified that the Marines were to make contact, capture prisoners, and deny the ground to the enemy, a directive that—in light of what was about to happen—would prove to be more prophetic than expected.

That last Thursday in March 1953 was clear, almost unseasonably warm. Just after darkness had settled down over the Korean ridges, gullies, MLR, outposts, and rice paddies, the enemy suddenly made his presence known. Up until that time it had been an average day of activity, and there had been no especially ominous overtones to the start of the night.

That last Thursday in March 1953 was clear, almost unseasonably warm. Just after darkness fell over the Korean ridges, gorges, MLR, outposts, and rice fields, the enemy suddenly made his presence known. Until that point, it had been a typical day of activity, and there hadn't been any particularly threatening signs as the night began.

Suddenly, at 1900, small arms and machine gun fire cracked from enemy strongholds on Hills 44, 40, 35, and 33, and tore into the left and center part of the 1/5 sector. Almost immediately, a heavy mortar and artillery preparation of 15 minutes duration exploded all along the 5th Marines MLR. A Chinese rifle platoon and half a dozen machine guns on Hill 140, about 500 yards west of Kumgok, directed additional fire on the sector.

Suddenly, at 1900, gunfire from small arms and machine guns erupted from enemy positions on Hills 44, 40, 35, and 33, hitting the left and center areas of the 1/5 sector. Almost immediately, a heavy mortar and artillery barrage lasting 15 minutes detonated all along the 5th Marines MLR. A Chinese rifle platoon and a handful of machine guns on Hill 140, roughly 500 yards west of Kumgok, added more fire to the sector.

280

280

At the same time 5th Marines outposts Carson and Reno, each manned by a reinforced rifle platoon from C/1/5, came under attack from Chinese mortars and 76mm artillery. Approximately 1,200 mortar rounds struck COP Carson by 1920. As men of D/2/5, some of whom had been detailed to Carson earlier that night for an ambush, reported, “one round per second from Chinese 60mm and 82mm landed in or around [our] position during the first 20 minutes of the engagement. Thereafter, one round was received every 40 seconds until about 2200.”366 Interdiction fires also raked Marine rear areas and supply routes. Counterbattery fire struck Marine direct support artillery positions in the 5th’s regimental sector while heavy shelling of the MLR and its battalion CPs shattered wire communication between those installations and their advance outposts.

At the same time, the 5th Marines outposts Carson and Reno, each staffed by a reinforced rifle platoon from C/1/5, came under attack from Chinese mortars and 76mm artillery. By 1920, around 1,200 mortar rounds had hit COP Carson. The men of D/2/5, some of whom had been sent to Carson earlier that night for an ambush, reported, “one round per second from Chinese 60mm and 82mm landed in or around [our] position during the first 20 minutes of the engagement. After that, one round was received every 40 seconds until about 2200.” 366 Interdiction fire also targeted Marine rear areas and supply routes. Counterbattery fire hit Marine direct support artillery positions in the 5th’s regimental sector, while heavy shelling of the MLR and its battalion CPs disrupted wire communication between those installations and their forward outposts.

366 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, p. 10.

366 1/5 ComdD, Mar 53, p. 10.

Within ten minutes, Vegas, furthest east of the four OPs in 1/5 territory, became the object of serious enemy attention. Outposts Berlin and East Berlin, meanwhile, still further east in the 3/5 sector proper were also engaged by fire from hostile small arms and mortars from Chinese occupying Hills 15 (Detroit), 13 (Frisco), and 98 to the northeast. As the coordinated fire attack raged throughout the 5th Marines regimental front, preparatory fire and diversionary probes hit the 1st Marines sector. Outposts Hedy, Bunker, Esther, and Dagmar, in the center regimental area, were struck by small arms, mortars, and artillery shells a few minutes before 1900. Platoon and squad strength limited attacks were conducted against Dagmar, Hedy, and Esther, and enemy units were sighted moving in front of the KMC, further west along the MLR.

Within ten minutes, Vegas, the furthest east of the four OPs in the 1/5 territory, became the focus of serious enemy attention. Outposts Berlin and East Berlin, even further east in the 3/5 sector, were also under fire from hostile small arms and mortars coming from the Chinese occupied Hills 15 (Detroit), 13 (Frisco), and 98 to the northeast. As the coordinated fire attack continued across the 5th Marines regimental front, preparatory fire and diversionary probes hit the 1st Marines sector. Outposts Hedy, Bunker, Esther, and Dagmar, located in the central regimental area, were hit by small arms, mortars, and artillery shells just before 1900. Limited attacks involving platoon and squad strength were launched against Dagmar, Hedy, and Esther, and enemy units were observed moving in front of the KMC, further west along the MLR.

At precisely 1910, a force of 3,500 Chinese from the 358th Regiment, 120th Division, 46th CCF Army began to swarm down from Ungok, Arrowhead, Hill 25A, and Hill 190 and launched a massive assault in regimental strength against the 5th Marines sector. (Map 27.) Elements of six companies from three battalions converged on the area from three directions. Two enemy platoons of the 1st Company, 1st Battalion from Ungok struck Carson while one infantry company each, initially, began a direct assault on Reno and Vegas. Units from the 3d Company, 1st Battalion, from Arrowhead and Hill 29, crossed the Seoul road to hit Reno in a direct frontal281 assault. Elements of the 7th Company, 3d Battalion moved down from Hill 190, a mile north, to encircle the left flank of Reno and thus strike from the rear of the Marine position. Other Chinese soldiers of the 8th Company, 3d Battalion, supported by the 9th Company, moved some 500 yards south of their ridgeline positions on Hill 25A and 155 immediately north of Vegas to attack the outpost head-on.

At exactly 1910, a force of 3,500 Chinese from the 358th Regiment, 120th Division, 46th CCF Army started to come down from Ungok, Arrowhead, Hill 25A, and Hill 190 and launched a major attack in regimental strength against the 5th Marines’ sector. (Map 27.) Elements from six companies across three battalions converged on the area from three different directions. Two enemy platoons from the 1st Company, 1st Battalion coming from Ungok attacked Carson, while one infantry company each initially began a direct assault on Reno and Vegas. Units from the 3d Company, 1st Battalion from Arrowhead and Hill 29 crossed the Seoul road to hit Reno in a straightforward frontal assault. Elements of the 7th Company, 3d Battalion moved down from Hill 190, a mile to the north, to encircle the left flank of Reno and attack from the rear of the Marine position. Other Chinese soldiers from the 8th Company, 3d Battalion, supported by the 9th Company, advanced about 500 yards south from their ridgeline positions on Hill 25A and 155 immediately north of Vegas to assault the outpost directly.

Another enemy unit, the 2d Company, 1st Battalion, swept south from Hill 57A and made diversionary probes of the two most remote outposts of the entire 1st Marine Division line, Berlin and East Berlin in the 3d Battalion sector. These two smaller positions, each manned by a reinforced squad-size detachment from G/3/5, were to be successful in driving off the enemy’s less determined efforts there with a rain of small arms, mortar, and artillery fires.

Another enemy unit, the 2nd Company, 1st Battalion, moved south from Hill 57A and carried out distraction missions at the two most distant outposts of the entire 1st Marine Division line, Berlin and East Berlin in the 3rd Battalion sector. These two smaller positions, each staffed by a reinforced squad-size team from G/3/5, successfully pushed back the enemy’s less determined attacks there with a barrage of small arms, mortar, and artillery fire.

As the enemy regiment advanced toward its objectives in a coordinated three-pronged attack, Marine artillery fired protective boxes and VT on the outposts and routes of approach from the west, north, and east. Defending infantry also called down organic 60mm and 81mm mortar barrages. Actually, prior to the Chinese onslaught at 1900, 1/11, the direct support battalion (Lieutenant Colonel Olin W. Jones, Jr.) for the 5th Marines, began a registration and had laid its howitzer fires on the active area. The artillery regiment had also set up conference calls linking its four organic battalions and supporting Army units. The fire plan for the 11th Marines provided for its three light battalions (1/11, 2/11, and 3/11) to cover enemy approaches and assembly areas, deliver protective boxing and VT fires requested by the outposts, and furnish countermortar missions called in by forward observers. Medium battalions (4/11 and the 623d Field Artillery) were to reinforce defensive fires and destroy hostile mortars and artillery emplacements. Heavy 8-inch howitzer support (Battery C, 17th FA Battalion and Battery A, of the 204th) would silence enemy counterbattery weapons.

As the enemy regiment moved toward its targets in a coordinated three-pronged attack, Marine artillery fired protective boxes and VT rounds at the outposts and routes approaching from the west, north, and east. Defending infantry also called in their own 60mm and 81mm mortar strikes. In fact, before the Chinese assault began at 1900, 1/11, the direct support battalion (Lieutenant Colonel Olin W. Jones, Jr.) for the 5th Marines, started its initial registration and had positioned its howitzer fires on the active area. The artillery regiment had also set up conference calls connecting its four organic battalions and supporting Army units. The fire plan for the 11th Marines was designed for its three light battalions (1/11, 2/11, and 3/11) to cover enemy approaches and assembly areas, deliver protective boxing and VT fires requested by the outposts, and provide countermortar missions called in by forward observers. Medium battalions (4/11 and the 623d Field Artillery) were tasked with reinforcing defensive fires and taking out enemy mortars and artillery positions. Heavy 8-inch howitzer support (Battery C, 17th FA Battalion and Battery A, of the 204th) was assigned to silence enemy counterbattery weapons.

As it happened on the night of the 26th, Marine tanks, in addition to artillery, were also registered before the time of the actual attack. Eleven of Captain Hunter’s Company A tanks had earlier rumbled into firing position on the MLR to provide mechanized support for an infantry raid scheduled at dawn the next morning.

As it turned out on the night of the 26th, Marine tanks, along with artillery, were also noted before the actual attack. Eleven of Captain Hunter’s Company A tanks had previously rolled into firing position on the MLR to offer mechanized support for an infantry raid planned for dawn the next morning.

MAP 27 K. WHITE

MAP 27 K. WHITE

ATTACKS ON 5TH MARINES FRONT

Attacks on 5th Marines front

26–30 MARCH 1953

26–30 March 1953

Despite this immediate response of Marine fire support, the Chinese invaders outnumbered the platoons holding the outposts by a 20 to283 1 ratio. The sheer weight of numbers was the decisive factor. By 1935 the enemy had penetrated the lower trenches of both Carson and Reno. An hour after the onset of the attack, at 2000, the Marines were throwing back Chinese forces with bayonets, knives, rifles, and bare fists in the close, heavy fighting at Carson. There, where 54 men had been on duty at the time of initial attack, the outpost was successfully holding off the Communists. Four reinforcing squads quickly dispatched by battalion were designed to further strengthen the position. At 2000, just when D/1/5 and C/1/5 relief squads were leaving for the outpost, the Chinese unexpectedly began to release their grip on Carson as they concentrated on the two more isolated COPs, Reno and Vegas, that were further from the MLR.

Despite the quick reaction from Marine fire support, the Chinese invaders outnumbered the platoons stationed at the outposts by a ratio of 20 to 283. The overwhelming number of troops was the deciding factor. By 1935, the enemy had breached the lower trenches of both Carson and Reno. An hour after the attack started, at 2000, the Marines were pushing back the Chinese forces with bayonets, knives, rifles, and their bare fists in the intense close combat at Carson. There, where 54 men were on duty when the initial attack began, the outpost was managing to hold off the Communists successfully. Four reinforcement squads were quickly sent by battalion to strengthen the position even more. At 2000, just as the D/1/5 and C/1/5 relief squads were departing for the outpost, the Chinese unexpectedly loosened their hold on Carson as they focused on the two more isolated COPs, Reno and Vegas, which were farther from the MLR.

No other attempt was made by the enemy to occupy Carson that night or the next day. Barrage fires gradually ceased as the enemy began to withdraw about 2135. Sporadic bursts of his 60mm and 82mm mortars and 76mm guns, however, continued to rock the position until midnight.

No other attempts were made by the enemy to take over Carson that night or the following day. Barrage fire gradually stopped as the enemy started to pull back around 9:35 PM. However, intermittent bursts from their 60mm and 82mm mortars and 76mm guns continued to shake the position until midnight.

Developments at Reno and Vegas, by 2000, were vastly more ominous. At Reno, two companies of CCF soldiers thrust into the position from a frontal and flank attack. Within a half hour they made their way into the trench defenses. Although VT fires placed on the outposts and WP flare shells outlined the enemy for the gunners, Chinese in overpowering numbers continued to batter the Marine post. Due to the lack of fighting trenches, bunkers, and to limited fields of fire, Reno defenders fell back on a cave defense within a half hour of the assault.367

Developments at Reno and Vegas by 2000 were much more serious. At Reno, two companies of CCF soldiers launched a frontal and flank attack. In less than half an hour, they broke through the trench defenses. Even though VT fire targeted the outposts and WP flare shells highlighted the enemy for the gunners, the Chinese, in overwhelming numbers, continued to hammer the Marine post. Because of the inadequate fighting trenches, bunkers, and limited fields of fire, the defenders at Reno retreated to a cave defense just half an hour into the assault.367

367 At both Reno and Vegas the Marines had moved into the caves for protection from VT fire. This was the plan in event of an overwhelming enemy attack. In contrast, the detachment at Carson fought from covered fighting holes and employed the cave there only to get their wounded out of direct fire. 5thMar SAR “Cities,” pp. 2–3.

367 At both Reno and Vegas, the Marines had taken shelter in the caves to protect themselves from VT fire. This was the strategy in case of a massive enemy assault. In contrast, the unit at Carson fought from protected fighting positions and used the cave only to evacuate their wounded from the line of fire. 5thMar SAR “Cities,” pp. 2–3.

A message received at 2030, requesting more VT rounds and reinforcements, indicated that the enemy had sealed all entrances to the cave and that the men were suffering from lack of air. Of the 40 Company C Marines on the outpost at the time of attack an hour and a half earlier, only 7 were then reported still able to fight. More illumination to enable friendly machine guns and rockets to chop up the enemy was furnished by artillery and a flare plane that arrived on station at 2205. Two Marine tanks, in position behind Reno, were alerted and put their 90mm fires to good use on the enemy and his weapons emplacements.

A message received at 8:30 PM, asking for more VT rounds and reinforcements, indicated that the enemy had blocked all entrances to the cave and that the men were struggling with a lack of air. Of the 40 Marines from Company C stationed at the outpost when the attack happened an hour and a half earlier, only 7 were still able to fight. Artillery and a flare plane that arrived at 10:05 PM provided more light to help friendly machine guns and rockets take out the enemy. Two Marine tanks, positioned behind Reno, were put on alert and effectively used their 90mm fire against the enemy and their weapon sites.

284

284

Meanwhile, at Vegas, the situation was also deteriorating. More than a hundred Chinese had moved up under the perimeter of exploding shells and Marine defensive fires into the lower trenches by 1950, less than an hour after the enemy’s first volley. Ten minutes later, the Marines were forced to give way to the overwhelming number of enemy soldiers which began to swarm over the outpost.

Meanwhile, in Vegas, things were also getting worse. Over a hundred Chinese soldiers had advanced under the barrage of exploding shells and Marine gunfire into the lower trenches by 1950, less than an hour after the enemy’s first attack. Ten minutes later, the Marines had to retreat in the face of the overwhelming number of enemy troops that began to swarm over the outpost.

In addition to the sudden force and onslaught of the enemy, communication difficulties also plagued Marine detachments on the outposts, particularly at Vegas. Enemy mortar and artillery, aimed at the mainline CPs, had wrecked the ground lines. As early as 1940, communications between the 1st Battalion CP and Vegas went dead and continued to be broken despite repeated attempts to reestablish contact. Carson and Reno also had wire troubles about this time, but radio contact was shortly established. For the most part, operational reports and orders during the night and early morning hours were sent over company and battalion tactical nets. The intensity of the Chinese fire was not restricted just to forward positions; the 1/5 CP, a mile south of the MLR, at one point received up to 100 rounds per minute.

In addition to the sudden force and attack from the enemy, communication issues also hit the Marine units on the outposts, especially at Vegas. Enemy mortars and artillery targeting the main command posts had destroyed the ground lines. As early as 1940, communications between the 1st Battalion command post and Vegas went silent and stayed broken despite multiple efforts to reconnect. Carson and Reno faced similar wire problems around this time, but they soon established radio contact. Most operational reports and orders during the night and early morning were sent over company and battalion tactical networks. The intensity of the Chinese fire wasn't just limited to the front positions; the 1/5 command post, a mile south of the main line of resistance, at one point took in up to 100 rounds per minute.

Reinforcements Dispatched368

368 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 26–27 Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 883, dtd 27 Mar 53; 1st MAW PIR 86-53, dtd 27 Mar 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11 ComdDs, Mar 53; 1stMar SAR; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; VMO-6, HMR-161 ComDs, Mar 53; MacDonald, POW; USMC Biog.

368 Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section comes from: 1st Mar Div ComdD, Mar 53; 1st Mar Div G-3 Journal, March 26–27, 1953; 1st Mar Div PIR 883, dated March 27, 1953; 1st MAW PIR 86-53, dated March 27, 1953; 1st Mar, 5th Mar, 7th Mar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11 ComdDs, Mar 53; 1st Mar SAR; 5th Mar SAR “Cities”; VMO-6, HMR-161 ComDs, Mar 53; MacDonald, POW; USMC Biography.

While the Marines on the outposts were trying to drive off the enemy, reinforcements back at the MLR and in the reserve ranks quickly saddled up. A F/2/5 advance platoon dispatched to Reno at 2015 by way of the Reno Block was ambushed near Hill 47 an hour later by two enemy squads which had moved south to cut off Marine reinforcements. After a fire exchange, the platoon made its way to the blocking position. Another relief unit, from Company C, 1st Battalion, that jumped off for Reno 15 minutes later had poorer luck. The men had scarcely gone a half mile before being shelled. After briefly taking cover the Marines moved out again, only to draw fire from the enemy at Hill 47. Advancing for a third time, the Company C two-squad unit was again halted by fire from two hostile285 platoons. By this time 10 Marines had been wounded and evacuated.

While the Marines at the outposts were trying to push back the enemy, reinforcements back at the MLR and in the reserve ranks quickly mounted up. An advance platoon from F/2/5 sent to Reno at 2015 through the Reno Block was ambushed near Hill 47 an hour later by two enemy squads that had moved south to cut off Marine reinforcements. After exchanging fire, the platoon made its way to the blocking position. Another relief unit from Company C, 1st Battalion, that set out for Reno 15 minutes later had worse luck. The men had barely gone half a mile before getting shelled. After briefly taking cover, the Marines moved out again, only to come under fire from the enemy at Hill 47. Advancing for a third time, the Company C two-squad unit was stopped again by fire from two enemy platoons. By this time, 10 Marines had been wounded and evacuated.

A D/2/5 reinforcement platoon ordered to Vegas, at 2129, encountered strong opposition in the Block vicinity, but it threw back the enemy in hand-to-hand fighting and prevented him from gaining fire supremacy at the position. Leading units of F/2/5, meanwhile, had been ordered to operational control of 1/5 to augment the earlier Company C platoon at the Block and then move north with them to Reno. After being issued ammunition and hand grenades at the Company C supply point, the “F” 1st Platoon left the MLR at 2227, with the 2d Platoon filing out in column 400 yards behind them. Under a constant rain of 76mm artillery and 82mm and 122mm mortar shells—and with casualties for one platoon reaching as high as 70 percent within minutes—the F/2/5 men fought their way into the trenches at the Block. Here they joined the depleted ranks of Company C which had established a base of fire. Despite the incessant barrage of Chinese incoming that continued to inflict heavy casualties, the Marines maintained their precarious grip on the Block and cleared out large numbers of Chinese attempting to infiltrate the trenches and approaches from the north and south to the Marine position.

A D/2/5 reinforcement platoon ordered to Vegas, at 9:29 PM, encountered strong resistance in the Block area, but they pushed back the enemy in close combat and prevented them from gaining fire supremacy at the position. Meanwhile, leading units of F/2/5 had been placed under the operational control of 1/5 to support the earlier Company C platoon at the Block and then move north with them to Reno. After receiving ammunition and hand grenades at the Company C supply point, the “F” 1st Platoon left the main line of resistance at 10:27 PM, with the 2nd Platoon following in a column 400 yards behind them. Under a steady barrage of 76mm artillery and 82mm and 122mm mortar shells—and with casualties in one platoon rising as high as 70 percent within minutes—the F/2/5 Marines fought their way into the trenches at the Block. Here, they joined the weakened ranks of Company C, which had established a base of fire. Despite the constant shelling from the Chinese that continued to inflict heavy casualties, the Marines held onto the Block and cleared out large numbers of Chinese trying to infiltrate the trenches and approaches from the north and south to the Marine position.

While the Reno and Vegas relief units were pinned down at the Block, the situation at the outposts remained critical. Throughout the night new waves of Communist soldiers poured out from their positions behind Chogum-ni, Hills 31 and 31D. When a company of enemy troops were observed at 2100 massing near Chogum-ni for a new assault, it was quickly disposed of by Marine artillery and Company A tankers. At Reno where the immediate situation was the most grim, a message at 2145 reported the enemy still in the trenches, trying to dig down into the cave while the Marines were attempting to work their way out by hand. The final report from Reno received late that night, about 2300, was weak and could not be understood.

While the Reno and Vegas relief units were stuck at the Block, the situation at the outposts was still critical. Throughout the night, new waves of Communist soldiers kept coming out from their positions behind Chogum-ni, Hills 31 and 31D. When enemy troops were seen at 2100 gathering near Chogum-ni for a new attack, Marine artillery and Company A tankers quickly took care of them. At Reno, where the immediate situation was the worst, a message at 2145 reported that the enemy was still in the trenches, trying to dig down into the cave while the Marines were working to get out by hand. The final report from Reno, received late that night around 2300, was weak and difficult to understand.

At Vegas, meanwhile, communications failure continued to complicate defensive measures at the outpost. Because of this, on the order of regimental commander, Colonel Walt, operational control had been transferred, at 2119, from 1/5 to 3/5. Three minutes before midnight all contact with Vegas was lost. As with Reno, reinforcements sent out with the mission of buttressing the Vegas detachment had been delayed. When it became evident that the Company D platoon had been pinned down at the Block, a platoon from E/2/5 jumped off at 2323 for the Vegas position.

At Vegas, communication failures continued to complicate defensive measures at the outpost. Because of this, on the order of regimental commander, Colonel Walt, operational control was transferred at 2119 from 1/5 to 3/5. Three minutes before midnight, all contact with Vegas was lost. Similar to Reno, reinforcements sent out to support the Vegas detachment had been delayed. When it became clear that the Company D platoon had been pinned down at the Block, a platoon from E/2/5 headed out at 2323 for the Vegas position.

286

286

Shored up to reinforced company strength, the composite unit at the Block had prepared to move on for the ultimate relief of C/1/5 forces at Reno. Chinese firepower and troops continued to lash the position, however. There seemed to be no limit to the number of reserve troops the enemy could throw into the attack. At 2157, two Chinese platoons had hit the Block. Twenty minutes later, another two platoons struck. By 2300, the Marines had repulsed three attacks, numbering more than 200 troops, amid a continuing withering avalanche of bullets and shells. Shortly before midnight, a full enemy company had deployed south from Reno to the Block, but had been largely cut down by friendly 90mm tank fire and VT rounds from 1/11. Reinforced and reorganized, the Marines again prepared for a counterpunch on Reno.

Shored up with reinforced company strength, the composite unit at the Block had gotten ready to support the C/1/5 forces at Reno. However, Chinese firepower and troops continued to bombard the position. There seemed to be no end to the number of reserve troops the enemy could send into the fight. At 2157, two Chinese platoons attacked the Block. Twenty minutes later, another two platoons hit. By 2300, the Marines had successfully defended against three attacks involving more than 200 troops, all while facing a relentless barrage of bullets and shells. Shortly before midnight, a full enemy company moved south from Reno to the Block, but they were mostly taken down by friendly 90mm tank fire and VT rounds from 1/11. With reinforcements and a new plan, the Marines got ready to counterattack Reno.

By midnight on the 26th, after five blistering hours of battle—to develop into five days of intense conflict and continuing counterattacks—the early efforts of the enemy were partly successful. Two of the Nevada Hill outposts had fallen, and Marine attempts to strengthen them were initially being thwarted by Chinese troops that had overflowed the Block and southward toward the MLR. COP Carson was holding. But the enemy was in control of Reno and Vegas and was using the Reno position to mass troops and firepower to further brace his continuing assault on Vegas.

By midnight on the 26th, after five intense hours of fighting—which would stretch into five days of heavy conflict and ongoing counterattacks—the enemy made some initial gains. Two of the Nevada Hill outposts had fallen, and Marine efforts to reinforce them were being blocked by Chinese troops that had crossed the Block and moved south toward the MLR. COP Carson was holding strong. However, the enemy controlled Reno and Vegas, using the Reno position to gather troops and firepower for their continued assault on Vegas.

Initially, the 5th Marines had expected to launch an immediate counterattack to regain Reno. In the early hours of the 27th, however, it became apparent this plan would have to be revised. Reinforcing elements from the 5th Marines, composed largely of F/2/5, had been unable to mount out effectively from the Block for Reno. At 0144, the commanding officer of Company F, Captain Ralph L. Walz, reported he had one platoon left. Between then and 0220 his diminishing unit had rallied for attack three times. It had successively engaged the enemy in fire fights, one of 30 minutes’ duration, evacuated its wounded, regrouped, and then had come under heavy incoming again. Countermortar fire had been requested and delivered on active enemy positions at Arrowhead, Hills 29, 45, and 21B, some 500 yards northwest of Vegas.

Initially, the 5th Marines planned to launch an immediate counterattack to reclaim Reno. However, in the early hours of the 27th, it became clear that this plan needed to change. Reinforcements from the 5th Marines, mainly made up of F/2/5, couldn't effectively move out from the Block toward Reno. At 1:44 AM, the commander of Company F, Captain Ralph L. Walz, reported that he had only one platoon left. Between that time and 2:20 AM, his diminishing unit attempted to launch an attack three times. They engaged the enemy in several firefights, one lasting 30 minutes, evacuated their wounded, regrouped, and then came under heavy fire again. Counter-mortar fire had been requested and was delivered on active enemy positions at Arrowhead, Hills 29, 45, and 21B, about 500 yards northwest of Vegas.

But as the Marines girded their defending platoon at the Block to company-plus size, the Chinese had done likewise, throwing in continuous rounds of new mortar attacks and additional troops. When, at 0246, another hostile company was seen spreading south from287 Reno toward the Block, the 1st Battalion directed artillery fires on the enemy and ordered its troops to disengage and return to the MLR. By 0300, early efforts to retake Reno were suspended. Relief forces from Companies F and C were on their way back to the battalion area. Ground action had ceased.

But as the Marines prepared their defending platoon at the Block to be larger than a company, the Chinese did the same, launching continuous mortar attacks and bringing in more troops. When, at 2:46 AM, another enemy company was seen moving south from 287 Reno toward the Block, the 1st Battalion ordered artillery fire on the enemy and instructed its troops to pull back to the MLR. By 3:00 AM, early attempts to retake Reno were called off. Relief forces from Companies F and C were on their way back to the battalion area. Ground action had stopped.

During these early attempts to rescue Reno and its defenders on the night of 26–27 March, Marine elements had struggled for more than four hours trying to get to Reno, but the enemy had completely surrounded it. At Reno itself, the Marine in command of the outpost when the Chinese struck, Second Lieutenant Rufus A. Seymour, machine gun platoon commander of C/1/5, had been taken prisoner along with several of his men. Of the Marines originally on duty there, all but five had been killed. Casualties of the Reno reinforcing units were later estimated by the regimental commander as being “as high as 35 percent, with many dead.”369

During the early efforts to save Reno and its defenders on the night of March 26-27, Marine units struggled for over four hours to reach Reno, but the enemy had completely surrounded it. At Reno itself, the Marine in charge of the outpost when the Chinese attacked, Second Lieutenant Rufus A. Seymour, commander of the machine gun platoon in C/1/5, was taken prisoner along with several of his men. Out of the Marines who were originally on duty there, only five survived. The battalion commander later estimated the casualties among the Reno reinforcement units to be “as high as 35 percent, with many dead.”369

369 Statement by LtGen Lewis W. Walt, as cited in Eloise Engle, Medic (New York, N.Y.: John Day, May 1967), p. 211.

369 Statement by LtGen Lewis W. Walt, as cited in Eloise Engle, Medic (New York, N.Y.: John Day, May 1967), p. 211.

A 21-year-old Navy hospital corpsman from Alexandria, Virginia,370 attached to a Company C relief platoon from 1/5, helped save many Marine lives that night in the Reno Block area. He was Hospitalman Francis C. Hammond, who lost his own life but was awarded posthumously the nation’s highest honor for bravery under fire. For more than four exhausting hours the young hospitalman helped others to safety, even though he had been struck early in the fighting and was hobbling around with a leg injury. When his unit was ordered to withdraw from its attack against a strongly fortified CCF position, Hammond skillfully directed the evacuation of wounded Marines and remained behind to assist other corpsmen. Shell fragments from a mortar blast struck him, this time, fatally.

A 21-year-old Navy hospital corpsman from Alexandria, Virginia, 370 attached to a Company C relief platoon from 1/5, helped save many Marine lives that night in the Reno Block area. He was Hospitalman Francis C. Hammond, who lost his own life but was awarded posthumously the nation’s highest honor for bravery under fire. For over four exhausting hours, the young hospitalman helped others to safety, even though he had been hit early in the fighting and was moving around with a leg injury. When his unit was ordered to withdraw from its attack against a heavily fortified CCF position, Hammond skillfully directed the evacuation of wounded Marines and stayed behind to help other corpsmen. Shell fragments from a mortar blast struck him, fatally this time.

370 In 1956, a newly-completed school in Alexandria, Virginia was named the Francis C. Hammond High School and dedicated in his memory.

370 In 1956, a recently finished school in Alexandria, Virginia was named Francis C. Hammond High School and dedicated in his honor.

The Vegas reinforcing units, in those dark early hours of the 27th, had come closer to their objective. Shortly after midnight two platoons, composed of elements from D/2/5 and C/1/5, had reached a point 400 yards from the outpost, in the vicinity of the entrance to the communication trench. When the enemy threw in powerful new assault forces at Vegas, F/2/7, a company from the regimental reserve, came under operational control of 3/5 and moved out from the MLR to reinforce the position. By 0300 the first relief platoon,288 despite heavy and continuing Chinese barrages, got to within 200 yards of the outpost. At this time, however, it was found that the enemy was in control of Vegas as well as Reno. Marines from D/2/5, C/1/5, E/2/5, and F/2/7 relief forces, on order, began to pull back to the MLR at 0417. Initial attempts to regain control of the two outposts were temporarily halted, and instead it was decided to launch a coordinated daylight attack.

The Vegas reinforcement units, in the early hours of the 27th, had gotten closer to their goal. Shortly after midnight, two platoons made up of elements from D/2/5 and C/1/5 reached a point 400 yards from the outpost, near the entrance to the communication trench. When the enemy launched a powerful new assault at Vegas, F/2/7, a company from the regimental reserve, came under the operational control of 3/5 and moved out from the main line of resistance to reinforce the position. By 0300, the first relief platoon,288 despite heavy and ongoing Chinese bombardments, got within 200 yards of the outpost. At this point, however, it was found that the enemy was in control of both Vegas and Reno. Marines from D/2/5, C/1/5, E/2/5, and the F/2/7 relief forces began to pull back to the main line of resistance at 0417, as ordered. Initial attempts to regain control of the two outposts were temporarily stalled, and it was decided to plan a coordinated daylight attack instead.

At about the same time, 0430, the boundary between 1/5 and 3/5 was moved 250 yards westward to give 3/5 total responsibility for Vegas, although operational control had been transferred seven hours earlier the previous night.

At around the same time, 4:30 AM, the line between 1/5 and 3/5 was shifted 250 yards to the west to give 3/5 full responsibility for Vegas, even though operational control had been handed over seven hours earlier the night before.

Enemy casualties for the eight hours of action were heavy. An estimated 600 Chinese had been wounded and killed. Marine losses were also heavy. In the action First Lieutenant Kenneth E. Taft, Jr., Officer-in-Charge at Vegas, was killed and, as it was later learned, some of his H/3/5 defenders had been captured by the Chinese. By midnight the two line battalions, 3/5 and 1/5, had reported a total of nearly 150 casualties,371 and this figure did not include those wounded or killed from the relief platoons and companies being shuttled into action from the 2/5 reserve battalion. One platoon from E/2/5 had arrived at the Company C supply point about 0210 and, together with a provisional unit from Headquarters and Service Company, 1/5, began to evacuate casualties in front of the MLR. By 0325, a total of 56 wounded had passed through the C/1/5 aid station and a cryptic entry in the G-3 journal noted that “more who are able are going back to assist in evacuation of casualties.”

Enemy casualties during the eight hours of fighting were significant. An estimated 600 Chinese were either wounded or killed. Marine losses were also substantial. In this engagement, First Lieutenant Kenneth E. Taft, Jr., who was the Officer-in-Charge at Vegas, was killed. It was later discovered that some of his defenders from H/3/5 had been captured by the Chinese. By midnight, the two line battalions, 3/5 and 1/5, reported a total of nearly 150 casualties, and this number did not account for those wounded or killed among the relief platoons and companies being sent in from the 2/5 reserve battalion. One platoon from E/2/5 arrived at the Company C supply point around 2:10 AM and, along with a provisional unit from Headquarters and Service Company, 1/5, began to evacuate casualties in front of the Main Line of Resistance (MLR). By 3:25 AM, a total of 56 wounded had passed through the C/1/5 aid station, and a brief note in the G-3 journal indicated that “more who are able are going back to help with the evacuation of casualties.”

371 1/5 and 3/5 ComdDs, Mar 53. At this time 1/5 had suffered 5 killed, 30 wounded, 21 wounded not evacuated, 39 missing (personnel at Reno), or 95. Reports from 3/5 showed 1 killed, 8 wounded/evacuated, and 40 missing (at Vegas), or 49.

371 1/5 and 3/5 ComdDs, Mar 53. At this time, 1/5 had experienced 5 fatalities, 30 injuries, 21 injured personnel not evacuated, and 39 missing (individuals at Reno), totaling 95. Reports from 3/5 indicated 1 fatality, 8 injured/evacuated, and 40 missing (at Vegas), totaling 49.

Similar recovery efforts were being made at the same time in the 3d Battalion. Two alternate routes for evacuation were in effect. From a checkpoint located just south of the MLR in the H/3/5 sector, casualties were taken to the Company H supply point and thence to the battalion aid station, or else to the KSC camp from which they were evacuated to the 1st Battalion aid station. VMO-6 and HMR-161 helicopters flew out the critically-injured to USS Haven and Consolation hospital ships at Inchon Harbor and transported blood from supply points to Medical Companies A, E, and C289 forward stations. Excepting the original personnel killed or missing at Reno and Vegas, 1st Battalion forces from Companies C and F dispatched to Reno had returned to the MLR by 0445. Vegas units, ordered to disengage later than the Reno reinforcements, were back by 0530.

Similar recovery efforts were happening at the same time in the 3rd Battalion. Two alternate evacuation routes were in place. From a checkpoint just south of the MLR in the H/3/5 sector, casualties were taken to the Company H supply point and then to the battalion aid station, or to the KSC camp, from where they were evacuated to the 1st Battalion aid station. VMO-6 and HMR-161 helicopters flew out the critically injured to the USS Haven and Consolation hospital ships at Inchon Harbor and transported blood from supply points to Medical Companies A, E, and C forward stations. Except for the original personnel killed or missing at Reno and Vegas, 1st Battalion forces from Companies C and F sent to Reno had returned to the MLR by 0445. Vegas units, ordered to pull out later than the Reno reinforcements, were back by 0530.

Diversionary probes by the Chinese during the night of the 26th at the 3/5 right flank outposts Berlin and East Berlin, as well as in the 1st Marines sector, had been beaten back by the Marines. Following the preassault fire at 1900, a CCF company had sent two platoons against Berlin and one against satellite East Berlin, both manned by Company G. These reinforced squad outposts, both only about 325 yards forward of the MLR, had stymied the enemy’s attempts. Boxing fires and VT on approach routes had forced the Chinese to retreat at 2115. Ten minutes later Company G reported that communication, which had temporarily gone out, had been restored. One squad dispatched by the 3d Battalion to Berlin and a second, to East Berlin an hour later, further buttressed the companion positions.

Diversionary attacks by the Chinese during the night of the 26th at the 3/5 right flank outposts Berlin and East Berlin, as well as in the 1st Marines sector, were repelled by the Marines. After the preassault fire at 1900, a CCF company sent two platoons against Berlin and one against satellite East Berlin, both manned by Company G. These fortified squad outposts, only about 325 yards ahead of the MLR, thwarted the enemy's efforts. Coordinated fires and VT on the approach routes forced the Chinese to pull back at 2115. Ten minutes later, Company G reported that communication, which had temporarily been lost, was back up. A squad sent by the 3rd Battalion to Berlin and another to East Berlin an hour later further strengthened the positions.

Action in the 1st Marines center regimental sector had also been relatively brief. Immediately after the 1900 mortar and artillery preparation, the Chinese in company strength attempted to penetrate outposts Hedy, Bunker, Esther, and Dagmar. Shelling had been heaviest at Dagmar and, shortly after 1900, two squads of Chinese began to assault the outpost with automatic weapons and satchel charges. Machine guns positioned on enemy Hills 44, 114, and 116 and small arms fire from Hill 108 supported the attack. The enemy was hurled back at all places except Dagmar where approximately 25 Chinese breached the wire entanglement.

Action in the 1st Marines' center regimental sector was also fairly short. Right after the 1900 mortar and artillery preparation, the Chinese, in company strength, tried to break through the outposts Hedy, Bunker, Esther, and Dagmar. The shelling was heaviest at Dagmar, and shortly after 1900, two squads of Chinese began to assault the outpost with automatic weapons and satchel charges. Machine guns on enemy Hills 44, 114, and 116, along with small arms fire from Hill 108, supported the attack. The enemy was pushed back everywhere except Dagmar, where about 25 Chinese penetrated the wire entanglement.

Two hours of intense, close fighting in the trenches followed as the 27 defending Marines, directed by outpost commander Second Lieutenant Benjamin H. Murray of I/3/1, strongly resisted the invaders. More than 300 rounds of mortar and artillery fire supported the action. A counterattack from the MLR led by the I/3/1 executive officer, Second Lieutenant John J. Peeler, restored the position, and at 2120 the CCF finally withdrew. Less determined efforts had been made by the enemy at Esther and Bunker. By 2200 the Chinese had departed from the scene there, too. Altogether, the 1st Marines sector skirmishes had cost the CCF 10 killed, 20 estimated killed, and 17 estimated wounded to Marine casualties of 4 killed and 16 wounded.

Two hours of intense, close fighting in the trenches followed as the 27 defending Marines, led by outpost commander Second Lieutenant Benjamin H. Murray of I/3/1, vigorously resisted the attackers. Over 300 rounds of mortar and artillery fire supported the action. A counterattack from the MLR, led by I/3/1's executive officer, Second Lieutenant John J. Peeler, regained control of the position, and at 2120, the CCF finally withdrew. The enemy made less determined efforts at Esther and Bunker. By 2200, the Chinese had left those areas as well. In total, the skirmishes in the 1st Marines sector had cost the CCF 10 killed, 20 estimated killed, and 17 estimated wounded, compared to Marine casualties of 4 killed and 16 wounded.

290

290

Massed Counterattack the Next Day372

372 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 27 Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIR Nos. 882–4, dtd 26–28 Mar 53; 1st MAW PIR 86-53, dtd 27 Mar 53, 87-53, dtd 28 Mar 53, 88-53, dtd 29 Mar 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; 11thMar “Artillery in the Defense of Outpost Vegas, 26–30 Mar 53,” hereafter 11thMar SAR “Arty Defense”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-212, -323; VMFs-115, -311, VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Mar 53; Fugate, “Vegas”; USMC Biog.

372 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Journals, March 27, 1953; 1stMarDiv PIR Nos. 882–4, dated March 26–28, 1953; 1st MAW PIR 86-53, dated March 27, 1953, 87-53, dated March 28, 1953, 88-53, dated March 29, 1953; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1st Tank Battalion ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; 11thMar “Artillery in the Defense of Outpost Vegas, March 26–30, 1953,” hereafter referred to as 11thMar SAR “Artillery Defense”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-212, -323; VMFs-115, -311, VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Mar 53; Fugate, “Vegas”; USMC Biography.

While the 5th Marines reorganized during the morning hours of the 27th for a new attack to recapture the lost outposts, General Pollock ordered mortars, tanks, and artillery, including rockets, to neutralize the Reno and Vegas areas and enemy approaches.

While the 5th Marines regrouped in the morning of the 27th for a new assault to take back the lost outposts, General Pollock directed mortars, tanks, and artillery, including rockets, to target the Reno and Vegas areas and enemy approaches.

From the time of the 1900 attack the preceding evening until the temporary break in fighting eight hours later, at 0300, early estimates indicated 5,000 rounds of enemy mixed fire had been received in the “Wild” sector (code name for the 5th Marines, and appropriate it was for this late-March period). And this did not include the vast number of shells that had fallen on the three Nevada COPs. During the same period 1/11, in direct support of the 5th, reported it had delivered some 4,209 rounds on the enemy. Throughout the early hours, two battalions from the 11th Marines continued to pound away at Reno and Vegas with neutralizing fires to soften enemy positions, deter his resupply efforts, and silence those mortars and batteries that were troubling the Marines.

From the time of the attack on the 1900 the previous evening until the temporary pause in fighting eight hours later, at 0300, initial estimates showed that the "Wild" sector (the code name for the 5th Marines, which was fitting for this late-March period) had received about 5,000 rounds of mixed enemy fire. This total didn’t even account for the huge number of shells that had landed on the three Nevada COPs. During the same time, 1/11, directly supporting the 5th, reported it had fired around 4,209 rounds at the enemy. Throughout those early hours, two battalions from the 11th Marines kept targeting Reno and Vegas with neutralizing fire to weaken enemy positions, disrupt their resupply efforts, and silence the mortars and batteries that were bothering the Marines.

By 0330 observation planes from VMO-6 had made 28 flights behind enemy lines which enabled artillery spotters to direct nearly 60 fire missions on CCF active artillery, mortars, and self-propelled guns. From nightfall on the 26th through 0600 the following morning a total of 10,222 rounds of all calibers had been fired by Marine cannoneers supporting the 1st Division in its ground battles from Berlin to Hedy.

By 0330, observation planes from VMO-6 had completed 28 flights behind enemy lines, allowing artillery spotters to direct nearly 60 fire missions against CCF active artillery, mortars, and self-propelled guns. From sunset on the 26th until 0600 the next morning, Marine cannoneers supporting the 1st Division fired a total of 10,222 rounds across all calibers in their ground battles from Berlin to Hedy.

Revised intelligence reports from the 5th Marines S-2, Major Murray O. Roe, meanwhile, indicated that between 1900 on the 26th and 0400 the next day the Chinese had sent 14,000 rounds of mixed mortar and artillery crashing into Marine positions. It was also determined that a reinforced regiment had initially hit the Carson, Reno, and Vegas posts.

Revised intelligence reports from the 5th Marines S-2, Major Murray O. Roe, showed that between 7 PM on the 26th and 4 AM the next day, the Chinese had fired 14,000 rounds of mixed mortar and artillery into Marine positions. It was also found that a reinforced regiment had initially targeted the Carson, Reno, and Vegas posts.

Early on the 27th, at 0345 as the 5th Marines prepared for the291 counterattack, the division reserve, 2/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Alexander D. Cereghino), was placed under operational control of the 5th Marines. (Previously put on alert the battalion had moved into an assembly area behind 1/5 shortly after midnight, and its F/2/7 had taken part in the predawn relief attempt.) During the early morning hours a section of Skyknights, from Lieutenant Colonel Conley’s night fighter squadron, VMF(N)-513, had made radar controlled bombing runs to strike CCF artillery positions in the Hill 190 area and enemy troops at Hill 98. Precisely at 0650, friendly Panthers from VMF-115 began arriving on station to help the neutralizing artillery fire on Reno and Vegas. Originally, a dawn ground attack had been envisioned for Reno, but that was delayed to wait for air support.

Early on the 27th, at 3:45 AM, as the 5th Marines got ready for the counterattack, the division reserve, 2/7 (Lieutenant Colonel Alexander D. Cereghino), was put under the operational control of the 5th Marines. (The battalion had previously been put on alert and had moved into an assembly area behind 1/5 shortly after midnight, with its F/2/7 participating in the early morning relief attempt.) During the early hours, a section of Skyknights from Lieutenant Colonel Conley’s night fighter squadron, VMF(N)-513, conducted radar-controlled bombing runs to target CCF artillery positions in the Hill 190 area and enemy troops at Hill 98. Exactly at 6:50 AM, friendly Panthers from VMF-115 began arriving on station to assist in neutralizing artillery fire on Reno and Vegas. Initially, a dawn ground attack was planned for Reno, but that was postponed to wait for air support.

A tentative H-Hour was set for 0900 with a dual jump-off for both Reno and Vegas. At 0930 the attacks still had not begun due to communication difficulties. While division Marines were waiting to get off the ground, 1st MAW pilots were enjoying a busy morning. By 0930, six four-plane air strikes had been completed by VMF-115 (Lieutenant Colonel Stoddard G. Cortelyou) and -311 (Lieutenant Colonel Francis K. Coss) plus sorties by Air Force Thunderjets. Tankers from Company A had also gotten in a few licks when two groups of Chinese were seen carrying logs for bunker support into Reno; one group was wiped out, the other got by.

A tentative H-Hour was set for 0900 with a simultaneous launch for both Reno and Vegas. By 0930, the attacks still hadn't started due to communication issues. While division Marines were waiting to take off, 1st MAW pilots were having a busy morning. By 0930, six four-plane air strikes had been completed by VMF-115 (Lieutenant Colonel Stoddard G. Cortelyou) and -311 (Lieutenant Colonel Francis K. Coss), along with sorties by Air Force Thunderjets. Tankers from Company A also managed to get a few hits in when two groups of Chinese were spotted carrying logs for bunker support into Reno; one group was eliminated, while the other got through.

Shortly after 1100, friendly artillery batteries began delivering smoke on Hills 57A and 190, two enemy high points of observation. The fire plan was modified to eliminate an early 10-minute preparation on objective areas. (Basically, the artillery plan for counterattack was that employed in the 19 March Operation ITEM raid on Ungok, because of the proximity of Ungok to the Vegas hills. This plan consisted of massed fires on the objective, with countermortar and counterbattery fires on known artillery positions. To this prearranged plan were added those new mortar and counterbattery targets located by air observers during the night of 26–27 March.) This time, the preparatory fires were to be on call, as was the 90mm fire support from the tankers. A further change was made when it was decided to limit the assault to Vegas and not retake Reno but rather neutralize it by fire.

Shortly after 1100, friendly artillery units began targeting Hills 57A and 190, two key enemy observation points, with smoke. The fire plan was adjusted to remove an early 10-minute preparation on the objective areas. (Essentially, the artillery plan for the counterattack was similar to the one used in the March 19 Operation ITEM raid on Ungok, due to Ungok's close proximity to the Vegas hills. This plan involved concentrated fire on the objective, along with countermortar and counterbattery fire on known artillery locations. New mortar and counterbattery targets identified by air observers during the night of March 26–27 were added to this prearranged plan.) This time, the preparatory fires were to be on call, along with 90mm fire support from the tank crews. Additionally, it was decided to limit the assault to Vegas and to neutralize Reno by fire instead of attempting to retake it.

While artillery, air, mortars, and tanks pounded the objective, assault elements of D/2/5 from the regimental reserve, under Captain292 John B. Melvin, prepared for jump-off. At 1120 the company crossed the line of departure in the 3/5 sector of the MLR and immediately came under heavy fires from enemy infantry and artillery units. Within a half hour after leaving the battalion front for Vegas, Dog Company had been pinned down by Chinese 76mm artillery, had picked itself up, and been stopped again by a plastering of 60mm and 82mm shells falling everywhere in its advance. By 1210 only nine men were left in Captain Melvin’s 1st Platoon to carry on the fight. The Marine unit continued to claw its way through the rain-swollen rice paddies and up the muddy slopes leading from the MLR to within 200 yards of the outpost. In 10 minutes, heavy incoming began to take its inevitable toll and enemy reinforcements were flowing towards Vegas from the CCF assembly point on Hill 153.

While artillery, air support, mortars, and tanks bombarded the target, the assault units of D/2/5 from the regimental reserve, led by Captain292 John B. Melvin, got ready to launch. At 11:20, the company crossed the starting line in the 3/5 sector of the Main Line of Resistance and immediately came under heavy fire from enemy infantry and artillery. Within half an hour of leaving the battalion front for Vegas, Dog Company was pinned down by Chinese 76mm artillery, managed to regroup, and then got hit again by a barrage of 60mm and 82mm shells raining down on its advance. By 12:10, only nine men were left in Captain Melvin’s 1st Platoon to continue the fight. The Marine unit kept pushing through the rain-swollen rice paddies and up the muddy slopes toward the outpost, getting within 200 yards. In 10 minutes, heavy incoming fire started to take its toll, and enemy reinforcements were pouring toward Vegas from the CCF assembly point on Hill 153.

Between noon and 1300, four enemy groups of varying size had pushed south from Hill 153 to Vegas. At this time still another group, of company size, moved in with its automatic weapons and mortars. Within the next 15 minutes, a reinforced CCF platoon made its way from the Reno trench to Vegas while still another large unit attempted to reinforce from Hill 21B. As enemy incoming swept the slopes and approaches to Vegas, Marine artillery and tank guns fired counterbattery missions to silence the Chinese weapons. In the skies, VMA-121 ADs and the sleek jet fighters from MAG-33 squadrons VMF-115 and -311 continued to pinpoint their target coordinates for destruction of enemy mortars, trenches, personnel bunkers, and troops.

Between noon and 1:00 PM, four groups of enemies, each varying in size, pushed south from Hill 153 to Vegas. At that time, another group, about the size of a company, moved in with their automatic weapons and mortars. Within the next 15 minutes, a reinforced CCF platoon made its way from the Reno trench to Vegas, while another large unit tried to reinforce from Hill 21B. As enemy fire swept across the slopes and approaches to Vegas, Marine artillery and tank guns fired counterbattery missions to take out the Chinese weapons. In the skies, VMA-121 ADs and the sleek jet fighters from MAG-33 squadrons VMF-115 and -311 continued to precisely target enemy mortars, trenches, personnel bunkers, and troops for destruction.

Back at the battalion CP two more companies were being readied to continue the Vegas assault. The Provisional Company of 2/5, commanded by Captain Floyd G. Hudson, moved out at 1215. Close on its heels, E/2/5 left the Company H checkpoint in the 3/5 sector for the zone of action. At 1305 the counterattack for Vegas was raging in earnest, with Company D riflemen on the lower slopes, chewing into the enemy with their grenades, BARs, M-1s, and carbines. Two hours after the original jump off time, four Marines crawled out of the trenches at Vegas and by 1322 were going over the top, despite incoming that “literally rained on the troops.” Assault commander Melvin recalled:

Back at the battalion command post, two more companies were getting ready to continue the Vegas assault. The Provisional Company of 2/5, led by Captain Floyd G. Hudson, moved out at 12:15 PM. Close behind, E/2/5 left the Company H checkpoint in the 3/5 sector for the action zone. At 1:05 PM, the counterattack for Vegas was in full swing, with Company D riflemen on the lower slopes, going after the enemy with their grenades, BARs, M-1s, and carbines. Two hours after the original start time, four Marines crawled out of the trenches at Vegas and by 1:22 PM were charging over the top, despite enemy fire that “literally rained on the troops.” Assault commander Melvin recalled:

It was so intense at times that you couldn’t move forward or backward. The Chinese 60mm mortars began to bother us about as much as firecrackers. It was the 120mm mortars and 122mm artillery that hurt the most.293 The noise was deafening. They would start walking the mortars toward us from every direction possible. You could only hope that the next round wouldn’t be on target.373

It was so intense at times that you couldn’t move forward or backward. The Chinese 60mm mortars started to annoy us like firecrackers. It was the 120mm mortars and 122mm artillery that caused the most damage.293 The noise was deafening. They would start aiming the mortars toward us from every possible direction. You could only hope that the next round wouldn’t hit its mark.373

373 Fugate, “Vegas,” p. 20.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Fugate, “Vegas,” p. 20.

Meanwhile, Company E, 5th Marines, under Captain Herbert M. Lorence, had moved up from the rear and, at 1440, was ordered to pass through Company D ranks, evacuate casualties, continue the attack, and secure the crest of Vegas. Although Captain Lorence’s men succeeded in moving into Company D positions, the deluge of Chinese mortar and artillery was so heavy that Company E was unable to advance beyond this point. At 1530, a new Marine company, F/2/7 (Captain Ralph F. Estey), was dispatched from the MLR to buttress the assault. By this time elements of D/2/5 had reached the right finger of Vegas but were again pinned down by intensive enemy artillery and mortars.

Meanwhile, Company E, 5th Marines, led by Captain Herbert M. Lorence, had moved up from the back and, at 2:40 PM, was ordered to pass through the ranks of Company D, evacuate casualties, continue the attack, and secure the top of Vegas. Even though Captain Lorence's men managed to get into Company D's positions, the heavy barrage of Chinese mortar and artillery made it impossible for Company E to move beyond that point. At 3:30 PM, a new Marine company, F/2/7 (Captain Ralph F. Estey), was sent from the Main Line of Resistance to support the assault. By that time, elements of D/2/5 had reached the right edge of Vegas but were once again stuck due to intense enemy artillery and mortar fire.

Within the first hour after leaving the battalion line, the Company F Marines nearly reached the advanced positions of 2/5, and Company D, which had been in the vanguard since 1100, returned to the regimental CP. During the next hour, however, heavy shelling slowed the Marine advance. At 1730, as Company F prepared to make its first major assault, a deluge of 60mm and 82mm mortar shells, 76mm and 122mm bursts, and machine gun bullets rained on the troops. As the men crawled forward slowly, planes from VMA-323 which had arrived on scene two hours earlier, continued to smoke the enemy’s posts on Hills 190 and 139. Captain Hunter’s tanks also moved into their MLR positions to zero in their 90mm rifles on the CCF stronghold at the Vegas northern crest.

Within the first hour after leaving the battalion line, the Company F Marines almost reached the forward positions of 2/5, and Company D, which had been leading since 1100, returned to the regimental CP. However, during the next hour, heavy shelling slowed the Marine advance. At 1730, as Company F got ready for its first major assault, a barrage of 60mm and 82mm mortar shells, 76mm and 122mm explosions, and machine gun fire hit the troops. As the men crept forward slowly, planes from VMA-323, which had arrived two hours earlier, continued to target the enemy positions on Hills 190 and 139. Captain Hunter’s tanks also moved into their MLR positions to aim their 90mm rifles at the CCF stronghold on the northern peak of Vegas.

By 1800, Company F was continuing the Marine counterattack to regain Vegas and was approximately 400 yards from the outpost summit. Combining with Company E Marines, for a total strength of three platoons in position, Captain Estey was able to retake part of the objective. After an intense 90-minute fire fight and hand-to-hand fighting in the lower trenches, E/2/7 advanced to the right of the outpost where at 1930 it began to consolidate. In the next half hour, two platoons of Company F moved out from the right finger of Vegas to within 50 yards of the peak, before being forced back by Chinese machine gun fire and mortars lobbed from the Able (left) gate on Vegas. The enemy company occupying the outpost resisted the attacking Marines with mortars, grenades, and small arms294 fire. In addition, the CCF employed firing positions at Reno for their machine guns, heavy mortars, and artillery supporting the Vegas defense and periodically reinforced their troops from the newly captured Reno outpost.

By 1800, Company F was continuing the Marine counterattack to reclaim Vegas and was about 400 yards from the outpost summit. Teaming up with Company E Marines, they had a total of three platoons in position, allowing Captain Estey to retake part of the objective. After an intense 90-minute firefight and hand-to-hand combat in the lower trenches, E/2/7 advanced to the right of the outpost, where at 1930 it began to consolidate. In the next half hour, two platoons of Company F moved out from the right finger of Vegas to within 50 yards of the peak before being pushed back by Chinese machine gun fire and mortars fired from the Able (left) gate on Vegas. The enemy company occupying the outpost fought back against the attacking Marines with mortars, grenades, and small arms fire. Additionally, the CCF used firing positions at Reno for their machine guns, heavy mortars, and artillery supporting the Vegas defense and periodically reinforced their troops from the newly captured Reno outpost.294

It was a busy night for Marines and corpsmen alike. One, whose split-second improvisations in the blazing zone of action were in the best Hippocratic tradition, was Hospital Corpsman Third Class William R. Charette. Attached to F/2/7, he was assisting a Marine when an enemy grenade landed but a few feet away. Charette immediately threw himself on the injured man, taking the full shock of the missile with his own body. Since the force of the blast had ripped away his helmet and medical aid kit, he tore off his clothing to make bandages. Another time, while attending a seriously wounded Marine whose armored vest had been blown off, the hospitalman removed his own to place around the injured man. Without armored vest or helmet, Charette continued to accompany his platoon in the assault. As a Marine observer, Staff Sergeant Robert S. Steigerwald, commented, “HM3 Charette was everyplace seemingly at the same time, performing inexhaustibly.”374

It was a hectic night for both Marines and corpsmen. One corpsman, known for his quick thinking in the heat of battle, was Hospital Corpsman Third Class William R. Charette. Assigned to F/2/7, he was helping a Marine when an enemy grenade landed just a few feet away. Charette instantly threw himself over the injured man, absorbing the full impact of the explosion with his own body. The blast knocked off his helmet and medical kit, so he ripped off his clothing to make bandages. On another occasion, while caring for a seriously wounded Marine whose armored vest had been blown away, he took off his own vest and wrapped it around the injured man. Without his vest or helmet, Charette kept going with his platoon during the attack. As Marine observer Staff Sergeant Robert S. Steigerwald noted, “HM3 Charette was seemingly everywhere at once, working tirelessly.”374

374 Statement cited in personnel record of HMC(SS) William R. Charette, USN. He was the only corpsman during the Korean War who was awarded the Medal of Honor and lived to receive it.

374 Statement cited in the personnel record of HMC(SS) William R. Charette, USN. He was the only corpsman during the Korean War who was awarded the Medal of Honor and survived to receive it.

Throughout the night the enemy counterattacked but was unsuccessful in driving the Marines off the outpost. Between 1830 and midnight, F/2/7 repulsed three enemy onslaughts and engaged in sporadic fire fights. Although pushed back from the summit, Company F Marines set up a perimeter defense at the base of Vegas where the troops dug in for the rest of the night. Their opposite numbers, from 1st MAW, were also on the scene. As follow-up to the day’s unremitting air bombardment of enemy installations, night fighters of VMF(N)-513 and MAG-12 Corsairs from VMAs-212 and -323 made nine MPQ strikes between 1830 and 0115 unleashing 24½ tons of explosives on CCF hill defenses and supply strongpoints.

Throughout the night, the enemy launched counterattacks but failed to drive the Marines off the outpost. Between 6:30 PM and midnight, F/2/7 repelled three enemy assaults and took part in sporadic gunfights. Although they were pushed back from the summit, the Marines of Company F established a perimeter defense at the base of Vegas, where they hunkered down for the rest of the night. Their counterparts from 1st MAW were also present. Following the relentless air bombardment of enemy positions during the day, night fighters from VMF(N)-513 and MAG-12 Corsairs from VMAs-212 and -323 conducted nine MPQ strikes between 6:30 PM and 1:15 AM, dropping 24½ tons of explosives on CCF hill defenses and supply points.

Gradually, heavy incoming on Vegas began to lift, and from midnight through the early hours of the following morning most of the enemy’s artillery and mortar fires switched from Vegas to the Marine companies on the MLR. Intermittent small arms fire still cracked and punctuated the night from enemy positions on Hills 57A, Detroit, and Frisco, to the northeast of Vegas.

Gradually, the intense activity in Vegas started to ease up, and from midnight into the early hours of the next morning, most of the enemy’s artillery and mortar fire shifted away from Vegas to the Marine companies on the Main Line of Resistance (MLR). Intermittent small arms fire continued to crack and disrupt the night from enemy positions on Hills 57A, Detroit, and Frisco, to the northeast of Vegas.

295

295

Push to the Summit375

375 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 28 Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 884, annex 340-MISP-53-12, POW Rpt and 1stMarDiv PIR 885, annex 340-MISP-53-13, POW Rpt; 1st MAW PIRs 88-53, dtd 29 Mar 53 and 89-53, dtd 30 Mar 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; 11thMar SAR “Arty Defense”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-212, -323, VMFs-115, -311 ComdDs, Mar 53; Fugate, “Vegas”; USMC Biog.

375 Unless noted otherwise, the material in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 28 Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 884, annex 340-MISP-53-12, POW Report and 1stMarDiv PIR 885, annex 340-MISP-53-13, POW Report; 1st MAW PIRs 88-53, dated 29 Mar 53 and 89-53, dated 30 Mar 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; 11thMar SAR “Arty Defense”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-212, -323, VMFs-115, -311 ComdDs, Mar 53; Fugate, “Vegas”; USMC Biography.

Although the composite two-platoon unit of Marines from F/2/7 and E/2/5 had partially won Vegas back in 10 hours of savage fighting on 27 March, after earlier groundwork by D/2/5, it was a precarious hold. Marines had attained the lower slopes but the Chinese still clung to the northern crest. As it turned out, three separate company-sized assaults were going to be needed to dislodge the enemy.

Although the combined two-platoon unit of Marines from F/2/7 and E/2/5 had partially taken back Vegas after 10 hours of brutal fighting on March 27, following earlier efforts by D/2/5, their hold was shaky. The Marines had made it to the lower slopes, but the Chinese still held on to the northern peak. In the end, it would take three separate company-sized attacks to drive the enemy out.

The initial Marine action on the 28th began at 0335 when 105mm and 155mm howitzers of the 1st, 2d, and 4th Battalions, 11th Marines, belched forth their streams of fire at the pocket of enemy troops on the northern slopes preparatory to the forthcoming Marine infantry assault. This 2,326-round pounding was aimed at Chinese assembly areas and weapon emplacements, with much of the preparation zeroed in on active mortars.

The first Marine action on the 28th started at 3:35 AM when the 105mm and 155mm howitzers from the 1st, 2nd, and 4th Battalions, 11th Marines, unleashed their heavy fire on the group of enemy troops on the northern slopes in preparation for the upcoming Marine infantry attack. This intense barrage of 2,326 rounds targeted Chinese assembly zones and weapon positions, focusing significantly on active mortars.

Within a half hour the weary men of F/2/7, who had spent a wakeful night in the lower Vegas trenches, moved to within hand grenade range of the objective in their first attempt to gain the summit. An intense shower of small arms and mortar fire, however, forced them to pull back to the south slopes. While Captain Estey’s troops reorganized for the next assault, air strikes joined the big guns, mortars, and tanks in battering the enemy’s position on the outpost and supply routes thereto. Shortly after sunup, a lone AU from VMA-213, followed a half hour later by a VMA-323 Corsair, arrived on station. They laid a smoke screen three miles across the front between Arrowhead and the far eastern Marine-U.S. Army boundary to assist four early-morning air strikes. Soon afterwards, eight ADs from Lieutenant Colonel John E. Hughes’ VMA-121 were in the skies to support the Vegas attack in the opening round of aerial activity that would see day-long bombing and strafing runs by five 1st MAW squadrons.

Within half an hour, the exhausted soldiers of F/2/7, who had endured a sleepless night in the lower Vegas trenches, moved into grenade range of their target in their first effort to reach the summit. However, a heavy barrage of small arms and mortar fire forced them to retreat to the southern slopes. While Captain Estey’s troops regrouped for the next assault, air strikes joined the artillery, mortars, and tanks in pummeling the enemy’s position on the outpost and its supply routes. Soon after sunrise, a lone AU from VMA-213 arrived on station, followed half an hour later by a VMA-323 Corsair. They created a smoke screen three miles wide across the front between Arrowhead and the far eastern Marine-U.S. Army boundary to aid four early-morning air strikes. Shortly after, eight ADs from Lieutenant Colonel John E. Hughes’ VMA-121 took to the skies to support the Vegas assault in the first wave of aerial operations that would involve day-long bombing and strafing runs by five 1st MAW squadrons.

A new Marine assault at 0600 was repulsed and Company F pulled back to a defilade position 375 yards south of Vegas and regrouped.296 Again friendly planes from VMA-121 and -323, tanks, artillery, and mortars plastered the enemy in a new series of preparatory fires, beginning at 0920; and again Captain Estey’s F/2/7 men jumped off in attack. By 1015 the Marines had made their way across the height to within 15 yards of the trench line on the left finger of Vegas. There they came under continuous small arms and grenade bursts from the crest and battled the Chinese in an intense 22-minute fire fight.

A new Marine assault at 6:00 AM was pushed back, and Company F withdrew to a sheltered position 375 yards south of Vegas to regroup.296 Once again, friendly planes from VMA-121 and -323, along with tanks, artillery, and mortars, bombarded the enemy in a new round of preparatory fires starting at 9:20 AM. Once more, Captain Estey’s F/2/7 troops launched their attack. By 10:15 AM, the Marines had advanced across the elevation to within 15 yards of the trench line on the left side of Vegas. There, they faced continuous small arms fire and grenade explosions from the high ground and engaged the Chinese in a fierce 22-minute firefight.

It was during this onslaught by Company F for the crest of Vegas that Sergeant Daniel P. Matthews so defiantly routed the enemy to save the life of a wounded comrade that his action gave renewed spirit to those witnessing it. A squad leader of F/2/7, Matthews was in the thick of a counterpunch against solidly dug-in hill defenses that had repelled six previous assaults by Marine forces. The 21-year-old California Marine was coolly leading his men in the attack when the squad suddenly was pinned down by a hostile machine gun located on the Vegas crest. When he saw that its grazing fire prevented a corpsman from removing to safety a wounded Marine who had fallen in full range of the weapon, Matthews acted instinctively.

It was during Company F's aggressive push for the peak of Vegas that Sergeant Daniel P. Matthews boldly drove back the enemy to save a wounded buddy, inspiring everyone who witnessed his courage. A squad leader of F/2/7, Matthews was deeply involved in a counterattack against well-fortified hill defenses that had turned away six earlier attempts by Marine forces. The 21-year-old Marine from California was calmly leading his men in the assault when they were suddenly pinned down by enemy machine gun fire from the Vegas crest. When he saw that the gunfire was keeping a corpsman from getting a wounded Marine, who had fallen in the line of fire, to safety, Matthews acted on instinct.

Quickly working his way around to the base of the enemy machine gun position, he leaped onto the rock fortification that surrounded it. Taking the enemy by surprise, he charged the emplacement with his own rifle. Severely wounded within moments, the Marine continued his assault, killed two of the enemy, dispatched a third, and silenced the weapon. By this action, Sergeant Matthews enabled his comrades on the ground to evacuate the injured Marine, although Matthews died before aid could reach him.376

Quickly making his way to the base of the enemy machine gun position, he jumped onto the rock fortification that surrounded it. Taking the enemy by surprise, he charged the spot with his own rifle. Severely wounded within moments, the Marine continued his attack, killed two of the enemy, took out a third, and silenced the weapon. By doing this, Sergeant Matthews allowed his comrades on the ground to evacuate the injured Marine, although Matthews died before help could reach him.376

376 The Marine NCO was to be posthumously awarded the Medal of Honor, presented a year after the action, on 29 March 1954.

376 The Marine NCO would be awarded the Medal of Honor after his death, which was presented a year later, on March 29, 1954.

Back at battalion, E/2/5, with D/2/7 in column behind it, had moved out to relieve Captain Estey’s redoubtable F/2/7 forces. By noon, Captain Lorence’s Company E had completed passage of lines through Company F. The latter unit, now numbering 43 effectives after its six assaults on 27–28 March to regain the Vegas high ground, returned to base camp.

Back at the battalion, E/2/5, with D/2/7 following in column, had moved out to take over from Captain Estey's formidable F/2/7 forces. By noon, Captain Lorence's Company E had finished passing through Company F. The latter unit, now down to 43 effective soldiers after its six assaults on March 27-28 to reclaim the Vegas high ground, returned to base camp.

Heavy air attacks, meanwhile, were assisting the artillery in blasting out Communist defenses of the Vegas area. Between 0950 and297 1300, seven four-plane strikes by pilots of Colonel Bowman’s MAG-12 had swept the outpost area and hill lairs of the enemy at 57A, the east slope of Reno, Tumae-ri (40D), 190, and resupply points. Within one 23-minute period alone, 28 tons of bombs were laid squarely on the Vegas position. Supported by air, mortars, and artillery, Company E was 400 yards from the objective, and, by 1245, forward elements had moved up to within 150 yards of the crest. As Marine supporting fires lifted from Vegas to enemy assembly areas on Hills 150, 153, and 190, E/2/5 launched its final assault at 1301. Although small arms, bursts of mortar and enemy artillery fire traced their every move, the Marines’ hard-hitting attack brought them to the top of Vegas where they literally dug the Chinese out of their defenses.

Heavy air attacks were helping the artillery blast through the Communist defenses in the Vegas area. Between 9:50 AM and 1:00 PM, pilots from Colonel Bowman’s MAG-12 executed seven four-plane strikes, targeting the enemy outpost areas and hill hideouts at 57A, the east slope of Reno, Tumae-ri (40D), 190, and resupply points. During one 23-minute stretch, 28 tons of bombs were dropped directly on the Vegas position. Supported by air power, mortars, and artillery, Company E was 400 yards from the objective, and by 12:45 PM, forward units had moved within 150 yards of the ridge. As Marine artillery fire shifted from Vegas to enemy gathering points on Hills 150, 153, and 190, E/2/5 launched its final assault at 1:01 PM. Despite facing small arms fire, mortar explosions, and enemy artillery that traced their every move, the Marines’ powerful attack pushed them to the top of Vegas, where they literally dug the Chinese out of their defenses.

At 1307, the Marines had secured their position and recaptured the Vegas outpost. At approximately the same time the Marine reinforcing unit, D/2/7, was ordered to return to MLR, since the objective had been gained. The Marine in charge of the E/2/5 platoon that retook Vegas was Staff Sergeant John J. Williams, who had taken over the 1st Platoon after its leader, Second Lieutenant Edgar R. Franz, had been wounded and evacuated. Almost immediately after securing Vegas at 1320, the Chinese launched a counterattack and Company E came under a renewed barrage of incessant artillery and mortar shells, exploding at the rate of one round per second in the Marines’ newly gained trenches.

At 1307, the Marines had secured their position and retaken the Vegas outpost. Around the same time, the Marine reinforcing unit, D/2/7, was ordered to return to the MLR since the objective had been achieved. The Marine leading the E/2/5 platoon that recaptured Vegas was Staff Sergeant John J. Williams, who had taken charge of the 1st Platoon after its leader, Second Lieutenant Edgar R. Franz, was wounded and evacuated. Almost immediately after securing Vegas at 1320, the Chinese launched a counterattack, and Company E came under a new barrage of relentless artillery and mortar shells, exploding at a rate of one round per second in the Marines’ newly won trenches.

Marine firepower from the tankers’ 90mm rifles and the protective fire curtain placed around the outpost by the artillery batteries, however, deterred this heavy enemy effort. For the next hour Captain Lorence’s men continued with mopping up chores. Gradually and fitfully the Chinese resistance began to slacken. By 1401 definite control of Vegas was established, except for the topographical crest at the northernmost point. Resupply and consolidation of the outpost began at once, with Vegas under 3/5 administration and Major Benjamin G. Lee, operations officer of 2/5, in command.

Marine firepower from the tankers’ 90mm rifles and the protective fire curtain set up around the outpost by the artillery units effectively held back this significant enemy push. For the next hour, Captain Lorence’s men continued with cleanup tasks. Slowly and irregularly, the Chinese resistance started to weaken. By 1401, definite control of Vegas was established, except for the high ground at the northernmost point. Resupply and consolidation of the outpost began immediately, with Vegas under 3/5 administration and Major Benjamin G. Lee, operations officer of 2/5, in charge.

Two prisoners had been taken during the day’s action, one by E/2/5 during its afternoon assault and the other by F/2/7 early in the day. The soldier seized by a fire team from Company E was a 21-year-old wounded litter bearer attached to the attacking force, 3rd Battalion, 358th Regiment. He told 5th Marines interrogators that for the preceding three months the mission of the 358th Regiment (a component of the 40th CCF Army, under operational control298 of the 46th CCF Army) had been to prepare to occupy the Vegas and Reno outposts before the expected UN spring offensive could be launched. The two key installations overlooked CCF supply routes. Furthermore, occupation of these two hills, the Chinese believed, would serve as a valuable tactical example to the 46th Army, whose ranks at this time were composed of nearly 65 percent recruits. The POW also reported that prior to the CCF attack on Reno and Vegas, men of his regiment had practiced throwing hand grenades every day for the past two weeks. No political classes had been held during this period as practical proficiency, apparently, took priority over theoretical indoctrination.

Two prisoners were taken during the day's operations, one by E/2/5 during its afternoon assault and the other by F/2/7 earlier in the day. The soldier captured by a fire team from Company E was a 21-year-old wounded litter bearer attached to the attacking force, 3rd Battalion, 358th Regiment. He told the 5th Marines interrogators that for the past three months, the mission of the 358th Regiment (part of the 40th CCF Army, under the operational control298 of the 46th CCF Army) had been to prepare to occupy the Vegas and Reno outposts before the expected UN spring offensive could begin. The two key installations overlooked CCF supply routes. Furthermore, the Chinese believed that occupying these two hills would serve as a valuable tactical example to the 46th Army, which at that time was composed of nearly 65 percent recruits. The POW also reported that before the CCF attack on Reno and Vegas, men from his regiment had practiced throwing hand grenades every day for the past two weeks. No political classes had been held during this time, as practical skills seemed to take priority over theoretical lessons.

The other Chinese prisoner, captured by Company F at 0610, was a grenadier with the 9th Company, 3d Battalion, 358th Regiment. Prior to the attack, his unit had occupied reverse slope positions on Hills 25A and 155 as reinforcements for the 8th Company. Each CCF battalion, he revealed, “held a front of approximately 1,000 meters, utilizing one company on line with two in support.”377 This remark interested interrogators since it contradicted the normal pattern of enemy employment. According to the grenadier, the mission of the 3d Battalion had been to attack Vegas, while the 1st Battalion (to the west of the 3d on the Chinese MLR) was to secure Reno. Hill 190.5, an enemy strongpoint, had several antiaircraft machine guns on its reverse slope, he declared, and was the location as well of the forward CP of the 3d Battalion, 358th Regiment.

The other Chinese prisoner, captured by Company F at 6:10 AM, was a grenadier with the 9th Company, 3rd Battalion, 358th Regiment. Before the attack, his unit had been stationed on the back slopes of Hills 25A and 155 as reinforcements for the 8th Company. He explained that each CCF battalion “held a front of about 1,000 meters, using one company on the front line with two in support.” 377 This statement caught the attention of the interrogators since it went against the usual enemy tactics. According to the grenadier, the mission of the 3rd Battalion was to attack Vegas, while the 1st Battalion (located to the west of the 3rd on the Chinese MLR) was tasked with securing Reno. He stated that Hill 190.5, an enemy strongpoint, had several antiaircraft machine guns positioned on its back slope and was also the site of the forward command post for the 3rd Battalion, 358th Regiment.

377 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dtd 28 Mar 53.

377 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dated 28 Mar 53.

For the next five hours, from 1440 to 1930, the Marines dug in on the crest and slopes of Vegas, buttressing their positions for the new Chinese attack sure to come. A muster of the rag-tag group left from the day’s 10 hours of fighting revealed a total strength of only five squads—58 effectives from E/2/5 and 8 from F/2/7. Uppermost in the minds of all the men, regardless of their diminished numbers, was the ironclad conviction that “we intend to stay.”378

For the next five hours, from 2:40 PM to 7:30 PM, the Marines settled in on the top and hills of Vegas, strengthening their positions for the new Chinese attack that was sure to come. A count of the rag-tag group that remained after the day’s 10 hours of fighting showed a total of only five squads—58 effective soldiers from E/2/5 and 8 from F/2/7. Uppermost in the minds of all the men, no matter their reduced numbers, was the unwavering belief that “we intend to stay.”378

378 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Their leader, Major Lee, was no less determined. At 42, he was a Marine veteran of 19 years, a former sergeant major from World War II and holder of the Silver Star and Purple Heart for service at Guadalcanal. Now he had volunteered for this hazardous duty of holding together segments of the Vegas enclave until the Marines could once again possess the entire hilltop outpost. Under his direction299 the troops promptly began to prepare individual fighting holes in the best possible tactical positions and to emplace their weapons. Personnel from Captain Lorence’s E/2/5 held the hard-won Vegas crest, while 150 men from F/2/5 committed later in the afternoon strengthened the rear trenches.

Their leader, Major Lee, was just as determined. At 42, he was a Marine veteran with 19 years of service, a former sergeant major from World War II, and a recipient of the Silver Star and Purple Heart for his actions at Guadalcanal. Now, he had volunteered for the dangerous task of keeping parts of the Vegas enclave secure until the Marines could retake the entire hilltop outpost. Under his command299, the troops quickly started to dig individual fighting holes in the best tactical positions and set up their weapons. Personnel from Captain Lorence’s E/2/5 held the hard-won Vegas crest, while 150 men from F/2/5 who joined later in the afternoon reinforced the rear trenches.

Air bombardment, prior to the 28th, had not been employed extensively against Vegas itself. The goal had been to recapture the outpost and drive the Communists out without unnecessarily destroying its defenses. Chinese tenacity in exploiting the Marine weapons positions at COP 21, while augmenting them, had made it apparent that the Vegas defense network would have to be reduced to retake the position. Altogether, during the day 33 missions (more than 100 CAS sorties) were flown by AUs, ADs, F4Us, and F9Fs of the 1st Marine Air Wing to support division ground action in regaining the advance outpost. All morning long, powerful attack planes from three MAG-12 squadrons had winged in from nearby K-6. Pilots from VMA-121, VMA-212 (Lieutenant Colonel Louis R. Smunk), and VMA-323 (Lieutenant Colonel William M. Frash) had flown the bombing runs.

Air strikes, before the 28th, hadn't been widely used against Vegas itself. The objective was to reclaim the outpost and drive the Communists out without causing unnecessary damage to its defenses. The Chinese were determined in taking advantage of the Marine weapons positions at COP 21 while also reinforcing them, making it clear that the Vegas defense network needed to be weakened to retake the position. Throughout the day, a total of 33 missions (over 100 CAS sorties) were conducted by AUs, ADs, F4Us, and F9Fs from the 1st Marine Air Wing to support ground action for recovering the outpost. All morning, powerful attack planes from three MAG-12 squadrons had flown in from nearby K-6. Pilots from VMA-121, VMA-212 (Lieutenant Colonel Louis R. Smunk), and VMA-323 (Lieutenant Colonel William M. Frash) were responsible for the bombing runs.

In the early afternoon they were joined by the speedy, stable Panther jets from VMF-115 and VMF-311, of MAG-33 (Colonel Robertshaw), based further away at K-3. Between 1300 and 1800, a series of three four-plane F9F assaults were launched north of the Marine MLR by VMF-311, while another strike was made further east in support of the Army 2d Infantry Division’s Old Baldy operations. These planes, together with two divisions from VMF-115, dumped a total of 23 tons of bombs and 3,100 rounds of 20mm shells on CCF trenches, bunkers, mortars, and caves at Vegas, Reno, and Hill 25A. Additionally, VMF-115 Panthers flew four single-sortie daytime MPQ missions north of the bombline to damage and destroy enemy resupply points.

In the early afternoon, they were joined by the fast and reliable Panther jets from VMF-115 and VMF-311, part of MAG-33 (Colonel Robertshaw), which were based further away at K-3. Between 1 PM and 6 PM, VMF-311 launched a series of three four-plane F9F attacks north of the Marine MLR, while another strike was made further east in support of the Army's 2nd Infantry Division’s Old Baldy operations. These aircraft, along with two units from VMF-115, dropped a total of 23 tons of bombs and fired 3,100 rounds of 20mm shells on CCF trenches, bunkers, mortars, and caves at Vegas, Reno, and Hill 25A. Additionally, VMF-115 Panthers conducted four single-sortie daytime MPQ missions north of the bombline to damage and destroy enemy resupply points.

Other Communist Probes379

379 The material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 884-5, dtd 28–29 Mar 53; 1stMar ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMar SAR.

379 The information in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 884-5, dated 28–29 Mar 53; 1stMar ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMar SAR.

Although the Chinese made it plain that their main interest was in the Vegas outpost area, spotty probes also took place in Colonel300 Adams’ 1st Marines sector. On the 27th, at about 2310, two enemy squads milled around the wire defense at outpost Kate, but Marine small arms, BARs, and mortars routed them after a 15-minute fire fight. At midnight, a CCF reinforced platoon reconnoitered Dagmar and Esther, for the second successive night, supported by small arms and automatic weapons fire from Chinese Hills 114 and 44. The enemy platoon started to rush the forward slope at Dagmar, but Company I defenders pulled back to the reverse side and directed VT-fuzed shells on the enemy.

Although the Chinese made it clear that their main focus was on the Vegas outpost area, there were also sporadic probes in Colonel300 Adams’ 1st Marines sector. On the 27th, around 11:10 PM, two enemy squads gathered around the wire defense at outpost Kate, but Marine small arms, BARs, and mortars drove them away after a 15-minute firefight. At midnight, a CCF reinforced platoon reconnoitered Dagmar and Esther for the second consecutive night, supported by small arms and automatic weapon fire from Chinese Hills 114 and 44. The enemy platoon began to rush the forward slope at Dagmar, but Company I defenders fell back to the reverse side and directed VT-fuzed shells at the enemy.

Following this barrage the Marines reoccupied their position, with the help of MLR machine guns, mortars, and artillery from the 3/11 direct support battalion. (Now commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Alfred L. Owens, who had succeeded Lieutenant Colonel Pregnall on 25 March.) The enemy reinforced with a second platoon, as did the Marines. After intense close-in fighting in the Dagmar trenches for two hours, the Chinese withdrew. An enemy squad also engaged Bunker and Hedy; but again, 3/11 VT-fuzed concentrations and the organic outpost defenses sent him off handily. Enemy casualties for the evening’s activity were 15 dead, 25 more estimated killed, and 23 estimated wounded.

Following this heavy attack, the Marines took back their position, with support from MLR machine guns, mortars, and artillery from the 3/11 direct support battalion. (Now led by Lieutenant Colonel Alfred L. Owens, who took over from Lieutenant Colonel Pregnall on March 25.) The enemy strengthened their forces with a second platoon, just like the Marines did. After two hours of intense close-quarters fighting in the Dagmar trenches, the Chinese pulled back. An enemy squad also targeted Bunker and Hedy, but again, the 3/11 VT-fuzed concentrations and the built-in outpost defenses handled them easily. Enemy casualties for the night’s activities were reported as 15 dead, an estimated 25 more killed, and 23 estimated wounded.

The following night the Chinese briefly harassed outpost Hedy, using as cover an abandoned Marine tank just east of the outpost, as well as the MLR to the rear of COP Bunker. Marine bullets and mortar shells dictated a quick retreat, however. Several minor contacts with the enemy had also been made during the two-day period in the 1st KMC sector. The most menacing were heavy enemy sightings on the 27th of some 200 Chinese in the area west of the old outposts 36 and 37, but no major action developed.

The next night, the Chinese briefly attacked outpost Hedy, using an abandoned Marine tank just east of the outpost for cover, as well as the MLR behind COP Bunker. Marine bullets and mortar shells forced a quick withdrawal, though. There had also been several minor encounters with the enemy during the two-day period in the 1st KMC sector. The most serious threat was on the 27th, when about 200 Chinese were spotted in the area west of the old outposts 36 and 37, but no significant action took place.

Three CCF Attempts for the Outpost380

380 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 28–29 Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 884-6, dtd 29–31 Mar 53; 1st MAW PIR 89-53, dtd 29 Mar 53; 5th Mar, 7thMar, 11th Mar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 3/11, 4/11 ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; 11thMar SAR “Arty Defense”; Fugate, “Vegas.”

380 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, March 28–29, 1953; 1stMarDiv PIRs 884-6, dated March 29–31, 1953; 1st MAW PIR 89-53, dated March 29, 1953; 5th Mar, 7th Mar, 11th Mar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 3/11, 4/11 ComdDs, Mar 53; 5th Mar SAR “Cities”; 11th Mar SAR “Arty Defense”; Fugate, “Vegas.”

As darkness blanketed No-Man’s-Land on the night of the 28th, ground fighting flared up anew at 1955. The Chinese had begun another one of their nightly rituals, the first of three counterattacks301 to win back the disputed territory from the Marines. Vegas reported heavy incoming, including not only the usual assortment of mortar and artillery fires but direct 3.5-inch rocket hits. Enemy troops, estimated at nearly a battalion, began approaching from Reno. By way of answer two Marine light artillery battalions, 1/11 and 2/11, together with the medium 155mm howitzers of 4/11 and the Army 623d Field Artillery, lashed a 4,670-round barrage to interdict the approaching enemy. Ripples from the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery reinforced the howitzers in thwarting this initial enemy assault. On the right flank of the outpost an intense 20-minute fire fight broke out at 2023, but the Vegas defenders beat back the intruders. For an hour the enemy, supported by heavy mortar and artillery fires from Reno and his own positions at Vegas, tried unsuccessfully to force the Marines to withdraw.

As darkness covered No-Man’s-Land on the night of the 28th, ground fighting erupted again at 7:55 PM. The Chinese had started another of their nightly routines, the first of three counterattacks to reclaim the contested territory from the Marines. Vegas reported heavy incoming fire, including not just the usual mix of mortar and artillery but also direct hits from 3.5-inch rockets. Enemy troops, estimated to be almost a battalion, began moving in from Reno. In response, two Marine light artillery battalions, 1/11 and 2/11, along with the medium 155mm howitzers of 4/11 and the Army's 623rd Field Artillery, unleashed a barrage of 4,670 rounds to stop the advancing enemy. Ripples from the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery supported the howitzers in countering this initial enemy attack. On the right flank of the outpost, an intense 20-minute firefight broke out at 8:23 PM, but the defenders in Vegas pushed back the intruders. For an hour, the enemy, backed by heavy mortar and artillery fire from Reno and their own positions at Vegas, tried unsuccessfully to force the Marines to retreat.

Carson, which had been relatively undisturbed for the past two days, also came under attack at this time from automatic weapons and mortars directed on its north slope by the enemy holed up behind Hills 67 and 31. For the rest of the night an enemy company prowled around the area, but the defense at Carson, plus artillery and mortar fire support from JAMESTOWN, sent the Chinese off in the early morning hours with their ambitions thwarted.

Carson, which had been mostly quiet for the past two days, faced an attack at this time from automatic weapons and mortars aimed at its north slope by the enemy holed up behind Hills 67 and 31. For the rest of the night, an enemy company lurked around the area, but the defense at Carson, along with artillery and mortar support from JAMestown, drove the Chinese away in the early morning hours, leaving their plans unfulfilled.

At Vegas, meanwhile, outpost commander Major Lee at 2130 radioed battalion headquarters that he was preparing for a new enemy counterattack. It was not long in coming. Less than an hour later, the Chinese were again storming from Hill 153, and Marine boxing fires picked off the advancing enemy. At 2230 Major Lee’s riflemen, deployed about 25 yards from the peak, were holding Vegas, surrounded by Chinese on the southern face of the position. For a brief period the enemy took the high ground but then gave it up under pressure from the defending Marines. Close by, another sharp fire fight erupted; then subsided for about an hour. At 2300 a new onslaught of Chinese reinforcements made the third major attempt of the evening to recapture the Vegas position. Two enemy companies descended. Within a half hour another massive fire fight had broken out, and the battle was raging across the shell-scarred hilltop. Major Lee reported to G-3 heavy enemy sightings of at least 200 Chinese on the top slopes challenging Marine possession of the Vegas crest and attempting to smoke their positions. At 0045, hostile forces had surrounded the outpost and seized part of the302 Vegas height, but 11th Marines fires walled off the enemy and prevented penetration. Flare planes circling overhead lighted the target and cannoneers of both sides concentrated on the crest. The heaviest Marine shoot of the night-long artillery duel, a 6,108-round barrage, rained down on enemy troops and trenches shortly before midnight.

At Vegas, meanwhile, outpost commander Major Lee at 9:30 PM radioed battalion headquarters that he was getting ready for a new enemy counterattack. It didn't take long to arrive. Less than an hour later, the Chinese were once again charging from Hill 153, and Marine artillery picked off the advancing enemy. At 10:30 PM, Major Lee’s riflemen, positioned about 25 yards from the peak, were holding Vegas, surrounded by Chinese forces on the southern side of the area. For a short time, the enemy took the high ground but then lost it under the pressure from the defending Marines. Nearby, another intense firefight broke out, then quieted down for about an hour. At 11:00 PM, a new wave of Chinese reinforcements made their third major attempt of the evening to retake the Vegas position. Two enemy companies moved down. Within half an hour, another massive firefight had begun, and the battle was raging across the shell-scarred hilltop. Major Lee reported to G-3 heavy enemy sightings of at least 200 Chinese on the upper slopes challenging Marine control of the Vegas crest and trying to smoke out their positions. At 12:45 AM, hostile forces had surrounded the outpost and taken part of the302 Vegas height, but the 11th Marines fired back, creating a barrier to block the enemy and prevent further penetration. Flare planes flying overhead illuminated the target as both sides’ cannoneers focused on the crest. The heaviest Marine artillery barrage of the night, a 6,108-round bombardment, was unleashed on enemy troops and trenches shortly before midnight.

Altogether, during the night of 28–29 March, two battalions of Chinese troops had made three separate, unsuccessful ventures to retake the Vegas crest, but were thrown back by Marine mortar, artillery, and tank fires. At 0130, following a heavy 37-minute artillery and mortar concentration, the enemy began to withdraw, but not before venting his displeasure with a resounding blast of small arms and bazooka fire from the Reno hill. In their departure, the Chinese were given an assist by Company E, 7th Marines, which had broken through the enemy encirclement of Vegas in the early morning hours to join E/2/5 and F/2/5 defending forces and help drive the invaders off all but the northern tip of the hill. Now under Captain Thomas P. Connolly, E/2/7 ascended the high ground, passing through F/2/5 ranks in preparation for the ultimate relief of E/2/5.

Altogether, during the night of March 28-29, two battalions of Chinese troops made three separate, unsuccessful attempts to recapture the Vegas crest but were pushed back by Marine mortar, artillery, and tank fire. At 1:30 AM, after a heavy 37-minute artillery and mortar barrage, the enemy started to pull back, but not before expressing their frustration with a loud burst of small arms and bazooka fire from the Reno hill. As they retreated, the Chinese were supported by Company E, 7th Marines, which had broken through the enemy's encirclement of Vegas in the early morning hours to join E/2/5 and F/2/5 defending forces and help drive the invaders off all but the northern tip of the hill. Now under Captain Thomas P. Connolly, E/2/7 climbed the high ground, moving through the ranks of F/2/5 in preparation for the final relief of E/2/5.

For the next two hours the 11th Marines battalions, together with the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery, sealed off the outpost and blistered enemy fortifications at Reno with a total of 4,225 rounds. Air observers on station fired 10 missions between midnight and 0430. Twenty minutes later, the artillerymen unleashed still another preparation to dislodge the unyielding CCF dug in at the Vegas topographical crest. Heavier fires from the 155mm howitzers of 4/11 and the 623d Field Artillery Battalions followed on more than two dozen active mortar and artillery targets.

For the next two hours, the 11th Marines battalions, along with the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery, surrounded the outpost and pummeled enemy defenses at Reno with a total of 4,225 rounds. Air observers on duty conducted 10 missions between midnight and 4:30 AM. Twenty minutes later, the artillery crews launched another round of fire to dislodge the resolute CCF entrenched at the Vegas ridge. Heavier fire from the 155mm howitzers of 4/11 and the 623rd Field Artillery Battalions targeted more than two dozen active mortar and artillery positions.

A new assault by Marine infantrymen (E/2/7, E/2/5, and F/2/5) at 0450 recaptured the critical northern segment of the outpost. Elation over this encouraging turn of events was dampened, however, by loss of several Marine leaders in the early morning foray. Shortly before 0500, Major Lee and Captain Walz were killed instantly by a 120mm mortar round during an intensive enemy shelling. Another Marine casualty early on the 29th was First Lieutenant John S. Gray. A forward observer from C/1/11, he was mortally wounded by an enemy mortar blast when he left his foxhole to crawl closer to the Vegas peak and thus better direct artillery fires on the enemy. At the time of his death, Lieutenant Gray was reported to have been at Vegas longer than any other officer.

A new attack by Marine infantrymen (E/2/7, E/2/5, and F/2/5) at 4:50 AM recaptured the crucial northern part of the outpost. While there was excitement over this positive development, it was tempered by the loss of several Marine leaders in the early morning assault. Just before 5:00 AM, Major Lee and Captain Walz were killed instantly by a 120mm mortar round during heavy enemy shelling. Another Marine casualty early on the 29th was First Lieutenant John S. Gray. A forward observer from C/1/11, he was fatally wounded by an enemy mortar explosion when he left his foxhole to crawl closer to Vegas peak in order to better guide artillery fire on the enemy. At the time of his death, Lieutenant Gray was reported to have been at Vegas longer than any other officer.

303

303

Vegas Consolidation Begins381

381 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 29–31 Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 885–887, dtd 29–31 Mar 53; 1st MAW PIRs 8-53, dtd 29 Mar 53 and 90-53, dtd 30 Mar 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; 11thMar SAR “Arty Defense”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-212, -323, VMFs-115, -311 ComdDs, Mar 53; Fugate, “Vegas.”

381 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, 29–31 Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 885–887, dated 29–31 Mar 53; 1st MAW PIRs 8-53, dated 29 Mar 53 and 90-53, dated 30 Mar 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 2/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Mar 53; 5thMar SAR “Cities”; 11thMar SAR “Arty Defense”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-212, -323, VMFs-115, -311 ComdDs, Mar 53; Fugate, “Vegas.”

Only a few surviving enemy were seen when Marines of F/2/5 and E/2/7 moved out to consolidate the position after daybreak. This task was completed without contact by 0830. In the meantime, the Vegas defense was reorganized with two reinforced platoons on the main portion and a third occupying the high ground. A smoke haze placed around the outpost screened the work of the Marines. Individual foxholes were dug and automatic weapons emplaced. Major Joseph S. Buntin, executive officer of 3/5, had taken over as the new outpost commander. Corpsmen and replacement weapons—machine guns, mortars, BARs, rockets—had arrived. The morning supply train brought KSC personnel and Marines with engineering tools to begin work on trenches, fighting holes, weapons dugouts, and bunker fortifications.

Only a few remaining enemies were spotted when the Marines from F/2/5 and E/2/7 moved out to secure the area after sunrise. They finished this task without any contact by 8:30 AM. Meanwhile, the Vegas defense was reorganized, with two reinforced platoons in the main area and a third taking position on the high ground. A smoke screen around the outpost concealed the Marines' activities. Individual foxholes were dug, and automatic weapons were set up. Major Joseph S. Buntin, the executive officer of 3/5, had taken over as the new outpost commander. Corpsmen and replacement weapons—machine guns, mortars, BARs, and rockets—had arrived. The morning supply convoy brought KSC personnel and Marines with engineering tools to start work on trenches, fighting holes, weapons dugouts, and bunker fortifications.

By noon, excavation work on the shell-pocked trench system was well under way, with all of it dug waist deep and the majority as deep as a man’s shoulder. Daylight hours between 1000 and 1600 on the 29th were relatively quiet with only light ground activity. Rainy weather that turned road nets and fighting trenches into boot-high muck and giant mud holes further slowed the action. Artillerymen completed countermortar and smoke missions, and in the skies air observers directed fire throughout the day on 19 enemy resupply and target points until dusk when rain and light snow forced them to return to base.

By noon, the digging of the shell-damaged trench system was well underway, with all of it excavated to waist depth and most sections as deep as a man’s shoulder. The daylight hours between 10:00 AM and 4:00 PM on the 29th were fairly quiet, with only some light ground activity. The rainy weather turned the roads and fighting trenches into muddy messes and deep mud holes, which further slowed things down. The artillery crews finished counter-battery and smoke missions, and throughout the day, air observers directed fire on 19 enemy resupply and target locations until dusk, when rain and light snow forced them to head back to base.

At 1850, the Chinese launched what in some respects was a carbon copy action of the night of the 26th. Once again there was sudden heavy incoming and then shortly after dusk the CCF struck in a new three-pronged attack to overrun Vegas. This time three companies of Chinese approached both flanks of the outpost from their positions on Reno and Hill 153. In addition to his infantry weapons, the enemy was supported by heavy mortars and artillery. But the Marines’ mortars, illuminating shells, and big guns replied immediately. Ten minutes304 after the enemy’s latest incursion, a massed counterfire from five artillery battalions joined in the heaviest single barrage of the entire Vegas defense action. This massed fire of 6,404 rounds blasted the Chinese assault battalion and sent it reeling back with heavy losses. Two rocket ripples also tore into the Chinese troops.

At 1850, the Chinese launched what was essentially a repeat of the night of the 26th. Once again, there was a sudden heavy barrage followed shortly after dusk by the CCF launching a new three-pronged attack to take over Vegas. This time, three companies of Chinese forces approached both sides of the outpost from their positions on Reno and Hill 153. Along with their infantry weapons, the enemy was backed by heavy mortars and artillery. But the Marines' mortars, illuminating rounds, and heavy guns responded right away. Ten minutes304 after the enemy's latest incursion, a coordinated counterfire from five artillery battalions resulted in the heaviest single barrage of the entire Vegas defense effort. This concentrated fire of 6,404 rounds hit the Chinese assault battalion hard, forcing them to retreat with significant losses. Two rocket volleys also struck the Chinese troops.

In addition to the medium and heavy firing batteries, two heavy mortar units, Companies A and C of the 461st Infantry Battalion, had that day gone into position in the 5th Marines sector in general support of 1/11. Other fires came from the 8-inch howitzer unit, Battery C, 424th Field Artillery Battalion, also newly assigned to the 17th Field Artillery Battalion that day in general support of the 1st Marine Division.

In addition to the medium and heavy firing batteries, two heavy mortar units, Companies A and C of the 461st Infantry Battalion, had set up in the 5th Marines sector that day to support 1/11. Other fire support came from the 8-inch howitzer unit, Battery C, 424th Field Artillery Battalion, which was also newly assigned to the 17th Field Artillery Battalion that day to support the 1st Marine Division.

Although another enemy attack was quickly repulsed at 2045 in a brisk, savage fight, shortly before midnight the Chinese reappeared, moving up from behind the right finger of Hill 153. This was believed to be an attempt to recover their casualties, but Marine artillery, mortars, and rocket bursts sent them fleeing within ten minutes. Still the enemy obstinately refused to give up his goal of retaking the high ground at COP 21. In the early morning hours of the 30th, he again returned to hit the outpost in his second battalion-strength attack within six hours. Again he struck from Reno and Hill 153, and again he attempted to cut off the outpost Marines by encircling the position. Heavy pounding by artillery, mortar, and boxing fires snuffed out the enemy’s attack and by 0215 the Chinese had left the Vegas domain—this time, it was to prove, for good. Their casualties for this latest attempt had been 78 counted killed, 123 more estimated killed, and 174 estimated wounded.

Although another enemy attack was quickly pushed back at 2045 in a fast, brutal fight, shortly before midnight the Chinese returned, moving up from behind the right side of Hill 153. It was believed to be an attempt to retrieve their casualties, but Marine artillery, mortars, and rocket fire sent them running within ten minutes. Still, the enemy stubbornly refused to abandon their goal of retaking the high ground at COP 21. In the early morning hours of the 30th, they returned for a second battalion-strength attack on the outpost within six hours. Once again, they came from Reno and Hill 153, attempting to encircle the position to cut off the outpost Marines. Heavy artillery, mortar, and barrage fire extinguished the enemy’s attack, and by 0215 the Chinese had left the Vegas area—this time, it would prove to be for good. Their casualties from this latest attempt were 78 confirmed killed, 123 estimated killed, and 174 estimated wounded.

With sunup, the Marines at the battered outpost again repaired the damage of the night’s visits from the Chinese and continued work to improve their trenches and gun emplacements. Clearing weather enabled air observers and pilots to follow a full flight schedule. VMA-212 and VMA-323 were again over the Vegas skies during the morning hours and shortly before noon a joint mission by eight AU’s, a division from each squadron, dumped nearly 10 tons of bombs on enemy trenches, mortars, bunkers, and troops at Hill 25A across from Reno to discourage Chinese rebuilding efforts. Both flew afternoon sorties to destroy strongholds at Hill 21B, at Reno, now in possession of the enemy, and to make smoke screen runs. Early in the day, Company F of 2/5 came up from the 2/5 CP to fill in on the305 MLR and Berlin outposts for Company G from 3/5. Later in the afternoon, G/3/5 relieved E/2/7 on Vegas and Major George E. Kelly, S-3 of 2d Battalion, 7th Marines, succeeded Major Buntin as the new outpost commander.

At sunrise, the Marines at the damaged outpost worked again to fix the damage caused by the Chinese during the night and continued to improve their trenches and gun placements. Clear weather allowed air observers and pilots to carry out a full flight schedule. VMA-212 and VMA-323 were back over the skies of Vegas in the morning, and just before noon, a joint mission involving eight aircraft, one from each squadron, dropped nearly 10 tons of bombs on enemy trenches, mortars, bunkers, and troops at Hill 25A, aimed at discouraging Chinese rebuilding efforts. They both flew afternoon missions to destroy strongholds at Hill 21B, located in Reno and currently held by the enemy, and to conduct smoke screen runs. Earlier in the day, Company F of 2/5 moved up from the 2/5 command post to take over the305 Marine Line of Resistance and Berlin outposts for Company G from 3/5. Later in the afternoon, G/3/5 took over from E/2/7 on Vegas, and Major George E. Kelly, S-3 of the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, replaced Major Buntin as the new outpost commander.

Two comments, casually made at the time, perhaps typify the grim staying power of the Marines who defended Vegas. As Corporal George C. Demars, Company F platoon guide, 5th Marines, observed, “The guys were like rabbits digging in. The fill-ins [reinforcements] gotten by the Company during the reorganization, jumped right in. We didn’t know half the people on the fire teams, but everybody worked together.”382 Second Lieutenant Irvin B. Maizlish, assigned as a rifle platoon commander of F/2/5 on the 25th, the day before the fighting broke out, and who had the dubious distinction of being one of the few officers of those originally attached to the company not wounded or killed, recalled: “I checked the men digging in at Vegas ... I’ve never seen men work so hard ... I even heard some of them singing the Marine Corps Hymn as they were digging....”383

Two comments, casually made at the time, perhaps capture the gritty determination of the Marines who defended Vegas. As Corporal George C. Demars, Company F platoon guide, 5th Marines, noted, “The guys were like rabbits digging in. The reinforcements we got during the reorganization jumped right in. We didn’t know half the people on the fire teams, but everyone worked together.”382 Second Lieutenant Irvin B. Maizlish, who was assigned as a rifle platoon commander of F/2/5 on the 25th, the day before the fighting started, and who had the unfortunate distinction of being one of the few officers originally attached to the company not wounded or killed, remembered: “I checked the men digging in at Vegas ... I’ve never seen men work so hard ... I even heard some of them singing the Marine Corps Hymn while they were digging....”383

382 Fugate, “Vegas,” p. 74.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Fugate, “Vegas,” p. 74.

383 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

The last direct confrontation with the enemy at Vegas had occurred that morning, about 1100, when five Chinese unconcernedly walked up to the outpost, apparently to surrender. Then, suddenly, they began throwing grenades and firing their automatic weapons. The little delegation was promptly dispatched by two Marine fire teams. Three CCF soldiers were killed and two taken prisoners, one of whom later died.

The last direct confrontation with the enemy in Vegas happened that morning around 11:00 AM, when five Chinese soldiers casually approached the outpost, seemingly to surrender. Then, without warning, they started throwing grenades and firing their automatic weapons. The small group was quickly taken down by two Marine fire teams. Three CCF soldiers were killed and two were captured, one of whom later died.

As darkness fell on the 30th, Marine artillery fired heavy harassing and interdiction missions and regimental TOTs on enemy supply routes and assembly areas. Although the shoot was dual-purposed, both to prevent another Chinese attempt at retaking Vegas and to foil a possible diversionary probe elsewhere in the division sector, neither situation developed. For the fourth consecutive night, giant searchlights from the Army’s 2d Platoon, 61st Field Artillery Battery illuminated the battlefield to spotlight the enemy withdrawal routes. Two of the quadruple .50 caliber machine gun mounts from the 1st Provisional AAA-AW Battery were also displaced to MLR positions in anticipation of trouble, but the CCF had apparently had enough of a thoroughly bloodied nose from the Marine fighters and decided to call it quits.

As darkness fell on the 30th, Marine artillery launched heavy harassment and interdiction missions along with regimental time-on-target (TOT) strikes on enemy supply routes and assembly areas. Although the mission had two goals—preventing another Chinese attempt to retake Vegas and disrupting a possible diversion in other areas of the division—the situation didn’t develop. For the fourth night in a row, giant searchlights from the Army’s 2nd Platoon, 61st Field Artillery Battery lit up the battlefield to highlight the enemy's withdrawal routes. Two of the quadruple .50 caliber machine gun mounts from the 1st Provisional AAA-AW Battery were also moved to main line of resistance (MLR) positions in case trouble arose, but it seemed the CCF had had enough after taking significant losses from the Marine fighters and chose to pull back.

306

306

By daybreak, the Vegas sentry forces could report that things had been relatively quiet—the first time in five interminably long nights—and Companies D and E, 5th Marines, which had been watchdogging it at the outpost moved back to the MLR. At 0800, the 2d Battalion, 7th Marines, reverted to parent control, and by noon, reliefs were under way not only for Vegas but for Corinne, Dagmar, Hedy, and Bunker in the 1st Marines sector. A 5th Marines body recovery detail, meanwhile, had moved out to search the draws.

By dawn, the Vegas guard forces could report that things had been fairly quiet—the first time in five endlessly long nights—and Companies D and E, 5th Marines, which had been keeping watch at the outpost, returned to the MLR. At 0800, the 2nd Battalion, 7th Marines, returned to parent control, and by noon, replacements were underway not only for Vegas but also for Corinne, Dagmar, Hedy, and Bunker in the 1st Marines sector. Meanwhile, a 5th Marines body recovery detail had moved out to search the draws.

If ground action was light on the 31st, supporting arms activity was a different story, starting with seven MPQ drops on enemy artillery positions and ammunition caves in the early hours of darkness. Between 0650 and 1900, 23 air strikes were flown in the Vegas-Reno area by VMA-121 ADs and AUs of -212 and -323, MAG-12 squadrons, as well as three quartets of Air Force Thunderjets dispatched by Fifth Air Force. Artillery fired a total of 800 rounds on 156 enemy concentrations, again with 4.2-inch mortars from the 461st Infantry Battalion reinforcing 1/11 fires on hostile mortars, ammunition dumps, and supply points. If the outgoing was aimed at discouraging Communist plans for new acquisitions, their incoming had dropped to a new low in comparison with the heightened activity of the past five days. A total of 699 rounds was reported in the division sector, most of it falling in 5th Marines territory.

If ground action was light on the 31st, supporting arms activity was a different story, starting with seven MPQ drops on enemy artillery positions and ammo caves in the early hours of darkness. Between 6:50 AM and 7:00 PM, 23 airstrikes were carried out in the Vegas-Reno area by VMA-121 ADs and AUs of -212 and -323, MAG-12 squadrons, as well as three groups of Air Force Thunderjets sent by the Fifth Air Force. Artillery fired a total of 800 rounds at 156 enemy concentrations, again with 4.2-inch mortars from the 461st Infantry Battalion supporting 1/11 fires on enemy mortars, ammo dumps, and supply points. If the outgoing was aimed at discouraging Communist plans for new acquisitions, their incoming had dropped to a new low compared to the increased activity of the past five days. A total of 699 rounds was reported in the division sector, most of it landing in 5th Marines territory.

Aftermath384

384 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 887, dtd 31 Mar 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 3/5 ComdDs, Mar 53; 11thMar SAR “Arty Defense”; Hicks, Outpost Warfare; MacDonald POW; Jane Blakeney, Heroes—U.S. Marine Corps, 1861–1955 (Washington, D.C.: Blakeney, 1957); Leckie, Conflict; Fugate, “Vegas”; MSgt Roy E. Heinecke, “A Year in Korea,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 11 (Nov 53); New York Times, 29–31 Mar 53; Washington Post, 29–31 Mar 53.

384 Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 887, dated 31 Mar 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 3/5 ComdDs, Mar 53; 11thMar SAR “Arty Defense”; Hicks, Outpost Warfare; MacDonald POW; Jane Blakeney, Heroes—U.S. Marine Corps, 1861–1955 (Washington, D.C.: Blakeney, 1957); Leckie, Conflict; Fugate, “Vegas”; MSgt Roy E. Heinecke, “A Year in Korea,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 11 (Nov 53); New York Times, 29–31 Mar 53; Washington Post, 29–31 Mar 53.

Recapture and defense of the Vegas outpost was one of the intense, contained struggles which came to characterize the latter part of the Korean War. The action developed into a five-day siege involving over 4,000 ground and air Marines and was the most bloody action that Marines on the western front had yet engaged in. Its cost can be seen, in part, by the casualties sustained by the 1st Marine Division.307 The infantry strength of two battalions was required to retake Outpost Vegas and defend it against successive Chinese counterattacks. A total of 520 Marine replacements were received during the operation. Marine casualties totaled 1,015, or 116 killed, 441 wounded/evacuated, 360 wounded/not evacuated, and 98 missing, of which 19 were known to be prisoners. Losses for the critical five-day period represented 70 percent of division casualties for the entire month—1,488 killed, wounded, and missing (not including 128 in the KMC sector).

Recapturing and defending the Vegas outpost was one of the intense, focused battles that defined the later part of the Korean War. The operation turned into a five-day siege involving over 4,000 ground and air Marines and was the bloodiest engagement that Marines on the western front had faced so far. The cost can be partly seen in the casualties suffered by the 1st Marine Division.307 Two battalions of infantry were needed to retake Outpost Vegas and defend it against ongoing Chinese counterattacks. A total of 520 Marine replacements were brought in during the operation. Marine casualties amounted to 1,015, including 116 killed, 441 wounded/evacuated, 360 wounded/not evacuated, and 98 missing, of which 19 were confirmed to be prisoners. Losses during this critical five-day period accounted for 70 percent of the division’s casualties for the entire month—1,488 killed, wounded, and missing (not including 128 in the KMC sector).

Enemy casualties were listed conservatively as 2,221. This represented 536 counted killed, 654 estimated killed, 174 counted wounded, 853 estimated wounded, and 4 prisoners. The Marines, moreover, in the five days of furious fighting had knocked out the 358th CCF Regiment, numbering between 3,000 and 3,500 men, and destroyed its effectiveness as a unit.

Enemy casualties were reported to be 2,221. This included 536 confirmed deaths, 654 estimated deaths, 174 confirmed injuries, 853 estimated injuries, and 4 prisoners. Furthermore, in the five days of intense combat, the Marines had taken out the 358th CCF Regiment, which had around 3,000 to 3,500 soldiers, and rendered it ineffective as a unit.

Throughout the Vegas operation, the 1st Marine Air Wing had flown 218 combat missions against the Nevada Cities hills (63 percent of the entire month’s total 346 CAS missions), bombing and strafing enemy weapons positions, bunkers, ammunition dumps, trenches, and troops. On the 27th and 28th, while heavy fighting raged in both the Marine and 7th Army Division sectors, Marine Air Group 33 pilots flew 75 sorties—resulting in their highest daily sortie rate and air hours since December 1952. The March 28th date was a noteworthy one for MAG-12, too. It established a new record for combat sorties and bomb tonnage unloaded on the enemy in a single day; the group executed 129 sorties and dropped 207.64 tons of bombs and napalm.

Throughout the Vegas operation, the 1st Marine Air Wing conducted 218 combat missions against the Nevada Cities hills (63 percent of the total 346 Close Air Support missions for the month), targeting enemy weapon positions, bunkers, ammunition dumps, trenches, and troops with bombing and strafing runs. On the 27th and 28th, as intense fighting continued in both the Marine and 7th Army Division areas, Marine Air Group 33 pilots flew 75 sorties—achieving their highest daily sortie rate and air hours since December 1952. March 28th was also significant for MAG-12, as it set a new record for combat sorties and bomb tonnage dropped on the enemy in one day; the group completed 129 sorties and released 207.64 tons of bombs and napalm.

Although restricted on two days by weather conditions, close air support was effectively used throughout the Vegas Cities operation. A total of 81 four-aircraft flights dropped approximately 426 tons of explosives in CAS missions. Smoke and flare planes—despite a shortage of both flare planes and flares385—were employed throughout the period as were the rotary aircraft of the two helicopter squadrons, the latter for casualty evacuation operations.

Although limited by weather for two days, close air support was effectively utilized during the Vegas Cities operation. A total of 81 flights with four aircraft each dropped about 426 tons of explosives in CAS missions. Smoke and flare planes—despite a shortage of both flare planes and flares—were used throughout the period, along with the rotary aircraft from the two helicopter squadrons, which were employed for casualty evacuation operations.

385 CG, 1stMarDiv msg to COs, 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, KMC, KPR, dtd 31 Mar 53, in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53, App. II, p. 9.

385 CG, 1stMarDiv message to Commanding Officers, 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, KMC, KPR, dated March 31, 1953, in 1stMarDiv Command Document, March 1953, Appendix II, page 9.

Tanks, provided by the Company A direct support tank company, were used day and night, firing from nine positions along the MLR. Their effective use to mark air targets was of particular importance in connection with their support role, while the tank light also helped308 to provide illumination of the objective area in hours of darkness. Approximately 7,000 rounds of 90mm tank ammunition were fired.

Tanks from Company A's direct support tank company were used around the clock, firing from nine positions along the Main Line of Resistance (MLR). Their effective use for marking air targets was especially important for their support role, while the tank lights also helped illuminate the objective area at night. About 7,000 rounds of 90mm tank ammo were fired.

During these five tense days the enemy deluged Marine positions with 45,000 rounds of artillery, mortar, and mixed fire. Indicative of the savage pounding the Vegas area took is the fact that incoming Chinese artillery for the full two-week period from 1–15 March totaled only 3,289 rounds. Marine efforts to defend, counterattack, secure, and hold the Vegas outpost against repeated Chinese assaults were “marked by maximum use of and coordination with various supporting arms and organic weapons.”386 Three light artillery battalions, two medium battalions, two 8-inch batteries, one 4.5-inch rocket battery, and two companies of 4.2-inch mortars fired a combined total of 104,864 rounds between 27–31 March; the 11th Marines and its heavy Army reinforcing elements, in support of 5th and 7th Marines units, executed 332 counterbattery and 666 countermortar missions. Of the total number fired, 132 were air observed.

During these five intense days, the enemy bombarded Marine positions with 45,000 rounds of artillery, mortar, and mixed fire. The brutal assault on the Vegas area is highlighted by the fact that the total incoming Chinese artillery fire for the entire two-week period from March 1 to March 15 was only 3,289 rounds. Marine efforts to defend, counterattack, secure, and hold the Vegas outpost against repeated Chinese attacks were “characterized by maximum use of and coordination with various supporting arms and organic weapons.”386 Three light artillery battalions, two medium battalions, two 8-inch batteries, one 4.5-inch rocket battery, and two companies of 4.2-inch mortars fired a total of 104,864 rounds between March 27 and March 31; the 11th Marines and its heavy Army reinforcement units, supporting the 5th and 7th Marines, carried out 332 counter-battery and 666 counter-mortar missions. Of the total rounds fired, 132 were air observed.

386 5thMar SAR “Cities,” p. 8.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Mar 5th SAR “Cities,” p. 8.

The artillery shelling was the hottest during a 24-hour period ending at 1600 on 28–29 March. During this time 35,809 rounds were fired (33,041 from the four Marine battalions). This even surpassed the previous record of 34,881 rounds fired during a one-day period in the Bunker Hill defense of August 1952. A new one-day battalion total for West Korean fighting was also set on the 28th; 1/11 fired 11,079 rounds, exceeding the record of 10,652 set by 3/11 during the Bunker Hill fighting.

The artillery shelling peaked during a 24-hour period ending at 4:00 PM on March 28-29. During this time, 35,809 rounds were fired (33,041 from the four Marine battalions). This even surpassed the previous record of 34,881 rounds fired in a single day during the Bunker Hill defense in August 1952. A new one-day battalion total for fighting in Western Korea was also set on the 28th; 1/11 fired 11,079 rounds, exceeding the record of 10,652 set by 3/11 during the Bunker Hill fighting.

Marines at a rear area supply point achieved another record. In a 24-hour period, during the heavy fighting on 28–29 March, 130 men handled 2,841 tons of ammunition. Second Lieutenant Donald E. Spangler, an ammunition platoon commander with the 1st Ordnance Battalion, who had but 13 hours’ sleep in the entire five days of fighting, proudly noted that his unit had “more than doubled the tonnage that the U.S. Army says a man can handle in 14 hours.”387

Marines at a rear area supply point set another record. In a 24-hour period during the intense fighting on March 28–29, 130 men managed 2,841 tons of ammunition. Second Lieutenant Donald E. Spangler, an ammunition platoon commander with the 1st Ordnance Battalion, who had only 13 hours of sleep over the five days of fighting, proudly pointed out that his unit had "more than doubled the tonnage that the U.S. Army claims a person can handle in 14 hours."387

387 Heinecke, op. cit., p. 50.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Heinecke, quoted work, p. 50.

As for the men on the front line, besides the Medal of Honor winners, 10 Marines were awarded the Navy Cross, the nation’s second highest combat award. Nine citations were for the Vegas action and one for the 1st Marines defense of Dagmar, in staving off an enemy penetration on the night of the 26th.

As for the men on the front line, besides the Medal of Honor winners, 10 Marines were awarded the Navy Cross, the nation’s second-highest combat award. Nine of the citations were for the Vegas action, and one was for the 1st Marines' defense of Dagmar, which successfully prevented an enemy breach on the night of the 26th.

309

309

Battlefront tactics employed by the CCF in its assault of the Vegas Cities outposts were largely consistent with their previous strategy. As in the past, the enemy launched simultaneous attacks against several Marine positions in attempt to fragment defensive artillery firepower. Characteristically, the enemy preceded his thrust with heavy preassault concentrations of artillery and mortar fire. He also took advantage of the twin ploys of surprise and overwhelming strength, with wave after wave of Chinese rolling over the objective. Innovative techniques consisted of scaling ladders, fashioned from lightweight but sturdy bamboo, which were used to traverse Marine wire defenses, and of having an artillery liaison officer attached to infantry squads to better direct supporting fires during the attack. Analysis of Chinese firepower tactics indicated deliberate counterbattery efforts by the CCF, although this employment of artillery was secondary to its support of ground troops.

Battlefront tactics used by the CCF in their attack on the Vegas Cities outposts were mostly in line with their previous strategy. As before, the enemy launched simultaneous assaults on several Marine positions to disrupt defensive artillery fire. Typically, the enemy kicked off the attack with heavy artillery and mortar fire. They also utilized the strategies of surprise and overwhelming force, sending wave after wave of Chinese troops over the target. Innovative techniques included using lightweight but durable bamboo ladders to get over Marine wire defenses, and assigning an artillery liaison officer to infantry squads to better coordinate supporting fire during the attack. Analysis of Chinese firepower tactics showed intentional counterbattery actions by the CCF, although their artillery use was mainly to support ground troops.

Actually, the Chinese attack on the forward Marine outposts the night of the 26th appeared to have been part of an overall reinvigorated spring assault. Opening gun of this offense had been fired three nights earlier, on the 23d, when they swept over an Army hill defense at Old Baldy, 25 miles northeast of the Marine Vegas Hills. Despite heavy Allied gunfire and bombing by Air Force and Marine planes under Fifth Air Force flight orders, the Chinese had clung to the hill, burrowed deeply, and resisted all efforts to be dislodged. After three days of fighting, U.S. 7th Division troops had abandoned the Old Baldy hill at dawn on the 26th. The CCF, apparently emboldened by this success, that same night had launched a series of probes at nine UN outposts on the Korean far western front in an attempt to further extend their frontline acquisitions.

Actually, the Chinese attack on the Marine outposts that night on the 26th seemed to be part of a renewed spring offensive. The first shot of this attack was fired three nights earlier, on the 23rd, when they stormed an Army hill defense at Old Baldy, 25 miles northeast of Marine Vegas Hills. Despite heavy Allied gunfire and bombing by Air Force and Marine planes following Fifth Air Force orders, the Chinese managed to hold onto the hill, digging in and resisting all attempts to remove them. After three days of fighting, U.S. 7th Division troops abandoned the Old Baldy hill at dawn on the 26th. The CCF, seemingly encouraged by this victory, launched a series of probes that same night at nine UN outposts on the far western front of Korea to further expand their territorial gains.

Following the loss of Reno, a new outpost, Elko, was established on Hill 47, southeast of Carson and 765 yards from the MLR, to prevent the enemy from using the Hill 47 position as an attack and patrol route to the MLR. In addition to this new platoon-strength outpost, the Marines substantially shored up Vegas from its former platoon garrison to a detachment consisting of 2 officers and 133 enlisted men.

Following the loss of Reno, a new outpost, Elko, was set up on Hill 47, southeast of Carson and 765 yards from the MLR, to stop the enemy from using the Hill 47 position as a route for attacks and patrols to the MLR. Along with this new outpost at platoon strength, the Marines significantly reinforced Vegas from its previous platoon garrison to a detachment made up of 2 officers and 133 enlisted men.

Headlines had told Americans at home and the free peoples around the world the story of the “Nevada Cities” in Korea and the Marines’ five-day stand there to prevent loss of critical UNC territory. The event that marked an official “well done” to the Marines themselves310 was a message from the Commandant, General Shepherd, who on 30 March sent the following dispatch to General Pollock, CG, 1st Marine Division:

Headlines informed Americans at home and free people everywhere about the “Nevada Cities” in Korea and the Marines’ five-day effort to hold onto important UNC territory. The official recognition for the Marines came from a message sent by Commandant General Shepherd on March 30 to General Pollock, CG, 1st Marine Division:

Have followed the reports of intensive combat in the First Marine Division sector during the past week with greatest sense of pride and confidence. The stubborn and heroic defense of Vegas, Reno, and Carson Hills coupled with the superb offensive spirit which characterized the several counterattacks are a source of reassurance and satisfaction to your fellow Marines everywhere. On their behalf please accept for yourself and pass on to every officer and man of your command my sincere congratulations on a task accomplished in true Marine Corps fashion.388

I have been following the reports of intense combat in the First Marine Division area over the past week with great pride and confidence. The determined and heroic defense of Vegas, Reno, and Carson Hills, along with the outstanding offensive spirit seen in the various counterattacks, reassures and satisfies your fellow Marines everywhere. On their behalf, please accept my heartfelt congratulations for yourself and pass them on to every officer and member of your command for a job well done in true Marine Corps style.388

388 CMC msg to CG, 1stMarDiv, dtd 30 Mar 53, cited in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53, App. I, p. 7.

388 CMC msg to CG, 1stMarDiv, dated 30 Mar 53, cited in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Mar 53, App. I, p. 7.

In turn, General Pollock congratulated the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing of General Megee and its six participating squadrons (VMAs-121, -212, -323, VMFs-115, -311, and VMF(N)-513). Citing the close air support missions of the Marine flyers during the operation, General Pollock noted that the air strikes of the 28th were “particularly well executed and contributed materially to the success of the 1st Marine Division in retaking and holding the objective.”389

In response, General Pollock praised the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing led by General Megee and its six participating squadrons (VMAs-121, -212, -323, VMFs-115, -311, and VMF(N)-513). Highlighting the close air support missions conducted by the Marine pilots during the operation, General Pollock pointed out that the air strikes on the 28th were “especially well carried out and significantly contributed to the success of the 1st Marine Division in reclaiming and securing the objective.”389

389 CG, 1stMarDiv msg to CG, 1st MAW, dtd 31 Mar 53, in MAG-12 ComdD, Mar 53, App. VII-3.

389 CG, 1stMarDiv message to CG, 1st MAW, dated March 31, 1953, in MAG-12 Command Diary, March 1953, Appendix VII-3.

Plaudits had also come to the 1st Marine Division from the Korean Minister of Defense, Pai Yung Shin,390 the day immediately preceding the Vegas attack. On 25 March, the Korean Presidential Unit Citation streamer,391 for action from 26 October 1950 to 15 February 1953, had been placed on the division colors in ceremonies at the division command post, attended by the Korean Defense Minister; Vice Admiral Woon Il Sohn, Chief of Korean Naval Operations; Major General Hyan Zoon Shin, Commandant of the Korean Marine Corps; General Pollock, division commander, and his troops. The event marked the fourth Korean PUC awarded to Marine units since the beginning of the war.

Plaudits had also been given to the 1st Marine Division by the Korean Minister of Defense, Pai Yung Shin, the day before the Vegas attack. On March 25, the Korean Presidential Unit Citation streamer, for actions from October 26, 1950, to February 15, 1953, was placed on the division colors in a ceremony at the division command post, attended by the Korean Defense Minister; Vice Admiral Woon Il Sohn, Chief of Korean Naval Operations; Major General Hyan Zoon Shin, Commandant of the Korean Marine Corps; General Pollock, the division commander, and his troops. This event marked the fourth Korean PUC awarded to Marine units since the start of the war.

390 CROKMC ltr to CMC, dtd 2 Feb 1971, hereafter ROKMC Comments.

390 CROKMC letter to CMC, dated February 2, 1971, hereafter ROKMC Comments.

391 See Appendix G for complete text of citation. Previous awards were as follows: 1stProvMarBrig (for 2 Aug-6 Sep 50 period), 1st MAW (3 Aug 50–26 Feb 51), and 1stMarDiv (15–27 Sep 50).

391 See Appendix G for the full text of the citation. The previous awards were as follows: 1st Prov Mar Brig (for the period of August 2 to September 6, 1950), 1st MAW (from August 3, 1950, to February 26, 1951), and 1st Mar Div (from September 15 to September 27, 1950).

A directive at the end of the month put the 7th Marines on the alert to move into 5th Marines positions in the right regimental sector. This was to be accomplished on 4–5 April when, after 68 days on line, the 5th Marines moved south to Camp Rose to become the311 division reserve regiment. The prospect of a new stage in the off-and-on truce negotiations had also come late in the month. On 28 March, the Communists informed the UN of their willingness to discuss the Allied proposal for return of sick and wounded prisoners. This exchange had originally been suggested by the UN more than a year earlier, in December 1951. Notification of the new Chinese intentions came, ironically, on a day when the Vegas outpost fighting was at its height.

A directive at the end of the month put the 7th Marines on alert to move into the 5th Marines positions in the right regimental sector. This was set to happen on 4–5 April when, after 68 days on the front line, the 5th Marines moved south to Camp Rose to become the311 division reserve regiment. The possibility of a new phase in the on-and-off truce negotiations also emerged late in the month. On 28 March, the Communists informed the UN of their willingness to talk about the Allied proposal for the return of sick and wounded prisoners. This exchange had originally been suggested by the UN over a year earlier, in December 1951. Notification of the new Chinese intentions came, ironically, on a day when the Vegas outpost fighting was at its peak.

As the month closed on the Vegas chapter, Marines on line and in the reserve companies who had just sweated through the bloodiest exchange of the war on the I Corps front to date added their own epitaph. With a touch of ungallantry that can be understood, they called the disputed crest of Vegas “the highest damn beachhead in Korea.”

As the month ended for the Vegas chapter, Marines on the front lines and in the reserve units, who had just endured the bloodiest battle of the war on the I Corps front so far, added their own tribute. With a bit of unheroic honesty that makes sense, they referred to the contested peak of Vegas as “the highest damn beachhead in Korea.”


The Peace Talks Resume—Operation LITTLE SWITCH—Interval Before the Marines Go Off the Line—The May Relief—Training While in Reserve and Division Change of Command—Heavy May-June Fighting—Developments in Marine Air—Other Marine Defense Activities—The Division Is Ordered Back to the Front

The Peace Talks Resume—Operation Small change—Break Before the Marines Go Off the Line—The May Relief—Training While in Reserve and Division Change of Command—Intense May-June Fighting—Updates in Marine Air—Other Marine Defense Activities—The Division Is Ordered Back to the Front

The Peace Talks Resume392

392 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv, 1st EngrBn ComdDs, Apr 53; Berger, Korea Knot; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Hermes, Truce Tent; Leckie, Conflict; M/Sgt Robert T. Fugate, “Freedom Village,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 7 (Jul 53), hereafter Fugate, “Freedom Village.”

392 Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv, 1st EngrBn ComdDs, Apr 53; Berger, Korea Knot; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Hermes, Truce Tent; Leckie, Conflict; M/Sgt Robert T. Fugate, “Freedom Village,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 7 (Jul 53), hereafter Fugate, “Freedom Village.”

It was April 1953, but it wasn’t an April Fool’s mirage. On 6 April, representatives of the United Nations Command and the Communist delegation sat down at the Panmunjom truce tents to resume the peace talks that had been stalemated six months—since October 1952. If there was a word that could be said to reflect the attitude of American officials and private citizens alike—for that matter, the atmosphere at Panmunjom itself—it was one of caution—not real optimism, not an unbridled hopefulness, but a wearied caution born of the mountains of words, gulfs of free-flowing dialogue and diatribe, and then ultimate plateaus of intransigence that had marked negotiations with Communist leaders since the original truce discussions had begun in July 1951.

It was April 1953, but it wasn’t an April Fool’s illusion. On April 6, representatives of the United Nations Command and the Communist delegation gathered at the Panmunjom truce tents to restart peace talks that had been stuck for six months—since October 1952. If there was one word that captured the attitude of American officials and private citizens alike—and the atmosphere at Panmunjom itself—it was caution—not real optimism or unrestrained hopefulness, but a tired caution that stemmed from the endless words, overflowing dialogue and arguments, and the ultimate deadlock that had characterized negotiations with Communist leaders since the original truce discussions began in July 1951.

Diplomatic maneuverings had been underway since the end of 1952 for the exchange of sick and wounded prisoners of both sides. This was considered a first step towards ending the prisoner of war314 dispute and achieving an ultimate truce. A resolution introduced in mid-November by India at the United Nations session dealing with settlement of nonrepatriate prisoners had been adopted in early December. Later that month the Red Cross international conference had officially gone on record favoring the exchange of sick and wounded prisoners in advance of a truce. A letter written on 22 February by the UNC commander, General Clark, calling for the immediate exchange of ailing prisoners had been delivered to the NKPA and CCF leaders.

Diplomatic efforts had been ongoing since the end of 1952 for the exchange of sick and injured prisoners from both sides. This was seen as a first step toward resolving the prisoner of war314 issue and reaching a final truce. A resolution introduced in mid-November by India at the United Nations meeting regarding the settlement of non-repatriate prisoners was adopted in early December. Later that month, the Red Cross international conference officially endorsed the exchange of sick and injured prisoners ahead of a truce. A letter written on February 22 by the UNC commander, General Clark, requesting the immediate exchange of ailing prisoners was delivered to the NKPA and CCF leaders.

Initially, the Communist answer was an oppressive silence that lasted for more than a month. During this time the Communist hierarchy had been stunned by the death, on 5 March, of Premier Stalin. Then, on 28 March, in a letter that reached General Clark at Tokyo in the middle of the night, came an unexpected response from the two Communist spokesmen. They not only agreed unconditionally to an exchange of the sick and injured prisoners but further proposed that “the delegates for armistice negotiations of both sides immediately resume the negotiations at Panmunjom.”393

Initially, the Communist response was a heavy silence that lasted over a month. During this period, the Communist leadership was taken aback by the death of Premier Stalin on March 5. Then, on March 28, in a letter that reached General Clark in Tokyo late at night, there was an unexpected reply from the two Communist representatives. They not only agreed without conditions to exchange the sick and injured prisoners but also suggested that "the delegates for armistice negotiations from both sides immediately resume talks at Panmunjom."393

393 Leckie, Conflict, p. 373.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Leckie, Conflict, p. 373.

This favorable development astonished not only the United Nations Commander but the rest of the Free World as well. Several steps were quickly put in motion. The UN Commander’s reply to the Kim-Peng offer was expressed in such a way that resumption of full negotiations was not tied in as a condition for the preliminary exchange of ailing POWs. President Eisenhower, commenting on the new Communist proposals at his 2 April press conference, stated he thought the country should “now take at face value every offer made to us until it is proved unworthy of our confidence.”394 He also further enjoined major military commanders and subordinates to avoid anything that might be contrary to this view when they made public remarks or issued press releases.

This positive development shocked not just the United Nations Commander but also the rest of the Free World. Several steps were quickly put into action. The UN Commander responded to the Kim-Peng offer in a way that didn’t tie the resumption of full negotiations to the preliminary exchange of sick POWs. President Eisenhower, discussing the new Communist proposals at his April 2 press conference, said he believed the country should “now take every offer made to us at face value until it's proven unworthy of our trust.”394 He also urged major military commanders and their subordinates to avoid anything that might contradict this perspective in their public statements or press releases.

394 CG, Eighth Army msg to CG, 1stMarDiv and others, dtd 4 Apr 53, in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 53, App. I, p. 1.

394 CG, Eighth Army message to CG, 1stMarDiv and others, dated April 4, 1953, in 1stMarDiv ComdD, April 1953, Appendix I, page 1.

In Korea, the Munsan-ni Provisional Command was established on 5 April under the Commanding General, Eighth Army, in the vicinity of the 1st Marine Division railhead at Munsan-ni. The command was to prepare for the many housekeeping details involved in the receiving and orderly processing of all UNC prisoners. The anticipated exchange itself was dubbed Operation LITTLE SWITCH.315 Two Army officers, one Marine Corps, and one ROKA representative were designed to direct the administrative machinery of the provisional command. Heading the organization was Colonel Raymond W. Beggs, USA.

In Korea, the Munsan-ni Provisional Command was set up on April 5 under the Commanding General of the Eighth Army, near the railhead of the 1st Marine Division at Munsan-ni. The command was responsible for handling the various administrative tasks involved in receiving and processing all UNC prisoners in an orderly manner. The expected exchange was called Operation Small switch.315 Two Army officers, one Marine Corps officer, and one ROKA representative were assigned to oversee the administrative operations of the provisional command. Colonel Raymond W. Beggs, USA, led the organization.

The Marine representative, Colonel Wallace M. Nelson, was named commanding officer of the United Nations Personnel and Medical Processing Unit. His responsibility was not limited to the obvious medical aspects of the exchange, but extended to other details involving clothing issue, personnel, security, chaplains, food, communication, motor transport, engineering, and the operation of unit headquarters. Among those matters to which the Munsan-ni command directed its immediate attention was the setting up of a temporary facility for Communist prisoners currently held in UNC camps at Koje, Cheju, and Yongcho Islands and a hospital near Pusan. Arrangements were also made for in interpreter pool, debriefing teams, and press center facilities.

The Marine representative, Colonel Wallace M. Nelson, was appointed as the commanding officer of the United Nations Personnel and Medical Processing Unit. His role went beyond just the medical side of the exchange; it also included managing details like clothing distribution, personnel, security, chaplains, food, communication, transportation, engineering, and the operation of unit headquarters. One of the first priorities for the Munsan-ni command was to set up a temporary facility for Communist prisoners currently held in UNC camps at Koje, Cheju, and Yongcho Islands, along with a hospital near Pusan. They also organized an interpreter pool, debriefing teams, and press center facilities.

As the new week began on Monday, 6 April, and the world looked to Panmunjom for the next set of signals in the war, a new stage developed in the truce negotiations. Within five days after the talks had begun, both sides agreed to return the disabled prisoners in their custody. Final papers for the preliminary exchange were signed at noon on 11 April by Rear Admiral John C. Daniel, USN, for the United Nations Command, and Major General Lee Sang Cho, of the Communist delegation. The week-long transfer of sick and wounded POWs was scheduled to begin 20 April, at Panmunjom.

As the new week started on Monday, April 6, and the world watched Panmunjom for signs of what would happen next in the war, a new phase began in the truce negotiations. Just five days after talks kicked off, both sides agreed to return the disabled prisoners they held. The final documents for the preliminary exchange were signed at noon on April 11 by Rear Admiral John C. Daniel, USN, representing the United Nations Command, and Major General Lee Sang Cho from the Communist delegation. The week-long transfer of sick and injured POWs was set to begin on April 20 at Panmunjom.

The Communists announced they intended to release 600 sick and wounded UNC prisoners (450 Korean, 150 non-Korean), a figure which Admiral Daniel called “incredibly small.”395 For its part, the UNC indicated that it planned to free nearly ten times that number of North Korean and Chinese POWs. Communist and Allied representatives also agreed that truce talks would be resumed at Panmunjom, once the prisoner exchange was completed.

The Communists announced they planned to release 600 sick and wounded UNC prisoners (450 Korean, 150 non-Korean), a number that Admiral Daniel called “incredibly small.”395 The UNC, in response, stated that it intended to free nearly ten times that number of North Korean and Chinese POWs. Communist and Allied representatives also agreed that truce talks would resume at Panmunjom once the prisoner exchange was complete.

395 Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 415.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 415.

Security precautions went into effect at both Panmunjom396 and the316 entire Munsan-ni area, 10 miles southeast, on the first day of the prisoner talks. All facilities at both Panmunjom and Munsan-ni were placed off limits to Eighth Army personnel not directly involved in the operations. Regulations were strictly enforced. Even before the negotiations opened at Panmunjom, actual construction work for LITTLE SWITCH was well under way by Marine engineers. “Operation RAINBOW,” as the building of the facilities for the POW exchange was called, began 5 April.

Security measures were implemented at both Panmunjom396 and the 316 whole Munsan-ni area, located 10 miles southeast, on the first day of the prisoner talks. All facilities at both Panmunjom and Munsan-ni were off-limits to Eighth Army personnel who weren't directly involved in the operations. Rules were strictly enforced. Even before the negotiations started at Panmunjom, actual construction work for Small change was already underway by Marine engineers. “Operation RAINBOW,” which referred to the building of the facilities for the POW exchange, began on April 5.

396 With resumption of truce negotiations, the 1st Marines, whose left battalion sector was immediately adjacent to the Panmunjom neutral zone between the two battle lines, took certain precautionary measures. The regiment set up radio communication with the UN base camp at Munsan and reactivated its rescue task force. This unit was on alert to evacuate the UN truce team from Panmunjom in the event of Communist hostile action or any threat to security. While the talks were in session, a forward covering group, composed of a reinforced rifle company and 1st Tank Battalion platoon, occupied the high ground east of Panmunjom at COP 2. Here the Marine rescue force maintained close surveillance of the enemy in the Panmunjom peace corridor as well as the safe arrival and departure of the UN truce team shuttled in by helicopter or motor convoy. 1stMar ComdD, Apr 53, pp. 5, 14 and App. II, pp. 1–4.

396 With the resumption of truce negotiations, the 1st Marines, whose left battalion sector was right next to the Panmunjom neutral zone that separated the two battle lines, took some precautionary measures. The regiment established radio communication with the UN base camp at Munsan and reactivated its rescue task force. This unit was on standby to evacuate the UN truce team from Panmunjom in case of any hostile actions from the Communists or any security threats. While the talks were happening, a forward covering group, made up of a reinforced rifle company and a platoon from the 1st Tank Battalion, took position on the high ground to the east of Panmunjom at COP 2. Here, the Marine rescue force kept a close watch on the enemy in the Panmunjom peace corridor as well as on the safe arrival and departure of the UN truce team transported by helicopter or motor convoy. 1stMar ComdD, Apr 53, pp. 5, 14 and App. II, pp. 1–4.

In a little over a day—actually 31 working hours—a task force of less than 100 Marine construction personnel had erected the entire Freedom Village POW recovery station at Munsan-ni. The special work detachment was composed of men from Company A, 1st Shore Party Battalion, under Major Charles E. Gocke, and attached to the engineer battalion; utility personnel from Headquarters and Service Companies; and a Company D platoon, 1st Engineer Battalion.397

In just over a day—specifically 31 working hours—a team of fewer than 100 Marine construction workers built the entire Freedom Village POW recovery station at Munsan-ni. The special work group was made up of men from Company A, 1st Shore Party Battalion, under Major Charles E. Gocke, and was attached to the engineer battalion; utility personnel from Headquarters and Service Companies; and a Company D platoon, 1st Engineer Battalion.397

397 The battalion’s new commanding officer was Lieutenant Colonel Francis “X” Witt, Jr., who a week earlier had succeeded Lieutenant Colonel Francis W. Augustine.

397 The battalion’s new commanding officer was Lieutenant Colonel Francis “X” Witt, Jr., who had taken over from Lieutenant Colonel Francis W. Augustine a week earlier.

Early Sunday morning the Marines moved their giant bulldozers, earth movers, pans, and other heavy duty equipment into Munsan-ni. Ground leveling started at 0800 and work continued around the clock until 0100 Monday. After a five-hour break the men dug in again at 0600 and worked uninterruptedly until 2000 that night. Furniture, tentage, and strongbacking stored at the 1st Engineer Battalion command post, meanwhile, had been transported and emplaced. When it was all done the Freedom Village complex, like ancient Gaul, had been divided into three parts. The command area comprised receiving lines, processing and press tents, and related facilities for United Nations troops. Adjacent to this was the 45th Mobile Army Surgical Hospital tent, completely wood-decked, equipped for mass examinations and emergency treatment. Across the road from the UN site proper was the area reserved for returning South Korean prisoners, who would form the bulk of the repatriates.

Early Sunday morning, the Marines brought in their massive bulldozers, earth movers, pans, and other heavy-duty equipment to Munsan-ni. Ground leveling began at 8:00 AM and continued around the clock until 1:00 AM on Monday. After a five-hour break, the men started working again at 6:00 AM and kept going without interruption until 8:00 PM that night. Meanwhile, furniture, tents, and strongbacking stored at the 1st Engineer Battalion command post had been transported and set up. Once everything was completed, the Freedom Village complex, like ancient Gaul, was divided into three sections. The command area included receiving lines, processing and press tents, and related facilities for United Nations troops. Next to this was the 45th Mobile Army Surgical Hospital tent, fully decked with wood and equipped for mass examinations and emergency treatment. Across the road from the UN site was the area set aside for returning South Korean prisoners, who would make up the majority of the repatriates.

Altogether the three camp areas represented some 35,100 square feet of hospital tentage, 84 squad tents, and 5 wall tents. Gravel to317 surface three miles of standard combat road, plus two miles of electrical wiring, was hauled and installed. More than 100 signs, painted in Korean and English, were erected, as well as the large one that stretched clear across the road at the Freedom Village entrance. Six welcome signs were raised above the UN and ROK processing tents, while another mammoth Korean-English sign was installed at the Panmunjom exchange site.

Altogether, the three camp areas covered about 35,100 square feet of hospital tents, 84 squad tents, and 5 wall tents. Gravel was laid down to317 pave three miles of standard combat road, along with two miles of electrical wiring that was transported and installed. Over 100 signs, painted in Korean and English, were put up, including a large one that stretched across the road at the entrance to Freedom Village. Six welcome signs were hung above the UN and ROK processing tents, and another giant Korean-English sign was placed at the Panmunjom exchange site.

Special areas for ambulance parking; helicopter landing strips; five 50-foot flagpoles; graded access roads and foot paths; sanitation facilities; and storage areas for food, blankets, and medical supplies were also constructed. And timing was important. It had been anticipated that the prisoner exchange might take place on short notice. For this reason 1st Marine Division work and processing teams had conducted their rehearsals so that they could complete all duties within 36 hours after first receiving the “go ahead” signal for the switch.

Special areas for ambulance parking, helicopter landing zones, five 50-foot flagpoles, graded access roads and walking paths, sanitation facilities, and storage spaces for food, blankets, and medical supplies were also built. Timing was crucial. It was expected that the prisoner exchange could happen on short notice. For this reason, the 1st Marine Division's work and processing teams had practiced their tasks so they could complete everything within 36 hours after getting the “go ahead” signal for the switch.

Operation Small Switch398

398 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap 9; Commander Naval Forces, Far East (ComNavFE), “Operation Little Switch—Apr 53”; ComNavFE Rpt of Intelligence Processing; ComNavFE Rpt, 24 Jul 53; FMFPac ComdD, Apr 53 (#1); FMFPac ComdD, May 53 (Pt. 2), rpt LtCol Fisher to CG, FMFPac, subj, “Debriefing of Returned POWs”; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 53; MacDonald, POW; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Hermes, Truce Tent; Leckie, Conflict; Fugate, “Freedom Village”; New York Times, 19–21 Apr 53; Washington Post, 19–21 Apr 53.

398 Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap 9; Commander Naval Forces, Far East (ComNavFE), “Operation Little Switch—Apr 53”; ComNavFE Rpt of Intelligence Processing; ComNavFE Rpt, 24 Jul 53; FMFPac ComdD, Apr 53 (#1); FMFPac ComdD, May 53 (Pt. 2), report LtCol Fisher to CG, FMFPac, subject, “Debriefing of Returned POWs”; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 53; MacDonald, POW; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Hermes, Truce Tent; Leckie, Conflict; Fugate, “Freedom Village”; New York Times, 19–21 Apr 53; Washington Post, 19–21 Apr 53.

Nine days after the truce talks were temporarily suspended, 11 April, Operation LITTLE SWITCH (code-named Little Swap) began the morning of Monday, 20 April. By the time it ended on 26 April, a total of 6,670 North Korean and Chinese Communist prisoners had been returned by the UNC. The enemy released 684 captives,399 of whom 149 were Americans. Among them were 15 Marines, 3 Navy corpsmen who had been attached to the 1st Marine Division, and a Navy aviator. The first day Allied prisoners—walking, some hobbling along on crutches, and others carried on litters—were delivered in two groups. The initial 50 men reached Panmunjom at 0825, and the second group, two hours later. The first Marine freed318 was Private Alberto Pizarro-Baez, H/3/7, a Puerto Rican, who had been captured at Frisco in the early October 1952 outpost clashes. Later that day, another POW taken in the same action, Private Louis A. Pumphrey, was also released.

Nine days after the truce talks were temporarily put on hold, on April 11, Operation LITTLE SWITCH (code-named Little Swap) kicked off on the morning of Monday, April 20. By the time it wrapped up on April 26, the UNC had returned a total of 6,670 North Korean and Chinese Communist prisoners. The enemy released 684 captives, 399 of whom 149 were Americans. This included 15 Marines, 3 Navy corpsmen attached to the 1st Marine Division, and a Navy pilot. On the first day, Allied prisoners—some walking, some hobbling on crutches, and others carried on stretchers—were delivered in two groups. The first group of 50 men arrived at Panmunjom at 8:25 AM, with the second group arriving two hours later. The first Marine to be freed318 was Private Alberto Pizarro-Baez, H/3/7, a Puerto Rican who had been captured during the outpost clashes in early October 1952. Later that same day, another POW taken in the same incident, Private Louis A. Pumphrey, was also released.

399 The 684 UNC prisoners returned in LITTLE SWITCH represented 471 South Koreans, 149 Americans, 32 British, 15 Turks, 6 Colombians, 5 Australians, 2 Canadians, 1 Greek, 1 South African, 1 Filipino, and 1 Netherlander.

399 The 684 UNC prisoners returned in SMALL TOGGLE included 471 South Koreans, 149 Americans, 32 British, 15 Turks, 6 Colombians, 5 Australians, 2 Canadians, 1 Greek, 1 South African, 1 Filipino, and 1 Dutch.

Early moments of the exchange were tense as UNC sick and wounded captives were shipped in a long line of CCF ambulances from Kaesong, five miles northwest of Panmunjom, down the neutral corridor past enemy lines to the exchange point. Despite the fact that all official papers and agreements had been concluded more than a week earlier, no one was absolutely sure until the last moment that the prisoner exchange would actually take place. The mechanics of the transfer operation itself, as it turned out, went off practically without hitch. One minor unsavory incident had occurred when 50 North Korean prisoners in UNC custody en route from Pusan to Panmunjom, had dumped their mess kits into garbage cans, noisily complaining about breakfast.

Early moments of the exchange were tense as UNC sick and injured captives were transported in a long line of CCF ambulances from Kaesong, five miles northwest of Panmunjom, down the neutral corridor past enemy lines to the exchange point. Even though all official papers and agreements had been finalized more than a week earlier, no one was completely certain until the last moment that the prisoner exchange would actually happen. The logistics of the transfer operation itself, as it turned out, went off practically without any issues. One minor unpleasant incident occurred when 50 North Korean prisoners in UNC custody, on their way from Pusan to Panmunjom, dumped their mess kits into garbage cans, loudly complaining about breakfast.

There was also a long taut moment of uneasy silence when the first Communist ambulance pulled up in front of the Panmunjom receiving center. An American MP, who in the excitement had gotten his orders confused, forgot to tell the enemy driver where to turn. The ambulance almost went past the center. A UN officer raced out to the road and motioned to the driver, who backed around and pulled into the parking lot.

There was also a long, tense moment of awkward silence when the first Communist ambulance arrived at the Panmunjom receiving center. An American MP, who in the chaos had mixed up his orders, forgot to direct the enemy driver on where to turn. The ambulance nearly drove past the center. A UN officer darted out to the road and signaled to the driver, who then backed up and turned into the parking lot.

One of the first things the liberated POWs saw was the big sign “Welcome Gate to Freedom” raised the preceding night over the Panmunjom receiving tents. Here they could get a cup of coffee and momentarily relax before starting the long one-and-a-half hour ambulance trip south to Freedom Village. The returnees were outfitted in blue Communist greatcoats, utilities, caps, and tennis shoes. Some of the men were bearded; some wore thin smiles; some had half-hidden tears in their eyes. Primarily, there was a subdued and businesslike air to the day’s proceedings, however, with a marked absence of levity. Admiral Daniel, whose UNC liaison group had negotiated the exchange, in commenting on the smoothness of the first day’s operation observed: “It’s been a tremendous emotional experience for us all. Not much was said between us here, but we are all very happy.”319400

One of the first things the freed POWs saw was the big sign “Welcome Gate to Freedom” that had been put up the night before over the Panmunjom receiving tents. Here they could grab a cup of coffee and take a moment to relax before beginning the long one-and-a-half hour ambulance ride south to Freedom Village. The returnees were dressed in blue Communist greatcoats, uniforms, caps, and tennis shoes. Some of the men had beards, some wore faint smiles, and some had tears welling in their eyes. Overall, though, there was a serious and focused atmosphere to the day’s events, with a noticeable lack of lightheartedness. Admiral Daniel, whose UNC liaison group had arranged the exchange, commented on how smoothly the first day went: “It’s been a tremendous emotional experience for us all. Not much was said among us here, but we are all very happy.”319400

400 New York Times, dtd 20 Apr 53, p. 1.

400 New York Times, dated April 20, 1953, page 1.

From Panmunjom all Allied prisoners were taken to Freedom Village at Munsan where they received a medical check, and the more seriously wounded were flown to a field hospital near Seoul. The first American prisoner to reach Freedom Village was an Army litter patient, Private First Class Robert C. Stell, a Negro. Helicoptered in from Panmunjom at 1007, he was treated “like a 5-star general by all hands, including General Clark, UN commander.”401 By noon the routine, agreed upon in the earlier exchange talks, was moving along evenly and would be in effect throughout the week-long exchange. The Communist quota was 100 prisoners freed daily, in two groups of 50 each, while the Allies returned 500. Thirty Americans were among the 100 UNC men released that first day.

From Panmunjom, all Allied prisoners were taken to Freedom Village in Munsan, where they received medical examinations, and the more seriously injured were flown to a field hospital near Seoul. The first American prisoner to arrive at Freedom Village was Army litter patient Private First Class Robert C. Stell, an African American. He was airlifted in from Panmunjom at 10:07 AM and was treated “like a 5-star general by everyone, including General Clark, the UN commander.” 401 By noon, the routine established in the earlier exchange talks was running smoothly and would continue for the week-long exchange. The Communist quota was 100 prisoners released daily, divided into two groups of 50, while the Allies returned 500. Thirty Americans were among the 100 UNC men released on that first day.

401 Ibid., p. 3.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 3.

Upon their arrival at Freedom Village the Marine POWs, all of whom had been wounded prior to being captured, were greeted by representatives of the 1st Marine Division. In addition to General Clark, other ranking officials on hand included Lieutenant General Maxwell D. Taylor, new EUSAK commander, Major General Pollock, 1st Marine Division CG, Brigadier General Joseph C. Burger, in one of his first public duties since assuming the post of assistant division commander on 1 April, and Dr. Otto Lehner, head of the International Red Cross inspection teams.

Upon their arrival at Freedom Village, the Marine POWs, all of whom had been injured before being captured, were welcomed by representatives of the 1st Marine Division. In addition to General Clark, other high-ranking officials present included Lieutenant General Maxwell D. Taylor, the new EUSAK commander, Major General Pollock, the commander of the 1st Marine Division, Brigadier General Joseph C. Burger, in one of his first public duties since taking on the role of assistant division commander on April 1, and Dr. Otto Lehner, head of the International Red Cross inspection teams.

Each Marine prisoner was met by a 1st Division escort who gave him physical assistance, if necessary, as well as a much-prized possession—a new utility cap with its Marine Corps emblem. Recovered personnel received a medical examination. Waiting helicopters stood by to transport seriously sick or wounded Marines to the hospital ships Haven and Consolation riding at anchor in the Inchon harbor. Chaplains chatted as informally or seriously as a returnee desired. Newspapers and magazines gave the ex-prisoners their first opportunity in months to read unslanted news. And a full set of utility uniforms, tailored on the spot for proper fit, were quickly donned by Marines happy to discard their prison blues.

Each Marine prisoner was met by a 1st Division escort who provided physical assistance if needed, along with a highly valued item—a new utility cap featuring the Marine Corps emblem. Recovered personnel underwent a medical examination. Waiting helicopters were ready to transport seriously ill or wounded Marines to the hospital ships Haven and Consolation anchored in Inchon harbor. Chaplains engaged in informal or serious conversations, depending on the preferences of the returnee. Newspapers and magazines offered the ex-prisoners their first chance in months to read unbiased news. And a full set of utility uniforms, custom-fitted on the spot, were quickly put on by Marines eager to replace their prison blues.

Although returnees received their initial medical processing at Freedom Village, no intelligence processing was attempted in Korea. Within 24 hours after their exchange, returned personnel were flown to K-16 (Seoul) and from there to Haneda Air Force Base at320 Tokyo. Upon arrival at the Tokyo Army Hospital Annex, a more detailed medical exam was conducted, including a psychiatric interview by officials from the newly formed Special Liaison Group of Commander, Naval Forces, Far East. Lieutenant Colonel Regan Fuller, USMC, was designated by ComNavFE as OIC of the detailed briefing of all returned personnel at Tokyo. Other Marine officers participating in the debriefings included Lieutenant Colonel Thell H. Fisher and Major James D. Swinson, of FMFPac headquarters; Major Jack M. Daly, representing the 1st Marine Division; and Captain Richard V. Rich, of the 1st Marine Air Wing.

Although returnees had their initial medical processing at Freedom Village, no intelligence processing was done in Korea. Within 24 hours after their exchange, the returned personnel were flown to K-16 (Seoul) and then from there to Haneda Air Force Base in Tokyo. Upon arriving at the Tokyo Army Hospital Annex, they underwent a more detailed medical exam, including a psychiatric interview conducted by officials from the newly formed Special Liaison Group of the Commander, Naval Forces, Far East. Lieutenant Colonel Regan Fuller, USMC, was appointed by ComNavFE as the officer in charge of the detailed briefing of all returned personnel in Tokyo. Other Marine officers involved in the debriefings included Lieutenant Colonel Thell H. Fisher and Major James D. Swinson from FMFPac headquarters; Major Jack M. Daly, representing the 1st Marine Division; and Captain Richard V. Rich from the 1st Marine Air Wing.

Each Marine returnee was interviewed by a two-man debriefing team that consisted of a Marine and a Navy officer, the latter usually a counterintelligence expert. The three-phase interrogation averaged 9–12 hours and covered personal data, counterintelligence, and a detailed military questionnaire. The latter, particularly, sought information about UN personnel still held captive by the enemy. Since all of the 15 Marine POWs had been captured relatively recently (either in the October outpost contests or the Vegas battle the previous month), the information they had about the enemy was of limited intelligence value. From debriefing reports of Marine returnees, many of whom brought address books with them, it was learned that at least 115 more USMC and Navy prisoners were alive and still held in POW camps.

Each returning Marine was interviewed by a two-person debriefing team made up of a Marine and a Navy officer, who was usually a counterintelligence expert. The three-phase interrogation lasted an average of 9 to 12 hours and included questions about personal information, counterintelligence matters, and a detailed military questionnaire. The questionnaire specifically aimed to gather information about UN personnel who were still being held captive by the enemy. Since all 15 Marine POWs had been captured relatively recently (either during the October outpost skirmishes or the Vegas battle the month before), the intelligence they provided about the enemy was of limited usefulness. From the debriefing reports of returning Marines, many of whom brought their address books with them, it was revealed that at least 115 more USMC and Navy prisoners were alive and still being held in POW camps.

Upon completion of counterintelligence processing, returned personnel were available for press interviews. Long-distance telephone calls to parents or other family members were arranged by the Red Cross. Summer service uniforms and campaign ribbons were issued, pay provided, and administrative records updated by representatives dispatched by Colonel John F. Dunlap, Commanding Officer, Marine Barracks, Yokosuka.

Upon finishing counterintelligence processing, returned personnel were available for press interviews. Long-distance phone calls to parents or other family members were arranged by the Red Cross. Summer service uniforms and campaign ribbons were issued, pay was provided, and administrative records were updated by representatives sent by Colonel John F. Dunlap, Commanding Officer, Marine Barracks, Yokosuka.

All of the 19 Marine and Navy POWs had been released by 25 April. After final processing and clearance for return to the U.S. the men were flown home, via Hawaii, in three groups that departed 28 April, 30 April, and 4 May. Each was accompanied by a Marine Corps officer. Members of the first contingent of POWs arrived at Travis Air Force Base, California, on 29 April, thereby completing their 7,000-mile journey from Communist prison camps. Another small group of POWs considered possible security risks were airlifted directly from Japan to Valley Forge Hospital, near321 Philadelphia, for further interviewing. No Marines were among them. With the initial prisoner exchange completed, staffs of the major Far East commands began to prepare for the final return of all POWs. Operation BIG SWITCH would take place after the ceasefire that, hopefully, was not too far away.

All 19 Marine and Navy POWs had been released by April 25. After going through final processing and getting cleared to return to the U.S., the men were flown home via Hawaii in three groups that left on April 28, April 30, and May 4. Each group was accompanied by a Marine Corps officer. The first group of POWs arrived at Travis Air Force Base in California on April 29, completing their 7,000-mile journey from Communist prison camps. Another small group of POWs, considered potential security risks, was airlifted directly from Japan to Valley Forge Hospital, near321 Philadelphia, for further interviews. No Marines were in that group. With the initial prisoner exchange complete, the staffs of the major Far East commands began preparing for the final return of all POWs. Operation BIG SWITCH would happen after the ceasefire, which, hopefully, would not be too far off.

On the day that Operation LITTLE SWITCH ended, 26 April, plenary truce talks resumed at Panmunjom. The stormy issue of repatriation of prisoners, which had already prolonged the war by more than a year, was still the one major problem preventing final agreement. There was indication, however, that the Communists appeared to be softening on their rigid insistence of forced repatriation. And, on 7 May, the Communists accepted the UN proposal that nonrepatriate prisoners be kept in neutral custody within Korea (rather than being removed to a foreign neutral nation) and offered an eight-point armistice plan. With modifications, this ultimately became the basis for the armistice. While discussions and disagreements continued on this proposal, another real problem developed from a totally different source.

On the day Operation Small Switch ended, April 26, plenary truce talks restarted at Panmunjom. The contentious issue of repatriating prisoners, which had already extended the war by over a year, was still the main obstacle to reaching a final agreement. However, there were signs that the Communists seemed to be easing their strict stance on forced repatriation. Then, on May 7, the Communists accepted the UN proposal that non-repatriated prisoners be kept in neutral custody within Korea (instead of being taken to a foreign neutral country) and presented an eight-point armistice plan. With some changes, this eventually became the foundation for the armistice. While talks and disagreements continued regarding this proposal, another significant problem arose from a completely different source.

Since early in April rumblings had been heard, through the polite ambassadorial circuits, that Syngman Rhee, the aging South Korean president, was dissatisfied with major truce issues. In particular, he was disturbed over the possibility that Korea would not become reunited politically. Further, Rhee gave indication that he might take some kind of action on his own. The Korean leader had advised President Eisenhower that if any armistice was signed that permitted Chinese Communist troops to remain south of the Yalu, with his country divided, he would withdraw ROK military forces from the UN command. Since South Korean troops, backed by American specialized units, presently manned the bulk of the UNC front line, Rhee’s threat to remove them from General Clark’s command presented harrowing possibilities.

Since early April, there had been whispers in the diplomatic circles that Syngman Rhee, the aging president of South Korea, was unhappy with key truce issues. He was particularly worried about the chance that Korea wouldn't reunite politically. Moreover, Rhee hinted that he might act independently. The Korean leader informed President Eisenhower that if any armistice was signed allowing Chinese Communist troops to stay south of the Yalu, with his country still divided, he would pull ROK military forces out of the UN command. Since South Korean troops, supported by American specialized units, currently made up the majority of the UNC front line, Rhee’s threat to remove them from General Clark’s command posed serious risks.

Meanwhile, on 13 May, General Harrison, senior UN representative at Panmunjom, made a counterproposal to the Communist plan. This incorporated three measures aimed at reconciling differences in the long-controversial repatriation issue.402 Arguments flew back and322 forth at Panmunjom, with a temporary recess called in the talks; but on 4 June the Communists accepted this UN final offer. The dispute of 18 months’ duration had ended and the Allied principle of voluntary repatriation had won out in the end. About the only homework left for the negotiating teams was to map out final details of the Demilitarized Zone.

Meanwhile, on May 13, General Harrison, the senior UN representative at Panmunjom, made a counterproposal to the Communist plan. This included three measures aimed at addressing the long-standing differences in the controversial repatriation issue.402 Arguments went back and forth at Panmunjom, leading to a temporary recess in the talks; however, on June 4, the Communists accepted this final UN offer. The dispute that lasted for 18 months had come to an end, and the Allied principle of voluntary repatriation had prevailed. About the only work left for the negotiating teams was to finalize the details of the Demilitarized Zone.

402 In brief, these were: (1) that the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission (NNRC) take custody of Chinese nonrepatriates but give Korean POWs the option of settling either in North or South Korea, as they wished; (2) that troops from just one country (India) be used to guard nonrepatriates, rather than the unwieldy five-nation force earlier proposed by the Communists; and (3), that specific procedures, which were clearly spelled out, be followed for granting political asylum to returning prisoners who refused repatriation.

402 In short, these were: (1) that the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission (NNRC) take care of Chinese non-repatriates but allow Korean POWs the choice to settle in either North or South Korea, as they preferred; (2) that troops from only one country (India) be assigned to guard non-repatriates, instead of the cumbersome five-nation force previously suggested by the Communists; and (3) that clear procedures be established for granting political asylum to returning prisoners who chose not to be repatriated.

President Rhee now even more violently denounced the projected armistice plan. He declared that he and the Koreans would fight on alone, if necessary. South Korean delegates boycotted the Panmunjom truce meetings, and Rhee began a campaign to block the cease-fire. Final agreement on the POW issue was reached 8 June. It provided that the NNRC offer a “civilian status” to former POWs who did not exercise their right of repatriation within four months after being taken into custody by the commission. Those POWs who desired asylum would be set free. The South Korean National Assembly unanimously rejected the truce terms the following day.

President Rhee strongly condemned the proposed armistice plan. He stated that he and the Koreans would continue fighting alone if necessary. South Korean delegates boycotted the Panmunjom truce meetings, and Rhee launched a campaign to prevent the cease-fire. A final agreement on the POW issue was reached on June 8. It stated that the NNRC would offer a “civilian status” to former POWs who did not choose to return home within four months of being taken into custody by the commission. Those POWs who wanted asylum would be released. The South Korean National Assembly unanimously rejected the truce terms the next day.

Revision of the truce line, to correspond to current battle positions, and other concluding details of the truce were being settled by 17 June. On 18 June, chaos suddenly replaced progress. Acting on orders from Rhee, during early morning hours ROK guards at the South Korean prisons released approximately 27,000 North Korean anti-Communist POW inmates (the majority of the large group of NKPA who did not wish to be repatriated). They quickly escaped and became absorbed into the civilian populace of South Korea. Immediately the Communists charged the Americans with complicity and demanded to know whether the United Nations Command was able to control its South Korean ally or not.

Revision of the truce line to match current battle positions and other final details of the truce were being finalized by June 17. On June 18, chaos suddenly replaced progress. Following orders from Rhee, early in the morning, ROK guards at South Korean prisons released around 27,000 North Korean anti-Communist POWs (the majority of the large group of NKPA who did not want to be repatriated). They quickly escaped and blended into the civilian population of South Korea. Immediately, the Communists accused the Americans of being complicit and demanded to know if the United Nations Command could control its South Korean ally or not.

For the next two weeks the American ambassadorial and military team tried to restore some measure of international good grace and hope to the crisis. Daily talks (and pressure) took place with Rhee, as well as with the Communist negotiators, to set the course back on track again in the direction of a final truce agreement. At the end of June, UNC Commander Clark was authorized by Washington to work out a way in which it would be possible to sign the tenuous armistice—without the Koreans, if necessary.

For the next two weeks, the American ambassador and military team tried to bring some international goodwill and hope back to the crisis. Daily talks (and pressure) occurred with Rhee and the Communist negotiators to steer things back toward a final truce agreement. By the end of June, UNC Commander Clark received authorization from Washington to find a way to sign the fragile armistice—without the Koreans, if needed.

323

323

Interval Before the Marines Go Off the Line403

403 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 896–900, dtd 8–12 Apr 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 2/5, 1/7, 2/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Apr 53; VMAs-121, -212, -323, VMFs-115, -311, VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Apr 53.

403 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 896–900, dated 8–12 Apr 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 2/5, 1/7, 2/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Apr 53; VMAs-121, -212, -323, VMFs-115, -311, VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Apr 53.

Shortly after the heavy Vegas fighting in late March, Colonel Funk’s 7th Marines, which had been in reserve, exchanged positions with the 5th Marines. The new line regiment assumed responsibility for the critical, action-prone right sector of the MLR on 4–5 April. In the center part of JAMESTOWN, the 1st Marines of Colonel Adams continued to man the MLR and its 12 outposts, including the strategic COP-2 tucked down by the Panmunjom peace corridor. With the resumption of truce talks on 6 April, this position had again taken on renewed importance with its tank-infantry covering force of 5 armored vehicles and 245 Marines on call at all times.

Shortly after the intense fighting in Vegas in late March, Colonel Funk’s 7th Marines, which had been in reserve, switched places with the 5th Marines. The new regiment took over the critical, action-prone right sector of the MLR on April 4–5. In the center of JAMESTOWN, the 1st Marines under Colonel Adams continued to hold the MLR and its 12 outposts, including the important COP-2 situated near the Panmunjom peace corridor. With the resumption of truce talks on April 6, this position had regained significance, supported by a tank-infantry covering force of 5 armored vehicles and 245 Marines available at all times.

After its relief from the MLR in early April the 5th Marines, as the new division reserve unit, assumed the regular missions of serving as a counterforce for Marines in the I Corps sector, if required; maintenance of the secondary KANSAS line; and a rigorous training program. On 10 April, the 3d Battalion moved out to the KANSAS position for a two-day field exercise. By midmonth, spring thaws and heavy rains had so weakened the trench and bunker fortifications of KANSAS that an all-out effort was temporarily diverted from refresher training to reconstruction. The 2d Battalion, meanwhile, under Operation Plan 24-53, pursued an intensive five-day shore-based training program, 7–11 April, in preparation for its coming amphibious exercise, MARLEX XX. On the 13th, BLT 2/5 under Lieutenant Colonel Finch, with armored amphibian, tank, amtrac, and 1/11 detachments, proceeded to the landing area, Tokchok-to, one of the WCIDE command offshore islands southwest of Inchon. Battalion assault companies hit the southern Tokchok-to beaches on D-Day, 15 April, according to schedule, although high winds and rough seas subsequently modified the exercise.404

After being relieved from the MLR in early April, the 5th Marines, now the new division reserve unit, took on regular duties like acting as a backup for Marines in the I Corps sector if needed, maintaining the secondary KANSAS line, and participating in a strict training program. On April 10, the 3rd Battalion moved to the KANSAS position for a two-day field exercise. By mid-April, spring thaws and heavy rains had weakened the trench and bunker fortifications at Kans. so much that all efforts shifted from refresher training to rebuilding. Meanwhile, the 2nd Battalion, under Operation Plan 24-53, engaged in an intensive five-day shore-based training program from April 7 to 11, getting ready for its upcoming amphibious exercise, MARLEX XX. On the 13th, BLT 2/5 under Lieutenant Colonel Finch, along with armored amphibian, tank, amtrac, and 1/11 detachments, headed to the landing area at Tokchok-to, one of the offshore islands southwest of Inchon under WCIDE command. Battalion assault companies landed on the southern beaches of Tokchok-to on D-Day, April 15, as planned, although high winds and rough seas later altered the exercise.404

404 Official records are at variance on this point. The 2/5 command diary indicates that the battalion continued the exercise on 16–17 April, returning the latter date. The 5th Marines report categorically indicates that MARLEX XX was cancelled on 15 April, because of the weather.

404 Official records disagree on this issue. The 2/5 command diary shows that the battalion continued the exercise on April 16–17, returning on the latter date. The 5th Marines report clearly states that MARLEX XX was canceled on April 15 due to the weather.

Not long afterward a training exercise involving UNC personnel got underway when the 5th405 and 1st Marines, together with the324 artillerymen, combined with the Army, ROK, and Commonwealth Division on 20 April for a four-day I Corps command post exercise (CPX) EVEREADY GEORGE, not far from Seoul.

Not long after, a training exercise with UNC personnel began when the 5th405 and 1st Marines, along with the 324 artillerymen, teamed up with the Army, ROK, and Commonwealth Division on April 20 for a four-day I Corps command post exercise (CPX) Eveready George, not far from Seoul.

405 Now under a new regimental commander, Colonel Tschirgi, who had joined the 5th Marines on 14 April, succeeding Colonel Walt, newly assigned division G-3.

405 Now under a new regimental commander, Colonel Tschirgi, who joined the 5th Marines on April 14, taking over from Colonel Walt, who was newly assigned as division G-3.

Along the division front the war was still a daily survival contest, despite the promising outlook at Panmunjom. The most ambitious attempt by the Chinese during the month took place over a three-day period in the right regimental sector, not long after the 7th Marines had moved to the MLR. On 9 April, following a heavy two-hour ballistic downpour of 2,000 rounds of enemy mortar and artillery, a reinforced company of about 300 Chinese soldiers launched a strong probe against Carson at 0345. Attacking in two echelons, the enemy approached from the direction of Arrowhead on the north and the Reno ridgeline. In an hour’s time, the enemy had reached the Marine trenches and protective wire, at some places, and was being unceremoniously repulsed by the 1/7 detachment at Carson. For an hour and a half a heavy fire fight raged at the outpost while intruders and defenders battled at point-blank range to settle the dispute.

Along the front lines, the war remained a daily battle for survival, even with the hopeful developments at Panmunjom. The most ambitious move by the Chinese during this month happened over a three-day span in the right regimental sector, shortly after the 7th Marines had arrived at the main line of resistance. On April 9, after a heavy two-hour barrage of 2,000 rounds from enemy mortars and artillery, a reinforced company of around 300 Chinese soldiers launched a strong attack on Carson at 3:45 AM. The enemy advanced in two waves, coming from the direction of Arrowhead to the north and the Reno ridgeline. Within an hour, they had reached the Marine trenches and protective wire in some areas but were being forcefully pushed back by the 1/7 detachment at Carson. For an hour and a half, intense fighting broke out at the outpost as intruders and defenders clashed at point-blank range to resolve the conflict.

A reinforcement platoon, from 4/2/7, dispatched from the MLR at 0530, made it as far as the newly established Marine outpost at Elko, about 400 yards southeast of Carson, before being held up by a heavy shower of mortar rounds, and small arms fire. Tankers from the Company A direct element406 plus a section (two tanks) from the regiment’s armored platoon leveled their lethal 90mm fires to discourage the enemy, as did the defender’s barrage of 60mm, 81mm, and 4.2-inch mortars.

A reinforcement platoon from 4/2/7, sent out from the MLR at 5:30 AM, reached the newly established Marine outpost at Elko, about 400 yards southeast of Carson, before getting stalled by a heavy barrage of mortar rounds and small arms fire. Tank crews from Company A's direct unit plus a section (two tanks) from the regiment's armored platoon unleashed their powerful 90mm fire to push back the enemy, alongside the defenders' intense barrage of 60mm, 81mm, and 4.2-inch mortars.

406 Throughout the three-day action, gun tanks from Companies A and B (the forward reserve unit) and the regimental antitank company fired a total of more than 1,469 90mm shells to neutralize enemy positions and weapons.

406 Throughout the three-day operation, tanks from Companies A and B (the forward reserve unit) and the regimental antitank company fired over 1,469 90mm shells to take out enemy positions and weapons.

Two rocket ripples and 22 defensive fire concentrations unleashed by 2/11, also in direct support of Lieutenant Colonel Henry C. Lawrence Jr.’s 1st Battalion, plus additional reinforcing fires by batteries of 1/11 and 4/11 drove off the enemy at 0700. As a security measure, a company from the regimental reserve (E/2/7) was assigned to Carson to buttress the position and assist in reorganizing the outpost defense. The enemy’s activity had cost him 60 known dead. Additional casualties were estimated to be 90 killed and 70 wounded. Marine losses numbered 14 killed, 4 missing, 44 wounded/325evacuated, and 22 non-seriously wounded. Meanwhile, beginning at 0715, Marine prop-driven attack AUs from VMAs-212 and -323 and ADs from VMA-121 were aloft over prime Chinese targets to perform CAS missions and MPQ drops.

Two rocket ripples and 22 defensive fire concentrations fired by 2/11, also in direct support of Lieutenant Colonel Henry C. Lawrence Jr.’s 1st Battalion, along with additional reinforcing fires from batteries of 1/11 and 4/11, drove off the enemy at 0700. As a precaution, a company from the regimental reserve (E/2/7) was sent to Carson to strengthen the position and help reorganize the outpost defense. The enemy's actions resulted in 60 confirmed dead, with additional casualties estimated at 90 killed and 70 wounded. Marine losses included 14 killed, 4 missing, 44 wounded/325 evacuated, and 22 with non-serious injuries. Meanwhile, starting at 0715, Marine prop-driven attack aircraft from VMAs-212 and -323 and ADs from VMA-121 were in the air over key Chinese targets to conduct close air support missions and MPQ drops.

Between the morning’s first strike and midafternoon the three MAG-12 squadrons completed 43 sorties and blasted enemy hills and weapons positions north of Carson with a total of 67½ tons of bombs. Later that night three Chinese platoons, operating in small units, reappeared in the Carson-Elko-Vegas vicinity to recover casualties. Although they reached an unoccupied caved-in bunker 50 feet from Carson, the enemy’s nocturnal activity only cost him more casualties from the COP’s defense fires: 15 known dead, 15 estimated killed, 7 known wounded, and 27 estimated wounded.

Between the first light of morning and midafternoon, the three MAG-12 squadrons completed 43 sorties, dropping a total of 67½ tons of bombs on enemy hills and weapon positions north of Carson. Later that night, three Chinese platoons, operating in small groups, returned to the Carson-Elko-Vegas area to recover their casualties. Although they managed to reach an abandoned, collapsed bunker just 50 feet from Carson, their nighttime activity only resulted in more casualties from the COP’s defensive fire: 15 confirmed dead, 15 estimated dead, 7 confirmed wounded, and 27 estimated wounded.

The following day, Panther jets from Marine Fighter Squadrons 311 and 115 contributed to the further destruction of hostile emplacements, but the enemy himself was nowhere to be seen. Again that night, ground-controlled radar bombing runs were made by VMA-121 and VMF(N)-513 to help keep the enemy off balance. In the early-morning hours of the 11th, however, a band of 30 grenade-slinging Chinese renewed the assault on 7th Marines positions by attacking the reverse slope of Elko. This ambition was deterred by outpost organic weapons and box-me-in fires. After a brief fire fight the CCF withdrew, and the two MAG-33 squadrons later that morning returned to station for CAS strikes against CCF trouble spots. Another raid on Carson began at 2115 that night when 70 Chinese moved out from Ungok to the west ridge of the Marine position. Ten minutes later, Marine 81mm and 4.2-inch mortars, artillery, machine guns, and tanks forced them back with approximately 20 CCF killed and wounded to show for their efforts.

The next day, Panther jets from Marine Fighter Squadrons 311 and 115 continued to destroy enemy positions, but the enemy was nowhere to be found. Again that night, VMA-121 and VMF(N)-513 conducted ground-controlled radar bombing runs to keep the enemy off balance. However, in the early morning hours of the 11th, about 30 armed Chinese troops renewed the attack on the 7th Marines' positions by assaulting the reverse slope of Elko. This was countered by the outpost's weapons and concentrated fire. After a brief firefight, the CCF retreated, and later that morning, the two MAG-33 squadrons returned to their station for close air support strikes against CCF hotspots. Another raid on Carson began at 2115 that night when 70 Chinese moved west from Ungok towards the Marine position. Ten minutes later, Marine 81mm and 4.2-inch mortars, artillery, machine guns, and tanks pushed them back, resulting in about 20 CCF killed and wounded.

A brief repeat action occurred the following night when two squads of Chinese reappeared at Elko, but they were dispatched by Marine infantry, artillery, and armor direct fires following a 15-minute spirited exchange. During the night of the 12th407 Chinese probes and harassing efforts diminished. Other than a few spotty, abortive skirmishes in the KMC sector, this pattern of reduced enemy effort would continue for the next several weeks, until after the change of the Marine line in early May. As the peace talks at Panmunjom were326 beginning to show some progress, enemy psychological warfare efforts in the KMC, 1st, and 7th regimental sectors became more zealous, an indication of the Chinese attempt to increase their propaganda offensive. This included not only loudspeaker broadcasts and propaganda leaflet fired in mortar shells but a more unusual tactic, on 6 April, of enemy messages dropped over the COP Vegas area by airplane.

A brief repeat action took place the following night when two groups of Chinese returned to Elko, but they were quickly dealt with by Marine infantry, artillery, and armored fire after a 15-minute intense exchange. During the night of the 12th407 Chinese probing and harassment efforts decreased. Aside from a few scattered, unsuccessful skirmishes in the KMC sector, this trend of diminished enemy activity would continue for the next several weeks, until after the Marine line changed in early May. As the peace talks at Panmunjom started to show some progress, enemy psychological warfare efforts in the KMC, 1st, and 7th regimental sectors became more aggressive, indicating the Chinese were trying to ramp up their propaganda campaign. This included not just loudspeaker broadcasts and propaganda leaflets fired from mortar shells but also a more unusual tactic on April 6, where enemy messages were dropped over the COP Vegas area by airplane.

407 This same date was significant because it marked the first time a searchlight-guided night close air support mission was flown by 1st MAW in the division sector.

407 This date was important because it was the first time a searchlight-guided night close air support mission was conducted by 1st MAW in the division sector.

Little ground action took place in the division sector throughout the rest of the month. During the last three days of April, as the operational period for the Marines drew to an end, both infantry and artillery units noticed an unusual lull across the front. Marine patrols made few contacts, and there was a sharp decrease in the heavy enemy sightings of midmonth. Chinese incoming, in fact, during the latter part of the month decreased markedly, with a total of 873 rounds compared to the 4,149 tallied during the 1–15 April period. An average of 58.2 rounds daily made it, in fact, the quietest period in the Marine division sector since the holiday calm of late December when only 84.2 rounds had fallen the last 10 days of the month.

Little ground action occurred in the division sector for the rest of the month. During the last three days of April, as the Marines' operational period was coming to an end, both infantry and artillery units noticed an unusual calm across the front. Marine patrols had few encounters, and there was a significant drop in heavy enemy sightings compared to midmonth. Chinese artillery fire, in fact, decreased significantly in the latter part of the month, with a total of 873 rounds compared to 4,149 fired during the first half of April. An average of 58.2 rounds per day made it the quietest period in the Marine division sector since the calm during the holidays in late December, when only 84.2 rounds had fallen in the last 10 days of the month.

The May Relief408

408 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Apr-May 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 22 Apr-13 May 53; 1stMar ComdDs, Apr-May 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar ComdDs, May 53; 1st EngrBn ComdDs, Apr-May 53; Hermes, Truce Tent.

408 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Apr-May 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 22 Apr-13 May 53; 1stMar ComdDs, Apr-May 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar ComdDs, May 53; 1st EngrBn ComdDs, Apr-May 53; Hermes, Truce Tent.

By late April, plans had moved into high gear for relief of the 1st Marine Division by the 25th U.S. Infantry Division and transfer of the Marines to U.S. I Corps reserve at Camp Casey. Although the Marine division had been in active defense positions for 20 months (first in the eastern X Corps and, for the past year, on the western front), some observers noted that there was a reluctance to turn over their presently occupied positions and that the Marines were coming out “under protest from commanders who wanted the Division to remain on the line.”409

By late April, plans were ramping up to relieve the 1st Marine Division with the 25th U.S. Infantry Division and transition the Marines to the U.S. I Corps reserve at Camp Casey. Even though the Marine division had been actively defending for 20 months (first in the eastern X Corps and, for the past year, on the western front), some observers noted a hesitation to give up their current positions and that the Marines were leaving “under protest from commanders who wanted the Division to stay on the line.”409

409 News story (AP), Robert D. Tuckman, Seoul, dtd 12 May 53, 1stMarDiv ComdD, May 53, App. IX, p. 1.

409 News story (AP), Robert D. Tuckman, Seoul, dtd 12 May 53, 1stMarDiv ComdD, May 53, App. IX, p. 1.

For its part, the 25th Division, commanded by Major General Samuel T. Williams, was to shift over to the I Corps far west coastal area from its own neighboring IX Corps sector on the right. Marine association with the Army division went back to the early days of327 the war.410 In August 1950, when the Korean Conflict was then only a few weeks old, the 25th Division, with the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade and the Army’s RCT-5, had spearheaded the first UN counteroffensive on the far southern front, in the Sachon-Chinju area. Now fresh from its own recent period in reserve411 the 25th Division, including its attached Turkish Brigade, was to take over the 33-mile 1st Marine Division line, effective 5 May. Marine armor and artillery, however, would remain in support of the 25th Division and transfer to I Corps control.

For its part, the 25th Division, led by Major General Samuel T. Williams, was set to move from its position in the adjacent IX Corps sector to the far western coastal area of I Corps. The collaboration between the Marine Corps and the Army division dates back to the early days of 327 the war.410 In August 1950, just a few weeks into the Korean Conflict, the 25th Division, along with the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade and the Army’s RCT-5, played a key role in the first UN counteroffensive on the southern front in the Sachon-Chinju area. Now, fresh from a recent period in reserve411, the 25th Division, along with its attached Turkish Brigade, was set to take over the 33-mile front line of the 1st Marine Division, starting on May 5. However, Marine armor and artillery would remain in support of the 25th Division and be transferred to I Corps control.

410 The two divisions had also seen combat together early in WW II, at Guadalcanal. Col R. D. Heinl, Jr. ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 27 Sep 70, hereafter Heinl ltr.

410 The two divisions had fought together early in World War II, at Guadalcanal. Col R. D. Heinl, Jr. letter to Director, Marine Corps History, HQMC, dated September 27, 1970, hereafter Heinl letter.

411 Soon after assuming command of the Eighth Army, in mid-February, General Taylor had begun to stress the need for a complete eight-week training program for reserve divisions before reentering the line, detailed rehearsal of patrols, and more frequent rotation of artillery battalions to maintain their basic mobility. Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 391.

411 Soon after taking charge of the Eighth Army in mid-February, General Taylor emphasized the importance of a comprehensive eight-week training program for reserve divisions before they returned to the front lines, along with detailed practice of patrols and more regular rotation of artillery battalions to keep them mobile. Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 391.

Another change at this time affected the designation of the United Nations MLR. Called Line JAMESTOWN in the I Corps sector (and variously in other parts of the EUSAK front as MISSOURI, DULUTH, MINNESOTA, and CAT), the Allied front was redesignated simply as “main line of resistance,” beginning 28 April, and was to be so known in all future orders and communications throughout the entire Eighth Army. A further modification dropped the reference “in Korea” from the acronym EUSAK, the title becoming “Eighth U.S. Army.”

Another change at this time affected the designation of the United Nations MLR. Called Line JAMESTOWN in the I Corps sector (and variously in other parts of the EUSAK front as MISSOURI, Duluth, Minnesota, and CAT), the Allied front was simply renamed “main line of resistance,” starting on April 28, and would be known as such in all future orders and communications throughout the entire Eighth Army. Additionally, the reference “in Korea” was removed from the acronym EUSAK, and the title became “Eighth U.S. Army.”

In the Marine sector, the last few days of April were a study in contrasts. While Marine frontline infantrymen and cannoneers were having a comparatively peaceful interlude during this period of minimal CCF activity, division engineers were the proverbial colony of beavers. Following up their rigorous schedule in early April of building Freedom Village from scratch within 36 hours, engineer personnel moved out from the division sector late that month to begin construction of the rear area camps that would shortly be occupied by the Marines while in I Corps reserve.

In the Marine sector, the last few days of April were marked by contrasts. While Marine frontline infantry and cannoneers enjoyed a relatively calm period due to minimal CCF activity, division engineers were busy like a colony of beavers. After their intense work in early April building Freedom Village from the ground up in just 36 hours, the engineering team moved out from the division area later that month to start constructing the rear area camps that would soon house the Marines while they were in I Corps reserve.

Located approximately 15 miles east of the Marine MLR, the Camp Casey reserve complex consisted of three major areas. They were: the central one, Casey, which gave its name to the entire installation and would house the new division CP and 5th Marines; Indianhead, to the north, where the 7th Marines, 1st KMC Regiment, Division Reconnaissance Company, machine gun and NCO schools328 were to be established; and Britannia, to the south, assigned to the 1st Marines. Motor transport, engineer, and medical units in support of the respective regiments were to locate nearby.

Located about 15 miles east of the Marine MLR, the Camp Casey reserve complex included three main areas. They were: the central area, Casey, which lent its name to the entire installation and would accommodate the new division CP and 5th Marines; Indianhead, to the north, where the 7th Marines, 1st KMC Regiment, Division Reconnaissance Company, machine gun, and NCO schools328 would be set up; and Britannia, to the south, designated for the 1st Marines. Motor transport, engineer, and medical units supporting the respective regiments were to be located nearby.

On 27 April, the day after resumption of truce talks at Panmunjom, Company A engineers began the work of clearing the camp site, erecting prefabricated buildings, and pioneering roads in the 7th Marines northern area. Two days later the 1st KMC Engineer Company was also detailed to Indianhead for work on the 1st KMC Regimental camp. Company C engineers and Company A, 1st Shore Party Battalion, attached to the Engineer Battalion, meanwhile moved into the Casey sector to ready the relocated Division CP and the 5th Marines camp.

On April 27, the day after the truce talks resumed at Panmunjom, Company A engineers started clearing the campsite, setting up prefabricated buildings, and paving roads in the northern area of the 7th Marines. Two days later, the 1st KMC Engineer Company was also assigned to Indianhead to work on the 1st KMC Regimental camp. Meanwhile, Company C engineers and Company A from the 1st Shore Party Battalion, which was attached to the Engineer Battalion, moved into the Casey sector to prepare the relocated Division CP and the 5th Marines camp.

Tactical relief of the 1st Marine Division officially began 1 May. By the time it was over, four days later, more than 2,370 truckloads of Marine personnel and equipment had been used in the transfer to Camp Casey. Described another way: if placed bumper to bumper in a continuous convoy, this would have extended more than six miles, the length of the MLR held by a Marine regiment in any major defense sector. As a preliminary step in the relief, on 29 April the division assumed operational control of several incoming Army artillery units (the 8th, 64th, 69th, and 90th Field Artillery Battalions, and the 21st Antiaircraft Automatic Weapons Battalion) plus elements of the Turkish command, including the TAFC Field Artillery Battalion. By midafternoon, the first of the Army infantry relief personnel had also arrived in the division sector, when elements of the three battalions of the 35th Infantry Regiment had reported in to respective 1st Marines412 host units, preparatory to assuming responsibility for the center sector of the Marine line.

Tactical relief of the 1st Marine Division officially started on May 1. By the time it was completed four days later, over 2,370 truckloads of Marine personnel and equipment had been transferred to Camp Casey. To put it another way, if lined up bumper to bumper in a continuous convoy, this would stretch more than six miles, the distance of the main line of resistance held by a Marine regiment in any major defense area. As an initial part of the relief, on April 29, the division took operational control of several incoming Army artillery units, including the 8th, 64th, 69th, and 90th Field Artillery Battalions, and the 21st Antiaircraft Automatic Weapons Battalion, along with elements of the Turkish command, like the TAFC Field Artillery Battalion. By midafternoon, the first Army infantry relief personnel had also shown up in the division's area, with elements from the three battalions of the 35th Infantry Regiment reporting to their assigned 1st Marines’ host units in preparation to take on responsibilities for the center sector of the Marine line.

412 The regiment was newly-commanded by Colonel Nelson, the former UN Personnel and Medical Processing Unit officer, who succeeded Colonel Adams as CO, 1st Marines on 1 May.

412 The regiment was recently put under the command of Colonel Nelson, the former officer of the UN Personnel and Medical Processing Unit, who took over from Colonel Adams as CO of the 1st Marines on May 1.

On 1 May the 5th Marines, then in reserve at Camp Rose, took over responsibility for the 14th Infantry Regiment, designated as the Army maneuver unit. Later that day, when Colonel Tschirgi’s regiment closed its headquarters and moved out by motor march to Casey, control of the Army unit transferred to the division. The same day, the 1st KMC/RCT artillery battalion—which, like the 11th Marines units, was to remain on line although KMC infantry personnel were to move to I Corps reserve—came under control of329 I Corps; two days later an Army armored unit, the 89th Tank Battalion, rolled into position in the KMC rear support area and came under division command.

On May 1, the 5th Marines, currently in reserve at Camp Rose, took over responsibility for the 14th Infantry Regiment, which was designated as the Army maneuver unit. Later that day, when Colonel Tschirgi’s regiment finished closing its headquarters and moved out by motor march to Casey, control of the Army unit was transferred to the division. On the same day, the 1st KMC/RCT artillery battalion—which, like the 11th Marines units, was to stay in position even though KMC infantry personnel were moving to I Corps reserve—came under the control of329 I Corps; two days later, an Army armored unit, the 89th Tank Battalion, moved into position in the KMC rear support area and fell under division command.

The 7th Marines right regimental sector, with its critical Nevada Cities and two Berlin positions, became the new home for the Turkish battalions of Brigadier General Sirri Acar in a four-day phased operation, beginning 0115 on 3 May. Actual bulk displacement of the first Marine MLR units and their respective outposts got underway on this date, when responsibility for the 7th Marines left battalion sector transferred from 2/7413 to the 1st Battalion, TAFC, and the 7th Marines battalion began displacing to Indianhead. On the same day the division opened its advance command post at Camp Casey.

The 7th Marines' right regimental sector, which included the important Nevada Cities and two positions in Berlin, became the new base for the Turkish battalions of Brigadier General Sirri Acar during a four-day phased operation that started at 1:15 AM on May 3. The movement of the first Marine MLR units and their outposts began on this date, when the responsibility for the 7th Marines' left battalion sector was transferred from 2/7413 to the 1st Battalion, TAFC, allowing the 7th Marines battalion to start relocating to Indianhead. On the same day, the division set up its advance command post at Camp Casey.

413 On 23 April, 2/7 had relieved 1/7 in the left battalion sector and 1/7 became the regimental reserve. There was no change in 3/7’s location in the right sector. These were the positions for transfer with the Turkish troops in early May.

413 On April 23, 2/7 took over from 1/7 in the left battalion sector, and 1/7 became the regimental reserve. There was no change in 3/7’s position in the right sector. These were the positions for transfer with the Turkish troops in early May.

The first Marine sector to complete the relief was the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, to the south of the Munsan-ni railhead; at midnight on 4 May, with the assumption of sector responsibility by the Army Task Force Track, it moved to the logistical complex at Ascom City where it opened its new CP. Throughout the BMNT hours of 4 and 5 May, Marine positions were transferred to the incoming organic and/or attached units of the U.S. Army 25th Division. Relief of three of the major sectors in the Marine division line was thus well under way by the early hours of the 5th. Final relief and its elaborate phasing operations were completed that morning. On the left flank, the 1st KMC was relieved at 1030 by the incoming U.S. Army 27th Infantry;414 30 minutes later, the 1st Marines was replaced in the line by the Army 35th Infantry; and on the right, the 7th Marines sector was taken over by the TAFC. (See Map 28.)

The first Marine unit to finish the relief was the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, located south of the Munsan-ni railhead. At midnight on May 4, after the Army Task Force Track took over the sector, they moved to the logistics area at Ascom City to set up their new command post. Throughout the early morning hours of May 4 and 5, Marine positions were handed over to the incoming units from the U.S. Army's 25th Division. By the early hours of May 5, the relief of three major sectors in the Marine division line was well underway. The final relief and its detailed phasing operations were completed that morning. On the left flank, the 1st KMC was relieved at 10:30 by the incoming U.S. Army 27th Infantry; 30 minutes later, the 1st Marines was replaced in the line by the Army 35th Infantry; and on the right, the 7th Marines sector was taken over by the TAFC. (See Map 28.)

414 ROKMC Comments.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ROKMC Comments.

Sharply at 1120 on 5 May,415 the U.S. Army 25th Division assumed responsibility for defense of the MLR in what had been the 1st Marine Division sector for more than 13 months. At the same time all 25th Infantry Division units under operational direction of the division also reverted to parent control. In addition to the Kimpo Regiment, several small Korean Service Corps and medical units retained in the sector also came under Army command.

Sharply at 11:20 AM on May 5, 415 the U.S. Army 25th Division took over responsibility for defending the MLR, which had been under the 1st Marine Division’s control for over 13 months. At the same time, all units of the 25th Infantry Division that were operating under the division's direction returned to their original command. Besides the Kimpo Regiment, several small Korean Service Corps and medical units that remained in the area also fell under Army command.

330

330

415 Final relief was largely complete at this time. Exceptions were the 7th Marines reserve battalion, 1/7, relieved by TAFC forces at 0350 the following day and a few remaining Marine rear echelon elements that closed out the sector on 7 May.

415 Final relief was mostly done at this point. The exceptions were the 7th Marines reserve battalion, 1/7, which was relieved by TAFC forces at 3:50 AM the next day, and a few remaining Marine support units that wrapped up their work in the area on May 7.

MAP 28 K. White

MAP 28 K. White

25th INFANTRY DIVISION SECTOR

25th Infantry Division Area

FOLLOWING RELIEF OF THE 1st MARINE DIVISION

FOLLOWING RELIEF OF THE 1st MARINE DIVISION

5 MAY 1953

5 MAY 1953

331

331

I Corps Operation Orders No. 31 and 32 had directed that the 11th Marines remain on line in the sector attached to I Corps Artillery, with a general support mission of reinforcing the fires of the 25th Division artillery, and a secondary task of coordinating counterbattery support. The medium battalion, 4/11, and the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery, furnished general support for I Corps. Regimental and battalion CPs, as well as the rocket battery, continued to occupy their same locations. A change affected the KMC artillery battalion, however; when transferred to I Corps artillery control it displaced from the Marine sector, with a new general support role of reinforcing the I Corps line.

I Corps Operation Orders No. 31 and 32 directed the 11th Marines to stay in position in the sector assigned to I Corps Artillery. Their main mission was to support the fires of the 25th Division artillery, with a secondary task of coordinating counter-battery support. The medium battalion, 4/11, and the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery provided general support for I Corps. Regimental and battalion CPs, along with the rocket battery, continued to operate from their same locations. However, there was a change for the KMC artillery battalion; when it was transferred to I Corps artillery control, it moved out of the Marine sector and took on a new role of general support to reinforce the I Corps line.

Also on 5 May, at 1130, the 1st Tank Battalion416 passed to 25th Division control. Two companies, C and B, were assigned to the TAFC (which had no armored units) in the left and right battalion areas, respectively. Company D vehicles came under command of the 35th Infantry Regiment, in the center sector; while A, the remaining company, was designated as the single reserve unit. This was a modification of the Marine system of maintaining two tank companies in reserve, one a short distance behind the MLR and the other, at the armored battalion CP near Munsan-ni. A change in tactics also took place when the Marine tanks came under Army operational control. It had been the Marine practice to retain the tanks at the company CP from where they moved to prepared firing slots at the request of the supported infantry unit.

Also on May 5, at 11:30 AM, the 1st Tank Battalion416 came under the control of the 25th Division. Two companies, C and B, were assigned to the TAFC (which had no armored units) in the left and right battalion areas, respectively. Company D vehicles were put under the command of the 35th Infantry Regiment in the center sector, while A, the last company, was designated as the only reserve unit. This was a change from the Marine system of keeping two tank companies in reserve, one a short distance behind the Main Line of Resistance (MLR) and the other at the armored battalion CP near Munsan-ni. A change in tactics also occurred when the Marine tanks fell under Army operational control. Traditionally, the Marines kept the tanks at the company CP, from where they would move to designated firing positions at the request of the infantry unit they were supporting.

416 The 1st Tank Battalion was now commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Charles W. McCoy, who had relieved Lieutenant Colonel Williamson on 16 April 1953.

416 The 1st Tank Battalion was now led by Lieutenant Colonel Charles W. McCoy, who took over from Lieutenant Colonel Williamson on April 16, 1953.

When the 1st Tank Battalion was attached to the 25th Division, the armored vehicles were shifted to firing slots near the MLR where they occupied semifixed positions.417 Armored personnel carriers (APCs) were assigned by the Army to Company B and used by both B and C as resupply vehicles to haul food, water, fuel, and ammunition to the tanks on line. Also as part of the relief, control of the KMC tank company was transferred from the Marine 1st Tank Battalion to I Corps, although the company still continued in its same location in the old KMC sector.

When the 1st Tank Battalion was assigned to the 25th Division, the armored vehicles were moved to firing positions near the MLR where they set up semi-permanent spots. 417 Armored personnel carriers (APCs) were allocated by the Army to Company B and used by both B and C as resupply vehicles to deliver food, water, fuel, and ammunition to the tanks on the front lines. Additionally, as part of the transition, control of the KMC tank company was handed over from the Marine 1st Tank Battalion to I Corps, although the company remained in its same location in the old KMC sector.

332

332

417 The tanks were not kept in exposed firing positions at all times. They were parked in protected, defilade revetments and were periodically driven into the firing slots to zero in on targets of opportunity. One tank might thus use any of several slots, and in cases of major attacks reserve tanks could reinforce. LtCol Robert J. Post ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 28 May 70, hereafter Post ltr.

417 The tanks weren't always in open firing positions. They were stored in protected, covered areas and were occasionally brought out into firing positions to aim at targets of opportunity. One tank could use any of several positions, and during major attacks, reserve tanks could provide support. LtCol Robert J. Post ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 28 May 70, hereafter Post ltr.

Also remaining in their same positions were MASRT-1 (Marine Air Support Radar Team One), in support of the 25th Infantry Division, MTACS-2 (Marine Tactical Air Control Squadron Two), and VMO-6. The mobile air support section of the observation squadron, however, had moved with the 1st Marine Division to the new Casey area for participation in the coming MARLEX operations scheduled during the reserve training period.

Also staying in their current roles were MASRT-1 (Marine Air Support Radar Team One), supporting the 25th Infantry Division, MTACS-2 (Marine Tactical Air Control Squadron Two), and VMO-6. However, the mobile air support section of the observation squadron had relocated with the 1st Marine Division to the new Casey area to take part in the upcoming MARLEX operations planned for the reserve training period.

Thus with the relief completed, components of the old Marine division front, from left to right, were: the Kimpo Provisional Regiment; Task Force Track; the 27th Infantry Regiment; 35th Infantry Regiment in the center sector, including its armor and heavy mortar company and 2d and 3d Battalions forward, replacing the 1st Marines 3d and 1st Battalions; and in the right sector, the Turkish Brigade 4.2-inch mortar company and its 1st and 3d Battalions initially located418 in the MLR positions vacated by the 2d and 3d Battalions, 7th Marines.

Thus, with the relief finished, the components of the old Marine division front, from left to right, were: the Kimpo Provisional Regiment; Task Force Track; the 27th Infantry Regiment; the 35th Infantry Regiment in the center sector, including its armor and heavy mortar company and 2nd and 3rd Battalions forward, replacing the 1st Marines' 3rd and 1st Battalions; and in the right sector, the Turkish Brigade's 4.2-inch mortar company and its 1st and 3rd Battalions initially located418 in the MLR positions vacated by the 2nd and 3rd Battalions, 7th Marines.

418 Later, the Turkish forces were to place three battalions forward [adding the 2d], with a fourth in reserve.

418 Later, the Turkish troops were set to deploy three battalions ahead [including the 2nd], with a fourth held in reserve.

In addition to the 1st Marine Division railhead and truckhead at Munsan-ni and Ascom City, a subsidiary railhead/truckhead was opened at Tongduchon-ni, two miles southwest of the new division CP at Casey. No change was made in the airhead at K-16. Effective with the 5 May change, remaining elements of the division CP staff at Yongji-ri joined the advance elements at Casey. As the Marines moved off the front lines they received “well-done” messages from the Commandant, General Shepherd, and the U.S. Pacific Fleet Commander in Chief, Admiral Arthur W. Radford, as well as the new I Corps Commander, Lieutenant General Bruce C. Clarke419 who cited the “excellence of the planning, coordination and cooperation which enabled the operation of the past few days to be successfully accomplished.”333420

In addition to the 1st Marine Division railhead and truckhead at Munsan-ni and Ascom City, a secondary railhead/truckhead was opened at Tongduchon-ni, two miles southwest of the new division command post at Casey. There was no change to the airhead at K-16. Starting with the changes on May 5, the remaining members of the division command post staff at Yongji-ri joined the forward elements at Casey. As the Marines stepped back from the front lines, they received “well-done” messages from the Commandant, General Shepherd, the U.S. Pacific Fleet Commander in Chief, Admiral Arthur W. Radford, and the new I Corps Commander, Lieutenant General Bruce C. Clarke, who praised the “excellence of the planning, coordination, and cooperation that made the operation of the past few days successful.”333420

419 General Clarke had succeeded General Kendall on 10 April 1953.

419 General Clarke took over for General Kendall on April 10, 1953.

420 CG, I Corps msg to CGs, 1stMarDiv, 25th InfDiv, dtd 6 May 53, in 1stMarDiv ComdD, May 53, App. I, p. 2.

420 CG, I Corps message to CGs, 1st Marine Division, 25th Infantry Division, dated May 6, 1953, in 1st Marine Division Command Document, May 1953, Appendix I, page 2.

Training While in Reserve and Division Change of Command421

Training While in Reserve and Division Change of Command421

421 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt Eval Rpts No. 5. Chap 6, No. 6, Chaps. 7, 9; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, May-June 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 22 Apr-30 Jun 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1st EngrBn, HMR-161, VMO-6 ComdDs, May-June 53; Field, NavOps, Korea.

421 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt Eval Rpts No. 5. Chap 6, No. 6, Chaps. 7, 9; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, May-June 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 22 Apr-30 Jun 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1st EngrBn, HMR-161, VMO-6 ComdDs, May-June 53; Field, NavOps, Korea.

While the division was in reserve, its tactical mission consisted of preparation for commitment on I Corps order as a counterattack force in any of the four division sectors of I Corps. Division Operation Plan 7-53 implemented this I Corps Plan “RESTORE” and set forth the designated blocking positions in the 25th Army, Commonwealth, 1st ROK, and 7th Army Division sectors in event of threatened or actual enemy penetration of the MLR.

While the division was on standby, its tactical mission was to prepare for deployment on I Corps’ orders as a counterattack force in any of the four division sectors of I Corps. Division Operation Plan 7-53 carried out this I Corps Plan “RESTORE” and outlined the designated blocking positions in the 25th Army, Commonwealth, 1st ROK, and 7th Army Division sectors in case of threatened or actual enemy penetration of the MLR.

The 1st Marine Division’s Training Order 8-53, issued on 6 May, the day after the relief was officially effected, outlined the training to be accomplished during the eight-week reserve period, 10 May-5 July. Following a few days’ interval devoted to camp construction and improvement of facilities, an active training program commenced. Its objective was the continued improvement of amphibious and ground offensive combat potential of all personnel. Three major regimental combat team MARLEXES were scheduled.422 The training syllabus called for a four-phased progressive schooling from individual to battalion and regimental level conducted in all phases of offensive, defensive, and amphibious warfare. Weaponry familiarization, small unit tactics, and combined unit training, with tank-infantry deployment and integration of helicopters at company-level exercises, were emphasized, culminating in a week-long field maneuver.

The 1st Marine Division's Training Order 8-53, issued on May 6, the day after the relief was officially completed, outlined the training to be carried out during the eight-week reserve period from May 10 to July 5. After a few days dedicated to setting up the camp and improving facilities, an active training program began. The goal was to enhance the amphibious and ground offensive combat capabilities of all personnel. Three major regimental combat team MARLEXES were scheduled.422 The training plan included a four-phase progression from individual to battalion and regimental levels, covering all aspects of offensive, defensive, and amphibious warfare. Emphasis was placed on weapon familiarity, small unit tactics, and joint unit training, with tank-infantry deployment and integration of helicopters during company-level exercises, culminating in a week-long field maneuver.

422 Relief from the Eighth Army defense line provided the first opportunity for expansion of the 1st Marine Division amphibious training to regimental level. Amphibious training in battalion-sized MARLEXES had been under way since June 1952, upon transfer of the Marines to the western coastal sector. This had, in fact, “produced an extra dividend as [their] amphibious retraining program, conducted throughout the summer in the Tokchok Islands, was apprehensively observed by the enemy.” Field, NavOps, Korea, p. 430.

422 Relief from the Eighth Army defense line gave the first chance to expand the 1st Marine Division's amphibious training to the regimental level. Amphibious training in battalion-sized MARLEX had been happening since June 1952, when the Marines were moved to the western coastal area. This actually “produced an extra benefit as [their] amphibious retraining program, carried out over the summer in the Tokchok Islands, was nervously watched by the enemy.” Field, NavOps, Korea, p. 430.

Lectures were to be kept to a minimum, with at least 50 percent of the tactical training conducted at night. Specialty training in intelligence, signal communications, antitank and mortar, machine gun, mine warfare, and staff NCO schools was also prescribed. Numerous command post exercises were programmed to obtain a high standard of efficiency in both battalion and regimental-level334 staff functioning. It was the first time the division had been in reserve since a brief two-week period in late July-August of 1951. A brisk 40–44 hour week, plus organized athletics, insured that the training period was to be fully utilized.

Lectures were to be kept to a minimum, with at least 50 percent of the tactical training done at night. Specialty training in areas like intelligence, signal communications, antitank and mortar operations, machine gun use, mine warfare, and staff NCO schools was also required. Many command post exercises were scheduled to achieve a high level of efficiency in both battalion and regimental staff operations. This was the first time the division had been in reserve since a short two-week period in late July-August of 1951. A busy 40–44 hour work week, along with organized athletics, ensured that the training period would be fully utilized.334

No time was lost getting under way. At a staff conference with battalion commanders on 11 May, General Pollock, division CG, stressed the importance of using the time they were in reserve for enhancing division combat-readiness. Even as he spoke, his 5th Marines had the day before boarded ships at Inchon and were en route to the Yongjong-ni landing area for MARLEX I. Since the 5th Marines, in division reserve, had been the first of the regiments to displace and on 1 May had turned its sector over to the incoming 14th Infantry Regiment, it got the jump on training during the reserve period. Regimental Operation Plan 12-53, of 28 April, had outlined requirements for the 5th Marines RCT LEX 1; from 2–9 May the regiment had participated in a week of intensive amphibious training, including reduced and normal distance CPX dry runs for the coming MARLEX.

No time was wasted getting started. During a staff meeting with battalion commanders on May 11, General Pollock, the division commander, emphasized the importance of using their time in reserve to improve the division's combat readiness. While he spoke, his 5th Marines had boarded ships at Inchon the day before and were headed to the Yongjong-ni landing area for MARLEX I. Since the 5th Marines, who were in division reserve, were the first regiment to move and had handed over their sector to the incoming 14th Infantry Regiment on May 1, they got a head start on training during the reserve period. Regimental Operation Plan 12-53, dated April 28, had laid out the requirements for the 5th Marines RCT LEX 1; from May 2 to May 9, the regiment participated in a week of intensive amphibious training, including both reduced and normal distance CPX dry runs for the upcoming MARLEX.

With ships from CTE 90.85,423 and air defense by VMFs-311 and -115, Colonel Tschirgi’s RCT-5 made the D-Day landing on 13 May with its two assault BLTs securing the objective. An unexpectedly shallow beach gradient and difficulties encountered in unloading vehicles from the causeway resulted in less than a 100 percent performance rating. These were deficiencies that might have been prevented had not the customary rehearsal been cancelled the previous day when a heavy fog obscured the landing beaches. Besides regimental antitank and 4.2-inch mortar units, participating support elements included Company D, 1st Tank Battalion; Company A, 1st Armored Amphibian Battalion; Company C, 1st Engineer Battalion; 1/11; and helicopters from HMR-161 and VMO-6.

With ships from CTE 90.85, 423 and air defense by VMFs-311 and -115, Colonel Tschirgi’s RCT-5 made the D-Day landing on May 13 with its two assault BLTs securing the objective. An unexpectedly shallow beach gradient and difficulties in unloading vehicles from the causeway led to a performance rating of less than 100 percent. These issues could have been avoided if the usual rehearsal hadn't been canceled the day before due to heavy fog covering the landing beaches. In addition to regimental antitank and 4.2-inch mortar units, supporting elements included Company D, 1st Tank Battalion; Company A, 1st Armored Amphibian Battalion; Company C, 1st Engineer Battalion; 1/11; and helicopters from HMR-161 and VMO-6.

423 CTE 90.85 constituted the MARLEX training element of TF-90, Amphibious Force Far East, redesignated Amphibious Group Western Pacific earlier that month.

423 CTE 90.85 was the MARLEX training unit of TF-90, Amphibious Force Far East, which was renamed Amphibious Group Western Pacific earlier that month.

Meanwhile, on 15 May, command post and subordinate units from the 1st, 5th (less RCT-5 currently deployed in MARLEX I), and 7th Marines and support elements took part in a one-day division CPX at Camp Casey stressing mobility, security and operational procedures. Another CPX on 22–23 May by 11th Marines and engineer personnel emphasized dispersion, camouflage, and message handling335 under simulated combat conditions. Units of the three infantry regiments plus the KMCs training with the 7th Marines at Indianhead combined in a CPX-FEX (command post-firing exercise) on 26–27 May. Realism bowed to current ordnance supply economics in that ammunition was carried for individual weapons, but it would “not be loaded except on specific orders from an officer.”424

Meanwhile, on May 15, command post and subordinate units from the 1st, 5th (excluding RCT-5 currently deployed in MARLEX I), and 7th Marines, along with support elements, participated in a one-day division command post exercise at Camp Casey that focused on mobility, security, and operational procedures. Another command post exercise on May 22–23, conducted by the 11th Marines and engineer personnel, emphasized dispersion, camouflage, and message handling335 under simulated combat conditions. Units from the three infantry regiments, along with the KMCs training with the 7th Marines at Indianhead, came together for a command post-firing exercise on May 26–27. Realism was toned down due to current ordnance supply economics, as ammunition was provided for individual weapons but would “not be loaded except on specific orders from an officer.”424

424 1stMarDiv msg to addees in 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dtd 22 May 53.

424 1stMarDiv message to addressees in 1stMarDiv G-3 Journal, dated 22 May 53.

The CPX-FEX was held as a trial exercise for an Eighth Army CPX scheduled later in the month, which was postponed indefinitely on 29 May because of the critical battlefront situation and continuing enemy attacks across the EUSAK front. Extensive preparations were also underway for MARLEX II, with RCT-7, from 2–10 June; and concluding MARLEX III, scheduled 14–23 June, with RCT-1.

The CPX-FEX was conducted as a practice exercise for an Eighth Army CPX planned for later in the month, which was postponed indefinitely on May 29 due to the critical situation on the battlefront and ongoing enemy attacks along the EUSAK front. Extensive preparations were also taking place for MARLEX II, with RCT-7, from June 2 to June 10; and wrapping up MARLEX III, scheduled for June 14 to June 23, with RCT-1.

Armor and advance regimental elements had left for the Ascom City-Inchon staging area by 1 June, preparatory for departure to the Yongjong-ni beaches on the Korean west coast in the vicinity of Kunsan. The troop list included approximately 250 officers and 4,450 enlisted from Colonel Funk’s 7th Marines and support units, including USN and KMC. Infantry personnel from the regiment’s three battalions formed the three assault teams plus a reserve battalion composed of 475 Korean Marines designated as BLT 5/KMC. Regimental support units included Company C, 1st Engineer Battalion; Company D, 1st Medical Battalion; Company C, 1st Shore Party Battalion; Company B, 1st Armored Amphibian Battalion, and various motor transport, amphibian truck, military police, and helicopter detachments.

Armor and advance regimental elements had departed for the Ascom City-Inchon staging area by June 1, in preparation for leaving for the Yongjong-ni beaches on the Korean west coast near Kunsan. The troop list included about 250 officers and 4,450 enlisted personnel from Colonel Funk’s 7th Marines and support units, which included USN and KMC. Infantry personnel from the regiment’s three battalions formed the three assault teams, along with a reserve battalion made up of 475 Korean Marines designated as BLT 5/KMC. Regimental support units comprised Company C, 1st Engineer Battalion; Company D, 1st Medical Battalion; Company C, 1st Shore Party Battalion; Company B, 1st Armored Amphibian Battalion; as well as various motor transport, amphibian truck, military police, and helicopter detachments.

R-Day on 5 June went off per schedule. Despite intelligence estimates which cheerily predicted that only “nine days of rain can be expected during the month of June”,425 RCT-7 drew one out of the barrel with its D-Day landing, 6 June. This took place during heavy rains and decreased visibility which threw the boat waves off phase by minutes and required more than the allotted time for HMR-161 troop and cargo lifts.

R-Day on June 5 went as planned. Despite intelligence reports that optimistically predicted only “nine days of rain during June,”425 RCT-7 jumped right into action with its D-Day landing on June 6. This happened amid heavy rain and low visibility, which delayed the boat waves by several minutes and took longer than expected for HMR-161 to lift troops and cargo.

425 MAR RCT LEX II, Opn Plan I, App. 1 to Annex B, dtd 9 May 53, p. 1, in 7thMar ComdD, May 53.

425 MAR RCT LEX II, Opn Plan I, App. 1 to Annex B, dtd 9 May 53, p. 1, in 7thMar ComdD, May 53.

Use of a 144-foot-long M-2 steel treadway pontoon bridge loaned by the Army, emplaced from the end of the causeway to the beach high water mark, was considered highly successful. It solved unloading problems encountered in the earlier MARLEX, in that all heavy equipment336 and vehicles were landed on the designated beaches. Further experimentation with this novel employment of the M-2 was recommended to test the coupling system of bridge and causeway during periods of heavy surf. On the minus side, shore party officers noted that night transfer operations had been hindered because of the lack of running lights on the amtracs.

The use of a 144-foot-long M-2 steel treadway pontoon bridge borrowed from the Army, set up from the end of the causeway to the high water mark on the beach, was seen as very successful. It addressed the unloading issues faced in the earlier MARLEX, as all heavy equipment336 and vehicles were successfully landed on the designated beaches. Further testing of this innovative use of the M-2 was suggested to evaluate the connection system of the bridge and causeway during heavy surf. However, shore party officers pointed out that night transfer operations were difficult due to the absence of running lights on the amtracs.

On 9 June, as RCT-7 was on the way back from its amphibious exercise, a directive from ComNavFE (Vice Admiral Robert P. Briscoe) notified the division of cancellation of the forthcoming RCT MARLEX III. All available shipping was being held on 24-hour readiness for the expected final repatriation of POWs (Operation BIG SWITCH). All afloat training exercises by Marine, Army, and Navy units between 6 June and 15 October were to be cancelled.

On June 9, as RCT-7 was returning from its amphibious exercise, a notice from ComNavFE (Vice Admiral Robert P. Briscoe) informed the division that the upcoming RCT MARLEX III had been canceled. All available shipping was to be on 24-hour standby for the anticipated final repatriation of POWs (Operation BIG SWITCH). All afloat training exercises conducted by Marine, Army, and Navy units from June 6 to October 15 were also canceled.

The division was host to ranking I Corps, Eighth Army, Korean, and 1st Commonwealth officials when a special helicopter assault demonstration was staged 11–12 June at Camp Casey. Two rocket launcher sections, 14 HMR-161 copters, and 2/5 infantrymen were deployed to show the diverse combat capabilities of the aerial workhorse. While in I Corps reserve, the division was also host—and winner—of the I Corps Pistol Matches. And 3/11, which the previous month had taken the Army Training Test 6-2 (a) Modified, was notified the battalion had scored 92.91 percent and received congratulations from the CGs, I Corps Artillery and Eighth Army.

The division hosted top officials from I Corps, Eighth Army, Korean, and 1st Commonwealth during a special helicopter assault demonstration held on June 11–12 at Camp Casey. Two rocket launcher sections, 14 HMR-161 helicopters, and 2/5 infantry soldiers were deployed to showcase the various combat capabilities of the aerial powerhouse. While in I Corps reserve, the division also hosted—and won—the I Corps Pistol Matches. Additionally, 3/11, which had taken the Army Training Test 6-2 (a) Modified the previous month, was informed that the battalion scored 92.91 percent and received congratulations from the CGs of I Corps Artillery and Eighth Army.

A change of command within the 1st Marine Division took place on 15 June with the arrival of Major General Randolph McC. Pate. The retiring CG, General Pollock, was presented the Distinguished Service Medal by the I Corps commander, General Clarke, for his “outstanding success in the defense of Carson, Vegas, and Elko.” The previous month, General Pollock had received the Korean Order of Military Merit, Taiguk for his active part in the formation, development, and training of the Korean Marine Corps. Attending the change of command ceremonies were General Megee, CG 1st MAW, General Schilt, CG AirFMFPac, and other Marine, I Corps, Commonwealth, and Korean senior officers.

A change of command in the 1st Marine Division happened on June 15 with Major General Randolph McC. Pate taking over. The outgoing commander, General Pollock, was awarded the Distinguished Service Medal by I Corps commander, General Clarke, for his "outstanding success in the defense of Carson, Vegas, and Elko." The previous month, General Pollock had also received the Korean Order of Military Merit, Taiguk for his active role in forming, developing, and training the Korean Marine Corps. The change of command ceremony was attended by General Megee, CG 1st MAW, General Schilt, CG AirFMFPac, and other senior officers from the Marine Corps, I Corps, Commonwealth, and Korea.

The new 1st Marine Division CG was coming to his Korean post from Camp Lejeune, N. C. where (like General Pollock before him) he had most recently commanded the 2d Marine Division. Commissioned originally in the Marine Corps Reserve in 1921, General Pate was to later rise to four-star rank. Prior to World War II,337 he had seen expeditionary service in Santo Domingo, in 1923–1924, and in China from 1927–1929, and also served in Hawaii. For his outstanding service and skill in complicated staff duties, first at Guadalcanal, and later during amphibious operations at Peleliu, Iwo Jima, and Okinawa, General Pate had been awarded the Legion of Merit and a Gold Star in lieu of a second Legion of Merit.

The new commander of the 1st Marine Division was arriving at his post in Korea from Camp Lejeune, N.C., where he had most recently led the 2nd Marine Division, just like General Pollock before him. General Pate, who was originally commissioned in the Marine Corps Reserve in 1921, would later achieve the rank of four stars. Before World War II,337 he had participated in expeditionary missions in Santo Domingo from 1923 to 1924, in China from 1927 to 1929, and had also served in Hawaii. For his exceptional service and expertise in complex staff roles, first at Guadalcanal and later during amphibious operations at Peleliu, Iwo Jima, and Okinawa, General Pate received the Legion of Merit and a Gold Star instead of a second Legion of Merit.

After the war, he had served two tours as head of the Division Reserve, in 1946 and 1951. Other assignments included Director of the Marine Corps Educational Center at Quantico and Deputy Director of Logistic Plans in the Office of the Joint Chiefs of Staff.426

After the war, he served two tours as head of the Division Reserve, in 1946 and 1951. Other roles included Director of the Marine Corps Educational Center at Quantico and Deputy Director of Logistic Plans in the Office of the Joint Chiefs of Staff.426

426 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of Gen Randolph McC. Pate, Jan 56, rev.

426 DivInfo, HQMC, Biography of Gen Randolph McC. Pate, Jan 56, rev.

Heavy May-June Fighting427

427 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, May-Jun 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 15 May, 28–30 May 53; 11thMar, 2/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, May-Jun 53; 1st MAW ComdD, May 53; 1st MAW PIR 136-53, dtd 14–15 May 53 and PIR 150-53, dtd 28–29 May 53; VMAs-121, -212, -323, VMFs-115, -311 ComdDs, May 53; Hermes, Truce Tent; Miller, Carroll, and Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953.

427 Unless otherwise specified, the information in this section is based on: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, May-Jun 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, May 15, 28–30, 1953; 11thMar, 2/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, May-Jun 53; 1st MAW ComdD, May 53; 1st MAW PIR 136-53, dated May 14–15, 1953, and PIR 150-53, dated May 28–29, 1953; VMAs-121, -212, -323, VMFs-115, -311 ComdDs, May 53; Hermes, Truce Tent; Miller, Carroll, and Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953.

After the early May change of lines, the Chinese lost little time in testing the new UNC defenses. Shortly after 0200 on 15 May, the CCF directed a two-battalion probe on the Carson-Elko-Vegas trio and the Berlin-East Berlin outposts newly held by the Turkish brigade. Supported by heavy concentrations of mortar and artillery, one battalion of enemy soldiers moved against each of the two major defense complexes. Marine Company C tanks, occupying the firing slots that night, accounted for heavy enemy losses in the action, estimated at 200 CCF killed and 100 wounded. Assisting the TAFC Field Artillery Battalion in throwing back the attack were 1/11, 2/11, and 4/11 which sent 3,640 rounds into the sharp four-hour engagement.

After the line changes in early May, the Chinese quickly began testing the new UNC defenses. Shortly after 2:00 AM on May 15, the CCF launched a two-battalion probe on the Carson-Elko-Vegas trio and the Berlin-East Berlin outposts recently taken over by the Turkish brigade. Backed by heavy mortar and artillery fire, one battalion of enemy troops attacked each of the two major defense complexes. Marine Company C tanks, positioned in the firing slots that night, inflicted heavy enemy losses in the battle, with estimates of 200 CCF soldiers killed and 100 wounded. Supporting the TAFC Field Artillery Battalion in repelling the attack were 1/11, 2/11, and 4/11, which fired 3,640 rounds during the intense four-hour engagement.

The TAFC defense was further reinforced later that day with 21 air strikes against hostile personnel and weapons positions north of the Turkish sector. Adding their weight to the clash, 3/11 and the rocket battery also brought their guns into action, for a combined 5,526 Marine rounds428 dispatched against the enemy.

The TAFC defense was bolstered later that day with 21 air strikes against enemy personnel and weapons sites north of the Turkish sector. Contributing to the conflict, 3/11 and the rocket battery also deployed their guns, resulting in a total of 5,526 Marine rounds428 fired at the enemy.

338

338

428 Total ammunition expenditure by the 11th Marines and the 25th Division artillery batteries was 11,527 rounds, to the Chinese output of approximately 10,000 rounds. 11thMarDiv ComdD, May 53, p. 13.

428 Total ammunition used by the 11th Marines and the 25th Division artillery batteries was 11,527 rounds, compared to the Chinese production of about 10,000 rounds. 11thMarDiv ComdD, May 53, p. 13.

It was not until 25 May, after the UNC had made its final offer at the truce talks, however, that CCF artillery really began to open up on the Nevada complex. The increased activity by hostile pieces, during the 25–27 May period, was duly noted by the artillery Marines who laconically reported, “Operations followed the recent pattern: enemy shelling of the Turkish Brigade increased during the afternoon; no contacts were reported.”429

It wasn't until May 25, after the UNC made its final offer at the truce talks, that CCF artillery really started firing on the Nevada complex. The rise in activity from enemy artillery during the May 25–27 period was noted by the artillery Marines who dryly reported, “Operations continued as usual: enemy shelling of the Turkish Brigade increased in the afternoon; no contacts were reported.”429

429 11thMar ComdD, May 53, dtd 27 May, p. 19.

429 11thMar ComdD, May 53, dated 27 May, p. 19.

This latter situation changed abruptly on 28 May. Beginning at 1800, major elements of the Chinese 120th Division launched simultaneous attacks over 17,500 yards of I Corps front that stretched from COP-2 eastward to that consistent trouble-spot, the Nevada Cities, on to the Berlins, and finally the Hook area in the adjacent Commonwealth Division sector. Supported by heavy artillery fires, one CCF battalion moved in towards Carson and Elko. Another battalion,430 under cover of smoke, attacked central COP Vegas, while a third struck Berlin and East Berlin on the right flank. Three hours after the initial attack, defenders at Carson and Elko were engaged in hand-to-hand combat with the Chinese.

This situation changed dramatically on May 28. Starting at 6:00 PM, major units of the Chinese 120th Division launched simultaneous attacks along 17,500 yards of the I Corps front, stretching from COP-2 eastward to the persistent trouble spot, the Nevada Cities, then to the Berlins, and finally the Hook area in the adjacent Commonwealth Division sector. Backed by heavy artillery fire, one CCF battalion moved in towards Carson and Elko. Another battalion, 430 under cover of smoke, attacked central COP Vegas, while a third hit Berlin and East Berlin on the right flank. Three hours after the initial attack, defenders at Carson and Elko were engaged in hand-to-hand combat with the Chinese.

430 Some historians indicate that the 120th Division initially sent four battalions forward in the action, with two against the main objective, Vegas. Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 463.

430 Some historians suggest that the 120th Division initially deployed four battalions in the operation, with two targeting the main objective, Vegas. Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 463.

By midnight the men of the 35th Infantry had beaten back the attack at COP-2. The Turks, likewise, were still in possession of the two Berlin (platoon-strength) outposts, but Commonwealth forces were involved in a pitched battle at Ronson and Warsaw. The situation was even grimmer at this time in the Nevada Cities area outposted by the TAFC. Although the Turkish troops continued to hold Vegas, where 140 men were dug in, Carson (two-platoon size) had fallen and Elko (platoon-strength) was heavily besieged. Shortly thereafter, the 25th Division ordered that the TAFC withdraw from the latter position to its own MLR. The diversionary attack against Berlin-East Berlin had been broken off and the twin positions were secured.

By midnight, the men of the 35th Infantry had pushed back the attack at COP-2. The Turks were still holding on to the two Berlin (platoon-strength) outposts, but Commonwealth forces were engaged in a fierce battle at Ronson and Warsaw. The situation was even tougher at that moment in the Nevada Cities area, which was outposted by the TAFC. Although the Turkish troops continued to hold Vegas, where 140 men were entrenched, Carson (two-platoon size) had fallen, and Elko (platoon-strength) was under heavy siege. Shortly after, the 25th Division ordered the TAFC to withdraw from Elko to its own MLR. The diversionary attack against Berlin-East Berlin had been called off, and the two positions were secured.

During the first six hours of the attack, the night of 28–29 May, Colonel Mills’ 11th Marines, now under I Corps command, had sent 9,500 rounds crashing into Chinese strongpoints, while Marine air observers directed eight missions against active enemy artillery positions. Ripples from the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery, transferred to the339 Commonwealth sector to support the Hook defense, were fired on CCF troop activity there. Another curtain of flame engulfed the Carson intruders. When the fighting started, 15 Marine tanks were positioned in the Turkish sector. Company B and C vehicles, under Captains James M. Sherwood and Robert J. Post, relentlessly pounded the approaching CCF columns, while Company D was put on a 30-minute standby. As the action developed, additional tanks were committed until 33 were on line at one time or another.431

During the first six hours of the attack on the night of May 28–29, Colonel Mills’ 11th Marines, now under I Corps command, fired 9,500 rounds into Chinese strongholds, while Marine air observers directed eight missions against active enemy artillery positions. Ripples from the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery, assigned to the Commonwealth sector to support the Hook defense, targeted CCF troop activity in that area. Another wave of flames engulfed the Carson intruders. When the fighting began, 15 Marine tanks were positioned in the Turkish sector. Company B and C vehicles, led by Captains James M. Sherwood and Robert J. Post, relentlessly attacked the approaching CCF columns, while Company D was placed on a 30-minute standby. As the action progressed, more tanks were deployed until there were 33 on the line at various times. 431

431 Discussing the Army employment of tanks in fixed MLR positions, Lieutenant Colonel Post recalled that although many Marine tankers were originally opposed to this procedure, “I am forced to confess that it worked well in that static defensive situation.” A major advantage resulting from this change was that tanks effectively linked the MLR with rear area CPs through land line and radio. While initial preparatory fire often tore out the phone lines, the radios worked well and this was “generally the only reliable means of communications with the scene of action.” Post ltr.

431 When talking about the Army's use of tanks in fixed Main Line of Resistance (MLR) positions, Lieutenant Colonel Post noted that even though many Marine tankers were initially against this approach, “I have to admit that it worked well in that static defensive situation.” A major benefit from this adjustment was that tanks effectively connected the MLR with rear area command posts (CPs) through landline and radio. While the initial preparatory fire often destroyed the phone lines, the radios performed well, and this was “generally the only reliable means of communication with the scene of action.” Post ltr.

When savage Chinese pummeling of the 25th Division outposts continued the following day, Colonel Nelson’s 1st Marines was transferred at 1315 to operational control of I Corps. The regiment’s three infantry battalions, antitank, and heavy mortar companies promptly moved out from their Britannia headquarters and within two hours had relocated at 25th Division bivouac areas south of the KANSAS line in readiness for counterattack orders. The 1st Marine Division Reconnaissance Company was similarly ordered to 25th Division control to relieve a 14th Infantry Regiment reserve company in position along the east bank Imjin River defenses.

When fierce Chinese attacks on the 25th Division outposts continued the next day, Colonel Nelson’s 1st Marines were transferred at 1:15 PM to I Corps' operational control. The regiment’s three infantry battalions, along with antitank and heavy mortar companies, quickly moved out from their headquarters in Britannia and, within two hours, made their way to the bivouac areas of the 25th Division south of the KANSAS line, ready for counterattack orders. The 1st Marine Division Reconnaissance Company was also ordered to take control of the 25th Division to relieve a reserve company from the 14th Infantry Regiment stationed along the eastern bank of the Imjin River defenses.

Overhead, close air support runs were being conducted by pilots of Marine Attack Squadrons 212, 121, and 323. A series of seven 4-plane strikes hit repeatedly from noon on those Chinese troops, hardware, and resupply areas north of the 25th Division line. The aerial assault continued late into the night with MPQ missions executed by VMA-121 and VMF-311.

Overhead, pilots from Marine Attack Squadrons 212, 121, and 323 were carrying out close air support missions. A series of seven strikes with four planes each repeatedly targeted Chinese troops, equipment, and resupply areas north of the 25th Division line starting at noon. The aerial assault went on late into the night with MPQ missions conducted by VMA-121 and VMF-311.

During the 29th, control of the Vegas outposts—where 1st Division Marines had fought and died exactly two months earlier—changed hands several times between the indomitable Turkish defenders and the persistent Chinese. By dark, the CCF had wrested the northern crest from the TAFC which still held the southeastern face of the position. In the 24-hour period from 1800 on the 28th through the 29th, the 11th Marines had expended 41,523 rounds in 531 missions. At one point in the action Chinese counterbattery fire scored a direct hit on Turkish gun emplacements, knocking six howitzers340 out of action from the explosions of charges already loaded. As a result 2/11, under its new battalion commander, Major Max Berueffy, Jr., took over the direct support mission of the TAFC Brigade. Marine artillery spotters on station from 0450 to midnight directed 42 fire missions on CCF guns, while the rocket battery unleashed 20 ripples against troop activity, one of which caused 50 WIAs. Although an Allied counterattack early in the day had restored Elko to friendly control, the enemy refused to be dislodged from Carson.

On the 29th, control of the Vegas outposts—where the 1st Division Marines had fought and died exactly two months earlier—changed hands multiple times between the unyielding Turkish defenders and the determined Chinese. By nightfall, the CCF had taken the northern crest from the TAFC, which still maintained control of the southeastern side of the position. During the 24-hour period from 6 PM on the 28th to the 29th, the 11th Marines had fired 41,523 rounds in 531 missions. At one point, Chinese counter-battery fire hit Turkish gun positions directly, taking out six howitzers340 due to already loaded explosive charges. As a result, 2/11, under its new battalion commander, Major Max Berueffy, Jr., took over the direct support mission for the TAFC Brigade. Marine artillery spotters on duty from 4:50 AM to midnight directed 42 fire missions against CCF guns, while the rocket battery launched 20 barrages against troop movements, one of which resulted in 50 wounded in action. Although an Allied counterattack earlier in the day had recaptured Elko, the enemy refused to leave Carson.

I Corps had previously regarded the defensive positions of the Nevada complex as “critical,” with the TAFC having been “instructed to hold them against all enemy attacks.”432 By midday on the 29th, however, the I Corps commander, General Clarke, and 25th Division CG, General Williams, had apparently had a change of mind. The Vegas strength was down to some 40 Turks. Altogether more than 150 men under the 25th command had been killed and another 245 wounded in defense of Nevada positions. It appeared that the Chinese, constantly reinforcing with fresh battalions despite estimated losses of 3,000, intended to retain the offensive until the outposts were taken.

I Corps had previously seen the defensive positions of the Nevada complex as “critical,” with the TAFC being “ordered to defend them against all enemy attacks.”432 By midday on the 29th, however, the I Corps commander, General Clarke, and 25th Division CG, General Williams, seemed to have changed their minds. The strength in Vegas had dropped to around 40 Turks. In total, over 150 men under the 25th command had been killed and another 245 wounded while defending the Nevada positions. It looked like the Chinese, continuously bringing in fresh battalions despite estimated losses of 3,000, planned to keep the offensive until they captured the outposts.

432 Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 462.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 462.

With Carson and Vegas both occupied by the enemy, the Elko position became untenable without the support of its sister outposts. Six times the CCF had crossed over from Carson to Elko to try to retake the latter position, but had been thus far deterred by Allied firepower. Accordingly, at 2300, the 25th Division ordered its reserve 14th Regiment, earlier committed to the Elko-Carson counterattack, to withdraw from Elko and the Turks to pull back from Vegas to the MLR. By daybreak the withdrawal was completed and 25th Division and Turkish troops had regrouped on the MLR.

With Carson and Vegas both occupied by the enemy, the Elko position became unsustainable without support from its sister outposts. Six times the CCF had crossed over from Carson to Elko to attempt to retake the latter position, but had so far been deterred by Allied firepower. Therefore, at 11 PM, the 25th Division ordered its reserve 14th Regiment, which had previously been committed to the Elko-Carson counterattack, to withdraw from Elko and for the Turks to pull back from Vegas to the MLR. By daybreak, the withdrawal was completed, and the 25th Division and Turkish troops had regrouped on the MLR.

The Army reported that more than 117,000 rounds of artillery and 67 close air support missions had buttressed the UNC ground effort. Official estimates indicated that in the three-day action the Chinese had fired 65,000 rounds of artillery and mortar, “up to this point an unprecedented volume in the Korean War.”433 The Marine artillery contribution from its four active battalions during this 28–30 May period totaled 56,280 rounds in 835 missions.

The Army reported that over 117,000 rounds of artillery and 67 close air support missions had supported the UNC ground effort. Official estimates indicated that during the three-day action, the Chinese had fired 65,000 rounds of artillery and mortar, “up to this point an unprecedented volume in the Korean War.”433 The Marine artillery contribution from its four active battalions during this May 28–30 period totaled 56,280 rounds in 835 missions.

341

341

433 Ibid., p. 464.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 464.

During the three-day siege, 15 to 33 Marine tanks poured their lethal 90mm projectiles on the enemy from MLR firing slots. At times the action was so heavy that the tanks were refueled on line. As they ran out of ammunition and fuel, “armored utility vehicles of the battalion, with a basic load of ammunition aboard, maneuvered beside the tanks in position and rearmed them on the spot,”434 to permit virtual uninterrupted tank firing. One Marine was killed in the action the first night. Although 4,162 rounds of Chinese fire fell near the tank positions, no damage to materiel was reported. For their part the M-46s and flames were responsible for 721 enemy deaths, an estimated 137 more killed, 141 wounded, and an estimated 1,200 injured.

During the three-day siege, 15 to 33 Marine tanks unleashed their deadly 90mm rounds on the enemy from the MLR firing slots. At times, the fighting was so intense that the tanks were refueled right on the front lines. As they ran out of ammunition and fuel, "armored utility vehicles from the battalion, carrying extra ammunition, maneuvered next to the tanks in position and rearmed them on the spot," to ensure almost continuous tank firing. One Marine was killed during the action on the first night. Despite 4,162 rounds of Chinese fire landing near the tank positions, no damage to equipment was reported. The M-46s and flamethrowers accounted for 721 enemy deaths, with around 137 more killed, 141 wounded, and an estimated 1,200 injured.

434 1st TkBn ComdD, May 53, p. 3.

434 1st TkBn ComdD, May 53, p. 3.

During the second day of action, nearly 20 missions were flown by Corsairs and Skyraiders of the three Marine attack squadrons and the jet fighters of VMF-311 and -115. Altogether throughout 28–30 May, Marine aircraft had flown no less than 119 sorties for the inflamed sectors of the U.S. Army 25th Division and adjacent British 1st Commonwealth Division. Of these, 99 were in support of the sagging Carson-Elko-Vegas-Berlins line.

During the second day of operations, almost 20 missions were carried out by Corsairs and Skyraiders from the three Marine attack squadrons, along with the jet fighters of VMF-311 and -115. Overall, from May 28 to 30, Marine aircraft completed at least 119 sorties for the active sectors of the U.S. Army's 25th Division and the nearby British 1st Commonwealth Division. Out of these, 99 were in support of the struggling Carson-Elko-Vegas-Berlins line.

Ground action ceased the following day as rain drenched the battlefield, although the 11th Marines reported sightings of more than 200 Chinese soldiers, most of them on the three recently lost outposts. Benched while the fierce battle was going on, the 1st Marines remained under operational control of I Corps as a possible contingency force from 29 May to 5 June. On the latter date, following the Eighth Army decision not to retake the Carson-Elko-Vegas outposts, the regiment reverted to Marine control and returned to Camp Britannia. The previous day the Communists had agreed on all major points of the UNC final offer and it appeared that a ceasefire was close at hand.

Ground action stopped the next day as rain soaked the battlefield, although the 11th Marines reported seeing over 200 Chinese soldiers, most of them at the three recently lost outposts. While the fierce battle was happening, the 1st Marines were sidelined but remained under the operational control of I Corps as a possible backup force from May 29 to June 5. On June 5, after the Eighth Army decided not to retake the Carson-Elko-Vegas outposts, the regiment went back under Marine control and returned to Camp Britannia. The day before, the Communists had agreed on all major points of the UNC final offer, and it seemed that a ceasefire was close.

Diplomats and military leaders both felt this latest Chinese assault was to show a strong military hand and win dominating terrain features along the MLR. Thus the enemy would be able to improve his defensive posture when final battlelines were adjusted at the truce. It was not believed that the CCF effort was an attempt to expand their operations into a general offensive. In any event, the Nevada positions were downgraded from their previous designation as major outposts. I Corps also decreed no further effort would be342 made to retake them and that a “revaluation of the terrain in view of the destruction of the defensive work indicates these hills are not presently essential to defense of the sector.”435

Diplomats and military leaders both believed that this latest Chinese attack aimed to display a strong military presence and gain control over key terrain features along the MLR. This would allow the enemy to strengthen their defensive position when the final battle lines were set at the truce. It was not thought that the CCF's actions were an effort to escalate into a general offensive. Regardless, the Nevada positions were downgraded from their former status as major outposts. I Corps also stated that no further attempts would be342 made to reclaim them and that a “reassessment of the terrain, considering the destruction of the defensive structures, indicates these hills are not currently essential for the defense of the sector.”435

435 CG, I Corps msg to CG, 7thInfDiv, CG, 25thInfDiv, CG, 1stMarDiv, GOC, 1stComWelDiv, CG I Corps Arty, dtd 9 Jun 53 in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jun 53, App. 1, p. 1.

435 CG, I Corps message to CG, 7th Inf Div, CG, 25th Inf Div, CG, 1st Mar Div, GOC, 1st Com Wel Div, CG I Corps Arty, dated June 9, 1953, in 1st Mar Div Command Document, June 1953, Appendix 1, page 1.

If things were now relatively quiet along the battlefront of the I Corps coastal sector, the situation had begun to heat up in the central part of the UNC defense line. On 10 June, following a CCF realignment of troops and supply buildup that had not gone unnoticed by Eighth Army intelligence officials, elements of the CCF 60th and 68th Armies struck the ROK II Corps area, on the east-central front. (See Map 29.) Advancing south along both sides of the Pukhan River with two divisions, the Chinese struck at the ROK II defense line which originally had bulged out to form a salient in the Kumsong vicinity. Within six days the ROK line had been forced back 4,000 yards. In subsequent assaults the enemy made new penetrations further west in the ROK II MLR. Although the main Communist thrust was directed against the ROK II Corps, secondary attacks were also made in the X Corps sector east of ROK II, in the Punchbowl area manned by the ROK 20th Division. It was the heaviest, all-out drive since the CCF spring offensive of April-May 1951, when the UNC had been pushed south approximately 30 miles across the entire Korean front.

If things were relatively quiet now along the battlefront of the I Corps coastal sector, the situation had started to intensify in the central part of the UNC defense line. On June 10, after a CCF realignment of troops and supply buildup that Eighth Army intelligence officials had noticed, elements of the CCF 60th and 68th Armies launched an attack in the ROK II Corps area, on the east-central front. (See Map 29.) Moving south along both sides of the Pukhan River with two divisions, the Chinese struck the ROK II defense line, which had originally bulged out to form a salient in the Kumsong area. In just six days, the ROK line was pushed back 4,000 yards. In later assaults, the enemy made new advances further west in the ROK II MLR. Although the main Communist effort was focused on the ROK II Corps, there were also secondary attacks in the X Corps sector east of ROK II, in the Punchbowl area held by the ROK 20th Division. This was the heaviest, all-out offensive since the CCF spring offensive of April-May 1951, when the UNC had been pushed south about 30 miles across the entire Korean front.

By 18 June, the CCF assaults started to settle down. During the nine days of flaming action, ROK units had suffered some 7,300 casualties to enemy losses of 6,600. Boundaries had been redrawn and three ROK divisions had been redeployed in counterattacks to plug holes in the line that the Chinese had punched open. Nearly 15,000 yards of ROK front had been pushed 4,000 yards south and several hill positions east of the Pukhan had been lost.

By June 18, the CCF attacks began to calm down. Over the nine days of intense fighting, ROK units had taken about 7,300 casualties compared to enemy losses of 6,600. Boundaries had changed, and three ROK divisions had been redeployed in counterattacks to fill gaps in the line that the Chinese had created. Almost 15,000 yards of the ROK front had been pushed back 4,000 yards to the south, and several hill positions east of the Pukhan had been lost.

MAP 29 K. WHITE

MAP 29 K. WHITE

EIGHTH ARMY SECTORS

Eighth Army Sectors

1 JANUARY-27 JULY 1953

1 JANUARY - 27 JULY 1953

The brief respite ended 24 June when the CCF again directed heavy blows against the ROK troops, ignoring other UN forces in the Eighth Army line. It was generally considered a retaliatory move for the 18 June mass release of anti-Communist prisoners by South Korean President Rhee. This time the major target of the renewed Chinese offensive was the ROK 9th Division, in the IX Corps sector immediately west of the ROK II Corps. On 25 June the 1st ROK Division on the eastern flank of I Corps, to the right of the 1st344 Commonwealth Division, was pounded by another Chinese division. Significantly, the date was the third anniversary of the invasion of South Korea.436 The 7th Marines, training in I Corps reserve, was put on standby status. The regiment was removed the following day when the 1st KMC/RCT (minus its 3d Battalion) was instead placed in readiness,437 and subsequently moved out from its Indianhead area to be committed as a relief force in the left sector of the 1st ROK line.

The brief break ended on June 24 when the CCF launched heavy attacks against the ROK troops, ignoring other UN forces in the Eighth Army line. It was widely seen as a retaliatory response to the June 18 mass release of anti-Communist prisoners by South Korean President Rhee. This time, the main target of the renewed Chinese offensive was the ROK 9th Division, located in the IX Corps area just west of the ROK II Corps. On June 25, the 1st ROK Division on the eastern flank of I Corps, to the right of the 1st344 Commonwealth Division, was hit hard by another Chinese division. Notably, this date marked the third anniversary of the invasion of South Korea.436 The 7th Marines, training in I Corps reserve, was put on standby. The regiment was removed the next day when the 1st KMC/RCT (minus its 3d Battalion) was placed on alert,437 and then moved out from its Indianhead area to serve as a relief force in the left sector of the 1st ROK line.

436 The strong likelihood of such attacks at this time had been noted by Eighth Army in a warning issued the previous day that reminded all commanders to be “particularly alert” at this time. CG, 8th Army msg to CG, 1stMarDiv and addees, G-3 Jnl, dtd 24 Jun 53.

436 The high chance of these attacks was pointed out by the Eighth Army in a warning issued the day before, reminding all commanders to be “especially alert” right now. CG, 8th Army msg to CG, 1stMarDiv and addees, G-3 Jnl, dtd 24 Jun 53.

437 This change was due to the existing policy of not having a United States unit serving under operational control of a Korean commander. Had the 7th Marines or other U.S. unit been so committed, it is expected that a provisional task force would have been created for the assignment, under a non-Korean commander. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-20. Actually, the 7th Marines alert on the 25th was of such short duration that no mention of it appears in the regimental command diary, although the fact is so noted in division records. The 1st KMC/RCT was ordered to move out from the Indianhead area at 1630 on 26 June and came under operational control of 1st ROK Division at 1540, 27 June. By 0100 the following day, it had relieved 11th ROK Regiment. ROKMC Comments.

437 This change happened because of the current policy that doesn't allow a U.S. unit to operate under the command of a Korean officer. If the 7th Marines or another U.S. unit had been assigned, a temporary task force would likely have been formed for the mission, led by a non-Korean commander. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-20. In fact, the 7th Marines' alert on the 25th was so brief that it wasn’t even noted in the regimental command diary, although it is recorded in the division records. The 1st KMC/RCT was ordered to leave the Indianhead area at 1630 on 26 June and came under the operational control of the 1st ROK Division at 1540 on 27 June. By 0100 the next day, it had taken over from the 11th ROK Regiment. ROKMC Comments.

By the 26th, the persistent Chinese probes of the 1st ROK sector had resulted in several forward outposts being overrun. To help stem the action the Marine 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery was displaced on I Corps Artillery order from its regular position (in the right regimental sector) 20 miles east to support the hard-pressed ROK division. On at least two occasions the battery placed ripples between ROK positions only 600 yards apart and it was felt that these “continued requests for fire close to friendly troops attested to the gunnery of the unit.”438 Between that date and the 30th, the rocket battery remained in the ROK sector, firing a total of 25 ripples. For the 25th Infantry Division sector, however, the front continued undisturbed throughout the entire month of June.

By the 26th, the ongoing Chinese attacks on the 1st ROK sector had led to several forward outposts being captured. To help control the situation, the Marine 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery was moved on I Corps Artillery orders from its usual position (in the right regimental sector) 20 miles east to support the struggling ROK division. On at least two occasions, the battery fired ripples between ROK positions that were only 600 yards apart, indicating that these "continued requests for fire close to friendly troops showed the skill of the unit."438 Between that date and the 30th, the rocket battery stayed in the ROK sector, firing a total of 25 ripples. However, for the 25th Infantry Division sector, the front remained stable throughout the entire month of June.

438 11thMar ComdD, Jun 53, p. 15.

438 11th Mar ComdD, Jun 53, p. 15.

Developments in Marine Air439

439 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap 10, No. 5, Chap 9, No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 53; 1/7 ComdD, Apr 53, App. IV, Rpt of Night Air Strikes; 1st MAW, MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-121, -212, -323, VMFs-115, -311, VMF(N)-513, VMJ-1 ComdDs, Apr-Jun 53; VMA-312 ComdDs, Apr-May 53; VMA-251 ComdD, June 53; VMO-6 ComdD, Apr 53; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Hermes, Truce Tent.

439 Unless stated otherwise, the content in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap 10, No. 5, Chap 9, No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 53; 1/7 ComdD, Apr 53, App. IV, Rpt of Night Air Strikes; 1st MAW, MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-121, -212, -323, VMFs-115, -311, VMF(N)-513, VMJ-1 ComdDs, Apr-Jun 53; VMA-312 ComdDs, Apr-May 53; VMA-251 ComdD, June 53; VMO-6 ComdD, Apr 53; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Hermes, Truce Tent.

While the division was in I Corps reserve during the greater part of the April-June period, the 6,800-man 1st Marine Aircraft Wing345 continued its missions as an operational component of Fifth Air Force. For the Marine air arm it was a time of a major tactical innovation, a number of new air records set, and rapid personnel changes in the squadrons.

While the division was in reserve with I Corps for most of the April-June period, the 6,800-member 1st Marine Aircraft Wing345 carried on with its missions as part of the Fifth Air Force. For the Marine air unit, this was a time of significant tactical innovation, several new air records being set, and fast personnel changes in the squadrons.

Shortly before the Marine division went off the line, a new method of close air support at night was introduced. This employed the use of two or more ground controlled 24-inch searchlights located on prominent terrain features along the MLR in the 7th Marines left battalion sector where the missions were to be flown. Enemy-held reverse slopes—in some cases less than 500 yards from Marine positions—were thereby pinpointed by the powerful intersecting searchlight beams. These long pencil-shaped beams created an excellent artificial horizon and enabled pilots to make bombing or strafing runs with a high degree of accuracy even on the blackest of nights. Manned by ANGLICO personnel, the lights were employed either for target location or illumination (both shadow and direct). A tactical airborne observer in an OE light liaison plane of VMO-6 directed the searchlight teams and controlled the missions.

Shortly before the Marine division completed its time on the front line, a new method for close air support at night was introduced. This involved using two or more 24-inch ground-controlled searchlights positioned on prominent terrain features along the MLR in the 7th Marines' left battalion sector where missions were set to take place. Enemy-held reverse slopes—sometimes less than 500 yards from Marine positions—were pinpointed by the powerful beams of the intersecting searchlights. These long, pencil-like beams created an excellent artificial horizon and allowed pilots to conduct bombing or strafing runs with a high level of accuracy, even on the darkest nights. Operated by ANGLICO personnel, the lights were used both for locating targets and for illumination (both shadow and direct). A tactical airborne observer in an OE light liaison plane from VMO-6 directed the searchlight teams and managed the missions.

A week of experimentation and trial runs to perfect the night close air support (NCAS) was conducted by several VMF(N)-513 pilots under direction of Colonel Jack R. Cram. Formerly CO of Marine Air Control Group Two at K-3, he had extended his tour in Korea to complete work on the new program. On 12 April, the first night of operations, Major Charles L. Schroeder and Second Lieutenant Thomas F. St. Denis flew two night support missions in F7F Tigercats. Although employed only a few weeks prior to the division going into reserve on 5 May, the new system rated an enthusiastic response from both pilots and ground commanders, all the way up to the division CG. As the latter reported to the Commandant following the first week of night close support missions, “results ... exceeded all expectations.”440

A week of testing and practice to perfect night close air support (NCAS) was carried out by several VMF(N)-513 pilots under the leadership of Colonel Jack R. Cram. Previously the commanding officer of Marine Air Control Group Two at K-3, he had extended his tour in Korea to finish work on the new program. On April 12, the first night of operations, Major Charles L. Schroeder and Second Lieutenant Thomas F. St. Denis flew two night support missions in F7F Tigercats. Although it was only used a few weeks before the division went into reserve on May 5, the new system received enthusiastic feedback from both pilots and ground commanders, reaching all the way to the division commanding general. As the latter reported to the Commandant after the first week of night close support missions, “results ... exceeded all expectations.”440

440 CG, 1stMarDiv msg to CMC, dtd 18 Apr 53; in 1stMarDiv ComdD, Apr 53, App. II, p. 2.

440 CG, 1stMarDiv message to CMC, dated 18 Apr 53; in 1stMarDiv Command Document, Apr 53, Appendix II, p. 2.

Between 12 April and 5 May, the night fighter squadron conducted 58 NCAS sorties in the division right sector employing this346 new control system with excellent results.441 The procedure was a marked success and made it possible to provide continuous 24-hour-a-day close support to Marine infantry units. It was considered a supplement to, not a replacement for the MPQ (radar controlled bombing) missions of MASRT-1. Plans called for F9F aircraft to be integrated into the program, since the F7F Tigercats were being replaced by jets. Allied psychological warfare teams on 17 April introduced a different theme in their broadcasts to the enemy: that of the dangers to the CCF from the new searchlight marking of targets. As a Marine training bulletin noted: “It is believed that this method of attack by aircraft is particularly demoralizing to the enemy because he is unable to anticipate where the strike will hit, and therefore has no means of defending himself against it.”442

Between April 12 and May 5, the night fighter squadron carried out 58 NCAS sorties in the division's right sector using this346 new control system with great success. The procedure was a clear success and allowed for continuous 24/7 close support to Marine infantry units. It was seen as a supplement to, not a replacement for, the MPQ (radar-controlled bombing) missions of MASRT-1. Plans were in place to incorporate F9F aircraft into the program, as the F7F Tigercats were being phased out for jets. On April 17, Allied psychological warfare teams introduced a different theme in their broadcasts to the enemy: warning the CCF about the threats posed by the new searchlight marking of targets. As a Marine training bulletin observed: “This method of attack by aircraft is believed to be particularly demoralizing to the enemy because he cannot predict where the strike will occur, leaving him defenseless against it.”442

441 Confirmed damage assessment in this period: 75 enemy KIA, 5 WIA; 25 bunkers, 12 personnel shelters, 20 mortar positions, 32 automatic weapons positions, 1 ammunition bunker, and 1 37mm AA position destroyed; 1 supply area, 3 weapons damaged; 1,545 yards trenchline destroyed; and 190 secondary explosions or fires. Due to operating conditions, these figures represented only 80 percent of the total flights made on which TAOs confirmed results. VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Apr-May 53.

441 Confirmed damage assessment during this period: 75 enemy killed in action, 5 wounded in action; 25 bunkers, 12 personnel shelters, 20 mortar positions, 32 automatic weapons positions, 1 ammunition bunker, and 1 37mm anti-aircraft position destroyed; 1 supply area, 3 weapons damaged; 1,545 yards of trenchline destroyed; and 190 secondary explosions or fires. Due to operating conditions, these figures represented only 80 percent of the total flights conducted on which Tactical Air Observers confirmed results. VMF(N)-513 ComdDs, Apr-May 53.

442 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-106, quoting 1stMarDiv Training Bulletin No. 5-53, dtd 10 Jun 53.

442 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-106, quoting 1stMarDiv Training Bulletin No. 5-53, dated June 10, 1953.

Another tactical improvement about this same time dealt with artillery flak suppression in support of close support aircraft. Two refinements made in the procedure in the late spring of 1953 involved firing of HE rounds during the actual run of planes over the target. Basically, the plan consisted of releasing a TOT or VT concentration on the most lucrative enemy antiaircraft positions within a 2,500-yard circle around the strike area. A continuous rain of HE-fuzed projectiles was placed on these targets for a three-minute period, during which Marine planes made their runs.

Another tactical improvement around this time focused on artillery flak suppression to support close air support aircraft. Two enhancements to the procedure in late spring 1953 involved firing high-explosive rounds while planes were actually flying over the target. Essentially, the strategy consisted of dropping a Time-On-Target (TOT) or Variable Time (VT) concentration on the most valuable enemy antiaircraft positions within a 2,500-yard radius of the strike area. A steady stream of high-explosive-fuzed projectiles was aimed at these targets for three minutes, while Marine aircraft conducted their runs.

Favorable results were achieved in that new system tended to keep enemy antiaircraft gunners off-balance for a longer period of time and thus decreased the danger to friendly attacking aircraft. On the other hand, pilots quickly noted that this became an “unimaginative employment of an unvarying flak suppression schedule which Communist AA gunners soon caught onto and turned to their own advantage.”443

Favorable results were achieved in that the new system tended to keep enemy anti-aircraft gunners off-balance for a longer period of time, thus reducing the risk to friendly attacking aircraft. However, pilots quickly observed that this led to an “unimaginative use of a constant flak suppression schedule, which Communist anti-aircraft gunners soon figured out and used to their advantage.”443

443 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10, p. 10-70.

443 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10, p. 10-70.

With respect to squadron hardware, Marine combat potential increased substantially during the spring months with the phasing out of F7Fs in Night Fighter Squadron 513 and introduction of the new F3D-2 twin-jet Skyknight intruder. By late May the Allocation of 24 of these jet night fighters had been augmented by 4 more jets from the carrier USS Lake Champlain and the squadron “assumed its primary night-fighter mission for the first time in the347 Korean War.”444 While the sturdy, dependable Tigercats445 made their final contribution to the United Nations air effort early in May with the experimental NCAS program, the new Skyknights continued the squadron’s unique assignment inaugurated in late 1952 as night escort to Air Force B-29 bombers on their strike missions. Not a single B-29 was lost to enemy interceptors after 29 January 1953. The capabilities of the skilled Marine night-fighters were noted in a “well done” message received by the CO, VMF(N)-513 in April from the Air Force.446

With regard to squadron equipment, Marine combat effectiveness improved significantly during the spring months as F7Fs were phased out in Night Fighter Squadron 513 and the new F3D-2 twin-jet Skyknight intruder was introduced. By late May, the squadron's allocation of 24 of these jet night fighters had been increased by 4 more jets from the carrier USS Lake Champlain, and the squadron "carried out its primary night-fighter mission for the first time in the347Korean War.”444 While the robust and reliable Tigercats445 made their last contribution to the United Nations air effort in early May with the experimental NCAS program, the new Skyknights continued the squadron’s unique role, which began in late 1952, as night escorts for Air Force B-29 bombers on their strike missions. Not a single B-29 was lost to enemy interceptors after January 29, 1953. The skills of the Marine night-fighters were acknowledged in a “well done” message received by the CO, VMF(N)-513 in April from the Air Force.446

444 Ibid., p. 10-99.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 10-99.

445 Also characterized by squadron members as the “tired old Tigercats” in reference to the war-weary, 1945-vintage aircraft. VMF(N)-513 ComdD, May 53, p. 6.

445 Also described by squadron members as the “tired old Tigercats,” referring to the worn-out aircraft from 1945. VMF(N)-513 ComdD, May 53, p. 6.

446 CO, 19th Bomber Group (Col Harvey C. Dorney, USAF) msg to CO, VMF(N)-513 (LtCol Robert F. Conley), n.d., reading: “19th Bomber Group Airborne Commander and crews participating in attack on Sinanju Bridge Complex, 11 April, have high praise for night fighter protection. All feel that without their protection severe damage or loss of B-29’s would have resulted.” VMF(N)-513 ComdD, Apr 53, p. 6.

446 CO, 19th Bomber Group (Col Harvey C. Dorney, USAF) message to CO, VMF(N)-513 (LtCol Robert F. Conley), no date, stating: “The 19th Bomber Group Airborne Commander and the crews involved in the attack on the Sinanju Bridge Complex on April 11th have given high praise for the night fighter protection. Everyone believes that without their support, there would have been severe damage or loss of B-29s.” VMF(N)-513 ComdD, Apr 53, p. 6.

Organizational changes within the wing included the arrival, on 29 May, of a new MAG-12 unit to replace the “Checkerboard” squadron. VMA-332 (Lieutenant Colonel John B. Berteling) was slated to operate on board the USS Bairoko (CVE-115) for the F4U carrier-based squadron VMA-312447 due for return to CONUS. Veteran of 33 months of combat while attached to the wing as West Coast (CTE 95.1.1) aerial reconnaissance and blockade squadron, VMA-312 (Lieutenant Colonel Winston E. Jewson) was officially relieved 10 June. The change, moreover, was the first phase of a new personnel policy, carrier unit rotation, that was expected to implement a unit rotation program for land-based squadrons. It was anticipated that the new unit rotation program would eliminate inherent weakness of the individual pilot rotation system and thus increase the combat effectiveness of the wing.448

Organizational changes within the wing included the arrival, on 29 May, of a new MAG-12 unit to replace the “Checkerboard” squadron. VMA-332 (Lieutenant Colonel John B. Berteling) was set to operate aboard the USS Bairoko (CVE-115) for the F4U carrier-based squadron VMA-312447, which was scheduled to return to CONUS. After 33 months of combat while attached to the wing as the West Coast (CTE 95.1.1) aerial reconnaissance and blockade squadron, VMA-312 (Lieutenant Colonel Winston E. Jewson) was officially relieved on 10 June. This change was the first phase of a new personnel policy, known as carrier unit rotation, which aimed to implement a unit rotation program for land-based squadrons. The new unit rotation program was expected to address the inherent weaknesses of the individual pilot rotation system, thereby increasing the combat effectiveness of the wing.448

447 Prior to early May, VMA-312 had been based aboard the USS Bataan (CVL-29). The carrier itself was scheduled for relief from the Korean Theater shortly before the new afloat MAG-12 squadron reported in, and a transfer was made by 312 to the new, larger escort carrier on 8 May.

447 Before early May, VMA-312 was stationed on the USS Bataan (CVL-29). The carrier was set to be replaced in the Korean Theater just before the new afloat MAG-12 squadron arrived, and VMA-312 transferred to the new, larger escort carrier on May 8.

448 Comments PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10, p. 10-33: “Severe tactical operations weakness developed throughout the war in Korea which can be traced directly to the individual pilot rotation system. These weaknesses are inherent in any system which precludes pre-combat unit training of pilots in the tactical squadron with which they later go into combat. The situation is aggravated further when pilots, many of them inadequately pre-combat trained, are rotated through combat engaged units so rapidly that squadron esprit cannot develop to a degree which will insure a high standard of tactical efficiency.”

448 Comments PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10, p. 10-33: “Significant weaknesses in tactical operations emerged throughout the Korean War due to the individual pilot rotation system. These weaknesses are a natural outcome of any system that prevents pilots from undergoing pre-combat training in the tactical squadrons they will later join in combat. The issue worsens when pilots, many of whom are not fully prepared for combat, are rotated through active combat units so quickly that squadron morale can't develop enough to ensure a high level of tactical effectiveness.”

During the period other organizational changes included transfer of administrative control of VMF(N)-513 on 15 May from MAG-33348 to MAG-12.449 The squadron, with its new twin-engined jet fighters, moved from K-8 (Kunsan) further up the coast to the MAG-12 complex at K-6 (Pyongtaek), upon completion of the new 8,000-foot concrete runway there. This phased redeployment of nightfighter personnel and equipment began in late May and was concluded on 6 June without any interim reduction of combat commitments. Replacement of the squadron F7F-3Ns with F3D-2s was also completed in early June.

During this time, other organizational changes included the transfer of administrative control of VMF(N)-513 on May 15 from MAG-33348 to MAG-12.449 The squadron, now equipped with its new twin-engine jet fighters, relocated from K-8 (Kunsan) further up the coast to the MAG-12 complex at K-6 (Pyongtaek) after the new 8,000-foot concrete runway there was completed. This gradual redeployment of nightfighter personnel and equipment started in late May and was finished by June 6, all without a drop in combat commitments. The replacement of the squadron's F7F-3Ns with F3D-2s was also completed in early June.

449 MAG-12, since 1 April, had been under Colonel Edward B. Carney, who assumed command upon reassignment of Colonel Bowman to the States.

449 MAG-12, since April 1, had been under Colonel Edward B. Carney, who took command after Colonel Bowman was reassigned to the States.

Late that month, plans were underway for two additional changes: the Marine photographic squadron, VMJ-1, was due to be separated administratively and operationally from MAG-33 on 1 July and revert to 1st MAW; and Marine Wing Service Squadron One (MWSS-1) was to be deactivated, effective 1 July.

Late that month, plans were in motion for two additional changes: the Marine photographic squadron, VMJ-1, was set to be separated both administratively and operationally from MAG-33 on July 1 and revert to 1st MAW; and Marine Wing Service Squadron One (MWSS-1) was scheduled to be deactivated, effective July 1.

The change of command relationships between CG, FAF and CG, 1st MAW earlier in the year450 which had restored operational control of certain designated Marine air units to the wing commander, increased the efficiency of 1st MAW operations. Despite the fact that VMJ-1 at times contributed nearly 40 percent to the total FAF input of all daylight combat photographs,451 aerial intelligence (both pre- and post-strike photos) supplied to wing and group headquarters was considered inadequate. As a MAG-33 intelligence officer commented with some exasperation as late in the war as May 1953:

The change in command relationships between CG, FAF and CG, 1st MAW earlier this year450 restored operational control of certain designated Marine air units to the wing commander, which improved the efficiency of 1st MAW operations. Even though VMJ-1 sometimes accounted for nearly 40 percent of the total FAF contribution of all daylight combat photos,451 the aerial intelligence (both pre- and post-strike photos) provided to wing and group headquarters was viewed as insufficient. As a MAG-33 intelligence officer remarked with some frustration as late as May 1953:

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Check __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

451 The magnitude of the VMJ-1 work load “can be gauged by one day’s peak effort of 5,000 exposures, which, if laid end to end, would cover a strip of ground one and one half miles long.” PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 10, p. 10-67.

451 The scale of the VMJ-1 workload “can be measured by one day’s peak effort of 5,000 exposures, which, if lined up, would stretch over a strip of ground one and a half miles long.” PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, Chap. 10, p. 10-67.

The Section continued to experience difficulty in obtaining 1:50,000 scale overlays of friendly MLR and OP positions. These overlays are important for making up target maps for close support missions, but they are continually held up for long periods by higher echelons, and, if received here at all, are then often too old to be considered reliable.452

The Section continued to struggle with getting 1:50,000 scale overlays of friendly MLR and OP positions. These overlays are crucial for creating target maps for close support missions, but they are often delayed for long stretches by higher-ups, and when they do arrive, they're usually too outdated to be deemed reliable.452

452 MAG-33 ComdD, May 53, p. H-2.

452 MAG-33 ComdD, May 53, p. H-2.

Similarly, at the individual squadron level, the carrier unit VMA-312 shortly before its relief, reported: “The one limitation on squadron activities continued to be photo coverage of the strikes. With limited facilities available, the squadron has no clear cut pictures of strike results.”453 Return of VMJ-1 to operational control of General349 Megee ultimately “gave the Wing adequate photo-intelligence for the first time since commencement of combat operations in Korea.”454

Similarly, at the individual squadron level, the carrier unit VMA-312 shortly before its relief, reported: “The main limitation on squadron activities continued to be photo coverage of the strikes. With limited facilities available, the squadron has no clear pictures of strike results.”453 Return of VMJ-1 to operational control of General349 Megee ultimately “gave the Wing adequate photo-intelligence for the first time since combat operations began in Korea.”454

453 VMA-312 ComdD, May 53, p. G-2.

453 VMA-312 ComdD, May 53, p. G-2.

454 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10, p. 10-65.

454 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10, p. 10-65.

Indoctrination of new replacement personnel within the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing took a swift upturn during the spring period. Pilots who had completed 100 combat missions were transferred to staff duty elsewhere in the wing in Korea or rotated Stateside. The average squadron personnel strength ran to 88 percent of T/O for enlisted; and officer strength, considerably less, frequently dipped as low as 61 percent. Under the 100-missions policy, it was a time of rapid turnover of unit commanders, too, as witnessed from the following squadron diary entries:

Indoctrination of new replacement personnel in the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing ramped up quickly during the spring. Pilots who had completed 100 combat missions were moved to staff roles elsewhere in the wing in Korea or rotated back to the States. The average squadron personnel strength was about 88 percent of authorized for enlisted members, and officer strength was much lower, often dropping to as low as 61 percent. Following the 100-missions policy, there was also a fast turnover of unit commanders, as shown in the squadron diary entries:

VMA-212—Lieutenant Colonel James R. Wallace assumed command from Major Edward C. Kicklighter, effective 19 June; the latter had been squadron ExO and acting CO in interim period following 30 April departure of former CO, Lieutenant Colonel Smunk;

VMA-212—Lieutenant Colonel James R. Wallace took command from Major Edward C. Kicklighter, effective June 19; the latter had been the squadron Executive Officer and acting Commanding Officer during the interim period following the departure of the former Commanding Officer, Lieutenant Colonel Smunk, on April 30;

VMA-323—Lieutenant Colonel Clarence H. Moore vice Lieutenant Colonel Frash, on 11 April; and Major Robert C. Woten succeeding Lieutenant Colonel Moore on 27 June;

VMA-323—Lieutenant Colonel Clarence H. Moore replaced Lieutenant Colonel Frash on April 11; and Major Robert C. Woten took over from Lieutenant Colonel Moore on June 27;

VMA-121—Major Richard L. Braun vice Lieutenant Colonel Hughes, on 21 April;

VMA-121—Major Richard L. Braun replaced Lieutenant Colonel Hughes on April 21;

VMF(N)-513—Lieutenant Colonel Ross S. Mickey vice Lieutenant Colonel Conley, on 6 May; in June, Lieutenant Colonel Robert L. Conrad, acting CO, named CO for Lieutenant Colonel Mickey, hospitalized for injuries received in a May aircraft accident;

VMF(N)-513—Lieutenant Colonel Ross S. Mickey replaced Lieutenant Colonel Conley on May 6; in June, Lieutenant Colonel Robert L. Conrad, who was acting CO, was appointed CO in place of Lieutenant Colonel Mickey, who was hospitalized due to injuries from a May aircraft accident;

VMJ-1—Lieutenant Colonel Leslie T. Bryan, Jr. vice Lieutenant Colonel William M. Ritchey, on 15 May;

VMJ-1—Lieutenant Colonel Leslie T. Bryan, Jr. replaced Lieutenant Colonel William M. Ritchey on May 15;

VMF-311—Lieutenant Colonel Arthur M. Moran vice Lieutenant Colonel Coss, on 21 April; Lieutenant Colonel Bernard McShane vice Lieutenant Colonel Moran, on 1 June;

VMF-311—Lieutenant Colonel Arthur M. Moran replaced Lieutenant Colonel Coss on April 21; Lieutenant Colonel Bernard McShane replaced Lieutenant Colonel Moran on June 1;

VMF-115—Lieutenant Colonel Lynn H. Stewart vice Lieutenant Colonel Warren, 5 June.

VMF-115—Lieutenant Colonel Lynn H. Stewart replaced Lieutenant Colonel Warren, June 5.

With respect to CAS activities, excellent weather in April—only a single day of restricted flying—brought the 1st MAW air tally that month for its land-based squadrons to 3,850 effective combat sorties (440 more by VMA-312) and 7,052.8 combat hours. This was a substantial increase over the preceding months. Not surprisingly, the average daily sortie rate for the month was correspondingly high: 128.3. Of 1,319 CAS sorties the largest proportion, 579 and 424 (43.9 percent, 32.1 percent), were for Marine and ROK operations, respectively.

With regard to CAS activities, great weather in April—only one day of restricted flying—allowed the 1st MAW air tally for its land-based squadrons to reach 3,850 effective combat sorties (440 more by VMA-312) and 7,052.8 combat hours. This was a significant increase compared to the previous months. Unsurprisingly, the average daily sortie rate for the month was also high: 128.3. Out of 1,319 CAS sorties, the largest shares were for Marine and ROK operations, with 579 and 424 sorties (43.9 percent and 32.1 percent), respectively.

350

350

The outstanding day of the month was 17 April. During the 24-hour reporting period, 262 sorties were completed by MAGs-33 and -12 pilots,455 who expended a combined total of 228.3 tons of bombs and 28,385 rounds of 20mm ammunition. For the two MAG-33 fighter bomber squadrons, it represented maximum effort day. Preparation had been made a week earlier to devise the targeting and best all-round flight schedules for ordnance and line sections. Objective areas for the mass attack were picked by the wing G-3 target selection branch and approved by the EUSAK-Fifth Air Force JOC. It was decided that “flights of eight aircraft staggered throughout the day would offer the best efficiency in expediting reloading and refueling with not more than sixteen aircraft inactive on the flight line at one time.”456 Throughout the day, from 0410 to 2030, VMFs-311 and -115 continuously pounded designated targets in support of the U.S. 7th and 3d Infantry Divisions.457 Commented MAG-33:

The standout day of the month was April 17. During the 24-hour reporting period, pilots from MAGs-33 and -12 completed 262 sorties, who together dropped a total of 228.3 tons of bombs and fired 28,385 rounds of 20mm ammunition. For the two MAG-33 fighter-bomber squadrons, it was a maximum effort day. Preparations had been made a week before to plan the best targeting and overall flight schedules for munitions and support teams. The objective areas for the mass attack were chosen by the wing's G-3 target selection branch and approved by the EUSAK-Fifth Air Force JOC. It was decided that "flights of eight aircraft staggered throughout the day would provide the best efficiency for reloading and refueling, with no more than sixteen aircraft inactive on the flight line at any one time." Throughout the day, from 4:10 AM to 8:30 PM, VMFs-311 and -115 relentlessly struck designated targets in support of the U.S. 7th and 3rd Infantry Divisions. Commented MAG-33:

455 Between 15–18 April the west coast carrier squadron was under a FEAF order restricting normal interdiction missions. This was to protect UNC sick and wounded POWs in transit from China to Kaesong for final exchange at Panmunjom. VMA-312 air operations were held to CAS along the bombline. “Marine fliers of the ‘Checkerboard’ squadron proved adept at this unusual role [CAS support missions along the front lines], and received a ‘well done’ from JOC Korea as the Corsairs flew more than 100 close air support sorties from 16–18 April.” PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10, p. 10-110.

455 Between April 15–18, the west coast carrier squadron was under a FEAF order that limited normal interdiction missions. This was to protect UNC sick and wounded POWs in transit from China to Kaesong for their final exchange at Panmunjom. VMA-312's air operations were focused on close air support along the bombline. “Marine fliers of the ‘Checkerboard’ squadron excelled in this unusual role [close air support missions along the front lines], earning a ‘well done’ from JOC Korea as the Corsairs conducted over 100 close air support sorties from April 16–18.” PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10, p. 10-110.

456 MAG-33 ComdD, Apr 53, p. 51.

456 MAG-33 ComdD, Apr 53, p. 51.

457 Their respective locations were: 7th Division, at the extreme right of I Corps sector; and further east, the 3d Division occupied the corresponding right flank of IX Corps sector. VMF-311 concentrated on the 7th Division targets while VMF-115 efforts were devoted primarily to the 3d Division.

457 Their respective locations were: 7th Division, on the far right of the I Corps sector; and further east, the 3rd Division held the corresponding right flank of the IX Corps sector. VMF-311 focused on the targets of the 7th Division while VMF-115 concentrated primarily on the 3rd Division.

Hitting an all-time high in the annals of memorable days, this, the seventeenth of April not only further proved MAG-33’s ability to cripple the enemy’s already diminishing strength but it also allowed VMF-115 to set records in total airborne sorties launched in a single day plus a record total ordnance carried and expended in one day by jet type aircraft.458

Hitting an all-time high in the history of memorable days, this April 17th not only demonstrated MAG-33’s capability to weaken the enemy’s already declining strength but also enabled VMF-115 to set records for the total number of airborne sorties launched in a single day, as well as a record for the total ordnance carried and used in one day by jet aircraft.458

458 MAG-33 ComdD, Apr 53, p. 51.

458 MAG-33 ComdD, Apr 53, p. 51.

VMF-115 alone, with 30 pilots and 23 aircraft, had flown 114 sorties and delivered 120 tons of bombs on North Korean targets.

VMF-115 alone, with 30 pilots and 23 aircraft, had flown 114 sorties and dropped 120 tons of bombs on North Korean targets.

A sample of the intensity of this maximum day was a series of three early-morning interdiction strikes led by three VMF-115 pilots that launched the effort. Led by Lieutenant Colonel Joe L. Warren, Major Samuel J. Mantel, Jr., and Major John F. Bolt, the 23 attacking Panther jets lashed the objective with 22.35 tons of ordnance and 4,630 rounds of 20mm ammunition. The three missions destroyed half of351 the buildings and inflamed 95 percent of the target area in the enemy supply concentration point T’ongch’on on the Korean east coast.

A glimpse of the peak intensity of that day was a series of three early-morning strikes led by three VMF-115 pilots who initiated the operation. Under the leadership of Lieutenant Colonel Joe L. Warren, Major Samuel J. Mantel, Jr., and Major John F. Bolt, the 23 attacking Panther jets bombarded the target with 22.35 tons of explosives and 4,630 rounds of 20mm ammunition. The three missions destroyed half of351 the buildings and ignited 95 percent of the target area at the enemy supply concentration point T’ongch’on on the east coast of Korea.

By contrast, wing operations in May were considerably hampered by the bad weather peculiar to this time of the year in Korea. Restricted flying conditions were recorded for 18 days of the month. A total of 153 CAS sorties were flown for the Marine division before its 5 May relief from the front lines. Of the wing’s 3,359 sorties459 during the month, 1,405 were for close support to forward units beating back Communist encroachment efforts. The allocation of CAS sorties was 412 for U.S. infantry divisions (including 211 for the 25th Division occupying the customary Marine sector); 153 for the 1st Commonwealth Division at the Hook which the Communists assaulted on 27–28 May as part of their overall thrust against western I Corps defenses; 412 sorties for ROK units; and 63, miscellaneous. Heaviest action for Marine aviators took place towards the end of the month to thwart enemy blows in the I Corps sector where Army and Turkish units were attempting to repulse the Chinese.

In contrast, wing operations in May were significantly affected by the typical bad weather in Korea during this time of year. Restricted flying conditions were reported for 18 days of the month. A total of 153 close air support sorties were completed for the Marine division before its relief from the front lines on May 5. Out of the wing’s 3,359 sorties during the month, 1,405 were for close support to forward units resisting Communist advances. The allocation of close air support sorties was 412 for U.S. infantry divisions (including 211 for the 25th Division in the usual Marine sector); 153 for the 1st Commonwealth Division at the Hook, which the Communists assaulted on May 27–28 as part of their broader offensive against western I Corps defenses; 412 sorties for ROK units; and 63 for miscellaneous purposes. The heaviest action for Marine aviators occurred towards the end of the month to counter enemy attacks in the I Corps sector, where Army and Turkish units were trying to repel the Chinese.

459 This figure does not include sorties by VMA-312 (carrier-based), VMO-6, or HMR-161, the latter two under operational control of the 1st Marine Division.

459 This figure doesn't account for sorties by VMA-312 (carrier-based), VMO-6, or HMR-161, with the latter two operating under the command of the 1st Marine Division.

The renewed effort of the Chinese Communists against UNC ground forces in late May continued sporadically the following month. A number of new records were set by Marines flying CAS assignments under the Fifth Air Force. During the intense mid-June attacks on the ROK II Corps area and adjacent X Corps sector, MAGs-12 and -33 pilots chalked up some busy days. Between 10–17 June, Marine, Navy, and Air Force aircraft had flown 8,359 effective sorties, the bulk of this massive FAF effort to buttress the crumbling ROK defense. Of this number, Marine sorties totaled 1,156, or nearly 14 percent. (Combat sorties for the 1st MAW throughout June came to 3,276 despite 23 days of marginal to nonoperational weather.) Marine pilots scored as high as 48 percent of a single day’s interdiction strikes made by FAF. This occurred 15 June when the 1st MAW flew a record-breaking 283 sorties, followed by another peak 227 sorties the next day.

The renewed effort by the Chinese Communists against UNC ground forces in late May continued sporadically into the following month. A number of new records were set by Marines flying CAS missions under the Fifth Air Force. During the intense mid-June attacks on the ROK II Corps area and the nearby X Corps sector, pilots from MAGs-12 and -33 had some busy days. Between June 10 and June 17, Marine, Navy, and Air Force aircraft flew 8,359 effective sorties, the majority of this huge FAF effort to support the weakening ROK defense. Out of this total, Marine sorties numbered 1,156, which is nearly 14 percent. (Combat sorties for the 1st MAW throughout June totaled 3,276 despite 23 days of marginal to nonoperational weather.) Marine pilots managed to achieve as much as 48 percent of a single day’s interdiction strikes conducted by FAF. This happened on June 15 when the 1st MAW flew a record-breaking 283 sorties, followed by another peak of 227 sorties on the next day.

Actually, when the ground situation in the ROK II Corps front began to deteriorate on 12 June, the new Fifth Air Force commander, Lieutenant General Samuel E. Anderson, “waived the [3,000 foot] minimum-altitude restrictions on his fighter-bombers and ordered his wings to give all-out support to the Eighth Army.”460 The Seventh352 Fleet commander, Admiral Clark, likewise kept his carriers on line for seven days and ordered its naval pilots to “team with Marine and Fifth Air Force airmen for a close-support effort exceeding anything up to that time.”461 When the ROK II Corps defenses cracked open on 15 June, temporary clearing weather “allowed General Anderson and Admiral Clark to hit the Reds with everything they had. FEAF planes flew a total of 2,143 sorties of all kinds for the largest single day’s effort of the war.”462

Actually, when the situation on the ground in the ROK II Corps front started to decline on June 12, the new Fifth Air Force commander, Lieutenant General Samuel E. Anderson, “waived the [3,000 foot] minimum-altitude restrictions on his fighter-bombers and ordered his wings to give full support to the Eighth Army.”460 The Seventh352 Fleet commander, Admiral Clark, also kept his carriers in line for seven days and instructed its naval pilots to “team up with Marine and Fifth Air Force airmen for a close-support effort that surpassed anything seen before.”461 When the ROK II Corps defenses broke on June 15, brief clear weather “allowed General Anderson and Admiral Clark to unleash everything they had against the Reds. FEAF planes flew a total of 2,143 sorties of all kinds, marking the largest single day’s effort of the war.”462

460 Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 631.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 631.

461 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same as above.

462 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Commenting on this heavy action period, 14–17 June, a dispatch to General Megee from the new FAF commander, who had succeeded General Barcus the previous month, noted:

Commenting on this intense period of activity from June 14 to 17, a message to General Megee from the new FAF commander, who took over from General Barcus the month before, mentioned:

The figures are now in. From 2000, 14 Jun 53, to 0001, 17 Jun 53, Fifth Air Force units flew a total of 3,941 combat sorties. The cost was 9 pilots lost, 11 aircraft lost, 11 aircraft major damage, 42 aircraft minor damage. The results: 1 enemy offensive stopped cold. I very deeply appreciate the splendid efforts of all members of the 5th AF at all levels. Only a concerted team effort made the foregoing possible.463

The numbers are in. From June 14, 1953, to 12:01 AM on June 17, 1953, Fifth Air Force units completed a total of 3,941 combat missions. The losses were 9 pilots, 11 aircraft destroyed, 11 aircraft significantly damaged, and 42 aircraft with minor damage. The outcome: 1 enemy offensive was completely halted. I sincerely appreciate the outstanding efforts of everyone in the 5th AF at all levels. It was only through a united team effort that we achieved this.463

463 CG, FAF msg to CG, 1st MAW, dtd 17 Jun 53, in 1st MAW ComdD Jun 53 (Vol I), p. 3 and App., IV (Vol III).

463 CG, FAF message to CG, 1st MAW, dated June 17, 1953, in 1st MAW Command Document June 1953 (Volume I), page 3 and Appendix, IV (Volume III).

This came, incidentally, only five days after receipt by the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing of the Korean Presidential Unit Citation.464 The award cited the wing’s “outstanding and superior performance of duty” between 27 February 1951 and 11 June 1953. During this period Marine fliers executed more than 80,000 combat sorties for UNC divisions.

This happened, by the way, just five days after the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing received the Korean Presidential Unit Citation. 464 The award recognized the wing’s “outstanding and superior performance of duty” from February 27, 1951, to June 11, 1953. During this time, Marine pilots completed over 80,000 combat missions for UNC divisions.

464 Presentation of this second Korean PUC to the 1st MAW was made by South Korean President Rhee in impressive ceremonies 12 June at MAG-33 headquarters, K-3. Among the many ranking military officials attending the ceremony was Admiral Radford, former CinCPacFlt, and newly-appointed Chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff.

464 Presentation of this second Korean PUC to the 1st MAW was made by South Korean President Rhee in impressive ceremonies on June 12 at MAG-33 headquarters, K-3. Among the many senior military officials attending the ceremony was Admiral Radford, former CinCPacFlt, and the newly-appointed Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff.

The fighter-bombers of MAG-33 and the MAG-12 attack planes saw heavy action during 24–30 June when the Chinese again concentrated their attention on ROK divisions in the UNC line. Peak operational day was 30 June. Marine squadrons alone executed 301 sorties, including 28 percent of the CAS and 24 percent of total FAF interdiction missions. It was also an outstanding day for MAG-12 which “outdid itself by flying 217 combat sorties against enemy forces. The 30th of this month saw MAG-12 establish a new ordnance record when an all-time high of 340 tons of bombs and napalm were dropped353 on North Korea.”465 Contributing heavily to this accomplishment was Marine Attack Squadron 121. It unleashed 156 tons of ordnance, a squadron record. It was believed this also established an all-time record for tonnage expended on the enemy by a Marine single-engine propeller squadron.

The fighter-bombers of MAG-33 and the MAG-12 attack planes were heavily involved in action from June 24 to June 30 when the Chinese focused their efforts on the ROK divisions along the UNC line. The busiest day was June 30. Marine squadrons alone completed 301 sorties, which included 28 percent of the Close Air Support (CAS) and 24 percent of total FAF interdiction missions. It was also an exceptional day for MAG-12, which "went above and beyond by flying 217 combat sorties against enemy forces. On the 30th of this month, MAG-12 set a new record for ordnance dropped when an all-time high of 340 tons of bombs and napalm were released353 on North Korea."465 A significant contributor to this achievement was Marine Attack Squadron 121, which dropped 156 tons of ordnance, setting a squadron record. This was also believed to be an all-time record for the amount of tonnage used against the enemy by a Marine single-engine propeller squadron.

465 MAG-12 ComdD, Jun 53, p. C-1.

465 MAG-12 ComdD, Jun 53, p. C-1.

Other Marine Defense Activities466

466 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 5, Chaps. 2, 8, No. 6, Chaps. 2, 9; WCIDE(U) ComdDs, Oct 52-Jun 53; ECIDE(U) ComdDs, Oct 52-Jun 53; Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Field, NavOps, Korea.

466 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 5, Chaps. 2, 8, No. 6, Chaps. 2, 9; WCIDE(U) ComdDs, Oct 52-Jun 53; ECIDE(U) ComdDs, Oct 52-Jun 53; Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Field, NavOps, Korea.

Like their counterparts on the Korean mainland, the Marines, naval gunfire teams, and ROK security troops comprising the West Coast and East Coast Island Defense Commands felt the alternating pressure build-up and slow-down that typified the closing months of the war. At both installations the defense had been recently strengthened, more or less by way of response to a CINCPacFleet intelligence evaluation in December 1952. This alerted the isolated island forces to the possibility of a renewed Communist attempt to recapture their positions. The Allied east coast defense structure at Wonsan, right at the enemy’s own front door just above the 39th Parallel, was considered particularly vulnerable.

Like their counterparts on the Korean mainland, the Marines, naval gunfire teams, and ROK security troops making up the West Coast and East Coast Island Defense Commands experienced the constant rise and fall of pressure that characterized the final months of the war. At both locations, the defense had recently been reinforced, largely in response to a CINCPacFleet intelligence report from December 1952. This warned the isolated island forces about the possibility of a renewed Communist attempt to capture their positions. The Allied east coast defense setup at Wonsan, right at the enemy’s doorstep just north of the 39th Parallel, was considered especially vulnerable.

As in the preceding months, the mission of the west coast island group remained unchanged—namely, the occupation, defense, and control of its six island components. These, it will be remembered, were: Sok-to, Cho-do, Paengyong-do (command headquarters), Yongpyong-do, and the two lesser islands at Taechong-do and Tokchok-to.467 Formal designation of the island commands was modified on 1 January 1953. At this time the West Coast and East Coast Island Defense Elements (TE 95.15 and TE 95.23) were redesignated as Task Units (TU 95.1.3 and TU 95.2.3) respectively. Korean Marines, who represented the bulk of these task units, were provided from the 2d KMC Regiment, the island security force. This unit constituted the main defense for the important U.S. Marine-controlled islands off the Korean west and east coasts.

As in the previous months, the mission of the west coast island group stayed the same—specifically, the occupation, defense, and control of its six islands. These were Sok-to, Cho-do, Paengyong-do (the command headquarters), Yongpyong-do, and the two smaller islands at Taechong-do and Tokchok-to.467 The official names of the island commands were changed on January 1, 1953. At that time, the West Coast and East Coast Island Defense Elements (TE 95.15 and TE 95.23) were renamed as Task Units (TU 95.1.3 and TU 95.2.3) respectively. Korean Marines, who made up most of these task units, were provided by the 2nd KMC Regiment, the island security force. This unit formed the main defense for the key U.S. Marine-controlled islands off the western and eastern coasts of Korea.

354

354

467 Locations given on WCIDE map, Chapter II.

467 Locations provided on the WCIDE map, Chapter II.

Approximately 17 Marine officers and 100 enlisted men were assigned to the western coastal complex, with two battalions of Korean Marines fleshing out the garrison defense. The primary mission of this island group was to serve as offshore bases for UNC intelligence activities, including encouragement of friendly guerrilla operations conducted by anti-Communist North Korean personnel. Artillery based on the Marine-controlled islands provided both defensive fires and counterbattery missions against enemy guns sited on the nearby mainland.

Approximately 17 Marine officers and 100 enlisted troops were assigned to the western coastal complex, with two battalions of Korean Marines enhancing the garrison defense. The main purpose of this island group was to act as offshore bases for UNC intelligence activities, including supporting friendly guerrilla operations led by anti-Communist North Korean personnel. Artillery stationed on the Marine-controlled islands provided both defensive fire and counter-battery missions against enemy guns located on the nearby mainland.

The secondary mission of WCIDU, that of training Korean troops in infantry and weapons firing exercises, continued to be hampered somewhat by faulty communication. As one officer observed, the training program to qualify selected KMCs for naval gunfire duties “met with only modest success, due primarily to the language barrier and lack of communications equipment in the Korean Marine Corps. Personnel who had received this training did prove to be extremely helpful in accompanying raiding parties on the mainland in that they were able to call for and adjust fires.”468

The secondary mission of WCIDU, which involved training Korean troops in infantry and weapons firing exercises, was still hindered somewhat by communication issues. As one officer noted, the training program designed to prepare selected KMCs for naval gunfire duties “had only limited success, mainly due to the language barrier and the lack of communication equipment in the Korean Marine Corps. Personnel who had received this training were very helpful when accompanying raiding parties on the mainland because they could call for and adjust fire.”468

468 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-128. See also Chapter II.

468 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-128. See also Chapter II.

Enemy pressure against the West Coast Islands, both from Communist shore guns and bombing, had increased during the fall and winter of 1952. Cho-do, shaped roughly like a giant downward-plunging fish, as previously noted had been bombed in October for the first time in the history of the command. This new trend was repeated for the next two months. By way of response, two 90mm guns were transferred to Cho-do from Kanghwa-do (a more peaceful guerrilla-controlled island northwest of Inchon) for use there as counterbattery fire against aggressive mainland batteries. The islands of Sok-to and Paengyong-do had likewise been bombed during this period, although no damage or serious casualties resulted. In December, enemy shore guns fired 752 rounds against Task Force 95 (United Nations Blockading and Escort Force) ships charged with responsibility for the island defense, in contrast to the 156 rounds of the preceding month.

Enemy pressure on the West Coast Islands, both from Communist shoreline artillery and bombing, increased during the fall and winter of 1952. Cho-do, shaped somewhat like a giant fish diving downwards, had been bombed in October for the first time in the command's history. This trend continued for the next two months. In response, two 90mm guns were moved to Cho-do from Kanghwa-do (a more peaceful guerrilla-controlled island northwest of Inchon) to be used for counterbattery fire against aggressive mainland artillery. The islands of Sok-to and Paengyong-do were also bombed during this time, although there was no damage or serious injuries. In December, enemy shore guns fired 752 rounds at Task Force 95 (United Nations Blockading and Escort Force) ships responsible for island defense, compared to 156 rounds the previous month.

Intelligence in December from “Leopard,” the friendly Korean guerrilla unit at Paengyong-do, also reported the presence of junks, rubber boats, and a nearby enemy artillery battalion off Chinnampo, believed to be in readiness to attack the island. A captured POW,355 moreover, on 22 December reported that elements of the 23d NKPA Brigade located on the mainland across from Sok-to would attempt to seize the island group before the end of the year. The next day, shortly after dusk, when a concentration of 200 rounds469 of 76mm suddenly fell on Sok-to, and another 125 rounds struck neighboring Cho-do, it looked as if it might be the beginning of trouble. Naval gunfire (NGF) spotters on the islands directed the fire from UNC patrol boats cruising the Yellow Sea. This counterbattery fire quickly silenced the enemy guns. Again, at the end of the month, West Coast islands were alerted for an invasion, but it never materialized.

Intelligence in December from “Leopard,” the friendly Korean guerrilla unit at Paengyong-do, also reported the presence of junks, rubber boats, and a nearby enemy artillery battalion off Chinnampo, believed to be ready to attack the island. A captured POW, 355 moreover, on December 22 reported that elements of the 23d NKPA Brigade located on the mainland across from Sok-to would try to seize the island group before the end of the year. The next day, shortly after dusk, when a burst of 200 rounds 469 of 76mm suddenly fell on Sok-to, and another 125 rounds hit neighboring Cho-do, it seemed like trouble was about to start. Naval gunfire (NGF) spotters on the islands directed fire from UNC patrol boats cruising the Yellow Sea. This counterbattery fire quickly silenced the enemy guns. Again, at the end of the month, West Coast islands were put on alert for an invasion, but it never happened.

469 An average day’s enemy harassment consisted of 4, 7, 10, or at the most approximately 28 rounds of fire. WCIDE ComdDs, passim.

469 An average day's enemy harassment included 4, 7, 10, or at most about 28 rounds of fire. WCIDE ComdDs, passim.

A matter of continuing concern to the command during the fall and winter months was the North Korean refugee problem. So serious was the situation, in fact, that it had warranted a directive from the TF 95 commander (Rear Admiral John E. Gingrich). In the early fall, a large number of refugees had filtered into the West Coast Islands, raising serious doubts as to their feeding and ultimate survival during the Korean winter. Through the United Nations Civil Assistance Command, a tentative date of September had been set for evacuating these North Korean refugees to South Korea. By November the question of their relocation was still not settled, although the feeding problem had been eased somewhat by two LST-resupply loads of emergency rations and grain by CTF 90.

A ongoing concern for the command during the fall and winter months was the North Korean refugee issue. The situation was so serious that it required a directive from the TF 95 commander (Rear Admiral John E. Gingrich). In early fall, a large number of refugees made their way to the West Coast Islands, raising significant worries about their food supply and chances of survival during the Korean winter. Through the United Nations Civil Assistance Command, a tentative date in September was set for evacuating these North Korean refugees to South Korea. By November, the question of their relocation was still unresolved, although the food supply issue had been somewhat alleviated by two LST resupply loads of emergency rations and grain from CTF 90.

Activities followed a fairly consistent pattern during early 1953, with harassing fire striking the islands from the North Korean shore batteries and sporadic bomb and propaganda drops. Periodically USAF pilots who had strayed off course, planes from the nearby British carriers HMS Glory or Ocean, or Marine fliers from USS Badoeng Strait or Bataan made emergency landings on the beach airstrips at Paengyong-do for engine repairs or refueling. Logistical support continued to be a problem, due to the peculiarities of the joint ordering system through the Army. In January the western islands had unfilled requisitions dated from as early as February 1952. Official unit reports also noted the difficulty of obtaining medical supplies either promptly or in full.

Activities followed a pretty consistent pattern during early 1953, with harassing fire hitting the islands from the North Korean shore batteries and occasional bomb and propaganda drops. From time to time, USAF pilots who had gone off course, planes from the nearby British carriers HMS Glory or Ocean, or Marine fliers from USS Badoeng Strait or Bataan made emergency landings on the beach airstrips at Paengyong-do for engine repairs or refueling. Logistical support continued to be an issue, due to the quirks of the joint ordering system through the Army. In January, the western islands had unfilled requisitions dating back to as early as February 1952. Official unit reports also highlighted the difficulty of getting medical supplies either quickly or completely.

In April, with the hot-cold cease-fire talks again taking one of their spasmodic upswings, WCIDU commander, Colonel Harry N. Shea,356 conferred with American and British naval officials regarding CTG 95.1’s (Royal Navy Commander, West Coast Blockading and Patrol Group) Operation PANDORA. This called for the evacuation of Sok-to and Cho-do, the two WCIDU islands north of the 38th Parallel, at the time of the armistice.

In April, as the hot-and-cold cease-fire talks picked up again, WCIDU commander Colonel Harry N. Shea,356 met with American and British naval officials about CTG 95.1’s (Royal Navy Commander, West Coast Blockading and Patrol Group) Operation PANDORA. This operation involved evacuating Sok-to and Cho-do, the two WCIDU islands north of the 38th Parallel, at the time of the armistice.

Increased naval gunfire and artillery missions against active enemy mainland targets, caves, and observation posts gave the two new 90mm guns delivered to the Sok-to garrison the month before and the pair already at Cho-do, as well as their gun crews, some unscheduled practice. Marine garrison personnel at the two islands and nearby patrol ships were busy 25 days of the month knocking out or neutralizing Communist mainside batteries. Late that month, the battleship USS New Jersey stationed off the east coast, sailed around the Korean peninsula to add its 16-inch guns to the bombardment. Enemy shelling of the two western islands increased in June, with 1,815 rounds expended in response by the two Marine gun sections.

Increased naval gunfire and artillery missions targeting active enemy positions on the mainland, caves, and observation posts provided the two new 90mm guns delivered to the Sok-to garrison the previous month, along with the pair already at Cho-do and their gun crews, some unexpected practice. Marine garrison personnel at the two islands, along with nearby patrol ships, were busy for 25 days that month taking out or neutralizing Communist coastal batteries. Late that month, the battleship USS New Jersey, stationed off the east coast, sailed around the Korean peninsula to contribute its 16-inch guns to the bombardment. Enemy shelling of the two western islands increased in June, with 1,815 rounds fired in response by the two Marine gun sections.

During June, as it appeared the end of the war was in sight, the first phase of PANDORA got underway with the evacuation by CTF 95 of approximately 19,425 partisans, their families, and refugees from Sok-to and Cho-do to islands south of the 38th Parallel. A new WCIDU commander, Colonel Alexander B. Swenceski, had also arrived by this time, since the average tour of duty was but a brief four months at both island commands.

During June, as it seemed like the war's end was near, the first phase of PANDORA began with CTF 95 evacuating about 19,425 partisans, their families, and refugees from Sok-to and Cho-do to islands south of the 38th Parallel. A new WCIDU commander, Colonel Alexander B. Swenceski, had also arrived by this time, as the average tour of duty was just a short four months for both island commands.

Across the Korean peninsula, the east coast Allied offshore island defense centered on a cluster of islands in Wonsan Harbor. Situated more than 100 miles north of the battleline, these strategically-placed islands comprised the northernmost UN-held territory in Korea. The East Coast Island Defense Command numbered approximately 35 Marines, 1,270 Korean Marines, and 15 Naval personnel. Headquarters for TU 95.2.3 was Yo-do, the largest installation, which was garrisoned by approximately 300 Korean Marines and a limited detachment of USMC and USN personnel. Smaller defense forces were located on the other islands under ECIDU command.470 In addition, an improvised NGF spotting team was also stationed at the three forward islands (Mo-do, Tae-do, and Hwangto-do). Mission of the ECIDU was a defensive one: to hold the islands as a357 base for covert intelligence activities. The island defense system existed for the purpose of “containing and destroying any enemy forces who escape detection or who press home an attack in the face of Navy attempts at their destruction.”471

Across the Korean peninsula, the east coast Allied offshore island defense focused on a group of islands in Wonsan Harbor. Located more than 100 miles north of the front lines, these strategically placed islands represented the northernmost UN-held territory in Korea. The East Coast Island Defense Command had around 35 Marines, 1,270 Korean Marines, and 15 Naval personnel. Headquarters for TU 95.2.3 was Yo-do, the largest installation, which housed about 300 Korean Marines along with a small detachment of USMC and USN personnel. Smaller defense units were stationed on the other islands under ECIDU command.470 Additionally, an improvised NGF spotting team was deployed to the three forward islands (Mo-do, Tae-do, and Hwangto-do). The mission of the ECIDU was defensive: to hold the islands as a357 base for covert intelligence activities. The island defense system was designed to “contain and destroy any enemy forces who evade detection or who launch an attack despite Navy efforts to eliminate them.”471

470 See Chapter II and ECIDE map.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See Chapter __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

471 ECIDE ComdD, Oct 2, p. 1.

471 ECIDE ComdD, Oct 2, p. 1.

Individual island commanders were responsible for the defense of their small parcels of seaborne real estate, control of both defensive and offensive NGF missions in the area, and evaluation of intelligence regarding enemy troop locations, the movement of supplies north, or new emplacements of hostile guns. Fire support for the ECIDU islands, exposed to the enemy shore batteries above the 39th Parallel, was available from Task Force 95, which maintained a task, group of ships off both the east and west coasts. Aircraft and ships of Task Force 77 (Seventh Fleet Striking Force), operating off the East Korean coastline, were also on call. In December, for instance, the Corsairs of TF 77 had resumed their rail-bridge interdiction. All-out attacks on railroad and highway bridges, as well as bombing runs on the 90-mile stretch of east coast railroad from Hungnam to Songjin, were undertaken to cut off supplies being moved north for Communist industrial use.

Individual island commanders were in charge of defending their small patches of seaborne territory, managing both defensive and offensive naval gunfire missions in the area, and assessing intelligence about enemy troop positions, the movement of supplies north, or new placements of hostile artillery. Fire support for the ECIDU islands, which were vulnerable to enemy shore batteries above the 39th Parallel, was provided by Task Force 95, which had a group of ships stationed off both the east and west coasts. Aircraft and ships from Task Force 77 (Seventh Fleet Striking Force), operating along the East Korean coastline, were also on standby. In December, for example, the Corsairs of TF 77 had resumed their operations targeting rail bridges. They conducted extensive attacks on railroad and highway bridges, as well as bombing runs along the 90-mile stretch of east coast railroad from Hungnam to Songjin, in an effort to disrupt supplies being sent north for Communist industrial use.

February marked the second anniversary of the siege of Wonsan by the UNC, the longest blockade of a port in recent U.S. history. Some naval authorities by this time argued that the venture had become one of doubtful merit which “should never have been undertaken, but its long history made it difficult to abandon without apparent admission of defeat.”472 In any event, the month also signaled increasing attention paid by hostile shore batteries to the little island enclave. For seven consecutive days, 9–15 February, the harbor islands were targets for enemy mixed artillery and mortar shells. Minor materiel damage and casualties were sustained at Yo-do during a Valentine’s Day bombardment, 14 February.

February marked the second anniversary of the Wonsan siege by the UNC, the longest blockade of a port in recent U.S. history. By this time, some naval authorities argued that the operation had turned into something questionable, asserting it "should never have been undertaken, but its lengthy history made it hard to abandon without a clear admission of defeat."472 In any case, the month also indicated growing attention from hostile shore batteries towards the small island enclave. For seven straight days, from February 9 to 15, the harbor islands were hit by enemy mixed artillery and mortar fire. Minor material damage and casualties were reported at Yo-do during a bombardment on Valentine's Day, February 14.

472 Field, NavOps, Korea, p. 434.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Field, NavOps, Korea, p. 434.

Altogether, the enemy harassed the harbor islands for 16 days during the month, expending 316 rounds, compared with 11 days in January. Hostile fire, not limited to the Wonsan Harbor islands, was also directed against friendly ships USS DeHaven and USS Moore. These provided counterbattery fire and were, in turn, fired upon, the nearest shells landing only 400 yards from the two vessels.358 This attack, also on 14 February, was described as an “unusually determined and precise”473 effort. The enemy, moreover, did not appear to take his usual precautions with respect to disclosing his positions. The fact that a Communist shore battery would cease fire when subjected to friendly counterbattery, with other positions then immediately taking up the delivery, “indicated some sort of central control for the first time.”474 The I Corps, NKPA artillery units across from the Wonsan Island command revealed the “heavy, effective artillery capability of enemy batteries which encircle Wonsan Harbor.”475

Overall, the enemy targeted the harbor islands for 16 days during the month, firing 316 rounds, compared to 11 days in January. Hostile fire, which wasn't just aimed at the Wonsan Harbor islands, also hit friendly ships USS DeHaven and USS Moore. These ships returned fire and were in turn attacked, with shells landing as close as 400 yards from them.358 This assault, which occurred on 14 February, was described as an “unusually determined and precise”473 effort. Additionally, the enemy didn’t seem to take his usual precautions regarding his position’s visibility. The fact that a Communist shore battery would stop firing when friendly counterbattery fire was directed at it, while other positions immediately resumed firing, “indicated some sort of central control for the first time.”474 The I Corps, NKPA artillery units across from the Wonsan Island command revealed the “heavy, effective artillery capability of enemy batteries that surround Wonsan Harbor.”475

473 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 2, p. 2-5.

473 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 2, p. 2-5.

474 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

475 ECIDE(U) ComdD, Feb 53, p. 1. Seventh Fleet intelligence estimated that there were no less than “21 active batteries emplaced on Wonsan Bay and within range of our islands.” Heinl ltr.

475 ECIDE(U) ComdD, Feb 53, p. 1. Seventh Fleet intelligence estimated that there were at least “21 active batteries set up on Wonsan Bay and within range of our islands.” Heinl ltr.

Unseasonably good weather the latter part of February improved the transportation and supply situation. With the bitter cold and wind subsiding, maintenance crews could repair the ravages of the past several months. Craft, up to LCVP size, were hoisted in on a large pontoon for repair. For most of December and January, “this small, physically remote Marine Corps command,”476 as the ECIDU commander, Lieutenant Colonel Robert D. Heinl, Jr. himself described it, had been snowbound. Winds howled in excess of 40 knots, and temperatures dropped to 10° below at night. Personnel at the command island, Yo-do, subsisted on C rations for eight days. With boating operations suspended because of the high winds, it was not possible to send supplies or water to Hwangto-do which for several days relied solely on melted snow.

Unseasonably nice weather at the end of February improved the transportation and supply situation. With the bitter cold and wind easing up, maintenance crews were able to fix the damage from the past several months. Crafts, up to LCVP size, were brought in on a large pontoon for repairs. For most of December and January, “this small, physically remote Marine Corps command,” 476 as the ECIDU commander, Lieutenant Colonel Robert D. Heinl, Jr. described it, had been stuck in the snow. Winds howled at over 40 knots, and temperatures dropped to 10° below at night. Personnel at the command island, Yo-do, survived on C rations for eight days. With boating operations suspended due to the high winds, it was impossible to send supplies or water to Hwangto-do, which relied solely on melted snow for several days.

476 ECIDE(U) ComdD, Jan 53, p. 3.

476 ECIDE(U) ComdD, Jan 53, p. 3.

The prolonged foul weather, moreover, interrupted all classified radio communications between the ECIDU and the outside world. Crypto guard for the Wonsan islands was maintained by elements of the East Coast TG 95. Coded and decoded security radio messages had to be picked up by patrol boat which could not reach the islands during extreme conditions of icy seas and heavy snows.

The extended bad weather also disrupted all secure radio communications between the ECIDU and the outside world. Security for the Wonsan islands was upheld by parts of the East Coast TG 95. Coded security radio messages had to be received by a patrol boat that wasn't able to reach the islands due to the severe icy seas and heavy snowfall.

As with the men on the front line, the Communists stepped up their pressure and gunfire against the island command Marines during March. The record477 524 rounds which fell on the ECIDU islands359 in March doubled the following month when the command received 1,050 rounds from active mainland batteries. In April the persistent NKPA artillerymen kept up a continuing bombardment of the eastern coastal UNC islands, missing only three days of the entire month, that caused nine casualties when a direct hit was made on the Tae-do CP bunker. It was the highest rate of incoming since UN occupation of the islands. Another April record was enemy mine laying, which increased sharply in both the WCIDU and ECIDU command areas. A total of 37 mines were sighted, the highest number since August 1952. Communist shore gunners, in addition to harassment of the island themselves, fired 2,091 rounds against TF 95 ships, another all-time high.

As with the men on the front line, the Communists intensified their pressure and gunfire against the island command Marines throughout March. The record477 524 rounds that hit the ECIDU islands359 in March doubled the next month when the command received 1,050 rounds from active mainland batteries. In April, the relentless NKPA artillerymen maintained a constant bombardment of the eastern coastal UNC islands, missing only three days for the entire month, resulting in nine casualties when a direct hit struck the Tae-do CP bunker. This was the highest rate of incoming fire since UN occupation of the islands. Another record in April was enemy mine laying, which sharply increased in both the WCIDU and ECIDU command areas. A total of 37 mines were sighted, the highest number since August 1952. Communist shore gunners, in addition to harassing the islands themselves, fired 2,091 rounds against TF 95 ships, marking yet another all-time high.

477 Another record at this time was the spate of senior visiting officers. Seven times during the month no less than 15 flag and general officers had taken their turn inspecting the ECIDU command headquarters at Yo-do. Services represented were the Marine Corps, U.S. Army, Korean Marine Corps, ROK Navy, and ROK Army. “One local statistician computed the total number of stars for the month (one side of the collar only) as 38,” the monthly report brightly noted. This was believed possibly an all-time high for any headquarters in the Korean theater, short of the Eighth Army. ECIDE(U) ComdD, Mar 53, p. 1.

477 Another notable event during this time was the influx of senior visiting officers. Throughout the month, at least 15 flag and general officers inspected the ECIDU command headquarters at Yo-do on seven separate occasions. The branches represented included the Marine Corps, U.S. Army, Korean Marine Corps, ROK Navy, and ROK Army. “One local statistician calculated the total number of stars for the month (just one side of the collar) to be 38,” the monthly report cheerfully noted. This was thought to possibly be an all-time high for any headquarters in the Korean theater, aside from the Eighth Army. ECIDE(U) ComdD, Mar 53, p. 1.

With respect to personnel, the situation had improved markedly. An increase in ECIDU command strength authorized by CG, FMFPac in March provided for an additional 9 Marine officers, 38 enlisted Marines, and 6 Navy personnel. These were exclusive of the current detachments of 1st ANGLICO shore party and naval maintenance personnel, and represented nearly a 40 percent strength increase.478 Not long afterward the new ECIDU commander, Lieutenant Colonel Hoyt U. Bookhart, Jr., arrived to succeed Lieutenant Colonel Heinl, who had held the position since the preceding November.

With regard to personnel, the situation had improved significantly. An increase in ECIDU command strength authorized by CG, FMFPac in March allowed for an additional 9 Marine officers, 38 enlisted Marines, and 6 Navy personnel. These numbers did not include the current detachments of the 1st ANGLICO shore party and naval maintenance personnel, and represented nearly a 40 percent increase in strength. 478 Soon after, the new ECIDU commander, Lieutenant Colonel Hoyt U. Bookhart, Jr., arrived to take over from Lieutenant Colonel Heinl, who had been in the role since the previous November.

478 The previous T/O for the ECIDU was 5 officers and 30 enlisted USMC, 15 USN attached primarily to the Navy maintenance unit, and 55 officers and 1,217 enlisted KMCs.

478 The previous T/O for the ECIDU was 5 officers and 30 enlisted USMC, 15 USN attached primarily to the Navy maintenance unit, and 55 officers and 1,217 enlisted KMCs.

As with the WCIDU force, by late spring it appeared that the days of UNC control and occupation of the east coast islands were numbered. In view of the imminent armistice, a CinCFE directive of 11 June called for the evacuation of all civilians, supplies, and equipment “in excess of immediate needs.”479 This was a preliminary step towards full evacuation of the islands once the armistice agreement was reached. Accordingly, on 11 June, as evacuation of the friendly west coast partisans got under way, villagers from Yo-do, the largest and ECIDU headquarters site, and the far northern island of Yang-do were similarly moved south. The evacuation was completed by mid-June.

As with the WCIDU force, by late spring it seemed that the days of UNC control and occupation of the east coast islands were numbered. Given the upcoming armistice, a CinCFE directive on June 11 called for the evacuation of all civilians, supplies, and equipment "beyond immediate needs." 479 This was a preliminary step towards fully evacuating the islands once the armistice agreement was finalized. Therefore, on June 11, as the evacuation of the friendly west coast partisans began, villagers from Yo-do, the largest ECIDU headquarters site, and the far northern island of Yang-do were also moved south. The evacuation was completed by mid-June.

360

360

479 ECIDE(U) ComdD, Jun 53, p. 1.

479 ECIDE(U) ComdD, Jun 53, p. 1.

The Division is Ordered Back to the Front480

480 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar ComdDs, Jun 53.

480 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv, 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar ComdDs, Jun 53.

A rash of political activity in June markedly affected the tenor of military operations in Korea. Intensified Communist aggression broke out north of ROK sectors in the Eighth Army line, largely as a reaction to President Rhee’s unprecedented action on 18 June of freeing, with the help of ROK guards, approximately 25,000 North Korean anti-Communist prisoners at POW camps in the south. Other anti-Communist POWs at Camp No. 10, near Ascom City, staged violent break-out attempts at that same time and Company A, 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion passed to operational control of the camp commanding officer there to help prevent a repetition of any such incidents in the future. Following a recess of truce talks, pending a clarification of the status of the current military-diplomatic agreements, key delegates held crisis meetings at Panmunjom and Tokyo to get the beleaguered talks back on track.

A surge of political activity in June significantly impacted the nature of military operations in Korea. Increased Communist aggression emerged north of ROK sectors along the Eighth Army line, largely in response to President Rhee’s unprecedented action on June 18, when he freed about 25,000 North Korean anti-Communist prisoners at POW camps in the south, with the help of ROK guards. At the same time, other anti-Communist POWs at Camp No. 10, near Ascom City, attempted violent breakouts, prompting Company A of the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion to come under the operational control of the camp's commanding officer to help prevent any future incidents. After a pause in truce talks, awaiting clarification of the current military-diplomatic agreements, key delegates held urgent meetings in Panmunjom and Tokyo to try to revive the struggling talks.

Despite the furor, signing of the armistice agreement was expected shortly. As a result, the Munsan-ni Provisional Command was reorganized with the 1st Marine Division assigned the responsibility of reactivating the United Nations Personnel and Medical Processing Unit for the anticipated post-truce exchange of prisoners of war. This was to be conducted along lines similar to that for Operation LITTLE SWITCH, the initial limited exchange. The Division Inspector was named processing unit commander and functional sections (S-1, S-2, S-3, S-4, interpreters, messing, medical, engineer) were also activated. As the division training tour in I Corps reserve drew to a close, a number of regimental CPXs were held during June. And the 5th Marines drew a new assignment: training in riot control. Following civilian demonstrations that had erupted in various populated areas of Eighth Army, including the I Corps sector, the regiment was ordered “to be prepared to move in battalion size increments, to be employed as army service area reserve in suppression of civil disturbances anywhere in army service area.”481

Despite the chaos, the signing of the armistice agreement was expected soon. Consequently, the Munsan-ni Provisional Command was reorganized, with the 1st Marine Division assigned to reactivate the United Nations Personnel and Medical Processing Unit for the anticipated post-truce exchange of prisoners of war. This would follow a process similar to that of Operation Small toggle, the initial limited exchange. The Division Inspector was appointed as the processing unit commander, and functional sections (S-1, S-2, S-3, S-4, interpreters, messing, medical, engineer) were also activated. As the division training tour in I Corps reserve came to an end, several regimental CPXs were conducted throughout June. The 5th Marines received a new assignment: training in riot control. In response to civilian demonstrations that had erupted in various populated areas of the Eighth Army, including the I Corps sector, the regiment was ordered “to be prepared to move in battalion-sized increments, to be used as army service area reserve in suppression of civil disturbances anywhere in the army service area.”481

481 5thMar ComdD, Jun 53, p. 1.

481 5thMar ComdD, Jun 53, p. 1.

While the Marine infantry regiments concluded their training period, the 1st Tank Battalion, Kimpo Provisional Regiment, and Division Reconnaissance Company remained under operational control361 of the frontline U.S. 25th Infantry Division. Marine artillerymen likewise continued under orders of CG, I Corps Artillery, in the forward area, reinforcing division artillery fires. Tentative plans were underway for movement of the 1st Marine Division back to its former position on the MLR in early July. After the signing of the cease-fire, the division would comply with provisions of the truce agreement by closing out its former MLR and withdrawing to designated positions two kilometers south of the former defensive positions.

While the Marine infantry regiments finished their training, the 1st Tank Battalion, Kimpo Provisional Regiment, and Division Reconnaissance Company stayed under the operational control361 of the U.S. 25th Infantry Division on the front lines. Marine artillery units also continued to follow orders from the CG, I Corps Artillery, in the forward area, supporting division artillery fire. There were preliminary plans for the 1st Marine Division to return to its previous position on the MLR in early July. After the cease-fire was signed, the division would follow the terms of the truce by closing out its old MLR and withdrawing to designated spots two kilometers south of the former defense positions.


Relief of the 25th Division—Initial Attacks on Outposts Berlin and East Berlin—Enemy Probes, 11–18 July—Marine Air Operations—Fall of the Berlins—Renewal of Heavy Fighting, 24–26 July—Last Day of the War

Relief of the 25th Division—Initial Attacks on Outposts Berlin and East Berlin—Enemy Probes, July 11–18—Marine Air Operations—Fall of the Berlins—Renewal of Heavy Fighting, July 24–26—Last Day of the War

Relief of the 25th Division482

482 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: Pac Flt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ltr to CMC 3/cpc, A16-13, n.d., Subj: Berlin and East Berlin Action, Rpt of, in 1stMarDiv Summary of Activities, Jul 53 (G-3) file (Records Group 127, 61A-2265, Box 74, FRC, Alex., Va.), hereafter CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 1–9 Jul 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11th Mar, 1st TkBn, 1/7, 2/7, 3/7, 2/11 ComdDs, Jul 53.

482 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: Pac Flt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv letter to CMC 3/cpc, A16-13, n.d., Subject: Berlin and East Berlin Action, Report of, in 1stMarDiv Summary of Activities, Jul 53 (G-3) file (Records Group 127, 61A-2265, Box 74, FRC, Alex., Va.), hereafter CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Journals, 1–9 Jul 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11th Mar, 1st TkBn, 1/7, 2/7, 3/7, 2/11 ComdDs, Jul 53.

For the first week of July the 1st Marine Division continued its mission as I Corps Reserve and its two-month period of intensive combat training that had begun on 5 May. Planning got under way on 1 July, however, for return of the division to its former sector of the MLR, as the western anchor of I Corps, in relief of the 25th Infantry Division.

For the first week of July the 1st Marine Division continued its duties as the I Corps Reserve and its two-month intense combat training that started on May 5. However, planning began on July 1 for the division's return to its previous area of the MLR, serving as the western anchor of I Corps, taking over from the 25th Infantry Division.

Marine infantry components were directed by I Corps to effect the transfer of operational control during the night of 7–8 July. Tank and artillery units—already in the division sector throughout the reserve period—were to make whatever minor relocations were necessary at suitable times thereafter. Division Operation Plan 10-53 ordered the 7th Marines to reassume its responsibility for the right regimental sector of the MLR, eastward to the 1st Commonwealth boundary. The 5th Marines, which had been in reserve at the time of the May relief of lines, was assigned to the center sector of the MLR, while the 1st Marines was designated as divisional reserve.

Marine infantry units were instructed by I Corps to transfer operational control during the night of July 7-8. Tank and artillery units—already in the division's area during the reserve period—were to make any minor relocations as needed at appropriate times afterward. Division Operation Plan 10-53 directed the 7th Marines to take back their responsibility for the right regimental sector of the Main Line of Resistance (MLR), extending east to the 1st Commonwealth boundary. The 5th Marines, which had been in reserve during the May relief, was assigned to the center sector of the MLR, while the 1st Marines was designated as the divisional reserve.

Relief of the 25th Infantry Division by Marine units got underway on 6 July when the first incoming elements of Colonel Funk’s 7th Marines moved up to the right regimental sector manned jointly by364 the U.S. 14th Infantry Regiment and the Turkish Armed Forces Command. Advance personnel reported into the left sector, to be taken over by the Marine 1st Battalion, and at 1400 the 3d Battalion relieved the TAFC reserve battalion in the rear area.

Relief of the 25th Infantry Division by Marine units started on July 6 when the first incoming team from Colonel Funk’s 7th Marines moved up to the right regimental sector, which was jointly held by the U.S. 14th Infantry Regiment and the Turkish Armed Forces Command. Advance personnel checked into the left sector, which was set to be taken over by the Marine 1st Battalion, and at 2:00 PM, the 3rd Battalion replaced the TAFC reserve battalion in the rear area.

Two platoons from the Marine regiment’s 4.2-inch Mortar Company, meanwhile, also began their phased relief of the Turkish Heavy Mortar Company. The incoming mortar crews had some unexpected early target practice. As the men took up their active MLR firing positions in the right battalion sector, they were promptly forced to put their tubes into action to silence a troublesome machine gun, enemy mortars, and hostile troops behind the Jersey Ridge to the north and Reno and Elko on the west. That evening the 2d Battalion opened its new command post in the eastern sector, occupied by two TAFC battalions.

Two platoons from the Marine regiment's 4.2-inch Mortar Company started replacing the Turkish Heavy Mortar Company. The incoming mortar crews got some unexpected early target practice. As the men took their firing positions in the right battalion sector, they quickly had to use their mortars to take out a troublesome machine gun, enemy mortars, and hostile troops behind Jersey Ridge to the north and Reno and Elko to the west. That evening, the 2nd Battalion set up its new command post in the eastern sector, which was occupied by two TAFC battalions.

Sharply at 0455 on 7 July, the 7th Marines assumed responsibility for the right regimental sector and came under operational control of the 25th Division. Shortly after noon that day, forward units of 1/7 reached the 25th Division sector after a three hour motor march from Camp Indianhead, through driving rains in their second day without letup. At the battalion sector, 1/7 joined the advance echelon of 40 men who had arrived the previous day and took over its MLR positions from the 14th Infantry. Additional 7th Marines units reporting in throughout the day and assuming new locations were the weapons, mortar, and antitank companies.

Sharply at 4:55 AM on July 7th, the 7th Marines took charge of the right regimental area and came under the operational control of the 25th Division. Shortly after noon that day, forward units of 1/7 reached the 25th Division area after a three-hour motor march from Camp Indianhead, battling through relentless rain on their second day without a break. At their battalion sector, 1/7 joined the advance group of 40 men who had arrived the day before and took over their Main Line of Resistance positions from the 14th Infantry. Additional units from the 7th Marines reported in throughout the day and assumed new locations, including the weapons, mortar, and antitank companies.

The first of Colonel Tschirgi’s 5th Marines returned to their center regimental sector before dawn that same day to begin their relief of the Army 35th Infantry Regiment. At 0300 the 3d Battalion assumed responsibility for the eastern half of the MLR. By late afternoon, antitank personnel and the 2d Battalion were in line, the latter taking over the western battalion sector at 1716. In the rear regimental area, early elements of Colonel Nelson’s 1st Marines, locating just south of the Imjin River, had begun to arrive by 1300. The regiment would assume ground security for the Spoonbill and Libby (formerly X-Ray) bridges in the sector as well as MASRT #1.

The first unit of Colonel Tschirgi’s 5th Marines returned to their regimental sector before dawn that day to start replacing the Army's 35th Infantry Regiment. At 0300, the 3rd Battalion took over the eastern half of the Main Line of Resistance (MLR). By late afternoon, the antitank team and the 2nd Battalion were in position, with the latter taking over the western battalion sector at 1716. In the rear regimental area, the initial elements of Colonel Nelson’s 1st Marines, located just south of the Imjin River, had begun to arrive by 1300. The regiment would take on ground security for the Spoonbill and Libby (formerly X-Ray) bridges in the area as well as MASRT #1.

No one needed to remind the 1st Marine Division that the territory it was moving back into was not the same—with respect to defense posts in the right regimental sector—that it had left two months earlier. Three of its six outposts there (Carson, Elko, Vegas) had fallen to the enemy in the late-May battle, despite the formidable365 resistance of the defending Turks. Outpost Ava remained at the far western end of the line, with the Berlin-East Berlin complex in the right battalion area. Some 6,750 yards of intervening MLR—more than four miles—lay in between, bereft of any protective outposts to screen and alert the defending line companies to sudden enemy assaults. The Marines were thus returning to a main line of resistance considerably weakened in its right regimental sector.

No one needed to remind the 1st Marine Division that the area it was going back to was different—especially in terms of defense posts in the right regimental sector—than what it had left two months earlier. Three of its six outposts there (Carson, Elko, Vegas) had fallen to the enemy in the late-May battle, despite the strong resistance of the defending Turks. Outpost Ava remained at the far western end of the line, along with the Berlin-East Berlin complex in the right battalion area. About 6,750 yards of open space—more than four miles—lay in between, with no protective outposts to watch over and alert the defending line companies to sudden enemy attacks. The Marines were thus returning to a main line of resistance that was considerably weaker in its right regimental sector.

As the 1st Division CG, General Pate, observed:

As the commander of the 1st Division, General Pate, noted:

Vegas [had] dominated the enemy approaches to Berlin from the north and northwest and therefore made Berlin relatively secure. Berlin, in turn, dominated the enemy approaches from the north and northwest to East Berlin and made East Berlin relatively secure. The loss of Outpost Vegas to the CCF placed Berlin and East Berlin in very precarious positions and negated their being supported by ground fire except from the MLR.483

Vegas had controlled the enemy routes to Berlin from the north and northwest, making Berlin relatively safe. In turn, Berlin controlled the enemy approaches from the north and northwest to East Berlin, keeping East Berlin relatively secure. Losing Outpost Vegas to the CCF put both Berlin and East Berlin in very risky positions and eliminated their ability to receive support from ground fire, except from the MLR.483

483 CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt., p. 1.

483 CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt., p. 1.

Ground support fire from the MLR, moreover, tended to be only moderately successful in supporting the outposts because of the nature of the terrain. A major Communist stronghold, Hill 190, lay northeast of the Carson-Elko-Vegas complex. Since Berlin (COP 19) and East Berlin (COP 19-A) were sited on extensions of this same hill mass, the enemy could make sudden “ridgeline” attacks against the Berlins. With buffer outpost Vegas now lost, the likelihood of CCF success in such attacks was “immeasurably increased.”484

Ground support fire from the MLR was only somewhat effective in helping the outposts because of the tough terrain. A major Communist stronghold, Hill 190, was located northeast of the Carson-Elko-Vegas complex. Since Berlin (COP 19) and East Berlin (COP 19-A) were positioned on extensions of the same hill, the enemy could launch sudden "ridgeline" attacks against the Berlins. With buffer outpost Vegas now gone, the chances of CCF success in these attacks were "immeasurably increased."484

484 Ibid., p. 2.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 2.

Initial Attacks on Outposts Berlin and East Berlin485

485 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt; 1stMarDiv ComdD, July 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 1–10 Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 992, dtd 8–9 Jul 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1st TkBn, 1/7, 2/7, 3/7, 2/11, 4/11 ComdDs, Jul 53; 1st MAW, VMF-311, VMO-6, HMR-161 ComdDs, Jul 53; Hicks, Outpost Warfare; MacDonald, POW.

485 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt; 1stMarDiv ComdD, July 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 1–10 Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 992, dated 8–9 Jul 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 1st TkBn, 1/7, 2/7, 3/7, 2/11, 4/11 ComdDs, Jul 53; 1st MAW, VMF-311, VMO-6, HMR-161 ComdDs, Jul 53; Hicks, Outpost Warfare; MacDonald, POW.

It did not take the Chinese long to exploit this situation. At about 2100 on 7 July, while the relief of lines was in progress, the two Berlin outposts and newly-located MLR companies of Lieutenant Colonel Cereghino’s 2d Battalion (from the left: D, F, and E), were greeted by a heavy volume of Chinese mortar and artillery fire. The barrage continued unremittingly, followed by waves of a reinforced Chinese battalion that swept over the two platoon-sized outposts,366 from the direction of Vegas. By 2345 defending Marines at both outposts were engaged in hand-to-hand combat with the enemy, identified as elements of the 407th Regiment, 136th Division, 46th CCF Army.

It didn't take long for the Chinese to take advantage of the situation. Around 9 PM on July 7, while the relief of lines was taking place, the two Berlin outposts and the newly positioned MLR companies of Lieutenant Colonel Cereghino’s 2nd Battalion (from the left: D, F, and E) were hit by a heavy barrage of Chinese mortar and artillery fire. The shelling kept coming without pause, followed by waves of a reinforced Chinese battalion that advanced over the two platoon-sized outposts from the direction of Vegas. By 11:45 PM, defending Marines at both outposts were engaged in hand-to-hand combat with the enemy, identified as elements of the 407th Regiment, 136th Division, 46th CCF Army.366

Berlin, manned at the time by TAFC486 and Marine personnel, was unexpectedly strengthened by a Company F reinforced squad that had been dispatched on an earlier ambush patrol in the vicinity of the outpost. At East Berlin, however, the overwhelming hordes of Chinese soldiers advanced to the trenchline of the steep forward slope and quickly locked with the Marines at point-blank range. Despite the coordination of MLR machine gun, 60mm, 81mm, and 4.2-inch mortar, and artillery fires from 2/11487 and 4/11, the enemy overran the outpost at 2355 after heavy, close fighting. Chinese mortar and artillery barrages, by midnight, had continuously disrupted the Marine communications net at East Berlin, and by 0130 radio relay was also out at Berlin proper.

Berlin, staffed at the time by TAFC486 and Marine personnel, was unexpectedly reinforced by a squad from Company F that had been sent on an earlier ambush patrol near the outpost. However, at East Berlin, waves of Chinese soldiers advanced to the trench line of the steep forward slope and quickly engaged the Marines at close range. Despite the coordination of MLR machine guns, 60mm, 81mm, and 4.2-inch mortar, along with artillery support from 2/11487 and 4/11, the enemy overran the outpost at 11:55 PM after intense, close combat. By midnight, Chinese mortar and artillery fire had consistently disrupted the Marine communications network at East Berlin, and by 1:30 AM, radio relay was also down at Berlin proper.

486 Discussing this phase of operations, the 2/7 commander stated: “As it turned out we were in great shape with both Marines and Turks fighting side by side in some instances. We had a great rapport with the Turks in that they had previously relieved 2/7. In fact, they made us honorary members of their battalions, giving each 2/7 Marine one of the unit patches.” Col Alexander D. Cereghino ltr to Dir MCHist, HQMC, dtd 19 Jun 70.

486 Discussing this phase of operations, the 2/7 commander stated: “It turned out we were in great shape with both Marines and Turks fighting side by side in some cases. We had an excellent relationship with the Turks since they had previously relieved 2/7. In fact, they made us honorary members of their battalions, giving each 2/7 Marine one of the unit patches.” Col Alexander D. Cereghino ltr to Dir MCHist, HQMC, dtd 19 Jun 70.

487 On 7 July, 2/11 had become the direct support battalion for the 7th Marines.

487 On July 7, 2/11 had become the direct support battalion for the 7th Marines.

A provisional platoon from Headquarters and Service Company of 2/7 was quickly ordered to reinforce the main line against any attempted breakthrough by the Chinese. This was a distinct possibility since the Berlins were only 325 yards from the MLR, nearer than most outposts. Men from Companies H and I of the rear reserve 3d Battalion (since 26 May commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Paul M. Jones) were also placed under operational control of 2/7 and ordered to forward assembly areas in readiness for a thrust against the enemy at East Berlin.

A temporary platoon from Headquarters and Service Company of 2/7 was quickly ordered to strengthen the main line against any attempts by the Chinese to break through. This was a real possibility since the Berlins were only 325 yards from the MLR, closer than most outposts. Soldiers from Companies H and I of the rear reserve 3d Battalion (commanded since May 26 by Lieutenant Colonel Paul M. Jones) were also placed under the operational control of 2/7 and instructed to move to forward assembly areas in preparation for an attack on the enemy at East Berlin.

At 0355 a Company F squad jumped off for the initial counterattack. This was made at 0415, without artillery preparation, in an attempt to gain surprise for the assault. It was thrown back. A second Company F unit, by 0440, was on its way to reinforce the first but got caught by 25 rounds of incoming, with 15 men wounded. It continued on, however, but an hour later the Marines were ordered to disengage so that the artillerymen could place TOT fire on the area preparatory to a fresh attempt to dislodge the enemy soldiers.

At 3:55 AM, a squad from Company F set out for the initial counterattack. They launched it at 4:15 AM, without any artillery support, to catch the enemy off guard. They were pushed back. A second Company F unit, by 4:40 AM, was heading to reinforce the first but was hit by 25 incoming rounds, resulting in 15 injuries. They kept going, but an hour later, the Marines were ordered to pull back so the artillery could fire on the area in preparation for a new attempt to drive out the enemy soldiers.

367

367

During the early morning hours of 8 July, large numbers of Chinese were seen at their new Vegas and Reno strongholds. Marines of the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery blanketed hostile troops there and at the Berlin outposts with four ripples. On another occasion, a time-on-target mission launched by the 2/11 direct support battalion, landed in the midst of an enemy company assembled on Vegas. Friendly firepower by this time consisted of all four battalions of the 11th Marines, as well as seven Army and Turkish artillery battalions still emplaced in the area during the relief period and thus under tactical control of 25th Division Artillery.

During the early morning of July 8, a large number of Chinese troops were spotted at their new strongholds in Vegas and Reno. Marines from the 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery targeted enemy forces there and at the Berlin outposts with four waves of rockets. On another occasion, a coordinated attack by the 2/11 direct support battalion struck right in the middle of an enemy company gathered in Vegas. By this time, friendly firepower included all four battalions of the 11th Marines, along with seven Army and Turkish artillery battalions still positioned in the area during the relief operation, and thus under the tactical control of the 25th Division Artillery.

Throughout 7–8 July, 11 Marine tanks from Company B placed 800 shells on enemy installations and troops. In the characteristic pattern, use of Marine armor heightened unfriendly response. The tanks drew in return 2,000 rounds of Chinese mortar and artillery on their own positions, but without any serious damage. Elements of the Army 14th Infantry Regiment Tank Company, still in the area, also opened up with some additional shells and bullets.

Throughout July 7–8, 11 Marine tanks from Company B fired 800 shells at enemy installations and troops. True to form, the use of Marine armor provoked a strong reaction from the enemy. The tanks attracted 2,000 rounds of Chinese mortar and artillery aimed at their positions, but suffered no serious damage. Elements of the Army 14th Infantry Regiment Tank Company, still in the area, also started firing additional shells and bullets.

Despite the Chinese attack, the relief of lines continued during the night. In the center MLR sector, the 5th Marines had taken over regimental responsibility at 2130, with 3/11 becoming its direct supporting unit. And in the western half of the 7th Marines line—about the only undisturbed part of the regimental sector—1/7 had routinely completed is battalion relief at 0335 on 8 July.

Despite the Chinese attack, the relief of lines continued throughout the night. In the center MLR sector, the 5th Marines assumed regimental responsibility at 9:30 PM, with 3/11 becoming its direct support unit. Meanwhile, in the western half of the 7th Marines line—basically the only undisturbed part of the regimental sector—1/7 had typically finished its battalion relief at 3:35 AM on July 8.

At 0630 it was confirmed that East Berlin, an extension of the ridge on which Berlin was located, was under enemy control. Better news at first light was that Berlin,488 500 yards west, had repulsed the enemy, a fact not definitely known earlier due to communication failure. At this time, G-3 reported that 18 effectives were holding Berlin, and 2/7 assigned an 18-man reinforced squad to buttress the defense. It was not considered feasible to send a larger reinforcement “since the Berlin area [could] accommodate only a small garrison.”489

At 6:30 AM, it was confirmed that East Berlin, an extension of the ridge where Berlin was situated, was under enemy control. The better news at dawn was that Berlin, 488 500 yards to the west, had successfully repelled the enemy—information that hadn't been clearly known earlier because of communication issues. At this point, G-3 reported that 18 soldiers were holding Berlin, and 2/7 assigned an 18-man reinforced squad to strengthen the defense. It was deemed impractical to send a larger reinforcement "since the Berlin area [could] accommodate only a small garrison." 489

488 The ridge on which COP Berlin was located was split by two valleys. Both of these and the ridge itself served as approaches to the Marine MLR. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-169.

488 The ridge where COP Berlin was situated was divided by two valleys. Both the valleys and the ridge itself provided access to the Marine MLR. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-169.

489 CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt, p. 2.

489 CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt, p. 2.

Meanwhile, another 7th Marines counterforce was being organized for a massed assault to retake East Berlin. At 1000, under cover of a thundering 1,600-round mortar and artillery preparation by Marine and TAFC gunners, a reinforced two-platoon unit from Companies368 George and How, launched the attack. The unlucky H/3/7 platoon, in the lead, got caught between well-aimed Chinese shells and the Marines’ own protective wire. In less than 15 minutes the platoon had been reduced to 20 effectives, with Company G passing through its ranks to continue the attack. By 1123 the Marines were in a violent fire fight and grenade duel in the main trenchline at East Berlin.

Meanwhile, another 7th Marines counterforce was being organized for a large-scale attack to retake East Berlin. At 10:00 AM, under the cover of a booming 1,600-round mortar and artillery barrage by Marine and TAFC gunners, a reinforced two-platoon unit from Companies368 George and How launched the assault. The unfortunate H/3/7 platoon, at the front, got trapped between well-aimed Chinese shells and the Marines’ own protective wire. In less than 15 minutes, the platoon was down to 20 effective members, with Company G moving through its ranks to keep pushing forward. By 11:23 AM, the Marines were engaged in a fierce firefight and grenade duel in the main trenchline at East Berlin.

Tank guns, meanwhile, blasted away at Chinese troops, bunkers, active weapons, and trenches. On call they placed their fire “only a few yards in front of the friendly attacking infantry and moved this fire forward as the foot troops advanced.”490 Heavy countermortar and artillery rounds were also hitting their mark on forward, top, and reverse slopes of East Berlin to soften the Chinese defenses. A few minutes later the 3d Battalion men had formed for the assault. During the heavy hand-to-hand fighting of the next hour the Marines “literally threw some of the Chinese down the reverse slope.”491 Gaining the crest of the hill, the Marines by force and fire dispatched the enemy intruders. At 1233 they were again in possession of East Berlin. With just 20 men left in fighting condition at the outpost, a reinforcing platoon from I/3/7 was dispatched to buttress the assault force.

Tank guns continued to fire at Chinese troops, bunkers, active weapons, and trenches. They targeted their fire “just a few yards in front of the friendly attacking infantry and moved this fire forward as the foot troops advanced.”490 Heavy countermortar and artillery shells were also striking the forward, top, and reverse slopes of East Berlin to weaken the Chinese defenses. A few minutes later, the men of the 3d Battalion were ready to launch their assault. During the intense hand-to-hand fighting that followed, the Marines “literally threw some of the Chinese down the reverse slope.”491 After reaching the top of the hill, the Marines used force and fire to eliminate the enemy intruders. By 1233, they had regained control of East Berlin. With only 20 men left able to fight at the outpost, a reinforcing platoon from I/3/7 was sent to support the assault team.

490 1st TkBn ComdD, Jul 53, p. 2.

490 1st TkBn ComdD, Jul 53, p. 2.

491 Hicks, Outpost Warfare, p. 136.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hicks, *Outpost Warfare*, p. 136.

North of the 7th Marines sector four F9F Panthers, led by the commanding officer of VMF-311, Lieutenant Colonel Bernard McShane, found their way through the rainy skies that had restricted aerial support efforts nearly everywhere. In a noon MPQ mission, the quartet delivered five tons of ordnance on Chinese reinforcement troops and bunkers.

North of the 7th Marines sector, four F9F Panthers, led by the commanding officer of VMF-311, Lieutenant Colonel Bernard McShane, navigated through the rainy skies that had limited aerial support efforts almost everywhere. During a noon MPQ mission, the group dropped five tons of ordnance on Chinese reinforcement troops and bunkers.

Promptly at 1300—a half hour after retaking the outpost—the 7th Marines effected the relief of the last Turkish elements at Berlin and occupied the twin defense positions. And by 1500 on 8 July, the 1st Marine Division assumed operational control of the entire division sector from the Army 25th Infantry Division. Relief of individual units would continue, however, through several more days. At the same time, the mission of the 11th Marines, since 5 July under a new regimental commander, Colonel Manly L. Curry, changed from general support of U.S. I Corps, reinforcing the fires of the 25th Division Artillery, to direct support of the Marine Division.369 The 1st Tank Battalion similarly took over its regular direct support role. Other units under temporary Army jurisdiction, such as the Kimpo Provisional Regiment and Division Reconnaissance Company, reverted to Marine control.

Promptly at 1:00 PM—half an hour after retaking the outpost—the 7th Marines relieved the last Turkish troops at Berlin and took over the dual defense positions. By 3:00 PM on July 8, the 1st Marine Division had operational control of the entire division sector from the Army's 25th Infantry Division. However, the relief of individual units would continue for several more days. At the same time, the mission of the 11th Marines, which had been under a new regimental commander, Colonel Manly L. Curry, since July 5, shifted from general support of U.S. I Corps, reinforcing the fires of the 25th Division Artillery, to direct support of the Marine Division.369 The 1st Tank Battalion similarly resumed its regular direct support role. Other units that had been temporarily under Army control, such as the Kimpo Provisional Regiment and Division Reconnaissance Company, returned to Marine control.

During the rest of the day, gunners of the 11th Marines continued their fire missions despite reduced visibility that hindered surveillance by the OY spotting planes and forward observers. Only 42 Chinese were sighted during the daytime, although shortly before dusk a CCF group reportedly heading toward the Berlins area southwest from Frisco was taken under fire. Estimates of enemy incoming throughout the 7–8 July action from 17-odd battalions of Chinese artillery dug in across the division sector was placed at 19,000 rounds of all types. Marine and Army-controlled battalions, for their part, pounded Chinese strongholds with a total of 20,178 rounds.

During the rest of the day, the gunners from the 11th Marines kept carrying out their fire missions despite limited visibility that made it hard for the OY spotting planes and forward observers to do their job. Only 42 Chinese troops were seen during the day, although just before dusk, a group of CCF that was reportedly moving toward the Berlins area southwest of Frisco came under fire. Estimates of incoming enemy fire throughout the July 7-8 action from about 17 battalions of Chinese artillery stationed across the division sector were around 19,000 rounds of various types. Meanwhile, Marine and Army-controlled battalions bombarded Chinese strongholds with a total of 20,178 rounds.

That night Colonel Funk authorized a 3d Battalion platoon to bolster the MLR. Five tanks were also ordered to locate in the Hill 126 area, the Marine high-ground terrain feature to the rear of the frontlines. This foresight was well rewarded. During the late evening hours strange motor noises “sounding like a convoy pulling in and then back out again”492 floated over the Korean hills and the tanks immediately swept suspected hostile installations with their 90mm guns. Later that night of 8–9 July, the Chinese suddenly renewed their probing efforts at the battered Marine outposts. Moving in from Vegas, an estimated reinforced enemy company attacked Berlin at 0104, then brushed on to East Berlin. An intense fire fight ensued off and on for nearly two hours at the two posts. Marine 81mm and 4.2-inch mortars, plus artillery illumination, boxing fires, and tanks blunted the assaults. At 0315 the enemy broke contact and action quieted down at both locations.

That night, Colonel Funk authorized a 3rd Battalion platoon to strengthen the MLR. Five tanks were also ordered to position themselves in the Hill 126 area, the high ground behind the frontlines. This foresight paid off. During the late evening hours, strange motor noises “sounding like a convoy pulling in and then back out again”492 echoed over the Korean hills, and the tanks quickly engaged suspected hostile positions with their 90mm guns. Later that night, on July 8-9, the Chinese suddenly intensified their probing at the battered Marine outposts. Coming in from Vegas, an estimated reinforced enemy company attacked Berlin at 0104 and then moved on to East Berlin. An intense firefight lasted on and off for nearly two hours at the two posts. Marine 81mm and 4.2-inch mortars, as well as artillery illumination, boxing fires, and tanks, thwarted the assaults. At 0315, the enemy broke contact, and the action quieted down at both locations.

492 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dtd 9 Jul 53.

492 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dated 9 Jul 53.

Throughout the rest of the day, eight Company C493 armored vehicles assisted the infantrymen in consolidation of positions. A total of 25 rounds of shells and 19,140 rounds of .30 and .50 caliber370 machine gun bullets were expended on CCF strongpoints and troops during a 24-hour firing period that ended at 1700.

Throughout the rest of the day, eight Company C493 armored vehicles helped the infantry secure their positions. They fired a total of 25 shells and used 19,140 rounds of .30 and .50 caliber machine gun bullets on CCF strongpoints and troops during a 24-hour firing period that ended at 1700.370

493 On 9 July Company C relieved Company B on the MLR in support of the 7th Marines. Both tank companies had been in action with the TAFC during the entire 60-day period the division was in I Corps reserve. Due to the rotation system, however, Baker Company had been on line longer and transferred to the rear ranks for a “much needed rest and rehabilitation.” 1st TkBn ComdD, Jul 53, p. 3.

493 On July 9, Company C took over from Company B on the Main Line of Resistance (MLR) in support of the 7th Marines. Both tank companies had been engaged with the Tactical Air Force Command (TAFC) throughout the entire 60-day period the division was in I Corps reserve. However, because of the rotation system, Baker Company had been on the front lines longer and was moved to the rear for a “much needed rest and rehabilitation.” 1st TkBn ComdD, Jul 53, p. 3.

Because of the casualties at Berlin, an H/3/7 reinforcement squad was sent to augment the Marine force there. Losses suffered by the 7th Marines for the two successive nights were 9 killed, 12 missing,494 126 wounded and evacuated, and 14 with minor wounds. The cost to the CCF was 30 known dead, and an estimated 200 killed and 400 wounded.

Because of the casualties in Berlin, a reinforcement squad from H/3/7 was sent to support the Marine force there. The 7th Marines faced losses over two consecutive nights: 9 killed, 12 missing, 494 126 wounded and evacuated, and 14 with minor injuries. The cost to the CCF was 30 confirmed dead, with an estimated 200 killed and 400 wounded.

494 Later it was determined that only two were actually captured and they were subsequently repatriated. MacDonald, POW, p. 211.

494 Later it was found that only two were actually taken prisoner, and they were later sent back home. MacDonald, POW, p. 211.

With the Marines back on line, VMO-6 and HMR-161 which were under division operational control again resumed normal combat routine. Returning on 8 July to their forward airstrip in the center regimental sector, VMO-6 helicopters made eight frontline helicopter evacuations. Observation planes that same day conducted four artillery spotting missions behind enemy lines. HMR-161, assuming normal operations on 10 July, resupplied Marine division outposts with 1,200 pounds of rations, water, and gear as part of its 25.3 hours flight time this first day back in full service.

With the Marines back on duty, VMO-6 and HMR-161, which were under division operational control, resumed their regular combat routine. Returning on July 8 to their forward airstrip in the center of the regimental sector, VMO-6 helicopters completed eight frontline evacuations. That same day, observation planes conducted four artillery spotting missions behind enemy lines. HMR-161, resuming normal operations on July 10, supplied Marine division outposts with 1,200 pounds of rations, water, and gear as part of its 25.3 hours of flight time on this first day back in full service.

Enemy and Marine Probes, 11–18 July495

495 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 10–17 Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 923–930, dtd 10–17 Jul 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 2/5, 1/7, 3/7, 2/11 ComdDs, Jul 53; Hermes, Truce Tent.

495 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, Jul 10–17, 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 923–930, dated Jul 10–17, 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 2/5, 1/7, 3/7, 2/11 ComdDs, Jul 53; Hermes, Truce Tent.

After the flare-up on the Berlin front, there was relatively little action for the next 10 days. Marines continued the relief of the last of the outgoing 25th Division units. When this was completed on 13 July, 1st Marine Division units, including the 1st KMC/RCT496 and 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, were all back in their accustomed sectors. They thus rejoined the 1st Tank Battalion, 11th Marines, Kimpo Regiment, and Division Reconnaissance Company which had remained on line throughout the period. The July relief was one that could hardly be characterized as routine. Interfering elements had included not only the Chinese but torrential summer rains. These371 had continued virtually nonstop from 5–8 July causing bridge and road washouts, rerouting of supply trucks, and juggling of manifests at a time when the regiments were using an average of 90 transport vehicles daily.

After the conflict in Berlin, there was relatively little action for the next 10 days. Marines continued the relief of the last outgoing units from the 25th Division. When this was completed on July 13, 1st Marine Division units, including the 1st KMC/RCT496 and 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion, were back in their usual areas. They rejoined the 1st Tank Battalion, 11th Marines, Kimpo Regiment, and Division Reconnaissance Company, which had remained operational throughout that time. The July relief was anything but routine. There were disruptions from not only the Chinese forces but also from heavy summer rains. These371 continued almost without stopping from July 5 to 8, causing bridge and road damage, rerouting of supply trucks, and rearranging cargo lists at a time when the regiments were using an average of 90 transport vehicles each day.

496 The 1st KMC/RCT turned over its sector of the 1st ROK Division front to the 1st ROK Regiment at 1800 on 8 July and relieved the U.S. 27th Infantry Regiment on 12 July. ROKMC Comments.

496 The 1st KMC/RCT handed over its section of the 1st ROK Division front to the 1st ROK Regiment at 6:00 PM on July 8 and took over from the U.S. 27th Infantry Regiment on July 12. ROKMC Comments.

Forward of the MLR the regular nightly patrols probed enemy territory, often with no contact. On at least three occasions division intelligence reported entire 24-hour periods during which the elusive Chinese could not be sighted anywhere in No-Man’s-Land by friendly patrols operating north of the Marine division front.

Forward of the MLR, the regular nightly patrols explored enemy territory, often without any contact. On at least three occasions, division intelligence reported entire 24-hour periods during which the elusive Chinese could not be seen anywhere in No-Man’s-Land by friendly patrols operating north of the Marine division front.

More rain,497 continual haze, and ground fog for 6 of the 10 days between 9–18 July not only reduced the activity of air observers and Marine pilots, but apparently inspired the ground-digging Chinese to pursue—at least across from the division sector of I Corps—a more mole-like existence than ever. Enemy troop sightings during the daytime decreased from as many as 310 CCF to a new low of 14. Incoming, for one 24-hour period, totaled no more than 48 rounds of Chinese artillery and 228 of mortar fire that struck Marine positions, causing only slight damage.

More rain, continual overcast, and ground fog for 6 out of the 10 days between July 9–18 not only limited the activity of air observers and Marine pilots, but apparently motivated the underground-digging Chinese to adopt—at least in the area across from the I Corps division sector—a more mole-like lifestyle than ever. Enemy troop sightings during the day dropped from as many as 310 CCF to a new low of 14. During one 24-hour period, there were only 48 rounds of Chinese artillery and 228 mortar rounds that hit Marine positions, resulting in only minor damage.

497 Spoonbill Bridge was submerged under 11 feet of water and destroyed by the pressure against it on 7 July. Flood conditions existed again on 14–15 July when the Imjin crested at 26 feet at Libby Bridge. Roads in the vicinity were impassable for three days. Resupply of forward companies was made via Freedom Bridge. One command diary writer, discussing the elaborate series of six moves made by 1/1 during July, added a touch of unconscious humor when he observed, “During the month, it seemed as if the Battalion was constantly on the move.... Rain hampered these moves considerably. The weather between moves was generally clear and dry.” 1/1 ComdD, July 53, p. 1; 1st TkBn ComdD, Jul 53, pp. 5, 11–12, 23; PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, pp. 9-68, 9-136.

497 Spoonbill Bridge was underwater, completely destroyed by the pressure on July 7. Flood conditions returned on July 14-15 when the Imjin River peaked at 26 feet at Libby Bridge. Roads in the area were impassable for three days. Supplies for the forward units were delivered via Freedom Bridge. One command diary writer, reflecting on the complicated series of six movements made by 1/1 during July, added a bit of unintentional humor when he noted, “During the month, it felt like the Battalion was always on the move.... Rain made these movements much more difficult. The weather between moves was usually clear and dry.” 1/1 ComdD, July 53, p. 1; 1st TkBn ComdD, Jul 53, pp. 5, 11–12, 23; PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, pp. 9-68, 9-136.

The same could not be said for their mines. One 7th Marines reconnaissance patrol located a new minefield staked out with Soviet antipersonnel mines (POMZ-2) of an unfamiliar type with both pull and tension fuses. It appeared that mines which had lain dormant during the winter months had suddenly come to life with the warm weather, or else been recently re-laid. Nearly a dozen were uncovered by 5th and 7th Marines patrols, soon after their return to the front, and sometimes the discovery came too late. Probably the worst day was 12 July when four Marines were killed and eight wounded as a result of accidentally detonating mines.

The same couldn't be said for their mines. One reconnaissance patrol from the 7th Marines found a new minefield marked with Soviet antipersonnel mines (POMZ-2) of a strange type that had both pull and tension fuses. It looked like the mines that had been inactive during the winter had suddenly become active with the warmer weather, or they had been recently re-laid. Nearly a dozen were found by patrols from the 5th and 7th Marines shortly after they returned to the front, and sometimes the discovery came too late. The worst day was probably July 12, when four Marines were killed and eight were injured after accidentally detonating mines.

At the same time, in the 5th Marines sector near the vicinity of truce corridor COP-2, the persistent voice of the Dragon Lady taunted Marines with such lackluster gambits as “Surrender now! What is372 your girl doing back home?” in the stepped-up pace of its midnight propaganda broadcasts.

At the same time, in the 5th Marines sector near the truce corridor COP-2, the constant voice of the Dragon Lady mocked the Marines with dull lines like “Surrender now! What’s your girl doing back home?” during the increased frequency of its midnight propaganda broadcasts.

The regular nightly patrols checked in and out, performing their mission routinely. Even during this last month of the war, when word of the final truce agreement was expected daily, fire fights ensued. On 12 July, a 5th Marines 13-man reconnaissance patrol clashed briefly north of COP Esther, while a 7th Marines platoon-size combat patrol brushed with a Chinese squad west of Elko in an 18-minute fire fight. The same night the 11th Marines reported increased enemy sightings of 318 CCF soldiers—the most seen since the Berlin probe of 7–8 July. No follow-up was made. The Chinese were busy with major offensives elsewhere along the UNC front, devoting their primary efforts to ROK divisions on the central and eastern sectors of the Eighth Army line. Apparently they fully intended to demonstrate to the South Koreans that continuation of the war would be a costly business.498

The regular nightly patrols checked in and out, carrying out their mission as usual. Even in this last month of the war, when news of the final truce agreement was expected daily, firefights still happened. On July 12, a 13-man reconnaissance patrol from the 5th Marines had a brief clash north of COP Esther, while a platoon-sized combat patrol from the 7th Marines encountered a Chinese squad west of Elko in an 18-minute firefight. That same night, the 11th Marines reported seeing an increased number of enemy troops—318 CCF soldiers—the highest count since the Berlin probe on July 7-8. No follow-up action was taken. The Chinese were occupied with major offensives elsewhere along the UNC front, focusing their efforts on the ROK divisions in the central and eastern sections of the Eighth Army line. It seemed they were determined to show the South Koreans that continuing the war would be a costly undertaking.498

498 Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 470.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hermes, *Truce Tent*, p. 470.

Along the Marine front, three patrol contacts took place on the night of 16–17 July. Two of them were grim reminders that despite the promising look (and sound) of the peace talks, for those men lost the toll of the war was as final and unremitting as it had been at any time during the past three years of combat. The first was a routine maneuver for a 5th Marines 13-man combat patrol that, at 2252, engaged an enemy squad just north of outpost Hedy. After an eight-minute fire fight the enemy withdrew, with two Chinese soldiers counted dead and one wounded and no friendly casualties.

Along the Marine front, three patrol contacts occurred on the night of July 16–17. Two of them were harsh reminders that despite the hopeful progress of the peace talks, the loss was as devastating and relentless for those men as it had been at any time during the last three years of fighting. The first was a routine mission for a 13-man combat patrol from the 5th Marines, which at 10:52 PM engaged an enemy squad just north of outpost Hedy. After an eight-minute firefight, the enemy retreated, leaving behind two Chinese soldiers dead and one wounded, with no casualties on our side.

Not so lucky was a 2/5 reconnaissance patrol. At midnight, its 15 members encountered a band of 30 to 40 Chinese, deployed in a V-shaped ambush in the Hill 90 area, an enemy stronghold two miles east of Panmunjom. The Marines set up a base of fire, beating off the enemy with their rifles, BARs, mortars, and bare fists. Reinforcements and artillery fires were called in. The first relief unit was intercepted by vicious mortar shelling which wounded the entire detail. A second relief squad, also taken under mortar fire, continued the action in an intense fire contest that lasted nearly two hours. In the meantime, the direct support artillery battalion, 3/11, reinforced by 1/11, showered 280 rounds of countermortar on Chinese long-range machine guns and mortars barking from the surrounding hills.

Not so lucky was a 2/5 reconnaissance patrol. At midnight, its 15 members encountered a group of 30 to 40 Chinese soldiers, set up in a V-shaped ambush in the Hill 90 area, an enemy stronghold two miles east of Panmunjom. The Marines established a base of fire, fighting off the enemy with their rifles, BARs, mortars, and even their bare fists. They called for reinforcements and artillery support. The first relief unit was hit by heavy mortar fire, injuring the entire team. A second relief squad, also caught in mortar fire, continued the battle in an intense exchange that lasted nearly two hours. Meanwhile, the direct support artillery battalion, 3/11, backed by 1/11, launched 280 rounds of countermortar fire at Chinese long-range machine guns and mortars firing from the surrounding hills.

373

373

During the engagement the Chinese made several attempts to capture prisoners. When the enemy finally began to withdraw, CCF casualties were 10 known dead, an estimated 9 more dead, and 3 wounded. Seven Marines were found to be missing after the Chinese broke contact. A 5th Marines platoon that extensively screened the battalion front during the hours of darkness on the 17th returned at 2210 with six bodies.

During the engagement, the Chinese made several attempts to capture prisoners. When the enemy finally started to pull back, CCF casualties included 10 confirmed deaths, an estimated 9 more dead, and 3 wounded. Seven Marines were reported missing after the Chinese disengaged. A 5th Marines platoon that thoroughly monitored the battalion's front during the night on the 17th returned at 10:10 PM with six bodies.

The third encounter took place not long after midnight in the 7th Marines territory. This brief skirmish was also to have an unpleasant aftermath and, inadvertently, fulfill the psywar broadcast of the previous day that had warned Marines “not to go on patrols or be killed.” As it was leaving the Ava Gate (250 yards northwest of the outpost proper) at 0045, a 30-man combat patrol from Company A was challenged on three sides by 40–50 CCF employing small arms, automatic weapons, grenades, and mortars. After a 15-minute fire exchange, during which the patrol lost communications with its MLR company, the enemy withdrew. Six CCF had been counted dead, and 12 more estimated killed or wounded.

The third encounter happened shortly after midnight in the 7th Marines' area. This brief clash also resulted in a bad aftermath and, unintentionally, confirmed the psychological warfare broadcast from the day before that had warned Marines “not to go on patrols or be killed.” As it was leaving the Ava Gate (250 yards northwest of the main outpost) at 12:45 AM, a 30-man combat patrol from Company A was confronted on three sides by 40–50 CCF using small arms, automatic weapons, grenades, and mortars. After a 15-minute exchange of fire, during which the patrol lost communication with its MLR company, the enemy retreated. Six CCF were counted as dead, with an estimated 12 more killed or wounded.

Upon returning to the outpost, a muster of the men engaged in the action showed four Marines were missing. A rescue squad recovered three bodies. When, several hours later, daylight hampered movements of the search party, 2/11 laid down a smoke screen to isolate the sector. Between 0050 and 0455, its gunners also directed 529 rounds of close support and countermortar fire on Chinese troops and active weapons in the area. The recovery unit continued to sweep the area for the last missing man until 0545 when it was decided that the search would have to be terminated with negative results. Marine casualties from the encounter were 3 killed, 1 missing, 19 wounded (evacuated), and 2 nonseriously wounded.

Upon returning to the outpost, a roll call revealed that four Marines were missing. A rescue team recovered three bodies. When daylight several hours later made it difficult for the search party to operate, 2/11 created a smoke screen to secure the area. Between 12:50 AM and 4:55 AM, its gunners also fired 529 rounds of close support and countermortar fire at Chinese troops and active weapons nearby. The recovery team continued searching for the last missing man until 5:45 AM when it was decided that the search would have to be called off due to lack of results. Marine casualties from the encounter were 3 killed, 1 missing, 19 wounded (evacuated), and 2 with nonserious injuries.

The following day patrol activity and enemy contacts quieted down. Action shifted to the 1st KMC/RCT sector. Here, during the late hours of the 18th, four Korean combat patrols brushed quickly and briefly with Chinese squad and platoon units in light skirmishes of but a few minutes duration. The Korean Marines killed 2 of the enemy and estimated they accounted for 16 more.499

The next day, patrol activities and enemy encounters calmed down. Focus shifted to the 1st KMC/RCT sector. During the late hours of the 18th, four Korean combat patrols had quick and brief encounters with Chinese squad and platoon units in light skirmishes lasting just a few minutes. The Korean Marines killed 2 of the enemy and estimated they were responsible for 16 more.499

499 ROKMC Comments.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ROKMC Feedback.

The only activity in the Marine right regimental sector occurred when a 7th Marines 36-man combat patrol, on prowl the night of374 17–18 July, advanced at 0112 as far as hand-grenade range of the Chinese trenchline at Ungok. Undetected by the enemy, a patrol member fired a white phosphorus rifle grenade squarely at the CCF machine gun that was harassing the friendly MLR. The Marines then engaged 15 Chinese defending the position in a brief 20-minute skirmish. Although two men were wounded,500 the Company C patrol members in a somewhat roguish gesture as they left also planted a Marine Corps recruiting sign at their FPOA (Farthest Point of Advance), facing the enemy.

The only action in the Marine right regimental area happened when a 36-member combat patrol from the 7th Marines moved out on the night of374 July 17-18 at 0112, getting as close as hand-grenade range to the Chinese trench line at Ungok. They went undetected by the enemy, and one of the patrol members shot a white phosphorus rifle grenade directly at the CCF machine gun that was bothering the friendly MLR. The Marines then engaged in a brief 20-minute skirmish with 15 Chinese troops defending the position. Although two men were wounded, the members of Company C made a somewhat cheeky move by planting a Marine Corps recruiting sign at their FPOA (Farthest Point of Advance) as they left, facing the enemy.

500 One, who died that morning, was squad leader Sergeant Stephen C. Walter, posthumously presented the Navy Cross. Also awarded the nation’s second highest combat medal for extraordinary heroism in a patrol action on 16–17 July was Private First Class Roy L. Stewart, of the 5th Marines.

500 One person who died that morning was squad leader Sergeant Stephen C. Walter, who was awarded the Navy Cross posthumously. Private First Class Roy L. Stewart of the 5th Marines was also given the nation’s second highest combat medal for extraordinary heroism during a patrol action on July 16–17.

Marine Air Operations501

501 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 10, No. 5, Chap. 9, No. 6, Chap. 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 924, dtd 10–11 Jul 53; 1st MAW, MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-121, -212, -251, -323, VMF(N)-153, VMF-311 ComdDs, Jul 53; Field, NavOps, Korea; Futrell, USAF, Korea.

501 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 10, No. 5, Chap. 9, No. 6, Chap. 10; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 924, dated 10–11 Jul 53; 1st MAW, MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-121, -212, -251, -323, VMF(N)-153, VMF-311 ComdDs, Jul 53; Field, NavOps, Korea; Futrell, USAF, Korea.

If the monsoon rains of July hung like a shroud over the infantryman, they were an even more serious impediment to air operations of MAGs-12 and -33. There were 24 days of restricted flying when the weather at home base or target area was recorded as marginal to non-operational. On 12 full days air operations were cancelled entirely. Precipitation for July rose to 7.38 inches, with 22 days of rain recorded throughout the month. The generally unfavorable weather conditions not only limited the normal support missions flown by 1st MAW but delayed the arrival of VMA-251502 en route from Japan to relieve VMA-323.

If the July monsoon rains hung over the infantryman like a heavy blanket, they were an even bigger obstacle for the air operations of MAGs-12 and -33. There were 24 days when flying was restricted because the weather at the home base or target area was considered marginal to non-operational. Air operations were completely cancelled on 12 days. July saw a total of 7.38 inches of rainfall, with 22 days of rain recorded throughout the month. The generally poor weather conditions not only limited the usual support missions flown by 1st MAW but also delayed the arrival of VMA-251502 coming from Japan to relieve VMA-323.

375

375

502 Marine Attack Squadron 251 (Lieutenant Colonel Harold A. Harwood) administratively joined MAG-12 on 6 July for 323, which had rotated back to MCAS, El Toro three days earlier. Movement of -251 aircraft to Korea could not take place, however, until 12 July. When VMA-323 (Major Woten) departed, the famous “Death Rattlers” had the distinction of being the Marine tactical (VMA/VMF) air squadron in longest service during the Korean War. The unit’s final combat mission on 2 July brought its total Korean operations to 20,827 sorties and 48,677.2 hours. On 6 August 1950, roaring up from the flight deck of the USS Badoeng Strait, the VMA-323 Corsairs (then VMF-323) had launched their opening blow against North Korean installations, led by Major Arnold A. Lund, CO. The initial Marine air offensive action of the Korean War had been flown three days earlier by VMF-214. This unit was reassigned to CONUS in November 1951, giving the Death Rattlers the longest continuous service flight record. Jul 53 ComdD, 1st MAW, p. 2; USMC Ops Korea-Pusan, v. I, pp. 89–90, 98; VMF-214 Squadron History, HRB.

502 Marine Attack Squadron 251 (Lieutenant Colonel Harold A. Harwood) officially joined MAG-12 on July 6 for VMA-323, which had returned to MCAS, El Toro three days earlier. However, the transfer of -251 aircraft to Korea couldn't happen until July 12. When VMA-323 (Major Woten) left, the renowned “Death Rattlers” held the record for being the Marine tactical (VMA/VMF) air squadron with the longest active service during the Korean War. The unit's last combat mission on July 2 brought its total operations in Korea to 20,827 sorties and 48,677.2 hours. On August 6, 1950, launching from the flight deck of the USS Badoeng Strait, the VMA-323 Corsairs (then VMF-323) struck first against North Korean targets, led by Major Arnold A. Lund, CO. The first Marine air offensive in the Korean War had taken place three days earlier by VMF-214. This unit was reassigned to CONUS in November 1951, giving the Death Rattlers the longest continuous service flight record. Jul 53 ComdD, 1st MAW, p. 2; USMC Ops Korea-Pusan, v. I, pp. 89–90, 98; VMF-214 Squadron History, HRB.

During July the wing’s nearly 300 aircraft (250 operational, 43 assigned to pool status in Korea) flew 2,688 combat sorties503 and 5,183.1 combat hours. The bulk of the sorties, 1,497, were CAS operations flown for 19 different UNC divisions. Nearly 900 supported the 12 ROK divisions involved in the heavy fighting on the central UNC sector. Approximately 250 of the CAS sorties were for the 1st Marine Division, with more than 200 being day or night MPQ drops and the rest, daytime CAS runs. No night close support missions were conducted.

During July, the wing’s nearly 300 aircraft (250 operational, 43 in reserve in Korea) completed 2,688 combat sorties503 and logged 5,183.1 combat hours. Most of the sorties, 1,497, were close air support (CAS) operations conducted for 19 different UNC divisions. Almost 900 supported the 12 ROK divisions engaged in heavy fighting in the central UNC sector. About 250 of the CAS sorties were for the 1st Marine Division, with over 200 being day or night MPQ drops and the rest being daytime CAS runs. No night close support missions were carried out.

503 Individual reports by the two groups result in a slightly higher figure. MAG-12 recorded 2,001 combat sorties (including more than 400 flown by carrier-based VMA-332, not in the 1st MAW sortie rate). MAG-33 listed 945 sorties, or a combined group total of 2,946 for the month. ComdDs Jul 53 MAG-12, p. C-1 and MAG-33, p. I.

503 Individual reports from the two groups show a slightly higher number. MAG-12 recorded 2,001 combat sorties (including over 400 flown by carrier-based VMA-332, which is not part of the 1st MAW sortie rate). MAG-33 reported 945 sorties, leading to a combined total of 2,946 for the month. ComdDs Jul 53 MAG-12, p. C-1 and MAG-33, p. I.

When nearly a week of inclement weather finally lifted, Colonel Arthur R. Stacy’s504 MAG-33 pilots based at Pohang welcomed a brisk change in the tempo of operations. In seven MPQ strikes on 11 July, they hurled 13 tons of ordnance on Chinese fortifications north of the 7th Marines sector. It was the wing’s first active day in support missions for the 1st Marine Division, newly back on the line.

When nearly a week of bad weather finally cleared up, Colonel Arthur R. Stacy’s MAG-33 pilots based at Pohang welcomed a lively change in their operations. In seven MPQ strikes on July 11, they dropped 13 tons of explosives on Chinese fortifications north of the 7th Marines sector. It was the wing's first active day supporting the 1st Marine Division, which was newly back on the front line.

504 Colonel Stacy was group commander until 24 July, when he was detached for assignment to 1st MAW as Assistant Chief of Staff, G-2. He was succeeded at MAG-33 by Colonel John L. Smith.

504 Colonel Stacy was the group commander until July 24, when he was assigned to the 1st MAW as Assistant Chief of Staff, G-2. He was succeeded at MAG-33 by Colonel John L. Smith.

During the interim period of 9–18 July, between the two Berlin outpost attacks, F9F jet fighters from MAG-13 again carried out approximately 35 MPQ missions for the division. (MAG-12 attack planes, during this time, were assigned to the flaming central Allied line.) Nearly 20 of these were on a single day, 14 July, when VMFs-311 and -115 Panther jets roared over enemy country from morning to sundown unleashing 25 tons north of the Marine troubled right regimental sector and 9 more tons on hostile emplacements near the western end of the division line.

During the period from July 9 to July 18, between the two Berlin outpost attacks, F9F jet fighters from MAG-13 conducted about 35 MPQ missions for the division. (MAG-12 attack planes were assigned to the intense central Allied line during this time.) Nearly 20 of these missions occurred on a single day, July 14, when VMFs-311 and -115 Panther jets flew over enemy territory from morning until sunset, dropping 25 tons of bombs north of the Marine's troubled right regimental sector and 9 more tons on enemy positions near the western end of the division line.

In middle and late July, however, the majority of missions by Marine fliers bolstered UNC operations in the central part of the Allied front where a major enemy counterthrust erupted. The peak operational day for MAG-33 pilots during this period occurred 17 July when 40 interdiction and MPQ missions (136 combat sorties) were executed for Army and ROK divisions. The corresponding record day for Colonel Carney’s MAG-12 aviators was 19 July when 162 combat sorties were flown on heavy destruction missions to support UNC action.

In mid to late July, the majority of missions flown by Marine pilots supported UNC operations in the central area of the Allied front, where a major enemy counterattack unfolded. The busiest operational day for MAG-33 pilots during this time was July 17, when they executed 40 interdiction and MPQ missions (136 combat sorties) for Army and ROK divisions. The highest record day for Colonel Carney’s MAG-12 pilots was July 19, when they completed 162 combat sorties on heavy destruction missions to assist UNC efforts.

376

376

Marine exchange pilot Major John F. Bolt, of VMF-115, chalked up a record of a different kind on 11 July. Attached to the Fifth Air Force 51st Fighter-Interceptor Group, he shot down his fifth and sixth MIG-15 (the previous four having been bagged since 16 May) to become the first Marine jet ace in history. Major Bolt was leading a four-plane F-86 flight in the attack on four MIGs east of Sinuiju and required only 1,200 rounds of ammunition and five minutes to destroy the two enemy jet fighters. Bolt thereby became the 37th jet ace of the Korean War.

Marine exchange pilot Major John F. Bolt, of VMF-115, recorded a different kind of achievement on July 11. Assigned to the Fifth Air Force 51st Fighter-Interceptor Group, he shot down his fifth and sixth MIG-15s (the previous four had been taken down since May 16) to become the first Marine jet ace in history. Major Bolt was leading a four-plane F-86 mission in the attack on four MIGs east of Sinuiju and only needed 1,200 rounds of ammunition and five minutes to destroy the two enemy jet fighters. This made Bolt the 37th jet ace of the Korean War.

Earlier in the month, Navy Lieutenant Guy P. Bordelon won a Silver Star medal and gold star in lieu of a second Silver Star. Attending the K-6 ceremonies were General Megee and Admiral Clark, 1st Wing and Seventh Fleet commanders. Bordelon, flying with the Marine Corsair night fighters, had downed four of the harassing “Bedcheck Charlie” planes. A member of VC-3 attached to MAG-12, Lieutenant Bordelon on 17 July made his fifth night kill and was subsequently awarded the Navy Cross.

Earlier this month, Navy Lieutenant Guy P. Bordelon earned a Silver Star medal and a gold star for a second Silver Star. The K-6 ceremonies were attended by General Megee and Admiral Clark, the commanders of the 1st Wing and Seventh Fleet. Bordelon, flying alongside the Marine Corsair night fighters, had shot down four of the troublesome "Bedcheck Charlie" planes. As a member of VC-3 attached to MAG-12, Lieutenant Bordelon achieved his fifth nighttime kill on July 17 and was later awarded the Navy Cross.

On the minus side, the 1st Marine Air Wing this last month of the war suffered a higher rate of personnel losses on combat flights than in any month since June 1952.505 Captain Lote Thistlethwaite and Staff Sergeant W. H. Westbrook, of VMF(N)-513, were killed in an air patrol flight on 4 July. (Two nights earlier, the same squadron had lost a Navy pilot and crewman on temporary duty with the night-fighters when their F3D-2 similarly failed to return to Pyongtaek.) Another MAG-12 casualty was Captain Carl F. Barlow, of VMA-212, killed 13 July on a prebriefed CAS mission when he crashed while flying instruments.

On the downside, the 1st Marine Air Wing last month experienced a higher rate of personnel losses during combat flights than in any month since June 1952. 505 Captain Lote Thistlethwaite and Staff Sergeant W. H. Westbrook, from VMF(N)-513, were killed in an air patrol flight on July 4. (Two nights earlier, the same squadron had lost a Navy pilot and crewman on temporary duty with the night-fighters when their F3D-2 also failed to return to Pyongtaek.) Another casualty from MAG-12 was Captain Carl F. Barlow, from VMA-212, who was killed on July 13 during a prebriefed CAS mission when he crashed while flying on instruments.

505 Wing casualties for July 1953 were listed as three killed, seven missing, and two wounded in action. Names of enlisted crew members on flights are not always given in air diaries, which accounts for the discrepancies.

505 Wing casualties for July 1953 were reported as three killed, seven missing, and two wounded in action. The names of enlisted crew members on flights are not always included in air diaries, which explains the discrepancies.

On 17 July, Captain Robert I. Nordell, VMF-311, flying his third mission that day, and wingman First Lieutenant Frank L. Keck, Jr. were hit by intense automatic weapons fire while on an interdiction flight. Their planes reportedly went down, at 2000, over the Sea of Japan. After a four-day air and surface search conducted by JOC, they were declared missing and subsequently reclassified killed in action. Another MAG-33 pilot listed KIA was Major Thomas M. Sellers, VMF-115, on exchange duty with the Air Force, shot down 20 July in a dogfight after he had scored two MIG-15s.377 Two days earlier a VMO-6 pilot, First Lieutenant Charles Marino, and his artillery spotter, First Lieutenant William A. Frease, flying a flak suppression mission, were struck by enemy fire and crashed with their ship in the 5th Marines center regimental sector.

On July 17, Captain Robert I. Nordell, VMF-311, flying his third mission of the day, and his wingman, First Lieutenant Frank L. Keck, Jr., were hit by heavy automatic gunfire during an interdiction flight. Their planes reportedly went down at 2000 over the Sea of Japan. After a four-day air and surface search conducted by JOC, they were declared missing and later reclassified as killed in action. Another MAG-33 pilot listed as KIA was Major Thomas M. Sellers, VMF-115, who was on exchange duty with the Air Force and was shot down on July 20 during a dogfight after he had scored two MIG-15s.377 Two days earlier, a VMO-6 pilot, First Lieutenant Charles Marino, and his artillery spotter, First Lieutenant William A. Frease, were flying a flak suppression mission when they were hit by enemy fire and crashed in the 5th Marines center regimental sector.

Fall of the Berlins506

506 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 19–21 Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 933–934, dtd 19–21 Jul 53; 1stMar ComdD, Jul 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 3/1, 3/5, 1/7, 2/7, 3/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1stTkBn ComdDs, Jul 53; 1stMar Preliminary Special Action Report, period 8–27 Jul 53 in ComdD, Jul 53, hereafter 1stMar SAR “Berlins”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-121, -212 ComdDs, Jul 53.

506 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 19–21 Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 933–934, dtd 19–21 Jul 53; 1stMar ComdD, Jul 53; 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 3/1, 3/5, 1/7, 2/7, 3/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1stTkBn ComdDs, Jul 53; 1stMar Preliminary Special Action Report, period 8–27 Jul 53 in ComdD, Jul 53, hereafter 1stMar SAR “Berlins”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-121, -212 ComdDs, Jul 53.

Despite their preoccupation with other corps sectors on the central front of the Eighth Army line, the Chinese had not forgotten about the Berlin complex held by the Marines. On the night of 19–20 July,507 the enemy lunged against the two Marine outposts in reinforced battalion strength to renew his attack launched 12 days earlier. Beginning at 2200, heavy Chinese mortar and artillery fire struck the two COPs and supporting MLR positions of the 3d Battalion, which had advanced to the front on 13 July in relief of 2/7.508 In the center regimental sector, 5th Marines outposts Ingrid and Dagmar, and the line companies were also engaged by small arms, mortar, and artillery fires. An attempted probe at Dagmar was repulsed, aided by 3/11.

Despite being focused on other corps areas along the central front of the Eighth Army line, the Chinese had not forgotten about the Berlin complex held by the Marines. On the night of July 19-20, 507, the enemy struck the two Marine outposts with reinforced battalion strength to continue the attack they had started 12 days earlier. Beginning at 10 PM, heavy Chinese mortar and artillery fire hit the two COPs and supporting MLR positions of the 3rd Battalion, which had moved to the front on July 13 to relieve 2/7.508 In the center regimental sector, 5th Marines outposts Ingrid and Dagmar, along with the line companies, were also targeted by small arms, mortar, and artillery fire. An attempted probe at Dagmar was pushed back, assisted by 3/11.

507 The 19th of July, ironically, was the date that truce negotiators working at Panmunjom had reached final agreement on all remaining disputed points. Staff officers were scheduled to begin drawing up details of the armistice agreement and boundaries of the demilitarized zone. USMA, Korea, p. 51.

507 The 19th of July, ironically, was the day that truce negotiators at Panmunjom had finalized all the remaining disputed points. Staff officers were set to start drafting the details of the armistice agreement and the boundaries of the demilitarized zone. USMA, Korea, p. 51.

508 Company E and a detachment of the 81mm mortar platoon from the 2d Battalion remained on line. They were attached to the 3d Battalion when the sector command changed.

508 Company E and a team from the 81mm mortar platoon of the 2nd Battalion stayed in position. They were assigned to the 3rd Battalion when the sector command changed.

Concentrating their main assault efforts on the Berlins, however, the Chinese forces swarmed up the slopes of the outposts at 2230, with more troops moving in from enemy positions on Jersey, Detroit, and Hill 139, some 700 yards north of Berlin. The Chinese struck first at East Berlin, where 37 Marines were on duty, and then at Berlin, held by 44 men. Both positions were manned by First Lieutenant Kenneth E. Turner’s Company I personnel and employed the maximum-size defenses which could be effectively utilized on these terrain features.

Focusing their main attack on the Berlins, the Chinese forces rushed up the slopes of the outposts at 10:30 PM, with more troops coming in from enemy positions on Jersey, Detroit, and Hill 139, about 700 yards north of Berlin. The Chinese launched their first strike at East Berlin, where 37 Marines were stationed, and then at Berlin, which was held by 44 men. Both positions were staffed by First Lieutenant Kenneth E. Turner’s Company I personnel and used the largest possible defenses that could be effectively applied on these terrain features.

378

378

By 2300 hostile forces were halfway up Berlin. Continuous volumes of small arms and machine gun fire poured from the defending MLR companies. Defensive boxes were fired by 60mm, 81mm, and 4.2-inch mortars. Eight Company C tanks augmented the close-in fires, with their lethal direct-fire 90mm guns tearing into Chinese troops and weapons. Within two hours after the initial thrust, the 11th Marines had fired 20 counterbattery and 31 countermortar missions. Artillerymen from 2/11 and 1/11 had expended 1,750 rounds. In addition, 4/11 had unleashed 124 of its 155mm medium projectiles. More countermortar fire came from the TAFC Field Artillery Battalion. Despite the heavy fire support, by midnight the situation was in doubt and at 0146 the twin outposts were officially declared under enemy control. Nearly 3,000 rounds of incoming were estimated to have fallen on division positions by that time, most of it in the 7th Marines sector.

By 2300, enemy forces were halfway through Berlin. There was a constant barrage of small arms and machine gun fire from the defending MLR companies. Defensive positions were targeted by 60mm, 81mm, and 4.2-inch mortars. Eight tanks from Company C added to the close-in fire support, with their powerful 90mm guns blasting into Chinese troops and weaponry. Within two hours of the initial attack, the 11th Marines had conducted 20 counterbattery and 31 countermortar missions. Artillery units from 2/11 and 1/11 fired off 1,750 rounds. Additionally, 4/11 had launched 124 of its 155mm medium projectiles. More countermortar fire came from the TAFC Field Artillery Battalion. Despite the heavy fire support, by midnight the situation was uncertain, and at 0146 the two outposts were officially declared under enemy control. By that time, nearly 3,000 incoming rounds were estimated to have struck division positions, most of which fell in the 7th Marines sector.

During the early morning hours of the 20th, Marine tank guns and continuous shelling by six509 artillery battalions wreaked havoc on Chinese hardware, reinforcing personnel, supply points, and fortifications. Reserve units from 2/7 were placed on 30-minute standby, with Companies D, E, and F already under 3/7 operational control. Battalion Operation Order 20-53, issued at 0400 by Lieutenant Colonel Jones, called for Easy and Dog to launch a two-company counterattack at 0730 to restore Berlin and East Berlin respectively. Incoming, meanwhile, continued heavy on the MLR; at 0520, Company I, located to the rear of the contested outposts, reported receiving one round per second.

During the early morning hours of the 20th, Marine tank guns and continuous shelling from six artillery battalions caused major damage to Chinese equipment, supply points, and defensive positions. Reserve units from 2/7 were put on a 30-minute standby, with Companies D, E, and F already under the operational control of 3/7. Battalion Operation Order 20-53, issued at 0400 by Lieutenant Colonel Jones, called for Easy and Dog to launch a two-company counterattack at 0730 to reclaim Berlin and East Berlin, respectively. Meanwhile, heavy incoming fire persisted on the MLR; at 0520, Company I, positioned behind the contested outposts, reported receiving one round per second.

509 Three Marine, one TAFC, and two Army battalions.

509 Three Marine battalions, one TAFC, and two Army battalions.

The Marine assault was cancelled by I Corps a half hour before it was scheduled to take place. A decision subsequently rendered from I Corps directed that the positions not be retaken.379510

The Marine assault was called off by I Corps half an hour before it was supposed to happen. A decision made by I Corps afterward stated that the positions should not be retaken.379510

510 At a routine conference that same morning attended by CG Eighth Army (General Taylor), CG I Corps (General Clarke) and CG 1st Marine Division, the earlier decision about not regaining the outposts was affirmed. General Taylor maintained the positions “could never be held should the Chinese decide to exert sufficient pressure against them” and recommended instead that the sector be organized on a wide front defense concept. Actually, following the initial Berlins attack of 7–8 July, a discussion about possible readjustment of the Marine sector defense had been initiated by General Pate. A staff study recommending that just such a “strongpoint” concept (rather than the customary linear defense) be adopted had been completed by Marine Division officials on 15 July. I Corps staff members had concurred with the study and it was awaiting consideration by CG, I Corps when the Berlins were attacked for the second time on 19 July. CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt, pp. 3–4.

510 At a routine conference that same morning attended by CG Eighth Army (General Taylor), CG I Corps (General Clarke), and CG 1st Marine Division, the earlier decision about not regaining the outposts was confirmed. General Taylor stated that the positions “could never be held if the Chinese decided to put enough pressure on them” and suggested that instead, the sector be organized using a broad front defense strategy. In fact, after the initial Berlins attack on July 7–8, General Pate had started discussions about possibly adjusting the defense of the Marine sector. A staff study recommending adopting a “strongpoint” concept (instead of the usual linear defense) was completed by Marine Division officials on July 15. The I Corps staff had agreed with the study, which was pending consideration by CG, I Corps when the Berlins were attacked again on July 19. CG, 1stMarDiv, Berlin Rpt, pp. 3–4.

Since the outposts were not to be recaptured,511 efforts that day were devoted to making the two hills as untenable as possible for their new occupants. Heavy destruction missions by air, armor, and artillery blasted CCF defenses throughout the day. Air observers were on station from 0830 until after dark, with nine CAS missions conducted by MAG-12 pilots from VMA-121 and -212. The day’s series of air strikes on the Berlin-East Berlin positions (and Vegas weapons emplacements) began at 1145 when a division of ADs from Lieutenant Colonel Harold B. Penne’s512 -121 hurled nine and a half tons of ordnance on enemy bunkers and trenches at East Berlin.

Since the outposts were not going to be recaptured, 511 efforts that day were focused on making the two hills as uncomfortable as possible for their new occupants. Intense air, armor, and artillery missions targeted CCF defenses throughout the day. Air observers were positioned from 8:30 AM until after dark, with nine Close Air Support missions conducted by MAG-12 pilots from VMA-121 and -212. The day’s series of air strikes on the Berlin-East Berlin positions (and Vegas weapons sites) began at 11:45 AM when a division of ADs from Lieutenant Colonel Harold B. Penne’s 512 -121 dropped nine and a half tons of ordnance on enemy bunkers and trenches at East Berlin.

511 Commenting on this point, the I Corps commander noted: “The outposts in front of the MLR had gradually lost their value in my opinion because, between the MLR and the outposts, minefields, tactical wire, etc. had made their reinforcement and counterattacks very costly.” Resupply was thus restricted to narrow paths on which the CCF had zeroed in and “holding poor real estate for sentimental reasons is a poor excuse for undue casualties.” Gen Bruce C. Clarke, USA, ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 20 May 70.

511 Commenting on this point, the I Corps commander noted: “The outposts in front of the MLR had gradually lost their value in my opinion because, between the MLR and the outposts, minefields, tactical wire, etc. had made their reinforcement and counterattacks very costly.” Resupply was thus restricted to narrow paths on which the CCF had zeroed in and “holding poor real estate for sentimental reasons is a poor excuse for undue casualties.” Gen Bruce C. Clarke, USA, ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 20 May 70.

512 The new squadron commander had taken over 16 July from Major Braun.

512 The new squadron commander took over on July 16 from Major Braun.

The artillery was having an active day, too. Six firing battalions had sent more than 3,600 rounds crashing against the enemy by nightfall. The 1st 4.5-inch rocketeers also contributed four ripples to the melee. Heavy fire missions were requested and delivered by the Army 159th Field Artillery Battalion (240mm howitzers) and 17th Field Artillery Battalion (8-inch howitzers) using 11th Marines airborne spotters. The precision fire on enemy positions, which the air spotters reported to be “the most effective missions they had conducted in Korea”513 continued for several hours. By 1945 the big guns had demolished the bunkers and all but 15 yards of trenchline at East Berlin. For their part the Chinese had fired an estimated 4,900 rounds of mortar and artillery against the 3d Battalion right hand sector in the 24-hour period ending at 1800 on the 20th.

The artillery was having a busy day as well. Six firing battalions had launched over 3,600 rounds against the enemy by nightfall. The 1st 4.5-inch rocketeers also added four rounds to the chaos. Heavy fire missions were requested and executed by the Army's 159th Field Artillery Battalion (240mm howitzers) and 17th Field Artillery Battalion (8-inch howitzers) with the help of 11th Marines airborne spotters. The precise fire on enemy positions, which the air spotters reported as "the most effective missions they had conducted in Korea" 513 continued for several hours. By 1945, the big guns had destroyed the bunkers and nearly all of the trench line at East Berlin, leaving just 15 yards intact. Meanwhile, the Chinese fired an estimated 4,900 rounds of mortar and artillery at the 3d Battalion's right-hand sector in the 24-hour period ending at 1800 on the 20th.

513 BGen Manly L. Curry ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 28 May 70, hereafter Curry ltr.

513 BGen Manly L. Curry letter to Director, Marine Corps History, Headquarters Marine Corps, dated May 28, 1970, hereafter Curry letter.

Armored vehicles, meanwhile, during 19–20 July had expended 200 rounds of HE and WP shells and 6,170 machine gun rounds.514 Tank searchlights had also effectively illuminated enemy positions on the East Berlin hill. The tankers’ performance record included: 20 Chinese bunkers and 2 57mm recoilless rifles destroyed; an estimated 30 enemy soldiers killed; a dozen more firing apertures, caves, and trenchworks substantially damaged.

Armored vehicles, on July 19–20, fired 200 rounds of HE and WP shells and 6,170 machine gun rounds.514 Tank searchlights also effectively lit up enemy positions on the East Berlin hill. The tankers' performance record included: 20 Chinese bunkers and 2 57mm recoilless rifles destroyed; an estimated 30 enemy soldiers killed; and around a dozen more firing positions, caves, and trenchworks significantly damaged.

380

380

514 Tank and artillery ammunition allocations had been cut 50 percent the afternoon of the 19th, with a subsequent reduction of normal destruction missions and elimination of H&I fires. ComdDs Jul 53 1st TkBn, p. 3 and App. 2, p. 4 and 1/11, p. 5.

514 Tank and artillery ammo allocations were reduced by 50 percent on the afternoon of the 19th, leading to fewer normal destruction missions and the cancellation of H&I fires. ComdDs Jul 53 1st TkBn, p. 3 and App. 2, p. 4 and 1/11, p. 5.

MAP 30 K. White

MAP 30 K. White

7TH MARINES MLR SECTOR

7th Marines MLR Sector

(Division Right)

(Division Right)

LINEAR DEFENSE

Linear defense

19–20 July 1953

July 19–20, 1953

381

381

Between noon and the last flight of the day, when a trio of AUs from Lieutenant Colonel Wallace’s VMA-212 attacked a northern enemy mortar and automatic weapons site, 35 aircraft had repeatedly streaked over the Berlin territory and adjacent Chinese strongpoints. Strikes by VMA-121 at 1145, 1320, 1525, 1625, 1700, 1750; and VMA-212 at 1413, 1849, and 1930 had released a combined total of 69½ tons of bombs and 6,500 rounds of 20mm ammunition on hostile locations.

Between noon and the last flight of the day, when a group of AUs from Lieutenant Colonel Wallace’s VMA-212 targeted a northern enemy mortar and automatic weapons site, 35 aircraft repeatedly flew over the Berlin area and nearby Chinese strongholds. Strikes by VMA-121 at 11:45 AM, 1:20 PM, 3:25 PM, 4:25 PM, 5:00 PM, and 5:50 PM; and VMA-212 at 2:13 PM, 6:49 PM, and 7:30 PM dropped a total of 69½ tons of bombs and 6,500 rounds of 20mm ammunition on enemy positions.

The Chinese casualty toll during this renewed flareup in the fighting on 19–20 July was conservatively placed by 3/7 at 75 killed and 300 wounded. It was further believed that “the enemy battalion was so weakened and disorganized by the attacks that it was necessary for the CCF to commit another battalion to hold the area captured.”515 Regimental reports indicated that 6 Marines had been killed, 56 listed missing,516 86 wounded and evacuated, and 32 not seriously wounded.

The Chinese casualty count during the renewed fighting on July 19–20 was estimated by 3/7 at 75 killed and 300 wounded. It was also believed that “the enemy battalion was so weakened and disorganized by the attacks that the CCF had to deploy another battalion to maintain control of the captured area.”515 Regimental reports indicated that 6 Marines were killed, 56 were listed as missing, 516 86 were wounded and evacuated, and 32 were not seriously wounded.

515 3/7 ComdD, 20 Jul 53, p. 5. With respect to the number of enemy casualties that night, battalion, regimental, artillery support, and division command diaries given differing accounts. Other figures cited are: 9 CCF killed, between 234–284 estimated killed, and 630 estimated wounded.

515 3/7 ComdD, 20 Jul 53, p. 5. Regarding the number of enemy casualties that night, the diaries from the battalion, regiment, artillery support, and division command show varying accounts. Other cited figures include: 9 CCF killed, an estimated 234–284 killed, and about 630 estimated wounded.

516 Subsequently, it was learned that of 56 Marines unaccounted for at the time, 12 were actually captured. They were returned after hostilities ended. Several men from 1st Marines units under operational control of the 7th were also taken in this battle. MacDonald, POW, pp. 212, 268–269.

516 Later on, it became known that out of 56 Marines who were unaccounted for at that time, 12 had actually been captured. They were released after the fighting stopped. Several men from the 1st Marines units that were under the operational control of the 7th were also captured during this battle. MacDonald, POW, pp. 212, 268–269.

As a result of the critical tactical situation and number of casualties suffered during the Berlins operation, the 7th Marines regimental commander requested that units of the division reserve be placed under his control to help check any further aggressive moves of the enemy. For it now appeared that the Chinese might continue their thrust and attempt to seize Hill 119 (directly south of Berlin and East Berlin) in order to be in position to deny part of the Imjin River to UNC forces after signing of the armistice.

As a result of the critical tactical situation and the number of casualties suffered during the Berlin operation, the commander of the 7th Marines regimental requested that units from the division reserve be placed under his control to help stop any further aggressive moves from the enemy. It now seemed that the Chinese might keep pushing and try to take Hill 119 (directly south of Berlin and East Berlin) to position themselves to deny part of the Imjin River to UNC forces after the armistice was signed.

While the lost outposts were being neutralized on the morning of the 20th, the CO of the incoming 1st Marines, Colonel Nelson, also ordered an immediate reorganization and strengthening of the MLR. This employed the defense in depth concept, used by the British Commonwealth Division in the sector adjacent to the Marines on the east. The wide front defense concept was fully developed with one company occupying a portion of the MLR to the rear of the Berlin complex, known as Hill 119 or more informally, Boulder City. Three383 companies organized the high ground to the right rear of the MLR east to Hill 111, the limiting point on the boundary between the Marine and Commonwealth divisions. Three more companies fortified the Hill 126 area to the rear and left of Berlin to its juncture with the western battalion sector held by Lieutenant Colonel Harry A. Hadd’s 1/7. (See Maps 30 and 31.)

While the lost outposts were being taken care of on the morning of the 20th, the commanding officer of the incoming 1st Marines, Colonel Nelson, also ordered an immediate reorganization and strengthening of the MLR. This employed the defense in depth strategy used by the British Commonwealth Division in the sector next to the Marines on the east. The wide front defense strategy was fully developed with one company occupying a part of the MLR behind the Berlin complex, known as Hill 119 or more casually, Boulder City. Three companies set up on the high ground to the right rear of the MLR extending to Hill 111, which marked the boundary between the Marine and Commonwealth divisions. Three more companies fortified the Hill 126 area behind and to the left of Berlin, joining with the western battalion sector held by Lieutenant Colonel Harry A. Hadd’s 1/7. (See Maps 30 and 31.)

MAP 31 K. WHITE

MAP 31 K. WHITE

7TH MARINES MLR SECTOR

7th Marines MLR Sector

Defense-in-depth

Defense in depth

20–21 July 1953

July 20–21, 1953

The afternoon of the 20th, 2/1 (Lieutenant Colonel Frank A. Long) was transferred to 7th Marines control and positioned in the center of the regimental MLR, as the first step in the scheduled relief of the 7th, due off the line on 26 July. For the next three days the regiment continued to develop the sector defense to the rear of the MLR. Elements of the regimental reserve, 2/7, were employed to reinforce the 3/7 sector. Initially, on 20–21 July, F/2/7, under operational command of 3/7, was assigned the mission of reinforcing Hill 119. Later a 2/1 platoon was also ordered to strengthen the position.

On the afternoon of the 20th, 2/1 (Lieutenant Colonel Frank A. Long) was transferred to the control of the 7th Marines and placed in the center of the regimental Main Line of Resistance (MLR), as the first step in the planned relief of the 7th, which was scheduled to leave the front lines on July 26. For the next three days, the regiment focused on improving the defense sector behind the MLR. Parts of the regimental reserve, 2/7, were used to support the 3/7 sector. Initially, on July 20-21, F/2/7, under the operational command of 3/7, was tasked with reinforcing Hill 119. Later, a 2/1 platoon was also ordered to reinforce the position.

MAP 32 K. WHITE

MAP 32 K. WHITE

7TH MARINES MLR SECTOR

7th Marines MLR Sector

Defense-in-depth

Layered security

22–23 July 1953

July 22–23, 1953

Incoming 1st Marines platoons and companies from the 2d and 3d (Lieutenant Colonel Roy D. Miller) Battalions augmented the forces at the two critical Hill 119 and 111 locations. As it turned out, 1st Marines personnel returning to the front from division reserve were to see the last of the war’s heavy fighting in the course of their relief of the 7th Marines. Ultimately, the regimental forward defense, instead of being divided into two battalion sectors as before, now consisted of three—a left, center, and right sector. By 23 July the depth reorganization had been completed and these sectors were manned by 1/7, 2/1, and 3/7. (See Map 32.)

Incoming 1st Marines platoons and companies from the 2nd and 3rd (Lieutenant Colonel Roy D. Miller) Battalions strengthened the forces at the two critical locations, Hill 119 and Hill 111. As it turned out, personnel from the 1st Marines who were returning to the front from division reserve were about to experience the last of the war’s heavy fighting while relieving the 7th Marines. Ultimately, the regimental forward defense, instead of being split into two battalion sectors as before, was now organized into three—a left, center, and right sector. By July 23, the reorganization had been completed, and these sectors were occupied by 1/7, 2/1, and 3/7. (See Map 32.)

Renewal of Heavy Fighting, 24–26 July517

517 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, dtd 21–28 Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 935–941, dtd 21–27 Jul 53 and 942, dtd 7 Aug 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11th Mar, 3/1, 3/5, 2/7, 3/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Jul 53; 1stMar SAR “Berlins”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-121, -212, -251, VMFs-115, -311 ComdDs, Jul 53; Hicks, Outpost Warfare; Hermes, Truce Tent; Miller, Carroll, and Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953; Martin Russ, The Last Parallel: A Marine’s War Journal (New York: Rinehart and Company, 1957); USMA, Korea.

517 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, dated 21–28 Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIRs 935–941, dated 21–27 Jul 53 and 942, dated 7 Aug 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11th Mar, 3/1, 3/5, 2/7, 3/7, 1/11, 2/11, 3/11, 4/11, 1st TkBn ComdDs, Jul 53; 1stMar SAR “Berlins”; MAGs-12, -33, VMAs-121, -212, -251, VMFs-115, -311 ComdDs, Jul 53; Hicks, Outpost Warfare; Hermes, Truce Tent; Miller, Carroll, and Tackley, Korea, 1951–1953; Martin Russ, The Last Parallel: A Marine’s War Journal (New York: Rinehart and Company, 1957); USMA, Korea.

Sightings of enemy troops for the next few days were light. A large scale attack expected on the 21st by the 5th Marines at Hedy and Dagmar failed to materialize. Instead, a token force of a dozen Chinese dressed in burlap bags made a limited appearance at Hedy before385 departing, minus three of its party, due to Marine sharp-shooting skills. In the skies, MAG-33 fliers from VMF-115 and -311 had been transferred by Fifth Air Force from exclusive missions for the central and eastern UNC front (the IX, ROK II, and X Corps sectors) to join VMA-121 in MPQ flights supporting the 1st Marine Division. During the 21–23 July period, despite layers of thick stratus clouds and rain that turned off and on periodically like a water spigot, more than 15 radar missions were executed by the three squadrons.518 They unleashed a gross 33-ton bomb load on CCF mortar and 76mm gun positions, supply areas, CPs, bunkers, and trenches.

Sightings of enemy troops over the next few days were minimal. A large-scale attack that was expected on the 21st by the 5th Marines at Hedy and Dagmar didn’t happen. Instead, a small group of about twelve Chinese soldiers disguised in burlap sacks made a brief appearance at Hedy before385 leaving, with three members missing due to Marine sharpshooting. In the air, MAG-33 pilots from VMF-115 and -311 had been reassigned by the Fifth Air Force from exclusive missions for the central and eastern UNC front (the IX, ROK II, and X Corps sectors) to join VMA-121 in MPQ flights supporting the 1st Marine Division. During the period of July 21–23, despite thick stratus clouds and rain that came and went like a faucet, over 15 radar missions were carried out by the three squadrons.518 They dropped a total of 33 tons of bombs on CCF mortar and 76mm gun positions, supply areas, command posts, bunkers, and trenches.

518 One additional flight expending three 1,000-lb. bombs was made 22 July by a single AD from replacement squadron VMA-251. This was the unit’s first combat sortie in support of the 1st Marine Division after its indoctrination flights. VMA-251 also flew four MPQ flights for the 7th Marines in the early hours of 24 July, the day the outposts were attacked again. VMA-251 ComdD, Jul 53.

518 One more flight dropping three 1,000-pound bombs took place on July 22 by a single AD from replacement squadron VMA-251. This was the unit's first combat mission supporting the 1st Marine Division after their training flights. VMA-251 also conducted four MPQ flights for the 7th Marines in the early hours of July 24, the day the outposts were attacked again. VMA-251 ComdD, Jul 53.

The lull in ground fighting lasted until late on the 24th. Then, at 1930, a heavy preparation of 60mm, 82mm, and 120mm mortars combined with 76mm and 122mm artillery shells began to rain down on Boulder City. Men of G/3/1, under command of First Lieutenant Oral R. Swigart, Jr., were deployed at that time in a perimeter defense of the position having that morning completed the relief of G/3/7.

The break in ground fighting lasted until late on the 24th. Then, at 7:30 PM, a heavy bombardment of 60mm, 82mm, and 120mm mortars, along with 76mm and 122mm artillery shells, started to fall on Boulder City. Soldiers from G/3/1, led by First Lieutenant Oral R. Swigart, Jr., were positioned at that time in a defensive perimeter after completing the relief of G/3/7 earlier that morning.

Enemy troops were reported massing for an assault. One regiment located by forward observers behind Hill 139, some 700 yards northwest of Berlin, was taken under fire at 1940 by artillery and rocket ripple. At 2030, following their usual pattern of laying down a heavy mortar and artillery barrage, the CCF began to probe the MLR at Hills 119 and 111 in the Marine right battalion sector. They hit first at Hill 111, the far right anchor of the division line, currently held by 7th Marines personnel. Then the CCF moved westward to Hill 119. Their choice of time for the attack once again coincided with the relief of 7th Marines units by the 1st Marines.519 When the assault began, H/3/1 was moving up to relieve H/3/7 at the easternmost point of the line in the Hill 111 vicinity, and Company I was preparing to relieve I/3/7, to its left.

Enemy troops were reported gathering for an attack. One regiment spotted by forward observers behind Hill 139, about 700 yards northwest of Berlin, came under fire at 1940 from artillery and rocket fire. At 2030, following their usual tactic of launching a heavy mortar and artillery barrage, the CCF began testing the main line of resistance at Hills 119 and 111 in the Marine right battalion sector. They struck first at Hill 111, the far right anchor of the division line, currently held by personnel from the 7th Marines. Then the CCF moved west to Hill 119. Their timing for the attack coincided yet again with the relief of the 7th Marines units by the 1st Marines.519 When the assault started, H/3/1 was moving up to relieve H/3/7 at the easternmost point of the line near Hill 111, while Company I was getting ready to relieve I/3/7 on its left.

519 A similar incident had occurred on 7 July when the 7th Marines was attacked while in the process of relieving a regiment of the 25th Infantry. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-58.

519 A similar incident happened on July 7 when the 7th Marines were attacked while they were relieving a regiment of the 25th Infantry. PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-58.

The Communist troops temporarily penetrated Hill 111 positions. At Boulder City, where the main force of the CCF two-battalion unit386 had struck, they occupied a portion of the trenchline. Attempting to exploit this gain, the Chinese repeatedly assaulted the Berlin Gate, on the left flank of Company G’s position and the East Berlin Gate, to its right. Marine units of the two regiments posted at the two citadel hills were heavily supported by MLR mortar, artillery, and tank fires. No artillery spotter or CAS flights were flown through the night, once again due to weather conditions.

The Communist troops temporarily pushed into Hill 111 positions. In Boulder City, where the main force of the CCF’s two-battalion unit386 had attacked, they took over part of the trenchline. To take advantage of this gain, the Chinese repeatedly launched assaults on the Berlin Gate, which was on the left side of Company G’s position, and the East Berlin Gate, to its right. Marine units from the two regiments stationed at the two citadel hills were heavily supported by MLR mortar, artillery, and tank fire. No artillery spotter or CAS flights were conducted throughout the night due to weather conditions.

By 2120, the bulk of Chinese soldiers had begun to withdraw from Hill 111, this attack apparently being a diversionary effort. But the enemy’s main thrust continued against the central Hill 119 position. Here the close, heavy fighting raged on through the morning hours, with enemy troops steadily reinforcing from the Jersey Ridge and East Berlin, by way of the Berlin Gate, the best avenue of approach to forward positions of Hill 119. At approximately 2100, the Chinese hurled a second attack against Hill 119 in the strength of two companies, supported by intense mortar and artillery fire. An hour later hand-to-hand combat had developed all along the 700 yards of the forward trenches. Company G men of the 1st Marines were down to half their original number, ammunition was running low, and evacuation of casualties was slowed by the fact that two of the eight corpsmen had been killed and most of the rest were themselves casualties.

By 2120, most of the Chinese soldiers had started pulling back from Hill 111, as this attack seemed to be a diversion. However, the main enemy push continued against the central position at Hill 119. Intense fighting persisted throughout the morning, with enemy troops continuously being reinforced from Jersey Ridge and East Berlin via the Berlin Gate, which was the best route to the forward positions at Hill 119. Around 2100, the Chinese launched a second attack on Hill 119 with two companies, backed by heavy mortar and artillery fire. An hour later, hand-to-hand combat broke out along the entire 700 yards of the forward trenches. The men of Company G from the 1st Marines were down to half their original strength, ammunition was running low, and evacuating casualties was hindered by the fact that two of the eight corpsmen had been killed, and most of the rest were casualties themselves.

By midnight, the front, left, and right flanks of the perimeter had been pushed back to the reverse slope of the hill and a 1st Marines participant commented “... only a never-say-die resistance was keeping the enemy from seizing the remainder of the position.”520 At 0015, the thinning ranks of G/3/1 Marines (now down to 25 percent effectives) were cheered by the news that Company I men were about to reinforce their position. This latter unit itself suffered 35 casualties while moving into the rear area, when the Chinese intercepted a coded message and shifted a substantial amount of their mortar and artillery fires to the rear approaches of Hill 119.

By midnight, the front, left, and right sides of the perimeter had been pushed back to the reverse slope of the hill, and a 1st Marines member commented, “... only a never-give-up resistance was keeping the enemy from taking the rest of the position.”520 At 0015, the dwindling ranks of G/3/1 Marines (now down to 25 percent effective) were encouraged by the news that men from Company I were about to reinforce their position. This latter unit itself suffered 35 casualties while moving into the rear area when the Chinese intercepted a coded message and shifted a significant amount of their mortar and artillery fire to the rear approaches of Hill 119.

520 1stMar SAR “Berlins,” Aug 53, p. 4.

520 1stMar SAR “Berlins,” Aug 53, p. 4.

In response to the enemy bombardment, Marine artillery fires crashed against the Chinese continuously from 2100 to midnight. Four ripples were launched in support of the Hill 119 defenders. In one of the regiment’s most intense counterbattery shoots on record, the 11th Marines in three hours had fired 157 missions. By 2400, an387 estimated 6,000 to 8,000 hostile rounds had fallen in the division sector.

In response to the enemy bombardment, Marine artillery fired continuously at the Chinese from 9 PM to midnight. Four salvos were launched to support the defenders on Hill 119. In one of the regiment’s most intense counter-battery operations ever recorded, the 11th Marines fired 157 missions in just three hours. By midnight, an estimated 6,000 to 8,000 enemy rounds had landed in the division's sector.

Meanwhile, the Chinese were also attempting to punch holes in the 5th regimental sector. In a second-step operation, rather than striking simultaneously as was customary, the enemy at 2115 had jabbed at outposts Esther and Dagmar in the right battalion of the 5th Marines. The reinforced Chinese company from the 408th Regiment quickly began to concentrate its attention on Esther, outposted by Company H Marines. During the heavy fighting both Marines and Chinese reinforced. By early morning, the enemy had seized part of the front trenchline, but the Marines controlled the rear trenches and reorganized the defense under rifle platoon commander, Second Lieutenant William H. Bates. The Chinese unsuccessfully attempted to isolate the position by heavy shelling and patrolled vigorously between Esther and the MLR.

Meanwhile, the Chinese were also trying to break through the 5th regimental sector. In a second-phase operation, instead of attacking at the same time as usual, the enemy struck out at 2115 against outposts Esther and Dagmar in the right battalion of the 5th Marines. The reinforced Chinese company from the 408th Regiment quickly focused its efforts on Esther, which was defended by Company H Marines. During the intense fighting, both the Marines and Chinese brought in reinforcements. By early morning, the enemy had taken part of the front trench line, but the Marines held the rear trenches and reorganized their defense under rifle platoon commander Second Lieutenant William H. Bates. The Chinese made unsuccessful attempts to cut off the position with heavy shelling and patrolled aggressively between Esther and the MLR.

Marines replied with flamethrowers and heavy supporting fires from the MLR, including machine guns, 81mm and 4.2-inch mortar boxes. Three tanks—a section from the regimental antitank platoon and one from Company A—neutralized enemy targets with 153 rounds to assist the 3d and 2d Battalions. The 3/11 gunners supporting the 5th Marines also hurled 3,886 rounds against the Chinese in breaking up the attack. After several hours of strong resistance, the Chinese loosened their grip, and at 0640 on the 25th, Esther was reported secured.

Marines responded with flamethrowers and heavy fire support from the Main Line of Resistance, including machine guns and 81mm and 4.2-inch mortar systems. Three tanks—one from the regimental anti-tank platoon and another from Company A—took out enemy targets with 153 rounds to support the 3rd and 2nd Battalions. The 3/11 artillery supporting the 5th Marines also fired 3,886 rounds at the Chinese to disrupt their attack. After several hours of intense resistance, the Chinese began to weaken their hold, and at 6:40 AM on the 25th, Esther was reported secured.

By this time an enemy battalion had been committed piecemeal at the position. The action had developed into the heaviest encounter of the month in the 5th Marines sector. During that night of 24–25 July, more than 4,000 artillery and mortar rounds fell in the outpost vicinity; total incoming for the regimental sector throughout July was recorded at 8,413 rounds. Twelve Marines lost their lives in the battle, with 35 wounded and evacuated, and 63 suffering minor injuries. A total of 85 CCF were counted dead, 110 more estimated killed, and an estimated 250 wounded.

By this time, an enemy battalion had been sent in gradually to the position. The fighting had turned into the most intense clash of the month in the 5th Marines sector. During the night of July 24–25, over 4,000 artillery and mortar rounds landed near the outpost; the total incoming for the regimental sector in July was recorded at 8,413 rounds. Twelve Marines were killed in the battle, 35 were wounded and evacuated, and 63 suffered minor injuries. A total of 85 CCF were confirmed dead, with another 110 estimated to have been killed, and around 250 injuries estimated.

Back at the Berlin Complex area of the 7th Marines where the major action centered, intense shelling, fire fights, and close hand-to-hand combat continued through the early morning of the 25th. Chinese infiltrators had broken through a substantial part of the trenchwork on the forward slope of Boulder City. For a while they temporarily occupied the rocky, shrub-grown hill crest as well.

Back at the Berlin Complex area of the 7th Marines, where the main action was taking place, heavy shelling, gunfire, and close hand-to-hand combat went on through the early morning of the 25th. Chinese infiltrators had breached a significant section of the trenches on the front slope of Boulder City. For a time, they also briefly held the rocky, bush-covered hilltop.

388

388

A swift-moving counterattack launched at 0130 by 1st Marines from Companies G and I, led by Captain Louis J. Sartor, of I/3/1, began to restore the proper balance to the situation. At 0330 the MLR had been reestablished and the Marines had the controlling hand. By 0530 the Hill 119 area was secured, with four new platoons from Companies E of the 7th and 1st Marines aiding the defense. Scattered groups of Chinese still clung to the forward slopes, and others vainly tried to reinforce by the Berlin-to-Hill 119 left flank trenchline.

A quick counterattack started at 1:30 AM by the 1st Marines from Companies G and I, led by Captain Louis J. Sartor of I/3/1, began to restore balance to the situation. By 3:30 AM, the Main Line of Resistance (MLR) had been reestablished, and the Marines were back in control. By 5:30 AM, the Hill 119 area was secured, with four new platoons from Companies E of the 7th and 1st Marines supporting the defense. Scattered groups of Chinese still held on to the forward slopes, while others unsuccessfully attempted to reinforce by the trench line from Berlin to Hill 119 on the left flank.

Direct fire from the four M-46s on position at Boulder City521 had helped disperse hostile troop concentrations. The tanks had also played a major communication role. Although surrounded by enemy forces during the peak of the fighting, two of the armored vehicles were still able to radio timely tactical information to higher echelons. This Company C quartet, plus another vehicle from the 7th Marines antitank unit, between the time of the enemy assault to 0600 when it stabilized, had pumped 109 HE, 8 marking shells, and 20,750 .30 caliber machine gun bullets into opposition forces.522 Five tanks from the 1st Marines AT company located to the west of the Berlin site meted out further punishment to enemy soldiers, gun pits, and trenches.

Direct fire from the four M-46 tanks positioned at Boulder City521 helped scatter enemy troop concentrations. The tanks also played a key communication role. Despite being surrounded by enemy forces at the height of the fighting, two of the armored vehicles were still able to send timely tactical information to higher command. This group from Company C, along with another vehicle from the 7th Marines antitank unit, during the enemy assault until 0600 when things stabilized, fired 109 HE shells, 8 marking shells, and 20,750 .30 caliber machine gun rounds into opposing forces.522 Five tanks from the 1st Marines AT company located to the west of the Berlin site dealt additional damage to enemy soldiers, gun positions, and trenches.

521 One participant remarked: “I think the Boulder City action ... is the classic example of where the Army system worked well. The tanks were generally given credit for saving the position, and I seriously doubt our ability to have done the job under the previous system which would have required the tanks to move to the scene after the action had begun.” Post ltr.

521 One participant said: “I think the Boulder City action ... is the perfect example of where the Army system worked effectively. The tanks really got credit for holding the position, and I honestly doubt we could have done the job under the old system, which would have meant the tanks moving to the scene after the action started.” Post ltr.

522 In retaliation, between 2200 and 0600, the four tanks at Hill 119 drew 2,200 rounds of enemy mortar and artillery.

522 In retaliation, between 10 PM and 6 AM, the four tanks at Hill 119 absorbed 2,200 rounds of enemy mortar and artillery.

Sporadic fighting and heavy incoming (at the rate of 60–70 rounds per minute for 10 minutes duration) also rained down on eastern Hill 111 in the early hours of the 25th. Assault teams with flamethrowers and 3.5-inch rocket launchers completed the job of clearing the enemy out of Marine bunkers.

Sporadic fighting and heavy fire (at a rate of 60–70 rounds per minute for 10 minutes straight) also fell on eastern Hill 111 in the early hours of the 25th. Assault teams with flamethrowers and 3.5-inch rocket launchers finished the job of clearing the enemy from Marine bunkers.

Altogether the Communists had committed 3,000 troops across the Marine division front during the night of 24–25 July. Between 2200 and 0400, a total of 23,725 rounds had been fired by the 11th Marines and 10 battalions under its operational control in the division sector. This included batteries from the 25th Division Artillery, I Corps Artillery, and 1st Commonwealth Division Artillery.523 The389 artillery outgoing represented 7,057 rounds to assist the 5th Marines at outpost Esther and 16,668 in defense of Boulder City.

Altogether, the Communists moved 3,000 troops across the Marine division front during the night of July 24–25. Between 10 PM and 4 AM, the 11th Marines and 10 battalions under its control fired a total of 23,725 rounds in the division sector. This included batteries from the 25th Division Artillery, I Corps Artillery, and 1st Commonwealth Division Artillery.523 The389 artillery fire amounted to 7,057 rounds to support the 5th Marines at outpost Esther and 16,668 rounds in defense of Boulder City.

523 The British were not hampered by any ammunition restrictions at this time. The excellent liaison between the 11th Marines and Commonwealth Division Artillery resulted in a humorous incident. After the battle of 24–25 July, a young British artillery officer arrived at a Marine regimental CP. He identified himself as being from the unit that had provided artillery support to the Marines the previous night, for which he was profusely thanked. Before his astonished audience he then unrolled an impressive scroll. This proved to be a bill enumerating the various types and amounts of projectiles fired and specifying the cost in pounds sterling. When he felt the Marine staff was properly flabbergasted, he grinned and conceded waggishly: “But I am authorized to settle for two bottles of your best whiskey!” Curry ltr.

523 The British weren't held back by any ammo restrictions at this time. The great teamwork between the 11th Marines and Commonwealth Division Artillery led to a funny incident. After the battle on July 24-25, a young British artillery officer showed up at a Marine regimental CP. He introduced himself as part of the unit that had provided artillery support to the Marines the night before, which the Marines thanked him for profusely. To the amazement of everyone there, he then unrolled an impressive scroll. It turned out to be a bill listing the different types and amounts of shells fired and detailing the cost in pounds sterling. Once he saw the Marine staff was properly shocked, he grinned and joked: “But I am authorized to settle for two bottles of your best whiskey!” Curry ltr.

On the morning of 25 July, the Chinese at 0820 again assaulted Hill 119 in company strength. Marine mortar and artillery fire repulsed the attack, with heavy enemy losses. See-saw action continued for most of the rest of the day on the position. No major infantry attempt was made at Hill 111. Intense hostile shelling was reported here at 1100, however, when the 3d Battalion, 7th Marines, still in operational control of the area, began receiving 125 to 150 rounds per minute. The last of the Chinese marauders were forced off the forward slope at Boulder City at 1335. For some welcomed hours both Marine positions remained quiet. A conservative estimate by 3/7 of the toll for the enemy’s efforts were 75 CCF killed and 425 wounded.

On the morning of July 25, the Chinese launched another attack on Hill 119 at 8:20 AM with a large force. Marine mortar and artillery fire successfully pushed back the assault, inflicting heavy casualties on the enemy. The back-and-forth fighting continued for most of the day over the position. There were no significant infantry attempts at Hill 111. Intense enemy shelling was reported here at 11:00 AM when the 3rd Battalion, 7th Marines, still in control of the area, began taking 125 to 150 rounds per minute. The last of the Chinese attackers were driven off the forward slope at Boulder City at 1:35 PM. For a few welcome hours, both Marine positions experienced calm. A conservative estimate by 3/7 indicated that the enemy suffered 75 CCF killed and 425 wounded.

Air support that morning was provided by 32 of the sleek, hard-hitting F9Fs from VMF-115 and -311. Working in tandem over Chinese terrain directly north of the right regimental sector, the two squadrons, between 0616 and 1036, flew nine MPQ missions. In the aerial assault, they bombarded the enemy with more than 32 tons of explosives.

Air support that morning came from 32 of the fast and powerful F9Fs from VMF-115 and -311. Operating together over Chinese land directly north of the right regimental sector, the two squadrons flew nine MPQ missions between 0616 and 1036. In the air attack, they dropped over 32 tons of explosives on the enemy.

Twelve Marine tanks had a workout, expending 480 HE and 33 WP shells and 21,300 rounds of machine gun ammunition in direct fire missions. The traditional inequity of battlefront luck was plainly demonstrated between a section (two) of armored vehicles near the Hill 111 company CP and a trio located at Boulder City. It was practically a standoff for the former. Together they were able to fire only 71 high explosive shells, drawing a return of 1,000 rounds of CCF 60mm mortar and 122mm cannon shells. Blazing guns of the three tanks in the Hill 119 area, meanwhile, during the 24-hour firing period had sent 158 HE, 10 WP, and 17,295 bullets to destroy hostile weapons and installations and received but 120 mortar and another 120 rounds of artillery fire.

Twelve Marine tanks worked hard, using 480 HE shells, 33 WP shells, and 21,300 rounds of machine gun ammo in direct fire missions. The usual luck of the battlefield was clearly shown between a pair of armored vehicles near the Hill 111 company command post and a group of three at Boulder City. It was almost a standoff for the first set. Together, they could only fire 71 high explosive shells and received a return of 1,000 rounds from CCF 60mm mortars and 122mm cannon shells. Meanwhile, the three tanks in the Hill 119 area, during the 24-hour firing period, fired off 158 HE shells, 10 WP shells, and 17,295 bullets to take out enemy weapons and installations, while only receiving 120 mortar shells and another 120 rounds of artillery fire in return.

The 11th Marines were also busy as heavy firing continued on390 Chinese policing parties and those enemy batteries actively shelling MLR positions. By late afternoon, 13,500 rounds of Chinese mortar and artillery had crashed against the 7th Marines right sector—the highest rate of incoming for any 24-hour period during the entire Berlin action. For its part, the regiment and its medium and heavy support units completed 216 counterbattery missions and sent 36,794 rounds of outgoing into Chinese defenses between 2200 on 24 July and 1600 on the 25th.

The 11th Marines were also hard at work as heavy firing continued on390 Chinese police units and the enemy artillery actively bombarding MLR positions. By late afternoon, 13,500 rounds of Chinese mortar and artillery had slammed into the 7th Marines' right sector—the highest rate of incoming fire for any 24-hour period during the entire Berlin action. Meanwhile, the regiment and its medium and heavy support units carried out 216 counterbattery missions and fired 36,794 rounds into Chinese defenses between 2200 on July 24 and 1600 on the 25th.

Meanwhile, during 25 July, Colonel Nelson’s men continued with their relief of the 7th Marines. At 1100 Major Robert D. Thurston, S-3 of 3/1, assumed command of Hill 119 and reorganized the embattled Company G and Company I personnel, 1st Marines. That night, at 1940, E/2/1 and F/2/7 effected the relief of the composite George-Item men. At the eastern Hill 111 Company H, 1st Marines had assisted Company H, 7th Marines during the day in clearing the trenchworks of the enemy; then at 1815, the 1st Marines unit completed its relief of H/3/7 and took over responsibility for the MLR right company sector. Not long after, beginning at 2130, 1st and 7th Marines at the critical Hill 119 complex were attacked by two enemy companies. MLR fire support plus artillery and tank guns lashed at the enemy and he withdrew. Between 0130 and 0300 the Chinese again probed Hills 111 and 119, gaining small parts of the trenchline before being driven out by superior Marine firepower. Marine casualties were 19 killed and 125 wounded. The CCF had suffered 30 known dead, an estimated 84 killed, and 310 estimated wounded.

Meanwhile, on July 25, Colonel Nelson’s troops continued their support for the 7th Marines. At 11:00 AM, Major Robert D. Thurston, the S-3 of 3/1, took command of Hill 119 and reorganized the struggling personnel from Company G and Company I, 1st Marines. That night, at 7:40 PM, E/2/1 and F/2/7 replaced the mixed George-Item troops. On the eastern Hill 111, Company H, 1st Marines helped Company H, 7th Marines throughout the day to clear out the enemy trenchworks; by 6:15 PM, the 1st Marines unit had finished its relief of H/3/7 and took over the responsibility for the right company sector of the Main Line of Resistance (MLR). Soon after, starting at 9:30 PM, the 1st and 7th Marines at the crucial Hill 119 complex were attacked by two enemy companies. MLR fire support, along with artillery and tank guns, targeted the enemy, causing them to retreat. Between 1:30 AM and 3:00 AM, the Chinese again probed Hills 111 and 119, capturing small sections of the trenchline before being driven out by superior Marine firepower. Marine casualties totaled 19 killed and 125 wounded. The Chinese Communist Forces (CCF) suffered 30 known dead, an estimated 84 killed, and approximately 310 wounded.

With dawn on the 26th came the first real quiet the battlefield had known for two days. Small enemy groups tried to reinforce by way of the Berlin trenchline, only to be stopped by Marine riflemen and machine gunners. Hostile incoming continued spasmodically. At 1330 the 1st Marines assumed operational control of the right regimental sector, as scheduled, and of the remaining 7th Marines units still in the area.524 By this time Marine casualties since 24 July numbered 43 killed and 316 wounded.

With dawn on the 26th came the first real quiet the battlefield had known for two days. Small enemy groups tried to reinforce themselves via the Berlin trench line, but they were stopped by Marine riflemen and machine gunners. Hostile fire continued sporadically. At 1:30 PM, the 1st Marines took operational control of the right regimental sector as planned, along with the remaining 7th Marines units still in the area.524 By this time, Marine casualties since July 24 had reached 43 killed and 316 wounded.

524 Seventh Marines units were Companies D and E, and elements of the 4.2-inch Mortar Company.

524 Seventh Marines units included Companies D and E, along with parts of the 4.2-inch Mortar Company.

That night the Communists, knowing the armistice was near and that time was running out for seizing the Boulder City objective,391 made their final attempts at the strongpoint. Again they attacked at 2130. Defending 1st Marines were now under Captain Esmond E. Harper, CO of E/2/1, who had assumed command when Major Thurston was seriously wounded and evacuated. They fought off the Chinese platoon-size drive when the enemy advanced from Berlin to the wire at Hill 119. Shortly after midnight another Chinese platoon returned to Hill 119 in the last skirmish for the territory, but Marine small arms and artillery handily sent it home. At 0045, a CCF platoon nosed about the Hill 111 area for an hour and twenty minutes. Again the Marines discouraged these last faltering enemy efforts. Action at both hills ceased and what was to become the concluding ground action for the 1st Marine Division in Korea had ended.

That night, the Communists, aware that the armistice was approaching and that they were running out of time to capture the Boulder City objective,391 made their final attempts at the stronghold. They launched another attack at 9:30 PM. The defending 1st Marines were now led by Captain Esmond E. Harper, the CO of E/2/1, who took command after Major Thurston was seriously wounded and evacuated. They repelled the Chinese platoon-sized assault as the enemy advanced from Berlin to the wire at Hill 119. Shortly after midnight, another Chinese platoon returned to Hill 119 for the last skirmish over the territory, but Marine small arms and artillery effectively drove them back. At 12:45 AM, a CCF platoon lingered around the Hill 111 area for an hour and twenty minutes. Once again, the Marines thwarted these last desperate enemy efforts. Action at both hills came to a halt, marking what would become the final ground action for the 1st Marine Division in Korea.

Despite impressive tenacity and determination, the Chinese Communist attacks throughout most of July on the two Berlin outposts and Hills 119 and 111 achieved no real gain. Their repetitive assaults on strongly-defended Boulder City up until the last day of the war was an attempt to place the Marines (and the United Nations Command) in as unfavorable a position as possible when the armistice agreement was signed. While talking at Panmunjom, the Communists pressed hungrily on the battlefront for as much critical terrain as they could get under their control before the final ceasefire line was established.

Despite their impressive tenacity and determination, the Chinese Communist attacks throughout most of July on the two Berlin outposts and Hills 119 and 111 didn’t achieve any real gains. Their repeated assaults on the heavily defended Boulder City right up until the last day of the war were an attempt to put the Marines (and the United Nations Command) in as disadvantageous a position as possible when the armistice agreement was signed. While negotiations were happening at Panmunjom, the Communists aggressively sought to control as much critical territory as they could before the final ceasefire line was drawn.

Had the enemy succeeded in his assaults on the two hill defenses after his earlier seizure of the Berlins, under terms of the agreement UNC forces would have been forced to withdraw southward to a point where they no longer had free access to all of the Imjin River. If the Chinese had taken Boulder City this would have also provided the CCF a major high ground position (Hill 126) with direct observation into Marine rear areas and important supply routes.

Had the enemy succeeded in attacking the two hill defenses after capturing the Berlins, according to the agreement, UNC forces would have had to retreat south to a location where they couldn't freely access all of the Imjin River. If the Chinese had taken Boulder City, it would have also given the CCF a significant high ground position (Hill 126) with a clear view into Marine rear areas and crucial supply routes.

From the standpoint of casualties, the last month of the Korean War was a costly one, with 181 infantry Marines killed in action and total losses of 1,611 men.525 This was the highest rate for any month during 1953. It was second only to the October 1952 outpost battles526 for any month during the year the 1st Marine Division defended the line in West Korea. The closing days of the war produced392 the last action for which Marines were awarded the Navy Cross. These Marines were Second Lieutenant Bates, H/3/5; First Lieutenant Swigart, G/3/1; Second Lieutenant Theodore J. Lutz, Jr., H/3/1; and Sergeant Robert J. Raymond, F/2/7, who was mortally wounded.

From the perspective of casualties, the final month of the Korean War was extremely costly, with 181 infantry Marines killed in action and total losses reaching 1,611 men.525 This was the highest rate for any month in 1953. It was only surpassed by the October 1952 outpost battles526 for any month during the year the 1st Marine Division held the line in West Korea. The last days of the war resulted in the final actions for which Marines were awarded the Navy Cross. These Marines included Second Lieutenant Bates, H/3/5; First Lieutenant Swigart, G/3/1; Second Lieutenant Theodore J. Lutz, Jr., H/3/1; and Sergeant Robert J. Raymond, F/2/7, who was mortally wounded.

525 Casualty breakdown: 181 killed, 86 missing, 862 wounded and evacuated, 474 wounded (not evacuated), and 10 non-battle deaths.

525 Casualty breakdown: 181 killed, 86 missing, 862 wounded and evacuated, 474 wounded (not evacuated), and 10 non-battle deaths.

526 During this period 186 Marines were killed and 1,798 listed as casualties.

526 During this time, 186 Marines lost their lives and 1,798 were recorded as casualties.

The 7th and 1st Marines, as the two regiments involved during July in the Berlin sector defense, sustained high monthly losses: 804 and 594, respectively. Forty-eight men from the 7th Marines and 70 from the 1st Marines were killed in action. In contrast, the 5th Marines which witnessed little frontline action during the month (except for a sharp one-night clash at Outpost Esther), suffered total monthly casualties of 150 men, of whom 26 lost their lives. Chinese losses were also high: 405 counted killed, 761 estimated killed, 1,988 estimated wounded, 1 prisoner, or 3,155 for the month of July.

The 7th and 1st Marines, the two regiments involved in the Berlin sector defense in July, faced significant monthly losses: 804 and 594, respectively. Forty-eight men from the 7th Marines and 70 from the 1st Marines were killed in action. In comparison, the 5th Marines, which had minimal frontline action during the month (aside from a brief one-night clash at Outpost Esther), experienced total monthly casualties of 150 men, with 26 losing their lives. Chinese losses were also substantial: 405 confirmed killed, 761 estimated killed, 1,988 estimated wounded, and 1 prisoner, totaling 3,155 for July.

In their unsuccessful attempts to dislodge the Marines from their MLR positions the Chinese had pounded the right regimental flank with approximately 22,200 artillery and mortar shells during the last 24–27 July battle. In reply, 11th Marines gunners and supporting units had expended a total of 64,187 rounds against CCF strongpoints. The enemy’s increased counterbattery capabilities in July, noted by division intelligence, also received particular attention from the artillerymen. A record number of 345 counterbattery missions were conducted during the period by Marine and Army cannoneers.

In their failed attempts to push the Marines out of their MLR positions, the Chinese bombarded the right regimental flank with about 22,200 artillery and mortar shells during the battle from July 24 to 27. In response, the 11th Marines gunners and supporting units fired a total of 64,187 rounds at CCF strongpoints. The enemy’s improved counterbattery capabilities in July, highlighted by division intelligence, also caught the artillerymen’s attention. A record 345 counterbattery missions were carried out during this period by Marine and Army cannoneers.

More than 46,000 rounds of outgoing had been fired by the Chinese in their repeated attempts of 7–9, 19–20, and 24–27 July to seize the Berlin posts and key MLR terrain. Operations during this final month, as the 2/11 commander was to point out later, on numerous occasions had verified the wisdom of leaving “direct support artillery battalions in place during frequent changes of frontline infantry units.”527

More than 46,000 rounds had been fired by the Chinese in their repeated attempts on July 7–9, 19–20, and 24–27 to capture the Berlin posts and crucial MLR terrain. Operations during this final month, as the 2/11 commander would later emphasize, repeatedly confirmed the wisdom of keeping “direct support artillery battalions in place during frequent changes of frontline infantry units.”527

527 Col Gordon H. West ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 1 Jul 70, hereafter West ltr.

527 Col Gordon H. West letter to Director, MCHist, HQMC, dated July 1, 1970, hereafter West letter.

Armored support throughout the 24–27 July period consisted of more than 30 tanks (Company C, AT Company elements of the 1st and 7th Marines, a section of flames, and Company D platoon) on line or in reserve. Marine tankers used a record 1,287 shells and 54,845 bullets against the CCF, while drawing 4,845 rounds of enemy mixed mortar and artillery.

Armored support from July 24 to 27 included over 30 tanks (Company C, elements of the AT Company from the 1st and 7th Marines, a flame section, and a Company D platoon) either in action or on standby. Marine tank crews fired a record 1,287 shells and 54,845 rounds of ammunition against the CCF, while also receiving 4,845 rounds of mixed mortar and artillery fire from the enemy.

The enemy’s attack on Marine MLR positions, beginning 24 July,393 constituted the major action in the I Corps sector the final 10 days of the war. During this period the Chinese probed I Corps positions 25 times (8 in the Marine, 5 in the 1st Commonwealth, 6 in the 1st ROK, and 6 in the 7th Infantry Division sectors).

The enemy's attack on Marine MLR positions, starting on July 24, 393 marked the main action in the I Corps area during the last 10 days of the war. During this time, the Chinese tested I Corps positions 25 times (8 in the Marine sector, 5 in the 1st Commonwealth, 6 in the 1st ROK, and 6 in the 7th Infantry Division sectors).

In other parts of the Eighth Army line, the last large-scale action had broken out east of the Marine sector beginning 13 July when major elements of six Chinese Communist divisions penetrated a ROK unit to the right of the IX Corps. As the division’s right and center fell back, units withdrew into the zones of the IX and ROK II Corps on the east. General Taylor directed that a new MLR be established south of the Kumsong River, and a counterattack 17–20 July by three II Corps divisions attained this objective.

In other areas of the Eighth Army line, the last major battle began east of the Marine sector on July 13, when significant forces from six Chinese Communist divisions broke through a ROK unit to the right of the IX Corps. As the division's right and center pulled back, units retreated into the zones of the IX and ROK II Corps to the east. General Taylor ordered the establishment of a new main line of resistance (MLR) south of the Kumsong River, and a counterattack from July 17 to 20 by three II Corps divisions achieved this goal.

Since the armistice agreement was imminent, no attempt was made to restore the original line. The Chinese had achieved temporary success528 but at heavy cost. Eighth Army officials estimated that CCF casualties in July reached 72,000 men, with more than 25,000 of these dead. The enemy had lost the equivalent of seven divisions of the five Chinese armies committed in attacks upon the II and IX Corps sectors.

Since the ceasefire agreement was about to happen, no effort was made to restore the original line. The Chinese had experienced temporary success528 but at a significant cost. Eighth Army officials estimated that CCF casualties in July reached 72,000 men, with more than 25,000 of these dead. The enemy had lost the equivalent of seven divisions from the five Chinese armies involved in attacks on the II and IX Corps sectors.

528 Minor realignments of the military line of demarcation were made in the center sector to include a few miles of territory gained by the Communists in their massive July offensive there. Clark, Danube to Yalu, p. 292; Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 640; Leckie, Conflict, p. 385.

528 Minor adjustments to the military boundary were made in the central area to incorporate a few miles of land captured by the Communists during their large offensive in July. Clark, Danube to Yalu, p. 292; Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 640; Leckie, Conflict, p. 385.

The Last Day of the War529

529 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 26–28 Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 941, dtd 27 Jul 53; 1st MAW ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 3/1, 3/5, 2/7, 4/11 ComdDs, Jul 53; 1stMar SAR “Berlins”; HRS Log Sheet, dtd 21 Aug 67 (n.t., about Korean War Casualties, prepared on request for Policy Analysis Br., HQMC); Leckie, Conflict; Capt C. A. Robinson and Sgt D. L. Cellers, “Land of the Morning Calm,” Midwest Reporter (Jul 68).

529 Unless otherwise indicated, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9; 1stMarDiv ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 26–28 Jul 53; 1stMarDiv PIR 941, dtd 27 Jul 53; 1st MAW ComdD, Jul 53; 1stMar, 5thMar, 7thMar, 11thMar, 3/1, 3/5, 2/7, 4/11 ComdDs, Jul 53; 1stMar SAR “Berlins”; HRS Log Sheet, dtd 21 Aug 67 (n.t., about Korean War Casualties, prepared on request for Policy Analysis Br., HQMC); Leckie, Conflict; Capt C. A. Robinson and Sgt D. L. Cellers, “Land of the Morning Calm,” Midwest Reporter (Jul 68).

Representatives of the Communist Forces and the United Nations Command signed the armistice agreement that marked the end of the Korean War in Panmunjom at 1000 on Monday, 27 July 1953. The cease-fire, ending two years of often fruitless and hostile truce negotiations, became effective at 2200 that night. After three years, one month, and two days the so-called police action in Korea had come to a halt.

Representatives of the Communist Forces and the United Nations Command signed the armistice agreement that marked the end of the Korean War in Panmunjom at 10:00 AM on Monday, July 27, 1953. The cease-fire, which ended two years of often unproductive and tense truce negotiations, became effective at 10:00 PM that night. After three years, one month, and two days, the so-called police action in Korea had come to a stop.

394

394

Actually, final agreement on the armistice had been expected since late June. By mid-July it was considered imminent, even though the CCF during these waning days of the war had launched several major counteroffensives against ROK troops defending the central part of the Eighth Army line as well as the Marines in the western I Corps sector.

Actually, a final agreement on the armistice had been expected since late June. By mid-July, it was seen as imminent, even though the CCF had launched several major counteroffensives against ROK troops defending the central part of the Eighth Army line and the Marines in the western I Corps sector during these final days of the war.

With the final resolution of hostilities at 1000, a flash message went out immediately to the 26,000 Marines of General Pate’s division directing that there be “no celebration firing related in any way to the advent of the armistice.”530 Fraternization or communication with the enemy was expressly forbidden. Personnel were reminded that firing of all weapons was to be “restricted to the minimum justified by the tactical situation.”531 No defensive firing was to take place after 2145 unless the Marines were actually attacked by enemy infantry. Each frontline company was authorized to fire one white star cluster at 2200, signalling the cease fire.

With the end of hostilities at 10:00 AM, a flash message was sent out immediately to the 26,000 Marines in General Pate’s division instructing them that there should be “no celebratory firing related to the armistice.” 530 Fraternization or communication with the enemy was explicitly banned. Personnel were reminded that the use of all weapons was to be “limited to what is necessary based on the tactical situation.” 531 No defensive firing was to occur after 9:45 PM unless the Marines were actually attacked by enemy infantry. Each frontline company was authorized to fire one white star cluster at 10:00 PM to signal the ceasefire.

530 Msg 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dtd 27 Jul 53, quoting Cease Fire and Armistice Agreement, IUS-OP-9-53.

530 Msg 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dated July 27, 1953, quoting Cease Fire and Armistice Agreement, IUS-OP-9-53.

531 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

The signing of the armistice agreement on 27 July thus ended 36 months of war for the Marines in Korea. On that date, the 1st Marine Division initiated plans for its withdrawal to defensive positions south of the Imjin River. One regiment, the 5th Marines, was left north of the river to man the general outpost line across the entire division front. A transition was made at this time from the customary wide-front linear defense to a defense in depth, similar to that employed in the July Boulder City battle.

The signing of the armistice agreement on July 27 marked the end of 36 months of war for the Marines in Korea. On that day, the 1st Marine Division started planning its move to defensive positions south of the Imjin River. One regiment, the 5th Marines, remained north of the river to cover the general outpost line across the entire division front. At this time, a shift was made from the traditional wide-front linear defense to a defense in depth, similar to what was used in the July Boulder City battle.

MAP 33 K. WHITE

MAP 33 K. WHITE

EIGHTH ARMY FRONT

Eighth Army Front

27 JULY 1953

July 27, 1953

Briefly, the armistice agreement decreed that both UNC and Communist forces:

Briefly, the armistice agreement stated that both UNC and Communist forces:

Cease fire 12 hours (at 2200, 27 July) after signing of agreement;

Ceasefire 12 hours (at 10:00 PM, July 27) after signing the agreement;

Withdraw all military forces, supplies, and equipment from the demilitarized zone (2,000 yards from line of contact) within 72 hours after effective time of ceasefire;

Withdraw all military forces, supplies, and equipment from the demilitarized zone (2,000 yards from the line of contact) within 72 hours after the ceasefire takes effect;

Locate and list all fortifications and minefields in the DMZ within 72 hours, to be dismantled during a subsequent salvage period;

Locate and list all fortifications and minefields in the DMZ within 72 hours, to be taken down during a later salvage period;

396

396

Replace combat personnel and supplies on a one-for-one basis, to prevent any build-up; and

Replace combat personnel and supplies one-for-one to avoid any build-up; and

Begin repatriation of all POWs, with exchange to be completed within two months.

Begin repatriation of all POWs, with the exchange to be completed within two months.

The 1st Marine Division began that afternoon to close out its existing MLR532 and withdraw to its designated post-armistice main battle position located two kilometers to the south, in the vicinity of the KANSAS Line. This tactical withdrawal was to be completed no later than 2200 on 30 July.

The 1st Marine Division started that afternoon to finalize its existing MLR532 and pull back to its assigned post-armistice main battle position located two kilometers to the south, near the KANSAS Line. This tactical withdrawal was to be finished by 10:00 PM on July 30.

532 See Map 33 for Eighth Army dispositions on the last day of the war.

532 See Map 33 for the Eighth Army's positions on the last day of the war.

By early afternoon the three infantry regiments had been ordered to furnish mine teams to mark, remove, and clear minefields. For units of the 1st and 7th Marines deployed at the Boulder Hill Outpost—quiet only since 0300 that morning—the cease-fire news understandably carried a “let’s see” reaction as the men “waited cautiously throughout the day in their fortifications for the White Star Cluster which would signify the end ...”533 Convincing the men at shell-pocked Boulder City that a cease-fire was to take place within a few hours would have been a difficult task that day, however, even for the Commandant.

By early afternoon, the three infantry regiments had been told to send out mine teams to mark, remove, and clear minefields. For the 1st and 7th Marines stationed at the Boulder Hill Outpost—quiet only since 3:00 AM that morning—the news of the cease-fire naturally prompted a “let’s see” reaction as the troops “waited cautiously throughout the day in their fortifications for the White Star Cluster, which would signal the end...” 533 Convincing the men at the shell-pocked Boulder City that the cease-fire would happen within a few hours would have been a tough job that day, even for the Commandant.

533 1stMar SAR “Berlins,” p. 5.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1st Mar SAR “Berlins,” p. 5.

The Marine infantrymen who had been the target of the last heavy Communist attacks of the war might well have had a special sense of realism about the end of hostilities. Between the skirmish with Chinese attacking units in the early hours of the 27th and mine accidents, a total of 46 Marines had been wounded and removed from duty that last day of the war and 2 others declared missing in action.

The Marine infantrymen who were the targets of the final intense Communist assaults of the war likely had a unique perspective on the end of fighting. Between the clash with Chinese forces in the early hours of the 27th and mine incidents, a total of 46 Marines were injured and taken out of action on that last day of the war, with 2 others reported missing in action.

For the more free-wheeling artillerymen of the 11th Marines, that final day was one of fairly normal operations. During the day, 40 counterbattery missions had been fired, the majority in reply to Communist batteries that came alive at dusk.534 A total of 102 countermortar missions were also completed, bringing the total outgoing that last month to 75,910 rounds. Action of the regiment397 continued until 2135, just ten minutes before the preliminary cease-fire which preceded the official cease-fire at 2200.

For the more laid-back artillery crew of the 11th Marines, that last day was pretty standard. Throughout the day, they fired 40 counterbattery missions, mostly in response to Communist batteries that started firing at dusk.534 They also completed a total of 102 countermortar missions, bringing the final count for that month to 75,910 rounds. The regiment's operations397 continued until 9:35 PM, just ten minutes before the preliminary cease-fire that led up to the official cease-fire at 10:00 PM.

534 The CO of the direct support artillery battalion in the defense of Boulder City, recalled that “on the evening of the 27th, with the Armistice only hours away, 2/11 received heavy Chinese artillery fire apparently directed at the batteries. Of the many rounds ... 80% were duds and no damage was done. Numerous time fuzed shells detonated hundreds of meters above ground. We figured that they were using up old rounds to keep from hauling them back north.” West ltr.

534 The commander of the direct support artillery battalion defending Boulder City remembered that “on the evening of the 27th, with the Armistice just hours away, 2/11 came under heavy Chinese artillery fire that seemed aimed at the batteries. Of the many rounds ... 80% were duds and caused no damage. Several time-fuzed shells exploded hundreds of meters in the air. We thought they were trying to use up old rounds to avoid bringing them back north.” West ltr.

For the 7,035 Marine officers and men on duty with General Megee’s 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, the day was also an active one. That final day of the war Corsairs, Skyraiders, and Pantherjets from the wing mounted 222 sorties and blasted the enemy with 354 tons of high explosives along the front. Banshees from VMJ-1 flew 15 reconnaissance sorties during the day for priority photographs of enemy airfields and railroads. Last Marine jet pilot in action was Captain William I. Armagost of VMF-311. He smashed a Communist supply point with four 500-pounders, at 1835, declaring his flight felt “just like the last winning play of a football game.”535

For the 7,035 Marine officers and personnel serving under General Megee’s 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, that day was full of activity. On the last day of the war, Corsairs, Skyraiders, and Panther jets from the wing conducted 222 missions and dropped 354 tons of high explosives on the enemy front. Banshees from VMJ-1 performed 15 reconnaissance missions throughout the day to capture essential photos of enemy airfields and railroads. The last Marine jet pilot in action was Captain William I. Armagost of VMF-311. He destroyed a Communist supply point with four 500-pound bombs at 1835, stating that his flight felt “just like the last winning play of a football game.”535

535 1st MAW ComdD, Jul 53 (Folder 3), CTF-91 msg to ComNavFE, dtd 27 Jul 53.

535 1st MAW ComdD, Jul 53 (Folder 3), CTF-91 message to ComNavFE, dated 27 Jul 53.

The wing closed out its share of the Korean War 35 minutes before the cease-fire. A VMA-251 aviator, Captain William J. Foster, Jr., dropped three 2,000-pound bombs at 2125 in support of UN troops. The distinction of flying this final Marine mission over the bombline had gone, fittingly, to the wing’s newly-arrived “Black Patch” squadron. At sea, U.S. and British warships ended the 17-month naval siege by shelling Wonsan for the last time, and at 2200 the ships in the harbor turned on their lights. In compliance with the terms of the armistice, full evacuation of the WCIDU and ECIDU islands north of the 38th Parallel started at 2200. Island defense forces off both coasts at this time began a systematic destruction of their fortifications as they prepared to move south.

The wing wrapped up its part in the Korean War 35 minutes before the cease-fire. A VMA-251 pilot, Captain William J. Foster, Jr., dropped three 2,000-pound bombs at 9:25 PM in support of UN troops. The honor of flying this final Marine mission over the bombline went, appropriately, to the wing’s newly-arrived “Black Patch” squadron. At sea, U.S. and British warships concluded the 17-month naval blockade by shelling Wonsan one last time, and at 10:00 PM, the ships in the harbor turned on their lights. In line with the armistice terms, the full evacuation of the WCIDU and ECIDU islands north of the 38th Parallel began at 10:00 PM. Island defense forces along both coasts at this time started systematically destroying their fortifications as they prepared to move south.

As early as 2100 Marine line units reported seeing Chinese soldiers forward of their own positions, policing their areas. An hour later large groups of enemy were observed along the division sector. Some “waved lighted candles, flashlights, and banners while others removed their dead and wounded, and apparently looked for souvenirs.”536 A few attempts were made by the Chinese to fraternize. One group approached a Marine listening post and asked for water and wanted to talk. Others hung up gift bags at the base of outpost Ava and shouted, “How are you? Come on over and let’s have a398 party,” while the Marines stared at them in silence.537 The last hostile incoming in the 1st Marine Division sector was reported at 2152 when five rounds of 82mm mortar landed on a Korean outpost, COP Camel.

As early as 2100, Marine units reported seeing Chinese soldiers ahead of their positions, patrolling their areas. An hour later, large groups of enemy forces were spotted along the division sector. Some "waved lighted candles, flashlights, and banners while others removed their dead and wounded, apparently looking for souvenirs."536 A few attempts were made by the Chinese to socialize. One group approached a Marine listening post and asked for water and wanted to talk. Others hung gift bags at the base of outpost Ava and shouted, "How are you? Come on over and let’s have a 398 party," while the Marines stared at them in silence.537 The last hostile incoming in the 1st Marine Division sector was reported at 2152 when five rounds of 82mm mortar landed on a Korean outpost, COP Camel.

536 1stMarDiv, ComdD, Jul 53, p. 2. One Marine officer, Major General Louis Metzger, who at the time was Executive Officer, Kimpo Provisional Regiment, recalled how voices of the Chinese Communists’ singing and cheering drifted across the Han River that night. “It was an eerie thing ... and very depressing.” MajGen Louis Metzger comments on draft MS, dtd 1 Jul 70, hereafter Metzger comments.

536 1stMarDiv, ComdD, Jul 53, p. 2. One Marine officer, Major General Louis Metzger, who was the Executive Officer of the Kimpo Provisional Regiment at the time, remembered how the sounds of the Chinese Communists singing and cheering floated across the Han River that night. “It was a creepy thing ... and really discouraging.” MajGen Louis Metzger comments on draft MS, dtd 1 Jul 70, hereafter Metzger comments.

537 1stMarDiv ComdD, op. cit., and Rees, Korea, p. 434.

537 1stMarDiv ComdD, op. cit., and Rees, Korea, p. 434.

Marines on line that night warily scanned the darkness in front of their trenches. Slowly at first, then with increasing rapidity the white star cluster shells began to burst over positions all along the line. Thousands of flares illuminated the sky and craggy hills along the 155-mile front, from the Yellow Sea to Sea of Japan. The war in Korea was over. Of the men from the one Marine Division and air wing committed in Korea during the three-year conflict, 4,262 had been killed in battle. An additional 26,038 Marines were wounded. No fewer than 42 Marines would receive the Nation’s highest combat decoration, the Medal of Honor, for outstanding valor—26 of them posthumously.

Marines on the line that night cautiously scanned the darkness in front of their trenches. Slowly at first, then with increasing speed, the white star cluster shells began to explode over positions all along the line. Thousands of flares lit up the sky and the rocky hills along the 155-mile front, from the Yellow Sea to the Sea of Japan. The war in Korea was over. Of the men from the one Marine Division and air wing deployed in Korea during the three-year conflict, 4,262 had been killed in battle. An additional 26,038 Marines were wounded. At least 42 Marines would receive the nation’s highest combat award, the Medal of Honor, for exceptional bravery—26 of them posthumously.


Operation BIG SWITCHCircumstances of Capture—The Communist POW Camps—CCF “Lenient Policy” and Indoctrination Attempts—The Germ Warfare Issue—Problems and Performance of Marine POWs—Marine Escape Attempts—Evaluation and Aftermath

Operation BIG SWITCHCircumstances of Capture—The Communist POW Camps—CCF “Lenient Policy” and Indoctrination Attempts—The Germ Warfare Issue—Problems and Performance of Marine POWs—Marine Escape Attempts—Evaluation and Aftermath

Operation BIG SWITCH538

538 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Jul-Sep 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, Jul-Aug 53; 1st MAW ComdD, Jul 53; 11thMar, MAG-33 ComdDs, Jul 53; HRS Subject File VE23.2.S8 “CMC Statements on Korean POWs”; HRS Subject File #1 “Prisoners of War—Korea—General”; HRS Subject Files “Prisoners of War—Korea—News Clippings, folders #1, #2, #3”; Korea War casualty cards from Statistical Unit, Casualty Section, Personal Affairs Br, Code DNA, HQMC; MacDonald, POW; Berger, Korea Knot; Clark, Danube to Yalu; T. R. Fehrenbach, This Kind of War—A Study in Unpreparedness (New York: The Macmillan Co., 1963), hereafter Fehrenbach, Kind of War, quoted with permission of the publisher; Field, NavOps, Korea; Hermes, Truce Tent; Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea; USMA, Korea; MSgt Roy E. Heinecke, “Big Switch,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 11 (Nov 53), hereafter Heinecke, “Big Switch”; Life Magazine, Jul-Aug 53 issues; New York Times, 5 Aug-6 Sep 53; Washington Post, 5 Aug-6 Sep 53.

538 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdDs, Jul-Sep 53; 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, Jul-Aug 53; 1st MAW ComdD, Jul 53; 11thMar, MAG-33 ComdDs, Jul 53; HRS Subject File VE23.2.S8 “CMC Statements on Korean POWs”; HRS Subject File #1 “Prisoners of War—Korea—General”; HRS Subject Files “Prisoners of War—Korea—News Clippings, folders #1, #2, #3”; Korea War casualty cards from Statistical Unit, Casualty Section, Personal Affairs Br, Code DNA, HQMC; MacDonald, POW; Berger, Korea Knot; Clark, Danube to Yalu; T. R. Fehrenbach, This Kind of War—A Study in Unpreparedness (New York: The Macmillan Co., 1963), hereafter Fehrenbach, Kind of War, quoted with permission of the publisher; Field, NavOps, Korea; Hermes, Truce Tent; Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea; USMA, Korea; MSgt Roy E. Heinecke, “Big Switch,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 11 (Nov 53), hereafter Heinecke, “Big Switch”; Life Magazine, Jul-Aug 53 issues; New York Times, 5 Aug-6 Sep 53; Washington Post, 5 Aug-6 Sep 53.

Between August 1950, the month that the first Marine was taken prisoner and July 1953, when 18 Marine infantrymen were captured in final rushes by the CCF, a total of 221 U.S. Marines became POWs.539 The majority of them—nearly 90 percent—ultimately returned. After the conclusion of hostilities, Marine POWs were among the UNC fighting men returned in Operation BIG SWITCH.

Between August 1950, when the first Marine was taken prisoner, and July 1953, when 18 Marine infantrymen were captured in the final rushes by the CCF, a total of 221 U.S. Marines became POWs.539 The majority of them—almost 90 percent—eventually returned. After the fighting ended, Marine POWs were among the UNC soldiers returned in Operation GAME CHANGER.

539 Marine Corps prisoners, including their unit designations and date of release (or death), are listed in MacDonald, POW, pp. 249–273.

539 Marine Corps prisoners, along with their unit designations and release (or death) dates, can be found in MacDonald, POW, pp. 249–273.

The new mission of the 1st Marine Division, with the cease-fire, called for organization of the Post Armistice Battle Positions and establishment of a No-Pass Line approximately 200 yards south of the Demilitarized Zone boundary. In addition to maintaining a defensive readiness posture for full-scale operations if hostilities400 resumed, the Marine division was charged with control of the Munsan-ni area and assisting in repatriation of prisoners of war. Obviously, since the Panmunjom release point for receiving the POWs was located in the Marine zone of action, the division—as in the earlier LITTLE SWITCH prisoner exchange—would play a major part in the final repatriation.

The new mission of the 1st Marine Division, following the cease-fire, involved organizing the Post Armistice Battle Positions and setting up a No-Pass Line about 200 yards south of the Demilitarized Zone boundary. Besides staying ready for full-scale operations if fighting started again, the Marine division was responsible for managing the Munsan-ni area and helping with the repatriation of prisoners of war. Clearly, since the Panmunjom release point for receiving the POWs was in the Marine's area of operations, the division—just like in the earlier Small toggle prisoner exchange—would play a key role in the final repatriation.

With the armistice and ending of the war expected almost daily, the Munsan-ni Provisional Command was activated and reorganized in June. Once again, the 1st Marine Division was responsible for the United Nations Personnel and Medical Processing Unit, organized along lines similar to those used during the preliminary exchange. The division inspector, Colonel Albert F. Metze, was designated Processing Unit Commander. Sections under his direction were staffed by Marine and naval personnel. The normal command structure was reinforced by special engineer, medical, interpreter, food service, chaplain, security, signal, supply, and motor transport teams. Planning for the project, like all military operations, was thorough and continuous.

With the ceasefire and end of the war expected almost any day, the Munsan-ni Provisional Command was activated and reorganized in June. Once again, the 1st Marine Division was responsible for the United Nations Personnel and Medical Processing Unit, set up similarly to how it was during the initial exchange. The division inspector, Colonel Albert F. Metze, was appointed as the Processing Unit Commander. Sections under his management were staffed by Marine and naval personnel. The typical command structure was bolstered by specialized teams for engineering, medical support, interpretation, food service, chaplaincy, security, communications, supply, and motor transport. Planning for the project, like all military operations, was meticulous and ongoing.

As in April, the Munsan-ni Provisional Command assumed responsibility for handling the UN repatriation at Panmunjom as well as supervision of the receiving and processing of ROKA personnel. Brigadier General Ralph M. Osborne, USA, was placed in charge of the command, with headquarters at the United Nations Base Camp. The RCT landing exercise for the 1st Marines, scheduled in July, was cancelled because of shipping commitments for Operation BIG SWITCH, as the Navy Amphibious Force readied itself for the repatriation of prisoners. By the end of July, the 1st Marine Division was supporting “approximately 42,400 troops with Class I [rations] and 48,600 with Class III [petroleum products] due to the influx of units and personnel participating in Operation BIG SWITCH.”540

As in April, the Munsan-ni Provisional Command took charge of managing the UN repatriation at Panmunjom and overseeing the receiving and processing of ROKA personnel. Brigadier General Ralph M. Osborne, USA, was assigned to lead the command, with headquarters at the United Nations Base Camp. The RCT landing exercise for the 1st Marines, planned for July, was canceled due to shipping commitments for Operation BIG SWITCH, as the Navy Amphibious Force prepared for the repatriation of prisoners. By the end of July, the 1st Marine Division was supporting “approximately 42,400 troops with Class I [rations] and 48,600 with Class III [petroleum products] due to the influx of units and personnel involved in Operation BIG SWITCH.”540

540 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-134.

540 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-134.

Several days before the exchange, however, it became evident that the old site of the Gate to Freedom used in the April exchange would have to be abandoned. It was found inadequate to handle the larger number of returning prisoners—approximately 400 daily—to be processed in the new month-long operation. The new site, Freedom Village, near Munsan-ni contained an old Army warehouse which was renovated by the 1st Division engineers and transformed401 into the 11th Evacuation Hospital where the UN Medical and Processing Unit was located. Members of the division Military Police Company provided security for the exchange area. Marines from practically every unit of the division were assigned duties at the United Nations Processing Center. As General Clark, UNC Commander later recalled:

Several days before the exchange, it became clear that the old location of the Gate to Freedom used during the April exchange would need to be abandoned. It was deemed inadequate to manage the larger number of returning prisoners—about 400 each day—who were to be processed in the new month-long operation. The new site, Freedom Village, near Munsan-ni, included an old Army warehouse that was renovated by the 1st Division engineers and turned into the 11th Evacuation Hospital, where the UN Medical and Processing Unit was based. Members of the division's Military Police Company provided security for the exchange area. Marines from almost every unit in the division were assigned tasks at the United Nations Processing Center. As General Clark, UNC Commander, later recalled:

Preparations for Big Switch were necessarily elaborate. At Munsan we had a huge warehouse stocked high with clothing, blankets, medical equipment and other supplies for the returning POWs. At Freedom Village nearby we had a complete hospital unit ready. It was one of the Mobile Army Surgical Hospitals (MASH) which had done such magnificent work close to the front through most of the war.541

Preparations for Big Switch were quite extensive. At Munsan, we had a large warehouse filled with clothing, blankets, medical equipment, and other supplies for the returning POWs. At Freedom Village nearby, we set up a fully equipped hospital unit. It was one of the Mobile Army Surgical Hospitals (MASH) that had done amazing work near the front lines throughout much of the war.541

541 Clarke, Danube to Yalu, pp. 298–299.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Clarke, Danube to Yalu, pp. 298–299.

On 5 August, the first day of BIG SWITCH, Colonel Metze took a final look around the processing center. Readiness of this camp was his responsibility. If anyone had real understanding of a prisoner’s relieved and yet shaken reaction to new freedom it was this Marine Colonel. Chosen by the United Nations Command to build and direct the enlarged Freedom Village, Colonel Metze himself had been a prisoner of war in World War II. He knew from personal experience how men should be treated and what should be done for them early in their new freedom. For many, this was after nearly three long years in Communist prison camps. That morning, as described by an observer:

On August 5th, the first day of BIG SWITCH, Colonel Metze took a final look around the processing center. It was his responsibility to ensure the camp was ready. If anyone understood a prisoner’s mix of relief and anxiety about newfound freedom, it was this Marine Colonel. Chosen by the United Nations Command to build and lead the expanded Freedom Village, Colonel Metze had been a prisoner of war during World War II. He knew from personal experience how men should be treated and what needed to be done for them at the start of their new freedom. For many, this came after nearly three long years in Communist prison camps. That morning, as described by an observer:

Members of his [Colonel Metze’s] command stood by their cubicles, awaiting the first signal. The 129 enlisted Marines, corpsmen, doctors and other UN personnel had held a dress rehearsal only the day before. Everything was ready.542

Members of his [Colonel Metze’s] command stood by their cubicles, waiting for the first signal. The 129 enlisted Marines, corpsmen, doctors, and other UN personnel had held a dress rehearsal just the day before. Everything was ready.542

542 Heinecke, “Big Switch,” p. 44.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Heinecke, “Big Switch,” p. 44.

Fifteen miles northwest another group of Marines assigned to the Provisional Command Receipt and Control section waited almost in the shadow of the famous “peace pagoda” at Panmunjom. UNC receiving teams, each headed by a Marine Corps major, “watched the road to the north for the first sign of a dust cloud which would herald the approach of the Communist convoy.”543 The United Nations POWs had been assembled at Kaesong and held there in several groups, preparatory to the return. The exchange agreement had specified that the repatriation would begin at 0900. Precisely402 at 0855 the Communist convoy, led by three Russian-made jeeps, each carrying one CCF and two NKPA officers, moved out from the Communist side of the peace corridor. Trucks and ambulances followed the jeeps.

Fifteen miles northwest, another group of Marines assigned to the Provisional Command Receipt and Control section waited almost in the shadow of the famous “peace pagoda” at Panmunjom. UNC receiving teams, each led by a Marine Corps major, “watched the road to the north for the first sign of a dust cloud which would signal the approach of the Communist convoy.”543 The United Nations POWs had been gathered at Kaesong and held there in several groups, getting ready for their return. The exchange agreement specified that the repatriation would start at 0900. Exactly402 at 0855, the Communist convoy, led by three Russian-made jeeps, each carrying one CCF and two NKPA officers, moved out from the Communist side of the peace corridor. Trucks and ambulances followed the jeeps.

543 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

As they approached the exchange site, “a Marine officer bellowed the familiar naval command, ‘Marines, man your stations!’”544 Rosters of the UNC prisoners in the trucks and ambulances were then presented to the Marine team captains who checked the lists. As they called the names, “thin, wan, but smiling men shuffled from the trucks to the medical tents.”545

As they got closer to the exchange location, “a Marine officer shouted the familiar naval command, ‘Marines, take your positions!’”544 Lists of the UNC prisoners in the trucks and ambulances were then given to the Marine team captains, who reviewed the lists. As they called out names, “thin, frail, but smiling men walked from the trucks to the medical tents.”545

544 Ibid., p. 45.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 45.

545 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Official receipt of the POWs at Panmunjom was by the Munsan-ni Provisional Command Receipt and Control Officer, assisted by 35 officers and enlisted men from the 1st Marine Division. After their screening by medical officers, UN returnees not in need of immediate medical aid were transferred by ambulance to Freedom Village at Munsan-ni for further processing. Helicopter priority went to litter patients too weak to travel by ambulance. POWs requiring prompt treatment were loaded aboard the HMR-161 carriers and flown to the 11th Evacuation Hospital at Freedom Village.

Official receipt of the POWs at Panmunjom was handled by the Munsan-ni Provisional Command Receipt and Control Officer, with help from 35 officers and enlisted personnel from the 1st Marine Division. After being screened by medical officers, UN returnees who didn't need immediate medical care were taken by ambulance to Freedom Village at Munsan-ni for further processing. Helicopter priority was given to litter patients who were too weak to travel by ambulance. POWs needing urgent treatment were loaded onto the HMR-161 carriers and flown to the 11th Evacuation Hospital at Freedom Village.

Seriously injured men were transferred directly to the Inchon hospital ships for embarkation to the United States, or were air-evacuated to Japan. South Korean repatriates were processed and went their way to freedom through nearby Liberty Village, the ROK counterpart of Freedom Village. A huge map was used to check progress of the POW convoys en route from Panmunjom to Freedom Village. The departure of ambulances and helicopters from Panmunjom was radioed ahead to Freedom Village, where medical personnel and vehicles lined the landing mat.

Seriously injured men were taken directly to the Inchon hospital ships for transfer to the United States, or were airlifted to Japan. South Korean repatriates were processed and made their way to freedom through nearby Liberty Village, the ROK equivalent of Freedom Village. A large map was used to track the progress of the POW convoys traveling from Panmunjom to Freedom Village. The departure of ambulances and helicopters from Panmunjom was communicated in advance to Freedom Village, where medical staff and vehicles were ready on the landing pad.

At Munsan-ni, the newly-freed men received a more thorough physical exam and the rest of their processing. Here they were again screened by medical officers to determine their physical condition. Able-bodied POWs were escorted to the personnel data section where necessary administrative details were recorded and their military records brought up to date. Those medically cleared were available for press interviews. New clothing issue, individually tailored, probably as much as anything emphasized to a prisoner that his particular Korean War was over. And nearly all of them found403 news546 awaiting them in letters from home. When all basic details were completed, returnees went into the recreation and refreshment section. Commonplace iced tea, coffee, ice cream (the favorite), milk, sandwiches, cigarettes, and the latest periodicals were luxuries. In their weakened condition, the POWs could be served only light fare; the big steaks would come later.

At Munsan-ni, the newly-freed men underwent a more thorough physical exam and completed the rest of their processing. They were screened again by medical officers to assess their physical condition. Fit POWs were taken to the personnel data section where necessary administrative details were recorded and their military records updated. Those who were medically cleared were available for press interviews. Receiving new clothing, individually tailored, likely signified to a prisoner that his specific Korean War experience was over. Almost all of them found403 news546 waiting for them in letters from home. Once all basic details were taken care of, returnees moved to the recreation and refreshment section. Basic iced tea, coffee, ice cream (the favorite), milk, sandwiches, cigarettes, and the latest magazines were available as treats. In their weakened state, the POWs could only be served light meals; the big steaks would come later.

546 For at least two Marines their return home was news in itself. Captain Paul L. Martelli, VMF-323, had been reported KIA. First Lieutenant Robert J. O’Shea, of division headquarters, the son of Marine Brigadier General George J. O’Shea (Ret), had also been thought dead by his family. He had been reported missing in July 1951 and had not been carried on the official POW list released the following December.

546 For at least two Marines, coming home was news in itself. Captain Paul L. Martelli, VMF-323, had been reported killed in action. First Lieutenant Robert J. O’Shea, from division headquarters and the son of Marine Brigadier General George J. O’Shea (Ret), had also been believed dead by his family. He had been reported missing in July 1951 and had not been included on the official POW list released the following December.

The first Marine and fifth man in the processing line on the initial day, 5 August, was Private First Class Alfred P. Graham, Jr., of H/3/5. Although too weak to enter the press room, the 21-year-old repatriate told newsmen later in Tokyo of being fed a diet of cracked corn during his prison camp stay and of being forced to carry firewood 11 miles each day. The second Marine returned that day, and the 34th man to enter Freedom Village, was Sergeant Robert J. Coffee, of the 1st Signal Battalion. Captured in November 1950, he had been wounded just before being taken prisoner and had received little medical treatment. Like other returnees, Coffee stated that the treatment had been very poor while he was in the hands of the North Koreans but that it had improved somewhat after he was turned over to the Chinese.

The first Marine and fifth person in the processing line on the initial day, August 5, was Private First Class Alfred P. Graham, Jr., from H/3/5. Although he was too weak to enter the press room, the 21-year-old repatriate later shared with reporters in Tokyo that he was fed a diet of cracked corn during his time in the prison camp and was forced to carry firewood for 11 miles each day. The second Marine to return that day, and the 34th person to enter Freedom Village, was Sergeant Robert J. Coffee from the 1st Signal Battalion. Captured in November 1950, he had been wounded just before being taken prisoner and had received minimal medical treatment. Like other returnees, Coffee mentioned that the treatment was very poor while he was in North Korean custody, but it improved somewhat after he was handed over to the Chinese.

Third and last Marine to come through the line was Private First Class Pedron E. Aviles, previously with the Reconnaissance Company of Headquarters Battalion. Knocked unconscious with a rifle butt while battling the enemy on a patrol on 7 December 1952, he regained consciousness to find himself a prisoner of the CCF.

Third and last Marine to come through the line was Private First Class Pedron E. Aviles, who was previously part of the Reconnaissance Company of Headquarters Battalion. He was knocked out with a rifle butt while fighting the enemy on a patrol on December 7, 1952, and when he came to, he found himself a prisoner of the CCF.

On the second day, three more USMC infantrymen traveled that final road to freedom. They were Private First Class Francis E. Kohus, Jr., of A/1/7; Corporal Gethern Kennedy, Jr., I/3/1; and Private First Class Bernard R. Hollinger, H/3/5. Like the preceding three, their stories bore a similar pattern: usually they had been captured only after having been wounded or clubbed unconscious. As with other UNC prisoners being released daily, they told of the physical cruelty of their North Korean captors and the mental strain under the Chinese. Observers noted that many of the men released this second day were in much poorer physical condition than the initial returnees. In fact, one ROK prisoner was found to have died404 in an ambulance while en route to Liberty Village.

On the second day, three more USMC infantrymen made their final journey to freedom. They were Private First Class Francis E. Kohus, Jr., of A/1/7; Corporal Gethern Kennedy, Jr., I/3/1; and Private First Class Bernard R. Hollinger, H/3/5. Like the first three, their stories followed a similar pattern: they were usually captured only after being injured or knocked out. Like other UNC prisoners released daily, they recounted the physical abuse from their North Korean captors and the mental pressure from the Chinese. Observers noted that many of the men released on this second day were in much worse physical shape than the initial returnees. In fact, one ROK prisoner was found to have died404 in an ambulance on the way to Liberty Village.

Mostly the repatriates asked questions about their old outfits: “Do you know if any of the other guys on the outpost got back off the hill?” and “Did we finally take the damn thing?” “Where’s the 24th Division now?”547

Mostly the returnees asked questions about their old outfits: “Do you know if any of the other guys at the outpost made it back down?” and “Did we finally take that damn thing?” “Where’s the 24th Division now?”547

547 HRB Subject File: “#1, ‘Prisoners Of War—Korea—General,’” HQMC Div Info release, n.d., n.t.

547 HRB Subject File: “#1, ‘Prisoners Of War—Korea—General,’” HQMC Div Info release, n.d., n.t.

Technical Sergeant Richard E. Arnold was one of the two Marine combat correspondents at Freedom Village during BIG SWITCH. He described his impressions of the returning men—in some cases, coming home after 30 months’ confinement in North Korean POW camps, and others, as little as 30 days:

Technical Sergeant Richard E. Arnold was one of the two Marine combat correspondents at Freedom Village during BIG SWITCH. He shared his thoughts on the returning men—some had been home after 30 months of confinement in North Korean POW camps, while others had been away for just 30 days:

All are relieved and some a little afraid ... It’s their first hour of freedom, and most tell you that they can still hardly believe it’s true. Some are visibly shaken, some are confused—and all are overwhelmed at the thought of being free men once again.548

All are relieved and some feel a bit scared... It’s their first hour of freedom, and most say they can barely believe it’s real. Some are clearly shaken, some are confused—and all are overwhelmed by the idea of being free men again.548

548 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

As in prison life everywhere, the POWs told of the hated stool pigeons, the so-called “progressives.” These were the captives who accepted (or appeared to accept) the Communist teachings and who, in turn, were treated better than the “reactionary” prisoners who resisted the enemy “forced feeding” indoctrination. Continued the Marine correspondent:

As in prison life everywhere, the POWs talked about the despised informers, the so-called “progressives.” These were the captives who accepted (or seemed to accept) the Communist beliefs and, in return, were treated better than the “reactionary” prisoners who resisted the enemy’s indoctrination tactics. Continued the Marine correspondent:

They don’t talk much. When they do, it’s ... mainly of progressives and reactionaries—the two social groups of prisoner life under the rule of Communism, the poor chow and medical care, and of the desire to fight Communism again.

They don’t say much. When they do, it’s mostly about progressives and reactionaries—the two social groups in prison life under Communist rule, the terrible food and medical care, and the desire to fight Communism again.

When you ask, they tell you of atrocities committed during the early years of the war with a bitterness of men who have helplessly watched their friends and buddies die. Of forced marches, the bitter cold, and the endless political lectures they were forced to attend.549

When you ask, they share stories of the horrific things that happened in the early years of the war, with a bitterness that comes from watching their friends and comrades die helplessly. They talk about forced marches, the freezing cold, and the constant political lectures they had to sit through.549

549 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

One of the last—possibly the last—Marine captured by the Chinese was Private First Class Richard D. Johnson, of G/3/1. The 20-year-old machine gunner had been in the final battle of the war, the Boulder City defense, and was taken 25 July, just two days before the signing of the truce. Private First Class Johnson was returned the 19th day of the exchange. Another Marine seized in405 that same action was Private First Class Leonard E. Steege, H/3/7. As he entered the gate, he momentarily shook up Corporal James E. Maddell, a military policeman on duty at Freedom Village. Maddell said the last time he saw Steege was during the fighting for the outpost. “He was a dead Marine then,” Maddel said, “but I guess it was just a case of mistaken identity.”550

One of the last—possibly the last—Marines captured by the Chinese was Private First Class Richard D. Johnson from G/3/1. The 20-year-old machine gunner had fought in the last battle of the war, the Boulder City defense, and was taken on July 25, just two days before the truce was signed. Private First Class Johnson was returned on the 19th day of the exchange. Another Marine captured in405 the same action was Private First Class Leonard E. Steege from H/3/7. When he entered the gate, he briefly surprised Corporal James E. Maddell, a military policeman on duty at Freedom Village. Maddell said the last time he saw Steege was during the fighting for the outpost. “He was a dead Marine then,” Maddell said, “but I guess it was just a case of mistaken identity.”550

550 Heinecke, “Big Switch,” p. 48.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Heinecke, “Big Switch,” p. 48.

Captain Jesse V. Booker of Headquarters Squadron 1, the first Marine POW of the war, who had been captured on 7 August 1950, was also one of the earliest MAW personnel released. Booker and First Lieutenant Richard Bell, VMF-311, were returned to UNC jurisdiction on 27 August, the first Marine aviators to be sent back.

Captain Jesse V. Booker of Headquarters Squadron 1, the first Marine POW of the war, who was captured on August 7, 1950, was also one of the earliest MAW personnel to be released. Booker and First Lieutenant Richard Bell from VMF-311 were returned to UNC jurisdiction on August 27, the first Marine aviators to be sent back.

In addition to the regular issue of Marine utilities, gold naval aviator’s wings, donated by 1st MAW fliers, were pinned on the chests of returning pilots by Wing General Megee and Division General Pate. Also welcoming Marine returnees at Freedom Village were Brigadier General Verne J. McCaul, the new Assistant Wing Commander; General Burger, ADC; and Colonel Metze, who also “found time during the busy days to greet and talk with every Marine and Navy Corpsman who passed through.”551 Among those dignitaries552 present for the occasion were General Taylor, EUSAK CG; General Clarke, I Corps Commander; Secretary of the Army, Robert T. Stevens; and various U.S. senators.

In addition to the usual issue of Marine utilities, gold naval aviator wings, donated by 1st MAW pilots, were pinned on the chests of returning pilots by Wing General Megee and Division General Pate. Also welcoming Marine returnees at Freedom Village were Brigadier General Verne J. McCaul, the new Assistant Wing Commander; General Burger, ADC; and Colonel Metze, who also took the time during the busy days to greet and chat with every Marine and Navy Corpsman who passed through. 551 Among those dignitaries 552 present for the occasion were General Taylor, EUSAK CG; General Clarke, I Corps Commander; Secretary of the Army, Robert T. Stevens; and various U.S. senators.

551 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 53, App. VI, p. 12.

551 1stMarDiv ComdD, Aug 53, App. VI, p. 12.

552 As the exchange got underway, General Mark Clark was on a trip to the U.S. Unable to greet the returning prisoners, as he had at LITTLE SWITCH, the UNC Commander had a welcoming letter waiting for each repatriate. A booklet especially prepared for returning POWs which contained a quick fill-in on world news and sports events they may have missed as prisoners was also given each returnee. Washington Post, dtd 5 Aug 53, p. 3.

552 As the exchange began, General Mark Clark was traveling in the U.S. He couldn't meet the returning prisoners, like he did at LITTLE SWITCH, but he had a welcome letter ready for each repatriate. Each returnee also received a booklet specifically made for returning POWs, which included a brief update on world news and sports events they might have missed while in captivity. Washington Post, dtd 5 Aug 53, p. 3.

During August enlisted POWs were recovered in large numbers. Officers, generally, did not arrive at Kaesong—the first step to Panmunjom—until about 21 August. After that date they were gradually returned to friendly control.

During August, a significant number of enlisted POWs were recovered. Officers typically didn't reach Kaesong—the first step to Panmunjom—until around August 21. After that date, they were gradually returned to friendly control.

Even as late as 26 August there was considerable concern over the fate of hundreds of Allied officers not yet repatriated. Some early returning officers told of colonels, majors and captains who had been sentenced up to ten years for forming “reactionary groups” in camp. One field grade officer had been sentenced to a long prison term on406 the eve of the armistice.553 A similar thing nearly happened to Captain John P. Flynn, VMF(N)-513, long a thorn in the side of his Communist captors. Like a number of UNC airmen falsely charged with waging germ warfare, he vigorously denounced these allegations. “Even as late as the end of August the Marine was threatened with nonrepatriation, and his experience formed the basis for an episode in the novel A Ride to Panmunjom.”554

Even as late as August 26, there was significant worry about the fate of hundreds of Allied officers who still hadn't been sent home. Some officers who returned early shared stories of colonels, majors, and captains who received sentences of up to ten years for creating "reactionary groups" in the camp. One high-ranking officer was given a long prison sentence on406 the eve of the armistice.553 A similar situation almost happened to Captain John P. Flynn, VMF(N)-513, who had long been a thorn in the side of his Communist captors. Like several UNC airmen falsely accused of engaging in germ warfare, he strongly refuted these claims. “Even at the end of August, the Marine faced threats of being non-repatriated, and his experience inspired an episode in the novel A Ride to Panmunjom.”554

553 HRS Subject File: “#1. “PRISONERS OF WAR—Korea—General,” Washington News article, dtd 26 Aug 53 from Panmunjom, “Officers’ Fate Worries Army,” by Jim G. Lucas.

553 HRS Subject File: “#1. “PRISONERS OF WAR—Korea—General,” Washington News article, dated August 26, 1953, from Panmunjom, “Officers’ Fate Worries Army,” by Jim G. Lucas.

554 MacDonald, POW, p. 225.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 225.

Between 5 August-6 September, 3,597 U.S. servicemen were returned during Operation BIG SWITCH, including 129 ground and 28 air Marines. This 157 figure represents a total of 42 officers and 115 enlisted repatriated during this second and final POW exchange. Of the 27 Naval personnel freed, at least 6 were hospital corpsmen serving with the 1st Marine Division when they were taken. Counting the 157 Marines released in Operation BIG SWITCH and the 15 wounded POWs sent back in April, a total of 172 division and wing Marines were returned in the two POW exchanges.

Between August 5 and September 6, 3,597 U.S. servicemen were returned during Operation Big Switch, including 129 ground and 28 air Marines. This total of 157 includes 42 officers and 115 enlisted personnel repatriated during this second and final POW exchange. Of the 27 Naval personnel freed, at least 6 were hospital corpsmen who were serving with the 1st Marine Division when they were captured. When you add the 157 Marines released in Operation Major Change and the 15 wounded POWs sent back in April, a total of 172 division and wing Marines were returned in the two POW exchanges.

Although the switch took place over a five-week period, 38 Marines, or 24 percent, were not released until late in the proceedings, in September. As one author noted, “It was Communist policy to hold the ‘reactionaries’ ... to the last.”555

Although the switch took place over a five-week period, 38 Marines, or 24 percent, were not released until late in the proceedings, in September. As one author noted, “It was Communist policy to hold the ‘reactionaries’ ... to the last.”555

555 Fehrenbach, Kind of War, p. 651.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Fehrenbach, *Kind of War*, p. 651.

Two of the best-known Marine “reactionaries” who had openly defied their Communist jailers during their entire period of captivity, were then-Lieutenant Colonel William G. Thrash, a VMA-121 pilot, and then-Major John N. McLaughlin, taken POW in November 1950. McLaughlin was released on 1 September and Thrash on 5 September in a group of 275 Americans returned, the largest number for any single day’s transfer since the exchange began. The most famous U.S. prisoner held by the Communists was Major General William F. Dean. Formerly commander of the U.S. Army 24th Division, he had been captured in August 1950 after the fall of Taejon.

Two of the most well-known Marine “reactionaries” who openly challenged their Communist captors throughout their entire time in captivity were then-Lieutenant Colonel William G. Thrash, a VMA-121 pilot, and then-Major John N. McLaughlin, who was taken prisoner in November 1950. McLaughlin was released on September 1, and Thrash on September 5, as part of a group of 275 Americans returned, which was the largest number in a single day's transfer since the exchange began. The most famous U.S. prisoner held by the Communists was Major General William F. Dean. He was formerly the commander of the U.S. Army 24th Division and had been captured in August 1950 after the fall of Taejon.

Ever since Operation BIG SWITCH got under way, every returnee had been asked if he had seen or heard of General Dean. None had. Many UN officers felt—uneasily—that he would probably be the last officer to be sent back. In fact, he emerged from imprisonment on 4 September “to be greeted with cheers at Freedom Village.”556 Major Walter R. Harris and the most senior Marine captured407 during the war, Colonel Frank H. Schwable, later to be the central figure in a Court of Inquiry, were among the last nine Marines returned on 6 September, the final day of the switch. And so, one by one, the last 160 American POWs passed through Panmunjom. All were men marked by the enemy as “war criminals.”

Ever since Operation Big Change started, every returnee was asked if they had seen or heard of General Dean. None had. Many UN officers felt—uneasily—that he would probably be the last officer sent back. In fact, he came out of imprisonment on September 4 “to be welcomed with cheers at Freedom Village.”556 Major Walter R. Harris and the highest-ranking Marine captured407 during the war, Colonel Frank H. Schwable, who later became the central figure in a Court of Inquiry, were among the last nine Marines returned on September 6, the final day of the switch. And so, one by one, the last 160 American POWs passed through Panmunjom. All were men marked by the enemy as “war criminals.”

556 Life Magazine, v. 35, no. 11 (15 Sep 53), p. 42.

556 Life Magazine, v. 35, no. 11 (15 Sep 53), p. 42.

One Army sergeant, who freely admitted he could “never adequately describe how he felt when he knew he was going home”557 recalled those final moments as a newly-freed prisoner:

One Army sergeant, who openly acknowledged he could “never adequately describe how he felt when he knew he was going home”557 recalled those final moments as a newly-freed prisoner:

557 Fehrenbach, Kind of War, p. 651.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Fehrenbach, *A Kind of War*, p. 651.

At 1100 his truck pulled up at Panmunjom, the last convoy of American POWs to be exchanged. A huge, moustached Marine master sergeant walked up beside the truck, called out: “I will call out your last name. You will answer with your first name, middle initial, and Army serial number ...”

At 11:00, his truck arrived at Panmunjom, the final convoy of American POWs to be exchanged. A big, mustachioed Marine master sergeant stepped up next to the truck and shouted, “I will call out your last name. You will reply with your first name, middle initial, and Army serial number ...”

“Schlichter!”

“Schlichter!”

Schlichter [Charles B., Sgt.], barked out his response, and stepped down.

Schlichter [Charles B., Sgt.] shouted his reply and stepped down.

“Sergeant,” the big Marine said gravely, “glad to have you home.”

“Sergeant,” the big Marine said seriously, “happy to have you back.”

“Fella, you don’t know how glad I am,” Schlichter said.558

“Dude, you have no idea how glad I am,” Schlichter said.558

558 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

In the preliminary prisoner exchange, the week-long “LITTLE SWITCH” in April 1953, all of the returned Marine personnel were men who had been wounded at the time of their capture. They were recently-captured POWs, deliberately segregated by the enemy from early captives. All of these home-coming Marines had been captured since May 1952. Generally speaking, they had all been fairly well-treated.

In the initial prisoner exchange, the week-long “Small switch” in April 1953, all of the returned Marine personnel were men who had been injured when they were captured. They were recent POWs, intentionally separated by the enemy from earlier captives. All these returning Marines had been captured since May 1952. Overall, they had been treated fairly well.

During Operation BIG SWITCH, by contrast, 41 Marines were repatriated who had spent nearly three years as Communist prisoners of war. The majority of USMC returnees in this second exchange, however—a total of 91—had been captured relatively recently, in 1952 and 1953, and 25 had been held since 1951.

During Operation GAME CHANGER, on the other hand, 41 Marines were brought back home after spending nearly three years as Communist prisoners of war. However, the majority of USMC returnees in this second exchange—a total of 91—had been captured more recently, in 1952 and 1953, and 25 had been held since 1951.

Throughout Operation BIG SWITCH, the Allied Command transferred a total of 75,799 prisoners (70,159 NKPA and 5,640 CCF) seeking repatriation. The Communist returned 12,757 POWs. In addition to the 3,597 Americans, this total represented 1,312 other UNC troops (including 947 Britons, 228 Turks, and small numbers of Filipinos, Australians, and Canadians) and 7,848 South Koreans.

Throughout Operation BIG SWITCH, the Allied Command transferred a total of 75,799 prisoners (70,159 NKPA and 5,640 CCF) seeking to return home. The Communists sent back 12,757 POWs. In addition to the 3,597 Americans, this total included 1,312 other UNC troops (comprising 947 Britons, 228 Turks, and small numbers of Filipinos, Australians, and Canadians) and 7,848 South Koreans.

The BIG SWITCH exchange went relatively smoothly, marred for a while only by the unruly behavior of some Communist diehard POWs. In a manner reminiscent of their earlier camp riots, the408 Communist POWs put on a blatant propaganda show for the benefit of world newsreel cameras. As the train carrying CCF and North Korean prisoners moved into the Panmunjom exchange point, enemy POWs noisily shouted Communist slogans, defiantly waved Communist flags, and hurled insults at UN forces. Some POWs stripped off their [U.S. provided] uniforms, “tossing them contemptuously to the ground.”559 Others spat in the faces of U.S. supervising officers, threw their shoes at jeep windshields, and sang in Korean and Chinese “We will return in the Fall.”560

The BIG SWITCH exchange went pretty well overall, but it was interrupted for a while by the rowdy actions of some hardline Communist POWs. Similar to their previous camp riots, the 408 Communist POWs put on an obvious propaganda display for the world news cameras. As the train carrying CCF and North Korean prisoners arrived at the Panmunjom exchange point, enemy POWs loudly shouted Communist slogans, defiantly waved Communist flags, and hurled insults at UN forces. Some POWs stripped off their [U.S. provided] uniforms and “tossed them contemptuously to the ground.”559 Others spat in the faces of U.S. supervising officers, threw their shoes at jeep windshields, and sang in Korean and Chinese, “We will return in the Fall.”560

559 Life Magazine, v. 35, no. 7 (17 Aug 53), p. 22.

559 Life Magazine, vol. 35, no. 7 (Aug 17, 1953), p. 22.

560 Metzger comments.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Metzger says.

Marine division and wing elements were designated responsible for the security of nonrepatriated enemy POWs. By terms of the armistice agreement, these were held by UNC custodial forces from India. In commenting on the airlift operations, performed largely by HMR-161, the UNC Commander noted:

Marine division and wing units were assigned the responsibility for the security of non-repatriated enemy prisoners of war. According to the armistice agreement, these prisoners were held by UNC custodial forces from India. While discussing the airlift operations, mainly conducted by HMR-161, the UNC Commander remarked:

We had to go to great lengths to live up to our pledge to Syngman Rhee that no Indian troops would set foot on South Korean soil. Therefore, we set up an airlift operation which carried more than six thousand Indians from the decks of our carriers off Inchon by helicopter to the Demilitarized Zone. It was a major undertaking which just about wore out our helicopter fleet in Korea.561

We went to great lengths to keep our promise to Syngman Rhee that no Indian troops would enter South Korea. So, we organized an airlift operation that transported over six thousand Indians from our carriers off Inchon by helicopter to the Demilitarized Zone. It was a huge task that almost exhausted our helicopter fleet in Korea.561

561 Clark, Danube to Yalu, p. 299.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Clark, Danube to Yalu, p. 299.

One of the recommendations made by military officials after the April LITTLE SWITCH exchange was that all interrogation of returning POWs be done either in America or on board ship en route home, rather than in Tokyo. This system was followed and worked out well. The POWs boarded ships at Inchon, following their clearance at Freedom Village. Interrogation teams, in most cases, completed this major part of their repatriation processing before docking at San Francisco. Two weeks of recuperation, good food and rest aboard ship enabled many POWs to arrive home in far better shape for reunion with their families than they had been in when received initially at Panmunjom.

One of the recommendations made by military officials after the April LITTLE SWITCH exchange was that all interrogations of returning POWs should take place either in America or on the ship headed home, instead of in Tokyo. This system was implemented and it worked well. The POWs boarded ships at Inchon, after being cleared at Freedom Village. Interrogation teams, in most cases, completed this major part of their repatriation processing before arriving in San Francisco. Two weeks of recovery, good food, and rest on the ship allowed many POWs to come home in much better condition for their reunions with their families than they were when they were first received at Panmunjom.

As in LITTLE SWITCH, Marine and Navy personnel were processed by members of the Intelligence Department of Commander, Naval Forces Far East, augmented by officers from other Marine staffs. Marine officers who conducted the shipboard interrogations again included Lieutenant Colonel Fisher, ComNavFE liaison officer, as409 well as Lieutenant Colonel William A. Wood, Major Stewart C. Barber, and First Lieutenant Robert A. Whalen. All returning POWs were queried in depth by counterintelligence personnel about enemy treatment and atrocities, questionable acts committed by that small proportion of our own men whose conduct was reprehensible, and routine military matters. A security dossier was prepared on each prisoner, and all data about him went into his file case. The LITTLE SWITCH reports had indicated earlier—and this was subsequently confirmed—that some U.S. servicemen were definitely marked for further detailed questioning and scrutiny.

As in Small toggle, Marine and Navy personnel were processed by members of the Intelligence Department of Commander, Naval Forces Far East, with additional support from officers from other Marine units. The Marine officers who conducted the shipboard interrogations included Lieutenant Colonel Fisher, the ComNavFE liaison officer, as well as Lieutenant Colonel William A. Wood, Major Stewart C. Barber, and First Lieutenant Robert A. Whalen. All returning POWs were thoroughly questioned by counterintelligence personnel regarding how they were treated by the enemy, any atrocities committed, questionable actions taken by a small number of our own men whose behavior was unacceptable, and standard military matters. A security dossier was created for each prisoner, and all information about him was added to his file. The Small change reports had indicated earlier—and this was later confirmed—that some U.S. servicemen were specifically chosen for further questioning and examination.

Circumstances of Capture562

562 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: HRS Subject File: VE 23.2.S8 “CMC Statements on Korean POWs”; HRS Subject File: “Korea—Korean War—General”; MacDonald, POW; Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea—East-Central Front, v. IV; Matthew B. Ridgway, The Korean War (Garden City: Doubleday & Co., Inc., 1967), hereafter Ridgway, Korean War; Heinecke, “Big Switch.”

562 Unless stated otherwise, the material in this section comes from: HRS Subject File: VE 23.2.S8 “CMC Statements on Korean POWs”; HRS Subject File: “Korea—Korean War—General”; MacDonald, POW; Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea—East-Central Front, vol. IV; Matthew B. Ridgway, The Korean War (Garden City: Doubleday & Co., Inc., 1967), hereafter referred to as Ridgway, Korean War; Heinecke, “Big Switch.”

As the Commandant, General Shepherd, was to testify later during an investigation, “the prisoner of war question had never been a major problem [in the Marine Corps] due to the extremely limited number of Marines taken prisoner.”563 As one returnee at BIG SWITCH bluntly put it: “You fought until they reached you with a bullet or a rifle butt—that was the end.”564

As the Commandant, General Shepherd, was set to testify later during an investigation, “the prisoner of war issue had never been a big problem [in the Marine Corps] because the number of Marines taken prisoner was extremely low.”563 One returnee at GAME CHANGER put it bluntly: “You fought until they got you with a bullet or the butt of a rifle—that was it.”564

563 HRS Subject File: “VE 23.2.S8—CMC Statements on Korean POWs,” CMC Statement dtd 14 Apr 54, p. 2.

563 HRS Subject File: “VE 23.2.S8—CMC Statements on Korean POWs,” CMC Statement dtd 14 Apr 54, p. 2.

564 Heinecke, “Big Switch,” p. 58.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Heinecke, “Big Switch,” p. 58.

Of the 221 U.S. Marines captured during the Korean War, more than half—121—were seized after 20 September 1951. For the Marine Corps this date marked the time when “warfare of position replaced a warfare of movement throughout the remaining 22 months of the conflict in Korea.”565 Both in the X Corps sector in eastern Korea where the 1st Marine Division was located at that time, as well as later on the Korean western front, the Marine Corps was denied its traditional aggressive fighting role. The Marines (along with the rest of the UNC forces) ceased offensive operations, were reduced to making limited attacks, and were under order from higher echelons to “firm up the existing line and to patrol vigorously forward of it.”410566

Of the 221 U.S. Marines captured during the Korean War, more than half—121—were taken prisoner after September 20, 1951. This date signified the shift for the Marine Corps, as “warfare of position replaced warfare of movement for the remaining 22 months of the conflict in Korea.”565 In both the X Corps sector in eastern Korea, where the 1st Marine Division was stationed at the time, and later on the Korean western front, the Marine Corps was denied its usual aggressive fighting role. The Marines (along with the other UNC forces) stopped offensive operations, were limited to small-scale attacks, and were ordered by higher command to “secure the current line and patrol actively in front of it.”410566

565 Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea, v. IV, p. 201.

565 Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea, vol. IV, p. 201.

566 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

The mission of the Marine division thereby evolved into “an aggressive defense of their sector of responsibility” as records duly phrased it. On a larger scale, the nature of the Korean War, from about November 1951 on, reverted to that of July and August,567 characterized primarily by minor patrol clashes and small unit struggles for key outpost positions. This became the pattern for the remainder of the war. It changed only when the decreed mission of an “active defense of its sector” by a UNC unit became this in fact. Normal defense then escalated into sharp, vigorous fighting to retain friendly key ground positions being attacked by the enemy. One American writer, in a discussion of the British defense in depth concept (adopted by the Marine Corps late in the war), went so far as to blame heavy Marine casualties in Korea on EUSAK’s outpost system.568

The mission of the Marine division evolved into "an aggressive defense of their area of responsibility," as the records stated. On a broader scale, the nature of the Korean War, from about November 1951 onward, returned to what it was like in July and August, characterized mainly by minor patrol skirmishes and small unit battles for crucial outpost positions. This became the pattern for the rest of the war. It only changed when the mandated mission of an "active defense of its sector" by a UNC unit became a reality. Normal defense then escalated into intense, vigorous fighting to hold onto key ground positions being attacked by the enemy. One American writer, discussing the British concept of defense in depth (which the Marine Corps adopted late in the war), even went so far as to blame the high Marine casualties in Korea on EUSAK's outpost system.568

567 In July 1951, fighting had quieted down all along the UNC front, as a result of truce talks initiated by the Communists. This conveniently provided the enemy, at that time hard-pressed, a much-needed breathing spell. The lull in ground fighting continued until late August when the truce negotiations were suspended.

567 In July 1951, fighting had calmed down along the UNC front due to truce talks started by the Communists. This conveniently gave the enemy, who was struggling at that time, a much-needed break. The pause in ground fighting lasted until late August when the truce negotiations were put on hold.

568 HRS Subject file “Korea—Korean War—General,” article Washington Times-Herald, dtd 20 Aug 53, by Walter Simmons, p. 27.

568 HRS Subject file “Korea—Korean War—General,” article Washington Times-Herald, dtd 20 Aug 53, by Walter Simmons, p. 27.

Approximately half of the 100 Marines taken prisoner by September 1951—43—had fallen into enemy hands during the last two days of November 1950. They had been part of the ill-fated Task Force Drysdale,569 a composite Royal Marine-USMC-Army convoy that was ambushed by the Chinese en route to the Chosin Reservoir. These facts are relevant to a better understanding of the Commandant’s statement that, traditionally, few Marines become prisoners of war.

Approximately half of the 100 Marines captured by September 1951—43—were taken prisoner during the last two days of November 1950. They were part of the unfortunate Task Force Drysdale,569 a mixed Royal Marine-USMC-Army convoy that was ambushed by the Chinese while heading to the Chosin Reservoir. These details are important for understanding the Commandant’s statement that, traditionally, few Marines become prisoners of war.

569 For further details of this action, see MacDonald, POW, pp. 33–43; Montross and Canzona, USMC Ops Korea—Chosin, v. III, pp. 140–141, 225–235; and Reese, Korea, p. 162.

569 For more details about this action, see MacDonald, POW, pp. 33–43; Montross and Canzona, USMC Ops Korea—Chosin, vol. III, pp. 140–141, 225–235; and Reese, Korea, p. 162.

Overall, the survival rate for Marines taken captive during the Korean War was 87.8 percent. Even for the worst year, 1950, when NKPA treatment was more ruthless and brutal than the CCF (and in any event, for those men longest-held), the Marine survival rate was 75 percent. Marine Corps statistics show that of 221 Marines captured, 194 (43 officers, 151 enlisted) returned, and 27 or 12.2 percent died.570 Only a few Marines were afflicted with “give-up-itis,” the malady that struck countless POWs and took a heavy toll of411 lives. Included among these 194 returnees were the 172 men from the two POW exchanges, as previously noted; plus a group of 18 Marines captured in 1950 who escaped and rejoined USMC units in May 1951; two enlisted men who escaped less than a week after being taken; and two others released by the enemy after less than a month’s captivity.

Overall, the survival rate for Marines captured during the Korean War was 87.8 percent. Even in the worst year, 1950, when the treatment by the NKPA was harsher and more brutal than that of the CCF (and especially for those men held the longest), the Marine survival rate was 75 percent. Marine Corps statistics show that out of 221 Marines captured, 194 (43 officers, 151 enlisted) returned, while 27, or 12.2 percent, died.570 Only a few Marines suffered from “give-up-itis,” the condition that affected countless POWs and took a heavy toll on411 lives. Among these 194 returnees were the 172 men from the two POW exchanges, as mentioned earlier; a group of 18 Marines captured in 1950 who escaped and rejoined USMC units in May 1951; two enlisted men who escaped less than a week after being captured; and two others released by the enemy after being held for less than a month.

570 Records indicate that 3 officers and 18 enlisted died while in captivity. Three officers and 3 enlisted POWs were also presumed to have died. MacDonald, POW, pp. 257–259.

570 Records show that 3 officers and 18 enlisted members died while in captivity. Three officers and 3 enlisted POWs were also presumed dead. MacDonald, POW, pp. 257–259.

In a pure statistical oddity, the survival percentage for both Marine officers and enlisted (as well as the overall return rate) turned out to be the same: 87 percent.

In a pure statistical oddity, the survival rate for both Marine officers and enlisted personnel (as well as the overall return rate) ended up being the same: 87 percent.

Without going into an analysis here of the possible relevant factors, it is interesting to note that 62 percent of all U.S. captured military personnel returned after the Korean War and that roughly 38 percent died while imprisoned.571 During World War II, the death rate for U.S. prisoners held by the Axis powers was approximately 11 percent.

Without going into an analysis here of the possible relevant factors, it’s interesting to note that 62 percent of all U.S. captured military personnel returned after the Korean War and that roughly 38 percent died while imprisoned.571 During World War II, the death rate for U.S. prisoners held by the Axis powers was about 11 percent.

571 The number of American servicemen returned was approximately 4,428 of 7,190 captured during the war. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1966 edition, “Prisoners of War—Korean War,” p. 519B. Earlier DOD “Tentative Final Report of U.S. Battle Casualties in the Korean War,” cited by MacDonald, POW, p. 230, indicated 7,140 Americans were captured, 4,418 recovered, and 2,701 died. Either way, the percentages remain the same.

571 The number of American servicemen who returned was about 4,428 out of 7,190 captured during the war. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1966 edition, “Prisoners of War—Korean War,” p. 519B. An earlier DOD report titled “Tentative Final Report of U.S. Battle Casualties in the Korean War,” referenced by MacDonald, POW, p. 230, stated that 7,140 Americans were captured, 4,418 returned, and 2,701 died. Either way, the percentages remain the same.

Circumstances accounting for the capture of Marines during the Korean War were, as in every war, an occupational hazard. In most cases, prisoners were taken in one of two situations. One occurred when overwhelming numbers of hostile forces suddenly surrounded and overran a small outpost, and either killed or captured a high proportion of its defenders. The second resulted from the well-known increasing accuracy of CCF antiaircraft fire. Halfway through the war it began to take its toll of 1st MAW pilots with similarly predictable results: either death or capture. Simple mischance and the human error of confused directions caused at least two ground Marines to blunder into enemy territory.572

Circumstances that led to the capture of Marines during the Korean War were, like in any war, a part of the job. In most cases, prisoners were taken in one of two situations. One happened when a large number of enemy forces suddenly surrounded and overwhelmed a small outpost, either killing or capturing most of its defenders. The second occurred due to the increasingly accurate antiaircraft fire from the Chinese Communist Forces (CCF). By the middle of the war, it began to have an impact on 1st MAW pilots with similar outcomes: either death or capture. Simple bad luck and human errors from confused directions led at least two ground Marines to accidentally enter enemy territory.572

572 A similar mishap had dire consequences for Major General Dean of the Army. Cut off from his unit, he was attempting to return to the U.S. line. Lacking a compass he walked to the southwest—and thereby into NKPA hands—instead of the southeast where U.S. troops were then heavily engaged in the fierce battle of the Pusan Perimeter.

A similar mishap had serious consequences for Major General Dean of the Army. Cut off from his unit, he was trying to get back to the U.S. line. Without a compass, he walked southwest—and ended up in NKPA hands—instead of heading southeast where U.S. troops were heavily involved in the intense battle of the Pusan Perimeter.

A brief review of the Korean War, chronologically, illustrates how some of the men of the 1st Marine Division wound up as prisoners. In the first week of August 1950, leading elements of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade and the 1st MAW air squadrons arrived in Korea. Soon thereafter the Marine Corps was in the thick412 of these early-moving offensives: at the Pusan Perimeter; the September Inchon-Seoul amphibious landings; Fox Hill at Toktong Pass, Yudam-ni, the Task Force Drysdale operation, all in November; and the October-December Chosin Reservoir campaign, including the two-day movement from Hagaru to Koto-ri in early December. Marine infantry, military police, tankers, motor transport personnel, and artillerymen were listed MIA in these operations.

A quick chronological look at the Korean War shows how some of the soldiers from the 1st Marine Division ended up as prisoners. In the first week of August 1950, the initial units of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade and the 1st MAW air squadrons arrived in Korea. Shortly after, the Marine Corps was deeply involved in these early offensives: at the Pusan Perimeter; the September Inchon-Seoul amphibious landings; Fox Hill at Toktong Pass, Yudam-ni, the Task Force Drysdale operation, all in November; and the October-December Chosin Reservoir campaign, which included the two-day movement from Hagaru to Koto-ri in early December. Marine infantry, military police, tankers, motor transport personnel, and artillerymen were reported missing in action during these operations.

Altogether, 79 Marines were captured during the first year. November 1950, when 58 Marines were lost to the enemy, would rank as the most costly month of the entire war in terms of Marines seized in combat. The first air POW, Captain Booker, was shot down 7 August while flying a reconnaissance mission from the USS Valley Forge. (This was the same date that infantrymen of the Marine Provisional Brigade saw their initial heavy fighting in what was then considered only a “police action.”) Captain Booker was to remain the only Marine pilot in enemy hands until April 1951.

Altogether, 79 Marines were captured during the first year. November 1950, when 58 Marines were lost to the enemy, would be the most costly month of the entire war in terms of Marines captured in combat. The first air POW, Captain Booker, was shot down on August 7 while flying a reconnaissance mission from the USS Valley Forge. (This was the same date that infantrymen of the Marine Provisional Brigade experienced their initial heavy fighting in what was then seen as only a “police action.”) Captain Booker would remain the only Marine pilot in enemy hands until April 1951.

One ground Marine captured during the hectic days of August 1950 escaped before ever becoming listed as a casualty. Although Private First Class Richard E. Barnett thus does not technically qualify as a POW statistic, he still holds the distinction of being both one of the first Marine captives and one of the few to escape.573

One ground Marine captured during the chaotic days of August 1950 escaped before he was ever listed as a casualty. Although Private First Class Richard E. Barnett technically doesn't count as a POW statistic, he still holds the distinction of being one of the first Marine captives and one of the few to escape.573

573 A radio-jeep driver, Private First Class Barnett, was returning to his unit when he made a wrong turn and, instead, came upon a group of North Koreans. The enemy fired and halted the vehicle, quickly taking Barnett prisoner. Beaten, searched, and interrogated, the Marine was placed in a heavily-guarded cellar. For several days he was given only a few crackers to eat. On the third night, unaccountably, the Koreans took him along on an attack. As they neared the objective, Barnett noticed that all but one of his NKPA guards had gotten ahead of him. He deliberately fell, throwing a rock in the face of the nearby guard, and raced for safety. Successfully eluding his captors, Private First Class Barnett later rejoined his own forces. MacDonald, POW, pp. 8–10.

573 A radio-jeep driver, Private First Class Barnett, was heading back to his unit when he took a wrong turn and stumbled upon a group of North Koreans. The enemy opened fire, stopping the vehicle and quickly capturing Barnett. Beaten, searched, and interrogated, the Marine was put in a heavily-guarded cellar. For several days, he was given only a few crackers to eat. On the third night, unexpectedly, the Koreans brought him along for an attack. As they got close to the target, Barnett noticed that all but one of his NKPA guards had moved ahead of him. He purposely fell, throwing a rock in the face of the nearby guard, and sprinted away to safety. Successfully escaping from his captors, Private First Class Barnett later rejoined his own forces. MacDonald, POW, pp. 8–10.

Few Marines were taken during 1951. Of the 31 seized throughout the entire year, 13 were from the division and 18 from the wing. The Marines were engaged in antiguerrilla activities until late February when a general advance was ordered by U.S. IX and X Corps to deny positions to the enemy. The 1st Marine Division was committed near Wonju, as part of the IX Corps. A second offensive, Operation RIPPER, was launched in March, and for the next six weeks small inroads were made against CCF forces. Relieved in the Hongchon area the next month by elements of the U.S. 2d and 7th Divisions, the Marines continued to operate as part of the IX Corps. Their mission was to secure objectives north of the 38th Parallel.413 On 21 April the 1st Marine Division launched its attack, on IX Corps order, encountering moderate to heavy resistance. Throughout the first half of 1951, only five Marine infantrymen were captured.

Few Marines were captured in 1951. Out of the 31 taken during the entire year, 13 were from the division and 18 from the wing. The Marines were involved in anti-guerrilla activities until late February when U.S. IX and X Corps ordered a general advance to deny the enemy positions. The 1st Marine Division was deployed near Wonju as part of the IX Corps. A second offensive, Operation RIPPER, was launched in March, and for the next six weeks, small gains were made against CCF forces. Relieved in the Hongchon area the following month by elements of the U.S. 2d and 7th Divisions, the Marines continued to operate as part of the IX Corps. Their mission was to secure objectives north of the 38th Parallel.413 On April 21, the 1st Marine Division launched its attack, following IX Corps orders, encountering moderate to heavy resistance. Throughout the first half of 1951, only five Marine infantrymen were captured.

Truce negotiations, as earlier noted, began at Kaesong on 10 July 1951 and ground fighting slowed. When the Communists broke off the truce sessions in late August General Van Fleet, then EUSAK commander, ordered an offensive by the X Corps to seize the entire Punchbowl. Along with other X Corps divisions, the Marines attacked on 31 August. They secured initial objectives, and then moved north to the Soyang River to seize additional designated objectives. Following the bitter action in the Punchbowl area, the Marines were involved in consolidating and improving their defenses.

Truce negotiations, as mentioned earlier, started in Kaesong on July 10, 1951, and ground fighting slowed down. When the Communists ended the truce talks in late August, General Van Fleet, who was the commander of EUSAK, launched an offensive by the X Corps to take control of the entire Punchbowl. On August 31, the Marines, along with other X Corps divisions, attacked. They achieved their initial objectives and then moved north to the Soyang River to capture more designated targets. After the intense fighting in the Punchbowl area, the Marines focused on strengthening and enhancing their defenses.

As the battle lines became comparatively stabilized in 1951, the enemy began to develop his AA defenses to peak efficiency. Marine pilots engaged in CAS, observation, interdiction, and armed reconnaissance missions began to encounter accurate and intense ground fire.574 Aircraft losses increased, and with them, the number of USMC aviators who fell into enemy hands. More than half of the Marine POWs taken during the year—18 of 31—were on 1st MAW station lists. Captive airmen represented VMF-323, VMF(N)-513, Hedron MAG-33 (Headquarters Squadron 33), VMO-6, VMF-312, VMF-311, and VMA-121.

As the battle lines became relatively stable in 1951, the enemy started to enhance their anti-aircraft defenses to maximum effectiveness. Marine pilots involved in close air support, observation, interdiction, and armed reconnaissance missions began to face accurate and heavy ground fire. Aircraft losses increased, leading to a rise in the number of USMC aviators captured by the enemy. More than half of the Marine POWs taken that year—18 out of 31—were on the 1st MAW station lists. The captured airmen came from VMF-323, VMF(N)-513, Hedron MAG-33 (Headquarters Squadron 33), VMO-6, VMF-312, VMF-311, and VMA-121.

574 One Marine who had conducted volunteer AAA reconnaissance missions over North Korea was Lieutenant Colonel Charles W. May, CO of the 1st 90mm AAAGunBn. In December 1951 he was lost in such a mission—the same flight in which Lieutenant Colonel Thrash, of VMA-121, was captured. MajGen A. F. Binney ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 14 Sep 66.

574 One Marine who took part in volunteer AAA reconnaissance missions over North Korea was Lieutenant Colonel Charles W. May, commander of the 1st 90mm AAAGunBn. In December 1951, he went missing during one of these missions—the same flight where Lieutenant Colonel Thrash from VMA-121 was captured. MajGen A. F. Binney ltr to Hd, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, dtd 14 Sep 66.

The year 1952, like 1950, saw a large number of Marines taken into hostile custody—a total of 70. As the year began, CCF and UNC ground forces had settled down to a bunker warfare system often compared to the trench warfare of World War I. Air activity remained much as it had the preceding year. Air losses decreased, however, with only 11 pilots becoming POWs, in contrast to the 59 infantry Marines captured. In March, the 1st Marine Division moved from the X Corps zone of action on the east-central front to the I Corps western coastal flank. Here the Marines encountered “steadily increasing aggressiveness as the enemy launched larger and more frequent attacks against outpost positions.”575 Probes, patrol414 actions, and aggressive defense of the MLR and its outposts took their toll.

The year 1952, like 1950, saw a significant number of Marines taken into enemy custody—a total of 70. As the year began, CCF and UNC ground forces had settled into a bunker warfare system often likened to the trench warfare of World War I. Air activity remained about the same as the previous year. However, air losses decreased, with only 11 pilots becoming POWs, compared to the 59 infantry Marines captured. In March, the 1st Marine Division moved from the X Corps zone of action on the east-central front to the I Corps western coastal flank. Here, the Marines faced “steadily increasing aggressiveness as the enemy launched larger and more frequent attacks against outpost positions.”575 Probes, patrol actions, and aggressive defense of the MLR and its outposts took their toll.

575 MacDonald, POW, p. 139.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 139.

Enemy pressure reached its height in October, when 41 Marine infantrymen were seized, the second highest number taken in any month during the war. In the COPs Detroit and Frisco defense of 6–7 October, the 7th Marines listed 22 MIA, of whom 13 became POWs, practically all of them being wounded prior to capture. On 26 October, the Communists lunged at 7th Marines COPs Ronson and Warsaw, adjacent to the main battle position, the Hook. In the ensuing action, 27 Marines were “marched, carried, or dragged off the hill and taken into the Chinese lines.”576 Surprisingly, all 27 were recovered alive in the prisoner exchanges the following year.

Enemy pressure peaked in October when 41 Marine infantrymen were captured, the second highest number taken in a single month during the war. In the COPs Detroit and Frisco defense on October 6–7, the 7th Marines reported 22 missing in action, of which 13 became prisoners of war, most of them wounded before capture. On October 26, the Communists attacked the 7th Marines COPs Ronson and Warsaw, which were near the main battle position, the Hook. During the fighting, 27 Marines were “marched, carried, or dragged off the hill and taken into the Chinese lines.”576 Surprisingly, all 27 were recovered alive in the prisoner exchanges the following year.

576 Ibid., p. 149.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 149.

Of the 11 Marine airmen who became statistics on a POW list in 1952, 4 were shot down in an ill-fated 10-day period beginning 6 May. Again, all-too-accurate hostile AA fire was the villain. In similar incidents during the year, two Marines engaged in “good Samaritan” aerial activities became POWs for their efforts. In February, First Lieutenant Kenneth W. Henry, an AO assigned to the Marine detachment aboard the light cruiser USS Manchester, and Lieutenant Edwin C. Moore, USN, whirled off in the cruiser’s HO3S to attempt rescue of a downed Navy fighter pilot, Ensign Marvin Broomhead. In the bright early afternoon, as Henry was maneuvering the helicopter sling, their ship suddenly crashed—apparently from enemy machine gun fire intended for a combat air patrol operating in the vicinity. Two of the three men—Broomhead and Henry—were injured, but managed to drag themselves to a hidden position and waited to be rescued. Instead, they were discovered shortly before midnight by a Chinese patrol.

Of the 11 Marine airmen who ended up on a POW list in 1952, 4 were shot down during a tragic 10-day stretch starting on May 6. Once again, accurate enemy anti-aircraft fire was to blame. In similar events that year, two Marines who were involved in "good Samaritan" rescue efforts also became POWs. In February, First Lieutenant Kenneth W. Henry, an AO assigned to the Marine detachment on the light cruiser USS Manchester, and Lieutenant Edwin C. Moore, USN, took off from the cruiser’s HO3S to try to rescue a downed Navy fighter pilot, Ensign Marvin Broomhead. On a bright early afternoon, while Henry was maneuvering the helicopter sling, their aircraft suddenly crashed—apparently due to enemy machine gun fire aimed at a combat air patrol in the area. Two of the three men—Broomhead and Henry—were injured but managed to crawl to a concealed spot and waited to be rescued. Instead, they were found shortly before midnight by a Chinese patrol.

A similar mishap occurred on 16 May to First Lieutenant Duke Williams, Jr., of VMF-212. Searching for a crashed pilot, his plane was struck by AA and he managed to jump. His parachute blossomed down into the midst of 15 waiting Koreans who had gathered to take him prisoner.

A similar incident happened on May 16 to First Lieutenant Duke Williams, Jr., of VMF-212. While searching for a downed pilot, his plane was hit by anti-aircraft fire and he managed to bail out. His parachute opened right above 15 waiting Koreans who had gathered to capture him.

During the last seven months of hostilities in Korea, from January-July 1953, 41 Marines were captured. These included a VMO-6 pilot and air observer in the little OE-1 spotting planes shot down415 in two separate incidents, plus 39 ground Marines trapped in the vicious outpost struggles of March and July. Except for two Marines who died, the rest were freed a few months after their capture during Operation BIG SWITCH.

During the last seven months of fighting in Korea, from January to July 1953, 41 Marines were captured. This included a VMO-6 pilot and air observer in the small OE-1 spotting planes that were shot down in two separate incidents, along with 39 ground Marines who were caught in fierce battles at outposts in March and July. Aside from two Marines who died, the others were released a few months after their capture during Operation Major Change.

Summarizing it another way, of the 221 Marines captured during the three-year conflict:

Summarizing it another way, out of the 221 Marines captured during the three-year conflict:

— 49 were officers and 172 enlisted;
— 190 were ground personnel and 31 aviators;
— of the 190 ground troops, 19 were officers and 171 enlisted;
— of the 31 aviators, 30 were officer pilots and 1 was enlisted.

— 49 were officers and 172 were enlisted;
— 190 were ground personnel and 31 were aviators;
— of the 190 ground troops, 19 were officers and 171 were enlisted;
— of the 31 aviators, 30 were officer pilots and 1 was enlisted.

The 7th Marines, which was the unit on line at the time of several major CCF attacks, had the highest number of POWs in the division. A total of 70 men, or 59.3 percent577 of the 118 infantry Marines taken, were from the 7th. The record during this 1950–1953 period for the others is as follows: 1st Marines, 15 POWs; 5th Marines, 33; and the division artillery regiment, the 11th Marines, 14. Six pilots from Marine Fighter Squadron 312 found themselves unwilling guests in North Korea. Four other units—VMO-6, VMF-323, VMF-311, and VMF(N)-513—each had five members who served out the rest of the war as POWs.

The 7th Marines, which was the unit on the front lines during several significant CCF attacks, had the most POWs in the division. A total of 70 men, or 59.3 percent of the 118 infantry Marines captured, were from the 7th. The records for the other units during this 1950–1953 period are as follows: 1st Marines, 15 POWs; 5th Marines, 33; and the division artillery regiment, the 11th Marines, 14. Six pilots from Marine Fighter Squadron 312 became unwilling guests in North Korea. Four other units—VMO-6, VMF-323, VMF-311, and VMF(N)-513—each had five members who spent the rest of the war as POWs.

577 Recapitulation of facts from MacDonald, POW, pp. 260–269 and passim.

577 Recap of facts from MacDonald, POW, pp. 260–269 and passim.

The Communist POW Camps578

578 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: MacDonald, POW; Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea—East-Central Front, v. IV; Barclay, Commonwealth; Fehrenbach, Kind of War; Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

578 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: MacDonald, POW; Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea—East-Central Front, vol. IV; Barclay, Commonwealth; Fehrenbach, Kind of War; Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

The Communist POW camp system, under Chinese direction, began in late December 1950. Marines captured in November and December, along with U.S. Army troops, British Commandos, and other Allied personnel, were forced-marched north to Kanggye, not far from the Manchurian border.579 In the bitter cold, while winter howled through North Korea, the column of prisoners limped its way to its final destination, arriving the day after Christmas. Several416 of the group, including Marines, perished during the four-day march—victims of malnutrition, untreated combat wounds, pneumonia, the stinging, freezing wind, and subzero temperatures. Usually, “the Communists moved them [the prisoners] by night, because they feared the United Nations air power which ... ranged over the whole of North Korea.”580

The Communist POW camp system, led by China, started in late December 1950. Marines captured in November and December, along with U.S. Army soldiers, British Commandos, and other Allied personnel, were forced to march north to Kanggye, close to the Manchurian border.579 In the freezing cold, as winter roared through North Korea, the group of prisoners slowly made their way to their final destination, arriving the day after Christmas. Several416 members of the group, including Marines, died during the four-day march—victims of malnutrition, untreated combat wounds, pneumonia, the biting, freezing wind, and subzero temperatures. Typically, “the Communists moved them [the prisoners] at night, because they feared the United Nations air power which ... ranged over the whole of North Korea.”580

579 Although some American prisoners were taken in the summer of 1950, it was not until the late autumn that large numbers of men taken in several major engagements created a need for a permanent prison-camp system. Rees, Korea, p. 330.

579 Although some American prisoners were captured in the summer of 1950, it wasn't until late fall that the significant number of men taken during several major battles led to the need for a permanent prison camp system. Rees, Korea, p. 330.

580 Fehrenbach, Kind of War, pp. 423–424.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Fehrenbach, Kind of War, pp. 423-424.

During the first three months of 1951, a network of POW camps was developed along the southern shores of the Yalu River. Occupants of the forlorn villages were evacuated, and newly captured UNC prisoners moved in. The main camp operation at this time was in the Kanggye area. This was a temporary indoctrination center established in October 1950 before the development of regular POW camps. (For various CCF camp locations, see Map 34.) Ultimately a group of a half dozen or so permanent camps were developed northeast of Sinuiju, along a 75-mile stretch of the Yalu.

During the first three months of 1951, a network of POW camps was set up along the southern shores of the Yalu River. Residents of the abandoned villages were evacuated, and newly captured UNC prisoners moved in. The primary camp operation at this time was in the Kanggye area. This was a temporary indoctrination center established in October 1950 before the regular POW camps were built. (For various CCF camp locations, see Map 34.) Ultimately, a group of about six permanent camps were developed northeast of Sinuiju, along a 75-mile stretch of the Yalu.

By early 1951, Major McLaughlin, a captured Marine staff officer previously attached to X Corps, was senior officer among the Kanggye prisoners which included a heterogeneous collection of U.S. 7th Division soldiers, U.S. Marines, 18 Royal Marine Commandos, and Navy hospitalmen. UN personnel were scattered throughout several farmhouses, with no attempt made to segregate the enlisted and officers. The Chinese designated prisoner squads of 8–12 men, depending on the size of the room to which they were assigned. CCF-appointed squad leaders were those prisoners who appeared more cooperative.

By early 1951, Major McLaughlin, a captured Marine staff officer who had previously been with X Corps, was the senior officer among the Kanggye prisoners, which included a mixed group of U.S. 7th Division soldiers, U.S. Marines, 18 Royal Marine Commandos, and Navy hospital corpsmen. UN personnel were spread out across several farmhouses, with no effort made to separate the enlisted men from the officers. The Chinese organized prisoner squads of 8–12 men, depending on the size of the room they were assigned to. Squad leaders appointed by the CCF were those prisoners who seemed more cooperative.

In direct opposition to orders, Major McLaughlin set about establishing communication between the small scattered POW groups, despite ever-present surveillance. He tried to achieve effective control of the POWs so that a united front of resistance against the enemy could be maintained. At mass indoctrination meetings, held regularly every few days, the Marine officer issued instructions to enlisted personnel through five Marine noncommissioned officers. As one ex-prisoner recalled, the “cold, smoke-filled barn was the locale for wide-spread exchange of information between the many little groups.”581 Daily routine at Kanggye stressed study and political indoctrination. Squad leaders were responsible for lectures and discussions418 on assigned topics in Marxian dialectical materialism. The curriculum was more intense than most college courses. On the other hand, physical treatment of inmates—except for chronic malnutrition and grossly inadequate medical care—at Kanggye was less brutal than at most of the other prisoner compounds.

In direct opposition to orders, Major McLaughlin worked on establishing communication between the small, scattered POW groups, despite constant surveillance. He aimed to exert effective control over the POWs so that a united front of resistance against the enemy could be maintained. At large indoctrination meetings, held regularly every few days, the Marine officer provided instructions to the enlisted personnel through five Marine noncommissioned officers. As one ex-prisoner recalled, the “cold, smoke-filled barn was the setting for widespread exchange of information between the many little groups.”581 The daily routine at Kanggye emphasized study and political indoctrination. Squad leaders were responsible for lectures and discussions418 on assigned topics in Marxist dialectical materialism. The curriculum was more intense than most college courses. On the other hand, the physical treatment of inmates—except for chronic malnutrition and seriously inadequate medical care—at Kanggye was less brutal than at most of the other prisoner compounds.

581 MacDonald, POW, p. 63.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 63.

MAP 34 K. White

MAP 34 K. White

POW CAMPS IN WHICH MARINES WERE HELD

POW CAMPS WHERE MARINES WERE HELD

Interrogations went hand-in-hand with indoctrination. Prisoners were grilled regularly on order of battle, close air support, naval gunfire methods, UN aircraft, weapons, unit locations, and other tactical information. The Chinese were even more interested in the life histories and biographical data of their captives. POWs were required to answer “economic questionnaires” and at frequent intervals compelled to write elaborate self-criticisms of their political attitudes and class backgrounds. The CCF were satisfied only when prisoners—whose original truthful answers had been rejected—revised their own family status and income statistics downward. POWs, being interrogated, often found the Chinese arguing with them over such far-away matters as the prisoner’s parents or his own family annual income and social level.

Interrogations went hand-in-hand with indoctrination. Prisoners were regularly questioned about their order of battle, close air support, naval gunfire methods, UN aircraft, weapons, unit locations, and other tactical information. The Chinese were particularly interested in the life histories and biographical data of their captives. POWs were required to fill out “economic questionnaires” and were frequently forced to write detailed self-criticisms of their political views and class backgrounds. The CCF were only satisfied when prisoners—whose original honest answers had been dismissed—revised their own family status and income information downwards. While being interrogated, POWs often found the Chinese debating with them about distant topics like the prisoner’s parents or their own family annual income and social standing.

In March 1951, after an indoctrination period of about eight weeks, the Kanggye POWs were transferred, and the camp itself was later abandoned. The officers were relocated at Camp 5, Pyoktong, while the majority continued the march westward to the newly opened Camp 1, at Chongsong.

In March 1951, after about eight weeks of training, the Kanggye POWs were moved, and the camp was later shut down. The officers were taken to Camp 5 in Pyoktong, while most of the others continued their march west to the newly opened Camp 1 in Chongsong.

Despite its numerical designation as Camp 5, the Pyoktong compound had been organized two months earlier and was the first of the permanent CCF centers. It became the headquarters of the entire prison-camp system. Approximately 2,000 UNC prisoners were interned here by the early part of the year. They were housed in native huts. New inmates arrived regularly from temporary collection centers in the south, where they had been held for months. Sometimes they were marched to the Yalu during the Korean winter while still wearing their summer fatigues. Pyoktong offered little chance for escape. The compound, situated on a barren peninsula that jutted out into the Yalu Reservoir, was so secure that the Communists did not even surround it with barbed wire or employ searchlights. It was hemmed in on three sides by fast water currents, while the one exit from the peninsula was closely guarded.

Despite being called Camp 5, the Pyoktong compound was set up two months earlier and was the first of the permanent CCF centers. It became the main base for the whole prison-camp system. By early in the year, around 2,000 UNC prisoners were held here, living in makeshift huts. New prisoners came in regularly from temporary collection centers in the south, where they had been kept for months. Sometimes they were forced to march to the Yalu during the harsh Korean winter while still in their summer uniforms. Pyoktong offered little chance to escape. The compound was located on a bare peninsula that extended into the Yalu Reservoir and was so secure that the Communists didn’t even use barbed wire or searchlights. It was surrounded on three sides by swift water currents, and the only way out of the peninsula was heavily guarded.

Conditions were far more severe here than at Kanggye. A starvation diet and complete lack of medical care quickly had their419 inevitable effect. Pneumonia, dysentery, and malnutrition were rampant. The basic diet of boiled corn or millet resulted in associated deficiency diseases, such as beriberi and pellagra. Between 20 and 30 prisoners died daily. Many experts, nonetheless, felt that “if the Chinese during the winter of 1950–51 killed their prisoners by deliberate neglect, the North Koreans who had handled the captives before they became primarily a Chinese responsibility killed them by calculated brutality.”582

Conditions were much harsher here than in Kanggye. A starvation diet and complete lack of medical care quickly took their toll. Pneumonia, dysentery, and malnutrition were widespread. The basic diet of boiled corn or millet led to related deficiency diseases, such as beriberi and pellagra. Between 20 and 30 prisoners died each day. Many experts, however, believed that “if the Chinese during the winter of 1950–51 killed their prisoners through deliberate neglect, the North Koreans who had handled the captives before they became primarily a Chinese responsibility killed them through calculated brutality.”419

582 Rees, Korea, p. 330.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Rees, *Korea*, p. 330.

Although now junior to some Army and Air Force officers, Major McLaughlin was elected by his fellow officer-prisoners to represent them. Recognized by the Chinese as a staunch non-cooperative and dedicated trouble-maker, the enemy concentrated their pressure on the Marine officer—and he was subjected to intimidation, maltreatment, and threats of death.

Although now junior to some Army and Air Force officers, Major McLaughlin was elected by his fellow officer-prisoners to represent them. The Chinese recognized him as a strong non-cooperator and a committed troublemaker, so the enemy focused their pressure on the Marine officer—and he faced intimidation, mistreatment, and death threats.

As they had at Kanggye, the CCF attempted to organize progressive groups to write peace appeals, propaganda leaflets, and articles condemning the United States for the war. Typically, progressive POWs (usually weaker, less resilient members) who went along with the Communist propaganda conditioning, received better rations and treatment. Rugged resisters, on the other hand, could dependably expect to stand a considerable amount of solitary confinement, usually in an unspeakably foul, vermin-infested “hole.” Here a POW was forced to remain in a debilitating, crouched position usually 56 hours or more. Throughout the war a good many Marines were to know this particular enemy treatment. One Marine artilleryman, Second Lieutenant Roland L. McDaniel, tied to a Korean POW in the hole for 10 days, emerged with pneumonia and tuberculosis.

As they did in Kanggye, the CCF tried to organize progressive groups to write peace appeals, propaganda leaflets, and articles condemning the United States for the war. Usually, progressive POWs (who were typically the weaker, less resilient members) who went along with the Communist propaganda conditioning received better rations and treatment. Rugged resistors, on the other hand, could expect to face a significant amount of solitary confinement, often in an incredibly foul, vermin-infested “hole.” In this condition, a POW was forced to stay in a debilitating, crouched position for usually 56 hours or more. Throughout the war, many Marines experienced this specific form of enemy treatment. One Marine artilleryman, Second Lieutenant Roland L. McDaniel, who was tied to a Korean POW in the hole for 10 days, came out with pneumonia and tuberculosis.

In addition to the POW compounds at Pyoktong and Chongsong, other sites where Marines were held were Camp 3, at Changsong (nearby and with a nearly identical name to Camp 1), primarily for enlisted personnel, and at “The Valley.” This was a temporary medical processing center in the Kanggye area. Marine inmates here were often confined to a pig pen. Largely because of the filthy conditions of this camp, the death rate quickly earned the Valley the opprobrious name of Death Valley.

In addition to the POW camps at Pyoktong and Chongsong, other places where Marines were held included Camp 3 at Changsong (which is nearby and has a nearly identical name to Camp 1), mainly for enlisted personnel, and at “The Valley.” This was a temporary medical processing center in the Kanggye area. Marine inmates in this location were often locked up in a pig pen. Due to the filthy conditions of this camp, the death rate rapidly earned the Valley the harsh nickname of Death Valley.

Another cluster of POW camps was located further south. These420 were primarily run by the North Koreans, and were transit camps where prisoners were collected and interrogated before being moved north by truck or on foot to the permanent establishments. Among them were collection centers at Kung Dong and Chorwon, and Camp 10, south of the North Korean Capital Pyongyang. The latter was also known variously as the Mining Camp, the Gold Mine, or Bean Camp—this due to its prevailing diet. At this southernmost Communist camp, POWs were required to dig coal in the nearby mine shafts. Loads of coal were then hauled in small hand carts over icy roads to the camp, a task made more difficult by the prisoners’ skimpy mealtime fare.

Another group of POW camps was situated further south. These420 were mainly operated by the North Koreans and served as transit camps where prisoners were gathered and interrogated before being transported north by truck or on foot to the permanent camps. Among these were collection centers in Kung Dong and Chorwon, as well as Camp 10, located south of the North Korean capital, Pyongyang. The latter was also known by various names like the Mining Camp, the Gold Mine, or Bean Camp—referring to its main diet. In this southernmost Communist camp, POWs had to dig coal in nearby mine shafts. Loads of coal were then transported in small hand carts over icy roads to the camp, a task made even harder by the prisoners’ meager meals.

The most notorious of all the camps, however, was Pak’s Palace,583 the interrogation center near Pyongyang. POWs also called it Pak’s Death Palace for its chief interrogator, a sadistic North Korean officer, Major Pak. Captain Martelli, a F4U fighter pilot from VMF-323 shot down in April 1951, was the first Marine processed through Pak’s, where POWs were continuously threatened and beaten with little or no provocation. Another Marine aviator, Captain Gerald Fink, VMF-312, upon being asked during interrogation here why he had come to Korea won a sentence of several days solitary confinement in the hole for his forthright answer: “to kill Communists.” Second Lieutenant Carl R. Lindquist, also of VMF-312, was the only one of 18 Marine officers captured in 1951 not processed through Pak’s before being sent north.

The most infamous of all the camps, however, was Pak’s Palace, 583 the interrogation center near Pyongyang. POWs also referred to it as Pak’s Death Palace because of its main interrogator, a sadistic North Korean officer, Major Pak. Captain Martelli, an F4U fighter pilot from VMF-323 who was shot down in April 1951, was the first Marine to be processed through Pak’s, where POWs faced constant threats and beatings with little or no reason. Another Marine aviator, Captain Gerald Fink of VMF-312, earned a sentence of several days in solitary confinement for his straightforward answer when interrogated about why he had come to Korea: “to kill Communists.” Second Lieutenant Carl R. Lindquist, also from VMF-312, was the only one of the 18 Marine officers captured in 1951 who was not processed through Pak’s before being sent north.

583 The Secretary of Defense Advisory Committee on Prisoners of War later adjudged Pak’s to have been “the worst camp endured by American POWs in Korea.” MacDonald, POW, p. 104.

583 The Secretary of Defense Advisory Committee on Prisoners of War later determined that Pak’s was “the worst camp experienced by American POWs in Korea.” MacDonald, POW, p. 104.

Gradually the Chinese developed the policy of segregating officer and enlisted personnel. Commenting on this procedure, one British observer offered the following:

Gradually, the Chinese developed a policy of separating officers and enlisted personnel. A British observer commented on this approach:

By this means the lower ranks were deprived of their leaders and for a short time this had a depressing, and generally bad, effect. It was not long, however, before the natural leaders among the rank and file asserted themselves. The standard of leadership naturally varied in different compounds; but in all there was some organization and in some it was highly efficient. It was ... the policy of the Chinese ... to discourage the emergence of thrustful leaders.... Consequently, clandestine rather than open leadership was usual.584

By doing this, the lower ranks lost their leaders, which caused a negative and discouraging effect for a little while. However, it wasn't long before the natural leaders within the group stepped up. The level of leadership varied across different groups, but there was some form of organization in all of them, and in some, it was very effective. It was the Chinese policy to discourage assertive leaders, so secretive leadership was the norm rather than open leadership. 584

584 Barclay, Commonwealth, p. 190.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Barclay, Commonwealth, p. 190.

By midyear, noncommissioned officers were also separated from the enlisted men, in an attempt to better control prisoners. In421 October of 1951 another one of the Yalu River Camps was set up. This was Camp 2, at Pi-chong-ni, which thereafter served as the main officers camp. The next month a POW column of nearly 50 men, including 6 Marines, left Kung Dong for these northern camps on a death march that covered 225 miles in two weeks. During the excruciating march, prisoners had been forced to strip naked and wade across the Chongsong River, a procedure which caused several deaths and cases of frostbite. One British participant, however, recalled that the “Marines banded together during the terrible march, and the Royal Marines were drawn close to the U.S. Marines.”585

By midyear, noncommissioned officers were separated from the enlisted men to better control the prisoners. In 421 October 1951, another Yalu River Camp was established. This was Camp 2, at Pi-chong-ni, which later became the main officers' camp. The following month, a column of nearly 50 POWs, including 6 Marines, departed from Kung Dong for these northern camps on a grueling death march that spanned 225 miles in two weeks. During the painful march, prisoners were forced to strip naked and wade across the Chongsong River, a process that led to several deaths and cases of frostbite. One British participant recalled that the “Marines banded together during the terrible march, and the Royal Marines were drawn close to the U.S. Marines.”585

585 MacDonald, POW, p. 127.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 127.

In December 1951 the Communist and UNC forces exchanged lists of captured personnel. The list of 3,198 American POWs (total UNC: 11,559) revealed that 61 Marines were in enemy hands. Nine others, captured late in the year, were still in temporary collection points and thus not listed. Although Marines represented only a small portion of the total POWs, they were present in most of the nearly dozen regular camps or collection points then in existence. In any event the 1951 POW list586 gave a picture of the growing Communist camp system.

In December 1951, the Communist and UNC forces exchanged lists of captured personnel. The list of 3,198 American POWs (total UNC: 11,559) showed that 61 Marines were in enemy hands. Nine others, captured late in the year, were still in temporary collection points and therefore not listed. Although Marines made up only a small part of the total POWs, they were present in most of the nearly dozen regular camps or collection points that existed at the time. In any case, the 1951 POW list586 provided a glimpse of the expanding Communist camp system.

586 Negotiations broke down at this point. No other list was offered by Communist officials until the first exchange of wounded POWs, 17 months later, in the April 1953 LITTLE SWITCH operation. Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea, v. IV, p. 223.

586 Negotiations fell apart at this point. No other list was provided by Communist officials until the first exchange of wounded POWs, 17 months later, in the April 1953 Tiny Toggle operation. Montross, Kuokka, and Hicks, USMC Ops Korea, v. IV, p. 223.

As 1951 was drawing to an end, the Camp 2 commandant, a fanatical Communist named Ding, ordered UNC prisoners to prepare and send a New Year’s greeting to the commander of the CCF, General Peng Teh-huai. Senior UN officer, Lieutenant Colonel Gerald Brown, USAF, was determined that the prisoners would not sign the spurious holiday message. Major McLaughlin voluntarily organized Marine resistance, and senior officers of other nationality groups followed suit. No greetings were sent. As usually happened, an informer reported the organized resistance and furnished names of the reactionary leaders. The following month, the six ranking officers were sentenced to solitary confinement, ranging from three to six months, for their “subversive activities.”

As 1951 was coming to a close, the Camp 2 commandant, a hardcore Communist named Ding, ordered UNC prisoners to prepare and send a New Year’s greeting to the commander of the CCF, General Peng Teh-huai. Senior UN officer, Lieutenant Colonel Gerald Brown, USAF, was determined that the prisoners would not sign the fake holiday message. Major McLaughlin voluntarily organized Marine resistance, and senior officers from other nationality groups did the same. No greetings were sent. As often happened, an informer reported the organized resistance and provided the names of the dissenting leaders. The following month, the six highest-ranking officers were sentenced to solitary confinement for their “subversive activities,” with terms ranging from three to six months.

The episode marked the first really organized resistance to the Chinese. “Although the principals were subjected to months of solitary confinement, coercion, torture, and very limited rations during the bitterly cold months of early 1952, their joint effort laid the422 foundation for comparatively effective resistance within Camp 2 during the remainder of the war.”587

The episode marked the first truly organized resistance against the Chinese. “Even though the key figures faced months of isolation, coercion, torture, and very limited food during the bitterly cold early months of 1952, their collective effort built the422 foundation for relatively effective resistance within Camp 2 for the rest of the war.”587

587 MacDonald, POW, p. 138.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 138.

In January 1952, Major McLaughlin and the other five officers were removed to begin their long tours of solitary confinement. Although the remaining Marine officers at Pi-chong-ni had “formed a tightly knit group and consulted among themselves on every major issue,”588 the atmosphere within the camp itself became highly charged and strained. Suspicion of informers and opportunists was rampant. The officers at Camp 2 were generally agreed that Marine Lieutenant Colonel Thrash, who arrived in June, was largely responsible for restoring discipline. He issued an all-inclusive order about camp behavior for all personnel which read, in part:

In January 1952, Major McLaughlin and the other five officers were taken away to start their long periods of solitary confinement. Even though the remaining Marine officers at Pi-chong-ni had formed a close-knit group and discussed every major issue among themselves, the atmosphere within the camp became very tense and strained. There was widespread suspicion of informers and opportunists. The officers at Camp 2 generally agreed that Marine Lieutenant Colonel Thrash, who arrived in June, played a big role in bringing back discipline. He issued a comprehensive order about camp behavior for all personnel which stated, in part:

588 Ibid., p. 164.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 164.

Study of Communist propaganda would not be countenanced. If study was forced on them, POWs were to offer passive resistance and no arguments.

Study of Communist propaganda wouldn't be allowed. If they were forced to study it, POWs were to show passive resistance and not engage in arguments.

If prisoners were subject to trial or punishment they were to involve no one but themselves.

If prisoners faced trial or punishment, it only affected them and no one else.

There would be no letters written using any titles or return address which might prove beneficial to the Communists for propaganda value.589

There would be no letters written with any titles or return address that could help the Communists for propaganda purposes.589

589 Ibid., pp. 165–166.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., pp. 165–166.

Expectedly, it was not long before Lieutenant Colonel Thrash’s efforts to influence and organize his fellow officers outraged CCF officials. In September he was removed from the compound, charged with “Criminal Acts and Hostile Attitude against the Chinese People’s Volunteers.” The Marine airman spent the next eight months in solitary. Here he was subjected to constant interrogation, harassment, and duress. On one occasion he was bound, severely beaten, and thrown outside half naked in sub-zero weather. Shock of the severe temperature rendered him unconscious, and he nearly died. Throughout his eight-month ordeal there were demands that he cooperate with the “lenient” Chinese upon his return to the compound.

Expectedly, it didn't take long for Lieutenant Colonel Thrash’s attempts to influence and organize his fellow officers to anger CCF officials. In September, he was taken out of the compound and charged with “Criminal Acts and Hostile Attitude against the Chinese People’s Volunteers.” The Marine airman spent the next eight months in solitary confinement. During this time, he faced constant interrogation, harassment, and pressure. On one occasion, he was tied up, severely beaten, and left outside half naked in sub-zero temperatures. The extreme cold shocked his system, causing him to lose consciousness, and he nearly died. Throughout his eight-month ordeal, there were demands for him to cooperate with the “lenient” Chinese when he returned to the compound.

During 1952, the Communists developed the system of keeping newly-captured Marines (and other UNC troops) apart from those taken prior to January 1952 who had suffered more brutal treatment. Beginning in August, noncommissioned officers were also segregated. They were removed from Chongsong (Camp 1) and taken further423 north along the Yalu to the “Sergeants Camp” (Camp 4) at Wiwon. Although a few Marines had been interned at the Camp 2 Annex, at Obul, from late 1951 on, they were not sent there in any sizable number until mid-1952.

During 1952, the Communists created a system to keep newly captured Marines (and other UNC troops) separate from those taken before January 1952 who had experienced harsher treatment. Starting in August, noncommissioned officers were also separated. They were moved from Chongsong (Camp 1) and taken further423 north along the Yalu to the “Sergeants Camp” (Camp 4) at Wiwon. Although a few Marines had been held at the Camp 2 Annex at Obul since late 1951, they weren't sent there in any large numbers until mid-1952.

Adjacent to a steeply-walled valley, the Obul camp was also known as “No Name Valley.” Although the inmates of the annex were aware of other POWs in the main compound and throughout the valley, they were under heavy guard to prevent contact between the groups. An Air Force officer, the senior member, and Major Harris, the ranking Marine, went about organizing the prisoners in a military manner. In order to exchange information, notes were hidden under rocks at common bathing points or latrines. Messages were baked in bread by POWs on kitchen detail, and songs were loudly sung to convey information. Hospitalized POWs, meanwhile, were held at the Pyoktong (Camp 5) hospital or, in the southern sector, at a second hospital a few miles north of Pyongyang. Other locations where prisoners were confined in 1952 were “Pike’s Peak,” also in the same general southern area, and the Manpo Camp on the Yalu.

Adjacent to a steep-walled valley, the Obul camp was also called “No Name Valley.” Even though the inmates of the annex knew there were other POWs in the main compound and throughout the valley, they were closely guarded to prevent any contact between the groups. An Air Force officer, the senior member, and Major Harris, the highest-ranking Marine, took charge of organizing the prisoners in a military way. To share information, notes were hidden under rocks at common bathing spots or latrines. Messages were baked into bread by POWs on kitchen duty, and songs were sung loudly to relay information. Hospitalized POWs were held at the Pyoktong (Camp 5) hospital or, further south, at another hospital a few miles north of Pyongyang. Other places where prisoners were kept in 1952 included “Pike’s Peak,” also in the same general southern area, and the Manpo Camp on the Yalu.

For POWs incarcerated behind the bamboo curtain, 1952 marked several other developments. It was the year that American airmen began to receive special grilling and threats from their Communist captors. This was in connection with the germ warfare hoax, to be discussed later. It was also the year that Marine POWs at Pi-chong-ni (Camp 2) observed their own traditional 10 November Marine Corps birthday ceremony. Eggs, sugar, and flour were stolen for a cake surreptitiously baked and suitably decorated with the Marine Corps globe and anchor. Another group accomplished the task of bootlegging rice wine. When the special date arrived, the Marine officers toasted the President, Commandant, and Marine Corps and spiritedly sang the National Anthem and Marine Corps hymn. One of the invited guests, Quartermaster Sergeant James Day of the Royal Marines, later recalled the reaction of other prisoners:

For POWs held behind the bamboo curtain, 1952 saw several significant developments. It was the year when American airmen started facing intense questioning and threats from their Communist captors. This was related to the germ warfare hoax, which will be discussed later. It was also the year when Marine POWs at Pi-chong-ni (Camp 2) celebrated their traditional Marine Corps birthday ceremony on November 10. Eggs, sugar, and flour were secretly taken to bake a cake that was decorated with the Marine Corps globe and anchor. Another group managed to brew rice wine. When the special day came, the Marine officers raised a toast to the President, the Commandant, and the Marine Corps, and enthusiastically sang the National Anthem and the Marine Corps hymn. One of the guests, Quartermaster Sergeant James Day of the Royal Marines, later remembered the reactions of the other prisoners:

Firstly some were apprehensive in case of trouble with the Chinese, and its always consequent rash of gaol [jail] victims. Some thought it a little childish, and not worth the trouble of interrupting the daily routine of the place. And I feel that quite a lot were rather envious that the small band of USMC should be able to get together and do this sort of thing quite seriously, quite sincerely, and with no thought of any consequence.590

Firstly, some were worried about potential issues with the Chinese and the inevitable wave of people ending up in jail. Some thought it was a bit childish and not worth disrupting the daily routine of the place. And I sensed that many were quite envious that the small group of USMC could come together and engage in this kind of activity so seriously, so sincerely, and without any concern for the consequences.590

424

424

590 Ibid., p. 190.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 190.

This same month the Chinese staged a “Prisoner of War Command Olympics” at Pyoktong. Although most Marines opposed the idea of participation in the event, because of its inevitable propaganda exploitation by the CCF, the decision rendered by the senior UN officer was that POW athletes would be represented. Much improved quality food was served for the occasion, Communist photographers were everywhere, and a CCF propaganda brochure (with articles written by POW turncoats) was later distributed in Geneva purportedly to show the healthy recreational activities available to UNC prisoners. An Air force pilot, in describing the performance of Major McLaughlin, noted that “his skill as an athlete helped restore the prestige of the officers torn down by the enemy’s propaganda.”591

This same month, the Chinese held a “Prisoner of War Command Olympics” at Pyoktong. While most Marines disagreed with the idea of participating in the event due to its likely propaganda use by the CCF, the senior UN officer decided that POW athletes would take part. Better quality food was served for the occasion, Communist photographers were everywhere, and a CCF propaganda brochure (with articles written by POW turncoats) was later distributed in Geneva, claiming to showcase the healthy recreational activities available to UNC prisoners. An Air Force pilot, describing Major McLaughlin's performance, remarked that "his skill as an athlete helped restore the prestige of the officers undermined by the enemy’s propaganda."591

591 Ibid., p. 195.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 195.

More important, he defied the guards by deliberately circulating among the enlisted men (often younger, impressionable, less mature individuals) to point out lies in enemy propaganda tactics designed to slander the U.S. government and its leaders. The Marine officer also collected names of American POWs held in isolated places who it was suspected the enemy might attempt to hold as hostages at the end of the war—possibly as a bargaining tool for the granting of a seat to Red China in the UN.

More importantly, he challenged the guards by intentionally moving among the enlisted men (often younger, impressionable, less mature individuals) to expose the lies in enemy propaganda tactics aimed at discrediting the U.S. government and its leaders. The Marine officer also gathered the names of American POWs held in remote locations who were suspected to be potential hostages the enemy might try to use at the end of the war—possibly as leverage for getting a seat for Red China in the UN.

During the last year of the war although a number of prisoners were still being captured in some of the most savage attacks unleashed by the enemy, the lot of the average POW had improved. More attention was being paid to the former pitiful medical care. The men were more warmly clad, even though still huddled into filthy, crowded huts. And the monotonous poor chow had improved. Most POWs, although carefully kept from learning developments of the outside world, naturally suspected that some reason lay behind the changes. And so there was: the Communists had no desire to repatriate skeletonized prisoners.

During the last year of the war, even though a number of prisoners were still being taken in some of the most brutal attacks by the enemy, the situation for the average POW had improved. They were getting better medical care than before. The men were dressed more warmly, even though they were still packed into dirty, crowded huts. The bland and poor food had also gotten a bit better. Most POWs, although carefully kept in the dark about what was happening in the outside world, naturally suspected there was a reason for these changes. And there was: the Communists had no interest in sending back emaciated prisoners.

CCF “Lenient Policy” and Indoctrination Attempts592

592 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: MacDonald, POW; Barclay, Commonwealth; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Fehrenbach, Kind of War; Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

592 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: MacDonald, POW; Barclay, Commonwealth; Clark, Danube to Yalu; Fehrenbach, Kind of War; Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

As early in the war as July 1951, the CCF was seeking propaganda benefits out of its so-called “lenient” policy toward captured United425 Nations personnel. Basically, this could be described as “calculated leniency in return for cooperation, harassment in return for neutrality, and brutality in return for resistance.”593 Others have characterized the CCF psychological techniques of indoctrination as monotonous and single-minded “repetition, harassment and humiliation.”594

As early as July 1951 during the war, the CCF was looking to gain propaganda advantages from its so-called “lenient” approach to captured United Nations personnel. Essentially, this could be summed up as “calculated leniency for cooperation, harassment for neutrality, and brutality for resistance.”593 Others have described the CCF's psychological methods of indoctrination as tedious and focused on “repetition, harassment, and humiliation.”594

593 MacDonald, POW, p. 61. One former Marine POW commented: “The ‘lenient policy’ applied to the ‘liberated soldiers,’ who had supposedly been ‘liberated’ from the American capitalists by the Chinese People’s Volunteers. Unless a prisoner accepted this absurd concept, he was a ‘war criminal’ and subject to being treated as such. The North Vietnamese use this same characterization (‘war criminal’) in reference to U.S. POWs when queried by U.S. representatives at the Paris talks.” MajGen John N. McLaughlin ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 17 Jul 70.

593 MacDonald, POW, p. 61. One former Marine POW said: “The ‘lenient policy’ was directed toward the ‘liberated soldiers,’ who had supposedly been ‘freed’ from American capitalists by the Chinese People’s Volunteers. If a prisoner didn’t accept this ridiculous idea, he was labeled a ‘war criminal’ and treated accordingly. The North Vietnamese use the same label (‘war criminal’) for U.S. POWs when asked about them by U.S. representatives at the Paris talks.” MajGen John N. McLaughlin ltr to Dir, MCHist, HQMC, dtd 17 Jul 70.

594 Rees, Korea, p. 337.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Rees, *Korea*, p. 337.

In some respects, it is true that the Chinese treatment of prisoners appeared to be more humane than that of the North Koreans. The latter freely used physical cruelty and torture, to the point of being barbaric.595 Sometimes it appeared that Allied POWs did not receive any harsher treatment from the CCF than did local civilian prisoners.

In some ways, it's true that how the Chinese treated prisoners seemed to be more humane than how the North Koreans did. The latter openly used physical cruelty and torture, to the point of being barbaric.595 Sometimes it seemed like Allied POWs didn't face any harsher treatment from the CCF than local civilian prisoners did.

595 There were, for example, instances when POW columns were being marched north and the NKPA treatment was so rough that “Chinese guards intervened to protect the prisoners from the North Koreans.” MacDonald, POW, p. 43.

595 There were, for example, times when POW columns were marched north, and the NKPA treatment was so harsh that “Chinese guards stepped in to protect the prisoners from the North Koreans.” MacDonald, POW, p. 43.

Whereas the NKPA regularly resorted to physical brutality, the Chinese “introduced a more insidious form of cruelty.”596 Although they used physical violence less often, it was usually more purposeful and combined with deliberate mental pressure. CCF officials announced that treatment of captives would be “fair and lenient,” but that wrongdoers would be publicly punished. Usually this CCF punishment took the form of less drastic methods—solitary confinement, prolonged interrogation, and a reduced diet. Even under this decreed lenient policy, however, no relief parcels were delivered to POWs, nor were any neutral observers ever allowed to inspect the prison camps.

Whereas the NKPA often used physical violence, the Chinese “introduced a more subtle kind of cruelty.”596 Although they relied on physical abuse less frequently, it was usually more calculated and accompanied by intentional psychological pressure. CCF officials claimed that captives would be treated “fairly and leniently,” but that offenders would be punished publicly. Typically, this CCF punishment involved less severe methods—solitary confinement, lengthy interrogations, and limited food. Even with this so-called lenient policy, no care packages were sent to POWs, nor did any neutral observers ever get to check the prison camps.

596 Ibid., p. 60.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 60.

In any event, the Chinese were considerably more effective than the NKPA in their intelligence activities. Often their skilled interrogators were officers who spoke excellent English. Occasionally, they had even attended such U.S. schools as the University of Chicago and had considerable insight into American psychology, customs, and values—even slang. Interrogation sessions usually employed recording devices and sometimes were further equipped with one-way mirrors. One Marine, subjected to frequent interrogation, was kept426 awake by the Chinese who slapped his face and blew smoke in his eyes.

In any case, the Chinese were much more effective than the NKPA in their intelligence operations. Often, their skilled interrogators were officers who spoke excellent English. Sometimes, they had even attended U.S. schools like the University of Chicago and had a deep understanding of American psychology, customs, and values—even slang. Interrogation sessions typically used recording devices and were sometimes equipped with one-way mirrors. One Marine, who faced frequent interrogations, was kept426 awake by the Chinese, who slapped his face and blew smoke in his eyes.

From early 1951 to the end of the war UNC prisoners were subjected to a systematic attempt at mass conversion to Communism. This intensive indoctrination effort—like the riots of Communist prisoners in Allied POW camps and the CCF germ warfare fabrications—was designed to gain a propaganda advantage. From highest-ranking officer to lowly private, no one was immune to this thought-reform process. General Dean, prize Communist captive, who was subject to three years of intense Marxist-Leninist indoctrination, upon his release commented wryly, “I’m an authority now on the history of the Communist Party and much of its doctrine.”597

From early 1951 until the war ended, UNC prisoners faced a systematic effort to convert them to Communism. This intense indoctrination campaign—similar to the riots by Communist prisoners in Allied POW camps and the CCF's fabricated germ warfare narratives—was aimed at gaining a propaganda edge. From the highest-ranking officer to the lowest private, no one was safe from this thought-reform process. General Dean, a significant Communist captive who underwent three years of intense Marxist-Leninist indoctrination, remarked upon his release, “I'm now an expert on the history of the Communist Party and much of its doctrine.”597

597 Rees, Korea, p. 334.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Rees, *Korea*, p. 334.

English-speaking POWs, both American and British, particularly became the target for Communist thought-control conditioning. Many experts have discussed glowingly the superb example and iron discipline—both on the battlefield and in POW camp—displayed by the Turkish soldiers. This is true, and their outstanding performance is to their credit as a national group. The fact remains, however, that the Turks were long-term professional soldiers. Usually they were left alone by the Communists who neither spoke their language nor needed them for propaganda purposes. As a rule all non-American troops of the United Nations received better treatment than American and British personnel.

English-speaking POWs, both American and British, became primary targets for Communist thought-control conditioning. Many experts have praised the remarkable example and strict discipline—both on the battlefield and in POW camps—shown by Turkish soldiers. This is true, and their impressive performance deserves recognition as a national group. However, it's important to note that the Turks were seasoned professional soldiers. Generally, they were isolated by the Communists, who neither spoke their language nor needed them for propaganda. In general, all non-American troops of the United Nations received better treatment than American and British personnel.

The basic tenet of the Communist party line was that this aggressive war against the peace-loving people of Korea had been caused by American imperialists seeking additional foreign markets. All UNC soldiers were, therefore, by simple definition war criminals who deserved no better treatment than death. But as most UN soldiers were misguided and misled by their capitalist rulers they would “not be shot if they admitted their mistakes and showed themselves to be progressive”598 by becoming properly indoctrinated.

The basic belief of the Communist party was that this aggressive war against the peace-loving people of Korea was caused by American imperialists wanting more foreign markets. So, all UNC soldiers were basically war criminals who deserved no better treatment than death. However, since most UN soldiers were deceived and misled by their capitalist leaders, they would “not be shot if they admitted their mistakes and showed themselves to be progressive”598 by becoming properly indoctrinated.

598 Ibid., p. 335.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 335.

Often, the thought-reform processing started long before prisoners reached their permanent camps, while they were under initial interrogation in the transit collection center. Captain Samuel J. Davies, Anglican Chaplain of the British Gloucestershire Regiment,599 noted427 that lecture subjects presented to his officer group at one North Korean temporary collection center included:

Often, the thought-reform process began long before prisoners arrived at their permanent camps, during their initial interrogation at the transit collection center. Captain Samuel J. Davies, Anglican Chaplain of the British Gloucestershire Regiment, 599 noted427 that the topics covered in lectures for his officer group at one North Korean temporary collection center included:

  • Corruption of the UN by the American warmongers;
  • The Chinese Peoples’ right to Formosa;
  • The Stockholm Peace Appeal;
  • Progress in Peoples’ China;
  • Churchill, tool of the Truman-MacArthur-Dulles Fascist clique;
  • The Soviet Union heads the World Peace Camp.600

599 Davies was the only one of the four captured UNC chaplains who survived the war. During his imprisonment, he visited hospitalized POWs at the makeshift hospital near Camp 2 and held weekly community services. Another well-remembered chaplain was Captain Emil J. Kapaun, Chaplains Corps, USA. The Catholic priest stole food and sneaked into the enlisted compounds at Camp 5 to distribute it. His heroic behavior and selfless interest in his fellow-men were an inspiration to fellow POWs. MacDonald, POW, pp. 77, 136.

599 Davies was the only one of the four captured UNC chaplains who made it through the war. While he was imprisoned, he visited hospitalized POWs at the makeshift hospital near Camp 2 and held weekly community services. Another memorable chaplain was Captain Emil J. Kapaun, Chaplains Corps, USA. The Catholic priest stole food and snuck into the enlisted compounds at Camp 5 to distribute it. His heroic actions and selfless concern for his fellow men inspired other POWs. MacDonald, POW, pp. 77, 136.

600 Rees, Korea, p. 336.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Rees, *Korea*, p. 336.

Systematically the enemy ground away at theory and practice of Communism, with its superiority to American democracy. From emphasis on the Korean War as imperialist aggression, the programmed thinking then dealt with shortcomings of western countries (particularly Southern lynchings, poor treatment of Negroes, and colonialism) to the idyllic socialism in people’s democracies where “everyone is equal.” “Together with the emotional pressures involved, this dramatic presentation of Marxism-Leninism to prisoners who often not only failed to comprehend why they had fought in Korea, but even the rudiments of democracy itself, was bound to have some sort of effect.”601

Systematically, the enemy undermined the theory and practice of Communism, claiming it was superior to American democracy. They focused on the Korean War as an example of imperialist aggression, then pointed out the flaws in Western countries, especially with issues like Southern lynchings, the poor treatment of Black people, and colonialism. In contrast, they portrayed an idealized socialism in people's democracies where "everyone is equal." "Along with the emotional pressures involved, this dramatic presentation of Marxism-Leninism to prisoners—who often not only didn't understand why they had fought in Korea but also lacked even a basic grasp of democracy—was bound to have some sort of impact."601

601 Ibid., p. 337.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 337.

Compulsory lectures and discussions often went on until 2200. Together with the unceasing indoctrination efforts, the CCF attempted to maintain complete control over every aspect of POW life. Each camp was divided into POW companies (ranging from 60 to 300 men), platoons, and squads. Squad leaders, appointed by the Chinese, reported regularly to authorities the opinions of men in their group. “Converted” progressives were responsible for much of the internal policing. Every prisoner with reactionary tendencies was isolated. The varied pressures of hunger, fear, constant threats of torture, coercion, nonrepatriation, anxiety, and guilt602 were used to break him down.

Compulsory lectures and discussions often lasted until 10 PM. Along with the constant indoctrination efforts, the CCF tried to maintain complete control over every part of POW life. Each camp was divided into POW companies (ranging from 60 to 300 men), platoons, and squads. Squad leaders, appointed by the Chinese, regularly reported the opinions of their group to the authorities. “Converted” progressives handled much of the internal policing. Every prisoner with reactionary tendencies was isolated. The various pressures of hunger, fear, constant threats of torture, coercion, nonrepatriation, anxiety, and guilt602 were used to break him down.

602 Some analysts have pointed out that the Lenient Policy with its “emphasis on confession and repentance, and its propaganda exploitation” closely resembled POW indoctrination tactics developed by the Russians with their German prisoners in World War II. Rees, Korea, p. 338.

602 Some analysts have noted that the Lenient Policy, with its focus on confession and repentance, along with its propaganda tactics, closely resembled the POW indoctrination strategies used by the Russians with their German prisoners during World War II. Rees, Korea, p. 338.

In an attempt to convert the Marines and other prisoners to their own beliefs, the Communists prohibited the use of the term “prisoner of war.” Instead they used the phrase “newly liberated friends”428 and insisted the POWs do likewise. They also denounced religion as a superstition and device for controlling people’s minds. Curiously, POWs were often permitted to retain whatever religious articles they had on them when captured, so that Bibles, rosaries, etc., were available for squad groups that sought to hold informal religious discussions and readings. Such religious expression was, of course, strictly forbidden. It might be noted here that Marines, as a group, did not appear to be any more or less interested in religious services than other POWs.

In an effort to convert the Marines and other prisoners to their beliefs, the Communists banned the term “prisoner of war.” Instead, they used the phrase “newly liberated friends”428 and insisted that the POWs do the same. They also dismissed religion as a superstition and a tool for controlling people’s minds. Interestingly, POWs were often allowed to keep any religious items they had when captured, so Bibles, rosaries, and other items were available for groups that wanted to hold informal religious discussions and readings. However, such religious expression was strictly prohibited. It’s worth noting that Marines, as a group, did not seem to be any more or less interested in religious services than other POWs.

By mid-1952 the compulsory lectures were considered a failure, and the emphasis shifted to “voluntary” study groups led by progressives. More insidious methods of indoctrination were being used—books, papers, and articles written by camp progressives. Personal interrogation and indoctrination had proved it could have a more powerful effect than attempts at mass conversion. Then, too, the Chinese had by this time perfected another propaganda tool that admirably suited their purposes. It was to have even still more effective, far reaching results.

By mid-1952, the mandatory lectures were seen as a failure, so the focus changed to “voluntary” study groups led by progressives. More subtle methods of indoctrination were being used—books, papers, and articles written by camp progressives. Personal interviews and indoctrination had shown to have a stronger impact than efforts aimed at mass conversion. Additionally, the Chinese had by this time refined another propaganda tool that perfectly suited their goals. It was set to have even more effective, far-reaching outcomes.

The Germ Warfare Issue603

603 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: MacDonald, POW; Fehrenbach, Kind of War; Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

603 Unless otherwise indicated, the content in this section comes from: MacDonald, POW; Fehrenbach, Kind of War; Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

Besides their routine interrogations and indoctrinations, by 1952 the Communists had found a new angle to exploit. This was to have strong repercussions on the treatment of some captured personnel. And, ultimately, it was to affect American public reaction to the entire Korean War and to shake the nation’s confidence in some of its fighting men who became POWs.

Besides their regular interrogations and brainwashing, by 1952 the Communists found a new approach to take advantage of. This was going to have significant effects on how some captured personnel were treated. Ultimately, it would also influence the American public’s reaction to the entire Korean War and undermine the nation's confidence in some of its soldiers who became POWs.

The germ warfare issue developed from an incident in January 1952 when the Communists shot down a U.S. Air Force B-26 bomber. Several months later, in May, the enemy propaganda campaign moved into high gear when the navigator and pilot both purportedly confessed that they took part in a raid in which germ bombs were dropped on North Korean towns. After the CCF successfully extracted false confessions from the two USAF officers, the enemy exposed both prisoners to a select group of Oriental medical specialists429 and newspapermen. The two Americans apparently performed according to plan, and a relentless flood of Communist propaganda was unleashed on the world.

The germ warfare issue started with an incident in January 1952 when the Communists shot down a U.S. Air Force B-26 bomber. A few months later, in May, the enemy's propaganda campaign ramped up when the navigator and pilot allegedly confessed that they participated in a mission where germ bombs were dropped on North Korean towns. After the CCF successfully got false confessions from the two USAF officers, the enemy presented both prisoners to a select group of Asian medical specialists429 and journalists. The two Americans seemed to perform as expected, and a relentless wave of Communist propaganda was released worldwide.

While the allegation of bacteriological warfare was not new in the Korean War, it was not until 1952 that the Chinese successfully exploited it. After suffering their first reverses in Korea in September 1950, the Communists charged that Americans were waging germ warfare. Even after they regained the tactical initiative in late 1950 they continued their campaign of vilification. In early 1951, while the UNC battled epidemics of smallpox, typhus, and amoebic dysentery prevalent among the civil population and within the POW camps, the CCF branded medical efforts to curb the diseases as experiments in germ warfare. A formal complaint was made by the CCF to the United Nations in May 1951; thereafter, the germ warfare charges lay dormant for the rest of the year.

While the accusation of biological warfare wasn't new during the Korean War, it wasn't until 1952 that the Chinese effectively used it. After experiencing their first defeats in Korea in September 1950, the Communists claimed that Americans were conducting germ warfare. Even after they regained the upper hand in late 1950, they continued their smear campaign. In early 1951, while the UNC fought outbreaks of smallpox, typhus, and amoebic dysentery affecting both the civilian population and the POW camps, the CCF labeled the medical efforts to control these diseases as experiments in germ warfare. In May 1951, the CCF formally lodged a complaint with the United Nations; after that, the germ warfare allegations remained inactive for the rest of the year.

The effect of the two airmen’s “confessions” in 1952 was far-reaching. From that time until the end of hostilities “captured aviators of all services were subjected to a degree of pressure and coercion previously unknown by prisoners of war. Prior to the turn of the year aviation and ground personnel received relatively the same treatment in Communists’ hands. After January 1952, aviators were singled out for a special brand of treatment designed to wring bacteriological warfare confessions from them.”604 North Korean officials joined the CCF spokesmen in loudly denouncing American bacteriological attacks. As the campaign gained momentum, an elaborate, cleverly-concocted “War Crimes Exhibit” was set up in Peiping in May. Similar displays were later on view at the UNC officers’ camp at Pi-chong-ni, including hand-written and sound-recorded confessions by the two American pilots, as well as a convincing array of photos depicting the lethal “bomb containers.”

The impact of the two airmen's "confessions" in 1952 was extensive. From that point until the end of the conflict, "captured aviators from all branches faced a level of pressure and coercion that was previously unknown to prisoners of war. Before the start of the new year, aviation and ground personnel received relatively similar treatment in the hands of the Communists. After January 1952, aviators were specifically targeted for a unique form of treatment aimed at extracting confessions about bacteriological warfare." North Korean officials joined the CCF spokespeople in loudly condemning American bacteriological attacks. As the campaign picked up steam, a detailed, cleverly-designed "War Crimes Exhibit" was set up in Peiping in May. Similar displays were later presented at the UNC officers' camp in Pi-chong-ni, featuring handwritten and recorded confessions from the two American pilots, along with a convincing collection of photos showing the deadly "bomb containers."

604 MacDonald, POW, p. 175.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 175.

All the while air personnel were being put under acute stress to confess alleged war crimes. Captured Marine aviation personnel encountered this new subject in their interrogations. Lieutenant Henry, captured in February, was asked about germ warfare. Major Judson C. Richardson, of VMF(N)-513, during interrogations at Pak’s was told he would never leave Korea when he denied that the U.S. was waging bacteriological warfare. Master Sergeant John T. Cain,430 VMO-6, a well-known Marine enlisted pilot whose plane was shot down in July 1952, was questioned, confined to the hole, and taken before a firing squad when he refused to acknowledge American participation. Captain Flynn was also subjected to intensive and brutal interrogation by North Korean and Chinese Communist Air Force personnel who sought a confession. Others were to meet similar pressure and be questioned until their nerves shrieked.

All the while, air personnel were under intense pressure to confess to supposed war crimes. Captured Marine aviators faced this new line of questioning during their interrogations. Lieutenant Henry, who was captured in February, was asked about germ warfare. Major Judson C. Richardson, from VMF(N)-513, was told during interrogations at Pak’s that he would never leave Korea when he denied that the U.S. was conducting bacteriological warfare. Master Sergeant John T. Cain, 430 of VMO-6, a well-known Marine pilot whose plane was shot down in July 1952, was interrogated, locked in a hole, and taken before a firing squad when he refused to admit American involvement. Captain Flynn also faced intense and brutal questioning from North Korean and Chinese Communist Air Force personnel who were seeking a confession. Others would experience similar pressure and be questioned until their nerves were frayed.

On 8 July 1952, the first of a chain of events occurred that was to link the Marine Corps with the spurious bacteriological warfare propaganda. Colonel Frank H. Schwable, 1st MAW Chief of Staff and Major Roy H. Bley, wing ordnance officer, were struck by Communist ground fire while making a reconnaissance flight. The enemy had little difficulty in compiling Colonel Schwable’s biography. Although he repeatedly maintained he had just arrived in Korea and had not yet received an assignment, he was in uniform with insignia and full personal identification. A Department of Defense press release issued two days later gave considerable data, correctly identifying him as the Marine Wing Chief of Staff. The Chinese knew they had a prize.

On July 8, 1952, the first in a series of events took place that would connect the Marine Corps with false bacteriological warfare propaganda. Colonel Frank H. Schwable, the 1st MAW Chief of Staff, and Major Roy H. Bley, the wing ordnance officer, were hit by Communist ground fire while on a reconnaissance flight. The enemy had little trouble gathering Colonel Schwable’s background information. Even though he insisted he had just arrived in Korea and hadn't yet been assigned, he was in uniform with insignia and full personal identification. A Department of Defense press release issued two days later provided considerable information, accurately identifying him as the Marine Wing Chief of Staff. The Chinese realized they had a valuable target.

Two weeks after his capture, the colonel was taken to an interrogation center where he remained in solitary confinement until December. He quickly became aware of CCF intentions to utilize him for their propaganda mill. He was interrogated relentlessly, badgered, accused of being a war criminal, fed a near-starvation diet, denied proper latrine privileges, refused medical and dental attention, and subjected to extremes of temperature. Ultimately the discomfort, almost constant diarrhea, extreme pain from being forced to sit in unnatural positions, fatigue, and naked threats wore him down. At the same time he was also convinced that had he continued to resist Communist demands for a confession the enemy would have affixed his forged signature to a document to achieve their ends. He later commented:

Two weeks after he was captured, the colonel was sent to an interrogation center where he stayed in solitary confinement until December. He quickly realized that CCF intended to use him for their propaganda machine. He was interrogated non-stop, harassed, accused of being a war criminal, given almost no food, denied proper bathroom access, refused medical and dental care, and exposed to extreme temperatures. Eventually, the discomfort, almost constant diarrhea, severe pain from being forced into uncomfortable positions, exhaustion, and direct threats broke him down. At the same time, he also believed that if he had continued to resist Communist demands for a confession, the enemy would have forged his signature on a document to achieve their goals. He later commented:

In making my most difficult decision to seek the only way out, my primary consideration was that I would be of greater value to my country in exposing this hideous means of slanderous propaganda than I would be by sacrificing my life through non-submission or remaining a prisoner of the Chinese Communists for life, a matter over which they left me no doubt.605

In making my hardest decision to find the only way out, my main thought was that I would be more valuable to my country by exposing this terrible method of slanderous propaganda than I would be by sacrificing my life by not submitting or staying a prisoner of the Chinese Communists forever, something they made clear to me. 605

431

431

605 Ibid., p. 180.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 180.

General Dean, held in solitary confinement for much of his three years’ captivity, stated the greatest problem facing a prisoner of war is “maintaining his judgment—he has no one on whom he can try out his ideas before turning them into decisions.”606 Possibly this was also Colonel Schwable’s problem. Many drafts of his confession were made before the Chinese were satisfied that specific details reinforced the information earlier obtained in other prisoners’ false statements. The confession that finally evolved in December cleverly combined factual order of battle data and technical terminology to create a most convincing lie. It was more sophisticated than efforts of earlier captives and was, unquestionably, damaging.

General Dean, who spent much of his three years in solitary confinement, said the biggest challenge for a prisoner of war is “maintaining his judgment—he has no one to bounce his ideas off before making decisions.”606 This might have been Colonel Schwable’s issue as well. He went through many drafts of his confession before the Chinese were satisfied that specific details backed up the information obtained from false statements made by other prisoners. The confession that finally emerged in December skillfully mixed factual battle data and technical terms to create a very convincing lie. It was more advanced than the efforts of earlier captives and definitely had a serious impact.

606 Ibid., p. 182.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Id., p. 182.

Problems and Performance of Marine POWs607

607 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10; MacDonald, POW; Fehrenbach, Kind of War.

607 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10; MacDonald, POW; Fehrenbach, Kind of War.

Problems faced by Marine and other UNC prisoners ranged from the fundamentals of sheer survival to more abstract questions involving honor and duty that have less sharply defined interpretations. Was it, for instance, a prisoner’s duty to overtly resist the enemy at all costs and on all possible occasions? Or was an attitude of passive resistance that created less hostility and attention better in the long run? Were such passive techniques liable to render a POW unable to continue making fine distinctions in his conduct and behavior so that he unwittingly went over the line to become a collaborator with the enemy? What about a ranking POW’s responsibility of leadership?

Problems faced by Marine and other UNC prisoners ranged from the basics of just surviving to more complex questions about honor and duty that don't have clear answers. For example, was it a prisoner's duty to openly resist the enemy at all costs and whenever possible? Or would a more passive resistance, which attracted less hostility and attention, be better in the long run? Could such passive methods make a POW unable to make careful distinctions in their behavior, leading them to unwittingly become a collaborator with the enemy? What about the responsibility of a senior POW in terms of leadership?

In a practical, day-in, day-out way, every prisoner had to decide for himself as to how actively or passively he would resist the enemy. In a number of cases Marine (and other Allied) POWs gave deliberately false or misleading information in response to threats, coercion, or maltreatment. Three Marines at Pak’s regularly held counsel “to determine their courses of action and to coordinate their false stories.”608 Captain Fink’s list of ships, all sunk in World Wars I and II, was similar to the story told by an Air Force officer of the new B-108 bomber (three B-36s).

In a practical, everyday way, every prisoner had to decide for themselves how actively or passively they would resist the enemy. In several instances, Marine (and other Allied) POWs deliberately provided false or misleading information in response to threats, coercion, or mistreatment. Three Marines at Pak’s regularly met to “determine their courses of action and to coordinate their false stories.” 608 Captain Fink’s list of ships, all sunk in World Wars I and II, was similar to the story told by an Air Force officer about the new B-108 bomber (three B-36s).

432

432

608 MacDonald, POW, p. 121.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 121.

Not infrequently a POW faced threats of death, reduced rations, still worse medical care, solitary, or physical beatings and torture if he failed to make some response to questions. Major Richardson finally wrote untruthful answers to five questions about the Navy, although his NKPA interrogators told him his lies were detected. Master Sergeant Cain authored a fanciful report about the Fleet Logistic Wing, an organization about which he knew nothing, not too surprisingly since it did not exist. He later admitted, however, that he felt he’d “made a mistake at that time [his first interrogation] by lying about inconsequential things.”609

Not infrequently, a POW faced threats of death, reduced rations, even worse medical care, solitary confinement, or physical beatings and torture if he didn’t respond to questions. Major Richardson ultimately provided false answers to five questions about the Navy, even though his NKPA interrogators told him they knew he was lying. Master Sergeant Cain created an elaborate report about the Fleet Logistic Wing, a group he knew nothing about, which wasn’t surprising since it didn’t exist. However, he later admitted that he felt he’d “made a mistake at that time [his first interrogation] by lying about inconsequential things.”609

609 Ibid., p. 185.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 185.

Expressed in simplistic terms, a spirit of cohesion and of group identity seemed to be the key factor in—to use a bromide that is particularly apt here—separating the men from the boys. Even when avowed reactionary leaders were removed to serve one of their many solitary tours, there seems little doubt that their example served to instill a spirit of resistance (either open or underground) in fellow POWs. This was particularly true when the leadership gap was filled by the next senior man and the chain of command remained unbroken.

Expressed in simple terms, a sense of unity and group identity appeared to be the key factor in—using a cliché that fits perfectly here—separating the men from the boys. Even when declared reactionary leaders were taken away for one of their many solitary stints, there was no doubt that their example helped inspire a spirit of resistance (either openly or secretly) in their fellow POWs. This was especially true when the leadership gap was filled by the next senior person, keeping the chain of command intact.

Prisoners who were able to rise above their own personal situation (i.e., to adjust, without giving in) and to assist others seemed, unquestionably, to have gained greater resiliency and determination. Whether this is a cause-or-effect reaction, however, might be a grey area difficult to pinpoint precisely. In any event, glimpses of Marines from behind the barbed wire indicated that steadfastness under pressure, ingenuity, and outstanding leadership earned them the respect of fellow prisoners as well as a place in Marine Corps history.

Prisoners who managed to rise above their own circumstances (i.e., to adapt without surrendering) and help others clearly seemed to develop greater resilience and determination. Still, whether this is a cause-or-effect relationship might be a gray area that's hard to identify exactly. In any case, the sight of Marines behind the barbed wire showed that their strength under pressure, creativity, and exceptional leadership earned them the respect of their fellow prisoners and a spot in Marine Corps history.

Even in a situation as inhospitable and hazardous as a POW camp, it is not surprising that characteristic behavior and certain distinctive personality traits tend to show through, no matter what. Captain Fink, captured early in the war, endured unspeakable humiliations at the hands of the North Koreans. Although he felt his morale was at its lowest point at this time, and was not sure he could go on, he was later responsible for providing a high degree of civility for POWs confined to Camp 2. His most notable artistic and mechanical433 achievement was probably the construction of an artificial leg610 for USAF Major Thomas D. Harrison. This prosthetic was so expertly fashioned that its owner could play volley ball using his new limb! Fink also built stethoscopes for POW doctors, using resonant wood and tubing stolen from Chinese trucks. After a discussion with other POWs on the need for a religious symbol in camp, the resourceful Marine made a 22-inch crucifix, christened “Christ in Barbed Wire.”611 His efforts on behalf of religion earned him a 10-day sentence in the hole.

Even in a situation as bleak and dangerous as a POW camp, it’s not surprising that typical behaviors and some distinctive personality traits tend to come through, no matter what. Captain Fink, captured early in the war, faced unimaginable humiliations at the hands of the North Koreans. Although he felt his morale was at its lowest point during this time and wasn't sure he could carry on, he later played a key role in maintaining a high level of civility for POWs confined to Camp 2. His most notable artistic and mechanical achievement was likely the construction of an artificial leg433 for USAF Major Thomas D. Harrison. This prosthetic was crafted so well that its owner could play volleyball using his new limb! Fink also created stethoscopes for POW doctors, using resonant wood and tubing taken from Chinese trucks. After discussing with other POWs about the need for a religious symbol in camp, the resourceful Marine made a 22-inch crucifix, named “Christ in Barbed Wire.” His efforts for the sake of religion got him a 10-day sentence in solitary confinement.

610 A hollowed-out compartment of the leg was used to hide written records on deaths, atrocities, and other administrative data. Ultimately, the records were brought back to the U.S. The Air Force officer was a cousin, interestingly enough, of the chief Allied truce negotiator, General Harrison. MacDonald, POW, p. 227, and Washington Post, dtd 5 Aug 53, p. 1.

610 A hollowed-out section of the leg was used to conceal written records of deaths, atrocities, and other administrative information. In the end, the records were returned to the U.S. Interestingly, the Air Force officer was a cousin of the chief Allied truce negotiator, General Harrison. MacDonald, POW, p. 227, and Washington Post, dtd 5 Aug 53, p. 1.

611 The crucifix was brought back to freedom by Camp 2 POWs and later placed in the Father Kapaun High School, in Wichita, Kansas. MacDonald, POW, p. 172.

611 The crucifix was returned to freedom by Camp 2 POWs and later installed at Father Kapaun High School in Wichita, Kansas. MacDonald, POW, p. 172.

Captain Arthur Wagner, VMF(N)-513, spent an unusually long six-month tour at Pak’s during 1951. For new captives headed in that direction, the word via USMC grapevine was that he “could be trusted.”612 Captain Wagner counselled other prisoners at Pak’s, helped chop wood, draw water, cook, ease the burden of sick POWs, and resisted the Communists at every turn.

Captain Arthur Wagner, VMF(N)-513, spent an unusually long six-month tour at Pak’s in 1951. For new captives going that way, the word through the USMC grapevine was that he “could be trusted.” 612 Captain Wagner advised other prisoners at Pak’s, helped chop wood, collect water, cook, alleviated the burdens of sick POWs, and resisted the Communists at every opportunity.

612 Ibid., p. 121.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 121.

Another member of the same squadron, Captain Flynn, had completed 59 combat missions against the enemy in North Korea before being shot down in May 1952.613 While captive, the veteran Marine fighter pilot withstood intense interrogation, influenced others to suppress CCF-inspired talks made by progressives, and strengthened morale by planning a group escape. He was sentenced to 20 years imprisonment by a mock court. Throughout it all, according to Master Sergeant Cain, the POWs “owed much to Flynn who kept them amused.”614 First Lieutenant Robert J. Gillette’s “reactionary” attitude resulted in his being placed in the hole on several occasions. Once, at No Name Valley, he managed to scribble a novel on toilet paper which subsequently provided some light moments for fellow prisoners. And First Lieutenant Felix L. Ferranto, 1st. Signal Battalion, spent more than two years of his 33 months’ imprisonment in solitary confinement or isolated with small units of “non-cooperative”434 POWs. The CCF pronounced him a “hopeless capitalist, an organizer with an ‘unsincere attitude.’”615

Another member of the same squadron, Captain Flynn, had completed 59 combat missions against the enemy in North Korea before being shot down in May 1952.613 While a prisoner, the experienced Marine fighter pilot endured intense interrogation, encouraged others to dismiss CCF-influenced discussions made by progressives, and boosted morale by planning a group escape. He was given a 20-year sentence by a sham court. Throughout this, according to Master Sergeant Cain, the POWs "owed a lot to Flynn who kept them entertained."614 First Lieutenant Robert J. Gillette’s “reactionary” attitude led to him being placed in the hole multiple times. Once, at No Name Valley, he managed to write a novel on toilet paper, which later brought some laughs for his fellow prisoners. And First Lieutenant Felix L. Ferranto, from the 1st Signal Battalion, spent more than two years of his 33 months in imprisonment in solitary confinement or isolated with small groups of “non-cooperative”434 POWs. The CCF labeled him a “hopeless capitalist, an organizer with an ‘insincere attitude.’”615

613 Parachuting from his burning plane after it was struck by hostile AA fire, Captain Flynn duplicated an earlier action from World War II. In July 1945 he had bailed out of an aircraft similarly hit by fire while on a combat patrol over Japan. Biog File, HRS, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC.

613 Captain Flynn parachuted from his burning plane after it was hit by enemy AA fire, repeating an earlier event from World War II. In July 1945, he had jumped from an aircraft that was similarly struck during a combat patrol over Japan. Biog File, HRS, HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC.

614 MacDonald, POW, p. 185.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 185.

615 Ibid., p. 122.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 122.

The type of amiable accommodation that could sometimes be made, without compromising one’s standards, was once successfully demonstrated by Captain Jack E. Perry, VMF-311 briefing officer. On a bombing run his F9F fuel tank was hit, and he parachuted down. Seized almost immediately by the Chinese, his captors “showed him bomb holes from numerous strikes in the area, and they pointed out several wounded soldiers. Then, as he describes it, ‘They laughed like hell.’ Although Captain Perry failed to see anything funny, he laughed along with them.’”616

The kind of friendly compromise that could sometimes be reached without lowering one’s standards was once effectively shown by Captain Jack E. Perry, VMF-311 briefing officer. During a bombing run, his F9F fuel tank was hit, and he parachuted down. He was quickly captured by the Chinese, who “showed him bomb holes from various strikes in the area and pointed out several wounded soldiers. Then, as he puts it, ‘They laughed like crazy.’ Even though Captain Perry didn’t find anything funny, he laughed along with them.”616

616 Ibid., p. 109.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 109.

Three Marines captured during the Korean War had suffered a similar fate in World War II. Ironically, Staff Sergeant Charles L. Harrison, of the Military Police Company; Warrant Officer Felix J. McCool, of 1st Service Battalion; and Master Sergeant Frederick J. Stumpges, Headquarters Company, were all captured in the same 29 November 1950 action. Comparisons of treatment by the Communists and Japanese were inevitable. A survivor of the Bataan Death March, Stumpges felt that although the Japanese confinement was more difficult physically, imprisonment in North Korea was a far worse mental ordeal. “They [the Communists] were around all the time and you could never speak your mind.”617

Three Marines captured during the Korean War had experienced a similar fate in World War II. Ironically, Staff Sergeant Charles L. Harrison, from the Military Police Company; Warrant Officer Felix J. McCool, from the 1st Service Battalion; and Master Sergeant Frederick J. Stumpges, from Headquarters Company, were all captured in the same action on 29 November 1950. Comparisons of treatment by the Communists and Japanese were unavoidable. A survivor of the Bataan Death March, Stumpges felt that while the Japanese confinement was physically tougher, being imprisoned in North Korea was a much worse mental struggle. “They [the Communists] were always around, and you could never speak your mind.”617

617 New York Times, dtd 30 Aug 53, p. 2.

617 New York Times, dated August 30, 1953, page 2.

The other two Marines similarly thought that the Japanese were more brutal but had more character. Harrison, captured at Wake Island, said he admired them because “they really believed in their cause and were loyal to it.”618 The Chinese, on the other hand, he characterized as employing “false friendship and deceit.”619 McCool, who had spent 70 hours in a slimy, lice-infested hole for refusing to confess to a phony charge of rape and pillage, knew that he “hated the Chinese Communists far more than he had hated the Japanese.”620

The other two Marines felt that the Japanese were tougher but had more integrity. Harrison, who was captured at Wake Island, said he respected them because “they really believed in their cause and were loyal to it.”618 The Chinese, however, he described as using “false friendship and deceit.”619 McCool, who had spent 70 hours in a filthy, lice-infested hole for refusing to confess to a fake charge of rape and pillage, realized that he “hated the Chinese Communists far more than he had hated the Japanese.”620

618 MacDonald, POW, p. 79.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 79.

619 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

620 Ibid., p. 167.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 167.

Master Sergeant Cain had distinguished himself by flying little OE reconnaissance planes 184 hours and had 76 combat missions in one month. Just before his capture, Cain had paid for six months’ education for nine Korean youngsters who lived near his air base.435 Because of his graying hair and lack of rank insignia, Sergeant Cain was mistaken for a senior officer. In fact, the Chinese insisted that he was Lieutenant Colonel Cain, CO of VMF-121. His equal amount of insistence that he was not a Marine officer, plus his refusal to reveal any significant information, made him a particular nuisance to the CCF. He was subjected to intensive interrogation sessions, confined to the hole, and stood at attention for periods of five to eight hours. Describing the occasion on which he thought it was all over, Sergeant Cain related that he:

Master Sergeant Cain had made a name for himself by flying little OE reconnaissance planes for 184 hours and completing 76 combat missions in just one month. Right before he was captured, Cain paid for six months of education for nine Korean kids living near his air base.435 Because of his graying hair and lack of rank insignia, Sergeant Cain was mistaken for a senior officer. In fact, the Chinese insisted he was Lieutenant Colonel Cain, the CO of VMF-121. His strong insistence that he was not a Marine officer, along with his refusal to provide any significant information, made him a major annoyance to the CCF. He was subjected to intense interrogation sessions, confined to a small cell, and made to stand at attention for five to eight hours at a time. Recalling the moment when he thought it was all over, Sergeant Cain said that he:

... was taken to a hillside, blindfolded, and placed in front of a firing squad. He heard rifle bolts click. The commander of the firing squad asked if he was ready to tell all.621

... was taken to a hillside, blindfolded, and stood in front of a firing squad. He heard the clicks of rifle bolts. The commander of the firing squad asked if he was ready to confess everything.621

621 Ibid., p. 186.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 186.

When the Marine sergeant replied that he was not going to talk, the Chinese returned him to solitary confinement. Eventually, after questioning him for 84 days, the CCF gave up trying to indoctrinate him in the ways of Communism. Major Harris, senior officer of the Obul complex, freely acknowledged that Sergeant Cain “assumed more than his share of duties and responsibilities and set an example for all to follow.”622

When the Marine sergeant said he wasn't going to talk, the Chinese put him back in solitary confinement. After 84 days of questioning him, the CCF stopped trying to brainwash him into Communism. Major Harris, the senior officer of the Obul complex, openly admitted that Sergeant Cain “took on more than his share of duties and responsibilities and set an example for everyone to follow.”622

622 Ibid., pp. 186–187.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., pp. 186–187.

Marine Escape Attempts623

623 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: MacDonald, POW; Korean War casualty cards from Statistical Unit, Casualty Section, HQMC.

623 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: MacDonald, POW; Korean War casualty cards from the Statistical Unit, Casualty Section, HQMC.

As the Korean War came to a close, assessments were being made of America’s role in it. Operation BIG SWITCH swung into high gear and national attention focused on the returning POWs and their experiences in Communist camps. The widely-accepted statement was that no prisoners had escaped. Even more discrediting was the prevailing belief that, “worse, not a single American attempted to escape from captivity.”624 These reported facts are not borne out by the actual record.

As the Korean War ended, people started evaluating America's involvement in it. Operation BIG SWITCH ramped up, and the nation began to focus on the returning POWs and what they went through in Communist camps. It was commonly believed that no prisoners had escaped. Even more damaging was the idea that, “to make matters worse, not a single American tried to escape from captivity.”624 However, these claims are not supported by the actual evidence.

624 Leckie, Conflict, p. 389.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Leckie, Conflict, p. 389.

In May 1951, a group of 18 Marines and a U.S. Army interpreter found their way back to American control through a combination of fortuitous events and quick thinking. All of the Marines had been captured several months earlier, in the 28 November-11 December436 period, the majority on the night of 29–30 November. There were peculiar circumstances connected with their escape. In early April, a group of nearly 60 UNC prisoners had been brought south by the enemy from the Majon-ni area. Presumably they were to perform working details in the rear of Communist front lines.

In May 1951, a group of 18 Marines and a U.S. Army interpreter managed to return to American control through a mix of lucky events and quick thinking. All the Marines had been captured several months earlier, between November 28 and December 11436, with most taken on the night of November 29–30. There were unusual circumstances surrounding their escape. In early April, nearly 60 UNC prisoners had been moved south by the enemy from the Majon-ni area. They were probably intended to do work details behind the Communist front lines.

While a larger number of prisoners, both Army and Marine, were marched westward to Pyoktong, First Lieutenant Frank E. Cold and a group of 17 enlisted were sent further south to the general Chorwon area, not far from the 38th Parallel. In the meantime the Chinese launched their spring counteroffensive on 22 April. It appears that, subsequently, the Marines and Army interpreter, Corporal Saburo “Sam” Shimamura, who had been attached to the 1st Marine Division, were told they would be taken to the area in which the Marine division was operating and released there.

While a larger number of prisoners, both Army and Marine, were marched westward to Pyoktong, First Lieutenant Frank E. Cold and a group of 17 enlisted personnel were sent further south to the general Chorwon area, close to the 38th Parallel. In the meantime, the Chinese launched their spring counteroffensive on April 22. It seems that, afterward, the Marines and Army interpreter, Corporal Saburo “Sam” Shimamura, who had been attached to the 1st Marine Division, were informed that they would be taken to the area where the Marine division was operating and released there.

The group was then trucked southeast to Chunchon, just below the Parallel, under guard, and marched toward the vicinity of the front lines. On 24 May, while in proximity to the main battle area, an artillery preparation suddenly registered nearby. The CCF guards fled, while the prisoners ran in the opposite direction, heading for high ground where they successfully eluded the guards. For the rest of that day and night the escapees quietly watched Communist troops retreat past them. The next day, 25 May, the Marines fashioned make-shift air panels from wallpaper they stripped from a ruined Korean house in the area. They spelled out “POWS—19 RESCUE.” Their signal attracted the attention of an Army observation pilot who radioed their position to an Army reconnaissance unit.

The group was then transported southeast to Chunchon, just below the Parallel, under guard, and marched toward the area near the front lines. On May 24, while close to the main battle zone, nearby artillery fire suddenly erupted. The CCF guards ran away, while the prisoners took off in the opposite direction, heading for higher ground where they managed to avoid the guards. For the rest of that day and night, the escapees quietly watched Communist troops retreat past them. The next day, May 25, the Marines made makeshift air panels from wallpaper they stripped from a damaged Korean house in the area. They spelled out “POWS—19 RESCUE.” Their signal caught the attention of an Army observation pilot who radioed their location to an Army reconnaissance unit.

Three Army tanks were dispatched and escorted the ex-prisoners to safety. They entered friendly lines in the vicinity of Chunchon, “the first and only group of prisoners to experience Communist indoctrination and to reach freedom after a prolonged period of internment.”625 Two members of the unit626 were of special interest. One man was 56-year-old Master Sergeant Gust H. Dunis, who had barely survived the brutal, frozen death march to Kanggye in late December. The other was Staff Sergeant Charles L. Harrison, previously introduced as a unique two-time prisoner of war.

Three Army tanks were sent to escort the former prisoners to safety. They reached friendly lines near Chunchon, “the first and only group of prisoners to undergo Communist indoctrination and to gain freedom after a long period of confinement.”625 Two members of the unit626 stood out. One was 56-year-old Master Sergeant Gust H. Dunis, who had barely survived the brutal, freezing death march to Kanggye in late December. The other was Staff Sergeant Charles L. Harrison, who was previously introduced as a rare two-time prisoner of war.

625 MacDonald, POW, p. 84, reporting news stories in The Washington Post, dtd 27 Aug 53, p. 7, and Saturday Evening Post, 25 Aug 51, p. 109.

625 MacDonald, POW, p. 84, reporting news stories in The Washington Post, dated 27 Aug 53, p. 7, and Saturday Evening Post, 25 Aug 51, p. 109.

626 Roster of this May 1951 escape group: 1stLt Cold, H&S/3/7; MSgt Dunis, Military Police Co; SSgt Harrison, MPCo; SSgt James B. Nash, MPCo; Sgt Charles W. Dickerson, 1stTkBn; Sgt Morris L. Estess, 1stSigBn; Sgt Paul M. Manor, A/7 MT Bn; Cpl Clifford R. Hawkins, 1stTkBn; Cpl Ernest E. Hayton, 1stTkBn; Cpl Frederick G. Halcomb, 11thMar; Cpl Leonard J. Maffioli, 1stTkBn; Cpl Theodore R. Wheeler, 1stServBn; Cpl Calvin W. Williams, Hq, 1stDiv; PFC John A. Haring, 7thMar; PFC Theron L. Hilburn, 1stTkBn; PFC Charles M. Kaylor, W/2/7; PFC Paul J. Phillips, A/7 MTBn; and PFC Charles E. Quiring, 5thMar. MacDonald, POW, pp. 260–263.

626 Roster of this May 1951 escape group: 1stLt Cold, H&S/3/7; MSgt Dunis, Military Police Co; SSgt Harrison, MPCo; SSgt James B. Nash, MPCo; Sgt Charles W. Dickerson, 1stTkBn; Sgt Morris L. Estess, 1stSigBn; Sgt Paul M. Manor, A/7 MT Bn; Cpl Clifford R. Hawkins, 1stTkBn; Cpl Ernest E. Hayton, 1stTkBn; Cpl Frederick G. Halcomb, 11thMar; Cpl Leonard J. Maffioli, 1stTkBn; Cpl Theodore R. Wheeler, 1stServBn; Cpl Calvin W. Williams, Hq, 1stDiv; PFC John A. Haring, 7thMar; PFC Theron L. Hilburn, 1stTkBn; PFC Charles M. Kaylor, W/2/7; PFC Paul J. Phillips, A/7 MTBn; and PFC Charles E. Quiring, 5thMar. MacDonald, POW, pp. 260–263.

DOD Photo A 169702

Ice-Breaker at Work—Amphibian tractor of 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion destroys thick-crusted ice to prevent its backing up against Spoonbill Bridge. Below, the 1st Engineer Battalion maintenance shop in operation at Ascom City.

Ice-Breaker at Work—Amphibian tractor from the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion breaks up thick ice to stop it from piling up against Spoonbill Bridge. Below, the maintenance shop of the 1st Engineer Battalion is working at Ascom City.

DOD Photo A 168178
DOD Photo A 16373

Captured Enemy Weapons—Various types of mortar and artillery shells, machine guns, rifles, and a 60mm mortar are displayed at 1st Marine Division CP. Below, F9F Pantherjet fighter taxies down runway for takeoff.

Captured Enemy Weapons—Different types of mortar and artillery shells, machine guns, rifles, and a 60mm mortar are on display at the 1st Marine Division CP. Below, a F9F Panther jet fighter taxis down the runway for takeoff.

DOD Photo A 346720
DOD Photo A 170084

Outpost Defense—Inside view of one of the many sleeping caves, which shelter two to four men, on Marine outpost Carson. Below, COP Dagmar under artillery bombardment preceding enemy diversionary ground attack on 26 March 1953.

Outpost Defense—An inside look at one of the many sleeping caves that can accommodate two to four men at Marine outpost Carson. Below, COP Dagmar is under artillery bombardment before the enemy’s diversionary ground attack on March 26, 1953.

DOD Photo A 17096

POW Exchange—Frontline Marines watch Army convoy bringing first UN prisoners to Freedom Village in Operation LITTLE SWITCH. Below, NKPA and CCF delegation upon adjournment of first day’s truce talks, April 1953.

POW Exchange—Frontline Marines observe an Army convoy bringing the first UN prisoners to Freedom Village during Operation Small Switch. Below, the NKPA and CCF delegation after the first day’s truce talks concluded, April 1953.

DOD Photo A 170778
DOD Photo A 170795 DOD Photo A 170766

Freedom Village—Marines of 1st Engineer Battalion raise welcoming sign at entrance to camp. Rear Admiral John C. Daniel, USN, senior delegate at truce talks, reports progress at press conference. Below, KSC workers and Marine reroll barbed wire for use at the front.

Freedom Village—Marines from the 1st Engineer Battalion put up a welcoming sign at the camp entrance. Rear Admiral John C. Daniel, USN, the senior delegate at the truce talks, shares updates during a press conference. Below, KSC workers and Marines are rerolling barbed wire for use at the front lines.

DOD Photo A 170106
DOD Photo A 13392

Ready to Strike—Ground crew loads rockets on “Devilcat” Corsair in preparation for day’s mission. Below, protective screen of M-46 dozer of 1st Tank Battalion is designed to explode 3.5-inch rockets before they hit armored vehicle. The wire fence turns with the turret.

Ready to Strike—Ground crew loads rockets onto the “Devilcat” Corsair in preparation for the day’s mission. Below, the protective screen of the M-46 dozer from the 1st Tank Battalion is designed to detonate 3.5-inch rockets before they hit the armored vehicle. The wire fence turns with the turret.

DOD Photo A 170228
DOD Photo A 171000

Evacuation from MLR—Improvised trolley rigged up by 2d Battalion, 1st Marines, safely transfers Marine casualty. Below, front view of first aid bunker, built on reverse slope, by 1st Engineer Battalion personnel.

Evacuation from MLR—Improvised trolley set up by the 2nd Battalion, 1st Marines, safely moves a Marine casualty. Below, there’s a front view of the first aid bunker, constructed on the reverse slope by the 1st Engineer Battalion team.

DOD Photo A 171077
DOD Photo A 171351

Marine Relief—Advance party of the Turkish 3d Battalion arrives at 3/7 CP to reconnoiter its new sector preparatory to relief of 1st Marine Division, May 1953. Below, mine damage absorbed by thermo boot. Its sturdy construction saved limb of wounded Marine. Navy corpsman displays armored jacket worn by infantryman who survived blast of 5 lbs. of TNT accidentally exploded at close range.

Marine Relief—The advance party of the Turkish 3rd Battalion arrives at 3/7 CP to scout their new sector in preparation for taking over from the 1st Marine Division, May 1953. Below, mine damage sustained by a thermal boot. Its strong design saved the limb of an injured Marine. A Navy corpsman shows an armored jacket worn by the infantryman who survived the blast of 5 lbs. of TNT that accidentally detonated at close range.

DOD Photo A 172596 DOD Photo A16050
DOD Photo A 171293 DOD Photo A173207

Street Signs—Markers for the new Marine division CP at Camp Casey await completion of road work. Casey is command post of 1st MarDiv while in I Corps reserve. Marine tank fires in support of Turkish Brigade during May attack. Below, 5th Marines slog through flooded area on way back from day’s training.

Street Signs—Markers for the new Marine division command post at Camp Casey await completion of road work. Casey is the command post of the 1st Marine Division while in reserve with I Corps. Marine tanks provided fire support for the Turkish Brigade during the May attack. Below, the 5th Marines trudge through a flooded area on their way back from a day of training.

DOD Photo A 173233
DOD Photo A 173914

Defense of Boulder City—Men of 1st and 7th Marines receive supplies during CCF assaults in July 1953 against Boulder City. Below, aerial view of pock-marked terrain in front of Boulder City as seen from HMR-161 helicopter.

Defense of Boulder City—Troops from the 1st and 7th Marines get supplies during the CCF attacks in July 1953 on Boulder City. Below is an aerial view of the damaged landscape in front of Boulder City from an HMR-161 helicopter.

DOD Photo A 173886
DOD Photo A 174359

Cease-fire—1st Marines move off MLR on 28 July, following cease-fire order. How Company marches to Camp Lee from position at the front. Below, contemplative Marine surveys trench line being filled in in accordance with armistice agreement.

Cease-fire—1st Marines leave MLR on 28 July after receiving the cease-fire order. How Company marches to Camp Lee from their front-line position. Below, a thoughtful Marine watches as the trench line is filled in according to the armistice agreement.

DOD Photo A 173720
DOD Photo A 174381

Operation BIG SWITCH—Road map of route taken by repatriated UN prisoners of war as convoy reaches radio check points. Progress of convoy is immediately relayed to Freedom Village and entered on map.

Operation BIG CHANGE—A guide showing the route followed by returning UN prisoners of war as the convoy reaches radio checkpoints. The convoy's progress is quickly communicated to Freedom Village and marked on the map.

DOD Photo A 174586

UN Custodial Forces—Indian troops board Marine helicopter on deck of USS Point Cruz. They are then flown to the buffer zone to guard CCF and NKPA nonrepatriated POWs. Below, LtCol William G. Thrash receives naval aviator wings upon his release at Freedom Village from MajGen Vernon E. Megee, CG, 1st MAW.

UN Custodial Forces—Indian troops get on a Marine helicopter on the deck of the USS Point Cruz. They are then flown to the buffer zone to protect CCF and NKPA nonrepatriated POWs. Below, LtCol William G. Thrash receives his naval aviator wings upon his release at Freedom Village from MajGen Vernon E. Megee, CG, 1st MAW.

DOD Photo A 349140
DOD Photo A 173860

Dismantling the MLR—KSCs, under Marine supervision, load and carry lumber from torn-down bunkers to new sector. Below, guard shack at entrance to 1/1 CP show results of flood waters, August 1952. Road approach to Spoonbill Bridge completely submerged by annual summer rains, in July 1953.

Dismantling the MLR—KSCs, under Marine supervision, load and carry lumber from demolished bunkers to the new sector. Below, the guard shack at the entrance to 1/1 CP shows the effects of floodwaters from August 1952. The road leading to Spoonbill Bridge is completely underwater due to the usual summer rains in July 1953.

DOD Photo A 164548 DOD Photo A 173282
DOD Photo A 349563

Shore-to-Ship Operation—F3D is hauled aboard ship after being ferried by four DUKWs, as 1st MAW redeploys from Korea to Japan in June 1956. Below, 1st Marine Division in Korea functions as security force. Marine DMZ policemen inspect enemy positions, February 1955.

Shore-to-Ship Operation—F3D is brought onto the ship after being transported by four DUKWs, as 1st MAW moves from Korea to Japan in June 1956. Below, the 1st Marine Division in Korea acts as a security force. Marine DMZ officers check enemy positions, February 1955.

DOD Photo A 366097
DOD Photo A 366210

Mission Completed—1st Marine Division equipment and records at dockside prior to loading for division’s return to the States. Below, 1st Marines march across Freedom Gate Bridge on their way to Ascom City and thence home to U.S., March 1955.

Mission Completed—1st Marine Division equipment and records at the dock before loading for the division’s return to the U.S. Below, 1st Marines march across Freedom Gate Bridge on their way to Ascom City and then home to the U.S., March 1955.

DOD Photo A 366127

437

437

An additional four enlisted Marines returned to military control after a brief period of capture. Corporal William S. Blair, B/1/7, and PFC Bernard W. Insco, D/2/11, were taken prisoner on 24 April 1951 while the 1st Marine Division was operating as a component of IX Corps. Although originally sent north to a POW camp, both were released on 12 May by the enemy after less than a month’s captivity. Another pair of lucky Marines were PFC Richard R. Grindle and Corporal Harold J. Kidd, both of B/1/7. Seized on 11 May in patrol actions, they were the only Marines captured in ground fighting that month, and escaped to return to the division four days later.

An additional four enlisted Marines returned to military control after a short period of being captured. Corporal William S. Blair from B/1/7 and PFC Bernard W. Insco from D/2/11 were taken prisoner on April 24, 1951, while the 1st Marine Division was operating as part of IX Corps. Although they were initially sent north to a POW camp, both were released by the enemy on May 12 after less than a month in captivity. Another pair of fortunate Marines were PFC Richard R. Grindle and Corporal Harold J. Kidd, both from B/1/7. Captured on May 11 during patrol actions, they were the only Marines taken prisoner in ground combat that month, but they escaped and returned to the division four days later.

At least six escape attempts are known to have been made by Marine POWs, and another elaborate plan late in the war was foiled before it got under way. The incidents follow:

At least six escape attempts are known to have been made by Marine POWs, and another detailed plan late in the war was stopped before it could start. The incidents are as follows:

#1. In the early winter months of 1951, Sergeant Donald M. Griffith, F/2/5, became increasingly upset by the filth, steady attrition of POWs, and semi-starvation diet at The Valley. He vowed to escape. Late one night he pretended to go to the latrine and finding the guard asleep, instead hurried down the path leading out of the valley. He walked until dawn, then found a hut where he hid among a pile of rice bags for some much-needed sleep. Later, he knocked at a hut, asking for food. While he ate, however, his genial host’s son was out contacting a military patrol which even then was on Griffith’s trail.

#1. In the early winter months of 1951, Sergeant Donald M. Griffith, F/2/5, became more and more frustrated by the dirt, constant loss of POWs, and the nearly starving diet at The Valley. He decided to escape. Late one night, he faked a trip to the latrine and, finding the guard asleep, hurried down the path leading out of the valley instead. He walked until dawn, then found a hut where he hid among a pile of rice bags to catch some much-needed sleep. Later, he knocked on a hut and asked for food. While he was eating, though, the friendly host’s son was out getting in touch with a military patrol that was already on Griffith’s trail.

A group of Communist soldiers closed in to recapture him. As early punishment, Griffith’s shoe pacs were taken from him and he was forced to walk back to the Valley in his threadbare ski socks. Returned to the camp, the Marine sergeant was beaten across the face. He was also directed to walk up a nearby hill and for three successive times a rifle bullet tearing by his head barely missed him. Later he learned that plans of his escape were leaked to the CCF by an informer, thus triggering an early search.

A group of Communist soldiers surrounded him to take him back. As a form of punishment, they took Griffith’s shoe pacs, forcing him to walk back to the Valley in his worn-out ski socks. Once back at the camp, the Marine sergeant got beaten across the face. He was also ordered to walk up a nearby hill, and three times a bullet whizzed by his head, just missing him. Later, he found out that details of his escape had been leaked to the CCF by an informant, which led to an early search.

#2. In May 1951, Captain Bryon H. Beswick, VMF-323, was a member of a large POW column being marched north. Although still suffering severe burns on his face, hands, and leg incurred438 while bailing out of his plane that had caught fire, Beswick and four others attempted to outwit their guards while on the march. All the would-be escapees were placed in solitary confinement.

#2. In May 1951, Captain Bryon H. Beswick, VMF-323, was part of a large group of POWs being marched north. Despite still dealing with serious burns on his face, hands, and leg from bailing out of his plane that had caught fire, Beswick and four others tried to outsmart their guards during the march. All of the escapees were put in solitary confinement.

#3. Shortly after his capture in July 1951, PFC Alfred P. Graham, Jr., H/3/5, was interned temporarily at what appeared to be a divisional headquarters. One afternoon when the guards seemed slack, Graham and another Marine sneaked off. Ultimately they approached a farmhouse to get food and there stumbled into a half dozen Koreans who took them into custody. The two Marines were beaten with a submachine gun and their hands were bound behind their back with communications wire. On their forced reappearance at the original site of escape, a Korean officer beat and interrogated them for three days.

#3. Shortly after his capture in July 1951, PFC Alfred P. Graham, Jr., H/3/5, was temporarily held at what seemed like a divisional headquarters. One afternoon, when the guards were a bit lax, Graham and another Marine snuck away. They eventually came across a farmhouse to get some food and ended up running into a group of about six Koreans who took them prisoner. The two Marines were beaten with a submachine gun and their hands were tied behind their backs with communications wire. When they were forced to return to the place they escaped from, a Korean officer beat them and interrogated them for three days.

#4. A short-lived escape attempt at Pak’s Palace, not long after his capture in October 1951, had earned Lieutenant Gillette a solitary confinement tour. Arriving at Officers’ camp in Pi-chong-ni the following spring, the former VMF(N)-513 squadron member and a South African air force pilot laid plans for a mutual escape. Gillette deliberately set himself on a course of reduced rations to prepare himself for the coming feat. When the two men made their break, they were shot at but managed to safely clear the camp.

#4. A brief escape attempt at Pak’s Palace, shortly after his capture in October 1951, earned Lieutenant Gillette a stint in solitary confinement. When he arrived at the Officers’ camp in Pi-chong-ni the following spring, the former VMF(N)-513 squad member and a South African air force pilot started planning a joint escape. Gillette intentionally cut back on his rations to get ready for the challenge ahead. When they made their move, they were fired at but managed to get out of the camp safely.

The first night out the other pilot so badly injured himself in a fall that Gillette had to leave him and go on alone. Although the apparent escape route lay to the west, nearer the coast, the Marine chose to go east across rugged mountains that offered little in the way of cover, concealment, or food. His unorthodox planning nearly paid off. “Whereas most escapees were recaptured within hours, or at best within days, Lieutenant Gillette was free for several weeks before the Communists found him halfway across Korea.”627 One Royal Marine described the attempt as “the finest and most determined one he knew of.”628

The first night out, the other pilot hurt himself so badly in a fall that Gillette had to leave him behind and continue on his own. Even though the obvious escape route was to the west, closer to the coast, the Marine decided to head east across rough mountains that offered little cover, concealment, or food. His unconventional planning almost worked. “While most escapees were caught within hours, or at most within days, Lieutenant Gillette was free for several weeks before the Communists found him halfway across Korea.”627 One Royal Marine described the attempt as “the finest and most determined one he knew of.”628

627 MacDonald, POW, p. 169.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 169.

628 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

#5. In July 1952, three Marine officers were involved in an abortive escape attempt at Camp 2. They were Lieutenant Colonel Thrash, Major McLaughlin, and Second Lieutenant Richard L. Sill, 1st 90mm AAA Gun Battalion. When detected outside of camp they were able to get back inside the compound, but the Chinese439 did identify Lieutenant Still. His escape attempt earned him a three-month sentence in the hole from which he later “emerged unbothered and steeled against the Communists.”629

#5. In July 1952, three Marine officers were involved in a failed escape attempt at Camp 2. They were Lieutenant Colonel Thrash, Major McLaughlin, and Second Lieutenant Richard L. Sill, 1st 90mm AAA Gun Battalion. When they were spotted outside the camp, they managed to return inside the compound, but the Chinese439 identified Lieutenant Sill. His escape attempt landed him a three-month sentence in solitary confinement, from which he later “emerged unbothered and ready to face the Communists.”629

629 Ibid., p. 170.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 170.

#6. Captain Martelli escaped from the Camp 2 compound in September 1952. Retaken 10 days later, he was put in the same hole for two months. On release from the confinement, he was visibly upset by the experience, but quickly recovered. As a matter of interest, Martelli, like the other men whose exploits are recounted here, returned home in Operation BIG SWITCH.

#6. Captain Martelli escaped from the Camp 2 compound in September 1952. He was recaptured 10 days later and was put in the same hole for two months. When he was released from confinement, he was clearly shaken by the experience, but he recovered quickly. Interestingly, Martelli, like the other men whose stories are told here, returned home in Operation BIG SWITCH.

#7. In the spring of 1953 a group of 30 officers, including two British Marines, at Camp 2 organized classes in mathematics, physics, and survival lectures. Conferences on escape and evasion techniques were held and the men formed escape groups. The teams drew straws to pick priorities for escape, and each one presented its plan to a senior body for approval. On 1 July, with support of the other teams, the first group went over the fence surrounding their house. Their freedom was brief, however, and the camp guard doubled. When rumors of armistice began circulating, further escape plans were cancelled. Clandestine prisoner escape committees—although unsuccessful in terms of actual results achieved—had existed at various camps. Second Lieutenant Rowland M. Murphy had been a member of such an organization at Obul. Major McLaughlin had assumed similar responsibilities at Camp 5, in 1951, and later at Camp 2 served on the secret all-UNC prisoners escape committee and senior officers’ organization within Camp 2. In early 1953 Major Harris became senior officer at the Camp 2 Annex. He organized Spanish classes as a facade for having a regular meeting place to announce policy and issue orders. Maps of North Korea were prepared for use in escape attempts and counter-Chinese political indoctrination was disseminated.

#7. In the spring of 1953, a group of 30 officers, including two British Marines, at Camp 2 started classes in math, physics, and survival tactics. They held conferences on escape and evasion techniques, and the men formed escape groups. The teams drew straws to decide their escape priorities, and each one presented its plan to a higher authority for approval. On July 1, with support from the other teams, the first group went over the fence surrounding their barracks. Their freedom was short-lived, though, as the camp guard increased. When rumors of an armistice began to spread, additional escape plans were canceled. Clandestine prisoner escape committees—though not successful in terms of actual outcomes—had existed at various camps. Second Lieutenant Rowland M. Murphy was part of such an organization at Obul. Major McLaughlin had taken on similar responsibilities at Camp 5 in 1951 and later served on the secret all-UNC prisoners escape committee and the senior officers’ organization within Camp 2. In early 1953, Major Harris became the senior officer at the Camp 2 Annex. He set up Spanish classes as a cover for a regular meeting place to announce policies and give orders. Maps of North Korea were created for use in escape attempts, and counter-Chinese political indoctrination was spread.

The Camp 2 officers performed another useful service. As rumor leaked out of the impending truce, they drafted a policy guide on POW behavior that was secretly circulated to other camps. UNC prisoners were directed to refrain from any appearance of fraternizing with the enemy, or acts of exuberance or violence. Specifically, they were reminded not to show any great enthusiasm upon440 their release, to prevent the Communist cameras on the scene from recording this as another propaganda victory.

The Camp 2 officers provided another important service. As rumors spread about the upcoming truce, they created a policy guide on POW behavior that was secretly shared with other camps. UNC prisoners were instructed to avoid any signs of camaraderie with the enemy, as well as any expressions of excitement or violence. They were specifically reminded not to display excessive enthusiasm upon440 their release, in order to stop the Communist cameras on-site from capturing it as another propaganda win.

Evaluation and Aftermath630

630 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: HRS Subject File: VE23.2.S8 “CMC Statements on Korean POWs”; Biog File, HRB, HistDiv, HQMC; MacDonald, POW; Fehrenbach, Kind of War; Elliot Harris, The “UnAmerican” Weapon—Psychological Warfare (New York: M. W. Lads Publishing Co., 1967); Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

630 Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section comes from: HRS Subject File: VE23.2.S8 “CMC Statements on Korean POWs”; Biog File, HRB, HistDiv, HQMC; MacDonald, POW; Fehrenbach, Kind of War; Elliot Harris, The “UnAmerican” Weapon—Psychological Warfare (New York: M. W. Lads Publishing Co., 1967); Leckie, Conflict; Rees, Korea.

With but a few exceptions, circumstances indicated that capture of most Marines was unavoidable. Theoretically, it can be argued that several seized in bunkers might have avoided captivity had they been occupying fighting-holes instead. On the other hand, they might just as readily have become statistics on a KIA list, instead, by falling victim to preparatory fire that preceded the enemy’s main assault.

With a few exceptions, the situation suggested that most Marines would likely be captured. One could argue that some who were caught in bunkers might have avoided being taken if they had been in fighting positions instead. However, they could just as easily have ended up on a KIA list by being hit by the enemy's preparatory fire that came before the main attack.

As Marine historian, then-Major, MacDonald has noted:

As marine historian, former Major MacDonald has noted:

A shadow fell over American POWs in the aftermath of the Korean War. Courts-martial and other official inquiries revealed that a small segment of the Americans captured by the Communists had been guilty of behavior ranging from questionable to treasonable.631

A shadow fell over American POWs after the Korean War. Courts-martial and other official inquiries showed that a small group of Americans captured by the Communists had engaged in behavior ranging from questionable to treasonous.631

631 MacDonald, POW, p. 3.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ MacDonald, POW, p. 3.

Both the Secretary of Defense Advisory Committee on Prisoners of War and the United States Congress, which investigated the entire POW issue, returned favorable verdicts for Marine POW conduct. The U.S. Senate report summarized its findings:

Both the Secretary of Defense Advisory Committee on Prisoners of War and the United States Congress, which looked into the entire POW situation, came back with positive opinions on the conduct of Marine POWs. The U.S. Senate report summed up its findings:

The United States Marine Corps, the Turkish troops, and the Colombians as groups, did not succumb to the pressures exerted upon them by the Communists and did not cooperate or collaborate with the enemy. For this they deserve greatest admiration and credit.632

The United States Marine Corps, Turkish troops, and Colombians as groups did not give in to the pressures from the Communists and did not cooperate or work with the enemy. For this, they deserve the highest praise and recognition.632

632 Ibid., p. 237.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 237.

In commenting on prisoner attitudes and activities that seemed to account for those men who became “survival types”, an Army psychiatrist, Major William F. Mayer, observed:

In discussing the mindset and actions of inmates that contributed to those men who turned into “survival types,” an Army psychiatrist, Major William F. Mayer, noted:

The Marines were a statistically significant group from the standpoint of size, something over two hundred; the only thing I can say about them is that more of them survived than we. I think this is a function of discipline and morale and esprit; and the attitude in the Marine Corps I expressed a little while ago, that if something happens to me, these jokers will take care of me.633

The Marines were a notable group in terms of size, with over two hundred members; all I can say about them is that more of them made it through than we did. I believe this comes down to discipline, morale, and team spirit; the mindset in the Marine Corps that I mentioned earlier—that if something happens to me, these guys will look out for me. 633

441

441

633 Ibid., pp. 236–237, address to U.S. Army Chaplain School, 1957.

633 Same source., pp. 236–237, address to U.S. Army Chaplain School, 1957.

In the nature of self-judgment, Sergeant Griffith referred to “that certain ‘something’ that seems to weld men together prevailed more among the Marine POWs than it did with the other captured UN Troops.”634 The Marine with probably more experience as a POW than anyone else, Sergeant Harrison, noted that “without USMC training I would never have lived through several tight spots. I am not talking strictly about physical training as I am mental conditioning. It is something that causes you to think ... about what the other guy will think or how it [your action] might affect or endanger them.”635

In terms of self-judgment, Sergeant Griffith pointed out that “there's a certain ‘something’ that seems to bond people together, and it was stronger among the Marine POWs than with the other captured UN troops.” 634 The Marine with probably the most experience as a POW, Sergeant Harrison, remarked, “Without USMC training, I wouldn’t have survived several tough situations. I'm not just talking about physical training; I mean mental conditioning. It makes you think ... about what the other person will think or how your actions might affect or put them at risk.” 635

634 Ibid., p. 88.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 88.

635 Ibid., p. 238.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 238.

A senior Air Force officer, Lieutenant Colonel Gerald Brown, who headed POW units at Camp 2 and 5 between his tours of solitary confinement, declared:

A senior Air Force officer, Lieutenant Colonel Gerald Brown, who led POW units at Camp 2 and 5 during his time away from solitary confinement, stated:

I was extremely proud of the conduct of U.S. Marine Corps personnel with whom I came in contact during my period of confinement. Their esprit de corps was perhaps the highest of any branch of the Armed Forces of the United States during this period.636

I was really proud of how the U.S. Marine Corps personnel I interacted with behaved during my time in confinement. Their sense of camaraderie was possibly the strongest of any branch of the Armed Forces in the United States at that time.636

636 Ibid., p. 220.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 220.

And Navy Chief Duane Thorin, a former inmate of the Camp 2 annex, who later inspired the character of the helicopter pilot in James A. Michener’s The Bridges of Toko-ri, pointed out:

And Navy Chief Duane Thorin, who was a former inmate of the Camp 2 annex and later inspired the character of the helicopter pilot in James A. Michener's The Bridges of Toko-ri, pointed out:

The Navy and Marine Corps POWs were generally excellent. The Marines who left something to be desired were more than compensated for by the majority of them.637

The Navy and Marine Corps POWs were typically outstanding. Any Marines who fell short were more than made up for by the majority of them.637

637 Ibid., p. 223.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 223.

Another view was offered by a prominent neurologist and consultant to the Secretary of Defense Advisory Committee, Dr. Harold G. Wolff. After investigating the performance of American POWs in Korea, Dr. Wolff concluded they had not “behaved much differently from other men in other armies and places” but that Americans had been made to appear much worse “by the enemy’s propaganda devices and our own initial ineptitude in countering the Communist propaganda.”638

Another perspective was presented by a well-known neurologist and advisor to the Secretary of Defense Advisory Committee, Dr. Harold G. Wolff. After looking into how American POWs performed in Korea, Dr. Wolff concluded that they did not “behave much differently from other men in other armies and places” but that Americans were made to look much worse “by the enemy’s propaganda efforts and our own initial failure to counter the Communist propaganda.”638

638 Ibid., p. 237.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 237.

As a postscript to the POW story, five Marines received awards, on 11 January 1954, for their exceptionally meritorious conduct while serving as prisoners of the Communists in Korea. They were:

As a note after the POW story, five Marines were awarded, on January 11, 1954, for their outstanding bravery while being held as prisoners by the Communists in Korea. They were:

442

442

Lieutenant Colonel Thrash—awarded a Gold Star in lieu of a second Legion of Merit;

Lieutenant Colonel Thrash—awarded a Gold Star instead of a second Legion of Merit;

Major McLaughlin—awarded the Legion of Merit;

Major McLaughlin—awarded the Legion of Merit;

Major Harris—also awarded the Legion of Merit;

Major Harris—also awarded the Legion of Merit;

Captain Flynn—awarded the Navy and Marine Corps Medal; and

Captain Flynn—recognized with the Navy and Marine Corps Medal; and

Master Sergeant Cain—awarded a Letter of Commendation with Ribbon.

Master Sergeant Cain—received a Letter of Commendation with a Ribbon.

On the negative side, one enlisted Marine was disciplined for his cooperation with the enemy in writing a pro-Communist magazine article. A Court of Inquiry, convened in March 1954, did not recommend a court-martial for the 45-year-old pilot, Colonel Schwable. After a month-long review of circumstances involved in the case, the court opined that he had resisted Communist pressure and torture “to the limit of his ability before giving in.”639 Its final judgment was that Schwable—a Naval Academy graduate, veteran of 20 years’ military service, and distinguished WW II night-fighter pilot and squadron CO—not be subjected to disciplinary action. At the same time the court held that his future usefulness as a Marine officer was “seriously impaired” by his conduct as a war prisoner.

On the negative side, a Marine was disciplined for collaborating with the enemy by writing a pro-Communist magazine article. A Court of Inquiry, which met in March 1954, did not recommend a court-martial for the 45-year-old pilot, Colonel Schwable. After a month-long review of the circumstances surrounding the case, the court stated that he had resisted Communist pressure and torture “to the limit of his ability before giving in.”639 Its final decision was that Schwable—a Naval Academy graduate, veteran of 20 years of military service, and distinguished WW II night-fighter pilot and squadron leader—should not face disciplinary action. However, the court also found that his future usefulness as a Marine officer was “seriously impaired” by his actions as a war prisoner.

639 Ibid., p. 233.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 233.

On a larger scale, 192 Americans were found guilty of misconduct against fellow prisoners or various degrees of collaboration with the enemy. None of these was a Marine. In comparison with some 22,000 Communists who refused repatriation, 21 U.S. and 1 British prisoner succumbed to CCF brainwashing tactics. Twelve of the Americans have since returned to the U.S., apparently disenchanted with the Communist version of “people’s democracy” after getting a closer look at it.

On a larger scale, 192 Americans were found guilty of misconduct against fellow prisoners or varying degrees of collaboration with the enemy. None of these individuals were Marines. In contrast to the roughly 22,000 Communists who refused to return home, 21 American and 1 British prisoner fell victim to CCF brainwashing tactics. Twelve of the Americans have since returned to the U.S., seemingly disillusioned with the Communist idea of “people’s democracy” after seeing it up close.

Investigations later showed that “only a handful of the POWs in Korea were able to maintain absolute silence under military interrogation. Nearly all of the American prisoners went beyond the [Geneva Convention] ‘absolute’, name, rank, serial number, and date of birth restriction.”640 Although giving false or misleading information was a common occurrence in POW camps, such testimony was usually quickly detected. American military authorities, drawing up a revised Code of Conduct (1955) subsequently recommended443 against making untruthful statements. Further, even though several Marines seemed to have suffered none the worse for giving false information, in at least one case a prisoner’s own situation was weakened by enemy detection of his lie and increasing pressure was brought against him.

Investigations later revealed that “only a few of the POWs in Korea could keep completely silent during military interrogation. Almost all of the American prisoners went beyond the [Geneva Convention] ‘absolute’ rules of only providing name, rank, serial number, and date of birth.”640 Although providing false or misleading information was common in POW camps, such claims were usually discovered quickly. American military authorities, drafting a revised Code of Conduct (1955), later advised443 against making dishonest statements. Additionally, while some Marines seemed to be fine after giving false information, in at least one instance, a prisoner’s situation worsened when the enemy detected his lie, leading to increased pressure on him.

640 Ibid., p. 230.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 230.

It was found too, that in every group of prisoners there were always gradations of those more cooperative with the enemy (“progressives”) and those who offered open or passive resistance (“reactionaries”). One Korean War analyst, in seeking the final explanation of what POW tactics succeeded best against a dedicated enemy, cited the Turkish “chain of command that was never broken” and which helped to mold them together. He noted the “permissive” culture and background of Americans where freedom of choice and individual decisions are basic tenets. Despite the effect of military indoctrination and discipline, this concept of individualism and freedom appeared to be so strongly engrained that unless there was a corresponding emphasis on responsibility and strong beliefs it tended to weaken a man when his action and values were put to a prolonged test—as in the POW compound. The analyst concluded:

It was also discovered that in every group of prisoners, there were always degrees of those who were more cooperative with the enemy (“progressives”) and those who put up open or passive resistance (“reactionaries”). One Korean War analyst, in trying to pinpoint the best tactics for POWs against a determined enemy, pointed out the Turkish “chain of command that was never broken,” which helped unify them. He observed the “permissive” culture and background of Americans, where freedom of choice and individual decisions are fundamental values. Despite the impact of military training and discipline, this idea of individualism and freedom seemed so deeply rooted that unless there was a strong emphasis on responsibility and firm beliefs, it tended to weaken a person when their actions and values were put to a long-term test—as seen in the POW compound. The analyst concluded:

Only an extremely cohesive group, with tight leadership and great spiritual strengths, coupled with inner toughness and concern for one another, could have survived the shocks visited upon their minds and bodies.... They [the Turks] remained united against the enemy, and they survived.641

Only a very close-knit group, with strong leadership and great mental resilience, along with inner strength and care for each other, could have endured the challenges faced by their minds and bodies... They [the Turks] stayed united against the enemy, and they survived.641

641 Fehrenbach, Kind of War, pp. 541–542.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Fehrenbach, Kind of War, pp. 541–542.

This judgement, to a large degree, tells the Marine POW story.

This judgment largely tells the story of Marine POWs.


The Postwar Transition—Control of the DMZ and the Military Police Company—Organization of New Defense Positions—Postwar Employment of Marine Units in FECOM

The Postwar Transition—Managing the DMZ and the Military Police Company—Setup of New Defense Positions—Postwar Use of Marine Units in FECOM

The Postwar Transition642

642 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdDs Jul-Sep 53; 1stMarDiv Type “C” Rpt—Defense of “C” Sector, 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, Folder #3 (this and following 1stMarDiv end-of-war records currently retired in 61 A2265, Box 74, FRC, Suitland, Md.); 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 30 Jul-31 Aug 53; 1stMar Hist of Defense of “D” Sector, 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, Folder #3 (contains brief histories of 1/1, 2/1, 3/1, AT Co/1, 4.2-inch MortCo/1); 5thMar Hist of Def of “D” Sector, 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, Folder #3; 5thMar Hist, same period, Folder #4 (brief histories of 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, AT Co/5, 4.2-inch MortCo/5, DMZ Police Co/5), dtd 26 Dec 53; 7thMar Hist of Defense, 27 Jul 53–10 Feb 54 (brief histories 1/7, 2/7, 3/7, AT Co/7, 4.2-inch MortCo/7), Folder #5; 1stMarDiv-Type “C” Rpt—Defense of “C” Div Sect, 27 Jul-31 Dec 53, Folder #6 (containing, among others, brief rpts 11thMar, 1st TkBn, 1st Engr Bn, 1st MT Bn, 7th MT Bn, 1st KMC Regt, 2d KMC Regt).

642 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10; 1stMarDiv ComdDs Jul-Sep 53; 1stMarDiv Type “C” Rpt—Defense of “C” Sector, 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, Folder #3 (this and the following 1stMarDiv end-of-war records are currently retired in 61 A2265, Box 74, FRC, Suitland, Md.); 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 30 Jul-31 Aug 53; 1stMar Hist of Defense of “D” Sector, 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, Folder #3 (includes brief histories of 1/1, 2/1, 3/1, AT Co/1, 4.2-inch MortCo/1); 5thMar Hist of Defense of “D” Sector, 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, Folder #3; 5thMar Hist, same period, Folder #4 (brief histories of 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, AT Co/5, 4.2-inch MortCo/5, DMZ Police Co/5), dated 26 Dec 53; 7thMar Hist of Defense, 27 Jul 53–10 Feb 54 (brief histories of 1/7, 2/7, 3/7, AT Co/7, 4.2-inch MortCo/7), Folder #5; 1stMarDiv-Type “C” Rpt—Defense of “C” Div Sect, 27 Jul-31 Dec 53, Folder #6 (including, among others, brief reports from 11thMar, 1st TkBn, 1st Engr Bn, 1st MT Bn, 7th MT Bn, 1st KMC Regt, 2d KMC Regt).

Terms of the Armistice Agreement required EUSAK components, including the 1st Marine Division, to carry out a number of major tasks in the months following the end of active hostilities. As stipulated by the cease-fire, UNC troops all along the front withdrew to a new main battle position (MBP) south of the main line of resistance. A military demarcation line (MDL) was established between enemy and friendly positions, corresponding to the end-of-war battle lines. Each side pulled back 2,000 yards from this MDL, with the combined 4,000-yard buffer strip on both sides being known as the demilitarized zone.(DMZ).

Terms of Service Armistice Agreement required EUSAK units, including the 1st Marine Division, to complete several significant tasks in the months following the end of active fighting. As specified by the cease-fire, UNC troops along the front withdrew to a new main battle position (MBP) south of the main line of resistance. A military demarcation line (MDL) was set up between enemy and friendly positions, reflecting the battle lines at the end of the war. Both sides pulled back 2,000 yards from this MDL, creating a total 4,000-yard buffer zone on both sides known as the demilitarized zone (DMZ).

A continuous double-strand barbed wire fence, known as the No-Pass Fence, or No-Pass Line, was erected 200 yards below the southern boundary of the DMZ by infantry units manning the MLR at the time of the cease-fire. Appropriate marking signs, in Chinese, Korean, and English, were placed at regular intervals along the446 fence, prohibiting unauthorized entry into the Demilitarized Zone.

A continuous double-strand barbed wire fence, called the No-Pass Fence or No-Pass Line, was built 200 yards below the southern boundary of the DMZ by infantry units stationed at the MLR during the cease-fire. Signs marking the area, in Chinese, Korean, and English, were put up at regular intervals along the446 fence, prohibiting unauthorized entry into the Demilitarized Zone.

Strict requirements by I Corps enjoined that the “fence on the southern boundary of the DMZ must present a continuous unbroken line except for gates and where it crosses large streams.”643 Beginning late on 27 July 1953, the 1st Marine Division’s modified mission became that of withdrawal to and organization of the post-armistice MBP, establishment of the No-Pass Line, and defense of the new position in readiness for any possible resumption of hostilities by the enemy.

Strict requirements from I Corps mandated that the “fence along the southern boundary of the DMZ must form a continuous, unbroken line except for gates and where it crosses large streams.”643 Starting late on July 27, 1953, the 1st Marine Division’s revised mission was to withdraw and set up the post-armistice MBP, establish the No-Pass Line, and defend the new position in preparation for any potential resumption of hostilities by the enemy.

643 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dtd 2 Aug 53.

643 1stMarDiv G-3 Journal, dated 2 Aug 53.

Division officers, from commanding general to platoon leader level, repeatedly emphasized that the armistice agreement was only a cessation of active fighting. As such, it could be violated by the enemy at any time. The armistice was not a peace, but had simply paved the way for a political conference. As the UNC commander, General Mark W. Clark, had stated, the 27 July document was merely “a military agreement between opposing commanders to cease fire and to permit the opposing sides to arrive at a peaceful solution of the conflict.”644 Since many felt the cease-fire might be only temporary and not necessarily a permanent peace, all hands showed an attitude of skepticism and watchful waiting. There was little disposition or time for celebration. The response of many men to the complete lack of noise across the front was one of simple restlessness and expectancy.

Division officers, from the commanding general to platoon leader level, constantly stressed that the armistice agreement was just a pause in active fighting. Because of that, the enemy could break it at any moment. The armistice wasn’t a peace deal; it only set the stage for a political conference. As UNC commander General Mark W. Clark had said, the document from July 27 was simply “a military agreement between opposing commanders to cease fire and to allow both sides to work towards a peaceful resolution of the conflict.” 644 Since many believed the cease-fire might only be temporary and not a lasting peace, everyone displayed an attitude of skepticism and cautious waiting. There was little willingness or time for celebration. The reaction of many soldiers to the complete silence along the front was one of sheer restlessness and anticipation.

644 1stMarDiv ComdD Aug 53, App. VII, Annex E to IMARD-00-10-53, p. 2.

644 1stMarDiv ComdD Aug 53, App. VII, Annex E to IMARD-00-10-53, p. 2.

From the 7th Marines just engaged in the vicious Boulder City battle, the reaction

From the 7th Marines who were just involved in the brutal Boulder City battle, the response

... was one of disbelief and caution. Extensive movements of the enemy during the night of 27 July only bolstered the feeling of wariness and suspicion. Only after dawn broke on 28 July, without any shots being fired, did the realism [reality] of the truce become apparent, followed by a wide-spread sensation of relief.645

... was one of disbelief and caution. Extensive movements of the enemy during the night of July 27 only strengthened the sense of wariness and suspicion. It wasn't until dawn broke on July 28, with no shots fired, that the reality of the truce became clear, followed by a widespread feeling of relief.645

645 7thMar Hist, p. 1, Folder #5.

645 7thMar Hist, p. 1, Folder #5.

A 5th Marines representative noted:

A representative from the 5th Marines noted:

The fact that negotiations had been going on for some time with numerous false alarms dulled the edge for most people, and a prior announcement that the agreement would be signed took most of the steam away from the actual culmination of the fighting ... in effect [the cease-fire]447 meant “we’re giving you ten dollars but don’t spend it for we might take it back.”646

The fact that negotiations had been happening for a while with many false alarms made most people less excited, and a previous announcement that the agreement would be signed took away a lot of the excitement from the actual end of the fighting ... essentially, [the cease-fire]447 meant “we’re giving you ten dollars, but don’t spend it because we might take it back.”646

646 Co H Rpt of Post-Armistice Activities, Encl (2), CO 3/5 ltr ser 00208, dtd 11 Jan 54, p. 1, in 3/5 Hist, Folder #4.

646 Co H Report of Post-Armistice Activities, Enclosure (2), CO 3/5 letter number 00208, dated January 11, 1954, page 1, in 3/5 History, Folder #4.

The view expressed by a Korean regimental commander was that:

The perspective shared by a Korean regimental commander was that:

Many of the officers and men were relieved to see the fighting cease; others, particularly among the officers, would rather have seen the fighting continue until the country could be united. However, the officers and men accepted the cease-fire as a military order and acted accordingly.647

Many of the officers and soldiers were relieved to see the fighting stop; others, especially among the officers, would have preferred to see the fighting go on until the country was united. However, the officers and soldiers accepted the cease-fire as a military order and acted accordingly.647

647 1st KMC Regt Rpt, dtd 7 Apr 54, p. 1, in 1stMarDiv Type “C” Rpt, Folder #6.

647 1st KMC Regt Report, dated April 7, 1954, page 1, in 1st Mar Div Type “C” Report, Folder #6.

Division MLR units on 27 July had been the 1st KMC, the 5th Marines, and 1st Marines in the left, center, and right regimental sectors, respectively. With the pullback of the division to new defensive positions, the 5th Marines—the infantry regiment that had not been heavily engaged in recent combat—was assigned the mission of defending the forward general outpost (GOP) line across the division front. In addition, the 5th Marines, or Northern Regiment as it came to be called since it was the only one remaining north of the Imjin River, was also charged with police duties and security of the UNC part of the DMZ located in the division sector.

Division MLR units on July 27 were the 1st KMC, the 5th Marines, and the 1st Marines in the left, center, and right regimental sectors, respectively. With the division pulling back to new defensive positions, the 5th Marines—the infantry regiment that had not been heavily involved in recent combat—was given the task of defending the forward general outpost (GOP) line across the division front. Additionally, the 5th Marines, which became known as the Northern Regiment since it was the only one left north of the Imjin River, was also responsible for police duties and security of the UNC part of the DMZ located in the division sector.

Marine regiments, battalions, and companies began withdrawing from the DMZ to move to their new MBP early on the morning of 28 July, less than 24 hours after the signing of the Korean armistice. To some extent, the relocation of units was facilitated by the fact that the forward part of the division sector had been defended by the three MLR regiments. Since the lateral boundaries, initially, would remain the same, the three 5th Marines battalions were to occupy positions held by the three line regiments. Orders called for 2/5 to occupy the left regimental sector previously held by the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regimental Combat Team; 1/5 to man the 5th Marines center sector; and 3/5 to assume the right regimental sector.

Marine regiments, battalions, and companies started pulling back from the DMZ to head to their new MBP early in the morning on July 28, less than 24 hours after the Korean armistice was signed. The move was somewhat easier because the forward part of the division sector had already been protected by the three MLR regiments. Since the lateral boundaries would initially stay the same, the three 5th Marines battalions were set to take over the positions previously held by the three line regiments. Orders specified that 2/5 would take the left regimental sector once held by the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regimental Combat Team; 1/5 would take the center sector for the 5th Marines; and 3/5 would take over the right regimental sector.

Whereas 5th Marines battalions were directed to occupy their new positions by D+84 hours (or 2200, 30 July), other units in some cases were not required to pull out of their respective positions until positions by D+108 hours (2000, 1 August). This was done to insure that no portion of the division front was left unmanned during this very critical period. It did, however, force small units to make two448 moves and “in one instance, a battalion and a regimental headquarters were occupying the same area.”648 Because of the need to move almost immediately, only a hasty physical reconnaissance was made. Small unit leaders were not always familiar with the area and this gave rise, in some instances, to confusion about exact unit boundaries. This resulted in a later relocation of several units.

Whereas the 5th Marine battalions were ordered to take their new positions by D+84 hours (or 2200, 30 July), other units were sometimes not required to leave their positions until D+108 hours (2000, 1 August). This was done to ensure that no part of the division front was left unmanned during this critical time. However, it forced smaller units to make two448 moves, and “in one case, a battalion and a regimental headquarters were in the same area.”648 Due to the need to move quickly, only a brief physical reconnaissance was conducted. Small unit leaders were not always familiar with the area, which sometimes led to confusion about exact unit boundaries. This resulted in several units needing to be relocated later.

648 5thMar Hist, dtd 26 Dec 53, p. 4, Folder #4.

648 5thMar Hist, dated December 26, 1953, page 4, Folder #4.

For the first 72 hours after the armistice, Marines were engaged in a maximum effort to tear down installations, salvage fortification materials, and physically move out of the Demilitarized Zone. Infantry units were responsible for this destruction and salvage work within assigned sectors, with 1st Engineer Battalion assistance and supervision, as available. For the nearly 50 Marine infantry companies and attached KMC units, the order of priorities for those first three days generally appears to have been:

For the first 72 hours after the ceasefire, Marines worked hard to take down installations, salvage fortification materials, and physically move out of the Demilitarized Zone. Infantry units were in charge of this destruction and salvage work in their assigned areas, with help and oversight from the 1st Engineer Battalion when available. For the nearly 50 Marine infantry companies and attached KMC units, the priorities for those first three days generally seemed to be:

(1) Recovery of ordnance and removal to company supply dumps;

(1) Retrieval of weapons and transport to company supply depots;

(2) Removal of all combat equipment to supply dumps; and

(2) Taking all combat gear to supply dumps; and

(3) Destruction of field fortifications and salvage of all bunker timbers and other building materials from the old MLR sector.

(3) Demolition of field fortifications and recovery of all bunker timber and other construction materials from the old MLR area.

Specifications of the initial armistice agreement, as originally drawn up in August 1952, had called for a complete withdrawal of all military personnel, supplies, and equipment from the DMZ within 72 hours after the cease-fire. Destruction of all fortifications within the DMZ likewise was to be accomplished within this 72-hour deadline. It subsequently became evident, however, that it would be impossible to complete the entire job of dismantling and salvaging MLR fortifications within a three-day period. In mid-June 1953, CinCUNC had advised major commands that Communist and UNC negotiators had agreed to extend the original 72 hours to an additional 45-day period, or until 13 September.649

Specifications of the initial armistice agreement, as originally set up in August 1952, required a complete withdrawal of all military personnel, supplies, and equipment from the DMZ within 72 hours after the cease-fire. All fortifications within the DMZ were also supposed to be destroyed within this 72-hour window. However, it soon became clear that it would be impossible to fully dismantle and salvage MLR fortifications in just three days. In mid-June 1953, CinCUNC informed major commands that Communist and UNC negotiators had agreed to extend the original 72 hours to an additional 45 days, or until September 13.649

649 Other modifications and deadline extensions included: (a) withdrawal of all military forces, supplies, and equipment from coastal islands and waters north of the 38th Parallel within 5 days increased to 10 days; (b) Personnel and equipment to be evacuated from Korea only through those ports of entry specified in the armistice agreement. 1st MAW ComdD, Vol. III, Jun 53, Msg from CinCUNC to CG, AFFE, COMNAVFE, CG FEAF, info 1st MAW and others, dtd 17 Jun 53.

649 Other changes and extensions to deadlines included: (a) the withdrawal of all military forces, supplies, and equipment from coastal islands and waters north of the 38th Parallel within 5 days has been extended to 10 days; (b) Personnel and equipment will only be evacuated from Korea through the ports of entry specified in the armistice agreement. 1st MAW ComdD, Vol. III, Jun 53, Msg from CinCUNC to CG, AFFE, COMNAVFE, CG FEAF, info 1st MAW and others, dtd 17 Jun 53.

Division order 1MARD-OP-11-53, issued at 1600 on 27 July, clearly stated that all “removable materials”650 would be taken out449 of the DMZ within the immediate 72-hour period following the effective date of the armistice (2200, 27 July). The end-of-war order further directed that division personnel would “locate and list all valuable materials which should be salvaged but cannot be moved during this prescribed time ... an additional period of 45 days, after the initial 72-hour period, will be used to complete salvage operations within the Demilitarized Zone under the supervision of the Military Armistice Commission....”651

Division order 1MARD-OP-11-53, issued at 4 PM on July 27, clearly stated that all "removable materials"650 would be removed449 from the DMZ within the immediate 72-hour period following the effective date of the armistice (10 PM, July 27). The end-of-war order also directed that division personnel would "identify and list all valuable materials that should be salvaged but cannot be moved during this specified time... an additional 45 days, after the initial 72-hour period, will be used to complete salvage operations within the Demilitarized Zone under the supervision of the Military Armistice Commission...."651

650 1stMarDiv Folder “Withdrawal to and Organization of Post Armistice MBP 1MARD-OP-11-53-July 1953,” dtd 27 Jul 53.

650 1stMarDiv Folder “Withdrawal to and Organization of Post Armistice MBP 1MARD-OP-11-53-July 1953,” dated 27 Jul 53.

651 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

From top to lower echelons, however, a breakdown in communications seems to have taken place in the maze of post-truce orders. At the pick and shovel level, initial instructions were sometimes to the effect of:

From top to bottom, however, it seems there has been a breakdown in communication within the confusing maze of post-truce orders. At the grassroots level, initial instructions were sometimes like:

Salvage everything possible in the 72 hours we have to get out of here. If unable to salvage; then destroy.... No word was passed that there would be a period following the truce in which we could conduct a thorough salvage operation. Had this information been available, a more systematic process could have been devised....652

Salvage everything we can in the 72 hours we have to leave this place. If we can't salvage it, then destroy it. No one mentioned that there would be a period after the truce for us to carry out a comprehensive salvage operation. If we had known this sooner, we could have developed a more organized approach. 652

652 Co H Rpt, op. cit., p. 1, 3/5 Hist, Folder #4.

652 Co H Rpt, same source, p. 1, 3/5 Hist, Folder #4.

One regiment commented “that early directives from higher authorities did not clearly establish the relative priority for salvage operations.”653 More specifically, 1/7 related:

One regiment noted that the initial instructions from upper management didn't clearly define the level of importance for salvage operations. 653 More specifically, 1/7 said:

653 7thMar Hist, dtd 28 Jan 54, p. 5, Folder #5.

653 7thMar Hist, dated 28 Jan 54, p. 5, Folder #5.

Periodically, messages would be received stressing certain items of salvage as critical. This required revision of working schedules and shifting of men to other jobs ... if all salvageable material had been designated as critical at the commencement of salvage operations, the work could have been completed more expeditiously....654

Periodically, messages would come in highlighting certain salvage items as crucial. This needed adjustments to working schedules and moving workers to different tasks... if all salvageable material had been labeled as critical from the start of the salvage operations, the job could have been finished more quickly...654

654 1/7 Hist, in 7thMar Hist, p. 4, Folder #5.

654 1/7 Hist, in 7thMar Hist, p. 4, Folder #5.

A 5th Marines observer commented on the confusion in these words:

A 5th Marines observer noted the confusion with these words:

It is evident, however, that in dissemination to some of the lower echelons, pertinent information was either ignored or improperly passed ... some Company Commanders were under the impression that the entire job of dismantling and salvaging was to be completed in 72 hours. The result of this misconception was that in some areas bunkers were filled in with earth and then later had to be evacuated [excavated] in order to salvage the materials.655

It’s clear, though, that when sharing information with some of the lower levels, important details were either overlooked or not communicated correctly... some Company Commanders thought that the whole process of taking apart and recovering materials was supposed to be finished in 72 hours. This misunderstanding led to situations where bunkers were filled in with dirt and later had to be dug up again to recover the materials.655

450

450

655 5thMar Hist, p. 1, Folder #4.

655 5thMar Hist, p. 1, Folder #4.

Initial salvage operations were conducted from 28–30 July. Trenchlines were filled in; tank slots dozed under; bunkers torn down and usable timbers carried to salvage collecting points.

Initial salvage operations were carried out from July 28–30. Trenchlines were backfilled; tank positions were leveled; bunkers were demolished, and usable timber was transported to salvage collection points.

Beginning on 28 July, 1st Marines line units on the division right flank came under operational control of the 5th Marines, with their new mission being to “man an outpost line on the most formidable ground south of the southern boundary of the newly planned Demilitarized Zone in the MLR regimental sector.”656 Movement to the new outpost positions was under way by 29 July.

Beginning on July 28, the line units of the 1st Marines on the right flank of the division came under the operational control of the 5th Marines, with their new mission being to “set up an outpost line on the toughest terrain south of the southern boundary of the newly planned Demilitarized Zone in the MLR regimental sector.”656 Movement to the new outpost positions was in progress by July 29.

656 1/1 Hist, in 1stMar Hist, p. 1, Folder #3.

656 1/1 Hist, in 1stMar Hist, p. 1, Folder #3.

As the Marine units moved south to establish their new outpost positions in previously undeveloped areas, the limited engineering equipment available for simultaneously dismantling bunkers and constructing new camps tended to slow the latter job. Personnel of 1/1, which had utilized 124 vehicles for the transfer, were among those housed in widely scattered areas for several days during the moving and setting up of new camps. Torrential rains, of several days’ duration, which had engulfed the division’s transport operations on so many occasions in the past, caused the new campsites to turn into a muddy quagmire. Men of 2/5, during part of the relocation period, lived in shelter tents until regular tentage became available.

As the Marine units moved south to set up their new outpost positions in previously undeveloped areas, the limited engineering equipment available for taking down bunkers and constructing new camps tended to slow down the latter task. Personnel from 1/1, who had used 124 vehicles for the transfer, were among those who were housed in widely scattered locations for several days while moving and setting up new camps. Heavy rain that lasted several days, which had impacted the division's transport operations so many times before, turned the new campsites into a muddy mess. The men from 2/5 lived in shelter tents for part of the relocation period until regular tents became available.

A short moratorium on salvage activities took place between 31 July-3 August while the details for entry into the DMZ were being settled. Marine division salvage efforts encompassed an area extending from the MLR to the sector rear, in the vicinity of the KANSAS Line, as far as the Imjin River. Work in the areas south of the DMZ did not begin, in most cases, until after 13 September, and fortifications of secondary defense lines were left in place.

A brief pause on salvage activities happened from July 31 to August 3 while the details for entering the DMZ were being finalized. Marine division salvage operations covered an area from the MLR to the rear sector, near the Kans. Line, all the way to the Imjin River. In most cases, work in areas south of the DMZ didn’t start until after September 13, and the defenses of secondary lines were kept in place.

All salvage materials removed from the DMZ were placed in battalion and regimental dumps where they would be readily available for use in building the new battle positions. Recovery of ammunition was accomplished in some sectors early on the 28th. At the far right flank of the division line, the scene of the Marines’ final action in the Korean War, salvage efforts took on an additional task. Most of the first day was allotted to recovery of the dead at Hills 119 and 111 and the removal of their bodies to rear areas.

All salvage materials taken from the DMZ were stored in battalion and regimental dumps so they could be easily accessed for building the new battle positions. Recovery of ammunition happened in some sectors early on the 28th. At the far right flank of the division line, the site of the Marines’ last action in the Korean War, salvage efforts had an extra focus. Most of the first day was dedicated to recovering the bodies at Hills 119 and 111 and transporting them to rear areas.

Although the enemy had policed in front of Marine lines on the451 night of 27–28 July, at first light the CCF indicated the desire to recover their dead from Marine positions. Enemy parties were thus permitted to temporarily enter 3/1 lines to retrieve these bodies. This procedure provoked some consternation and renewed vigilance by Marine personnel upon “seeing the enemy moving around within a stone’s throw of our front lines so soon after his determined attacks.”657

Although the enemy patrolled in front of the Marine lines on the451 night of July 27–28, at first light the CCF expressed their desire to recover their dead from Marine positions. Enemy parties were allowed to temporarily enter the 3/1 lines to retrieve these bodies. This situation caused some unease and heightened vigilance among Marine personnel upon “seeing the enemy moving around within a stone’s throw of our front lines so soon after their determined attacks.”657

657 3/1 Hist, in 1stMar Hist, p. 2, Folder #3.

657 3/1 Hist, in 1stMar Hist, p. 2, Folder #3.

As soon as the Marines’ own corresponding unhappy task was completed, ammunition was removed to supply dumps, a laborious task not finished in the 1st Marines sector until noon on 29 July. The fierce fighting that had started after dark on 24 July and lasted until the morning of the ceasefire also accounted for the large amount of salvageable items found in the area including M-1 rifles, helmets, armored vests, and quantities of blood serum. All ordnance, equipment, and building materials were separated into stockpiles of good or nonrepairable items. Ammunition in excess of a one-half a basic JAMESTOWN fire unit (a unit of fire is the amount of ammunition a weapon will use in a day of combat), was placed in company and battalion dumps for collection by regimental ordnance teams.

As soon as the Marines finished their own difficult job, they moved ammunition to supply dumps, a tedious task that wasn't completed in the 1st Marines sector until noon on July 29. The intense fighting that began after dark on July 24 and lasted until the morning of the ceasefire also resulted in a significant number of salvageable items found in the area, including M-1 rifles, helmets, armored vests, and large quantities of blood serum. All ordnance, equipment, and building materials were sorted into piles of usable or non-repairable items. Any ammunition exceeding half of a basic JAMESTOWN fire unit (a unit of fire is the amount of ammunition a weapon uses in a day of combat) was stored in company and battalion dumps for collection by regimental ordnance teams.

On occasion, salvage of friendly ammunition was made more difficult because COP stockpiles struck by enemy mortar fire contained both damaged and live, usable ammunition mixed together. Although 1st Engineer Battalion ordnance disposal teams covered the positions thoroughly, unexploded mortar and artillery rounds were often unearthed by Marines filling in the old trenches, knocking down bunkers, or recovering wire. Anti-personnel mines forward of the protective wire prevented full salvage operations in some cases.

Sometimes, retrieving usable ammunition was tougher because the stockpiles at the outpost that were hit by enemy mortar fire had both damaged and functional ammo mixed together. Even though the ordnance disposal teams from the 1st Engineer Battalion searched the areas carefully, Marines often found unexploded mortar and artillery shells while they were filling in old trenches, tearing down bunkers, or collecting wire. In some cases, anti-personnel mines in front of the protective wire made it impossible to carry out complete salvage operations.

Three Marine combat outposts required special attention. These were Bunker Hill and Esther, in the central part of the MLR, and Ava, in the right sector. Although occupied by Marines at the time of the cease-fire, the COPs fell north of the MDL and thus became inaccessible for salvage after the initial 72-hour period. The positions were reduced and materials salvaged in the allotted time.

Three Marine combat outposts needed special attention. These were Bunker Hill and Esther, located in the central part of the MLR, and Ava, in the right sector. Even though Marines occupied them at the time of the cease-fire, the COPs were north of the MDL and became unreachable for salvage after the initial 72-hour period. The positions were cleared, and materials were salvaged within the allowed time.

During the first night, Marines of 3/5 (originally the right battalion, center sector) removed more than 11 truckloads of ammunition. Outposts Hedy and Bunker offered a particular problem due452 to the distance from the MLR and nearest road. As described by some veterans of 24-hour work crews, the trail to Bunker was “particularly tortuous and made the packing of first the ammunition and later the fortification materials a physical ordeal.”658

During the first night, Marines of 3/5 (originally the right battalion, center sector) removed over 11 truckloads of ammunition. Outposts Hedy and Bunker presented a specific challenge due452 to the distance from the MLR and the nearest road. As described by some veterans of 24-hour work crews, the trail to Bunker was “especially winding and made the transport of both the ammunition and later the fortification materials a physical struggle.”658

658 Co I Rpt of Post-Armistice Activities, Encl (3), CO 3/5 ltr ser 00208, dtd 11 Jan 54, p. 1, in 3/5 Hist, Folder #4.

658 Co I Report of Post-Armistice Activities, Enclosure (3), CO 3/5 letter serial 00208, dated January 11, 1954, page 1, in 3/5 History, Folder #4.

At Hedy the extreme proximity of CCF and Marine lines posed an additional difficulty. On the afternoon of the 28th, an interval of 20 yards separated the two; by the following day the enemy had completed his work in the area and was never again that close. Operations here were also somewhat delayed “by an influx of visitors: newspapermen and newsreel cameramen all interested in the great numbers of enemy visible to our front engaged in the same tasks that we were.”659

At Hedy, the close distance between CCF and Marine lines created an extra challenge. On the afternoon of the 28th, there was just a 20-yard gap between them; by the next day, the enemy had finished their work in the area and was never that close again. Operations here were also slightly delayed “by an influx of visitors: reporters and newsreel cameramen all interested in the large number of enemy troops visible in front of us, engaged in the same activities we were.”659

659 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Dismantling bunkers was the single biggest problem of the entire salvage program. This operation began at dawn on the 28th and was not completed until the second week of September. Ultimately, more than 500 bunkers were reclaimed from MLR materials and installed in the new division position. Most of the bunkers were built of 12x12 timbers, buried deep in the ground, fastened together with 10- to 16-inch spikes. Infantry organic tools and equipment were inadequate to dismember bunkers so constructed. Crowbars, picks, shovels, pinch bars, and sledge hammers were all in short supply. Engineer equipment and other tools were not stockpiled in sufficient quantity to buttress a demolition program of such magnitude.

Dismantling bunkers was the biggest challenge of the entire salvage program. This operation started at dawn on the 28th and wasn't finished until the second week of September. In the end, more than 500 bunkers were taken apart from MLR materials and set up in the new division position. Most of the bunkers were made from 12x12 timbers, buried deep in the ground, and held together with 10- to 16-inch spikes. The tools and equipment available to infantry were not enough to break down bunkers built this way. Crowbars, picks, shovels, pinch bars, and sledgehammers were all in short supply. Engineer equipment and other tools weren't stored in enough quantity to support a demolition program of this scale.

In places where the terrain permitted operation of bulldozers, their use drastically shortened the time spent uncovering bunkers. Where these had been emplaced on reverse slope positions of steep hills, however, the timbers had to be removed by hand. The latter was the generally prevailing situation.

In areas where the ground allowed for bulldozer operation, using them significantly reduced the time needed to uncover bunkers. However, when these were set up on the downward slope of steep hills, the timbers had to be taken out by hand. This was generally the common situation.

Not surprisingly, throughout the demolition program “basic equipment was usually the Marine himself and his ingenuity.”660 Effective on-the-spot, problem-solving was seen in the many “jury-rigged” levers or prybars fashioned from timbers and crowbars from scrap steel. The “Korean Sling Method,” with heavy rope and carrying poles, was often used to move heavy timbers. Trucks equipped453 with winches and wreckers were effective for this purpose. Dozer tanks were also used, but only after having their guns removed as required by the armistice agreement. Division engineers experimented at some length with three different ways to pull apart the larger 12x20 bunkers, in which the cross beams were secured to columns with two-feet spikes. The least technical approach which involved “winching the bunkers out of their positions and bouncing them down a steep slope until they broke apart proved the most successful and the quickest method.”661

Not surprisingly, throughout the demolition program, “basic equipment was usually the Marine himself and his ingenuity.”660 Effective problem-solving on-site was evident in the many “jury-rigged” levers or prybars made from timbers and crowbars from scrap steel. The “Korean Sling Method,” which used heavy ropes and carrying poles, was often utilized to move heavy timbers. Trucks fitted453 with winches and wreckers were effective for this purpose. Dozer tanks were also used, but only after their guns were removed as required by the armistice agreement. Division engineers experimented for some time with three different methods to dismantle the larger 12x20 bunkers, where the cross beams were secured to columns with two-foot spikes. The least technical approach, which involved “winching the bunkers out of their positions and bouncing them down a steep slope until they broke apart,” proved to be the most successful and the fastest method.”661

660 5thMar Hist, p. 2, Folder #4.

660 5thMar Hist, p. 2, Folder #4.

661 1st EngrBn Rpt, dtd 19 Apr 54, p. 3, Folder #6.

661 1st EngrBn Rpt, dated April 19, 1954, page 3, Folder #6.

Besides the lack of engineering tools, limited motor transport facilities and manpower shortages also created difficulties. Heavy commitments across the front, with virtually every division unit displacing to a new location, resulted in a shortage of trucks that slowed both salvage and logistics operations. Assignment of personnel to around-the-clock shifts during the critical initial 72-hour period and use of lighting trailers produced maximum results from the available equipment. Company G, 3/5 reported that its men were allowed “ten minute breaks every hour and, because of the heat, they were given from 1200 to 1500 hours for sleep and worked all through the darkness.”662 During this three-day period alone, the 1st Tank Battalion transported 275 tons of ammunition and fortification material, or a total of 111 loads in 2½-ton trucks.

Besides the lack of engineering tools, limited transportation options and shortages of manpower also created challenges. Heavy demands along the front, with almost every division moving to a new location, led to a shortage of trucks that delayed both salvage and logistics operations. Assigning personnel to round-the-clock shifts during the critical first 72-hour period and using lighting trailers maximized results from the available equipment. Company G, 3/5 reported that its soldiers were allowed “ten minute breaks every hour and, because of the heat, they were given from 1200 to 1500 hours for sleep and worked throughout the night.”662 During this three-day period alone, the 1st Tank Battalion transported 275 tons of ammunition and fortification materials, totaling 111 loads in 2½-ton trucks.

662 Co G Rpt of Post-Armistice Activities, Encl (1), CO 3/5 ltr ser 00208, dtd 11 Jan 54, p. 1, in 3/5 Hist, Folder #4.

662 Co G Report of Post-Armistice Activities, Enclosure (1), CO 3/5 letter serial number 00208, dated January 11, 1954, page 1, in 3/5 History, Folder #4.

At this time, the restrictive provisions of the truce agreement led to a problem involving the use of heavy engineer vehicles. After 3 August, it was difficult to bring into the DMZ any hauling or motorized gear that could be construed as “combat equipment.” The 2½-ton trucks, however, continued to be employed for much of the motor transport operations.

At this time, the strict terms of the truce agreement created an issue with using heavy engineering vehicles. After August 3, it became challenging to bring any hauling or motorized equipment into the DMZ that could be seen as “combat equipment.” However, the 2½-ton trucks were still used for most of the motor transport operations.

By 0930 on 1 August, the 1st Marine Division had completed its withdrawal and manned the new MBP south of the DMZ. The 5th Marines continued its mission as the northern outpost regiment. South of the Imjin, the 7th Marines occupied the right regimental sector; the 1st KMC moved into the center of the MBP; and the 1st Marines became the division reserve.

By 9:30 AM on August 1, the 1st Marine Division had finished its withdrawal and set up at the new MBP south of the DMZ. The 5th Marines continued their role as the northern outpost regiment. South of the Imjin, the 7th Marines held the right regimental sector; the 1st KMC positioned themselves in the center of the MBP; and the 1st Marines served as the division reserve.

Between 3 August-13 September, each rifle company sent daily working parties into the DMZ to excavate those sectors occupied454 by Marine units on 27 July. Depending on available transportation, the size of the working parties varied from 25 to 100 men. These shortages were alleviated, to some extent, by KSC (Korean Service Corps) personnel.663 The heavy-duty, “pure drudgery without glamour,” monotonous tasks performed in tropical weather, 103 degree-plus temperatures and high humidity, caused one Marine infantryman to comment ruefully:

Between August 3 and September 13, each rifle company sent daily work crews into the DMZ to dig up the areas held by Marine units on July 27. Depending on transportation availability, the size of the work crews ranged from 25 to 100 men. These shortages were partly helped by KSC (Korean Service Corps) personnel. The tough, “pure drudgery without glamour,” repetitive tasks done in tropical weather, with temperatures over 103 degrees and high humidity, led one Marine infantryman to comment sadly:

663 KSC units were deactivated shortly thereafter. Following a EUSAK order in August to begin discontinuing use of the Korean laborers, the number of KSC workers was reduced. By the end of October, the 103d KSC Regiment attached to the division had been completely disbanded.

663 KSC units were shut down soon after. Following a EUSAK order in August to start phasing out the Korean laborers, the number of KSC workers was cut back. By the end of October, the 103d KSC Regiment linked to the division had been fully disbanded.

Close officer supervision proved to be absolutely necessary due to the nature of the work, which made the maintenance of interest and enthusiasm in the average individual, very difficult.664

Close officer supervision turned out to be essential because of the nature of the work, which made it really hard to keep the average person interested and motivated.664

664 1/5 Hist, in 5thMar Hist, p. 3, Folder #4.

664 1/5 Hist, in 5thMar Hist, p. 3, Folder #4.

In another 5th Marines unit the motivation gap was partially solved by “use of a graph posted on the bulletin board showing the money value of materials salvaged each day, with the exhortation to better the previous day’s total.”665

In another 5th Marines unit, the motivation gap was partly addressed by using a graph displayed on the bulletin board that showed the monetary value of materials salvaged each day, along with a call to surpass the previous day’s total. 665

665 4.2-inch Mort Co/5, in 5thMar Hist, p. 3, Folder #4.

665 4.2-inch Mort Co/5, in 5thMar Hist, p. 3, Folder #4.

Throughout the month of August and until 13 September, destruction of MLR positions and removal of materials took place concurrently with organization of defensive positions in the new sector. After the initial three-day period and its top priority of physical withdrawal of troops from the DMZ, division tactical requirements called for completion of the MBP as rapidly as possible. This now became the first priority. New company perimeter defense sites, battalion blocking positions, coordinated fire plans in event of attack, counterattack orders, and evacuation routes were mapped out. Construction began immediately. By 5 August, the new battalion camps had begun to take form and work on the blocking positions was in progress. Marine units, like other UNC forces, had to be prepared at all times for any act of enemy aggression. Whether the Communists would continue to respect the cease-fire agreement or not remained an open question.

Throughout August and until September 13, the destruction of MLR positions and the removal of materials happened alongside the organization of defensive positions in the new sector. After the first three days, with the main focus on physically withdrawing troops from the DMZ, division tactical needs required the completion of the MBP as quickly as possible. This became the top priority. New company perimeter defense sites, battalion blocking positions, coordinated fire plans for potential attacks, counterattack orders, and evacuation routes were all mapped out. Construction began immediately. By August 5, the new battalion camps were starting to take shape, and work on the blocking positions was underway. Marine units, like other UNC forces, needed to be ready at all times for any acts of enemy aggression. Whether the Communists would continue to honor the cease-fire agreement remained uncertain.

Stockpiling, meanwhile, had been accomplished at company, battalion, and regimental dumps. All materials were stacked by size to facilitate reissue during construction of new positions. As much as 90 percent of the materials salvaged were usable in the new455 fortification. Although a certain amount of inter-battalion exchange took place, battalion stocks—with the exception of sandbags—were usually adequate to provide sufficient fortification materials for the rebuilding. For 5th Marines units that had the least distance to relocate, timbers moved from the old MLR in the morning were sometimes emplaced in the new defensive positions by late afternoon. Helicopters, as well as trucks, were used extensively to move stockpiles from company and battalion areas to rear regimental supply dumps.

Stockpiling was carried out at company, battalion, and regimental dumps. All materials were organized by size to make it easier to redistribute during the construction of new positions. As much as 90 percent of the salvaged materials were usable in the new 455 fortification. While some inter-battalion exchange occurred, battalion supplies—except for sandbags—were generally enough to provide adequate fortification materials for rebuilding. For 5th Marines units that had the shortest distance to relocate, timbers taken from the old MLR in the morning were sometimes set up in the new defensive positions by late afternoon. Helicopters and trucks were both used extensively to transport stockpiles from company and battalion areas to rear regimental supply dumps.

Division MLR supplies salvaged by the 5th Marines represented:

Division MLR supplies salvaged by the 5th Marines represented:

T/E material 12 tons
Signal equipment (wire) 2,000 miles
Engineer items
barbed wire 2,850 rolls
concertina 340 rolls
pickets, 6-foot 11,000
pickets, 3-foot 8,000
sandbags 339,000
timbers (from 3×8 to 12×12) 150,000 linear feet
Total tonnage 2,000 short tons

The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines estimated that wire rolls, sandbags, timbers, and other materiel “recovered by this battalion and assisting units was valued at approximately $150,000.”666

The 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines estimated that the wire rolls, sandbags, timbers, and other supplies “recovered by this battalion and supporting units was valued at around $150,000.”666

666 2/5 Hist, in 5thMar Hist, dtd 12 Dec 53, p. 3, Folder #4.

666 2/5 Hist, in 5thMar Hist, dtd 12 Dec 53, p. 3, Folder #4.

By early September, the 1st Marine Division work priority once again had reverted from camp construction to salvage operations. It had become apparent that another maximum effort period would be necessary if all salvageable materials were to be removed from the DMZ no later than the 13 September deadline reaffirmed by I Corps on 2 September. During this last phase of salvage work, participating battalions again came under operational control of the 5th Marines. Elements of the 1st and 11th Marines, neither of which at that time had a sector of responsibility for salvage, as well as KMC troops, augmented the organic units. One battalion alone, 1/1, detailed 400 men in work parties. At 2130, on 13 September, the division completed its salvage mission in the Demilitarized Zone, thus meeting the specified time limit. Under terms of the armistice456 agreement, after 13 September all personnel were prohibited from entering the Korean Demilitarized Zone. The only exceptions were members of the DMZ police companies of the Allied and Communist sides and other persons specifically authorized passage by the Military Armistice Commission (MAC).

By early September, the 1st Marine Division's work priority shifted back from building the camp to salvage operations. It became clear that another intense effort would be needed to remove all salvageable materials from the DMZ by the 13 September deadline set by I Corps on 2 September. During this last phase of salvage work, the participating battalions fell under the operational control of the 5th Marines again. Elements from the 1st and 11th Marines, neither of which was responsible for salvage at the time, along with KMC troops, supported the main units. One battalion alone, 1/1, assigned 400 men to work parties. At 2130 on 13 September, the division completed its salvage mission in the Demilitarized Zone, meeting the specified deadline. According to the armistice456 agreement, after 13 September, all personnel were prohibited from entering the Korean Demilitarized Zone. The only exceptions were members of the DMZ police companies from both the Allied and Communist sides and others specifically authorized by the Military Armistice Commission (MAC).

Control of the DMZ and the Military Police Company667

667 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, 30 Jul-31 Aug 53; Demilitarized Zone Police Co Rpt, dtd 18 Dec 53, in 5thMar Hist, Folder #4; MSgt Paul Sarokin, “DMZ Marines,” Leatherneck, v. 37, no. 10 (Oct 54), hereafter Sarokin, “DMZ Marines.”

667 Unless stated otherwise, the content in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnls, July 30 - August 31, 1953; Demilitarized Zone Police Company Report, dated December 18, 1953, in 5thMar Hist, Folder #4; MSgt Paul Sarokin, “DMZ Marines,” Leatherneck, vol. 37, no. 10 (October 1954), referred to as Sarokin, “DMZ Marines.”

Since the late July signing of the armistice, one of the missions of the 5th Marines GOP regiment had been the marking, control of entry, and policing of the DMZ. At the time the No-Pass Fence was constructed, roadblocks, called “crossing stations” were located at each route leading into the DMZ. Initially, 21 crossing stations were opened across the regimental front. When it later became apparent that not all of these security points would be needed, some were closed and the roads barricaded. Each crossing station was manned by a minimum of two sentries who insured that no weapons were carried into the DMZ. Along the fence itself, signs printed in three languages prohibited unauthorized entry into the southern boundary of the DMZ. On roads and trails approaching the southern boundary fence, additional signs placed 200 yards from the fence warned of the proximity to this southern end of the military zone. Air panels and engineer tape also marked the DMZ.

Since the armistice was signed in late July, one of the tasks of the 5th Marines GOP regiment has been to mark, control entry, and patrol the DMZ. When the No-Pass Fence was built, roadblocks, known as “crossing stations,” were set up at every route leading into the DMZ. Initially, 21 crossing stations were opened across the regimental front. Later, when it became clear that not all of these security points were necessary, some were closed and the roads barricaded. Each crossing station was staffed by at least two sentries who made sure that no weapons were brought into the DMZ. Along the fence itself, signs printed in three languages prohibited unauthorized entry into the southern boundary of the DMZ. On the roads and paths leading to the southern boundary fence, additional signs placed 200 yards from the fence warned about the proximity to this southern end of the military zone. Air panels and engineer tape also marked the DMZ.

After 31 July, entry into the DMZ was limited to those persons holding a valid pass, issued under the auspices of the Military Armistice Commission. Authority was also delegated to CG, U.S. I Corps to issue passes for the I Corps sector. With salvage operations requiring a large number of passes, authority was further delegated to the CO, 5th Marines, to issue permits for the regimental sector, good only for unarmed668 working parties engaged in salvage operations. The regimental S-2 established a pass control center, and anyone desiring to enter the DMZ made application through that office. Each pass contained the bearer’s name, rank, service number, organization,457 number of personnel and vehicles in the working party, and reason for entry.

After July 31, access to the DMZ was restricted to people with a valid pass issued by the Military Armistice Commission. The authority to issue passes for the I Corps area was also given to the CG, U.S. I Corps. Since salvage operations needed a lot of passes, the authority was further passed down to the CO, 5th Marines, to issue permits for their regimental sector, which were only valid for unarmed668 work crews involved in salvage operations. The regimental S-2 set up a pass control center, and anyone wanting to enter the DMZ had to apply through that office. Each pass included the holder’s name, rank, service number, organization,457 number of personnel and vehicles in the work crew, and the reason for entry.

668 With the exception of the DMZ Police, all persons entering the DMZ for salvage were required to check their weapons at the zone entry.

668 Except for the DMZ Police, everyone entering the DMZ for salvage had to leave their weapons at the zone entrance.

Security procedures also required that a log book of all zone entries and exits be kept by crossing station guards. This information was ultimately telephoned or radioed to higher echelons. At battalion and regimental levels a master log or “status board” indicated the number of people, vehicles, passes, and pass identification numbers present in the DMZ at all times. As the salvage program reached its height in August and early September, just the “issuance and recording of passes and the checking of the working parties into the zone became a major operation.”669 Between 4 August-13 September, a total of 3,523 vehicle passes and an unknown number of personnel permits were issued. With the ending of salvage operations on 13 September, the Marine regiment no longer issued DMZ passes, although I Corps continued to authorize MAC personnel entry permits.

Security procedures required that a logbook of all zone entries and exits be maintained by the crossing station guards. This information was eventually communicated via phone or radio to higher authorities. At the battalion and regimental levels, a master log or “status board” showed the number of people, vehicles, passes, and pass identification numbers present in the DMZ at all times. As the salvage program peaked in August and early September, the “issuance and recording of passes and the checking of the working parties into the zone became a major operation.”669 Between 4 August and 13 September, a total of 3,523 vehicle passes and an unknown number of personnel permits were issued. With the end of salvage operations on 13 September, the Marine regiment no longer issued DMZ passes, though I Corps continued to authorize MAC personnel entry permits.

669 5thMar Hist, p. 2, Folder #3.

669 5thMar Hist, p. 2, Folder #3.

A stipulation set by the armistice agreement was that both the Communist and UNC sides police their respective sections of the DMZ with “civil police,” not to exceed 1,000 in the zone at any one time across the entire front. With further allocation of police personnel to army and I Corps units, the number of 1st Marine Division police on duty within the DMZ at any one time was originally set at 50. Since no civilian police were available to either side, requirements were modified so that a specially designated military unit, in lieu of civil police, could be employed and the original quota enlarged if this became feasible.

A condition of the ceasefire agreement was that both the Communist and UNC sides would patrol their sections of the DMZ with “civil police,” not exceeding 1,000 in total across the entire area at any time. With more police assigned to army and I Corps units, the number of 1st Marine Division police on duty in the DMZ at any time was initially set at 50. Since neither side had civilian police available, the requirements were adjusted so that a specially designated military unit could be used instead of civil police, and the original limit could be increased if it became possible.

Due to the delicate political aspect of the DMZ as well as the non-repatriated POWs in the custody of Indian forces, security measures were of utmost importance. The Marine division activated a new unit, the 1st Provisional Demilitarized Zone Police Company at 0800 on 4 September. The new unit, charged with maintaining security throughout the 1st Marine Division sector, became operational three days later. Commanding officer was Captain Samuel G. Goich, formerly of F/2/7. Each regiment from the division furnished 25 enlisted men and 1 officer to form the company, including standby personnel. On 21 September, the DMZ Police Company was attached to the 5th Marines. Police Company personnel were required to have had at least three months’ Korean service, a General Classification458 Test score of at least 95, a minimum height of 5 feet 10 inches, and were “selected for physical stature and mental capacity required in coping with the delicate situation existing within the Demilitarized Zone.”670 The average DMZ company member was said to know “map-reading on an officer level, first aid, radio, and understand the fine print of the cease-fire agreement like a striped-trouser diplomat.”671

Due to the sensitive political situation in the DMZ and the POWs held by Indian forces, security was extremely important. The Marine division established a new unit, the 1st Provisional Demilitarized Zone Police Company, at 8:00 AM on September 4. This new unit, responsible for maintaining security in the 1st Marine Division sector, became operational three days later. The commanding officer was Captain Samuel G. Goich, previously of F/2/7. Each regiment from the division contributed 25 enlisted personnel and 1 officer to form the company, including backup staff. On September 21, the DMZ Police Company was assigned to the 5th Marines. Members of the Police Company were required to have at least three months of service in Korea, a General Classification458 Test score of 95 or above, a minimum height of 5 feet 10 inches, and were “selected for their physical stature and mental ability to handle the sensitive situation in the Demilitarized Zone.”670 The average member of the DMZ company was expected to know “map reading at an officer level, first aid, radio communication, and understand the details of the cease-fire agreement like a diplomat in striped pants.”671

670 1stMarDiv ComdD, Sep 53, p. 2.

670 1stMarDiv ComdD, Sep 53, p. 2.

671 Sarokin, “DMZ Marines,” p. 23.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Sarokin, “DMZ Marines,” p. 23.

The mission of the Marine provisional police company as set up by the truce agreement was to furnish military police escort for special personnel visiting the DMZ and to apprehend truce violators or enemy line crossers. Visitors who rated a military escort were members of MAC, Joint Observer Teams, Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission personnel,672 NNSC inspection teams or agency assistants, or other VIPs authorized to enter the UN half by the Military Armistice Commission.

The mission of the Marine provisional police company established by the truce agreement was to provide military police escorts for special personnel visiting the DMZ and to catch anyone violating the truce or crossing enemy lines. Visitors who required a military escort included members of MAC, Joint Observer Teams, personnel from the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, NNSC inspection teams or agency assistants, or other VIPs authorized to enter the UN half by the Military Armistice Commission.

672 The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission supervised all phases of implementation of the armistice. It consisted of the Secretariat and 20 neutral nations inspection teams staffed by personnel from Sweden, Switzerland, Poland, and Czechoslovakia.

672 The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission oversaw every stage of carrying out the armistice. It was made up of the Secretariat and 20 inspection teams from neutral countries, with members from Sweden, Switzerland, Poland, and Czechoslovakia.

Six Marine DMZ military policemen, each armed with a .45 caliber pistol and M-1 rifle, accompanied UN joint observer teams to the demarcation line, midpoint between enemy and friendly boundaries, but did not cross the MDL. I Corps orders directed that military police were to be “responsible for the safety of the United Nations members of the team and, when meetings are held south of the demarcation line, they will be responsible for the safety of the CCF members of the team as well.”673

Six Marine DMZ military policemen, each armed with a .45 caliber pistol and an M-1 rifle, accompanied UN joint observer teams to the demarcation line, which is the midpoint between enemy and friendly boundaries, but they did not cross the MDL. I Corps orders stated that military police were to be “responsible for the safety of the United Nations members of the team and, when meetings take place south of the demarcation line, they will also be responsible for the safety of the CCF members of the team.”673

673 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dtd 1 Aug 53, msg CG I U.S. Corps to addees, dtd 31 Jul 53.

673 1stMarDiv G-3 Jnl, dated 1 Aug 53, message from CG I U.S. Corps to addressees, dated 31 Jul 53.

Major tasks performed by the 104-man company operating within the 2,000-yard wide, 28-mile-long zone were:

Major tasks carried out by the 104-person team working within the 2,000-yard wide, 28-mile-long area were:

To maintain surveillance over civilians within the UN half of the DMZ;

To keep an eye on civilians in the UN-controlled part of the DMZ;

To apprehend and deliver to the Division Provost Marshal any line crossers encountered who did not possess an authorized pass, regardless of the direction from which such persons entered the DMZ; and

To understand and hand over to the Division Provost Marshal anyone crossing the line who didn’t have an authorized pass, no matter which direction these individuals entered the DMZ; and

To provide check points on known routes through the zone and observation posts, especially during the hours of reduced visibility, and telephone all suspicious incidents to Regimental S-2.

To set up check points on familiar routes through the area and observation posts, especially during times of low visibility, and to report all suspicious incidents to Regimental S-2 by phone.

459

459

DMZ Police Company personnel operated in motorized patrol teams and traveled the entire division sector in radio or cargo jeeps. One platoon was kept on a standby basis at camp to serve as a mobile reserve in the event of an emergency. The roving patrols submitted reports of all incidents, which were then compiled in a company report. A copy was submitted to the S-2, the Northern Regiment, and 1st Marine Division G-2.

DMZ Police Company personnel worked in motorized patrol teams and drove around the entire division sector in radio or cargo jeeps. One platoon was kept on standby at camp to act as a mobile reserve in case of an emergency. The patrols provided reports on all incidents, which were then combined into a company report. A copy was sent to the S-2, the Northern Regiment, and 1st Marine Division G-2.

UNC security measures at all times were strict and uncompromising in the Korean DMZ buffer zone. This included the salvage period, the BIG SWITCH prisoner exchange that took place within the division sector at Freedom Village from 5 August-6 September, and the lengthy nonrepatriate POW settlement that extended through January 1954. In places where the military demarcation line was not marked on the ground or clearly recognizable, the conservative ruling was to stay at least 500 yards south of its estimated location. This applied both to body recovery and salvage operations. The No-Fly line was scrupulously verified.

UNC security measures were always strict and firm in the Korean DMZ buffer zone. This included the salvage period, the BIG SWITCH prisoner exchange that occurred within the division sector at Freedom Village from August 5 to September 6, and the lengthy non-repatriate POW settlement that lasted until January 1954. In areas where the military demarcation line wasn’t marked on the ground or wasn’t clearly visible, the conservative rule was to stay at least 500 yards south of its estimated location. This applied to both body recovery and salvage operations. The No-Fly line was carefully monitored.

Alleged violations charged by the CCF/NKPA were checked out with the Marine ground observation posts set up in August to record all movements of fixed-wing (reconnaissance) and rotary aircraft in the area. Helicopters were allowed to fly in the DMZ but no closer than the 500 yard limit from the MDL. Helicopters operating forward of CPs of 5th Marines units having sector responsibility were required to obtain clearance from the ground unit concerned for each flight. Medical evacuation copters, generally, were exempted from this restriction and authorized a standing clearance.

Alleged violations reported by the CCF/NKPA were verified with the Marine ground observation posts established in August to monitor all movements of fixed-wing (reconnaissance) and rotary aircraft in the area. Helicopters were permitted to fly in the DMZ but not closer than the 500-yard limit from the MDL. Helicopters operating ahead of the CPs of 5th Marines units responsible for the sector were required to get clearance from the relevant ground unit for each flight. Medical evacuation helicopters, in general, were exempt from this restriction and granted standing clearance.

Commitments for the DMZ Police Company increased substantially with arrival of the nonrepatriated POWs at their camp in the DMZ corridor west of the 2d Battalion, 5th Marines area. The Communist “explainers,” as well as Polish and Czech members of the neutral Nations Commission, had to be escorted while in the UN half of the DMZ. This required that a 24-hour checkpoint and escort cadre be established in the zone. As the number of enemy sightings, a daily occurrence in the DMZ, continued to increase, the size of the police patrols increased correspondingly. A typical example was related by a member of the police company:

Commitments for the DMZ Police Company increased significantly with the arrival of the non-repatriated POWs at their camp in the DMZ corridor west of the 2nd Battalion, 5th Marines area. The Communist “explainers,” along with Polish and Czech members of the neutral Nations Commission, needed to be escorted while in the UN half of the DMZ. This meant that a 24-hour checkpoint and escort team had to be set up in the zone. As the number of enemy sightings, which happened daily in the DMZ, continued to rise, the size of the police patrols grew accordingly. A typical example was shared by a member of the police company:

It was common practice of the Communists to have a group of their men, supposedly their DMZ Police, walk up to the Military Demarcation Line and either stand close to it or step across. When one of our patrols460 approached in superior numbers to attempt to apprehend them, the Communists would immediately reinforce with more men. This made it necessary to have our patrols at sufficient strength that they could protect themselves from being kidnapped.674

It was a usual tactic for the Communists to send a group of their guys, claiming to be their DMZ Police, to walk right up to the Military Demarcation Line and either hang out near it or cross over. Whenever one of our patrols460 came in greater numbers to try to catch them, the Communists would quickly bring in more guys for backup. This made it essential for our patrols to be strong enough to defend themselves against being captured.674

674 Demilitarized Zone Police Co/5 rpt, p. 4, in 5thMar Hist, Folder #4, op. cit.

674 Demilitarized Zone Police Co/5 rpt, p. 4, in 5thMar Hist, Folder #4, op. cit.

As these requirements for security increased, the original complement of approximately 5 officers and 99 men became inadequate to patrol the DMZ. By late October the T/O strength of the 1st Provisional Demilitarized Zone Police Company had been increased to 6 officers and 314 men. Authorization for the number of police personnel on duty in the DMZ had similarly been augmented from 50 to 175.

As the security needs grew, the initial team of about 5 officers and 99 men was not enough to patrol the DMZ. By late October, the authorized strength of the 1st Provisional Demilitarized Zone Police Company was raised to 6 officers and 314 men. The approval for the number of police personnel on duty in the DMZ was also increased from 50 to 175.

During the September salvage operations, five Marines in the DMZ were taken into custody by the Chinese Communists. Charged with being in unauthorized territory and violating terms of the armistice agreement, they were later returned to United Nations jurisdiction.

During the September recovery efforts, five Marines in the DMZ were detained by the Chinese Communists. They were accused of being in unauthorized territory and breaching the terms of the armistice agreement, but they were later handed back to United Nations control.

Organization of New Defense Positions675

675 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: 1stMarDiv ComdDs Jul-Sep 53; 1stMarDiv Type “C” Rpt Defense of “C” Sector, 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, Folder #3 (this and following 1stMarDiv end-of-war records retired in 61 A2265, Box 74, FRC, Suitland, Md.); 1stMar Hist of Defense of “D” Sector, 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, Folder #3 (contains brief histories of individual units); 5thMar Hist of Defense of “D” Sector, 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, in Folders #3 and #4; 7thMar Hist of Defense of “D” Sector, 27 Jul 53–10 Feb 54, in Folder #5; 1stMarDiv Type “C” Rpt Defense of “C” Div Sect, 27 July-31 Dec 53, Folder #6 (containing, among others, brief rpts 11thMar, 1st TkBn, 1st EngrBn, 1stMTBn, 7th MTBn, 1st KMC Rgt, 2d KMC Rgt).

675 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: 1stMarDiv ComdDs Jul-Sep 53; 1stMarDiv Type “C” Report on Defense of “C” Sector, July 27 - October 31, 1953, Folder #3 (this and the following 1stMarDiv end-of-war records were retired in '61 A2265, Box 74, FRC, Suitland, Md.); 1stMar Hist of Defense of “D” Sector, July 27 - October 31, 1953, Folder #3 (includes brief histories of individual units); 5thMar Hist of Defense of “D” Sector, July 27 - October 31, 1953, in Folders #3 and #4; 7thMar Hist of Defense of “D” Sector, July 27, 1953 – February 10, 1954, in Folder #5; 1stMarDiv Type “C” Report on Defense of “C” Division Sector, July 27 - December 31, 1953, Folder #6 (which includes, among others, brief reports from 11thMar, 1st Tank Battalion, 1st Engineer Battalion, 1st Motor Transport Battalion, 7th Motor Transport Battalion, 1st KMC Regiment, 2nd KMC Regiment).

Upon withdrawal from the demilitarized zone and organization of the MBP, the Eighth Army established its plan for defense on a wide front. This was based on the organization of strongpoints disposed in depth, with planned counterattacks by mobile reserves.

Upon leaving the demilitarized zone and setting up the MBP, the Eighth Army developed its defense strategy across a broad front. This strategy was centered around creating strongholds strategically placed in depth, along with planned counterattacks using mobile reserves.

As it had during active hostilities, the 1st Marine Division in the post-armistice period continued as one of the four UNC divisions manning the general outpost and MBP in the U.S. I Corps sector. Immediately east of the division was its long-time neighbor, the 1st Commonwealth Division. Still further east in I Corps were the 1st ROK and U.S. 7th Infantry Divisions.

As it did during active combat, the 1st Marine Division in the post-armistice period continued to be one of the four UNC divisions stationed at the general outpost and MBP in the U.S. I Corps sector. Directly east of the division was its long-time neighbor, the 1st Commonwealth Division. Further east in I Corps were the 1st ROK and U.S. 7th Infantry Divisions.

Since 1 August, the Marine division had continued to outpost the most favorable terrain in its sector below the southern boundary of461 the DMZ. The division manned the No-Pass Line and prepared its defenses to resume full scale military operations, if necessary. The Munsan-ni Provisional Command, composed of the Marine-Navy-Army personnel responsible for implementing the final prisoner exchange, was also headquartered in the 1st Marine Division sector.

Since August 1, the Marine division had continued to occupy the most advantageous terrain in its area below the southern boundary of461 the DMZ. The division secured the No-Pass Line and got its defenses ready to restart full-scale military operations, if needed. The Munsan-ni Provisional Command, made up of Marine, Navy, and Army personnel responsible for carrying out the final prisoner exchange, was also based in the 1st Marine Division area.

The strongpoint organization of the division’s main battle position was accomplished by the deployment of the 5th Marines at the general outpost line of resistance (or OPLR, a term and concept not in use since April 1952). The outpost defense concept embodied a number of forward positions, lightly held in actual numbers of men but strongly defended in numbers of automatic weapons and firepower. (This capability was possible due to the excess number of automatic weapons on hand, above normal T/E allowances, which previously had been required by MLR defenses.) In the organization of the positions, emphasis was placed on construction of bunkered observation posts, the emplacement of automatic weapons with flanking fires, and clearing of fields of fire for these weapons.

The division’s main battle position was organized by deploying the 5th Marines along the overall outpost line of resistance (or OPLR, a term and concept no longer used since April 1952). The outpost defense approach included several forward positions that had a small number of troops but were heavily fortified with automatic weapons and firepower. (This was possible because there was an excess of automatic weapons available, beyond the normal T/E allowances, which had previously been required for MLR defenses.) When organizing the positions, there was a focus on building bunkered observation posts, placing automatic weapons for flanking fire, and clearing fields of fire for these weapons.

Basically, the general concept of OPLR defense was to establish mutually supporting defensive positions across the front, as well as to develop additional defense in depth positions whose strength increased from front to rear. The positions thus formed successive defense lines, from the southern DMZ boundary—the new Marine division front—south to the KANSAS Line, the Main Battle Position. (These defense lines were the old secondary defensive lines of WYOMING, KANSAS, and KANSAS SWITCH.) The KMC, 1st Marines, 7th Marines, and other units located in the KANSAS vicinity engaged in bunker construction and trench improvement. Battalion fire plans coordinated the organic, attached, and supporting weapons. Construction of the new positions and development of the KANSAS Line would be a continuing process throughout the rest of the year.

Basically, the main idea of OPLR defense was to set up mutually supportive defensive positions along the front, as well as to create additional deeper defensive positions that increased in strength from the front to the rear. The positions formed successive defense lines, from the southern DMZ boundary—the new Marine division front—down to the Kans. Line, the Main Battle Position. (These defense lines were the old secondary defensive lines of Wyoming, Kansan, and KANSAS SWITCH.) The KMC, 1st Marines, 7th Marines, and other units in the KANSAS area were involved in building bunkers and improving trenches. Battalion fire plans coordinated the organic, attached, and supporting weapons. The construction of the new positions and the development of the KANSAS Line would continue throughout the rest of the year.

The 1st Marines received the assignment of developing the blocking positions, most of these battalion-sized strongpoints. As in the past, division support units continued to be located in the old rear supply areas south of the Imjin. In early August the division had stationed the 7th Marines in the right sector; the 1st KMC in the center; and the 1st Marines, to the south of the KMC sector. The 11th Marines, to the rear of the 7th Marines, had displaced its artillery, relaid, and was prepared to fire in support of the general outpost and MBP. (Map 35.) Additional artillery battalions included I Corps and463 army units. Essentially these were the positions held until early October when, during a period of political unrest resulting from the prisoner exchange, the 1st Marines relieved the 1st KMC/RCT in the center sector (which held the southern approaches to Freedom Bridge and the nonrepatriate war compound). The Korean unit then relocated to blocking positions and assumed the mission of reserve regiment.

The 1st Marines were assigned to develop the blocking positions, primarily made up of battalion-sized strongpoints. As before, division support units remained in the old rear supply areas south of the Imjin. By early August, the division had stationed the 7th Marines in the right sector, the 1st KMC in the center, and the 1st Marines to the south of the KMC sector. The 11th Marines, positioned behind the 7th Marines, had moved its artillery, set it up again, and was ready to fire in support of the general outpost and MBP. (Map 35.) Additional artillery battalions included I Corps and 463 army units. These were essentially the positions held until early October when, during a time of political unrest due to the prisoner exchange, the 1st Marines took over from the 1st KMC/RCT in the center sector (which controlled the southern approaches to Freedom Bridge and the non-repatriate war compound). The Korean unit then moved to blocking positions and took on the role of reserve regiment.

MAP 35 K. WHITE

MAP 35 K. WHITE

E. WILSON

E. Wilson

1st MARINE DIVISION

1st Marine Division

POST-ARMISTICE MAIN BATTLE POSITION

Post-Armistice main battle position

30 SEPTEMBER 1953

September 30, 1953

Marine support units—motor transport, tank, service, medical, aerial liaison (VMO/HMR)—were in the same general rear area, as was the headquarters of the U.S. 25th Infantry Division. The Marine Division CP continued to be located at Yongji-ri, although construction of a new site further south at Chormyon was due to be completed by engineer personnel on 1 October. The division railhead and truckhead remained, respectively, at Munsan-ni and Ascom City. To the left of the KMC sector was the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion. Still further west, separated from other units by the Han River, was the Kimpo Provisional Regiment, in its former wartime sector.

Marine support units—motor transport, tank, service, medical, and aerial liaison (VMO/HMR)—were located in the same general rear area, as was the headquarters of the U.S. 25th Infantry Division. The Marine Division CP was still at Yongji-ri, although a new site further south at Chormyon was expected to be completed by engineer personnel on October 1. The division's railhead and truckhead remained at Munsan-ni and Ascom City, respectively. On the left side of the KMC sector was the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion. Even further west, separated from other units by the Han River, was the Kimpo Provisional Regiment, in its previous wartime sector.

As the division OPLR regiment, the 5th Marines held a line 36,000 yards in length—about 21 miles—roughly corresponding to the front manned by three regiments during the war. The OPLR sector included the entire area in the divisional zone of responsibility north of the Imjin. Boundaries of the 5th Marines territory were the southern DMZ truce line on the west and north, the Samichon River to the east, and that major water barrier, the curving Imjin River, to the rear.

As the OPLR regiment division, the 5th Marines maintained a line 36,000 yards long—about 21 miles—roughly equivalent to the front held by three regiments during the war. The OPLR sector covered the entire area within the divisional zone of responsibility north of the Imjin. The boundaries of the 5th Marines' territory were the southern DMZ truce line to the west and north, the Samichon River to the east, and that major water barrier, the winding Imjin River, to the rear.

After establishment of the DMZ, the division occupied unfavorable low ground poorly suited to the defense and inferior to that held by the enemy—continuing the same situation that had existed during the period of stabilized combat operations in West Korea. Almost without exception the southern boundary of the DMZ prohibited the Marines from moving onto the commanding terrain, as the No-Pass Line was behind or along the reverse slopes of the high ground. On the other hand, in most cases the CCF had the advantage of having forward slope positions as well as the crests plus most of the commanding terrain in the area.

After the DMZ was established, the division found itself in low ground that was not ideal for defense and worse than what the enemy occupied—continuing the same situation that had existed during the stabilized combat operations in West Korea. Almost always, the southern boundary of the DMZ kept the Marines from accessing the higher, more dominant terrain, as the No-Pass Line was set behind or along the back slopes of the high ground. Meanwhile, in most instances, the CCF enjoyed the benefit of being on forward slope positions, as well as the crests and most of the commanding terrain in the area.

Communist territory in the northern DMZ sector included the former strongholds of Yoke, Bunker Hill, Carson, Reno, Vegas, Berlin, East Berlin and Warsaw. Within the Marine division postwar area464 were the Panmunjom Corridor and outposts Marilyn, Kate, the Boulder City hills, and the Hook. Much of the terrain between the major hill positions along the 5th Marines regimental front and the Imjin River consisted of low-rolling hills rising abruptly out of the rice paddies.

Communist territory in the northern DMZ area included the former strongholds of Yoke, Bunker Hill, Carson, Reno, Vegas, Berlin, East Berlin, and Warsaw. Within the Marine division's postwar area464 were the Panmunjom Corridor and outposts Marilyn, Kate, the Boulder City hills, and the Hook. Much of the land between the main hill positions along the 5th Marines' regimental front and the Imjin River consisted of gently rolling hills that rose sharply out of the rice fields.

Construction of new positions and the defense system of the 5th Marines was based on several assumptions about enemy capabilities, made by G-2 and the new regimental CO, Colonel Rathvon McC. Tompkins, who had assumed command on 2 August. These were: that in the event of resumption of hostilities by the CCF the enemy would use his jet fighters and bombers in support of operations; that he would continue to have numerical superiority in artillery; and that the northern outpost regiment would have no reinforcement or surface resupply from units south of the Imjin.

Construction of new positions and the defense system of the 5th Marines was based on several assumptions about enemy capabilities made by G-2 and the new regimental CO, Colonel Rathvon McC. Tompkins, who took command on August 2. These were: that if hostilities resumed by the CCF, the enemy would use their jet fighters and bombers to support operations; that they would maintain numerical superiority in artillery; and that the northern outpost regiment would receive no reinforcements or surface resupply from units south of the Imjin.

The defense plan for the forward part of the 5th Marines sector in event of a resumption of hostilities called for furnishing patrols equipped with radios and FO teams to occupy Hills 155, 229, and 181. (Hill 155 was directly south of the DMZ in the 2/5 left battalion sector; Hills 229 and 181 were, respectively, just inside and just outside the southern boundary of the truce line in the center 1/5 sector.) From these three elevations the patrols would then have the mission of bringing down artillery fire on enemy concentrations and relaying communications about the situation to the friendly main attack force. Other critical hill masses in the OPLR regimental sector were Hill 126 (in the 3/5 eastern battalion sector, just inside the Marine side of the DMZ) and Hill 163, in the Hook area. The latter hill was not as suitable for defense since it was located south of the military demarcation line and was thus less accessible.

The defense plan for the front part of the 5th Marines sector in case hostilities resumed called for the deployment of patrols equipped with radios and forward observer teams to occupy Hills 155, 229, and 181. (Hill 155 was directly south of the DMZ in the 2/5 left battalion sector; Hills 229 and 181 were, respectively, just inside and just outside the southern boundary of the truce line in the center 1/5 sector.) From these three elevations, the patrols would be tasked with calling down artillery fire on enemy concentrations and communicating updates about the situation to the friendly main attack force. Other important hill masses in the OPLR regimental sector included Hill 126 (located in the 3/5 eastern battalion sector, just inside the Marine side of the DMZ) and Hill 163, in the Hook area. The latter hill was not as suitable for defense since it was located south of the military demarcation line and was therefore less accessible.

These hill masses so completely dominated the major enemy approaches through the division sector to the Imjin, the lower river crossing sites and bridges, that their occupation by Marine personnel was considered essential in the event of any attack. Hill 229, adjacent to the Chan-dang corridor and part of the 229-181 axis, was considered the most critical terrain feature in the entire northern section.

These hill masses completely controlled the main enemy routes through the division area to the Imjin, as well as the lower river crossing points and bridges, making it essential for Marine personnel to occupy them in case of an attack. Hill 229, next to the Chan-dang corridor and part of the 229-181 axis, was deemed the most crucial terrain feature in the whole northern section.

Key areas to the rear of the 5th Marines’ sector were the two operating bridges (Freedom in 2/5 territory and Libby on the 3/5 right) and the two interior crossing sites (Honker and Spoonbill). All provided access to the Imjin and division support units deployed on the south side of the river. In the event of threatened hostile465 attack, the Northern Regiment was under orders to destroy the bridges to prevent their use by the enemy on any attempted advance to the rear.

Key areas behind the 5th Marines’ sector were the two operational bridges (Freedom in 2/5 territory and Libby on the 3/5 right) and the two interior crossing points (Honker and Spoonbill). All of these provided access to the Imjin and division support units stationed on the south side of the river. If there was a potential hostile attack, the Northern Regiment was instructed to destroy the bridges to stop the enemy from using them in any attempt to move toward the rear.

Strong perimeter defenses, called “Bridgehead Positions” were to be built by 5th Marines’ battalions. Two were to protect the two bridges and a third, to include both ferry sites. Between the forward defended localities and the rear bridgehead positions, alternate and secondary sites were organized to create mutually supporting defenses in depth. The bridgeheads were a combination of linear and strongpoint defense, capable of withstanding severe pressure.

Strong perimeter defenses, known as “Bridgehead Positions,” were to be constructed by the 5th Marines’ battalions. Two were designated to protect the two bridges, and a third was to include both ferry sites. Between the forward defense locations and the rear bridgehead positions, alternate and secondary sites were organized to create mutually reinforcing defenses. The bridgeheads were a mix of linear and strongpoint defense, capable of withstanding intense pressure.

Organization of the defensive positions in the 5th Marine sector was complicated both by peculiarities of the terrain and political restrictions due to proximity of the DMZ. In addition to the regiment’s excess frontage, the demilitarized zone immediately to the front precluded use of either aerial or motorized reconnaissance for early warning. Security measures for the OPLR were less than ideal. Neither proper patrols nor a covering force in front of the OPLR was possible; the best that could be done was to maintain patrols along the friendly side of the No-Pass Line.

Organization of the defensive positions in the 5th Marine sector was challenging due to the unique aspects of the terrain and political limitations because of the proximity to the DMZ. Besides the regiment’s extensive front, the demilitarized zone right in front of them made it impossible to use either aerial or motorized reconnaissance for early warning. Security measures for the OPLR were not optimal. Proper patrols or a covering force in front of the OPLR couldn’t be established; the best they could manage was to keep patrols along the friendly side of the No-Pass Line.

As the regimental left battalion pointed out: “Location of the DMZ and the No-Pass Line made the trace of the OPLR follow an artificial and arbitrary line rather than that of the best terrain.”676 The most critical terrain feature in the sector, Hill 155, was located just outside the southern boundary of the DMZ. Although its possession was essential to successful defense of the OPLR and the bridgehead defense positions being developed to the interior and rear of the battalion sector, Hill 155 could not be occupied because of the armistice agreement. The solution to the problem was simply to occupy the best ground adjacent to the No-Pass Line.

As the left battalion of the regiment noted: “The location of the DMZ and the No-Pass Line made the path of the OPLR follow an artificial and arbitrary line instead of the best terrain.”676 The most important terrain feature in the area, Hill 155, was just outside the southern boundary of the DMZ. Even though controlling it was crucial for the effective defense of the OPLR and the bridgehead defense positions being prepared within and behind the battalion sector, Hill 155 couldn't be occupied due to the armistice agreement. The solution to this issue was simply to take the best ground next to the No-Pass Line.

676 2/5 Hist, in 5thMar Hist, dtd 12 Dec 53, p. 4, Folder #4.

676 2/5 Hist, in 5thMar Hist, dtd 12 Dec 53, p. 4, Folder #4.

Placement of automatic weapons was a factor of great importance in organizing the defensive positions. In order to accomplish the mission of an OPLR, weapons had to be situated to bring the enemy under fire at maximum ranges. Accordingly, machine guns and other weapons were placed on high ground well to the front. Some Marines commented that:

Placement of automatic weapons was a significant factor in setting up the defensive positions. To achieve the mission of an OPLR, weapons needed to be positioned to engage the enemy at maximum ranges. Therefore, machine guns and other weapons were placed on elevated ground well in front. Some Marines commented that:

Many individuals having the MLR concept in mind insisted that weapons should be located forward on low ground to provide grazing fire. A period466 of education was required. For the same reason, it was necessary to place 81mm mortar and 4.2-inch mortar positions further forward than they would normally be in support of the MLR.677

Many people who understood the MLR concept insisted that weapons should be positioned on low ground towards the front to provide grazing fire. A period466 of training was essential. Similarly, it was important to set up the 81mm and 4.2-inch mortar positions further ahead than usual to support the MLR.677

677 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

The problem of establishing depth to the defensive positions was never solved to the satisfaction of everyone. This was due primarily to the extended front which necessitated using more units for support elements than would normally be done. This situation was partly alleviated by establishing some unit defensive sectors further to the rear in the company areas.

The issue of creating depth in the defensive positions was never fully resolved to everyone's satisfaction. This was mainly because the lengthy front required more units for support than would typically be needed. This situation was somewhat improved by setting up some unit defensive sectors further back in the company areas.

Another difficulty was the inadequate allocation of ammunition: one-half JAMESTOWN load on position, and another half-load available at the regimental dump. The JAMESTOWN load unit had been developed for use in a stabilized defense situation where automatic weapons were aimed as the enemy came in close proximity to the MLR. On the other hand, OPLR machine guns and weapons were required to open up at maximum ranges and might well be fired for extended periods of time. It was calculated that A4 machine guns firing at medium rate (75 rpm) would expend the one-half JAMESTOWN load in 22 minutes, while an A1 machine gun at medium rate (125 rpm) would exhaust the same load in 13 minutes. A partial improvement was obtained by moving the ammunition loads from regimental to battalion dumps although the basic problem of limited allocation—shared also by rear infantry regiments—continued to exist.

Another issue was the insufficient allocation of ammunition: one-half JAMESTOWN load on-site and another half-load available at the regimental dump. The JAMESTOWN load unit was designed for a stable defense situation where automatic weapons were aimed as the enemy got close to the MLR. However, OPLR machine guns and weapons needed to open fire at maximum ranges and could be fired for long periods. It was estimated that A4 machine guns firing at a medium rate (75 rpm) would use up the one-half Jameestown load in 22 minutes, while an A1 machine gun at medium rate (125 rpm) would deplete the same load in 13 minutes. A slight improvement was achieved by transferring the ammunition loads from regimental to battalion dumps, but the fundamental issue of limited allocation—also faced by rear infantry regiments—remained.

An unique situation that had confronted the 2d Battalion and at times the adjoining 1st Battalion stemmed from the large numbers of Army engineer personnel building the nonrepatriate POW camp in the DMZ immediately west of the 2/5 sector. During August and the first part of September, the area in front of 2/5 had been used as a base camp for 5,000–7,000 construction personnel. Although their area was crowded with these additional units, the Marine battalions could not exercise any control over them. The Marines were still responsible for security of the sector, however. Presence of as many as 22,000 nonrepatriate CCF and NKPA prisoners as well as the Indian custodial forces further complicated the matter. It was noted that:

A unique situation that faced the 2nd Battalion and, at times, the neighboring 1st Battalion came from the large numbers of Army engineers building the non-repatriated POW camp in the DMZ just west of the 2/5 sector. During August and early September, the area in front of 2/5 had been used as a base camp for 5,000–7,000 construction workers. Even though their area was crowded with these extra units, the Marine battalions had no control over them. The Marines were still responsible for security in the sector, though. The presence of as many as 22,000 non-repatriated CCF and NKPA prisoners, along with the Indian custodial forces, made things even more complicated. It was noted that:

467

467

At the same time the Army engineers were building the camp, the prisoners were situated in the middle of the 2/5 area and the MSR to Panmunjom led completely across the battalion position into the 1/5 sector [and thence] into the DMZ. Upon completion of the camp, the engineers withdrew from the area but as they withdrew the 5,500 troops of the Custodial Forces India were brought in to guard the nonrepatriate prisoners. With the arrival of the prisoners, the number of personnel in the regiment’s sector of responsibility rose to 28,000–30,000. Thus, the problem of having a GOP mission and at the same time having never less than 5,000 and as many as 30,000 friendly, neutral, and/or prisoner personnel in front of our most forward defended localities was always present.678

At the same time the Army engineers were constructing the camp, the prisoners were located in the middle of the 2/5 area, and the main supply route to Panmunjom passed directly through the battalion position into the 1/5 sector [and from there] into the DMZ. After the camp was completed, the engineers left the area, but as they did, 5,500 troops of the Custodial Forces India were brought in to guard the non-repatriated prisoners. With the arrival of the prisoners, the personnel in the regiment's area of responsibility increased to 28,000–30,000. Thus, the challenge of having a GOP mission while consistently managing at least 5,000 and sometimes as many as 30,000 friendly, neutral, and/or prisoner personnel in front of our most forward defended areas was always a concern.678

678 5thMar Hist, pp. 6–7, Folder #3.

678 5thMar Hist, pp. 6–7, Folder #3.

Camp construction and development of the new positions south of the river continued at a furious pace from August through early October. Since the new camp sites were in civilian populated areas, “it was necessary to secure real estate clearance before they could be occupied or improved.”679 After clearance was obtained on 29 July, division engineers immediately began work on five separate camps. These camp building activities and reconnaissance of assigned blocking positions continued until 10 August. At this time, construction began on the major blocking positions, so organized and developed as to be self-sustaining for several days. Whether squad, platoon, or company, all positions were organized using a perimeter type defense and were mutually supporting laterally and in depth. Connecting trenches, bunkers, ammunition holes, and tank slots were also built.

Camp construction and development of the new positions south of the river went into high gear from August through early October. Since the new camp sites were in civilian-populated areas, “it was necessary to secure real estate clearance before they could be occupied or improved.” 679 After clearance was obtained on July 29, division engineers immediately started work on five separate camps. These camp-building activities and reconnaissance of assigned blocking positions continued until August 10. At that point, construction began on the major blocking positions, which were organized and developed to be self-sustaining for several days. Whether it was a squad, platoon, or company, all positions were set up using a perimeter defense and were mutually supporting both laterally and in depth. Connecting trenches, bunkers, ammunition slots, and tank spaces were also constructed.

679 1st EngrBn Rpt, Operations during 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, dtd 19 Apr 53, p. 4, Folder #6.

679 1st EngrBn Rpt, Operations during 27 Jul-31 Oct 53, dtd 19 Apr 53, p. 4, Folder #6.

By early October, construction of the blocking positions was completed by the 1st Marines despite the fierce summer heat, the numerous rock formations in the area that were difficult to dig out with limited tools and demolitions, and the shortage of personnel due to units participating in the new series of division MARLEX exercises, resumed in October. Within three months, the Marine division had thus largely completed building of a solid defense in its new main battle position. The importance of maintaining combat readiness for any renewed hostility on the part of the enemy demanded continuing vigilance at all times.

By early October, the 1st Marines finished building the blocking positions despite the intense summer heat, the many challenging rock formations that were hard to dig out with limited tools and explosives, and the shortage of personnel since units were involved in the new series of division MARLEX exercises, which resumed in October. Within three months, the Marine division had mostly completed the construction of a solid defense in its new main battle position. The need to stay combat-ready for any renewed enemy hostility required constant vigilance at all times.

Defense specifications throughout the 5th Marines northern general outpost sector called for some 1,560 individual fighting positions, 400 automatic weapons sites, 8 bunkered infantry OPs, 30 bunkered468 CPs, 15,400 yards of trenchlines, and 70,000 yards of protective and tactical wire. In construction of the MBP, all bunkers were so blended and camouflaged with the natural terrain that they were almost impossible to be seen.

Defense specifications across the 5th Marines' northern general outpost area required about 1,560 individual fighting positions, 400 automatic weapon sites, 8 fortified infantry observation posts, 30 fortified command posts, 15,400 yards of trench lines, and 70,000 yards of protective and tactical wire. In building the main battle position, all bunkers were blended in and camouflaged with the natural landscape, making them nearly invisible.

To the division rear, the location of recoilless rifle positions, FDC bunkers, and tank slots in the blocking positions and bridgeheads was the major priority. In the antimechanized defense plan, tanks covered likely avenues of approach into the general outpost area and also overlooked critical river crossing sites. Wherever possible old firing positions which had been previously prepared to support the secondary lines WYOMING and KANSAS were utilized. By the end of the year, 204 tank firing positions had been emplaced throughout the Marine division sector.

To the division rear, establishing recoilless rifle positions, FDC bunkers, and tank slots in blocking positions and bridgeheads was the top priority. In the anti-mechanized defense plan, tanks covered likely routes into the general outpost area and also overlooked key river crossing sites. Wherever possible, old firing positions that had been previously prepared to support the secondary lines Wyoming and Kansass were used. By the end of the year, 204 tank firing positions had been set up throughout the Marine division sector.

Three rehearsals for the occupation of the main battle position were held by the 1st Marine Division in September. All division units, both combat and service, participated in these exercises. Tactical units were required to occupy the MBP and be fully prepared for combat on four hours’ notice; service units were to provide additional local security required for the elimination of enemy infiltrators or guerrilla agents. Divisional and I Corps test exercises indicated that three hours were necessary to man the MBP during daylight and approximately three and one half hours at night.

Three rehearsals for taking over the main battle position were held by the 1st Marine Division in September. All division units, including both combat and service, took part in these exercises. Tactical units needed to occupy the MBP and be ready for combat with just four hours' notice; service units were responsible for providing extra local security needed to deal with enemy infiltrators or guerrilla agents. Divisional and I Corps test exercises showed that it took three hours to man the MBP during the day and about three and a half hours at night.

Postwar Employment of Marine Units in FECOM680

680 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10; AnlRpt CMC to SecNav for FY 1954, dtd 11 Aug 54; AnlRpt CMC to SecNav for FY 1955, dtd 15 Aug 55; 1st MAW ComdDs, Aug-Sep 53; MAGs-12, -33 ComdDs, Aug-Sep 53; MSgt Roy E. Heinecke, “Four Star Visit,” Leatherneck, v. 37, no. 1 (Jan 54).

680 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, Chap. 10; AnlRpt CMC to SecNav for FY 1954, dated 11 Aug 54; AnlRpt CMC to SecNav for FY 1955, dated 15 Aug 55; 1st MAW ComdDs, Aug-Sep 53; MAGs-12, -33 ComdDs, Aug-Sep 53; MSgt Roy E. Heinecke, “Four Star Visit,” Leatherneck, v. 37, no. 1 (Jan 54).

The 1st Marine Aircraft Wing Post-Armistice Plan, as part of Fifth Air Force operations, was effective at 2200, on 27 July. Its purpose, basically, was to insure that wing elements carried out provisions of the armistice and yet continued to maintain a high level of combat readiness in the uneasy truce period.

The 1st Marine Aircraft Wing Post-Armistice Plan, part of Fifth Air Force operations, took effect at 10:00 PM on July 27. Its main goal was to ensure that wing units followed the armistice terms while still keeping a high level of combat readiness during the tense truce period.

Two major operational restrictions had been imposed on the UNC air force by the armistice. The first was establishment of the “No-Fly469 Line” south of the Allied southern boundary of the DMZ. Any flight beyond that point had to be authorized by JOC and a barrier patrol was maintained by FAF to apprehend any violators of the truce provisions. The 1st MAW contribution to this aerial security team was night patrols performed by F3D-2s from VMF(N)-513 and radar-configured AD aircraft from VMC-1 (later, by the new VMA-251 squadron).

Two big operational restrictions were placed on the UNC air force by the armistice. The first was the creation of the “No-Fly469 Line” south of the Allied southern boundary of the DMZ. Any flight past that point had to be approved by JOC, and a barrier patrol was carried out by FAF to catch any violators of the truce. The 1st MAW contributed to this aerial security team with night patrols conducted by F3D-2s from VMF(N)-513 and radar-equipped AD aircraft from VMC-1 (later, by the new VMA-251 squadron).

The second post-truce restriction, which affected wing logistic movements, limited the entry and departure of all Korean air traffic to five airfields. These aerial ports were K-2, K-8, K-9, K-14, and K-18. (K-16 was later added.) Neither K-3, the east coast home field of MAG-33 nor K-6, located just inland from the west coast and the site of MAG-12 operations, was included. All Marine traffic landed either at K-9 or K-2 for inventory, a procedure which subsequently developed into a bottleneck, and caused supply delays due to the substantial reduction in payload made to accommodate the necessary extra fuel due to greater overland distances between airfields. When the CG, 1st MAW requested that K-3 be made a port of entry to avoid the difficulties involved in use of the two FAF fields, ComNavFE disapproved the request with the following rationale:

The second post-truce restriction, which impacted wing logistic movements, limited the entry and departure of all Korean air traffic to five airfields. These airfields were K-2, K-8, K-9, K-14, and K-18. (K-16 was added later.) Neither K-3, the east coast home field of MAG-33, nor K-6, located just inland from the west coast and the site of MAG-12 operations, was included. All Marine traffic landed either at K-9 or K-2 for inventory, a process that eventually became a bottleneck, causing supply delays due to the significant reduction in payload necessary to accommodate the extra fuel required for the longer overland distances between airfields. When the CG, 1st MAW requested that K-3 be made a port of entry to avoid the challenges of using the two FAF fields, ComNavFE denied the request with the following rationale:

ComNavFE feels that to ask for designation of K-3 as an additional port of entry would be politically inadvisable. It would provide the Communists with a basis for a propaganda claim that the United Nations were attempting to further delay an armistice agreement. Should the Communists propose an additional port of entry for their side, COMNAVFE states the UN Military Armistice Commission will offer designation of K-3 as a quid pro quo.681

ComNavFE believes that requesting K-3 to be designated as an additional port of entry would be politically unwise. It would give the Communists a reason to claim, as part of their propaganda, that the United Nations was trying to delay an armistice agreement even more. If the Communists suggest adding a port of entry for themselves, COMNAVFE says that the UN Military Armistice Commission will offer to designate K-3 in return. 681

681 PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 6, p. 10-74.

681 PacFlt EvalRpt, No. 6, p. 10-74.

Removal from Korea to Japan of operational combat aircraft for routine maintenance runs and their return thus had to be made through the same port of exit and reentry. Inspections were conducted by the USAF combat aircraft control officer at the port.

Removal from Korea to Japan of operational combat aircraft for routine maintenance runs and their return thus had to be made through the same port of exit and reentry. Inspections were conducted by the USAF combat aircraft control officer at the port.

The post-truce 1st MAW mission, in part, comprised the following:

The post-truce 1st MAW mission included the following:

... to maintain assigned forces in a state of combat readiness, provide for security of assigned forces, areas, and installations; observe the conditions of the Armistice Agreement; support other elements of the United470 Nations Command as required; be prepared to counter any attempt on the part of the enemy to resume active hostilities; continue current missions other than combat; insure that 1st MAW personnel and combat material are not increased beyond the level present at the instant of the effective time of the Armistice Agreement; submit reports on 1st MAW personnel and controlled items of Wing equipment entering or leaving Korea; be prepared to disperse air units within or from Korea as necessary to provide maximum security during an Armistice....682

... to keep assigned forces ready for combat, ensure the security of assigned forces, areas, and facilities; adhere to the terms of the Armistice Agreement; support other elements of the United470 Nations Command as needed; be ready to respond to any efforts by the enemy to start hostilities again; continue current non-combat missions; make sure that 1st MAW personnel and combat equipment don't exceed the levels present at the effective time of the Armistice Agreement; submit reports on 1st MAW personnel and controlled Wing equipment entering or leaving Korea; be prepared to disperse air units within or from Korea as necessary to ensure maximum security during an Armistice....682

682 1st MAW ComdD, Aug 53, Folder #1, p. 1.

682 1st MAW ComdD, Aug 53, Folder #1, p. 1.

The strict interpretation of replacing combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition that were destroyed, worn out, or used up during the period of armistice was, of course, due to the sensitive political considerations. It was felt that replacement of combat equipment by UNC forces:

The strict interpretation of replacing combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition that were destroyed, worn out, or used up during the armistice period was, understandably, influenced by sensitive political issues. There was a belief that replacing combat equipment by UNC forces:

... would result in the Communists adopting the same liberal interpretation which is undesirable since it will lessen the control of combat material in North Korea and could permit them to replace phenomenal unauthorized quantities of material damaged, destroyed, worn out or used up prior to the effective date of the Armistice Agreement.683

... would lead to the Communists taking on the same liberal interpretation, which is not ideal since it would reduce control over combat materials in North Korea and might allow them to replace enormous amounts of material that were damaged, destroyed, worn out, or used up before the effective date of the Armistice Agreement.683

683 1st MAW ComdD, Aug 53, Folder #2, msg ComNavFE to all units, dtd 16 Aug 53.

683 1st MAW ComdD, Aug 53, Folder #2, msg ComNavFE to all units, dtd 16 Aug 53.

In August, postwar procedures were mapped out for 1st MAW personnel, as part of the overall quota limitations prescribed by FECOM (Far East Command) through FEAF and FAF echelons. A 1st MAW headquarters section, designated as 1st MAW, rear echelon, was established at Itami AFB, Japan, two hours’ flight from Korea. All incoming or outgoing aviation personnel on permanent change of station orders were to report to the rear echelon, 1st MAW. Announcement of Marine Corps plans to initiate future postwar rotation on a stretch-out basis (for both air and ground personnel) was also made in August. Preliminary plans called for changing the current 11-month combat tour in Korea to 14 months by March 1954, and possibly 16-month tours by July 1954, if extension of Korean service proved necessary. As with division personnel, monthly cumulative arrivals were not to exceed the number of departing aviation Marines. The quota set by FEAF for 1st MAW rotation for the month of August was 600, compared to the Marine division quota of 3,000 for ground personnel.

In August, postwar procedures were outlined for 1st MAW personnel as part of the overall limitations set by FECOM (Far East Command) through FEAF and FAF echelons. A 1st MAW headquarters section, called 1st MAW, rear echelon, was established at Itami AFB, Japan, two hours' flight from Korea. All incoming or outgoing aviation personnel on permanent change of station orders were required to report to the rear echelon, 1st MAW. In August, the Marine Corps announced plans to start future postwar rotations on a phased basis (for both air and ground personnel). Preliminary plans aimed to extend the current 11-month combat tour in Korea to 14 months by March 1954, and possibly even to 16-month tours by July 1954, if extending Korean service became necessary. Like the division personnel, the monthly total of arriving aviation Marines was not to exceed the number departing. The quota set by FEAF for 1st MAW rotation for August was 600, compared to the Marine division quota of 3,000 for ground personnel.

With the 1st Marine Division engaged for an unknown length of time in its postwar mission as an occupation force and 1st MAW471 units continuing to operate under FAF in Korea, new Marine ground and air units were assigned to the Far East theater shortly after the conclusion of Korean hostilities. On 23 July, the 3d Marine Division, together with supporting air units, was readied for deployment from Camp Pendleton to Japan the following month. On 13 August the division CP was opened afloat and units proceeded to Japan between 16–30 August. The mission of this division and the two major air units, MAGs-11 and -16, was to maintain a high state of readiness in the Far East Command and to assist in the air defense of Japan. As explained by the Commandant, their redeployment was accomplished “in order to provide the amphibious capability which is an important element of national strategy in that predominantly maritime theater.”684

With the 1st Marine Division engaged for an unknown duration in its postwar role as an occupation force and the 1st MAW471 units continuing to operate under FAF in Korea, new Marine ground and air units were assigned to the Far East theater shortly after the Korean hostilities ended. On July 23, the 3rd Marine Division, along with supporting air units, was prepared for deployment from Camp Pendleton to Japan the following month. On August 13, the division command post was opened afloat and units moved to Japan between August 16 and 30. The mission of this division and the two major air units, MAGs-11 and -16, was to maintain a high state of readiness in the Far East Command and to assist in Japan's air defense. As the Commandant explained, their redeployment was carried out “in order to provide the amphibious capability which is an important element of national strategy in that predominantly maritime theater.”684

684 AnlRpt CMC to SecNav for FY 1954, dtd 11 Aug. 54, p. II-2.

684 AnlRpt CMC to SecNav for FY 1954, dated 11 Aug. 54, p. II-2.

The new Marine units thus joined in the Pacific, the 1st Provisional Marine Air-Ground Task Force685 that had been activated in Kaneohe, Hawaii in January of 1953. Commanded by Brigadier General James P. Risely, it was to include a headquarters company, reinforced regiment, and reinforced aircraft group. The special task force was designated as a hard-hitting, air-ground team that could respond immediately as a force-in-readiness to any emergency in the Pacific area.

The new Marine units joined in the Pacific, the 1st Provisional Marine Air-Ground Task Force685 that was activated in Kaneohe, Hawaii in January 1953. Led by Brigadier General James P. Risely, it was set to include a headquarters company, a reinforced regiment, and a reinforced aircraft group. This special task force was designated as a powerful air-ground team that could quickly respond as a force-in-readiness to any emergency in the Pacific region.

685 The Task Force was subsequently redesignated as the 1st Marine Brigade, FMF, in May 1956.

685 The Task Force was later renamed the 1st Marine Brigade, FMF, in May 1956.

Commanded by Major General Robert H. Pepper, the 21,100-man 3d Marine Division was called the “Three-Dimensional Division,” in reference to its training in airborne, amphibious, and atomic warfare. Within six months, its components were to stretch from Kobe to Tokyo, with division headquarters and the 9th Marines at Gifu, the 4th Marines at Nara, and other units at Otsu.

Commanded by Major General Robert H. Pepper, the 21,100-soldier 3rd Marine Division was known as the “Three-Dimensional Division,” referring to its training in airborne, amphibious, and nuclear warfare. In just six months, its units were set to extend from Kobe to Tokyo, with division headquarters and the 9th Marines stationed in Gifu, the 4th Marines in Nara, and other units in Otsu.

New Marine air units, which included Marine Transport Squadron 253 and Marine Observation Squadron 2, as well as MAGs-11 and -16, all came under 1st MAW operational control. Commanded by Colonel John D. Harshberger, the all-jet MAG-11, formerly based at Edenton, N.C., arrived at NAS Atsugi on 10 September. It comprised three F9F squadrons, VMFs-222, -224, and -314. Also at Atsugi, the Marine Corps aerial gateway to Japan, was the new transport squadron, VMR-253, commanded by Lieutenant Colonel472 Carl J. Fleps, which reported in to CG, 1st MAW, on 16 August. Following numerous FMFPac requests for additional air transport capability, the Commandant had authorized transfer of the squadron from El Toro to assist the veteran wartime carrier VMR-152 in the enormous postwar airlift program.

New Marine air units, including Marine Transport Squadron 253 and Marine Observation Squadron 2, along with MAGs-11 and -16, all came under the operational control of 1st MAW. Commanded by Colonel John D. Harshberger, the all-jet MAG-11, which was previously based in Edenton, N.C., arrived at NAS Atsugi on September 10. It consisted of three F9F squadrons, VMFs-222, -224, and -314. Also at Atsugi, the Marine Corps’ aerial gateway to Japan, was the new transport squadron, VMR-253, commanded by Lieutenant Colonel472 Carl J. Fleps, which reported to the CG of 1st MAW on August 16. Following several requests from FMFPac for more air transport capability, the Commandant had authorized the squadron's transfer from El Toro to help the veteran wartime carrier VMR-152 with the massive postwar airlift program.

Flying new R4Q Fairchild Packets, which could carry 42 troops, the squadron from August to May 1954 logged more than 5,000,000 passenger miles in transporting Marine replacements for the 1st and 3d Marine Divisions. Additional air capability was provided by Marine Helicopter Transport Group 16 (at Hanshin AFB) under Colonel Harold J. Mitchener, with its two HRS-2 (HMR-162, HMR-163) and service squadrons (MAMs-16, MABS-16) and VMO-2, commanded by Major William G. MacLean (based at Itami). Both units reported to 1st MAW and FECOM on 13 August.

Flying the new R4Q Fairchild Packets, which could carry 42 troops, the squadron logged over 5,000,000 passenger miles from August to May 1954, transporting Marine replacements for the 1st and 3rd Marine Divisions. Additional air support was provided by Marine Helicopter Transport Group 16 (located at Hanshin AFB) under Colonel Harold J. Mitchener, with its two HRS-2 squadrons (HMR-162, HMR-163) and service squadrons (MAMs-16, MABS-16) and VMO-2, commanded by Major William G. MacLean (based at Itami). Both units reported to 1st MAW and FECOM on August 13.

Major command changes within the 1st MAW that month were: Brigadier General Verne J. McCaul, vice Brigadier General Alexander W. Kreiser, Jr. as ACG, 1st MAW, effective 16 August; and Colonel William F. Hausman, vice Colonel Carney, CO, MAG-12, on 8 August. (The new MAG-33 CO, Colonel Smith, had succeeded Colonel Stacy in late July.)

Major command changes within the 1st MAW that month were: Brigadier General Verne J. McCaul replaced Brigadier General Alexander W. Kreiser, Jr. as ACG, 1st MAW, effective August 16; and Colonel William F. Hausman took over from Colonel Carney as CO, MAG-12, on August 8. (The new MAG-33 CO, Colonel Smith, succeeded Colonel Stacy in late July.)

In the immediate post-armistice period, extensive training programs were instituted by MAGs-12 and -33 to maintain high operational efficiency. Marine aircraft remained on JOC alert as required by the Fifth Air Force and flew training missions scheduled by 1st MAW and FAF. These consisted of practice strikes against heavily-defended targets, practice CAS for Eighth Army units, GCI (ground control intercept) flights under MGCIS-3 control, and bombing practice using the Naktong Bombing Range. Other training sorties were scheduled in reconnaissance navigation, weather penetration, determining fuel bingos,686 target location and identification, air defense patrolling, and coordination of tactical procedures in the target area. The training schedules provided a well-balanced indoctrination program for new squadron flight leaders, pilots, radar operators, and other crew members arriving in Korea on the postwar personnel drafts.

In the period right after the armistice, MAGs-12 and -33 set up extensive training programs to keep operational efficiency high. Marine aircraft stayed on JOC alert as required by the Fifth Air Force and conducted training missions scheduled by 1st MAW and FAF. These missions included practice strikes on heavily-defended targets, practice close air support for Eighth Army units, ground control intercept flights under MGCIS-3, and bombing practice at the Naktong Bombing Range. Additional training sorties were organized for reconnaissance navigation, weather penetration, fuel bingo determination, target location and identification, air defense patrols, and coordinating tactical procedures in the target area. The training schedules provided a comprehensive indoctrination program for new squadron flight leaders, pilots, radar operators, and other crew members arriving in Korea as part of the postwar personnel drafts.

686 A fuel bingo is the amount of fuel needed by a pilot to reach home base plus enough additional fuel to divert to an alternate airfield.

686 A fuel bingo is the amount of fuel a pilot needs to get back to their home base, plus enough extra fuel to divert to another airfield if necessary.

A new work day schedule of 0700–1500 implemented in August473 made more time available for athletics, swimming, studying, and R&R (Rest & Recreation). That same month the MAG-12 softball team won the Fifth Air Force “All Korea” softball championship. Following this achievement, the team left for Japan to compete in the FAF “Far East” softball tournament which included teams from all the major Pacific bases. Subsequently, the K-6 players “disguised in Air Force uniforms, went onward and upward to become FEAF champions in September.”687 MAG-33 pilots, meanwhile, participated in Operation SPYGLASS, a FAF training exercise in August and Operation BACK DOOR, the following month. Both emphasized interception flying and work with GCI squadrons. As “aggressors,” the Pohang-based airmen made simulated attacks on South Korean targets “defended” by Air Force and other land-based Marine units. In October, MAG-33 pilots flew CAS missions for the 1st Marine Division training problem, MARLEX IV, a battalion landing exercise staged by 1/7 on Tokchok-to Island. Beginning that month a new procedure was inaugurated by MAG-33 and the recently-arrived MAG-11. Every week, four MAG-11 pilots came to Korea for a week of orientation flying with a MAG-33 squadron to gain a better picture of typical flying conditions in the Korean theater.

A new work schedule from 7:00 AM to 3:00 PM was introduced in August473, allowing more time for athletics, swimming, studying, and R&R (Rest & Recreation). That same month, the MAG-12 softball team won the Fifth Air Force “All Korea” softball championship. After this success, the team headed to Japan to compete in the FAF “Far East” softball tournament, which included teams from all the major Pacific bases. Later, the K-6 players, disguised in Air Force uniforms, went on to becomeFEAF champions in September. Meanwhile, MAG-33 pilots took part in Operation Telescope, a FAF training exercise in August, and Operation Back entrance the following month. Both operations focused on interception flying and coordination with GCI squadrons. Acting as “aggressors,” the Pohang-based airmen made simulated attacks on South Korean targets defended by Air Force and other land-based Marine units. In October, MAG-33 pilots conducted CAS missions for the 1st Marine Division training exercise, MARLEX IV, a battalion landing drill carried out by 1/7 on Tokchok-to Island. Starting that month, MAG-33 and the newly-arrived MAG-11 initiated a new procedure. Each week, four MAG-11 pilots came to Korea for a week of orientation flying with a MAG-33 squadron to get a better understanding of the typical flying conditions in the Korean theater.

687 Field, NavOps, Korea, pp. 456–457.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Field, NavOps, Korea, pp. 456–457.

Early in 1955 the 1st Marine Division, which had been in the Korean front lines almost continuously since September 1950, returned to Camp Pendleton. Redeployment by echelons began in February. By June, all units had returned to CONUS. The transfer from Korean occupation duty was effected in order that the division’s “valuable capability as a highly trained amphibious force in readiness may be fully realized.”688 Now under Major General Merrill B. Twining,689 the division had been a part of Eighth Army occupying postwar defense positions in Korea until its relief on 17–18 March 1955 by the U.S. 24th Infantry Division.

Early in 1955, the 1st Marine Division, which had been on the Korean front lines almost nonstop since September 1950, returned to Camp Pendleton. They started redeploying in February, and by June, all units were back in the continental United States. The shift from Korean occupation duty was made so that the division's "valuable capability as a highly trained amphibious force ready to respond may be fully utilized." 688 Now under Major General Merrill B. Twining, 689 the division had been part of the Eighth Army, occupying defense positions in postwar Korea until it was relieved on March 17-18, 1955, by the U.S. 24th Infantry Division.

688 AnlRpt of CMC to SecNav FY 1955, dtd 15 Aug 55, p. 3, quoting statement made by SecDef in Dec 54 on forthcoming departure of 1stMarDiv from FECOM.

688 AnlRpt of CMC to SecNav FY 1955, dtd 15 Aug 55, p. 3, quoting statement made by SecDef in Dec 54 on upcoming departure of 1stMarDiv from FECOM.

689 Postwar commanders of 1stMarDiv to date had been Major General Robert H. Pepper, who succeeded General Pate, and served from 12 May 54–22 Jul 54; Major General Robert E. Hogaboom, 23 Jul 54–17 Jan 55; and General Twining, beginning 18 Jan 55.

689 Postwar commanders of 1stMarDiv so far have been Major General Robert H. Pepper, who took over from General Pate and served from May 12, 1954, to July 22, 1954; Major General Robert E. Hogaboom, from July 23, 1954, to January 17, 1955; and General Twining, starting January 18, 1955.

In addition to its official mission in the Eighth Army line, the 1st Marine Division had conducted an active small-unit amphibious training program during its postwar Korea duty. All but two of its infantry battalions had carried out assault landings on Tokchok-to,474 off the Korean west coast south of Inchon, prior to its departure for the United States. The 3d Marine Division had also conducted an active training program, with numerous small-unit exercises and regimental landings staged at Iwo Jima and Okinawa as part of its continuous readiness conditioning.

In addition to its official mission in the Eighth Army line, the 1st Marine Division had run an active small-unit amphibious training program during its postwar service in Korea. All but two of its infantry battalions had performed assault landings on Tokchok-to,474 off the Korean west coast south of Inchon, before leaving for the United States. The 3rd Marine Division had also conducted an active training program, with many small-unit exercises and regimental landings taking place at Iwo Jima and Okinawa as part of its ongoing readiness training.

For Marine air personnel, their official departure from Korea following the 1st MAW wartime assignment there, came the next year. Beginning in June 1956, initial units of the Marine aircraft wing were withdrawn from Korea and relocated at NAS Iwakuni, Japan. Plans called for the wing, then under Brigadier General Samuel S. Jack690 and occupying bases in both Korea and Japan, to be permanently headquartered at Iwakuni and revert to CinCPacFlt control. The wing remained on station in the Far East as a component of postwar United States defense strength in that area.

For Marine air personnel, their official departure from Korea after the 1st MAW's wartime assignment there came the following year. Starting in June 1956, the first units of the Marine aircraft wing were withdrawn from Korea and moved to NAS Iwakuni, Japan. The plan was for the wing, then led by Brigadier General Samuel S. Jack690 and operating bases in both Korea and Japan, to be permanently based in Iwakuni and come under CinCPacFlt control. The wing continued to be stationed in the Far East as part of the United States' postwar defense presence in the region.

690 CGs, 1st MAW, in the immediate post-armistice period were: Major General Megee, until 4 Dec 53; Major General Albert D. Cooley, 5 Dec 53–25 Mar 54; Brigadier General McCaul, 26 May 54–24 Aug 54; Brigadier General Marion L. Dawson, 25 Aug 54–24 Sep 55; and Brigadier General Jack, 25 Sep 55–30 Jun 56.

690 CGs, 1st MAW, in the immediate post-armistice period were: Major General Megee, until December 4, 1953; Major General Albert D. Cooley, from December 5, 1953, to March 25, 1954; Brigadier General McCaul, from May 26, 1954, to August 24, 1954; Brigadier General Marion L. Dawson, from August 25, 1954, to September 24, 1955; and Brigadier General Jack, from September 25, 1955, to June 30, 1956.

The prewar Fifth Air Force and Eighth U.S. Army commands, under which Marine Corps air and ground units had functioned during the Korean War, were permanently deployed in the Far East as operative military echelons. EUSAK-FAF transferred from its wartime JOC location at Seoul to Osan-ni in January 1954 and in September of that year relocated to Nagoya, Japan. Eighth Army headquarters remained at Seoul.

The prewar Fifth Air Force and Eighth U.S. Army commands, under which Marine Corps air and ground units operated during the Korean War, were permanently based in the Far East as active military units. EUSAK-FAF moved from its wartime JOC location in Seoul to Osan-ni in January 1954 and then relocated to Nagoya, Japan, in September of that year. The Eighth Army headquarters stayed in Seoul.


Marine Corps Role and Contributions to the Korean War: Ground, Air, Helicopter—FMF and Readiness Posture—Problems Peculiar to the Korean War—Korean Lessons

Marine Corps Role and Contributions to the Korean War: Ground, Air, Helicopter—FMF and Readiness Posture—Problems Peculiar to the Korean War—Korean Lessons

Marine Corps Role and Contribution to the Korean War: Ground691

Marine Corps Role and Contribution to the Korean War: Ground691

691 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: U.S. Dept. of Defense, Semiannual Reports of the Secretary of Defense, 1951–1954, hereafter Rpt of SecDef; PacFlt EvalRpts, No. 6, Chaps. 9, 10, No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9, No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; Marine Corps Board Study, An Evaluation of the Influence of Marine Corps Forces on the Course of the Korean War (4 Aug 50–15 Dec 50), vs. I and II, hereafter USMC Board Rpt, held in James C. Breckinridge Library, MCDEC, Quantico, Va; A Summary of the General Officers’ Conference, HQMC, 19–21 Aug 53, hereafter Generals’ Summary, at Breckinridge Library; 1stMarDiv ComdD, May 53, App. IX, Summary of USMC Action in Korean War; USMC Ops Korea, vs. I, II, III, IV, passim; Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Robert D. Heinl, Jr., Soldiers of the Sea: The United States Marine Corps, 1775–1962 (Annapolis, Md.: United States Naval Institute, 1962), hereafter Heinl, Soldiers of Sea; Release “1st Marine Division ‘The Old Breed’” from 1st MarDiv folder, HRB RefFile; Release “Outline of the First Two Years of the 1st Marine Division in Korea,” HistBr, G-3 Div, HRS Folder; CheVron, MCRD, San Diego, Calif., V. 27, no. 31 (2 Aug 68), p. 4–5, “From Camp Pendleton to Inchon—18 Years Later, LtGen E. A. Craig, 1st Provisional Brigade CG, Recalls Experiences in Korea,” Cpl C. N. Damopoulos, hereafter CheVron.

691 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: U.S. Department of Defense, Semiannual Reports of the Secretary of Defense, 1951–1954, hereafter Rpt of SecDef; PacFlt EvalRpts, No. 6, Chapters 9, 10, No. 5, Chapters 8, 9, No. 4, Chapters 9, 10; Marine Corps Board Study, An Evaluation of the Influence of Marine Corps Forces on the Course of the Korean War (Aug 4, 1950–Dec 15, 1950), vols. I and II, hereafter USMC Board Rpt, located in James C. Breckinridge Library, MCDEC, Quantico, Va; A Summary of the General Officers’ Conference, HQMC, Aug 19–21, 1953, hereafter Generals’ Summary, at Breckinridge Library; 1stMarDiv ComdD, May 1953, App. IX, Summary of USMC Action in Korean War; USMC Ops Korea, vols. I, II, III, IV, passim; Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Robert D. Heinl, Jr., Soldiers of the Sea: The United States Marine Corps, 1775–1962 (Annapolis, Md.: United States Naval Institute, 1962), hereafter Heinl, Soldiers of Sea; Release “1st Marine Division ‘The Old Breed’” from 1st MarDiv folder, HRB RefFile; Release “Outline of the First Two Years of the 1st Marine Division in Korea,” HistBr, G-3 Div, HRS Folder; CheVron, MCRD, San Diego, Calif., Vol. 27, No. 31 (Aug 2, 1968), pp. 4–5, “From Camp Pendleton to Inchon—18 Years Later, LtGen E. A. Craig, 1st Provisional Brigade CG, Recalls Experiences in Korea,” Cpl C. N. Damopoulos, hereafter CheVron.

Ground operations of the 1st Marine Division during the Korean War can be divided into six periods. These are the Pusan Perimeter defense (August-September 1950), Inchon-Seoul assault (September-October 1950), the Chosin Reservoir campaign (October-December 1950), East-Central Korea (January 1951-March 1952), West Korea (March 1952-July 1953), and the post-armistice period (July 1953-February 1955).

Field operations of the 1st Marine Division during the Korean War can be broken down into six periods. These include the Pusan Perimeter defense (August-September 1950), the Inchon-Seoul assault (September-October 1950), the Chosin Reservoir campaign (October-December 1950), East-Central Korea (January 1951-March 1952), West Korea (March 1952-July 1953), and the post-armistice period (July 1953-February 1955).

Marine Corps traditional concepts of readiness and fast, effective deployment were never better illustrated than in the hectic weeks following 25 June 1950. The NKPA invasion of South Korea came at a time when U.S. military forces were in the final stages of a cutback476 to peacetime size. Ships and planes were being “mothballed”; personnel of all the Armed Services were being reduced in number to the lowest possible effective manpower levels.

Marine Corps traditional ideas about readiness and quick, effective deployment were never clearer than in the chaotic weeks after June 25, 1950. The NKPA invasion of South Korea happened when U.S. military forces were nearing the end of a drawdown to peacetime levels. Ships and planes were being put into storage; the number of personnel across all Armed Services was being cut down to the lowest effective levels possible.476

From the peak of its six-division, five-wing wartime strength of 475,600 in 1944–1945, the Marine Corps at the outbreak of the Korean emergency had only two skeletal divisions and two air wings. There were but 74,279 Marines on active duty, 97 percent of the Marine Corps authorized strength. Although a ceiling of 100,000 had been established for the Corps by law, it was a period of tight purse strings for all defense components. Fiscal austerity in the post-World War II period had whittled Corps numbers from 85,000 in FY 1947 to what was projected at 67,000 by the end of FY 1950.

From its peak wartime strength of 475,600, with six divisions and five wings in 1944–1945, the Marine Corps had only two minimal divisions and two air wings at the start of the Korean emergency. There were only 74,279 Marines on active duty, which was 97 percent of the Marine Corps' authorized strength. Although there was a legal limit of 100,000 for the Corps, it was a time of budget cuts for all defense sectors. Financial constraints in the post-World War II era had reduced Corps numbers from 85,000 in FY 1947 to an expected 67,000 by the end of FY 1950.

This critically reduced strength found the normal Marine triangular infantry organization cut back to two companies per battalion, two battalions per regiment, and two regiments per division. The 1st Marine Division, at Camp Pendleton, and 2d Marine Division, at Camp Lejeune, were structured along the regular peacetime T/O of 10,232 USMC/USN vice the wartime minimum T/O of 22,355. No Marine units of any size were located in the Far East.

This significantly reduced strength meant that the standard Marine triangular infantry organization was scaled back to two companies per battalion, two battalions per regiment, and two regiments per division. The 1st Marine Division at Camp Pendleton and the 2nd Marine Division at Camp Lejeune were organized according to the regular peacetime T/O of 10,232 USMC/USN instead of the wartime minimum T/O of 22,355. There were no Marine units of any size stationed in the Far East.

Despite its lean numbers in late June 1950, the Marine Corps once again would be in the forefront of American military response to the Communist aggression 6,000 miles across the Pacific. As hard-pressed South Korean forces and understrength U.S. occupation troops from Japan attempted to halt the Communist invaders, General of the Army Douglas MacArthur, on 2 July, requested the JCS to send immediately a Marine RCT with supporting air to the Far East. On 7 July, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade was formed at Camp Pendleton from units of the 1st Division. Major components of the brigade—a balanced force of ground, service, and aviation elements—were the 5th Marines and MAG-33. Five days later, the 6,534-man brigade had mounted out from San Diego to answer the CinCFE plea for Marines to help turn the Communist tide engulfing Korea.

Despite its small numbers in late June 1950, the Marine Corps would once again be at the forefront of America’s military response to the Communist aggression 6,000 miles away across the Pacific. As beleaguered South Korean forces and understrength U.S. occupation troops from Japan tried to stop the Communist invaders, General of the Army Douglas MacArthur requested on July 2 that the Joint Chiefs of Staff send a Marine Regimental Combat Team with air support to the Far East immediately. On July 7, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade was formed at Camp Pendleton from units of the 1st Division. Major components of the brigade—a balanced force of ground, service, and aviation units—were the 5th Marines and MAG-33. Five days later, the 6,534-man brigade had shipped out from San Diego to respond to the request from the Commander in Chief, Far East, for Marines to help turn the Communist tide sweeping through Korea.

The brigade buttressed the faltering UNC defense in the Pusan Perimeter. Employed as a mobile reserve it helped prevent three enemy breakthroughs—at Chinju and the two Naktong River battles. On 7 August, a month after its activation, the brigade launched an attack toward Chinju. The Marine brigade was the first unit sent from CONUS to see combat in what was then considered a short-term police action. Later, in leading the way to destruction of an enemy477 bridgehead at the Naktong, the Marine brigade gave the defending Eighth Army its first victory against the NKPA in the Korean conflict.

The brigade supported the struggling UNC defense at the Pusan Perimeter. Used as a mobile reserve, it helped prevent three enemy breakthroughs—at Chinju and during the two Naktong River battles. On August 7, a month after it was activated, the brigade launched an attack toward Chinju. The Marine brigade was the first unit sent from the continental U.S. to see action in what was then viewed as a short-term police operation. Later, while leading the charge to destroy an enemy bridgehead at the Naktong, the Marine brigade secured the defending Eighth Army's first victory against the NKPA in the Korean conflict.477

Even before the brigade had been dispatched to the Far East, as the Korean situation continued to deteriorate, MacArthur had requested the JCS to expand the brigade to a full war-strength division. Between 10–21 July MacArthur, now CinCUNC, had made three separate requests for a Marine division. This persistence was reinforced by his growing determination to conduct a tactical amphibious operation to the rear of the overextended NKPA lines and thereby seize the initiative from the enemy.

Even before the brigade was sent to the Far East, as the situation in Korea kept getting worse, MacArthur had asked the JCS to grow the brigade into a full-strength division. Between July 10 and 21, MacArthur, now CinCUNC, made three different requests for a Marine division. His determination to carry out a tactical amphibious operation behind the stretched-out NKPA lines and take the initiative away from the enemy only strengthened his persistence.

In the States, meanwhile, authorization was received to bring the badly understrength 1st and 2d Marine Divisions up to full 22,000-man war levels. By stripping posts and stations, reassignment and rerouting of units, and callup of additional reserve personnel, major elements of the 1st Marine Division were on their way to Korea by mid-August. Timing was critical in order to meet the projected D-Day target date of 15 September.

In the U.S., authorization was granted to fully staff the understrength 1st and 2nd Marine Divisions to their full wartime level of 22,000 troops. By reallocating posts and stations, reassigning and rerouting units, and calling up extra reserve personnel, significant parts of the 1st Marine Division were on their way to Korea by mid-August. Timing was crucial to meet the planned D-Day target of September 15.

Pulled out of the Pusan line on 12 September, the brigade was absorbed by the newly arrived 1st Marine Division in preparation for the coming Inchon invasion. As the brigade commander, Lieutenant General Edward A. Craig, USMC, later reminisced:

Pulled out of the Pusan line on September 12, the brigade was integrated into the newly arrived 1st Marine Division to prepare for the upcoming Inchon invasion. As the brigade commander, Lieutenant General Edward A. Craig, USMC, later reflected:

Although the 1st Provisional Brigade and the 1st MarDiv had never actually trained or worked together, they still combined and executed a successful landing. To me, this simply emphasized the fine training and techniques laid down for amphibious landings by the Marines.692

Although the 1st Provisional Brigade and the 1st MarDiv had never actually trained or worked together, they still came together and successfully executed a landing. To me, this just highlighted the excellent training and techniques established for amphibious landings by the Marines.692

692 CheVron, pp. 4–5.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ CheVron, pp. 4–5.

Organized as a unit less than four months, the brigade left behind it a reputation for mobility, effectiveness, and rapid deployment in the face of national emergency. Although Marine air and ground forces had operated together since 1919 in Haiti, formation of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade “marked the first time that the air and ground elements, task organized under a single commander, had engaged in combat.”693

Organized as a unit for less than four months, the brigade left behind a reputation for being mobile, effective, and capable of rapid deployment in times of national emergency. Even though Marine air and ground forces had worked together since 1919 in Haiti, the formation of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade “marked the first time that the air and ground elements, organized under a single commander, had engaged in combat.”693

693 Ibid. Even though Marine air and ground forces had on occasion operated jointly ever since the 1920s, air support in the early days was considered a subsidiary rather than integral part of the team. The doctrine of Marine close air support was formulated in WW II but not fully employed before the end of hostilities.

693 Ibid. Although Marine air and ground forces had occasionally worked together since the 1920s, air support in the early days was seen as a secondary rather than essential part of the team. The doctrine of Marine close air support was developed during WWII but wasn't fully utilized until after the conflict ended.

In the brilliant Inchon landing of 15 September 1950, Major General Oliver P. Smith’s 1st Division Marines led the X Corps attack478 in the first major counterstroke by United Nations forces on Communist-held territory. This maneuver was closely timed against enormous odds of personnel, logistics, and hydrography (tidal fluctuations of 31 feet) which made 15 September the only suitable assault date until mid-October. When outlined in earlier planning sessions by General MacArthur, the mammoth difficulties of the operation had been so unsettling that the designated Attack Force Commander for the landing, Rear Admiral James H. Doyle, expressed the view that “the best I can say is that Inchon is not impossible.”694

In the successful Inchon landing on September 15, 1950, Major General Oliver P. Smith's 1st Division Marines led the X Corps attack478 in the first major counteroffensive by United Nations forces against Communist-held territory. This operation was meticulously timed despite facing huge challenges related to personnel, logistics, and hydrography (with tidal variations of 31 feet), which made September 15 the only viable assault date until mid-October. During earlier planning sessions, General MacArthur outlined the significant difficulties of the operation, which were so daunting that the appointed Attack Force Commander for the landing, Rear Admiral James H. Doyle, remarked that “the best I can say is that Inchon is not impossible.”694

694 Quoted in USMC Ops Korea, v. II, p. 46. Admiral Doyle was Commander of Amphibious Forces for the Pacific Fleet.

694 Quoted in USMC Ops Korea, v. II, p. 46. Admiral Doyle was the Commander of Amphibious Forces for the Pacific Fleet.

Despite all the difficulties, the landing at Inchon and recapture of Seoul, the South Korean Capital, and its adjacent Kimpo airfield by the Marines was a stunning tactical blow by the UNC that broke the backbone of the North Korean People’s Army 1950 offensive. The 1st Marine Division, in its successfully executed amphibious landing, had offered UNC forces an opportunity to defeat the enemy decisively before a Siberian-like Korean winter set in. Accomplished under the most adverse weather and geographic conditions, the assault proved anew the decisive power of amphibious forces employed at a critical time and place. This capability and readiness of the Marine Corps had totally reversed the military situation, and a battered enemy was on the run. The subsequent routing of the NKPA divisions in the Inchon-Seoul campaign by X Corps and the Eighth U.S. Army forces would have led to an early UN victory had not the Chinese Communists intervened to support their Korean counterparts. The operation had validated Far East Commander General MacArthur’s early premise that:

Despite all the challenges, the landing at Inchon and the recapture of Seoul, the South Korean capital, along with the nearby Kimpo airfield by the Marines was a remarkable tactical victory for the United Nations Command that shattered the momentum of the North Korean People’s Army’s offensive in 1950. The 1st Marine Division, through its successful amphibious landing, provided UNC forces with the chance to decisively defeat the enemy before the harsh winter hit Korea. Carried out under extremely difficult weather and geographic conditions, the assault demonstrated once again the powerful impact of amphibious forces used at a crucial time and place. This capability and readiness of the Marine Corps completely turned around the military situation, and a battered enemy was in retreat. The subsequent defeat of the NKPA divisions during the Inchon-Seoul campaign by X Corps and the Eighth U.S. Army would have likely resulted in an early UN victory if the Chinese Communists hadn’t stepped in to support their Korean allies. The operation confirmed Far East Commander General MacArthur’s initial belief that:

... air and naval action alone could not be decisive, and that nothing short of the intervention of U.S. ground forces could give any assurance of stopping the Communists and of later regaining the lost ground.695

... air and naval action by themselves couldn't be enough, and that only the involvement of U.S. ground forces would guarantee stopping the Communists and reclaiming the lost territory.695

695 Ibid., p. 3.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 3.

The Inchon operation, moreover, had been planned in record time—approximately 20 days. This was one of the shortest periods ever allotted to a major amphibious assault, involving the planning, assembly of shipping, and mounting out of a combined force of 29,000 Marines and support personnel.

The Inchon operation was also planned in record time—about 20 days. This was one of the shortest periods ever allowed for a major amphibious assault, which included planning, assembling shipping, and deploying a combined force of 29,000 Marines and support staff.

479

479

With the Inchon-Seoul operation ended, the 1st Marine Division (including the 7th Marines which had reached Inchon in time for the liberation of Seoul) reembarked on 12 October for deployment to the east coast of Korea. A new military operation was envisioned north of the 38th Parallel against Pyongyang, the North Korean Capital. As part of the drive, X Corps was to make an amphibious envelopment on the east coast, in the area of the enemy-held port of Wonsan. From here X Corps would advance westward toward Pyongyang, to link up with Eighth Army troops and trap NKPA forces withdrawing from the south.

With the Inchon-Seoul operation finished, the 1st Marine Division (which included the 7th Marines that had arrived in Inchon just in time for the liberation of Seoul) reboarded on October 12 for deployment to the east coast of Korea. A new military operation was planned north of the 38th Parallel targeting Pyongyang, the capital of North Korea. As part of this campaign, X Corps was set to conduct an amphibious maneuver on the east coast, near the enemy-controlled port of Wonsan. From there, X Corps would move westward towards Pyongyang to connect with Eighth Army troops and encircle the NKPA forces retreating from the south.

While the Marines were en route to the objective, word was received that ROK troops had overrun Wonsan and were pushing north. The revised X Corps plan of operation called for a three-pronged attack towards the Yalu. The Marine division would advance on the left, the U.S. Army 7th Division in the center, and 1st ROK Division on the right flank. This drive to the north and subsequent action at the Chosin Reservoir would rank as one of the most rigorous campaigns in the entire history of the Marine Corps.

While the Marines were on their way to the target, they got word that ROK troops had taken Wonsan and were moving north. The updated X Corps operation plan called for a three-pronged attack toward the Yalu. The Marine division would push on the left, the U.S. Army 7th Division in the center, and the 1st ROK Division on the right flank. This advance north and the following actions at the Chosin Reservoir would be remembered as one of the toughest campaigns in the entire history of the Marine Corps.

Fighting as part of EUSAK, by this time fanned out throughout North Korea, the 1st Marine Division did not meet the expected NKPA resistance. Instead, large-scale Chinese Communist Forces had entered the war. As X Corps swept north toward the Yalu River in November 1950, the Marines became the first United States troops to defeat the Chinese Communists in battle. At Sudong, after four days of savage fighting, the Marine RCT-7 so badly crippled major elements of the 124th CCF Division that it was never again committed as an organic unit.

Fighting as part of EUSAK, by this time spread across North Korea, the 1st Marine Division did not encounter the anticipated NKPA resistance. Instead, large-scale Chinese Communist Forces had entered the war. As X Corps moved north toward the Yalu River in November 1950, the Marines became the first U.S. troops to defeat the Chinese Communists in battle. At Sudong, after four days of intense fighting, the Marine RCT-7 severely crippled significant parts of the 124th CCF Division so badly that it was never used again as a complete unit.

When the Chinese forces struck in full force at the Chosin Reservoir, X Corps units were forced back. Elements of a nine-division assault force, the CCF 9th Army Group, which had been sent into Korea with the specific mission of annihilating the 1st Marine Division, began to attack. On 27 November, the Chinese directed a massive frontal assault against 5th and 7th Marines positions at Yudam-ni, west of the reservoir. Another CCF division, moving up from the south, cut the MSR held by the 1st Marines so that the division at Yudam-ni, west of the reservoir, was completely encircled by Communist forces. Many experts considered the 1st Marine Division as lost. Others thought the only way to save it was to airlift it out, leaving its equipment behind. Instead, the Marines seized the480 initiative at Yudam-ni and cut a path through CCF units blocking a route to Hagaru. The division battled its way out in 20-degree-below-zero weather 78 miles over icy, winding mountain roads from the reservoir to the Hamhung-Hungnam area where, on 15 December, it redeployed to South Korea.

When Chinese forces launched a full-scale attack at the Chosin Reservoir, X Corps units were pushed back. Elements of a nine-division assault force, the CCF 9th Army Group, which had been sent into Korea specifically to eliminate the 1st Marine Division, began their offensive. On November 27, the Chinese executed a massive frontal assault against the positions of the 5th and 7th Marines at Yudam-ni, located west of the reservoir. Another CCF division, advancing from the south, cut the main supply route held by the 1st Marines, completely encircling the division at Yudam-ni with Communist forces. Many experts believed the 1st Marine Division was doomed. Others thought it could only be saved by airlifting it out, leaving its equipment behind. Instead, the Marines took the initiative at Yudam-ni and carved out a path through the CCF units blocking their route to Hagaru. The division fought its way out in -20-degree weather, covering 78 miles over icy, winding mountain roads from the reservoir to the Hamhung-Hungnam area, where it redeployed to South Korea on December 15.

Integrated ground and air action enabled the 10,000 Marines and attached 4,000 Army-Royal Marine troops to break out of the entrapment and move south. During 13 tortuous days the Marines had withstood hostile strength representing elements of six to eight CCF divisions. The major result, from the military view, was that the Marine division properly evacuated its dead and wounded, brought out all operable equipment, and completed the retrograde movement with tactical integrity.

Integrated ground and air operations allowed the 10,000 Marines and 4,000 Army-Royal Marine troops attached to them to break free from their entrapment and move south. Over 13 grueling days, the Marines endured hostile forces from six to eight CCF divisions. The key outcome from a military perspective was that the Marine division successfully evacuated its dead and wounded, retrieved all usable equipment, and executed the withdrawal with tactical integrity.

Not only had the Chinese (with a total of 60,000 men in assault or reserve) failed to accomplish their mission, destruction of the division, but the Marine defenders had dealt a savage blow to the enemy in return. POW debriefings later revealed that assault units of the CCF 9th Army Group had been rendered so militarily ineffective that nearly three months were required for its replacement, re-equipment, and reorganization.

Not only did the Chinese (with a total of 60,000 troops in attack or reserve) fail to achieve their goal of destroying the division, but the Marine defenders also dealt a heavy blow to the enemy in return. POW debriefings later showed that the assault units of the CCF 9th Army Group had become so ineffective that it took almost three months to replace, re-equip, and reorganize them.

Early in 1951, the 1st Marine Division was reassigned to IX Corps for Operation KILLER, a limited offensive ordered by the EUSAK Commander, General Matthew B. Ridgway. In Operation RIPPER, in March, the division led another IX Corps advance as it drove toward the 38th Parallel on the east-central front. When the Chinese struck back with their spring offensive on 22 April, the Marines were transferred to operational control of X Corps and counterattacked to restore the UNC defensive position in the far eastern sector. During May and June, the 1st Marine Division continued to punish the enemy in the Punchbowl area of eastern Korea, driving the CCF back to Yanggu and the Soyang River corridor.

Early in 1951, the 1st Marine Division was assigned to IX Corps for Operation Killer, a limited offensive ordered by the EUSAK Commander, General Matthew B. Ridgway. In Operation RIPPER, in March, the division led another IX Corps advance as it pushed toward the 38th Parallel on the east-central front. When the Chinese launched their spring offensive on April 22, the Marines were moved under the operational control of X Corps and counterattacked to regain the UNC defensive position in the far eastern sector. During May and June, the 1st Marine Division continued to hit the enemy in the Punchbowl area of eastern Korea, pushing the CCF back to Yanggu and the Soyang River corridor.

Activity all along the UNC front came to an uncertain halt in July 1951 when Allied and Communist negotiators met at Kaesong for truce talks initiated by the enemy. In August the MLR flared into action again, and the Marine Division was engaged in new counterthrusts in the Punchbowl area. Fighting during the next three weeks involved the division in some of its hardest offensive operations in Korea. It also developed that this would be the last offensive for the Marines. In November 1951, as a result of the truce talks and possibility481 of ending hostilities, General Ridgway, now UNC Commander, ordered the Eighth Army to cease offensive operations and begin an active defense of the front.

Activity along the UNC front came to an uncertain halt in July 1951 when Allied and Communist negotiators met at Kaesong for truce talks initiated by the enemy. In August, the MLR flared up again, and the Marine Division was involved in new counteroffensive actions in the Punchbowl area. Fighting over the next three weeks saw the division engaged in some of its toughest offensive operations in Korea. It also became clear that this would be the last offensive for the Marines. In November 1951, due to the truce talks and the possibility of ending hostilities, General Ridgway, now the UNC Commander, ordered the Eighth Army to stop offensive operations and start an active defense of the front.

The war of fire and movement had turned into one of positional warfare, a defensive posture by UN forces that would continue for the last 21 months of the three-year conflict. Throughout the winter of 1951–1952, the Marines conducted vigorous patrol activities in their sector of X Corps. Although it was a lackluster period of trench warfare for the average infantryman, major tactical innovations were being pioneered by the division with its use of the transport helicopter for logistical and resupply missions.

The war of fire and movement had shifted to a style of positional warfare, with UN forces taking a defensive stance that would last for the final 21 months of the three-year conflict. Throughout the winter of 1951–1952, the Marines carried out intense patrol activities in their area of X Corps. While it was a dull time of trench warfare for the average soldier, the division was making significant tactical advancements by utilizing transport helicopters for logistics and resupply missions.

In March 1952, the 1st Marine Division was transferred from the eastern X Corps line 140 miles west to strengthen the far end of the Eighth Army MLR in the I Corps sector. The division was relocated in the path of the enemy’s invasion route to Seoul, where weak defenses in the Kimpo coastal area had threatened the security of the UNC front. Here the division’s four infantry regiments (including the 1st Korean Marine Corps RCT) held nearly 35 miles of front line in the critical Panmunjom-Munsan area. The demilitarized route for the United Nations negotiators led through the Marine lines. It was the most active sector of the UN front for the next 16 months. This key position guarded the best routes of advance from North Korea to Seoul and indicated the high regard in which General James A. Van Fleet, EUSAK commander, held the Marines.

In March 1952, the 1st Marine Division was moved from the eastern X Corps line, 140 miles west, to strengthen the far end of the Eighth Army Main Line of Resistance (MLR) in the I Corps sector. The division was positioned along the enemy's route to invade Seoul, where weak defenses in the Kimpo coastal area were threatening the security of the UNC front. Here, the division's four infantry regiments (including the 1st Korean Marine Corps RCT) held nearly 35 miles of the frontline in the critical Panmunjom-Munsan area. The demilitarized route for the United Nations negotiators ran through the Marine lines. This became the busiest sector of the UN front for the next 16 months. This strategic position protected the prime routes of advance from North Korea to Seoul and reflected the high regard that General James A. Van Fleet, EUSAK commander, had for the Marines.

West Korean terrain was rugged, hilly, and friendly to the CCF who had the advantage of high ground positions as well as considerably more manpower. Although cast in an unaccustomed defensive warfare role, rather than a true attack mission, the Marines repelled an almost continuous series of enemy probes. While truce talks went on at nearby Panmunjom, fighting as furious as at any time earlier in the war flared up intermittently as the CCF tried to gain additional terrain for bargaining purposes. During 1952–1953, the Marine division beat off determined CCF limited objective attacks on Bunker Hill, the Hook, Vegas, and Boulder City outposts up until—literally—the final day of the war, 27 July 1953.

West Korean terrain was rugged, hilly, and advantageous for the CCF, who had the benefit of high ground positions and significantly more manpower. Even though they were placed in an unfamiliar defensive role rather than a true offensive mission, the Marines successfully repelled an almost continuous series of enemy probes. While peace talks took place at nearby Panmunjom, intense fighting erupted intermittently, as fierce as at any earlier point in the war, with the CCF trying to gain more ground for negotiation leverage. During 1952–1953, the Marine division fought off determined CCF attacks on Bunker Hill, the Hook, Vegas, and Boulder City outposts right up until—literally—the final day of the war, July 27, 1953.

In reviewing Marine actions during this period, the Secretary of the Navy commented:

In reviewing Marine activities during this time, the Secretary of the Navy stated:

Marines in Korea have established an enviable record of success in carrying out their assigned missions. The First Marine Division began its third482 year in Korea holding an active sector of the United Nations front guarding the enemy’s invasion route to Seoul. It was frequently subjected to fanatical Chinese attacks supported by intensive artillery fire. Some of the heaviest fighting during the year took place along the front held by this Division. Enemy attacks were well coordinated and numerically strong. Continued patrol activity to keep the enemy off balance frequently resulted in bitter hand-to-hand fighting with numerous casualties on both sides.696

Marines in Korea have built an impressive track record of success in completing their missions. The First Marine Division entered its third year in Korea overseeing an active section of the United Nations front, protecting the route the enemy was using to invade Seoul. They often faced intense Chinese assaults backed by heavy artillery fire. Some of the fiercest battles of the year occurred along the front held by this Division. Enemy attacks were well coordinated and heavily numbered. Ongoing patrols to keep the enemy unsettled frequently led to fierce hand-to-hand combat, resulting in many casualties on both sides.696

696 Semianl Rpt of SecNav (1 Jan-30 Jun) 1953, p. 185.

696 Semianl Rpt of SecNav (Jan 1 - Jun 30) 1953, p. 185.

This type of prolonged static warfare gave little real satisfaction to Marines accustomed to waging a war of movement and a more tangible “mission accomplished.” The year of positional warfare in western Korea was costly, too. Total U.S. casualties in the Korean War numbered approximately 137,000 men killed, missing, or wounded. The Marine Corps toll was 30,544. Of this number, 4,262 were KIA, an additional 244 were listed as non-battle deaths, and 26,038 were wounded. During this last part of the war, Marine casualties (both ground and air) totaled 13,087, plus an additional 2,529 for the attached 1st KMC/RCT. Astonishingly, 1,586 Marines or 39.6 percent697 of the infantry Marines killed in the entire war were victims of the “static,” outpost warfare in the west. Another 11,244 were listed WIA during this period—representing 43.9 percent of the total number of ground Marines wounded during the three years of conflict.

This kind of prolonged static warfare didn't satisfy Marines who were used to a more dynamic approach and a clear sense of “mission accomplished.” The year of positional warfare in western Korea was expensive, too. Overall, U.S. casualties in the Korean War were around 137,000 men killed, missing, or wounded. The Marine Corps suffered 30,544 losses. Of these, 4,262 were killed in action (KIA), an additional 244 were classified as non-battle deaths, and 26,038 were wounded. During this final phase of the war, Marine casualties (including both ground and air) reached 13,087, along with another 2,529 from the attached 1st KMC/RCT. Shockingly, 1,586 Marines, or 39.6 percent—697—of the infantry Marines killed in the entire war were casualties of the “static” outpost warfare in the west. Another 11,244 were listed as wounded in action (WIA) during this time, making up 43.9 percent of the total number of ground Marines wounded during the three years of conflict.

697 See Appendix E. Percentages represent Marine ground only; air casualties have been deducted. Of 1st MAW casualties of 432 (258 KIA, 174 WIA) during the entire war, 103 were KIA and 41 WIA during the April 1952-July 1953 period cited above.

697 See Appendix E. Percentages represent only Marine ground casualties; air casualties have been excluded. Out of the 1st MAW total casualties of 432 (258 KIA, 174 WIA) during the entire war, 103 were KIA and 41 WIA during the period from April 1952 to July 1953 mentioned above.

* * * * *

Conditions varied widely during the 1950–1952 and 1952–1953 periods of the war. The enemy’s improved capability in artillery during the latter period of positional warfare largely accounts for the high casualty rate at this time. It has been noted that:

Conditions varied greatly during the 1950–1952 and 1952–1953 periods of the war. The enemy's enhanced artillery capabilities during the later stage of positional warfare significantly contributed to the high casualty rate during this time. It has been noted that:

Prior to February 1952, with a warfare of mobility prevailing, the enemy was inferior in artillery, the causative agent of most personnel losses. Afterwards, during the outpost warfare of western Korea, the front remained more or less static, and the Chinese Reds had as much artillery support as the Marines.698

Before February 1952, when mobile warfare was the norm, the enemy had less artillery, which was responsible for most troop casualties. After that, in the outpost warfare in western Korea, the front lines became relatively stable, and the Chinese Reds had as much artillery support as the Marines.698

698 Lynn Montross, “Development of Our Body Armor,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 6 (Jun 55), p. 16.

698 Lynn Montross, “Development of Our Body Armor,” Marine Corps Gazette, vol. 39, no. 6 (Jun 55), p. 16.

It might be valid to question the use of Marine Corps specialists in amphibious warfare in an Army-type conventional land war. The protracted land campaign that characterized the latter stages of the483 Korean conflict actually was waged for the majority of the war period—from September 1951 to July 1953, or nearly two years. In terms of economy of manpower it could be considered an inefficient, though not ineffective use of Marines. On the other hand, the history of warfare down through the ages makes it repeatedly clear that a nation fights the pitched battle against its opponent with the arsenal of weapons and personnel at hand.

It might be reasonable to question the role of Marine Corps specialists in amphibious warfare during a conventional land war more typical of the Army. The prolonged land campaign that marked the later stages of the483 Korean conflict actually took place for most of the war—from September 1951 to July 1953, or nearly two years. In terms of manpower efficiency, it could be seen as an inefficient, though not ineffective, use of Marines. However, the history of warfare throughout the ages makes it clear that a nation engages in a direct battle against its opponent with the weapons and personnel available.

As an Eighth U.S. Army component (attached variously to the X, IX, and I Corps), the 1st Marine Division (one of nearly 20 divisions representing U.S. Army, British Commonwealth, and ROK troops) performed its assigned mission—to repulse and punish the enemy. It contributed heavily to maintaining the integrity of the EUSAK front and was considered one of the two crack EUSAK divisions—the other being the Marines’ neighbor to the right, the British Commonwealth Division. With the attached KMCs, the 1st Marine Division, moreover, was also the biggest and strongest division in EUSAK.

As part of the Eighth U.S. Army (attached at different times to the X, IX, and I Corps), the 1st Marine Division (one of nearly 20 divisions representing U.S. Army, British Commonwealth, and ROK forces) carried out its mission—to fend off and retaliate against the enemy. It played a crucial role in maintaining the strength of the EUSAK front and was regarded as one of the two elite EUSAK divisions—the other being the Marines’ neighbor to the right, the British Commonwealth Division. Additionally, with the attached KMCs, the 1st Marine Division was also the largest and strongest division in EUSAK.

Most importantly, fast deployment of the Marine division had made possible the brilliant tactical maneuver at Inchon. Many military experts, following World War II, had envisioned future conflicts only in terms of atomic warfare and massive strategic air assaults. Even the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff “had predicted publicly, hardly six months before, that the world would never again see a large-scale amphibious landing.”699 In contradiction to new atomic-age tactics, however, the United Nations commander in September 1950 had turned the tide of the battle by his use of a conventional maneuver—envelopment by amphibious assault. The performance of the Marine Corps was thus responsible, in part, for changing post-Korean War military doctrine from total reliance on new tactics and weaponry to a more balanced concept that combined both sophisticated innovations and viable, established procedures.

Most importantly, the rapid deployment of the Marine division made the brilliant tactical maneuver at Inchon possible. Many military experts, after World War II, envisioned future conflicts primarily as atomic warfare and massive strategic air strikes. Even the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff had publicly predicted, just six months earlier, that the world would never see a large-scale amphibious landing again. However, contrary to the new atomic-age tactics, the United Nations commander in September 1950 turned the tide of the battle by using a conventional strategy—envelopment through amphibious assault. The performance of the Marine Corps was partly responsible for shifting post-Korean War military doctrine from total reliance on new tactics and weaponry to a more balanced approach that combined both advanced innovations and established, effective procedures.

699 Statement by Gen Omar N. Bradley, USA, as quoted by Gen G. C. Thomas, Col R. D. Heinl, Jr. and RAdm A. A. Ageton, The Marine Officer’s Guide (Annapolis: United States Naval Institute, 1956), p. 130.

699 Statement by Gen Omar N. Bradley, USA, as quoted by Gen G. C. Thomas, Col R. D. Heinl, Jr. and RAdm A. A. Ageton, The Marine Officer’s Guide (Annapolis: United States Naval Institute, 1956), p. 130.

Although unemployed in its primary amphibious role after late 1950, the 1st Marine Division had originally been positioned on the eastern front because of this capability. It was the UN commander’s desire to have EUSAK’s only amphibious trained and equipped division484 near the coast in the event that an amphibious maneuver was required for offensive or defensive purposes. Again, in the division’s 1952 move to the western coastal front in the Kimpo area, this fighting capability was a major consideration.

Although it was no longer active in its main amphibious role after late 1950, the 1st Marine Division had initially been stationed on the eastern front because of this ability. The UN commander wanted to keep EUSAK’s only amphibious-trained and equipped division484 close to the coast in case an amphibious operation was needed for attack or defense. Similarly, when the division moved to the western coastal front in the Kimpo area in 1952, this fighting capability was a key factor.

To a large extent, U.S. forces in Korea fought the early part of the Korean War with weapons from the preceding war—only five years removed. Three tactical innovations employed by the Marine Corps during the Korean War were highly successful and largely adopted by the other services. These were the thermal boot, individual body armor, and the helicopter. All were first combat tested in 1951.

To a large extent, U.S. forces in Korea fought the early part of the Korean War with weapons from the previous war—just five years earlier. Three tactical innovations used by the Marine Corps during the Korean War were very successful and were mostly adopted by the other branches. These were the thermal boot, individual body armor, and the helicopter. All were first tested in combat in 1951.

Frostbite casualties during the first winter in Korea resulting from inadequate footwear made it necessary to provide combat troops with specially insulated footgear. The new thermal boot virtually eliminated frostbite for both Marine infantrymen and aviators. Armored utility jackets had been developed toward the end of World War II but were not actually battle tested. The Marine Corps had renewed the experimentation in 1947. First combat use of the plastic, light-weight body armor was made in July 1951 by Marines while fighting in the Punchbowl and Inje areas of X Corps. Improvements were made to the prototypes and by the following summer the Marine Corps, following a request made by the Army Quartermaster General, furnished some 4,000 vests to frontline Army troops. By 1953 the 1st Marine Division had received its authorized quota of 24,000 vests and new lower torso body armor had also been put into production.

Frostbite injuries during the first winter in Korea due to inadequate footwear made it essential to equip combat troops with specially insulated boots. The new thermal boots nearly eliminated frostbite for both Marine infantry and aviators. Armored utility jackets were developed by the end of World War II but hadn't been tested in battle. The Marine Corps began experimenting with them again in 1947. The first combat use of lightweight plastic body armor occurred in July 1951 by Marines fighting in the Punchbowl and Inje areas of X Corps. Improvements were made to the prototypes, and by the following summer, the Marine Corps, responding to a request from the Army Quartermaster General, provided around 4,000 vests to frontline Army troops. By 1953, the 1st Marine Division had received its authorized supply of 24,000 vests, and new lower torso body armor had also gone into production.

Medical experts reported that the effectiveness of enemy low-velocity missile weapons striking a man wearing body armor was reduced from 30–80 percent. Chest and abdominal wounds decreased from 90–95 percent after issuance of the armored vests. Overall battle casualties were estimated to have been cut by 30 percent. By the time of the cease-fire, the protection offered by the Marine body armor had been extended to some 93,000 Marine and Army wearers. Hardly anywhere could the U.S. taxpayer or fighting man have found a better buy for the money: mass production had reduced the per unit cost of the Marine armored vest to just $37.50.

Medical experts reported that the effectiveness of enemy low-velocity missile weapons hitting someone wearing body armor dropped to between 30–80 percent. Chest and abdominal injuries decreased from 90–95 percent after the armored vests were issued. Overall battle casualties were estimated to have been reduced by 30 percent. By the time the cease-fire was declared, the protection provided by the Marine body armor had been extended to around 93,000 Marine and Army personnel. It’s hard to find a better deal for U.S. taxpayers or service members: mass production brought the cost of each Marine armored vest down to just $37.50.

485

485

Air700

700 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 6, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8, No. 4, Chap. 10; USMC Board Rpts, vs. 1-11; Generals’ Summary; AnlRpt SecNav 1952–1953; USMC Ops Korea vs. I-IV, passim; Monograph, A Brief History of Marine Corps Aviation, (HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, 1960); Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Sherrod, Marine Aviation; LtCol C. A. Phillips and Maj H. D. Kuokka, “1st MAW in Korea, Part I, Pusan to the Reservoir: The Acid Test,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 41, no. 5 (May 57), pp. 22–27; LtCol C. A. Phillips and Maj H. D. Kuokka, “1st MAW in Korea, Part II, January 1951 to the Armistice,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 41, no. 6 (Jun 57), pp. 22–26; Brochure, Change of Command Ceremonies, 11 Jul 56, First Marine Aircraft Wing, FMF, 1st MAW folder, HRB ref. file.

700 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 6, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8, No. 4, Chap. 10; USMC Board Rpts, vs. 1-11; Generals’ Summary; AnlRpt SecNav 1952–1953; USMC Ops Korea vs. I-IV, passim; Monograph, A Brief History of Marine Corps Aviation, (HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, 1960); Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea; Sherrod, Marine Aviation; LtCol C. A. Phillips and Maj H. D. Kuokka, “1st MAW in Korea, Part I, Pusan to the Reservoir: The Acid Test,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 41, no. 5 (May 57), pp. 22–27; LtCol C. A. Phillips and Maj H. D. Kuokka, “1st MAW in Korea, Part II, January 1951 to the Armistice,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 41, no. 6 (Jun 57), pp. 22–26; Brochure, Change of Command Ceremonies, 11 Jul 56, First Marine Aircraft Wing, FMF, 1st MAW folder, HRB ref. file.

On 3 August 1950, eight VMF-214 Corsairs led by squadron executive officer, Major Robert P. Keller, catapulted from the deck of the USS Sicily to launch the first Marine air strikes in the Korean action. From then until 27 July 1953, units of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing flew 127,496 combat sorties in the Korean War, considerably in excess of the 80,000-odd sorties for all Marine aviation during World War II. Of this Korean number nearly a third, more than 39,500, represented the Marine Corps close air support specialty, even though 1st MAW pilots were heavily engaged in other assignments from Fifth Air Force. These included interdiction, general support, air defense patrols, air rescue operations, photo and armed reconnaissance, and related tasks to insure Allied air superiority.

On August 3, 1950, eight VMF-214 Corsairs, led by squadron executive officer Major Robert P. Keller, launched from the deck of the USS Sicily to carry out the first Marine air strikes in the Korean conflict. From that point until July 27, 1953, units of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing completed 127,496 combat missions during the Korean War, significantly surpassing the approximately 80,000 missions for all Marine aviation during World War II. Of this total in Korea, nearly a third, over 39,500, were for close air support, despite the fact that 1st MAW pilots were also heavily involved in other roles under Fifth Air Force. These roles included interdiction, general support, air defense patrols, air rescue operations, photo and armed reconnaissance, and various tasks to ensure Allied air superiority.

With the outbreak of Korean hostilities, Stateside Marine air units were alerted for combat duty by 5 July. At Major General Field Harris’ 1st MAW headquarters, El Toro, MAG-33 elements were quickly readied for deployment to Japanese bases and thence to Korea. Commanded by Brigadier General Thomas J. Cushman, MAG-33 comprised Headquarters and Service Squadron 33, fighter squadrons VMF-214 and -323, an echelon of nightfighters from VMF(N)-513, two radar units (Marine Ground Control Intercept Squadron 1 and Marine Tactical Air Control Squadron 2), plus the observation squadron, VMO-6. Forward elements were quickly on their way, arriving in Japan on 19 July, while the rear echelon reached the Korean Theater on 31 July. Twenty R5Ds from Marine Transport Squadrons 152 and 352 were already providing logistical support for Pacific lift operations.

With the outbreak of the Korean War, Marine air units on the mainland were put on alert for combat duty by July 5. At Major General Field Harris’ 1st MAW headquarters in El Toro, elements of MAG-33 were quickly prepared for deployment to bases in Japan and then to Korea. Led by Brigadier General Thomas J. Cushman, MAG-33 included Headquarters and Service Squadron 33, fighter squadrons VMF-214 and -323, a team of night fighters from VMF(N)-513, two radar units (Marine Ground Control Intercept Squadron 1 and Marine Tactical Air Control Squadron 2), along with the observation squadron, VMO-6. The forward units were rapidly on their way, arriving in Japan on July 19, while the rear echelon reached the Korean Theater by July 31. Twenty R5Ds from Marine Transport Squadrons 152 and 352 were already providing logistical support for operations in the Pacific.

After practicing some last minute carrier landing approaches, the fighter pilots got into combat almost at once. Following -214 into486 the war, VMF-323 started operations on 6 August, flying from USS Badoeng Strait in support of the Pusan ground defenders. When the brigade mounted out on 7 August on its drive to Chinju, the two MAG-33 carrier squadrons were there with their 5-inch HVARs, napalm, 100- to 500-pound bombs, and 20mm cannon. VMF(N)-513 began its regularly-scheduled night tours over the Korean perimeter that same date, lashing at enemy supply and transportation centers in the Sachon-Chinju area of southern Korea. VMO-6 had already started evacuating casualties from the Pusan area three days earlier.

After practicing some last-minute carrier landing approaches, the fighter pilots got into combat almost immediately. Following -214 into486 the war, VMF-323 started operations on August 6, flying from USS Badoeng Strait in support of the Pusan ground defenders. When the brigade moved out on August 7 for its drive to Chinju, the two MAG-33 carrier squadrons were there with their 5-inch HVARs, napalm, 100- to 500-pound bombs, and 20mm cannons. VMF(N)-513 began its regularly scheduled night missions over the Korean perimeter that same day, targeting enemy supply and transportation centers in the Sachon-Chinju area of southern Korea. VMO-6 had already started evacuating casualties from the Pusan area three days earlier.

Many Army ground commanders witnessed the Marine system of close air support for the first time during the Pusan fighting. After the second Naktong battle, when air strikes had silenced enemy guns and 300 troops near Obong-ni, the commander of the 23rd Regiment to the right of the brigade wrote General Ridgway in Washington:

Many Army ground commanders saw the Marine close air support system for the first time during the Pusan fighting. After the second Naktong battle, when air strikes had taken out enemy guns and 300 troops near Obong-ni, the commander of the 23rd Regiment, positioned to the right of the brigade, wrote to General Ridgway in Washington:

Infantry and artillery is a good team, but only by adding adequate and efficient air support can we succeed without devastating losses ... The Marines on our left were a sight to behold. Not only was their equipment superior or equal to ours, but they had squadrons of air in direct support. They used it like artillery. It was, ‘Hey, Joe, this is Smitty, knock the left of that ridge in from Item Company.’ They had it day and night.701

Infantry and artillery make a solid team, but we can only succeed without heavy losses by adding proper and effective air support... The Marines on our left were impressive. Not only was their gear better or on par with ours, but they also had squadrons of air support ready to back them up. They treated it like artillery. It was, 'Hey, Joe, this is Smitty, take out the left side of that ridge from Item Company.' They had it day and night.701

701 Quoted in Andrew Geer, The New Breed—The Story of the U.S. Marines in Korea (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1952), pp. 94–95, quoted with permission of the publisher.

701 Quoted in Andrew Geer, The New Breed—The Story of the U.S. Marines in Korea (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1952), pp. 94–95, quoted with permission of the publisher.

And while Marine, Army, and Navy staffs were completing plans for the forthcoming Inchon assault, MAG-33’s little aerial Photo Unit (part of Headquarters Squadron) took a series of reconnaissance photographs of the landing beaches in preparation for the closely coordinated maneuver.

And while the Marine, Army, and Navy teams were finalizing plans for the upcoming Inchon assault, MAG-33’s small aerial Photo Unit (part of the Headquarters Squadron) took a series of surveillance photos of the landing beaches in preparation for the closely coordinated operation.

During Inchon-Seoul operations, MAG-33 was joined by three MAG-12 fighter squadrons: VMF-212, VMF-312, and VMF(N)-542. After the capture of Kimpo airfield, 212’s “Devilcats” and 542’s nightfighters transferred from Itami to Kimpo. Flying out of 2d MAW headquarters, Cherry Point, N.C., on 18 August, the Devilcats had climaxed a hurried dash halfway around the world to get into action. The squadron flew its first combat mission from Kimpo a month after its departure from the East Coast. While the MAG-12 land-based squadrons and the carrier pilots functioned487 as the division’s flying artillery, MGCIS-1 set up a radar warning system and MTACS-2 established a Tactical Air Direction Center to direct all aircraft in the X Corps zone of action.

During the Inchon-Seoul operations, MAG-33 was joined by three MAG-12 fighter squadrons: VMF-212, VMF-312, and VMF(N)-542. After capturing Kimpo airfield, 212’s “Devilcats” and 542’s night fighters were transferred from Itami to Kimpo. On August 18, the Devilcats flew out from the 2d MAW headquarters at Cherry Point, N.C., completing a rapid journey halfway around the world to get into action. The squadron conducted its first combat mission from Kimpo a month after leaving the East Coast. While the MAG-12 land-based squadrons and the carrier pilots operated as the division’s flying artillery, MGCIS-1 set up a radar warning system and MTACS-2 established a Tactical Air Direction Center to manage all aircraft in the X Corps area of operations.

With the conclusion of the Inchon operation on 8 October, VMF-312 and VMF(N)-542 remained at Kimpo. Other Marine squadrons (VMF-212, VMF(N)-513, VMO-6, HqSq-12, and carrier-based VMF-323) shifted to the Korean east coast in readiness for the Wonsan landing and subsequent deployment north of the Marine infantry regiments. Wing elements began arriving at the port city’s airfield on 13 October. Division Marines, meanwhile, on board ship in the Wonsan harbor while more than 3,000 expertly laid Communist mines were being removed, did not land until 26 October. For the men who fought the vertical war in Korea, it was “one of the rare times in the air-ground association, the 1st MAW had landed ahead of the 1st Marine Division. The aviators didn’t miss putting up a big sign-board “Welcome, 1st Division!702

With the end of the Inchon operation on October 8, VMF-312 and VMF(N)-542 stayed at Kimpo. Other Marine squadrons (VMF-212, VMF(N)-513, VMO-6, HqSq-12, and carrier-based VMF-323) moved to the east coast of Korea to prepare for the Wonsan landing and the following deployment north with the Marine infantry regiments. Wing elements started arriving at the airfield in the port city on October 13. Meanwhile, division Marines, still aboard ship in Wonsan harbor while over 3,000 well-placed Communist mines were being cleared, didn’t land until October 26. For the men who fought in the air-war in Korea, it was “one of the rare times in the air-ground association that the 1st MAW landed before the 1st Marine Division.” The aviators didn’t forget to put up a big sign that read “Welcome, 1st Division!702

702 LtCol C. A. Phillips and Maj H. D. Kuokka, “1st MAW in Korea,” Part I, Marine Corps Gazette, May 1957, p. 45.

702 LtCol C. A. Phillips and Maj H. D. Kuokka, “1st MAW in Korea,” Part I, Marine Corps Gazette, May 1957, p. 45.

As 30 CCF divisions slammed into UNC forces all across the fighting front in late November to change the nature of ground operations (and the future of the war), so did the onset of the first Korean winter test 1st MAW aerial skills and ingenuity. Low hanging ceilings, icing conditions, and three-inch snows on the carrier decks were common operating hazards. For the shore-based pilots, the bad weather often caused changed flight plans as they were forced to land at alternate fields or on Navy carriers. Nonetheless, Marine RD4s flew up to the southern tip of the Chosin Reservoir, at Hagaru, to air-drop ammunition and supplies and evacuate casualties from the entrapment. Logistical support to this tiny frozen makeshift air strip was also provided by Air Force C-47s and C-119s. Later on, during the first step of the grinding movement south, Air Force pilots paradropped a sectionalized steel bridge vitally needed at Koto-ri to replace a destroyed span over a chasm.

As 30 CCF divisions hit UNC forces across the front in late November to change the nature of ground operations (and the war's future), the first Korean winter also tested the 1st MAW's flying skills and creativity. Low cloud cover, icy conditions, and three inches of snow on the carrier decks were common hazards. For the shore-based pilots, the bad weather often forced changes to their flight plans as they had to land at alternate airfields or on Navy carriers. Still, Marine RD4s flew up to the southern tip of the Chosin Reservoir at Hagaru to drop ammunition and supplies and evacuate casualties from the trap. Logistical support for this tiny frozen makeshift airstrip also came from Air Force C-47s and C-119s. Later, during the first phase of the tough movement south, Air Force pilots dropped a segmented steel bridge that was urgently needed at Koto-ri to replace a destroyed span over a chasm.

Beginning with the load-out for Wonsan in early October, the 1st MAW was placed under operational control of the Seoul-based Fifth Air Force.703 Echelons of FAF air command and control initially488 slowed operational orders anywhere from 4 to 36 hours. Simplified interservice communications and command liaison between 1st MAW and FAF helped improve the situation. With a verbal agreement, on 1 December, for CG, 1st MAW to receive full control over X Corps area aircraft, problems eased substantially. To a large degree the close coordination of Marine aviation and ground forces during the Chosin campaign was due to the use of flexible, simplified, and fast battle-tested Marine Corps-Navy CAS techniques and to having increased the number of pilot FACs from one to two per battalion.

Beginning with the deployment for Wonsan in early October, the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing (MAW) was put under the operational control of the Seoul-based Fifth Air Force. Echelons of the Fifth Air Force’s air command and control initially delayed operational orders anywhere from 4 to 36 hours. Improved interservice communications and command liaison between the 1st MAW and the Fifth Air Force helped to enhance the situation. With a verbal agreement on December 1 for the Commanding General of the 1st MAW to have full control over X Corps area aircraft, issues eased significantly. Much of the effective coordination between Marine aviation and ground forces during the Chosin campaign was thanks to the application of flexible, straightforward, and proven Marine Corps-Navy Close Air Support (CAS) techniques, as well as increasing the number of pilot Forward Air Controllers (FACs) from one to two per battalion.

703 Technically, FAF had also been the controlling agency for air support during Pusan operations. Marine aviation units, as a component of an integrated Fleet Marine Force, however, were directed to fly support for 1st ProvMarBrig as their highest priority. Except for the formality of checking in with the FAF Tactical Air Control Center (TACC) at JOC, 1st MAW units operated under the Marine Corps-Navy CAS doctrine. During the Seoul-Inchon campaign, control of air operations came under ComNavFE, since it was an amphibious operation, and the air system followed Marine-Navy doctrine. USMC Board Rpt, v. I, p. IV-B-9, 14.

703 Technically, FAF was also in charge of air support during the Pusan operations. However, Marine aviation units, as part of an integrated Fleet Marine Force, were instructed to prioritize support for the 1st ProvMarBrig. Aside from the formal check-in with the FAF Tactical Air Control Center (TACC) at JOC, 1st MAW units operated according to the Marine Corps-Navy CAS doctrine. During the Seoul-Inchon campaign, control of air operations shifted to ComNavFE, as it was an amphibious operation, and the air system adhered to Marine-Navy doctrine. USMC Board Rpt, v. I, p. IV-B-9, 14.

The Marine movement south from Hagaru was protected by one of the greatest concentrations of aircraft during the entire war. Twenty-four CAS aircraft covered the breakout column, while attack planes assaulted enemy forces in adjacent ridge approaches. Marine planes on station at Yonpo (south of the Hamhung-Hungnam axis) and carrier-based VMF-323 flew some 130 sorties daily. Another 100 attack sorties were flown daily by Navy carrier-based planes, while FAF flew interdiction missions beyond the bombline. Marine Panther jets of VMF-311, operating with the Air Force from the Pusan area, got into the action at Yonpo. It was also at this time that an airborne TADC (tactical air direction center) was first improvised when the radio jeeps moving south with the column had communication failures. For six days, a VMR-152 R5D transport orbited 2,000 to 4,000 feet above the Marine units to control air support between Hagaru and Chinhung-ni as a flying radio nerve center.

The Marines moving south from Hagaru were protected by one of the largest concentrations of aircraft during the entire war. Twenty-four CAS aircraft covered the breakout column, while attack planes targeted enemy forces on nearby ridge approaches. Marine planes stationed at Yonpo (south of the Hamhung-Hungnam route) and carrier-based VMF-323 conducted about 130 sorties each day. Another 100 attack sorties were carried out daily by Navy carrier-based planes, while FAF executed interdiction missions beyond the bombline. Marine Panther jets from VMF-311, working with the Air Force from the Pusan area, joined the action at Yonpo. It was also at this time that an airborne TADC (tactical air direction center) was first set up when the radio jeeps traveling south with the column experienced communication failures. For six days, a VMR-152 R5D transport flew at 2,000 to 4,000 feet above the Marine units to manage air support between Hagaru and Chinhung-ni, acting as a flying radio nerve center.

From late November to early December, as the division battled its way from Chosin to Hamhung, Marine, Navy, and Air Force aircraft evacuated more than 5,000 Marine, Army, and ROK casualties. And during the most critical period, the little OY spotter planes and HO3S-1 helicopters from VMO-6 provided the only physical contact between units separated by enemy action. Marine tactical squadrons in these three early major offensives of the war, from 3 August to 14 December, flew 7,822 sorties, 5,305 of them CAS for the battered UNC ground units.

From late November to early December, as the division fought its way from Chosin to Hamhung, Marine, Navy, and Air Force aircraft evacuated over 5,000 casualties from the Marines, Army, and ROK. During the most critical period, the small OY spotter planes and HO3S-1 helicopters from VMO-6 provided the only physical link between units that had been separated by enemy action. Marine tactical squadrons in these three early major offensives of the war, from August 3 to December 14, completed 7,822 sorties, with 5,305 of them being close air support for the hard-hit UNC ground units.

489

489

From 1951–1953, 1st MAW pilots and planes came under direct control of FAF. They alternated between principal missions of interdiction raids to harass and destroy Communist supply lines north of the battlefront, general support sorties outside the bombline, and CAS flights to support infantry forces threatened by enemy penetration. Typical of FAF focus on massive aerial assaults were the following assignments that Marine flyers participated in:

From 1951 to 1953, 1st MAW pilots and planes were directly controlled by FAF. They took turns on main missions that included interdiction raids to disrupt and destroy Communist supply lines north of the battlefront, general support flights outside the bombline, and CAS missions to assist infantry forces at risk from enemy advances. Typical of FAF's emphasis on large-scale aerial attacks were the following assignments that Marine aviators took part in:

In January 1951 (prior to Operation KILLER), the 1st MAW undertook a series of interdiction raids against the Communist supply net located in the Korean waist between the 38th and 39th Parallels, to disrupt the CCF transport-truck system.

In January 1951 (before Operation Killer), the 1st MAW carried out several targeted raids against the Communist supply network in the area between the 38th and 39th Parallels in Korea, aiming to disrupt the CCF transport-truck system.

On 9 May 1951, 75 1st MAW Corsairs and Panther jets were part of the 300-plane raid staged by FAF against Communist airfields at Sinuiju, on the Korean side of the Yalu.

On May 9, 1951, 75 Corsairs and Panther jets from the 1st MAW took part in a 300-plane raid organized by the FAF against Communist airfields at Sinuiju, located on the Korean side of the Yalu.

Operation STRANGLE, a major Fifth Air Force all-out interdiction effort to cripple the enemy supply life line, was undertaken 20 May. When the Chinese Communist spring offensive broke shortly thereafter, MAG-12 Corsairs and -33 Panther jets delivered maximum support to the MLR regiments, the 1st and 7th Marines. When the truce talks began in Kaesong, in July 1951, 1st MAW planes and the radar searches of MACG-2 stood guard. Batteries of the Marine 1st 90mm AAA Gun Battalion, attached to the wing, were also alerted to keep under surveillance the approaches to key military ports.

Operation STRANGLE, a major effort by the Fifth Air Force to disrupt the enemy's supply lines, was launched on May 20. Shortly after, when the Chinese Communist spring offensive began, MAG-12 Corsairs and -33 Panther jets provided extensive support to the Marine Line of Resistance regiments, the 1st and 7th Marines. When the truce talks started in Kaesong in July 1951, 1st MAW planes and the radar searches by MACG-2 kept watch. Batteries from the Marine 1st 90mm AAA Gun Battalion, which were attached to the wing, were also on standby to monitor the approaches to key military ports.

New tactical developments pioneered by 1st MAW during the Korean War advanced the UNC air effort and added to the 1st MAW reputation for versatility. Several major steps forward were taken toward Marine aviation’s primary goal of providing real operational 24-hour CAS, regardless of foul weather conditions. The new MPQ-14 radar-controlled bombing equipment, developed between 1946 and 1950, was employed by MASRT-1, as a device to control night fighter sorties of a general support nature flown by day attack aircraft. By means of height-finding and directional radars, it enabled a pilot to leave his base, drop a bomb load on target, and return to home field without ever having seen the ground. It offered major practical improvement in blind bombing methods. MPQ was limited, however, in its use in sudden, moving battle situations because of some of its sophisticated, hand-built ABC components. A real tactical breakthrough in night CAS came in April490 1953 when VMF(N)-513 and the VMO-6 spotter planes evolved the new searchlight beam control system which made possible 24-hour coverage for 1st Marine Division ground units.

New tactical developments initiated by the 1st MAW during the Korean War enhanced the UNC air operations and contributed to the 1st MAW's reputation for adaptability. Significant strides were made toward Marine aviation’s primary objective of providing reliable 24-hour close air support (CAS), regardless of poor weather conditions. The new MPQ-14 radar-controlled bombing system, created between 1946 and 1950, was utilized by MASRT-1 as a tool to manage night fighter missions that provided general support, flown by day attack aircraft. With the help of height-finding and directional radars, it allowed a pilot to leave their base, drop bombs on the target, and then return home without ever seeing the ground. It offered a significant practical advancement in blind bombing techniques. However, MPQ was limited in its application in fast-moving combat situations due to some of its complex, handcrafted components. A real tactical breakthrough in night CAS occurred in April490 1953 when VMF(N)-513 and the VMO-6 spotter planes developed a new searchlight beam control system, enabling 24-hour coverage for the 1st Marine Division ground units.

In other innovations, it will be remembered that the Air Force in late 1952 had requested escort by VMF(N)-513’s new two-place jet-intruder F3D Skyknights on Air Force B-29 night bombing missions. During a four-month period from 1952–1953, the Marine night fighters downed one enemy plane or more a month while escorting the B-29s. Once the F3Ds began their night escort role, Air Force bomber losses became negligible.

In other developments, it will be noted that the Air Force in late 1952 asked for escort by VMF(N)-513’s new two-seat jet-intruder F3D Skyknights on Air Force B-29 night bombing missions. During a four-month stretch from 1952 to 1953, the Marine night fighters shot down at least one enemy plane each month while escorting the B-29s. Once the F3Ds started their night escort duties, Air Force bomber losses were minimal.

A unique capability of the long-range, jet-intruder night-fighter was that the F3D carried a radar operator who replaced the ground controller, thereby extending air-defense radar range to the aircraft. It could thus operate independently and effectively at great distance from its base. Without GCI (ground control intercept) aid, VMF(N)-513 direct escort to bombers at night was so successful that the squadron’s planes were used as exclusive escort of the Bomber Command B-29s. In November 1952, the Marine squadron’s two night kills were the first ever recorded by airborne intercept radar-equipped jet fighters. At the end of the war, Skyknights and -513 pilots (flying F3Ds as well as the earlier F7Fs) had destroyed more enemy aircraft than any other Marine or Navy day or night fighter plane. Tactics employed by VMF(N)-513 were original in concept and required a high-level of training and individual pilot-AIO (airborne intercept operator) proficiency. It was noted that:

A unique feature of the long-range, jet-intruder night fighter was that the F3D had a radar operator who took over from the ground controller, allowing the aircraft to extend the air-defense radar range. This meant it could operate independently and effectively far from its base. Without ground control intercept (GCI) support, VMF(N)-513's direct escort of bombers at night was so successful that the squadron's planes became the exclusive escort for Bomber Command B-29s. In November 1952, the Marine squadron achieved two night kills, marking the first-ever recorded by jet fighters equipped with airborne intercept radar. By the end of the war, Skyknights and -513 pilots (flying F3Ds as well as earlier F7Fs) had downed more enemy aircraft than any other Marine or Navy day or night fighter. The tactics used by VMF(N)-513 were innovative and required a high level of training and proficiency from both the pilots and airborne intercept operators (AIOs). It was noted that:

The enthusiasm with which this Marine aid to the Air Force has been received by FEAF Bomber Command indicates that VMF(N)-513 had successfully adapted its equipment and personnel to a mission usually associated with Air Force operations, making an important contribution to interservice cooperation, but even more important, to tactical progress in the night escort of bomber formations.704

The excitement with which this Marine support to the Air Force has been embraced by FEAF Bomber Command shows that VMF(N)-513 effectively adjusted its equipment and personnel to a mission typically linked with Air Force operations, making a significant contribution to collaboration between services, but even more crucial, to tactical advancements in the night escort of bomber formations.704

704 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-82.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-82.

An operation somewhat in reverse of the nightfighters was that of VMJ-1, the Marine photographic squadron, which had its own Air Force escort. Formerly the Wing Photo Unit, VMJ-1 was commissioned in February 1952 and flew a total of 5,025 combat flights. Under FAF operational control until late in the war, the squadron’s 550-mph F2H-2P twin-jet Banshees flew unarmed deep into enemy491 country—even as far as the MIG-guarded Yalu—photographing positions, airfields, power plants, and other targets. An escort plane flew cover while the photo ship took pictures. Photo missions to the Suiho Reservoir were rated so important that “24 Air Force F-86 jets flew an umbrella.”705 Introduction of the squadron’s jet Banshee early in 1952 was a major step in improved aerial photography. The Banshee was the superior photographic aircraft in the combat theater, because of its new advanced-design view finder and operating range.

An operation somewhat opposite to the nightfighters was run by VMJ-1, the Marine photographic squadron, which had its own Air Force escort. Previously known as the Wing Photo Unit, VMJ-1 was established in February 1952 and completed a total of 5,025 combat flights. Under FAF operational control until late in the war, the squadron’s 550-mph F2H-2P twin-jet Banshees flew unarmed deep into enemy491 territory—even all the way to the MIG-guarded Yalu—taking photos of positions, airfields, power plants, and other targets. An escort plane provided cover while the photo aircraft captured images. Photo missions to the Suiho Reservoir were deemed so critical that “24 Air Force F-86 jets flew an umbrella.”705 The introduction of the squadron’s jet Banshee early in 1952 marked a significant advancement in aerial photography. The Banshee was the best photographic aircraft in the combat area, thanks to its new advanced-design viewfinder and operational range.

705 “1st MAW in Korea,” op. cit., Part II, Jun 57, p. 23.

705 “1st MAW in Korea,” op. cit., Part II, Jun 57, p. 23.

Coverage from VMJ-1’s gross wartime output of 793,012 feet of processed prints was equal to a continuous photographic strip six and half times around the earth at the equator. The Marine photo squadron contributed a third to the entire UN photo reconnaissance effort and at times flew as much as 50 percent of all FAF intelligence missions.

Coverage from VMJ-1's total wartime output of 793,012 feet of processed prints was equivalent to a continuous photographic strip that could wrap around the earth at the equator six and a half times. The Marine photo squadron provided a third of the entire UN photo reconnaissance effort and at times conducted up to 50 percent of all FAF intelligence missions.

Throughout the war the four attack squadrons of MAG-12 (VMAs-212, -251, -121; and -332 at the end of the war) had dumped seemingly endless bomb loads on CCF installations, while MAG-33’s two jet-fighter squadrons (VMF-115 and -311) had provided the Marine exchange pilots who scoured the lower side of the Yalu with the Air Force F-86s on fighter sweeps.

Throughout the war, the four attack squadrons of MAG-12 (VMAs-212, -251, -121; and -332 at the end of the war) dropped what seemed like an endless amount of bombs on CCF installations, while MAG-33’s two jet-fighter squadrons (VMF-115 and -311) provided the Marine exchange pilots who patrolled the lower side of the Yalu with the Air Force F-86s during fighter sweeps.

During Korea the Marine CVE/CVL squadrons (VMAs-214, -233, -312, and -251) flew more than 25,000 sorties, experimenting with improved techniques for carrier landings. The carrier qualification program of Marine air units, a regular part of their training, also proved its value in combat. In the earliest days of the war, VMF-214 and -323706 had operated from two CVEs based off the south coast of Korea, thereby providing close support to the brigade and other Eighth Army elements at a time when all shore-based aircraft were forced to operate from Japan.

During the Korean War, the Marine CVE/CVL squadrons (VMAs-214, -233, -312, and -251) completed over 25,000 sorties, testing out better techniques for carrier landings. The carrier qualification program for Marine air units, which was a standard part of their training, also showed its effectiveness in combat. In the early days of the war, VMF-214 and -323706 operated from two CVEs off the south coast of Korea, providing close support to the brigade and other Eighth Army units when all shore-based aircraft were required to operate from Japan.

706 With phaseout of the Corsairs in 1952, the VMF squadrons were subsequently redesignated as attack units.

706 With the phasing out of the Corsairs in 1952, the VMF squadrons were later renamed as attack units.

In other tactical refinements, the 1st MAW had employed an airborne tactical air control center in combat for the first time. In July 1952, when the static ground situation led to a build-up of enemy flak along the front lines that interfered with effective CAS delivery, the 11th Marines had instituted a flak suppression program in front of the division sector. Later that year, CG Eighth Army had ordered a similar program used by all other Eighth Army commands.492 By December, apparently because of lack of success with their own methods, EUSAK had adopted the system developed by the Marine artillery regiment. The antiaircraft program, together with a reduction in the number of runs per aircraft per mission,707 had measurably decreased casualties for CAS missions conducted within artillery range. During 1952–1953 this loss rate for pilots and planes had dropped by a third, with no corresponding reduction in the sortie rate.

In other tactical improvements, the 1st MAW used an airborne tactical air control center in combat for the first time. In July 1952, when the static ground situation caused a buildup of enemy flak along the front lines that disrupted effective close air support (CAS) delivery, the 11th Marines started a flak suppression program in front of the division sector. Later that year, the Commander of the Eighth Army ordered all other Eighth Army units to implement a similar program.492 By December, seemingly due to their own methods not working well, EUSAK adopted the system developed by the Marine artillery regiment. The antiaircraft program, along with a reduction in the number of runs per aircraft per mission, 707 had significantly decreased casualties for CAS missions conducted within artillery range. During 1952–1953, the loss rate for pilots and planes dropped by a third, without a corresponding reduction in the sortie rate.

707 In August 1952, FAF had introduced a new policy limiting pilots to one pass on general support or interdiction missions and two passes on CAS flights.

707 In August 1952, FAF announced a new policy that restricted pilots to one pass on general support or interdiction missions and two passes on CAS flights.

Stabilized warfare and enemy AA build-up had also led to an increasing use of enemy radars. Passive electronics countermeasures (ECM) were instituted by FAF. This program was enhanced in September 1952 by the commissioning of VMC-1 (Marine Composite Squadron 1), administratively assigned to MACG-2. The squadron possessed the only Fifth Air Force ECM capability to locate enemy radars and was the primary source of ECM intercept equipment in FAF squadrons for early warning and radar control monitoring. Throughout the duration of hostilities, VMC-1 remained the only Navy-Marine unit in the Korean theater with ECM as its prime function.

Stabilized warfare and the enemy's buildup of anti-aircraft defenses led to a greater reliance on their radar systems. The FAF implemented passive electronic countermeasures (ECM). This initiative was bolstered in September 1952 with the establishment of VMC-1 (Marine Composite Squadron 1), which was administratively assigned to MACG-2. The squadron had the only ECM capability within the Fifth Air Force to detect enemy radars and served as the main source of ECM interception equipment for FAF squadrons focused on early warning and radar control monitoring. Throughout the conflict, VMC-1 was the only Navy-Marine unit in the Korean theater with ECM as its primary function.

For its combat action, the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing was awarded two Korean Presidential Unit Citations and the Army Distinguished Unit Citation for the Wonsan operation. Wing pilots were responsible for downing 35 enemy planes, including the first night kill made by a United Nations aircraft. Participation of the 1st MAW in the war could also be measured in a different way. On the inevitable red side of the ledger: 258 air Marines had been killed (including 65 MIA and presumed dead) and 174 WIA. A total of 436 aircraft were also lost in combat or operational accidents.

For its combat actions, the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing received two Korean Presidential Unit Citations and the Army Distinguished Unit Citation for the Wonsan operation. Wing pilots were credited with shooting down 35 enemy planes, including the first nighttime kill by a United Nations aircraft. The involvement of the 1st MAW in the war could also be viewed from another perspective. On the unfortunate side of the record: 258 Marines in the air were killed (including 65 MIA and presumed dead) and 174 were wounded in action. A total of 436 aircraft were also lost due to combat or operational accidents.

From the command level, Korean operations marked the first time the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing had functioned for an extended period as a component in a broad, unified command structure such as FAF. Despite the weak links initially inherent in such a situation, the command structure did work. Marine-Navy and Air Force-Army differing aerial doctrines and tactics of close tactical air support, however, were never fully reconciled. The Marine wing made a notable contribution in providing really effective close, speedy tactical493 support during the sudden fluid battle situation that erupted in mid-July 1953. Simplified Marine TACP control, request procedures, and fast radio net system enabled 1st MAW pilots to reach the target area quickly. During this final month of the war—and indicative of the enormous amount of coordination involved in the FAF administrative apparatus—1st MAW planes flew 1,500 CAS sorties for the 19 different EUSAK frontline divisions.

From the command level, Korean operations marked the first time the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing operated for an extended period as part of a large, unified command structure like FAF. Despite the initial weaknesses in that setup, the command structure was effective. However, the differing aerial doctrines and tactics for close air support between the Marines, Navy, and Air Force–Army were never fully integrated. The Marine wing made a significant contribution by providing effective and rapid tactical support during the dynamic battle situation that unfolded in mid-July 1953. Streamlined Marine TACP control and request procedures, along with a quick radio network, allowed 1st MAW pilots to reach their targets quickly. During this final month of the war—and reflective of the extensive coordination involved in the FAF administrative system—1st MAW planes flew 1,500 close air support sorties for the 19 different EUSAK frontline divisions.

CG, 1st MAW noted in General Order No. 153 issued the last day of the war, that “the Wing’s association with the Eighth Army, the Fifth Air Force and the Seventh U.S. Fleet in combined operations had been a professionally broadening experience—teaching tolerance, teamwork, and flexibility of operations.”708

CG, 1st MAW noted in General Order No. 153 issued on the last day of the war, that “the Wing’s collaboration with the Eighth Army, the Fifth Air Force, and the Seventh U.S. Fleet in combined operations had been a valuable learning experience—promoting tolerance, teamwork, and adaptability in operations.”708

708 MajGen V. E. Megee, GO 153, dtd 27 Jul 53, quoted in 1st MAW, Part II, op. cit., p. 26.

708 MajGen V. E. Megee, GO 153, dated July 27, 1953, quoted in 1st MAW, Part II, op. cit., p. 26.

Besides the FAF interdiction work and support missions for frontline units, new 1st MAW tactics and equipment had diversified the wing’s skills and capabilities in its primary role of providing CAS for Marine ground units. Of new tactical air support developments in the Korean action none had a more revolutionary effect than those created by the helicopter—which dramatically reshaped battlefield logistics and pointed the way to a new era in Marine Corps air-ground teamwork.

Besides the FAF interdiction work and support missions for frontline units, the new 1st MAW tactics and equipment had expanded the wing’s skills and abilities in its main role of providing close air support for Marine ground units. Among the new tactical air support developments in the Korean conflict, none had a more groundbreaking impact than those introduced by the helicopter—which significantly transformed battlefield logistics and paved the way for a new era in Marine Corps air-ground teamwork.

Helicopter709

709 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8, No. 6, Chap. 9; USMC Board Rpt, v. I; Generals’ Summary; USMC Ops Korea, vs. I-IV, passim; Montross, SkyCav.

709 Unless stated otherwise, the content in this section comes from PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chap. 9, No. 5, Chap. 8, No. 6, Chap. 9; USMC Board Rpt, vol. I; Generals’ Summary; USMC Ops Korea, vols. I-IV, passim; Montross, SkyCav.

A promising newcomer on the Marine aviation scene was the helicopter, whose tactical employment in Korea was to far exceed all expectations. A few helicopters had been used experimentally in the European and Pacific theaters toward the end of World War II, too late to evaluate their performance. But it was the Marine Corps, beginning in 1947, that had pioneered the development of combat techniques utilizing the rotor-driven aircraft as a means of enhancing its capability for the amphibious assault. When the Korean incident erupted in June 1950, the Marine Corps was in a position to assign four HO3S-1 Sikorsky two-place helicopters and flight personnel from its Quantico test unit, HMX-1, together with fixed-wing planes and pilots to form the brigade observation squadron, VMO-6. These494 Marines had the distinction of being the first helicopter pilots of any U.S. service to be formed into a unit for overseas duty.

A promising newcomer in Marine aviation was the helicopter, whose tactical use in Korea went far beyond all expectations. A few helicopters had been tested in the European and Pacific theaters toward the end of World War II, but it was too late to assess their performance. However, it was the Marine Corps, starting in 1947, that led the way in developing combat techniques using rotor-driven aircraft to enhance their capability for amphibious assaults. When the Korean War broke out in June 1950, the Marine Corps was ready to deploy four HO3S-1 Sikorsky two-place helicopters and flight personnel from its Quantico test unit, HMX-1, along with fixed-wing planes and pilots to create the brigade observation squadron, VMO-6. These494 Marines were the first helicopter pilots of any U.S. military branch to be organized into a unit for overseas service.

Further, the Marine Corps also had 31 months’ experience with the strange looking, pot-bellied, ungainly aircraft in diverse battlefield tasks. These included casualty evacuation, reconnaissance, wire-laying, liaison, and administrative missions. But promising test exercises at Quantico and Camp Lejeune were hardly enough. The real test would come at the front. There, the helicopter’s military value would reflect and “depend to a large extent on how well the Marine Corps had worked out combat doctrines and techniques where none had existed before.”710

Further, the Marine Corps had 31 months of experience with the strange-looking, pot-bellied, awkward aircraft in various battlefield roles. These included casualty evacuation, reconnaissance, wire-laying, liaison, and administrative missions. However, promising test exercises at Quantico and Camp Lejeune weren't sufficient. The real test would happen at the front. There, the military value of the helicopter would depend largely on how effectively the Marine Corps developed combat doctrines and techniques where none had existed before. 710

710 Montross, SkyCav, p. 108.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Montross, SkyCav, p. 108.

Landing with the brigade in August 1950, the choppers performed invaluable service from the earliest days of Pusan, Inchon, Seoul, and the Reservoir. During the most critical phase of the Chosin operation, the helicopters provided the only liaison between isolated commands. Wire-laying by air was first employed by VMO-6 during the second battle of the Naktong River, in September 1950. The ground had changed hands several times and control was uncertain. Using makeshift communication rigs, VMO-6 pilots unreeled telephone wire at a mile a minute. This method of putting telephone lines across Korean mountains became routine through the rest of the war, and Marine choppers strung miles of lines in rain and wind with the enemy blasting away at them. Wire was laid over terrain in a matter of hours where it would have taken men on foot weeks—if it could have been done.

Landing with the brigade in August 1950, the helicopters provided invaluable support from the earliest days in Pusan, Inchon, Seoul, and the Reservoir. During the most critical phase of the Chosin operation, the helicopters were the only link between isolated commands. Wire-laying by air was first used by VMO-6 during the second battle of the Naktong River in September 1950. The ground had changed hands multiple times, and control was uncertain. Using makeshift communication setups, VMO-6 pilots unrolled telephone wire at a mile a minute. This method of running telephone lines across the Korean mountains became standard for the rest of the war, with Marine helicopters stringing miles of lines in rain and wind while under enemy fire. Wire was laid over terrain in a matter of hours where it would have taken ground troops weeks—if it could have been done at all.

Perhaps the greatest innovation of VMO-6, however, was its night casualty evacuation techniques first employed at Pusan. Darting in and out at treetop level around the Korean mountains, the light, easily maneuverable craft could land on a tiny patch of earth to evacuate injured men or bring in supplies. Once, during the early part of the war, when the aeronautical pioneer Igor Sikorsky was asked how his revolutionary vehicles were performing in combat, Mr. Sikorsky, bowing from the waist in his Old World manner, replied:

Perhaps the biggest innovation of VMO-6, though, was its night casualty evacuation techniques first used at Pusan. Skimming in and out at treetop level around the Korean mountains, the light, easily maneuverable craft could land on a small patch of ground to evacuate injured soldiers or bring in supplies. Once, during the early part of the war, when the aviation pioneer Igor Sikorsky was asked how his groundbreaking vehicles were performing in combat, Mr. Sikorsky, bowing from the waist in his old-fashioned way, replied:

Thank you. Our things go very well in Korea. The helicopter has already saved the lives of several thousands of our boys in Korea and the score is still mounting.711

Thank you. Things are going really well in Korea. The helicopter has already saved the lives of several thousand of our guys in Korea, and the number keeps increasing.711

495

495

711 Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 10 (Oct 55), p. 61 quoting Eugene E. Wilson, Wings of the Dawn (Hartford, Conn.: Connecticut Printers, Inc., 1955).

711 Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 10 (Oct 55), p. 61 quoting Eugene E. Wilson, Wings of the Dawn (Hartford, Conn.: Connecticut Printers, Inc., 1955).

With the advent of the helicopter, as little as 43 minutes elapsed between the time a Marine was hit and the time he was on board the USS Repose or other hospital ships. Later on when the Marine transport copters arrived in Korea, HMR-161 pilots felt a new record had been set when only 30 minutes712 intervened between the time a frontline Marine was hit and delivered to a hospital facility 17 miles from the zone of action. The Consolation had been outfitted with a helicopter loading platform in July 1951, and eventually all hospital ships had such landing platforms. In Korea the flying ambulances could make the trip from rear area aid station to ship in five minutes and unload the wounded and clear the deck in 45 seconds flat.

With the arrival of the helicopter, it took as little as 43 minutes from when a Marine was injured to when he was on board the USS Repose or other hospital ships. Later, when the Marine transport helicopters came to Korea, HMR-161 pilots believed they had set a new record when just 30 minutes712 passed between the time a frontline Marine was hit and when he was delivered to a hospital facility 17 miles away from the combat zone. The Consolation was equipped with a helicopter loading platform in July 1951, and eventually all hospital ships had these landing platforms. In Korea, the flying ambulances could make the trip from the rear area aid station to the ship in five minutes and offload the wounded, clearing the deck in just 45 seconds.

712 By contrast, in 1945 World War II campaigns the Secretary of the Navy James V. Forrestal had visited hospital ships and praised the air evacuation methods then in use when he commented, “I went aboard the Samaritan, where Navy surgeons and corpsmen were already dealing with the casualties from the day and night before.” Capt Clifford P. Morehouse, The Iwo Jima Campaign, (Washington: HistDiv, HQMC, 1946), p. 139.

712 By contrast, in 1945 during World War II campaigns, Secretary of the Navy James V. Forrestal visited hospital ships and praised the air evacuation methods that were in use at the time. He remarked, “I went aboard the Samaritan, where Navy surgeons and corpsmen were already handling the casualties from the previous day and night.” Capt Clifford P. Morehouse, The Iwo Jima Campaign, (Washington: HistDiv, HQMC, 1946), p. 139.

Throughout the war nearly 10,000 wounded Marines were evacuated by helicopter; more than 1,000 such missions were carried out at night. Records indicate that VMO-6 flew out 7,067 casualties and that another 2,748 medical evacuations were made by HMR-161, for which the task ranked as a secondary mission. Although these humanitarian gains were important, major tactical innovations made by the helicopter were even more significant.

Throughout the war, nearly 10,000 injured Marines were evacuated by helicopter; over 1,000 of those missions happened at night. Records show that VMO-6 flew out 7,067 casualties and that another 2,748 medical evacuations were carried out by HMR-161, which considered this task a secondary mission. While these humanitarian efforts were crucial, the major tactical innovations introduced by the helicopter were even more important.

In the fall of 1951, HMR-161 successfully executed the first combat troop resupply mission in history. At this time while the division was deployed in the jagged razorback-ridge Punchbowl area, “a glimpse of future warfare was provided when Marine helicopter lifts on a company scale led to the lift of an entire battalion and its organic equipment.”713 Arriving in Korea on 31 August, the squadron had a complement of 15 new 10-place HRS-1 transport vehicles, with cruising speed of 60–85 knots. Developed specifically to meet Marine Corps combat requirements, the HRS marked a new era in Marine airborne support to ground troops. Both VMO-6 and HMR-161 came under operational control of the division. (With 1st Division and Wing headquarters separated geographically by more than 200 miles, it was particularly expedient to have the two squadrons under division control.)

In the fall of 1951, HMR-161 successfully carried out the first combat troop resupply mission in history. At the time, while the division was deployed in the rugged, razorback-ridge Punchbowl area, “a glimpse of future warfare was provided when Marine helicopter lifts on a company scale led to the lift of an entire battalion and its essential equipment.”713 Arriving in Korea on August 31, the squadron had 15 new 10-seat HRS-1 transport helicopters, with a cruising speed of 60–85 knots. Developed specifically to meet Marine Corps combat needs, the HRS marked a new era in Marine air support for ground troops. Both VMO-6 and HMR-161 came under operational control of the division. (With the 1st Division and Wing headquarters separated by over 200 miles, it was particularly practical to have the two squadrons under division control.)

713 HistBr outline, p. 4.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ HistBr outline, p. 4.

The first step toward using the rotor-blade aircraft in the mission most closely related to the USMC basic helicopter concept—that of496 transporting troops and supplies by vertical envelopment—was accomplished 13 September 1951. In Operation WINDMILL I, HRS choppers carried out the first Marine mass helicopter combat resupply operation in history. A lift of one day’s supplies was made to 2/1 in the Soyang River vicinity. A total of 28 flights were executed in overall time of 2½ hours (a total flight time of 14.1 hours) to transport 18,848 pounds of gear and 74 Marines a distance of seven miles.

The first step toward using rotor-blade aircraft for the mission most aligned with the USMC basic helicopter concept—transporting troops and supplies through vertical envelopment—was achieved on September 13, 1951. In Operation WINDMILL I, HRS helicopters conducted the first mass helicopter combat resupply operation for the Marines. A lift of one day's supplies was delivered to 2/1 near the Soyang River. A total of 28 flights were completed in about 2½ hours (14.1 hours of flight time overall) to transport 18,848 pounds of equipment and 74 Marines over a distance of seven miles.

HMR-161 first applied the Corps’ new concept of vertical envelopment on 21 September when, despite heavy fog, it transported 224 fully equipped Marines and 17,772 pounds of cargo from the reserve area to the MLR. This was the first helicopter lift of a combat unit in history. Company-size troop lifts inevitably led to more complicated battalion-size transfers. In the 11 November Operation SWITCH, HMR-161 effected the relief of a frontline battalion, involving the lift of nearly 2,000 troops. Twelve of the 3½-ton aircraft made 262 flights in overall time of 10 hours (95.6 hours flight time).

HMR-161 first used the Corps' new idea of vertical envelopment on September 21 when, despite heavy fog, it transported 224 fully equipped Marines and 17,772 pounds of cargo from the reserve area to the MLR. This was the first helicopter lift of a combat unit in history. Company-sized troop lifts inevitably led to more complicated battalion-sized transfers. In the November 11 Operation SWITCH, HMR-161 facilitated the relief of a frontline battalion, involving the lift of nearly 2,000 troops. Twelve of the 3½-ton aircraft made 262 flights over a total time of 10 hours (95.6 hours flight time).

The tactical and logistical possibilities of the multi-purpose rotor craft attracted considerable attention. So impressed, in fact, were Eighth Army officers by the mobility and utility displayed by Marine helicopters that in November 1951 General Ridgway had asked the Army to provide four Army helicopter transport battalions, each with 280 helicopters. Korea, Ridgway said, had “conclusively demonstrated that the Army vitally needed helicopters,”714 and he recommended that the typical field army of the future have 10 helicopter transportation battalions.

The tactical and logistical capabilities of the multi-purpose rotorcraft grabbed a lot of attention. Eighth Army officers were so impressed by the mobility and usefulness of Marine helicopters that in November 1951, General Ridgway requested the Army to set up four helicopter transport battalions, each with 280 helicopters. Ridgway stated that Korea had “definitively shown that the Army urgently needed helicopters,”714 and he suggested that future field armies should have 10 helicopter transportation battalions.

714 Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 533–534.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 533–534.

Ridgway was thereby renewing requests for helicopters made in the early days of the war by both the Army (through General MacArthur) and the Air Force (by General Barcus). But the UNC Commander’s enthusiasm, although understandable, turned out to be the undoing for substantial Army use of the rotary-blade aircraft in Korea. The scale of operations715 envisioned by Ridgway unwittingly led to a “jurisdictional controversy”716 about possible duplication of aerial functions not reconciled by the two services until a year later. Although both services had helicopters in limited use, “hostilities were in their last stages before either the Army or the497 Air Force began to receive the cargo helicopters which they had put on order in 1950 and 1951.”717

Ridgway was thus restating requests for helicopters made early in the war by both the Army (through General MacArthur) and the Air Force (by General Barcus). However, the UNC Commander’s enthusiasm, while understandable, ended up being the reason for limited Army use of rotary-wing aircraft in Korea. The scale of operations 715 that Ridgway envisioned inadvertently led to a “jurisdictional controversy” 716 about potential overlap in aerial functions that the two services did not resolve until a year later. Even though both services had helicopters in limited use, “hostilities were in their last stages before either the Army or the 497 Air Force began to receive the cargo helicopters which they had put on order in 1950 and 1951.” 717

715 Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 184, comments: “In order to insure a steady flow of replacement craft, he [Ridgway] suggested that procurement be started on a scale that would permit manufacturers to expand production immediately.”

715 Hermes, Truce Tent, p. 184, comments: “To ensure a steady supply of replacement equipment, he [Ridgway] recommended starting procurement on a scale that would allow manufacturers to ramp up production right away.”

716 Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 534.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, p. 534.

717 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

A successful three-day Army regimental supply exercise in May 1953 and a combat maneuver the following month in which the choppers formed an air bridge to a heavily attacked, isolated ROK unit caused General Taylor, then CG, EUSAK, to observe: “The cargo helicopter, employed in mass, can extend the tactical mobility of the Army far beyond its normal capability.” He strongly recommended that the Army make “ample provisions for the full exploitation of the helicopter in the future.”718

A successful three-day Army regimental supply exercise in May 1953, followed by a combat maneuver the next month where helicopters created an air bridge to a heavily attacked, isolated ROK unit, led General Taylor, who was then the Commander of EUSAK, to state: “The cargo helicopter, used extensively, can enhance the Army's tactical mobility well beyond its usual limits.” He strongly urged the Army to make “ample provisions for fully utilizing helicopters in the future.”718

718 Ibid., p. 535.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 535.

Pioneering developments by the Marine Corps had, of course, continued meanwhile. Logistical operations had grown increasingly complex and diversified. In Operation HAYLIFT II, 23–27 February 1953, Marine helicopters set an all time cargo-carrying record when they lifted 1,612,306 pounds of cargo to completely supply two JAMESTOWN regiments with daily requirements for the five-day period. This represented a total of 1,633 lifts and 583.4 flying hours for the operation. The record day’s lift was 200 tons, whereas plans had called for lifting a maximum 130 tons per day. Experience gained during the operation indicated that similar tactical maneuvers in warmer weather would be even more successful when troop fuel oil requirements were reduced.

Pioneering developments by the Marine Corps continued to progress. Logistical operations became increasingly complex and diverse. In Operation HAYLIFT 2, from February 23 to 27, 1953, Marine helicopters set an all-time cargo-carrying record by lifting 1,612,306 pounds of cargo to fully supply two JAMestown regiments with daily needs for the five-day duration. This involved a total of 1,633 lifts and 583.4 flying hours for the operation. The record lift for a single day was 200 tons, while plans had aimed for a maximum of 130 tons per day. The experience gained during the operation suggested that similar tactical maneuvers in warmer weather would be even more effective when the troop fuel oil requirements were lower.

Other Marine innovations by HMR-161 included supplying ammunition from the rear area ASP to the MLR and redeployment of 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery personnel and guns from one firing area to another. And although VMO-6 executed most of the mercy missions, the transport squadron performed an unusual assignment in July 1952. Flood conditions throughout Korea brought an urgent request from the Army for use of HMR-161. On 30 July, the Marine squadron evacuated 1,172 Army troops from their positions in the Chunchon area where they had been trapped by the heavy rains.

Other Marine innovations by HMR-161 included delivering ammunition from the back area ASP to the MLR and moving 1st 4.5-inch Rocket Battery personnel and guns from one firing area to another. While VMO-6 carried out most of the mercy missions, the transport squadron took on an unusual task in July 1952. Flooding across Korea prompted an urgent request from the Army for HMR-161's help. On July 30, the Marine squadron evacuated 1,172 Army troops from their positions in the Chunchon area, where they had been stranded by the heavy rains.

With a new tactical exercise held nearly every month, HMR-161 operations that once had rated world-wide headlines were now practically routine. VTOL-style battalion troop lifts were no longer novel and regimental resupply operations were becoming almost standard practice. In both relocation of units and logistical support,498 combat helicopters had provided high mobility and reasonable speed. They had introduced a new infantry technique of “hit and run” tactics. The transport helicopter squadron had proved most effective when employed in major tactical movements and not when used piecemeal on minor missions. Marine Corps wartime use of the new aerial vehicle had clearly proven that helicopters had become a necessary and integral component of the modern-day balanced military force.

With a new tactical exercise happening almost every month, HMR-161 operations that once made global headlines were now practically routine. VTOL-style troop lifts were no longer new, and regimental resupply missions were becoming almost standard. In both relocating units and providing logistical support,498 combat helicopters offered high mobility and decent speed. They introduced a new infantry technique called “hit and run” tactics. The transport helicopter squadron was most effective during major tactical movements, not when used piecemeal for minor missions. The Marine Corps' wartime use of this new aerial vehicle clearly showed that helicopters had become a necessary and essential part of a modern balanced military force.

FMF and Readiness Posture719

719 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: Semianl Rpts of SecDef (including SecNav), 1951–1955; PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10, No. 5, Chaps. 8, 9, No. 6. Chaps. 9, 10; USMC Board Rpt, vs. 1-11; Generals’ Summary; Brochure titled “Historical Outline of the Development of Fleet Marine Force, Pacific 1941–1950 (Preliminary),” held at HRB; HRS Log Sheet of Korean War Statistics prepared for Policy Analysis Br., HQMC, dtd 21 Aug 67; Ernest H. Giusti, The Mobilization of the Marine Corps Reserve in the Korean Conflict, 1950–1951 (Washington: HistBr, G-3 Div, HQMC, 1967 ed.), hereafter Giusti, Mobilization, MCR; USMC Ops Korea, vs. I-II; Public Affairs Unit 4-1, The Marine Corps Reserve—A History, 1916–1966 (Washington: Division of Reserve, HQMC, 1966); HQMC Press Kit, “Men of Color,” issued July 1968; U.S. Bureau of the Census, Historical Statistics of the United States, Colonial Times to 1957 (Washington: U.S. Govt. Printing Office, 1961).

719 Unless otherwise specified, the material in this section comes from: Seminal Reports of the Secretary of Defense (including the Secretary of the Navy), 1951–1955; PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chapters 9, 10, No. 5, Chapters 8, 9, No. 6, Chapters 9, 10; USMC Board Report, volumes 1-11; Generals’ Summary; brochure titled “Historical Outline of the Development of Fleet Marine Force, Pacific 1941–1950 (Preliminary),” archived at HRB; HRS Log Sheet of Korean War Statistics prepared for Policy Analysis Branch, HQMC, dated August 21, 1967; Ernest H. Giusti, The Mobilization of the Marine Corps Reserve in the Korean Conflict, 1950–1951 (Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1967 edition), referred to hereafter as Giusti, Mobilization, MCR; USMC Operations Korea, volumes I-II; Public Affairs Unit 4-1, The Marine Corps Reserve—A History, 1916–1966 (Washington: Division of Reserve, HQMC, 1966); HQMC Press Kit, “Men of Color,” released July 1968; U.S. Bureau of the Census, Historical Statistics of the United States, Colonial Times to 1957 (Washington: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1961).

The flexibility and readiness capability inherent in the Marine Corps FMF structure was a strong undergirding factor in its swift response to the Korean crisis. As noted, in June 1950 the Marine Corps had 74,279 officers and men on active duty. Its Fleet Marine Force, consisting of FMFPac and FMFLant, numbered 27,656. The 11,853 personnel of FMFPac included 7,779 men in General Smith’s 1st Marine Division at Camp Pendleton and 3,733 in General Harris’ 1st Marine Aircraft Wing at El Toro. On the East Coast, FMFLant numbered 15,803 with approximately 8,973 Marines in the 2d Division at Camp Lejeune and 5,297 air personnel attached to the 2d Wing at Cherry Point.

The flexibility and readiness of the Marine Corps FMF structure played a significant role in its quick response to the Korean crisis. As mentioned, in June 1950, the Marine Corps had 74,279 active-duty personnel. Its Fleet Marine Force, made up of FMFPac and FMFLant, totaled 27,656. FMFPac had 11,853 personnel, including 7,779 in General Smith’s 1st Marine Division at Camp Pendleton and 3,733 in General Harris’ 1st Marine Aircraft Wing at El Toro. On the East Coast, FMFLant had 15,803, with about 8,973 Marines in the 2d Division at Camp Lejeune and 5,297 air personnel attached to the 2d Wing at Cherry Point.

Outbreak of Korean hostilities thus presented the Marine Corps with the tasks of organizing and deploying for combat first a brigade and then a full war-strength reinforced division, each with supporting aviation elements. Despite the low strength to which FMFPac had shrunk due to stringent national defense economy measures, the heavy demands placed upon it were met. Both missions were accomplished quickly and effectively. In fact, “few achievements in499 the long history of the Marine Corps can equal what was achieved in the 11 weeks which elapsed between the outbreak of the Korean War and the amphibious assault of the 1st Marine Division at Inchon.”720

The outbreak of hostilities in Korea challenged the Marine Corps to organize and deploy for combat, first a brigade and then a fully equipped division with supporting aviation units. Despite the reduced strength of FMFPac due to strict national defense budget cuts, it met the heavy demands placed on it. Both missions were completed quickly and effectively. In fact, “few achievements in499 the long history of the Marine Corps can match what was accomplished in the 11 weeks between the start of the Korean War and the amphibious assault of the 1st Marine Division at Inchon.”720

720 Historical Outline of the Development of FMFPac, 1941–1950, p. 49.

720 Historical Outline of the Development of FMFPac, 1941–1950, p. 49.

As early as 2 July, CinCFE MacArthur had requested that a Marine RCT-air unit be dispatched to the Far East. On 7 July the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade was activated; on 12–14 July it embarked. With departure of the brigade, personnel shortages within the 1st Division and 1st Wing became acute. The division was reduced to 3,459, less than a RCT; and the wing to 2,300. Meanwhile, as the increasing demand had continued for a Marine Division deployed to Korea, it became equally apparent that if the Marine Corps were to fulfill this requirement of deploying a full-strength division to Korea,721 its reservists would have to be called up to alleviate these shortages.

As early as July 2, CinCFE MacArthur had asked for a Marine RCT-air unit to be sent to the Far East. On July 7, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade was activated; it embarked between July 12 and 14. With the brigade's departure, personnel shortages in the 1st Division and 1st Wing became severe. The division's strength dropped to 3,459, less than a RCT, and the wing to 2,300. Meanwhile, as the demand for a Marine Division in Korea continued to rise, it became clear that for the Marine Corps to meet the requirement of deploying a full-strength division to Korea, its reservists would need to be called up to address these shortages.

721 With 7,779 men in 1stMarDiv and 8,973 in the 2dMarDiv, even “had they been combined into a single unit, its numbers would still have fallen 20 percent short of one war-strength division.” Giusti, Mobilization, MCR, p. 9.

721 With 7,779 men in 1stMarDiv and 8,973 in the 2dMarDiv, even if they had been combined into a single unit, it would still have been 20 percent short of the strength needed for a full war division.” Giusti, Mobilization, MCR, p. 9.

Manpower potential of the Marine Corps Reserve was 128,959, nearly twice that of the regular establishment. In June 1950, the Organized Marine Corps Reserve (Ground) numbered 1,879 officers and 31,648 enlisted personnel being trained in 138 OMCR units of battalion size or less. Membership of the ground reserve was approximately 76 percent of its authorized strength. At the same time the Organized Reserve (Aviation) consisted of 30 fighter and 12 ground control intercept squadrons attached to the Marine Air Reserve Training Command organized at Glenview, Ill. in 1946. These MARTCOM squadrons numbered 1,588 officers and 4,753 enlisted, or approximately 95 percent of authorized strength. In addition to nearly 40,000 members of the OMCR, the Marine Volunteer (nondrill, nonpay status) Reserve carried approximately 90,000 on its rolls.

Manpower potential of the Marine Corps Reserve was 128,959, which was nearly double that of the regular establishment. In June 1950, the Organized Marine Corps Reserve (Ground) had 1,879 officers and 31,648 enlisted members training in 138 OMCR units of battalion size or smaller. The membership of the ground reserve was about 76 percent of its authorized strength. At the same time, the Organized Reserve (Aviation) included 30 fighter squadrons and 12 ground control intercept squadrons linked to the Marine Air Reserve Training Command, which was organized in Glenview, Ill. in 1946. These MARTCOM squadrons had 1,588 officers and 4,753 enlisted personnel, or about 95 percent of authorized strength. In addition to nearly 40,000 members of the OMCR, the Marine Volunteer (non-drill, non-pay status) Reserve had approximately 90,000 individuals on its rolls.

A warning notice went out on 19 July from the Commandant, General Cates, to District Directors that the OMCR would shortly be ordered to active duty; later that same day mobilization of the Reserve was authorized by President Truman, with Congressional sanction. On 20 July, the first 22 ground units, with nearly 5,000 men, were ordered to active duty on a schedule that took into account500 the unit’s state of readiness, proximity to its initial duty station, and facilities there for handling the personnel overload.

A warning notice was sent out on July 19 from Commandant General Cates to District Directors that the OMCR would soon be called to active duty. Later that same day, President Truman authorized the mobilization of the Reserve, with Congress's approval. On July 20, the first 22 ground units, totaling nearly 5,000 men, were ordered to active duty based on the unit’s readiness, distance from their initial duty station, and the resources available there to manage the personnel influx.

Less than a month after hostilities began in Korea, key infantry, artillery, and engineer units of the OMCR had been ordered to extended active duty. On 31 July, West Coast ground reserve units from Los Angeles, San Francisco, Oakland, and Phoenix were the first to report in to Camp Pendleton for augmentation into the 1st Marine Division. The following day their opposite numbers from the East Coast units arrived at Camp Lejeune. By 11 September, all of the organized ground units had reported for duty and the OMCR (Ground) had ceased to exist.

Less than a month after the fighting started in Korea, key infantry, artillery, and engineering units of the OMCR had been called to extended active duty. On July 31, West Coast ground reserve units from Los Angeles, San Francisco, Oakland, and Phoenix were the first to check in at Camp Pendleton to support the 1st Marine Division. The next day, their counterparts from the East Coast arrived at Camp Lejeune. By September 11, all organized ground units had reported for duty, and the OMCR (Ground) was no longer in existence.

While the organized ground reserve was being mobilized, the first of the 42 MARTCOM fighter and intercept squadrons began arriving at El Toro. Personnel of six reserve VMF and three MGCI squadrons were ordered to duty on 23 July as replacements in the 1st MAW which had furnished units and men for the MAG-33 component of the brigade.

While the organized ground reserve was being mobilized, the first of the 42 MARTCOM fighter and intercept squadrons started arriving at El Toro. Personnel from six reserve VMF and three MGCI squadrons were called to duty on July 23 as replacements in the 1st MAW, which had provided units and personnel for the MAG-33 component of the brigade.

Commenting on the success with which the Marine Corps achieved this expansion, the Secretary of Defense was to note later:

Commenting on the success of the Marine Corps in achieving this expansion, the Secretary of Defense would later note:

The speed with which this mobilization was effected was an important factor in the rapid buildup of the First Marine Division, the first units of which sailed for the Far East in July 1950.722

The speed at which this mobilization happened was a key factor in the quick formation of the First Marine Division, the first units of which left for the Far East in July 1950.722

722 Semianl Rpt of SecDef (1 Jan-30 Jun) 1953, p. 187.

722 Seminal Report of the Secretary of Defense (Jan 1 - Jun 30) 1953, p. 187.

As late as 20 July, the Joint Chiefs of Staff had informed MacArthur that a Marine division could not be sent before November or even December. Finally, on 25 July, the CinCUNC’s third request for the division was approved. It would, however, be a division minus one RCT, and the Joint Chiefs were “adamant in their decision that MacArthur must wait until autumn or even winter for his third RCT.”723

As late as July 20, the Joint Chiefs of Staff had told MacArthur that a Marine division couldn't be sent until November or even December. Finally, on July 25, the CinCUNC's third request for the division was approved. However, it would be a division minus one RCT, and the Joint Chiefs were "firm in their decision that MacArthur would have to wait until fall or even winter for his third RCT."723

723 USMC Ops Korea, v. II, p. 23.

723 USMC Ops Korea, v. II, p. 23.

The JCS also directed on 25 July that the Marine Corps build its division (less one RCT) to full war strength. The date of 10–15 August was set for its departure to the Far East. Among the many steps taken in the mobilization schedule, the JCS directed that the Camp Lejeune-based 2d Marine Division be expanded immediately to war strength.

The JCS also instructed on July 25 that the Marine Corps increase its division (minus one RCT) to full combat capacity. The departure date for the Far East was set for August 10-15. As part of the mobilization plan, the JCS ordered that the 2nd Marine Division based at Camp Lejeune be immediately expanded to war strength.

Fleshing out personnel—against short-fuzed manpower and time501 factors—for the 1st Marine Division and Wing, due to embark in mid-August, a month after the brigade had left, was a round-the-clock operation for all hands. Between 25 July-5 August, the Marine Corps provided personnel for the expanded Division/Wing by:

Filling out personnel—amidst limited manpower and time501 factors—for the 1st Marine Division and Wing, set to deploy in mid-August, a month after the brigade had departed, was a continuous effort for everyone involved. From July 25 to August 5, the Marine Corps supplied personnel for the expanded Division/Wing by:

transfer of FMFLant-selected, 2d Division/Wing air and ground units, of 6,800 men, to FMFPac;

transfer of FMFLant-selected, 2nd Division/Wing air and ground units, consisting of 6,800 personnel, to FMFPac;

transfer of 3,600 regular Marines from 105 posts and stations throughout the U.S.;

transfer of 3,600 regular Marines from 105 posts and stations across the U.S.;

mobilization of 2,900 from early OMCR ground and air units; and utilization of two replacement drafts, number 900, intended for the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade.

mobilization of 2,900 from early OMCR ground and air units; and use of two replacement drafts, number 900, intended for the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade.

Expansion of the 1st Marine Division was in two phases, bringing the division (less one RCT) up to war strength and then organizing its third reinforced infantry regiment, the 7th Marines. With the cadre of 3,459 men in the division after the brigade left and the influx of regulars and reservists, the 1st Division embarked for Korea between 10 and 24 August. It had reached wartime strength (less one RCT) on 15 August, just 27 days after beginning its buildup from a peacetime T/O. As it had approached war strength, the Division CG, General Smith, was directed by CMC ltr of 4 August to activate a third RCT and prepare it for departure to Korea no later than 1 September.

Expansion of the 1st Marine Division happened in two phases, first boosting the division (minus one RCT) to full wartime strength and then organizing its third reinforced infantry regiment, the 7th Marines. After the brigade left, the division had a core group of 3,459 men, and with the addition of regulars and reservists, the 1st Division departed for Korea between August 10 and 24. It reached wartime strength (minus one RCT) on August 15, just 27 days after starting its buildup from a peacetime take-off. As it approached full strength, the Division Commander, General Smith, was instructed by the CMC letter dated August 4 to activate a third RCT and prepare it for departure to Korea by no later than September 1.

While mounting out, the division transferred approximately 1,000 of its rear echelon to be used in the buildup of the 7th Marines. The 6th Marines of the 2d Division provided the base for building this new regiment. (Approximately 800 Marines of 3/6 were reassigned from Mediterranean duty and ordered to the Far East, via the Suez Canal, to join the 7th Marines upon its arrival there.) By drawing men from widely scattered sources, it was possible to activate the 7th Marines on 17 August. Departure of this regiment on 1 September was thus far in advance of the late fall or winter target date originally set by the JCS.

While preparing to leave, the division moved about 1,000 of its support troops to help build up the 7th Marines. The 6th Marines from the 2nd Division formed the base for establishing this new regiment. (About 800 Marines from 3/6 were pulled from their Mediterranean duty and ordered to the Far East, going through the Suez Canal, to join the 7th Marines when it arrived.) By recruiting personnel from various locations, it became possible to activate the 7th Marines on August 17. The deployment of this regiment on September 1 was therefore much earlier than the late fall or winter date originally planned by the JCS.

With all OMCR ground units called up and absorbed into the 1st and 2d Divisions, and air squadrons being mobilized on a slower schedule (due to less-urgent combat needs for air personnel in the early war stage), the Marine Corps dealt with its remaining body of reserve strength. Bulk orders went out beginning 15 August to the Volunteer Reserve, and by the end of the year 58,480 men and502 women in this category were on active duty. More than 80 percent of the volunteer reservists on Marine Corps rolls served during the Korean War.

With all OMCR ground units activated and integrated into the 1st and 2nd Divisions, and air squadrons mobilizing at a slower pace (due to a lower immediate need for combat air personnel in the early stages of the war), the Marine Corps managed its remaining reserve strength. Large orders were sent out starting August 15 to the Volunteer Reserve, and by the end of the year, 58,480 men and502 women from this group were on active duty. Over 80 percent of the volunteer reservists listed in the Marine Corps served during the Korean War.

Attesting to the impact of events in Korea is the fact that “following the epic withdrawal of the 1st Division from the Chosin Reservoir, the number of new enlistments into the active Volunteer Reserve jumped from 877 in December to 3,477 in January.”724

Attesting to the impact of events in Korea is the fact that “after the dramatic withdrawal of the 1st Division from the Chosin Reservoir, the number of new enlistments into the active Volunteer Reserve soared from 877 in December to 3,477 in January.”724

724 Giusti, op. cit., p. 36.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Giusti, op. cit., p. 36.

Complete mobilization of the organized ground reserve had been accomplished in just 53 days, from 20 July to 11 September. A previous estimate had shown an expected 80 percent availability of ground reserve on M-Day; the actual mobilization figure was 90 percent. Of 33,528 OMCR ordered to active duty, a total of 30,183 (1,550 officers/28,633 enlisted) reported. Marine aviation also expanded rapidly. By January 1951, 32 organized reserve air units (20 of the 30 existing VMFs and all 12 MGCIs) had been activated and by October of that year all of the reserve squadrons had been called to active duty. Of the 6,341 organized air reservists, 5,240 received orders; 4,893, or 93.4 percent, reported in. In contrast to the ground reserve, air units had been recalled on a staggered or partial mobilization schedule, a matter which was later to receive Congressional attention (and ultimately to set a new trend) when the Nation’s entire Korean War mobilization procedures were reviewed and subsequently revised.

Complete mobilization of the organized ground reserve was achieved in just 53 days, from July 20 to September 11. A previous estimate had indicated an expected 80 percent availability of ground reserve on M-Day; the actual mobilization figure reached 90 percent. Out of 33,528 OMCR ordered to active duty, a total of 30,183 (1,550 officers/28,633 enlisted) reported. Marine aviation also grew quickly. By January 1951, 32 organized reserve air units (20 of the 30 existing VMFs and all 12 MGCIs) had been activated, and by October of that year, all reserve squadrons had been called to active duty. Of the 6,341 organized air reservists, 5,240 received orders, with 4,893, or 93.4 percent, reporting in. Unlike the ground reserve, air units were recalled on a staggered or partial mobilization schedule, which later gained Congressional attention (and ultimately set a new trend) during the review and revision of the Nation’s entire Korean War mobilization procedures.

Of the Marines participating in the Inchon invasion, 17 percent were reservists. By June 1951 the proportion of reservists in Marine Corps units in Korea had increased to nearly 50 percent. Between July 1950 and June 1953, approximately 122,000 reservists, both recruits and veterans, saw active duty with the Marine Corps.

Of the Marines involved in the Inchon invasion, 17 percent were reservists. By June 1951, the percentage of reservists in Marine Corps units in Korea had risen to nearly 50 percent. From July 1950 to June 1953, around 122,000 reservists, including both new recruits and veterans, served on active duty with the Marine Corps.

Throughout the war the Marine Corps effected approximately 34 replacement drafts and another 31 rotation drafts. Ground Marines served an average tour of 13 months overseas (although actual time attached to the division was about 10½ months). The collapse of North Korean forces after the Inchon-Seoul operation and the unopposed landing at Wonsan had pointed to an early end of the Korean conflict. Massive Chinese intervention in November 1950, however, changed the prospect of a short war to a long one and made it necessary to implement a rotation and release policy. By503 March 1951, HQMC had worked out a preliminary phaseout program for reserve personnel (based on the various categories and length of service prior to recall) which was put into effect in June 1951.

Throughout the war, the Marine Corps carried out about 34 replacement drafts and another 31 rotation drafts. Ground Marines served an average tour of 13 months overseas (although actual time with the division was around 10½ months). The collapse of North Korean forces after the Inchon-Seoul operation and the unopposed landing at Wonsan suggested an early end to the Korean conflict. However, massive Chinese intervention in November 1950 shifted the expectation from a short war to a long one, making it necessary to establish a rotation and release policy. By503 March 1951, HQMC had developed a preliminary phaseout program for reserve personnel (based on the various categories and length of service prior to recall), which was implemented in June 1951.

During 1952 and up until July 1953, approximately 500 officers and 15,500 enlisted men joined the 1st Marine Division in Korea every six months. Individual monthly replacement drafts generally ranged from 1,900 to 2,500, depending on the combat situation and other personnel needs within the Marine Corps. Monthly rotation drafts of Marines assigned to the States or other duty stations from Korea were usually somewhat smaller than their corresponding incoming numbers. Ranks and MOS of replacement personnel to the end of the war, however, did not always meet the needs of the division. Specialty training conducted by the 1st Marine Division in Korea helped remedy most of the worst deficiencies.

During 1952 and up until July 1953, about 500 officers and 15,500 enlisted personnel joined the 1st Marine Division in Korea every six months. Individual monthly replacement drafts typically ranged from 1,900 to 2,500, depending on the combat situation and other personnel requirements within the Marine Corps. Monthly rotation drafts of Marines going to the States or other duty stations from Korea were usually a bit smaller than the incoming numbers. However, the ranks and Military Occupational Specialty (MOS) of replacement personnel until the end of the war didn’t always match the division’s needs. Specialty training conducted by the 1st Marine Division in Korea helped address most of the significant deficiencies.

During the latter half of 1952 and throughout 1953, tours for Marine pilots/combat air crews averaged 9 months, and for aviation ground officer/enlisted personnel, 12 months. Following a detailed HQMC study of the advantages of tactical unit as opposed to individual pilot rotation, a new squadron replacement policy was instituted. This procedure assured standard precombat training of all pilots725 and development of a team spirit prior to the squadron’s arrival in the combat theater. Previously this had not been possible with the continuing turnover of 1st MAW personnel under the individual release system. Despite plans during 1952–1953 for replacement and rotation of squadrons as an entity, this did not come about until late in the war when carrier squadron VMA-312 was replaced by VMA-332 in June 1953. With the end of hostilities, tours were extended to approximately 14 months for both aviation and ground Marines.

During the second half of 1952 and into 1953, Marine pilots and combat air crews had tours that lasted around 9 months, while aviation ground officers and enlisted personnel served for about 12 months. After a thorough HQMC study on the benefits of rotating tactical units versus individual pilots, a new squadron replacement policy was put in place. This policy ensured that all pilots received standardized precombat training and developed a sense of teamwork before the squadron was deployed to the combat zone. This had not been possible earlier due to the constant turnover of 1st MAW personnel under the individual release system. Although there were plans between 1952 and 1953 for the replacement and rotation of squadrons as a whole, this didn't actually happen until later in the war when carrier squadron VMA-312 was replaced by VMA-332 in June 1953. After the fighting ended, tour lengths were extended to around 14 months for both aviation and ground Marines.

725 Even as late as July 1952, the influx of Class III volunteer reserve pilots, many of whom lacked adequate recent precombat flying experience, had presented a serious wing personnel problem and resulted in on-the-job training for pilots in the VMO-6 fixed-wing section. As another measure to improve squadron operational proficiency and partially correct weaknesses of the individual pilot rotation system and fast turnover, a 100-mission ceiling was inaugurated in February 1953. This applied to aviators in the VMF/VMA tactical units, with the exception of VMF(N)-513 pilots who were rotated after 60 missions.

725 Even as late as July 1952, the arrival of Class III volunteer reserve pilots, many of whom didn’t have enough recent flying experience before combat, created a serious issue for wing personnel and led to on-the-job training for pilots in the VMO-6 fixed-wing section. To enhance squadron operational skills and somewhat address the problems with the individual pilot rotation system and rapid turnover, a 100-mission limit was put in place in February 1953. This rule applied to aviators in the VMF/VMA tactical units, with the exception of VMF(N)-513 pilots who were rotated after 60 missions.

Buildup of Marine Corps personnel during the Korean War from the June 1950 base of 74,279 is seen in the following strength figures:

Buildup of Marine Corps personnel during the Korean War from the June 1950 base of 74,279 is seen in the following strength figures:

504

504

June 1951 192,620 Marines on active duty
June 1952 231,967 Marines on active duty
June 1953 249,219 Marines on active duty

Altogether, an estimated 424,000 Marines served during the period of hostilities. The war also witnessed a sizable increase in the number of Negro Marines on active duty. This figure grew from 2 officers/1,965 enlisted in 1950 to 19 officers/14,468 enlisted by 1953. Marine officials commented on their fine combat performance, including that of many outstanding NCOs. In line with the changing climate of events and legislation,726 the Korean War marked the first time that Negro personnel were fully integrated into the military services, in contrast to the segregated units before and during World War II.

Altogether, around 424,000 Marines served during the conflict. The war also saw a significant increase in the number of Black Marines on active duty. This number rose from 2 officers and 1,965 enlisted in 1950 to 19 officers and 14,468 enlisted by 1953. Marine officials praised their excellent combat performance, highlighting many outstanding NCOs. In line with the shifting social climate and new legislation, 726 the Korean War marked the first time that Black personnel were fully integrated into the military services, unlike the segregated units that existed before and during World War II.

726 Assignment of Negro personnel in the armed forces continued to expand as a result of the President’s 1948 Executive Order on Equality of Treatment and Opportunity. The Far East Command in July 1951 and the European Command in April 1952 initiated steps towards the racial integration of combat units, followed by similar programs for service units. Semianl Rpt SecDef (1 Jan-30 Jun 1952), p. 21.

726 Assignment of Black personnel in the armed forces continued to grow due to the President’s 1948 Executive Order on Equality of Treatment and Opportunity. The Far East Command began implementing measures for racial integration of combat units in July 1951, followed by the European Command in April 1952, which also started similar programs for service units. Semianl Rpt SecDef (1 Jan-30 Jun 1952), p. 21.

Peak strength of the Marine Corps during the Korean emergency occurred on 30 September 1953, when 261,343 were on duty. At the end of the war, 33,107 Marines (26,072 division, 7,035 wing) were stationed in Korea. The time of peak deployed strength in Korea during 1950–1953 appears to have been April 1953, when Marines of the 1st Division/Wing numbered 35,306.727

Peak strength of the Marine Corps during the Korean conflict occurred on September 30, 1953, when 261,343 were on duty. By the end of the war, 33,107 Marines (26,072 from the division, 7,035 from the wing) were stationed in Korea. The highest deployed strength in Korea during 1950–1953 seems to have been in April 1953, when Marines from the 1st Division/Wing totaled 35,306.727

727 For detailed breakdown of figures, see 1stMarDiv, 1st MAW ComdDs, Apr 53 and PacFlt Eval Rpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-54, Chap. 10, p. 10-29. Also, PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8, p. 8-33 and No. 4, Chap. 9, p. 9-26.

727 For a detailed breakdown of figures, see 1stMarDiv, 1st MAW ComdDs, Apr 53 and PacFlt Eval Rpt No. 6, Chap. 9, p. 9-54, Chap. 10, p. 10-29. Also, PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, Chap. 8, p. 8-33 and No. 4, Chap. 9, p. 9-26.

While the Korean War was still in progress, Congress passed new legislation to remedy certain shortcomings that had become apparent during the emergency, particularly the Nation’s recent experience with partial mobilization. These new laws affected the size of the FMF structure of the Marine Corps, its active-duty strength, and its reserve component.

While the Korean War was still ongoing, Congress enacted new laws to address specific issues that had emerged during the crisis, especially the Nation’s recent experience with partial mobilization. These new laws impacted the size of the FMF structure of the Marine Corps, its active-duty strength, and its reserve component.

Public Law 416, enacted 28 June 1952, represented several major advances for the Marine Corps. It authorized an increase of Marine Corps strength to a minimum of three combat divisions and three wings; raised the ceiling of regular active-duty personnel to 400,000 (except for normal expansion in a national emergency or war); and provided for the Commandant to sit as co-equal member of the505 Joint Chiefs of Staff728 on matters of direct concern to the Marine Corps. In reaffirming the role of Marine Corps in the seizure and defense of advanced naval bases, as well as land operations incident to naval campaigns, the law also cited the corollary Marine Corps mission of “performing such other duties as the President may direct.” Commenting on Public Law 416, the Commandant observed: “Our views are considered. Our interests are protected. The entire Marine Corps has benefited greatly by these gains.”729 General Shepherd further noted that the new legislation “expresses clearly the intent that the Marine Corps shall be maintained as a ready fighting force prepared to move promptly in time of peace or war to areas of trouble. It recognizes that in the future there may be a series of continuing international crises—each short of all-out war, but each requiring our nation ... to move shock forces into action on the shortest of notice.”730

Public Law 416, enacted on June 28, 1952, marked several significant advancements for the Marine Corps. It allowed for an increase in Marine Corps strength to at least three combat divisions and three wings; raised the limit of regular active-duty personnel to 400,000 (except for normal expansion during a national emergency or war); and provided for the Commandant to serve as a co-equal member of the505 Joint Chiefs of Staff on matters directly affecting the Marine Corps. By reaffirming the role of the Marine Corps in capturing and defending advanced naval bases, as well as land operations related to naval campaigns, the law also mentioned the Marine Corps' additional mission of “performing such other duties as the President may direct.” Commenting on Public Law 416, the Commandant stated: “Our views are taken into account. Our interests are safeguarded. The entire Marine Corps has greatly benefited from these advancements.”729 General Shepherd further pointed out that the new legislation “clearly expresses the intent that the Marine Corps will be maintained as a ready fighting force prepared to move quickly in times of peace or war to areas of conflict. It acknowledges that in the future, there may be a series of ongoing international crises—each falling short of full-scale war, but each requiring our nation ... to deploy shock forces into action on very short notice.”730

728 Previously, Marine Corps views had been represented at the JCS level by the SecNav or CNO.

728 Previously, the Marine Corps' perspectives had been communicated at the JCS level by the SecNav or CNO.

729 Generals’ Summary, p. 1.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Generals’ Summary, p. 1.

730 Thomas, Heinl, and Ageton, op. cit., p. 70.

730 Thomas, Heinl, and Ageton, op. cit., p. 70.

The two new laws affecting the future training and composition of the Marine Corps and other services were: (1) the Universal Military Training and Service Act (UMT&S), as amended, approved 19 June 1951; and (2) the Armed Forces Reserve Act of 1952 (Public Law 476), approved 9 July 1952. Basically, the two laws sought to establish a sounder mobilization base and were complementary in nature. The Armed Forces Reserve Act of 1952 implemented a new mobilization concept: either a partial or total callup of the Nation’s reserve forces. In the past, the M-Day target had been geared to a total war only. A limited war, resulting in a partial, Korean-type mobilization, had not been envisioned. The 1952 act thereby provided greater flexibility for dealing with both contingencies and also consolidated much of the existing legislation affecting reserve forces.

The two new laws that will impact the future training and makeup of the Marine Corps and other services were: (1) the Universal Military Training and Service Act (UMT&S), as amended, approved on June 19, 1951; and (2) the Armed Forces Reserve Act of 1952 (Public Law 476), approved on July 9, 1952. Essentially, these two laws aimed to create a more solid mobilization foundation and complemented each other. The Armed Forces Reserve Act of 1952 introduced a new mobilization concept: a partial or total call-up of the Nation’s reserve forces. Previously, the M-Day target was set for total war only. A limited war scenario, like what happened in Korea, had not been anticipated. The 1952 act thus provided more flexibility to handle both situations and also combined much of the existing legislation regarding reserve forces.

Members of the reserve were newly designated by different categories of M-Day priority: ready, standby, and retired reserve. These varying degrees of availability for callup reflected training status (OMCR/volunteer), length of prior service, and related factors (i.e., men with the least service were designated for first callup, or the “Ready” category.) Previously, they were all equally subject for recall in an emergency, regardless of prior service.

Members of the reserve were recently classified into different categories based on M-Day priority: ready, standby, and retired reserve. These different levels of availability for call-up reflected training status (OMCR/volunteer), the length of prior service, and other factors (for example, those with the least service were marked for the first call-up, or the “Ready” category). Before this change, they were all equally subject to recall in an emergency, regardless of their prior service.

506

506

The 1952 act and its new provisions thereby distinguished between a future national emergency and an all-out war. Theoretically, at least, a national emergency could be proclaimed by the President, calling for a partial mobilization, as in Korea. A declaration of war by Congress, as in World War II, would call for total mobilization. Thus the Marine Corps Reserve was newly earmarked for either a partial or total mobilization.

The 1952 act and its new rules made a clear distinction between a future national emergency and a full-scale war. In theory, the President could declare a national emergency that would require a partial mobilization, like during Korea. A declaration of war by Congress, as seen in World War II, would require complete mobilization. As a result, the Marine Corps Reserve was set aside for either partial or total mobilization.

Under UMT&S, a military service obligation of eight years was established for all young men under age 26 entering the armed forces (whether by enlistment, draft, appointment, or reserve) after 19 June 1951. The act also authorized drafting of male citizens for two-year active duty periods. This new system of eight-year obligors provided the post-Korean MCR with a stable body of personnel who had received their basic training but still had a reserve obligation.

Under UMT&S, all young men under 26 who entered the armed forces (whether by enlistment, draft, appointment, or reserve) after June 19, 1951, were required to serve an eight-year military obligation. The act also allowed for the drafting of male citizens for two-year active duty periods. This new system of eight-year obligors created a stable group of personnel for the post-Korean MCR who had completed their basic training but still had a reserve obligation.

Also as a result of the Korean mobilization, the Organized Marine Corps Reserve troop list was modified in order to provide a manpower pool for additional elements of the regular establishment. Supply, service, and security units were added to provide more of an FMF type of augmentation than that furnished by reserve units in the past. Reestablishment of the OMCR began in October 1951, when the first group of recalled reservists were released from Korean duty. Plans called for a larger reserve and more comprehensive training. Ground units were to be increased from 138 to approximately 255, with the air squadrons to number 42. The Volunteer Reserve was similarly to be strengthened by stricter requirements for participation.

Also, because of the Korean mobilization, the Organized Marine Corps Reserve troop list was updated to create a manpower pool for more regular establishment elements. Supply, service, and security units were added to provide more of an FMF-type boost than what reserve units had offered in the past. The reestablishment of the OMCR began in October 1951 when the first group of recalled reservists was released from Korean duty. The plans aimed for a larger reserve and more comprehensive training. Ground units were set to increase from 138 to around 255, with air squadrons totaling 42. The Volunteer Reserve was also going to be strengthened by stricter participation requirements.

Traditionally the mission of the Marine Corps Reserve, since 1916, had been defined as “providing trained personnel for integration into the Marine Corps in time of national emergency.” The strengthened MCR program as a result of Korea and the new laws led to a more serious reappraisal of its role. In looking to its post-Korea future, the Marine Corps planned a revitalized training program that would now “assist in extending the ‘force-in-readiness’ concept to the Marine Corps Reserve.”731 More than ever before, the Marine Corps sought to make its reserve a mirror-image of the regular establishment.

Traditionally, the mission of the Marine Corps Reserve, since 1916, was defined as “providing trained personnel for integration into the Marine Corps in times of national emergency.” The enhanced MCR program resulting from Korea and the new laws prompted a more in-depth reassessment of its role. Looking toward its post-Korea future, the Marine Corps planned a revamped training program that would now “help extend the ‘force-in-readiness’ concept to the Marine Corps Reserve.”731 More than ever before, the Marine Corps aimed to make its reserve a reflection of the regular establishment.

507

507

731 Generals’ Summary, p. 96.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Generals' Summary, p. 96.

Problems Peculiar to the Korean War732

732 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10, No. 5, Chaps. 1, 8, 9, No. 6, Chaps. 1, 9, 10; USMC Board Rpt vs. I-II; 1st Marine Division Training Bulletin No. 5-53, “Lessons Learned,” dtd 10 Jun 53, hereafter Lessons Learned 5-53; Generals’ Summary; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Heinl, Soldiers of Sea.

732 Unless stated otherwise, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10; No. 5, Chaps. 1, 8, 9; No. 6, Chaps. 1, 9, 10; USMC Board Rpt vs. I-II; 1st Marine Division Training Bulletin No. 5-53, “Lessons Learned,” dated 10 Jun 53, hereafter Lessons Learned 5-53; Generals’ Summary; Futrell, USAF, Korea; Heinl, Soldiers of Sea.

The undeclared war of Communist China against United Nations forces resulted in major changes in high-level policy and strategy that affected military tactics for the rest of the war. In an attempt to prevent escalation of Korean hostilities into an all-out nuclear war, the decision was made that U.N. forces, both ground and air, would not strike enemy bases in Chinese territory. After the beginning of truce negotiations in July 1951, the mission of Allied ground forces was changed from initiating offensive operations to one of maintaining an active defense of the MLR across Korea. The basic strategy became one of containment and prevention of any further enemy gains south of the 38th Parallel. It involved attempting to inflict maximum losses on the enemy while attempting to minimize those of the UNC. Militarily, these restrictions removed the possibility of winning a decisive victory. For the next two years, fighting seesawed back and forth across the parallel.

The undeclared war of Communist China against United Nations forces led to significant changes in high-level policies and strategies that impacted military tactics for the remainder of the war. To avoid escalating the Korean conflict into a full-scale nuclear war, it was decided that U.N. forces, both ground and air, would not target enemy bases on Chinese soil. After truce negotiations began in July 1951, the mission of Allied ground forces shifted from launching offensive operations to maintaining an active defense along the MLR across Korea. The main strategy became one of containment, aiming to prevent any further enemy advances south of the 38th Parallel. This approach focused on inflicting maximum damage on the enemy while trying to minimize losses for the UNC. Militarily, these restrictions ruled out the possibility of achieving a decisive victory. For the next two years, fighting fluctuated back and forth across the parallel.

Static and defensive warfare thus characterized the greater part of the Korean War. During this period, the Marine division performed a land war mission similar to other Eighth Army components while Marine aviation squadrons flew under control of Fifth Air Force. Both the 1st Marine Division and 1st Marine Aircraft Wing faced tactical restrictions that resulted from the strategic policies governing the overall role of EUSAK and FAF. Problem areas arose from the limited nature of this particular war. These involved not only the shift in the UNC strategy from an offensive posture to a defensive (“active defense”) concept, but also from the paralyzing effect of the protracted truce negotiations on battlefield tactics.

Static and defensive warfare characterized most of the Korean War. During this time, the Marine division carried out land war missions similar to other Eighth Army units, while Marine aviation squadrons operated under the Fifth Air Force. Both the 1st Marine Division and 1st Marine Aircraft Wing faced tactical limitations that stemmed from the strategic policies shaping the overall role of EUSAK and FAF. Issues arose from the limited nature of this war. These included not only the shift in the UNC strategy from an offensive stance to a defensive (“active defense”) approach but also the crippling impact of the prolonged truce negotiations on battlefield tactics.

For nearly two years (16 months in West Korea and 5 months earlier while in IX Corps on the East-Central front), the Marine division assumed an unaccustomed defensive role. Such a sustained, basically non-win position was hardly morale-building to the average Marine unable to see personally any yardage gained, any progress made in his particular war. Not surprisingly, such a passive battle assignment did result in a temporary loss of amphibious skills on508 the part of both individual Marines and the division. End-of-war evaluations noted that “long and indecisive defensive situations such as existed in Korea do little to foster the offensive spirit so long traditional with the Marine Corps and certainly tend to detract from the immediate amphibious readiness required of a Marine Division.”733

For almost two years (16 months in West Korea and 5 months earlier with IX Corps on the East-Central front), the Marine division took on an unusual defensive role. This long period, characterized by being on the defense without substantial victories, was hardly uplifting for the average Marine, who couldn’t see any progress made in his fight. Unsurprisingly, this kind of passive duty led to a temporary decline in amphibious skills for both individual Marines and the division. End-of-war evaluations noted that “long and indecisive defensive situations such as existed in Korea do little to foster the offensive spirit so long traditional with the Marine Corps and certainly tend to detract from the immediate amphibious readiness required of a Marine Division.”508733

733 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-2.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-2.

Prior to its tour of duty as I Corps reserve in mid-1953, the 1st Marine Division had noted that it would “require intensive training and reequipping for a period of at least 60 days” upon release from active combat in order to “reach a desirable standard of amphibious readiness.”734 Rigorous MARLEX and RCT exercises initiated in June 1952 after the division had moved to the western coastal sector off the Yellow Sea and expanded during its I Corps reserve period, were important steps in rectifying this skill attrition. This was, of course, in addition to the continuous training schedule in offensive and defensive warfare maintained by the division for the battalions and regiment periodically in regular reserve status.

Before its deployment as I Corps reserve in mid-1953, the 1st Marine Division realized that it would need “intensive training and reequipping for at least 60 days” after leaving active combat to “achieve a satisfactory level of amphibious readiness.”734 The rigorous MARLEX and RCT exercises that started in June 1952, after the division relocated to the western coastal area by the Yellow Sea and intensified during its I Corps reserve period, were crucial in addressing this decline in skills. This was, of course, on top of the ongoing training program in offensive and defensive warfare that the division maintained for the battalions and regiment that were periodically in regular reserve status.

734 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-5. Subsequently, the division’s ground readiness was rated as excellent; a conservative estimate placed individual unit amphibious readiness at between 25 and 60 percent; and indicated a 30-day training period would bring the division to complete amphibious readiness. Generals’ Summary, p. 53.

734 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-5. Later on, the division’s ground readiness was rated as excellent; a cautious estimate put individual unit amphibious readiness at about 25 to 60 percent; and it suggested that a 30-day training period would achieve full amphibious readiness for the division. Generals’ Summary, p. 53.

Outpost warfare in West Korea was characterized by overextended MLR frontage. The more than 60,000 yards held by the division while in the I Corps sector resulted in a thinly-held line which invited penetration and encirclement. “Normal” frontage for an infantry division in defense with two regiments on line was considered by U.S. Army doctrine to be 8–9,000 yards. Even with four MLR regiments (two Marine, 1st KMC/RCT, and KPR) and the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion on line (the third Marine regiment in reserve with a counterattack mission), this was a very lengthy sector. It was further complicated by the Han River obstacle on the left flank and the Imjin River to the rear of the sector that separated Marine frontline troops from rear support and reserve units.

Outpost warfare in West Korea was marked by an overstretched MLR frontline. The division held more than 60,000 yards in the I Corps sector, resulting in a lightly defended line that was vulnerable to penetration and encirclement. The U.S. Army considered a “normal” defense frontline for an infantry division with two regiments in position to be around 8,000 to 9,000 yards. Even with four MLR regiments (two Marine, 1st KMC/RCT, and KPR) and the 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion on the line (with the third Marine regiment in reserve for counterattacks), this was still a very long sector. It was made even more challenging by the Han River obstacle on the left flank and the Imjin River to the rear of the sector, which separated Marine frontline troops from support and reserve units.

Infantry battalions thus occupied “extremely wide fronts, as a rule 3,500 to 5,000 yards,” while individual rifle companies were assigned anywhere from “1,200 to 1,700 yards of the MLR to occupy and defend.”735 Prior to the battle of the Hook in October 1952, one of the major engagements on the western front, the 7th Marines at the far right end of the division sector had emplaced all three battalions509 on line, rather than the customary procedure of two on line and the third in reserve. There was little other choice, for the regimental sector exceeded 10,000 yards, “more properly the frontage for a division rather than a regiment.”736

Infantry battalions ended up occupying “extremely wide fronts, usually 3,500 to 5,000 yards,” while individual rifle companies were tasked with defending “anywhere between 1,200 to 1,700 yards of the MLR.”735 Before the battle of the Hook in October 1952, one of the significant engagements on the western front, the 7th Marines at the far right end of the division sector had positioned all three battalions509 on the line, instead of the usual setup of two on the line and the third in reserve. There wasn’t much choice in the matter, as the regimental sector stretched over 10,000 yards, “more appropriately the frontage for a division rather than a regiment.”736

735 Lessons Learned 5-53, p. 19.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Lessons Learned 5-53, p. 19.

736 Hicks, Outpost Warfare, p. 107.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hicks, *Outpost Warfare*, p. 107.

During a 100 percent watch, at least theoretically, a Marine could be spaced at intervals about every 10 to 15 yards along the MLR. A night 50 percent watch—with personnel of rifle platoons assigned to COPs, listening posts, combat patrols, repair of fortifications, and the KSC nightly supply trains—not infrequently spread personnel to a point where the MLR was dangerously thin, often with 50 yards between men.737 Such an over-wide lineal deployment dissipated defensive strength and made mutually supporting fires difficult.

During a full watch, at least in theory, a Marine could be stationed every 10 to 15 yards along the MLR. During a night watch at 50 percent—with rifle platoon members assigned to COPs, listening posts, combat patrols, repairing fortifications, and the KSC’s nightly supply trains—personnel often spread out to the point where the MLR became dangerously thin, with gaps of up to 50 yards between them.737 This overly extended line of deployment weakened defensive strength and made it hard to support each other's fire effectively.

737 Lessons Learned, op. cit.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Lessons Learned, source cited.

Division artillery, too, was thinly positioned across the wide sector, making it difficult to execute counterbattery missions. This led to development of the innovative counter-counterbattery program (or “roving guns”) devised by the 11th Marines in May 1952 to deliberately mislead the CCF as to the strength and location of divisional artillery; the situation resulted as well in the reinforcement of the four Marine artillery battalions by heavier I Corps 155mm and 8-inch howitzers. The static situation in the prolonged land campaign also led to the growth of large, semi-permanent type camps which somewhat hampered traditional Marine mobility. Organizations had additional personnel and equipment above T/O and T/E because of the peculiar defense requirements of the sustained battle situation.

Division artillery was also sparsely deployed across the wide area, making it tough to carry out counterbattery operations. This led to the creation of the innovative counter-counterbattery program (or "roving guns") developed by the 11th Marines in May 1952 to intentionally mislead the CCF about the strength and location of divisional artillery. The situation also resulted in the reinforcement of the four Marine artillery battalions with heavier I Corps 155mm and 8-inch howitzers. The static situation in the prolonged land campaign also resulted in the establishment of large, semi-permanent camps, which somewhat hindered traditional Marine mobility. Organizations had extra personnel and equipment beyond T/O and T/E due to the unique defense needs of the ongoing battle situation.

The lack of depth in the defense did not provide for receiving the shock of a determined enemy attack, particularly since the normal OPLR had been withdrawn to strengthen the overextended MLR in April 1952, shortly after the division’s arrival in West Korea. Ultimately, as we have seen, this main line of resistance concept was modified and rather than a long thin trenchline the Marine division employed a defense-in-depth concept using a series of strongpoints, as in Boulder City and the organization of the postwar main battle position. In contrast to the Marine situation (and that of most other divisions in the EUSAK line), the CCF confronting the 1st Marine Division beyond No-Man’s-Land deployed their forces in great depth, boasted unlimited manpower, and employed an elastic type of defense on mutually supporting key terrain features. The510 enemy had also developed an artillery capability that was numerically superior to ours. And they held high ground positions that overlooked virtually the entire Marine front.

The shallow defense didn’t prepare for the impact of a determined enemy attack, especially since the normal OPLR had been pulled back to reinforce the overstretched MLR in April 1952, shortly after the division arrived in West Korea. Ultimately, as we’ve seen, this main line of resistance concept was adjusted, and instead of a long, thin trenchline, the Marine division adopted a defense-in-depth strategy using a series of strongpoints, similar to those in Boulder City and the setup of the postwar main battle position. Unlike the Marine situation (and that of most other divisions in the EUSAK line), the CCF that faced the 1st Marine Division beyond No-Man’s-Land deployed their forces deeply, had an unlimited supply of manpower, and used an elastic defense strategy on mutually supporting key terrain features. The510 enemy also developed an artillery capability that outnumbered ours and occupied high ground positions that overlooked almost the entire Marine front.

As in World War II, Korean operations provided another instance in which various military services and components were coordinated by joint commands: EUSAK for the ground defense and FAF for air. These massive operational command structures accomplished the desired goals. On lower level echelons, however, some policies tended to be so restrictive that they precluded normal combat initiative and aggressiveness. The net result was thus to allow the enemy to maintain the tactical initiative while, in effect, hampering UNC counter-defense measures.

As in World War II, the Korean operations were another example where different military branches and units worked together under joint commands: EUSAK for ground defense and FAF for air support. These large operational command structures achieved their objectives. However, at lower levels, some policies were so restrictive that they limited normal combat initiative and aggressiveness. As a result, this allowed the enemy to keep the tactical advantage, effectively hindering UNC's counter-defense efforts.

New directives issued by I Corps in late 1952, for example, changed the corps policy of large-scale raids for prisoners, previously encouraged in the spring of 1952, which affected infantry raids and patrol activities for the rest of the war. Plans for all raids, company size or larger, required both I Corps and EUSAK approval, and were to be submitted 10 days prior to planned execution. Complete patrol plans for even platoon-size operations had to be submitted at least 24 hours in advance. Although the reason for the new policy stemmed from a desire to minimize casualties during the prolonged stalemate, negative effects of such a lead-time factor were quickly apparent. Battalion or regimental commanders frequently were unable to capitalize on targets of opportunity that developed or changes in local conditions, such as weather or troop deployment, to gain maximum effectiveness from the operation.

New directives issued by I Corps in late 1952 changed the corps policy on large-scale raids for prisoners, which had been encouraged in the spring of 1952. This affected infantry raids and patrol activities for the rest of the war. Plans for all raids, company size or larger, now required approval from both I Corps and EUSAK, and had to be submitted 10 days before the planned execution. Even complete patrol plans for platoon-size operations needed to be submitted at least 24 hours in advance. Although the reason for the new policy was to reduce casualties during the prolonged stalemate, the negative effects of this lead-time requirement quickly became clear. Battalion or regimental commanders often found it hard to take advantage of unexpected targets or changes in local conditions, such as weather or troop movements, to maximize the effectiveness of their operations.

Directives covering offensive maneuvers that could be taken on local initiative were so restrictive that “any independent action below the level of the Division Commander became practically nonexistent.”738 Similarly, counterattack plans to retake previously considered major COPs were countermanded, on several occasions, by corps or army higher echelons shortly before jump-off time with the reason given that the action was not worth the cost of further UNC casualties or possible jeopardy to the fragile peace negotiations.

Directives about offensive actions that could be taken on local initiative were so limiting that “any independent action below the level of the Division Commander became practically nonexistent.”738 Likewise, plans to counterattack and reclaim previously deemed major COPs were canceled multiple times by corps or army higher-ups just before the start, with the justification that the action wasn’t worth the risk of additional UNC casualties or the potential danger to the fragile peace talks.

738 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-84.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-84.

Allied offensive capability was further restricted by various EUSAK and I Corps orders issued during the protracted period of truce talks. Many directives had as their well-intentioned rationale the desire511 not to upset the precarious balance in UNC-Communist negotiations by providing the enemy further opportunities for exploitative propaganda victories. The actual record shows, however, that the Communists were never at a loss to conjure up and capitalize on fabricated “events” that suited their purpose—whether charging UNC aircraft had violated the Kaesong neutrality strip, that American fliers were engaging in germ warfare, or deliberately instigating POW camp disruptions and breakouts.

Allied offensive capability was further limited by various EUSAK and I Corps orders issued during the extended truce talks. Many directives were well-intentioned, aiming to avoid disturbing the fragile balance in UNC-Communist negotiations by preventing the enemy from seizing additional opportunities for propaganda victories. However, the actual record shows that the Communists were never short on creating and taking advantage of made-up “events” that suited their agenda—whether it was claiming that UNC aircraft violated the Kaesong neutrality zone, that American pilots were engaging in germ warfare, or deliberately triggering disruptions and breakouts in POW camps.

Neutrality restrictions739 on supporting arms within the entire Kaesong-Panmunjom-Munsan-ni area further complicated the UNC tactical situation and hampered both offensive and defensive operations of the 1st Marine Division. This was particularly true of the center Marine regimental sector which was bisected by the Panmunjom corridor and the no-fire lines. The truce talk neutral zone restrictions prevented the Marines in this area from massing their artillery fires on a desirable scale and also, at times, interfered with proper CAS delivery forward of the MLR. The numerous and sometimes conflicting “no-fly, no-fire” restricting lines stemmed from original agreements made between UNC and Communist representatives in 1951. Subsequently, however, the prohibitions against firing any type of weapon in the area were modified from time to time and added to by FAF, EUSAK, and I Corps, “each time adding to the frustration of the local commanders.”740

Neutrality restrictions739 on supporting arms throughout the Kaesong-Panmunjom-Munsan-ni area complicated the UNC tactical situation and hindered both offensive and defensive operations of the 1st Marine Division. This was especially true for the central Marine regimental sector, which was split by the Panmunjom corridor and the no-fire lines. The truce talks’ neutral zone restrictions stopped the Marines in this area from grouping their artillery fire effectively and sometimes interfered with proper CAS delivery in front of the MLR. The various and sometimes conflicting “no-fly, no-fire” lines originated from agreements made between UNC and Communist representatives in 1951. However, the restrictions on firing any type of weapon in the area were modified periodically and added to by FAF, EUSAK, and I Corps, “each time adding to the frustration of the local commanders.”740

739 Basically, these consisted of a no-hostile-act three-mile circular area radiating from Kaesong; a six-mile radius forbidding FAF planes in the skies over Kaesong and another two-mile, no-fly radius over Panmunjom; and various other prohibitions on military craft, air-dropped leaflets, and firing of artillery to include propaganda shell leaflets.

739 Essentially, these included a three-mile circular zone around Kaesong where no hostile actions were allowed; a six-mile radius that prohibited FAF planes from flying over Kaesong, and an additional two-mile no-fly zone over Panmunjom; as well as various other restrictions on military aircraft, aerial leaflets, and artillery fire, including propaganda shells.

740 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, 9-78.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, 9-78.

The double-standard effect of the neutrality restrictions became readily apparent, however. The CCF artfully used this area, by means of his tactics of “creeping” toward the Allied MLR, as a supply and reserve buildup location. The enemy emplaced artillery, assembled troops, and even used the neutral territory for equipment buildups, including tanks, in the Kaesong vicinity.741 Thus the restrictive lines gave the enemy an opportunity to maneuver within an approximate 12 square-mile area, all within effective artillery range and outside of the Kaesong-Panmunjom restricted territory, but UNC units were powerless to take any action.

The double standard from the neutrality restrictions quickly became clear. The CCF cleverly used this area, employing tactics of “creeping” toward the Allied MLR, as a spot for supply and reserve buildup. The enemy set up artillery, gathered troops, and even utilized neutral territory for equipment stockpiling, including tanks, near Kaesong.741 This allowed the enemy to maneuver within roughly a 12 square-mile area, all within effective artillery range and outside the Kaesong-Panmunjom restricted zone, while UNC units were helpless to respond.

512

512

741 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 9-37.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 4, p. 9-37.

Intelligence operations, during the latter stages of the war, were not considered optimum—for either the division or wing. While dug in on the western end of I Corps, the Marine information effort had been “seriously hampered by the lack of prisoners of war.”742 Only 94 CCF had been captured by the division during the period, compared with more than 2,000 prisoners taken earlier on the East-Central front.743 This deficiency was attributed to the “static defensive situation, the reluctance of the Chinese to surrender and the heavy volume of fire placed on our reconnaissance patrols.”744

Intelligence operations in the later stages of the war weren't seen as ideal—for either the division or the wing. While stationed at the western end of I Corps, the Marine information effort was “seriously hindered by the lack of prisoners of war.”742 Only 94 CCF soldiers were captured by the division during this time, compared to over 2,000 prisoners taken earlier on the East-Central front.743 This shortfall was due to the “static defensive situation, the Chinese's unwillingness to surrender, and the heavy fire directed at our reconnaissance patrols.”744

742 Generals’ Summary, p. 39.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Generals’ Summary, p. 39.

743 Between December 1950-July 1953, the 1st Marine Division took 2,445 NKPA/CCF, with an additional 656 enemy seized by its attached 1st KMC/RCT, or a total of 3,101. Marine capturing units included Headquarters Battalion, 1st Tank Battalion, 11th Marines, the three infantry regiments, and 7th Motor Transport Battalion. An additional 4,792 POWs were also taken by the 1st Division in the early Inchon-Seoul operations. G-1 Folder, Aug 53 (Box 4), “Personnel Periodic Rpt. No. 94,” dtd 15–31 Aug 53; USMC Board Rpt, v. I, p. II-B-46.

743 Between December 1950 and July 1953, the 1st Marine Division captured 2,445 NKPA/CCF, with an additional 656 enemy taken by its attached 1st KMC/RCT, for a total of 3,101. The Marine units involved in the captures included the Headquarters Battalion, 1st Tank Battalion, 11th Marines, the three infantry regiments, and the 7th Motor Transport Battalion. An additional 4,792 POWs were also captured by the 1st Division during the early Inchon-Seoul operations. G-1 Folder, Aug 53 (Box 4), “Personnel Periodic Rpt. No. 94,” dtd 15–31 Aug 53; USMC Board Rpt, v. I, p. II-B-46.

744 Generals’ Summary, p. 39.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Generals' Summary, p. 39.

In the air, photo reconnaissance results were not rated entirely satisfactory as a source of current information by either air or ground Marines. The command channels in effect designated the Air Force as responsible agent for control and coordination of all photo missions in Korea. Requests for photographic missions thus were relayed on to FAF and flown by its Reconnaissance Wing or the Marines’ own VMJ-1 squadron. The system produced relatively good vertical coverage with photos available in about 10 days. Special requests for immediate coverage on areas of local importance, however, customarily were either not flown or “delayed to the point where they were of no value”745 because the tactical situation had been changed.

In the air, the results from photo reconnaissance were not considered fully satisfactory by either air or ground Marines. The command structure designated the Air Force as the responsible agency for controlling and coordinating all photo missions in Korea. Requests for photographic missions were passed on to FAF and carried out by its Reconnaissance Wing or the Marines’ own VMJ-1 squadron. This system provided relatively good vertical coverage, with photos available in about 10 days. However, special requests for immediate coverage in areas of local importance were usually either not carried out or “delayed to the point where they were of no value”745 because the tactical situation had changed.

745 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

Delays were due to the shortage of photographic aircraft throughout FAF and the limited provision in T/Os for photo interpretation. Intelligence of air-strike targets (particularly post-strike) was consistently mediocre. Oblique photos of frontline positions took an average of three-four days to be processed and sometimes longer. As an expedient, aerial observers began to shoot their own vertical and oblique photos with hand-held cameras slung over the side of a VMO-6 plane.

Delays were caused by the lack of photographic aircraft across FAF and the limited guidelines in T/Os for photo analysis. Intelligence on air-strike targets (especially after strikes) was consistently mediocre. Oblique photos of frontline positions took an average of three to four days to process, and sometimes even longer. As a workaround, aerial observers started taking their own vertical and oblique photos using handheld cameras that they hung over the side of a VMO-6 plane.

Probably the most serious problem of all, from the Marine Corps point of view, was that during much of the Korean War Marine air-ground components, trained to work as a team, were to a large513 extent precluded from operating together. The separate missions of the wing and division reflected, on a smaller scale, the divergent UNC air and ground doctrine and tactics. After the early moving battles, Korean hostilities had settled down to a protracted land war in which ground and air tactical commands did not operate jointly and were never coordinated to deal a truly devastating blow to the enemy. Since the Korean War was a limited one most of the fighting was confined to the stabilized front across Korea. Both air and naval forces were viewed largely as supporting arms for the ground operation.

Probably the biggest issue for the Marine Corps during the Korean War was that for much of the conflict, Marine air-ground units—trained to work as a team—were largely unable to operate together. The separate missions of the wing and division reflected, on a smaller scale, the different air and ground strategies and tactics of the United Nations Command. After the initial battles, the fighting in Korea turned into a long, drawn-out land war where ground and air commands did not work together and were never coordinated to deliver a truly crushing blow to the enemy. Since the Korean War was limited, most of the fighting was focused on a stabilized front across Korea. Air and naval forces were mainly seen as support for ground operations.

Due to political-military considerations, UNC tactical air power had been, in effect, handcuffed so that its use would not appear “overly aggressive” and threaten an enlargement of the Korean hostilities into a nuclear armageddon of World War III.746 Since the earliest days of the war, a strict embargo had been placed on any bombing of Chinese rear supply areas or industrial complexes although it was obvious that much of the enemy’s logistical strength lay beyond the Manchurian border.

Due to political and military reasons, UNC tactical air power was effectively restrained so that its use wouldn't come across as “too aggressive” and risk escalating the Korean conflict into a nuclear World War III. Since the earliest days of the war, there had been a strict ban on bombing Chinese supply areas or industrial sites, even though it was clear that a significant part of the enemy’s logistical capacity was located beyond the Manchurian border.

746 Much of the unwritten but basic policy mitigating against full use of Allied air superiority stemmed from the desire to employ “humanitarian” standards in the UNC war effort. Following WW II there had been wide criticism of the “moral wrong of massed air bombardment” as well as employment of the atomic bomb by the U. S. to hasten the end of the war. The UNC goal, in Korea, was to avoid needless civilian casualties and for air strikes to be directed against purely military targets. Futrell, USAF Korea, p. 41.

746 Much of the unwritten but fundamental policy limiting the full use of Allied air superiority came from the desire to apply “humanitarian” standards in the UNC war effort. After World War II, there was significant criticism of the “moral wrong of massed air bombardment” as well as the use of the atomic bomb by the U.S. to speed up the end of the war. The UNC's goal in Korea was to prevent unnecessary civilian casualties and to ensure that air strikes were aimed only at military targets. Futrell, USAF Korea, p. 41.

Air efforts were concentrated largely on nuisance or harassing raids within North Korea and close air support efforts of various types, rather than a systematic destruction of the enemy’s primary supply installation’s. Some ranking officers had informally interpreted official Washington policy as “Don’t employ airpower so that the enemy will get mad and won’t sign the armistice.”747 Indeed, it was not until after the Communists had rejected what the UNC called its “final truce package,” in April 1952, that it was decided to exert greater pressure against the Communists. The list of approved aerial targets was then enlarged to include North Korean hydroelectric power facilities, previously exempted from air attack.

Air operations mainly focused on nuisance or harassing raids within North Korea and various types of close air support, rather than systematically destroying the enemy’s main supply installations. Some senior officers had informally interpreted the policy from Washington as “Don’t use airpower so the enemy doesn’t get upset and won’t agree to the armistice.” Indeed, it wasn’t until after the Communists rejected what the UNC called its “final truce package” in April 1952 that it was decided to apply more pressure against them. The list of approved aerial targets was then expanded to include North Korean hydroelectric power facilities, which had been previously protected from air attacks.

747 Ibid., p. 402.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 402.

From late 1950 until early 1953, Marine air squadrons were assigned directly by FAF, with CG, 1st MAW, having virtually no tactical control over his own units. Marine Corps aerial doctrine traditionally employed close air support of ground operations as the514 primary role of its air arm. FEAF and FAF, however, in their interpretation of employment of tactical air power directed FAF maximum efforts toward interdiction missions, sometimes even to the expense of immediate CAS needs.748 As Far East Air Forces stated late in 1951, “when required, close air support of United Nations Army forces may take precedence over other FEAF programs.”749 Interdiction, general support, and close support missions were the normal order of priorities flown by FEAF-FAF.

From late 1950 until early 1953, Marine air squadrons were assigned directly by FAF, with CG, 1st MAW, having virtually no tactical control over his own units. The Marine Corps aerial doctrine traditionally used close air support for ground operations as the primary role of its air arm. However, FEAF and FAF, in their approach to using tactical air power, directed FAF's maximum efforts toward interdiction missions, sometimes even at the expense of immediate CAS needs. As Far East Air Forces stated late in 1951, “when required, close air support of United Nations Army forces may take precedence over other FEAF programs.” Interdiction, general support, and close support missions were the normal order of priorities flown by FEAF-FAF.

748 Comments Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 430–431: “Despite the fact that responsible Eighth Army and Fifth Air Force commanders had decided that the rail-interdiction attacks would best accomplish the United Nations mission in Korea, Eighth Army subordinate commanders were gravely dissatisfied with the limitations [96 sorties daily for the entire Eighth Army front, decided upon by EUSAK-FAF in November 1951] placed on close support.” One of those dissenting subordinates at the time was CG, 1st Mar Div. Following the September 1951 heavy fighting in the Punchbowl area, General Thomas officially described the Marine division’s air support as unsatisfactory and stated his division had “taken unnecessary casualties because its air support had not been adequate or timely.” Average elapsed time between the division’s CAS requests and its 187 approved missions that month had been nearly two hours. Only 32 immediate air-support requests had been filled within 30 minutes.

748 Comments Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 430–431: “Even though the responsible commanders of the Eighth Army and Fifth Air Force determined that the rail-interdiction attacks would best serve the United Nations mission in Korea, subordinate commanders of the Eighth Army were seriously unhappy with the restrictions [96 sorties daily for the entire Eighth Army front, set by EUSAK-FAF in November 1951] on close support.” One of those dissenting subordinates at that time was the Commanding General of the 1st Marine Division. After the intense fighting in the Punchbowl area in September 1951, General Thomas officially deemed the Marine division’s air support as inadequate and claimed his division had “suffered unnecessary casualties due to insufficient or untimely air support.” The average time from the division’s close air support requests to the 187 approved missions that month had been nearly two hours. Only 32 immediate air-support requests were fulfilled within 30 minutes.

749 Ibid., p. 432.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., p. 432.

Operation STRANGLE, the 10-month, all-out, air interdiction campaign during 1951–1952 originally had as its objective the destruction of the North Korean road-rail network. The interdiction program had been defined at first as a move to “paralyze enemy transportation in the zone between the railheads at the 39th Parallel and the front lines.”750 and later somewhat more conservatively as a measure to so “disrupt the enemy’s lines of communication ... that he will be unable to contain a determined offensive by friendly forces ... or to mount a sustained offensive himself.”751

Operation CHOKE, the extensive 10-month air campaign from 1951 to 1952, was initially aimed at destroying the North Korean road and rail network. The goal of the campaign was first described as an attempt to "paralyze enemy transportation in the area between the railheads at the 39th Parallel and the front lines."750 Later, it was more cautiously framed as a way to "disrupt the enemy’s lines of communication ... so that they won't be able to contain a strong offensive from friendly forces ... or launch a sustained offensive themselves."751

750 Ibid., p. 296.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 296.

751 Ibid., pp. 435–436.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., pp. 435–436.

Despite more than 87,552 interdiction sorties flown during the period, CinCFE daily intelligence summaries showed that aerial harassment of the CCF had not hindered their defensive efforts. Instead, by the summer of 1952 the enemy had “actually doubled in troop strength, reinforced their artillery strength to equal that of the UN forces, developed a tremendous AA capability, and established the capability for launching a general offensive.”752 With UNC air and sea superiority, the Chinese Communists had still succeeded in keeping their main supply route open. Rail track cuts were being repaired in as little as 36 hours. And the CCF was employing515 more fire power than ever: in May 1952, some 102,000 rounds fell against UNC positions compared to only 8,000 the previous July.

Despite more than 87,552 interdiction sorties flown during this time, CinCFE daily intelligence reports indicated that aerial harassment of the CCF hadn’t affected their defensive efforts. By the summer of 1952, the enemy had “actually doubled in troop strength, boosted their artillery to match that of the UN forces, developed a significant AA capability, and established the ability to launch a general offensive.”752 Even with UNC air and sea dominance, the Chinese Communists managed to keep their main supply route open. Rail track repairs were completed in as little as 36 hours. Additionally, the CCF was using515 more firepower than ever: in May 1952, roughly 102,000 rounds hit UNC positions, compared to only 8,000 the previous July.

752 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-58.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-58.

Even the retiring UNC Supreme Commander, General Ridgway, admitted before Congressional representatives in 1952 that the enemy had greater offensive potential than ever before, and the Commander, Seventh Fleet, Vice Admiral Joseph J. Clark, declared flatly: “The interdiction program was a failure ... It did not interdict.”753 USAF spokesmen felt it had attained its limited purpose but opined: “Seen abstractly, the United Nations railway-interdiction campaign was defensive and preventive rather than offensive and positive.”754 In early 1952, CG, FAF, General Everest, recognizing that his pilots “had been so long engaged in interdiction attacks that they were losing their skills in close support”755 inaugurated a new system. Beginning in March all fighter-bomber squadrons were to be rotated on weekly close-support missions.

Even the retiring UNC Supreme Commander, General Ridgway, admitted before Congressional representatives in 1952 that the enemy had more offensive potential than ever before, and the Commander of the Seventh Fleet, Vice Admiral Joseph J. Clark, stated clearly: “The interdiction program was a failure ... It did not interdict.”753 USAF spokesmen believed it had achieved its limited purpose but said: “Viewed abstractly, the United Nations railway-interdiction campaign was defensive and preventive rather than offensive and positive.”754 In early 1952, CG, FAF, General Everest, recognizing that his pilots “had been so long engaged in interdiction attacks that they were losing their skills in close support”755 introduced a new system. Starting in March, all fighter-bomber squadrons were to be rotated on weekly close-support missions.

753 Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea, p. 270.

753 Cagle and Manson, Sea War, Korea, p. 270.

754 Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 437–438.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Futrell, USAF, Korea, pp. 437–438.

755 Ibid., p. 434.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 434.

Actually, the skies had begun to clear for Marine aviation operational difficulties by the latter half of 1952. A better understanding had developed between both high-level officials and the working day-to-day liaison operations at JOC CG, 1st MAW had “established his position so firmly he was able to guide establishment of the policies which governed his operations merely by expressing his desires to CG 5th AF.”756 The battle for Bunker Hill in August 1952 had marked excellent cooperation between Eighth Army and FAF, with the 1st Marine Division receiving air priority for two days. In any event, matters were substantially improved from late 1951-early 1952 when, during a 12-month period, 1st MAW CAS sorties for 1st MarDiv had plummeted to the incredibly low figure of 1,956757 or 15.8 percent of the wing’s total 12,372 CAS sorties during FY 1952 (1Jul51–30Jun52).

Actually, by the second half of 1952, conditions for Marine aviation had begun to improve. There was a better understanding between high-level officials and the daily liaison operations at JOC CG, 1st MAW, which had solidified its position so much that he could shape the policies governing his operations simply by communicating his needs to CG 5th AF.756 The battle for Bunker Hill in August 1952 showcased excellent collaboration between the Eighth Army and FAF, with the 1st Marine Division receiving air priority for two days. Overall, things had significantly improved compared to late 1951 and early 1952, when, over a 12-month period, the 1st MAW's CAS sorties for the 1st MarDiv had dropped to the remarkably low number of 1,956757 or 15.8 percent of the wing’s total 12,372 CAS sorties during FY 1952 (1Jul51–30Jun52).

756 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 9-45.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, pp. 9-45.

757 By contrast: in FY 1951, 1st MAW CAS sorties for 1stMarDiv were 7,000 of total 14,028 CAS sorties, or 50 percent; for FY 1953, the figure was 4,912 of total 14,540 CAS sorties, or 32.4 percent. Generals’ Summary, Chart C, following p. 58.

757 By contrast: in FY 1951, the 1st MAW CAS sorties for the 1st MarDiv were 7,000 out of a total of 14,028 CAS sorties, which is 50 percent; for FY 1953, the figure was 4,912 out of a total of 14,540 CAS sorties, or 32.4 percent. Generals’ Summary, Chart C, following p. 58.

Commenting on this unhappy period for both air and infantry Marines, Lieutenant General Richard C. Mangrum, USMC (Retired), who was CO, MAG-12 during part of the STRANGLE operations, said “for the rest of 1951 and well into 1952 the major effort516 of my Group and of MAG-33 was devoted to cutting the rail lines in North Korea. Without success, of course. Little by little we were able to increase the percentages of effort devoted to close support of the troops.”758 And by the last six months of the war the bulk of all CAS missions received by the division were flown by 1st MAW aircraft, in contrast to earlier periods when a third or half of the division’s sorties were Marine-flown. As the last Korean War Wing CG noted, despite basic differences between Army-Air Force and Marine Corps-Navy concept and tactics, ultimately “the commanders of the Fifth Air Force in actual daily practice decentralized control to a marked degree.”759

Commenting on this difficult time for both air and infantry Marines, Lieutenant General Richard C. Mangrum, USMC (Retired), who was the CO of MAG-12 during part of the STRANGLE operations, said, “For the rest of 1951 and well into 1952, the main focus of my Group and MAG-33 was on disrupting the rail lines in North Korea. Unsurprisingly, we had little success. Gradually, we were able to increase the amount of effort dedicated to providing close support for the troops.”758 By the last six months of the war, the majority of all CAS missions flown for the division were carried out by 1st MAW aircraft, unlike earlier times when a third or half of the division’s sorties were flown by Marines. As the last Korean War Wing CG noted, despite fundamental differences between Army-Air Force and Marine Corps-Navy concepts and tactics, ultimately “the commanders of the Fifth Air Force in actual daily practice decentralized control to a significant extent.”759

758 Quoted in Heinl, Soldiers of Sea, p. 647.

758 Quoted in Heinl, Soldiers of Sea, p. 647.

759 MajGen V. E. Megee, “Tactical Air Support of Ground Forces,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 12 (Dec 55), p. 17.

759 MajGen V. E. Megee, “Tactical Air Support of Ground Forces,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 12 (Dec 55), p. 17.

Throughout the war, however, a lack of standardized terms and differences in request procedures continued to exist. (This was resolved by using Marine control procedures when flying for the division, and Army-Air Force procedures when scrambled on flights for other divisions.) Whereas EUSAK-FAF considered strikes inside the bombline760 as “close air support” and those outside it as “general support,” the Marine CAS concept was one of support in close proximity to frontlines (ranging from 50 to 500 yards out) that affects the fire and maneuver of those ground units. In the hands of Marine FACs, Marine planes employed on close support strikes had a definite influence on the MLR tactical situation.

Throughout the war, there was still a lack of standardized terms and differences in request procedures. (This was addressed by using Marine control procedures when flying for the division and Army-Air Force procedures when scrambling on flights for other divisions.) While EUSAK-FAF saw strikes inside the bombline760 as “close air support” and those outside it as “general support,” the Marine CAS concept focused on support near the front lines (ranging from 50 to 500 yards out) that directly impacts the operations of ground units. In the hands of Marine FACs, Marine planes conducting close support strikes had a significant effect on the MLR tactical situation.

760 The bombline had been moved in to an average of 3–4,000 meters from the MLR in December 1952 to expose more targets to the “mass” strike treatment.

760 The bombline had been brought in to an average of 3,000 to 4,000 meters from the MLR in December 1952 to make more targets available for the “mass” strike action.

Then, too, the Marine system of maintaining aircraft “on air alert” resulted in CAS requests being filled in 5 to 15 minutes. Air support requests screened in the regular manner by Eighth Army and FAF at the JOC level resulted in a delivery of ordnance to the target in a minimum of 30 minutes and delays sometimes of nearly four hours.761 During fluid situations, when the division required more than 40 sorties per day, the “on station” system proved more tactically effective than the FAF pre-planned “on call” procedure.

Then, the Marine system for keeping aircraft “on air alert” led to CAS requests being fulfilled in 5 to 15 minutes. Air support requests that were screened in the usual way by the Eighth Army and FAF at the JOC level resulted in ordnance reaching the target in at least 30 minutes, with delays sometimes taking nearly four hours. 761 During fast-moving situations, when the division needed more than 40 sorties each day, the “on station” system was more tactically effective than the FAF’s pre-planned “on call” procedure.

761 PacFlt EvalRpt Chap. 1, No. 6, p. 1-15.

761 PacFlt EvalRpt Chap. 1, No. 6, p. 1-15.

Operational differences between the Marine-Navy and Army-Air Force type of CAS in a critical ground situation were never more apparent than in a major CCF last-ditch effort when the enemy517 slammed against ROK defenses in the Kumsong area. An end-of-war report noted:

Operational differences between the Marine-Navy and Army-Air Force types of CAS in a critical ground situation were never more obvious than in a major CCF last-ditch effort when the enemy517 pushed hard against ROK defenses in the Kumsong area. An end-of-war report noted:

CCF penetration of the II ROK Corps sector, in July, 1953, brought clearly into focus the ineffectiveness of the Air Force-Army close air support (CAS) system during periods of fluid operations. CCF eruption through the II ROK Corps MLR and deep into friendly territory eliminated, as effective or practical, the complete reliance by 5th AF on pre-planned CAS strikes (using aircraft from the ground-alert pool), against fleeting targets or targets of an immediate nature. These types of targets are considered normal during a fluid situation.

CCF penetration of the II ROK Corps area in July 1953 highlighted the shortcomings of the Air Force-Army close air support (CAS) system during dynamic operations. The CCF breakthrough through the II ROK Corps main line of resistance and deep into friendly territory made the 5th AF's complete dependence on scheduled CAS strikes (using aircraft on standby) against fast-moving or urgent targets ineffective and impractical. These types of targets are typical in a fluid situation.

The inadequacy of communications for rapid transmission of air support requests in the CAS system employed in Korea, the impossibility of only four TACP’s per division (U.S. and ROK Army) to keep up with frontline battalion battle actions in order to control CAS strikes, and the over-centralization of control of CAS request approvals and CAS aircraft allocation were all clearly demonstrated during that period of fluid ground operations in July.762

The limited communication for quickly sending air support requests in the CAS system used in Korea, the challenge of having only four TACP units per division (U.S. and ROK Army) to keep pace with frontline battalion actions to manage CAS strikes, and the excessive centralization of control over CAS request approvals and aircraft allocation were all clearly shown during the dynamic ground operations in July.762

762 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 10-3.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 10-3.

Despite the accommodation reached during the Korean War, many of these fundamental differences in doctrine and employment of air support to ground troops in combat persisted until recent years.763

Despite the agreement reached during the Korean War, many of these basic differences in doctrine and the use of air support for ground troops in combat continued until recently. 763

763 For a penetrating discussion of interservice problems dealing with air-ground liaison and communications, use of FACs, and CAS capability, etc., see U.S. Congress, Rpt of Special Subcommittee on Tactical Air Support of the Committee on Armed Services, Otis G. Pike, Chairman (House of Reps., 89th Congress, 1 Feb 66), Washington: GPO, 1966.

763 For an in-depth discussion of interservice issues related to air-ground liaison and communications, the use of Forward Air Controllers (FACs), and Close Air Support (CAS) capabilities, etc., refer to U.S. Congress, Report of the Special Subcommittee on Tactical Air Support of the Committee on Armed Services, Otis G. Pike, Chairman (House of Representatives, 89th Congress, February 1, 1966), Washington: GPO, 1966.

As military history has shown countless times in the past, wars are fought under the prevailing difficulties of the time. There never was a war waged under ideal conditions. A reflection on operational problems of the Korean period is predicated on the thought that a review of them—and the solutions effected where possible—may help avoid their repetition in a conflict of the future.

As military history has demonstrated many times before, wars are fought under the challenges of their time. There has never been a war fought under perfect conditions. Looking back on the operational issues from the Korean period is based on the idea that evaluating them—and the solutions implemented where feasible—might help prevent their recurrence in future conflicts.

Korean Lessons764

764 Unless otherwise noted, the material in this section is derived from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10, No. 5, Chaps. 1, 8, No. 6, Chaps. 1, 9; Generals’ Summary; Lessons Learned 5-53; 1stMarDiv PIR 942, dtd 7 Aug 53; 1st MAW PIR 127-53, dtd 7 May 53, Encl (1) Estimate of Enemy Ground Situation #1-53 (end-of-war analysis); 1st MAW PIR 169-53, dtd 18 Jun 53, Encl (1) Estimate of Enemy Air Situation 1-53, dtd 20 May 53 (end-of-war analysis); 5thMar ComdD, Nov 52, App. VI: Comments on Tactics, Techniques, and Equipment, pp. 1–12; J. Lawton Collins, War in Peacetime—The History and Lessons of Korea (Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co., 1969); S. L. A. Marshall, The Military History of the Korean War (New York: Franklin Watts, Inc., 1963); S. L. A. Marshall, Pork Chop Hill—The American Fighting Man in Action, Korea, Spring 1953 (New York: William Morrow & Co., 1956), quoted with permission of the publisher; Ridgway, Korean War; Hicks, Outpost Warfare; Batterton, Korea Notes.

764 Unless otherwise indicated, the information in this section comes from: PacFlt EvalRpts No. 4, Chaps. 9, 10, No. 5, Chaps. 1, 8, No. 6, Chaps. 1, 9; Generals’ Summary; Lessons Learned 5-53; 1stMarDiv PIR 942, dated August 7, 1953; 1st MAW PIR 127-53, dated May 7, 1953, Encl (1) Estimate of Enemy Ground Situation #1-53 (end-of-war analysis); 1st MAW PIR 169-53, dated June 18, 1953, Encl (1) Estimate of Enemy Air Situation 1-53, dated May 20, 1953 (end-of-war analysis); 5thMar ComdD, November 1952, App. VI: Comments on Tactics, Techniques, and Equipment, pp. 1–12; J. Lawton Collins, War in Peacetime—The History and Lessons of Korea (Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co., 1969); S. L. A. Marshall, The Military History of the Korean War (New York: Franklin Watts, Inc., 1963); S. L. A. Marshall, Pork Chop Hill—The American Fighting Man in Action, Korea, Spring 1953 (New York: William Morrow & Co., 1956), quoted with permission from the publisher; Ridgway, Korean War; Hicks, Outpost Warfare; Batterton, Korea Notes.

In the early phase of the Korean War, the 1st Marine Division deployment was in a moving battle situation similar to numerous518 engagements it had fought in the past 175 years. Most of the “lessons” learned from the enemy, the tactical situation itself, and the terrain in Korea are derived largely from the later outpost warfare stage when the Marines were employed in a stabilized and sustained defensive situation similar to that facing other Allied units across the entire Eighth Army front. Tactics of defense on a wide front, construction of permanent type field fortifications, and organization of the battle position in difficult terrain was a new experience to Marines. This period of limited objective attacks and battles of attrition highlighted the importance of small unit tactics and demonstrated some modified concepts regarding employment of supporting arms.

In the early days of the Korean War, the 1st Marine Division was deployed in a fast-moving battle scenario similar to many engagements it had faced over the past 175 years. Most of the “lessons” learned from the enemy, the tactical situation, and the Korean terrain mainly came from the later stage of outpost warfare, when the Marines were involved in a stabilized and sustained defense, much like other Allied units across the entire Eighth Army front. Defending a wide front, building permanent field fortifications, and organizing battle positions in challenging terrain were new experiences for the Marines. This time of limited objective attacks and attrition battles underscored the importance of small unit tactics and showed some adjusted concepts regarding the use of supporting arms.

During the period of outpost warfare, the 1st Marine Division was never confronted by a general enemy offensive or combined infantry-armor-artillery-air assault. The nature of the conflict was one of limited objective attacks, with strong and sometimes sustained probes. Typically, these were two-battalion assaults against a platoon-size outpost.

During the time of outpost warfare, the 1st Marine Division never faced a full-scale enemy offensive or a coordinated attack involving infantry, armor, artillery, and air support. The conflict was characterized by limited objective strikes, featuring powerful and occasionally prolonged probes. Usually, these involved two-battalion assaults on a platoon-sized outpost.

Time after time, as UNC defending troops learned, the CCF characteristic pattern of attack was repetitive and almost predictable. After dark, heavy preparatory fires deluged an isolated advance outpost. Crude, but effective, improvised demolitions often reduced COP fortifications765 so that the enemy could assail the position. Waves of attacking Chinese then overwhelmed the greatly outnumbered defenders. Almost invariably the initial attack made on the front of the position was a feint; the real attack would be made by troops that had enveloped the position and moved to the rear. Enemy ambush forces were also located to the rear of the outpost, between the COP and MLR, at normal reinforcement routes to prevent both519 a pullback by the defenders to the MLR and to stop reinforcements from reaching the outpost.

Time and again, as the UNC defending troops realized, the CCF's pattern of attack was repetitive and almost predictable. After dark, heavy barrages hit an isolated forward outpost. Simple but effective improvised demolitions often weakened the COP fortifications765 so that the enemy could strike the position. Waves of attacking Chinese troops then overwhelmed the vastly outnumbered defenders. Almost always, the initial attack on the front of the position was a feint; the main assault would come from troops that had surrounded the position and moved to the rear. Enemy ambush forces were also positioned behind the outpost, between the COP and MLR, along typical reinforcement routes to stop both519 a retreat by the defenders to the MLR and to prevent reinforcements from reaching the outpost.

765 If the enemy advanced closer than 50 yards, by closely following under heavy preparatory fires, he could penetrate the position. At this close range, normal box-me-in artillery fires were not close enough to break up the attack. Lessons Learned 5-53, p. 10.

765 If the enemy got within 50 yards by closely following behind intense preparatory fire, he could break through our position. At this short distance, standard artillery fire wasn’t effective enough to stop the attack. Lessons Learned 5-53, p. 10.

Effective defensive fire plans for the COPs covered all likely enemy approaches and assembly areas, as well as close-in boxing fires of the COP on all sides. Marine defense positions were sited for all-round defense, with special attention paid to covering the rear approaches at night. This tactic of rear envelopment also applied on a smaller scale to patrols. Invariably the CCF maneuvered to the flanks and rear of a friendly patrol in an attempt to encircle it. The CCF skillfully employed both the terrain and troops and regularly attacked from more than one direction.

Effective defensive fire plans for the COPs addressed all potential enemy approaches and assembly areas, as well as close-range fire support around the COP on all sides. Marine defense positions were set up for comprehensive defense, with particular focus on covering rear approaches at night. This tactic of surrounding from the back also applied on a smaller scale to patrols. The CCF consistently maneuvered to the flanks and rear of a friendly patrol in an effort to encircle it. The CCF expertly utilized both the terrain and troops, often attacking from multiple directions.

Experience with Communist combat techniques forced UNC leaders to reevaluate their own night-fighting tactics. The Chinese had a marked superiority in night operations. Every major attack on Marine outposts during the last year of the war was made at night. When they were not directly assaulting a friendly site, the CCF advanced their own ground positions by digging and their well-known creeping tactics. This enabled them to establish an OP line within small arms and mortar range of Marine COPs and the MLR. The battle for Bunker Hill came about as a result of this enemy tactic. Organization in early 1952 of COP-2A, adjacent to the Panmunjom corridor, was in direct rebuttal to this same tactic. By such indirect methods, the Chinese were further able to extend their already favorable high ground positions which gave them observation over practically all of the Marine front line. Defensively the enemy used the cover of darkness equally well: mountain roads were aswarm with trucks and supply movements, which UNC night-fighters and bombers slowed with only moderate success.

Experience with Communist combat techniques forced UNC leaders to rethink their own night-fighting tactics. The Chinese had a clear advantage in nighttime operations. Every major attack on Marine outposts during the last year of the war happened at night. When they weren’t directly attacking a friendly site, the CCF advanced their positions by digging and using their well-known creeping tactics. This allowed them to set up an OP line within small arms and mortar range of Marine COPs and the MLR. The battle for Bunker Hill occurred because of this enemy tactic. The formation of COP-2A in early 1952, near the Panmunjom corridor, was a direct response to this same tactic. Through these indirect methods, the Chinese were able to further extend their already advantageous high ground positions, which provided them with observation over nearly all of the Marine front line. Defensively, the enemy used the cover of darkness just as effectively: mountain roads were filled with trucks and supply movements, which UNC night-fighters and bombers slowed down with only moderate success.

Skilled, rapid construction of field fortifications and excellent camouflage discipline by the enemy were also object lessons. Entrances to tunnels and caves, as well as the bunkers themselves were so carefully disguised by fresh branches, weeds, logs, and other natural foliage that they were rarely visible either by air observer or aerial photographs. Active weapons positions were also effectively camouflaged. Often 60mm and 82mm mortars were housed in bunkers and fired through a narrow opening at the top. If moved out temporarily to an open slope, they were quickly returned to the bunker to avoid detection. The Chinese elaborate underground system of trenchworks and radial tunnels between forward and rear520 bunkers was sometimes as much as 35 yards long. Underground bunkers and tunnels often had 20 feet or more of protective dirt cover and offered security from anything except a direct aerial hit.

Skilled, fast construction of field fortifications and excellent camouflage techniques by the enemy were also important lessons. The entrances to tunnels and caves, as well as the bunkers themselves, were so carefully disguised with fresh branches, weeds, logs, and other natural greenery that they were rarely visible to aerial observers or in aerial photographs. Active weapons positions were also effectively concealed. Often, 60mm and 82mm mortars were placed in bunkers and fired through a narrow opening at the top. If they needed to be moved temporarily to an open slope, they were quickly returned to the bunker to avoid being detected. The Chinese had an elaborate underground system of trenches and radial tunnels connecting forward and rear bunkers, sometimes measuring as much as 35 yards long. Underground bunkers and tunnels often had over 20 feet of protective dirt cover and offered safety from anything except a direct aerial strike.

Destruction of the enemy’s trenches, bunkers, and cave network by medium and heavy artillery was only partially successful. Napalm was generally ineffective due to the lack of combustible materials in CCF ground defenses. The well-prepared, deeply dug fortifications were virtually impervious to anything less than air assaults with heavy ordnance (1,000-pound bombs and over) which were required to destroy CCF reverse slope positions.

Destruction of the enemy’s trenches, bunkers, and cave network by medium and heavy artillery was only partially successful. Napalm was generally ineffective due to the lack of flammable materials in CCF ground defenses. The well-prepared, deeply dug fortifications were almost invulnerable to anything less than air assaults with heavy ordnance (1,000-pound bombs and larger) which were needed to destroy CCF reverse slope positions.

A well dug-in secondary line was located four to eight miles to the rear of the Chinese MLR. Intelligence indicated that an attack to infiltrate CCF defenses would “require the penetration of a fortified area to a minimum depth of 10 miles.”766 Some Korean War analysts maintained that behind their front line the Chinese had entrenched the ridges to an average depth of 14 miles and that the enemy “could have fallen back upon successive prepared positions for all that distance.”767 Although the trench warfare period of the Korean War was often likened to World War I, the Chinese defensive works were estimated to have “ten times the depth of any belt of entrenchments in World War I.”768 Some areas had even been engineered for defense against nuclear attack. Caves, tunnels, and particularly reverse slope positions also showed CCF skill in the selection and organization of terrain features.

A well-established secondary line was located four to eight miles behind the Chinese main line of resistance (MLR). Intelligence suggested that an attack aimed at breaching the Chinese People's Volunteer Army (CCF) defenses would "require penetrating a fortified area to at least a depth of 10 miles."766 Some analysts of the Korean War believed that behind their front line, the Chinese had fortified the ridges to an average depth of 14 miles, and that the enemy "could have retreated to successive prepared positions over that distance."767 Although the trench warfare period of the Korean War was often compared to World War I, the Chinese defensive structures were estimated to have "ten times the depth of any line of trenches from World War I."768 Some areas were even designed for protection against nuclear attacks. Caves, tunnels, and especially reverse slope positions demonstrated the CCF's expertise in selecting and organizing terrain features.

766 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, p. 8-29.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 5, pp. 8-29.

767 Marshall, Pork Chop Hill, p. 24.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Marshall, Pork Chop Hill, p. 24.

768 Ibid., p. 116.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 116.

Both the nature of the ground fighting and weather in Korea quickly indicated that our bunker construction needed to be improved. Siting them lower into the ground, so that the outline of the bunkers would not make them such ready targets, and reinforcing them to withstand a 105mm direct hit were steps in this direction. Use of sandbags (of which there was a continuing shortage) for both bunkers and trenches proved to be almost as much a problem as a solution. Bunkers above ground shored up with sandbags frequently collapsed in times of heavy rains or Korean spring thawing conditions.

Both the nature of the ground fighting and the weather in Korea quickly showed that we needed to improve our bunker construction. Placing them deeper in the ground so that their outlines wouldn't make them such easy targets, and reinforcing them to withstand a 105mm direct hit were steps in that direction. Using sandbags (which were always in short supply) for both bunkers and trenches turned out to be almost as much of a problem as it was a solution. Bunkers above ground that were supported with sandbags often collapsed during heavy rains or the spring thaw in Korea.

Outpost warfare also proved that the average bunker often became a deathtrap when used defensively. This was due to the enemy521 proclivity for sealing entrances with their satchel charges, as occurred in the Vegas Cities battle. It became evident that large living-fighting bunkers could easily turn into traps in which many men could become casualties simultaneously, and from which few could fight. Despite their exposed nature, fighting holes were often safer. Some Korean combat officers were of the opinion that rather than our six- to eight-man bunkers, smaller two-man fighting units would be obviously faster to build, more effective, and safer since they would present a smaller target.

Outpost warfare also showed that the average bunker often turned into a deathtrap when used defensively. This was because the enemy521 tended to seal entrances with their satchel charges, as happened in the Vegas Cities battle. It became clear that large living-fighting bunkers could quickly become traps where many soldiers could fall simultaneously, and from which few could effectively fight. Despite being more exposed, fighting holes were usually safer. Some Korean combat officers believed that instead of our six- to eight-man bunkers, smaller two-man fighting units would be quicker to build, more effective, and safer since they would be a smaller target.

A 1st Marine Division training bulletin issued near the end of the war stated categorically:

A 1st Marine Division training bulletin released toward the end of the war stated clearly:

As a rule no bunker or cave should be large enough to accommodate more than four men. If the cave is bombardment proof, there is another greater danger that the men will fail to man their fighting positions quickly enough after the enemy fire lifts or ceases.769

As a rule, no bunker or cave should be big enough to hold more than four men. If the cave can withstand bombardment, there’s an even bigger risk that the men won’t get to their fighting positions quickly enough after the enemy fire stops. 769

769 Lessons Learned, 5-53, p. 11.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Lessons Learned, 5-53, p. 11.

UNC reconnaissance and security activities also showed need for improvement. Night raids, patrol operations, and ambushes were conducted continuously to maintain contact with the enemy, keep him off balance, and obtain intelligence. This type of mobile, small-unit action repeatedly indicated an urgent need for more basic training in night combat operations at the squad and platoon level. The frequent breakdown of communications in night fighting, whether it involved a small patrol or besieged outpost, was particularly critical. Some regimental commanders noted the failure to employ properly organic small arms in combat action during darkness before requesting heavier supporting fires. It was felt that the practice of calling for mortar or artillery fire to the exclusion of using small arms was a dangerous practice which was being overused and that “even in the defense the spirit of the offensive must be maintained.”770 Meticulous planning was vital for effective fire plans, alternate avenues of approach, and evacuation. Detailed rehearsals of raids were essential.

UNC reconnaissance and security activities also showed a need for improvement. Night raids, patrol operations, and ambushes were conducted continuously to maintain contact with the enemy, keep him off balance, and gather intelligence. This kind of mobile, small-unit action repeatedly pointed out an urgent need for more basic training in night combat operations at the squad and platoon level. The frequent breakdown of communications during night fighting, whether it involved a small patrol or a besieged outpost, was particularly critical. Some regimental commanders noted the failure to properly use organic small arms in combat during darkness before calling for heavier supporting fire. It was believed that the practice of requesting mortar or artillery fire instead of using small arms was a risky approach that was being overused and that “even in defense, the spirit of the offensive must be maintained.”770 Thorough planning was essential for effective fire plans, alternate routes of approach, and evacuation. Detailed rehearsals of raids were crucial.

770 5thMar ComdD, Nov 52, App. VI, p. 4.

770 5th Mar ComdD, Nov 52, App. VI, p. 4.

Night operations proved it was necessary to have a combat patrol sufficiently large to allow for both the accomplishment of the mission and evacuation of casualties. In evaluating the Korean experience, Marine officers pointed to the difficulties of operating effectively on “pitch black nights when a man could barely see his own hand in522 front of him or when the most prominent terrain feature could not be silhouetted.”771 Some commanders declared that such circumstances often lead to patrols accidentally walking into minefields—their own, as well as the enemy’s.

Night operations showed that it was essential to have a combat patrol big enough to both carry out the mission and evacuate any casualties. In reviewing the Korean experience, Marine officers highlighted the challenges of operating effectively on “pitch black nights when a person could barely see their own hand in522 front of them or when the most obvious terrain feature couldn’t be seen.” Some commanders stated that these conditions often caused patrols to accidentally wander into minefields—both their own and the enemy’s.

771 Batterton, Korea Notes, p. 34.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Batterton, *Korea Notes*, p. 34.

In their security measures, CCF strict policing of the battlefield after either a small raid or major assault was well known to every Marine infantryman as part of the Chinese elaborate precautions to preserve order of battle identity. CCF counterintelligence efforts were equally scrupulous. Despite extensive precautions to keep the relief of the Marines by the 25th Infantry Division secret in May 1953, enemy psychological warfare loudspeakers predicted the relief date one week in advance. Later they broadcast a change in date that was equally accurate. Two heavy enemy probes made in July while individual battalion reliefs were in process also demonstrated the Chinese acuity in intelligence activities.

In their security measures, the CCF's strict policing of the battlefield after a small raid or major assault was well known to every Marine infantryman as part of the Chinese's elaborate precautions to maintain battle identity. The CCF's counterintelligence efforts were equally thorough. Despite extensive measures to keep the relief of the Marines by the 25th Infantry Division a secret in May 1953, enemy psychological warfare loudspeakers accurately predicted the relief date one week ahead of time. Later, they broadcast a change in date that was also spot on. Two significant enemy probes in July, while individual battalion reliefs were happening, also showed the Chinese's keen abilities in intelligence activities.

The necessity for UNC commanders to avoid a fixed pattern in operations was insufficiently recognized. A battle diary found on a CCF soldier killed in early 1953, had observed about the Americans:

The need for UNC commanders to steer clear of a predictable approach in operations wasn't properly acknowledged. A battle diary discovered on a CCF soldier who died in early 1953 noted the following about the Americans:

Two days before an enemy relief they clamor in their trenches, and at the same time heavily bombard our positions.

Two days before the enemy reinforcement arrives, they shout in their trenches and heavily shell our positions at the same time.

For small scale attacks, the enemy sends out a small group of men crawling on their hands and knees; however, in large scale attacks, they intensely bombard our positions.

For small-scale attacks, the enemy sends out a small group of guys crawling on their hands and knees; however, in large-scale attacks, they heavily bombard our positions.

An enemy artillery bombardment following air reconnaissance indicates that the enemy will probably launch a ground attack within a short period.772

An enemy artillery strike after aerial surveillance suggests that they will likely initiate a ground assault soon.772

772 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6 p. 9-58 citing Eighth U.S. Army PIR No. 948.

772 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6 p. 9-58 citing Eighth U.S. Army PIR No. 948.

As the CG, 1st Marine Division further commented about overuse of established procedures:

As the CG of the 1st Marine Division further remarked on the excessive use of established procedures:

The same tactics and techniques should not be followed in every raid. The pattern should be altered to the extent that the tactics and techniques employed will not indicate the objective to the enemy. The time selected for raids should vary to permit the conduct of both daylight and night raids. Employment of supporting arms including the delivery of smoke must be varied to prevent indication of the objective.773

The same strategies and methods shouldn't be used in every raid. The approach should be changed enough so that the tactics and techniques used won't reveal the goal to the enemy. The timing of raids should differ to allow for both daytime and nighttime operations. Using support units, including smoke screens, should be varied to avoid revealing the objective.773

773 Lessons Learned 5-53, p. 2.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Lessons Learned 5-53, p. 2.

Enemy ability to locate listening posts and take them under direct fire or mortar attack also dictated the need for frequent change in location.

Enemy's ability to find listening posts and hit them with direct fire or mortars also led to the need for frequent relocation.

523

523

Regarding the use of supporting arms, the Korean terrain itself dictated a need for modification of traditional practices of employing both direct and indirect fire weapons in order to achieve maximum effectiveness. Standard Marine Corps use of both crew-served infantry weapons and artillery centered around the concept of interlocking and mutually reinforcing bands of fire. Neither the frontage nor terrain in Korea was what could be termed “normal.” Battalion frontages were often more than twice the accepted maximum. The terrain consisted of steep main ridge lines with many steep finger ridges leading off both sides. Such contours require twice as many machine guns for adequate defense against enemy attacks if employed in positions affording the usual interlocking grazing fire.

Regarding the use of supporting arms, the Korean terrain forced a change in the traditional methods of using both direct and indirect fire weapons to achieve the best results. The standard Marine Corps approach to using crew-served infantry weapons and artillery focused on creating interlocking and mutually reinforcing zones of fire. The frontlines and terrain in Korea were far from what could be considered “normal.” Battalion frontages were often over twice the typical maximum. The terrain featured steep main ridgelines with many sharp finger ridges branching out on both sides. Such layouts require twice as many machine guns for proper defense against enemy attacks when using positions that provide the usual interlocking grazing fire.

For both infantry weapons on the forward COPs and MLR, and supporting artillery batteries, the combination of “stretching unit fronts and unstretchable ranges”774 of the weapons caused them to lose a considerable amount of their mutual support capability, as one artillery regimental commander commented about the experience of the 1st Marine Division in Korea. As a result, a compromise was often effected whereby machine guns were emplaced on the high ground of the ridge line, with their individual sectors of fire extended to 180 degrees. Although the guns were no longer mutually supporting, the numerous finger ridges could be better covered by fire to prevent the enemy from gaining a foothold on them prior to assault on the main ridge line.

For both infantry weapons at the forward Combat Outposts (COPs) and Main Line of Resistance (MLR), as well as supporting artillery batteries, the mix of “stretching unit fronts and unstretchable ranges”774 of the weapons resulted in a significant loss of their ability to support each other, as one artillery regimental commander reflected on the experience of the 1st Marine Division in Korea. Consequently, a compromise was often made where machine guns were positioned on the high ground of the ridge line, with their individual fields of fire expanded to 180 degrees. Even though the guns were no longer supporting each other, the various finger ridges could be more effectively covered by fire to stop the enemy from establishing a foothold before an attack on the main ridge line.

774 Col F. P. Henderson, “Amphibious Artillery of the Future,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 12 (Dec 55), p. 30.

774 Col F. P. Henderson, “Amphibious Artillery of the Future,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 12 (Dec 55), p. 30.

As previously noted, the Marine division also modified its concept about occupying the military crest, rather than the topographical crest, of forward slopes.775 In view of CCF tactics, forward slope positions offered the advantage of observation and superior fields of fire and assisted in bringing fire on the enemy in those areas and approaches masked from the view of reverse slope positions.

As mentioned earlier, the Marine division also changed its approach to occupying the military crest instead of the topographical crest on forward slopes.775 Considering CCF tactics, forward slope positions provided better observation and improved fields of fire, and they helped direct fire on the enemy in areas and paths that were hidden from reverse slope positions.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Check __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Under conditions of stabilized defensive lines in Korea, the great offensive power of Marine tanks was somewhat limited. They were used extensively as direct fire weapons and supplemented the artillery regiment by firing deep H&I (harassing and interdiction) missions. In West Korea, it proved expedient to have friendly tanks positioned in defiladed assembly areas where they were on call and524 ready to move into MLR firing slots on short notice. They often provided close fire support to Marine patrols and outpost defense actions, sometimes being called in for fire missions before the direct support artillery.

Under the stable defensive lines in Korea, the powerful offensive capabilities of Marine tanks were somewhat restricted. They were heavily utilized as direct fire weapons and helped the artillery regiment by carrying out deep harassing and interdiction missions. In West Korea, it was advantageous to have friendly tanks positioned in protected assembly areas where they could be ready to move into main line of resistance firing positions on short notice. They frequently provided close fire support to Marine patrols and outpost defense actions, often being requested for fire missions before the direct support artillery.

Since tanks under enemy observation invariably drew retaliatory fire, they usually remained in firing positions on the MLR only long enough to complete their fire mission. Deployment of several M-46s in mutually supporting MLR positions, however, tended to reduce the volume of hostile fire. When operating forward of the MLR, it was important that the armored vehicles be protected by infantry from enemy tank-killer teams. Often the Marine artillery observer’s knowledge of the terrain and familiarity with objective targets upon which the tank could be effectively used was thus relayed to the tanker, particularly when such targets were themselves obscured to the tank gunner. In registering the target, however, the adjustment system used by the gunner differed from that of the artillery FOs. It was recommended that use of tank guns and lights be made part of the regular COP fire plan.

Since tanks under enemy observation often attracted return fire, they typically stayed in firing positions on the MLR just long enough to finish their fire mission. However, deploying several M-46s in mutually supporting MLR positions helped to decrease the amount of enemy fire. When operating in front of the MLR, it was crucial for infantry to protect the armored vehicles from enemy tank-killer teams. The Marine artillery observer's knowledge of the terrain and familiarity with target objectives where the tank could be effectively used was often communicated to the tanker, especially when those targets were blocked from the tank gunner's view. When registering the target, however, the adjustment system used by the gunner was different from that of the artillery FOs. It was recommended that the use of tank guns and lights be incorporated into the regular COP fire plan.

The Korean experience demonstrated in particular the need for better rehearsed tank-infantry patrols. It also showed the need for a reliable tank-mounted searchlight with a range up to 2,000 yards. Smoke and muzzle blast of the 90mm gun often reduced the effectiveness of the tank searchlight. When two tanks were employed as a team (one spotting targets and adjusting fire with the light, while the other zeroed in on the illuminated targets), the searchlight was markedly more effective.

The Korean experience highlighted the importance of better-coordinated tank-infantry patrols. It also revealed the need for a dependable tank-mounted searchlight that could reach up to 2,000 yards. The smoke and muzzle blast from the 90mm gun often diminished the effectiveness of the tank searchlight. When two tanks worked together (one spotting targets and adjusting fire with the light, while the other focused on the lit targets), the searchlight's effectiveness significantly increased.

Outpost warfare, which was predominantly night fighting, was thus characterized by patrolling and ambushes, artillery dueling, and sharp battles for contested terrain that would offer improved observation. In this stand-off period of positional warfare, ground defenses were developed to the point where “both sides were incomparably stronger than they had been in actual [moving] battle.”776

Outpost warfare, which was mainly conducted at night, was marked by patrols and ambushes, artillery exchanges, and intense fights for disputed land that would provide better visibility. During this standoff phase of positional warfare, ground defenses were enhanced to the extent that “both sides were incomparably stronger than they had been in actual [moving] battle.”776

776 Marshall, Military History of Korean War, p. 72.

776 Marshall, Military History of Korean War, p. 72.

Lessons from Korea dealt not only with modified battle tactics, but involved an evaluation of enemy performance and capabilities, as well as certain strategic considerations which had so markedly affected the course of the war. UNC forces in Korea faced an adversary who had vast resources of manpower and, accordingly, was525 wholly indifferent to the cost of victory in terms of personnel and time. In fact, the enemy believed that mass was the key to victory. In many instances Chinese commanders did not launch an offensive unless their attack force had a three-to-one superiority over the defending friendly unit.

Lessons from Korea addressed not just updated battle tactics, but also looked at enemy performance and capabilities, along with important strategic factors that significantly influenced the war's outcome. UNC forces in Korea faced an opponent with enormous manpower resources and, as a result, were completely unconcerned about the personnel and time costs of winning. In fact, the enemy thought that having more troops was crucial for victory. In many cases, Chinese commanders wouldn't start an offensive unless their attacking force had a three-to-one advantage over the defending unit.

Combat effectiveness of the CCF was evaluated as good to excellent. Chinese officers demonstrated good combat leadership. They were well schooled in both offensive and defensive military tactics. Some units had been trained for amphibious operations. During the long period of positional warfare, the CCF had built up their military capability (troops, artillery, AA guns) and resupplied their forward units. Maintaining a steady flow of supplies had been an earlier weakness of the CCF logistics system. During the last six months of the war Chinese stockpiles were adequate for 35 days of offensive operations; the enemy was capable of supporting a major offensive for a 17–24 day period.

The combat effectiveness of the CCF was rated as good to excellent. Chinese officers showed strong combat leadership and were well-trained in both offensive and defensive military strategies. Some units had also trained for amphibious operations. Throughout the extended period of positional warfare, the CCF had strengthened their military capabilities (troops, artillery, AA guns) and replenished their forward units. Maintaining a consistent supply flow had been a previous weakness in the CCF's logistics system. In the last six months of the war, Chinese stockpiles were sufficient for 35 days of offensive operations, while the enemy could support a major offensive for 17 to 24 days.

By contrast, the North Korean soldier was considerably less effective. The larger number of NKPA prisoners taken and their greater desertion rate indicated poorer discipline and lower morale. NKPA units were rated from poor to good. After 1951, NKPA forces decreased in importance while the CCF assumed a greater role in the combat effort as well as in the truce negotiations.

By contrast, the North Korean soldier was much less effective. The larger number of NKPA prisoners captured and their higher desertion rate showed weaker discipline and lower morale. NKPA units were rated from poor to good. After 1951, NKPA forces became less important while the CCF took on a bigger role in the combat effort and in the truce negotiations.

Chinese weapons and equipment were characterized by a lack of standardization due to the absence of a central system of production or ordnance supply. Their weapons included a wide assortment of foreign manufacture—Japanese, U.S., German, Czechoslovakian, Soviet, and Chinese design. Because of a shortage of small arms, usually not more than a third of the personnel in their combat units were individually armed. Despite this fact the CCF soldier was convinced he was good and had “proved himself to be a formidable opponent in combat.”777

Chinese weapons and equipment lacked standardization because there was no central production system or ordnance supply. They used a variety of foreign-made weapons from Japan, the U.S., Germany, Czechoslovakia, and the Soviet Union, as well as some designed in China. Due to a shortage of small arms, typically only about a third of the soldiers in their combat units were armed individually. Despite this, the CCF soldier believed he was skilled and had "proven himself to be a formidable opponent in combat."777

777 1st MAW PIR 127-53, Encl (1), p. 1.

777 1st MAW PIR 127-53, Encl (1), p. 1.

Individually and as units, the CCF exhibited the traditional Oriental characteristics of extreme patience, passivity, and determination. Some authorities went so far as to declare that the Chinese ability to:

Individually and as groups, the CCF showed the classic traits of Eastern cultures, including remarkable patience, passiveness, and strong determination. Some experts even claimed that the Chinese ability to:

... remain quiet for a long period and to patrol stealthily are the main reasons for the success of his engagements. The enemy’s successes which526 have resulted from his patience and stealth show that our troops need more training in the same technique.778

... staying quiet for an extended time and moving stealthily are the key reasons for the success of his missions. The enemy’s victories that have come from his patience and stealth indicate that our troops require more training in these techniques.778

778 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-41.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-41.

The enemy’s tenacious determination to hold key terrain, regardless of the costs of lives, was well known. Another evaluation concluded:

The enemy's stubborn resolve to keep control of important ground, no matter the cost in lives, was widely recognized. Another assessment concluded:

The Chinese [is] well and courageously led at the small unit level. He is thoroughly disciplined. He is an industrious digger. His conduct of the defense is accomplished in spite of UN superiority in the air, his inferior communications equipment and his hodgepodge of weapons and equipment.779

The Chinese is well and bravely led at the small unit level. He is highly disciplined. He is a hard worker. His defense is carried out successfully despite UN air superiority, his outdated communications equipment, and his mix of different weapons and gear.779

779 Ibid., No. 5, p. 8-31.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., No. 5, pp. 8-31.

Battlefront lightweightness and mobility, particularly in Korean winter operations, was another important object lesson from the enemy. Marine cold weather clothing, including thermal boot and body armor which had saved so many lives, was of excellent design and quality. Despite this, some authorities felt that during the Korean War the Marine was “placed at a disadvantage when he met the CCF soldier,”780 because of bulky cold-weather clothing that hindered freedom of movement. The weight of some of the Marine infantryman’s weapons, such as the 16½ lb. BAR (plus magazines) and the 9½ lb. M-1 rifle, was felt to contribute further to this lack of mobility. In contrast, “the CCF soldier dressed in his quilted uniform and armed with a ‘burp’ [submachine] gun, moved freely and quietly over the roughest of terrain, thereby gaining a not inconsiderable advantage over his heavily burdened adversary.”781

Battlefront lightweightness and mobility, especially in Korean winter operations, was another key lesson learned from the enemy. The Marine cold weather gear, including thermal boots and body armor that saved many lives, was well-designed and high-quality. Even so, some officials believed that during the Korean War, the Marine was “at a disadvantage when he faced the CCF soldier,”780 due to the bulky cold-weather clothing that restricted movement. The weight of some Marine infantry weapons, like the 16½ lb. BAR (plus magazines) and the 9½ lb. M-1 rifle, was also seen as contributing to this lack of mobility. In contrast, “the CCF soldier, dressed in his quilted uniform and armed with a ‘burp’ [submachine] gun, moved easily and quietly over the roughest terrain, giving him a significant advantage over his heavily loaded opponent.”781

780 PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-82.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 9-82.

781 Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

This superior mobility led to the related advantage of tactical surprise. Since CCF units were unencumbered by heavy weapons they could readily use primitive routes of approach in the darkness. Their movements through disputed terrain were typically so furtive that often there was no preliminary warning until the CCF were virtually within grenade-throwing distance of friendly patrols or installations. The enemy practice of hiding by day and moving by night also concealed their presence from UN air reconnaissance.

This improved mobility resulted in the added benefit of tactical surprise. Since CCF units weren't weighed down by heavy weapons, they could easily use basic paths to approach under the cover of darkness. Their movements through contested areas were often so stealthy that there would frequently be no warning until the CCF was almost within grenade-throwing range of friendly patrols or installations. The enemy's strategy of hiding during the day and moving at night also kept them hidden from UN air reconnaissance.

One observer of the Korean scene, both in the early battles of 1950 and again in 1953, has compared the CCF development of military skills during this period, as follows:

One observer of the Korean situation, both in the early battles of 1950 and again in 1953, has compared the CCF's development of military skills during this time as follows:

527

527

In 1950, the Red Chinese were a crude lot, given more to pell-mell attacks and diehard stands than to deception and protection. But they stayed and they learned as they went along. When they entered the war, apart from their exceptional skill and persistence with the machine gun, they were not accurate users of hand weapons ... by 1953, few of the old signs remained. They had become as tenacious and as earth-seeking as ants, and in that lay a great part of their success. Two and one-half years of war in Korea were a bonanza for Communist China. On that training ground her armies became as skilled as any in the world in the techniques of hitting, evading and surviving.782

In 1950, the Red Chinese were pretty rough around the edges, tending more towards reckless attacks and stubborn defenses rather than strategy and safeguarding. But they adapted and learned as they went. When they joined the war, aside from their impressive skills and persistence with machine guns, they weren’t very precise with hand weapons... By 1953, few of the old traits remained. They had become as determined and ground-seeking as ants, and that was a big part of their success. Two and a half years of war in Korea were a huge opportunity for Communist China. On that training ground, their armies grew to be as skilled as any in the world in the art of striking, dodging, and surviving.782

782 Marshall, Pork Chop Hill, pp. 20–21.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Marshall, Pork Chop Hill, pp. 20–21.

The most telling characteristic of the Chinese Communist soldier, who essentially was a guerrilla fighter, may thus be his ready capacity to learn from experience, particularly the fine art of deception.

The most notable trait of the Chinese Communist soldier, who was essentially a guerrilla fighter, is probably his ability to quickly learn from experience, especially the skill of deception.

As important as any of the lessons from the battlefield was the experience of dealing with the Communists at the truce table. Cease-fire talks dragged on interminably over a period of 2 years and 17 days. Some 158 meetings were held, with more than 18 million words recorded, most of these dealing with the prisoner exchange that had been the major stumbling block since early 1952. During the two years of the truce talks, from July 1951-July 1953, an additional 56,000 Americans had been killed or wounded, bringing total U.S. combat losses to more than 136,000.783 (U.S. forces suffered some 80,000 casualties in the first year of the war.) And in the end, the final solution to the POW problem was substantially that first proposed by the UNC in April 1952.

As important as any lessons learned from the battlefield was the experience of negotiating with the Communists at the truce table. Cease-fire talks went on endlessly for 2 years and 17 days. About 158 meetings were held, with over 18 million words recorded, most of which focused on the prisoner exchange that had been the main issue since early 1952. During the two years of the truce talks, from July 1951 to July 1953, an additional 56,000 Americans were killed or wounded, bringing total U.S. combat losses to more than 136,000. 783 (U.S. forces suffered around 80,000 casualties in the first year of the war.) In the end, the final solution to the POW issue was largely the same as the proposal put forward by the UNC in April 1952.

783 Marshall, Military History of Korean War, pp. 77, 78.

783 Marshall, Military History of Korean War, pp. 77, 78.

Commenting on the Communist strategem that opened the truce talks in July 1951, U.S. government officials observed at the time the negotiations began:

Commenting on the Communist strategy that started the truce talks in July 1951, U.S. government officials noted when the negotiations began:

The suggestion was received with caution since the free people of the world have learned that Communist words and Communist intent seldom coincide. Regardless, our leaders initiated action for preliminary ceasefire talks with the hope that the Communists were acting in good faith.784

The suggestion was met with caution since the free people of the world have learned that Communist rhetoric and Communist intentions rarely align. Still, our leaders took the initiative for preliminary ceasefire talks, hoping that the Communists were being sincere. 784

784 Semianl Rpt SecNav (1 Jan-30 Jun), 1951, p. 187.

784 Semianl Rpt SecNav (1 Jan-30 Jun), 1951, p. 187.

Despite this early realistic appraisal of the enemy, the degree to which the Communists were to employ truce negotiations as simply an extension of the battlefield was not immediately evident.

Despite this early realistic assessment of the enemy, it wasn’t clear right away how much the Communists would use truce negotiations as just another way to continue the fight.

A key factor is involved here. The proverbial Chinese quality of passivity and seemingly endless patience, both on the individual and528 national level, was fully utilized to their advantage. In contrast, the Western people, particularly Americans, are characteristically impatient to complete a task once it is started. As Admiral C. Turner Joy, USN, who initially headed the UNC delegation to the Korean Armistice Conference, commented, “We are a people who like to get things done.... The Communist negotiating method recognizes and seeks to gain advantage by aggravating our American tendency to impatience through the imposition of endless delays.”785 The American attitude is to feel that a deadlocked issue should be resolved by mutual concessions, which puts the enemy on favorable ground in employing his delaying tactics. The Communist view is that by deliberately slowing the progress toward completion of the armistice the position of their opponent will gradually be undermined. Thus, Communists regard any concession made by their opponents as a sign of weakness. Whereas Westerners often feel that to accept part of a negotiating proposal will encourage the Communists to respond in kind, such an action is apt to lead to an even more unyielding position on their part.

A key factor is at play here. The well-known Chinese traits of passivity and seemingly endless patience, both individually and on a national level, were fully exploited to their advantage. In contrast, Westerners, especially Americans, are typically impatient to finish a task once it begins. As Admiral C. Turner Joy, USN, who first led the UNC delegation to the Korean Armistice Conference, said, “We are a people who like to get things done.... The Communist negotiating style recognizes and aims to exploit our American tendency toward impatience through endless delays.”528 The American mindset views a deadlocked issue as something that should be resolved through mutual concessions, which gives the enemy an edge in applying their delaying tactics. The Communist perspective is that by intentionally dragging out the process of finalizing the armistice, they will gradually weaken their opponent's position. Thus, Communists see any concession made by their opponents as a sign of weakness. While Westerners often believe that accepting part of a negotiation proposal will encourage the Communists to reciprocate, this action is likely to lead to an even more inflexible stance on their part.

785 Joy, Truce Negotiations, p. 39.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Joy, Truce Talks, p. 39.

* * * * *

The armistice effort in Korea also taught the following lessons:

The peace talks in Korea also taught the following lessons:

Never weaken your pressure when the enemy sues for [an] armistice. Increase it.

Never ease up your pressure when the enemy asks for a ceasefire. Crank it up.

Armistice conferences should be brief ... to allow ... talks to become protracted is to indicate weakness on your part. This encourages your Communist opponents.

Armistice conferences should be short ... to let ... discussions drag on is to show weakness on your part. This gives strength to your Communist opponents.

The site at which armistice talks are held should be outside the area of conflict.

The location for armistice talks should be outside the conflict zone.

Never concede anything to the Communists for nothing, merely to make progress.786

Never give anything to the Communists for free, just to make progress.786

786 Ibid., pp. 166–173, passim.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid., pp. 166–173, various places.

Possibly no one had more first-hand experience in negotiating with the enemy in the Korean War than Colonel James C. Murray, the Marine Corps staff officer who was involved in the truce talks from 8 July 1951 to 27 July 1953. In these two years he served as liaison officer between the delegations of the two sides and participated actively in meetings. On three different occasions he negotiated the truce line which was to separate UNC and Communist forces. In July 1953, as Senior Liaison Officer, he was in charge of529 the UNC staff group that determined the final line of demarcation. He has noted that Communist rationalizations readily disregard whatever facts or logic which do not fit their purpose, no matter how inconsistent.

Possibly no one had more first-hand experience in negotiating with the enemy during the Korean War than Colonel James C. Murray, the Marine Corps staff officer who was involved in the truce talks from July 8, 1951, to July 27, 1953. During these two years, he served as the liaison officer between the delegations of both sides and took an active part in the meetings. He negotiated the truce line that was meant to separate UNC and Communist forces on three different occasions. In July 1953, as Senior Liaison Officer, he led the UNC staff group that established the final line of demarcation. He has pointed out that Communist rationalizations often ignore any facts or logic that don’t align with their agenda, regardless of how inconsistent they may be.

While customarily ignoring all restrictions of the Geneva Convention in dealing with prisoners, for example, when it was expedient to their interests the Communists would then argue for an incredibly narrow interpretation of the Convention’s provisions. Declared Colonel Murray: “Having come to the conference table only because they were near defeat, the Communists were prepared from the very first to make the most of the negotiations to create ... a ‘climate of victory’.”787 This accounts for their concern with even the smallest detail of “stage setting,” for maintaining “face,” and for practical advantages from negotiating conditions, such as the physical setting of the truce talk site.

While typically ignoring all the rules of the Geneva Convention when it came to prisoners, when it suited their interests, the Communists would advocate for an extremely narrow interpretation of the Convention’s guidelines. Colonel Murray stated: “Having come to the conference table only because they were close to defeat, the Communists were ready from the very beginning to exploit the negotiations to create ... a ‘climate of victory’.”787 This explains their focus on even the smallest details of “stage setting,” the need to “save face,” and the practical benefits of the conditions for negotiating, like the physical location of the truce talks.

787 Col J. C. Murray, “Prisoner Issue in the Korean Armistice Negotiations,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 9 (Sep 55), p. 30.

787 Col J. C. Murray, “Prisoner Issue in the Korean Armistice Negotiations,” Marine Corps Gazette, vol. 39, no. 9 (Sep 1955), p. 30.

* * * * *

As the Marine officer further observed:

As the Marine officer continued to observe:

A fundamental objective of the Communists in respect to the truce was the appearance of the Communist victory in Korea.... An armistice, no less than war, could be looked upon only as a means to an end ... to this end they negotiate patiently and skillfully ... temporary inconveniences must be borne for ... the attainment of long-range political objectives.788

A key goal for the Communists regarding the truce was to create the impression of a Communist victory in Korea. An armistice, just like war, was seen as a way to achieve their objectives. They engaged in negotiations with patience and skill, understanding that they had to endure short-term challenges for the sake of reaching their long-term political goals.788

788 Ibid., p. 29.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., p. 29.

Certainly, the close interaction between Communist military operations and truce negotiations, a key factor since 1951, was particularly apparent during April-July 1953 as the war drew to an end.

Certainly, the close interaction between Communist military operations and ceasefire talks, which has been a key factor since 1951, was especially clear during April-July 1953 as the war came to a close.

In addition to Communist China which had emerged stronger and with considerably more prestige from the war, the other Asian nation to have undergone marked military growth was the Republic of Korea. In June 1950, the ROK army had numbered approximately 98,000 inadequately trained troops, armed chiefly with hand-carried weapons such as rifles and carbines, ill-prepared to hold back a determined enemy attack. The ROK army was little more than a constabulary force organized by KMAG (Korean Military Advisory Group) for internal police duty. Only 65,000 men had actually received unit combat training. ROK armed forces during the three years of the war had increased six-fold and by July 1953 totaled nearly 600,000 men.

In addition to Communist China, which came out of the war stronger and more prestigious, the other Asian country that saw significant military growth was the Republic of Korea. In June 1950, the ROK army had about 98,000 poorly trained troops, mainly armed with handheld weapons like rifles and carbines, and was ill-equipped to fend off a determined enemy attack. The ROK army was basically a police force set up by KMAG (Korean Military Advisory Group) for internal security. Only 65,000 soldiers had actually received combat training. Over the three years of the war, the ROK armed forces expanded six times and by July 1953 reached nearly 600,000 troops.

530

530

Training and equipment had steadily improved the ROK battle efficiency which, in the 1950–1951 period, had been handicapped by lack of heavy tanks, mortars, artillery, antitank mines and shells, and other heavy weapons. By the spring of 1951 the ROK army was being transformed into an effective fighting force, due largely to the determination of General Van Fleet, then EUSAK commander. In 1952 the ROK army had been enlarged to 12 divisions and the ROK Marine forces had been similarly expanded. Gradual augmentation resulted in a total of 16 ROK divisions, most of these with organic artillery; by July 1953 ROK troops had assumed responsibility for the majority of the UN line.

Training and equipment had steadily improved the ROK's battle efficiency, which from 1950 to 1951 had been limited by a lack of heavy tanks, mortars, artillery, antitank mines and shells, and other heavy weapons. By the spring of 1951, the ROK army was being transformed into an effective fighting force, largely thanks to the determination of General Van Fleet, who was then the commander of EUSAK. By 1952, the ROK army had expanded to 12 divisions, and the ROK Marine forces had similarly grown. This gradual increase resulted in a total of 16 ROK divisions, most of which had their own artillery; by July 1953, ROK troops had taken on responsibility for the majority of the UN line.

Marine Corps experience with its ROK counterpart had been instructive and generally encouraging.789 Organized in 1949 by the Republic of Korea with assistance from KMAG, the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment had taken part in antiguerrilla operations until the NKPA invasion. With the outbreak of hostilities, the KMCs engaged in UN delaying actions in southwest Korea until September 1950 when the Korean regiment of nearly 3,000 men was attached to the 5th Marines as part of the Inchon assault force. Later the KMCs were involved in defense of Wonsan and the Hamhung-Hungnam beachhead as well as the Pohang patrol. After serving as a maneuver element with the ROK forces in early 1951, the 1st KMC Regiment was attached permanently to the 1st Marine Division in March of that year, participating in the Hwachon Reservoir fighting and performing valuable service in the interrogation of POWs.

The Marine Corps' experience with its ROK counterpart was informative and mostly positive.789 Established in 1949 by the Republic of Korea with support from KMAG, the 1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment participated in anti-guerrilla operations until the invasion by the NKPA. When hostilities began, the KMCs engaged in UN delaying actions in southwest Korea until September 1950, when the nearly 3,000-man Korean regiment was attached to the 5th Marines as part of the Inchon assault force. Later, the KMCs were involved in the defense of Wonsan and the Hamhung-Hungnam beachhead, as well as the Pohang patrol. After serving as a maneuver element with the ROK forces in early 1951, the 1st KMC Regiment was permanently attached to the 1st Marine Division in March of that year, participating in the Hwachon Reservoir fighting and playing a key role in the interrogation of POWs.

789 See “1stMarDiv, 1st KMC Regt. and Its Relationship to the 1stMarDiv,” “SAR” File (Korea), Type “C” Rpt.

789 See “1st MarDiv, 1st KMC Regt. and Its Relationship to the 1st MarDiv,” “SAR” File (Korea), Type “C” Rpt.

The KMCs modeled themselves after U.S. Marines, particularly emulating the traditional offensive Marine esprit de corps and overriding goal to “close with the enemy and seize the objective” regardless of strong resistance. The combat courage and determination of the KMCs was cited by CG, 1st Marine Division, on several occasions.

The KMCs looked up to U.S. Marines, especially adopting the classic Marine esprit de corps and their main goal to “get close to the enemy and achieve the objective” despite facing tough opposition. The bravery and commitment of the KMCs were mentioned by the CG of the 1st Marine Division on multiple occasions.

During the 1952–1953 period, the KMC/RCT provided the Marine division with nearly a quarter of its combat strength and became the fourth regiment of the division. The ROK Marine Corps also consisted of the 2d KMC Regiment, which furnished personnel for the WCIDU/ECIDU island security forces, and the 5th KMC Battalion, attached to the Marine division in 1952. Classes in infantry tactics for KMC officer and enlisted personnel were conducted531 at the Korean Marine Corps Training Center at Chinhae. This was patterned after U.S. Marine Corps recruit and officers’ basic schools, under supervision of USMC staff personnel. Coupled with an offensive spirit and desire to attain U.S. Marine Corps standards and combat performance, the Korean Marines largely overcame early major problems resulting from the language barrier, translation of U.S. basic training materials, and the insufficient number of qualified and experienced Korean military instructors. One early recruit class possibly established a record for brevity in training when its members, after only a few weeks, were ordered to participate in the Inchon assault which was the Korean Marines’ first specialized amphibious operation.

During the 1952–1953 period, the KMC/RCT provided the Marine division with nearly a quarter of its combat strength and became the fourth regiment of the division. The ROK Marine Corps also included the 2d KMC Regiment, which supplied personnel for the WCIDU/ECIDU island security forces, and the 5th KMC Battalion, which was attached to the Marine division in 1952. Courses in infantry tactics for KMC officers and enlisted personnel were held531 at the Korean Marine Corps Training Center in Chinhae. This was modeled after U.S. Marine Corps recruit and officer basic schools, supervised by USMC staff. Along with a strong motivation to meet U.S. Marine Corps standards and combat performance, the Korean Marines largely overcame early significant challenges related to the language barrier, translating U.S. basic training materials, and the lack of qualified and experienced Korean military instructors. One early recruit class possibly set a record for the shortest training duration when its members, after just a few weeks, were ordered to take part in the Inchon assault, which was the Korean Marines’ first specialized amphibious operation.

Many of the hard lessons of Korea—as well as some of its unique problems—resulted from the fact that this was America’s first major experience in a modern, undeclared, and limited war. Accustomed to the tradition of hard-hitting, all-out war and decisive victory, both the fighting man at the front and Nation tended to view the conflict as well as its ultimate accomplishments as inconclusive.790

Many of the tough lessons from Korea—and some of its specific challenges—came from the fact that this was America's first major experience in a modern, undeclared, and limited war. Used to the tradition of aggressive, full-scale warfare and definite victories, both the soldiers on the front lines and the nation tended to see the conflict and its ultimate outcomes as unclear. 790

790 The course of the war, particularly its protracted and static nature, had led to growing national apathy and opposition, particularly on the U.S. home front. In late 1950, national opinion polls found that 80 percent of the people were in favor of the war and seven months later that 67 percent were against it. On the Korean front lines, morale was generally highest during heavy ground actions or large scale air attacks. Washington Post, dtd 12 Jul 70, p. A-17; PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 1-16.

790 The course of the war, especially its long and stagnant nature, resulted in increasing national apathy and opposition, particularly on the home front in the U.S. By late 1950, national opinion polls showed that 80 percent of people supported the war, while seven months later, only 67 percent were in favor of it. On the Korean front lines, morale was typically highest during intense ground battles or large-scale air strikes. Washington Post, dtd 12 Jul 70, p. A-17; PacFlt EvalRpt No. 6, p. 1-16.

Most importantly, immediate collective security action by the UNC had prevented another small country from being subdued by direct, armed aggression. And the Communists had failed to attain their objective: the forced unification of Korea, not as a free nation but as a Russian satellite, as was North Korea. The balance sheet for UNC military intervention showed that 22 nations (including the ROK) had provided assistance, either personnel or materiel in defense of South Korea. Many of these countries had supplied token units of battalion-size or less and several had furnished noncombat medical facilities. Despite the fact these detachments from other Allied countries totalled “only 44,000 men they were disproportionately valuable in emphasizing the collective, coalition nature of the Korean war effort.”791 Major losses, however, had been borne by ROK and American troops.

Most importantly, immediate collective security action by the UNC had prevented another small country from being taken over by direct, armed aggression. And the Communists had failed to achieve their goal: the forced unification of Korea, not as a free nation but as a Russian satellite, like North Korea. The results of UNC military intervention showed that 22 nations (including the ROK) had provided assistance, either personnel or supplies, in defense of South Korea. Many of these countries had contributed small units of battalion size or less, and several had provided noncombat medical facilities. Despite the fact that these detachments from other Allied countries totaled only 44,000 men, they were disproportionately valuable in highlighting the collective, coalition nature of the Korean war effort.791 Major losses, however, had been suffered by ROK and American troops.

791 Rees, Korea, p. 33.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Rees, *Korea*, p. 33.

UNC casualties numbered 996,937 killed, wounded, and missing.532 U.S. losses were 136,937, of which 33,629 represented battle deaths and 103,308 wounded in action. A measure of the role that ground forces played in Korea “may be judged from the fact that, of the total United States battle casualties for the entire conflict, the Army and Marines accounted for 97 percent.”792 Casualties of other UNC countries, exclusive of the U.S. and ROK, totaled approximately 17,000 although no other Allied nation lost as many as 1,000 dead. ROK casualties were listed at 850,000. Communist losses were estimated at 1,420,000 (CCF: 900,000 killed and wounded; NKPA: 520,000 killed and wounded).

UNC casualties totaled 996,937, including killed, wounded, and missing.532 U.S. losses reached 136,937, with 33,629 being battle deaths and 103,308 wounded in action. The impact of ground forces in Korea can be seen in the fact that, out of all U.S. battle casualties during the entire conflict, the Army and Marines made up 97 percent. 792 Casualties from other UNC countries, not including the U.S. and ROK, were around 17,000, though no other Allied nation lost more than 1,000 dead. ROK casualties were reported at 850,000. Communist losses were estimated to be 1,420,000 (CCF: 900,000 killed and wounded; NKPA: 520,000 killed and wounded).

792 Ridgway, Korean War, p. viii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ridgway, Korean War, p. viii.

For the Republic of South Korea, the end of the war in some respects represented a status quo ante bellum. Korea still remained politically partitioned and geographically divided. Whereas the 38th Parallel had been the territorial boundary prior to the Communist attack of 25 June 1950, the cease-fire line dividing North and South Korea in 1953 was the point of contact between ground forces at the time the armistice was signed. This demarcation line, however, “represented a stronger defense than the 38th Parallel as it possessed a geographical basis all along its approximately 155-mile length.”793 The new boundary ran above the KANSAS Line, the commanding ground north of the 38th Parallel.

For South Korea, the end of the war in some ways marked a status quo ante bellum. Korea still remained politically divided and geographically split. While the 38th Parallel had been the territorial boundary before the Communist attack on June 25, 1950, the cease-fire line separating North and South Korea in 1953 was where the ground forces met when the armistice was signed. This new line, however, “represented a stronger defense than the 38th Parallel since it had a geographical basis along its approximately 155-mile length.”793 The new boundary was located above the KANSAS Line, the commanding ground north of the 38th Parallel.

793 Rees, Korea, p. 431. In the three years of war, North Korea had gained 850 square miles of territory southwest of the Parallel, while the ROK acquired 2,350 square miles north of the original June 1950 boundary.

793 Rees, Korea, p. 431. During the three years of war, North Korea gained 850 square miles of territory southwest of the Parallel, while the ROK acquired 2,350 square miles north of the original June 1950 boundary.

Possibly the single, most important lesson to be drawn from the Korean War is that many of our nation’s military assumptions—and resulting tactical decisions—tended to be based on a lack of appreciation of enemy capabilities. In many instances intelligence evaluations focused on “probable intentions of the enemy rather than on his capabilities.”794

Possibly the most important lesson from the Korean War is that many of our military assumptions—and the tactical decisions that followed—were often based on a misunderstanding of the enemy's capabilities. In many cases, intelligence assessments concentrated more on the "likely intentions of the enemy than on his capabilities."794

794 Collins, War in Peacetime, p. 175.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Collins, War in Peacetime, p. 175.

While America put great military value and reliance on its massive destructive air power, for example, we were confronted by an enemy who practically never employed his own air capability, but instead moved freely at night and hid by day and was thus little deterred by our aerial harassment. And while our own battle summaries regularly cited kill ratios of 1 USMC to 3.75 CCF and substantial533 Communist losses,795 we seemed to ignore an enemy mind that thought in terms of numerical superiority and was little concerned about the high human cost of holding key terrain or annexing a desired position. In the last month of the war alone, Eighth Army estimated that CCF casualties numbered 72,000, with more than 25,000 killed.

While America placed a lot of military value and reliance on its extensive destructive air power, we faced an enemy that hardly used its own air capability. Instead, they moved freely at night and hid during the day, making them less affected by our aerial attacks. And even though our battle summaries often reported kill ratios of 1 USMC to 3.75 CCF and significant Communist losses, we seemed to overlook an enemy mindset focused on numerical superiority and indifferent to the high human cost of securing key terrain or capturing a desired position. In just the last month of the war, the Eighth Army estimated that CCF casualties amounted to 72,000, with over 25,000 killed.

795 Official records show that the 1stMarDiv inflicted approximately 59,805 CCF casualties (11,957 KIA; 15,111 estimated WIA or KIA; 32,643 estimated WIA; and 94 POWs) during the Apr 52-Jul 53 period on the western front. For the same time, Marine infantry casualties were approximately 13,000 plus some 2,500 for its 1st KMC/RCT.

795 Official records indicate that the 1stMarDiv caused around 59,805 casualties to the CCF (11,957 killed in action; 15,111 estimated killed or wounded in action; 32,643 estimated wounded; and 94 prisoners of war) during the period from April 1952 to July 1953 on the western front. During the same period, Marine infantry casualties were about 13,000, along with approximately 2,500 for its 1st KMC/RCT.

In both battlefield tactics and high-level strategy, the Korean War revealed a strong tendency on the part of the UNC to predict enemy action by values and ideology largely reflecting our own. Whether because of wishful thinking, basic mistakes in judgment, or international naiveté, the 1950–1953 experience repeatedly indicated a need on the part of Allied nations for considerably more hard-headed realism in dealing with a Communist adversary. The original UNC military objective of halting Communist aggression in Korea had been successfully accomplished, without enlarging the conflict into a nuclear war. At the same time, Korea had also provided a sobering lesson. It demonstrated how, in a limited war, overriding political considerations may permit the enemy to operate from a privileged sanctuary and allow him to seize and, in many respects, retain the initiative.

In both battlefield tactics and overall strategy, the Korean War showed a clear tendency among the UNC to predict enemy actions based on values and ideologies that largely mirrored our own. Whether from wishful thinking, simple judgment errors, or international naiveté, the experiences from 1950 to 1953 repeatedly highlighted the need for Allied nations to adopt a much more pragmatic approach when dealing with a Communist opponent. The original UNC military goal of stopping Communist aggression in Korea was successfully achieved, without escalating the conflict into a nuclear war. At the same time, Korea also taught an important lesson. It revealed that in a limited war, dominating political issues can allow the enemy to operate from a safe haven and enable them to take and, in many ways, maintain the initiative.

The Korean War had made America more aware of the threat of world Communism and had resulted in the strengthening of our national defense commitments in the Far East as well as in Europe. It had also validated the concept of a balanced defense force. In contrast to the emphasis on air capability and atomic power that had dominated the strategic thinking in the post-World War II era, the Korean hostilities pointed to the requirement for a balanced, diversified military force of sufficient strength and readiness to cope effectively and on short notice with any emergency. Korea had underscored how severe peacetime budgetary cut-backs had led to unpreparedness. The Korean experience had also shown the need for flexibility in mobilization planning. Previously, this had been projected for an all-out, general war, based on America’s role in World War II. The Nation’s post-Korean policy thus sought, for the first534 time, a military strategy that would effectively deter either a major war or local aggression.

The Korean War made America more aware of the threat of global Communism and resulted in stronger national defense commitments in both the Far East and Europe. It also confirmed the need for a balanced defense force. Unlike the focus on air power and atomic capabilities that had dominated post-World War II strategic thinking, the Korean conflict highlighted the necessity for a balanced, diverse military force that was strong and ready enough to effectively handle emergencies on short notice. Korea revealed how severe budget cuts in peacetime had led to a lack of preparedness. The Korean experience also demonstrated the need for flexibility in mobilization planning. Previously, this had been oriented toward an all-out, general war based on America’s role in World War II. Consequently, the Nation’s post-Korean policy aimed for the first time at a military strategy that could effectively deter either a major war or local aggression.

Korean hostilities illustrated another important lesson. South Korea had been attacked by an act of direct aggression, in flagrant violation of the Cairo Declaration and U.N. Charter. It was apparent that, despite the defense treaties and mutual aid pacts which the United States had signed during and after World War II, “any number of alliances, if not supported by strong military preparedness, would never restrain aggression.”796 It had taken the Korean War to drive home the harsh reality that military preparedness, possession of superior power, and the willingness to use that power were the only deterrent to enemy aggression throughout the world.

Korean hostilities highlighted another crucial lesson. South Korea had faced a direct attack, clearly violating the Cairo Declaration and the U.N. Charter. It became clear that, despite the defense treaties and mutual aid agreements the United States had established during and after World War II, “any number of alliances, if not backed by strong military readiness, would never stop aggression.”796 It took the Korean War to emphasize the harsh truth that military preparedness, having superior power, and being willing to use that power were the only ways to deter enemy aggression globally.

796 Marshall, Military History of Korean War, p. 2.

796 Marshall, Military History of Korean War, p. 2.

The Korean War also caused the Communists to modify their strategy from one of overt aggression to more insidious means of gaining their political and economic objectives. As the Marine Corps Commandant, General Shepherd, warned: “Their tactic is to use war by proxy, war by satellite, war by threat and subversion.”797 And, although it was not fully apparent at the time, the Korean attack “was to prove to be one of the first in a series of ‘wars of liberation’”798 that the world would be witness to.

The Korean War made the Communists change their approach from direct aggression to more subtle methods of achieving their political and economic goals. As the Marine Corps Commandant, General Shepherd, warned: “Their tactic is to use proxy wars, satellite wars, war by intimidation, and subversion.”797 And, while it wasn’t completely obvious at the time, the Korean attack “was to prove to be one of the first in a series of ‘wars of liberation’”798 that the world would see.

797 Anl Rpt of the CMC to SecNav, FY 1955, p. 3.

797 Anl Rpt of the CMC to SecNav, FY 1955, p. 3.

798 Collins, War in Peacetime, pp. 3–4.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Collins, War in Peacetime, pp. 3–4.

In the final analysis, the Korean War evolved into a prolonged battle of position and attrition in which the Communists, operating close to their base of supply, were fought to a standstill by United Nations forces under unfavorable conditions of climate and logistics. In countering the enemy threat in Korea, the American units committed there initially suffered from the effects of peacetime apathy that had followed the rapid demobilization following World War II. As the Korean War, originally visualized as a “police action” of brief duration, ground on into a major effort spanning a period of three years and one month, loud voices were raised on the home front to protest the expenditure of lives and materiel in a venture that was not always clearly understood by all Americans.

In the end, the Korean War turned into a long battle of positioning and attrition, where the Communists, fighting close to their supply base, reached a stalemate against United Nations forces under tough weather and logistical challenges. American units sent to Korea initially faced the consequences of peacetime indifference that followed the quick demobilization after World War II. As the Korean War, initially seen as a short "police action," dragged on for over three years, there were growing calls from the home front to protest the loss of lives and resources in a mission that not all Americans fully grasped.

Among the U.S. forces committed on this far flung battlefront, it was once again the Marine Corps component that stood out in its sacrifice, military skills, and devotion to duty. When rushed into the battle during the first desperate weeks and months of the war,535 the quickly-augmented Marine units helped to restore stability to the shattered EUSAK front line. During the daringly conceived and executed operation at Inchon, Marines accomplished this incredibly complex amphibious operation with their customary spirit and precision. Never was their courage and tenacity more conspicuous than during those bitter days of the Chosin Reservoir campaign following the Chinese Communist intervention.

Among the U.S. forces involved in this distant battlefront, it was once again the Marine Corps that stood out for its sacrifice, military skills, and commitment to duty. When rushed into battle during the first desperate weeks and months of the war,535 the quickly-reinforced Marine units helped restore stability to the shattered EUSAK front line. During the daringly planned and executed operation at Inchon, Marines carried out this incredibly complex amphibious operation with their usual spirit and precision. Their courage and determination were never more evident than during the harsh days of the Chosin Reservoir campaign following the Chinese Communist intervention.

In the static, or positional, warfare that marked the final operations in Korea, the 1st Marine Division and 1st Marine Aircraft Wing executed their respective missions with professional skill and dispatch, regardless of tactical problems and the dreary monotony that characterized a large part of the Korean War. U.S. Marines had seen combat throughout much of the Korean peninsula. The fighting had taken them from Pusan to Inchon and Seoul, to the Chosin, to Inje and the Hwachon Reservoir in the Punchbowl area, and finally, in 1952–1953, to the critical 35-mile front in West Korea near Panmunjom. In Korea, as in past wars, Marines demonstrated the versatility, aggressiveness, and readiness which has always been a tradition of the Corps.

In the stagnant, or positional, warfare that defined the final operations in Korea, the 1st Marine Division and the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing carried out their missions with skill and speed, despite facing tactical challenges and the tedious repetition that marked much of the Korean War. U.S. Marines had battled across much of the Korean peninsula. They fought from Pusan to Inchon and Seoul, then to Chosin, Inje, and the Hwachon Reservoir in the Punchbowl area, and finally, in 1952–1953, to the crucial 35-mile front in West Korea near Panmunjom. In Korea, as in previous wars, Marines showcased the adaptability, determination, and readiness that have always been a hallmark of the Corps.

Marine courage and combat performance went far toward removing the image of Western softness and decadence which the Communists had so mistakenly construed in their own minds. It is a record of which all Americans and the Free World can be proud.

Marine courage and combat performance greatly contributed to dispelling the image of Western weakness and moral decline that the Communists had wrongly perceived. This is a record that all Americans and the Free World can take pride in.


  • AAA—Antiaircraft Artillery
  • AA—Antiaircraft
  • AD—Douglas “Skyraider” Single-Engine Attack Aircraft
  • ADC—Assistant Division Commander
  • ANGLICO—Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison Company
  • AO—Aerial Observer
  • ASP—Ammunition Supply Point
  • AT—Antitank
  • AU—Attack model of Vought F4U “Corsair”
  • BAR—Browning Automatic Rifle
  • BLT—Battalion Landing Team
  • Bn—Battalion
  • Brig—Brigade
  • Btry—Battery
  • CAS—Close Air Support
  • CCF—Chinese Communist Forces
  • CG—Commanding General
  • CinCFE—Commander in Chief, Far East
  • CinCUNC—Commander in Chief, United Nations Command
  • CinCPacFlt—Commander in Chief, Pacific Fleet
  • CMC—Commandant of the Marine Corps
  • CNO—Chief of Naval Operations
  • Co—Company
  • CO—Commanding Officer
  • ComdD—Command Diary (also called Historical Diary, or War Diary)
  • ComNavFE—Commander, Naval Forces, Far East
  • ComServPac—Commander, Service Force, Pacific
  • CONUS—Continental United States
  • COP—Combat Outpost
  • CP—Command Post
  • CPX—Command Post Exercise
  • CSG—Combat Service Group
  • CTE—Commander Task Element
  • CTF—Commander Task Force
  • CTG—Commander Task Group
  • CVE—Escort Aircraft Carrier
  • CVL—Light Aircraft Carrier
  • Div—Division
  • DMZ—Demilitarized Zone
  • DOW—Died of Wounds
  • Dtd—Dated
  • DUKW—Marine Amphibious Truck
  • ECIDE(U)—East Coast Island Defense Element (Unit)
  • ECM—Electronic Countermeasures
  • Engr—Engineer
  • EUSAK—Eighth United States Army in Korea
  • F2H-2P—McDonnell “Banshee” Two-Engine Jet Fighter (photo model)
  • F3D-2—Douglas “Skyknight” Two-Engine Jet Fighter
  • F4U—Vought “Corsair” Single-Engine Fighter
  • F7F-3N—Grumman “Tigercat” Twin-Engine Night Fighter
  • 538
  • F9F-2,4,5—Grumman “Panther” Single-Engine Jet Fighter
  • F-80—Air Force “Shooting Star” Fighter Aircraft
  • F-84—Air Force “Thunderjet” Fighter Aircraft
  • FAC—Forward Air Controller
  • FAF—Fifth Air Force
  • FASRon—Fleet Air Service Squadron
  • FDC—Fire Direction Center
  • FEAF—Far East Air Forces
  • FECOM—Far East Command
  • FMFLant—Fleet Marine Force, Atlantic
  • FMFPac—Fleet Marine Force, Pacific
  • FO—Forward Observer (artillery)
  • FY—Fiscal Year
  • HE—High Explosive
  • Hedron—Headquarters Squadron
  • H&I—Harassing & Interdiction
  • HMR—Marine Helicopter Transport Squadron
  • H03S-1—Sikorsky Three-Place Observation Helicopter
  • Hq—Headquarters
  • HQMC—Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps
  • HRS-1—Sikorsky Single-Engine Helicopter
  • H&S—Headquarters and Service
  • HTL-4—Bell Two-Place Helicopter
  • Interv—Interview
  • JCS—Joint Chiefs of Staff
  • JOC—Joint Operations Center
  • KCOMZ—Korean Communication Zone (sometimes KComZ)
  • KIA—Killed in Action
  • KMAG—Korean Military Advisory Group
  • KMC—Korean Marine Corps
  • KMC/RCT—Korean Marine Corps Regimental Combat Team
  • KPR—Kimpo Provisional Regiment
  • KSC—Korean Service Corps
  • LogCom—Logistical Command
  • Ltr—Letter
  • LST—Landing Ship, Tank
  • LVT—Landing Vehicle, Tracked
  • M4A3E8—Flame Tank, Medium
  • M-46—Medium Tank
  • MAC—Military Armistice Commission
  • MACG—Marine Air Control Group
  • MAG—Marine Aircraft Group
  • Mar—Marine(s)
  • MARLEX—Marine Landing Exercise
  • MASRT—Marine Air Support Radar Team
  • MAW—Marine Aircraft Wing
  • MBP—Main Battle Position
  • MDL—Military Demarcation Line
  • MGCIS—Marine Ground Control Intercept Squadron
  • MIA—Missing in Action
  • MIG—Russian Single-Seat Jet Fighter-Interceptor
  • MLR—Main Line of Resistance
  • MOH—Medal of Honor
  • MOS—Military Occupation Specialty
  • Mosquito—Single Engine Plane used as Airborne FAC and for Target Spotting
  • MP—Military Police
  • MPQ—Ground Radar-Controlled Bombing
  • MS—Manuscript
  • Msg—Message
  • MSR—Main Supply Route
  • MTACS—Marine Tactical Air Control Squadron
  • MT—Motor Transport
  • NCAS—Night Close Air Support
  • NCO—Noncommissioned Officer
  • NGF—Naval Gunfire
  • NKPA—North Korean People’s Army
  • N.d.—Date not given
  • NNRC—Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission
  • NNSC—Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission
  • N.t.—Title not given
  • OCMH—Office of the Chief of Military History (USA)
  • OE-1—Cessna Single-Engine Light Observation Plane
  • 539
  • OOB—Order of Battle
  • OP—Observation Post (Sometimes used to refer to an Outpost)
  • OPLR—Outpost Line of Resistance
  • OY—Consolidated-Vultee Light Observation Plane
  • PIR—Periodic Intelligence Report
  • PO-2—Russian Trainer Aircraft
  • POW—Prisoner of War
  • PPSH—Soviet-made 7.62mm Sub-machine (“Burp”) Gun
  • Prov—Provisional
  • PUC—Presidential Unit Citation
  • R4D—Douglas Twin-Engine Transport (Navy and Marine Corps designation of C-47)
  • R5D—Douglas Four-Engine Transport (Navy and Marine Corps designation of C-54)
  • RCT—Regimental Combat Team
  • ROK—Republic of Korea
  • SAR—Special Action Report
  • SecDef—Secretary of Defense
  • SecNav—Secretary of Navy
  • Serv—Service
  • Sig—Signal
  • SOP—Standing Operating Procedure
  • TACC—Tactical Air Coordination Center
  • TADC—Tactical Air Direction Center
  • TAFC—Turkish Armed Forces Command
  • TAO—Tactical Air Observer
  • TE—Task Element
  • T/E—Table of Equipment
  • TF—Task Force
  • TG—Task Group
  • Tk—Tank
  • T/O—Table of Organization
  • TOT—Time on Target Fuze
  • TU—Task Unit
  • UN—United Nations
  • UNC—United Nations Command
  • USA—United States Army
  • USAF—United States Air Force
  • USMC—United States Marine Corps
  • USN—United States Navy
  • VMA—Marine Attack Squadron
  • VMC—Marine Composite Squadron
  • VMF—Marine Fighter Squadron
  • VMF(N)—Marine Night (All-Weather) Fighter Squadron
  • VMJ—Marine Photographic Squadron
  • VMO—Marine Observation Squadron
  • VMR—Marine Transport Squadron
  • VT—Variable Time Fuze
  • WCIDE(U)—West Coast Island Defense Element (Unit)
  • WIA—Wounded in Action
  • WP—White Phosphorous Shell
  • YAK—Russian Fighter Aircraft

1950
25 Jun North Korean People’s Army, with 60,000 troops and 100 Russian tanks, crosses 38th Parallel to invade South Korea.
25 Jun United Nations Security Council calls for end of aggression and withdrawal of NKPA troops.
27 Jun UN, adopting a U.S. resolution, proclaims NKPA attack a breach of world peace. Asks member nations to assist ROK in repelling invasion.
27 Jun Pres Truman orders U.S. air-sea units to support ROK and for U.S. Seventh Fleet to neutralize Formosan Strait.
28 Jun NKPA captures Seoul, South Korean capital.
29 Jun Pres Truman orders naval blockade of Korean coast; authorizes Far East Commander, Gen MacArthur, to send U.S. ground troops into Korea.
30 Jun Pres Truman receives Congressional authorization to order into active service any or all reserve components of Armed Forces, for a period of 21 months.
  2 Jul CNO directs that Marine reinforced regiment with supporting air be prepared for assignment to Far East.
  2 Jul CinCFE requests Marine RCT-air unit for Far East. This was inception of 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, formed less than a week later.
  3 Jul Inchon captured by North Koreans.
  5 Jul-4 Aug UNC fights series of delaying actions in Korea.
  7 Jul U.N. Security Council authorizes formation of a United Nations Command as counterforce against NKPA aggression.
  7 Jul 1st ProvMarBrig activated at Camp Pendleton, under BGen Edward A. Craig. Basic elements of 6,534-man Brigade are 5th Marines and MAG-33.
  8 Jul Gen MacArthur named Commander, UNC.
10 Jul CinCUNC asks Joint Chiefs of Staff to authorize expansion of Marine Brigade to full war-strength division.
12–14 Jul 1st ProvMarBrig embarks for Korean theater.
12 Jul LtGen Walton H. Walker named CG, Eighth U.S. Army in Korea.542
19 Jul CinCUNC makes 2d request for Marine division.
19 Jul Pres Truman authorizes Defense Dept to call up reserve units and individuals.
19 Jul CMC alerts Marine Corps organized reserve units for call to active duty following Presidential announcement.
20 Jul CMC, Gen Clifton B. Cates, orders to duty Organized Marine Corps ground reserve units, consisting of 22 units and 4,830 personnel. Partial callup for 6,000 air reservists in 30 Marine VMF and 12 MGCI squadrons.
20 Jul Taejon, temporary ROK capital, captured.
21 Jul CinCUNC makes 3d request for Marine division.
25 Jul UNC defense at Pusan deteriorates. CinCUNC orders 1st ProvMarBrig directly to Korea.
25 Jul JCS directs Marine Corps to build 1stMarDiv to war-strength.
31 Jul Masan and Chinju fall to enemy.
  2–3 Aug 1st ProvMarBrig arrives Pusan. Moves to bivouac area near Masan.
  3 Aug First Marine air strike launched by VMF-214.
  4 Aug Pusan Perimeter established by UNC in southeastern end of Korea.
  4 Aug First evacuation of casualties from Pusan by Marine VMO-6 helicopters.
  6 Aug First air mission flown by VMF-323.
  6–8 Aug CinCUNC confers with U.S. military-diplomatic officials about proposed Inchon amphibious landing.
  7–13 Aug Marine Brigade engaged in first combat operations at Chinju.
10 Aug First Marine helicopter rescue made by VMO-6 to recover downed pilot.
10–24 Aug 1stMarDiv units embark for Korea.
16 Aug EUSAK X Corps activated for coming Inchon-Seoul operation. Principal elements are 1stMarDiv and Army 7thInfDiv.
17 Aug Marine Brigade opens battle for Obong-ni (“No Name”) Ridge, leading way to destruction of enemy bridgehead at Naktong and first UNC victory in Korea.
17 Aug 7th Marines activated at Camp Pendleton and on 1 Sep embarks for Far East, arriving 21 Sep.
  1–5 Sep NKPA launches all-out offensive to break UNC perimeter defense at Pusan. In Second Naktong Battle, Brigade contains enemy at Yongsan.
13 Sep 1st ProvMarBrig deactivated and absorbed by 1stMarDiv for Inchon operation.
15 Sep D-Day, Inchon amphibious assault, spearheaded by 1stMarDiv.
17 Sep 1stMarDiv (5th Marines) recaptures Kimpo Airfield.
19–25 Sep Enemy resistance at Pusan begins to collapse. NKPA troops in retreat north from Pusan.
27 Sep 1stMarDiv recaptures Seoul. ROK Capital officially liberated 29 Sep.543
30 Sep Communist China Foreign Minister Chou En-lai warns: “The Chinese people will not supinely tolerate seeing their neighbors being savagely invaded by the imperialists.”
30 Sep-1 Oct ROK 3d Div crosses 38th Parallel in pursuit of retreating NKPA.
  7 Oct UN General Assembly authorizes UNC forces to cross 38th Parallel to defeat NKPA.
10 Oct Wonsan, east coast port at 39th Parallel, captured by ROK troops.
10 Oct Chinese repeat warning of intervention in Korean conflict.
16 Oct First Chinese Communist troops secretly enter Korea from Manchuria.
19 Oct Pyongyang, North Korean Capital at 39th Parallel, captured by EUSAK.
26 Oct Chinese troops attack ROK units at Yalu River and points south of Sino-Korean border.
26 Oct 1stMarDiv lands at Wonsan, establishes security for port, and drives north.
  1 Nov UNC forward elements reach positions along Yalu. First Russian-built MIG appears along Yalu to attack U.S. aircraft.
  2 Nov Strong Chinese and NKPA forces attack EUSAK at Unsan, causing withdrawal across Chongchon River. First identification of Chinese Communist Forces (CCF) in Korea.
  3–7 Nov Initial Marine encounter with CCF. 7th Marines units defeat major elements of 124th CCF Division.
  6 Nov MacArthur warns JCS that movement of CCF across Yalu threatens UNC position.
15 Nov Marine units reach Chosin Reservoir area in X Corps drive north.
24 Nov MacArthur announced “win the war” offensive. EUSAK begins advance toward Yalu.
26–27 Nov CCF, 200,000-strong, attack EUSAK troops forcing withdrawal. 1stMarDiv isolated at Yudam-ni, west of Chosin. MSR cut.
28 Nov-3 Dec 1stMarDiv turns back CCF attacks. Prepares to move south. Regroups at Hagaru-ri for drive to Hungnam.
  4 Dec Pyongyang recaptured by enemy.
  5–7 Dec 1stMarDiv evacuates wounded by air and fights through to Koto-ri.
  6 Dec Innovation of using airborne TADC as tactical CP to control air support.
10 Dec First Marine jet squadron to fly in combat, VMF-311, begins operations.
11 Dec 1stMarDiv completes fighting breakout from Chosin entrapment. Begins march to join rest of X Corps at Hungnam.
15 Dec 1stMarDiv deployed from Hungnam to Pusan.
15 Dec UNC establishes new defensive line at 38th Parallel.
18 Dec-27 Jan Marine division routs enemy guerrilla forces in Masan-Pohang-Sondong-Andong area.544
23 Dec EUSAK CG Walker killed in jeep accident. Gen Matthew B. Ridgway named to succeed him.
24 Dec Hungnam evacuation completed by X Corps.
29 Dec Large enemy buildup reported north of 38th Parallel, preparing for new attack.
1951
31 Dec-1 Jan Enemy launches all-out offensive against UNC across 38th Parallel, pushing EUSAK back 10–12 miles.
  4 Jan Seoul recaptured by Communists.
  7–15 Jan Enemy offensive halted, UNC sets up new defense line along Pyongtaek-Wonju axis, at 37th Parallel.
25 Jan UNC reassumes offensive. Operation THUNDERBOLT launched by I and IX Corps to regain territory south of Han River.
Jan-Feb 1stMarDiv continues antiguerrilla operations in Masan area.
  7 Feb Communists forced north of Han River. UNC retakes Inchon peninsula.
mid-Feb 1stMarDiv reassigned from X to IX Corps.
21 Feb Operation Killer, a general limited objective advance by U.S. IX and X Corps, ordered by Gen Ridgway. 1stMarDiv reenters frontlines for operation.
  7 Mar Operation RIPPER begins in central and eastern zones, with advance across Han by IX and X Corps.
14 Mar Seoul retaken by U.S. Eighth Army for second time.
27–31 Mar 1stMarDiv occupies 28,000-meter sector north of Hongchon. UNC elements reach 38th Parallel.
  1–21 Apr 1stMarDiv in general advance north to the Hwachon Reservoir.
  8 Apr Operation RIPPER clears enemy troops from South Korea east of Imjin River.
11 Apr Pres Truman relieves Gen MacArthur as CinCUNC, replacing him by Gen Ridgway, CG, EUSAK. LtGen James A. Van Fleet named Commander, EUSAK.
15 Apr UNC establishes defensive line along 38th Parallel, or KANSAS Line. Enemy heavily emplaced in Chorwon-Kumhwa-Pyonggang (“The Iron Triangle”) assembly area.
22 Apr-8 Jul CCF launches all-out “Spring Offensive.”
23–27 Apr 1stMarDiv halts CCF left flank breakthrough of IX Corps, establishes defense line in Chunchon vicinity.
30 Apr UNC completes withdrawal to new defense line north of Seoul. Intelligence reports indicate CCF plans renewed attack.
  1 May 1stMarDiv reassigned to X Corps.
  9 May 1st MAW squadrons participate in FAF 300-plane strike on Sinuiju, near Yalu. Biggest raid of war to date.
16 May Second phase of enemy offensive begins. CCF drives south from Iron Triangle area, making penetrations 15–20 miles deep along the front.545
20 May FAF launches Operation STRANGLE, massive all-out interdiction effort.
21 May UNC launches counter offensive, pushes enemy north of 38th Parallel again. 1stMarDiv drives toward Yanggu at eastern end of Hwachon Reservoir.
30 May Eighth Army back on KANSAS Line again.
  1–16 Jun 1stMarDiv advances northeast from Hwachon Reservoir to Punchbowl. Claws out daily gains of 1,000–2,000 meters, reaching objective despite heavy NKPA fire.
mid-Jun UNC forces consolidate positions at 38th Parallel. UNC front approximately the same line as when Communist spring offensive began.
23 Jun UN Soviet delegate, Jacob Malik, proposes cease-fire discussions.
30 Jun UN notifies enemy of its readiness to discuss an armistice.
10 Jul Truce talks begin at Kaesong and fighting dies down along front. UN delegation led by U.S. Vice Admiral C. Turner Joy. Communists represented by LtGen Nam Il, NKPA.
26 Jul Negotiators at Kaesong agree on preliminary agenda.
  5 Aug UNC suspends truce talks because of armed enemy troops in neutral area. Cease-fire talks resumed 10 Aug.
22 Aug Communists halt cease-fire talks, charge UN aircraft has violated neutrality zone.
31 Aug In final UNC offensive action of war, 1stMarDiv opens assault at Punchbowl. UN launches limited attacks to straighten line.
  5 Sep 1stMarDiv gains initial objectives in Punchbowl area, new ridgeline to become part of Line Minnesota, EUSAK defensive line. Heavy attacks by IX Corps at Heartbreak and Bloody Ridge.
13 Sep HMR-161 effects first Marine mass helicopter combat resupply maneuver, Operation WINDMILL I.
18 Sep Marines advance to Soyang River, north of Punchbowl.
21 Sep Operation Summit, first helicopter deployment of a combat unit, lands 224 fully-equipped troops and 17,772 lbs of cargo in Punchbowl area.
25 Oct Following two weeks of discussion between liaison officers, truce talks resumed at new site, Panmunjom.
28 Oct Cease-fire line agreed upon as present line of contact.
11 Nov HMR-161 conducts first frontline relief of a Marine battalion, in Operation SWITCH.
12 Nov Gen Ridgway, CinCUNC, orders EUSAK Commander, Gen Van Fleet to cease offensive operations and begin active defense of UN front.
Nov-Dec General stalemate along Korean battlefront during truce discussions.
18 Dec Prisoner of war lists exchanged by UN and Communists.546
1952
  2 Jan UNC proposes principle of “voluntary repatriation” in POW exchange.
  3 Jan UNC proposal violently rejected by Communists.
Jan-Apr Disorders in UNC prison camps as screening of prisoners begins.
22 Feb Communist Korean Foreign Affairs Minister charges America with renewed bacteriological warfare attacks in North Korea. Chinese Communist Foreign Minister Chou En-Lai, issues similar statement on 8 Mar, alleging U.S. flyers participate in “germ warfare.”
17 Mar 1stMarDiv reassigned from X Corps eastern-Korea position to I Corps far western end of EUSAK line. Takes over approximately 35 miles of Line Jamal's Town on 24 Mar.
28 Apr Adm Joy presents UN “final offer,” insists on voluntary repatriation principle.
  7–11 May Rioting prisoners at Koje-do camp seize Gen Dodd and hold him hostage, until order restored.
12 May Gen Mark W. Clark succeeds Ridgway as CinCUNC, upon latter’s departure to assume NATO command from Gen Eisenhower.
22 May MajGen William K. Harrison succeeds Adm Joy as chief of UN delegation at Panmunjom.
Jun-Oct General stalemate along battlefront while truce talks deadlocked on POW repatriation question. Sharp limited objective attacks made by enemy against UNC defensive line.
  9–16 Aug First major Marine ground action in western Korea, Battle of Bunker Hill (1st Marines).
19–20 Aug HMR-161 Operation RIPPLE introduces tactical innovation of transporting 4.5-inch rocket battery weapons and personnel to new firing position.
29 Aug Largest one-day FAF air assault of entire war, “All United Nations Air Effort” sends 1,403 sorties against North Korean Capital, Pyongyang.
22–26 Sep First resupply of MLR regiment by helicopter in Operation HAYLIGHT.
  8 Oct UNC adjourns armistice talks “indefinitely”; complete deadlock on POW question.
26–28 Oct Battle of the Hook (7th Marines).
  4 Nov Dwight D. Eisenhower elected President.
17 Nov India introduces compromise truce plan at United Nations.
  2 Dec President-elect Eisenhower begins three-day tour of Korea.
  3 Dec UN General Assembly adopts compromise Indian resolution by 54 to 5 vote.547
1953
Jan-Feb Winter lull in fighting. Cease-fire talks remain suspended.
  2 Feb President Eisenhower, in State of Union message, ends “neutralization” of Formosa Strait.
11 Feb Gen Maxwell D. Taylor assumes EUSAK command from Gen Van Fleet.
22 Feb UNC proposes exchange of sick and wounded POWs, as preliminary step in full exchange of prisoners.
  5 Mar Premier Joseph Stalin of Russia dies. Georgi Malenkov named to succeed him.
26–30 Mar 1stMarDiv combat outposts Vegas-Reno-Carson (5th Marines) under heavy attack.
28 Mar Communists accept UN proposal to discuss exchange of sick and wounded POWs.
30 Mar Chou En-lai indicates Communists will accept Indian UN compromise proposal. Truce talks to be resumed.
12 Apr 1st MAW flies first night CAS missions, using intersecting searchlight beams to mark enemy targets.
20–26 Apr Exchange of sick and wounded POWs, “Operation Small toggle,” takes place at Panmunjom, under direction of Munsan-ni Provisional Command.
26 Apr Truce talks resumed at Panmunjom.
  5 May 1stMarDiv relieved by U.S. 25thInfDiv; 1st Division assigned mission of I Corps Reserve.
  7 May Communists accept UN proposal that prisoners unwilling to be repatriated be kept in neutral custody within Korea, rather than be removed elsewhere to a neutral nation.
28–30 May Savage fighting while truce details worked out by negotiators. CCF launches regimental-strength attack against I Corps sector. Heavy action in Nevada Cities and Hook area outposts. Marine tanks and artillery in support of defending 25thInfDiv line units.
  6 Jun ROK national Assembly demands freedom for anti-Communist North Koreans held in South Korean POW camps. Civilian demonstrations break out in various EUSAK and I Corps localities.
  8 Jun Agreement reached on POW question. POW nonrepatriates to be turned over to five-member neutral commission to decide disposition of POW cases. Pres Rhee declares armistice terms unacceptable to South Korea.
  9 Jun ROK National Assembly unanimously rejects truce terms.
10–17 Jun Communists launch heaviest offensive in two years against ROK II Corps sector in Kumsong area. Heavy penetrations, with ROK II Corps pushed 4000 yards south to new MLR.
18 Jun Breakout of 25,000 North Korean anti-Communist prisoners from South Korean POW camps, assisted by ROK guards.548 Release ordered by Pres Rhee as protest against proposed armistice.
18–20 Jun Communists accuse UNC of complicity in freeing prisoners; truce talks suspended.
23–25 Jun Pres Rhee continues opposition to truce terms. Walter Robinson, U.S. Asst. Sec. of State for Far East and Gen Mark Clark start confidential talks with Rhee.
  7–8 Jul COPs Berlin-East Berlin (7th Marines right regimental sector) under attack during Marine relief of 25thInfDiv.
  8 Jul 1stMarDiv assumes operational control of its former MLR sector, relieving 25thInfDiv.
  8 Jul Communists agree to resume armistice negotiations; talks reconvened 10 July.
11 Jul Robertson announces that Pres Rhee will no longer oppose truce terms.
11 Jul Maj John F. Bolt, VMF-115, becomes first Marine jet ace with kill of his fifth and sixth MIGs.
13–20 Jul CCF launches even larger offensive than June attack along central Korean front. IX and ROK II Corps MLR reestablished south of Kumsong River.
19 Jul Negotiators at Panmunjom reach agreement on truce.
19 Jul Marine outposts Berlin-East Berlin overrun; I Corps decrees positions should not be retaken.
24–27 Jul Heavy enemy attack in Berlin Complex (“Boulder City”) area held by 7th and 1st Marines.
27 Jul Cease-fire agreement signed at Panmunjom at 1000. Fighting ends. Armistice effective at 2200.
  5 Aug-6 Sep Final exchange of prisoners in Operation BIG SWITCH, at Panmunjom.

1st Marine Division (Reinforced)
and
1st Marine Aircraft Wing
March 1952-July 1953

1st Marine Division (Reinforced)
and
1st Marine Aircraft Wing
March 1952 - July 1953

1st Marine Division
Commanding General MajGen John T. Selden (to 28 Aug 1952)
MajGen Edwin A. Pollock (from 29 Aug)
MajGen Randolph McC. Pate (from 16 Jun 1953)
Asst Division Commander BGen William J. Whaling (to 23 Mar 1952)
BGen Merrill B. Twining (from 24 Mar)
BGen Robert O. Bare (from 13 Jun)
BGen Joseph C. Burger (from 31 Mar 1953)
Chief of Staff Col Austin R. Brunelli (to 10 Oct 1952)
Col Henry W. Buse, Jr. (from 11 Oct)
Col Lewis W. Walt (from 15 Jun 1953)
G-1 Col Walter N. Flournoy (to 31 Mar 1952)
Col John F. Dunlap (from 1 Apr)
Col Sidney M. Kelly (from 11 Sep)
Col Albert F. Metze (from 1 Jun 1953)
Col Wendell H. Duplantis (from 20 Jul)
G-2 LtCol James H. Tinsley (to 9 Apr 1952)
Col Sidney S. Wade (from 10 Apr)
LtCol William R. Watson, Jr. (from 24 Apr)
Col Clarence A. Barninger, Jr. (from 11 Oct)
Col William F. Prickett (from 20 Dec)
Col Loren E. Haffner (from 1 Apr 1953)
Col James E. Mills (from 10 Jul)
G-3 LtCol Gordon D. Gayle (to 22 Apr 1952)
LtCol James H. Tinsley (from 24 Apr)
Col Russell E. Honsowetz (from 15 Jun)
Col Eustace R. Smoak (from 16 Dec)
Col Lewis W. Walt (from 18 Apr 1953)
LtCol Jess P. Ferrill, Jr. (from 15 Jun)
G-4 Col Robert A. McGill (to 27 Aug 1952)
Col Thomas A. Culhane (from 28 Aug)
Col Kenneth A. King (from 12 Nov)
Col Richard H. Crockett (from 15 Dec)
Col Thomas S. Ivey (from 15 May 1953)550
Special Staff
Adjutant Maj James K. Young (to 5 May 1952)
Maj Charles T. Lamb (from 6 May)
Maj Clyde W. Shealy (from 24 Feb 1953)
Maj George K. Acker (from 1 Jun)
Air Officer LtCol Edward V. Finn (to 14 Mar 1952)
LtCol Walter F. Cornnell (from 15 Mar)
LtCol William E. Abblitt (from 12 Feb 1953)
Anti-Tank Officer Maj Harold C. Howard (to 4 Aug 1952)
Maj Herbert E. L. Zastrow (from 5 Aug)
LtCol Earl W. Gardner (from 18 Nov)
Maj Marshall Salvaggio (from 10 Jan 1953)
Capt William F. Doehler (from 6 Apr)
Amphibian Tractor Officer LtCol Michiel Dobervich (to 1 Aug 1952)
LtCol Edwin B. Wheeler (from 2 Aug)
LtCol George S. Saussy, Jr. (from 7 Nov)
LtCol Frank R. Wilkinson, Jr. (from 16 Mar 1953)
Maj John McN. Rosebush (from 16 Jun)
Armored Amphibian Officer LtCol John T. O’Neill (to 5 Aug 1952)
Maj James L. Jones (from 6 Aug)
LtCol Henry G. Lawrence, Jr. (from 12 Aug)
LtCol Fenlon A. Durand (from 4 Dec)
Maj Ralph J. Parker, Jr. (from 16 May 1953)
LtCol Maurice C. Goodpasture (from 15 Jul)
Artillery Officer Col Frederick P. Henderson (to 20 Sep 1952)
Col Harry N. Shea (from 21 Sep)
Col James E. Mills (from 22 Feb 1953)
Col Manley L. Curry (from 5 Jul)
Chaplain Cdr Walter S. Peck, Jr., USN (to 16 Apr 1952)
Cdr Edward A. Slattery, USN (from 17 Apr)
Cdr Lonnie W. Meachum, USN (from 28 Dec)
Chemical Warfare and Radiological Defense Officer Maj Harold C. Howard (to 4 Aug 1952)
Maj Herbert E. L. Zastrow (from 5 Aug)
LtCol Earl W. Gardner (from 18 Nov)
Maj Marshall Salvaggio (from 10 Jan 1953)
Capt Gerald W. Gibson (from 30 Jan)
Dental Officer Capt Francis C. Snyder, USN (to 26 Apr 1952)
Cdr Clifford H. Rice, USN (from 27 Apr)
Capt William M. Fowler, USN (from 26 May)
Capt James R. Justice, USN (from 12 Mar 1953)551
Embarkation Officer LtCol John H. Papurca (to 1 Mar 1952)
LtCol James F. Coady (from 2 Mar)
LtCol Richard S. Johnson (from 5 Sep)
Maj Edwin J. St. Peter (from 6 Nov)
LtCol John N. Rentz (from 24 Nov)
LtCol Sidney F. Jenkins (from 12 May 1953)
Engineer Officer Col August L. Vogt (to 5 Jul 1952)
(None listed for 6–16 July)
Col Robert E. Fojt (from 17 Jul)
LtCol Harry D. Clarke (from 1 Feb 1953)
Col Walter R. Lytz (from 1 Apr)
Exchange Officer Capt Benjamin Reed (to 28 Nov 1952)
Capt John H. Thomas (from 29 Nov)
Food Director 1stLt Herbert E. McNabb (to 15 Jun 1952)
Maj Louis P. Penny (from 16 Jun)
Maj Francis K. Bernardini (from 23 Apr 1953)
Historical Officer 2dLt Francis X. Goss (to 22 Mar 1952)
Capt Robert F. Seward (from 23 Mar)
Capt William R. Smith (from 16 Jul)
1stLt Virgil S. Price (from 8 Nov)
2dLt John J. Creamer, Jr. (from 7 Dec)
Capt Verle E. Ludwig (from 6 Apr 1953)
2dLt Thomas A. MacCalla (from 22 Jul)
Inspector Col William K. Davenport, Jr. (to 17 Mar 1952)
Col Thomas C. Moore (from 18 Mar)
Col Eustace R. Smoak (from 18 Jul)
Col Clayton O. Totman (from 9 Aug)
Col Wallace M. Nelson (from 5 Dec)
Col Albert F. Metze (from 29 Apr 1953)
Col Manley L. Curry (from 1 Jun)
Col Edwin C. Ferguson (from 13 Jul)
Legal Officer LCdr Arnold W. Eggen, USN (to 12 Jan 1953)
Cdr Earl C. Collins, USN (from 13 Jan)
LtCol Raymond G. Coyne (from 8 Jul)
Motor Transport Officer Maj Walter R. O Quinn (to 14 May 1952)
LtCol Kenneth E. Martin (from 15 May)
LtCol Hugh J. Chapman (from 12 Mar 1953)
LtCol Jack F. McCollum (from 29 Jun)
Naval Gunfire Officer Maj John V. Downs (to 5 Aug 1952)
LtCol William P. Pala (from 6 Aug)
LtCol Robert D. Shaffer (from 16 Sep)
LtCol Henry H. Reichner, Jr. (from 20 Dec)
LtCol Robert D. Shaffer (from 26 Apr 1953)
Capt Robert J. Daeschler (from 15 Jul)552
Ordnance Officer Maj Harold C. Borth (to 5 May 1952)
LtCol William F. Pulver (from 6 May)
Maj Joseph O. Weist (from 4 Jun)
Maj Stanley Tesko (from 21 Oct)
LtCol Marshall R. Pilcher (from 1 Apr 1953)
LtCol Samuel L. Grigsby (from 1 Jun)
Postal Officer CWO George C. Hunter (to 25 Jun 1952)
2dLt Frederick T. McNamara, Jr. (from 26 Jun)
2dLt Rudolph R. Hendrick (from 18 May 1953)
CWO Emerson R. Murrell (from 2 Jun)
Provost Marshal LtCol William F. Pulver (to 31 Mar 1952)
LtCol Sidney J. Altman (from 1 Apr)
LtCol Frederick R. Findtner (from 15 Aug)
LtCol Jess P. Ferrill (from 12 Jan 1953)
LtCol Harold R. Warner, Jr. (from 18 Apr)
Maj Walter L. Williams (from 23 Jul)
Public Information Officer 1stLt Robert S. Gray (to 5 May 1952)
1stLt Robert F. Coll (from 6 May)
Maj Charles F. McKiever (from 5 Jul)
Capt Bem Price (from 7 Nov)
Capt Verle E. Ludwig (from 21 Jul 1953)
Shore Party Officer LtCol Warren S. Sivertsen (to 26 Jul 1952)
Col William G. Robb (from 27 Jul)
LtCol Russell Duncan (from 2 Oct)
Col Glenn C. Funk (from 3 Dec)
Col William H. Barba (from 21 Mar 1953)
Signal Officer LtCol Jino J. D’Allessandro (to 5 Apr 1952)
LtCol John E. Morris (from 6 Apr)
LtCol Eugene A. Dueber (from 18 Aug)
LtCol Ralph M. Wismer (from 14 Nov)
LtCol Frank G. Casserly (from 27 Jul 1953)
Supply Officer Col Chester R. Allen (to 27 Apr 1952)
Col Hawley C. Waterman (from 28 Apr)
Col LeRoy Hauser (from 1 Feb 1953)
Special Services Officer LtCol John E. Gorman (to 23 Jul 1952)
Maj Alfred A. Tillmann (from 24 Jul)
Maj William J. Kohler (from 8 Nov)
Capt Don H. Blanchard (from 20 Apr 1953)
Surgeon Capt Louis P. Kirkpatrick, USN (to 18 Jun 1952)
Capt Lawrence E. Bach, USN (from 19 Jun)
Capt Walter R. Miller, USN (from 25 Apr 1953)
Tank Officer Maj Walter E. Reynolds, Jr. (to 20 May 1952)
LtCol John I. Williamson, Jr. (from 21 May)
LtCol Charles W. McCoy (from 16 Apr 1953)553
Headquarters Battalion
Commanding Officer Col Robert T. Stivers, Jr. (to 5 Jul 1952)
Maj Anthony R. Frankiewicz (from 6 Jul)
LtCol Oscar F. Peatross (from 12 Jul)
LtCol John F. Corbett (from 11 Sep)
Col Alexander W. Gentleman (from 21 Nov)
LtCol John C. Landrun (from 16 May 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Corbin L. West (to 16 Mar 1952)
Maj Anthony R. Frankiewicz (from 17 Mar)
Maj Charles F. McKiever (from 10 Nov)
Maj John K. Hogan (from 31 Jan 1953)
(None listed for 29Feb-14May)
Capt Joseph Hornstein (from 15 May)
Commanding Officer, Headquarters Company Capt “J” E. Hancey (to 9 Mar 1952)
Capt Robert J. McKay (from 10 Mar)
1stLt George C. Schatteman (from 6 May)
Maj Louis A. Cortright (from 1 Jul)
2dLt Neil O. Snepp (from 17 Jul)
Maj Val Price, Jr. (from 29 Aug)
Capt Joseph Hornstein (from 15 Jan 1953)
Capt Robert A. Hohmann (from 15 May)
Capt Martin S. Hauge (from 28 May)
Commanding Officer, Military Police Company LtCol William F. Pulver (to 31 Mar 1952)
LtCol Sidney J. Altman (from 1 Apr)
LtCol Frederick R. Findtner (from 15 Aug)
LtCol Jess P. Ferrill, Jr. (from 12 Jan 1953)
LtCol Harold B. Warner, Jr. (from 18 Apr)
Maj Walter L. Williams (from 23 Jul)
Commanding Officer, Reconnaissance Company Maj Ephraim Kirby-Smith (to 10 Jun 1952)
Capt James O. Webb (from 11 Jun)
Capt James H. A. Flood (from 11 Sep)
Maj Dermott H. MacDonnell (from 3 Dec)
Maj Marvin D. Perskie (from 21 Jun 1953)
1st Marines
Commanding Officer Col Sidney S. Wade (to 9 Apr 1952)
Col Walter N. Flournoy (from 10 Apr)
Col Walter F. Layer (from 25 Jul)
Col Hewitt D. Adams (from 21 Nov)
Col Wallace M. Nelson (from 1 May 1953)554
Executive Officer LtCol Clifford F. Quilici (to 26 Mar 1952)
Col Clarence A. Barninger, Jr. (from 27 Mar)
LtCol Carlo A. Rovetta (from 2 May)
LtCol Glenn R. Long (from 16 Sep)
LtCol Sidney F. Jenkins (from 4 Feb 1953)
LtCol Lowell E. English (from 8 May)
LtCol Harold C. Boehm (from 2 Jul)
1st Battalion, 1st Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol John H. Papurca (to 2 Aug 1952)
LtCol Louis N. King (from 3 Aug)
LtCol Max H. LaGrone (from 13 Sep)
Col Frederick R. Findtner (from 14 Jan 1953)
LtCol Stanley M. Adams (from 5 Jun)
Executive Officer Maj Ralph “C” Rosacker (to 5 Apr 1952)
Maj Leo V. Gross (from 6 Apr)
Maj John K. Logan (from 14 Jul)
Maj William C. Chip (from 20 Aug)
Maj John K. Hogan (from 30 Dec)
Maj Marvin D. Perskie (from 4 Feb 1953)
Maj Roger D. Peterson (from 19 Jun)
2d Battalion, 1st Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol Thell H. Fisher (to 1 Apr 1952)
LtCol Clifford F. Quilici (from 2 Apr)
LtCol Roy J. Batterton, Jr. (from 23 Jun)
LtCol Charles E. Warren (from 18 Oct)
LtCol George A. Gililland (from 9 Feb 1953)
LtCol Frank A. Long (from 1 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj Frank J. Harte (to 5 May 1952)
Maj Fletcher R. Wycoff (from 6 May)
Maj John N. Rentz (from 29 Jul)
Maj John P. McNeill (from 21 Aug)
Maj Horace C. Reifel (from 9 Mar 1953)
Maj John B. Bristow (from 20 Apr)
Maj Albert S. Dooley, Jr. (from 1 Jul)
3d Battalion, 1st Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol Spencer H. Pratt (to 11 Apr 1952)
LtCol Carlo A. Rovetta (from 12 Apr)
LtCol Gerard T. Armitage (from 2 May)
LtCol Sidney J. Altman (from 20 Aug)
LtCol Ernest G. Atkin, Jr. (from 6 Dec)
LtCol Lowell E. English (from 1 Apr 1953)
LtCol Roy D. Miller (from 6 May)555
Executive Officer Maj Robert V. Perkins (to 2 Jul 1952)
Maj Wesley R. Christie (from 3 Jul)
Maj Charles S. Robertson (from 27 Oct)
Maj Norman C. Smyle (from 3 Jan 1953)
Maj Robert D. Thurston (from 26 Mar)
Maj Walter L. Williams (from 20 May)
Maj John T. Quinn (from 2 Jul)
5th Marines
Commanding Officer Col Thomas A. Culhane, Jr. (to 15 Aug 1952)
Col Eustace R. Smoak (from 16 Aug)
Col Lewis W. Walt (from 10 Dec)
Col Harvey C. Tschirgi (from 14 Apr 1953)
Executive Officer LtCol John A. Saxten (to 1 Jun 1952)
LtCol Franklin B. Nihart (from 2 Jun)
LtCol William S. McLaughlin (from 20 Jul)
LtCol Jess P. Ferrill, Jr. (from 21 Aug)
LtCol Edwin B. Wheeler (from 2 Jan 1953)
LtCol James H. Finch (from 23 May)
LtCol James Taul (from 18 Jul)
1st Battalion, 5th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol Franklin B. Nihart (to 24 May 1952)
Maj Paul H. Bratten, Jr. (from 25 May)
LtCol Alexander W. Gentleman (from 15 Jul)
LtCol Edwin B. Wheeler (from 11 Nov)
LtCol Jonas M. Platt (from 26 Dec)
LtCol Jackson B. Butterfield (from 29 Apr 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Hildeburn R. Martin (to 4 May 1952)
Maj Lyle K. London (from 5 May)
Maj Robert H. Twisdale (from 29 Aug)
Maj William C. Doty, Jr. (from 25 Jan 1953)
Maj Thomas W. Pearson (from 2 Apr)
Maj George R. Burke (from 11 Jun)
Maj Charles E. McPartlin, Jr. (from 22 Jun)
2d Battalion, 5th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol William H. Cushing (to 10 Jun 1952)
LtCol Thomas J. Cross (from 11 Jun)
LtCol William S. McLaughlin (from 20 Aug)
LtCol Oscar F. Peatross (from 11 Sep)
LtCol James H. Finch (from 27 Feb 1953)
LtCol Andrew C. Geer (from 14 May)556
Executive Officer Maj Robert S. Hudson (to 10 Jun 1952)
Maj John C. Lundrigan (from 11 Jun)
Maj Philip H. McArdle (from 16 Jul)
Maj Paul C. Scofield (from 19 Dec)
Maj Thomas M. Fields (from 26 Jun 1953)
3d Battalion, 5th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol William S. McLaughlin (to 15 Jul 1952)
LtCol Oscar T. Jensen, Jr. (from 16 Jul)
LtCol Robert J. Oddy (from 16 Nov)
LtCol John T. Hill (from 11 Apr 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Paul H. Bratten, Jr. (to 22 May 1952)
Maj Clifford J. Robichaud, Jr. (from 23 May)
Maj Joseph A. Bruder, Jr. (from 7 Jul)
Maj Vernon Burtman (from 1 Nov)
Maj Joseph S. Buntin (from 7 Feb 1953)
7th Marines
Commanding Officer Col Russell E. Honsowetz (to 10 Jun 1952)
Col Thomas C. Moore, Jr. (from 11 Jun)
Col Loren E. Haffner (from 5 Nov)
Col Glenn C. Funk (from 27 Mar 1953)
Executive Officer LtCol John D. Wiggins (to 17 Jul 1952)
LtCol Fenlon A. Durand (from 18 Jul)
LtCol Richard D. Strickler (from 24 Nov)
LtCol Robert S. Howell (from 22 Mar 1953)
LtCol Russell Duncan (from 26 May)
LtCol Stanley J. Nelson (from 31 Jul)
1st Battalion, 7th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol George W. E. Daughtry (to 2 Aug 1952)
LtCol Leo J. Dulacki (from 3 Aug)
LtCol James C. Short (from 22 Nov)
LtCol Henry G. Lawrence, Jr. (from 28 Dec)
LtCol Harry A. Hadd (from 18 May 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Henry V. Joslin (to 14 Jul 1952)
Maj Theodore R. Cathey (from 15 Jul)
Maj James C. Short (from 23 Jul)
Maj Floyd M. Johnson, Jr. (from 2 Aug)
Maj Roy H. Thompson (from 1 Dec)
Maj Glenn E. Ferguson (from 3 Jun 1953)
Maj Joseph R. Motelewski (from 25 Jun)557
2d Battalion, 7th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol Noel C. Gregory (to 18 Jul 1952)
LtCol Anthony Caputo (from 19 Jul)
LtCol Richard S. Johnson (from 12 Nov)
LtCol Alexander D. Cereghino (from 19 Mar 1953)
LtCol Joseph C. Missar (from 21 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj Erwin Madsen (to 19 Apr 1952)
Maj William J. Zaro (from 20 Apr)
Maj James C. Fetters (from 8 Jun)
Maj Richard H. Mickle (from 24 Oct)
Maj Littleton K. Smith (from 16 Apr 1953)
Maj Ralph E. June (from 17 Jun)
Maj Don P. Wyckoff (from 17 Jul)
3d Battalion, 7th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol Houston Stiff (to 26 Apr 1952)
Maj Franklin C. Bacon (from 27 Apr)
LtCol Gerald F. Russell (from 17 Jun)
LtCol Charles D. Barrett, Jr. (from 13 Oct)
LtCol Russell Duncan (from 14 Mar 1953)
LtCol Paul M. Jones (from 26 May)
Executive Officer Maj Franklin C. Bacon (to 26 Apr 1952)
Maj Richard M. Remington (from 27 Apr)
Maj Harold T. Clemens (from 28 Aug)
Maj Guy L. Wade (from 13 Oct)
Maj Alfred A. Tillman (from 23 Oct)
Maj John Mesko (from 25 May 1953)
11th Marines
Commanding Officer Col Frederick P. Henderson (to 20 Sep 1952)
Col Harry N. Shea (from 21 Sep)
Col James E. Mills (from 22 Feb 1953)
Col Manly L. Curry (from 5 Jul)
Executive Officer LtCol Lewis A. Jones (to 4 Jun 1952)
LtCol Robert F. Steidtmann (from 5 Jun)
LtCol Earl W. Gardner (from 16 Jan 1953)
LtCol Robert D. Heinl, Jr. (from 6 May)
Maj Joseph E. Fogg (from 6 Jul)
LtCol Wade H. Hitt (from 9 Jul)
1st Battalion, 11th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol James R. Haynes (to 24 Jun 1952)
LtCol David S. Randall (from 25 Jun)
LtCol Olin W. Jones, Jr. (from 2 Nov)
LtCol Earl W. Gardner (from 8 May 1953)558
Executive Officer Maj Harold E. Nelson (to 21 Jun 1952)
Maj Herbert E. L. Zastrow (from 22 Jun)
Maj Lee P. Vance (from 26 Jul)
Maj Harry L. Sherwood, Jr. (from 14 Nov)
Maj Thomas L. Randall (from 17 Dec)
Maj John J. Jarvis, Jr. (from 25 Mar 1953)
2d Battalion, 11th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol George B. Thomas (to 2 May 1952)
LtCol William P. Pala (from 3 May)
LtCol Bert Davis, Jr. (from 6 Aug)
LtCol Arthur J. Bachhuber (from 17 Nov)
LtCol William H. Atkinson (from 10 Feb 1953)
Maj Max Berueffy, Jr. (from 21 May)
LtCol Gordon H. West (from 18 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj Morris R. Snead (to 10 Jun 1952)
Maj Edward L. Fossum (from 11 Jun)
LtCol Bert Davis, Jr. (from 1 Jul)
Maj Roy E. Moffett (from 10 Aug)
Maj Max Berueffy, Jr. (from 2 Sep)
Maj Joseph F. Donahoe, Jr. (from 24 May 1953)
Maj Herman Poggemeyer, Jr. (from 13 Jul)
3d Battalion, 11th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol Henry E. W. Barnes (to 13 Jul 1952)
LtCol Charles O. Rogers (from 14 Jul)
LtCol Daniel S. Pregnall (from 27 Nov)
LtCol Alfred L. Owens (from 25 Mar 1953)
Maj Dale D. Meyers (from 28 Jul)
Executive Officer LtCol Charles A. Lipot (to 5 Jul 1952)
Maj Joseph S. Gardner (from 6 Jul)
Maj William J. Kohler (from 27 Jul)
Maj Lawrence L. Graham (from 17 Nov)
Maj Robert M. Jenkins (from 15 Dec)
Maj Adoph J. Honeycutt (from 28 Mar 1953)
Maj Robert C. Hilliard (from 7 May)
Maj Leslie L. Page (from 12 Jun to 26 Jul)
4th Battalion, 11th Marines
Commanding Officer LtCol William M. Gilliam (to 11 Apr 1952)
LtCol Bruce F. Hillam (from 12 Apr)
Maj Carl A. Nielsen (from 16 Jun)
LtCol Raymond D. Wright (from 16 Jul)
Maj William J. Sullivan (from 18 Dec)559
LtCol Robert D. Shaffer (from 20 Dec)
Maj David L. Moberly (from 23 Apr 1953)
LtCol Henry H. Reichner, Jr. (from 27 Apr)
Executive Officer LtCol Bruce F. Hillam (to 16 Apr 1952)
Maj Richard H. Jeschke, Jr. (from 17 Apr)
Maj Carl A. Nielsen (from 11 Jun)
Maj Edward E. Davis (from 16 Jun)
Maj William J. Sullivan (from 17 Oct)
Maj David L. Moberly (from 22 Feb 1953)
Maj Johnny Jennings (from 2 May)
Maj George W. Carrington, Jr. (from 13 Jun)
7th Motor Transport Battalion
Commanding Officer Maj Herbert E. Pierce (to 1 Jul 1952)
LtCol Robert B. McBroom (from 2 Jul)
Maj John H. Faggart (from 27 Jul)
Maj Robert S. Anderson (from 16 Jun 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Ben Sutts (to 5 May 1952)
Maj John J. Howe (from 16 Aug)
Maj Joseph P. Cushing (from 20 Nov)
Maj Alfred G. McCormick (from 26 Apr 1953)
1st Ordnance Battalion
Commanding Officer Maj Harold C. Borth (to 5 May 1952)
LtCol William F. Pulver (from 6 May)
Maj Marshall R. Pilcher (from 26 Aug)
Maj Maurice C. Pulliam (from 25 Mar 1953)
Executive Officer Capt Frederick V. Osborn (to 5 May 1952)
Maj Harold C. Borth (from 6 May)
Maj Marshall R. Pilcher (from 16 Jul)
Maj Frederick V. Osborn (from 26 Aug)
Maj Allen F. Stockdale (from 1 Sep)
Maj Frederick V. Osborn (from 15 Sep)
Maj Stanley P. Bulkowski (from 4 Nov)
Maj Maurice C. Pulliam (from 21 Dec)
Maj Stanley P. Bulkowski (from 25 Mar 1953)
Maj Jack G. Fitzgerald (from 4 Jul)
1st Service Battalion
Commanding Officer LtCol Bernard W. McLean (to 18 May 1952)
LtCol Charles E. Warren (from 19 May)
LtCol Edwin A. Law (from 1 Oct)
LtCol Hugh J. Chapman (from 5 Jul 1953)
Executive Officer Maj George E. Allison (to 27 Oct 1952)
Maj James C. Fetters (from 28 Oct)
Maj Robert “J” Vroegindewey (from 19 Mar 1953)560
1st Tank Battalion
Commanding Officer Maj Walter E. Reynolds, Jr. (to 20 May 1952)
LtCol John I. Williamson (from 21 May)
LtCol Charles W. McCoy (from 16 Apr 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Edward C. Nelson, Jr. (to 15 Jun 1952)
Maj Robert B. Jeter (from 16 Jun)
Maj William W. Day (from 21 Feb 1953)
Maj Francis C. Hogan (from 6 May)
1st Armored Amphibian Battalion
Commanding Officer LtCol John T. O’Neill (to 5 Aug 1952)
Maj James L. Jones (from 6 Aug)
LtCol Henry G. Lawrence, Jr. (from 12 Aug)
LtCol Fenlon A. Durand (from 4 Dec)
Maj Ralph J. Parker, Jr. (from 16 May 1953)
LtCol Maurice C. Goodpasture (from 15 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj James L. Jones (to 5 Aug 1952)
Maj David Young (from 6 Aug)
Maj James L. Jones (from 12 Aug)
Maj Ralph J. Parker, Jr. (from 21 Nov)
Maj Robert S. Wilson (from 16 May 1953)
1st Motor Transport Battalion
Commanding Officer LtCol Howard E. Wertman (to 15 May 1952)
Maj Walter R. O’Quinn (from 16 May)
LtCol Robert B. McBroom (from 27 Jul)
LtCol Robert E. McCook (from 24 Mar 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Raymond L. Luckel (to 2 Aug 1952)
Maj Marvin D. Grush (from 3 Aug)
Maj Joseph P. Cushing (from 6 Sep)
Maj Gobe Smith, Jr. (from 4 Oct)
Maj Robert C. McNab, Jr. (from 17 Feb 1953)
1st Combat Service Group
Commanding Officer Col Russell N. Jordahl (to 29 Jun 1952)
Col Kenneth A. King (from 30 Jun)
LtCol Sidney F. Jenkins (from 8 Nov)
Col James T. Wilbur (from 8 Dec)
Col Edwin C. Ferguson (from 8 Feb 1953)
Col James A. Moreau (from 8 Jul)
Executive Officer LtCol James G. Kelly (to 20 May 1952)
Col Frank M. Reinecke (from 21 May)
LtCol William H. Cushing (from 11 Jun)
LtCol Sidney F. Jenkins (from 8 Dec)561
LtCol Max H. LaGrone (from 28 Jan 1953)
LtCol Tillman N. Peters (from 15 Mar)
Maj Harvey B. Atkins (from 11 May)
1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion
Commanding Officer LtCol Michiel Dobervich (to 1 Aug 1952)
LtCol Edwin B. Wheeler (from 2 Aug)
LtCol George S. Saussy, Jr. (from 7 Nov)
LtCol Frank R. Wilkinson, Jr. (from 16 Mar 1953)
Maj John McN. Rosebush (from 16 Jun)
Executive Officer Maj William L. Eubank (to 3 Jun 1952)
Maj George S. Saussy, Jr. (from 4 Jun)
Maj William E. Lunn (from 7 Nov)
Maj John McN. Rosebush (from 24 Mar 1953)
Maj John J. DePalma (from 20 Jun)
1st Shore Party Battalion
Commanding Officer LtCol Warren S. Sivertsen (to 26 Jul 1952)
Col William G. Robb (from 27 Jul)
LtCol Russell Duncan (from 2 Oct)
Col Glenn C. Funk (from 3 Dec)
Col William H. Barba (from 21 Mar 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Frederick F. Draper (to 3 Jun 1952)
Maj William E. Buron (from 4 Jun)
LtCol Clyde P. Ford (from 12 Aug)
LtCol Francis X. Witt, Jr. (from 3 Mar 1953)
LtCol Eugene A. Dueber, Jr. (from 18 Apr)
LtCol James M. Joyner (from 8 Jul)
1st Engineer Battalion
Commanding Officer LtCol John V. Kelsey (to 5 May 1952)
LtCol Harry D. Clarke (from 6 May)
LtCol Francis W. Augustine (from 1 Dec)
LtCol Francis X. Witt, Jr. (from 20 Apr 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Grover C. Williams, Jr. (to 5 Jun 1952)
Maj Francis W. Augustine (from 6 Jun)
Maj George W. Torbert (from 1 Dec)
Maj Donald V. Nahrgang (from 26 Jun 1953)
1st Medical Battalion
Commanding Officer Cdr Richard Lawrence, Jr., USN (to 31 Aug 1952)
Cdr William W. Ayres, USN (from 1 Sep)562
Executive Officer Cdr James C. Luce, USN (to 12 May 1952)
(none listed from 13 May to 8 Jun)
LCdr James A. McLaughlin, USN (from 9 Jun)
Cdr Roald N. Grant, USN (from 24 Aug to 21 Sep)
(none listed from 22 Sep to 25 Apr 1953)
Lt Roger D. Williams, USN (from 26 Apr)
1st Signal Battalion
Commanding Officer LtCol John E. Morris (to 3 Apr 1952)
LtCol Alton L. Hicks (from 4 Apr)
LtCol Jacob E. Glick (from 3 Aug)
LtCol Eugene A. Dueber, Jr. (from 16 Feb 1953 to 22 Apr 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Ernest C. Bennett (to 4 Apr 1952)
Maj Bolish J. Kozak (from 5 Apr)
Maj Mauro J. Padalino (from 12 Jul)
Maj Frederick J. Cramer (from 30 Dec)
Maj John J. Reber (from 8 Feb 1953 to 22 Apr 1953)
(This battalion was disbanded on 22 Apr 1953.)
1st Marine Aircraft Wing (1st MAW)
Commanding General MajGen Christian F. Schilt (to 11 Apr 1952)
MajGen Clayton C. Jerome (from 12 Apr 1952)
MajGen Vernon E. Megee (from 9 Jan 1953)
Asst Commanding General BGen Frank H. Lamson-Scribner (to 30 Aug 1952)
BGen Alexander W. Kreiser, Jr. (from 31 Aug)
Chief of Staff Col Arthur F. Binney (to 30 Apr 1952)
Col Frank H. Schwable (from 1 May)
Col John Wehle (from 9 Jul)
Col Samuel S. Jack (from 8 Sep)
Col John C. Munn (from 8 May 1953)
Asst Chief of Staff, G-1 Col Robert O. Bisson (to 7 Sep 1952)
Col Lewis H. Delano, Jr. (from 8 Sep)
LtCol William M. Frash (from 11 May 1953)
Col Lawrence B. Clark (from 29 May)
Asst Chief of Staff, G-2 Col John W. Stage (to 14 May 1952)
LtCol Chester A. Henry, Sr. (from 15 May)
Maj Donald E. Kramer (from 22 Jul)
LtCol Harold Granger (from 16 Sep)
Col Arthur R. Stacy (from 25 Jul 1953)
Asst Chief of Staff, G-3 Col Stanley W. Trachta (to 8 Apr 1952)
Col William R. Wendt (from 9 Apr)
Col Louis B. Robertshaw (from 2 Sep)563
Col Charles H. Hayes (from 29 Sep)
Col William D. Roberson (from 30 May 1953)
Col Frank H. Wirsig (from 5 Jul)
Asst Chief of Staff, G-4 Col Elmer T. Dorsey (to 24 Mar 1952)
Col Robert E. Galer (from 25 Mar)
Col Robert W. Clark (from 24 May)
Col Richard D. Hughes (from 11 Feb 1953)
Col Richard M. Baker (from 4 Jul)
Headquarters Squadron, 1st MAW
Commanding Officer Maj Earl C. Miles (to 29 May 1952)
Maj David R. Moak (from 30 May)
Maj Charles H. Woodley (from 1 Sep)
Maj Lionel D. Hastings (from 26 Sep)
Maj Charles W. Boggs, Jr. (from 1 Mar 1953)
Maj Fred J. Gilhuly (from 1 Jul)
Marine Wing Service Squadron 1 (MWSS-1)
(Decommissioned 1 Jul 1953)
and
Marine Wing Service Group 17 (MWSG-17)
(Commissioned 1 Jul 1953)
Commanding Officer Col John Wehle (to 8 Apr 1952)
LtCol Birney B. Truitt (from 9 Apr)
LtCol Donald D. Blue (from 17 Jul)
Col Lyle H. Meyer (from 21 Sep)
LtCol Francis K. Coss (from 11 May 1953)
Col Robert J. Johnson (from 30 Jun)
Executive Officer LtCol Birney B. Truitt (to 8 Apr 1952)
Maj William L. Woodruff (from 9 Apr)
Maj Edward L. Schnettler (from 4 Jun)
Maj Franklin L. Kemper (from 26 Aug)
LtCol William G. Voss (from 20 Dec)
LtCol Francis K. Coss (from 21 Apr 1953)
Maj Elswin P. Dunn (from 11 May)
LtCol Charles J. Prall (from 6 Jul)
Headquarters Squadron, MWSG-17
(Commissioned 1 Jul 1953)
Commanding Officer Capt James D. Ireland (from 1 Jul 1953)
Marine Air Base Squadron 17 (MABS-17)
(Activated 1 Jul 1953)
Commanding Officer Maj Bryce Howerton (from 1 Jul 1953)564
Marine Aircraft Repair Squadron 17 (MARS-17)
(Activated 1 Jul 1953)
Commanding Officer Maj Vincent Franano (from 1 Jul 1953)
Maj James G. Fox (from 29 Jul)
Marine Air Control Group 2 (MACG-2)
Commanding Officer Col Frederick R. Payne (to 18 May 1952)
Col John W. Stage (from 19 May)
Col Jack R. Cram (from 11 Jul)
Col Kenneth D. Kerby (from 16 Feb 1953)
Executive Officer LtCol Russell D. Rupp (to 1 May 1952)
LtCol Philip “L” Crawford (from 2 May)
LtCol William A. Houston, Jr. (from 20 Jun)
LtCol Harold L. Lantz (from 11 Aug)
LtCol Lawrence F. Fox (from 24 Feb 1953)
LtCol Randolph C. Berkeley, Jr. (from 23 May)
LtCol John S. Flickinger (from 10 Jun)
LtCol Morris E. Flater (from 21 Jun)
Marine Tactical Air Control Squadron 2 (MTACS-2)
Commanding Officer LtCol Hensley Williams (to 2 Jun 1952)
Maj Clinton E. Jones (from 3 Jun)
LtCol William H. Whitaker, Jr. (from 1 Aug)
LtCol Frederick M. Rauschenbach (from 21 Aug)
LtCol Arthur C. Lowell (from 28 Jan 1953)
Col Joseph A. Gerath, Jr. (from 20 Feb)
LtCol Randolph C. Berkeley, Jr. (from 11 Jun)
Executive Officer Maj Clinton E. Jones (to 2 Jun 1952)
Capt John F. Driftmier (from 3 Jun)
Maj George C. Henshaw (from 28 Aug)
Maj Thomas H. Hughes, Jr. (from 25 Sep)
LtCol Arthur C. Lowell (from 20 Feb 1953)
(none listed from 15 Mar to 9 Jul)
Capt Robert L. Dietrichson (from 10 Jul)
Marine Ground Control Intercept Squadron 1 (MGCIS-1)
Commanding Officer Maj Fred A. Steele (to 15 Aug 1952)
Maj Henry W. Hise (from 16 Aug)
Maj Wallace G. Wethe (from 16 Oct)
LtCol Joseph F. Wagner, Jr. (from 3 Feb 1953)
Maj Randal A. Yarberry (from 1 Jun)
LtCol Harold F. Brown (from 23 Jun)565
Executive Officer Maj Marvin R. Bridges, Jr (to 11 Apr 1952)
Capt William J. Wachsler (from 12 Apr)
Capt Francis K. McManus (from 22 May)
Maj William Sloane (from 1 Aug)
Maj Romeo F. Bordigon (from 4 Oct)
Maj Tolbert T. Gentry (from 2 Nov)
Maj Francis F. Rotter (from 8 Jan 1953)
Capt John E. Dixon (from 31 May)
Maj Randal A. Yarberry (from 23 Jun)
Marine Ground Control Intercept Squadron 3 (MGCIS-3)
Commanding Officer LtCol Owen M. Hines (to 20 May 1952)
Maj James H. Foster (from 21 May)
LtCol Robert J. Hoey (from 14 Jun)
LtCol Kenneth D. Frazier (from 16 Aug)
LtCol John B. Maas, Jr. (from 3 Feb 1953)
Maj Nathan B. Peevey, Jr. (from 19 May)
Maj James E. Lovin, Jr. (from 1 Jul)
LtCol Lowell D. Grow (from 27 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj James H. Foster (to 1 Jun 1952)
Capt Lee B. Swindall (from 2 Jun)
Maj Roy A. Thorson (from 21 Jun)
Maj Raleigh E. Fletcher (from 5 Sep)
Maj Francis E. Lee, Jr. (from 29 Oct)
Maj Nathan B. Peevey, Jr. (from 4 Feb 1953)
Capt William K. Lebo (from 19 May)
Maj Thomas E. Archer (from 20 Jun)
Maj James E. Lovin, Jr. (from 27 Jul)
Marine Composite Squadron 1 (VMC-1)
(Activated 15 Sep 1952)
Commanding Officer LtCol Lawrence F. Fox (to 24 Jan 1953)
LtCol Ernest C. Fusan (from 25 Jan)
LtCol Thomas “H” Mann, Jr. (from 16 Mar)
Maj George H. Linnemeier (from 6 Apr)
LtCol Wilbur A. Free (from 1 Jun)
Marine Aircraft Group 12 (MAG-12)
Commanding Officer Col Elmer T. Dorsey (to 24 May 1952)
Col Robert E. Galer (from 25 May)
Col John P. Condon (from 10 Aug)
Col George S. Bowman, Jr. (from 13 Jan 1953)
Col Edward B. Carney (from 1 Apr)566
Executive Officer LtCol Robert J. Hoey (to 5 Jun 1952)
LtCol Joseph A. Gray (from 6 Jun)
Col George S. Bowman, Jr. (from 17 Aug)
LtCol Barnette Robinson (from 20 Feb 1953)
Col Robert J. Johnson (from 19 Mar)
Col William F. Hausman (from 30 Jun)
Headquarters Squadron, MAG-12
Commanding Officer Capt George Byers, Jr. (to 22 Apr 1952)
1stLt Daniel F. McConnell (from 24 Apr)
Maj Godfrey Muller (from 1 Jul)
Capt William M. Crooks (from 18 Sep)
Capt Edgar F. Remington (from 21 Dec)
Capt Bradford N. Slenning (from 15 May 1953)
Marine Air Base Squadron 12 (MABS-12)
Commanding Officer LtCol Carl M. Longley (to 31 Mar 1952)
Maj Sumner H. Whitten (from 1 Apr)
LtCol Graham H. Benson (from 25 Aug)
LtCol Barnette Robinson (from 11 Oct)
LtCol Eystein J. Nelson (from 1 Jan 1953)
LtCol Richard M. Huizenga (from 1 Mar)
LtCol Rufus D. Sams (from 1 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj Robert A. Collett (to 31 Mar 1952)
Maj LeRoy T. Frey (from 1 Apr)
Maj Oscar C. Hauge, Jr. (from 26 May)
Maj Sumner H. Whitten (from 18 Aug)
LtCol Barnette Robinson (from 18 Sep)
Maj Frank Hick (from 11 Oct)
Maj Harry J. Anderson (from 20 Jan 1953)
LtCol Rufus D. Sams (from 14 Apr)
Maj Donald A. McMillan (from 11 Jul)
Marine Aircraft Maintenance Squadron 12 (MAMS-12)
Commanding Officer LtCol Joseph A. Gray (to 31 May 1952)
Maj James G. G. Taylor (from 1 Jun)
Maj William M. Johnston, Jr. (from 19 Aug)
Maj Leonard I. Beatty (from 29 Dec)
LtCol Walter E. Gregory (from 20 Feb 1953)
LtCol Clarence H. Moore (from 27 Jun)
Maj Mervin L. Taylor (from 18 Jul)567
Executive Officer Maj Robert E. Will (to 26 Apr 1952)
Maj James G. G. Taylor (from 27 Apr)
Capt Robert T. Kinsey (from 1 Jun)
Maj James G. G. Taylor (from 19 Aug)
Maj Warren L. MacQuarrie (from 1 Sep)
Maj John R. Hyneman (from 15 Dec)
Maj Leonard I. Beatty (from 20 Feb 1953)
Maj Alexander Gagyi (from 15 Apr)
Maj Mervin L. Taylor (from 12 Jul)
Marine Attack Squadron 121 (VMA-121)
Commanding Officer LtCol William Q. Houston, Jr. (to 19 Jun 1952)
LtCol Philip “L” Crawford (from 20 Jun)
LtCol Wayne M. Cargill (from 11 Sep)
LtCol Richard M. Huizenga (from 7 Dec)
LtCol John E. Hughes (from 1 Mar 1953)
Maj Richard L. Braun (from 21 Apr)
LtCol Harold B. Penne (from 16 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj Henry W. Horst (to 31 May 1952)
Maj Robert H. Brumley (from 1 Jun)
Maj Julius B. Griffin (from 30 Jul)
LtCol Donald D. Blue (from 2 Nov)
LtCol Roy R. Hewitt (from 11 Dec)
LtCol John E. Hughes (from 17 Jan 1953)
Maj Mervin L. Taylor (from 1 Mar)
Maj Robert C. Woten (from 16 Jul)
Marine Fighter Squadron 212 (VMF-212)
redesignated
Marine Attack Squadron 212 (VMA-212)
on 10 Jun 1952
Commanding Officer LtCol Robert L. Bryson (to 9 Jun 1952)
LtCol Graham H. Benson (from 10 Jun)
LtCol Maurice W. Fletcher (from 5 Sep)
LtCol Charles E. Dobson, Jr. (from 25 Oct)
LtCol Barnette Robinson (from 1 Jan 1953)
LtCol Louis R. Smunk (from 20 Feb)
Maj Edward C. Kicklighter (from 1 Jun)
LtCol James R. Wallace (from 19 Jun)
Executive Officer Maj Richard B. Elliott (to 29 Feb 1952)
Maj Roy A. Thorson (from 8 Mar)
Maj Leslie C. Reed (from 10 Jun)568
LtCol Walter E. Gregory (from 25 Oct)
Maj Norman O’Bryan (from 20 Feb 1953)
Maj Edward C. Kicklighter (from 7 Mar)
Maj Donald A. McMillan (from 1 Jun)
Maj Edward C. Kicklighter (from 19 Jun)
Maj Boris J. Frankovic (from 20 Jul)
Marine Fighter Squadron 323 (VMF-323)
redesignated
Marine Attack Squadron 323 (VMA-323)
on 30 Jun 1952
(Transferred from operational control of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing
on 7 Jul 1953)
Commanding Officer LtCol Richard L. Blume (to 25 Apr 1952)
Maj William A. Weir (from 26 Apr)
LtCol Henry S. Miller (from 1 Jun)
LtCol Kenneth R. Chamberlain (from 1 Sep)
LtCol Williard C. Lemke (from 20 Nov)
LtCol William M. Frash (from 13 Jan 1953)
LtCol Clarence H. Moore (from 11 Apr to 26 Jun)
Executive Officer Maj William A. Weir (to 8 Jun 1952)
Maj Richard E. Pryor (from 9 Jun)
Maj Eystein J. Nelson (from 1 Sep)
Maj Thomas M. Forsyth, Jr. (from 20 Nov)
LtCol Clarence H. Moore (from 2 Jan 1953)
LtCol Frederick M. Rauschenbach (from 29 Jan)
Maj Robert C. Woten (from 3 May to 26 Jun)
Marine Attack Squadron 332 (VMA-332)
(Came under the operational control of the 1st Marine Aircraft Wing
on 29 May 1953)
Commanding Officer LtCol John B. Berteling (from 29 May 1953).
Executive Officer Maj Gordon L. Allen (from 29 May 1953)
Marine Attack Squadron (VMA-251)
attached to
1st Marine Aircraft Wing
on 9 Jun 1953
Commanding Officer LtCol Harold A. Harwood (from 9 Jun 1953)
Executive Officer Maj James W. Merritt (from 9 Jun 1953)569
Marine Night-Fighter Squadron 513 (VMF(N)-513)
Commanding Officer LtCol John R. Burnett (to 11 Jun 1952)
Col Peter D. Lambrecht (from 12 Jun)
LtCol Jack C. Scott (from 19 Jun)
LtCol Homer G. Hutchinson, Jr. (from 9 Sep)
LtCol Robert F. Conley (from 20 Jan 1953)
LtCol Ross S. Mickey (from 6 May)
LtCol Robert L. Conrad (from 10 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj Frank H. Simonds (to 19 Apr 1952)
Maj William D. Patterson, Jr. (from 23 Apr)
LtCol Jack C. Scott (from 15 Aug)
Maj Gorden E. Gray (from 20 Aug)
LtCol Jack C. Scott (from 8 Sep)
LtCol Jack B. Winters (from 14 Sep)
Maj Dave E. Severance (from 20 Jan 1953)
Maj Richard M. Hunt (from 9 Jun)
LtCol Robert L. Conrad (from 24 Jun)
Maj Richard M. Hunt (from 10 Jul)
Marine Aircraft Group 33 (MAG-33)
Commanding Officer Col Martin A. Severson (to 23 May 1952)
Col John P. Condon (from 24 May)
Col Herbert H. Williamson (from 11 Aug)
Col Louis B. Robertshaw (from 22 Oct)
Col Arthur R. Stacy (from 10 May 1953)
Col John L. Smith (from 24 Jul)
Executive Officer LtCol Vernon O. Ullman (to 13 May 1952)
LtCol Graham H. Benson (from 14 May)
Col Herbert H. Williamson (from 26 Jul)
LtCol Darrell D. Irwin (from 11 Aug)
Col John P. Coursey (from 17 Aug)
Col Arthur R. Stacy (from 25 Mar 1953)
LtCol James K. Dill (from 11 May)
LtCol Thomas V. Murto, Jr. (from 26 Jul)
Headquarters Squadron, MAG-33
Commanding Officer Capt Allen R. Schutter (to 30 May 1952)
Maj Guy M. Cloud (from 1 Jun)
Maj Richard J. Collins (from 21 Jul)
Maj Reuel H. Pietz (from 1 Nov)
Maj Thomas J. Cushman, Jr. (from 14 Apr 1953)
Capt Jerry N. Hendershot (from 26 May)570
Marine Air Base Squadron 33 (MABS-33)
Commanding Officer Maj Frank P. Barker, Jr. (to 9 Jun 1952)
Maj John W. Zuber (from 10 Jun)
Maj William D. Patterson, Jr. (from 6 Aug)
Maj Kenneth B. Nelson (from 9 Dec)
LtCol Bernard McShane (from 21 Apr 1953)
LtCol Arthur M. Moran (from 1 Jun)
LtCol Jack Cosley (from 26 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj George K. Harshberger (to 1 May 1952)
Maj Summerfield M. Taylor, Jr. (from 2 May)
Capt Frederic T. Watts, Jr. (from 11 Aug)
Maj Harold N. McLaffey (from 2 Oct)
Maj Darwin P. Glaese (from 23 Dec)
Capt George J. Collins (from 22 May 1953)
Marine Aircraft Maintenance Squadron 33 (MAMS-33)
Commanding Officer Maj Zadik Collier (to 1 Sep 1952)
Maj William N. Case (from 2 Sep)
Maj Patrick Harrison (from 5 Feb 1953)
Maj Julian P. Craigmiles (from 29 Jun)
Executive Officer Maj Alton C. Bennett (from 1 Aug 1952)
Maj John L. Herndon (from 12 Aug)
Maj James Aldworth (from 2 Dec)
Capt Marshall S. Austin (from 22 April 1953)
Marine Fighter Squadron 115 (VMF-115)
Commanding Officer LtCol Thomas M. Coles (to 20 May 1952)
Maj John W. Zuber (from 21 May)
LtCol Robert C. Armstead (from 5 Jun)
Maj Wallace G. Wethe (from 17 Jul)
LtCol Royce W. Coln (from 18 Aug)
LtCol John B. Maas, Jr. (from 29 Sep)
LtCol Stoddard G. Cortelyou (from 1 Feb 1953)
LtCol Joe L. Warren (from 31 Mar)
LtCol Lynn H. Stewart (from 5 Jun)
Executive Officer Maj Conrad G. Winter (to 26 Apr 1952)
Maj John W. Zuber (from 27 Apr)
Maj Griffith B. Doyle (from 21 May)
Maj Wallace G. Wethe (from 10 Jun)
Maj Arthur N. Nehf, Jr. (from 5 Aug)
LtCol Joseph F. Wagner, Jr. (from 19 Nov)
LtCol Joe L. Warren (from 2 Feb 1953)
Maj Carol Bernard (from 31 Mar)
Maj James H. Phillips (from 25 Jun)571
Marine Fighter Squadron 311 (VMF-311)
Commanding Officer LtCol Darrell D. Irwin (to 2 Jun 1952)
Maj Henry W. Hise (from 3 Jun)
Maj Kenneth D. Frazier (from 10 Jun)
Maj William J. Sims (from 26 Jun)
LtCol Arthur H. Adams (from 1 Oct)
LtCol Francis K. Coss (from 1 Feb 1953)
LtCol Arthur M. Moran (from 21 Apr)
LtCol Bernard McShane (from 1 Jun)
Executive Officer Maj Jay E. McDonald (to 27 Mar 1952)
Maj Henry W. Hise (from 28 Mar)
Maj Kenneth D. Frazier (from 26 Jun)
Maj Harold A. Langstaff, Jr. (from 22 Aug)
Maj Williams J. Sims (from 1 Oct)
LtCol Walter R. Bartosh (from 12 Oct)
LtCol Arthur M. Moran (from 20 Jan 1953)
Maj John Skinner, Jr. (from 21 Apr)
Maj William D. Heier (from 3 Jul)
Marine Attack Squadron (VMA-312)
(On 16 Jun 1953, this squadron was reassigned to the
3d Marine Aircraft Wing.)
Commanding Officer LtCol Joe H. McGlothlin, Jr. (to 8 Apr 1952)
LtCol Robert E. Smith, Jr. (from 9 Apr)
LtCol George C. Axtell, Jr. (from 11 Jul)
LtCol Robert E. Cameron (from 4 Oct)
LtCol Winston E. Jewson (from 25 Jan to 15 Jun 1953)
Executive Officer Maj Alexander S. Walker, Jr. (to 7 Apr 1952)
Maj Edmond P. Hartsock (from 9 Apr)
Maj Walter D. Persons (from 11 Jul)
Maj Marshall C. Gregory (from 1 Sep)
Maj James W. Baker (from 13 Jan 1953)
Maj Grover R. Betzer (from 2 Feb)
Maj James L. Cooper (from 4 May to 10 Jun)
Marine Photographic Squadron 1 (VMJ-1)
Commanding Officer Maj Robert R. Read (to 13 May 1952)
LtCol Vernon O. Ullman (from 14 May)
LtCol William H. Whitaker (from 11 Sep)
LtCol Howard L. Walter (from 1 Nov)
LtCol William M. Ritchey (from 16 Feb 1953)
LtCol Leslie T. Bryan, Jr. (from 15 May)572
Executive Officer Maj Albert E. James (to 3 Jun 1952)
Maj Marion B. Bowers (from 4 Jun)
Maj Grant W. McCombs (from 18 Jul)
LtCol William H. Whitaker (from 28 Aug)
Maj Grant W. McCombs (from 11 Sep)
Maj Howard L. Walter (from 2 Oct)
Maj Louis Conti (from 6 Nov)
LtCol Grant W. McCombs (from 14 Dec)
Maj Louis Conti (from 5 Feb 1953)
Maj John E. Worlund (from 1 Apr)
Marine Helicopter Transport Squadron 161 (HMR-161)
Commanding Officer Col Keith B. McCutcheon (to 7 Aug 1952)
LtCol John F. Carey (from 8 Aug)
Col Owen A. Chambers (from 15 Mar 1953)
Executive Officer Maj James R. Dyer (to 10 May 1952)
Maj Zigmund J. Radolinski (from 11 May)
LtCol David M. Danser (from 28 May)
LtCol Russel R. Riley (from 1 Sep)
Maj Gilbert Percy (from 3 Jun 1953)
LtCol John H. King, Jr. (from 1 Jul)
Marine Observation Squadron 6 (VMO-6)
Commanding Officer LtCol William H. Herring (to 10 May 1952)
Maj Wallace J. Slappey, Jr. (from 11 May)
LtCol Elkin S. Dew (from 11 Sep)
LtCol William A. Cloman, Jr. (from 2 Feb 1953)
LtCol Earl E. Anderson (from 1 Jul)
Executive Officer Maj William G. MacLean, Jr. (from 1 Jul)
Maj Lynn E. Midkiff (from 26 Jun)
Maj Alton W. McCully (from 5 Feb 1953)
Maj John A. Hood (from 15 May)
1st 90mm AAA Gun Battalion
Battalion Commander Col Max C. Chapman (to 22 Nov 1952)
Col Edgar O. Price (from 23 Nov)
LtCol Henry S. Massie (from 7 Apr 1953)
Executive Officer LtCol Kenneth P. Dunkle (to 30 Apr 1952)
Maj Thomas J. Matthews (from 1 May)
Maj Robert H. Twisdale (from 15 Mar 1953)
Maj Henry V. Leasure (from 9 Jun)

1st Marine Division
and
1st Marine Aircraft Wing
799

1st Marine Division
and
1st Marine Aircraft Wing
799

Listed below are selected dates and figures which represent the effective strength of 1stMarDiv and 1st MAW throughout the 1952–1953 period.

Listed below are selected dates and figures that represent the effective strength of 1st MarDiv and 1st MAW during the 1952–1953 period.

Date Officers Enlisted Total
31 Mar 52 2,238  30,790  33,028 
  ground (1,412) (24,811) (26,223)
  aviation ( 826) ( 5,979) ( 6,805)
30 June 52 2,560  34,509  37,069 
  ground (1,684) (28,549) (30,233)
  aviation ( 876) ( 5,960) ( 6,836)
31 Oct 52 2,403  33,726  36,129 
  ground (1,423) (26,795) (28,218)
  aviation ( 980) ( 6,931) ( 7,911)
31 Jan 53 2,329  32,976  35,305 
  ground (1,352) (26,766) (28,118)
  aviation ( 977) ( 6,210) ( 7,187)
30 Apr 53 2,307  33,995  36,302 
  ground (1,370) (28,172) (29,542)
  aviation ( 937) ( 5,823) ( 6,760)
31 Jul 53 2,335  31,881  34,216800
  ground (1,412) (25,299) (26,711)
  aviation ( 923) ( 6,582) ( 7,505)

799 Personnel figures file, Statistics Br., HQMC, 31 May 1950–31 Jan 1955.

799 Personnel figures file, Statistics Br., HQMC, May 31, 1950 – January 31, 1955.

800 In addition, the 1stMarDiv was reinforced throughout this period by other indigenous military and civilian personnel.

800 In addition, the 1stMarDiv was strengthened during this time by other local military and civilian staff.


Korean War 1950–1953801

Korean War 1950–1953 __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Date KIA802 Killed
non-Battle
WIA Cumulative
Total
Aug-Dec 1950 1,526 30 6,229 7,785
Jan-Dec 1951    960 82 7,924 8,966
Jan-Mar 1952      87 19    600    706
Aug 1950-Mar 1952 2,573 131   14,753   17,457  
Apr-Dec 1952    960 66 6,815 7,841
Jan-Jul 1953    729 47 4,470 5,246
Apr 1952-Jul 1953 1,689 113   11,285   13,087  
TOTAL:
Aug 1950 to
Jul 1953
4,262 244   26,038   30,544  

801 Abstracted from U. S. Marine Corps Strength in Korea vs Korean Casualties by Month, 25 Jun 1950–27 Jul 1953, based on Korean Operation Report, Statistics Br., HQMC and Log Sheet, dtd 21 Aug 1967.

801 Abstracted from U.S. Marine Corps Strength in Korea vs. Korean Casualties by Month, June 25, 1950 – July 27, 1953, based on Korean Operation Report, Statistics Branch, HQMC and Log Sheet, dated August 21, 1967.

802 KIA includes DOW, Captured and Died, and Missing In Action, Presumed Dead.

802 KIA includes DOW, Captured and Died, and Missing In Action, Presumed Dead.


21Apr51 1stLt Harold D. Daigh
(VMF-312, F4U-4, USS Bataan)
1 YAK
21Apr51 Capt Phillip C. DeLong
(VMF-312, F4U-4, USS Bataan)
2 YAKs
30Jun51 ACapt Edwin B. Long
(VMF(N)-513, F7F-3N)
1 PO-2
12Jul51 Capt Donald L. Fenton
(VMF(N)-513, F4U-5NL)
1 PO-2
23Sep51 Maj Eugene A. Van Gundy
(VMF(N)-513, F7F-3N)
1 PO-2
4Nov51 BMaj William F. Guss
(VMF-311)
1 MIG
5Mar52 BCapt Vincent J. Marzello
(VMF-311)
1 MIG
16Mar52 BLtCol John S. Payne
(1st MAW)
1 MIG
7June52 1stLt John W. Andre
(VMF(N)-513, F4U-5NL)
1 YAK-9
10Sep52 Capt Jesse G. Folmar
(VMA-312, F4U, USS Sicily)
1 MIG
15Sep52 BMaj Alexander J. Gillis
(VMF-311)
1 MIG
28Sep52 BMaj Alexander J. Gillis
(VMF-311)
2 MIGs
3Nov52 CMaj William T. Stratton, Jr.
(VMF(N)-513, F3D-2)
1 YAK-15
8Nov52 Capt Oliver R. Davis
(VMF(N)-513, F3D-2)
1 MIG
10Dec52 D1stLt Joseph A. Corvi
(VMF(K)-513, F3D-2)
1 PO-2578
12Jan53 Maj Elswin P. Dunn
(VMF(N)-513, F3D-2)
1 MIG
20Jan53 BCapt Robert Wade
(MAG-33)
1 MIG
28Jan53 Capt James R. Weaver
(VMF(N)-513, F3D-2)
1 MIG
31Jan53 LtCol Robert F. Conley
(VMF(N)-513, F3D-2)
1 MIG
7Apr53 BMaj Roy L. Reed
(VMF 115)
1 MIG
12Apr53 BMaj Roy L. Reed
(VMF 115)
1 MIG
16May53 BMaj John F. Bolt
(VMF-115)
1 MIG
18May53 BCapt Harvey L. Jensen
(VMF 115)
1 MIG
22Jun53 BMaj John F. Bolt
(VMF 115)
1 MIG
24Jun53 BMaj John F. Bolt
(VMF 115)
1 MIG
30Jun53 BMaj John F. Bolt
(VMF 115)
1 MIG
11Jul53 BMaj John F. Bolt
(VMF-115)
2 MIGs
12Jul53 BMaj John H. Glenn
(VMF-311)
1 MIG
19Jul53 BMaj John H. Glenn
(VMF-311)
1 MIG
20Jul53 BMaj Thomas M. Sellers
(VMF-115)
2 MIGs
22Jul53 BMaj John H. Glenn
(VMF-311)
1 MIG

A Marines on temporary exchange duty with Fifth Air Force.

A Marines on temporary exchange duty with Fifth Air Force.

B First enemy aircraft destroyed at night by UNC.

B First enemy aircraft taken down at night by UNC.

C First enemy jet aircraft destroyed through use of airborne intercept radar equipped fighter.

C First enemy jet aircraft destroyed using a fighter equipped with airborne intercept radar.

D First enemy aircraft destroyed by means of lock-on radar gear.

D First enemy aircraft destroyed using lock-on radar technology.


803 For text of previous awards to 1stMarDiv, 1st MAW, and 1st ProvMarBrig, see earlier volumes of this series.

803 For the text of previous awards to 1stMarDiv, 1st MAW, and 1st ProvMarBrig, check earlier volumes of this series.

Presidental Unit Citation
The President of the Republic of Korea takes profound pleasure
in citing
for outstanding and superior performance of duty during the
period 26 October 1950 to 27 July 1953
804
The First United States Marine Division (Reinforced)
for the award of
Presidental Unit Citation

President Unit Award
The President of the Republic of Korea is pleased to award
this citation
for exceptional and outstanding duty performed during the
period from October 26, 1950, to July 27, 1953
804
The First United States Marine Division (Reinforced)
for this award
President Unit Award

Landing at Wonsan on 26 October 1950 the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) advanced to Yudam-ni where they engaged the Chinese Communist Forces. The heroic and courageous fighting of the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced), which was outnumbered but never outfought by the Chinese Communist Forces; coupled with its fight against the terrible winter weather in this return to Hungnam, has added another glorious page to the brilliant history of the United States Marines. After regrouping and retraining, the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) rejoined the United Nations Forces and began the attack to the north which drove the aggressors relentlessly before them. The enemy spring offensive during April 1951 which threatened to nullify the recent United Nations gains was successfully repulsed by the First Marine Division (Reinforced) and when other Republic of Korea Forces were heavily pressed and fighting for survival the timely offensive by this Division gave heart to the peoples of Korea. In March 1952 the First Marine Division (Reinforced) assumed responsibility of defending the western flank of the Eighth Army. In carrying out the responsibilities of this assignment the Marines won everlasting glory at Bunker Hill. Continuing active operations against the Communist enemy until the Armistice, the First Marine Division (Reinforced) inflicted heavy losses upon the aggressors and successfully repulsed their assaults upon strong point Vegas and Reno during March 1953, and during July 1953, just prior to the signing of the Armistice, again threw back the enemy in several days of severe fighting at strong points Berlin and East Berlin. Although suffering heavy losses during580 these engagements the First Marine Division (Reinforced) was at all times successful in maintaining the integrity of the United Nations’ positions within their assigned sector. The First United States Marine Division (Reinforced), by its unparalleled fighting courage and steadfast devotion to duty, has won the undying affection and gratitude of the Korean people. During its entire campaign the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) remained true to its motto of “Semper Fidelis”. In keeping faith with the highest traditions of its own country the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) kindled new hope in the breasts of all free men and women in the Republic of Korea. This Citation carries with it the right to wear the Presidential Unit Citation Ribbon by each individual member of the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) who served in Korea during the stated period.

Landing at Wonsan on October 26, 1950, the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) moved on to Yudam-ni, where they confronted the Chinese Communist Forces. The brave and determined efforts of the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced), which faced overwhelming odds but never backed down against the Chinese Communist Forces, along with their struggle against the harsh winter weather on their way back to Hungnam, has added another glorious chapter to the proud history of the United States Marines. After regrouping and retraining, the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) rejoined the United Nations Forces and launched an offensive to the north, pushing the aggressors back relentlessly. The enemy's spring offensive in April 1951, which threatened to erase the recent UN gains, was effectively countered by the First Marine Division (Reinforced). When other Republic of Korea Forces were heavily pressured and fighting for survival, this Division's timely offensive inspired the people of Korea. In March 1952, the First Marine Division (Reinforced) took on the responsibility of defending the western flank of the Eighth Army. In fulfilling this mission, the Marines earned lasting recognition at Bunker Hill. Continuing to actively engage with the Communist enemy until the Armistice, the First Marine Division (Reinforced) inflicted significant losses on the aggressors and successfully resisted their attacks on strong points Vegas and Reno in March 1953. In July 1953, just before the Armistice was signed, they again pushed back the enemy after several days of intense fighting at strong points Berlin and East Berlin. Despite suffering heavy losses during these battles, the First Marine Division (Reinforced) consistently upheld the integrity of the United Nations’ positions within their assigned area. The First United States Marine Division (Reinforced), through its unmatched bravery and unwavering dedication to duty, has earned the lasting gratitude and affection of the Korean people. Throughout its campaign, the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) remained true to its motto of “Semper Fidelis.” By honoring the highest traditions of its country, the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) inspired new hope among all free men and women in the Republic of Korea. This Citation grants the right to wear the Presidential Unit Citation Ribbon to each individual member of the First United States Marine Division (Reinforced) who served in Korea during the specified period.

/S/ Syngman Rhee
President

/S/ Syngman Rhee
President

804 The Korean PUC, for the period 26 Oct 50 to 15 Feb 53, was presented to the 1stMarDiv in March 1953. Later, President Syngman Rhee furnished a second citation extending the period to include 16 Feb-27 Jul 53. The division was thus cited for the overall period 26 Oct 50 to 27 Jul 53, and the entire period is considered one award. Decorations & Medals Br., HQMC.

804 The Korean PUC, covering the timeframe from October 26, 1950, to February 15, 1953, was presented to the 1st MarDiv in March 1953. Later, President Syngman Rhee issued a second citation extending the period to include February 16 to July 27, 1953. As a result, the division was recognized for the entire period from October 26, 1950, to July 27, 1953, and this whole duration is regarded as a single award. Decorations & Medals Br., HQMC.

Presidential Unit Citation
The President of the Republic of Korea takes profound pleasure
in citing
for outstanding and superior performance of duty

The First Marine Aircraft Wing
United States Marine Corps

Presidential Unit Award
The President of the Republic of Korea is pleased
to recognize
for exceptional and outstanding duty performance

The First Marine Aircraft Wing
United States Marine Corps

The First Marine Aircraft Wing has distinguished itself in support of United Nations Forces in Korea from 27 February 1951 to 11 June 1953. During this period, Marine Aircraft flew over 80,000 combat sorties braving intense opposition to strike enemy fortifications, weapons and logistical installations throughout North Korea. These extensive combat operations, often conducted in hazardous weather, have provided United Nations’ ground forces with unparalleled close air support and have inflicted heavy casualties and tremendous damage on enemy forces. Flying from forward Korean bases and from naval aircraft carriers, Marine aircraft have continually harassed enemy communication and transportation systems, successfully curtailing the resupply of hostile front line troops. The exceptional achievements of the officers and men of the First Marine Aircraft Wing have materially assisted the Republic of Korea in its fight for freedom. Their outstanding performance of duty reflects great credit upon themselves and is in accord with the highest traditions of military service.

The First Marine Aircraft Wing has made a significant impact supporting United Nations Forces in Korea from February 27, 1951, to June 11, 1953. During this time, Marine Aircraft completed over 80,000 combat missions facing tough opposition to target enemy fortifications, weapons, and supply installations throughout North Korea. These extensive operations, often carried out in dangerous weather, provided unmatched close air support to United Nations ground forces, causing heavy casualties and significant damage to enemy forces. Operating from forward bases in Korea and from naval aircraft carriers, Marine aircraft consistently disrupted enemy communication and transportation systems, effectively limiting the resupply of hostile frontline troops. The remarkable achievements of the officers and men of the First Marine Aircraft Wing have greatly aided the Republic of Korea in its struggle for freedom. Their exemplary performance reflects great credit on themselves and aligns with the highest traditions of military service.

The citation carries with it the right to wear the Presidential Unit Citation Ribbon by each individual member of the First Marine Aircraft Wing who served in Korea during the stated period.

The citation grants each member of the First Marine Aircraft Wing who served in Korea during the specified period the right to wear the Presidential Unit Citation Ribbon.

/S/ Syngman Rhee
President

/S/ Syngman Rhee
President

581

581

Presidental Unit Citation
The President of the Republic of Korea
takes pleasure in citing

The United States Marine Corps Advisory Component
United States Naval Advisory Group

Presidential Unit Award
The President of the Republic of Korea
is pleased to recognize

The United States Marine Corps Advisory Component
United States Naval Advisory Group

for outstanding service to the people of Korea and for aid in the development of the Korean Marine Corps during the period February 1953 to 27 July 1954.

for exceptional service to the people of Korea and for assistance in the growth of the Korean Marine Corps from February 1953 to July 27, 1954.

While attached to the Republic of Korea Marine Corps the United States Marine Advisory Component performed commendable service by giving valuable advice and guidance thus enabling the Korean Marine Corps to attain a ready status for any emergency.

While working with the Republic of Korea Marine Corps, the United States Marine Advisory Component delivered excellent service by providing valuable advice and guidance, which helped the Korean Marine Corps achieve a state of readiness for any emergency.

By their initiative and constant attention the officers and men have contributed materially to the effective operation of all offices and departments of the Korean Marine Corps. Their thorough knowledge of techniques and military matters has helped in the practical routine training and in the fitting of the Korean Marine Corps for effective combat duty.

By their initiative and consistent focus, the officers and enlisted personnel have significantly contributed to the efficient functioning of all offices and departments within the Korean Marine Corps. Their deep understanding of techniques and military issues has been essential in practical routine training and in preparing the Korean Marine Corps for effective combat operations.

By exemplary conduct and indomitable spirit the United States Marine Corps Advisory Component has left a permanent imprint on the Korean Marine Corps which will assist in the accomplishment of the missions assigned to it in the future.

By their outstanding behavior and unwavering determination, the United States Marine Corps Advisory Component has made a lasting impact on the Korean Marine Corps that will help them succeed in their future missions.

The outstanding service of the officers and men of the United States Marine Corps Advisory Component is in the best tradition of the United States Naval Service and this Presidential Unit Citation is given in recognition of their significant contribution to the welfare of the Republic of Korea.

The exceptional service of the officers and personnel of the United States Marine Corps Advisory Component reflects the proud traditions of the United States Naval Service, and this Presidential Unit Citation is awarded to honor their important contributions to the well-being of the Republic of Korea.

/S/ Syngman Rhee
President

/S/ Syngman Rhee
President

THE SECRETARY OF THE NAVY
Washington

THE SECRETARY OF THE NAVY Washington

The Secretary of the Navy takes pleasure in commending the
First Marine Division, Reinforced

The Secretary of the Navy is pleased to commend the
1st Marine Division, Reinforced

for service as set forth in the following CITATION:

for service as outlined in the following CITATION:

“For exceptionally meritorious service during operations against enemy aggressor forces in Korea from 11 August 1952 to 5 May 1953 and from 7 to 27 July 1953. During these periods the First Marine Division, Reinforced, maintained the integrity of over thirty-five miles of defense line in Panmunjom582 Truce Area against the constant aggressions of the enemy. During the time the Division was in the lines, it was under fire and attack by a resolute, well-equipped and fanatical hostile force. The Division maintained an raiding defense and constantly kept the enemy off balance by continuously patrolling, probing and raiding enemy positions, accompanied by the full weight of artillery and air support. Commencing in August 1952, and frequently thereafter, during the months of October 1952, March 1953, and July 1953, the enemy launched a series of large scale attacks to capture certain terrain features critical to the defense of friendly lines. The outposts and main defensive positions called Bunker Hill, The Hook, Reno, Carson, Vegas, Berlin and East Berlin, along with certain smaller outposts, gave title to battles of unsurpassed ferocity in which the full effort of the Marine Division was required to hurl back the attackers at heavy cost to both the Division and the enemy. That the lines in the Division sector remained firm and unbreached at the cessation of hostilities on 27 July 1953 gave eloquent tribute to the resourcefulness, courage, professional acumen and stamina of the members of the First Marine Division, Reinforced. Their inspiring and unyielding devotion to the fulfillment of their vital mission reflects the highest credit upon themselves and the United States Naval Service.”

“For outstanding service during operations against enemy forces in Korea from August 11, 1952, to May 5, 1953, and from July 7 to July 27, 1953. During these times, the First Marine Division, Reinforced, upheld the integrity of over thirty-five miles of defense line in the Panmunjom582 Truce Area against constant enemy aggression. While the Division was on the front lines, it faced fire and attacks from a determined, well-equipped, and fanatical hostile force. The Division maintained a defensive strategy and continually kept the enemy off balance by patrolling, probing, and raiding enemy positions, supported by extensive artillery and air power. Starting in August 1952, and frequently afterwards, notably in October 1952, March 1953, and July 1953, the enemy launched a series of large-scale attacks to capture key terrain features crucial for defending friendly lines. The outposts and main defensive positions known as Bunker Hill, The Hook, Reno, Carson, Vegas, Berlin, and East Berlin, along with several smaller outposts, were the sites of intense battles that required the full effort of the Marine Division to repel the attackers at great cost to both the Division and the enemy. The fact that the lines in the Division sector remained strong and unbroken by the end of hostilities on July 27, 1953, is a testament to the resourcefulness, courage, professional skill, and endurance of the members of the First Marine Division, Reinforced. Their inspiring and unwavering commitment to their crucial mission reflects the highest honor upon themselves and the United States Naval Service.”

All personnel attached to and serving with the First Marine Division, Reinforced, during the periods 11 August 1952 to 5 May 1953 and 7 to 27 July 1953, or any part thereof, are hereby authorized to wear the Navy Unit Commendation Ribbon. This includes all organic units of the Division and the following reinforcing units:

All personnel assigned to and serving with the First Marine Division, Reinforced, during the periods of August 11, 1952, to May 5, 1953, and July 7 to 27, 1953, or any part of those times, are authorized to wear the Navy Unit Commendation Medal. This includes all organic units of the Division and the following reinforcing units:

Fleet Marine Force Units and Detachments: 1st 4.5 Rocket Battery; 1st Combat Service Group; 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion; 7th Motor Transport Battalion; 1st Armored Amphibian Battalion; 1st Amphibian Truck Company; Team #1, 1st Provisional Historical Platoon; 1st Fumigation and Bath Platoon; 1st Air Delivery Platoon; Radio Relay Team, 1st Signal Operations Company; Detachment, 1st Explosive Ordnance Disposal Company; 2nd Platoon, Auto Field Maintenance Company; 1st Provisional Truck Company; Detachment, 1st Air Naval Gunfire Liaison Company.

Fleet Marine Force Units and Detachments: 1st 4.5 Rocket Battery; 1st Combat Service Group; 1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion; 7th Motor Transport Battalion; 1st Armored Amphibian Battalion; 1st Amphibian Truck Company; Team #1, 1st Provisional Historical Platoon; 1st Fumigation and Bath Platoon; 1st Air Delivery Platoon; Radio Relay Team, 1st Signal Operations Company; Detachment, 1st Explosive Ordnance Disposal Company; 2nd Platoon, Auto Field Maintenance Company; 1st Provisional Truck Company; Detachment, 1st Air Naval Gunfire Liaison Company.

United States Army Units: (For such periods not included in Army Unit Awards) 1st Bn, 32nd Regt, 7th Inf Div; 7th Inf Div; 74th Truck Co.; 513th Truck Co; 3rd Plt, 86th Engr Searchlight Co (passed to operational control of 11th Marines); 558th Trans Truck Co (Amphibious, was attached to 7th MT Bn, FMF); 196th Field Arty Bn; 92nd Army Engr Searchlight Plt; 181st CIC Det USA; 163rd MIS Det USA (Unit redesignated 1 Sep 1952 to MIS Plt); TLO Det USA; UNMACK Civil Affairs Team USA; 61st Engr Co; 159th Field Arty Bn (155 Howitzer); 623rd Field Arty Bn; 17th Field Arty Bn “C” Btry; 204th Field Arty Bn “B” Btry; 84th Engr Construction Bn; 1st Bn, 15th US Inf Regt; 1st Bn, 65th US Inf Regt; 1st Bn, 9th Regt, 2nd US Div (attached to KPR); Recon Co, 7th US Inf Div; 461st Inf Bn; Heavy Mortars, 7th Inf Div; 204th Field Arty Bn “A” Btry; 69th Field Arty Bn; 64th Field Arty Bn; 8th Field Arty Bn; 90th Field Arty Bn; 21st AAA-AW Bn; 89th Tank Bn; 441st CIC Det, USA; Prov Bn, USA (Dets583 31st and 32nd RCTS); Co D, 10th Engr (C) Bn, USA; Tank Co, 31st Inf, USA; Hqr Co, 31st Inf, USA; 2nd Bn, 31st Inf, USA (less Co E); 185th Engr (C) Bn, USA (less Co A); Co B, 1st Bn, 31st Inf, USA.

U.S. Army Units: (For periods not covered by Army Unit Awards) 1st Bn, 32nd Regt, 7th Inf Div; 7th Inf Div; 74th Truck Co.; 513th Truck Co; 3rd Plt, 86th Engr Searchlight Co (under operational control of 11th Marines); 558th Trans Truck Co (Amphibious, attached to 7th MT Bn, FMF); 196th Field Arty Bn; 92nd Army Engr Searchlight Plt; 181st CIC Det USA; 163rd MIS Det USA (Unit redesignated 1 Sep 1952 to MIS Plt); TLO Det USA; UNMACK Civil Affairs Team USA; 61st Engr Co; 159th Field Arty Bn (155 Howitzer); 623rd Field Arty Bn; 17th Field Arty Bn “C” Btry; 204th Field Arty Bn “B” Btry; 84th Engr Construction Bn; 1st Bn, 15th US Inf Regt; 1st Bn, 65th US Inf Regt; 1st Bn, 9th Regt, 2nd US Div (attached to KPR); Recon Co, 7th US Inf Div; 461st Inf Bn; Heavy Mortars, 7th Inf Div; 204th Field Arty Bn “A” Btry; 69th Field Arty Bn; 64th Field Arty Bn; 8th Field Arty Bn; 90th Field Arty Bn; 21st AAA-AW Bn; 89th Tank Bn; 441st CIC Det, USA; Prov Bn, USA (Dets583 31st and 32nd RCTS); Co D, 10th Engr (C) Bn, USA; Tank Co, 31st Inf, USA; Hqr Co, 31st Inf, USA; 2nd Bn, 31st Inf, USA (excluding Co E); 185th Engr (C) Bn, USA (excluding Co A); Co B, 1st Bn, 31st Inf, USA.

Charles S. Thomas  
Secretary of the Navy

Charles S. Thomas
Secretary of the Navy

THE SECRETARY OF THE NAVY
Washington

SECRETARY OF THE NAVY
Washington

The Secretary of the Navy takes pleasure in commending the

The Secretary of the Navy is pleased to commend the

First Marine Aircraft Wing, Reinforced

First Reinforced Marine Aircraft Wing

for service as set forth in the following CITATION:

for service as outlined in the following CITATION:

“For exceptionally meritorious service during operations against enemy aggressor forces in Korea from 1 August 1952 to 27 July 1953. Flying more than 45,000 combat sorties against determined opposition during this period, the First Marine Aircraft Wing, Reinforced, struck repeatedly and effectively at enemy troops, fortifications, logistical installations and lines of communication throughout North Korea. These extensive combat operations provided friendly ground forces with decisive close air support during such battles as Bunker Hill, The Hook, Reno, Carson, Vegas, Berlin and East Berlin, and inflicted heavy casualties and tremendous damage upon the enemy. Operating from naval aircraft carriers and from forward Korean bases, Marine aircraft continually harassed enemy communication and transportation systems, curtailing the movement of hostile troops to the front lines, and provided the air defense of South Korea. The notable record achieved by the First Marine Aircraft Wing, Reinforced, is an eloquent tribute to the resourcefulness, courage and stamina of all her gallant officers and men. Their inspiring and unyielding devotion to duty in the fulfillment of these vital tasks reflect the highest credit upon themselves and the United States Naval Service.”

“For exceptional service during operations against enemy forces in Korea from August 1, 1952, to July 27, 1953. Conducting over 45,000 combat missions against determined opposition during this time, the First Marine Aircraft Wing, Reinforced, repeatedly and effectively targeted enemy troops, fortifications, logistical installations, and communication lines throughout North Korea. These extensive combat operations provided crucial close air support to ground forces during battles such as Bunker Hill, The Hook, Reno, Carson, Vegas, Berlin, and East Berlin, inflicting heavy casualties and significant damage on the enemy. Operating from naval aircraft carriers and forward bases in Korea, Marine aircraft consistently disrupted enemy communication and transportation systems, limiting the movement of hostile troops to the front lines, and ensured the air defense of South Korea. The remarkable achievements of the First Marine Aircraft Wing, Reinforced, serve as a testament to the resourcefulness, courage, and endurance of all its officers and personnel. Their inspiring and unwavering commitment to duty in carrying out these vital tasks reflects great credit on themselves and the United States Naval Service.”

All personnel attached to and serving with the First Marine Aircraft Wing, Reinforced, during the above period, or any part thereof, are hereby authorized to wear the Navy Unit Commendation Ribbon. This includes all organic units and the following reinforcing units: Construction Battalion Maintenance Unit 1; 1st 90mm Anti-Aircraft Artillery Gun Battalion; and Ground Control Approach Unit 41M.

All personnel assigned to and serving with the First Marine Aircraft Wing, Reinforced, during the specified time period, or any part of it, are authorized to wear the Navy Unit Commendation Medal. This includes all organic units and the following supporting units: Construction Battalion Maintenance Unit 1; 1st 90mm Anti-Aircraft Artillery Gun Battalion; and Ground Control Approach Unit 41M.

Charles S. Thomas  
Secretary of the Navy

Charles S. Thomas
Secretary of the Navy

584

584

EXTRACT

Sure, please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.

General Orders No. 16 Department of the Army

General Orders #16 U.S. Army

Washington 25, D.C., 3 March 1954

Washington, D.C., March 3, 1954

Distinguished Unit Citation—Citation of Unit—Section 1

Distinguished Unit Award—Unit Award—Section 1

1—Distinguished Unit Citation.—As authorized by Executive Order 9396 (sec. I, WD Bul, 22, 1943), superseding Executive Order 9075 (sec. III, WD Bul 11, 1942), the following unit is cited under AR 220-315 in the name of the President of the United States as public evidence of deserved honor and distinction. The citation reads as follows:

1—Distinguished Unit Award.—As allowed by Executive Order 9396 (sec. I, WD Bul, 22, 1943), replacing Executive Order 9075 (sec. III, WD Bul 11, 1942), the following unit is recognized under AR 220-315 in the name of the President of the United States as public acknowledgment of earned honor and distinction. The citation states:

1. The Third Turkish Brigade, Turkish Armed Forces Command, and the following attached units: The Turkish Liaison Detachment, 8215th Army Unit; Company B, 1st Marine Tank Battalion, 1st Marine Division; and Company C, 1st Marine Tank Battalion, 1st Marine Division, are cited for outstanding performance of duty and extraordinary heroism in action against the enemy near Munsan-ni, Korea, during the period 28 to 29 May 1953. On the night of 28 May, an assault, supported by a heavy barrage, was launched by a powerful enemy force, determined to wrest outposts “Elko,” “Carson,” and “Vegas” from friendly hands. The valiant troops occupying these positions were soon surrounded and hand-to-hand combat ensued. With great tenacity and courage, the friendly troops fought on until, with only three of them still standing on outpost “Carson,” the first position fell. Despite the tremendous number of casualties they had suffered, the foe intensified the attack on the two remaining terrain features, rushing repeatedly up the slopes only to be hurled back by the gallant defenders. Friendly reinforcements arrived together with concentrated artillery support. All fire power was brought to bear on the charging enemy, as the defending troops fought desperately to hold. The foe came on in seemingly endless numbers and friendly tanks moved into highly vulnerable positions to fire at close range. Friendly casualties were heavy, but the toll of enemy dead was enormous. The determined foe paid apparently no attention to their thousands of casualties and appeared prepared to sacrifice thousands more to gain their objectives. Realizing that these friendly outposts could not hope to stand in the face of the endless waves of hostile troops, the friendly command ordered the outpost defenders to withdraw to the main line of resistance. The extraordinary heroism, singleness of purpose, and magnificent fighting spirit exhibited by the members of the Third Turkish Brigade, Turkish Armed Forces Command, and attached units throughout this crucial battle, resulted in the frustration of enemy plans to breach the main line of resistance, thus reflecting the greatest credit on themselves and the military profession.

1. The Third Turkish Brigade from the Turkish Armed Forces Command and the following attached units: The Turkish Liaison Detachment, 8215th Army Unit; Company B, 1st Marine Tank Battalion, 1st Marine Division; and Company C, 1st Marine Tank Battalion, 1st Marine Division, are recognized for their outstanding duty performance and extraordinary bravery in action against the enemy near Munsan-ni, Korea, during the period of May 28 to 29, 1953. On the night of May 28, a powerful enemy force launched an assault, supported by heavy artillery, determined to take the outposts “Elko,” “Carson,” and “Vegas” from friendly control. The brave troops in these positions were quickly surrounded, leading to intense hand-to-hand combat. With remarkable grit and courage, the friendly forces continued to fight until only three were left standing at outpost “Carson,” which ultimately fell. Despite suffering heavy casualties, the enemy intensified their attack on the two remaining positions, repeatedly charging up the slopes only to be pushed back by the valiant defenders. Friendly reinforcements arrived along with concentrated artillery fire. All available firepower was directed at the advancing enemy, as the defending troops struggled to hold their ground. The enemy came in seemingly endless waves, and friendly tanks moved into vulnerable positions to fire at close range. While friendly casualties were significant, the enemy suffered enormous losses. The determined enemy ignored their thousands of casualties, seemingly ready to sacrifice even more to achieve their goals. Recognizing that these friendly outposts could not withstand the relentless waves of hostile troops, the command ordered the defenders to withdraw to the main line of resistance. The remarkable heroism, unity of purpose, and incredible fighting spirit shown by the members of the Third Turkish Brigade, Turkish Armed Forces Command, and attached units throughout this critical battle thwarted enemy plans to breach the main line of resistance, bringing great credit to themselves and the military profession.

By order of the Secretary of the Army:

By order of the Army Secretary:

Official:

Official:

Wm. E. Bergin
Major General, USA
The Adjutant General

M. B. Ridgway
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff

Wm. E. Bergin
Major General, USA
The Adjutant General

M.B. Ridgway
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff

585

585

THE SECRETARY OF THE NAVY
Washington

SECRETARY OF THE NAVY
Washington

The President of the United States takes pleasure in presenting the Presidential Unit Citation to

The President of the United States is proud to present the President's Unit Citation to

Marine Observation Squadron Six

Marine Observation Squadron 6

for service as set forth in the following CITATION:

for service as outlined in the following CITATION:

“For extraordinary heroism in action against enemy aggressor forces in Korea from August 1950 to 27 July 1953. Pioneering in the development of frontline helicopter evacuation of casualties, Marine Observation Squadron Six skillfully carried out unprecedented low-altitude evacuation flights during all hours of the day and night over rugged mountainous terrain in the face of enemy fire and extremely adverse weather, thereby saving untold lives and lessening the suffering of wounded marines. In addition, this valiant squadron completed thousands of day and night artillery spotting, reconnaissance and tactical air control missions, contributing materially to the extensive damage inflicted upon enemy positions, supply lines and troop concentrations. The splendid record achieved by Marine Observation Squadron Six attests to the courage, determination and esprit de corps of the officers and men of this unit and was in keeping with the highest traditions of the United States Naval Service.”

“For exceptional bravery in action against enemy forces in Korea from August 1950 to July 27, 1953. Pioneering the frontline helicopter evacuation of casualties, Marine Observation Squadron Six executed groundbreaking low-altitude evacuation flights at all hours over challenging mountainous terrain under enemy fire and extremely harsh weather, saving countless lives and reducing the suffering of injured marines. Additionally, this courageous squadron completed thousands of day and night artillery spotting, reconnaissance, and tactical air control missions, significantly contributing to the extensive damage inflicted on enemy positions, supply lines, and troop concentrations. The impressive record achieved by Marine Observation Squadron Six reflects the courage, determination, and team spirit of the officers and men of this unit and aligns with the highest traditions of the United States Naval Service.”

For the President,  
Charles S. Thomas  
Secretary of the Navy

For the President,  
Charles S. Thomas  
Secretary of the Navy


TEXT OF AGREEMENT

Agreement between the Commander in Chief, United Nations Command, on the one hand, and the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, on the other hand, concerning a military armistice in Korea.

Agreement between the Commander in Chief, United Nations Command, on one side, and the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, on the other side, regarding a military ceasefire in Korea.

Introduction

The undersigned, the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, on the one hand, and the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, on the other hand, in the interest of stopping the Korean conflict, with its great toll of suffering and bloodshed on both sides, and with the objective of establishing an armistice which will insure a complete cessation of hostilities and of all acts of armed force in Korea until a final peaceful settlement is achieved, do individually, collectively, and mutually agree to accept and to be bound and governed by the conditions and terms of armistice set forth in the following Articles and Paragraphs, which said conditions and terms are intended to be purely military in character and to pertain solely to the belligerents in Korea.

The undersigned, the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command, on one side, and the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, on the other side, in the interest of ending the Korean conflict, which has caused great suffering and bloodshed on both sides, and with the goal of establishing an armistice that will ensure a complete halt to hostilities and all acts of armed force in Korea until a final peaceful resolution is reached, individually, collectively, and mutually agree to accept and be bound by the terms and conditions of the armistice outlined in the following Articles and Paragraphs. These terms and conditions are intended to be purely military in nature and apply solely to those involved in the conflict in Korea.

Article I
Military Demarcation Line and Demilitarized Zone

1. A Military Demarcation Line shall be fixed and both sides shall withdraw two (2) kilometers from this line so as to establish a Demilitarized Zone between the opposing forces. A Demilitarized Zone shall be established as a buffer zone to prevent the occurrence of incidents which might lead to a resumption of hostilities.

1. A Military Demarcation Line will be set, and both sides will pull back two (2) kilometers from this line to create a Demilitarized Zone between the opposing forces. A Demilitarized Zone will be established as a buffer to prevent incidents that could trigger a return to hostilities.

2. The Military Demarcation Line is located as indicated on the attached map.

2. The Military Demarcation Line is positioned as shown on the attached map.

3. The Demilitarized Zone is defined by a northern and a southern boundary as indicated on the attached map.

3. The Demilitarized Zone is marked by a northern and a southern boundary as shown on the attached map.

4. The Military Demarcation Line shall be plainly marked as directed by the Military Armistice Commission hereinafter established. The Commanders of the opposing sides shall have suitable markers erected along the boundary between the Demilitarized Zone and their respective areas. The Military588 Armistice Commission shall supervise the erection of all markers placed along the Military Demarcation Line and along the boundaries of the Demilitarized Zone.

4. The Military Demarcation Line will be clearly marked as directed by the Military Armistice Commission that will be established hereafter. The commanders of both sides will have appropriate markers set up along the boundary between the Demilitarized Zone and their respective areas. The Military588 Armistice Commission will oversee the installation of all markers along the Military Demarcation Line and the boundaries of the Demilitarized Zone.

5. The waters of the Han River Estuary shall be open to civil shipping of both sides wherever one bank is controlled by one side and the other bank is controlled by the other side. The Military Armistice Commission shall prescribe rules for the shipping in that part of the Han River Estuary indicated on the attached map. Civil shipping of each side shall have unrestricted access to the land under the military control of that side.

5. The waters of the Han River Estuary will be open for civilian shipping from both sides wherever one bank is controlled by one side and the opposite bank is controlled by the other side. The Military Armistice Commission will set rules for shipping in the area of the Han River Estuary shown on the attached map. Civilian shipping from each side will have unrestricted access to the land under the military control of that side.

6. Neither side shall execute any hostile act within, from, or against the Demilitarized Zone.

6. Neither side may carry out any aggressive actions within, from, or against the Demilitarized Zone.

7. No person, military or civilian, shall be permitted to cross the Military Demarcation Line unless specifically authorized to do so by the Military Armistice Commission.

7. No one, military or civilian, is allowed to cross the Military Demarcation Line unless they have been specifically authorized to do so by the Military Armistice Commission.

8. No person, military or civilian, in the Demilitarized Zone shall be permitted to enter the territory under the military control of either side unless specifically authorized to do so by the Commander into whose territory entry is sought.

8. No one, military or civilian, in the Demilitarized Zone is allowed to enter the territory controlled by either side unless specifically authorized by the Commander of the territory they wish to enter.

9. No person, military or civilian shall be permitted to enter the Demilitarized Zone except persons concerned with the conduct of civil administration and relief and persons specifically authorized to enter by the Military Armistice Commission.

9. No one, military or civilian, is allowed to enter the Demilitarized Zone except for those involved in civil administration and relief efforts, and individuals who have been specifically authorized to enter by the Military Armistice Commission.

10. Civil administration and relief in that part of the Demilitarized Zone which is south of the Military Demarcation Line shall be the responsibility of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command; and civil administration and relief in that part of the Demilitarized Zone which is north of the Military Demarcation Line shall be the joint responsibility of the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. The number of persons, military or civilian, from each side who are permitted to enter the Demilitarized Zone for the conduct of civil administration and relief shall be as determined by the respective Commanders, but in no case shall the total number authorized by either side exceed one thousand (1,000) persons at any one time. The number of civil police and the arms to be carried by them shall be as prescribed by the Military Armistice Commission. Other personnel shall not carry arms unless specifically authorized to do so by the Military Armistice Commission.

10. Civil administration and assistance in the part of the Demilitarized Zone south of the Military Demarcation Line will be managed by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command. In contrast, civil administration and support in the area north of the Military Demarcation Line will be a shared responsibility between the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. The number of military or civilian personnel from each side allowed to enter the Demilitarized Zone for civil administration and aid will be determined by the respective Commanders, but neither side will have more than one thousand (1,000) people authorized to be in the area at the same time. The number of civil police and the types of weapons they can carry will be set by the Military Armistice Commission. Other personnel will not be allowed to carry weapons unless specifically authorized to do so by the Military Armistice Commission.

11. Nothing contained in this Article shall be construed to prevent the complete freedom of movement to, from, and within the Demilitarized Zone by the Military Armistice Commission, its assistants, its Joint Observer Teams with their assistants, the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission hereinafter established, its assistants, its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams with their assistants, and of any other persons, materials, and equipment specifically authorized to enter the Demilitarized Zone by the Military Armistice Commission. Convenience of movement shall be permitted through the territory under the military control of either side over any route necessary to move between points within the Demilitarized Zone where such points are not connected by roads lying completely within the Demilitarized Zone.

11. Nothing in this Article should be understood as preventing the unrestricted movement to, from, and within the Demilitarized Zone by the Military Armistice Commission, its staff, its Joint Observer Teams and their staff, the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission established hereafter, its staff, its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams and their staff, and any other individuals, materials, and equipment specifically authorized by the Military Armistice Commission to enter the Demilitarized Zone. Movement will be allowed through the area controlled by either side on any route necessary to travel between locations within the Demilitarized Zone, especially where those locations are not connected by roads completely within the Demilitarized Zone.

589

589

Article II
Clear Plans for Cease-Fire and Armistice

A. General

12. The Commanders of the opposing sides shall order and enforce a complete cessation of all hostilities in Korea by all armed forces under their control, including all units and personnel of the ground, naval, and air forces, effective twelve (12) hours after this Armistice Agreement is signed. (See Paragraph 63 hereof for effective date and hour of the remaining provisions of this Armistice Agreement.)

12. The leaders of the opposing sides will mandate and ensure a complete halt to all fighting in Korea by all military forces under their command, including all ground, naval, and air units and personnel, starting twelve (12) hours after this Armistice Agreement is signed. (See Paragraph 63 here for the effective date and time of the other provisions of this Armistice Agreement.)

13. In order to insure the stability of the Military Armistice so as to facilitate the attainment of a peaceful settlement through the holding by both sides of a political conference of a higher level, the Commanders of the opposing sides shall:

13. To ensure the stability of the Military Armistice and make it easier to reach a peaceful settlement through a higher-level political conference held by both sides, the Commanders of the opposing sides will:

a. Within seventy-two (72) hours after this Armistice becomes effective, withdraw all of their military forces, supplies, and equipment from the Demilitarized Zone except as otherwise provided herein. All demolitions, minefields, wire entanglements, and other hazards to the safe movement of personnel of the Military Armistice Commission or its Joint Observer Teams, known to exist within the Demilitarized Zone after the withdrawal of military forces therefrom, together with lanes known to be free of all hazards, shall be reported to the Military Armistice Commission by the Commander of the side whose forces emplaced such hazards. Subsequently, additional safe lanes shall be cleared; and eventually, within forty-five (45) days after the termination of the seventy-two (72) hour period, all such hazards shall be removed from the Demilitarized Zone as directed by and under the supervision of the Military Armistice Commission. At the termination of the seventy-two (72) hour period, except for unarmed troops authorized a forty-five (45) day period to complete salvage operations under Military Armistice Commission supervision, such units of a police nature as may be specifically requested by the Military Armistice Commission and agreed to by the Commanders of the opposing sides, and personnel authorized under Paragraphs 10 and 11 hereof, no personnel of either side shall be permitted to enter the Demilitarized Zone.

a. Within seventy-two (72) hours after this Armistice takes effect, all military forces, supplies, and equipment must be withdrawn from the Demilitarized Zone, unless stated otherwise here. Any demolitions, minefields, wire entanglements, and other dangers to the safe movement of personnel from the Military Armistice Commission or its Joint Observer Teams that are known to exist in the Demilitarized Zone after the military withdrawal must be reported to the Military Armistice Commission by the Commander of the side that placed those hazards. Additional safe lanes will be cleared afterward; ultimately, within forty-five (45) days after the seventy-two (72) hour period ends, all such hazards must be removed from the Demilitarized Zone as directed by and supervised by the Military Armistice Commission. At the end of the seventy-two (72) hour period, except for unarmed troops allowed a forty-five (45) day period to finish salvage operations under Military Armistice Commission supervision, any police-type units specifically requested by the Military Armistice Commission and agreed to by the Commanders of the opposing sides, and personnel authorized under Paragraphs 10 and 11 here, no personnel from either side will be permitted to enter the Demilitarized Zone.

b. Within ten (10) days after this Armistice Agreement becomes effective, withdraw all of their military forces, supplies and equipment from the rear and the coastal islands and waters of Korea of the other side. If such military forces are not withdrawn within the stated time limit, and there is no mutually agreed and valid reason for the delay, the other side shall have the right to take any action which it deems necessary for the maintenance of security and order. The term “coastal islands,” as used above, refers to those islands which, though occupied by one side at the time when this Armistice Agreement becomes effective, were controlled by the other side on 24 June 1950; provided, however, that all the islands lying to the north and west of the provincial boundary line between HWANGHAE-DO and KYONGGI-DO shall be under the military control of the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers590 except the island groups of PAENGYONG-DO (37°58´N, 124°40´E), TAECHONG-DO (37°50´N, 124°42´E), SOCHONG-DO (37°46´N, 124°46´E), YONPYONG-DO (37°38´N, 125°40´E), and U-DO (37°36´N, 125°58´E), which shall remain under the military control of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command. All the islands on the west coast of Korea lying south of the above-mentioned boundary line shall remain under the military control of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command.

b. Within ten (10) days after this Armistice Agreement takes effect, all military forces, supplies, and equipment must be withdrawn from the rear and the coastal islands and waters of Korea belonging to the other side. If these military forces are not withdrawn within the specified time frame, and there is no mutually agreed and valid reason for the delay, the other side has the right to take whatever actions it considers necessary for maintaining security and order. The term “coastal islands,” as mentioned above, refers to those islands that were occupied by one side when this Armistice Agreement takes effect but were controlled by the other side on June 24, 1950; however, all islands located north and west of the provincial boundary line between HWANGHAE-DO and KYONGGI-DO will be under the military control of the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers590, except for the island groups of PAENGYONG-DO (37°58´N, 124°40´E), TAECHONG-DO (37°50´N, 124°42´E), SOCHONG-DO (37°46´N, 124°46´E), YONPYONG-DO (37°38´N, 125°40´E), and U-DO (37°36´N, 125°58´E), which will remain under the military control of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command. All islands on the west coast of Korea lying south of the previously mentioned boundary line will remain under the military control of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command.

c. Cease the introduction into Korea of reinforcing military personnel; provided, however, that the rotation of units and personnel, the arrival in Korea of personnel on a temporary duty basis, and the return to Korea of personnel after short periods of leave or temporary duty outside of Korea shall be permitted within the scope prescribed below. “Rotation” is defined as the replacement of units or personnel by other units or personnel who are commencing a tour of duty in Korea. Rotation personnel shall be introduced into and evacuated from Korea only through the ports of entry enumerated in Paragraph 43 hereof. Rotation shall be conducted on a man-for-man basis; provided, however, that no more than thirty-five thousand (35,000) persons in the military service shall be admitted into Korea by either side in any calendar month under the rotation policy. No military personnel of either side shall be introduced into Korea if the introduction of such personnel will cause the aggregate of the military personnel of that side admitted into Korea since the effective date of this Armistice Agreement to exceed the cumulative total of the military personnel of that side who have departed from Korea since that date. Reports concerning arrivals in and departures from Korea of military personnel shall be made daily to the Military Armistice Commission and the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, such reports shall include places of arrival and departure and the number of persons arriving at or departing from each such place. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, through its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, shall conduct supervision and inspection of the rotation of units and personnel authorized above, at the ports of entry enumerated in Paragraph 43 hereof.

c. Stop sending additional military personnel to Korea; however, the rotation of units and personnel, the arrival of personnel on temporary duty, and the return of personnel after short leaves or temporary duty outside of Korea are allowed under the conditions outlined below. "Rotation" means replacing units or personnel with others starting a tour of duty in Korea. Rotation personnel can only enter and exit Korea through the entry points listed in Paragraph 43. Rotation will occur on a one-for-one basis; however, no more than thirty-five thousand (35,000) military personnel will be allowed into Korea by either side in any calendar month under the rotation policy. No military personnel from either side should be sent to Korea if this would cause the total military personnel from that side allowed into Korea since this Armistice Agreement became effective to surpass the total number of military personnel from that side who have left Korea since that date. Daily reports on arrivals and departures of military personnel in and out of Korea must be submitted to the Military Armistice Commission and the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission; these reports must include the locations of arrival and departure as well as the number of individuals arriving at or leaving from each location. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, through its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, will oversee and inspect the rotation of units and personnel as permitted above, at the entry points listed in Paragraph 43.

d. Cease the introduction into Korea of reinforcing combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition; provided, however, that combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition which are destroyed, damaged, worn out, or used up during the period of the armistice may be replaced on the basis of piece-for-piece of the same effectiveness and the same type. Such combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition shall be introduced into Korea only through the ports of entry enumerated in Paragraph 43 hereof. In order to justify the requirement for combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition to be introduced into Korea for replacement purposes, reports concerning every incoming shipment of these items shall be made to the Military Armistice Commission and the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission; such reports shall include statements regarding the disposition of the items being replaced. Items to be replaced which are removed from Korea shall be removed only through the ports of entry enumerated in Paragraph 43 hereof. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, through its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams shall conduct supervision and591 inspection of the replacement of combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition authorized above, at the ports of entry enumerated in Paragraph 43 hereof.

d. Stop introducing reinforcing combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition into Korea; however, combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition that are destroyed, damaged, worn out, or used up during the armistice period may be replaced on a piece-for-piece basis of the same effectiveness and type. These combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition will only be brought into Korea through the entry ports listed in Paragraph 43 hereof. To justify the need for introducing combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition for replacement, reports about every incoming shipment of these items must be submitted to the Military Armistice Commission and the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission. These reports should include details on the items being replaced. Items being replaced and removed from Korea can only be taken out through the entry ports listed in Paragraph 43 hereof. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, through its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, will supervise and inspect the replacement of the mentioned combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition at the entry ports specified in Paragraph 43 hereof.

e. Insure that personnel of their respective commands who violate any of the provisions of this Armistice Agreement are adequately punished.

e. Ensure that members of their respective teams who break any of the rules of this Armistice Agreement are appropriately punished.

f. In those cases where places of burial are a matter of record and graves are actually found to exist, permit graves registration personnel of the other side to enter, within a definite time limit after this Armistice Agreement becomes effective, the territory of Korea under their Military control, for the purpose of proceeding to such graves to recover and evacuate the bodies of the deceased military personnel of that side, including deceased prisoners of war. The specific procedures and the time limit for the performance of the above task shall be determined by the Military Armistice Commission. The Commanders of the opposing sides shall furnish to the other side all available information pertaining to the places of burial of the deceased military personnel of the other side.

f. In situations where burial sites are documented and graves are confirmed, allow the graves registration teams from the other side to enter the territory of Korea under their Military control within a specified time frame after this Armistice Agreement goes into effect. This is to facilitate the recovery and evacuation of the remains of their deceased military personnel, including former prisoners of war. The Military Armistice Commission will decide on the specific procedures and time limits for this task. The Commanders from each side will provide all relevant information to the other regarding the burial locations of their deceased military personnel.

g. Afford full protection and all possible assistance and cooperation to the Military Armistice Commission, its Joint Observer Teams, the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, and its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, in the carrying out of their functions and responsibilities hereinafter assigned; and accord to the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, and to its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, full convenience of movement between the headquarters of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and the ports of entry enumerated in Paragraph 43 hereof over main lines of communication agreed upon by both sides, and between the headquarters of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and the places where violations of this Armistice Agreement have been reported to have occurred. In order to prevent unnecessary delays, the use of alternate routes and means of transportation will be permitted whenever the main lines of communication are closed or impassable.

g. Provide complete protection and all possible support and cooperation to the Military Armistice Commission, its Joint Observer Teams, the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, and its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, in carrying out their assigned functions and responsibilities; and grant the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, and its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, full freedom of movement between the headquarters of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and the entry points listed in Paragraph 43 hereof along main communication routes agreed upon by both sides, as well as between the headquarters of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and the locations where violations of this Armistice Agreement have been reported. To avoid unnecessary delays, alternative routes and methods of transportation will be allowed whenever the main communication lines are closed or impassable.

h. Provide such logistic support, including communications and transportation facilities, as may be required by the Military Armistice Commission and the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and their Teams.

h. Provide logistical support, including communication and transportation facilities, as needed by the Military Armistice Commission and the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and their teams.

i. Each construct, operate, and maintain a suitable airfield in their respective ports of the Demilitarized Zone in the vicinity of the headquarters of the Military Armistice Commission, for such uses as the Commission may determine.

i. Each party will build, manage, and keep a suitable airfield in their respective ports of the Demilitarized Zone near the headquarters of the Military Armistice Commission, for purposes that the Commission may decide.

j. Insure that all members and other personnel of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission hereinafter established shall enjoy the freedom and facilities necessary for the proper exercise of their function, including privileges, treatment, and immunities equivalent to those ordinarily enjoyed by accredited diplomatic personnel under international usage.

j. Ensure that all members and other personnel of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission established here shall have the necessary freedom and facilities to properly carry out their duties, including privileges, treatment, and immunities similar to those normally enjoyed by accredited diplomatic personnel under international norms.

14. This Armistice Agreement shall apply to all opposing ground forces under the military control of either side, which ground forces shall respect the Demilitarized Zone and the area of Korea under the military control of the opposing side.

14. This Armistice Agreement will apply to all opposing ground forces controlled by either side, which forces must respect the Demilitarized Zone and the area of Korea controlled by the opposing side.

15. This Armistice Agreement shall apply to all opposing naval forces,592 which naval forces shall respect the waters contiguous to the Demilitarized Zone and to the land area of Korea under the military control of the opposing side, and shall not engage in blockade of any kind of Korea.

15. This Armistice Agreement will apply to all opposing naval forces,592 which must respect the waters next to the Demilitarized Zone and the land area of Korea under the military control of the other side, and they will not engage in any form of blockade against Korea.

16. This Armistice Agreement shall apply to all opposing air forces, which air forces shall respect the air space over the Demilitarized Zone and over the area of Korea under the military control of the opposing side, and over the waters contiguous to both.

16. This Armistice Agreement will apply to all opposing air forces, which must respect the airspace over the Demilitarized Zone, the area of Korea under the military control of the opposing side, and the waters next to both.

17. Responsibility for compliance with and enforcement of the terms and provisions of this Armistice Agreement is that of the signatories hereto and their successors in command. The Commanders of the opposing sides shall establish within their respective commands all measures and procedures necessary to insure complete compliance with all of the provisions hereof by all elements of their commands. They shall actively cooperate with one another and with the Military Armistice Commission and the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission in requiring observance of both the letter and the spirit of all of the provisions of this Armistice Agreement.

17. The signatories of this Armistice Agreement and their successors in command are responsible for complying with and enforcing its terms and provisions. The Commanders on both sides will create all necessary measures and procedures within their commands to ensure that every part of this Agreement is fully followed by all members of their commands. They will work together and cooperate with the Military Armistice Commission and the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission to ensure that both the letter and the spirit of this Armistice Agreement are respected.

18. The costs of the operations of the Military Armistice Commission and of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and of their Teams shall be shared equally by the two opposing sides.

18. The expenses for the Military Armistice Commission and the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, along with their teams, will be split equally between the two sides.

B. Military Armistice Commission
1. Composition

19. A Military Armistice Commission is hereby established.

19. A Military Armistice Commission is created.

20. The Military Armistice Commission shall be composed of ten (10) senior officers, five (5) of whom shall be appointed by the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, and five (5) of whom shall be appointed jointly by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. Of the ten members, three (3) from each side shall be of general or flag rank. The two (2) remaining members on each side may be major generals, brigadier generals, colonels, or their equivalents.

20. The Military Armistice Commission will consist of ten (10) senior officers, five (5) of whom will be appointed by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command, and five (5) will be jointly appointed by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. Out of the ten members, three (3) from each side must be of general or flag rank. The two (2) remaining members on each side can be major generals, brigadier generals, colonels, or their equivalents.

21. Members of the Military Armistice Commission shall be permitted to use staff assistants as required.

21. Members of the Military Armistice Commission are allowed to use staff assistants as needed.

22. The Military Armistice Commission shall be provided with the necessary administrative personnel to establish a Secretariat charged with assisting the Commission by performing record-keeping, secretarial, interpreting, and such other functions as the Commission may assign to it. Each side shall appoint to the Secretariat a Secretary and an Assistant Secretary and such clerical and specialized personnel as required by the Secretariat. Records shall be kept in English, Korean, and Chinese, all of which shall be equally authentic.

22. The Military Armistice Commission will be given the necessary administrative staff to set up a Secretariat responsible for helping the Commission by handling record-keeping, secretarial tasks, interpreting, and any other duties the Commission assigns to it. Each side will appoint a Secretary and an Assistant Secretary to the Secretariat, along with any clerical and specialized staff needed. Records will be maintained in English, Korean, and Chinese, all of which will hold the same level of authenticity.

23. a. The Military Armistice Commission shall be initially provided with and assisted by ten (10) Joint Observer Teams, which number may be reduced by agreement of the senior members of both sides on the Military Armistice Commission.

23. a. The Military Armistice Commission will start with ten (10) Joint Observer Teams, and this number can be decreased by agreement between the senior members of both sides in the Military Armistice Commission.

b. Each Joint Observer Team shall be composed of not less than four593 (4) nor more than six (6) officers of field grade, half of whom shall be appointed by the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, and half of whom shall be appointed jointly by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. Additional personnel such as drivers, clerks, and interpreters shall be furnished by each side as required for the functioning of the Joint Observer Teams.

b. Each Joint Observer Team will consist of no fewer than four (4) and no more than six (6) officers of field grade. Half of these officers will be appointed by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command, while the other half will be appointed jointly by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. Additional personnel, like drivers, clerks, and interpreters, will be provided by each side as needed for the operation of the Joint Observer Teams.

2. Functions and Authority

24. The general mission of the Military Armistice Commission shall be to supervise the implementation of this Armistice Agreement and to settle through negotiations any violations of this Armistice Agreement.

24. The main goal of the Military Armistice Commission is to oversee the implementation of this Armistice Agreement and to resolve any violations of this agreement through negotiations.

25. The Military Armistice Commission shall:

25. The Military Armistice Commission will:

a. Locate its headquarters in the vicinity of PANMUNJOM (37°57´29´´ N, 126°40´00´´ E). The Military Armistice Commission may relocate its headquarters at another point within the Demilitarized Zone by agreement of the senior members of both sides on the Commission.

a. Find its headquarters near PANMUNJOM (37°57´29´´ N, 126°40´00´´ E). The Military Armistice Commission can move its headquarters to a different location within the Demilitarized Zone if both sides' senior members on the Commission agree.

b. Operate as a joint organization without a chairman.

b. Function as a joint organization without a chairperson.

c. Adopt such rules of procedure as it may, from time to time, deem necessary.

c. Adopt any procedure rules it considers necessary from time to time.

d. Supervise the carrying out of the provisions of this Armistice Agreement pertaining to the Demilitarized Zone and to the Han River Estuary.

d. Oversee the implementation of the terms of this Armistice Agreement related to the Demilitarized Zone and the Han River Estuary.

e. Direct the operations of the Joint Observer Teams.

e. Oversee the activities of the Joint Observer Teams.

f. Settle through negotiations any violations of this Armistice Agreement.

f. Resolve any violations of this Armistice Agreement through negotiations.

g. Transmit immediately to the Commanders of the opposing sides all reports of investigations of violations of this Armistice Agreement and all other reports and records of proceedings received from the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission.

g. Immediately send to the Commanders of the opposing sides all reports concerning investigations into violations of this Armistice Agreement, along with any other reports and records of proceedings received from the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission.

h. Give general supervision and direction to the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War and the Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians, hereinafter established.

h. Provide overall supervision and direction to the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War and the Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians, established hereafter.

i. Act as an intermediary in transmitting communications between the Commanders of the opposing sides; provided however, that the foregoing shall not be construed to preclude the Commanders of both sides from communicating with each other by any other means which they may desire to employ.

i. Serve as a go-between for passing messages between the Commanders of the opposing sides; however, this doesn't prevent the Commanders on both sides from communicating with each other using any other methods they wish to use.

j. Provide credentials and distinctive insignia for its staff and its Joint Observer Teams, and a distinctive marking for all vehicles, aircraft, and vessels, used in the performance of its mission.

j. Provide identification and unique symbols for its staff and its Joint Observer Teams, and a special mark for all vehicles, aircraft, and ships used in carrying out its mission.

26. The mission of the Joint Observer Teams shall be to assist the Military Armistice Commission in supervising the carrying out of the provisions of this Armistice Agreement to the Demilitarized Zone and to the Han River Estuary.

26. The role of the Joint Observer Teams will be to help the Military Armistice Commission oversee the implementation of the provisions of this Armistice Agreement in the Demilitarized Zone and the Han River Estuary.

27. The Military Armistice Commission, or the senior member of either side thereof, is authorized to dispatch Joint Observer Teams to investigate violations of this Armistice Agreement reported to have occurred in the Demilitarized Zone or in the Han River Estuary; provided, however, that not more than one half of the Joint Observer Teams which have not been dispatched594 by the Military Armistice Commission may be dispatched at any one time by the senior member of either side on the Commission.

27. The Military Armistice Commission, or the highest-ranking member from either side, is allowed to send Joint Observer Teams to check out reported violations of this Armistice Agreement that are said to have happened in the Demilitarized Zone or in the Han River Estuary; however, no more than half of the Joint Observer Teams that haven't been sent out by the Military Armistice Commission can be dispatched at the same time by the senior member from either side on the Commission.594

28. The Military Armistice Commission, or the senior member of either side thereof, is authorized to request the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission to conduct special observations and inspections at places outside the Demilitarized Zone where violations of this Armistice Agreement have been reported to have occurred.

28. The Military Armistice Commission, or the senior member of either side, is allowed to ask the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission to carry out special observations and inspections in areas outside the Demilitarized Zone where violations of this Armistice Agreement have been reported.

29. When the Military Armistice Commission determines that a violation of this Armistice Agreement has occurred, it shall immediately report such violation to the Commanders of the opposing sides.

29. When the Military Armistice Commission finds that a violation of this Armistice Agreement has occurred, it will immediately inform the Commanders of the opposing sides.

30. When the Military Armistice Commission determines that a violation of this Armistice Agreement has been corrected to its satisfaction, it shall so report to the Commanders of the opposing sides.

30. When the Military Armistice Commission decides that a violation of this Armistice Agreement has been resolved to its satisfaction, it will report this to the Commanders of both opposing sides.

3. General

31. The Military Armistice Commission shall meet daily. Recesses of not to exceed seven (7) days may be agreed upon by the senior members of both sides; provided, that such recesses may be terminated on twenty-four (24) hour notice by the senior member of either side.

31. The Military Armistice Commission will meet every day. Breaks of no more than seven (7) days can be agreed upon by the senior members of both sides; however, these breaks can be canceled with twenty-four (24) hours' notice by the senior member of either side.

32. Copies of the record of the proceedings of all meetings of the Military Armistice Commission shall be forwarded to the Commanders of the opposing sides as soon as possible after each meeting.

32. Copies of the minutes from all meetings of the Military Armistice Commission will be sent to the Commanders of both sides as soon as possible after each meeting.

33. The Joint Observer Teams shall make periodic reports to the Military Armistice Commission as required by the Commission and, in addition, shall make such special reports as may be deemed necessary by them, or as may be required by the Commission.

33. The Joint Observer Teams will provide regular updates to the Military Armistice Commission as needed by the Commission, and in addition, will create special reports if they see fit or if the Commission requests them.

34. The Military Armistice Commission shall maintain duplicate files of the reports and records of proceedings required by this Armistice Agreement. The Commission is authorized to maintain duplicate files of such other reports, records, etc., as may be necessary in the conduct of its business. Upon eventual dissolution of the Commission, one set of the above files shall be turned over to each side.

34. The Military Armistice Commission will keep duplicate copies of the reports and records of proceedings required by this Armistice Agreement. The Commission is allowed to maintain duplicate copies of any other reports, records, etc., as needed for its operations. When the Commission is eventually dissolved, one set of these files will be given to each side.

35. The Military Armistice Commission may make recommendations to the Commanders of the opposing sides with respect to amendments or additions to this Armistice Agreement. Such recommended changes should generally be those designed to insure a more effective armistice.

35. The Military Armistice Commission can suggest changes to the Commanders of both sides regarding amendments or additions to this Armistice Agreement. These suggested changes should mainly aim to ensure a more effective armistice.

C. Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission
1. Composition

36. A Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission is hereby established.

36. A Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission is established here.

37. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission shall be composed of four (4) senior officers, two (2) of whom shall be appointed by neutral nations nominated by the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, namely, SWEDEN and SWITZERLAND, and two (2) of whom shall be appointed by neutral nations nominated jointly by the Supreme Commander of595 the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, namely, POLAND and CZECHOSLOVAKIA. The term “neutral nations” as herein used is defined as those nations whose combatant forces have not participated in the hostilities in Korea. Members appointed to the Commission may be from the armed forces of the appointing nations. Each member shall designate an alternate member to attend those meetings which for any reason the principal member is unable to attend. Such alternate members shall be of the same nationality as their principals. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission may take action whenever the number of members present from the neutral nations nominated by one side is equal to the number of members present from the neutral nations nominated by the other side.

37. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission will consist of four (4) senior officers. Two (2) will be appointed by neutral countries suggested by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command, specifically SWEDEN and SWITZERLAND. The other two (2) will be appointed by neutral countries jointly nominated by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, namely POLAND and CZECHOSLOVAKIA. The term “neutral nations” refers to those countries whose military forces have not been involved in the conflict in Korea. Commission members can come from the armed forces of the appointing nations. Each member must designate an alternate to attend meetings if the principal member cannot be there. These alternate members must be of the same nationality as their principals. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission can take action whenever the number of members present from the neutral nations nominated by one side equals the number of members present from the neutral nations nominated by the other side.

38. Members of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission shall be permitted to use staff assistants furnished by the neutral nations as required. These staff assistants may be appointed as alternate members of the Commission.

38. Members of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission are allowed to use staff assistants provided by the neutral nations as needed. These staff assistants may be appointed as alternate members of the Commission.

39. The neutral nations shall be requested to furnish the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission with the necessary administrative personnel to establish a Secretariat charged with assisting the Commission by performing necessary record-keeping, secretarial, interpreting, and such other functions as the Commission may assign to it.

39. The neutral nations will be asked to provide the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission with the necessary administrative staff to set up a Secretariat responsible for helping the Commission by handling record-keeping, secretarial duties, interpreting, and any other functions the Commission may assign.

40. a. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission shall be initially provided with, and assisted by, twenty (20) Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, which number may be reduced by agreement of the senior members of both sides on the Military Armistice Commission. The Neutral Nations Inspection Teams shall be responsible to, shall report to, and shall be subject to the direction of, the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission only.

40. a. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission will initially be provided with and assisted by twenty (20) Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, which number may be reduced by agreement of the senior members of both sides on the Military Armistice Commission. The Neutral Nations Inspection Teams will be accountable to, will report to, and will be directed solely by the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission.

b. Each Neutral Nations Inspection Team shall be composed of not less than four (4) officers, preferably of field grade, half of whom shall be from the neutral nations nominated by the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, and half of whom shall be from the neutral nations nominated jointly by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. Members appointed to the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams may be from the armed forces of the appointing nations. In order to facilitate the functioning of the Teams, sub-teams composed of not less than two (2) members, one of whom shall be from a neutral nation nominated by the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, and one of whom shall be from a neutral nation nominated by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, may be formed as circumstances require. Additional personnel such as drivers, clerks, interpreters, and communications personnel, and such equipment as may be required by the Teams to perform their missions, shall be furnished by the Commander of each side, as required, in the Demilitarized Zone and in the territory under his military control. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission may provide itself and the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams with such of the above personnel and equipment of its own as it may desire; provided, however, that such personnel shall be personnel of the same neutral nations of which the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission is composed.

b. Each Neutral Nations Inspection Team must consist of at least four (4) officers, preferably of field grade, with half coming from the neutral nations nominated by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command, and the other half from the neutral nations nominated jointly by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. Members appointed to the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams can be from the armed forces of the appointing nations. To support the work of the Teams, sub-teams made up of at least two (2) members may be formed as needed, with one member from a neutral nation nominated by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command, and the other from a neutral nation nominated by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. Additional personnel such as drivers, clerks, interpreters, and communications staff, as well as any necessary equipment for the Teams to carry out their missions, will be provided by the Commander of each side as needed, in the Demilitarized Zone and in the territory under their military control. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission may also supply itself and the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams with any of the mentioned personnel and equipment as desired, provided that these personnel come from the same neutral nations that make up the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission.

596

596

2. Functions and Authority

41. The mission of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission shall be to carry out the functions of supervision, observation, inspection, and investigation, as stipulated in Subparagraphs 13c and 13d and Paragraph 28 hereof, and to report the results of such supervision, observation, inspection, and investigation to the Military Armistice Commission.

41. The role of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission is to perform supervision, observation, inspection, and investigation, as outlined in Subparagraphs 13c and 13d and Paragraph 28 of this document, and to report the outcomes of this supervision, observation, inspection, and investigation to the Military Armistice Commission.

42. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission shall:

42. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission will:

a. Locate its headquarters in proximity to the headquarters of the Military Armistice Commission.

a. Find its headquarters near the headquarters of the Military Armistice Commission.

b. Adopt such rules of procedure as it may, from time to time, deem necessary.

b. Establish any rules of procedure it finds necessary from time to time.

c. Conduct, through its members and its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, the supervision and inspection provided for in Sub-paragraphs 13c and 13d of this Armistice Agreement at the ports of entry enumerated in Paragraph 43 hereof, and the special observations and inspections provided for in Paragraph 28 hereof at those places where violations of this Armistice Agreement have been reported to have occurred. The inspection of combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition by the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams shall be such as to enable them to properly insure that reinforcing combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition are not being introduced into Korea; but this shall not be construed as authorizing inspections or examinations of any secret designs or characteristics of any combat aircraft, armored vehicle, weapon, or ammunition.

c. Conduct, through its members and its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, the supervision and inspection required in Sub-paragraphs 13c and 13d of this Armistice Agreement at the entry points listed in Paragraph 43 of this document, as well as the special observations and inspections mentioned in Paragraph 28 at locations where violations of this Armistice Agreement have been reported. The inspection of combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, and ammunition by the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams will be conducted to ensure that no additional combat aircraft, armored vehicles, weapons, or ammunition are being brought into Korea; however, this does not allow for the inspection or examination of any secret designs or features of any combat aircraft, armored vehicle, weapon, or ammunition.

d. Direct and supervise the operations of the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams.

d. Direct and oversee the activities of the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams.

e. Station five (5) Neutral Nations Inspection Teams at the ports of entry enumerated in Paragraph 43 hereof located in the territory under the military control of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command; and five (5) Neutral Nations Inspection Teams at the ports of entry enumerated in Paragraph 43 hereof located in the territory under the military control of the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers; and establish initially ten (10) mobile neutral Nations Inspection Teams in reserve, stationed in the general vicinity of the headquarters of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, which number may be reduced by agreement of the senior members of both sides on the Military Armistice Commission. Not more than half of the mobile Neutral Nations Inspection Teams shall be dispatched at any one time in accordance with requests of the senior member of either side on the Military Armistice Commission.

e. Position five (5) Neutral Nations Inspection Teams at the entry ports listed in Paragraph 43 hereof, located in the area under the military control of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command; and five (5) Neutral Nations Inspection Teams at the entry ports listed in Paragraph 43 hereof, located in the area under the military control of the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers; and initially set up ten (10) mobile Neutral Nations Inspection Teams in reserve, based near the headquarters of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, which number can be decreased by agreement of the senior members from both sides on the Military Armistice Commission. No more than half of the mobile Neutral Nations Inspection Teams should be sent out at any given time, according to the requests of the senior member from either side on the Military Armistice Commission.

f. Subject to the provisions of the preceding Sub-paragraph, conduct without delay investigations of reported violations of this Armistice Agreement, including such investigations of reported violations of this Armistice Agreement as may be requested by the Military Armistice Commission or by the senior member of either-side on the Commission.

f. In accordance with the rules mentioned above, promptly investigate reported violations of this Armistice Agreement, including any investigations of reported violations that the Military Armistice Commission or the senior member from either side on the Commission may request.

g. Provide credentials and distinctive insignia for its staff and its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, and a distinctive marking for all vehicles, aircraft, and vessels, used in the performance of its mission.

g. Provide identification and unique symbols for its staff and its Neutral Nations Inspection Teams, along with a distinctive marking for all vehicles, aircraft, and vessels used in carrying out its mission.

597

597

43. Neutral Nations Inspection Teams shall be stationed at the following ports of entry:

43. Neutral Nations Inspection Teams will be located at the following ports of entry:

Territory under the military control of the United Nations command

Territory under the military control of the United Nations command

INCHON (37°28´N, 126°38´E)
TAEGU (35°52´N, 128°36´E)
PUSAN (35°06´N, 129°02´E)
KANGNUNG (37°45´N, 128°54´E)
KUNSAN (35°59´N, 126°43´E)

Territory under the military control of the Korean People’s Army and the Chinese People’s Volunteers

Territory under the military control of the Korean People’s Army and the Chinese People’s Volunteers

SINUIJU (40°´N, 124°24´E)
CHONGJIN (41°46´N, 129°49´E)
HUNGNAM (39°50´N, 127°37´E)
MANPO (41°09´N, 126°18´E)
SINANJU (39°36´N, 125°36´E)

These Neutral Nations Inspection Teams shall be accorded full convenience of movement within the areas and over the routes of communication set forth on the attached map.

These Neutral Nations Inspection Teams will be given complete freedom of movement within the areas and along the routes of communication outlined on the attached map.

3. General

44. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission shall meet daily. Recesses of not to exceed seven (7) days may be agreed upon by the members of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission; provided, that such recesses may be terminated on twenty-four (24) hour notice by any member.

44. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission will meet every day. Breaks of up to seven (7) days can be agreed upon by the members of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission; however, these breaks can be ended with twenty-four (24) hours' notice by any member.

45. Copies of the record of the proceedings of all meetings of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission shall be forwarded to the Military Armistice Commission as soon as possible after each meeting. Records shall be kept in English, Korean, and Chinese.

45. Copies of the meeting minutes from all sessions of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission will be sent to the Military Armistice Commission as soon as possible after each meeting. Records will be maintained in English, Korean, and Chinese.

46. The Neutral Nations Inspection Teams shall make periodic reports concerning the results of their supervision, observations, inspections, and investigations to the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission as required by the Commission and, in addition, shall make such special reports as may be deemed necessary by them, or may be required by the Commission. Reports shall be submitted by a Team as a whole, but may also be submitted by one or more individual members thereof; provided, that the reports submitted by one or more individual members thereof shall be considered as informational only.

46. The Neutral Nations Inspection Teams will provide regular reports on the results of their supervision, observations, inspections, and investigations to the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission as required by the Commission. Additionally, they will submit special reports as they see fit or as needed by the Commission. Reports will be submitted by the entire Team, but individual members may also submit their own reports, which will be considered for informational purposes only.

47. Copies of the reports made by the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams shall be forwarded to the Military Armistice Commission by the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission without delay and in the language in which received. They shall not be delayed by the process of translation or evaluation. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission shall evaluate such reports at the earliest practicable time and shall forward their findings to the Military Armistice Commission as a matter of priority. The Military Armistice Commission shall not take final action with regard to any such report until the evaluation thereof has been received from the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission. Members of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and of its Teams shall be subject to appearance before the Military Armistice Commission, at the request of the senior member of either side on the Military Armistice Commission, for clarification of any report submitted.

47. Copies of the reports made by the Neutral Nations Inspection Teams will be sent to the Military Armistice Commission by the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission without delay and in the original language received. They won't be held up by the process of translation or evaluation. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission will review these reports as soon as possible and will send their findings to the Military Armistice Commission as a top priority. The Military Armistice Commission won’t take final action on any report until they have received the evaluation from the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission. Members of the Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission and its Teams may be required to appear before the Military Armistice Commission, at the request of the senior member from either side on the Military Armistice Commission, for clarification on any submitted report.

48. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission shall maintain duplicate files of the reports and records of proceedings required by this Armistice598 Agreement. The Commission is authorized to maintain duplicate files of such other reports, records, etc., as may be necessary in the conduct of its business. Upon eventual dissolution of the Commission, one set of the above files shall be turned over to each side.

48. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission will keep duplicate files of the reports and records of proceedings required by this Armistice598 Agreement. The Commission is allowed to maintain duplicate files of any other reports, records, etc., that may be necessary for its operations. When the Commission is eventually dissolved, one set of the aforementioned files will be given to each side.

49. The Neutral Supervisory Commission may make recommendations to the Military Armistice Commission with respect to amendments or additions to this Armistice Agreement. Such recommended changes should generally be those designed to insure a more effective armistice.

49. The Neutral Supervisory Commission can suggest changes to the Military Armistice Commission regarding updates or additions to this Armistice Agreement. These suggested changes should typically aim to create a more effective armistice.

50. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, or any member thereof, shall be authorized to communicate with any member of the Military Armistice Commission.

50. The Neutral Nations Supervisory Commission, or any of its members, is authorized to communicate with any member of the Military Armistice Commission.

Article III
Arrangements for Prisoners of War

51. The release and repatriation of all prisoners of war held in the custody of each side at the time this Armistice Agreement becomes effective shall be effected in conformity with the following provisions agreed upon by both sides prior to the signing of this Armistice Agreement.

51. The release and return of all prisoners of war held by each side when this Armistice Agreement goes into effect will be carried out according to the following terms agreed upon by both sides before the signing of this Armistice Agreement.

a. Within sixty (60) days after this Armistice Agreement becomes effective, each side shall, without offering any hindrance, directly repatriate and hand over in groups all those prisoners of war in its custody who insist on repatriation to the side to which they belonged at the time of capture. Repatriation shall be accomplished in accordance with the related provisions of this Article. In order to expedite the repatriation process of such personnel, each side shall, prior to the signing of the Armistice Agreement, exchange the total numbers, by nationalities, of personnel to be directly repatriated. Each group of prisoners of war delivered to the other side shall be accompanied by rosters, prepared by nationality, to include name, rank (if any) and internment or military serial number.

a. Within sixty (60) days after this Armistice Agreement takes effect, both sides shall, without any obstacles, directly return and hand over in groups all prisoners of war in their custody who want to go home to the side they belonged to at the time of capture. Repatriation will be carried out according to the relevant provisions of this Article. To speed up the repatriation process for these individuals, both sides shall, before signing the Armistice Agreement, exchange the total numbers, by nationality, of the personnel to be directly repatriated. Each group of prisoners of war handed over to the other side shall be accompanied by rosters, organized by nationality, including name, rank (if applicable), and internment or military serial number.

b. Each side shall release all those remaining prisoners of war, who are not directly repatriated, from its military control and from its custody and hand them over to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission for disposition in accordance with the provisions in the Annex hereto: “Terms of Reference for Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.”

b. Each side will release all remaining prisoners of war who are not being directly repatriated from its military control and custody, and hand them over to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission for handling according to the provisions in the Annex attached: “Terms of Reference for Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.”

c. So that there may be no misunderstanding owing to the equal use of three languages, the act of delivery of a prisoner of war by one side to the other side shall, for the purposes of this Armistice Agreement, be called “repatriation” in English, “song hwan” in Korean, and “ch’ien fan” in Chinese, notwithstanding the nationality or place of residence of such prisoner of war.

c. To avoid any confusion arising from the use of three languages, the process of handing over a prisoner of war from one side to the other will be referred to as “repatriation” in English, “song hwan” in Korean, and “ch’ien fan” in Chinese, regardless of the nationality or whereabouts of the prisoner of war.

52. Each side insures that it will not employ in acts of war in the Korean conflict any prisoner of war released and repatriated incident to the coming into effect of this Armistice Agreement.

52. Each side guarantees that it will not use any prisoner of war released and returned as a result of this Armistice Agreement in acts of war during the Korean conflict.

53. All the sick and injured prisoners of war who insist upon repatriation shall be repatriated with priority. Insofar as possible, there shall be captured medical personnel repatriated concurrently with the sick and injured prisoners of war, so as to provide medical care and attendance en route.

53. All sick and injured prisoners of war who request repatriation shall be prioritized for return. Whenever possible, captured medical personnel will also be repatriated at the same time as the sick and injured prisoners of war to provide medical care and support during the journey.

599

599

54. The repatriation of all the prisoners of war required by Sub-paragraph 51a hereof shall be completed within a time limit of sixty (60) days after this Armistice Agreement becomes effective. Within this time limit each side undertakes to complete the repatriation of the above-mentioned prisoners of war in its custody at the earliest practicable time.

54. The return of all prisoners of war required by Sub-paragraph 51a here shall be finished within sixty (60) days after this Armistice Agreement takes effect. During this time frame, each side agrees to complete the return of the mentioned prisoners of war in their custody as soon as possible.

55. PANMUNJOM is designated as the place where prisoners of war will be delivered and received by both sides. Additional place(s) of delivery and reception of prisoners of war in the Demilitarized Zone may be designated, if necessary, by the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War.

55. PANMUNJOM is the location where both sides will hand over and receive prisoners of war. If needed, the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War may also designate additional locations in the Demilitarized Zone for the delivery and reception of prisoners.

56. a. A Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War is hereby established. It shall be composed of six (6) officers of field grade, three (3) of whom shall be appointed by the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, and three (3) of whom shall be appointed jointly by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. This Committee shall, under the general supervision and direction of the Military Armistice Commission, be responsible for coordinating the specific plans of both sides for the repatriation of prisoners of war and for supervising the execution by both sides of all of the provisions of this Armistice Agreement relating to the repatriation of prisoners of war. It shall be the duty of this Committee to coordinate the timing of the arrival of prisoners of war at the place(s) of delivery and reception of prisoners of war from the prisoner of war camps of both sides; to make, when necessary, such special arrangements as may be required with regard to the transportation and welfare of sick and injured prisoners of war; to coordinate the work of the joint Red Cross teams, established in Paragraph 57 hereof, in assisting in the repatriation of prisoners of war; to supervise the implementation of the arrangements for the actual repatriation or prisoners of war stipulated in Paragraphs 53 and 54 hereof; to select, when necessary, additional place(s) of delivery and reception of prisoners of war, and to carry out such other related functions as are required for the repatriation of prisoners of war.

56. a. A Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War is hereby established. It will consist of six (6) field-grade officers, three (3) of whom will be appointed by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command, and three (3) of whom will be appointed jointly by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. This Committee will, under the general supervision and direction of the Military Armistice Commission, be responsible for coordinating the specific plans of both sides for the repatriation of prisoners of war and for overseeing the implementation by both sides of all provisions of this Armistice Agreement related to the repatriation of prisoners of war. The Committee will coordinate the timing of the arrival of prisoners of war at the delivery and reception points from the prisoner of war camps of both sides; make any special arrangements needed regarding the transportation and welfare of sick and injured prisoners of war; coordinate the efforts of the joint Red Cross teams established in Paragraph 57 hereof to assist in the repatriation of prisoners of war; oversee the execution of the arrangements for the actual repatriation of prisoners of war specified in Paragraphs 53 and 54 hereof; select additional delivery and reception points for prisoners of war when necessary; and carry out any other related functions required for the repatriation of prisoners of war.

b. When unable to reach agreement on any matter relating to its responsibilities, the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War shall immediately refer such matter to the Military Armistice Commission for decision. The Commission for Repatriation of Prisoners of War shall maintain its headquarters in proximity to the headquarters of the Military Armistice Commission.

b. If the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War can't come to an agreement on any issue related to its responsibilities, it will immediately refer the matter to the Military Armistice Commission for a decision. The Commission for Repatriation of Prisoners of War will keep its headquarters close to the headquarters of the Military Armistice Commission.

c. The Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War shall be dissolved by the Military Armistice Commission upon completion of the program of repatriation of prisoners of war.

c. The Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War will be dissolved by the Military Armistice Commission once the program for repatriating prisoners of war is completed.

57. a. Immediately after this Armistice Agreement becomes effective, joint Red Cross teams composed of representatives of the national Red Cross Societies of the countries contributing forces to the United Nations Command on the one hand, and representatives of the Red Cross Society of the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea and representatives of the Red Cross Society of the People’s Republic of China on the other hand, shall be established. The joint Red Cross teams shall assist in the execution by both sides of those provisions of this Armistice Agreement relating to the repatriation of all the prisoners of war specified in Sub-paragraph 51a hereof, who insist upon repatriation, by the performance of such humanitarian services as are necessary600 and desirable for the welfare of the prisoners of war. To accomplish this task, the joint Red Cross teams shall provide assistance in the delivering and receiving of prisoners of war by both sides at the place(s) of delivery and reception of prisoners of war, and shall visit the prisoner of war camps of both sides to comfort the prisoners of war and to bring in and distribute gift articles for the comfort and welfare of the prisoners of war. The joint Red Cross teams may provide services to prisoners of war while en route from prisoner of war camps to the place(s) of delivery and reception of prisoners of war.

57. a. As soon as this Armistice Agreement goes into effect, joint Red Cross teams made up of representatives from the national Red Cross Societies of the countries contributing forces to the United Nations Command on one side, and representatives from the Red Cross Society of the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea and the Red Cross Society of the People’s Republic of China on the other side, shall be set up. The joint Red Cross teams will help both sides carry out the parts of this Armistice Agreement related to the repatriation of all the prisoners of war specified in Sub-paragraph 51a who wish to be repatriated, by providing the humanitarian services needed for the well-being of the prisoners of war. To achieve this, the joint Red Cross teams will assist with the transfer of prisoners of war at the locations where they are delivered and received, and will visit the prisoner of war camps on both sides to comfort the prisoners and bring in and distribute gifts for their comfort and welfare. The joint Red Cross teams may also provide assistance to prisoners of war while they are being transported from the camps to the delivery and reception locations.

b. The Joint Red Cross teams shall be organized as set forth below:

b. The Joint Red Cross teams will be organized as outlined below:

(1) One team shall be composed of twenty (20) members, namely, ten (10) representatives from the national Red Cross Societies of each side, to assist in the delivering and receiving of prisoners of war by both sides at the place(s) of delivery and reception of prisoners of war. The chairmanship of this team shall alternate daily between representatives from the Red Cross Societies of the two sides. The work and services of this team shall be coordinated by the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War.

(1) One team will consist of twenty (20) members, specifically, ten (10) representatives from the national Red Cross Societies of each side, to help with the delivery and reception of prisoners of war by both sides at the locations where prisoners of war are exchanged. The leadership of this team will switch daily between representatives from the Red Cross Societies of the two sides. The activities and services of this team will be overseen by the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War.

(2) One team shall be composed of sixty (60) members, namely, thirty (30) representatives from the national Red Cross Societies of each side, to visit the prisoners of war camps under the administration of the Korean People’s Army and the Chinese People’s Volunteers. This team may provide services to prisoners of war while en route from the prisoner of war camps to the place(s) of delivery and reception of prisoners of war. A representative of the Red Cross Society of the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea or of the Red Cross Society of the People’s Republic of China shall serve as chairman of this team.

(2) One team will consist of sixty (60) members, specifically, thirty (30) representatives from the national Red Cross Societies of each side, to visit the prisoner of war camps managed by the Korean People’s Army and the Chinese People’s Volunteers. This team may offer services to prisoners of war while traveling from the camps to the location(s) for the handover and reception of prisoners of war. A representative from the Red Cross Society of the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea or from the Red Cross Society of the People’s Republic of China will act as the chairperson of this team.

(3) One team shall be composed of sixty (60) members, namely, thirty (30) representatives from the national Red Cross Societies of each side, to visit the prisoner of war camps under the administration of the United Nations Command. This team may provide services to prisoners of war while en route from the prisoner of war camps to the place(s) of delivery and reception of prisoners of war. A representative of a Red Cross Society of a nation contributing forces to the United Nations Command shall serve as chairman of this team.

(3) One team will consist of sixty (60) members, specifically, thirty (30) representatives from the national Red Cross Societies of each side, to visit the prisoner of war camps managed by the United Nations Command. This team may offer services to prisoners of war while traveling from the camps to the locations for delivering and receiving prisoners of war. A representative from a Red Cross Society of a nation contributing forces to the United Nations Command will act as the chairman of this team.

(4) In order to facilitate the functioning of each joint Red Cross team, sub-teams composed of not less than two (2) members from the team, with an equal number of representatives from each side, may be formed as circumstances require.

(4) To help each joint Red Cross team work effectively, sub-teams made up of at least two (2) members from the team, with an equal number of representatives from each side, can be formed as needed.

(5) Additional personnel such as drivers, clerks, and interpreters, and such equipment as may be required by the joint Red Cross teams to perform their missions, shall be furnished by the Commander of each side to the team operating in the territory under his military control.

(5) Extra staff like drivers, clerks, and interpreters, as well as any equipment needed by the joint Red Cross teams to carry out their missions, will be provided by the Commander of each side to the team working in the area under his military control.

(6) Whenever jointly agreed upon by the representatives of both sides or any joint Red Cross team, the size of such team may be increased or decreased, subject to confirmation by the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War.

(6) Whenever both sides' representatives or any joint Red Cross team agree, the size of that team can be increased or decreased, pending confirmation by the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War.

c. The Commander of each side shall cooperate fully with the joint Red601 Cross teams in the performance of their functions, and undertakes to insure the security of the personnel of the joint Red Cross team in the area under his military control. The Commander of each side shall provide such logistic, administrative, and communications facilities as may be required by the team operating in the territory under his military control.

c. The Commander of each side shall fully cooperate with the joint Red Cross teams in carrying out their duties and agrees to ensure the safety of the personnel from the joint Red Cross team in the area under his military control. The Commander of each side will provide any logistical, administrative, and communication support needed by the team working in the territory under his military control.

d. The joint Red Cross teams shall be dissolved upon completion of the program of repatriation of all the prisoners of war specified in Sub-paragraph 51a hereof, who insist upon repatriation.

d. The joint Red Cross teams will be disbanded once the program for repatriating all the prisoners of war mentioned in Sub-paragraph 51a here has been completed, specifically those who request repatriation.

58. a. The Commander of each side shall furnish to the Commander of the other side as soon as practicable, but not later than ten (10) days after this Armistice Agreement becomes effective, the following information concerning prisoners of war:

58. a. The Commander of each side must provide the Commander of the other side as soon as possible, but no later than ten (10) days after this Armistice Agreement goes into effect, the following information regarding prisoners of war:

(1) Complete data pertaining to the prisoners of war who escaped since the effective date of the data last exchanged.

(1) Complete information about the prisoners of war who escaped since the last data exchange date.

(2) Insofar as practicable, information regarding name, nationality, rank, and other identification data, date and cause of death, and place of burial, of those prisoners of war who died while in his custody.

(2) As much as possible, information about the name, nationality, rank, and other identification details, the date and cause of death, and the burial location of those prisoners of war who died while in his custody.

b. If any prisoners of war escape or die after the effective date of the supplementary information specified above, the detaining side shall furnish to the other side, through the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War, the data pertaining thereto in accordance with the provisions of Sub-paragraph 58a hereof. Such data shall be furnished at ten-day intervals until the completion of the program of delivery and reception of prisoners of war.

b. If any prisoners of war escape or die after the effective date of the supplementary information mentioned above, the detaining side must provide the other side, through the Committee for Repatriation of Prisoners of War, with the relevant information as stated in Sub-paragraph 58a here. This information will be provided every ten days until the program for the delivery and reception of prisoners of war is completed.

c. Any escaped prisoner of war who returns to the custody of the detaining side after the completion of the program of delivery and reception of prisoners of war shall be delivered to the Military Armistice Commission for disposition.

c. Any escaped prisoner of war who comes back to the custody of the detaining side after the completion of the program for delivering and receiving prisoners of war will be handed over to the Military Armistice Commission for further action.

59. a. All civilians who, at the time this Armistice Agreement becomes effective, are in territory under the military control of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, and who, on 24 June 1950, resided north of the Military Demarcation Line established in this Armistice Agreement shall, if they desire to return home, be permitted and assisted by the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, to return to the area north of the Military Demarcation Line; and all civilians, who, at the time this Armistice Agreement becomes effective, are in territory under the military control of the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, and who, on 24 June 1950, resided south of the Military Demarcation Line established in this Armistice Agreement shall, if they desire to return home, be permitted and assisted by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers to return to the area south of the Military Demarcation Line. The Commander of each side shall be responsible for publicizing widely throughout territory under his military control the contents of the provisions of this Sub-paragraph, and for calling upon the appropriate civil authorities to give necessary guidance and assistance to all such civilians who desire to return home.

59. a. All civilians who, when this Armistice Agreement takes effect, are in areas controlled by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command, and who lived north of the Military Demarcation Line on June 24, 1950, will be allowed and assisted by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command to return to the area north of the Military Demarcation Line if they wish to go home. Similarly, all civilians who, at the time this Armistice Agreement takes effect, are in areas controlled by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, and who lived south of the Military Demarcation Line on June 24, 1950, will also be allowed and assisted by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers to return to the area south of the Military Demarcation Line if they want to go home. The Commander on each side will be responsible for widely disseminating the contents of this Sub-paragraph throughout the territory under their control and for urging the appropriate civil authorities to provide necessary guidance and assistance to all civilians who want to return home.

b. All civilians of foreign nationality who, at the time this Armistice602 Agreement becomes effective, are in territory under the military control of the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers shall, if they desire to proceed to territory under the military control of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, be permitted and assisted to do so; all civilians of foreign nationality who, at the time this Armistice Agreement becomes effective, are in territory under the military control of the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, shall, if they desire to proceed to territory under the military control of the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers, be permitted and assisted to do so. The Commander of each side shall be responsible for publicizing widely throughout the territory under his military control the contents of the provisions of this Sub-paragraph, and for calling upon the appropriate civil authorities to give necessary guidance and assistance to all such civilians of foreign nationality who desire to proceed to territory under the military control of the Commander of the other side.

b. All foreign civilians who, at the time this Armistice Agreement takes effect, are in areas controlled by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers will be allowed and helped to move to areas under the control of the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command if they wish to do so. Similarly, all foreign civilians who, at the time this Armistice Agreement takes effect, are in areas controlled by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command will be allowed and helped to move to areas under the control of the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers if they wish. The Commander on each side is responsible for widely sharing the details of this Sub-paragraph throughout the areas under his control and for urging the appropriate civil authorities to provide the necessary guidance and assistance to any foreign civilians who wish to move to areas under the military control of the other side.

c. Measures to assist in the return of civilians provided for in Sub-paragraph 59a hereof and the movement of civilians provided for in Sub-paragraph 59b hereof shall be commenced by both sides as soon as possible after this Armistice Agreement becomes effective.

c. Measures to help with the return of civilians outlined in Sub-paragraph 59a and the movement of civilians mentioned in Sub-paragraph 59b will be initiated by both sides as soon as possible after this Armistice Agreement takes effect.

d. (1) A Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians is hereby established. It shall be composed of four (4) officers of field grade, two (2) of whom shall be appointed by the Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command, and two (2) of whom shall be appointed jointly by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. This Committee shall, under the general supervision and direction of the Military Armistice Commission, be responsible for coordinating the specific plans of both sides for assistance to the return of the above-mentioned civilians, and for supervising the execution of both sides of all of the provisions of this Armistice Agreement relating to the return of the above-mentioned civilians. It shall be the duty of this Committee to make necessary arrangements, including those of transportation, for expediting and coordinating the movement of the above-mentioned civilians; to select the crossing point(s) through which the above-mentioned civilians will cross the Military Demarcation Line; to arrange for security at the crossing points; and to carry out such other functions as are required to accomplish the return of the above-mentioned civilians.

d. (1) A Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians is established. It will consist of four (4) field-grade officers, with two (2) appointed by the Commander-in-Chief of the United Nations Command and two (2) appointed jointly by the Supreme Commander of the Korean People’s Army and the Commander of the Chinese People’s Volunteers. This Committee will operate under the general supervision and direction of the Military Armistice Commission and will be responsible for coordinating the specific plans from both sides to assist in the return of the mentioned civilians, as well as overseeing the implementation of all provisions of this Armistice Agreement related to their return. The Committee's duties include making necessary arrangements, including transportation, to facilitate and coordinate the movement of these civilians; selecting the crossing point(s) for them to cross the Military Demarcation Line; arranging for security at the crossing points; and performing any other functions needed to ensure the return of these civilians.

(2) When unable to reach agreement on any matter relating to its responsibilities, the Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians shall immediately refer such matter to the Military Armistice Commission for decision. The Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians shall maintain its headquarters in proximity to the headquarters of the Military Armistice Commission.

(2) If the Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians can't agree on any issue related to its responsibilities, it will immediately refer the matter to the Military Armistice Commission for a decision. The Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians will keep its headquarters close to the headquarters of the Military Armistice Commission.

(3) The Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians shall be dissolved by the Military Armistice Commission upon fulfillment of its mission.

(3) The Committee for Assisting the Return of Displaced Civilians will be dissolved by the Military Armistice Commission once it has completed its mission.

603

603

Article IV
Recommendation to the Relevant Governments on Both Sides

60. In order to insure the peaceful settlement of the Korean question, the military Commanders of both sides hereby recommend to the governments of the countries concerned on both sides that, within three (3) months after the Armistice Agreement is signed and becomes effective, a political conference of a higher level of both sides be held by representatives appointed respectively to settle through negotiation the questions of the withdrawal of all foreign forces from Korea, the peaceful settlement of the Korean question, etc.

60. To ensure a peaceful resolution to the Korean issue, the military commanders on both sides recommend that the governments involved hold a high-level political conference. This should take place within three (3) months after the Armistice Agreement is signed and takes effect, with representatives appointed by each side to negotiate the withdrawal of all foreign forces from Korea and the peaceful resolution of the Korean question, among other matters.

Article V
Miscellaneous

61. Amendments and additions to this Armistice Agreement must be mutually agreed to by the Commanders of the opposing sides.

61. Changes and additions to this Armistice Agreement must be agreed upon by the Commanders of both sides.

62. The Articles and Paragraphs of this Armistice Agreement shall remain in effect until expressly superseded either by mutually acceptable amendments and additions or by provision in an appropriate agreement for a peaceful settlement at a political level between both sides.

62. The articles and paragraphs of this Armistice Agreement will stay in effect until they are explicitly replaced by mutually agreed-upon amendments and additions or by terms in a suitable agreement for a peaceful resolution at a political level between both parties.

63. All of the provisions of this Armistice Agreement, other than Paragraph 12, shall become effective at 2200 hours on 27 July 1953.

63. All the terms of this Armistice Agreement, except for Paragraph 12, will take effect at 10:00 PM on July 27, 1953.

Done at Panmunjom, Korea, at 1000 hours on the 27th day of July 1953, in English, Korean, and Chinese, all texts being equally authentic.

Done at Panmunjom, Korea, at 10:00 AM on July 27, 1953, in English, Korean, and Chinese, all texts being equally authentic.

Kim Il Sung
Marshall, Democratic People’s Republic of Korea
Supreme Commander, Korean People’s Army

Peng Teh-Huai
Commander, Chinese People’s Volunteers

Mark W. Clark
General, United States Army
Commander-in-Chief United Nations Command

Kim Il Sung
Marshall, Democratic People’s Republic of Korea
Supreme Commander, Korean People’s Army

Peng Teh-Huai
Commander, Chinese People’s Volunteers

Mark W. Clark
General, United States Army
Commander-in-Chief United Nations Command

PRESENT

PRESENT

Nam Il
General, Korean People’s Army
Senior Delegate,
Delegation of the Korean People’s Army and the Chinese People’s Volunteers

William K. Harrison, Jr.
Lieutenant General,
United States Army
Senior Delegate,
United Nations Command Delegation

Nam Il
General, Korean People’s Army
Senior Delegate,
Delegation of the Korean People’s Army and the Chinese People’s Volunteers

William K. Harrison Jr.
Lieutenant General,
United States Army
Senior Delegate,
United Nations Command Delegation

ANNEX
Terms of Reference
for
Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission

(See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__)

1. In order to ensure that all prisoners of war have the opportunity to exercise their right to be repatriated following an armistice, Sweden, Switzerland,604 Poland, Czechoslovakia and India shall each be requested by both sides to appoint a member to a Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission which shall be established to take custody in Korea of those prisoners of war who, while in the custody of the detaining powers, have not exercised their right to be repatriated. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall establish its headquarters within the Demilitarized Zone in the vicinity of Panmunjom, and shall station subordinate bodies of the same composition as the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission at those locations at which the Repatriation Commission assumes custody of prisoners of war. Representatives of both sides shall be permitted to observe the operations of the Repatriation Commission and its subordinate bodies to include explanations and interviews.

1. To make sure that all prisoners of war can exercise their right to go home after a ceasefire, Sweden, Switzerland,604 Poland, Czechoslovakia, and India will each be asked by both sides to appoint a member to a Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. This commission will be set up to take care of those prisoners of war in Korea who haven't claimed their right to return while under the control of the detaining powers. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission will set up its headquarters in the Demilitarized Zone near Panmunjom and will establish local offices with the same members as the commission at places where they take custody of prisoners. Representatives from both sides will be allowed to observe the commission's activities, including explanations and interviews.

2. Sufficient armed forces and any other operating personnel required to assist the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission in carrying out its functions and responsibilities shall be provided exclusively by India, whose representative shall be the umpire in accordance with the provisions of Article 132 of the Geneva Convention and shall also be chairman and executive agent of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. Representatives from each of the other four powers shall be allowed staff assistants in equal number not to exceed fifty (50) each. When any of the representatives of the neutral nations is absent for some reason, that representative shall designate an alternate representative of his own nationality to exercise his functions and authority. The arms of all personnel provided for in this Paragraph shall be limited to military police type small arms.

2. India will provide enough armed forces and any other necessary personnel to help the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission carry out its duties and responsibilities. India's representative will serve as the umpire according to Article 132 of the Geneva Convention and will also act as the chairman and executive agent of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. Each of the other four powers will be allowed to have an equal number of staff assistants, not exceeding fifty (50) each. If any representative of the neutral nations is absent for any reason, that representative must appoint an alternate from their own nationality to perform their duties and exercise their authority. The weapons for all personnel mentioned in this paragraph will be limited to military police-style small arms.

3. No force or threat of force shall be used against the prisoners of war specified in Paragraph 1 above to prevent or effect their repatriation, and no violence to their persons or affront to their dignity or self-respect shall be permitted in any manner for any purpose whatsoever (but see Paragraph 7 below). This duty is enjoined on and entrusted to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. This Commission shall ensure that prisoners of war shall at all times be treated humanely in accordance with the specific provisions of the Geneva Convention, and with the general spirit of that Convention.

3. No force or threat of force shall be used against the prisoners of war mentioned in Paragraph 1 above to stop or force their return, and no violence or disrespect toward their dignity or self-respect shall be allowed for any reason whatsoever (but see Paragraph 7 below). This responsibility is assigned to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. This Commission shall ensure that prisoners of war are treated humanely at all times in accordance with the specific provisions of the Geneva Convention and the overall spirit of that Convention.

II
POW Custody

4. All prisoners of war who have not exercised their right of repatriation following the effective date of the Armistice Agreement shall be released from the military control and from the custody of the detaining side as soon as practicable, and, in all cases, within sixty (60) days subsequent to the effective date of the Armistice Agreement to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission at locations in Korea to be designated by the detaining side.

4. All prisoners of war who have not chosen to return home after the Armistice Agreement takes effect will be released from military control and from the custody of the detaining side as soon as possible, and in all cases, within sixty (60) days after the Armistice Agreement takes effect to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission at locations in Korea designated by the detaining side.

5. At the time the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission assumes control of the prisoner of war installations, the military forces of the detaining side shall be withdrawn therefrom, so that the locations specified in the preceding Paragraph shall be taken over completely by the armed forces of India.

5. When the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission takes over control of the prisoner of war facilities, the military forces of the detaining side will be withdrawn from those locations, so that the sites mentioned in the previous Paragraph will be fully taken over by the armed forces of India.

605

605

6. Notwithstanding the provisions of Paragraph 5 above, the detaining side shall have the responsibility for maintaining and ensuring security and order in the areas around the locations where the prisoners of war are in custody and for preventing and restraining any armed forces (including irregular armed forces) in the area under its control from any acts of disturbance and intrusion against the locations where the prisoners of war are in custody.

6. Despite what’s mentioned in Paragraph 5 above, the side holding the prisoners is responsible for maintaining security and order in the areas surrounding where the prisoners of war are held. They must also prevent and control any armed forces (including irregular forces) in their area from causing any disturbances or intruding on the locations where the prisoners of war are being held.

7. Notwithstanding the provisions of Paragraph 3 above, nothing in this agreement shall be construed as derogating from the authority of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission to exercise its legitimate functions and responsibilities for the control of the prisoners of war under its temporary jurisdiction.

7. Regardless of what is mentioned in Paragraph 3 above, nothing in this agreement should be interpreted as limiting the authority of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission to perform its proper functions and responsibilities for overseeing the prisoners of war under its temporary control.

III
Explanation

8. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, after having received and taken into custody all those prisoners of war who have not exercised their right to be repatriated, shall immediately make arrangements so that within ninety (90) days after the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission takes over the custody, the nations to which the prisoners of war belong shall have freedom and facilities to send representatives to locations where such prisoners of war are in custody to explain to all the prisoners of war depending upon these nations their rights and to inform them of any matters relating to their return to their homelands, particularly of their full freedom to return home to lead a peaceful life, under the following provisions:

8. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, after receiving and taking custody of all prisoners of war who have not chosen to be repatriated, will immediately make arrangements so that within ninety (90) days after taking custody, the nations to which the prisoners of war belong will have the freedom and resources to send representatives to the locations where these prisoners are held. These representatives will explain to all the prisoners of war from these nations their rights and inform them of any details about their return to their home countries, especially their complete freedom to go home and live a peaceful life, under the following provisions:

a. The number of such explaining representatives shall not exceed seven (7) per thousand prisoners of war held in custody by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission; and the minimum authorized shall not be less than a total of five (5);

a. The number of explaining representatives can’t be more than seven (7) for every thousand prisoners of war held by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, and the minimum allowed is five (5);

b. The hours during which the explaining representatives shall have access to the prisoners shall be as determined by the Neutral Repatriation Commission, and generally in accord with Article 53 of the Geneva Convention Relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War;

b. The times when the explaining representatives will have access to the prisoners will be set by the Neutral Repatriation Commission, generally following Article 53 of the Geneva Convention on the Treatment of Prisoners of War;

c. All explanations and interviews shall be conducted in the presence of a representative of each member nation of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and a representative from the detaining side;

c. All explanations and interviews will be held in the presence of a representative from each member nation of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and a representative from the detaining side;

d. Additional provisions governing the explanation work shall be prescribed by the Neutral Repatriation Commission, and will be designed to employ the principles enumerated in Paragraph 3 above and in this Paragraph;

d. The Neutral Repatriation Commission will outline further rules for the explanation work, which will be based on the principles mentioned in Paragraph 3 above and in this Paragraph;

e. The explaining representatives, while engaging in their work, shall be allowed to bring with them necessary facilities and personnel for wireless communications. The number of communications personnel shall be limited to one team per location at which explaining representatives are in residence, except in the event all prisoners of war are concentrated in one location, in which case, two (2) teams shall be permitted. Each team shall consist of not more than six (6) communications personnel.

e. The representatives explaining things, while doing their work, will be allowed to bring the necessary equipment and staff for wireless communication. The number of communication staff will be limited to one team per location where the explaining representatives are present, unless all prisoners of war are in one place, in which case, two (2) teams will be allowed. Each team will consist of no more than six (6) communication staff.

606

606

9. Prisoners of war in its custody shall have freedom and facilities to make representations and communications to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and to representatives and subordinate bodies of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and to inform them of their desires on any matter concerning the prisoners of war themselves, in accordance with arrangements made for the purpose by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.

9. Prisoners of war in its custody shall have the freedom and means to communicate with the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and its representatives and subordinate bodies, and to express their wishes on any matters concerning themselves, according to the arrangements set up by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.

IV
Treatment of POWs

10. Any prisoner of war who, while in the custody of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, decides to exercise the right of repatriation, shall make an application requesting repatriation to a body consisting of a representative of each member nation of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. Once such an application is made, it shall be considered immediately by majority vote the validity of such application. Once such an application is made to and validated by the Commission or one of its subordinate bodies, the prisoner of war concerned shall immediately be transferred to and accommodated in the tents set up for those who are ready to be repatriated. Thereafter, he shall, while still in the custody of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, be delivered forthwith to the prisoner of war exchange point at Panmunjom for repatriation under the procedure prescribed in the Armistice Agreement.

10. Any prisoner of war who, while under the care of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, chooses to exercise their right to return home must submit a request for repatriation to a group made up of a representative from each member nation of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. Once this request is submitted, it will be considered right away by a majority vote regarding its validity. After the request is approved by the Commission or one of its subcommittees, the prisoner of war involved will be immediately moved to and accommodated in the tents set up for those ready to be repatriated. Following that, while still in the care of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, they will be swiftly transported to the prisoner of war exchange point at Panmunjom for repatriation following the procedures outlined in the Armistice Agreement.

11. At the expiration of ninety (90) days after the transfer of custody of the prisoners of war to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, access of representatives to captured personnel as provided for in Paragraph 8 above, shall terminate, and the question of disposition of the prisoners of war who have not exercised their right to be repatriated shall be submitted to the Political Conference recommended to be convened in Paragraph 60, Draft Armistice Agreement, which shall endeavor to settle this question within thirty (30) days, during which period the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall continue to retain custody of those prisoners of war. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall declare the relief from the prisoners of war status to civilian status of any prisoners of war who have not exercised their right to be repatriated and for whom no other disposition has been agreed to by the Political Conference within one hundred and twenty (120) days after the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission has assumed their custody. Thereafter, according to the application of each individual, and those who choose to go to neutral nations shall be assisted by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and the Red Cross Society of India. This operation shall be completed within thirty (30) days, and upon its completion, the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall immediately cease its functions and declare its dissolution. After the dissolution of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, whenever and wherever any of those above-mentioned civilians who have been relieved from the prisoner of war status desire to return to their fatherlands, the authorities of the localities where they are shall be responsible for assisting them in returning to their fatherlands.

11. Ninety (90) days after the custody of the prisoners of war has been transferred to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, the access for representatives to the captured personnel, as stated in Paragraph 8 above, will end. The issue regarding the fate of the prisoners of war who have not chosen to be repatriated will be presented to the Political Conference suggested in Paragraph 60 of the Draft Armistice Agreement, which will try to resolve this matter within thirty (30) days. During this time, the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission will continue to hold custody of those prisoners of war. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission will change the status of any prisoners of war who have not opted for repatriation and for whom no other solution has been reached by the Political Conference within one hundred and twenty (120) days after taking custody. After that, based on each individual's application, those who decide to go to neutral nations will receive support from the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and the Red Cross Society of India. This process should be completed within thirty (30) days, and once finished, the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission will immediately stop its functions and announce its dissolution. After the dissolution of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, whenever any of the civilians who have had their prisoner of war status lifted wish to return to their home countries, the authorities in the areas where they are located will be responsible for helping them return home.

607

607

V
Red Cross Visit

12. Essential Red Cross service for prisoners of war in custody of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall be provided by India in accordance with regulations issued by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.

12. India will provide essential Red Cross services for prisoners of war in the custody of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, following the regulations set by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.

VI
Media Coverage

13. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall insure freedom of the press and other news media in observing the entire operation as enumerated herein, in accordance with procedures to be established by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.

13. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission will guarantee freedom of the press and other news media in observing the entire operation as outlined here, according to procedures to be set by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.

VII
Logistical Support for POWs

14. Each side shall provide logistical support for the prisoners of war in the area under its military control, delivering required support to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission at an agreed delivery point in the vicinity of each prisoner of war installation.

14. Each side will provide logistical support for the prisoners of war in the area under its military control, delivering necessary support to the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission at a mutually agreed delivery point near each prisoner of war facility.

15. The cost of repatriating prisoners to the exchange point at Panmunjom shall be borne by the detaining side and the cost from the exchange point by the side on which said prisoners depend in accordance with Article 118 of the Geneva Convention.

15. The expense of returning prisoners to the exchange point at Panmunjom will be covered by the detaining side, while the cost from the exchange point will be the responsibility of the side that is associated with the prisoners, as outlined in Article 118 of the Geneva Convention.

16. The Red Cross Society of India shall be responsible for providing such general service personnel in the prisoner of war installations as required by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.

16. The Red Cross Society of India will be responsible for providing the necessary support staff in the prisoner of war facilities as required by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission.

17. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall provide medical support for the prisoners of war as may be practicable. The detaining side shall provide medical support as practicable upon the request of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and specifically for those cases requiring extensive treatment or hospitalization. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall maintain custody of prisoners of war during such hospitalization. The detaining side shall facilitate such custody. Upon completion of treatment, prisoners of war shall be returned to a prisoners of war installation as specified in Paragraph 4 above.

17. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission will provide medical support for prisoners of war as much as possible. The detaining side will also provide medical support as feasible when requested by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, especially for cases that need extensive treatment or hospitalization. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission will keep custody of the prisoners of war during this hospitalization. The detaining side will assist with such custody. After treatment is completed, prisoners of war will be returned to a designated prisoners of war facility as mentioned in Paragraph 4 above.

18. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission is entitled to obtain from both sides such legitimate assistance as it may require in carrying out its duties and tasks, but both sides shall not under any name and in any form interfere or exert influence.

18. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission has the right to receive any necessary support from both parties to fulfill its responsibilities and tasks, but neither side shall interfere or exert influence in any form or under any name.

608

608

VIII
Logistical Support for the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission

19. Each side shall be responsible for providing logistical support for the personnel of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission stationed in the area under its military control, and both sides shall contribute on an equal basis to such support within the Demilitarized Zone. The precise arrangements shall be subject to determination between the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and the detaining side in each case.

19. Each side will be responsible for providing logistical support for the personnel of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission located in the area under its military control, and both sides will equally contribute to this support within the Demilitarized Zone. The specific arrangements will be determined between the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and the detaining side in each case.

20. Each of the detaining sides shall be responsible for protecting the explaining representatives from the other side while in transit over lines of communication within its area, as set forth in Paragraph 23 for the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, to a place of residence and while in residence in the vicinity of but not within each of the locations where the prisoners of war are in custody. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall be responsible for the security of such representatives within the actual limits of the locations where the prisoners of war are in custody.

20. Each detaining side is responsible for protecting the representatives from the other side while they're being transported along communication lines within its area, as outlined in Paragraph 23 for the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, to a place of residence and while they are staying nearby, but not inside, each location where the prisoners of war are held. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission is responsible for the security of these representatives within the actual boundaries of the locations where the prisoners of war are being held.

21. Each of the detaining sides shall provide transportation, housing, communication, and other agreed logistical support to the explaining representatives of the other side while they are in the area under its military control. Such services shall be provided on a reimbursable basis.

21. Each side that is detaining shall provide transportation, housing, communication, and any other agreed logistical support to the representatives of the other side while they are in the area under its military control. These services will be provided on a reimbursable basis.

IX
Publication

22. After the Armistice Agreement becomes effective, the terms of this agreement shall be made known to all prisoners of war who, while in the custody of the detaining side, have not exercised their right to be repatriated.

22. Once the Armistice Agreement goes into effect, the terms of this agreement will be communicated to all prisoners of war who, while in the custody of the detaining party, have not chosen to be repatriated.

X
Motion

23. The movement of the personnel of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and repatriated prisoners of war shall be over lines of communication, as determined by the command(s) of the opposing side and the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. A map showing these lines of communication shall be furnished the command of the opposing side and the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. Movement of such personnel, except within locations as designated in Paragraph 4 above, shall be under the control of, and escorted by, personnel of the side in whose area the travel is being undertaken; however, such movement shall not be subject to any obstruction and coercion.

23. The movement of the staff of the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission and repatriated prisoners of war will follow lines of communication set by the commands of both opposing sides and the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. A map indicating these lines will be provided to the commands of both opposing sides and the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. Movement of these personnel, except in areas specified in Paragraph 4 above, will be controlled and escorted by personnel from the side in whose territory the travel is taking place; however, this movement cannot be obstructed or coerced.

609

609

XI
Procedural Matters

24. The interpretation of this agreement shall rest with the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. The Neutral Repatriation Commission, and/or any subordinate bodies to which functions are designed or assigned by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, shall operate on the basis of majority vote.

24. The interpretation of this agreement will be handled by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission. The Neutral Repatriation Commission, and/or any subordinate bodies assigned functions by the Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission, will operate based on majority vote.

25. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission shall submit a weekly report to the opposing Commanders on the status of prisoners of war in its custody, indicating the numbers repatriated and remaining at the end of each week.

25. The Neutral Nations Repatriation Commission will provide a weekly update to the opposing Commanders on the status of prisoners of war in its care, detailing the number of prisoners repatriated and those still remaining at the end of each week.

26. When this agreement has been acceded to by both sides and by the five powers named herein, it shall become effective upon the date the Armistice becomes effective.

26. When both parties and the five powers mentioned here have agreed to this arrangement, it will take effect on the date the Armistice begins.

Done at Panmunjom, Korea, at 1400 hours on the 8th day of June 1953, in English, Korean, and Chinese, all texts being equally authentic.

Done at Panmunjom, Korea, at 2:00 PM on June 8, 1953, in English, Korean, and Chinese, all texts being equally authentic.

Nam Il
General, Korean People’s Army
Senior Delegate,
Delegation of the Korean People’s Army and the Chinese People’s Volunteers

William K. Harrison, Jr.
Lieutenant General, United States Army
Senior Delegate,
United Nations Command Delegation

Nam Il
General, Korean People’s Army
Lead Delegate,
Delegation of the Korean People’s Army and the Chinese People’s Volunteers

William K. Harrison, Jr.
Lieutenant General, United States Army
Lead Delegate,
United Nations Command Delegation


DOCUMENTS

U.S. Dept. of Defense. Semiannual Reports of the Secretary of Defense (including Semiannual Reports of the Secretary of the Navy), 1951–1955.

U.S. Dept. of Defense. Semiannual Reports of the Secretary of Defense (including Semiannual Reports of the Secretary of the Navy), 1951–1955.

Department of the Army. Handbook “The Chinese Communist Army,” DA Pamphlet No. 30-51 (Washington, D.C., September 1952).

Department of the Army. Handbook “The Chinese Communist Army,” DA Pamphlet No. 30-51 (Washington, D.C., September 1952).

U.S. Marine Corps. Annual Reports, Commandant to Secretary of the Navy, 1953–1955.

U.S. Marine Corps. Annual Reports, Commandant to Secretary of the Navy, 1953–1955.

——. Brochure, Historical Outline of the Development of Fleet Marine Force, Pacific, 1941–1950 (Preliminary). Breckinridge Library, MCDEC, Quantico, Va.

——. Brochure, Historical Outline of the Development of Fleet Marine Force, Pacific, 1941–1950 (Preliminary). Breckinridge Library, MCDEC, Quantico, Va.

——. Decorations and Medals Branch, HQMC, Medal of Honor, Navy Cross citations.

——. Decorations and Medals Branch, HQMC, Medal of Honor, Navy Cross citations.

——. Division of Information, HQMC, Biography File.

——. Division of Information, HQMC, Biography File.

——. Letters and comments from participants in the Korean War. Vol. V, Korean comment file, Historical Reference Branch (formerly Historical Reference Section), HQMC.

——. Letters and comments from participants in the Korean War. Vol. V, Korean comment file, Historical Reference Branch (formerly Historical Reference Section), HQMC.

——. HRS Log Sheet of Korean War Statistics, dtd 21 August 1967, with annex “U.S. Marine Corps Strength vs Korean Casualties by Month, 25 June 1950–27 July 1953” based on Korean Operation Rpt (prepared by Statistics Br., HQMC).

——. HRS Log Sheet of Korean War Statistics, dated August 21, 1967, with annex “U.S. Marine Corps Strength vs Korean Casualties by Month, June 25, 1950–July 27, 1953” based on Korean Operation Report (prepared by Statistics Branch, HQMC).

U.S. Marine Corps. HRB Subject File: “Korea-Korean War General,” Historical Reference Branch, HQMC.

U.S. Marine Corps. HRB Subject File: “Korea-Korean War General,” Historical Reference Branch, HQMC.

——. HRB Subject File: VE23.2.S8 “CMC Statements on Korean POWs,” Historical Reference Branch, HQMC.

——. HRB Subject File: VE23.2.S8 “CMC Statements on Korean POWs,” Historical Reference Branch, HQMC.

——. HRB Subject File #1 “Prisoners of War—Korea—General,” Historical Reference Branch, HQMC.

——. HRB Subject File #1 “Prisoners of War—Korea—General,” Historical Reference Branch, HQMC.

——. HRB Subject Files “Prisoners of War—Korea—News Clippings, Folders #1, #2, #3,” Historical Reference Branch, HQMC.

——. HRB Subject Files “Prisoners of War—Korea—News Clippings, Folders #1, #2, #3,” Historical Reference Branch, HQMC.

——. Korean War casualty cards from Statistical Unit, Casualty Section, Personal Affairs Br., Code DNA, HQMC.

——. Korean War casualty cards from the Statistical Unit, Casualty Section, Personal Affairs Branch, Code DNA, HQMC.

——. Marine Corps Board Study, An Evaluation of the Influence of Marine Corps Forces on the Course of the Korean War (4 Aug 50–15 Dec 50), 2 vols. Breckinridge Library, MCDEC, Quantico, Va.

——. Marine Corps Board Study, An Evaluation of the Influence of Marine Corps Forces on the Course of the Korean War (Aug 4, 1950–Dec 15, 1950), 2 vols. Breckinridge Library, MCDEC, Quantico, VA.

——. A Summary of the General Officers Conference, HQMC, 19-21 Aug 53. Breckinridge Library, MCDEC, Quantico, Va.

——. A Summary of the General Officers Conference, HQMC, August 19-21, 1953. Breckinridge Library, MCDEC, Quantico, VA.

Commander in Chief, U.S. Pacific Fleet. Interim Evaluation Report, Number 4 (1 January-30 June 1952), Chapters 1, 9, 10, 12.612805

Commander in Chief, U.S. Pacific Fleet. Interim Evaluation Report, Number 4 (January 1 - June 30, 1952), Chapters 1, 9, 10, 12.612805

805 CinCPacFlt published six reports covering naval operations during the Korean War. The number, 1-6, indicated the time period; chapters refer to the subject, as FMF-Ground, FMF-Air, Amphibious Operations, etc.

805 CinCPacFlt published six reports on naval operations during the Korean War. The numbers, 1-6, represent the time period; chapters refer to the topics, like FMF-Ground, FMF-Air, Amphibious Operations, etc.

——. U.S. Pacific Fleet. Interim Evaluation Report, Number 5 (1 July 1952–31 January 1953), Chapters 1, 2, 6, 8, 9.

——. U.S. Pacific Fleet. Interim Evaluation Report, Number 5 (July 1, 1952 – January 31, 1953), Chapters 1, 2, 6, 8, 9.

——. U.S. Pacific Fleet. Interim Evaluation Report, Number 6 (1 February-27 July 1953), Chapters 1, 2, 7, 9, 10.

——. U.S. Pacific Fleet. Interim Evaluation Report, Number 6 (February 1 - July 27, 1953), Chapters 1, 2, 7, 9, 10.

Commander Naval Forces, Far East (ComNavFE). “Operation Little Switch—Apr 53.”

Commander Naval Forces, Far East (ComNavFE). “Operation Little Switch—Apr 53.”

——. Far East (ComNavFE). Report of Intelligence Processing, n.d.

——. Far East (ComNavFE). Report of Intelligence Processing, n.d.

——. Far East (ComNavFE). Report 24 July 1953.

——. Far East (ComNavFE). Report July 24, 1953.

Fleet Marine Force, Pacific. Command Diaries, July 1952-May 1953.

Fleet Marine Force, Pacific. Command Diaries, July 1952-May 1953.

Encl (1) to CG, FMFPac ltr 0762/161 over A9 to CMC, dtd 25 Nov 52. Subj: “Summary of the 1st Marine Division Situation from 20 Jul-20 Oct 52.”

Encl (1) to CG, FMFPac ltr 0762/161 over A9 to CMC, dtd 25 Nov 52. Subj: “Summary of the 1st Marine Division Situation from 20 Jul-20 Oct 52.”

CG, 1stMarDiv, Info for CG, FMFPac, n.d.

CG, 1stMarDiv, Info for CG, FMFPac, n.d.

1st Marine Division Staff Report. “Notes for Major General J. T. Selden, CG, 1stMarDiv, Korea,” dtd 20 August 1952.

1st Marine Division Staff Report. “Notes for Major General J. T. Selden, CG, 1stMarDiv, Korea,” dated August 20, 1952.

1st Marine Division rpt, dtd 13 June 1952. Subj: Type “C” Rpt, “1st KMC Regiment and Its Relationship to the 1st Marine Division, Sep 1950-May 1952.”

1st Marine Division rpt, dtd 13 June 1952. Subj: Type “C” Rpt, “1st KMC Regiment and Its Relationship to the 1st Marine Division, Sep 1950-May 1952.”

CG, 1stMarDiv ltr to CMC, dtd 23 Jul 53. Subj: Type “C” Rpt, “Civilian Affairs and the Korean Service Corps, Mar 52-May 53.”

CG, 1stMarDiv letter to CMC, dated 23 Jul 53. Subject: Type “C” Report, “Civilian Affairs and the Korean Service Corps, Mar 52-May 53.”

1stMarDiv ltr to CMC/cpc A16-13, n.d. Subj: “Berlin and East Berlin Action, Rpt of”, in 1stMarDiv Summary of Activities, Jul 53.

1stMarDiv ltr to CMC/cpc A16-13, n.d. Subj: “Berlin and East Berlin Action, Report of”, in 1stMarDiv Summary of Activities, Jul 53.

1st Marine Division, FMF. Command Diaries, March 1952-December 1953.

1st Marine Division, FMF. Command Diaries, March 1952-December 1953.

——. Periodic Intelligence Reports, March 1952-July 1953.

——. Periodic Intelligence Reports, March 1952-July 1953.

——. G-3 Journals, selected dates, March 1952-August 1953.

——. G-3 Journals, selected dates, March 1952-August 1953.

——. Training Bulletin No. 5-53 “Lessons Learned,” dtd 10 June 1953.

——. Training Bulletin No. 5-53 “Lessons Learned,” dated June 10, 1953.

1st Combat Service Group, FMF. Command Diaries, Unit Reports, March-April 1952.

1st Combat Service Group, FMF. Command Diaries, Unit Reports, March-April 1952.

1st Marine Aircraft Wing, FMF. Command Diaries, March 1952-December 1953.

1st Marine Aircraft Wing, FMF. Command Diaries, March 1952-December 1953.

——. Periodic Intelligence Reports, March-July 1953.

——. Periodic Intelligence Reports, March-July 1953.

1st Marines. Command Diaries, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc., March 1952-October 1953.

1st Marines. Command Diaries, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc., March 1952-October 1953.

5th Marines. Command Diaries, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc., March 1952-December 1953.

5th Marines. Command Diaries, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc., March 1952-December 1953.

7th Marines. Command Diaries, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc., March 1952-February 1954.

7th Marines. Command Diaries, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc., March 1952-February 1954.

11th Marines. Command Diaries, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc., March 1952-December 1953.

11th Marines. Command Diaries, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc., March 1952-December 1953.

1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment. Command Diaries, Unit Reports, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc. March 1952-December 1953.

1st Korean Marine Corps Regiment. Command Diaries, Unit Reports, Intelligence Summaries, Special Action Reports, etc. March 1952-December 1953.

Kimpo Provisional Regiment. Command Diaries, March-December 1952.

Kimpo Provisional Regiment. Command Diaries, March-December 1952.

Marine Air Group 12. Command Diaries, March 1952-September 1953.

Marine Air Group 12. Command Diaries, March 1952-September 1953.

Marine Air Group 33. Command Diaries, March 1952-September 1953.

Marine Air Group 33. Command Diaries, March 1952-September 1953.

Marine Air Control Group 2. Command Diaries, September 1952-February 1953.

Marine Air Control Group 2. Command Diaries, September 1952-February 1953.

613

613

Headquarters Battalion, 1st Marine Division. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

Headquarters Battalion, 1st Marine Division. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

1st Battalion, 1st Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-October 1953.

1st Battalion, 1st Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-October 1953.

2d Battalion, 1st Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-October 1953.

2d Battalion, 1st Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-October 1953.

3d Battalion, 1st Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-October 1953.

3rd Battalion, 1st Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952 - October 1953.

1st Battalion, 5th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

1st Battalion, 5th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

2d Battalion, 5th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

2nd Battalion, 5th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

3d Battalion, 5th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

3rd Battalion, 5th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

1st Battalion, 7th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-February 1954.

1st Battalion, 7th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-February 1954.

2d Battalion, 7th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-February 1954.

2d Battalion, 7th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-February 1954.

3d Battalion, 7th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-February 1954.

3rd Battalion, 7th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-February 1954.

1st Battalion, 11th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

1st Battalion, 11th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

2d Battalion, 11th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

2d Battalion, 11th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

3d Battalion, 11th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

3rd Battalion, 11th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

4th Battalion, 11th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

4th Battalion, 11th Marines. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-December 1953.

1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

1st Amphibian Tractor Battalion. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

1st Engineer Battalion. Command Diaries, March 1952-December 1953.

1st Engineer Battalion. Command Diaries, March 1952-December 1953.

1st Tank Battalion. Command Diaries, March 1952-December 1953.

1st Tank Battalion. Command Diaries, March 1952-December 1953.

East Coast Island Defense Element (Unit). Command Diaries, January 1952-July 1953.

East Coast Island Defense Team (Unit). Command Logs, January 1952-July 1953.

West Coast Island Defense Element (Unit). Command Diaries, January 1952-July 1953.

West Coast Island Defense Element (Unit). Command Diaries, January 1952-July 1953.

VMO-6. Command Diaries, March 1952-July 1953.

VMO-6. Command Diaries, March 1952-July 1953.

HMR-161. Command Diaries, March 1952-July 1953.

HMR-161. Command Diaries, March 1952-July 1953.

VMA-121. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMA-121. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMA-212. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMA-212. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMA-251. Command Diaries, June-July 1953.

VMA-251 Command Diaries, June-July 1953.

VMA-312. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMA-312. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMA-323. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMA-323. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMF-115. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMF-115. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMF-311. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMF-311. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMF(N)-513. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMF(N)-513. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMJ-1. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

VMJ-1. Command Diaries, selected dates, March 1952-July 1953.

614

614

BOOKS AND PERIODICALS

Asprey, Robert, B., et al. “The Soldier and the Prisoner,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 49, no. 5:37-44 (May 1965).

Asprey, Robert, B., et al. “The Soldier and the Prisoner,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 49, no. 5:37-44 (May 1965).

Barclay, C. N. Brigadier, British Army. The First Commonwealth Division—The Story of British Commonwealth Land Forces in Korea, 1950–1953. Aldershot: Gale & Polden, Ltd., 1954.

Barclay, C. N. Brigadier, British Army. The First Commonwealth Division—The Story of British Commonwealth Land Forces in Korea, 1950–1953. Aldershot: Gale & Polden, Ltd., 1954.

Batterton, Roy J., Jr., LtCol, USMC. “Random Notes on Korea,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39 no. 11:28-34 (November 1955).

Batterton, Roy J., Jr., LtCol, USMC. “Random Notes on Korea,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39 no. 11:28-34 (November 1955).

Berger, Carl. The Korea Knot—A Military-Political History. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1957.

Berger, Carl. The Korea Knot—A Military-Political History. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1957.

Blakeney, Jane. Heroes—U.S. Marine Corps, 1861–1955. Washington, D.C.: Blakeney, 1957.

Blakeney, Jane. Heroes—U.S. Marine Corps, 1861–1955. Washington, D.C.: Blakeney, 1957.

Braestrup, Peter, 1stLt, USMC. “Outpost Warfare,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 38, no. 11:32-36 (November 1953).

Braestrup, Peter, 1stLt, USMC. “Outpost Warfare,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 38, no. 11:32-36 (November 1953).

——. “Back to the Trenches,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 3:32-35 (March 1955).

——. “Back to the Trenches,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 39, no. 3:32-35 (March 1955).

Cagle, Malcolm W., Cdr, USN, and Manson, Frank A., Cdr, USN. The Sea War in Korea. Annapolis: U.S. Naval Institute, 1957.

Cagle, Malcolm W., Commander, USN, and Manson, Frank A., Commander, USN. The Sea War in Korea. Annapolis: U.S. Naval Institute, 1957.

Clark, Mark W., Gen, USA (Ret). From the Danube to the Yalu. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1954.

Clark, Mark W., Gen, USA (Ret). From the Danube to the Yalu. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1954.

Collins, J. Lawton. War in Peacetime—The History and Lessons of Korea. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, 1969.

Collins, J. Lawton. War in Peacetime—The History and Lessons of Korea. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, 1969.

Damopoulos, C. N., Cpl, USMC. “From Camp Pendleton to Inchon—18 Years Later, LtGen E. A. Craig, 1st Provisional Brigade CG, Recalls Experiences in Korea,” San Diego MCRD CheVron, v. 27, no. 31 (21 August 1968).

Damopoulos, C. N., Cpl, USMC. “From Camp Pendleton to Inchon—18 Years Later, LtGen E. A. Craig, 1st Provisional Brigade CG, Remembers Experiences in Korea,” San Diego MCRD CheVron, v. 27, no. 31 (21 August 1968).

Fehrenbach, T. R. The Fight for Korea, From the War of 1950 to the Pueblo Incident. New York: Grosset & Dunlap, 1969.

Fehrenbach, T. R. The Fight for Korea, From the War of 1950 to the Pueblo Incident. New York: Grosset & Dunlap, 1969.

——. This Kind of War—A Study in Unpreparedness. New York: The Macmillan Company, 1963.

——. This Kind of War—A Study in Unpreparedness. New York: The Macmillan Company, 1963.

Field, James A., Jr. History of United States Naval Operations, Korea. Washington: Division of Naval History, 1962.

Field, James A., Jr. History of United States Naval Operations, Korea. Washington: Division of Naval History, 1962.

Fugate, Robert T., MSgt, USMC. “Vegas, Reno, and Carson,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 6:16-21, 74 (June 1953).

Fugate, Robert T., MSgt, USMC. “Vegas, Reno, and Carson,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 6:16-21, 74 (June 1953).

——. “Freedom Village,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 7:20-23, 70 (July 1953).

——. “Freedom Village,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 7:20-23, 70 (July 1953).

Futrell, Robert F. The United Stales Air Force in Korea, 1950–1953. New York: Duell, Sloan, and Pearce, 1961.

Futrell, Robert F. The United States Air Force in Korea, 1950–1953. New York: Duell, Sloan, and Pearce, 1961.

Heinecke, Roy E., MSgt, USMC. “A Year in Korea,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 11:49-53, 85 (November 1953).

Heinecke, Roy E., MSgt, USMC. “A Year in Korea,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 11:49-53, 85 (November 1953).

——. “Big Switch,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 11:44-48 (November 1953).

——. “Big Switch,” Leatherneck, v. 36, no. 11:44-48 (November 1953).

——. “Four Star Visit,” Leatherneck, v. 37, no. 1:14-17, 74 (January 1954).

——. “Four Star Visit,” Leatherneck, v. 37, no. 1:14-17, 74 (January 1954).

Heinl, Robert D., Jr. Soldiers of the Sea: The United States Marine Corps, 1775–1962. Annapolis: U.S. Naval Institute, 1962.

Heinl, Robert D., Jr. Soldiers of the Sea: The United States Marine Corps, 1775–1962. Annapolis: U.S. Naval Institute, 1962.

Hermes, Walter G. U.S. Army in the Korean War—Truce Tent and Fighting Front. Washington: Office of the Chief of Military History, USA, 1966.

Hermes, Walter G. U.S. Army in the Korean War—Truce Tent and Fighting Front. Washington: Office of the Chief of Military History, USA, 1966.

615

615

Hicks, Norman W., Maj. USMC. “U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1952–1953, with Special Emphasis on Outpost Warfare.” MS, 1962.

Hicks, Norman W., Maj. USMC. “U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1952–1953, with Special Focus on Outpost Warfare.” MS, 1962.

Joy, C. Turner, VAdm, USN. How Communists Negotiate. New York: The Macmillan Company, 1955.

Joy, C. Turner, VAdm, USN. How Communists Negotiate. New York: The Macmillan Company, 1955.

Leatherneck. 1953–1955, passim.

Leatherneck. 1953–1955, various instances.

Leckie, Robert. Conflict—The History of the Korean War, 1950–1953. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1962.

Leckie, Robert. Conflict—The History of the Korean War, 1950–1953. New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1962.

MacDonald, James Angus, Jr., Maj, USMC. The Problems of U.S. Marine Corps Prisoner of War in Korea. MS, 1961.

MacDonald, James Angus, Jr., Maj, USMC. The Problems of U.S. Marine Corps Prisoners of War in Korea. MS, 1961.

Marine Corps Gazette. 1953–1955, passim.

Marine Corps Gazette. 1953–1955, various issues.

Marshall, S. L. A. The Military History of the Korean War. New York: Franklin Watts, Inc., 1963.

Marshall, S. L. A. The Military History of the Korean War. New York: Franklin Watts, Inc., 1963.

——. Pork Chop Hill—The American Fighting Man in Action, Korea, Spring 1953. New York: William Morrow & Co., 1956.

——. Pork Chop Hill—The American Fighting Man in Action, Korea, Spring 1953. New York: William Morrow & Co., 1956.

Miller, John, Jr., Carroll, Owen J., Maj, USA, and Tackley, Margaret E. Korea 1951–1953. Washington: Department of the Army, Office of the Chief of Military History, 1958.

Miller, John, Jr., Carroll, Owen J., Maj, USA, and Tackley, Margaret E. Korea 1951–1953. Washington: Department of the Army, Office of the Chief of Military History, 1958.

Montross, Lynn and Canzona, Nicholas A., Capt, USMC. U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1950–1953. v. I: The Pusan Perimeter. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1954.

Montross, Lynn and Canzona, Nicholas A., Capt, USMC. U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1950–1953. v. I: The Pusan Perimeter. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1954.

——. U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1950–1953. v. II: The Inchon-Seoul Operations. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1955.

——. U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1950–1953. v. II: The Inchon-Seoul Operations. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1955.

——. U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1950–1953. v. III: The Chosin Reservoir Campaign. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1957

——. U.S. Marine Operations in Korea, 1950–1953. vol. III: The Chosin Reservoir Campaign. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1957

Montross, Lynn. Cavalry of the Sky—The Story of U.S. Marine Combat Helicopters. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1954.

Montross, Lynn. Cavalry of the Sky—The Story of U.S. Marine Combat Helicopters. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1954.

Montross, Lynn, Kuokka, Hubard D., Maj, USMC, and Hicks, Norman W., Maj, USMC. U.S. Marine Operations in Korea 1950–1953. v. IV: The East-Central Front. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1962.

Montross, Lynn, Kuokka, Hubard D., Maj, USMC, and Hicks, Norman W., Maj, USMC. U.S. Marine Operations in Korea 1950–1953. v. IV: The East-Central Front. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1962.

New York Times, issues 27–31 March, 19–21 April, 5 August-6 September 1953.

New York Times, issues March 27–31, April 19–21, August 5–September 6, 1953.

Phillips, C. A., LtCol, USMC and Kuokka, H. D., Maj, USMC. “1st MAW in Korea, Part I, Pusan to the Reservoir: The Acid Test,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 41, no. 5:42-47 (May 1957).

Phillips, C. A., LtCol, USMC and Kuokka, H. D., Maj, USMC. “1st MAW in Korea, Part I, Pusan to the Reservoir: The Acid Test,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 41, no. 5:42-47 (May 1957).

——. “1st MAW in Korea, Part II, January 1951 to the Armistice,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 41, no. 6:20-26 (June 1957).

——. “1st MAW in Korea, Part II, January 1951 to the Armistice,” Marine Corps Gazette, v. 41, no. 6:20-26 (June 1957).

Rees, David. Korea: The Limited War. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1964.

Rees, David. Korea: The Limited War. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1964.

Ridgway, Matthew B., Gen, USA (Ret). The Korean War. Garden City: Doubleday & Company, Inc., 1967.

Ridgway, Matthew B., Gen, USA (Ret). The Korean War. Garden City: Doubleday & Company, Inc., 1967.

Robinson, C. A., Capt, USMC, and Cellers, D, L., Sgt, USMC. “Land of the Morning Calm,” Midwest Reporter, pp. 2–5 (July 1968).

Robinson, C. A., Capt, USMC, and Cellers, D. L., Sgt, USMC. “Land of the Morning Calm,” Midwest Reporter, pp. 2–5 (July 1968).

Russ, Martin. The Last Parallel: A Marine’s War Journal. New York: Rinehart and Company, 1957.

Russ, Martin. The Last Parallel: A Marine’s War Journal. New York: Rinehart and Company, 1957.

Sarokin, Paul, MSgt, USMC. “DMZ Marines,” Leatherneck, v. 37, no. 10:22-30 (October 1954).

Sarokin, Paul, MSgt, USMC. “DMZ Marines,” Leatherneck, vol. 37, no. 10:22-30 (October 1954).

616

616

Sherrod, Robert. History of Marine Corps Aviation in World War II. Washington: Combat Forces Press, 1952.

Sherrod, Robert. History of Marine Corps Aviation in World War II. Washington: Combat Forces Press, 1952.

U.S. Marine Corps. Marine Corps Historical Reference Series, Marine Corps Aircraft, 1913–1960. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1964.

U.S. Marine Corps. Marine Corps Historical Reference Series, Marine Corps Aircraft, 1913–1960. Washington: Historical Branch, G-3 Division, HQMC, 1964.

U.S. Military Academy. Operations in Korea. West Point: Department of Military Art and Engineering, U.S. Military Academy, 1956.

U.S. Military Academy. Operations in Korea. West Point: Department of Military Art and Engineering, U.S. Military Academy, 1956.

A Volunteer Soldier’s Day: Recollections by Men of the Chinese People’s Volunteers in the War to Resist U.S. Aggression and Aid Korea. Peking: Foreign Languages Press, 1961.

A Volunteer Soldier’s Day: Memories from Men of the Chinese People’s Volunteers in the War Against U.S. Aggression and Support for Korea. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press, 1961.

Washington Post, issues 27–31 March, 19–21 April, 5 August-6 September 1953.

Washington Post, issues March 27–31, April 19–21, August 5-September 6, 1953.

Wood, Herbert F., LtCol. Strange Battleground: The Operations in Korea and Their Effects on the Defense Policy of Canada. Ottawa: The Army Historical Section, Canadian Forces Headquarters, 1966.

Wood, Herbert F., LtCol. Strange Battleground: The Operations in Korea and Their Effects on the Defense Policy of Canada. Ottawa: The Army Historical Section, Canadian Forces Headquarters, 1966.


✩ U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1972 O-427-555

✩ U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1972 O-427-555

THE FAR EAST
U. S. MARINE GROUND OPERATIONS KOREAN WAR 1950–1953

Transcriber’s Notes

Punctuation, hyphenation, and spelling were made consistent when a predominant preference was found in the original book; otherwise they were not changed.

Punctuation, hyphenation, and spelling were made consistent when a main preference was identified in the original book; if not, they were left unchanged.

Frequent, simple typographical errors were silently corrected; unbalanced quotation marks were remedied when the change was obvious, and otherwise left unbalanced.

Frequent, simple typographical errors were silently corrected; unbalanced quotation marks were fixed when the change was obvious, and otherwise left unbalanced.

The index was not systematically checked for proper alphabetization or correct page references; some minor errors or omissions were silently corrected.

The index wasn't thoroughly checked for proper alphabetical order or accurate page references; some minor mistakes or omissions were quietly fixed.

Page 62: Two lines of text near the top of the page were in the wrong order and have been swapped back to the correct order.

Page 62: Two lines of text near the top of the page were in the wrong order and have been switched back to the correct order.

Photo sections: Some of the photo credit numbers may be incomplete, as the right-hand sides of some pages were clipped in all available images of the pages of the original publication.

Photo sections: Some of the photo credit numbers may be incomplete, as the right-hand sides of some pages were clipped in all available images of the pages of the original publication.

Page 579: “Presidental” was printed that way, and retained here as it may have been printed that way in the original Citation.

Page 579: “Presidental” was printed that way and is kept here because it might have been printed that way in the original Citation.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!